Module A Financial Reporting 5th Edition

Qualification
Programme
Qualification Programme
Module A
Financial
Module A
Reporting Financial Reporting
� th Edition Fifth Edition
HKMALP15.indd 1-2 30/07/2015 16:25

LEARNING PACK
Qualification Programme
Module A
Financial Reporting
First edition 2010
Fifth edition 2015
ISBN 9781 4727 3602 4

Previous ISBN 9781 4453 6965 5
British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the
British Library
Published by
BPP Learning Media Ltd

BPP House, Aldine Place
142-144 Uxbridge Road
London W12 8AA
www.bpp.com/learningmedia
The copyright in this publication is jointly owned by

BPP Learning Media Ltd and HKICPA.
Printed in China
Your learning materials, published by BPP Learning

Media Ltd, are printed on paper obtained from
traceable sustainable sources.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of the copyright holders.
The contents of this publication are intended as a guide

and not professional advice. Although every effort has been
made to ensure that the contents of this publication are
correct at the time of going to press, BPP Learning Media
makes no warranty that the information in this publication
is accurate or complete and accepts no liability for any loss
or damage suffered by any person acting or refraining from
acting as a result of the material in this publication.
Every effort has been made to contact the copyright

holders of any material reproduced within this publication.
If any have been inadvertently overlooked, BPP Learning
Media will be pleased to make the appropriate credits in
any subsequent reprints or editions.
We are grateful to HKICPA for permission to reproduce the

Learning Outcomes and past examination questions, the
copyright of which is owned by HKICPA.
©
HKICPA and BPP Learning Media Ltd
2015
ii
Contents
Page
Director's message v
Introduction vi
Module overview vii
Chapter features viii
Learning outcomes ix
Module A Financial Reporting
Part A Legal environment

1 Legal environment 3
Part B Financial reporting framework

2 Financial reporting framework 27
3 Small company reporting 75
Part C Accounting for business transactions

I Statements of financial position and profit or loss and other comprehensive
income
4 Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations 95
5 Property, plant and equipment 115
6 Investment property 141
7 Government grants 159
8 Intangible assets and impairment of assets 173
9 Leases 217
10 Inventories 251
11 Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets 267
12 Construction contracts 289
13 Share-based payment 309
14 Revenue 343
15 Income taxes 377
16 Employee benefits 431
17 Borrowing costs 463
18 Financial instruments 477
19 Fair value measurement 547
Introduction iii
Page
II Statement of cash flows
20 Statements of cash flows 565
III Disclosure and reporting
21 Related party disclosures 601
22 Accounting policies, changes in accounting estimates and errors;
events after the reporting period 617
23 Earnings per share 639
24 Operating segments 663
25 Interim financial reporting 679
26 Presentation of financial statements 695
Part D Group financial statements
27 Principles of consolidation 725
28 Consolidated accounts: accounting for subsidiaries 765
29 Consolidated accounts: accounting for associates and joint arrangements 813
30 Changes in group structures 843
31 Consolidation of foreign operations 895
Answers to exam practice questions 919

Question bank – questions 975
Question bank – answers 1003
Glossary of terms 1057
Index 1079
iv Financial Reporting
Director's message
Welcome to the Qualification Programme (QP) of the Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public
Accountants (HKICPA).
You have made the decision to complete the HKICPA's QP which entails completing the training
programme, passing professional examinations and acquiring practical experience under an
authorised employer or supervisor. This marks a further step on your pathway to a successful
business career as a CPA and becoming a valued member of the HKICPA.
The QP comprising four core modules and a final examination will provide you with a foundation for
life-long learning and assist you in developing your technical, intellectual, interpersonal and
communication skills. You will find this programme challenging with great satisfaction that will open
a wide variety of career opportunities bringing in attractive financial rewards.
A module of the QP involves approximately 120 hours of self-study over fourteen weeks,
participation in two full-day workshops and a three-hour open-book module examination at the
module end. We encourage you to read this Learning Pack which is a valuable resource to guide
you through the QP.
The four core modules of the QP are as follows:
Module A: Financial Reporting
Module B: Corporate Financing
Module C: Business Assurance
Module D: Taxation
Should you require any assistance at any time, please feel free to contact us on (852) 2287 7228.
May I wish you every success in your QP!
Shanice Tsui
Director of Education and Training
Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants
Introduction v
Introduction
This is the fifth edition of the Learning Pack for Module A Financial Reporting of the HKICPA
Qualification Programme.
The Institute is committed to updating the content of the Learning Pack on an annual basis to keep
abreast of the latest developments. This edition has been developed after having consulted and
taken on board the feedback received from different users of the previous edition. Some of the
examples and self-test questions have been rewritten to better reflect current working practices in
industry and facilitate the learning process for users of the Learning Pack.
The Learning Pack has been written specifically to provide a complete and comprehensive
coverage of the learning outcomes devised by HKICPA, and has been reviewed and approved by
the HKICPA Qualification and Examinations Board for use by those studying for the qualification.
The HKICPA Qualification Programme comprises two elements: the examinations and the
workshops. The Learning Pack has been structured so that the order of the topics in which you
study is the order in which you will encounter them in the workshops. There is a very close inter-
relationship between the module structure, the Learning Pack and the workshops. It is important
that you have studied the chapters of the Learning Pack relevant to the workshops before you
attend the workshops, so that you can derive the maximum benefit from them.
On page (ix) you will see the HKICPA learning outcomes. Each learning outcome is mapped to the
chapter in the Learning Pack in which the topic is covered. You will find that your diligent study of
the Learning Pack chapters and your active participation in the workshops will prepare you to
tackle the examination with confidence.
One of the key elements in examination success is practice. It is important that not only you fully
understand the topics by reading carefully the information contained in the chapters of the Learning
Pack, but it is also vital that you take the necessary steps to practise the techniques and apply the
principles that you have learned.
In order to do this, you should:
 Work through all the examples provided within the chapters and review the solutions,
ensuring that you understand them;
 Complete the self-test questions within each chapter, and then compare your answer with
the solution provided at the end of the chapter; and
 Attempt the exam practice questions that you will find at the end of the chapter. Many of
these are HKICPA past examination questions, which will give an ideal indication of the
standard and type of question that you are likely to encounter in the examination itself. You
will find the solutions to exam practice questions at the end of the book.
In addition, you will find at the end of the Learning Pack a bank of past HKICPA case-study style
questions. These are past ‘Section A’ examination questions, which present a case study testing a
number of different topics within the syllabus. These questions will provide you with excellent
examination practice when you are in the revision phase of your studies, bringing together, as they
do, the application of a variety of different topics to a scenario.
Please note that the Learning Pack is not intended to be a 'know-it-all' resource. You are required
to undertake background reading including standards, legislations and recommended texts for the
preparation for workshop and examination.
vi Financial Reporting
Module Overview
This module will enable you to exercise judgment in selecting and applying accounting policies to
prepare financial statements (both at individual company and group levels) in compliance with the
relevant Hong Kong Financial Reporting Framework and Hong Kong Accounting Standards
('HKFRSs'). Please refer to the QP Learning Centre for the cut-off rule on examinable standards.
Overall Structure of Module A (Financial Reporting)
Statements of
Financial Position and
Profit or Loss and
Other Comprehensive
Income
Introduction vii
Chapter features
Each chapter contains a number of helpful features to guide you through each topic.
Topic list Tells you what you will be studying in the chapter. The topic items form the
numbered headings within the chapter.
Learning focus Puts the chapter topic into perspective and explains why it is important, both
within your studies and within your practical working life.
Learning The list of Learning Outcomes issued for the Module by HKICPA,
Outcomes referenced to the chapter in the Learning Pack within which coverage will be
found.
Topic recap Reviews and recaps on the key areas covered in the chapter.
Bold text Throughout the Learning Pack you will see that some of the text is in bold
type. This is to add emphasis and to help you to grasp the key elements
within a sentence or paragraph.
Topic highlights Summarise the key content of the particular section that you are about to
start. They are also found within sections, when an important issue is
introduced other than at the start of the section.
Key terms Definitions of important concepts. You really need to know and understand
these before the examination, and understanding will be useful at the
workshops too.
Examples Illustrations of particular techniques or concepts with a worked solution or

explanation provided immediately afterwards.
Case study/ An example or illustration not requiring a solution, designed to enrich your
Illustration understanding of a topic and add practical emphasis. Often based on real
world scenarios and contemporary issues.
Self-test questions These are questions that enable you to practise a technique or test your
understanding. You will find the answer at the end of the chapter.
Formula to learn You may be required to apply financial management formulae in Module B,
Corporate Financing.
Exam practice A question at the end of the chapter to enable you to practise the
techniques that you have learned. In most cases this will be a past HKICPA
examination question, updated as appropriate. You will find the answers in a
bank at the end of the Learning Pack entitled Answers to Exam Practice
Questions.
Further reading In Modules B and D you will find references to further reading that will help
you to understand the topics and put them into the practical context. The
reading suggested may be books, websites or technical articles.
viii Financial Reporting

Learning outcomes
HKICPA's learning outcomes for the Module are set out below. They are cross-referenced to the
chapter in the Learning Pack where they are covered.
Fields of competency
The items listed in this section are shown with an indicator of the minimum acceptable level of
competency, based on a three-point scale as follows:
1 Awareness
To have a general professional awareness of the field with a basic understanding of relevant
knowledge and related concepts.
2 Knowledge
The ability to use knowledge to perform professional tasks competently without assistance in
straightforward situations or applications.
3 Application
The ability to apply comprehensive knowledge and a broad range of professional skills in a
practical setting to solve most problems generally encountered in practice.
Topics
Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO1. Legal environment

Describe the Hong Kong legal framework and related
implications for business activities
LO1.01 Types and relative advantage of alternative forms of 2
organisation:
1.01.01 Identify the types and relative advantages of 1
alternative forms of organisation
LO1.02 Legal procedures for establishment and governance of 2
companies:
1.02.01 Describe the legal procedures for the 1
establishment and governance of companies
Describe the obligations of directors and officers of companies
LO1.03 Powers, duties and obligations of directors and company 2
secretaries:
1.03.01 Describe the powers, duties and obligations of 1
company directors
1.03.02 Describe the powers, duties and obligations of the 1
company secretary
Introduction ix
Chapter
where
Competency covered
Describe the legal requirements associated with company

structure, share offerings, debt obligations and restructuring
LO1.04 Share issues and prospectus requirements: 2
1.04.01 Describe the procedure for issuing shares and the 1
requirement for a prospectus
LO1.05 Debt instruments and registration of charges: 2
1.05.01 Describe the procedure for the issue of debt 1
instruments
1.05.02 Describe the procedure for the registration of 1
charges over company debt
LO1.06 Statutory reporting and documentation requirements: 3
1.06.01 Explain the statutory registers that must be kept 1
by a company
1.06.02 Identify the financial statements that a company 1
must prepare
LO1.07 Appointment and removal of auditors: 3
1.07.01 Describe the procedures for the appointment, 1
removal and resignation of company auditors
LO1.08 Restructuring, including appointment of receivers and 1
liquidators:
1.08.01 Identify the reasons for which a company may 1
restructure, including the appointment of
receivers and liquidators
LO2. Financial reporting framework
Describe the financial reporting framework in Hong Kong and
the related implications for business activities
LO2.01 The role and setting of accounting standards: 2
2.01.01 Understand the role of accounting standards 2
2.01.02 Understand the role of the HKICPA, Securities 2
and Futures Commission (SFC), Financial
Reporting Council (FRC), the Hong Kong
Insurance Authority (HKIA), the Hong Kong
Monetary Authority (HKMA) and the Hong Kong
Stock Exchange (HKEx)
LO2.02 Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards: 2
2.02.01 Describe how Hong Kong Financial Reporting 2
Standards are set
x Financial Reporting
Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO2.03 Small and Medium-sized Entity Financial Reporting 2

Framework and Financial Reporting Standard:
2.03.01 Identify the conditions under which an entity may 3
adopt the SME Financial Reporting Framework
and Financial Reporting Standard
2.03.02 Describe the requirements of the SME Financial 3
Reporting Framework and Financial Reporting
Standard
LO2.04 Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standard for Private 2
Entities
2.04.01 Identify the conditions under which an entity may 3
adopt the HKFRS for Private Entities
2.04.02 Describe the requirements of the HKFRS for 3
Private Entities
LO2.05 Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants: 3
2.05.01 Explain the requirements of the Code of Ethics for 2
Professional Accountants
LO2.06 Hong Kong (IFRIC) Interpretations, Hong Kong 2
Interpretations and Hong Kong (SIC) Interpretations:
2.06.01 Describe the status of Hong Kong (IFRIC) 2
Interpretations, Hong Kong Interpretations and
Hong Kong (SIC) Interpretations
LO2.07 Other professional pronouncements and exposure drafts: 2
2.07.01 Identify other professional pronouncements and 2
exposure drafts relevant to the financial reporting
Conceptual Framework
LO2.08 Regulatory bodies and their impact on accounting: 2
2.08.01 Identify relevant regulatory bodies and their 2
impact on accounting
LO2.09 Accounting principles and conceptual frameworks: 2
2.09.01 Explain what is meant by a conceptual framework 2
and GAAP
2.09.02 Identify the advantages and disadvantages of a 2
conceptual framework
2.09.03 Identify the components and requirements of the 2
HKICPA's Conceptual Framework
2.09.04 Explain those requirements of HKAS 1 2
Presentation of Financial Statements which
overlap with the HKICPA's Conceptual
Framework
Introduction xi
Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO2.10 Integrated reporting: 1

2.10.01 Describe the development of integrated reporting 2
and sustainability reporting in Hong Kong
2.10.02 Identify the current developments 2
LO2.11 Current developments 2
2.11.01 Identify areas of accounting in which current 2
developments are occurring
LO3. Accounting for business transactions
Account for transactions in accordance with Hong Kong
Financial Reporting Standards
LO3.01 Accounting policies, changes in accounting estimates and 3
errors:
3.01.01 Distinguish between accounting policies and 22
accounting estimates in accordance with HKAS 8
3.01.02 Account for a change in accounting policy 22
3.01.03 Account for a change in accounting estimate 22
3.01.04 Correct a prior period error 22
LO3.02 Revenue: 3
3.02.01 Define revenue and identify revenue within the 14
scope of HKAS 18
3.02.02 Measure revenue at the fair value of 14
consideration received
3.02.03 Identify revenue transaction including multiple 14
element arrangements
3.02.04 Determine the recognition criteria for specified
types of revenue items including sales of goods,
rendering of services and interest, royalties and 14
dividends
3.02.05 Disclosure revenue as appropriate in the financial 14
statements
3.02.06 Explain the recognition and measurement 14
principles
3.02.07 Disclose revenue from contracts with customers 14
as appropriate in the financial statements
LO3.03 Government grants and assistance: 3
3.03.01 Accounting and presentation of government grants 7
3.03.02 Disclosure of government grants and assistance
in accordance with HKAS 20 7
xii Financial Reporting

Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO3.04 Employee benefits: 2

3.04.01 Identify short-term employee benefits in 16
accordance with HKAS 19 and apply the
recognition and measurement principles in
respect of short-term employee benefits
3.04.02 Distinguish between defined contribution plans 16
and defined benefit plans
3.04.03 Account for defined contribution plans 16
3.04.04 Identify termination benefits in accordance with 16
HKAS 19 and apply the recognition and
measurement principles in respect of termination
benefits
LO3.05 Share-based payment: 2
3.05.01 Identify and recognise share-based payment 13
transactions in accordance with HKFRS 2
3.05.02 Account for equity-settled and cash-settled share- 13
based payment transactions
3.05.03 Account for share-based payment transactions 13
with cash alternatives
3.05.04 Account for unidentified goods or services in a 13
share-based payment transaction
3.05.05 Account for group and treasury share 13
transactions
3.05.06 Disclosure requirement of share option 13
LO3.06 Inventories: 3
3.06.01 Scope and definition of HKAS 2 Inventories 10
3.06.02 Calculate the cost of inventories in accordance 10
with HKAS 2
3.06.03 Use accepted methods of assigning costs 10
including the allocation of overheads to
inventories
3.06.04 Explain the potential impact of net realisable 10
value falling below cost and make the required
adjustments
3.06.05 Calculate and analyse variances in a standard 10
costing system and advise on the appropriate
accounting treatment to be adopted in respect of
inventories
3.06.06 Prepare a relevant accounting policy note and 10
other required disclosures in respect of
inventories
Introduction xiii
Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO3.07 Construction contracts: 3

3.07.01 Define a construction contract 12
3.07.02 Explain when contract revenue and costs should 12
be recognised in accordance with HKAS 11
3.07.03 Explain how contract revenue and costs should 12
be measured and apply these principles
3.07.04 Account for the expected loss and changes in 12
estimates
3.07.05 Disclose information related to construction 12
contracts in the financial statements
LO3.08 Property, plant and equipment: 3
3.08.01 Identify the non-current assets which fall within or 5
outside the scope of HKAS 16
3.08.02 State and apply the recognition rules in respect of 5
property, plant and equipment
3.08.03 Determine the initial measurement of property, 5
plant and equipment, including assets acquired
by exchange or transfer
3.08.04 Determine the accounting treatment of 5
subsequent expenditure on property, plant and
equipment
3.08.05 Determine the available methods to measure 5
property, plant and equipment subsequent to
initial recognition
3.08.06 Account for the revaluation of property, plant and 5
equipment
3.08.07 Define “useful life” and allocate an appropriate 5
useful life for an asset in a straightforward
scenario
3.08.08 Explain the different methods of depreciation: 5
straight line and diminishing balance, and calculate
the depreciation amount in respect of different types
of asset
3.08.09 Account for the disposal of property, plant and 5
equipment
3.08.10 Disclose relevant information relating to property, 5
plant and equipment in the financial statements
xiv Financial Reporting

Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO3.09 Intangible assets: 3

3.09.01 Define an intangible asset and scope of HKAS 38 8
3.09.02 Apply the definition of an intangible asset to both 8
internally-generated and purchased intangibles
3.09.03 Account for the recognition and measurement of 8
intangible assets in accordance with HKAS 38
3.09.04 Describe the subsequent accounting treatment of 8
intangible assets including amortisation
3.09.05 Distinguish between research and development 8
and describe the accounting treatment of each
3.09.06 Explain how goodwill arises 8
3.09.07 Account for goodwill 8
3.09.08 Disclose relevant information in respect of 8
intangible assets under HKAS 38
LO3.10 Investment property: 3
3.10.01 Identify an investment property within the scope 6
of HKAS 40 and situation when a property can be
transferred in and out of the investment property
category
3.10.02 Distinguish investment property from other 6
categories of property holdings and describe the
difference in accounting treatment
3.10.03 Apply the recognition and measurement rules 6
relating to investment property
3.10.04 Account for investment property 6
3.10.05 Disclose relevant information, including an 6
accounting policy note, for investment property
Introduction xv
Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO3.11 Financial assets, financial liabilities and equity 2

instruments:
3.11.01 Discuss and apply the criteria for the recognition 18
and de-recognition of a financial asset or financial
liability
3.11.02 Discuss and apply the rules for the classification 18
of a financial asset, financial liability and equity,
and their measurement (including compound
instrument)
3.11.03 Discuss and apply the treatment of gains and 18
losses arising on financial assets or financial
liabilities
3.11.04 Discuss the circumstances that give rise to and 18
apply the appropriate treatment for the
impairment of financial assets
3.11.05 Account for derivative financial instruments and 18
simple embedded derivatives, including the
application of own-use exemption
18
3.11.06 Disclose relevant information with regard to
financial assets, financial liabilities and equity
instruments
LO3.12 Borrowing costs: 3
3.12.01 Identify the expenses which constitute borrowing 17
costs in accordance with HKAS 23
3.12.02 Identify the assets which are qualifying assets 17
3.12.03 Determine when the capitalisation of borrowing 17
costs shall commence, be suspended and cease
3.12.04 Calculate the amount of borrowing costs to be 17
capitalised from specific borrowing and general
borrowing
3.12.05 Prepare journal entries for borrowing costs, 17
including expensed and capitalised borrowing
costs
3.12.06 Disclose relevant information with regard to 17
borrowing costs
xvi Financial Reporting

Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO3.13 Impairment of assets: 3

3.13.01 Identify assets that are within the scope of 8
HKAS 36
3.13.02 Identify an asset that may be impaired by 8
reference to common external and internal
indicators
3.13.03 Identify the cash generating unit an asset belongs 8
to
3.13.04 Calculate the recoverable amount with reference 8
to value-in-use and fair value less cost to sell
3.13.05 Calculate the impairment loss, including the loss 8
relating to cash-generating units
3.13.06 Allocate impairment loss and account for 8
subsequent reversal
impairment loss, including critical judgement and
estimate
LO3.14 Leases: 3
3.14.01 Identify the types of lease within the scope of 9
HKAS 17 and define the terminology used in
relation to leases
3.14.02 Classify leases as operating or finance leases by 9
looking at the substance of the transaction
3.14.03 Account for operating leases from the perspective 9
of both the lessee and the lessor
3.14.04 Disclose the relevant information relating to 9
operating leases in the accounts of both the
lessee and the lessor
3.14.05 Account for finance leases from the perspective
9
of both the lessee and the lessor
3.14.06 Disclose the relevant information relating to
9
finance leases in the accounts of both the lessee
and the lessor
3.14.07 Account for manufacturer/dealer leases
9
3.14.08 Account for sale and leaseback transactions
9
3.14.09 Explain the term off-balance sheet finance and
9
the importance of substance over form
3.14.10 Explain how to determine whether an
9
arrangement contains a lease
LO3.15 Events after the reporting period: 3
3.15.01 Explain the period during which there is 22
responsibility for reporting events in accordance
with HKAS 10
3.15.02 Define adjusting and non-adjusting events 22
3.15.03 Explain when the financial statements should be 22
prepared on a basis other than going concern
Introduction xvii
Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO3.16 Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets: 3

3.16.01 Define provisions, contingent liabilities and 11
contingent assets within the scope of HKAS 37
3.16.02 Distinguish provisions from other types of 11
liabilities
3.16.03 Explain the criteria for recognition of provisions 11
and apply them to specific circumstances
3.16.04 Apply the appropriate accounting treatment for 11
contingent assets and liabilities
contingent liabilities in the financial statements
3.16.06 Account for decommissioning, restoration and 11
similar liabilities and their changes
contingent assets in the financial statements
LO3.17 Hedge accounting: 2
3.17.01 Identify fair value hedges, cash flow hedges and 18
hedges for net investment in accordance with
HKAS 39
3.17.02 Account for fair value hedges, cash flow hedges 18, 19
and hedges for net investment
LO3.18 Income taxes: 2
3.18.01 Account for current tax liabilities in accordance 15
with HKAS 12
3.18.02 Record entries relating to income tax in the 15
accounting records
3.18.03 Identify temporary differences (both inside and 15
outside difference) and calculate deferred tax
amounts
3.18.04 Account for tax losses and tax credits 15
3.18.05 Identify initial recognition exemption for assets 15
and liabilities
3.18.06 Account for deferred tax relating to investments in 15
subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures
3.18.07 Determine when tax assets and liabilities can be 15
offset
income taxes
xviii Financial Reporting

Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO3.19 The effects of changes in foreign exchange rates: 2

3.19.01 Determine the functional currency of an entity in 31
accordance with HKAS 21
3.19.02 Translate foreign operation financial statements 31
to the presentation currency
3.19.03 Account for foreign currency transactions within 31
an individual company and in the consolidated
financial statements
3.19.04 Account for disposal or partial disposal of a 31
foreign operation
LO3.20 Related party disclosures: 3
3.20.01 Identify the parties that may be related to a 21
business entity in accordance with HKAS 24
3.20.02 Identify the related party disclosures 21
3.20.03 Explain the importance of being able to identify 21
and disclose related party transactions
LO3.21 Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued 3
operations:
3.21.01 Define non-current assets (or disposal groups) 4
held for sale or held for distribution to owners and
discontinued operations within the scope of
HKFRS 5 4
3.21.02 Explain what assets are within the measurement
provision of HKFRS 5
4
3.21.03 Determine when a sale is highly probable
3.21.04 Measure non-current assets held for sale and 4
discontinued operations including initial
measurement, subsequent measurement and
change of plan
3.21.05 How to account for impairment loss and
4
subsequent reversals
3.21.06 Present the non-current asset held for sale and
4
discontinued operation in the financial statements
(including the prior year restatement)
LO3.22 Earnings per share: 3
3.22.01 Explain the meaning and significance of a 23
company's earnings per share
3.22.02 Calculate the earnings per share, including the 23
impact of a bonus issue, a rights issue and an
issue of shares at full market value in accordance
with HKAS 33
3.22.03 Explain the relevance of a company's diluted 23
earnings per share
3.22.04 Discuss the limitations of using earnings per 23
share as a performance measure
Introduction xix
Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO3.23 Operating segments: 3

3.23.01 Identify and discuss the nature of segmental 24
information to be disclosed in accordance with
HKFRS 8
3.23.02 Explain when operating segments should be 24
aggregated and disaggregated
3.23.03 Disclose the relevant information for operating 24
segments and appropriate entity-wide information
LO3.24 Interim financial reporting: 3
3.24.01 Identify the circumstances in which interim 25
financial reporting is required in accordance with
HKAS 34
3.24.02 Explain the purpose and advantages of interim 25
financial reporting
3.24.03 Explain the recognition and measurement 25
principle of interim financial statements and apply
them
3.24.04 Disclose the relevant information for interim 25
financial statements including seasonality
LO4. Preparation and presentation of financial statements
Prepare the financial statements for an individual entity in
accordance with Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards and
statutory reporting requirements
LO4.01 Primary financial statement preparation: 3
4.01.01 Prepare the statement of financial position, the 19, 20, 26
statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income, the statement of changes
in equity and the statement of cash flows of an
entity in accordance with Hong Kong accounting
standards 26
4.01.02 Explain the minimum line items that should be
presented in the financial statements and criteria
for additional line items
LO4.02 Financial statement disclosure requirements: 3
4.02.01 Disclose accounting policy and items required by 26
the HKFRS, Companies Ordinance and other
rules and regulations
4.02.02 Explain the importance to disclose significant 26
judgement and estimates
xx Financial Reporting
Chapter
where
Competency covered
Prepare the financial statements for a group in accordance with
Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards and statutory
reporting requirements
LO4.03 Principles of consolidation: 3
4.03.01 Identify and describe the concept of a group as a 27
single economic entity
4.03.02 Define a subsidiary and when a group should 27
start and stop consolidating a subsidiary
4.03.03 Explain what constitutes control and the impact of 27
potential voting rights
4.03.04 Describe the reasons why the directors of a 27
company may not want to consolidate a
subsidiary and the circumstances in which non-
consolidation is permitted
4.03.05 Explain the purpose of consolidated financial 27
statements
4.03.06 Explain the importance of eliminating intra-group 27
transactions
4.03.07 Explain the importance of uniform accounting 27
policies and coterminous year ends in the
preparation of consolidated accounts
4.03.08 Apply the appropriate accounting treatment of 27
consolidated goodwill
4.03.09 Explain how to account for changes in parent's 30
ownership interest in a subsidiary without losing
control
LO4.04 Acquisition of subsidiaries: 3
4.04.01 Prepare a consolidated statement of financial 28
position for a simple/complex group structure
including pre and post acquisition profits, non-
controlling interests and goodwill
4.04.02 Prepare a consolidated statement of profit or loss 28
and other comprehensive income for a
simple/complex group structure, dealing with an
acquisition and the non-controlling interest
LO4.05 Disposal of subsidiaries: 3
4.05.01 Account for the disposal of a subsidiary by a 30
group
4.05.02 Account for the change of ownership in 30
subsidiaries without loss of control
Introduction xxi
Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO4.06 Business combinations: 3

4.06.01 Explain the scope of business combinations in 27
accordance with HKFRS 3 (revised)
4.06.02 Identify business combination and the difference 27
between acquisition of asset and business
4.06.03 Determine the acquisition date of an acquisition 27
4.06.04 Identify the identifiable assets (including 27
intangibles) and liabilities acquired in a business
combination
4.06.05 Explain the recognition principle and 19, 27
measurement basis of identifiable assets and
liabilities and the exception
4.06.06 Explain what contingent consideration is and how 27
to account for it initially and subsequently
4.06.07 Explain how to account for acquisition-related 27
costs, including those related to issue debt or
equity securities
4.06.08 Determine what is part of the business 27
combination transaction and the consideration
4.06.09 Calculate goodwill (including bargain purchase) 27
and account for it
4.06.10 Explain the accounting for step acquisition 30
4.06.11 Account for non-controlling interest when the 27
subsidiary has negative equity balance
4.06.12 Explain and account for measurement period 19, 27
adjustments
LO4.07 Investments in associates: 3
4.07.01 Define an associate in accordance with HKAS 28 29
(2011)
4.07.02 Explain what significant influence is and apply the 29
principle
4.07.03 Explain the reasons for and impact of equity 19, 29
accounting, including notional purchase price
allocation on initial acquisition, fair value
adjustments, upstream and downstream
transactions, and uniform accounting policies
4.07.04 Account for investors' share of losses of an 29
associate in excess of its investments in associates
4.07.05 Explain the impairment test and related
treatments for investments in associates 29
4.07.06 Account for the disposal of an associate 30
4.07.07 Prepare the disclosure in respect of associates
29
xxii Financial Reporting

Chapter
where
Competency covered
LO4.08 Interests in joint arrangements: 3

4.08.01 Define joint arrangements in accordance with 29
HKFRS 11
4.08.02 Explain the difference among jointly controlled 29
operations and joint ventures
4.08.03 Explain how an entity should account for a joint
venture 29
4.08.04 Account for the transactions between a venturer
and a joint venture 29
4.08.05 Disclose the relevant information in the venturer's
financial statements 29
LO4.09 Consolidated financial statement preparation 3
4.09.01 Prepare a consolidated statement of financial 28
position in compliance with HKFRS 10
4.09.02 Prepare a consolidated statement of profit or loss 28
and other comprehensive income
4.09.03 Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows 20
LO4.10 Financial statement disclosure requirement 3
4.10.01 Disclose the relevant information for business 27
combinations occurred during and subsequent to
the reporting period
LO4.11 Merger accounting for common control combinations 2
4.11.01 Describe the principles and practices of merger 30
accounting
4.11.02 Apply merger accounting to a common control 30
combination
Introduction xxiii
xxiv Financial Reporting
Part A
Legal environment
The emphasis in this section is on the legal environment in Hong Kong. The purpose of this
section is to develop your understanding of the Hong Kong legal environment, including the
legal framework and the related implications for business activities. This is considered as the
basic knowledge and foundation for a future certified public accountant.
1
Financial Reporting
2
chapter 1
Legal environment
Topic list
1 Hong Kong legal framework

1.1 Types and relative advantages of alternative forms of organisation
1.2 Legal procedures for establishment of companies
1.3 Corporate governance
2 Directors, officers, meetings and returns
2.1 Directors’ responsibilities
2.2 Officers of companies
2.3 Annual general meeting and annual return
3 Legal requirements associated with company structure, share offerings, financial statements,
debt obligations and restructuring
3.1 Share issues and prospectus requirements
3.2 Debt instruments and registration of charges
3.3 Statutory reporting and documentation requirements
3.4 Appointment and removal of auditors
3.5 Restructuring, including appointment of receivers and liquidators
3.6 Financial statements requirements
Learning focus
This chapter is partly background knowledge to set the scene about the legal environment
before you look at financial reporting standards. It also discusses the legal framework and
related implications for business activities. It is important that you are aware of these both for
exam purposes and in practice.
3
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
In this chapter you will cover the following learning outcomes:
Competency
level
Describe the Hong Kong legal framework and related implications for
business activities
1.01 Types and relative advantage of alternative forms of 2
organisation
1.01.01 Identify the types and relative advantages of alternative forms of
organisation
1.02 Legal procedures for establishment and governance of 2
companies
1.02.01 Describe the legal procedures for the establishment and
governance of companies
Describe the obligations of directors and officers of companies
1.03 Powers, duties and obligations of directors and company 2
secretaries
1.03.01 Describe the powers, duties and obligations of company directors
1.03.02 Describe the powers, duties and obligations of the company
secretary
Describe the legal requirements associated with company structure,
share offerings, debt obligations and restructuring
1.04 Share issues and prospectus requirements 2
1.04.01 Describe the procedure for issuing shares and the requirement for a
prospectus
1.05 Debt instruments and registration of charges 2
1.05.01 Describe the procedure for the issue of debt instruments
1.05.02 Describe the procedure for the registration of charges over
company debt
1.06 Statutory reporting and documentation requirements 3
1.06.01 Explain the statutory registers that must be kept by a company
1.06.02 Identify the financial statements that a company must prepare
1.07 Appointment and removal of auditors 3
1.07.01 Describe the procedures for the appointment, removal and
resignation of company auditors
1.08 Restructuring, including appointment of receivers and 1
liquidators
1.08.01 Identify the reasons for which a company may restructure, including
the appointment of receivers and liquidators
4
1: Legal environment | Part A Legal environment
1 Hong Kong legal framework

Topic highlights
Certified public accountants need to understand the different forms of business entities that operate
in Hong Kong. You can apply the knowledge you obtain from this section of the Learning Pack to
demonstrate this competence.
The liability of the members of companies can be unlimited or limited. We are mainly concerned
with limited companies in this section.
1.1 Types and relative advantages of alternative forms of

organisation
Topic highlights
Commercial organisations may take a number of forms, including sole trader businesses,
partnerships, companies and joint ventures.
These are considered in turn in this section.
1.1.1 Sole trader business

A sole proprietorship also known as a sole trader, or simply proprietorship, is a type of
business entity which is owned and run by one individual and where there is no legal distinction
between the owner and the business. All profits and all losses accrue to the owner (subject to
taxation). All assets of the business are owned by the proprietor and all debts of the business are
their debts and they must pay them from their personal resources. This means that the owner has
unlimited liability. It is a "sole" proprietorship in the sense that the owner has no partners
(partnership). A sole proprietor may do business with a trade name other than his or her legal
name. This also allows the proprietor to open a business account with banking institutions.
This form of business has a major advantage in that it is easy and quick to set up. Furthermore
details of the business and its operation remain private as there is no requirement to file documents
such as accounts.
There are, however, drawbacks to operating as a sole trader, the main one being that the sole
trader is not legally separated from his business and therefore remains individually and personally
liable for any losses that the business makes.
In Hong Kong, all the investor needs to do is to apply for a business licence from the Business
Registration Office of the Inland Revenue Department. Every person carrying on a business shall
make such an application within one month of the commencement of the business.
1.1.2 Partnerships
A partnership is a business entity formed by the Hong Kong Partnerships Ordinance, which
defines a partnership as "the relation between persons carrying on a business in common with a
view of profit" and is not a joint stock company or an incorporated company.
There must be at least two partners, but not more than 20 partners, otherwise it would be treated
as a company (single entity) unless the partnership is a partnership of professional solicitors,
accountants and stockbrokers. The partners share any profits and losses and inject funding by way
of partners' capital.
There are two different kinds of partnership. If the business entity registers with the Registrar of
Companies it takes the form of a limited partnership defined in the Limited Partnerships Ordinance.
5
Financial Reporting
However, if this business entity fails to register with the Registrar of Companies, then it becomes a
general partnership as a default.
In a general partnership all partners are general partners so each one is liable for all debts and
obligations of the firm.
In a limited partnership the general partners are liable for all debts and obligations of the firm
while the limited partners are liable only for the capital they contributed to the firm.
In a limited partnership the general partners manage the firm while the limited partners may not
and should limited partners do so then they become personally liable for the debts of obligations of
the firm in the same manner as a general partner.
Unless a partnership agreement between the partners demand otherwise, (1) a majority of the
general partners decide ordinary business matters, (2) a limited partner may assign his partnership
interests, (3) a limited partner cannot dissolve a partnership, (4) the introduction of a new partner
does not require the consent of the existing limited partners.
A partnership business, in common with a sole trader business, is not required to make accounts
and other documents public. It also has the additional advantages of:
 greater access to capital since more individuals contribute to the business
 potentially a greater spread of skills provided by the partners
 shared risk
The disadvantages of a partnership include the issue of disputes in the running of the business,
and unlimited liability. Additionally, partners are jointly and severally liable for their partners,
meaning that any one may be held responsible for losses of the business.
1.1.3 Companies
A company is bound by applicable rules and regulations. This regulated formal structure is a
reason why companies are such a popular business structure. It is a comparatively safe and stable
system for different groups of people to join together in business activities.
The liabilities of the shareholders of companies in Hong Kong can be either limited or unlimited.
Extracts from Part 1 Division 3 Subdivision 1 of the new Companies Ordinance explain the
differences between unlimited companies and companies limited by shares or guarantee:
(a) Limited by shares – the members of the company are liable to pay the company's debts
only to the extent of the nominal value of their shares.
(b) Limited by guarantee – the members of the company are liable to pay the company's
debts only to the extent of a stated guarantee. This structure is often used by non-profit
organisations which do not want to have share capital, but want the benefits of using the
structure of a company.
(c) Unlimited – the members of the company are personally responsible for the debts of the
company. This type is less common but may suit partnerships who want to
use the more formal company structure for their business operation but are restricted by
some professional organisation from limiting their liability. In Hong Kong, sole proprietors
operating small businesses may also use this form of company.
Advantages of operating as a limited liability company
Advantages of a limited liability company include the following:
(a) The liability of the members is limited so reducing their personal exposure to debts should
the company fail.
(b) The separation of ownership and management may result in the smoother running of the
business and easier resolution of problems.
(c) A company may have better access to finance than unincorporated businesses and can
create a floating charge by the way of security.
6
(d) The ownership of the business is easily achieved through the transfer of shares.
Drawbacks of operating as a limited liability company
Drawbacks of a limited liability company include the following:
(a) The regulated formal operating structure comes at the cost of registration, secretarial and
audit fees.
(b) The stringent reporting requirements mean that details of the operation of the business are
made public and this increases the accountability of management.
(c) The process of operating is governed and sometimes inhibited by legal requirements. For
example, all limited companies are bound to compile accounts and to have their accounts
audited annually.
For these reasons, small business operators may prefer to operate as a sole trader or as a
partnership.
1.1.4 Joint ventures
A joint venture is a legal entity formed by two or more parties to undertake an economic activity
together. The entity formed (the joint venture) may be any type of legal structure including a
partnership or limited liability company.
Joint ventures are often the preferred, or required, method of entry into a new market. By forming a
joint venture with another company, entities can reduce the risks associated with accessing new
geographical or product markets. In certain jurisdictions, including Saudi Arabia, a foreign entity
cannot legally carry out business without forming an alliance with a national entity.
1.2 Legal procedures for establishment of companies

Companies are established under the provisions of the Companies Ordinance (Chapter 32 of the
Law of Hong Kong). A company operates under an agreement between subscribers or
shareholders. It is common to also have articles of association for a company, which are more
detailed rules and regulations regarding meetings, resolutions and activities of the company.
The new Companies Ordinance (the “new CO”) for Hong Kong was passed on 12 July 2012 with
21 Parts comprising 921 sections and 11 schedules, and will come into operation on 3 March 2014,
12 pieces of subsidiary legislation were enacted to provide for the relevant technical and
procedural matters. The new CO was drafted with four major objectives:
(1) Enhancing corporate governance
(2) Ensuring better regulation
(3) Facilitating business
(4) Modernising the law
On disclosure, the new CO allows companies meeting specified size criteria (e.g. small and
medium enterprises or SME) to prepare simplified financial statements and directors’ reports. As
before, the new CO does not give a definition of what is a "true and fair view" for preparation of
financial statements.
The specified size criteria (“Small private company”) under the new CO are as below:
 All private companies, or
 Guarantee companies with total annual revenue of not more than $25million.
The new CO abolishes the requirement to have a Memorandum of Association (“MA”) as a
constitutional document of a local company. A company incorporated in Hong Kong under the new
CO is only required to have Articles of Association (“AA”). Under the new CO, the information
which was required to be contained in the MA under the Companies Ordinance (Cap. 32) (“Cap.
32”) will be set out in the AA.
7
Financial Reporting
The AA of companies incorporated under the new CO must contain the following mandatory
clauses (the “Mandatory Articles”) :
 Company name (section 81)
 Members' liabilities (section 83)
 Liabilities or contribution of members (for limited companies) (section 84)
 Capital and initial shareholdings (for companies with a share capital) (section 85(1) and
section 8 of Part 5 of Schedule 2 to the new CO)
 For an association to be incorporated with a licence granted under section 103 or a limited
company granted with such a licence, its AA must state the company’s objects whilst the
licence remains in force (section 82).
Conditions contained in the memorandum of existing companies will be deemed to be provisions of
their articles, except those relating to authorized share capital and par value, which are regarded
as deleted under the new CO.
The new CO adopts a mandatory system of no-par value for all local companies with a share
capital and retires the par value of shares, as par value is an antiquated concept that may give rise
to practical problems, such as inhibiting the raising of new capital and unnecessarily complicating
the accounting regime. Now that the par value for shares has been abolished, it is now more in line
with international trends and to provide companies with greater flexibilities in structuring their share
capital.
Par value (also known as "nominal value") is the minimum price at which shares can generally be
issued. Before the implementation of the new CO, companies incorporated in Hong Kong and
having a share capital were required to have a par value ascribed to their shares. The
Administration has legislated for the migration to mandatory no-par. Relevant concepts such as
nominal value, share premium, and requirement for authorised capital will no longer be necessary
and will be abolished.
Schedule 11 part 4 Division 2 of the new CO contains transitional provisions in relation to the
abolition of par value. These state that at the beginning of the commencement date of the new
legislation, any amount standing to the credit of the company’s share premium account and capital
redemption reserve becomes part of the company’s share capital. Additionally, any amount that
would be required by a continuing provision to be transferred to a company’s share premium
account or capital redemption reserve on or after the commencement date of section 135 becomes
part of the company’s share capital.
Once registered with the Registrar of Companies, a company is issued with a certificate of
incorporation as evidence that all the requirements of the new CO have been met with respect to
the registration.
The most common form of business structure in Hong Kong is the limited liability company. Limited
companies can be private limited companies or public limited companies. Any company that
cannot meet the legal requirements to remain a private company must register as a public
company.
Private companies are devised for the small business and are intended for situations where the
members are also the managers of the company.
A private company is defined by new CO Part One Division 3 Subdivision 2 section 11 as a
company which by its articles:
(a) restricts the right to transfer its shares; and
(b) limits the number of members to 50, not including employees of the company and former
employees who were members of the company whilst employed and who have continued to
be members; and
(c) prohibits any invitation to the public to subscribe for any shares or debentures in the
company; and
8
(d) is not a company limited by guarantee.

For the purposes of this section, two or more persons holding one share jointly are treated as one
member.
If a company's articles fail to satisfy the requirements of s.11, it is a public company, although the
term "public company" is not actually used in or defined by the new CO.
The main advantage of private companies is that they need not file accounts with their annual
return and, subject to a number of exceptions, they may waive compliance with certain
requirements as to the content of their accounts (s.359). When a private company sends its annual
return to the Registrar of Companies they are signed by a director or the secretary, stating that the
company has complied with s.11.
If a company alters its articles so that it no longer satisfies s.11, from the date of alteration the
company will cease to be a private company and within 14 days it must deliver to the Registrar a
prospectus or a statement in lieu of a prospectus in the form and containing the particulars
specified in the Companies (Winding up and Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance, which is the
revised name for the remaining provisions of the old Companies Ordinance. These documents are
also required before a company which is formed as a public company may allot any of its shares or
debentures.
Under the new CO s.94, the company must, within 15 days after the date on which the alteration
takes effect, deliver to the Registrar for registration:
(a) a notice of the change of the company’s status in the specified form; and
(b) a copy (certified by an officer of the company to be true) of the company’s annual financial
statements that are:
(i) prepared in accordance with section 379; and
(ii) prepared for the financial year immediately before the financial year in which the alteration
takes effect.
Under the new CO, the annual return of a public company or a guarantee company will no longer be
filed with reference to the date of Annual General Meeting ("AGM") as an AGM may be dispensed with
under s.612 of the new CO. The requirement is to deliver the annual return in respect of every financial
year of the company instead of in each calendar year.
Pursuant to sections 662(3) and (4) of the new CO, the annual return of a public company or a
guarantee company should be filed (together with certified true copies of the relevant financial
statements, directors' report and auditor's report) within 42 days after the company's return date.
The return date for a public company is 6 months after the end of the company's accounting reference
period while the return date for a guarantee company is 9 months after the end of the company's
accounting reference period.
The accounting reference period is the period by reference to which the company's annual financial
statements are to be prepared. For example, if a company prepares its financial statements up to 31
December every year, the accounting reference period is from the 1 January of a year to 31 December
of the same year.
There is no change in the requirement to file annual returns of private companies. Pursuant to sections
662(1) and (2) of the new CO, the annual return of a private company must be delivered for registration
within 42 days after the anniversary of the date of incorporation of the company.
9
Financial Reporting
1.3 Corporate governance

Topic highlights
Corporate governance has become increasingly important in recent years due to a number of
high profile corporate collapses. The new CO seeks to emphasise the importance of corporate
governance.
Key term
Corporate governance is the system by which companies are directed and controlled.
(Cadbury Report)
Corporate governance may be defined as the system and processes by which companies are
directed and controlled in response to the rights and expectations of shareholders and other
stakeholders. Corporate governance therefore covers a very wide range of issues and disciplines
from the appointment and the remuneration of directors, the procedures of the directors' meetings
and the role of non-executive directors, to the company's objectives, business strategy and risk
management, and to investor relations, employee relations and social responsibilities and so on.
Corporate governance has been the subject of much debate in the business world in recent
years. The trigger for this debate was the collapse of major international companies during the
1980s, including Maxwell, BCCI and Polly Peck. These collapses were often unexpected, and
dubious (or even fraudulent) activities were sometimes attributed to their owners and managers.
These events represented a nasty shock for countries, such as the UK and the USA, that felt they
had well-regulated markets and strong company legislation. It became obvious, however, that part
of the problem was the way in which regulation was spread between different national
authorities for these global conglomerates, so that no one national authority had the whole picture
of the affairs of such companies, nor full powers over the whole of the business.
Individual countries began to develop better guidelines for the corporate governance, and efforts
have been made to produce an international standard on corporate governance.
Since 1995, the Corporate Governance Committee of the Hong Kong Institute of CPAs has made a
series of recommendations for enhanced corporate governance disclosure in Hong Kong. In the
committee's latest report, Corporate Governance Disclosure in Annual Reports – A Guide to
Current Requirements and Recommendations for Enhancement, which was published in March
2001, the Committee repeated certain of those recommendations which have not yet been adopted
in the Listing Rules and made further recommendations for enhancement.
Some of the recommendations are extracted as follows:
(a) To communicate to shareholders the strength of their corporate governance structure,
policies and practices, listed companies and public corporation are encouraged to include in
their annual report a statement of corporate governance;
(b) To enhance comparability and transparency of the way directors are compensated, directors'
remuneration should be analysed between 'performance based' and 'non-performance
based';
(c) Disclosure requirements in respect of directors' share options should be extended to include
disclosure by individual directors of the aggregate value realised. Aggregate value realised is
calculated as the excess of the market price on the day of exercise of the option over the
exercise price multiplied by the number of shares acquired as a result of the exercise of the
option;
(d) To aid communication with the reader of the financial statements, the directors should set
out in a separate statement their responsibilities in connection with the preparation of the
financial statements; and
10
(e) To increase transparency regarding auditors' independence, disclosure of non-audit fees

paid to auditors should be made.
The new CO in Hong Kong has introduced some measures for enhancing corporate governance, in
particular in the following areas:
(a) Strengthening the accountability of directors by:
 Requiring every private company to have at least one natural person acting as director
(rather than a corporate director, i.e. a company acting as director) in order to
enhance transparency and accountability.
 Clarifying in the statute the directors’ duty of care, skill and diligence with a view to
providing clear guidance to directors.
(b) Enhancing shareholder engagement in the decision making process by:
 Introducing detailed and comprehensive rules for the passing of written resolutions,
thus making it easier for shareholders to vote and companies to pass resolutions.
 Requiring companies to bear the expenses of circulating members’ statements
relating to AGMs, thus avoiding members being deterred from doing this by the cost.
 Reducing the threshold requirement for members to demand a poll from 10% to 5% of
the total voting rights.
(c) Improving the disclosure of company information by:
 Requiring public companies, large private companies and guarantee companies (i.e.
those that do not qualify for simplified reporting) to prepare a more comprehensive
directors’ report, including a ‘business review’, whilst allowing private companies to opt
out by special resolution. This will include information relating to environmental and
employee matters, thus promoting corporate social responsibility.
 Widening the ambit of disclosure of material interests of directors in contracts of
significance with the company to cover transactions and arrangements and to expand
the coverage to include the material interests of entities connected with a director in
the case of public companies.
(d) Fostering shareholder protection by:
 Introducing rules to deal with directors’ conflicts of interests.
 Requiring the approval of disinterested shareholders where shareholder approval is
required for transactions of public companies and their subsidiaries.
 Introducing stricter rules for the ratification of the conduct of directors to prevent
conflicts of interest and abuse of power.
 Replacing the 'headcount test' with a not more than 10% disinterested voting
requirement for privatisations and specified schemes of arrangement.
 Extending the scope of the ‘unfair prejudice’ remedy.
(e) Strengthening auditors’ rights by empowering auditors to require information or
explanations from a wider range of persons than was previously the case. The offence for
failure to provide the information or explanation is extended to cover officers of the company
and the wider range of persons.
Linkages to other modules
Corporate Governance is also part of the syllabus for Module C Business Assurance.
11
Financial Reporting
2 Directors, officers, meetings and returns

Topic highlights
The directors have statutory duties laid down in the Companies Ordinance, common law duties of
reasonable care and skill and fiduciary duties in equity.
2.1 Directors' responsibilities

Directors are first and foremost responsible for the operation of a company, ensuring that it
operates as the shareholders intended within the corporate legal environment.
The new CO broadens the definition of director to "include any person occupying the position of
director by whatever name called". Directors' responsibilities are therefore imposed on the senior
management of a company, whether they are the directors, chief executives, senior managers or
other officers; it depends on the role they actually fulfil.
Section 456 of the new CO maintains the restriction on corporate directorship in public companies,
companies limited by guarantee and private companies which are members of a group of
companies of which a listed company is a member. This restriction, however, does not apply to
other private companies which are required to have at least one director who is a natural person.
The new CO requires every private company to have at least one director who is a natural person,
to enhance transparency and accountability.
The liability of directors is not specifically set out in the Companies Ordinance, and is generally
established by case law. In some situations, directors may be held personally liable for losses
caused to the company as a result of their actions. The new CO states that any provision in a
company’s articles or a contract which seeks to enable a director to avoid liability for any
negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust as a result of their actions will be void (Part
10 Division 3 section 468).
2.1.1 Duties and responsibilities
The Companies Registry issued “A Guide on Directors’ Duties” in July 2009. The general principles
of directors’ duties were explained as follows:
(1) duty to act in good faith for the benefit of the company as a whole
(2) duty to use powers for a proper purpose for the benefit of members as a whole
(3) duty not to delegate powers except with proper authorisation and duty to exercise
independent judgment
(4) duty to exercise care, skill and diligence
(5) duty to avoid conflicts between personal interests and interests of the company
(6) duty not to enter into transactions in which the directors have an interest except in
compliance with the requirements of the law
(7) duty not to gain advantage from use of position as a director
(8) duty not to make unauthorised use of the company’s property or information
(9) duty not to accept personal benefit from third parties conferred because of position as a
director
(10) duty to observe the company's memorandum and articles of association and resolutions
(11) duty to keep proper books of account
12
These general principles involving duties and operation requirements are summarised further as
duties and powers below.
(a) Fiduciary duties
Directors must act honestly and in good faith for the benefit of the company.
In particular, directors must act in good faith in what they believe to be the best interests of
the company. Generally speaking, the interests of the company are to be equated with the
interests of its members as a whole. Directors must not act just for the economic advantage
of the majority of shareholders disregarding the interests of the minority. The position and
interests of creditors must be considered in any case where the company is not fully solvent.
The interests of the company's employees must also be taken into account.
Directors must act for a proper purpose. That is, directors must not abuse the powers
given to them by using those powers for purposes other than those for which they were
granted.
Directors must not obtain a personal profit from transactions entered into by the
company without the prior approval of the shareholders; otherwise such profits will be
regarded as being held in trust for the company and they may have to account for them.
Directors must agree not to fetter their discretion. As the powers delegated to directors
are held in trust by them for the company, they must not restrict their exercise of future
discretion.
Directors must act in such a way that there is no possibility of conflict between
personal interests and company interests. Directors should also avoid any conflict of
interest by not using corporate property, information or opportunity for any purpose other
than in the company's interests.
(b) Duty to exercise skill and care
Directors must exercise reasonable care and skill in the performance of their duties.
The wide range of skills required of directors has meant that there have been no precise
standards of skill and care established in case law. In the past the courts have required that
directors display the degree of skill and care which may reasonably be expected from a
person with that director's knowledge and experience. If employed as having particular skills,
for example, as being a certified public accountant, a director should display the skill or
ability expected from a person of that profession. A certified public accountant may,
depending on the circumstances, be held professionally responsible if he or she should be
found negligent in the discharge of his or her duties as a director.
However, the new CO has introduced a statutory responsibility on directors to
exercise reasonable care, skill and diligence (s.465) which should make it easier for
courts to determine whether the duty of care has been exercised.
Statutory duty – various company law statutes impose a number of duties on
directors, such as the preparation of annual accounts and duties in relation to auditors.
(c) Directors' responsibilities in respect of financial reporting
Directors are responsible for ensuring that all information contained in prospectuses,
financial statements and other financial documents is accurate and is presented in
accordance with the laws and regulations that apply to the company. In respect of
directors' liabilities, directors can be subject to fines and penalties under the Companies
Ordinance or subject to other penalties by regulatory bodies and, in the event of legal
proceedings, may be personally sued for negligence by investors, shareholders or other
parties affected by their actions.
The directors are responsible for ensuring that:
 the company prepares financial statements that give a true and fair view of the
company’s financial positions and results
13
Financial Reporting
 the financial statements are accurate and presented in accordance with law
(especially for example the Companies Ordinance) and regulations
 proper books and accounts are kept.
2.1.2 Powers and obligations

(a) Powers of directors
The general power of managing a company is usually vested in the directors. Formally the
powers of directors are defined by articles. The directors may meet together to despatch
business, adjourn, and otherwise regulate their meetings as they think fit under Table A,
art 100.
At common law, directors can only exercise their powers collectively by passing resolutions
at a properly convened meeting of the board of directors; they have no power to act
individually as agents for the company. However, a company's articles will usually empower
the board of directors to delegate its power to individual directors or to committees of
directors (Table A, art 104), and to the managing director (art 111), so that a meeting is not
required for each and every decision taken by the board of directors. Under the new CO, this
part is included in Cap. 622H, model articles for companies, division 2.
(b) Directors' obligations
If a person does not comply with his duties as a director he may be liable to civil or criminal
proceedings and may be disqualified from acting as a director.
Various important legal issues have been raised locally and overseas with regard to the fulfillment
of directors’ duties or the execution of their powers. Agency creation is an important topic. An
agency relationship is created when one person acquires the authority to act for another, the
principal. An agency relationship could be created by:
(1) express appointment;
(2) conduct of the parties;
(3) necessity of the situation;
(4) ratification; and
(5) estoppel.
Some practical legal views related to the agency theory are as follows.
(a) Indoor Management Rule
The Indoor Management Rule, also known as the Turquand Rule (Royal British Bank v
Turquand (1856) 6 E&B 327), entitles an outsider to assume that the internal procedures of a
company have been complied with. This is a practical approach to solving problems facing
outsiders because an outsider would have difficulty in discovering what is going on in a
company, e.g. whether a company director has exceeded his authority as given to him by the
Articles of Association, or whether there has been some non-compliance with an internal
procedure.
(b) The doctrine of estoppel
English law defines estoppel as: "a principle of justice and of equity. It comes to this: when a
man, by his words or conduct, has led another to believe in a particular state of affairs, he
will not be allowed to go back on it when it would be unjust or inequitable for him to so."
(Moorgate Mercantile v Twitchings [1976] 1 QB 225, CA at 241 per Lord Denning MR).
Estoppel could be by record with issue or cause of action. Estoppel could also be by deed of
rules, regarded as technical or formal estoppel. Under English law, estoppel by
representation of fact, promissory estoppel and proprietary estoppel are regarded as
reliance-based estoppels. All three estoppels are estoppels by representation.
Estoppel allows a party to a contract, acting in good faith, to prevent the counterparty from
breaking a contract by relying upon certain rights, or upon a set of facts (e.g. words said or
actions performed) which is different from an earlier set of facts, in certain situations. For
14
example, the chairman of a board cannot rescind a contract within his powers, signed by a
fellow director, on authority grounds, if he is also actively involved in the contract negotiation
together with that director.
2.2 Officers of companies

Topic highlights
The secretary of a company is the chief administrative officer. The position involves
communications with the Companies Registry and with members in relation to all legal and
administrative issues. The secretary usually has actual power to bind the company in respect of
actions normally expected of a company secretary.
The term "officer" is a generic one that can be applied to directors, the secretary and some other
senior managers. Officers are usually accountable in law for certain actions specified in legislation.
Furthermore, they may be accountable under the principles established in decided cases.
The secretary is the chief administrative officer of the company as regards relations with members
and the Companies Registry.
Every company must have a secretary. The position may be filled by an individual or a company.
It is permitted to have more than one secretary. Details of the secretary must be registered in
Chinese and English.
The secretary can be a director of the company unless the company has only one member who is
also the only director (s.475, new CO). Listed companies must segregate the roles of chairman and
secretary under the Listing Rules.
2.2.1 The role of the secretary
The secretary is the vital link between the company and the Companies Registry, and the company
and its members.
The secretary receives all formal communications from the Registry. The secretary is responsible
for submitting returns and registration of documents such as charges over assets, special
resolutions, loans to directors and so on (though it is the directors who are accountable for these
actions).
2.2.2 Powers and duties of the company secretary
The secretary:
 makes arrangements for meetings of the board of directors
 makes arrangements for annual and extraordinary general meetings
 records the formal minutes of meetings and makes these available for signature
 maintains the company's records, including the register of members
 deals with matters relating to liaison with members
 deals with formal communications between the company and the Companies Registry
2.3 Annual general meeting and annual return

A company must hold an Annual General Meeting (AGM) and submit an annual return every
accounting reference year. The new CO requirements are discussed in more detail below.
2.3.1 Annual general meeting
Shareholders have different levels of company involvement. In some companies, shareholders hold
positions as directors and are well informed about the direction of the business and themselves
directly affect day-to-day management.
15
Financial Reporting
However, in other companies, shareholders are not directors or employed to manage the business,
therefore, attendance at the Annual General Meeting (AGM) is an opportunity to understand the
management of the company.
Under the new CO, a company must hold its AGM by reference to its accounting reference period
as follows:
 In the case of a company limited by guarantee or a private company that is not a
subsidiary of a public company, 9 months after the end of its accounting reference
period; and
 In the case of any other company (e.g. public company, non-HK company) , 6 months
after the end of its accounting reference period.
The accounting reference period is the period by reference to which the financial year is to be
determined. Before holding an AGM, at least 21 days’ notice must be give to members.
If the accounting reference period is the first accounting reference period of the company and is
longer than 12 months, the company must hold a general meeting as its annual general meeting
within the following period:
 if it is a private company or a company limited by guarantee:
– 9 months after the anniversary of the company’s incorporation; or
– 3 months after the end of that accounting reference period,
whichever is the later.
 If it is any other company (e.g. public company, non-HK company):
– 6 months after the anniversary of the company’s incorporation; or
– 3 months after the end of that accounting reference period,
whichever is the later.
However, Under the new CO, a company can dispense with the AGM of each financial year if:
 everything that is required to be completed at the meeting is instead achieved by a written
resolution and copies of the documents required to be laid or produced at the meeting are
provided to each member of the company on or before the circulation date of the written
resolution (section 612(1));
 the company is a single member company (section 612(2)(a));
 the company has dispensed with the holding of AGMs by a written resolution or a resolution
at a general meeting passed by all members under section 613. The company is required to
deliver a copy of the resolution to the Registrar of Companies within 15 days after it has
been passed (sections 622(1)(g) and (2)); or
 the company is a dormant company (section 611).
2.3.2 Annual return

Under the new CO, the annual return of a public company or a guarantee company will no longer
be filed with reference to the date of AGM, as an AGM may be dispensed with as discussed above.
The requirement is to deliver the annual return in respect of every financial year of the company
instead of in each calendar year.
According to sections 662(3) and (4) of the new CO, the annual return of a public company or a
guarantee company should be filed (together with certified true copies of the relevant financial
statements, directors' report and auditor's report) within 42 days after the company's return date.
The return date is:
 For a public company, 6 months after the end of the company's accounting reference
period.
16
 For a guarantee company, 9 months after the end of the company's accounting reference
period.
The accounting reference period is the period by reference to which the company's annual financial
statements are to be prepared. For example, if a company prepares its financial statements up to
31 March every year, the accounting reference period is from the 1 April of a year to 31 March of
the same year.
Further, section 2 of Schedule 6 to the new CO provides that a listed company is only required to
provide the particulars of members who held 5% or more of the issued shares in any class of the
company's shares as at the date of the return.
There is no change in the requirement to file annual returns of private companies. Pursuant to
sections 662(1) and (2) of the new CO, the annual return of a private company must be delivered
for registration within 42 days after the anniversary of the date of incorporation of the company.
3 Legal requirements associated with company

structure, share offerings, financial statements, debt
obligations and restructuring
Topic highlights
There are legal requirements associated with the company structure, share offerings, debt
obligations and restructuring.
The issued share capital is made up of the shares already held by members. It is sometimes called
subscribed share capital.
A company does not have to issue all of its authorised share capital at once, or even at all if it
chooses not to do so. Share capital not issued is called unissued share capital.
3.1 Share issues and prospectus requirements

When a company is first established, shares are issued as follows:
(a) In a private company they are issued by allotment, with the directors passing a resolution at
a board meeting stating that shares are to be issued to named persons.
(b) In a public company they are issued by a renounceable allotment letter, which allows issued
shares to be transferred by the initial holder within a specified period of time.
The power to allot shares is normally delegated to the directors by the Articles or by an ordinary
resolution passed by the members at a general meeting.
When a public company seeks to raise capital from the general public it must issue a prospectus.
Detailed requirements of such a prospectus may be found on the website of the Hong Kong Stock
Exchange, although knowledge is not required for the Module A exam.
3.2 Debt instruments and registration of charges

Debt instruments are a type of financial instrument. The accounting treatment of these is found in a
later chapter. Issuers of debt finance, such as banks, will often require security for their loan in
case a company is unable to meet repayments. This security is normally a charge over individual
assets (a fixed charge) or over a group of changing assets (a floating charge). Where the borrower
defaults on repayment, a floating charge crystallises and the lender takes control of the asset(s)
held as security and may sell it or them to realise funds.
17
Financial Reporting
3.2.1 Registration of charges

Part 8 of the new CO deals with registration of charges. It specifies that two registers of charges
must be maintained:
(a) The Companies Registry must keep a record for each company (section 27)
(b) The company must keep its own register, either at its own office or at a location of which the
Registry is aware (Part 8 Division 7 section 352).
Fixed and floating charges must be registered at the Companies Registry within one month of their
execution.
Any charge not registered within this time period will be void against the liquidator and any creditor
of the company. This does not mean that the company no longer owes the money, but it does
relegate the obligation to the level of an unsecured creditor. Therefore, the charge remains valid
against the company. Irrespective of the terms of the debenture, failure to register makes the whole
debt immediately repayable. This will normally result in insolvency within a short period of time.
Any fixed charge on land and buildings must be registered in the Lands Office within one month of
being executed. This also applies if any floating charge that includes land or buildings crystallises.
The requirement to register is set out in Part 8 Divisions 2 and 3 of the Companies Ordinance. Not
all charges have to be registered, but the exclusions generally fall outside the Module A syllabus.
Charges must be registered by the debtor company, though the creditor can perform this function
(Division 2 section 335). Registration secures the position of the creditor and also serves as an
indication of the obligation to prospective future lenders if they choose to search the register.
Once registration has occurred, a non-current asset that secures a fixed charge can only be sold
with the consent of the secured lender. Some debentures are issued under a trust deed so that
only one registration is necessary. Also, if the directors seek release from the charge they need
only approach the trustees instead of potentially many lenders.
As we have seen, the creation of a floating charge does not prevent dealing in the asset.
On liquidation, charges are prioritised using the following principles:
 Fixed charges rank ahead of floating charges
 Charges of the same kind are ranked in order of their date of creation
The security to the lender is the value of the asset at disposal and not the debt. Therefore, if a
company is liquidated and an asset is sold for $50,000 with a loan outstanding of $70,000, the
difference will rank as unsecured.
Some lenders reinforce their position by including a negative pledge clause in their floating charge
documents. This is a condition that states that the company will not create any later legal or
equitable charges over specific assets ranking in priority to a floating charge.
3.3 Statutory reporting and documentation requirements

A company must keep statutory registers of:
 members
 directors
 directors' interests, including loans to directors
 charges over the company's assets
 meetings
 resolutions
 substantial interests in shares.
The records must be kept at the registered office or another location if permission is granted by the
Companies Registry.
18
The company must prepare a

 statement of financial position
 statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
Both of these documents must be approved and signed.
These financial statements have to be filed with the Registrar and sent to all members and
debenture holders.
A listed public company is permitted to produce summary financial statements for the members in
place of the full accounts.
Companies must keep proper accounting records to enable the accounts to be prepared with
reasonable accuracy. An annual return must be sent to the Registry.
3.4 Appointment and removal of auditors

The first auditors of a new company are appointed by the first directors of the company.
For existing companies, the appointment or reappointment of auditors is confirmed by the members
in the Annual General Meeting. If the AGM does not appoint an auditor, the court can make an
appointment.
If the auditors resign from their position, the directors or the shareholders at a general meeting may
appoint new auditors.
3.4.1 New auditors
Where new auditors are to be appointed at a general meeting it is necessary to serve special
notice (28 days) to the members. In some cases this may be impossible, but the notice period may
not be less than 21 days.
Notification to the members may be by any mode of communication permitted by the Articles of
Association.
The remuneration of auditors is determined by whoever appoints the auditors.
3.4.2 Removal and resignation of auditors
The company must pass an ordinary resolution if it wishes to remove the auditors. If this occurs
before the expiry of the period of office, special notice of 28 days to the company by the person
seeking to remove the auditor is mandatory.
Any representations by the auditors relating to (or relevant to) the removal or resignation must be
sent to the members. The removed or resigning auditor is entitled to attend the next AGM.
The auditor can resign in writing at any time. Unless the auditor wishes to make a statement to the
members, the notice to the company must state that there are no relevant circumstances
connected with the resignation that need to be brought to the attention of the members. The notice
of resignation must be deposited with the Companies Registry. If there is a statement made by the
auditor relating to the circumstances of resignation this must be sent to all of the members.
3.4.3 Auditors’ rights
The new CO enhances the rights of auditors. Pursuant to s. 412 of the new CO, auditors may
require information and explanation for the performance of their duties from a wider range of
persons, including persons holding or accountable for any accounting records of the company or a
Hong Kong incorporated subsidiary of the company.
It also empowers auditors to require the company to obtain information and explanation for the
performance of their duties from persons holding or accountable for the accounting records of
a non-Hong Kong incorporated subsidiary.
19
Financial Reporting
3.5 Restructuring, including appointment of receivers and

liquidators
Companies may alter their capital structure or make other arrangements to improve profitability or
liquidity, increase efficiency or ultimately rescue the business. The law sets out to protect the
members and outside parties in the event of these actions.
3.5.1 Restructuring
Restructuring is a common response to a change in business conditions. A company may
restructure its financing arrangements, its assets or its operations in order to save money and
achieve efficiencies.
Debt restructuring is the process where a company with cash flow problems restructures or
renegotiates debts in order to improve or restore liquidity so that trading may continue.
Capital restructuring involves reallocating assets to improve liquidity. Certain assets are sold and
replaced with alternative assets which can be better utilised to earn revenue and profits.
The overall motives of restructuring are reduced risk, reduced cost of capital and increased
liquidity.
3.5.2 Liquidation
Key term
Liquidation is the "end of the road" for the company. It occurs when it is certain that the life of the
company will come to an end. The process by which this occurs is called winding up. You can use
the terms "liquidation" and "winding up" to mean broadly the same thing. However, the company
does not have to be in financial difficulties to be wound up. The members of the company may
decide at any time to take such action, and in some cases are obliged to do so (for example, if the
company were set up to achieve a specific purpose and this has been fully achieved, there is no
reason for the company to go on trading).
The liquidator is the person appointed to wind up the company and is an insolvency practitioner
(usually an accountant or solicitor) with expertise in such matters. Where a company is insolvent,
the liquidator is appointed by the Official Receiver, a civil servant acting on instructions from the
court. The Official Receiver is sometimes called the provisional liquidator.
3.5.3 Receivership
A receiver is different to both a liquidator and the Official Receiver. A receiver is a person or firm
appointed by creditors to act if a company has broken the conditions of a debenture, such as not
making payments when contractually obliged to do so. The job of the receiver is to get the money
back for the creditor. If he does so and the company can still survive, it does not mean that the
receiver's actions will bring an end to the company.
The receiver is appointed under the provisions of the debenture. A receiver may also be appointed
by the court or on the statutory basis provided by the Conveyancing and Property Ordinance:
"... there shall be implied in any legal charge or equitable mortgage by deed, where the
money has become due, a power exercisable in writing by the mortgagee and any person
entitled to give a receipt for the mortgage money on its repayment to appoint a receiver... to
remove any receiver... and appoint another in his place."
The court appoints a receiver if the security is in jeopardy.
When a receiver is appointed it is necessary to inform the Companies Registry within seven days
of appointment. From this time, the company's letterhead must make specific reference to the
receiver.
20
3.5.4 Companies (Winding up and Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance

On the commencement day of the new CO, the old CO was retitled ‘Companies (Winding Up and
Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance (Cap. 32)’ The main focus of this ordinance is:
(1) Winding-Up of a Company;
(2) Insolvency of a Company;
(3) Director disqualification;
(4) Appointment of receivers and managers of insolvent companies;
Part 15 of the new CO sets out the provisions on the striking off and deregistration of defunct
companies, the restoration of companies that have been struck off or deregistered, and related
matters (including treatment of properties of dissolved companies). It introduces changes which
streamline the existing procedures for the striking-off and restoration of companies. This Part also
imposes new requirements to prevent any possible abuse of the deregistration procedure.
Under the old CO (Cap. 32), only a private company could make an application to the Registrar for
deregistration under section 291AA, provided that certain conditions are met, namely:
(a) The company had not commenced operation or business or had not been in operation or
carried on business for three months;
(b) The company had no outstanding liabilities; and
(c) All the members agreed to the deregistration.
Under this voluntary deregistration procedure, a company could be dissolved without going through
the winding-up process.
Non-private companies are not allowed to apply for voluntary deregistration to avoid prejudicing the
public interest.
Under the new CO, the deregistration procedure is extended to guarantee companies.
3.6 Financial statements requirements

Under the new CO, Hong Kong companies have a statutory duty to prepare financial statements
and file these financial statements with the Companies Registry unless exempted. Some of the
relevant Ordinance provisions are as follows:
 s.379 – a company's directors must prepare for each financial year financial statements that
comply with the ordinance requirements, and directors must instead prepare for the financial
year consolidated statements if the company is a holding company and not a wholly owned
subsidiary of another corporate.
 s.380(1) – the annual financial statements must give a true and fair view of the financial
position of the company as at the end of the financial year and the financial performance of
the company for the financial year.
 s.380(2) – the annual consolidated statements must give a true and fair view of the financial
position of the company and all the subsidiary undertakings as a whole as at the end of the
financial year, and the financial performance of the company and all the subsidiary
undertakings as a whole for the financial year.
 s.380(3) – the financial statements for a financial year must comply with Part 1 and 2 of
Schedule 4, depending on reporting exemption.
 s.380(4) – the financial statements for a financial year must comply with any other
requirements of the Ordinance in relation to the financial statements and the accounting
standards applicable to the financial statements.
 s.380(5) – the financial statements must contain all additional information necessary to give
a true and fair view.
21
Financial Reporting
 s.380(6) – the financial statements must contain the reasons for, and the particulars and
effect of, the departure from the Ordinance requirements to give a true and fair view.
 s.381 – the annual consolidated financial statements for a financial year must include all the
subsidiary undertakings of the company, exclusion of one or more subsidiaries may be
possible subject to reporting exemption or materiality.
 s.387 – a statement of financial position that forms part of any financial statements must be
approved by the directors and signed by two directors on the directors' behalf.
The new CO defines accounting standards as statements of standard accounting practice issued or
specified by a body prescribed by its Regulations. However, the definition of a true and fair view
again is not provided.
22
Topic recap
Legal environment
HongHong
KongKong
LegalLegal Hong
Directors
Kong and
Legal
officers of a company Hong Legal
Kong requirements
Legal
Framework Framework Framework
Types of organisation: Directors’ duties and responsibilities Share issues:

Sole proprietor Fiduciary duties Prospectus required where
Partnerships Duty to exercise skill and care a public company seeks to
Companies Responsibilities in respect of raise capital from general
financial reporting public.
A business licence to Directors’ powers and obligations: Debt & charges:

operate as a sole proprietor Power of directors – managing the Fixed charge: charge over
is applied for from the company single asset
Inland Revenue Directors’ obligations – compliance Floating charge: charge over
Department. with duties group of assets.
Two registers of charges must
Partnerships are formed by be maintained.
the Hong Kong
Partnerships Ordinance.
A company is established
under the provisions of the
Companies Ordinance.
Joint ventures may be any

type of legal structure.
Limited liability companies The company secretary is the chief Statutory reporting
are private or public. administrative officer. They: A company must:
Those which do not meet arrange board meetings maintain statutory registers
the conditions to remain arrange general meetings prepare statements of
private must register as record meeting minutes financial position and
public. maintain company records comprehensive income.
liaise with members
deal with formal
communications with the
Companies Registry
Corporate governance is Auditors
the system by which New auditors appointed at
companies are directed and AGM
controlled. Removal of auditors by
ordinary resolution
Resignation at any time in
writing
Restructuring
Debt restructuring
(renegotiate debts to
improve liquidity)
Capital restructuring
(reallocate assets to
improve liquidity)
Liquidation (winding
up the company)
Receivership
(recovery of money for
creditors)
23
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Preparing financial statements 15 minutes

During an audit of the financial statements of a Hong Kong incorporated company listed on the
Main Board of The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited, the auditor reported to the Audit
Committee of the company that no impairment assessment had been done by the management in
respect of the goodwill arising on an acquisition of a subsidiary in the prior year under HKAS 36
Impairment of Assets. In a meeting with the directors of the company, one of the executive
directors told the auditor that "We are not responsible for the preparation of financial statements.
We have delegated this task to our financial controller. Please talk to him directly." The financial
controller, being a professional accountant, responded that, "the financial statements will be
approved by the Board of Directors instead of me; it is not my problem if the financial statements
are not prepared in accordance with Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards".
Required
Comment on the validity of the statements given by the executive director and the financial
controller of the company in respect of their responsibilities in the preparation of the financial
statements. (8 marks)
HKICPA May 2009
Rider Games Inc 7 minutes

Rider Games Inc. (RGI) acquired a patented technology that expires in 10 years and a licence to
use a custom made software for 5 years at consideration of HK$4.5 million and HK$2.4 million
respectively on 1 October 2009. For tax purposes, the cost of a patent is a non-deductible
expenditure and the software licence is fully deductible in the year of acquisition. The director of the
company has asked you, the financial controller, the following question, ‘If the company can get full
tax deduction for the software licence, why don’t we state the whole HK$6.9 million as the cost of
acquisition for the software licence in our financial statements? Besides, as software is an
intangible item, we can use our own computer and printer to create more agreements and invoices
in order to record more acquisitions of software in the financial statements.’
In your position as financial controller of RGI, explain to the director his duties and responsibilities
in connection with the subject matter and the preparation of the financial statements.
(4 marks)
HKICPA December 2013 (amended)
24
Part B
Financial reporting
framework
25
Financial Reporting
26
chapter 2
Financial reporting
framework
Topic list 8 The HKICPA’s Conceptual Framework
8.1 Preface
1 Regulatory bodies and their impact on 8.2 Introduction
accounting 8.3 Purpose and status
1.1 The role of the Hong Kong Institute of 8.4 Scope
CPAs (HKICPA) 8.5 Users and their information needs
1.2 The role of the Stock Exchange of Hong 8.6 The objective of financial statements
Kong (SEHK) Ltd 8.7 Information about economic resources, claims
1.3 Securities and Futures Commission (SFC) and changes in resources and claims
1.4 Financial Reporting Council (FRC) 8.8 The reporting entity
1.5 Hong Kong Insurance Authority (HKIA) 9 Qualitative characteristics of financial information
1.6 Hong Kong Monetary Authority (HKMA) 9.1 Fundamental qualitative characteristics
2 Financial reporting requirements under 9.2 Enhancing qualitative characteristics
HKFRS 9.3 The cost constraint on useful financial reporting
9.4 Underlying assumption
3 Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards
3.1 The setting of HKFRS and due process 10 The elements of financial statements
3.2 Current Hong Kong FRS 10.1 Financial position
3.3 Scope of HKFRS 10.2 Performance
3.4 Accounting standards and choice 10.3 Capital maintenance
10.4 Section summary
4 Other sources of financial reporting guidance
4.1 HK(IFRIC) Interpretations, Hong Kong 11 Recognition of the elements of financial
Interpretations and HK(SIC) Interpretations statements
4.2 Conceptual Framework for Financial 11.1 Probability of future economic benefits
Reporting (the Conceptual Framework) 11.2 Reliability of measurement
4.3 Accounting Guidelines and implementation 11.3 Recognition of items
guidance 12 Measurement of the elements of financial
4.4 Accounting Bulletins statements
5 Additional requirements for listed companies 13 Fair presentation and compliance with HKFRS
5.1 Companies listed on the Main Board 13.1 Extreme case disclosures
5.2 Companies listed on the Growth 13.2 Break-up basis accounts
Enterprise Market (GEM)
5.3 Acceptance of Mainland Accounting and 14 Management commentary
Auditing Standards 14.1 Purpose
14.2 Contents
6 Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants 15 Integrated reporting
6.1 Fundamental principles 15.1 Development of integrated reporting
6.2 Obligation to comply with the Code of 15.2 Drivers of integrated reporting
Ethics 15.3 Benefits of integrated reporting
6.3 Revision to Code of Ethics 15.4 Integrated reporting framework
7 Conceptual Framework and GAAP 16 Current developments
7.1 A conceptual framework 16.1 Conceptual Framework
7.2 Advantages and disadvantages of a 16.2 Other IASB projects
conceptual framework
7.3 Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
(GAAP) 27
Financial Reporting
Learning focus
The content of the HKICPA's Conceptual Framework is vital as it underpins all HKFRS. Both in
exams and in practice, when an accounting standard does not appear to provide guidance on
a particular topic, you may be required to fall back on the basic principles of the Conceptual
Framework.
Learning outcomes

Competency
level
Describe the financial reporting framework in Hong Kong and the related
implications for business activities
2.01 The role and setting of accounting standards 2
2.01.01 Understand the role of accounting standards
2.01.02 Understand the role of the HKICPA, Securities and Futures
Commission (SFC), Financial Reporting Council (FRC), the Hong
Kong Insurance Authority (HKIA), the Hong Kong Monetary
Authority (HKMA) and the Hong Kong Stock Exchange (HKEx)
2.02 Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards 2
2.02.01 Describe how Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards are set
2.05 Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants 3
2.05.01 Explain the requirements of the Code of Ethics for Professional
Accountants
2.06 Hong Kong (IFRIC) Interpretations, Hong Kong Interpretations 2
and Hong Kong (SIC) Interpretations
2.06.01 Describe the status of Hong Kong (IFRIC) Interpretations, Hong
Kong Interpretations and Hong Kong (SIC) Interpretations
2.07 Other professional pronouncements and exposure drafts 2
2.07.01 Identify other professional pronouncements and exposure drafts
relevant to the financial reporting Conceptual Framework
2.08 Regulatory bodies and their impact on accounting 2
2.08.01 Identify relevant regulatory bodies and their impact on accounting
2.09 Accounting principles and conceptual frameworks 2
2.09.01 Explain what is meant by a conceptual framework and GAAP
2.09.02 Identify the advantages and disadvantages of a conceptual
framework
2.09.03 Identify the components and requirements of the HKICPA's
2.09.04 Explain those requirements of HKAS 1 Presentation of Financial
Statements which overlap with the HKICPA's Conceptual
Framework
2.10 Integrated reporting 1
2.10.01 Describe the development of integrated reporting and sustainability
reporting in Hong Kong
2.10.02 Identify the current developments
2.11 Current developments 2
2.11.01 Identify areas of accounting in which current developments are
occurring
28
2: Financial reporting framework | Part B Financial reporting framework
1 Regulatory bodies and their impact on accounting

Topic highlights
The main regulatory bodies influencing accounting within Hong Kong are the Hong Kong Institute
of Certified Public Accountants (HKICPA), and for listed companies, the Hong Kong Stock
Exchange (HKEx). Other bodies include the Securities and Future Commissions (SFC), Financial
Reporting Council (FRC), the Hong Kong Insurance Authority (HKIA) and the Hong Kong Monetary
Authority (HKMA). Throughout this chapter we shall meet the regulations and requirements put in
place by these bodies, but first, a brief introduction to each.
1.1 The role of the Hong Kong Institute of CPAs (HKICPA)

The HKICPA issues HKFRS and non-mandatory guidance documents including Accounting
Guidelines and Accounting Bulletins.
The HKICPA is the only statutory accounting body in existence in Hong Kong responsible for the
establishment of accounting and auditing standards and guidelines, as well as for the
administration and regulation of the accounting profession in Hong Kong.
Pursuant to the Professional Accountants Ordinance (Chapter 50), the Council of the HKICPA (the
Council) may, in relation to the practice of accountancy, issue or specify any standards of
accounting practices required to be observed, maintained or otherwise applied by members of the
Hong Kong Institute of CPAs. In this respect, the objectives of the Council are to:
(a) develop, in the public interest, a single set of high quality, understandable and enforceable
accounting standards that require high quality, transparent and comparable information in
financial statements and other financial reporting to help participants in the capital markets
and other users of the information to make economic decisions
(b) promote the use and rigorous application of those standards
(c) promote, support and enforce compliance with those standards by members of the HKICPA
whether as preparers or auditors of financial information
(d) bring about convergence of accounting standards with International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS).
1.2 The role of the Stock Exchange of Hong Kong (SEHK) Ltd
The principal function of the SEHK is to provide a fair, orderly and efficient market for the trading of
securities, under the Stock Exchange Unification Ordinance.
To enhance the competitiveness of the Hong Kong securities market so as to meet the challenge of
an increasingly globalised market, there was a comprehensive market reform of the securities and
futures market in March 2000, under which the SEHK, the Hong Kong Futures Exchange Ltd
(HKFE) and the Hong Kong Securities Clearing Company Ltd (HKSCC) were amalgamated under
a holding company, Hong Kong Exchanges and Clearing Ltd (HKEx).
Currently, there are two established exchanges under the SEHK, the Main Board and the Growth
Enterprise Market (GEM) Board, on which companies are listed in Hong Kong.
Companies listed on the Main Board are required to comply with the Listing Rules whereas
companies listed on the GEM Board are required to comply with the GEM Rules.
The SEHK regulates the financial reporting compliance of listed companies through a Regulatory
Affairs Group and a GEM Department for companies listed on the Main Board and the GEM Board
respectively.
29
Financial Reporting
1.3 Securities and Futures Commission (SFC)

Topic highlights
The Securities and Futures Commission (SFC) is an independent non-governmental statutory body,
and is established by the Securities and Futures Commission Ordinance (SFCO). It is outside the
civil service, responsible for regulating the securities and futures markets in Hong Kong.
The SFC is responsible for administering the laws governing the securities and futures markets in
Hong Kong and facilitating and encouraging the development of these markets.
The statutory regulatory objectives as set out in the SFO are to:
 maintain and promote the fairness, efficiency, competitiveness, transparency and orderliness
of the securities and futures industry;
 promote understanding by the public of the operation and functioning of the securities and
futures industry;
 provide protection for members of the public investing in or holding financial products;
 minimise crime and misconduct in the securities and futures industry;
 reduce systemic risks in the securities and futures industry; and
 assist the Financial Secretary in maintaining the financial stability of Hong Kong by taking
appropriate steps in relation to the securities and futures industry.
In carrying out their mission, the SFC aims to ensure Hong Kong's continued success and
development as an international financial centre.
The SFC is divided into four operational divisions: Corporate Finance, Intermediaries and
Investment Products, Enforcement, and Supervision of Markets. The Commission is supported by
the Legal Services Division and Corporate Affairs Division.
1.3.1 Whom, what and how: SFC regulation
Areas of regulation Methods
Licensed corporations and  Set licensing standards to ensure that all practitioners are
individuals carrying out the fit and proper
following regulated activities:
 Approve licenses and maintain a public register of
 Dealing in securities licensees
 Dealing in futures contracts  Issue codes and guidelines to inform the industry of its
 Leveraged foreign exchange expected standard of conduct and set financial resources
trading requirement
 Advising on securities  Monitor licensees' financial soundness and compliance

with the Ordinance, codes, guidelines, rules and
 Advising on futures contracts regulations
 Advising on corporate  Handle misconduct complaints against licensees
finance
 Investigate and take action against misconduct
 Providing automated trading
services
 Securities margin financing
 Asset management
 Providing credit rating
services
30
Areas of regulation Methods
Investment products offered  Set standards for the authorisation and regulation of
to the public investment products
 Review and authorise investment products offered to the
public and their promotion (including advertisements and
marketing materials)
Listed companies  Approve changes to the Listing Rules
 Monitor announcements and vet listing application
materials under the Dual Filing regime
 Directly regulate takeovers, mergers and privatisations
under the Codes on Takeovers and Mergers and Share
Buy-backs
 Consider requests for exemptions from prospectus
requirements under the Companies Ordinance
 Carry out active surveillance of listed companies,
enquiring into their suspected prejudicial or fraudulent
transactions or provision of false or misleading
information; and performing risk-based reviews of
particular companies and broader thematic reviews of
activities which may signal corporate misconduct
Automated trading service  Grant licences or authorisations for the provision of ATS in
(ATS) providers Hong Kong
 Oversee the operations of ATS providers
Hong Kong Exchanges and  Oversee the performance of its role as the frontline
Clearing Limited (HKEx) regulator of listing related matters
 Approve the creation of new markets, new products and
changes to its rules and regulations
 Monitor HKEx's own compliance with the Listing Rules
 Monitor the trading of shares, options and futures on its
markets
Approved share registrars  Approve the Federation of Share Registrars as an
association whose members shall be approved share
registrars
 Require approved share registrars to comply with the
requirements of the Code of Conduct for Share Registrars
Investor Compensation  Recognise the ICC as an independent compensation
Company Limited (ICC) company
 Approve the rules and any amendment of rules of the ICC
 Require the ICC to prepare and regularly submit financial
statements, auditors' report and other documents to the
SFC
All participants in trading  Monitor unusual market movements and direct trade
activities suspension of related stocks to maintain an informed and
orderly market
 Investigate and take action against market misconduct
and other breaches of the law
31
Financial Reporting
1.4 Financial Reporting Council (FRC)

The FRC is an independent statutory body set up under the Financial Reporting Council Ordinance,
which was enacted on 13 July 2006. The FRC was established on 1 December 2006. It became
fully operational on 16 July 2007.
The role of the FRC is to:
 conduct independent investigations into possible auditing and reporting irregularities in
relation to listed entities;
 enquire into possible non-compliance with financial reporting requirements on the part of
listed entities;
 require listed entities to remove any non-compliance identified.
The FRC may initiate investigations into a possible relevant irregularity or enquiries upon receipt of
complaints or on its own initiative an enquiry into possible relevant non-compliance with financial
reporting requirements on the part of listed entities.
Relevant irregularity means an auditing or reporting irregularity. It is defined in section 4 of the
Financial Reporting Council Ordinance (the "FRC Ordinance").
Any auditing or reporting irregularity exists if an auditor in respect of the audit of the financial
statements of a listed entity or a reporting accountant in respect of the preparation of an
accountants' report required for a listing document:
(a) falsified or caused to be falsified a document;
(b) made a statement, in respect of a document, that was material and that he knew to be false
or did not believe to be true;
(c) has been negligent in the conduct of his profession;
(d) has been guilty of professional misconduct;
(e) did or omitted to do something that would reasonably be regarded as bringing or likely to
bring discredit upon the auditor or reporting accountant himself, the Hong Kong Institute of
Certified Public Accountants (HKICPA) or the accountancy profession;
(f) failed to comply with a professional standard, i.e. any (a) statement of professional ethics; or
(b) standard of accounting, auditing and assurance practices, as issued or specified by the
council of the HKICPA from time to time;
(g) failed to comply with the provisions of any bylaw or rule made or any direction lawfully given
by the council of the HKICPA.
A relevant non-compliance exists if a relevant financial report of a listed entity does not comply with
a relevant requirement. A relevant non-compliance is defined in section 5 of the Financial
Reporting Council Ordinance (the "FRC Ordinance").
A relevant requirement refers to accounting requirements as provided in:
 the Companies Ordinance;
 the standards of accounting practice issued or specified by the Council of the Hong Kong
Institute of Certified Public Accountants (i.e. the Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards);
 the International Financial Reporting Standards issued by the International Accounting
Standards Board;
 the Listing Rules;
 any generally acceptable accounting principles allowed for usage under the Listing Rules; or
 the relevant SFC Codes or guidelines.
32
Any person who possesses information and/or evidence which suggest that there are or may be
auditing and reporting irregularities or non-compliance with financial reporting requirements may
lodge a complaint with the FRC.
Any auditing or reporting irregularities identified by the FRC will be referred to the HKICPA for
follow-up action. Any non-compliance relevant to the Listing Rules will be referred to the Securities
and Futures Commission or The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited for follow-up action. The
FRC is not empowered to discipline or prosecute.
1.5 Hong Kong Insurance Authority (HKIA)

The Office of the Commissioner of Insurance (OCI) is the regulatory body set up for the
administration of the Insurance Companies Ordinance (Cap. 41) (ICO). The OCI was established
in June 1990. The Office is headed by the Commissioner of Insurance who has been appointed as
the Insurance Authority (IA) for administering the ICO.
The principal functions of the IA are to ensure that the interests of policy holders or potential policy
holders are protected and to promote the general stability of the insurance industry. The IA has the
following major duties and powers:
(a) Authorisation: Authorisation of insurers to carry on insurance business in or from Hong
Kong. The IA has set out the criteria for authorisation which include, among other things,
strong financial position, proper management, viable business plan and physical presence in
Hong Kong in order to ensure that an adequate level of security is provided to the insuring
public.
(b) Regulation of insurers: The regulatory objective of the IA is to ensure the financial
soundness and integrity of the insurance market. The primary duty is to ensure that insurers
conduct their activities in a prudent manner so that their obligations and policy holders'
expectations will be met. Other operational aspects, such as setting of premium rates and
policy terms and conditions, are largely left to self-regulation by the industry. Regulatory
work is done primarily through the examination of the annual audited financial statements
and business returns submitted by the insurers. Where causes for concern are identified in
respect of an insurer, the IA is empowered under the ICO to take interventionary actions for
protection of the interests of policy holders and potential policy holders.
(c) Regulation of insurance intermediaries: An insurance agent is required to be properly
appointed by an insurer and registered with the Insurance Agents Registration Board (IARB), in
accordance with the Code of Practice for the Administration of Insurance Agents issued by the
Hong Kong Federation of Insurers. Under this central registration system, the IARB provides
enquiry services to and handles complaints from the public relating to insurance agents.
An insurance broker may seek authorisation directly from the IA, or may apply to become a
member of an approved body of insurance brokers, in order to carry on insurance broking
business in or from Hong Kong. An approved body of insurance brokers is charged with the
responsibilities of ensuring that its members comply with the statutory requirements and that
the interests of policy holders and potential policy holders are properly protected. It also
provides enquiry services to and handles complaints from the public relating to its members.
An insurance broker who is directly authorised by the IA is subject to the same statutory
requirements as applicable to a member of an approved body of insurance brokers.
(d) Liaison with the insurance industry: The IA believes in consultation and has worked
closely with the representative bodies of the insurance industry in promoting self-regulation
by the industry with the aim of enhancing the protection of policy holders. As one of the self-
regulatory measures, the Insurance Claims Complaints Bureau (ICCB) was established in
1990. Any claimant who feels aggrieved that his claim under a personal policy is not fairly
treated may lodge a complaint with the ICCB. The ICCB is empowered to make an award of
up to $800,000 per case. The IA also reviews the guidelines and regulations developed
within the system regularly to ensure that they are keeping up with market developments and
provide adequate protection to the insuring public.
33
Financial Reporting
1.6 Hong Kong Monetary Authority (HKMA)

The Hong Kong Monetary Authority (HKMA) was established on 1 April 1993 by merging the Office
of the Exchange Fund with the Office of the Commissioner of Banking. Its main functions and
responsibilities are governed by the Exchange Fund Ordinance and the Banking Ordinance and it
reports to the Financial Secretary.
The HKMA is the government authority in Hong Kong responsible for maintaining monetary and
banking stability. Its main functions are:
 maintaining currency stability within the framework of the Linked Exchange Rate system
 promoting the stability and integrity of the financial system, including the banking system
 helping to maintain Hong Kong's status as an international financial centre, including the
maintenance and development of Hong Kong's financial infrastructure
 managing the Exchange Fund.
2 Financial reporting requirements under HKFRS

Topic highlights
The Companies Ordinance provides the legal requirements for companies.
The financial reporting regulations and requirements currently in place in Hong Kong applicable to
limited liability companies are derived from a number of sources, including those bodies mentioned
above. Some are mandatory and some are advisory.
Those sources which are mandatory include:
(a) Legal requirements set out in the Companies Ordinance.
(b) Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards (HKFRS, taken for the purpose of this Learning
Pack to include both HKAS and HKFRS) and HKAS Interpretations (HKAS-lnt) issued by the
Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants (Hong Kong Institute of CPAs).
(c) For companies listed in Hong Kong, the requirements set out in the Rules Governing the
Listing of Securities (the Listing Rules) and the Rules Governing the Listing of Securities on
the Growth Enterprise Market (the GEM Rules), both issued by The Stock Exchange of Hong
Kong Ltd (SEHK) pursuant to section 34 (1) of the Stock Exchanges Unification Ordinance
(Cap. 361).
Those sources which are advisory in nature include:
(a) Accounting Guidelines (AGs) issued by the Hong Kong Institute of CPAs.
(b) Accounting Bulletins (ABs) issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Committee (FASC)
of the Hong Kong Institute of CPAs.
(c) Pronouncements of the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), formerly known as
International Accounting Standards Committee (IASC), and leading national standard setting
bodies such as those from Australia, Canada, New Zealand, the United Kingdom and the
United States of America.
3 Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards

HKFRS set out recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure requirements dealing with
transactions and events that are important in general purpose financial statements.
34
HKFRS are the most authoritative source of accounting principles generally accepted in Hong
Kong (HK GAAP).
Although HKFRS do not have any statutory backing, their authority is ensured by the requirement
of the Hong Kong Institute of CPAs that they should be observed by its members involved (either
as preparers or as auditors) with financial statements intended to give a true and fair view, unless
there are justifiable reasons for a departure in very exceptional circumstances.
For the purpose of this Learning Pack, the terms accounting standards, Standards and
Interpretations, Hong Kong Accounting Standards and Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards
are used interchangeably and include all Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards (HKFRS),
Hong Kong Accounting Standards (HKAS) and HKAS Interpretations (HKAS-Int) approved by the
Council and currently in issue unless otherwise specified.
3.1 The setting of HKFRS and due process

Topic highlights
The Financial Reporting Standards Committee (FRSC) of HKICPA has a mandate to develop
financial reporting standards to achieve convergence with the International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS) issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).
Within this remit, the HKICPA Council permits the FRSC to work in whatever way it considers most
effective and efficient and this may include forming advisory subcommittees or other forms of
specialist advisory groups to give advice in preparing new and revised HKFRS. The process for the
development of an HKFRS normally involves the following steps:
(a) Identifying and reviewing all the issues associated with an Exposure Draft or a draft
Interpretation issued by the IASB for possible adoption in Hong Kong or any other topics and
considering the application of the Conceptual Framework to the issues, if needed.
(b) Studying pronouncements of the IASB and other standard-setting bodies and accepted
industry practices about the issues.
(c) Consulting the Standard Setting Steering Board of the HKICPA (SSSB) about the advisability
of adding the topic to the FRSC's agenda.
(d) Forming an advisory group to give advice to the FRSC on the project.
(e) Publishing for public comment a discussion document. (In the case of the IASB issuing a
discussion document, also issuing an invitation to comment in Hong Kong with an earlier
deadline than that imposed by the IASB, so as to allow the FRSC a reasonable time to
consider the comments before the Council makes a submission to the IASB.)
(f) Publishing for public comment an Exposure Draft or a draft Interpretation. (In the case of the
IASB issuing an Exposure Draft or a draft Interpretation, issuing an invitation to comment in
Hong Kong on that Exposure Draft or draft Interpretation with a request for comment before
the comment deadline imposed by the IASB so as to allow the FRSC a reasonable time to
consider the comments before the Council makes a submission to the IASB.)
(g) Publishing within an Exposure Draft a basis for conclusions.
(h) Considering all the comments received within the comment period on Discussion Papers and
Documents, Exposure Drafts and draft Interpretations and those received in response to the
Hong Kong invitation to comment on the IASB documents and, when appropriate, preparing
a comment letter to the IASB.
(i) Following publication of the finalised IFRS or Interpretation of IFRS, considering the changes
made, if any, by the IASB and adopting the finalised IFRS or Interpretation of IFRS in Hong
Kong with the same effective date.
35
Financial Reporting
(j) Approving a standard or an Interpretation, including those converged with the equivalent
IFRS or Interpretation of IFRS, by the Council.
(k) Publishing within a standard a basis for conclusions, if appropriate, explaining how the
conclusions were reached and giving background information that may help users of HKFRS
to apply them in practice or, in the case of a standard that is converged with IFRS, publishing
within the standard the IASB Basis for Conclusions with an explanation of the extent to which
the Council agrees with the IASB Basis for Conclusions so as to enable users to understand
any changes made to the IFRS.
3.2 Current Hong Kong FRS

HKFRS set out recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure requirements dealing with
transactions and events that are important in general purpose financial statements.
The following table shows the list of Hong Kong Accounting Standards in issue as at 30 April 2015:
Hong Kong Accounting Standards
HKAS 1
Presentation of Financial Statements
(Revised)
HKAS 2 Inventories
HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows
HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors
HKAS 10 Events After the Reporting Period
HKAS 11 Construction Contracts
HKAS 12 Income Taxes
HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment
HKAS 17 Leases
HKAS 18 Revenue
HKAS 19
Employee Benefits
(2011)
HKAS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance
HKAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates
HKAS 23
Borrowing Costs
(Revised)
HKAS 24
Related Party Disclosures
(Revised)
HKAS 26 Accounting and Reporting by Retirement Benefit Plans
HKAS 27
Separate Financial Statements
(2011)
HKAS 28
Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
(2011)
HKAS 29 Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies
HKAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation
HKAS 33 Earnings Per Share
HKAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting
36
Hong Kong Accounting Standards
HKAS 36 Impairment of Assets

HKAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
HKAS 38 Intangible Assets
HKAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement
HKAS 40 Investment Property
HKAS 41 Agriculture
HKFRS 1
First-time Adoption of Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards
(Revised)
HKFRS 2 Share-based Payment
HKFRS 3
Business Combinations
(Revised)
HKFRS 4 Insurance Contracts
HKFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations
HKFRS 6 Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources
HKFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures
HKFRS 8 Operating Segments
HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments
HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements
HKFRS 11 Joint Arrangements
HKFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement
HKFRS 14 Regulatory Deferral Accounts
HKFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers
HKFRS for
HKFRS for Private Entities
PEs
You need to keep yourself up to date with Hong Kong Accounting Standards as they are issued or
reviewed.
Various Exposure Drafts and Discussion Papers are currently at different stages within the HKFRS
process, and by the end of your financial reporting studies, you should know all the Standards,
Exposure Drafts and Discussion Papers.
3.3 Scope of HKFRS

Any limitation of the applicability of a specific HKFRS is made clear within that standard. HKFRS
are not intended to be applied to immaterial items, nor are they retrospective. Each individual
HKFRS lays out its scope at the beginning of the standard.
3.4 Accounting standards and choice

It is sometimes argued that companies should be given a choice in matters of financial reporting on
the grounds that accounting standards are detrimental to the quality of such reporting. There are
arguments on both sides.
37
Financial Reporting
In favour of accounting standards (both national and international), the following points can be
made:
(a) They reduce or eliminate confusing variations in the methods used to prepare accounts.
(b) They provide a focal point for debate and discussions about accounting practice.
(c) They oblige companies to disclose the accounting policies used in the preparation of
accounts.
(d) They are a less rigid alternative to enforcing conformity by means of legislation.
(e) They have obliged companies to disclose more accounting information than they would
otherwise have done if accounting standards did not exist, for example HKAS 33 Earnings
Per Share.
Many companies are reluctant to disclose information which is not required by national legislation.
However, the following arguments may be put forward against standardisation and in favour of
choice:
(a) A set of rules which give backing to one method of preparing accounts might be
inappropriate in some circumstances. For example, HKAS 16 on depreciation is
inappropriate for investment properties (properties not occupied by the entity but held solely
for investment), which are covered by HKAS 40 on investment property.
(b) Standards may be subject to lobbying or government pressure (in the case of national
standards). For example, in the USA, the accounting standard FAS 19 on the accounts of oil
and gas companies led to a powerful lobby of oil companies, which persuaded the SEC
(Securities and Exchange Commission) to step in. FAS 19 was then suspended.
(c) Many national standards are not based on a conceptual framework of accounting,
although HKFRS are.
(d) There may be a trend towards rigidity, and away from flexibility in applying the rules.
You should be able to discuss:
 Due process of the HKICPA
 Use and application of HKFRS
 Future work of the HKICPA
One of the competencies you are required to demonstrate is to recognise and apply the external
legal and professional framework and regulations to financial reporting. The information in this
chapter will give you knowledge to help you demonstrate this competence.
4 Other sources of financial reporting guidance

4.1 HK(IFRIC) Interpretations, Hong Kong Interpretations and
HK(SIC) Interpretations
As well as HKFRS, you will also see reference to HK(IFRIC) Interpretations. IFRICs are the
publications of the IFRS Interpretations Committee.
The IFRS Interpretations Committee is the interpretative body of the IASB. The mandate of the
Interpretations Committee is to review on a timely basis widespread accounting issues that have
arisen within the context of current IFRS and to provide authoritative guidance (IFRICs) on those
issues.
IFRICs and their predecessors SICs are adopted in Hong Kong as HK(IFRIC) Interpretations and
HK(SIC) Interpretations. A number of these interpretations are considered throughout this Learning
Pack.
38
4.2 Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting (the

Conceptual Framework)
The Conceptual Framework sets out the concepts underlying the preparation and presentation of
financial statements for external users. Its objectives are to:
(a) assist the Council in the development of future accounting standards and guidelines and in
its review of existing accounting standards and guidelines;
(b) assist preparers of financial statements in applying accounting standards and guidelines and
in dealing with topics that have yet to form the subject of an accounting standard or
guideline;
(c) assist auditors in forming an opinion as to whether financial statements conform with
accounting standards;
(d) assist users of financial statements in interpreting the information contained in financial
statements prepared in conformity with accounting standards and guidelines; and
(e) provide those who are interested in the work of the Council with information about its
approach to the formulation of accounting standards and guidelines.
The Conceptual Framework is discussed in more detail in sections 8 to 12 of this chapter.
4.3 Accounting Guidelines and implementation guidance

Accounting Guidelines (AGs) have effect as guidance statements and indicators of best practice.
They are persuasive in intent. Unlike HKFRS, AGs are not mandatory, but are consistent with the
purpose of HKFRS in that they help define accounting practice in the particular area or sector to
which they refer. Therefore, they should normally be followed, and members of the Hong Kong
Institute of CPAs should be prepared to explain departures if called upon to do so. Many AGs
issued previously have already been superseded with the publication of a new HKFRS which
addresses and sets out mandatory practice in relation to accounting issues which were previously
the subject of an AG. The AGs in issue at the time of publication are:
AG 1 Preparation and Presentation of Accounts from Incomplete Records
AG 5 Merger Accounting for Common Control Combinations
AG 7 Preparation of Pro Forma Financial Information for Inclusion in Investment Circulars
In a number of HKFRS, e.g. HKAS 39, guidance on implementing the standard is included, either
with the standard or in a separate document. The Preface to Hong Kong Financial Reporting
Standards has not clarified the status of this guidance. For the purpose of this Learning Pack, this
implementation guidance is considered as having the same status as the accounting guidelines.
(Implementation guidance is not the same as application guidance, which is often an integral part
of the HKFRS.)
4.4 Accounting Bulletins

Accounting Bulletins (ABs) are informative publications on subjects of topical interest and are
intended to assist members or to stimulate debate on important accounting issues. They do not
require the approval of the Council of the Hong Kong Institute of CPAs and they do not have the
same authority as either HKFRS or AGs.
There are currently three ABs in issue:
AB 1 Disclosure of Loans to Officers
AB 3 Guidance on Disclosure of Directors' Remuneration
AB 4 Guidance on the Determination of Realised Profits and Losses in the Context of Distribution
under the Hong Kong Companies Ordinance
39
Financial Reporting
5 Additional requirements for listed companies

Topic highlights
The SEHK requires listed companies to comply with its Listing Rules.
5.1 Companies listed on the Main Board

The disclosure requirements for companies listed on the Main Board, both in respect of annual
financial reporting and interim financial reporting, are set out in the Appendix 16 of the Listing
Rules.
Companies listed on the Main Board are required to send their annual reports and audited financial
statements to every member and other holders of their listed securities within three months after
the end of the reporting period, and not less than 21 days before the date of the annual general
meeting. Note that the three-month limit for the release of the annual report relates to annual
accounting periods ending on or after 31 December 2010. Prior to that the limit was four months.
The Listing Rules require certain financial information disclosures, other than those required by
HKFRS or the Companies Ordinance, which are normally presented in the notes to financial
statements. These disclosures include:
 analysis of the maturity profile of borrowings
 analysis of directors' remuneration by emolument bands; analysis of employees' emoluments
by emolument bands; pension schemes
 credit policy and aged analysis of accounts receivable; and aged analysis of accounts
payable
An entity which either meets the definition of a Financial Conglomerate or a Banking Company is
subject to some additional disclosure requirements under the Listing Rules.
The Main Board requirement for paid announcements was abolished on 25 June 2007. Main Board
issuers are required to publish their announcements on their own website as well as the HKEx
website.
Any Main Board issuer that does not have its own website will be in breach of the Listing Rules.
5.1.1 Interim reports
A company listed on the Main Board is required to issue an interim report for the first six months of
a financial year. This report must be published not later than two months after the end of that
interim period.
Interim reports should contain the following financial information:
 Statement of profit or loss or statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
 Balance sheet (statement of financial position).
 Cash flow statement (statement of cash flows).
 A statement of movements in equity other than those arising from capital transactions with
shareholders and distributions to shareholders.
 Comparative figures, accounting policies and other notes to the financial statements.
Interim reports should comply with the requirements of HKAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting, or for
companies reporting under international financial reporting standards, IAS 34.
The Listing Rules require that the interim reports should be reviewed by the entity's audit
committee or, where such a committee has not been formed, by the external auditors.
40
5.2 Companies listed on the Growth Enterprise Market (GEM)

The disclosure requirements for companies listed on the GEM, both in respect of annual financial
reporting and interim financial reporting, are principally set out in Chapter 18 Financial Information
of the GEM Rules.
Companies listed on the GEM are subject to tighter reporting requirements. For example, they are
required to publish annual reports within three months; and half-yearly reports and quarterly reports
within 45 days after the end of each relevant financial period.
The disclosure requirements for annual reporting under the GEM Rules are in many ways similar to
the Listing Rules though there are some specific disclosures which are only applicable under the
GEM Rules. For instance, companies listed on GEM are subject to the following additional
disclosure requirements:
(a) A comparison of actual business progress with business objectives stated in listing
documents (for a few reporting periods after the year of listing only).
(b) Extension of the disclosure of directors' emoluments by showing the amount of emoluments
by director on an anonymous basis.
(c) The interests (if any) of the sponsor, and its directors, employees and associates, and of the
interests of the management shareholders of the issuer.
(d) As regards the compliance with corporate governance disclosure, specification of work
undertaken by the audit committee and number of meetings held, and so on.
For companies listed on GEM, the principal means of information dissemination on GEM is
publication on the Internet website operated by the SEHK. Companies listed on GEM are not
generally required to issue paid announcements in the press.
A GEM issuer that does not have its own website will be in breach of the Listing Rules.
5.3 Acceptance of Mainland Accounting and Auditing Standards

In December 2010, the Hong Kong Stock Exchange issued its Consultation Conclusions on the
Acceptance of Mainland Accounting and Auditing Standards and Mainland Audit Firms for
Mainland Incorporated Companies Listed in Hong Kong. The amendments to the Listing Rules:
 allow Mainland incorporated issuers to prepare their financial statements using Mainland
accounting standards; and
 allow Mainland audit firms vetted, nominated and endorsed by the Ministry of Finance of
China and the China Securities Regulatory Commission to service these issuers using
Mainland auditing standards.
Both Hong Kong Auditing Standards and Mainland Auditing Standards are allowed for Mainland
incorporated companies listed in Hong Kong.
As a result of this change, it is expected that compliance costs will be reduced for Mainland
companies listed in Hong Kong and market efficiency increased.
6 Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants

Topic highlights
Members of the HKICPA are bound by its Code of Ethics.
Certified public accountants in business owe certain legal duties towards their employers.
Additionally, they have ethical duties towards the HKICPA. The Council of HKICPA requires
members of the Institute (and therefore certified public accountants) to comply with the Code of
Ethics for Professional Accountants (the Code). Apparent failures by certified public accountants to
41
Financial Reporting
comply with the Code are liable to be enquired into by the appropriate committee established under
the authority of the Institute, and disciplinary action may result. Disciplinary action may include an
order that the name of the certified public accountant be removed from the Institute's membership
register.
The Code of Ethics is likely to be taken into account when the work of a certified public accountant
is being considered in a court of law or in other contested situations.
6.1 Fundamental principles

All certified public accountants, whether in business or in public practice, are required to comply
with the following fundamental principles:
(a) Integrity: a certified public accountant should be straightforward and honest in all
professional and business relationships. Integrity also implies fair dealing and truthfulness.
In particular, section 110 of the Code of Ethics requires that a certified accountant should not
be associated with reports, returns, communications or other information where they believe
that the information: (1) contains a materially false or misleading statement; (2) contains
statements or information furnished recklessly; or (3) omits or obscures information required
to be included where such omission or obscurity would be misleading. A certified public
accountant should not be associated with such reports, returns, communications or other
information unless the certified public accountant provides a modified report in respect of the
above mentioned matters.
(b) Objectivity: a certified public accountant should not allow bias, conflict of interest or undue
influence of others to override professional or business judgments.
In particular, section 120 of the Code of Ethics requires that all certified public accountants
should not compromise their professional or business judgment because of bias, conflict of
interest or the undue influence of others. Relationships that bias or unduly influence the
professional judgment of the certified public accountant should be avoided.
A certified public accountant may be exposed to situations that may impair objectivity. It is,
however, impracticable to define and prescribe all such situations.
(c) Professional competence and due care: a certified public accountant has a continuing
duty to maintain professional knowledge and skill at the level required to ensure that a client
or employer receives competent professional service based on current developments in
practice, legislation and techniques. A certified public accountant should act diligently and in
accordance with applicable technical and professional standards when providing
professional services.
(d) Confidentiality: a certified public accountant should respect the confidentiality of information
acquired as a result of professional and business relationships and should not disclose any
such information to third parties without proper and specific authority unless there is a legal
or professional right or duty to disclose. Confidential information acquired as a result of
professional and business relationships should not be used for the personal advantage of
the certified public accountant or third parties.
(e) Professional behaviour: a certified public accountant should comply with relevant laws and
regulations and should avoid any action that discredits the profession.
Ethics in accounting is of utmost importance to accounting professionals and those who rely on
their services. Accounting professionals know that people who use their services, especially
decision makers using financial statements, expect them to be highly competent, reliable, and
objective. Those who work in the field of accounting must not only be well qualified but must also
possess a high degree of professional integrity. A professional's good reputation is one of his or her
most important assets.
There is a very fine line between acceptable accounting practice and management's deliberate
misrepresentation in the financial statements.
42
The financial statements must meet the following criteria:

(a) Technical compliance: a transaction must be recorded in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles (GAAP).
(b) Economic substance: the resulting financial statements must represent the economic
substance of the event that has occurred.
(c) Full disclosure and transparency: sufficient disclosure must be made so that the effects of
transactions are transparent to the reader of the financial statements.
Accounting plays a critical function in society. It affects human behaviour especially when pay or
compensation is impacted, and to deliberately mask the nature of accounting transactions could be
deemed as unethical behaviour.
Example: Shepherd Co.

The finance director of Shepherd Co., a CPA, has carried out the following actions in June 20X9:
(a) Employed his brother's cleaning company to clean Shepherd Co.'s offices every week
(b) Used information that he acquired while at work to recommend to his sister that she buys
shares in Shepherd Co.'s parent company
(c) Approved the monthly management accounts of the company by signing his name, even
though he had not looked at them.
Has the finance director contravened any of the fundamental principles of the Code of Ethics for
Professional Accountants?
Solution
(a) contravenes the principle of objectivity
(b) contravenes the principle of confidentiality
(c) contravenes the principle of integrity
6.2 Obligation to comply with the Code of Ethics

Professional accountants have obligations to comply with the Code of Ethics. Compliance is
monitored by employers and the HKICPA.
Disciplinary actions may be taken by HKICPA for non-compliance with the Code of Ethics,
including removal from the Institute's membership register.
6.3 Revision to Code of Ethics

The Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (the Code) was revised in 2010 so as to maintain
convergence with the revised Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants issued by the IESBA in
July 2009. The revisions clarify requirements for all professional accountants and significantly
strengthen the independence requirements of auditors. The revised Code came into effect from
1 January 2011.
In addition to the IESBA Code, the Hong Kong Code contains additional local requirements in
Part D, such as the Prevention of Bribery Ordinance. These form an integral part of the Code, and
members should ensure that they are aware of the additional requirements and comply with them.
Linkages to other modules
Ethics is also part of the syllabus for Module B Corporate Financing and Module C Business
Assurance.
43
Financial Reporting
7 Conceptual Framework and GAAP

Topic highlights
A conceptual framework is a statement of generally accepted theoretical principles which form
the frame of reference for financial reporting. There are advantages and disadvantages to having a
conceptual framework.
7.1 A conceptual framework

A conceptual framework is a statement of generally accepted theoretical principles which form
the frame of reference for financial reporting. In other words, a conceptual framework will form the
basis for determining which events should be accounted for, how they should be measured and
how they should be communicated to the user. It is used to aid the development of new accounting
standards and the evaluation of those already in existence, and although theoretical in nature, a
conceptual framework for financial reporting has highly practical final aims.
Where a conceptual framework does not exist, standards tend to be produced in a haphazard
fashion, generally in response to an accounting issue that has arisen. Inconsistencies and
contradictions may therefore appear and, in turn, ambiguity which affects the true and fair concept
of reporting. This ad hoc approach is avoided where a framework exists, and the specific rules
within standards are based on sound basic principles, so ensuring a consistency of approach.
Another problem with the lack of a conceptual framework has become apparent in the USA. The
large number of highly detailed standards produced by the Financial Accounting Standards
Board (FASB) has created a financial reporting environment governed by specific rules rather than
general principles. However, accounting scandals such as Enron in the US have exposed the
weaknesses of this approach.
7.2 Advantages and disadvantages of a conceptual framework

Advantages
(a) Standards do not have to be developed on a haphazard, reactive basis, concentrating
resources on combating a problem that has been identified in practice, rather than
developing a consistent suite of standards that cover all problems.
(b) The standard-setting process in many countries in the past has been subject to political
interference, where interested parties have tried to influence the setting of standards in their
favour. For example, pharmaceutical companies may argue for the costs of research and
development to be capitalised in all situations, regardless of the likely recoverability of the
cost. A standard-setter should be better able to stand firm against pressure, if standards can
be seen to be deriving from a published conceptual framework.
(c) In the past, some standards seem to have concentrated on the income statement (the
calculation of profit or loss), while others have concentrated on the statement of financial
position (the valuation of net assets).
Disadvantages
(a) Financial statements are drawn up to serve the interests of a variety of user groups, and it
is not clear that a single conceptual framework can be devised that will satisfy the
information needs of all users.
(b) It can be argued that different accounting statements should be drawn up to achieve different
purposes. For example inventory might be of most use when measured at marginal cost in a
decision-making statement, and at full absorption cost in a financial reporting statement.
(c) The experience in countries that have issued conceptual frameworks is that little notice is
taken of them by standard-setting bodies when deciding on new standards.
44
Prior to a review of the HKICPA's attempt to bring forth the conceptual framework, it is important to
consider the generally accepted accounting principles (or practice) or GAAP.
7.3 Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP)

GAAP signifies all the rules, from whatever source, which govern accounting.
In individual countries this is seen as a combination of:
 National company law
 National accounting standards
 Local stock exchange requirements
Although the above sources form the basis for the GAAP of individual countries, the effects of other
non-mandatory sources in a particular country are also included in the concept, such as:
 International Accounting Standards
 Statutory requirements in other countries
 Long-standing accounting practices in areas not subject to a standard
Unlike countries such as the USA, GAAP does not have any statutory dominance or meaning in
many countries, such as the UK. The term, if mentioned in legislation, is only to a limited extent.
There are different views of GAAP in different countries. One view, held in most of Europe, is that
GAAP is a dynamic concept with accounting practices constantly changing in response to
circumstances. The term applies to those practices which the accounting profession regards as
permissible and legitimate in the circumstances in which it has been applied.
However, not all the countries share the same view. In the USA, the equivalent of a "true and fair
view" is "fair presentation in accordance with GAAP". Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
are viewed as having "substantial authoritative support". The adoption of accounting principles that
do not have substantial authoritative support in the preparation of accounts is presumed to be
misleading or inaccurate.
The above leads to the effect that "new" or "different" accounting principles are not acceptable
unless they have been adopted by the mainstream accounting profession, usually the standard-
setting bodies and/or professional accountancy bodies.
A conceptual framework for financial reporting can be defined as an attempt to codify existing
GAAP in order to reappraise current accounting standards and to produce new standards.
7.3.1 Mandatory and advisory sources
In Hong Kong, there are both mandatory and advisory sources of generally accepted accounting
principles (GAAP).
Mandatory sources are the following:
(a) Companies Ordinance. Legal requirements include maintenance of accounting records,
content of financial statements, and audits of companies incorporated in Hong Kong. The
new Hong Kong Companies Ordinance was issued in 2012, is being enacted by subsidiary
legislation and will become effective during 2014. Further detail on some of the sections
relevant to Module A was provided in Chapter 1.
(b) Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards (HKFRS). The term HKFRS includes both
Standards (HKFRS and HKAS) and Interpretations (HK(IFRIC)-Ints, HK(SIC)-Ints, and
HK-Ints).
(i) Standards and Interpretations are developed by the Financial Accounting Standards
Committee of the Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants (HKICPA).
(ii) Standards and Interpretations are virtually identical to their international equivalents
(International Financial Reporting Standards) except for three Hong Kong
Interpretations (HK-Ints) which have been developed locally by the HKICPA.
45
Financial Reporting
(c) Listing Rules. The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited (SEHK) has adopted rules
governing the listing of securities on its Main Board (the Listing Rules) and on its Growth
Enterprise Market (the GEM Rules). These include some accounting and disclosure
requirements.
Other sources of GAAP
Hong Kong Accounting Standard 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and
Errors (HKAS 8, which is identical to IAS 8) states:
10. In the absence of a HKFRS that specifically applies to a transaction, other event or
condition, management shall use its judgment in developing and applying an accounting
policy that results in information that is:
(a) relevant to the economic decision-making needs of users; and
(b) reliable, in that the financial statements:
(i) represent faithfully the financial position, financial performance and cash flows
of the entity;
(ii) reflect the economic substance of transactions, other events and conditions,
and not merely the legal form;
(iii) are neutral, i.e. free from bias;
(iv) are prudent; and
(v) are complete in all material respects.
11. In making the judgment described in paragraph 10, management shall refer to, and
consider the applicability of, the following sources in descending order:
(a) the requirements and guidance in HKFRS dealing with similar and related issues; and
(b) the definitions, recognition criteria and measurement concepts for assets, liabilities,
income and expenses in the Conceptual Framework.
12. In making the judgment described in paragraph 10, management may also consider the
most recent pronouncements of other standard-setting bodies that use a similar conceptual
framework to develop accounting standards, other accounting literature* and accepted
industry practices, to the extent that these do not conflict with the sources in paragraph 11.
*In the context of Hong Kong, other accounting literature includes Accounting Guidelines and
Accounting Bulletins.
The Accounting Guidelines and Accounting Bulletins referred to in the footnote to paragraph 12 of
HKAS 8 (above) are "best practice" guidance documents that have been published by the HKICPA
to assist its members in applying HKFRS. Accounting Guidelines, and Industry Accounting
Guidelines, are persuasive in intent and, while not mandatory, should normally be followed.
Accounting Bulletins are intended to assist members of the HKICPA in dealing with accounting
issues and to stimulate debate on subjects of topical interest.
TechWatch is a monthly publication prepared by the HKICPA to alert HKICPA members to topics
and issues that impact on accountants and their working environment. It is intended for general
guidance only.
7.3.2 GAAP for Small and Medium-sized Entities
The HKICPA released its own Small and Medium-sized Entity Financial Reporting Framework and
Financial Reporting Standard (SME-FRF & FRS) in August 2005. The SME-FRF and FRS became
effective for optional use by a qualifying entity's first financial statements that cover a period
beginning on or after 1 January 2005. Entities that qualify include Hong Kong incorporated
companies that meet certain legal requirements and overseas companies that have no public
accountability, meet size requirements and where the owners agree to use the SME-FRF and FRS.
Those entities which do not meet the criteria to use the SME-FRF and FRS may be able to use the
HKFRS for Private Entities, issued in 2010. Both of these options are discussed in more detail in
the next chapter.
46
8 The HKICPA's Conceptual Framework

Topic highlights
The Conceptual Framework provides the basis for the development of HKFRS / HKAS.
In June 1997 the HKICPA produced a document, Framework for the Preparation and Presentation
of Financial Statements (the Framework). This is, in effect, the conceptual framework upon which
all HKFRS are based and hence it determines how financial statements are prepared and the
information they contain.
The Framework is currently being revised with the project taking place in several stages and
Exposure Drafts being issued as each progress stage approaches completion. The first
amendments to the Framework were issued in October 2010, and the HKICPA has decided to
amend the Framework on a piecemeal basis, so the revised parts of the Framework sit alongside
the old Framework. The Framework has been renamed the Conceptual Framework for Financial
Reporting.
The revised Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting consists of several sections or
chapters, following on after a preface and introduction. These chapters are as follows:
 The objective of general purpose financial reporting (issued October 2010)
 The reporting entity (not yet issued)
 Qualitative characteristics of useful financial information (issued October 2010)
 The Framework (1997): The Remaining Text
– Underlying assumption
– The elements of financial statements
– Recognition of the elements of financial statements
– Measurement of the elements of financial statements
– Concepts of capital and capital maintenance
Much of the content of the chapters is also included in HKAS 1 (revised), and covered in sections
10 to 12 of this chapter. As you read through them, think about the impact the Conceptual
Framework has had on HKFRS, particularly the definitions.
8.1 Preface
Financial statements are prepared and presented for external users worldwide, and although they
may appear similar, differences are caused by social, economic and legal circumstances.
The HKICPA wishes to narrow these differences by harmonising all aspects of financial
statements, including the regulations governing their accounting standards and their preparation
and presentation.
The HKICPA believes that financial statements prepared for the purpose of providing information
that is useful in making economic decisions meet the common needs of most users. The types of
economic decisions for which financial statements are likely to be used include the following:
 Decisions to buy, hold or sell equity investments
 Assessment of management stewardship and accountability
 Assessment of the entity's ability to pay employees
 Assessment of the security of amounts lent to the entity
 Determination of taxation policies
 Determination of distributable profits and dividends
 Inclusion in national income statistics
 Regulations of the activities of entities
47
Financial Reporting
Any additional requirements imposed by national governments for their own purposes should not
affect financial statements produced for the benefit of other users.
The Conceptual Framework recognises that financial statements can be prepared using a variety
of models. Although the most common is based on historical cost and a nominal unit of currency
(such as the Hong Kong dollar), the Conceptual Framework can be applied to financial statements
prepared under a range of models.
8.2 Introduction
The introduction to the Conceptual Framework lays out the purpose, status and scope of the
document. It then looks at different users of financial statements and their information needs.
8.3 Purpose and status

The introduction gives a list of the purposes of the Conceptual Framework.
(a) To give guidance to the Council of HKICPA in developing new financial reporting standards
and reviewing existing standards. Accounting standards will be more consistent and logical if
they are developed from an orderly set of concepts.
(b) To assist preparers of financial statements in applying HKFRS. The concepts guide
preparers in their broader fulfilment of GAAP.
(c) To assist auditors in forming an opinion as to whether financial statements conform with
HKFRS. An independent review by the auditor of the recognition and measurement
decisions by preparers relating to revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities in the financial
statements can be undertaken by reference to the details about primary elements.
(d) To assist users of financial statements in interpreting the information. The quality of
disclosures can be judged by users against the list of qualitative characteristics.
(e) To provide those who are interested in the work of the Council with information about its
approach to the formulation of HKFRS. The process of communication between the Council
of HKICPA and its constituents can be enhanced because the conceptual underpinnings of
proposed accounting standards will be more apparent.
The Conceptual Framework is not an HKFRS and so does not overrule any individual HKFRS. In a
limited number of cases there may be a conflict between an HKFRS and the Conceptual
Framework; here, the HKFRS will prevail. The number of such cases will diminish over time as
the Conceptual Framework is used as a guide in the production of new HKFRS. The Conceptual
Framework itself will be revised occasionally depending on the experience of the HKICPA in using
it.
8.4 Scope
The Conceptual Framework deals with the following:
(a) The objective of financial reporting.
(b) The qualitative characteristics of useful information.
(c) The definition, recognition and measurement of the elements from which financial
statements are constructed.
(d) Concepts of capital and capital maintenance.
The Conceptual Framework is concerned with "general purpose" financial statements (that is, a
normal set of annual statements), but it can be applied to other types of accounts. A complete set
of financial statements includes:
(a) a statement of financial position
(b) a statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
(c) a statement of changes in financial position (e.g. a statement of cash flows)
(d) notes, other statements and explanatory material
48
Supplementary information may be included, but some items are not included in the financial
statements themselves, namely commentaries and reports by the directors, the chairman,
management and so on.
All types of financial reporting entities are included whether commercial, industrial, business;
public or private sector.
Key term
A reporting entity is an entity for which there are users who rely on the financial statements as
their major source of financial information about the entity. (Conceptual Framework)
CF.OB5 8.5 Users and their information needs

Users of financial statements include investors, employees, lenders, suppliers and other trade
creditors, customers, government and their agencies and the public.
The Conceptual Framework places particular emphasis on existing and potential investors, lenders
and other creditors. It states that other users of financial statements may find general purpose
financial statements useful, however those reports are not primarily directed towards those other
groups.
Self-test question 1
What are the information needs of the users of financial information? Your answer should not be
restricted to the groups of users identified by the Conceptual Framework as the primary users.
(The answer is at the end of the chapter)
CF.OB2-12 8.6 The objective of financial statements

Topic highlights
The Conceptual Framework states that:
"The objective of general purpose financial reporting is to provide financial information about the
reporting entity that is useful to existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors in
making decisions about providing resources to the entity."
This section of the Conceptual Framework was amended in September 2010. As a result of the
amendments, there is a new emphasis on specific users of accounts, namely investors, potential
investors, lenders and creditors. They require information which is useful in making decisions about
buying, selling or holding equity and debt instruments, and providing or settling loans and other
forms of credit.
The type of information required by investors, creditors and lenders is that which provides an
indication of potential future net cash inflows. Such information includes that relating to:
 the resources of the entity
 claims against the entity
 how efficiently and effectively the management have used the entity’s resources, protected
the entity’s resources from the unfavourable effects of factors such as price changes and
ensured that the entity complies with applicable laws and regulations.
Most investors, creditors and lenders cannot require entities to provide information directly to them,
and therefore rely on general purpose financial statements. Although such financial statements do
include a large amount of information, the Conceptual Framework states that general purpose
financial statements do not and they cannot provide all of the information that investors, lenders
49
Financial Reporting
and other creditors need. Therefore, these users must also consider information from other
sources, such as general economic conditions and expectations, political events and political
climate, and industry and company outlooks.
This section of the Conceptual Framework also clarifies that:
 general purpose financial statements are not designed to show the value of an entity,
although information contained within them may aid a valuation
 the management of an entity need not rely on general purpose financial statements as they
can obtain necessary financial information internally
 other parties such as regulators and members of the public may also find general purpose
financial reports useful, however, these reports are not primarily directed to these groups.
8.7 Information about economic resources, claims and changes

in resources and claims
General purpose financial reports provide information about the financial position of a reporting
entity, which is information about:
 the entity’s economic resources, and
 claims against the reporting entity.
Financial reports also provide information about the effects of transactions and other events that
change a reporting entity’s economic resources and claims. Both types of information provide
useful input for decisions about providing resources to an entity.
CF.OB13-14 8.7.1 Economic resources and claims
Information about the nature and amounts of a reporting entity’s economic resources and claims
can help users to identify the reporting entity’s financial strengths and weaknesses. That
information can help users to assess:
 the reporting entity’s liquidity and solvency,
 its needs for additional financing, and
 how successful it is likely to be in obtaining that financing.
Information about priorities and payment requirements of existing claims helps users to predict how
future cash flows will be distributed among those with a claim against the reporting entity.
CF.OB15-21 8.7.2 Changes in economic resources and claims
Changes in a reporting entity’s economic resources and claims result from:
(a) an entity’s financial performance, and
(b) other events or transactions such as issuing debt or equity instruments.
To properly assess the prospects for future cash flows from the reporting entity, users need to be
able to distinguish between both of these changes.
8.8 The reporting entity

This section of the Conceptual Framework has not yet been issued. An Exposure Draft was issued
in 2010 in which a reporting entity is defined as follows:
"A reporting entity is a circumscribed area of economic activities whose financial information has
the potential to be useful to existing and potential equity investors, lenders, and other creditors
who cannot directly obtain the information they need in making decisions about providing
resources to the entity and in assessing whether the management and the governing board of
that entity have made efficient and effective use of the resources provided."
50
A reporting entity has three features:

(a) Economic activities of an entity are being conducted, have been conducted, or will be
conducted.
(b) Those economic activities can be objectively distinguished from those of other entities and
from the economic environment in which the entity exists.
(c) Financial information about the economic activities of that entity has the potential to be
useful in making decisions about providing resources to the entity and in assessing whether
the management and the governing board have made efficient and effective use of the
resources provided.
These features are necessary but not always sufficient to identify a reporting entity.
During the course of 2013 a discussion paper relating to all remaining phases of the Conceptual
Framework project, including ‘the reporting entity’ will be issued and the IASB aims to complete the
project by 2015.
9 Qualitative characteristics of financial information

Topic highlights
The Conceptual Framework states that qualitative characteristics are the attributes that make the
information provided in financial statements useful to existing and potential investors, lenders and
creditors. The two fundamental qualitative characteristics are relevance and faithful representation.
These are supported by four enhancing qualitative characteristics of comparability, verifiability,
timeliness and understandability.
This section of the Conceptual Framework was revised in September 2010 and as a result, two
fundamental and four enhancing qualitative characteristics replace the previous qualitative
characteristics of relevance, reliability, comparability and understandability.
The two fundamental qualitative characteristics are relevance and faithful representation; the four
enhancing characteristics are comparability, verifiability, timeliness and understandability.
If financial information is to be useful, it must be relevant and faithfully represent what it purports to
represent. The usefulness of financial information is enhanced if it is comparable, verifiable, timely
and understandable.
The revised Conceptual Framework states that the qualitative characteristics of useful financial
information apply not only to financial information provided in financial statements, but also to
financial information provided in other ways.
CF.QC5-16 9.1 Fundamental qualitative characteristics

The fundamental qualitative characteristics are relevance and faithful representation.
9.1.1 Relevance
Relevant financial information is capable of making a difference in the decisions made by users.
Information may be capable of making a difference in a decision even if some users choose not to
take advantage of it or are already aware of it from other sources. Financial information is capable
of making a difference in decisions if it has predictive value, confirmatory value or both. Financial
information has a confirmatory value if it confirms or changes previous evaluations.
Materiality
Materiality is related to relevance. Information is material if omitting it or misstating it could
influence decisions that users make on the basis of financial information about a specific reporting
entity. Materiality is an entity-specific aspect of relevance based on the nature or magnitude, or
both, of the items to which the information relates in the context of an individual entity’s financial
51
Financial Reporting
report. It is impossible to specify a quantitative threshold for materiality or predetermine what could
be material in a particular situation as it depends on the individual entity.
9.1.2 Faithful representation
To be useful, in addition to being relevant, financial information must also faithfully represent the
phenomena that it purports to represent. To be a perfectly faithful representation, a depiction would
have three characteristics – it would be complete, neutral and free from error.
Faithful representation does not mean accurate in all respects. Information that is complete means
all necessary information is included for the user to understand the item being depicted. Neutral
information is prepared without bias in the selection or presentation of the information. Free from
error means there are no errors or omissions in the description of the item, and the process used to
produce the reported information has been selected and applied with no errors in the process.
CF.QC17-18 9.1.3 Application of the fundamental qualitative characteristics
Useful information must be both relevant and faithfully represented; neither a faithful representation
of an irrelevant phenomenon nor an unfaithful representation of a relevant phenomenon helps
users to make good decisions.
The most efficient and effective process for applying the fundamental qualitative characteristics
would usually be as follows:
(a) Identify an economic phenomenon that has the potential to be useful to users of an entity’s
financial information.
(b) Identify the type of information about that phenomenon that would be most relevant, if
available and can be faithfully represented.
(c) Determine whether that information is available and can be faithfully represented.
(d) If so, the process of satisfying the fundamental qualitative characteristics ends; if not, the
process is repeated with the next most relevant type of information.
CF.QC19-32 9.2 Enhancing qualitative characteristics

Comparability, verifiability, timeliness and understandability are qualitative characteristics that
enhance the usefulness of information that is relevant and faithfully represented.
9.2.1 Comparability
Users' decisions involve choosing between alternatives, for example, selling or holding an
investment, or investing in one reporting entity or another. Consequently, information about a
reporting entity is more useful if it can be compared with similar information about other entities and
with similar information about the same entity for another period or another date.
Comparability is the qualitative characteristic that enables users to identify and understand
similarities in, and differences among, items. Unlike the other qualitative characteristics,
comparability does not relate to a single item. A comparison requires at least two items.
Consistency, although related to comparability, is not the same. Consistency refers to the use of
the same methods for the same items, either from period to period within a reporting entity or in a
single period across entities. Comparability is the goal; consistency helps to achieve that goal.
9.2.2 Verifiability
Verifiability helps assure users that information faithfully represents the economic phenomena it
purports to represent. Verifiability means that different knowledgeable and independent observers
could reach consensus, although not necessarily complete agreement, that a particular depiction is
a faithful representation.
Verification can be direct or indirect. Direct verification means verifying an amount through direct
observation, for example, by counting cash. Indirect verification means checking the inputs to a
model, formula or other technique and recalculating the outputs using the same methodology.
52
9.2.3 Timeliness
Timeliness means having information available to decision-makers in time to be capable of
influencing their decisions. Generally, the older the information is the less useful it is. However,
some information may continue to be timely long after the end of a reporting period because, for
example, some users may need to identify and assess trends.
9.2.4 Understandability
Classifying, characterising and presenting information clearly and concisely makes it
understandable.
Some transactions are inherently complex and cannot be made easy to understand. While
excluding information about those transactions from financial reports might make the information in
those financial reports easier to understand, this may mean that information would be incomplete
and therefore potentially misleading.
The revised Conceptual Framework states that financial reports are prepared for users who have a
reasonable knowledge of business and economic activities and who review and analyse the
information diligently. At times, even the well-informed, diligent users may need to seek the aid of
an adviser to understand information about complex economic phenomena.
CF.QC33-34 9.2.5 Application of the enhancing qualitative characteristics
Enhancing qualitative characteristics should be maximised to the extent possible. However, the
enhancing qualitative characteristics, either individually or as a group, cannot make information
useful if that information is irrelevant or not faithfully represented.
CF.QC35-39 9.3 The cost constraint on useful financial reporting

Cost is a constraint on the information that can be provided by financial reporting. Reporting
financial information imposes costs, and it is important that those costs are justified by the benefits
of reporting that information. There are several types of costs and benefits to consider.
Providers of financial information expend most of the effort involved in collecting, processing,
verifying and disseminating financial information, but users ultimately bear those costs in the form
of reduced returns. Users of financial information also incur costs of analysing and interpreting the
information provided. If needed information is not provided, users incur additional costs to obtain
that information elsewhere or to estimate it.
Reporting financial information that is relevant and faithfully represents what it purports to represent
helps users to make decisions with more confidence.
CF.4.1 9.4 Underlying assumption

The Conceptual Framework identifies going concern as an underlying assumption in preparing
The financial statements are normally prepared on the assumption that an entity is a going concern
and will continue in operation for the foreseeable future. Hence, it is assumed that the entity has
neither the intention nor the need to liquidate or curtail materially the scale of its operations; if such
an intention or need exists, the financial statements may have to be prepared on a different basis
and, if so, the basis used is disclosed.
53
Financial Reporting
The qualitative characteristics of financial information in the Conceptual Framework for Financial
Reporting are comparability, faithful representation, relevance, timeliness, understandability and
verifiability.
Required
Explain the meaning of these characteristics in the context of financial reporting, providing
examples of how they are or are not applied to different accounting standards.
10 The elements of financial statements

Topic highlights
Transactions and other events are grouped together in broad classes according to their economic
characteristics. These broad classes are the elements of financial statements: assets, liabilities,
equity, income and expenses.
This chapter of the Conceptual Framework is taken from the 1997 Framework. It lays out these
elements as follows:
Elements of
Measurement of financial Measurement of performance

position in the statement in the statement of profit or
of financial position loss and other comprehensive
income
n Assets n Income
n Liabilities n Expenses
n Equity
A process of sub-classification then takes place for presentation in the financial statements, e.g.
assets are classified by their nature or function in the business to show information in the best way
for users to take economic decisions.
CF.4.4 – 4.7 10.1 Financial position

The elements related to the measurement of financial position are assets, liabilities and equity.
Key terms
 Asset. A resource controlled by an entity as a result of past events and from which future
economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity.
 Liability. A present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is
expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources embodying economic benefits.
 Equity. The residual interest in the assets of the entity after deducting all its liabilities.
(Conceptual Framework)
These definitions are important, but they do not cover the criteria for recognition of any of these
items, which are discussed in the next section of this chapter. This means that the definitions may
include items which would not actually be recognised in the statement of financial position because
54
they fail to satisfy recognition criteria particularly, as we will see below, the probable flow of any
economic benefit to or from the business.
Whether an item satisfies any of the definitions above will depend on the substance and
economic reality of the transaction, not merely its legal form. For example, consider finance
leases (see Chapter 9).
CF.4.8-4.14 10.1.1 Assets
Key term
Future economic benefit. The potential to contribute, directly or indirectly, to the flow of cash and
cash equivalents to the entity. The potential may be a productive one that is part of the operating
activities of the entity. It may also take the form of convertibility into cash or cash equivalents or a
capability to reduce cash outflows, such as when an alternative manufacturing process lowers the
cost of production. (Conceptual Framework)
Assets are usually employed to produce goods or services for customers; customers will then pay
for these and so contribute to the cash flow of the entity.
The existence of an asset is not reliant on:
 physical form or
 legal ownership
Non-physical items such as patents are assets provided that they are controlled and provide
probable future economic benefits; similarly non-owned items, such as machinery obtained under a
finance lease are assets, provided that they are controlled and provide probable future economic
benefits.
Transactions or events in the past give rise to assets; those expected to occur in the future do not
in themselves give rise to assets. For example, an intention to purchase a non-current asset does
not, in itself, meet the definition of an asset.
CF.4.15-4.18 10.1.2 Liabilities
An essential characteristic of a liability is that the entity has a present obligation.
Key term
Obligation. A duty or responsibility to act or perform in a certain way. Obligations may be legally
enforceable as a consequence of a binding contract or statutory requirement. Obligations also
arise, however, from normal business practice, custom and a desire to maintain good business
relations or act in an equitable manner. (Conceptual Framework)
It is important to distinguish between a present obligation and a future commitment. A

management decision to purchase assets in the future does not, in itself, give rise to a present
obligation.
Settlement of a present obligation will involve the entity giving up resources embodying economic
benefits in order to satisfy the claim of the other party. This may be done in various ways, not just
by payment of cash.
Liabilities must arise from past transactions or events. In the case of, say, recognition of future
rebates to customers based on annual purchases, the sale of goods in the past is the transaction
that gives rise to the liability.
CF.4.19 10.1.3 Provisions
Some liabilities can be measured only with a degree of estimation for example payments to be
made under existing warranties. These liabilities are known as provisions.
55
Financial Reporting
Key term
Provision. A present obligation which satisfies the rest of the definition of a liability, even if the
amount of the obligation has to be estimated. (Conceptual Framework)
Trainton Peach Co (TP) has recently acquired another company, Luton Sound (LS), in order to
access specific know how, TP has incurred a high level of external consultancy fees and spent a
large proportion of internal finance department time (and so cost) on the acquisition. The
Managing Director of TP has asked you, the Group Finance Manager, to capitalise the external
costs and a proportion of the internal costs and amortise them over the same period as goodwill on
the acquisition. The Managing Director’s rationale for the request is that this treatment should make
the financial statements more relevant.
Required
Prepare notes in reply to the Managing Director.
CF.4.20-4.23 10.1.4 Equity

Equity is defined above as a residual, but it may be sub-classified in the statement of financial
position. This is relevant to the decision-making needs of the users as it will indicate legal or other
restrictions on the ability of the entity to distribute or otherwise apply its equity. Some reserves are
required by statute or other law, e.g. for the future protection of creditors. The amount shown for
equity depends on the measurement of assets and liabilities. It has nothing to do with the
market value of the entity's shares.
CF.4.24-4.28 10.2 Performance

Profit is used as a measure of performance, or as a basis for other measures (e.g. earnings per
share).
It depends directly on the measurement of income and expenses, which in turn depend (in part) on
the concepts of capital and capital maintenance adopted.
The elements of income and expense are therefore defined.
Key terms
 Income. Increases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of inflows or
enhancements of assets or decreases of liabilities that result in increases in equity, other than
those relating to contributions from equity participants.
 Expenses. Decreases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of
outflows or depletions of assets or incurrences of liabilities that result in decreases in equity,
other than those relating to distributions to equity participants. (Conceptual Framework)
Income and expenses can be presented in different ways in the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income, to provide information relevant for economic decision-making. For
example, distinguish between income and expenses which relate to continuing operations and
those which do not.
Items of income and expense can be distinguished from each other or combined with each other.
56
CF.4.29-4.32 10.2.1 Income

Both revenue and gains are included in the definition of income. Revenue arises in the course of
ordinary activities of an entity and may be referred to by names including sales, fees, interest,
dividends rent or royalties.
Key term
Gains. Increases in economic benefits. As such they are no different in nature from revenue.
(Conceptual Framework)
Gains include those arising on the disposal of non-current assets. The definition of income also
includes unrealised gains, for example, on revaluation of marketable securities.
CF.4.33-4.35 10.2.2 Expenses
As with income, the definition of expenses includes losses as well as those expenses that arise in
the course of ordinary activities of an entity.
Key term
Losses. Decreases in economic benefits. As such they are no different in nature from other
expenses. (Conceptual Framework)
Losses will include those arising on the disposal of non-current assets. The definition of expenses
will also include unrealised losses, for example, exchange rate effects on borrowings.
10.3 Capital maintenance

Capital maintenance refers to the concept that profits can only be made when the capital of an
organisation is restored to, or maintained at the level that it was at the start of an accounting
period. The concept is commonly separated into two types: physical and financial capital
maintenance.
Under the physical capital maintenance concept, a profit is earned only when the operating
capability of an organisation at the end of a period exceeds the operating capability at the start of
the period.
Under the financial capital maintenance concept, a profit is earned when the money value of net
assets at the end of a period exceeds their money value at the start of the period.
CF.4.36 10.3.1 Capital maintenance adjustments
A revaluation gives rise to an increase or decrease in equity.
Key term
Revaluation. Restatement of assets and liabilities. (Conceptual Framework)
These increases and decreases meet the definitions of income and expenses. They are not
included in the statement of profit or loss under certain concepts of capital maintenance, however,
but rather in equity.

Make sure you learn the important definitions.
 Financial position:
– Assets
– Liabilities
– Equity
57
Financial Reporting
 Financial performance:
– Income
– Expenses
11 Recognition of the elements of financial

CF.4.37-4.39
statements
Topic highlights
Items which meet the definition of assets or liabilities may still not be recognised in financial
statements because they must also meet certain recognition criteria.
Key term
Recognition. The process of incorporating in the statement of financial position or statement of
profit or loss and other comprehensive income an item that meets the definition of an element and
satisfies the following criteria for recognition:
(a) It is probable that any future economic benefit associated with the item will flow to or from the
entity.
(b) The item has a cost or value that can be measured with reliability. (Conceptual Framework)
Regard must be given to materiality (see above).

CF.4.40
11.1 Probability of future economic benefits
Probability here means the degree of uncertainty that the future economic benefits associated
with an item will flow to or from the entity. This must be judged on the basis of the characteristics
of the entity's environment and the evidence available when the financial statements are
prepared.
CF.4.41-4.43 11.2 Reliability of measurement

The cost or value of an item, in many cases, must be estimated. The Conceptual Framework
states, however, that the use of reasonable estimates is an essential part of the preparation of
financial statements and does not undermine their reliability. Where no reasonable estimate can be
made, the item should not be recognised, although its existence should be disclosed in the notes,
or other explanatory material.
Items may still qualify for recognition at a later date due to changes in circumstances or
subsequent events.
CF.4.44-4.53 11.3 Recognition of items

We can summarise the recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, income and expenses, based on
the definition of recognition given above.
Statement of financial position
 An asset is recognised when it is probable that the future economic benefits will flow to the
entity and the asset has a cost or value that can be measured reliably.
 A liability is recognised when it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying
economic benefits will result from the settlement of a present obligation and the amount at
which the settlement will take place can be measured reliably.
58
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income

 Income is recognised when an increase in future economic benefits related to an increase in
an asset or a decrease of a liability has arisen that can be measured reliably.
 An expense is recognised when a decrease in future economic benefits related to a
decrease in an asset or an increase of a liability has arisen that can be measured reliably.
12 Measurement of the elements of financial

CF.4.54-4.56 statements
Topic highlights
A number of different measurement bases are used in financial statements. They include:
 historical cost
 current cost
 realisable (settlement) value
 present value of future cash flows
Key term
Measurement. The process of determining the monetary amounts at which the elements of the
financial statements are to be recognised and carried in the statement of financial position and
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. (Conceptual Framework)
This involves the selection of a particular basis of measurement. A number of these are used to
different degrees and in varying combinations in financial statements. They include the following:
Key terms
Historical cost. Assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair
value of the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition. Liabilities are
recorded at the amount of proceeds received in exchange for the obligation, or in some
circumstances (for example, income taxes), at the amounts of cash or cash equivalents expected
to be paid to satisfy the liability in the normal course of business.
Current cost. Assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash equivalents that would have to be
paid if the same or an equivalent asset was acquired currently.
Liabilities are carried at the undiscounted amount of cash or cash equivalents that would be
required to settle the obligation currently.
Realisable (settlement) value.
 Realisable value. The amount of cash or cash equivalents that could currently be obtained by
selling an asset in an orderly disposal.
 Settlement value. The undiscounted amounts of cash or cash equivalents expected to be
paid to satisfy the liabilities in the normal course of business.
Present value. The present discounted value of the future net cash flows in the normal course of
business. (Conceptual Framework)
Historical cost is the most commonly adopted measurement basis, but this is usually combined
with other bases, e.g. inventory is carried at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
59
Financial Reporting
13 Fair presentation and compliance with HKFRS

Topic highlights
Compliance with HKFRS is presumed to result in financial statements that achieve a fair
HKAS presentation.
1.15,16,18-20
Most importantly, financial statements should present a true and fair view of the financial position,
financial performance and cash flows of an entity. Compliance with HKFRS is presumed to result
in financial statements that achieve a fair presentation and true and fair view.
The following points made by HKAS 1 expand on this principle:
(a) Financial statements should be prepared using the accrual basis, i.e. income and expenses
are recognised as they arise rather than when the related cash is received or paid.
(b) Financial statements should be prepared on a going concern basis unless it is planned for
the entity to cease trading.
(c) Compliance with HKFRS should be disclosed.
(d) All relevant HKFRS must be followed if compliance with HKFRS is disclosed.
(e) Use of an inappropriate accounting treatment cannot be rectified either by disclosure of
accounting policies or notes/explanatory material.
There may be (very rare) circumstances when management decides that compliance with a
requirement of an HKFRS would be misleading. Departure from the HKFRS is therefore required
to achieve a fair presentation.
The following should be disclosed in such an event:
(a) Management confirmation that the financial statements fairly present the entity's financial
position, performance and cash flows.
(b) Statement that all HKFRS have been complied with except departure from one HKFRS to
achieve a fair presentation.
(c) Details of the nature of the departure, why the HKFRS treatment would be misleading, and
the treatment adopted.
(d) Financial impact of the departure.
This is usually referred to as the "true and fair override".
HKAS 13.1 Extreme case disclosures

1.17,23
In very rare circumstances, management may conclude that compliance with a requirement in a
standard or interpretation may be so misleading that it would conflict with the objective of
financial statements set out in the Conceptual Framework, but the relevant regulatory framework
prohibits departure from the requirements.
In such cases the entity needs to reduce the perceived misleading aspects of compliance by
disclosing:
(a) the title of the standard, the nature of the requirement and the reason why management has
reached its conclusion.
(b) for each period, the adjustment to each item in the financial statements that would be
necessary to achieve fair presentation.
60
HKAS 1 states what is required for a fair presentation:

(a) Selection and application of accounting policies.
(b) Presentation of information in a manner which provides relevant, reliable, comparable and
understandable information.
(c) Additional disclosures where required.
HKAS 13.2 Break-up basis accounts

1.25,26
HKAS 1 requires that, when preparing financial statements, management should assess the ability
of an entity to continue as a going concern.
Financial statements should be prepared on a going concern basis unless management either
intends to liquidate the entity or to cease trading, or has no realistic alternative but to do so.
In assessing whether an entity is a going concern, management must take into account all
available information about the future, being at least 12 months from the end of the reporting
period. They may consider current and expected profitability, debt repayment schedules and
potential sources of replacement financing.
Where an entity is not a going concern, the financial statements are prepared on a basis other than
that of a going concern, most commonly the break-up basis.
13.2.1 Content of break-up basis accounts
The term break-up basis is not defined in accounting standards and may be interpreted differently
by different people.
If the accounts are prepared on a basis other than that of a going concern, it does not automatically
mean that all assets are written down to their scrap value, nor that provision is made for all the
costs of winding up the business. All of the normal rules of accounting still apply, other than that of
going concern. The recognition, measurement and presentation of assets and liabilities will be
affected as follows.
Assets
(a) Non-current assets should be assessed for impairment, and written down to their
recoverable amount if this is less than their carrying amount.
As we shall see later in the Learning Pack, recoverable amount is the higher of net realisable
value and value in use.
 Realisable value was defined in section 12 as the amount of cash or cash equivalents
that could currently be obtained by selling the asset.
 Value in use is the present value of the future cash flows associated with the asset.
It should be remembered that the value in use is likely to be lower than previously expected
since the time frame for use will be shorter than if the company were a going concern.
Therefore, realisable value will often be taken as the recoverable amount.
(b) In addition, inventories will continue to be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable
value, however when an entity is not a going concern, it becomes more likely that cost will
exceed net realisable value.
(c) Amounts receivable are stated at their realisable value i.e. the cash expected to be
recovered. Practically this will be equal to gross receivables net of irrecoverable debts and
an allowance for receivables as usual, however in the context of a company which is not a
going concern the identification of irrecoverable debts and calculation of an allowance may
require additional consideration.
(d) Monetary items, such as cash are stated at their face value.
61
Financial Reporting
(e) It is sometimes said that all non-current assets should be reclassified as current assets in
break-up basis accounts. This would only be the case, however, if their use had changed.
If they were still held for use within the business (if only for a short time) then they are still
non-current assets.
Liabilities
(a) Liabilities are normally only recognised where an obligation exists at the reporting date and
the normal rules in HKAS 37 have been met. Therefore, legal and other costs related to an
insolvency are only recognised when incurred.
(b) Some non-current liabilities will be reclassified as current. A common example of this is
where the company is in breach of loan covenants at the year end meaning that the loan
facility will be withdrawn and so repayment is required in the short term.
13.2.2 Disclosure
When management is aware of material uncertainties related to events or conditions that may cast
significant doubt upon an entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, the entity should disclose
those uncertainties.
Where an entity does not prepare financial statements on a going concern basis, it must disclose
that fact together with the basis on which it prepared the financial statements and the reason why
the entity is not regarded as a going concern.
14 Management commentary
A management commentary (known as management discussion and analysis in Hong Kong) is a
narrative report that accompanies financial statements as part of an entity's financial reporting.
It explains the main trends and factors underlying the development, performance and position of the
entity's business during the period covered by the financial statements. It also explains the main
trends and factors that are likely to affect the entity's future development, performance and position.
An IFRS Practice Statement was issued on Management Commentary in December 2010. This is
a broad, non-binding framework for the presentation of narrative reporting to accompany financial
statements prepared in accordance with IFRS.
The Practice Statement is not an IFRS. Therefore, entities applying IFRS are not required to
comply with the Practice Statement, unless specifically required by their jurisdiction.
14.1 Purpose
The purpose of management commentary is to help investors to:
(a) interpret and assess the related financial statements in the context of the environment in
which the entity operates.
(b) assess what management views as the most important issues facing the entity and how it
intends to manage those issues.
(c) assess the strategies adopted by the entity and the potential for those strategies to succeed.
14.2 Contents
A number of principles and qualitative characteristics should underlie the preparation and
presentation of the management commentary.
In particular, the management commentary should:
 supplement and complement financial statement information.
 provide an analysis of the entity through the eyes of management.
 have an orientation to the future.
62
 possess the fundamental characteristics of relevance and faithful representation and

maximise the enhancing characteristics of comparability, verifiability, timeliness and
understandability.
15 Integrated reporting
In recent years users of financial statements have become increasingly interested not only in the
financial performance of a company, but also in the social, environmental and ethical performance.
Understanding a company's approach to corporate social responsibility is relevant to these
users because they want assurance that the company that they have invested in or have dealings
with complies with legal requirements, ethical standards and other international norms.
Furthermore, investors and other parties increasingly expect companies to actively engage in
actions that have a positive impact on the environment, consumers, communities, employees and
other stakeholders.
Integrated reporting is the latest development in corporate social responsibility reporting.
15.1 Development of integrated reporting

Initially reporting on corporate social responsibility took the form of environmental and social
reports.
 Environmental reports detail the effect, both positive and negative, on the environment of a
company's operations, such as levels of waste and pollution, and recycling levels.
 Social reports detail the impact of a business on society, for example through social
networks, the effect of business methods on health and human rights and employment
policies.
More recently the concept of social and environmental reporting expanded to form sustainability
reporting. This incorporates the wider issue of sustainability in an environmental, social and ethical
context. It addresses the issue of whether a business can meet the needs of the present world
without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. For example, a
company which uses renewable energy or recycled products is contributing to environmental
sustainability.
15.1.1 Sustainability reporting in Hong Kong
In August 2012, the HKEx issued its Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) Reporting
Guide and announced that it would make sustainability reporting 'recommended best practice' for
listed companies for reporting periods ending on or after 31 December 2012. Companies following
the Guide provide disclosures on workplace quality, environmental protection, operating practices
and community involvement.
Subject to consultation, the HKEx is likely to increase the obligation level of certain ESG
disclosures to 'comply or explain' during 2015. As a result, any companies that don’t prepare
sustainability reports would have to explain to the exchange why not. HKEx encourages companies
to adopt internationally recognized ESG reporting guidelines such as the guidelines published by
the Global Reporting Initiative. HKEx’s ESG reporting standard may become more robust and
scope for reporting may expand in the future.
The HKEx recommends that listed companies provide a sustainability report within their annual
reports.
Required
Explain the benefits to an organisation of providing a sustainability report within its annual report.
63
Financial Reporting
15.1.2 More recent developments

The most recent development in corporate social responsibility reporting is the emergence of
integrated reporting. This links environmental, social and sustainability issues to financial strategy
and results. It is sometimes referred to as 'triple bottom line reporting' i.e. reporting on 'profit, the
planet and people' (financial, environmental and social issues).
An integrated report is described by the International Integrated Reporting Council (the IIRC) as 'a
concise communication about how an organisation's strategy, governance, performance and
prospects, in the context of its external environment, leads to the creation of value in the short,
medium and long term'.
15.2 Drivers of integrated reporting

Demand from stakeholders has accelerated the development of integrated reporting. In particular,
stakeholders are concerned with how a business is operating in a sustainable way. There are three
key reasons for this:
(1) Social, environmental and ethical considerations are a key part of the investment decision for
many investors, with ethical investment growing in popularity.
(2) The ethical performance of a company also impacts on business relationships; for example,
a reporting entity may not wish to be associated with a supplier whose ethical stance does
not fit with its own.
(3) Environmental and ethical issues in particular represent a source of risk to a company with
possible financial implications.
15.3 Benefits of integrated reporting

Integrated reporting has benefits for both the reporting entity and investors. From the reporting
entity's perspective, integrated reporting provides a reporting environment that is conducive to
understanding and implementing their strategy. This helps to drive internal performance and attract
capital. Specific benefits include:
 Better stakeholder relations
 Lower operational and strategic risk
 Enhanced reputation and a stronger brand
 Customer loyalty
 Improved access to capital at a lower cost
 Reduced regulatory intervention
 New business opportunities
 Opportunities for business alliances
From an investor's perspective, integrated reporting makes the connections between strategy,
governance, performance and prospects and as a result investors can assess more effectively the
combined impact of diverse factors.
15.4 Integrated reporting framework

The IIRC issued the Integrated Reporting Framework (the <IR> Framework) in December 2013,
with the intention that this is used to accelerate the adoption of integrated reporting globally.
Currently integrated reporting is adopted by certain entities on a voluntary basis. Most of those
entities that have adopted this form of reporting are large multinational corporations, which took
part in the IIRC’s pilot programme. This programme came to an end in September 2014.
Companies that took part in it include PepsiCo, Unilever, HSBC and CLP Holdings Limited of China
and details of their <IR> journeys are available on the IIRC website (www.theiirc.org).
64
The IR Framework includes two sections:

 Part 1 provides guidance on using the Framework and the fundamental concepts of
integrated reporting.
 Part 2 discusses guiding principles and content elements related to the preparation and
presentation of an integrated report.
15.4.1 Fundamental concepts
The fundamental concepts of integrated reporting are:
 Value creation for the organisation and others
 The capitals (resources and the relationships used and affected by the organisation):
– Financial
– Manufactured
– Intellectual
– Human
– Social and relationship
– Natural
 The value creation process (the linkage between business model and ability to create value).
15.4.2 Guiding principles

Seven guiding principles underlie the preparation and presentation of an integrated report:
(1) Strategic focus and future orientation
(2) Connectivity of information
(3) Stakeholder relationships
(4) Materiality
(5) Conciseness
(6) Reliability and completeness
(7) Consistency and comparability
15.4.3 Content elements
An integrated report must include the following eight key content elements:
(1) Organisational overview and external environment
(2) Governance
(3) Business model
(4) Risks and opportunities
(5) Strategy and resource allocation
(6) Performance
(7) Outlook
(8) Basis of preparation and presentation
15.4.4 Interaction between concepts, guiding principles and content
elements
The <IR> Framework is principle-based. The <IR> Framework allows flexibility for organisations to
adjust the categorisation of the capitals. No matter how these are arranged, the capitals identified
in the <IR> Framework are only intended to be a guideline. Similarly, the Guiding Principles are not
intended to be a template for each Content Element. Rather, the Guiding Principles serve to inform
the content of the Integrated Report and how information is presented. Preparers should exercise
judgment when applying the Guiding Principles to the Content Elements, particularly if it appears
that there may be conflicts between them (e.g. being concise versus being complete).
65
Financial Reporting
The relationship among the Capitals, Guiding Principles, and Content Elements can be
summarised in this diagram:
Guiding
principles
(Capitals) Inputs
Described by
Content
Operations Integrated
elements
report
(Goods/services)
outputs
Case study
Examples of integrated reports can be found in the integrated reporting database, maintained on
the IIRC’s website. This includes examples of emerging practice in integrated reporting.
http://examples.theiirc.org/home
16 Current developments
16.1 Conceptual Framework
As we saw earlier in this chapter, the IASB and FASB completed the first phase of their joint project
to develop a common Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting in 2010. As a result, they
have issued a Conceptual Framework, which includes new chapters on the objective of financial
statements and qualitative characteristics together with the remaining chapters from the old
Framework. This revised Conceptual Framework has been adopted by the HKICPA.
The remaining phases of the project relate to:
 elements and recognition
 measurement
 the reporting entity
 presentation and disclosure
Subsequent to the completion of phase 1 of the project in 2010, remaining work was deferred. In
late 2012, however, the project was reactivated as an IASB-only project. A Conceptual Framework
discussion paper was issued in 2013 to obtain feedback from constituents on the remaining phases
of the project before the development of an exposure draft (expected in 2015). In particular the
discussion paper suggests:
 Improvements to the existing definitions of assets and liabilities and additional guidance to
support those definitions
 Improvements to the guidance on when assets and liabilities should be recognised
 New guidance on when assets and liabilities should be derecognised
 Guidance to assist standard setters in selecting the most appropriate measurement basis for
an asset or liability
 Increased disclosure of information about different classes of equity
66
 Principles to assist standard setters in deciding which items of income and expense should
be recognised in profit or loss, and which should be recognised in other comprehensive
income, and when items of other comprehensive income should be reclassified to profit or
loss
 The development of disclosure concepts for the Conceptual Framework.
16.2 Other IASB projects

The IASB is engaged in a number of ongoing projects. These are discussed in more detail in the
relevant chapters of this Learning Pack.
67
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
Hong
Financial
Kong Legal
Reporting
Framework
Hong Regulatory
Kong Legalbodies HongFinancial
Kong Legal
Reporting CodeLegal
Hong Kong of Ethics
Framework Framework
requirements Framework
HKICPA regulates the HKFRS set out recognition, Professional accountants must
accounting profession. The FR measurement, presentation comply with the Code
Standards Committee within and disclosure
the HKICPA issues HKFRS. requirements. They should
be observed to achieve a
true and fair view.
HK(IFRIC) Interpretations Fundamental principles:

provide guidance where Integrity
issues have arisen over the Objectivity
interpretation of HKFRS. Professional competence
& due care
Confidentiality
Professional behaviour
The Conceptual Framework
sets out the concepts
underlying the preparation
and presentation of financial
statements.
Accounting Guidelines (non

mandatory) are indicators of
best practice.
Accounting Bulletins (non

mandatory) are publications
on subjects of topical
interest.
SEHK regulates the financial

reporting compliance of listed Additionally for listed
companies in terms of the companies:
Listing and GEM Rules. Listing Rules contain
additional disclosure
requirements and require
interim reports.
SFC regulates the securities
and futures markets in Hong GEM Rules contain
Kong. additional disclosure
requirements.
FRC investigates auditing and

reporting irregularities in listed
companies.
HKIA is the regulatory body

related to the insurance
industry.
HKMA is responsible for

maintaining monetary and
banking stability.
68
A statement of generally accepted theoretical principles which

form the frame of reference for financial reporting.
The HKICPA’s Conceptual Framework
Purpose of the Conceptual Framework:

Aid development of new standards/review of existing
standards
Assist application of HKFRS
Assist auditors in forming opinion
Assist users to interpret financial information
Conceptual framework Qualitative characteristics Elements of FS
To provide financial Fundamental:

information that is useful Relevance Financial position:
to investors and creditors Faithful representation Assets
in making decisions. This Liabilities
includes information Equity
about:
economic resources Enhancing:
Comparability
Financial performance:
economic claims Income
changes in economic Verifiability
Expenses
resources and claims Timeliness
Understandability
Underlying assumption: Recognise when:

going concern otherwise it is probable future economic benefit will flow to/from the entity
break-up basis accounts. cost or value can be measured reliably
Measure at:
historical cost realisable (settlement)
current cost value
PV of future cash flows
Fair presentation
Presumed to be achieved by compliance with HKFRS
Departure from HKFRS is allowed if necessary to achieve fair presentation
“True and fair override” disclosures are necessary in the case of a departure
Management commentary (Management discussion and analysis)

Narrative report to accompany financial statements
IFRS Practice Statement issued 2010
Integrated reporting
Links environmental, social and sustainability issues to financial strategy and results (triple bottom
line reporting)
Non-mandatory
Guidance is provided in the <IR> Framework
69
Financial Reporting
Answers to self-test questions
Answer 1
(a) Investors are the providers of risk capital.
(i) Information is required to help make a decision about buying or selling shares, taking
up a rights issue and voting.
(ii) Investors must have information about the level of dividend, past, present and future
and any changes in share price.
(iii) Investors will also need to know whether the management has been running the
company efficiently.
(iv) As well as the position indicated by the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income, statement of financial position and earnings per share (EPS),
investors will want to know about the liquidity position of the company, the company's
future prospects, and how the company's shares compare with those of its
competitors.
(b) Employees need information about the security of employment and future prospects for jobs
in the company, and to help with collective pay bargaining.
(c) Lenders need information to help them decide whether to lend to a company. They will also
need to check that the value of any security remains adequate, that the interest repayments
are secure, that the cash is available for redemption at the appropriate time and that any
financial restrictions (such as maximum debt/equity ratios) have not been breached.
(d) Suppliers need to know whether the company will be a good customer and pay its debts.
(e) Customers need to know whether the company will be able to continue producing and
supplying goods.
(f) Government's interest in a company may be one of creditor or customer, as well as being
specifically concerned with compliance with tax and company law, ability to pay tax and the
general contribution of the company to the economy.
(g) The public at large would wish to have information for all the reasons mentioned above, but
it could be suggested that it would be impossible to provide general purpose accounting
information which was specifically designed for the needs of the public.
Answer 2
Relevance
Relevant information helps users to make decisions by having either a predictive or confirmatory
value. Examples in practice include:
 HKFRS 5 requires the separate disclosure of the results of discontinued operations; this
helps users to predict future results of continuing operations.
 Recognising a provision in accordance with HKAS 37 aids users to predict future cash
outflows.
 The use of a fair value measurement model for property helps to confirm users’ expectations
of its value.
70
Faithful representation
Information must be complete, neutral and free from error and reflect the commercial substance of
a transaction rather than its legal form. Examples include:
 HKAS 32 requires that redeemable preference shares are accounted for as debt since they
meet the definition of a liability.
 HKAS 10 requires that consolidated financial statements are prepared for a group of
companies.
 HKAS 17 requires that an asset acquired by way of a finance lease is accounted for in the
same way as an owned asset.
Comparability
Information about an entity must be comparable with other entities and the same entity in a
different period. Comparability is achieved by applying consistent accounting policies and
presenting information in the same way from year to year.
 HKFRS 3 reduces comparability by allowing a non-controlling interest to be measured at
either fair value or as a proportion of the fair value of identifiable net assets acquired on a
case-by-case basis.
 HKAS 40 and HKAS 16 increase comparability by requiring the same measurement policy to
be applied to all investment property / assets within the same class.
 Where standards provide choice (e.g. HKAS 40), they reduce comparability
Verifiability
Verifiability means that different knowledgeable and independent observers would agree that a
depiction is a faithful representation. For example, where historical cost is used as a measurement
basis for property, this is highly verifiable; where fair value or revaluation is used, this is less
verifiable as appraisers may differ in their opinion of fair or market value.
Timeliness
Information is only useful where it is provided in a timely manner. There is however a balance
between timeliness and reliability: it is often better to take a longer time to provide more reliable
information.
 In Hong Kong, companies listed on the Main Board are required to send their annual reports
and audited financial statements to every member and other holders of their listed securities
within three months after the end of the reporting period
Understandability
Financial information should be useful for users with a reasonable knowledge of business and
economic activities. Matters should not be left out of the financial statements on account of their
complexity. For example, the financial statements include complex items such as financial
instruments, pensions and deferred tax; users’ understanding of these items is aided by extensive
accounting policy, explanatory and numerical disclosures.
Answer 3
Although relevance is a fundamental characteristic of the Conceptual Framework, and must be
considered when preparing financial statements, the issue here is whether the costs meet the
definition of an asset.
An asset is ‘a resource controlled by an entity as a result of past events and from which future
economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity’.
71
Financial Reporting
The Conceptual Framework states that an asset should be recognised only if:
 It is probable that any future economic benefit associated with the item will flow to or from
the entity, and
 The item has a cost or value that can be measured with reliability.
Arguably, the costs incurred result in TP gaining knowledge, which is a resource that it controls as
the result of a past event.
The question is therefore whether future economic benefits are expected to flow to TPas a result of
the transaction costs. It could be argued that the company will return profits to TP and therefore
the transaction costs would indirectly result in economic benefits.
It should however be noted that it is not as a result of incurring the transaction costs that such
profits would be returned to TP; in fact this would be as a result of paying the purchase price for
LS.
Therefore the costs of external consultants and a proportion of the costs of an internal department
do not meet the definition of an asset that can be recognised in the statement of financial position.
In addition, the argument that capitalisation of the costs would result in relevant information does
not hold. Relevance is a fundamental characteristic of the Conceptual Framework. Information is
relevant when it is capable of making a difference in the decisions made by users because it has
either a predictive or a confirmatory value or both. The capitalisation of costs incurred prior to an
acquisition does not have either a predictive or confirmatory value. Therefore capitalising such
costs will not increase relevance.
Answer 4
The provision of a sustainability report is not currently mandatory for listed companies in Hong
Kong, and therefore in providing one a company would demonstrate to stakeholders that it is a
forward-looking and proactive organisation.
In measuring, monitoring and reporting on sustainability performance, a company is likely to
improve it. The process will also help an organisation to set goals and manage change.
Other internal benefits of sustainability reporting include:
 Fostering of employee loyalty
 An increased understanding of risks and opportunities
 A positive influence on long-term management strategy
 Streamlining of processes, reduction of costs and improvement of efficiency
 The avoidance of being implicated in publicised environmental and social corporate failures
 The ability to compare performance with rest of an industry to assess competitiveness and
market position
External benefits include:
 An improvement in reputation
 Fostering investor confidence and trust.
 Repeat custom and renewal of contracts
 Acting as a differentiator to win new business from competition
 Mitigation of negative social and environmental impacts
72
Exam practice
Fair presentation 11 minutes

"Financial statements should be prepared on a going concern basis and measured with historical
cost in order to present fairly the financial position of an entity."
Comment on this statement.
(6 marks)
HKICPA June 2012
Mr. Kong 9 minutes

Mr. Kong, a member of Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants (the "Institute"), is the
Chief Financial Controller of a company. At the end of the financial period, the company has
certain old and obsolete inventories kept in the warehouse. In order to avoid recognising an
impairment loss in the financial statements, Mr. Kong has asked the accounting manager Ms.
Yuen, who is also a member of the Institute, to create a forged purchase order from an existing
customer for the inventories at a selling price above the cost, with a delivery date six months later.
He has asked her to provide a copy to the auditor as evidence that the inventory does not require
writing down to net realisable value. Mr. Kong has also threatened Ms. Yuen with dismissal if she
is not willing to comply with his wishes.
Required
Discuss the behaviour of Mr. Kong and what Ms. Yuen should do in accordance with the Code of
Ethics for Professional Accountants.
(5 marks)
HKICPA June 2011
Mr. Lee 13 minutes

On 31 March 20X4, Ms. Wong, the accounting manager of ABC Group Limited (ABC), was
informed by the warehouse keeper that certain high-valued inventories had been stolen by a thief.
Ms. Wong reported to Mr. Lee, the financial controller of ABC, the theft of the inventories. To avoid
recognition of a loss on inventories, Mr. Lee asked Ms. Wong to prepare a falsified consignment
statement that these high-valued inventories was kept by a consignee in case the auditor discovers
this during the stock-taking and queries the existence of such inventories. The incentive
compensation scheme of ABC is linked to the financial performance of ABC. Mr. Lee convinced
Ms. Wong that they would continue to receive a large bonus if they succeed. Both Ms. Wong and
Mr. Lee are members of the Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants.
Discuss the behaviour of Mr. Lee in this case and the relevant safeguards. Advise what Ms. Wong
should do in accordance with the Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants.
(7 marks)
73
Financial Reporting
74
chapter 3
Small company reporting

Topic list
1 Background
2 Financial reporting in Hong Kong
2.1 Three financial reporting options
3 SME-FRF and SME-FRS
3.1 Companies which qualify for reporting under the SME-FRF and SME-FRS
3.2 The requirements of the SME-FRF and SME-FRS
3.3 SME-FRF and consolidated financial statements
4 Introduction to the HKFRS for Private Entities
4.1 Development of the HKFRS for Private Entities
4.2 Eligibility to use the HKFRS for Private Entities
5 Contents of the HKFRS for Private Entities
5.1 Overview
5.2 Simplified accounting
5.3 Simplified presentation
5.4 Omitted topics
5.5 Examples of options in full HKFRS not included in the HKFRS for Private Entities
5.6 Simplified disclosure
5.7 Updates and amendments to the HKFRS for Private Entities
6 Impact of the HKFRS for Private Entities
6.1 Key concerns
6.2 Comparison with full HKFRS
Learning focus
The HKFRS for Private Entities was issued in April 2010. It provides an option for non-publicly
accountable entities which do not qualify for the SME-FRS to use simplified accounting and
disclosure rules.
75
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
LO2.03 Small and Medium-sized Entity Financial Reporting Framework 2
and Financial Reporting Standard:
2.03.01 Identify the conditions under which an entity may adopt the SME
Financial Reporting Framework and Financial Reporting Standard
2.03.02 Describe the requirements of the SME Financial Reporting
Framework and Financial Reporting Standard
LO2.04 Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standard for Private Entities 2
2.04.01 Identify the conditions under which an entity may adopt the HKFRS
for Private Entities
2.04.02 Describe the requirements of the HKFRS for Private Entities
76
3: Small company reporting | Part B Financial reporting framework
1 Background
Topic highlights
The SME-FRF and SME-FRS provide a framework for simplified reporting for smaller companies in
Hong Kong.
The HKFRS for Private Entities was issued in April 2010 and is based on the IASB’s International
Financial Reporting Standard for Small and Medium-sized Entities (IFRS for SMEs).
The objective of financial statements is to provide information about the financial position and
performance of an entity that is useful to users of such information. Financial statements show the
results of management's stewardship of, and accountability for, the resources entrusted to it.
For small and medium-sized entities (SMEs), the most significant users are likely to be owners,
government and creditors, who may have the power to obtain information additional to that
contained in the financial statements. These users do not generally require the detailed
disclosures required by full HKFRS, and indeed the preparing entities generally find the provision of
such disclosures onerous in terms of the time and cost of preparation.
In Hong Kong, there are therefore two options for simplified reporting for smaller, non-listed
entities:
1 the SME-FRF and SME-FRS
2 the HKFRS for Private Entities.
This chapter considers each of these options, including who can use them and what simplifications
are made compared to the use of full HKFRS.
2 Financial Reporting in Hong Kong

Topic highlights
Until recently, two financial reporting options existed in Hong Kong: the SME-FRS was applicable
to most small and medium-sized entities and full HKFRS to all others. The introduction of the
HKFRS for Private Entities adds a third, middle tier, which can be adopted by unlisted entities.
2.1 Three financial reporting options

As a result of the introduction of the HKFRS for Private Entities, Hong Kong now has three financial
reporting options:
1 The SME-FRF & FRS which can only be applied by certain unlisted entities (see section 3)
2 The new HKFRS for Private Entities which can be applied by any private entity (see section 4.2)
3 Full HKFRS which must be applied by publicly listed entities and may be applied by any
private entity.
77
Financial Reporting
The options available to each type of entity are summarised in the following table:
Can apply:
Non-listed companies which meet the criteria to – SME-FRF & FRS

use the SME-FRF & FRS – HKFRS for Private Entities (meet the
criteria to use HKFRS for Private
Entities)
– Full HKFRS
Non-listed companies which do not meet the – HKFRS for Private Entities (meet the
criteria to use the SME-FRF & FRS criteria to use HKFRS for Private
Entities)
– Full HKFRS
Publicly listed companies – Full HKFRS
3 SME-FRF and SME-FRS

Topic highlights
The SME-FRF and SME-FRS can only be applied by certain unlisted entities. The SME-FRF
provides a conceptual framework for small company reporting and the SME-FRS sets out recognition,
measurement, presentation and disclosure requirements for companies reporting under it.
SME-FRF sets out the conceptual basis and qualifying criteria for the preparation of financial
statements in accordance with the Small and Medium-sized Entity Financial Reporting Standard
(SME-FRS).
SME-FRS sets out the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure requirements for an
entity that prepares and presents the financial statements in accordance with the SME-FRS.
SME-FRS 16 3.1 Companies which qualify for reporting under the SME-FRF
and SME-FRS
Both Hong Kong incorporated and overseas unlisted companies may qualify for reporting under the
SME-FRF and preparing financial statements in accordance with the SME-FRS.
3.1.1 Qualifying Hong Kong companies
A company incorporated under the Hong Kong Companies Ordinance qualifies for reporting under
the SME-FRF and SME-FRS if it satisfies the reporting exemption criteria set out in section 359 of
the new Companies Ordinance. The qualifying categories are:
A private company that is not a Any size 100% written approval from
member of a group shareholders is required each
year
Small private company Must not exceed two of: No shareholder approval is
 Total annual revenue of required
$100m
 Total assets of $100m at
the reporting date
 100 employees
78
A group of small private Each company in the group No shareholder approval is

companies must qualify as a small private required
company and the aggregate
amounts for the group must not
exceed 2 of 3 of the size tests
for small private companies
Small company limited by Total annual revenue no more No member approval is
guarantee than $25m required
Group of small companies Each company in the group No member approval required
limited by guarantee must qualify as a small private
company limited by guarantee
and the aggregate annual
revenue must not exceed
$25m
Larger eligible private company Must not exceed two of: 75% shareholder approval
 Total annual revenue of required with no objections
$200m
 Total assets of $200m at
the reporting date
 100 employees
Group of eligible companies Each company in the group The parent and all of the
must qualify as a small private subsidiaries that are not small
company or eligible larger private companies must have
company and the aggregate obtained the relevant
amounts for the group must not shareholder approval
exceed 2 of 3 of the size tests
for larger eligible private
companies
Where size limits apply, in general a company will be required to pass the size tests for two
consecutive years before becoming eligible in the third year. Similarly a company would have to fail
the tests for two consecutive years in order to become ineligible in the third year.
The following types of company are not eligible for the reporting exemption and may not apply the
SME-FRF and SME-FRS:
(a) Companies that are authorised under the Banking Ordinance to carry out banking business
(b) Companies that accept, by way of trade or business (other than banking business), loans of
money at interest or repayable at a premium other than on terms involving the issue of
debentures or other securities
(c) Companies that are licensed under Part V of the Securities and Futures Ordinance to carry
on a regulated business
(d) Companies that carry on an insurance business, other than solely as an agent
In addition, groups that contain such companies are not eligible for the reporting exemption and
cannot apply the SME-FRF and SME-FRS in the preparation of their consolidated financial
statements.
79
Financial Reporting
3.1.2 Overseas companies

Subject to any specific requirements imposed by the law of the company's place of incorporation
and subject to its constitution, overseas companies qualify for reporting under the SME-FRF and
SME-FRS when they meet the same requirements that a Hong Kong company is required to meet.
3.2 The requirements of the SME-FRF and SME-FRS

The SME-FRF and SME-FRS are a briefer and simpler set of accounting rules than full HKFRS.
They provide an accruals base framework in which the use of fair value for re-measuring assets or
liabilities is not allowed. Disclosure requirements focus on basic financial information.
If the SME-FRS does not cover an event or transaction, management are required to apply
judgment in order to develop an accounting policy consistent with the historical cost convention.
There is no requirement to fall back to full HKFRS.
The SME-FRF and SME-FRS were first issued in 2005 and have been revised in 2014 as a result
of the new Companies Ordinance.
Key areas in which the SME-FRS differs from full HKFRS include the following:
(a) There is no requirement to provide a statement of cash flows; however guidance is provided
for its preparation should an entity choose to do so. (SME-FRS para 1.1)
(b) Changes in equity may be disclosed in a note rather than in a separate primary statement.
(SME-FRS para 1.32)
(c) Leasehold interests in land from the Government of the HKSAR, or elsewhere with similar
features, are accounted for as property, plant and equipment. (SME-FRS para 3.13)
(d) There is no separate category of 'investment property'. Instead, the definition of property,
plant and equipment includes properties held for rental purposes or investment potential.
(SME-FRS para 3.1)
(e) The recognition of deferred tax is prohibited. Instead the only tax expense recognised is that
calculated based on profits assessed for tax purposes for the period, ie as is payable to the
taxation authorities in respect of that period. (SME-FRS para 14.6)
(f) Only investments in securities are covered; these are carried at historical cost (less
impairment). (SME-FRS paras 6.1 & 6.7)
(g) Entities can choose whether or not to use a discounting technique in the impairment test.
(SME-FRS para 9.8)
(h) There is no specific section of the SME-FRS dealing with share-based payments or
employee benefits, nor lease accounting for lessors.
3.3 SME-FRF and consolidated financial statements

The new CO sets out the criteria for excluding a subsidiary from consolidated financial statements.
This guidance is applicable to all companies and in order to be in line with this exemption, the
SME-FRS has been amended to include its own criteria.
3.3.1 Criteria applicable to all companies
(a) Immaterial subsidiary
Under the new CO s.381, one or more subsidiary may be excluded from the annual
consolidated financial statements if the inclusion of those subsidiary undertakings together is
not material for the purpose of giving a true and fair view of the financial position, and of the
financial performance.
80
(b) Parent is immediate holding company

Under the new CO s.379 (3)(b), a parent with material subsidiaries which is not wholly
owned is only exempt from preparing consolidated financial statements if all of the following
criteria are met:
 The parent must be a partially owned subsidiary of another body corporate;
 At least 6 months before the end of the financial year, the directors must write to the
members to notify them that they do not intend to prepare consolidated financial
statements for this financial year; and
 3 months before the financial year-end, no member has written to the company
requesting the company to prepare consolidated financial statements.
3.3.2 SME-FRS criteria
Under the SME-FRS (19.1), an entity that is a parent at the end of the financial year is required to
present consolidated financial statements except when:
(a) it is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity; or
(b) it meets all of the following conditions:-
(i) it is a partially-owned subsidiary of another entity;
(ii) at least 6 months before the end of the financial year, the directors notify the members
in writing of the directors' intention not to prepare consolidated financial statements for
the financial year, and the notification does not relate to any other financial year; and
(iii) as at a date falling 3 months before the end of the financial year, no member has
responded to the notification by giving the directors a written request for the
preparation of consolidated financial statements for the financial year.
If consolidated financial statements are presented they should include all subsidiaries of the parent,
except that one or more subsidiaries may be excluded from consolidation when:
(a) their exclusion measured on an aggregate basis is not material to the group as a whole; or
(b) their inclusion would involve expense and delay out of proportion to the value to members of
the company.
If a parent is exempt from preparing consolidated financial statements and does not prepare such
financial statements, it should prepare company-level financial statements. Company-level financial
statements are those in which investments in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures are
accounted for using the cost model.
A parent may not exclude a subsidiary from consolidation on the grounds of expense and delay out
of proportion to the value to members of the company unless the members of the company have
been informed in writing about, and do not object to, this exclusion.
4 Introduction to the HKFRS for Private Entities

Topic highlights
On 30 April 2010, the HKICPA issued the HKFRS for Private Entities. This new standard became
applicable immediately, and provided a new reporting option for those private companies which did
not meet the criteria to use the SME-FRS & FRF and were therefore previously forced to apply full
HKFRS.
81
Financial Reporting
4.1 Development of the HKFRS for Private Entities

The HKFRS for Private Entities is based on the International Financial Reporting Standard for
Small and Medium-sized Entities (IFRS for SMEs), which was issued in July 2009. Despite its
name, this IFRS for SMEs was developed by the IASB to apply to entities which are not publicly
accountable and publish general purpose financial statements for external users, (rather
than those which meet certain size definitions).
The Council considered that a variation of the IFRS for SMEs should be adopted in Hong Kong as
a reporting option for eligible non-listed companies, and as a result issued the HKFRS for Private
Entities.
4.1.1 Amendments made to the IFRS for SMEs in developing the HKFRS for
Private Entities
The HKFRS for Private Entities is based on the IASB’s IFRS for SMEs, however the following
amendments are made to make the standard more relevant to Hong Kong:
(a) The term "SMEs" is replaced by "Private Entities"
The term SMEs is widely used in Hong Kong and associated with the locally developed
SME-FRF & FRS. For clarity and differentiation, this HKFRS which is based on the "IFRS for
SMEs" is called "Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standard for Private Entities" (HKFRS for
Private Entities).
(b) The recognition and measurement principles in section 29 Income Tax of the IFRS for SMEs
is replaced by the extant version of HKAS 12 Income Taxes
The Council considers that it is more appropriate to include the recognition and
measurement principles contained in the extant version of HKAS 12 Income Taxes in the
new HKFRS. The relevant disclosures contained in the IFRS for SMEs are, however,
retained.
(c) The measurement of deferred tax liabilities associated with an investment property
measured at fair value is capped at the amount of tax that would be payable on its sale to an
unrelated market participant at fair value at the end of the reporting period
This amendment will restrict the amount of deferred taxation recognised in relation to
revaluation gains of investment properties as such tax is in practice never paid in Hong
Kong. This provision removes an anomaly currently in HKAS 12 Income Taxes.
4.2 Eligibility to use the HKFRS for Private Entities

Council has approved the adoption of the HKFRS for Private Entities as a financial reporting
option for companies that:
(a) do not have public accountability; and
(b) publish general purpose financial statements for external users.
4.2.1 Public accountability

An entity is defined as having public accountability (and so may not use the new standard) if:
 its debt or equity instruments are traded in a public market (or it is in the process of issuing
its debt or equity instruments for trading in a public market), or
 it holds assets in a fiduciary capacity for a broad group of outsiders as one of its primary
businesses.
A public market means any domestic or foreign stock exchange market, or an over-the-counter
market.
In general, an entity that holds assets in a fiduciary capacity as one of its primary businesses may
be a bank, insurance company, securities broker/dealer, mutual fund or investment bank.
82
If an entity holds assets in a fiduciary capacity for a broad group of outsiders for reasons that are
incidental to its primary business, it is not considered to have public accountability. Such entities
may include schools, travel agents and charities.
4.2.2 General purpose financial statements

HKFRS are designed to apply to the general purpose financial statements of profit-oriented entities.
General purpose financial statements are directed towards the common information needs of a
wide range of users, for example, shareholders, creditors, employees and the public at large. The
objective of financial statements is to provide information about the financial position,
performance and cash flows of an entity that is useful to those users in making economic
decisions.
4.2.3 Subsidiaries
A subsidiary of a group which applies full HKFRS may use the HKFRS for Private Entities provided
that the subsidiary itself meets the eligibility criteria.
5 Contents of the HKFRS for Private Entities

5.1 Overview
Topic highlights
The HKFRS for Private Entities is a self-contained standard incorporating accounting principles that
are based on full HKFRS, but which have been simplified to suit the private entities within its scope.
It includes simplifications that reflect the needs of users of private companies' financial statements
and the cost-benefit considerations of preparers. It facilitates financial reporting by unlisted entities
by:
 simplifying requirements for recognition and measurement;
 eliminating topics and disclosure requirements that are not generally applicable to private
entities;
 removing certain accounting treatments permitted under full HKFRS.
Note that entities are not permitted to mix and match the requirements of the HKFRS for Private
Entities and full HKFRS, except for the option to apply the recognition and measurement rules of
HKAS 39 (HKFRS 9) with regard to financial instruments.
The HKFRS for Private Entities became effective immediately upon its issuance on 30 April 2010.
Eligible entities are permitted to use HKFRS for Private Entities to prepare financial statements for
prior period(s) where the relevant financial statements have not been finalised and approved.
5.1.1 Cost-benefit considerations
In order to provide additional relief to preparers of financial statements under the HKFRS for
Private Entities, an "undue cost or effort" principle has been introduced in some sections of the
standard to replace the "impracticability" relief criterion in the full HKFRS (a requirement is
considered "impracticable" if an entity cannot apply it after making every reasonable effort to do
so).
Although the notion of "undue cost or effort" is not defined, it focuses on the concept of balancing
costs and benefits, which might in turn require management's judgment of when a cost is
considered excessive. In other words, the "undue cost or effort" principle implies that cost is always
considered.
83
Financial Reporting
5.2 Simplified accounting

The HKFRS for Private Entities simplifies certain recognition and measurement principles in full
HKFRS. The more useful simplifications are highlighted below.
(a) Research and development costs and borrowing costs must be expensed immediately.
(b) Financial instruments
Financial instruments meeting specified criteria are measured at cost or amortised cost. All
others are measured at fair value through profit or loss.
In addition, a simplified principle is established for derecognition and hedge accounting
requirements are simplified and tailored to private entities.
(c) Property, plant and equipment and intangibles
Only the cost model is allowed. There is no need to review residual value, useful life and
depreciation method unless there is an indication that they have changed since the most
recent reporting date.
(d) Goodwill and other indefinite-life intangibles
An impairment test is performed only if there are indications of impairment (rather than
annually). Goodwill is measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment
losses. All intangible assets are considered to have a finite useful life. If a reliable estimate of
goodwill or intangible assets cannot be made, it is presumed to be ten years.
(e) Investments in associates and jointly-controlled entities
The cost model, equity model and fair value model are permitted as an accounting policy
choice that should be applied to the whole class of associates or jointly-controlled entities.
An entity using the cost model must measure an investment for which there is a published
price using the fair value model.
(f) Exchange differences
An exchange difference that is recognised initially in other comprehensive income is not
reclassified in profit or loss on disposal of the investment in a foreign subsidiary. This
treatment is less burdensome than that required under full HKFRS because it eliminates the
need for tracking exchange differences after initial recognition.
(g) Non-current assets held for sale
There is no separate held-for-sale classification; instead holding an asset or group of assets
for sale is an indicator of impairment.
(h) Equity-settled share-based payment
If observable market prices are not available to measure the fair value of an equity-settled
share-based payment, the directors' best estimate is used.
(i) Defined benefit plans
All actuarial gains and losses are recognised immediately (in profit or loss or other
comprehensive income). All past service costs are to be recognised immediately in profit or
loss. To measure the defined benefit obligation, the projected unit credit method should be
used only if it can be applied without undue cost or effort. (Note. HKAS 19 has been revised
and has incorporated these simplifications.)
(j) Biological assets
The cost-depreciation-impairment model is used unless the fair value is readily determinable
without undue cost or effort. In this case, the fair value through profit or loss model should be
applied.
(k) Borrowing costs
All borrowing costs are expensed immediately.
84
(l) Government grants

Government grants are recognised in income (at fair value) when the performance
conditions are met.
(m) Investment property
If an entity can measure the fair value of an item of investment property reliably, without
undue cost or effort, it must use fair value. Otherwise the cost model is applied.
5.3 Simplified presentation

In order to reduce costs for preparers, while still meeting the needs of users, the HKFRS for Private
Entities has simplified financial statement presentation requirements as follows:
(a) An entity is not required to present a statement of financial position at the beginning of the
earliest comparative period when the entity applies an accounting policy retrospectively or
makes a retrospective restatement of items in its financial statements, or when it reclassifies
items in its financial statements as required under HKAS 1.
(b) An entity is permitted to present a single statement of income and retained earnings in place
of separate statements of comprehensive income and changes in equity if the only changes
to its equity during the periods for which financial statements are presented, arise from profit
or loss, payment of dividends, corrections of prior period errors, and changes in accounting
policy.
(c) All deferred tax assets and liabilities are classified as non-current assets or liabilities.
5.4 Omitted topics

The HKFRS for Private Entities does not address the following topics that are covered in full
HKFRS, because these topics are not generally considered to be relevant to private entities:
 Earnings per share
 Interim financial reporting
 Segment reporting
 Classification for non-current assets (or disposal groups) as held for sale
5.5 Examples of options in full HKFRS not included in the HKFRS

for Private Entities
The HKFRS for Private Entities does not allow the following accounting treatments available under
full HKFRS. This is generally because a simplified treatment is available instead (see section 5.2
above):
Treatment disallowed in HKFRS for Private

Entities:
Property, plant and equipment and Revaluation model
intangible assets
Borrowing costs Capitalisation of borrowing costs
Defined pension plans Deferral of actuarial gains and losses
Financial instruments* Available-for-sale and held-to-maturity
classifications are not available
Government grants Various accounting options excluded
Investment property Accounting policy choice
Consolidation Measurement of the non-controlling interest at
fair value
85
Financial Reporting
* Note. Entities are permitted to choose to apply HKAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and
Measurement in its entirety rather than the financial instruments section of the HKFRS for Private
Entities. Note also that full HKFRS no longer allow these categories (HKFRS 9) and no longer
allows deferred recognition (HKAS 19).
5.6 Simplified disclosure

A number of disclosure requirements contained in full HKFRS have been omitted from the HKFRS
for Private Entities for the following reasons:
 They relate to topics covered in full HKFRS but omitted from the HKFRS for Private Entities.
 They relate to recognition and measurement principles contained in full HKFRS that have
been replaced by simplifications.
 They relate to options in full HKFRS that are not included in the HKFRS for Private Entities.
 Some disclosures are not included on the basis of users' needs or cost-benefit
considerations.
Examples of simplified and reduced disclosure requirements include the following:
 There is no requirement to disclose the fair value of the carrying amount for property, plant
and equipment and investment property.
 The vast majority of the disclosure requirements of HKFRS 7 Financial Instruments:
Disclosures are not required.
 There is no requirement to disclose estimates used to measure the recoverable amount of
cash generating units containing goodwill.
 In relation to income taxes, entities are only required to provide an explanation of the
significant differences in amounts reported in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income and amounts reported to tax authorities.
 In relation to investments in associates, the following disclosures are omitted:
– Summarised financial information relating to assets, liabilities, revenues and profit or
loss.
– Share of contingent liabilities and the nature and extent of any significant restrictions
on the ability of associates to transfer funds to the investor, if any.
5.7 Updates and amendments to the HKFRS for Private Entities

The IASB is towards the end of a comprehensive post-implementation review of user entities'
experience in applying the IFRS for SMEs. The purpose of this review was to address identified
implementation issues and consider whether there was a need to amend the IFRS for SMEs to
reflect changes to full IFRS.
A Request for Information was issued in 2012 and the Board subsequently issued an Exposure
Draft of proposed amendments to the standard in 2013. There were 57 proposed amendments,
with most of these clarifying existing requirements or adding supporting guidance rather than being
changes to the underlying requirements of the standard.
An exception to this is the accounting treatment of income taxes. The original income taxes chapter
of the IFRS for SMEs was based on an exposure draft of proposed changes to IAS 12 (HKAS 12).
This project was not completed and IAS 12 (HKAS 12) was not revised. Therefore the changes
proposed to the IFRS for SMEs aim to re-align accounting for tax with IAS 12 (HKAS 12).
Other proposed amendments that will change requirements in the IFRS for SMEs are:
 The addition of a requirement that the useful life of goodwill or an intangible asset should not
exceed 10 years where an entity is unable to make a reliable estimate of the life (currently
the IFRS for SMEs fixes the useful life at 10 years);
86
 The addition of a requirement to account for the liability component of a compound financial
instrument in the same way as a similar standalone financial liability (currently the IFRS for
SMEs requires that it is measured at amortised cost).
The final amendments are expected to be issued in 2015 and adopted by HKICPA as amendments
to the HKFRS for private entities.
Beyond this, the IASB anticipate that the IFRS for SMEs will be amended approximately once
every three years, with proposed changes issued in one go within an ‘omnibus Exposure Draft’.
Therefore, the number and frequency of amendments is reduced compared to those made to full
standards, and so the burden on companies to keep up to date is also reduced.
6 Impact of the HKFRS for Private Entities

Topic highlights
The HKFRS for Private Entities affects many companies, whether at an individual entity level, or
subsidiaries in larger groups. Similar to full HKFRS, the HKFRS for Private Entities enables a true
and fair view to be given on the financial statements.
6.1 Key concerns

A key area of concern for all businesses, especially individual companies in Hong Kong, is to
ensure that the benefits of application of the HKFRS for Private Entities outweigh the costs
associated with doing so.
The principal issue is therefore to ensure that the financial costs of preparation do not increase and
the needs of stakeholders are still met.
The HKFRS addresses this concern, ensuring that
 financial statements are based on the same conceptual framework as full HKFRS,
condensed and specifically tailored for private entities; and
 the burden of preparing financial statements in accordance with full HKFRS is reduced.
6.2 Comparison with full HKFRS

6.2.1 The omitted topics
The following topics have been omitted completely from the HKFRS for Private Entities (compare
to full HKFRS), because they are not expected to be relevant for majority of entities which meet the
criteria of choosing HKFRS for Private Entities (PEs):
 Earnings per share
 Interim financial reporting
 Segment reporting
 Special accounting for assets held for sale
6.2.2 Not an option
The HKFRS for Private Entities does not include the following options, because it is considered that
PEs will choose to follow the simpler options as they will generally be less costly, require less
expertise and achieve greater comparability with their peers.
If a PE feels strongly about using one or more of the complex options, it could elect to follow the full
HKFRS rather than the HKFRS for Private Entities.
87
Financial Reporting
Property, plant and equipment

 The revaluation model is not an option.
 Property, plant and equipment carried at cost less accumulated depreciation and
impairment.
Intangible assets
 The revaluation model is not an option.
 Intangible assets carried at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment.
Borrowing costs
 The capitalisation model is not allowed.
 All borrowing costs should be expensed.
Government grants
 Various options excluded.
 Only single simplified method retained, that is, recognition in income (at fair value) when the
performance conditions are met.
Investment property
 Measurement is driven by circumstances rather than allowing an accounting policy choice
between the cost and fair value models.
Financial instruments
 Available-for-sale and held-to-maturity categories are not available.
Note. The above are just some of the differences between full HKFRS and the HKFRS for Private Entities.
6.2.3 Considerations prior to adopting the HKFRS for Private Entities

The HKFRS for Private Entities aims to simplify and reduce the potentially ever-increasing
reporting requirements of the full HKFRS. However, in determining whether to adopt the HKFRS for
Private Entities, management is advised to consider the facts and circumstances of the PE,
including but not limited to the following matters.
Must all PEs apply the HKFRS for Private Entities?
No. The adoption of the HKFRS for Private Entities is an option for PEs. If compliance with the full
HKFRS is required, desired or preferred by a PE, the PE may continue using or adopt the full
HKFRS and need not adopt the HKFRS for Private Entities.
Will the financial statements of a PE meet the needs of users?
PEs will have to consider whether financial statements prepared under the HKFRS for Private
Entities meet the needs of their own specific users. The financial statements of PEs generally are
not widely circulated, and the needs of individual users of those financial statements tend to be
specific, but not necessarily the same.
The HKFRS for Private Entities is based on the same framework as the full HKFRS. In developing
the IFRS for SMEs, the IASB attempted to consider the needs of users of the financial statements
of an SME. However, due to the specific needs of individual users, careful assessment will be
needed by each SME to determine whether the IFRS for SMEs will meet their needs. The IFRS for
SMEs concentrates on items such as short-term cash flows, liquidity, and balance sheet strength.
The IASB concluded that the full IFRS at times provided too much information for the needs of an
SME user, while in other situations other needs were not being met by the full IFRSs.
The HKICPA has held meetings with the Inland Revenue Department of the HKSAR Government
and representatives of Hong Kong Association of Banks since the issuance of the IFRS for SMEs.
Both parties acknowledged the standard setting role of the HKICPA and have no objection in principle
to relieving PEs from complying with the full HKFRS in the preparation of financial statements.
88
Are there any long-term considerations that should be taken into account?
The PE's long-term plans need to be considered; where such plans include becoming publicly
accountable or a possible listing of debt or equity instruments, this could affect the choices made
by the PE. A PE with such plans would be precluded from using the HKFRS for Private Entities in
the future, as it would fail to meet the definition of a PE. This would then force the PE into a second
conversion to the full HKFRS.
Another consideration is whether a PE's holding company reports (or will report) under the full
HKFRS. In such cases, it may be easier for that PE to also report under the full HKFRS in order to
facilitate the consolidation process in its parent company – thereby avoiding the need for dual
reporting.
89
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
Small company reporting
Financial reporting options in Hong Kong
Full HKFRS HKFRS for Private SME-FRF & FRS

Entities
Must be applied by May be applied May be applied by Hong Kong

publicly listed by entities which: incorporated companies and
entities; may be 1. have no public overseas companies that satisfy
applied by private accountability the reporting exemption criteria of
entities 2. prepare section 359 of the new Companies
general Ordinance
purpose
financial
statements
Based on the Conceptual basis and qualifying

IASB's IFRS for criteria set out in SME-FRF
SMEs this is a
self-contained
standard
Compared to full HKFRS, provides: Recognition, measurement,

simplified accounting eg all R&D costs presentation and disclosure
expensed as incurred. requirements provided in
simplified presentation eg all SME-FRS
deferred tax balances classified as non-
current
omitted topics eg EPS
simplified disclosure eg most HKFRS 7
disclosures not required
90
Exam practice
HKFRS for Private Entities 16 minutes

Sigma Technology Limited (STL), a private company, was established in the Macau Special
Administration Region (MSAR) in 20W8 by Mr. Ong and is engaged in trading computer hardware.
Less than 50 staff are employed by the company. The company is not a member of a group. STL
has prepared its financial statements in accordance with the Small and Medium-sized Entity
Financial Reporting Framework (SME-FRF) since it was established for both internal and external
users. For the four years ended 31 December 20X1, STL reported the following data in its
management accounts:
20W8 20W9 20X0 20X1
HK$’000 HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000
Revenue 37,654 43,528 93,456 148,621
Profit for the year 5,233 8,602 21,731 38,980
Total assets 18,366 20,984 92,327 128,489
Total liabilities 16,541 13,729 86,341 14,201
Required
(a) Explain whether STL can report under the SME-FRF for the years ended
31 December 20X0 and 31 December 20X1. (3 marks)
(b) Explain whether STL can report under the Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standard for
Private Entities (HKFRS for Private Entities) for the year ended 31 December 20X1.
(2 marks)
(c) "Revaluation and impairment of property, plant and equipment are prohibited under HKFRS
for Private Entities". Explain whether this statement is correct. (2 marks)
(d) Assuming that Mr. Ong plans to list STL on the Growth Enterprise Market of The Stock
Exchange of Hong Kong Limited and is considering incorporating the financial information of
the entity for each of the two years ended 31 December 20X1 and 6 months ended 30 June
20X2 in the prospectus, explain whether STL can report the historical financial information in
its prospectus under the SME-FRF or the HKFRS for Private Entities. (2 marks)
(Total = 9 marks)
91
Financial Reporting
92
Part C
Accounting for business

transactions
93
Financial Reporting
94
chapter 4
Non-current assets held for

sale and discontinued
operations
Topic list
1 HKFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations

1.1 Introduction and definitions
1.2 Scope
2 Classification of assets held for sale or for distribution to owners
2.1 Available for immediate sale in present condition
2.2 Highly probable sale
2.3 Assets held for distribution to owners
2.4 Assets to be abandoned
2.5 Summary decision tree
3 Measurement of assets held for sale or for distribution to owners
3.1 Initial measurement
3.2 Subsequent measurement
3.3 Impairment losses
3.4 Reversal of impairment losses
3.5 Measurement where assets are no longer classified as held for sale or distribution
3.6 Reclassification
4 Presentation of assets held for sale or for distribution to owners
4.1 Presentation of a non-current asset or disposal group classified as held for sale
4.2 Additional disclosures
5 Discontinued operations
5.1 Definition of discontinued operations
5.2 Presentation of discontinued operations
Learning focus
The measurement requirements for non-current assets and disposal groups held for sale are
particularly important both for exam and practical purposes.
95
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Account for transactions in accordance with Hong Kong Financial
Reporting Standards
3.21 Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations 3
3.21.01 Define non-current assets (or disposal groups) held for sale or held
for distribution to owners and discontinued operations within the
scope of HKFRS 5
3.21.02 Explain what assets are within the measurement provision of
HKFRS 5
3.21.03 Determine when a sale is highly probable
3.21.04 Measure non-current assets held for sale and discontinued
operations including initial measurement, subsequent measurement
and change of plan
3.21.05 How to account for impairment loss and subsequent reversals
3.21.06 Present the non-current asset held for sale and discontinued
operation in the financial statements (including the prior year
restatement)
96
4: Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and

Discontinued Operations
Topic highlights
HKFRS 5 requires assets and disposal groups ‘held for sale’ to be presented separately in the
statement of financial position.
The results of discontinued operations should be presented separately in the statement of profit or
loss and other comprehensive income.
HKFRS 5,
Appendix A
1.1 Introduction and definitions
HKFRS 5 requires assets and groups of assets (‘disposal groups’) that are ‘held for sale’ to be
presented separately in the statement of financial position.
It also requires that the results of discontinued operations are presented separately in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
These requirements ensure that users of financial statements are better able to make projections
about the financial position, profits and cash flows of the entity.
Key terms
Disposal group. A group of assets to be disposed of, by sale or otherwise, together as a group in
a single transaction, and liabilities directly associated with those assets that will be transferred in
the transaction. (In practice, a disposal group could be a subsidiary, a cash-generating unit or a
single operation within an entity.)
Discontinued operation. A component of an entity that either has been disposed of or is classified
as held for sale and:
(a) Represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations; or
(b) Is part of a single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or
geographical area of operations; or
(c) Is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale.
(HKFRS 5)
HKFRS 1.2 Scope

5.2,5,5A
The classification and presentation requirements of HKFRS 5 (sections 2 and 4) apply to all
recognised non-current assets and to all disposal groups.
The measurement requirements of the HKFRS (section 3) apply to all recognised non-current
assets other than those listed below, which continue to be measured in accordance with the
relevant HKFRS noted:
(a) Deferred tax assets (HKAS 12)
(b) Assets arising from employee benefits (HKAS 19)
(c) Financial assets (HKAS 39/HKFRS 9)
(d) Investment properties accounted for in accordance with the fair value model (HKAS 40)
(e) Agricultural and biological assets that are measured at fair value less costs to sell (HKAS 41)
(f) Insurance contracts (HKFRS 4)
The measurement requirements of the standard also apply to all disposal groups and such a group
may include any assets and liabilities including current assets, current liabilities and those assets
listed above which are excluded from the scope of the standard on an individual basis.
97
Financial Reporting
Where a non-current asset forms part of a disposal group, the measurement requirements of
HKFRS 5 are applied to the group as a whole rather than to each asset within it on an individual
basis.
The classification, presentation and measurement requirements in this HKFRS applicable to a non-
current asset (or disposal group) that is classified as held for sale apply also to a non-current asset
(or disposal group) that is classified as held for distribution to owners acting in their capacity as
owners (held for distribution to owners).
2 Classification of assets held for sale or for

HKFRS 5.6,7 distribution to owners
Topic highlights
A non-current asset (or disposal group) should be classified as held for sale if its carrying amount
will be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use.
In order for this to be the case:
(a) the asset must be available for immediate sale in its present condition
(b) its sale must be highly probable (i.e., significantly more likely than not)
HKFRS 5
2.1 Available for immediate sale in present condition
Implementation
HKFRS 5 requires that to be classified as held for sale, an asset (or disposal group) must be
Guidance
available for immediate sale in its present condition subject only to terms that are usual and
customary for sales of such assets (or disposal group).
The standard does not expand on the meaning of this, however the Implementation Guidance that
accompanies the standard states that an asset (or disposal group) is available for immediate sale if
an entity currently has the intention and ability to transfer the asset (or disposal group) to a buyer in
its present condition.
Example: Available for immediate sale in present condition 1
Vaughan Co acquires a property that it intends to sell only after it has completed renovations to
increase the property’s sales value.
Required
Is the head office available for immediate sale in its present condition?
Solution
No, Vaughan Co intends to delay the sale of the property until renovations are complete. Therefore
until the renovation work is finished the property is not available for immediate sale in its present
condition.
Example: Available for immediate sale in present condition 2
Farrell Co is committed to a plan to sell its manufacturing facility and has begun work to identify a
buyer. The facility has a backlog of customer orders to complete and any of these that have not
been completed by the sale date will be transferred to the purchaser of the facility. This transfer will
not affect the timing of the sale.
Required
Is the manufacturing facility available for immediate sale in its present condition?
Solution
Yes, the facility is available for sale in its present condition because any outstanding customer
orders will be transferred to the purchaser.
98
2.2 Highly probable sale

HKFRS
5.8,8A,9,11 For an asset to qualify as being held for sale, the sale must be 'highly probable'. The following must
apply:
(a) Management must be committed to a plan to sell the asset.
(b) There must be an active programme to locate a buyer.
(c) The asset must be actively marketed for sale at a price that is reasonable in relation to its
current fair value.
(d) The sale should be expected to take place within one year from the date of classification.
(e) It is unlikely that significant changes to the plan will be made or that the plan will be
withdrawn.
The probability of shareholders' approval (if required in the jurisdiction) should be considered as
part of the assessment of whether the sale is highly probable.
An entity that is committed to a sale plan involving loss of control of a subsidiary shall classify all
the assets and liabilities of that subsidiary as held for sale when the criteria are met, regardless of
whether the entity will retain a non-controlling interest in its former subsidiary after the sale.
If an asset (or disposal group) is not sold within one year, it can still be classified as held for sale
only when the delay has been caused by events or circumstances beyond the entity's control.
The entity is required to produce sufficient evidence to show its commitment to sell the asset or
disposal group, otherwise it must cease to classify the asset as held for resale.
When a disposal group (e.g. a subsidiary) is acquired solely with a view to its subsequent disposal,
an entity is allowed to classify it as an asset held for sale only if the sale is expected to occur within
a year and it is highly probable that all the criteria mentioned above will be satisfied within a short
period (normally three months) after the acquisition of the disposal group.
HKFRS 5.12A 2.3 Assets held for distribution to owners

A non-current asset (or disposal group) is classified as held for distribution to owners when the
entity is committed to distribute the asset (or disposal group) to the owners.
For this to be the case:
 The assets must be available for immediate distribution in their present condition
 The distribution must be highly probable
In order for the distribution to be considered highly probable:
1 Actions to complete the distribution should have been initiated
2 These actions should be expected to be completed within 12 months of the date of
classification
Actions required to complete the distribution should indicate that it is unlikely that significant
changes to the distribution will be made or that the distribution will be withdrawn. The probability of
shareholders' approval (if required in the jurisdiction) should be considered as part of the
assessment of whether the distribution is highly probable.
HKFRS 5.13 2.4 Assets to be abandoned

An asset that is to be abandoned should not be classified as held for sale. Since its carrying
amount is to be recovered principally through continuing use rather than sale, it should not be
classified as held for sale. However separate disclosure may be required (see section 5 below)
when a disposal group to be abandoned meets the definition of a discontinued operation.
99
Financial Reporting

The following decision tree will help you to make a decision as to whether an asset or disposal
group should be classified as held for sale:
Asset or disposal group to be Abandoned

sold or abandoned?
Sold
No
Available for sale in present
condition?
Yes
Sale highly probable? Consider

sub criteria:
Management committed
to plan No
No
Active programme to Acquired with a view to
locate buyer resale?
Marketed at fair value

Yes
Significant changes to
plan unlikely
No
Yes Highly probable that sub-
criteria met within three
Yes months of purchase?
No
Sale expected within one year?
Yes
Criterial met before the end of No

the year?
Yes
Classify as held for sale and Disclose as non-adjusting

event after the reporting Do not classify as held
re-measure and disclose in
period (see Chapter 22) for sale
accordance with HKFRS 5
1 Should the following be classified as held for sale at 31 December 20X1?
(a) Lawnmo is committed to a plan to sell a manufacturing facility in its present condition
and classifies the facility as held for sale at 31 March 20X1. After a firm purchase
commitment is obtained, the buyer's inspection of the property identifies environmental
damage not previously known to exist. Lawnmo is required by the buyer to make good
the damage, and this is likely to mean that the sale will not be completed until the end
of August 20X2. Lawnmo has initiated actions to make good the damage, and
satisfactory rectification of the damage is highly probable.
(b) Ficus is committed to a plan to sell its head office building and has engaged the
services of an agent to locate a buyer. Ficus will use the building until the completion
100
of its new premises, currently under construction. The existing head office will not be
transferred to a buyer until such time as Ficus vacates the property.
2 On 1 July 20X9, the board of directors of Clematis agreed to sell a division of the business.
The division currently has work planned until the end of September 20X9 so the board have
agreed to complete the work and then discontinue the operations of the division. There is an
interested buyer for the division but the Board of Clematis has stated that the purchase
cannot take place until after the work has been completed and realistically anticipate that a
transfer of the division cannot occur until 31 October 20X9.
Should the division be classified as 'held for sale' at 1 July 20X9?
3 Measurement of assets held for sale or for

distribution to owners
Key terms
Fair value. The price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an
HKFRS 5
Appendix A
orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.
Costs to sell. The incremental costs directly attributable to the disposal of an asset (or disposal
group), excluding finance costs and income tax expense.
Recoverable amount. The higher of an asset's fair value less costs to sell and its value in use.
Value in use. The present value of estimated future cash flows expected to arise from the
continuing use of an asset and from its disposal at the end of its useful life. (HKFRS 5)
HKFRS
5.15,15A, 18
Immediately before classification as held for sale, an asset (or the assets and liabilities of a
disposal group) must be remeasured in accordance with applicable HKFRS.
On transfer to the held for sale category, a non-current asset (or the net assets of a disposal group)
should be measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.
An entity shall measure a non-current asset (or disposal group) classified as held for distribution to
owners at the lower of its carrying amount and fair value less costs to distribute.
HKFRS 5.16 3.1.1 Carrying amount
HKFRS 5 clarifies that the carrying amount is that amount at which the asset or disposal group
would have been included in the financial statements had the classification to the held for sale
category not occurred. This carrying amount is measured in accordance with applicable HKFRS.
HKFRS 5.17 3.1.2 Fair value less costs to sell
HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement is applied in order to determine fair value (see Chapter 19).
When the sale is expected to occur beyond one year, the standard specifies that costs to sell
should be measured at present value. Any increase in the present value arising from the passage
of time is recognised in profit or loss as a financing cost.
HKFRS
5.19,25
3.2 Subsequent measurement
Once classified as held for sale (or part of a disposal group held for sale), a non-current asset is
not depreciated or amortised. Interest attributable to the liabilities of a disposal group does however
continue to be recognised.
101
Financial Reporting
At each reporting date subsequent to classification as held for sale (or distribution), an asset or
disposal group must be remeasured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell
(distribute).
For a disposal group, the carrying amount of those assets which are part of the disposal group but
individually outside the scope of HKFRS 5 (see section 1.2) should be re-measured in accordance
with the relevant HKFRS before the fair value less costs to sell of the disposal group is re-
measured.
HKFRS 5.20 3.3 Impairment losses

Assets held for sale are outside the scope of HKAS 36 and the guidance on impairments provided
within HKFRS 5 applies instead.
Where fair value less costs to sell (or distribute) is lower than carrying amount, the asset or
disposal group held for sale is impaired, and the difference between carrying amount and fair value
less costs to sell must be recognised as an impairment loss.
Example: Tang Co.

Tang Co. has owned a printing machine for several years. The machine cost $400,000 and is being
depreciated over a period of 10 years. At 1 October 20X8, the machine is carried in the statement
of financial position at $280,000. On 31 March 20X9 the management of Tang Co. decided to sell
the machine and immediately instructed a specialist selling agency to market the machine. The
current market value of such a machine is $270,000 and Tang Co. has agreed to pay a 5%
commission to the specialist selling agency.
At what value should the machine be included in the statement of financial position at
30 September 20X9, assuming that it has not yet been sold and that fair values remain unchanged
since classification as held for sale?
Solution
At the date of transfer to held for sale the carrying amount was:
$280,000 – ($400,000/10 years  6/12) = $260,000
The fair value less costs to sell was:
$270,000  95% = $256,500
On transfer to the held for sale category an impairment of $3,500 is recognised. Thereafter no
depreciation is charged, meaning that the asset held for sale is included in the statement of
financial position at 30 September 20X9 as a current asset carried at $256,500.
HKFRS 5.23 3.3.1 Impairment losses and disposal groups

An impairment loss recognised for a disposal group reduces the carrying amount of the non-current
assets of the disposal group that are within the scope of HKFRS 5 in the following order:
1 Any goodwill within the disposal group
2 Other assets on a pro rata basis
102
Example: Random Co.

Random Co. makes the decision to dispose of a division of its business on 15 February 20X9 and
immediately begins an active programme to find a buyer. The assets of this division make up a
disposal group, and are measured as follows:
Carrying amount at
15 February
20X9
$'000
Goodwill 45,000
Intangible asset 100,000
Property, plant and equipment 198,000
Inventory 13,200
Other current assets 90,000
Total 446,200
At 15 February 20X9:
 the inventory, which is carried at cost, could be sold for $13.7 million only after incurring
packaging costs of $700,000.
 a property with a carrying amount of $12 million (being the valuation determined the last time
the property was revalued) has a fair value of $14 million.
The fair value of the disposal group is $400 million and costs to sell are $6 million.
Required
Show how HKFRS 5 measurement guidance is applied to the disposal group.
Solution
The assets of the disposal group are first remeasured at 15 February 20X9 in accordance with
relevant standards:
Carrying amount at
15 February Revised carrying
20X9 Remeasurement amount
$'000 $'000 $'000
Goodwill 45,000 - 45,000
Intangible asset 100,000 - 100,000
Property, plant and equipment 198,000 2,000 200,000
Inventory 13,200 (200) 13,000
Other current assets 90,000 90,000
Total 446,200 1,800 448,000
The fair value less costs to sell is $394 million ($400 million – $6 million) and the revised carrying
amount is $448 million. Therefore an impairment loss is recognised on transfer of the disposal
group to held for sale of $54 million, and this is allocated to the non-current assets which fall within
the scope of the measurement provisions of HKFRS 5.
Therefore, no impairment loss is allocated to inventory or the other current assets.
103
Financial Reporting
The loss is allocated in the first place to goodwill and thereafter to other non-current assets on a
pro-rata basis:
Revised Carrying
carrying amount amount after
at allocation of
15 February Impairment impairment
20X9 loss loss
$'000 $'000 $'000
Goodwill 45,000 (45,000) –
Intangible asset 100,000 (3,000) 97,000
Property, plant and equipment 200,000 (6,000) 194,000
Inventory 13,000 – 13,000
Other current assets 90,000 – 90,000
Total 448,000 54,000 394,000
HKFRS 5.21-
22
3.4 Reversal of impairment losses
Where an asset or disposal group held for sale or distribution is measured at fair value less costs to
sell, any subsequent increase in fair value less costs to sell is recognised as follows:
 In the case of an individual asset, a reversal of an impairment loss may not be recognised in
excess of the cumulative impairment loss previously recognised in accordance with either
HKAS 36 or HKFRS 5.
 In the case of a disposal group, a reversal of an impairment loss is recognised:
– To the extent that it is not recognised on the remeasurement of the carrying amount of
assets and liabilities outside the scope of HKFRS 5
– For assets within the scope of HKFRS 5, not in excess of the cumulative impairment
loss previously recognised in accordance with either HKAS 36 or HKFRS 5.
An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not allowed to be reversed in a subsequent period.
Collingwood Co (‘CC’) classified one of its divisions as a disposal group held for sale on 12 June
20X4 . On this date the fair value less costs to sell was determined to be $7 million less than its
carrying amount and this loss was allocated as follows:
Revised carrying
Carrying amount at amount at 12 June
12 June 20X4 Impairment loss 20X4
$'000 $'000 $'000
Goodwill 5,000 (5,000) -
Non-current assets 30,000 (2,000) 28,000
Current assets 13,750 13,750
Current liabilities (11,200) (11,200)
Total 37,550 (7,000) 30,550
The loss was recognised on 12 June 20X4 by:
DEBIT Impairment loss $7,000,000
CREDIT Assets held for disposal $7,000,000
104
At the year end of 31 December 20X4, the division had not yet been sold. The current assets of the
division were measured at $12.9 million and the current liabilities at $10 million. The fair value less
costs to sell of the division was $33 million.
Required
Calculate amounts to be recognised in the statement of financial position of CC at 31 December
20X4 in respect of the disposal group and explain your answer. You should also state any journal
entries required at the year end.
HKFRS 5.27 3.5 Measurement where assets are no longer classified as held
for sale or distribution
A non-current asset (or disposal group) that is no longer classified as held for sale (for example,
because the sale has not taken place within one year) is measured at the lower of:
(a) Its carrying amount before it was classified as held for sale, adjusted for any depreciation,
amortisation or revaluations that would have been charged had the asset not been classified
as held for sale
(b) Its recoverable amount at the date of the decision not to sell
HKFRS 5 was amended in 2014 to extend this treatment to apply to assets or disposal groups that
cease to be classified as held for distribution. The amendment is effective from 1 January 2016.
3.6 Reclassification
HKFRS 5.26A
HKFRS 5 was amended in 2014 (effective 1 January 2016) to address the situation where an asset
(or disposal group) classified as held for sale becomes held for distribution or vice versa.
In this situation, the change in classification is considered to be a continuation of the original plan of
disposal and the original date of classification as held for sale/distribution is not changed.
Therefore HKFRS 5’s classification, measurement and presentation requirements of the new
method of disposal apply:
 If reclassified as held for sale the asset (or disposal group) is measured at the lower of
carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.
 If reclassified as held for distribution the asset (or disposal group) is measured at the lower
of carrying amount and fair value less costs to distribute.
 Any reduction or increase in fair value less costs to sell (or distribute) are recognised as
discussed in sections 3.3 and 3.4.
Example: Reclassification
Reilly Co, a family owned-company, classified a property as held for sale in accordance with
HKFRS 5 at 31 December 20X4. The asset was measured at this date at $289,500, being its fair
value of $300,000 less costs to sell of $10,500. At 31 August 20X5, having been unable to locate a
buyer, the Board of the company agreed to distribute the property to the shareholders of Reilly Co.
At that date the fair value of the property was $295,000 and the costs to distribute it amounted to
$7,500.
Required
How is the reclassification of the property from held for sale to held for distribution accounted for?
105
Financial Reporting
Solution
 The property is measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to
distribute.
 The carrying amount of the property is $289,500 and the fair value less costs to distribute is
$287,500, therefore the property is measured at $287,500.
 The decrease in the carrying amount of the property is recognised as an impairment loss in
profit or loss.
 The journal to record the reclassification is therefore:
DEBIT Non-current asset held for $287,500
distribution
DEBIT Impairment loss $2,000
CREDIT Non-current asset held for sale $289,500
4 Presentation of assets held for sale or for distribution

to owners
HKFRS 5.38-
40
4.1 Presentation of a non-current asset or disposal group
classified as held for sale
Separate classifications are to be presented in the statement of financial position for non-current
assets and disposal groups. Likewise separate disclosure is also required for the liabilities of a
disposal group in the statement of financial position.
(a) Assets and liabilities held for sale should not be offset.
(b) The major classes of assets and liabilities held for sale should be separately disclosed
either in the statement of financial position or in the notes.
If the disposal group is a newly acquired subsidiary that meets the criteria to be classified as held
for sale on acquisition, disclosure of the major classes of assets and liabilities is not required.
Re-presentation of prior year comparatives is not required to reflect those assets classified as held
for sale only in the current year.
Example: Colway Co.

At the end of 20X9, Colway Co. decides to dispose of a machine and Division D of its business.
Division D is a disposal group. Both of these intended disposals meet the criteria to be classified as
held for sale, and their carrying amount after this classification is:
$'000
Machine 15
Non-current assets of Division D 340
Current assets of Division D 120
Liabilities of Division D 260
Presentation in the statement of financial position of Colway Co. is therefore as follows:
$'000 $'000
Non-current assets X X
Current assets X X
Non-current assets classified as held for sale 475 X
Total assets X X
106
Equity X X
Non-current liabilities X X
Current liabilities X X
Liabilities associated with non-current assets classified as
held for sale 260 X
Total equity and liabilities X X
HKFRS
5.41,42
4.2 Additional disclosures
The following disclosures are required when a non-current asset (or disposal group) is either
classified as held for sale or sold during a reporting period:
(a) A description of the non-current asset (or disposal group)
(b) A description of the facts and circumstances of the disposal
(c) Any gain or loss recognised when the item was classified as held for sale
(d) If applicable, the reportable segment in which the non-current asset (or disposal group) is
presented in accordance with HKFRS 8 Operating Segments
When an entity reclassifies an asset as no longer held for sale, it should disclose the facts and
circumstances leading to the decision and its resultant effect.
Example: Disclosure
Disposal Group held for sale
Part of a manufacturing facility within the Beverages segment is presented as a disposal group
held for sale following the commitment of the Company’s management on 18 August 20X6 to sell
part of the facility. Efforts to sell the disposal group have commenced and a sale is expected by
August 20X7.
An impairment loss of $12 million on the remeasurement of the disposal group to the lower of its
carrying amount and its fair value less costs to sell has been recognised in other expenses.
5 Discontinued operations
HKFRS 5.32 5.1 Definition of discontinued operations
A discontinued operation was defined at the start of this chapter as a component of an entity that
has either been disposed of, or is classified as held for sale, and:
(a) Represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations;
geographical area of operations; or
A component of an entity comprises operations and cash flows that can be clearly distinguished
from the rest of the entity, both operationally and for financial reporting purposes.
HKFRS 5 requires that the results of a discontinued operation are disclosed separately in order to
enable users of the financial statements to evaluate the financial effects of discontinued operations.
107
Financial Reporting
Discuss whether these situations meet the definition of discontinued operations in HKFRS 5.
(i) Wong Co. had used two factories to manufacture office equipment. A general slump in the
economy has resulted in a reduced demand for such equipment and the company has
decided to move all the production facilities to one of the factories but keep the now empty
factory in the hope that there will be an upturn in demand and require the return to two
factory output.
(ii) In addition to the manufacture of office equipment, Wong Co. supplied office stationery to
private education establishments. In order to raise much needed cash the office stationery
supply business was sold. The office stationery supply business was operated separately
from the manufacturing activities.
HKFRS 5.33-
35,37
5.2 Presentation of discontinued operations
An entity should disclose a single amount in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income comprising the total of:
(a) The post-tax profit or loss of discontinued operations; and
(b) The post-tax gain or loss recognised on the measurement to fair value less costs to sell
or on the disposal of the assets or disposal group(s) constituting the discontinued operation.
An entity should also disclose an analysis of the above single amount into:
(a) The revenue, expenses and pre-tax profit or loss of discontinued operations
(b) The related income tax expense
(c) The gain or loss recognised on the measurement to fair value less costs to sell or on the
disposal of the assets or the discontinued operation
(d) The related income tax expense
The analysis may be shown separately from continuing operations, in a section identified as
discontinued operations, in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. As an
alternative, it may also be presented in the notes to the financial statements. Such disclosure is not
necessary where the discontinued operation relates to a newly acquired subsidiary that has been
classified as held for sale.
Disclosures relating to the net cash flows attributable to the operating, investing and financing
activities of the discontinued operations may be presented on the face of the statement of cash
flows. Alternatively, they may be shown in the notes.
The required disclosures must be re-presented for prior periods presented in the financial
statements so that the disclosures relate to all operations that have been discontinued by the most
recent reporting date.
Any current year adjustments made to amounts previously presented in discontinued operations
and directly related to the disposal of a discontinued operation in a prior period are classified
separately in discontinued operations.
The gains or losses arising from the reassessment of a disposal group, which is held for sale and is
not a discontinued operation, should be incorporated in the profit or loss from continuing
operations.
108
Illustration
The following illustration is taken from the implementation guidance to HKFRS 5. Profit for the year
from discontinued operations would be analysed in the notes.
Smart Group
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9
20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Continuing operations
Revenue X X
Cost of sales (X) (X)
Gross profit X X
Other income X X
Distribution costs (X) (X)
Administrative expenses (X) (X)
Other expenses (X) (X)
Finance costs (X) (X)
Share of profit of associates X X
Profit before tax X X
Income tax expense (X) (X)
Profit for the year from continuing operations X X
Discontinued operations
Profit for the year from discontinued operations X X
Profit for the year X X
Period attributable to:
Owners of the parent X X
Non-controlling interest X X
X X
The analysis of the profit from discontinued operations may also be presented in a separate
column in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
109
Financial Reporting
A&Z
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR
ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X1
20X1 20X0
$'000 $'000
Revenue 3,000 2,200
Cost of sales (1,000) (700)
Gross profit 2,000 1,500
Distribution costs (400) (300)
Administrative expenses (900) (800)
Profit before tax 700 400
Income tax expense (210) (120)
Profit for the year 490 280
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 40 30
Total comprehensive income for the year 530 310
During the year the company ran down a material business operation with all activities ceasing on
26 December 20X1. The results of the operation for 20X0 and 20X1 were as follows:
20X1 20X0
$'000 $'000
Revenue 320 400
Cost of sales (150) (190)
Gross profit 170 210
Loss before tax (50) (10)
Income tax expense 15 3
Loss for the year (35) (7)
Total comprehensive income for the year (30) (3)
The company recognised a loss of $30,000 on initial classification of the assets of the discontinued
operation as held for sale, followed by a subsequent gain of $120,000 on their disposal in 20X1.
These have been netted against administrative expenses. The income tax rate applicable to profits
on continuing operations and tax savings on the discontinued operation's losses is 30%.
Required
Prepare the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
December 20X1 for A&Z complying with the provisions of HKFRS 5.
110
Topic recap
HKFRS 5 Non-Current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations
Non-current assets/disposal groups held Discontinued operations

for sale or distribution
Non-current asset/disposal group is Operation which is disposed of or held for

classified as held for sale/distribution if: sale and:
Available for immediate sale/distribution Represents a separate major
in present condition, and business/geographical area
The sale/distribution is highly probable: Is part of a plan to dispose of a separate
– Management committed to plan; major business/geographical area
– Active programme to locate Is a subsidiary acquired with a view to
buyer/initiate distribution; resale
– Marketed at reasonable price if sale;
– Sale/distribution expected to take
place < 12 months
– Unlikely that sale plan will be
changed.
Measurement Disclosure
Lower of carrying amount and fair value Disclose single amount in statement of profit
less costs to sell or distribute. or
comprehensive
loss and otherincome
comprehensive
comprising:income
comprising:
Post tax profit or loss of the
Postdiscontinued
tax profit or operations
loss of the discontinued
and
operations
Post taxand
gain or loss on
If FV less costs to sell/distribute < carrying Postdisposal/measurement
tax gain or loss on to fair
amount recognise impairment loss. In disposal/measurement
value less costs to sell.
to fair value less
disposal group set against: costs to sell.
1. goodwill
2. other assets on pro rata basis
No further depreciation/amortisation Disclose further analysis of the single amount

in the SPLOCI or notes.
Disclosure
Disclose net cash operating, investing and

financing cash flows of the discontinued
Disclose separately as current operation.
assets/current liabilities held for
sale/distribution without offsetting
Disclose separate classes of
assets/liabilities held for sale/distribution
111
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
1 (a) The manufacturing facility should be classified as held for sale. Although the sale will
not be completed within 12 months of classification, the delay is caused by
circumstances beyond Lawnmo’s control and Lawnmo is clearly committed to the sale.
(b) The building should not be classified as held for sale. The delay in transferring the
building to a buyer demonstrates that it is not available for immediate sale. This is the
case even if a firm purchase commitment were obtained.
2 In order to be held for sale an asset must be available for immediate sale in its present
condition and a sale must be highly probable.
At 1 July 20X9 the division is not available for immediate sale in its present condition and
therefore it does not meet the criteria specified in HKFRS 5 as being held for sale.
The division will only meet be available for immediate sale in its present condition when the
planned work has been completed. It may meet the criteria on 31 October when the work
has been completed.
Answer 2
The statement of financial position of CC at 31 December 20X4 will include:
 Assets held for sale of $42.9 million
 Liabilities associated with assets held for sale of $10 million
WORKING
Carrying Carrying
amount at 12 amount at 31 Reversal of Revised
June 20X4 December 20X4 impairment loss carrying amount
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Goodwill - - - -
Non-current assets 28,000 28,000 2,000 30,000
Current assets 13,750 12,900 - 12,900
Current liabilities (11,200) (10,000) - (10,000)
Total 30,550 30,900 2,000 32,900
The carrying amount of the disposal group at 31 December 20X4 is $30,900,000 (after
remeasuring the current assets and liabilities outside the scope of HKFRS 5 in accordance with
relevant standards).
The fair value less costs to sell is $33 million
The maximum impairment reversal is the lower of :
 The initial impairment of $7 million
 The $2.1million by which the fair value less costs to sell exceeds carrying amount.
Therefore the maximum impairment reversal is $2.1 million, however no reversal may be
recognised in respect of goodwill. Therefore $2 million is recognised in respect of non-current
assets by:
DEBIT Assets held for disposal $2,000,000
CREDIT Impairment loss $2,000,000
112
Answer 3
(i) The closure of the factory does not result in the disposal of a separate major line of business
or geographical area of operation nor is the factory being held for sale. The closure therefore
does not appear to result in a need to classify any of the performance of Wong Co. as
discontinued in these circumstances. Nothing has been discontinued, merely production
reduced to a more competitive level until demand returns.
(ii) The office stationery supply business will probably be considered to represent a separate
major line of business and should therefore be classified as a discontinued operation with
separate disclosure of its activities in the statement of profit or loss as required by HKFRS 5.
Its disposal will probably have been a single co-ordinated plan, further confirming the
business as a discontinued operation.
Answer 4
A&Z
20X1 20X0
$'000 $'000
Revenue (3,000 – 320)/(2,200 – 400) 2,680 1,800
Cost of sales (1,000 – 150)/(700 – 190) (850) (510)
Gross profit 1,830 1,290
Distribution costs (400 – 120)/(300 – 130) (280) (170)
Administrative expenses (900 – 100)/(800 – 90) (800) (710)
Income tax expense (210 + 15)/(120 + 3) (225) (123)
Profit for the year from continuing operations 525 287
Loss for the year from discontinued operations (35) (7)
Note: Discontinued operations

During the year the company ran down a material business operation with all activities ceasing on
26 December 20X1. The results of the operation were as follows:
20X1 20X0
$'000 $'000
Revenue 320 400
Administrative expenses (100 + 90) (190) (90)
Loss before tax (140) (10)
Income tax expense (15 + (90  30%)) 42 3
Loss after tax (98) (7)
Post-tax gain on remeasurement and subsequent
disposal of assets classified as held for sale (90  70%) 63 –
Loss for the year (35) (7)
Total comprehensive income for the year (30) (3)
113
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Disposal Groups 22 minutes

Super Shoes Limited (‘SS’) is the holding company of Rocket Running Limited (‘RR’) and Soft
Walking Limited (‘SW’). At the board meeting of SS on 30 June 20X9, the management decided to
dispose of all the assets of RR to an independent third party and close down the retailing operation
of SW by the end of October 20X9. The assets of RR and SW as at 30 June 20X9 are measured in
the consolidated financial statements before classification as held for sale and / or adjustment for
impairment as a result of sales/closure of operation, if applicable, as follows:
RR SW
HK$'000 HK$'000
Goodwill 2,400 2,700
Intangible assets 12,500 -
Property, plant and equipment 48,300 18,800
Inventories 16,600 6,400
Trade receivables 4,500 1,300
Financial assets held for trading 8,000 -
Total 92,300 29,200
Taking into consideration the range of the price offered by the potential buyer, the management
estimates that the fair value less costs to sell of the group of assets of RR amounts to
HK$85,000,000.
Almost all of the property, plant and equipment of SW are leasehold improvement of retailing shops
located at premises rented under operating leases which would be abandoned upon the early
termination of the lease terms. No proceeds are expected to be received even upon disposal.
SW would continue to sell its inventories but at an estimated discount of 40% of the cost. The
trade receivables are expected to be fully recovered.
Required
Explain and calculate the impairment loss to be made to each of the assets of RR and SW.
(12 marks)
HKICPA February 2010
114
chapter 5
Property, plant and

equipment
Topic list
1 HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment

1.1 Scope
1.2 Definitions
1.3 Recognition of non-current assets
1.4 Measurement
1.5 Depreciation
1.6 Revaluations
1.7 Impairment
1.8 Retirements and disposals
1.9 Disclosure
Learning focus
Non-current assets form a large part of many entities' statements of financial position.
Accounting for them is not necessarily straightforward and you may need to think critically and
deal with controversial issues. This chapter deals with property, plant and equipment; how to
account for transactions involving them, and the principles and methods of depreciation.
115
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.08 Property, plant and equipment 3
3.08.01 Identify the non-current assets which fall within or outside the scope
of HKAS 16
3.08.02 State and apply the recognition rules in respect of property, plant
and equipment
3.08.03 Determine the initial measurement of property, plant and
equipment, including assets acquired by exchange or transfer
3.08.04 Determine the accounting treatment of subsequent expenditure on
3.08.05 Determine the available methods to measure property, plant and
equipment subsequent to initial recognition
3.08.06 Account for the revaluation of property, plant and equipment
3.08.07 Define 'useful life' and allocate an appropriate useful life for an
asset in a straightforward scenario
3.08.08 Explain the different methods of depreciation: straight line and
diminishing balance, and calculate the depreciation amount in
respect of different types of asset
3.08.09 Account for the disposal of property, plant and equipment
3.08.10 Disclose relevant information relating to property, plant and
equipment in the financial statements
116
5: Property, plant and equipment | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment

Topic highlights
HKAS 16 covers all aspects of accounting for property, plant and equipment. This represents the
bulk of items which are ‘tangible’ non-current assets.
HKAS 16.2,3 1.1 Scope

HKAS 16 should be followed when accounting for property, plant and equipment unless another
accounting standard requires a different treatment.
HKAS 16 does not apply to the following:
(a) Property, plant and equipment classified as held for sale in accordance with HKFRS 5
(b) Biological assets related to agricultural activity, other than bearer plants
(c) The recognition and measurement of exploration and evaluation assets
(d) Mineral rights and mineral reserves, such as oil, gas and other non-regenerative resources
However, the standard applies to property, plant and equipment used to develop the assets
described in (b) and (d).
HKAS 16.6 1.2 Definitions

The standard gives a large number of definitions.
Key terms
Property, plant and equipment are tangible items that are:
 Held for use in the production or supply of goods or services, for rental to others, or for
administrative purposes
 Expected to be used during more than one period
A bearer plant is a living plant that:
(a) Is used in the production or supply of agricultural produce
(b) Is expected to bear produce for more than one period
(c) Has a remote likelihood of being sold as agricultural produce except for individual scrap sales.
Cost is the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of other consideration given to
acquire an asset at the time of its acquisition or construction.
Residual value is the estimated amount that an entity would currently obtain from disposal of the
asset, after deducting the estimated costs of disposal, if the asset were already of the age and in
the condition expected at the end of its useful life.
Entity specific value is the present value of the cash flows an entity expects to arise from the
continuing use of an asset and from its disposal at the end of its useful life, or expects to incur
when settling a liability.
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an
Carrying amount is the amount at which an asset is recognised after deducting any accumulated
depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.
An impairment loss is the amount by which the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its
recoverable amount.
Recoverable amount is the higher of an asset's fair value less costs to sell and its value in use.
(HKAS 16)
117
Financial Reporting
HKAS 16 was amended in 2014 to add the definition of a bearer plant, as listed above. Examples
of bearer plants include grapevines, fruit trees and tea bushes, all of which are used to produce
harvests that can be sold. As a result of the amendment, bearer plants are now within the scope of
HKAS 16 and accounted for as property, plant and equipment. Previously, such plants were within
the scope of HKAS 41 Agriculture.
HKAS 16.7
1.3 Recognition of non-current assets
An item of property, plant and equipment should be recognised in the statement of financial
position as an asset when:
(a) It is probable that future economic benefits associated with the asset will flow to the entity.
(b) The cost of the asset to the entity can be measured reliably.
1.3.1 First criterion: Future economic benefits
The degree of certainty attached to the flow of future economic benefits must be assessed. This
should be based on the evidence available at the date of initial recognition (usually the date of
purchase). The entity should thus be assured that it will receive the rewards attached to the asset
and it will incur the associated risks, which will only generally be the case when the rewards and
risks have actually passed to the entity. Until then, the asset should not be recognised.
1.3.2 Second criterion: Cost measured reliably
It is generally easy to measure the cost of an asset as the transfer amount on purchase, i.e. what
was paid for it. Self-constructed assets can also be measured easily by adding together the
purchase price of all the constituent parts (labour, materials and so on) paid to external parties.
HKAS 1.3.3 Application to specific types of asset
16.8,9,11,13,14
Small separate assets
Although HKAS 16 provides criteria that must be met in order for an item of property, plant or
equipment to be recognised as an asset, it does not prescribe a unit of measurement for
recognition i.e. what value an item should have in order to be recognised as an asset rather than
expensed. Smaller items, such as tools, dies and moulds, are sometimes classified as
consumables and written off as an expense. Where these are classified as property, plant and
equipment, it is usual to aggregate similar items together and treat them as one.
Spare parts and stand-by equipment
Spare parts, stand-by equipment and servicing equipment are recognised as property, plant and
equipment when they meet the definition of property, plant and equipment. Otherwise they are
classified as inventory.
Safety and environmental equipment
When items of safety and environmental equipment are acquired they will qualify for recognition
where they enable the entity to obtain future economic benefits from related assets in excess of
those it would obtain otherwise. The recognition will only be to the extent that the carrying amount
of the asset and related assets does not exceed the total recoverable amount of these assets.
Complex assets
For very large and specialised items, an apparently single asset should be broken down into its
composite parts. This occurs where the different parts have different useful lives and different
depreciation rates are applied to each part, e.g. an aircraft, where the body and engines are
separated as they have different useful lives. Expenditure incurred in replacing or renewing a
component of an item of property, plant and equipment must be recognised in the carrying amount
of the item (and then depreciated to the next replacement date).
118
Inspections and overhauls

Certain assets require periodic overhauls or inspections in order to operate. The cost of these
overhauls/inspections should be included in the carrying amount of the relevant asset and
depreciated as a separate element of the asset to the date of the next overhaul/inspection.
HKAS 16.12 1.3.4 Subsequent expenditure
Subsequent expenditure on a non-current asset may be capitalised where the expenditure
enhances the economic benefits of the asset beyond its current standard or performance. This may
be achieved through extension of the asset's life, improved quality of output or an increased
operating capacity. Day to day servicing costs, repairs and maintenance do not meet this criteria
and therefore must be expensed to profit or loss.
1.4 Measurement
HKAS 16.15- 1.4.1 Initial measurement
22
Once an item of property, plant and equipment qualifies for recognition as an asset, it will initially
be measured at cost.
The standard lists the components of the cost of an item of property, plant and equipment.
(a) Purchase price, less any trade discount or rebate
(b) Import duties and non-refundable purchase taxes
(c) Directly attributable costs of bringing the asset to working condition for its intended use,
for example:
(i) The cost of site preparation
(ii) Initial delivery and handling costs
(iii) Installation costs
(iv) Testing
(v) Professional fees (architects, engineers)
(d) Initial estimate of the unavoidable cost of dismantling and removing the asset and restoring the
site on which it is located (HKAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets)
(e) Any borrowing costs incurred related to building the asset may be capitalised within the
assets too (HKAS 23 Borrowing Costs)
Additional guidance is provided on directly attributable costs included in the cost of an item of
property, plant and equipment.
(a) These costs bring the asset to the location and working conditions necessary for it to be
capable of operating in the manner intended by management, including those costs to test
whether the asset is functioning properly.
(b) They are determined after deducting the net proceeds from selling any items produced when
bringing the asset to its location and condition.
The standard also states that income and related expenses of operations that are incidental to the
construction or development of an item of property, plant and equipment should be recognised in
profit or loss. These include:
 Costs of opening a new facility
 Costs of introducing a new product or service
 Costs of conducting business in a new location or with a new class of customer
 Administration and other general overhead costs
119
Financial Reporting
In addition, the capitalisation of costs must cease when an asset is in the location and condition
necessary for it to be capable of normal operation. Therefore, the following may not be capitalised:
 Costs incurred when an item is capable of normal use however is operating at less than full
capacity
 Initial operating losses
 The costs of relocating or reorganising the entity's operations
All of these will be recognised as an expense rather than an asset.
In the case of self-constructed assets, the same principles are applied as for acquired assets.
If the entity makes similar assets during the normal course of business for sale externally, then the
cost of the asset will be the cost of its production under HKAS 2 Inventories. This also means that
abnormal costs (wasted material, labour or other resources) are excluded from the cost of the asset.
An example of a self-constructed asset is when a building company builds its own head office.
As part of a plan to diversify its product range, Flame Imports Co (‘FIC’) began construction of a
new distribution warehouse near to one of the container terminals at the Port of Hong Kong on 1
November 20X3. The costs incurred in respect of this property were as follows:
$’000
Site selection 260
Legal costs of acquiring site 340
Site preparation 1,320
Architects’ Fees 450
Construction materials 2,720
Construction labour 2,400
Proportion of FIC administrative costs allocated to project 190
The amount billed by the architects includes $125,000 in relation to original blueprints drawn up.
These blueprints were scrapped when the directors of FIC instructed the architects to revise their
plans in order to make the building as environmentally friendly as possible.
In line with the green credentials of the new building, FIC have installed solar panels on the roof of
the warehouse at a cost of $ 350,000. A further $ 20,000 was spent on having the building certified
as eco-friendly by the Hong Kong Green Building Council (HKGBC). The directors of FIC decided
to obtain this certification in order to boost their credentials as a sustainable company and so that
they could refer to it within their sustainability report.
The solar panels are expected to last 20 years before they will require replacement; the HKGBC
certificate must be renewed every 5 years. The property was completed on 12 March 20X4 and
brought into use on 1 April 20X4.
FIC depreciates property over a 50 year useful life.
Required
Calculate and explain the initial measurement of the new warehouse.
HKAS 16.24 1.4.2 Exchanges of assets

HKAS 16 specifies that exchange of items of property, plant and equipment, regardless of whether
the assets are similar, are measured at fair value, unless the exchange transaction lacks
commercial substance or the fair value of neither of the assets exchanged can be measured
reliably. If the acquired item is not measured at fair value, its cost is measured at the carrying
amount of the asset given up.
120
Example: Exchange of assets

A ship owner has properties with a carrying value of $10m. He is going to exchange his properties
for a ship which has a market value of $20m by paying an additional sum of cash of $5m.
Solution
The ship owner shall capitalise the ship at a value of $20m. The properties are deemed to be
disposed of at $15m ($20m – $5m), thus a gain of $5m ($15m – $10m) is recognised on disposal
of the properties.
Expressed as journal entries, we can see:
$m $m
DEBIT Property, plant and equipment (Ship) 20
CREDIT Gain on disposal 5
Property, plant and equipment (Properties) 10
Cash 5
HKAS 1.4.3 Measurement subsequent to initial recognition

16.30,31
HKAS 16 offers two possible treatments here, requiring you to choose between keeping an asset
recorded at cost or revaluing it to fair value.
(a) Cost model. Carry the asset at its cost less any accumulated depreciation and any
accumulated impairment losses.
(b) Revaluation model. Carry the asset at a revalued amount, being its fair value at the date of
the revaluation less any subsequent accumulated depreciation and subsequent accumulated
impairment losses. HKAS 16 makes clear that the revaluation model is available only if
the fair value of the item can be measured reliably.
Depreciation, revaluation and impairment are discussed in more detail in the next three sections of
the chapter.
1.5 Depreciation
Topic highlights
Where assets held by an entity have a limited useful life to that entity it is necessary to apportion
the value of an asset over its useful life.
With the exception of land held on freehold or very long leasehold, every non-current asset
eventually wears out over time. Machines, cars and other vehicles, fixtures and fittings, and even
buildings do not last for ever. When a business acquires a non-current asset, it will have some idea
about how long its useful life will be, and it might decide what to do with it.
(a) Keep on using the non-current asset until it becomes completely worn out, useless, and
worthless.
(b) Sell off the non-current asset at the end of its useful life, either by selling it as a
second-hand item or as scrap.
Since a non-current asset has a cost, and a limited useful life, and its value eventually declines, it
follows that a charge should be made in profit or loss to reflect the use that is made of the asset by
the business. This charge is called depreciation.
Depreciation must be charged even where an asset appears to be increasing in value over time.
Other than assets classified as held for sale, to which HKFRS 5 applies, the only type of asset for
which non-depreciation is permissible is freehold land.
121
Financial Reporting
Key terms
Depreciation is the systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an asset over its useful life.
HKAS 16.6
Depreciable assets are assets which:
 Are expected to be used during more than one accounting period
 Have a limited useful life
 Are held by an entity for use in the production or supply of goods and services, for rental to
others, or for administrative purposes.
Useful life is one of two things:
 The period over which an asset is expected to be available for use by an entity.
 The number of production or similar units expected to be obtained from the asset by an entity.
Depreciable amount is the cost of an asset, or other amount substituted for cost, less its residual
value.
HKAS 1.5.1 The mechanics of depreciation

16.48,50,55,
58,60 The standard states the following:
(a) The depreciable amount of an item of property, plant and equipment should be allocated on
a systematic basis over its useful life.
(b) The depreciation method used should reflect the pattern in which the asset's economic
benefits are consumed by the entity.
(c) The depreciation charge for each period should be recognised as an expense unless it is
included in the carrying amount of another asset.
Land and buildings are dealt with separately even when they are acquired together because land
use right normally is considered as a lease and accounted for in accordance with the requirements
under HKAS 17. Buildings do have a limited life and must be depreciated. Any increase in the
value of land on which a building is standing will have no impact on the determination of the
building's useful life.
Depreciation is usually treated as an expense, but not where it is absorbed by the entity in the
process of producing other assets. For example, depreciation of plant and machinery can be
incurred in the production of goods for sale (inventory items). In such circumstances, the
depreciation is included in the cost of the new assets produced.
Depreciation should commence when an asset is available for use. In other words it is in the
location and condition necessary for ordinary use. It does not cease when an asset becomes idle,
unless the asset is already fully depreciated or has been classified as held for sale.
HKAS 1.5.2 Useful life
16.56,57
The useful life of a depreciable asset is estimated based on the following factors:
 Expected physical wear and tear
 Obsolescence
 Legal or other limits on the use of the assets
The judgment on useful life is based on the entity's past experience with similar assets or classes
of assets. The task of estimating the useful life will be much more onerous when an entirely new
type of asset is acquired (i.e. through technological advancement or through use in producing a
brand new product or service).
It is indicated in the standard that the useful life of an asset might be shorter than its physical life.
The physical wear and tear the asset is likely to endure is one of the key factors that we need to
look at. It is affected by circumstances such as the entity's repair and maintenance programme and
number of shifts for which the asset will be used, and so on. Other factors such as obsolescence
122
(due to technological advance, improvements in production, reduction in demand for the product or
service produced by the asset) and legal restrictions, for example, the length of a related lease,
also play a role in determining the useful life of an asset.
Waitco acquires a computer system for use in its administration office on 1 July 20X4. The supplier
of the computer system has asserted that it will continue to operate at its full potential for at least
five full years. Waitco expects to continue with its policy of renewing all IT equipment used in the
business after a three-year period. After three years, Waitco usually sells its computers and other
hardware back to the supplier, who refurbishes the items before selling them to education
establishments. Such establishments will ordinarily benefit from the equipment for a further eight
years.
Required
Determine an appropriate useful life for the purpose of the calculation of depreciation by Waitco,
and explain your conclusion.
HKAS 16.53 1.5.3 Residual value

The residual value of an asset is likely to be immaterial in most instances. However, if the
residual value is expected to be significant, it must then be estimated at the date of acquisition or at
any subsequent revaluation. The residual value should be estimated based on the current situation
with other similar assets, used in the same way, which are now at the end of their useful lives. Any
future cost relating to the disposal should be netted off against the gross residual value.
HKAS 1.5.4 Depreciation methods
16.60,62, 62A
HKAS 16 requires the depreciation method used to reflect the pattern in which the asset's future
economic benefits are expected to be consumed by the entity.
A 2014 amendment to HKAS 16 clarified that a depreciation method based on the revenue
generated by use of the asset is not appropriate. For example a machine costing $120,000 may be
expected to produce goods for 3 years generating half of total revenue earned in the first year and
then a quarter in each subsequent year. In this case it would not be appropriate to charge
depreciation of $60,000 in the first year and then $30,000 in each subsequent year based on the
proportion of total revenue generated. This is not appropriate because revenue generated is
affected by factors other than the consumption of the asset, e.g. price inflation and sales and
marketing activities. This amendment is effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2016.
A variety of methods are appropriate, and these include the straight line method, the diminishing
balance method and the units of production method.
Straight line depreciation results in a constant annual depreciation charge. This method simply
spreads the depreciable amount evenly over the useful life.
Diminishing balance depreciation results in a higher depreciation charge in the earlier years of
an asset's useful life and a lower charge in later years. It is calculated as a constant percentage of
an asset's carrying amount.
The units of production method results in a charge based on expected output. The charge is
therefore higher in periods of higher output and lower when there is a lower output.
Consistency is important. The depreciation method selected should be applied consistently from
period to period unless altered circumstances justify a change. When the method is changed, the
effect should be quantified and disclosed and the reason for the change should be stated. Change
of policy is not allowed simply because of the profitability situation of the entity.
123
Financial Reporting
A computer system cost $20,000 and is being depreciated at 10% using the diminishing balance
method.
Required
(a) What journal entries are required to record depreciation in the first two years of ownership?
(b) How does this asset appear in the statement of financial position in the first and second year
of ownership?
(c) Why is the diminishing balance method more appropriate for such an asset?
DSyne Co acquired an item of plant for $1.8m on 1 January 20X1. It identified that the asset had
three major components as follows:
Component Useful life Cost
$'000
1 15 years 900
2 5 years 650
3 10 years 250
Under the terms of the 15-year licence agreement for the use of the plant, component 1 (but not
the other components) was to be dismantled at the end of the licence period.
Dismantling costs were initially estimated at a total cost of $280,000 payable in 15 years' time.
DSyne’s discount rate appropriate to the risk specific to this liability is 7% per annum.
Component 1 developed a fault on 1 January 20X2 and had to be sold for scrap for $140,000.
A replacement was purchased at a cost of $910,000 on 1 January 20X2, for use until the end of the
licence period, when dismantling costs on this component estimated at $250,000 would be
payable.
At a rate of 7% per annum the present value of $1 payable in 15 years' time is 0.3624 and of $1
payable in 14 years' time is 0.3878.
Required
Calculate
(a) The carrying amount of the machinery at 31 December 20X1
(b) The profit/loss on the disposal of the faulty component
(c) The carrying amount of the machinery at 31 December 20X2
HKAS 16.51 1.5.5 Review of useful life and residual value

A review of the useful life and residual value of property, plant and equipment should be carried
out at least at each financial year end and the depreciation charge for the current and future
periods should be adjusted if expectations have changed significantly from previous estimates.
Changes to the useful life or residual value are treated as changes in accounting estimates and are
accounted for prospectively as adjustments to future depreciation.
Example: Review of useful life

A machine costs $100,000 and has a useful life of 10 years since its acquisition in 20X7. At the end
of the second year of use, the asset is assessed to have a remaining useful life of five years. The
company adopts the straight line depreciation method.
What will be the depreciation charge for 20X9?
124
Solution
$
Original cost 100,000
Depreciation 20X7 – 20X8 (100,000  2/10) (20,000)
Carrying amount at 1 January 20X9 80,000
Remaining life = 5 years
80,000
Depreciation charge years 20X9 – 20Y3 = $16,000
5
HKAS 16.61 1.5.6 Review of depreciation method

The depreciation method should also be reviewed at least at each financial year end and, if
there has been a significant change in the expected pattern of economic benefits from those
assets, the method should be changed to suit this changed pattern. When such a change in
depreciation method takes place the change should be accounted for as a change in accounting
estimate and the depreciation charge for the current and future periods should be adjusted.
Example: Review of depreciation method

Using the same data as above, assume that at the end of the second year the company changes
from the straight line method to the diminishing balance method of depreciation, at a rate of 25%
per annum.
The carrying amount of $80,000 is therefore written off from 20X9 onwards using the diminishing
balance method over its remaining useful life.
The depreciation charge for 20X9 is therefore $20,000 (25%  $80,000).
HKAS 16.31 1.6 Revaluations

Where an entity chooses to apply the revaluation model to property, plant and equipment, the
revalued assets are carried at a revalued amount less subsequent depreciation and impairment
losses. Revalued amount is the fair value of the asset at the date of revaluation.
1.6.1 Fair value
Fair value is defined by HKAS 16 as 'the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to
transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date'.
This definition is that provided by HKFRS 13, and where the revaluation model is applied, fair value
should be determined by reference to that standard. Further detail on the determination of fair
value is provided in Chapter 19.
HKAS 16.34 1.6.2 Frequency of revaluations
Valuations must be kept up to date so that the carrying amount of a revalued asset does not differ
materially from its fair value. In some cases annual revaluation is necessary, whereas in others it
may be necessary to revalue the item only every three or five years.
HKAS 1.6.3 Consistency of revaluation
16.36,38
When an item of property, plant and equipment is revalued, the whole class of assets to which it
belongs should be revalued.
All items within a class should be revalued simultaneously. In this way, selective revaluation of
certain assets and disclosure of a mixture of costs and values from different dates in the financial
statements can be avoided. Entities are permitted to have revaluation on a rolling basis if the
125
Financial Reporting
revaluations are kept up to date and the revaluation of the entire class is accomplished in a short
period of time.
HKAS 1.6.4 Accounting for a revaluation
16.39,40
How should any increase in value be treated when a revaluation takes place? The debit will be
the increase in value in the statement of financial position, but what about the credit? HKAS 16
requires the increase to be credited to other comprehensive income and accumulated in a
revaluation surplus (i.e. part of owners' equity), unless the increase is reversing a previous
decrease which was recognised as an expense. Where this is the case, the increase is recognised
as income to the extent of the previous expense; any excess is then taken to the revaluation
surplus.
A decrease in value is recognised in the same way as an impairment loss (see section 1.7 below).
Example: Revaluation
Paddington has acquired numerous buildings and accounts for these using the revaluation model.
One particular piece of land is carried in Paddington’s statement of financial position at $560,000 at
1 January 20X1. At 31 December 20X1, further to a revaluation exercise, a fair value of $710,000
is identified in respect of this building.
How is this revaluation accounted for assuming that:
(a) The buildings have only ever risen in value
(b) Further to an economic downturn, at the time of the last revaluation exercise, an impairment
of $80,000 was identified and recognised in profit
Ignore depreciation.
Solution
(a) The double entry is:
$ $
DEBIT Buildings 150,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income (revaluation surplus) 150,000
(b) The double entry is:

$ $
DEBIT Buildings 150,000
CREDIT Administrative expenses (profit or loss) 80,000
Other comprehensive income (revaluation surplus) 70,000
Note: The line item for the credit to profit or loss is not specified in the standard, but it is generally
made to the same account as any depreciation and other costs relating to the buildings.
The case is similar for a decrease in value on revaluation. Any decrease should be recognised as
an expense, except where it offsets a previous increase taken as a revaluation surplus in owners'
equity. Any decrease greater than the previous upwards increase in value must be taken as an
expense in profit or loss.
Example: Revaluation decrease

Rupert Co. acquired a building for an original cost of $3.5 million at the start of 20X1. It was
revalued upwards to $3.8 million in January 20X3. The value has now fallen to $3 million at
31 December 20X3.
How should the decrease in value be recorded at 31 December 20X3?
126
Solution
The double entry is:
$ $
DEBIT Other comprehensive income (revaluation surplus) 300,000
Administrative expenses (profit or loss) 500,000
CREDIT Building 800,000
1.6.5 Depreciation of revalued assets

Where a depreciated asset is revalued, future depreciation is calculated based on the revalued
amount. One effect of an upwards revaluation is therefore an increase to the depreciation charge.
Normally, a revaluation surplus is only realised when the asset is sold, but when it is being
depreciated, part of that surplus is being realised as the asset is used. The amount of the surplus
realised is the difference between depreciation charged on the revalued amount and the (lower)
depreciation which would have been charged on the asset's original cost. This amount can be
transferred to retained (i.e. realised) earnings. This transfer is effected in the statement of
changes in equity; it is not reflected in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income.
Example: Revaluation and depreciation

Roosevelt Co. purchased a property on 1 January 20X1. Details are as follows:
 Cost $9 million
 Useful life 50 years
On 1 January 20X6 the property was revalued to $8.5 million, with the useful life unchanged.
(a) Account for the revaluation.
(b) Calculate depreciation for the year ended 31 December 20X6 and the amount that may be
transferred to retained earnings from the revaluation surplus in that year.
Solution
(a) On 1 January 20X6 the carrying value of the property is $9m – (5  $9m  50) = $8.1m.
For the revaluation:
$ $
DEBIT Asset value 400,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income (revaluation surplus) 400,000
(b) The depreciation for the year ended 31 December 20X6 will be $8.5m  45 = $188,889,
compared to depreciation on cost of $9m  50 = $180,000. So each year, the extra $8,889
can be treated as part of the surplus which has become realised:
$ $
DEBIT Revaluation surplus 8,889
CREDIT Retained earnings 8,889
This is a movement on owners' equity only, disclosed in the statement of changes in equity.
1.7 Impairment
An impairment loss should be treated in the same way as a revaluation decrease i.e. the
decrease should be recognised as an expense. However, a revaluation decrease (or impairment
loss) should be charged directly against any related revaluation surplus to the extent that the
decrease does not exceed the amount held in the revaluation surplus in respect of that same asset.
127
Financial Reporting
A reversal of an impairment loss should be treated in the same way as a revaluation increase,
i.e. a revaluation increase should be recognised as income to the extent that it reverses a
revaluation decrease or an impairment loss of the same asset previously recognised as an
expense.
HKAS 16.68 1.8 Retirements and disposals

When an asset is permanently withdrawn from use, or sold or scrapped, and no future
economic benefits are expected from its disposal, it should be withdrawn from the statement of
financial position.
Gains or losses are the difference between the estimated net disposal proceeds and the carrying
amount of the asset. They should be recognised as income or expense in profit or loss.
HKAS 1.8.1 Derecognition
16.67,68,68A
An entity is required to derecognise the carrying amount of an item of property, plant or
equipment that it disposes of on the date the criteria for the sale of goods in HKAS 18 Revenue
would be met. This also applies to parts of an asset.
An entity cannot classify as revenue a gain it realises on the disposal of an item of property, plant
and equipment.
However, an entity that, in the course of its ordinary activities, routinely sells items of property,
plant and equipment that it has held for rental to others shall transfer such assets to inventories at
their carrying amount when they cease to be rented and become held for sale. The proceeds from
the sale of such assets shall be recognised as revenue in accordance with HKAS 18 Revenue.
HKFRS 5 does not apply when assets that are held for sale in the ordinary course of business are
transferred to inventories.
Example: Derecognition
A property was purchased at a cost of $10m and has a useful life of 50 years. At the end of
Year 20, the property was revalued to $30m and its useful life remains unchanged. The property
was sold at the beginning of Year 22 for $33m.
Solution
Accounting entries:
At the end of Year 20, the following accounting entries reflect the revaluation:
$m $m
30
DEBIT Property ($30m – ( /50  $10m)) 24
CREDIT Revaluation surplus 24
In Year 21, the following adjustments are to be made:

$m
Depreciation based on revalued amount ($30m  1/30) 1.0
Depreciation based on original cost ($10m  1/50) 0.2
Depreciation increase related to revaluation surplus is regarded as realised 0.8
DEBIT Revaluation surplus 0.8

CREDIT Retained profits 0.8
Being realisation of part of revaluation reserve due to additional depreciation provided on
revaluation surplus.
128
In Year 22, the following adjustments are to be made:

$m $m
DEBIT Bank (disposal proceeds) 33
Accumulated depreciation 1
CREDIT Property 30
Gain on disposal (in profit or loss) 4
Being revalued property disposed of at a profit
DEBIT Revaluation reserve ($24m – $0.8m) 23.2
CREDIT Retained profit 23.2
Being realisation of revaluation reserve upon disposal of asset.

The following analysis shows that the distributable profits remain the same, whether the property is
revalued or not:
$m
Without revaluation of the asset
Cost 10.0
Less accumulated depreciation ($0.2  21 years) (4.2)
Carrying amount 5.8
Disposal proceeds (33.0)
Profit realised on disposal 27.2
$m
With revaluation of the asset
Gain on disposal (as above) 4.0
Revaluation surplus transferred to retained profits 23.2
27.2
A business purchased two rivet making machines on 1 January 20X5 at a cost of $15,000 each.
Each had an estimated life of five years and a nil residual value. The straight line method of
depreciation is used.
Owing to an unforeseen slump in market demand for rivets, the business decided to reduce its
output of rivets, and switch to making other products instead. On 31 March 20X7, one rivet making
machine was sold (on credit) to a buyer for $8,000.
Later in the year, however, it was decided to abandon production of rivets altogether, and the
second machine was sold on 1 December 20X7 for $2,500 cash.
Required
Prepare the machinery account, provision for depreciation of machinery account and disposal of
machinery account for the accounting year to 31 December 20X7.
Otley Chevin Co ('OCC') acquired a new head office building on 30 September 20X3, and as a
result, the old head office was sold on this date for $39 million. A buyer had been identified some
months earlier and as a result the sale transaction was made immediately on 30 September 20X3.
Prior to this, the property had not been classified as held for sale as it had been occupied by a
subsidiary of OCC, which was itself awaiting the completion of a new property.
This old head office property had been owned since 1 July 20W2, had an original cost of $24
million and was depreciated over a period of 50 years. On 1 April 20X2 the company decided to
129
Financial Reporting
change their accounting policy for property and adopt the revaluation model. The fair value of the
old head office at this date was $38 million. The total useful life of the property remained
unchanged. The fair value of the property had not changed substantially since the date of the
revaluation.
OCC has a policy of maximising distributable reserves, making an annual reserves transfer for
excess depreciation on revalued assets. Its reporting date is 31 March.
Required
(a) Explain the accounting treatment applied to the old head office building throughout the
period that it has been owned by OCC.
(b) Provide extracts from the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and
the statement of changes in equity in the year ended 31 March 20X4 in respect of the
disposal of the old head office.
Note: You should work to the nearest $’000.
HKAS
16.73,74,77,
1.9 Disclosure
79 The standard has a long list of disclosure requirements, for each class of property, plant and
equipment.
(a) Measurement bases for determining the gross carrying amount (if more than one, the gross
carrying amount for that basis in each category).
(b) Depreciation methods used.
(c) Useful lives or depreciation rates used.
(d) Gross carrying amount and accumulated depreciation (aggregated with accumulated
impairment losses) at the beginning and end of the period.
(e) Reconciliation of the carrying amount at the beginning and end of the period showing:
(i) Additions
(ii) Disposals
(iii) Acquisitions through business combinations (see Chapter 28)
(iv) Increases/decreases during the period from revaluations and from impairment losses
(v) Impairment losses recognised in profit or loss
(vi) Impairment losses reversed in profit or loss
(vii) Depreciation
(viii) Net exchange differences (from translation of statements of foreign entity)
(ix) Any other movements.
The financial statements should also disclose the following:
(a) Any recoverable amounts of property, plant and equipment
(b) Existence and amounts of restrictions on title, and items pledged as security for liabilities
(c) Accounting policy for the estimated costs of restoring the site
(d) Amount of expenditures on account of items in the course of construction
(e) Amount of commitments to acquisitions
Revalued assets require further disclosures, in addition to those required by HKFRS 13 Fair Value
Measurement (see Chapter 19):
(a) Basis used to revalue the assets
(b) Effective date of the revaluation
(c) Whether an independent valuer was involved
130
(d) Carrying amount of each class of property, plant and equipment that would have been
included in the financial statements had the assets been carried at cost less accumulated
depreciation and accumulated impairment losses
(e) Revaluation surplus, indicating the movement for the period and any restrictions on the
distribution of the balance to shareholders
The standard also encourages disclosure of additional information, which the users of financial
statements may find useful.
(a) The carrying amount of temporarily idle property, plant and equipment
(b) The gross carrying amount of any fully depreciated property, plant and equipment that is still
in use
(c) The carrying amount of property, plant and equipment retired from active use and held for
disposal
(d) The fair value of property, plant and equipment when this is materially different from the
carrying amount
Illustration
The following illustration shows the format that is commonly used to disclose non-current assets
movements
Accounting policies
Land and buildings held for use in the production or supply of goods or services or for
administrative purposes are stated in the statement of financial position at their revalued amounts,
being the fair value at the date of the revaluation less any subsequent accumulated depreciation
and impairment losses. Revaluations are performed with sufficient regularity such that the carrying
amount does not differ materially from that which would be determined using fair values at the
reporting date.
Revaluation surpluses are recognised as other comprehensive income and accumulated in a
revaluation reserve, except to the extent that they reverse a previous impairment loss, in which
case they are recognised in profit or loss.
Plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and any recognised
impairment loss.
Freehold land is not depreciated; depreciation is recognised so as to write off the cost or valuation
of assets (other than freehold land) less their residual values over their useful lives on the following
bases:
 Buildings over 50 years
 Plant and equipment over a period of 5 to 15 years
The gain or loss arising on the disposal of an asset is determined as the difference between the
sales proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and is recognised in income.
Property, plant and machinery
Land and Plant and
buildings equipment Total
$’000 $’000 $’000
Cost or valuation
At 1 January 20X8 40,000 10,000 50,000
Revaluation surplus 12,000 – 12,000
Additions in year – 4,000 4,000
Disposals in year – (1,000) (1,000)
At 31 December 20X8 52,000 13,000 65,000
131
Financial Reporting
Land and Plant and

buildings equipment Total
$’000 $’000 $’000
Depreciation
At 1 January 20X8 10,000 6,000 16,000
Charge for year 1,000 3,000 4,000
Eliminated on disposals – (500) (500)
At 31 December 20X8 11,000 8,500 19,500
Carrying amount
At 31 December 20X8 41,000 4,500 45,500
At 1 January 20X8 30,000 4,000 34,000
Freehold land and buildings with a carrying amount of $18 million have been pledged to secure
borrowings of the Company. The Company is not allowed to pledge these assets as security for
other borrowings or to sell them to another entity.
Land and buildings were revalued at 31 December 20X8 by James & Tripp Valuers, independent
valuers not connected with the Company, on the basis of market value.
At 31 December 20X8, had the land and buildings been carried at historical cost less accumulated
depreciation and accumulated impairment losses, their carrying amount would have been
approximately $23 million.
The revaluation surplus is disclosed in note X.
132
Topic recap
HEADING
HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment
Recognise an asset when:

1. it is probable that future economic benefits
associated with the asset will flow to the
entity and
2. the cost of the asset can be measured reliably.
Subsequent expenditure is recognised as an asset only

where it enhances the benefits of the asset.
Initial Subsequent measurement Depreciation

measurement
Cost model Revaluation model
Measured at cost Carrying amount = Carrying amount = Allocate depreciable

including: cost – accumulated revalued amount – amount (revalued
Purchase price depreciation – accumulated amount) less residual
duties and accumulated depreciation – value over useful life.
taxes impairment losses. accumulated
Directly impairment losses. Land usually not
attributable depreciated.
costs
Dismantling Review useful life,
costs (HKAS 37) Rules: residual value and
Borrowing Valuations must be kept up to date. depreciation method
costs (HKAS 23) at least each financial
Model must be applied to the whole class of year.
asset.
Changes accounted for
prospectively.
Upwards revaluation
Carrying amount = Downwards
Carrying amount =
recognised as other
cost – accumulated revaluation
revalued amount –
comprehensive
depreciation – charged to
accumulated
income in revaluation
accumulated revaluation
depreciationsurplus
– to
surplus.
impairment losses. the extent it exists in
accumulated
respect of the
impairment asset
losses.
then as an expense.
Disclosure requirements:
Measurement bases Recoverable amounts
Depreciation methods and Restrictions on title
estimations Estimated costs of restoring site
Reconciliation of cost/revalued Expenditure on assets under
amount and accumulated construction
depreciation b/f to the same Capital commitments
amounts c/f Additional disclosure for revalued
assets
133
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
The initial cost of an item of PPE includes its purchase price plus any costs directly attributable to
bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary for it to operate in the normal manner
intended by management.
Site selection costs are not directly attributable costs and are do not therefore form part of the
cost of the new warehouse; these are instead recognised in profit or loss as incurred. Site
preparation costs are, however, directly attributable to the completion of the warehouse and these
do form part of its cost.
HKAS 16 is clear that professional fees are part of the cost of an item of PPE and therefore both
legal costs and architects’ fees are included in the initial measurement. However, the architects’
fees include $ 125,000 relating to scrapped blueprints. This came about as a result of the directors’
decision to make the building environmentally friendly. These fees relate to wasted resources, and
as such HKAS 16 does not permit their inclusion in the initial measurement of the property.
Both construction materials and labour are directly attributable to the completion of the warehouse
and are included in the initial cost of the property. HKAS 16 does not allow the inclusion of a
proportion of general and administrative overheads in the cost of an asset; $190,000 is therefore
recognised in profit or loss.
The solar panels are an item of property, plant and equipment and their cost is capitalised as part
of the cost of the property. The cost of obtaining HKGBC certification is not a cost attributable to
bringing the warehouse into working condition. The warehouse would operate in the manner in
which it was intended to without this certification. Therefore this cost is recognised in profit or loss.
The initial measurement of the property is therefore:
$'000
Site preparation 1,320
Legal costs of acquiring site 340
Architects’ Fees (450 – 125) 325
Construction materials 2,720
Construction labour 2,400
Solar panels 350
7,455
Answer 2
Useful life is defined as either the period over which an asset is expected to be available for use by
an entity or the number of production or similar units expected to be obtained from the asset by an
entity.
As a computer system used for administrative purposes is unlikely to produce ‘units’, the first
definition is appropriate.
Here the computer system is expected to be available for use by Waitco for a period of 3 years.
After this time, Waitco expects to sell the system back to the supplier and replace it with a new
system. Therefore the useful life is 3 years.
The supplier’s claim as to the ‘full potential’ life of the asset is irrelevant to the determination of
useful life, as is the fact that the system can be used by a second owner for a further 8 years, so
giving a total economic life of 11 years.
134
Answer 3
(a) In year 1:
DEBIT Depreciation expense $2,000
$20,000  10%
CREDIT Accumulated depreciation $2,000
To recognise year 1 depreciation on the asset.
In year 2:
($20,000 – $2,000)  10%
To recognise year 2 depreciation on the asset.
(b) Year 1 Year 2
$ $
Cost 20,000 20,000
Accumulated depreciation
Yr 1 (2,000) (2,000)
Yr 2 – (1,800)
Carrying amount 18,000 16,200
(c) The diminishing balance method of depreciation is used instead of the straight line method
when it is considered fair to allocate a greater proportion of the total depreciable amount to
the earlier years and a lower proportion to the later years on the assumption that the benefits
obtained by the business from using the asset decline over time.
It may be argued that this method links the depreciation charge to the costs of maintaining
and running the computer system. In the early years these costs are low and the
depreciation charge is high, while in later years this is reversed.
Answer 4
(a)
Cost Depreciation Carrying amount
$ $ $
Component 1
Cost 900,000
Dismantling 101,472
($280,000  1,001,472 66,765 934,707
0.3624)
Component 2 650,000 130,000 520,000
Component 3 250,000 25,000 225,000
1,679,707
(b) Proceeds 140,000
CV at disposal (934,707)
Loss on disposal (794,707)
135
Financial Reporting
(c)
Cost Depreciation Carrying amount
$ $ $
Component 1
Cost 910,000
Dismantling 96,950
($250,000  1,006,950 71,925 935,025
0.3878)
Component 2 650,000 260,000 390,000
Component 3 250,000 50,000 200,000
1,525,025
Answer 5
20X7
$ $
31 Mar DEBIT Loss on disposal 250
Accumulated depreciation* 6,750
Account receivable (sale price) 8,000
CREDIT Non-current asset (cost) 15,000
Being recording sales proceeds for disposal
31 Dec DEBIT Loss on disposal 3,750
Accumulated depreciation** 8,750
Cash (sale proceeds) 2,500
CREDIT Non-current asset (cost) 15,000
Being recording sales proceeds for disposal
* Depreciation at date of disposal = $6,000 + $750
** Depreciation at date of disposal = $6,000 + $2,750
You should be able to calculate that there was a loss on the first disposal of $250, and on the
second disposal of $3,750, giving a total loss of $4,000.
WORKINGS
(1) Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 20X7, accumulated depreciation on the machines will be:
$15,000
2 machines  2 years  per machine pa = $12,000, or $6,000 per machine
5
(2) Monthly depreciation
$3,000
Monthly depreciation is = $250 per machine per month
12
(3) Depreciation at date of disposal
The machines are disposed of in 20X7.
(a) On 31 March – after 3 months of the year.
Depreciation for the year on the machine = 3 months  $250 = $750
(b) On 1 December – after 11 months of the year.
Depreciation for the year on the machine = 11 months  $250 = $2,750
136
Answer 6
(a) The old head office was acquired on 1 July 20W2 at a cost of $24 million, with the acquisition
recorded by:
DEBIT Property $24,000,000
CREDIT Cash/payable $24,000,000
The property was depreciated over 50 years, giving an annual depreciation charge of $24
million/50 years = $480,000, recognised each year by:
Therefore at 1 April 20X2 when the property was revalued it had a carrying amount of:
$'000
Cost 24,000
Depreciation ($480,000  9.75 years) (4,680)
Carrying amount 19,320
At this date the property was revalued to $38 million. The journal to record this revaluation is
DEBIT Property (38,000 – 19,320) $18,680,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income – $18,680,000
revaluation surplus
The credit entry is accumulated in a revaluation reserve in equity.
The property continued to be depreciated over the remaining 40.25 years of the total 50 year
useful life, giving an annual depreciation charge of $38,000,000/40.25 = $944,000 (to the
nearest $’000). The journal to recognise this depreciation is:
As OCC has a policy of maximising distributable reserves, the difference between the
$944,000 depreciation charge and the previous charge based on historic cost of $480,000 is
the subject of a reserves transfer:
DEBIT Revaluation reserve $464,000
CREDIT Retained earnings $464,000
Therefore at the disposal date the property had a carrying amount of:
$’000
Valuation 38,000
Depreciation y/e 31 March 20X3 (944)
Depreciation 1 April 20X3 – 30 September 20X3 (6 months) (472)
Carrying amount 36,584
The revaluation surplus has a carrying amount of:
$’000
Revaluation surplus at 1 April 20X2 18,680
Excess depreciation y/e 31 March 20X3 (464)
Balance 18,216
(Note the reserves transfer is annual and therefore no transfer will have been made for the 6
months ended 30 September 20X3).
137
Financial Reporting
The profit arising on disposal is $2,416,000 ($39,000,000 – $36,584,000). The asset is

derecognised by:
DEBIT Cash $39,000,000
CREDIT Property $36,584,000
CREDIT Profit on disposal (profit or loss) $2,416,000
On disposal, the balance on the revaluation reserve is transferred to retained earnings by:
DEBIT Revaluation reserve $18,216,000
CREDIT Retained earnings $18,216,000
(b) Extracts from the financial statements are as follows:
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
March 20X4
$’000
Depreciation (472)
Profit on disposal 2,416
Statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 March 20X4
Revaluation reserve Retained earnings
$ $
Balance at 1 April 20X3 18,216 X
Transfer of realised amounts (18,216) 18,216
Balance at 31 March 20X4 - X
138
Exam practice
Phoenix Real Estate 16 minutes

Phoenix Real Estate Limited (‘Phoenix’) is a property developer in China. In 20X3, Phoenix
acquired the land use rights of two pieces of land in Beijing for hotel development:
Property One – Since the date of the acquisition of the land, the board of Phoenix has decided to
run the hotel on its own and commenced the pre-operating activities of the hotel on 1 January 20X5
when the development is completed and the hotel is available for its intended use. The hotel's
grand opening took place on 1 July 20X5.
Property Two – Since the date of the acquisition of the land, the board of Phoenix decided to lease
the whole property to earn rental income. A lease agreement was entered into to lease the whole
property to its holding company (the ‘Tenant’) for a period of eighteen years for the operation of a
hotel.
The monthly revenue amount of the hotel operation is provided by the Tenant at the close of
business of each month-end date.
Other information on these two properties:
Property One Property Two
RMB'000 RMB'000
Cost of land use right 45,000 48,000
Cost of construction (excluding the right 303,000 267,000
amortisation of land use right)
Fair value of land use right at 31 December 60,000 100,000
20X5
Fair value of the building at existing status as at 560,000 340,000
31 December 20X5
Date of purchase of land use right 1 July 20X3 1 October 20X3
Term of land use right of the property 75 years 60 years
Estimated useful life of the property 50 years 40 years
Completion of construction of the building December 20X4 June 20X5
Phoenix has adopted the cost model under HKAS 16 for property, plant and equipment and the fair
value model under HKAS 40 for investment property (buildings only). Depreciation is provided to
write off the cost of property, plant and equipment using the straight line method. The land use right
is considered as a lease and accounted for in accordance with the requirements under HKAS 17.
Amortisation of the cost of the land during the construction period is capitalised as part of the
development cost of the property.
Required
Calculate the amount of (1) land use right and (2) carrying amount of the building for each property
to be reflected in Phoenix's statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X5. (9 marks)
HKICPA September 2006 (amended)
139
Financial Reporting
140
chapter 6
Investment property
Topic list
1 HKAS 40 Investment Property

1.1 Definitions
1.2 Recognition
1.4 Measurement subsequent to initial recognition
1.5 Transfers
1.6 Disposals
1.7 Summary of accounting treatment of property
1.8 Disclosure requirements
Learning focus
Some entities own land or buildings and treat them as an investment, i.e. in order to generate
income and cash flows independently of the other assets held by the entity. It is important that
you understand the difference between investment properties and other classes of assets,
and how to account for them.
141
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.10 Investment property 3
3.10.1 Identify an investment property within the scope of HKAS 40 and
situation when a property can be transferred in and out of the
investment property category
3.10.2 Distinguish investment property from other categories of property
holdings and describe the difference in accounting treatment
3.10.3 Apply the recognition and measurement rules relating to investment
property
3.10.4 Account for investment property
3.10.5 Disclose relevant information, including an accounting policy note,
for investment property
142
6: Investment property | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 40 Investment Property

Topic highlights
Land and building may be acquired for investment purpose rather than for use in the business.
The cash flows generated by this investment are largely independent of other assets held by the
entity. The accounting treatment of investment property is covered by HKAS 40.
HKAS 40 Investment Property was published in March 2000 with the objective of regulating the
accounting treatment for investment property and related disclosure requirements.
HKAS 40 does not deal with issues covered in HKAS 17. It includes investment property held
under a finance lease or leased out under an operating lease.
HKAS 40.5
1.1 Definitions
Key terms
Investment property is property (land or a building – or part of a building – or both) held (by the
owner or by the lessee under a finance lease) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both,
rather than for:
(a) Use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes
(b) Sale in the ordinary course of business.
Owner-occupied property is property held by the owner (or by the lessee under a finance lease) for
use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes.
Cost is the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of other consideration given to
Carrying amount is the amount at which an asset is recognised in the statement of financial
position.
A property interest that is held by a lessee under an operating lease may be classified and
accounted for as an investment property, if and only if the property would otherwise meet the
definition of an investment property and the lessee uses the HKAS 40 fair value model. This
classification is available on a property-by-property basis. (HKAS 40.5)
HKAS 40.8- The standard provides the following examples of investment properties:
12,
15 (a) Land held for long-term capital appreciation rather than for short-term sale in the ordinary
course of business.
(b) Land held for a currently undetermined future use.
(c) A building owned by the reporting entity (or held by the entity under a finance lease) and
leased out under an operating lease.
(d) A building that is vacant but held to be leased out under one or more operating leases.
(e) Property that is being constructed or developed for future use as investment property.
(f) A building held by an entity and leased to a parent or another subsidiary. Note, however,
that while this is regarded as an investment property in the individual entity's financial
statements, in the consolidated financial statements this property will be regarded as
owner-occupied (because it is occupied by the group) and will therefore be treated in
accordance with HKAS 16.
143
Financial Reporting
The standard also clarifies that the following are not investment properties, but are instead within
the scope of the named standards:
(a) Property intended for sale in the ordinary course of business (HKAS 2)
(b) Property being constructed or developed for sale in the ordinary course of business
(HKAS 2)
(c) Property being constructed or developed on behalf of third parties (HKAS 11)
(d) Owner occupied property (HKAS 16), which includes:
(i) Property held for future owner-occupation
(ii) Property held for future development before owner-occupation
(iii) Property occupied by employees regardless of whether they pay market rent
(iv) Owner-occupied property awaiting disposal
(e) Property leased to another entity under a finance lease.
Where a property is partly owner-occupied and partly held to earn rentals or for capital
appreciation, its treatment depends on whether or not the portions of the property could be sold
separately (or leased out separately under a finance lease). If they could not be sold separately,
the property is only treated as investment property if an insignificant portion is held for owner-
occupier use.
Where an entity provides ancillary services to the occupants of a property it holds:
 The property is treated as investment property where those ancillary services are
insignificant to the arrangement as a whole
 The property is treated as owner-occupied where the ancillary services are significant, for
example the services provided to a hotel guest by the owner of the hotel indicate that a hotel
is owner-occupied.
1.1.1 Use of judgment
HKAS 40.14
HKAS 40 is clear that judgment should be applied in order to determine whether a property is an
investment property. Judgment should also be used to determine whether the acquisition of an
investment property is the acquisition of an asset/group of assets or a business combination within
the scope of HKFRS 3. In order to determine this, the guidance in both HKAS 40 and HKFRS 3
should be applied.
(a) Propex constructs properties, some of which are sold, some of which are occupied by the
company itself and some of which are let to tenants:
1 Tennant House is owned by Propex and let to its construction workers who pay
nominal rent.
2 Stowe Place which, until recently was Propex’s main administrative property. On 1
July 20X3, Propex acquired an alternative property and split Stowe Place into 20
separate units. Propex continues to use one of the units and rents the remainder out
to unconnected companies under finance leases. At 31 December 20X3, 8 of the units
are vacant.
3 Construction on Crocket Square began in August 20X3 and at 31 December it is two-
thirds complete. Propex intends to let this out to a company called Speedex in which it
has a controlling interest.
4 Smith Tower is an office complex let out to a number of commercial tenants. Propex
provides these tenants with security and maintenance services in the building.
Propex depreciates its buildings at 2% per annum on cost.
Required
Explain how each of these properties should be classified in the financial statements of
Propex in the year ended 31 December 20X3.
144
(b) One of Propex’s subsidiaries, Robantic owns a large open plan warehouse in which it stores
excess stock. The warehouse offers significantly more space than Robantic requires and as
a result it rents out space to other companies that need to store goods on a short-term basis.
Required
Explain how the warehouse should be classified in the financial statements of Robantic.
Below is the decision tree showing which HKFRS should be applied to various kinds of property:
Is the asset complete and
held for use in the production
or supply of goods or services
or for administrative purposes
i.e. wholly owner occupied
(including occupied by
another group entity in the Yes
case of consolidated
accounts)? Asset is accounted for as
PPE (HKAS 16)
No
Is the asset under
development for future owner
Yes
occupation?
No
Is the asset complete and
held for sale in the ordinary
Yes
course of business?
No Asset is accounted for as
inventories (HKAS 2)
Is the asset being constructed
or developed for sale in the
Yes
ordinary course of business?
No
Is the asset being constructed Yes Asset is accounted for as
or developed on behalf of construction contract
third parties? (HKAS 11)
No
Is the asset partly owner Can the part which is owner
occupied? occupied be sold or leased
Yes
under a finance lease in a
separate transaction?
No
Is the asset leased out under Yes Asset is accounted for
a finance lease? under HKAS 17
No Yes
No
145
Financial Reporting
Asset should be recognised Yes Is the part of the asset Asset should be
as an investment property which is owner occupied separated into
under HKAS 40 insignificant? component parts. The
portion which is not
No
owner occupied is
Asset is recognised as investment property
property, plant and (HKAS 40); the portion
equipment under HKAS 16 which is owner occupied
is PPE (HKAS 16)
HKAS 40.16 1.2 Recognition

Investment property should be recognised as an asset when two conditions are met:
(a) It is probable that the future economic benefits that are associated with the investment
property will flow to the entity
(b) The cost of the investment property can be measured reliably
HKAS
40.20,25
An investment property should be measured initially at its cost, including transaction costs.
A property interest held under a lease and classified as an investment property shall be accounted
for as if it were a finance lease. The asset is recognised at the lower of the fair value of the property
and the present value of the minimum lease payments. An equivalent amount is recognised as a
liability.
HKAS
40.30,34
1.4 Measurement subsequent to initial recognition
Topic highlights
Entities can choose between:
 Fair value model, with changes in fair value being measured
 Cost model – the treatment most commonly used under HKAS 16
HKAS 40 requires an entity to choose between two models:

 The fair value model
 The cost model
Whatever policy it chooses should be applied to all of its investment property.
Where an entity chooses to classify a property held under an operating lease as an investment
property, there is no choice. The fair value model must be used for all the entity's investment
property, regardless of whether it is owned or leased.
HKAS 1.4.1 Fair value model
40.33,35, 53,
HKFRS 13.9- Where the fair value model is chosen, the following rules apply:
33,76, 81, 86
1 An entity that chooses the fair value model should measure all of its investment property at
fair value, except in the extremely rare cases where this cannot be measured reliably. In
such cases it should apply the HKAS 16 cost model.
2 A gain or loss arising from a change in the fair value of an investment property should be
recognised in net profit or loss for the period in which it arises. HKAS 40 does not specify
which account this gain or loss should be recognised in. Some entities maintain a separate
account for changes in the fair value of investment properties; others may use an ‘other
gains and losses’ account or another operating income or expense account.
146
The journal entry required to recognise an increase in the fair value of an investment
property is therefore:
DEBIT Investment property X
CREDIT Profit or loss X
The journal entry required to recognise a decrease in the fair value of an investment property
is:
DEBIT Profit or loss X
CREDIT Investment property X
HKAS 40 was the first time that the HKICPA has allowed a fair value model for non-financial
assets. This is not the same as a revaluation of assets where increases in carrying amount above a
cost-based measure are recognised as revaluation surplus (i.e., as a reserve, in equity). Under the
fair value model all changes in fair value are recognised in profit or loss.
HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement, issued in May 2011, deleted much of the guidance provided
in HKAS 40 in respect of the determination of fair value. Instead the requirements of HKFRS 13
apply in measuring the fair value of investment properties.
HKFRS 13 is considered in detail in Chapter 19 of this Learning Pack.
The guidance which remains in HKAS 40 is as follows:
(a) Double counting should be prevented in deciding on the fair value of the assets. For
example, elevators or air conditioning, which form an integral part of a building should be
incorporated in the investment property rather than recognised separately.
(b) According to the definition in HKAS 36 Impairment of Assets, fair value is not the same as
‘value in use’. The latter reflects factors and knowledge as relating solely to the entity, while
the former reflects factors and knowledge applicable to the market.
(c) In those uncommon cases in which the fair value of an investment property cannot be
determined reliably by an entity, the cost model in HKAS 16 must be employed until the
investment property is disposed of. The residual value must be assumed to be zero.
1.4.2 Operating lease and investment property
In respect of leased property that qualifies as an operating lease, the lessee has the option to
classify the leased property as investment property provided that the lessee uses the fair value
model of HKAS 40 and the relevant criteria are met and all of the investment property must only be
accounted for under the fair value model. This means that the components of land and
buildings of the lease need not be split in order to calculate whether it is a finance lease or
operating lease.
HKAS 40.56 1.4.3 Cost model

The model here is the same as the cost model in HKAS 16. Investment property should be
measured at depreciated cost, less any accumulated impairment losses. If an entity chooses
the cost model, it should disclose the fair value of its investment property.
Barnett Simpson Investments (BSI) acquired Mountain Square, a fifteen-storey office block, on 1
July 20X3 at a cost of $82.5 million. The property is divided into units of varying sizes and BSI rents
office space in it to small businesses on annual leases. The company occupies the top floor for its
own use, running its accounts department from this location. BSI provides its tenants in this
property with a number of additional services including a manned reception, provision of security
and property maintenance services. At 30 June 20X4 the property had a fair value of $91.5 million.
The company depreciates owner-occupied property over 50 years and measures it using the
historic cost model; investment property is measured using the fair value model.
147
Financial Reporting
Required
Explain how Mountain Square should be classified in the financial statements of BSI at 30 June
20X4 and state the required journal entries in respect of Mountain Square in that year.
HKAS 40.31 1.4.4 Changing models
An entity should apply its chosen fair value model or cost model to all its investment property.
It should not change its model unless the change will result in a more appropriate
presentation. HKAS 40 states that it is very unlikely that a change from the fair value model to the
cost model will end up in a more appropriate presentation.
A change in model is accounted for as a change of accounting policy (HKAS 8) and should be
applied retrospectively.
HKAS 40.57-
65
1.5 Transfers
Transfers to or from investment property should be made when, and only when, there is a change
in the use of the property as follows:
Transfer from To Evidenced by

1. Investment Owner-occupied Commencement of owner-occupation of a former
property property investment property
(HKAS 40) (HKAS 16)
2. Investment Inventories Commencement of the development of an
property (HKAS 2) investment property with a view to sale (Notes)
(HKAS 40)
3. Owner-occupied Investment Owner occupation ceases and property meets the
property property definition of investment property
(HKAS 16) (HKAS 40)
4. Inventories Investment An operating lease commences on a property
(HKAS 2) property previously held for sale in the ordinary course of
(HKAS 40) business.
Notes
1 Where an entity decides to sell an investment property without development, it is not
transferred to inventory but remains in investment property until the date of disposal.
2 Where an entity begins to redevelop an investment property for continued future use as an
investment property, it is not reclassified during the redevelopment, but remains an
investment property.
1.5.1 Accounting for transfers

The following table summarises the requirements of HKAS 40 on accounting for transfers.
Transfer from To Measurement rules

Investment Owner-occupied The property's deemed cost for subsequent accounting
property (at fair property in accordance with HKAS 16 is its fair value at the date
value) of change in use.
Investment Inventories The property's deemed cost for subsequent accounting
property (at fair in accordance with HKAS 2 is its fair value at the date
value) of change in use.
148
Transfer from To Measurement rules

Owner-occupied Investment HKAS 16 is applied to the owner-occupied property up
property property (at fair to the date of change in use. The entity treats any
value) difference at that date between the carrying amount of
the property in accordance with HKAS 16 and its fair
value in the same way as a revaluation in accordance
with HKAS 16. (See Note below)
Inventories Investment Any difference between the fair value of the property at
property (at fair the date of change in use and its previous carrying
value) amount shall be recognised in profit or loss.
Note
Where fair value is less than the carrying amount of the property, the decrease is recognised in
profit or loss (usually in the same account as that to which depreciation has been charged). To the
extent that an amount is included in revaluation surplus for that property, the decrease is first
recognised in other comprehensive income and reduces the revaluation surplus within equity.
The journal entries to record the transfer where fair value is less than carrying amount are
therefore:
(DEBIT Other comprehensive income X
(revaluation surplus)
DEBIT Profit or loss X
CREDIT Property, plant and equipment X
and
Where fair value is greater than the carrying amount of the property:
(a) To the extent that the increase reverses a previous impairment loss for that property, the
increase is recognised in profit or loss (in the same account as that where the impairment
was initially recognised). The amount recognised in profit or loss cannot exceed the amount
needed to restore the carrying amount to the carrying amount that would have been
determined (net of depreciation) had no impairment loss been recognised; and
(b) Any remaining part of the increase is recognised in other comprehensive income and
increases the revaluation reserve within equity. On subsequent disposal of the investment
property, the revaluation surplus included in equity may be transferred to retained earnings.
The transfer from revaluation reserve to retained earnings is not made through the statement
of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
The journal entries to record the transfer where fair value is greater than carrying amount are
therefore:
DEBIT Property, plant and equipment X
CREDIT Other comprehensive income X
CREDIT Profit or loss X
and
149
Financial Reporting
Golding Muirhead Property (GMP), a property construction company, completed the construction of
the M Building -a complex of 80 apartments in Shanghai – at the end of March 20X4. On 1 June
20X4, as a result of a lack of buyers in the market, and a recent fall in selling prices, GMP decided
to take the property off the market. Instead the company decided to rent out the individual
apartments in the M Building until the market improves. Rental arrangements were agreed
immediately on half of the apartments. The company expects an improvement in the market to take
four years. GMP cost $80million to develop and had a fair value on completion of $89million, and
fair values of $83.5million and $81.2 million on 1 June 20X4 and 30 June 20X4 respectively. GMP
measures investment properties using the fair value model.
Required
Explain how the M Building should be classified in the financial statements of GMP at 30 June
20X4 and what amounts are included in the financial statements for the year in respect of the
property, based on the information provided.
1.6 Disposals
HKAS
40.66,69,72 An investment property should be derecognised (eliminated from the statement of financial
position) on disposal or when it is permanently withdrawn from use and no future economic
benefits are expected from its disposal.
A gain or loss on disposal arises when there is a difference between the net disposal proceeds and
the carrying amount of the asset. It should generally be recognised in profit or loss as income or
expense (in the same account as that where changes in fair value have been recorded).
Compensation from third parties for investment property that was impaired, lost or given up should
be recognised in profit and loss when the compensation becomes receivable.
1.7 Summary of accounting treatment of property

Depending on which standard's scope a property falls within, it may be subject to significantly
different accounting treatment:
HKAS 16 HKAS 40
HKAS 16 revaluation HKAS 40 fair value
cost model model HKAS 2 cost model model
Measurement Cost less Revalued Lower of cost Cost less Fair value
in statement depreciation amount less and net depreciation
of financial less depreciation realisable less
position impairment less value impairment
losses impairment losses (same
losses as cost model
in HKAS 16)
Gains and Depreciation Revaluations No Depreciation Changes in

losses and recognised in depreciation and impairment fair value
impairment other recognised in recognised
recognised in comprehensive profit or loss in profit or
profit or loss income loss. No
depreciation
150
HKAS 40.75 1.8 Disclosure requirements

Disclosures in respect of investment properties are particularly important due to the choice of
accounting treatment provided by the standard. Users must be aware of whether the carrying
amount represented in the statement of financial position relates to cost or fair value.
Where the fair value model is used, users have an indication of the achievable proceeds on a sale
of an investment property; where the cost model is used, the requirement to disclose fair value
achieves the same end.
In addition, detail of amounts recognised in profit or loss, such as rental income and changes in fair
value, help users to determine the quality of an investment property in generating returns.
The following must be disclosed:
 Whether an entity applies the cost model or fair value model
 Whether property interests held as operating leases are included in investment property
 Criteria for classification as investment property
 Use of independent professional valuer (encouraged but not required)
 Amounts recognised in profit or loss for:
– Rental income
– Direct operating expenses from property that did generate rental income
– Direct operating expenses from property that did not generate rental income
– Cumulative change in fair value recognised in profit or loss on sale of an investment
property from a pool of assets in which the cost model is used to a pool in which the
fair value model is used
 Any restrictions or obligations associated with the investment property
HKAS 40.76 - 1.8.1 Fair value model – additional disclosures
78
An entity that adopts the fair value model must also disclose the following:
(a) A reconciliation of the carrying amount of the investment property at the beginning and end
of the period, including separate details for those properties for which reliable fair value
cannot be determined.
(b) Disclosure of adjustments to valuations obtained (for example to avoid double counting).
(c) Where fair value cannot be established reliably:
(i) A description of the property
(ii) Explanation of why fair value cannot be established reliably
(iii) A range of estimates within which fair value is likely to lie (where possible)
(iv) The carrying amount of any property disposed of and gain or loss recognised.
HKAS 40.79 1.8.2 Cost model – additional disclosures

An entity that adopts the cost model must also disclose:
 Depreciation methods used
 Useful lives or depreciation rates used
 The gross carrying amount and accumulated depreciation at the start and end of the period
 A reconciliation of the carrying amount of the investment property at the beginning and end
of the period
 The fair value of investment property
151
Financial Reporting
Illustration
1 Significant accounting policies
Investment properties
Investment properties are investments in land and buildings that are held to earn rentals or
for capital appreciation or both. Such properties are carried in the statement of financial
position at their fair value as determined by professional valuation. Changes in fair values of
investment properties are recorded in the statement of profit or loss.
2 Critical accounting estimates and judgments
Investment properties valuation
Investment properties are carried in the statement of financial position at their fair value as
determined by professional valuation. In determining the fair value of the investment
properties, the valuers use assumptions and estimates that reflect, amongst other things,
comparable market transactions, rental income from current leases and assumptions about
rental income from future leases in the light of current market conditions. Judgment is
required to determine the principal valuation assumptions to determine the fair value of the
investment properties.
Investment properties
Fair value $’m
At 1 January 20X3 23.60
Increase in fair value during the year 0.15
At 31 December 20X3 23.75
Increase in fair value during the year 0.25
Transferred from property, plant and equipment 3.00
At 31 December 20X4 27.00
The fair value of the Group’s investment property at 31 December 20X4 has been arrived at
on the basis of valuation carried out at that date by Valuer Co, independent valuers not
connected with the Group.
The Group has pledged all of its investment property to secure general banking facilities
granted to the Group.
The property rental income earned by the Group from its investment property, all of which is
leased out under operating leases, amounted to $980,000 (20X3: $975,000). Direct
operating expenses arising on the investment property in the period amounted to $231,000
(20X3: $430,000).
The Group has entered into a contract for the maintenance of its investment property for the
next five years which will give rise to an annual charge of $150,000.
152
Topic recap
HKAS 40 Investment Property
HEADING Definition HEADINGMeasurement HEADING Disclosure
Disclose
Land, building
singleoramount
part ofinbuilding
statement
heldofby Disclose
Whichsingle
measurement
amount inmodel
statement
is applied
of
comprehensive
the owner (or lessee
incomeunder
comprising:
finance lease) comprehensive
Criteria for classification
income comprising:
as investment property
to earn
Post
rentals/for
tax profit
capital
or loss
appreciation
of the rather UsePost
of independent
tax profit or valuer
loss of the
than fordiscontinued
use/sale in the
operations
ordinaryand course of Amounts
discontinued
recognised
operations
in profitand
or loss
business.
Post Includes:
tax gain or loss on Restrictions
Post tax gain
or obligations
or loss onassociated with the
Land disposal/measurement
held for undeterminedtofuturefair use property.
disposal/measurement to fair
Property
value being
less costs
constructed
to sell. for use as an value less costs to sell.
investment property
A building held by one group company and Fair value

Fair valuemodel
model Cost model
Cost model
leased to another group company is Reconciliation
Reconciliation of Depreciation
Depreciation
investment property in the individual of carrying
carrying amount methods
methods
company accounts and owner-occupied in amount
b/f and c/f b/f Reconciliation
Reconciliation of
the consolidated accounts. and c/f to
Adjustments of carrying
carrying amount
Adjustments
valuations amount
b/f and c/f b/f
Furtherto valuations
details FV and c/f
of property
Further
where FV can’t FV of
details where
be established property
Transferssingle
Disclose to/fromamount
investment
in statement
propertyofallowed
FV cant be
reliably
comprehensive
when there is a income
change comprising:
in use:
established
Commencement
Post tax profitof orowner
loss ofoccupation
the
reliably
Commencement
discontinued operations
of development
and with view
to sale
Post tax gain or loss on
Enddisposal/measurement
of owner occupation to fair
Commencement
value less costs
of operating
to sell. lease to
another party
Initial measurement: cost including transaction

costs
Subsequently choose and apply to all investment

property:
Cost model Fair value model

Measured at depreciated cost Measured to fair value at
less impairment losses (as reporting date
HKAS 16) Changes in fair value
recognised in profit or loss
153
Financial Reporting
Answer to self-test question
Answer 1
(a) 1 Tennant House
 This property initially appears to meet the definition of investment property as it
is let to tenants.
 HKAS 40 is, however, clear that where a property is let to employees, it is
owner occupied, regardless of whether those employees pay market rent.
 Therefore Tennant House is within the scope of HKAS 40.
2 Stowe Place
 Stowe place is part owner-occupied and part investment property.
 HKAS 40 therefore requires that we consider whether the property is separable,
i.e. whether the units within the property could be sold or leased separately
under finance leases.
 The answer to this is yes, as the units are already leased separately under
finance leases.
 Therefore the one unit used by Propex is classified as property, plant and
equipment, and the remaining units are classified as investment property.
 The fact that 8 units are not rented out at the reporting date is irrelevant as the
empty units still have the capacity to earn rentals.
 1/20 of the property is therefore within the scope of HKAS 16 and the remaining
19/20 is within the scope of HKAS 40.
3 Crocket Square
 Propex is constructing the property to let out to another company, Speedex.
During construction, and after completion, the property is therefore within the
scope ofHKAS 40 and should be accounted for as an investment property in
Propex’s individual accounts.
 As Speedex is a subsidiary of Propex, the property will be owner-occupied from
a group perspective and therefore HKAS 16 is applied at a consolidation level.
4 Smith Tower
 The service and maintenance services provided by Propex to its tenants would
be deemed not significant to the arrangement as a whole. Therefore, Propex
should treat Smith Tower as an investment property and apply the provisions of
HKAS 40.
(b) The warehouse is held by Robantic in part for its own use and in part in order to earn rentals.
In this case the different parts of the property are not separable; the part of the property that
is rented could not be sold separately or leased under a finance lease as it is not physically
separate from the part of the property used by Robantic. In this case HKAS 40 states that
the property is investment property in its entirety if only an insignificant part of the property
is used by Robantic itself. Insignificant is not defined by HKAS 40 and judgment is required
in order to apply this concept. It is likely that further information is required in this case in
order to establish the size of the area used by Robantic and, if relevant, the proportion of the
cost of the property that the owner occupied part represents.
154
Answer 2
HKAS 40 defines owner-occupied property as property held for use in the production or supply of
goods or services or for administrative purposes. The top floor of Mountain Square is occupied by
BSI for administrative purposes and so meets this definition.
HKAS 40 defines investment property as property held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or
both. The 14 floors of Mountain Square that are rented out would appear to meet this definition,
although the ancillary services provided must also be considered.
If ancillary services are significant to an arrangement as a whole, HKAS 40 concludes that the
property is owner-occupied; if the ancillary services are insignificant, it is investment property.
A degree of judgment must be applied but it would appear that the services provided by BSI are
insignificant and therefore the 14 floors do qualify as investment property.
HKAS 40 requires that where a property is part owner-occupied and part investment property, the
portions are accounted for separately if they could be sold separately or leased out separately
under a finance lease.
Although the leases over units in the 15 non-owner occupied floors are operating leases, they
could be equally be finance leases. Therefore it appears appropriate to split-account for the
property with 1/15 accounted for under HKAS 16 as owner occupied property and the remaining
14/15 under HKAS 40 as investment property.
Therefore the property is initially recognised on 1 July 20X3 by:
DEBIT Investment property $77,000,000
(14/15  $82,500,000)
DEBIT Property, plant and equipment $5,500,000
(1/15  $82,500,000)
CREDIT Bank $82,500,000
The owner-occupied portion is depreciated in the year ended 30 June 20X4 by:
($5,500,000/50 years)
CREDIT Property, plant and equipment $110,000
At 30 June 20X4, the investment property portion is remeasured to its fair value of $85,400,000
(14/15 x $91,500,000) by:
($85.4m – $77m)
CREDIT Gain on investment property (profit $8,400,000
or loss)
Answer 3
The M Building was built as a property intended for sale in the ordinary course of business and
therefore it was classified as inventory. The issue is whether the property is still inventory after 1
June 20X4, or whether it should be transferred to investment property.
The property should continue to be inventory if this is consistent with GMP’s strategy for the
property; it should be transferred to investment property if there has been a change in the
management’s intentions and they intend to hold the property for future rentals or capital
appreciation.
The correct classification of the M Building requires the application of judgment. The fact that rental
agreements have been arranged does not in itself mean that reclassification to investment property
is required. It does, however, indicate that management intentions may have changed. This view is
155
Financial Reporting
further reinforced by the decision to stop marketing the property. However, the transfer to inventory
is limited to the portion that have signed rental agreements, which is half. (The IASB has added a
project to its work plan to clarify whether this interpretation is valid, but for now it is.)
Therefore, on balance, half the property should be transferred to investment property at 1 June
20X4.
As inventory prior to transfer, the property is carried at cost of $80 million of which $40 million
relates to the properties on which rental agreements have been signed. Where there is a transfer
from inventory to investment property carried at fair value any difference between the fair value of
the property and its previous carrying amount is recognised in profit or loss.
Therefore on 1 June 20X4, the property is transferred to investment property at $41.75 million
($83.5 million × 50%) and $1.75 million ($3.5 million × 50%) is recognised as a gain in profit or loss
by:
CREDIT Inventory $40,000,000
CREDIT Other income (profit or loss) $1,750,000
On 30 June 20X4, the property is re-measured to $40.6 million ($81.2 million × 50%) and a loss of
$1.15 million is recognised in profit or loss by:
DEBIT Operating expense (profit or loss) $1,150,000
CREDIT Investment property $1,150,000
Therefore in the statement of financial position at 30 June 20X4, the applicable portion of M
Building is recognised as investment property, measured at $40.6 million
In the statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 June 20X4, a net gain on investment
property of $0.6 million is recognised.
156
Exam practice
Cliff Land Limited 27 minutes

Cliff Land Limited (CLL) owns the following three buildings in Hong Kong:
Building A Building B Building C
Usage Warehouse Director's quarter Earning rental

income
Date of acquisition 1 January 20X0 1 January 20W8 1 January 20X5
Cost of the building $20 million $36 million $18 million
Fair value of the $28 million $22 million $22 million
building at 31 December
20X7
In the board meeting held on 30 September 20X7, the management of CLL determined to sell
Buildings B and C. A property agency was appointed in the following month to identify potential
buyers. In addition, CLL moved the storage of its inventories in Building A to a new production plant
in Shenzhen. At 31 December 20X7, all three buildings were vacant.
CLL has accounted for (i) the building under property, plant and equipment at cost basis and
depreciated the cost with the estimated useful life of 30 years, (ii) the investment property at fair
value model, and (iii) the land cost as operating lease under HKAS 17. Cost and fair value of the
land are assumed to be zero. Cost to sell the buildings is estimated at 0.5% of the disposal value of
the asset.
Required
Determine the statement of financial position classification of these three buildings and calculate
the respective amounts to be recognised on the statement of financial position as at 31 December
20X7. (15 marks)
HKICPA February 2008 (amended)
Railand Corp 41 minutes

Ralland Corp (RLC), a property development and investment company, has the following
properties at 31 December 20X2, the end of the previous financial year:
Carrying amount Original cost
HK$'m HK$'m
Investment property – Tower A 25.8 18.6
Investment property under construction – Tower B 14.2 10.5
Office building – Tower C 28.5 30.0
Office building – Tower D 17.1 18.0
The company adopts the cost model for owned used property and the fair value model for
investment property. All four properties were acquired in 20X0 with an expected useful life of 50
years. Depreciation, if applicable, is calculated on a monthly basis and commenced on
1 July 20X0.
To enhance the profitability of the property portfolio, RLC carried out the following activities:
(a) Moved its headquarter from Tower C to Tower A upon the expiry of the lease with the tenant
at the end of March 20X3
157
Financial Reporting
(b) Refurnished Tower C at a cost of HK$1.8 million in April and May 20X3 and then rented it
out to earn rental income since 1 June 20X3
(c) Completed the construction of Tower B by end of May 20X3 with additional expenditure of
HK$3.8 million
(e) Sold Tower D at HKD30 million to an independent third party and entered into a lease of the
premises for 2 years at a market rental of HK$80,000 per month on 1 May 20X3
An external valuer has been engaged to perform a valuation for all the properties except Tower D
and the estimated fair values at 31 March 20X3 and 30 June 20X3 are as follows:
31 March 20X3 30 June 20X3
HK$’m HK$’m
Tower A 26.4 27.2
Tower B 17.4 19.2
Tower C 38.0 40.0
Required
(a) Explain the implication of the activities occurred during the six months ended 30 June 20X3
on the classification and the effective date for each of the properties of RLC. (6 marks)
(b) Determine the carrying amount at 30 June 20X3 for each of the properties owned by RLC.
(5 marks)
(c) Identify the nature and quantify the amount of each income and expenses item to be
recognised in the statement of comprehensive income for the six months ended 30 June
20X3 of RLC in relation to each of these properties. (12 marks)
Note: Ignore tax effect and rental income from investment properties.
(Total = 23 marks)
HKICPA December 2013
158
chapter 7
Government grants
Topic list
1 HKAS 20 Government Grants

1.1 Scope
1.2 Definitions
1.3 Government grants
1.4 Excluded government assistance
1.5 Disclosure
1.6 HK(SIC) Int-10 Government Assistance – No Specific Relation to Operating Activities
Learning focus
Entities in many different countries receive government grants for all sorts of reasons, very
often to encourage growth and industry in certain areas, or to help them overcome external
difficulties, such as economic difficulties. This chapter covers how to account for government
grants.
159
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.03 Government grants and assistance 3
3.03.01 Accounting and presentation of government grants
3.03.02 Disclosure of government grants and assistance in accordance with
HKAS 20
160
7: Government grants | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 20 Government Grants

Topic highlights
In many countries entities may receive government grants for various purposes (grants may be
called subsidies, premiums, or given other titles). They may also receive other types of assistance
which may be in many forms. The treatment of government grants is covered by HKAS 20
Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance.
HKAS 20.2 1.1 Scope

HKAS 20 does not cover the following situations:
(a) Accounting for government grants in financial statements reflecting the effects of changing
prices
(b) Government assistance given in the form of ‘tax breaks’
(c) The government acting as part-owner of the entity
(d) Government grants covered by HKAS 41 Agriculture
HKAS 20.3-5 1.2 Definitions

These definitions are provided in the standard.
Key terms
Government. Government, government agencies and similar bodies whether local, national or
international.
Government assistance. Action by government designed to provide an economic benefit specific
to an entity or range of entities qualifying under certain criteria.
Government grants. Assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in
return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the
entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value
placed upon them and transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the
normal trading transactions of the entity.
Grants related to assets. Government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying
for them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire non-current assets. Subsidiary conditions
may also be attached restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which they
are to be acquired or held.
Grants related to income. Government grants other than those related to assets.
Forgivable loans. Loans which the lender undertakes to waive repayment of under certain
prescribed conditions.
Fair value. This is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in
an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.
(HKAS 20.3)
Government assistance can be of various forms since both the type of assistance and the
conditions related to it may differ. It may have the impact of encouraging an entity to undertake
something it otherwise would not have done.
161
Financial Reporting
How will the financial statements be affected by the receipt of government assistance?
(a) Any resources transferred to an entity must be accounted for using an appropriate method.
(b) Disclosure in the notes to the accounts is required to show the magnitude to which an entity
has benefited from such assistance.
HKAS 20.7-
11
1.3 Government grants
Government grants (including non-monetary grants at fair value) should only be recorded when the
entity has reasonable assurance that:
 The entity will comply with any conditions attached to the grant
 The entity will actually receive the grant
The receipt of the grant does not mean that the conditions attached to it have been or will be
fulfilled.
The manner of receipt of the grant, whether it is in cash or as a reduction in a liability to the
government, is irrelevant in the treatment of the grant.
Once a grant has been recognised, any contingency associated with it should be accounted for
under HKAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
When a forgivable loan (as given in the key terms above) is received from the government and it
is reasonably assured that the entity will meet the appropriate terms for forgiveness, it should be
treated in the same way as a government grant. In addition, a loan at a below-market rate of
interest is to be dealt with as a government grant.
A benefit of a government loan at a below-market rate of interest is treated as a government
grant. The loan shall be recognised and measured in accordance with HKFRS 9 Financial
Instruments. The benefit of the below-market rate of interest shall be measured as the difference
between the initial carrying value of the loan determined in accordance with HKFRS 9 and the
proceeds received. The benefit is accounted for in accordance with this standard. The entity shall
consider the conditions and obligations that have been, or must be, met when identifying the costs
for which the benefit of the loan is intended to compensate.
HKAS 20.12- 1.3.1 Accounting treatment of government grants

22
There are two methods which could be used to account for government grants, and the arguments
for each are given in HKAS 20.
(a) Capital approach: the grant is recognised outside profit or loss.
(b) Income approach: the grant is recognised in profit or loss over one or more periods.
What are the different arguments used in support of each method?
HKAS 20 requires that the income approach should be adopted in the recognition of grants. In
other words, grants received should be recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the
relevant accounting periods in which the entity recognises as expenses the related costs.
A systematic basis of matching should be used to avoid a violation of the accrual assumption to
treat grants in profit or loss on a receipts basis. This latter basis would only be acceptable when no
other basis was available.
The related cost to a government grant can easily be identified and thereby the period(s) in which
the grant should be recognised in profit or loss, i.e. when the costs are incurred by the entity.
Grants received relating to a depreciating asset will be recognised, in the same proportion, over the
periods in which the asset is depreciated.
162
On 1 January 20X8, Xenon Co. purchased a non-current asset for cash of $100,000 and received
a grant of $20,000 towards the cost of the asset. Xenon Co.'s accounting policy is to treat the grant
as deferred income. The asset has a useful life of five years.
Required
Show the accounting entries to record the asset and the grant in the year ended 31 December
20X8.
Certain obligations may have to be fulfilled for grants relating to non-depreciable assets. In such
a case, the grant should be recognised in profit or loss over the periods in which the cost of
meeting the obligation is incurred. For example, if a piece of land is granted on the condition that a
building is erected on it, then the grant should be recognised in profit or loss over the building's life.
If a series of conditions, in the form of a package of financial aid, are attached to the grant, then
the entity must be careful in identifying precisely those conditions which give rise to costs which in
turn determine the periods in which the grant will be earned. The grant may also be split into parts
and allocated on different bases.
Grants received as compensation for expenses or losses which an entity has already incurred
and grants given merely to provide immediate financial support where there are no foreseeable
related costs, should be recognised in profit or loss of the period in which they become receivable.
HKAS 20.23 1.3.2 Non-monetary government grants

When a non-monetary asset, such as a piece of land or other resources, is given by the
government to an entity as a grant, the fair value of the asset is assessed and used to account for
both the asset and the grant. On the other hand, both may be recorded at a nominal value.
HKAS 20.24- 1.3.3 Presentation of grants related to assets

28
Two choices are available for disclosing government grants related to assets (including non-
monetary grants at fair value) in the statement of financial position:
(a) Deduct the grant in arriving at the carrying amount of the asset.
(b) Set up the grant as deferred income.
The two alternatives are considered as equally acceptable and an example for both is shown
below.
Example: Accounting for grants related to assets

In the year ended 31 December 20X8, Tiger-Lily Co. receives a grant of $100,000 towards the cost
of a new freehold property in a development zone. The cost of the property is $700,000, and the
purchase was completed on 30 June 20X8. The property is to be depreciated at an annual rate of
2% on cost.
Illustrate how the grant will affect the financial statements of Tiger-Lily for the years ended
31 December 20X8, 20X9 and 20Y0 assuming profits before depreciation in those years of
$250,000, $280,000 and $315,000.
163
Financial Reporting
Solution
The results of the company would be as follows:
(a) Reducing the cost of the asset
20X8 20X9 20Y0
$ $ $
Profits
Profit before depreciation 250,000 280,000 315,000
Depreciation* 12,000 12,000 12,000
Profit 238,000 268,000 303,000
*The depreciation charge on a straight line basis, for each year, is 2% × ($700,000 
$100,000) = $12,000.
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AT YEAR END (EXTRACT)
$ $ $
Non-current asset at cost 600,000 600,000 600,000
Depreciation 12,000 24,000 36,000
Carrying amount 588,000 576,000 564,000
(b) Treating the government grant as deferred income
20X8 20X9 20Y0
$ $ $
Profits
Profit before grant
and depreciation 250,000 280,000 315,000
Depreciation (14,000) (14,000) (14,000)
Government grant 2,000 2,000 2,000
Profit 238,000 268,000 303,000
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AT YEAR END (EXTRACT)

$ $ $
Non-current asset at cost 700,000 700,000 700,000
Depreciation (14,000) (28,000) (42,000)
Carrying amount 686,000 672,000 658,000
Deferred income
Government grant
deferred income 98,000 96,000 94,000
Whichever of these methods is used, the cash flows in relation to the purchase of the asset and
the receipt of the grant are often disclosed separately because of the significance of the
movements in cash flow.
HKAS 20.29- 1.3.4 Presentation of grants related to income
31
Grants related to income are a credit in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income. There are two alternative methods of disclosure.
(a) Present as a separate credit or under a general heading, e.g. 'other income'.
(b) Deduct from the related expense.
The disclosure has been a subject of controversy. Some would argue that it is not good practice to
offset income and expenses in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income,
others would say that offsetting is acceptable since the expenses would not have been incurred
had the grant not been available. A proper understanding of the financial statements is required
164
for the disclosure of the grant, particularly the effect on any item of income or expense which is to
be separately disclosed.
On 1 July 20X4, Dodds Plaice Co (‘DP’), an engineering company, received notification that it
would be awarded a grant of $60,000 conditional upon employing an apprentice for a two-year
period. DP received the grant on 1 August 20X4 and employed an apprentice on a two year
contract on 1 September 20X4. The apprentice’s salary is agreed at $36,000 in the first year of
employment and $40,000 in the second year. It is DP’s policy to present grant income separately in
the financial statements.
Required
(a) Explain how DP should recognise income from the grant.
(b) Show the accounting entries that DP should make to record the cost of the apprentice’s
salary and the grant in the year ended 31 December 20X4.
(c) Prepare extracts from DP’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X4.
HKAS 20.32- 1.3.5 Repayment of government grants

33
If a grant must be repaid it should be accounted for as a change in an accounting estimate.
In other words, the revision is accounted for prospectively. HKAS 8 requires that the nature and
amount of such a change in an accounting estimate is disclosed.
(a) Repayment of a grant related to income: apply first against any unamortised deferred income
set up in respect of the grant; any excess should be recognised immediately as an expense.
(b) Repayment of a grant related to an asset: increase the carrying amount of the asset or
reduce the deferred income balance by the amount repayable. The cumulative additional
depreciation that would have been recognised to date in the absence of the grant should be
immediately recognised as an expense.
The circumstances relating to repayment may entail a reassessment of the asset value and an
impairment of the new carrying amount of the asset.
On 1 January 20X5, The Welfare Corporation (‘TWC’) receives a grant of $1 million from the Hong
Kong government for the purpose of operating a drugs rehabilitation programme over a 2 year
period. 75% of the costs of operating the programme were expected to be incurred in its first year.
In February 20X6, the government realised that not all of the conditions stipulated in the grant
documentation were met by TWC, and asked for $600,000 to be refunded. TWC repaid this in
March 20X6
Required
Show the accounting entries required by TWC in the years ended 31 December 20X5 and 31
December 20X6.
165
Financial Reporting
HKAS 20.34-
36
1.4 Excluded government assistance
The definition of government grants does not include some forms of government assistance.
(a) Some forms of government assistance cannot reasonably have a value placed on them,
e.g. free technical or marketing advice, provision of guarantees.
(b) There are transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the entity's
normal trading transactions, e.g. government procurement policy resulting in a portion of
the entity's sales. Any segregation would be arbitrary.
The government assistance may have to be disclosed because of its significance; nature, extent
and duration.
HKAS 20.39 1.5 Disclosure

Disclosure is required of the following:
(a) Accounting policy adopted, including method of presentation.
(b) Nature and extent of government grants recognised and other forms of assistance received.
(c) Unfulfilled conditions and other contingencies attached to recognised government
assistance.
Example: Accounting for grants related to assets

Sunbeam operates in an Enterprise Zone (‘EZ’) and was awarded a grant of $750,000 by the EZ
Grant Committee in the year ended 31 December 20X8. The grant was received on 31 July 20X8
and is conditional upon Sunbeam conducting research activities over a three-year period.
Sunbeam commenced research activities on 1 September 20X8 and expects these to continue for
at least three years. It has recognised the grant as a reduction in the associated research costs.
Required
Prepare an accounting policy disclosure note for Sunbeam.
Solution
Accounting policy
Government grants are not recognised until there is reasonable assurance that the Company will
comply with the conditions attached to them and that the grants will be received.
Government grants towards research costs are recognised as income over the period necessary to
match them to the related costs and are deducted in reporting the related expense.
Government grants
A grant of $750,000 was received on 31 July 20X8. The grant was awarded by the Enterprise Zone
Grant Committee and is conditional upon Sunbeam conducting research activities over a three year
period. The company has, to date, set up the required research activities and completed four
months of work. Sunbeam expects these research activities to continue for the required period of
time.
1.6 HK(SIC) Int-10 Government Assistance – No Specific Relation

to Operating Activities
The aim of government assistance to entities in some countries is to encourage entities or to
provide long-term support of business activities either in certain regions or industry sectors.
Conditions to receive assistance may have no particular relationship with the operating activities of
166
the entity. Examples of this kind of assistance are transfers of resources by governments to entities
which:
 Operate in a specific industry
 Continue to operate in newly privatised industries
 Commence or continue to operate in underdeveloped areas
If the government assistance is considered as a ‘government grant’ within the scope of HKAS 20,
then it should be accounted for in accordance with this standard.
Even if there are no circumstances particularly relating to the operating activities of the entity other
than the requirement to operate in certain regions or industry sectors, government assistance to
entities still meets the definition of government grants in HKAS 20 and should not be credited
directly to equity.
167
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 20 Government Grants
Government Grants Government Assistance
Transfer of
Disclose single
resources
amount from
in statement
government of Outside definition
Disclose single amount
of grants:
in statement of
comprehensive
to an entity in return
income
for comprising:
compliance comprehensive
1. Government income
assistance
comprising:
without
with certain
Post conditions.
tax profit or loss of the Post
valuetax
e.g.
profit or loss of the
discontinued operations and discontinued operations
Free technical adviceand
Includes:
Post tax gain or loss on Post
tax gain or
Provision of loss on
guarantees
disposal/measurement
Forgivable loans to fair disposal/measurement to fair
Below value less costs
market to loans
interest sell. 2. value
Transactions
less costs
withtogovernment
sell.
Non-monetary assets (grant = fair value that cannot be distinguished
of asset) from normal trading
Excludes government assistance without transactions.
value.
Disclose single
Recognise when amount
there in statement of
is reasonable Disclose if significant
comprehensive
assurance that: income comprising:
1. Postentity
the tax profit or loss with
will comply of the
conditions
discontinued
attached to theoperations
grant and
Post tax gain or loss on
disposal/measurement
2. the entity will receive the to fair
grant.
Grants related to assets

1. Deduct from carrying amount of
asset, or
2. Set up deferred income account.
Presentation
Grants related to income

1. Deduct from related expense, or
2. Present as separate credit.
Grants related to assets

1. Increase carrying amount of asset or
reduce deferred income
balance
2. Recognise cumulative
additional depreciation as expense.
Repayment is accounted for as a change
in accounting estimate
Grants related to income

1. Reduce any unamortised
deferred income balance
2. Recognise excess as expense.
Disclose single amount in statement of
Disclosure
comprehensive income comprising:
Accounting policy
Postand
Nature taxextent
profit or
of loss of the
grants recognised
anddiscontinued operations
other assistance receivedand
Post tax
Unfulfilled gain or loss
conditions andon
other
disposal/measurement to fair
contingencies.
168
Answer 1
The standard gives the following arguments in support of each method.
Capital approach
(a) The grants are a financing device, so should go through the statement of financial position.
In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income they would simply offset
the expenses which they are financing. No repayment is expected by the government, so the
grants should be recognised outside profit or loss.
(b) Grants are not earned, they are incentives without related costs, so it would be wrong to
take them to profit or loss.
Income approach
(a) The grants are not received from shareholders so should not be recognised directly in
equity, but should be recognised in profit or loss in appropriate periods.
(b) Grants are not given or received for nothing. They are earned by compliance with
conditions and by meeting obligations. They should therefore be recognised in profit or loss
over the periods in which the entity recognises as expenses the related costs for which the
grant is intended to compensate.
(c) Grants are an extension of fiscal policies and so as income taxes and other taxes are
expenses, so grants should be recognised in profit or loss.
Answer 2
Acquisition of the asset and receipt of the grant on 1 January 20X8:
$ $
DEBIT Non current assets 100,000
CREDIT Bank 100,000
To record the asset at its cost
DEBIT Bank 20,000
CREDIT Deferred income 20,000
To record the receipt of the grant
In the year ended 31 December 20X8 the asset is depreciated and a portion of the grant is
released to the statement of profit or loss:
DEBIT Depreciation expense ($100,000 / 5 years) 20,000
CREDIT Accumulated depreciation 20,000
DEBIT Deferred income ($20,000 / 5 years) 4,000

CREDIT Operating expenses 4,000
The release of the deferred income is matched to the depreciation expense, so the net effect is an
expense of $16,000 relating to the asset.
169
Financial Reporting
Answer 3
(a) A grant is recognised as income when there is reasonable assurance that the entity will:
(i) comply with any conditions attached to the grant and
(ii) actually receive the grant.
The second condition is met on 1 August 20X4 when DP received the grant monies,
however at this date it is unclear whether the company will comply with the requirement to
employ an apprentice. Therefore the grant is initially recognised as a liability (deferred
income) rather than income. The first condition ie compliance with the requirement to
employ an apprentice is met on 1 September 20X4. From this date the grant is therefore
recognised as income over the two-year conditional period.
(b) Journal entries
1 August 20X4
$ $
DEBIT Bank 60,000
CREDIT Deferred income – grant 60,000
To record receipt of grant.
31 December 20X4
$ $
DEBIT Staff costs (4/12m x $36,000) 12,000
CREDIT Bank 12,000
To record payment of the apprentice’s salary for 4 months of 20X4
and
$ $
DEBIT Deferred income – grant (working) 9,474
CREDIT Grant income (profit or loss) 9,474
To record release of deferred grant income
Working
36
 $60,000  4/12 months = $9,474
 36 + 40 
(c) Statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X4
$
Staff costs 12,000
Grant income (9,474)
Statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X4
$
Current liabilities
Deferred grant income (working) 29,473
Long-term liabilities
Deferred grant income (working) 21,053
Working
Within 1 year $
36/(36+40)  $60,000  8/12m 18,947
40/(36+40)  $60,000  4/12m 10,526
29,473
After 1 year
40/(36+40)  $60,000  8/12m 21,053
170
Answer 4
1 January 20X5
$ $
DEBIT Bank 1,000,000
CREDIT Deferred income – grant 1,000,000
To record receipt of grant.
31 December 20X5
$ $
DEBIT Deferred income – grant (75%  $1m) 750,000
CREDIT Grant income (profit or loss) 750,000
To record release of deferred grant income to match costs
March 20X6
$ $
DEBIT Deferred income – grant 250,000
DEBIT Operating expenses 350,000
CREDIT Bank 600,000
To record part-repayment of grant.
171
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
PMT and WY 9 minutes

Peak Medical Technology Corporation (‘PMT’) conducts research and product development for an
anaesthetic injection under contract with WY Corporation (‘WY’), a pharmaceutical company. The
research and development contract requires that WY pays PMT an up-front amount of $1.5 million
when the contract is signed, $2 million upon the successful completion of clinical trials, and
$1.5 million upon the delivery of the first pilot unit of the injection. All payments are non-refundable.
The total cost of completion of the project is estimated to be $3 million.
PMT has invested $25 million in equipment for its research and development centre, which has an
anticipated useful life of eight years. Depreciation is charged on a straight-line basis. In the period
of acquisition, PMT received a government grant of $10 million towards purchase of the equipment,
which is conditional on certain employment targets being achieved within the next four years.
Required
Determine how PMT should recognise and measure the government grant by reference to the
relevant accounting standards. (5 marks)
HKICPA May 2007 (amended)
MHL 11 minutes
MHL Group conducts research and development projects in Country X. It has invested $50 million
in equipment for its research and development centre. The equipment has an estimated useful life
of ten years and is depreciated on a straight-line basis. In the period of acquisition, MHL Group
received an interest free loan of $25 million from the provincial government in Country X towards
the purchase of the equipment, which is conditional on the employment targets to be achieved
within the next five years.
Required
Advise the appropriate accounting treatment and the presentation of the interest free loan form the
provincial government in the financial statements. (6 marks)
172
chapter 8
Intangible assets and

impairment of assets
Topic list
1 HKAS 38 Intangible Assets 3 HKAS 36 Impairment of Assets

1.1 The objectives of the standard 3.1 Introduction
1.2 The scope of the standard 3.2 Scope
1.3 Definition of an intangible asset 3.3 Definitions
1.4 Recognition of an intangible asset 3.4 Identification of a possible impairment
1.5 Initial measurement of an intangible asset 3.5 Impairment test
1.6 Subsequent measurement of an intangible 3.6 Recognition and measurement of an
asset impairment loss
3.7 Subsequent accounting for an impaired
2 Research and development costs asset
2.1 Definitions 3.8 Cash generating units
2.2 Recognition 3.9 Goodwill and impairment
2.3 Initial measurement 3.10 Corporate assets
2.4 Recognition of an expense 3.11 Allocating an impairment loss to the assets
2.5 Measurement of intangible assets of a cash generating unit
subsequent to initial recognition 3.12 Reversal of an impairment loss
2.6 Amortisation of intangible assets 3.13 Disclosure
2.7 Disposals/retirements of intangible assets 3.14 Current developments
2.8 Disclosure requirements 3.15 Section summary
2.9 HK(SIC) Int-32 Intangible Assets –
Website Costs
Learning focus
Impairment of assets is particularly relevant in the current economic climate and several
companies are now having to apply the requirements with regard to accounting for impairment
for the first time.
173
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.09 Intangible assets 3
3.09.01 Define an intangible asset and scope of HKAS 38
3.09.02 Apply the definition of an intangible asset to both internally-
generated and purchased intangibles
3.09.03 Account for the recognition and measurement of intangible assets
in accordance with HKAS 38
3.09.04 Describe the subsequent accounting treatment of intangible assets
including amortisation
3.09.05 Distinguish between research and development and describe the
accounting treatment of each
3.09.06 Explain how goodwill arises
3.09.07 Account for goodwill
3.09.08 Disclose relevant information in respect of intangible assets under
HKAS 38
3.13 Impairment of assets 3
3.13.01 Identify assets that are within the scope of HKAS 36
3.13.02 Identify an asset that may be impaired by reference to common
external and internal indicators
3.13.03 Identify the cash generating unit an asset belongs to
3.13.04 Calculate the recoverable amount with reference to value-in-use
and fair value less cost to sell
3.13.05 Calculate the impairment loss, including the loss relating to cash-
generating units
3.13.06 Allocate impairment loss and account for subsequent reversal
3.13.07 Disclose relevant information with regard to impairment loss,
including critical judgment and estimate
174
8: Intangible assets and impairment of assets | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 38 Intangible Assets

Topic highlights
Intangible assets are defined by HKAS 38 as non-monetary assets without physical substance.
They must be:
 Identifiable
 Controlled as a result of a past event
 Able to provide future economic benefits
HKAS 38 Intangible Assets was issued in August 2004 and revised in May 2009 to reflect changes
introduced by HKFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations.
1.1 The objectives of the standard

(a) To establish the criteria for when an intangible asset may or should be recognised.
(b) To specify how intangible assets should be measured.
(c) To specify the disclosure requirements for intangible assets.
HKAS 38.2,3 1.2 The scope of the standard

HKAS 38 applies to all intangible assets with the following exceptions:
 Financial assets (HKAS 32)
 The recognition and measurement of exploration and evaluation assets (HKFRS 6)
 The development and extraction of minerals, oils, gas and other non-regenerative resources
(HKFRS 6)
 Intangible assets held for sale in the ordinary course of business (HKAS 2 and HKAS 11)
 Deferred tax assets (HKAS 12)
 Leases within the scope of HKAS 17
 Assets arising from employee benefits (HKAS 19)
 Goodwill acquired in a business combination (HKFRS 3 (revised))
 The recognition and measurement of insurance contracts (HKFRS 4)
 Intangible assets within the scope of HKFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and
HKAS 38.8-
10
1.3 Definition of an intangible asset
Key terms
An intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance.
An asset is a resource which is:
(a) Controlled by the entity as a result of events in the past
(b) Something from which the entity expects future economic benefits to flow
Examples of items that might be considered as intangible assets therefore include computer
software, patents, copyrights, motion picture films, customer lists, franchises, brands and fishing
rights.
175
Financial Reporting
An item should not be recognised as an intangible asset, however, unless it meets this definition in
full. In other words it is:
(a) Identifiable
(b) Controlled by the entity as a result of past events
(c) Expected to result in future economic benefits
Each of these elements of the definition is considered in turn below.
HKAS 1.3.1 Identifiable
38.11,12
An asset is identifiable if it:
(a) Is separable, i.e. if it could be rented or sold either individually or together with a related
contract or asset; or
(b) Arises from contractual or other legal rights regardless of whether those rights are separable.
Goodwill, whether purchased or internally generated, is not identifiable and is therefore not
considered to be an intangible asset within the scope of HKAS 38.
Other internally generated intangible items, such as brands and customer lists do, however,
meet these criteria, however, they may not meet the remaining two criteria within the definition of
an intangible asset, or the recognition criteria (section 1.4).
Purchased intangible assets, such as a purchased patent or brand are normally identifiable.
HKAS 38.13- 1.3.2 Control by the entity
16
An entity controls an asset if the entity has the power to obtain the future economic benefits flowing
from the underlying resource and to restrict the access of others to those benefits.
Whereas the application of the control criteria to purchased assets is relatively simple, it is less
straightforward in the case of internally generated assets. Therefore, additional guidance is
provided as follows:
Market and technical knowledge
The following provide evidence that an entity can control access to the future economic benefits
arising from expenditure to develop market and technical knowledge:
 The existence of copyrights
 A legal duty of employees to maintain confidentiality with regard to the knowledge
If such a legal right exists, and provided that the knowledge is identifiable and is expected to result
in future economic benefits, it qualifies as an intangible asset.
Skilled staff
Expenditure on training results in more skilled staff, and often increased revenues and better
efficiency. The costs of such training, however, are very unlikely to qualify as an intangible asset
because an entity does not control the future actions of its staff. These staff may leave the
organisation at any time.
Market share/customer base
Expenditure on advertising and building customer relationships results in the growth of market
share and a loyal customer base. However, unless relationships with customers are protected by
legal rights, the entity can not control the actions of its customers, and they may change to a
different supplier. Therefore, such expenditure on creating market share does not qualify as an
intangible asset.
HKAS 38.17 1.3.3 Expected future economic benefits

An item can only be recognised as an intangible asset if economic benefits are expected to flow in
the future from ownership of the asset.
176
Future economic benefits may include:

 Revenue from the sale of products or services
 Cost savings
 Other benefits resulting from the use of an asset by an entity
Again, this element of the definition is easily applied to purchase intangible assets, such as patents
or copyrights allowing production of items to sell. It may be more difficult to apply to expenditure on
internally generated items such as research and development projects, as the success of such a
project may be hard to gauge. For this reason, HKAS 38 considers research and development in
more detail and this is covered in section 2 of this chapter.
HKAS 38.21-
23
1.4 Recognition of an intangible asset
An intangible asset meeting the definition above should be recognised if, and only if, both the
following apply:
(a) It is probable that the future economic benefits that are attributable to the asset will flow to
the entity.
(b) The cost of the asset can be measured reliably.
Management has to exercise its judgment in assessing the degree of certainty attached to the flow
of economic benefits to the entity. External evidence is best.
HKAS 38.25 1.4.1 Separately acquired intangible assets
Normally, the fact that an entity purchases an intangible asset indicates an expectation that the
expected future economic benefits embodied in the asset will flow to the entity. In addition, the cost
can clearly be measured reliably.
Therefore, purchased intangible assets are normally recognised in the financial statements.
HKAS 38.33- 1.4.2 Intangible assets acquired as part of a business combination
34
In accordance with HKFRS 3 (revised), any intangible asset for which a fair value can be reliably
determined should be recognised separately. This is the case even where the purchased entity
does not recognise the asset in its own statement of financial position.
Sufficient information exists to measure the fair value of an asset reliably where it is separable or
arises from contractual or other legal rights.
HKAS 1.4.3 Internally generated assets
38.48,51,52,
63 Internally generated goodwill does not meet the definition of an intangible asset and therefore is
never recognised in the financial statements.
Other internally generated assets may meet the recognition criteria, however due to the difficulty of
assessing future economic benefits and determining a reliable cost of an internally generated
asset, HKAS 38 requires that all internal expenditure that may result in an intangible asset is
classified as research or development, and provides more detailed recognition guidance which is
applicable. This is considered in greater detail in section 2 of the chapter.
In any case, internally-generated brands, mastheads, publishing titles, customer lists and
items similar in substance shall not be recognised as intangible assets.
Trainor Clothing Co is a manufacturer of branded clothing that it sells to retailers on a wholesale
basis.
The company has an extensive customer list that it has built up for a new clothing range over the
year ended 31 December 20X4. Employee timesheets reveal that the marketing staff costs of
contacting new potential customers and compiling the list amounts to $120,000.
177
Financial Reporting
The financial controller feels that the name ‘Trainor Clothing’ has an industry-wide reputation for
quality and that an element of goodwill should be capitalised in the statement of financial position.
He has suggested an amount of $500,000, being the amount recognised when a large
conglomerate acquired one of Trainor Clothing’s competitors recently.
In September 20X4, Trainor Clothing acquired a brand, Bonita Carina from a competitor at a cost of
$3 million. The brand has strong sales and a loyal customer base.
Required
Explain whether the items of expenditure listed may be recognised as an intangible asset in
HKAS 38.24
1.5 Initial measurement of an intangible asset
An intangible asset is initially measured at cost.
HKAS 38.27- 1.5.1 Separately acquired intangible assets
29
The cost of a separately acquired intangible asset includes its purchase price and any directly
attributable costs of preparing the asset for its intended use.
Directly attributable costs may include professional fees and testing costs, but not advertising and
promotional expenditure or administration and general overhead costs.
HKAS 38.33 1.5.2 Intangible assets acquired as part of a business combination
When an intangible asset is acquired as part of a business combination (where one company
has acquired the shares of another company), the cost of the intangible asset is its fair value at the
date of the acquisition.
For example, if company A has acquired company B, and company B owns a drilling licence with a
fair value of $2m at the date of acquisition, then the cost of the licence in the consolidated accounts
will be $2m.
HKAS 38.44 1.5.3 Intangible assets acquired by way of government grant
According to HKAS 38, intangible assets acquired by way of government grant and the grant itself
may be recorded initially either at cost (which may be zero) or fair value.
HKAS 38.45 1.5.4 Exchanges of assets
Fair value is used to measure the cost of the intangible asset acquired if one intangible asset is
exchanged for another unless:
(a) The exchange lacks commercial substance; or
(b) The fair values of both the asset received and the asset given up cannot be measured
reliably.
In such cases, the cost of the intangible asset acquired is measured at the carrying amount of the
asset given up.
1.5.5 Internally generated assets
Internally generated intangible assets are recognised at cost. The elements of this are discussed in
more detail in section 2.
178
Example
Anderson Gadd owns and operates a number of restaurants, half of which are operated under
franchise from a global company Allied Restaurant Company (ARC). Anderson Gadd has incurred
the following expenses in the year ended 31 July 20X3 and wishes to know which can be
recognised as intangible assets in the statement of financial position:
1. The $357,000 cost of a new stock management software package.
2. Franchise fees of $250,000 paid to ARC for the use of the trading name ‘Cowabunga’ for a
new outlet.
3. Training costs amounting to $130,000 for staff at the new Cowabunga outlet.
9. Advertising costs of $75,000 incurred prior to the opening of the new Cowabunga outlet.
Required
Advise the management of LDC at what amount any intangible asset is initially measured.
Solution
Accounting software is a separately acquired intangible asset. All recognition criteria are met and
the stock management software package is capitalised at its cost of $357,000 by:
DEBIT Intangible assets – software $357,000
CREDIT Cash/payable $357,000
Franchise fees meet the definition of an intangible asset as they are identifiable (evidenced by their
separate acquisition) and result in a benefit (a revenue stream) that is controlled by Anderson
Gadd as a result of a past event (the acquisition). It is assumed that Anderson Gadd would not
have paid the fees if economic benefit were not probable; the fee provides evidence of reliable
measurement. Therefore the $250,000 cost is capitalised as an intangible asset by:
DEBIT Intangible assets – franchise fees $250,000
Training costs must be expensed. The benefit of training costs is not controlled by Anderson Gadd
as the staff that it has trained may leave the company. Equally, advertising costs are the costs of
introducing a new product or service; HKAS 38 specifically prohibits these costs forming part of an
intangible asset. Therefore a total of $205,000 is recognised as an expense in the period by:
DEBIT Training costs $130,000
DEBIT Advertising costs $75,000
HKAS 1.6 Subsequent measurement of an intangible asset

38.72,74,75
After recognition, an entity may choose to apply either the cost model or revaluation model.
Intangible assets are therefore carried at either:
 Cost less accumulated amortisation less accumulated impairment losses; or
 Fair value at date of revaluation less subsequent accumulated amortisation and subsequent
accumulated impairment losses.
The detailed rules with regard to revaluation and amortisation are considered in more detail later in
this chapter after the recognition rules and initial measurement rules for research and development
costs are discussed.
179
Financial Reporting
2 Research and development costs

HKAS
38.8,52
Topic highlights
Research costs are always recognised as an expense. Development costs must be recognised as
an asset if they meet certain criteria.
HKAS 38 requires that internally generated assets are classified into research and development
phases.
2.1 Definitions
Key terms
Research is original and planned investigation undertaken with the prospect of gaining new
scientific or technical knowledge and understanding.
Development is the application of research findings or other knowledge to a plan or design for the
production of new or substantially improved materials, devices, products, processes, systems or
services before the start of commercial production or use.
HKAS 38 provides examples of both research and development as follows.
HKAS 38.56 2.1.1 Examples of research costs

(a) Activities aimed at obtaining new knowledge
(b) The search for, evaluation and final selection of, applications of research findings or other
knowledge
(c) The search for alternatives for materials, devices, products, processes, systems or services
(d) The formulation, design, evaluation and final selection of possible alternatives for new or
improved materials, devices, products, systems or services
HKAS 38.59 2.1.2 Examples of development activities
(a) The design, construction and testing of pre-production or pre-use prototypes
(b) The design of tools, jigs, moulds and dies involving new technology
(c) The design, construction and operation of a pilot plant on a scale which is not feasible for
commercial production
(d) The design, construction and testing of a chosen alternative for new or improved materials,
devices, products, processes, systems or services

Although it defines the terms research and development, HKAS 38 provides the accounting
treatment for the ‘research phase’ and ‘development phase’ of a project. If an entity cannot
distinguish between these phases, the standard requires that costs are treated as if incurred in the
research phase only.
HKAS 38.55 2.2.1 Research phase
Research activities, which are carried out at the research stage of a project, do not meet the
recognition criteria under HKAS 38. It is uncertain that future economic benefits will flow to the
entity from the project at the research stage of a project and there is too much doubt about the
likely success or otherwise of the project.
Research costs should therefore be written off as an expense as they are incurred.
180
HKAS 38.57 2.2.2 Development phase

Development costs must be recognised as intangible assets when the following strict criteria can
be demonstrated:
(a) The technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so that it will be available for use
or sale.
(b) Its intention to complete the intangible asset and use or sell it.
(c) Its ability to use or sell the intangible asset.
(d) How the intangible asset will generate probable future economic benefits. Among other
things, the entity should demonstrate the existence of a market for the output of the
intangible asset or the intangible asset itself or, if it is to be used internally, the usefulness of
the intangible asset.
(e) Its ability to measure the expenditure attributable to the intangible asset during its
development reliably.
When these criteria are not met, development costs should be written off as an expense as incurred.
HKAS 38.65-
66, 71
Topic highlights
Internally generated intangible assets are initially measured at cost
The costs allocated to an internally generated intangible asset should only be those costs that can
be directly attributed or allocated on a reasonable and consistent basis to creating, producing or
preparing the asset for its intended use. The principle here is similar to that applied to the cost of
non-current assets and inventory.
The cost of an internally operated intangible asset is the sum of the expenditure incurred from
the date when the intangible asset first meets the recognition criteria. If, as often happens,
considerable costs have already been recognised as expenses before management could
demonstrate that the criteria have been met, this earlier expenditure should not be retrospectively
recognised at a later date as part of the cost of an intangible asset.
Mountain Co. is developing a new production process. During 20X1, expenditure incurred was
$500,000, of which $310,000 was incurred before 1 December 20X1 and $190,000 between
1 December 20X1 and 31 December 20X1. Mountain can demonstrate that, at 1 December 20X1,
the production process met the criteria for recognition as an intangible asset. How should the
expenditure be treated?
Light Drinks Company (LDC) owns and operates a number of beer and wine bars. The company
has incurred the following expenses in the year ended 31 July 20X3 and wishes to know which can
be recognised as intangible assets in the statement of financial position:
1. Costs incurred in developing a beer pumping process to ensure that the draught beer sold at
its outlets is not flat. This process is expected to be implemented by 20X5. Testing indicates
that it will cut wastage.
2. The costs of testing the beer pumping process.
3. The salaries of staff involved in the beer pumping process development project.
181
Financial Reporting
4. A share of the general overheads (eg rent and depreciation) of the R&D department as an
allocation to the beer pumping process development project.
5. A share of administrative overheads as an allocation to the beer pumping process
development project.
Required
Explain which costs can be capitalised as an intangible asset at 31 July 20X3.
At this stage it may be useful to summarise the rules seen for the recognition and initial
measurement of separately purchased intangibles, intangibles acquired as part of a business
acquisition and internally generated development expenditure.
Summary of the recognition and initial measurement requirements of HKAS 38
Intangible acquired as Internally generated

Separately purchased part of business intangible –
intangible combination development
Recognise as an  Meets definition of  Meets definition of  Technically feasible

asset if: intangible asset intangible asset  Intention to
 Probable economic  Probable economic complete
benefits benefits  Commercially viable
 Cost reliably  Fair value reliably  Probable economic
measured measured benefits
 Resources available
to complete
 Expenditure reliably
measured
Initially Cost + directly Fair value at date of Directly attributable
measured at: attributable costs in acquisition costs from date when
preparing asset for use criteria first met
Example: Computer software and hardware

The treatments can be illustrated by reference to computer software and hardware. The treatment
depends on the nature of the asset and its origin.
Asset Origin Treatment
Computer software Purchased Capitalise

Operating system for Purchased Include in hardware cost
hardware
Computer software Charge to expense until 'Development criteria'
Operating system for Internally are met. Then capitalise and amortise (see next
hardware developed section).
(For use or sale)
182
2.4 Recognition of an expense

HKAS 38.68–
70 Expenditure on an intangible should be expensed as incurred when it does not meet the criteria
for recognition either as an identifiable intangible asset or as goodwill arising on an acquisition.
Examples of such expenditure are stated in the HKAS:
 Start up costs, i.e. costs of establishing a new business
 Training costs
 Advertising and promotional costs
 Business relocation or reorganisation costs
Prepaid costs for services, for example advertising or marketing costs for campaigns that have
been prepared but not yet launched, can still be recognised as a prepayment.
HKAS 38 2.4.1 Advertising and promotional activities
BC46A-46H
There is often confusion as to whether the costs of advertising and promotional activities qualify as
an intangible asset. HKAS 38 has been amended to clarify that for advertising and promotional
activities:
(a) In the case of goods, an expense is recognised when the entity has the right to access those
goods.
(b) In the case of services, an expense is recognised when the entity receives those services.
(c) A right to access goods is received by the entity when the supplier has made them available
to the entity.
(d) The contract terms for the supply of goods or services determine when an expense should
be recognised.
(e) A prepayment can be recognised as an asset when payment has been made in advance of
the entity obtaining the right to access the goods or receiving the services.
The amendment clarifies that catalogues are considered to be a form of advertising and
promotional activity. Expenses incurred in printing mail order catalogues are recognised once the
catalogues are printed and not when they are distributed to customers.
HKAS
38.72,74,75,81
2.5 Measurement of intangible assets subsequent to initial
recognition
HKAS 38 allows two methods of measuring for intangible assets after they have been first
recognised:
1 Cost model: an intangible asset is carried at its cost, less any accumulated amortisation
and less any accumulated impairment losses.
2 Revaluation model: an intangible asset is carried at a revalued amount, which is its fair
value at the date of revaluation, less any subsequent accumulated amortisation and any
subsequent accumulated impairment losses.
The rules with regard to the application of the revaluation model are as follows:
(a) The fair value must be measured reliably with reference to an active market in that type of
asset.
(b) The entire class of intangible assets of that type must be revalued at the same time (to
prevent a business from choosing to revalue only those particular assets that have enjoyed
favourable price movements, and retaining the others at cost).
(c) If an intangible asset in a class of revalued intangible assets cannot be revalued because
there is no active market for this asset, the asset should be carried at its cost less any
accumulated amortisation and impairment losses.
183
Financial Reporting
(d) Revaluations should be made with such regularity that the carrying amount does not differ
from that which would be determined using fair value at the end of the reporting period.
HKAS 2.5.1 Active market
38.8,78
Key term
An active market is a market in which all the following conditions exist:
(a) The items traded in the market are homogenous
(b) Willing buyers and sellers can normally be found at any time
(c) Prices are available to the public
Since an active market for an intangible asset will not usually exist, the revaluation model will
usually not be available. For example, intangible assets such as copyrights, publishing rights and
film rights are each sold at unique sale value, so a continuous active market is not accessible.
A revaluation to fair value would therefore be inappropriate. However, a fair value might be
obtainable for assets such as fishing rights, quotas or taxi cab licences.
HKAS 38.85- 2.5.2 Accounting for a revaluation
87
Where the carrying amount of an intangible asset is revalued upwards to its fair value, the amount
of the revaluation should be credited to other comprehensive income and accumulated in a
revaluation surplus in equity.
However, a revaluation surplus resulting from a reversal of a previous revaluation decrease that
has been charged to profit or loss can be recognised as income.
On the other hand, the amount of a downward revaluation on an intangible asset should be
charged as an expense against income, unless an upward revaluation has previously been
recorded on the same intangible asset. In such case, the revaluation loss should be first debited to
other comprehensive income against any previous revaluation surplus recorded for the asset.
A non-current asset with a carrying value of $160m was impaired and written down to its
recoverable value of $120m two years ago.
After an upturn in business, the asset has a market value of $135m. Had the impairment not taken
place, the carrying value of the asset would have been $130m.
Required
Consider how this impairment is reversed.
When the revaluation model is adopted, the cumulative revaluation surplus of an intangible asset
may be transferred to retained earnings when the asset is disposed of and the surplus is
eventually realised. However, the surplus may also be realised over the period in which the
intangible asset is being used by the entity. The amount of the surplus realised each year is
calculated as the difference in amortisation charges based on the revalued amount of the asset
and the historical cost of the asset. The realised surplus should not be included in profit or loss,
instead it should be transferred from revaluation surplus directly to retained earnings and disclosed
in the statement of changes in equity.
184
2.6 Amortisation of intangible assets

Topic highlights
Capitalised intangible assets are amortised over their expected useful life. Where this is indefinite,
an annual impairment test replaces amortisation.
HKAS 2.6.1 Useful life

38.88,90,94
An intangible asset may have a finite or indefinite useful life. An indefinite useful life, in this
sense, means that there is no foreseeable limit to the period over which the asset is expected to
generate net cash inflows for the entity.
The useful life of an intangible asset is affected by many factors, including: technical, technological,
commercial or other types of obsolescence; expected usage; life cycles of typical product; the level
of maintenance expenditure required; the stability of the industry; expected actions by competitors;
and legal or similar restrictions on the use of the asset, such as the expiry dates of related leases.
Intangible assets which are susceptible to technological obsolescence, such as computer software,
normally have short lives. However, uncertainty does not justify the choice of a life that is
unrealistically short.
The useful life of an intangible asset may originate from contractual or other legal rights. It
should not exceed the period of the rights, though it may be shorter depending on the duration in
which the asset is to be used by the entity.
HKAS 38.100 2.6.2 Residual value
The residual value of an intangible asset with a finite useful life is assumed to be zero. This is not
the case when a third party has a commitment to buying the intangible asset at the end of its useful
life or when an active market exists for that type of asset (so that its expected residual value can be
measured) and it is likely that there will be a market for the asset at the end of its useful life.
HKAS 38.97, 2.6.3 Amortisation period

104
An intangible asset with a finite useful life is amortised over its expected useful life, starting when
the asset is available for use.
Amortisation should cease at the earlier of the date that the asset is classified as held for sale in
accordance with HKFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations and the
date that the asset is derecognised.
Annual review of the amortisation period of an intangible asset with finite useful life should be
carried out at the end of each financial year.
HKAS 38.98, 2.6.4 Amortisation method

98A,104
The amortisation method used should reflect the pattern in which the asset's future economic
benefits are consumed. If such a pattern cannot be predicted reliably, the straight line method
should be used.
HKAS 38 has been amended to remove wording perceived as prohibiting the use of the unit of
production method if it results in a lower amount of accumulated amortisation than under the
straight line method. Entities may use the unit of production method when the resulting
amortisation charge reflects the expected pattern of consumption of the expected future economic
benefits embodied in an intangible asset.
A 2014 amendment to HKAS 38 clarified that an amortisation method based on the revenue
generated by use of the asset is not appropriate. For example a patent costing $100,000 may be
used to protect production processes for 3 years, and result in goods that generate half of total
revenue earned in the first year and then a quarter in each subsequent year. In this case it would
not be appropriate to charge depreciation of $50,000 in the first year and then $25,000 in each
185
Financial Reporting
subsequent year based on the proportion of total revenue generated. This is not appropriate
because revenue generated is affected by factors other than the consumption of the asset, e.g.
price inflation, demand and sales and marketing activities. This amendment is effective for periods
beginning on or after 1 January 2016.
The amortisation method used for an intangible asset with a finite useful life should be reviewed at
each financial year end.
HKAS 38.99 2.6.5 Accounting for amortisation
The amortisation charge for a period is recognised in profit or loss in the same way as depreciation
on tangible non-current assets:
DEBIT Amortisation expense X
CREDIT Accumulated amortisation X
HKAS
38.107-109 2.6.6 Intangible assets with indefinite useful lives
An intangible asset with an indefinite useful life should not be amortised, instead HKAS 36
requires that such an asset is tested for impairment at least annually.
The useful life of an intangible asset that is not being amortised should be reviewed each year to
determine whether it is still appropriate to assess its useful life as indefinite. Reassessing the useful
life of an intangible asset as finite rather than indefinite is an indicator that the asset may be
impaired and in these circumstances it should be tested for impairment as well as being amortised
over its remaining life.
It can be difficult to establish the useful life of an intangible asset in practice. Write brief notes on
factors to consider when determining the useful life of a purchased brand name and how to
provide evidence that its useful life might, in fact, exceed 20 years.
HKAS 2.7 Disposals/retirements of intangible assets

38.112-113
An intangible asset should be derecognised from the statement of financial position when it is
disposed of or when there is no further expected economic benefit from its future use. On disposal
the gain or loss arising from the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the
carrying amount of the asset should be taken to profit or loss as a gain or loss on disposal
(i.e. treated as income or expense).
For example, if a fishing licence with a carrying amount of $2m is sold for $3m, then the licence is
derecognised from the statement of financial position and $1m profit on disposal is taken to profit.
HKAS
38.118,122,
124,126 Extensive disclosure is required for intangible assets as listed in the standard. The accounting
policies for intangible assets that have been adopted are to be disclosed in the financial
statements.
For each class of intangible assets, disclosure is required of the following:
(a) The method of amortisation used (e.g., straight line method).
(b) The useful life of the assets or the amortisation rate used.
(c) The gross carrying amount, the accumulated amortisation and the accumulated impairment
losses as at the beginning and the end of the period.
186
(d) A reconciliation of the carrying amount as at the beginning and at the end of the period
(additions, retirements/disposals, revaluations, impairment losses, impairment losses reversed,
amortisation charge for the period, net exchange differences, other movements).
(e) The carrying amount of internally-generated intangible assets.
The financial statements should also disclose the following:
(a) In the case of intangible assets that are assessed as having an indefinite useful life, the
carrying amounts and the reasons supporting that assessment.
(b) For intangible assets acquired by way of a government grant and initially recognised at fair
value, the fair value initially recognised, the carrying amount, and whether they are
carried under the cost model or the revaluation model for subsequent remeasurements.
(c) The carrying amount, nature and remaining amortisation period of any intangible asset that
is material to the financial statements of the entity as a whole.
(d) The existence (if any) and amounts of intangible assets whose title is restricted and of
intangible assets that have been pledged as security for liabilities.
(e) The amount of any commitments for the future acquisition of intangible assets.
Where intangible assets are accounted for at revalued amounts, disclosure is required of the
following:
(a) The effective date of the revaluation (by class of intangible assets).
(b) The carrying amount of revalued intangible assets.
(c) The carrying amount that would have been shown (by class of assets) if the cost model
had been used, and the amount of amortisation that would have been charged.
(d) The amount of any revaluation surplus on intangible assets, as at the beginning and end of
the period, and movements in the surplus during the year (and any restrictions on the
distribution of the balance to shareholders).
The financial statements should also disclose the amount of research and development
expenditure that has been charged as an expense of the period.
Illustration
Accounting policies
Intangible assets
(i) Research and development
Expenditure on research activities is recognised as an expense in the period in which it is
incurred.
An internally generated intangible asset arising from the Group’s product development
activities is capitalised only if all of the following conditions are met:
 An asset is created that can be identified
 It is probable that the asset with generate future economic benefits
 The development cost of the asset can be measured reliably
Internally generated intangible assets are amortised on a straight line basis over ten years
and measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses.
Where no internally generated intangible asset can be recognised, development expenditure
is recognised as an expense in the period in which it is incurred.
(ii) Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets that are acquired by the Group and have finite useful lives are
measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses.
187
Financial Reporting
Intangible assets
Development Licences
costs Total
$’000 $’000 $’000
Cost
At 1 January 20X3 5,000 8,000 13,000
Additions in year 200 - 200
Disposals in year – - -
At 31 December 20X3 5,200 8,000 13,200
Amortisation
At 1 January 20X3 1,000 3,300 4,300
Charge for year 520 600 1,120
Eliminated on disposals – - -
At 31 December 20X3 1,520 3,900 5,420
Carrying amount
At 31 December 20X3 3,680 4,700 7,780
At 1 January 20X3 4,000 4,100 8,700
Internally generated intangible assets have a carrying amount of $3.68 million (20X2:
$4 million).
At 31 December 20X3, the Group had entered into contractual commitments for the
acquisition of licences amounting to $750,000.
2.9 HK(SIC) Int-32 Intangible Assets – Website Costs

Websites are being used for business purposes to a large extent, including taking orders for
products or services; promotion and advertising of products and services; and trading access to
information contained on the website.
Many companies incur significant costs in developing such websites, and these may include the
following:
(a) Planning costs – including, for example, the costs of undertaking feasibility studies,
determining the objectives and functionalities of the website, exploring ways of achieving the
desired functionalities, identifying appropriate hardware and web applications and selecting
suppliers and consultants.
(b) Application and infrastructure development costs – including the costs of obtaining and
registering a domain name and of buying or developing hardware and operating software
that relate to the functionality of the site (for example, updateable content management
systems and e-commerce systems, including encryption software, and interfaces with other
IT systems used by the entity).
(c) Content costs – expenditure incurred on preparing, accumulating and posting the website
content.
(d) Operating costs.
The issue arises as to how these costs should be treated within the financial statements.
2.9.1 HK(SIC) Int-32 treatment
HK(SIC) Int-32 resolves that a website developed by an entity and funded by internal expenditure
is viewed as an internally generated intangible asset that is subject to the requirements of HKAS 38
Intangible Assets. This is the case whether the website is for internal or external access.
188
Specifically, the treatment is as follows:

(a) Website planning costs are an expense charged to profit or loss.
(b) Application and infrastructure development costs. Expenditure which can be directly
attributed, or allocated on a reasonable and consistent basis, to preparing the website for its
intended use is to be included in the cost of the website and recognised as an intangible
asset. Examples include expenditure on purchasing or creating content (other than content
for marketing an entity's own products and services) solely for a website, and expenditure to
enable use of the content (such as acquisition fee of a licence to reproduce) on the website.
These expenditures should be included in the cost of development when the condition is
met. However, HKAS 38 does not allow the recognition of an expenditure as part of the cost
of an intangible asset at a later date if the expenditure was initially recognised as an expense
in previous financial statements (for instance, when the content of a fully amortised copyright
is subsequently provided on a website).
(c) Content development. According to HKAS 38, expenditure incurred in the content
development stage to advertise and promote an entity's own products and services (such as
digital photographs of products) should be recognised as an expense when incurred. For
example, expenditure on professional services for taking digital photographs of an entity's
products and for enhancing their display should be recorded as an expense when the
professional services are received, not when the digital photographs are displayed on the
website.
(d) Operating. The operating stage commences when the development of a website is
complete. Unless expenditure meets the criteria in HKAS 38, it should be recognised as an
expense when it is incurred.
A website which is recognised as an intangible asset under HK(SIC) Int-32 should be measured
after initial recognition by applying the requirements as stated in HKAS 38. The useful life of a
website is best estimated to be short.

 An intangible asset should be recognised only on the condition that it is probable that future
economic benefits will flow to the entity and the cost of the asset can be measured reliably.
 An asset is initially recorded at cost but carried either at cost or revalued amount in
subsequent periods.
 Expense the costs as incurred if the recognition criteria are not met.
 Amortisation of an intangible asset with finite useful life should be spread over the useful life
of the asset. No amortisation should be recorded for an intangible asset with an indefinite
useful life.
Stauffer is a public listed company reporting under HKFRS. It has asked for your opinion on the
accounting treatment of the following items:
(a) The Stauffer brand has become well known and has developed a lot of customer loyalty
since the company was set up eight years ago. Recently, valuation consultants valued the
brand for sale purposes at $14.6m. Stauffer's directors are delighted and plan to recognise
the brand as an intangible asset in the financial statements. They plan to report the gain in
the revaluation surplus as they feel that crediting it to profit or loss would be imprudent.
(b) On 1 October 20X5 the company was awarded one of six licences issued by the government
to operate a production facility for five years. A ‘nominal’ sum of $1m was paid for the
licence, but its fair value is actually $3m.
(c) The company undertook an expensive, but successful advertising campaign during the year
to promote a new product. The campaign cost $1m, but the directors believe that the extra
189
Financial Reporting
sales generated by the campaign will be well in excess of that over its four year expected
useful life.
(d) Stauffer owns a 30-year patent which it acquired two years ago for $8m which is being
amortised over its remaining useful life of 16 years from acquisition. The product sold is
performing much better than expected. Stauffer's valuation consultants have valued its
current market price at $14m.
(e) On 1 August 20X6, Stauffer acquired a smaller company in the same line of business.
Included in the company's statement of financial position was an in-process research and
development project, which showed promising results (and was the main reason why
Stauffer purchased the other company), but was awaiting government approval. The project
was included in the company's own books at $3m at the acquisition date, while the
company's net assets were valued at a fair value of $12m (excluding the project).
Stauffer paid $18m for 100% of the company and the research and development project was
valued at $5m by Stauffer's valuation consultants at that date. Government approval has
now been received, making the project worth $8m at Stauffer's year end.
Required
Explain how the directors should treat the above items in the financial statements for the year
ended 30 September 20X6.
3 HKAS 36 Impairment of Assets

Topic highlights
HKAS 36 Impairment of Assets covers the write down of assets where their carrying value exceeds
the recoverable amount.
3.1 Introduction
The fundamental principle of HKAS 36 is relatively simple. If an asset's carrying value is higher
than its ‘recoverable amount’, then the asset is said to have suffered an impairment loss. Its value
should therefore be reduced by the amount of the impairment loss.
HKAS 36 provides guidance on:
(a) When an asset should be tested for a possible impairment
(b) How the impairment test is carried out
(c) How any resulting impairment loss is accounted for and disclosed
Before we consider each of these in turn, the next two sections explain the scope of HKAS 36 and
provide a list of important definitions within it.
HKAS 36.2
3.2 Scope
HKAS 36 applies to all tangible, intangible and financial assets including those which have been
revalued, except for the following:
 Inventories
 Assets arising from construction contracts
 Deferred tax assets
 Assets arising under HKAS 19 Employee Benefits
 Financial assets within the scope of HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments
190
 Investment property measured at fair value

 Biological assets related to agricultural activity that are measured at fair value less costs to
sell
 Deferred acquisition costs and intangible assets arising from an insurer's contractual rights
under insurance contracts within the scope of HKFRS 4 Insurance Contracts
 Non-current assets held for sale, which are dealt with under HKFRS 5 Non-current Assets
Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations
Instead, the relevant standard's requirements for recognition and measurement of assets should be
applied.

HKAS 36 provides a number of definitions, including the following:
Key terms
Impairment loss. The amount by which the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its recoverable
amount.
Carrying amount. The amount at which an asset is recognised after deducting any accumulated
depreciation (amortisation) and accumulated impairment losses thereon.
Recoverable amount of an asset is the higher of its fair value less costs to sell and its value in
use.
Value in use is the present value of the future cash flows expected to be derived from an asset.
(HKAS 36)
HKAS 36.10 3.4 Identification of a possible impairment

An impairment test is required for all assets when there is an indication of impairment at the
reporting date. In addition, certain assets should be tested for impairment annually. They are:
 Goodwill acquired in a business combination
 Intangible assets with an indefinite useful life
 Intangible assets which are not yet available for use
Note that the concept of materiality applies, and only material impairment needs to be identified.
HKAS 36.12 3.4.1 Indications of impairment
The various ways in which the indications of a possible impairment of assets might be recognised
are suggested in HKAS 36. These suggestions are mostly based on common sense.
(a) External sources of information
(i) A fall in the asset's market value that is more significant than would normally be
expected from passage of time over normal use.
(ii) A significant change in the technological, market, legal or economic environment of
the business in which the assets are employed.
(iii) An increase in market interest rates or market rates of return on investments likely to
affect the discount rate used in calculating value in use.
(iv) The carrying amount of the entity's net assets being more than its market
capitalisation.
191
Financial Reporting
(b) Internal sources of information

(i) Evidence is available of obsolescence or physical damage to an asset.
(ii) Significant changes with an adverse effect on the entity have taken place in the period
or are expected to in the near future with the result that the asset's expected use or
useful life will change.
(iii) Evidence is available that an asset is performing or will perform worse than expected.
(iv) Cash outflows to operate and maintain an asset are significantly higher than those
budgeted.
(v) Cash inflows from an asset are significantly lower than budgeted.
3.5 Impairment test

Topic highlights
Impairment is determined by comparing the carrying amount of the asset with its recoverable
amount.
The recoverable amount of an asset is the higher of the asset's fair value less costs to sell and
its value in use.
Where there are indications of impairment, or for those assets which require testing annually, an
impairment test must be performed. This involves comparing the carrying amount of the asset with
its recoverable amount.
We have already defined recoverable amount as the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value
in use.
HKAS 36.28 3.5.1 Fair value less costs to sell
Fair value is established in accordance with the requirements of HKFRS 13 Fair Value
Measurement. As we have already seen, it is defined as the price that would be received to sell an
asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the
measurement date. More detail on determining fair value is provided in Chapter 19.
While HKAS 36 provides no guidance on establishing fair value, it does clarify that costs of
disposal may include legal costs, stamp duty and similar transaction taxes, costs of removing the
asset, and direct incremental costs to bring an asset into condition for its sale. They do not,
however, include termination benefits (as defined in HKAS 19) and costs associated with reducing
or reorganising a business following the disposal of an asset are not direct incremental costs to
dispose of the asset.
HKAS 3.5.2 Value in use
36.30,33,39,
44,54-56 Value in use is the present value of the future cash flows expected to be derived from an asset.
The pre-tax cash flows and a pre-tax discount rate should be employed to calculate the present
value.
The calculation of value in use must reflect the following:
(a) An estimate of the future cash flows the entity expects to derive from the asset
(b) Expectations about possible variations in the amount and timing of future cash flows
(c) The time value of money
(d) The price for bearing the uncertainty inherent in the asset
(e) Other factors that would be reflected in pricing future cash flows from the asset
The standard provides further guidance in the assessment of cash flows and choice of discount rate.
192
Cash flows
The HKAS states the following:
(a) Cash flow projections should be based on ‘reasonable and supportable’ assumptions.
(b) Projections of cash flows, normally up to a maximum period of five years, should be based
on the most recent budgets or financial forecasts.
(c) A steady or declining growth rate for each subsequent year (unless a rising growth rate
can be justified) can be used in extrapolating short-term projections of cash flows beyond
this period. Unless a higher growth rate can be justified, the long-term growth rate employed
should not be higher than the average long-term growth rate for the product, market, industry
or country.
HKAS 36 further states that future cash flows may include:
(a) Projections of cash inflows from continuing use of the asset.
(b) Projections of cash outflows necessarily incurred to generate the cash inflows from
continuing use of the asset.
(c) Net cash flows received/paid on disposal of the asset at the end of its useful life assuming
an arm's length transaction.
An asset's current condition is the basis for estimating future cash flows. It should be noted that
future cash flows associated with restructurings to which the entity is not yet committed, or to future
costs to add to, replace part of, or service the asset are excluded.
Estimates of future cash flows should exclude the following:
(a) Cash inflows/outflows from financing activities.
(b) Income tax receipts/payments.
Foreign currency future cash flows should initially be prepared in the currency in which they will
arise and will be discounted using an appropriate rate. Translation of the resulting figure into the
reporting currency should then be based on the spot rate at the year end.
Discount rate
The discount rate should be a current pre-tax rate (or rates) that reflects:
 The current assessment of the time value of money
 The risks specific to the asset
A rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to
the asset is the return that investors would require if they were to choose an investment that
would generate cash flows of amounts, timing and risk profile equivalent to those that the
entity expects to derive from the asset.
This rate is estimated from:
 The rate implicit in current market transactions for similar assets; or
 The weighted average cost of capital of a listed entity that has a single asset which is similar
to that under review in terms of service potential and risks.
The discount should not include a risk weighting if the underlying cash flows have already been
adjusted for risk.
Example: Recoverable amount

An entity has a single manufacturing plant which has a carrying value of $749,000. A new
government elected in the country passes legislation significantly restricting exports of the product
produced by the plant. As a result, and for the foreseeable future, the entity's production will be cut
by 40%. Cash flow forecasts have been prepared derived from the most recent financial
193
Financial Reporting
budgets/forecasts for the next five years approved by management (excluding the effects of
general price inflation):
Year 1 2 3 4 5
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Future cash flows 230 211 157 104 233
(including
disposal
proceeds)
If the plant was sold now it would realise $550,000, net of selling costs.
The entity estimates that the pre-tax discount rate specific to the plant is 15%, excluding the effects
of general price inflation.
Required
Calculate the recoverable amount of the plant.
Note: PV factors at 15% are as follows.
Year PV factor at 15%
1 0.86957
2 0.75614
3 0.65752
4 0.57175
5 0.49718
Solution
 The fair value less costs to sell is given as $550,000
 The value in use is calculated as $638,000
Future cash PV factor at Discounted
Year flows 15% future cash flows
$'000 $'000
1 230 0.86957 200
2 211 0.75614 160
3 157 0.65752 103
4 104 0.57175 59
5 233 0.49718 116
638
The recoverable amount is the higher of $550,000 and $638,000, thus $638,000.
3.6 Recognition and measurement of an impairment loss

Topic highlights
Where the carrying amount exceeds the recoverable amount of an asset the difference should be
recognised as an impairment loss.
An impairment loss is recognised in profit or loss unless it reverses a previous upwards revaluation.
194
3.6.1 Measurement of an impairment loss

An impairment loss is measured as the excess of carrying amount over recoverable amount. When
impairment is identified, the impaired asset must be written down to its recoverable amount.
HKAS 36.59- 3.6.2 Recognition of an impairment loss
61
If the recoverable amount of an asset is less than its carrying amount in the statement of financial
position, an impairment loss has occurred. This loss should be recognised immediately.
(a) The asset's carrying amount should be reduced to its recoverable amount in the statement
of financial position.
(b) The impairment loss should be recognised immediately.
The recognition of an impairment loss depends on whether the asset in question is held at historic
cost or a revalued amount.
Where an asset is held at historic cost any impairment loss is recognised in profit or loss:
DEBIT Impairment loss expense (P/L) X
CREDIT Asset X
Where an asset is held at a revalued amount any impairment loss is recognised as follows:
(a) To the extent that there is a revaluation surplus held in respect of the asset, the impairment
loss should be charged to revaluation surplus.
(b) Any excess should be charged to profit or loss.
DEBIT Other comprehensive income X
DEBIT Impairment loss expense (P/L) X
CREDIT Asset X
3.6.3 Summary decision tree

The following decision tree will help to summarise the accounting steps seen so far:
Is there an indicator of An impairment test is not
potential impairment? required under HKAS 36
unless the asset is goodwill or
No an intangible asset with an
indefinite useful life or not yet
available for use.
Yes
An impairment test must be
performed by calculating the
fair value less costs to sell and
the value in use of the asset.
The higher of the two is
recoverable amount
Is the recoverable amount less No The asset is not impaired and

than the carrying amount of the should remain at carrying
asset? amount in the financial
statements
Yes
195
Financial Reporting
The asset is impaired and the

difference between the
carrying amount and
recoverable amount is the
impairment loss
Is the asset’s carrying amount No Debit the impairment loss to

based on cost? the revaluation reserve
Yes
Debit the impairment loss to
profit or loss
Example: Impairment loss

The accountant of Louella Co. has identified a machine which she believes to be impaired. The
machine cost $68,000 on 1 January 20X7 and was revalued to $75,000 on 31 December of that
year, resulting in a revaluation surplus of $10,400. The machine continued to be depreciated over
the remaining nine years of its ten-year life.
By 31 December 20X8, the development of new technology meant that the machine had fallen in
value such that its fair value less costs to sell was just $42,000. The accountant calculated a value
in use of $45,000.
What impairment loss should the accountant recognise and where should it be recorded?
Solution
 The recoverable amount is $45,000, being the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value
in use.
 The carrying amount of the machine is $66,667 ($75,000  8/9).
 Therefore an impairment loss of $21,667 must be recognised.
 The revaluation surplus at the year end in relation to the machine is $8,867 ($10,400 –
($75,000/9 – $68,000/10) being the depreciation reserves transfer).
 Therefore $8,867 is charged to other comprehensive income against the revaluation surplus
and the remaining $12,800 is charged to profit or loss by:
DEBIT Other comprehensive income $8,867
DEBIT Impairment loss expense (P/L) $12,800
CREDIT Property, plant and machinery $21,667
HKAS
36.63,110,114,
3.7 Subsequent accounting for an impaired asset
117,119 After reducing an asset to its recoverable amount, the depreciation charge on the asset should
then be based on its new carrying amount, its estimated residual value (if any) and its estimated
remaining useful life.
The annual review of assets to determine whether there may have been some impairment should
be applied to all assets, including assets that have already been impaired in the past.
196
3.7.1 Reversal of impairment losses

In some cases, the recoverable amount of an asset that has previously been impaired might turn
out to be higher than the asset's current carrying value. An impairment loss recognised previously
for an asset should be reversed if, and only if, there has been a change in the estimates used to
determine the asset's recoverable amount since the last impairment loss was recognised.
(a) The reversal of the impairment loss should be recognised immediately as income in profit
or loss for the year.
(b) The carrying amount of the asset should be increased to its new recoverable amount.
The asset cannot be revalued to a carrying amount that is higher than its value would have been if
the asset had not been impaired originally, i.e. its depreciated carrying value had the impairment
not taken place. Depreciation of the asset should now be based on its new revalued amount, its
estimated residual value (if any) and its estimated remaining useful life.
HKAS
36.6,66
3.8 Cash generating units
Topic highlights
When it is not possible to calculate the recoverable amount of a single asset, then that of its cash
generating unit (CGU) should be measured instead.
HKAS 36 explains the important concept of cash generating units. As a basic rule, the recoverable
amount of an asset should be calculated for the asset individually. However, there will be
occasions when it is not possible to estimate such a value for an individual asset, particularly in the
calculation of value in use. This is because cash inflows and outflows cannot be attributed to the
individual asset.
If it is not possible to calculate the recoverable amount for an individual asset, the recoverable
amount of the asset's cash generating unit should be measured instead.
Key term
A cash generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets for which independent cash
flows can be identified and measured.
HKAS 3.8.1 Identifying the cash generating unit to which an asset belongs
36.69,72
If the recoverable amount cannot be determined for an individual asset, an entity should identify
the smallest aggregation of assets that generate largely independent cash inflows.
As part of the identification process, an entity may take into account:
 How management monitors the entity's operations (for example, by product line, business or
location)
 How management makes decisions about continuing or disposing of the entity's operations
and assets
An asset or a group of assets is identified as a cash generating unit when an active market exists
for the output produced by the asset or the group. This is so even if some or all of the output is
used internally.
Unless a change is justified, it is necessary to identify consistently from period to period, the cash
generating units for the same type of asset.
The group of net assets (less liabilities) considered for impairment and those considered in the
computation of the recoverable amount should be alike. (For the treatment of goodwill and
corporate assets see below.)
197
Financial Reporting
Shrub is a retail store belonging to Forest, a chain of such stores. Shrub makes all its retail
purchases through Forest's purchasing centre. Pricing, marketing, advertising and human
resources policies (except for hiring Shrub's cashiers and salesmen) are decided by Forest. Forest
also owns five other stores in the same city as Shrub (although in different neighbourhoods) and 20
other stores in other cities. All stores are managed in the same way as Shrub. Shrub and four other
stores were purchased five years ago and goodwill was recognised.
What is the cash generating unit for Shrub?
Motorbike Publishing Co. owns 100 magazine titles of which 40 were purchased and 60 were self-
created. The price paid for a purchased magazine title is recognised as an intangible asset. The
costs of creating magazine titles and maintaining the existing titles are recognised as an expense
when incurred. Cash inflows from direct sales and advertising are identifiable for each magazine
title. Titles are managed by customer segments. The level of advertising income for a magazine
title depends on the range of titles in the customer segment to which the magazine title relates.
Management has a policy to abandon old titles before the end of their economic lives and replace
them immediately with new titles for the same customer segment.
What is the cash generating unit for the company?
3.9 Goodwill and impairment

HKAS 3.9.1 Allocating goodwill to cash generating units
36.80,84
Acquired goodwill does not generate independent cash flows and has to be allocated to the cash
generating units (or groups of cash generating units) of the buyer. These units are expected to
benefit from the synergies of the combination and should:
(a) Represent the lowest level within the entity at which the goodwill is monitored for internal
management purposes.
(b) Not be larger than an operating segment as defined by HKFRS 8 Operating Segments
before aggregation. This applies even where an entity is not within the scope of HKFRS 8.
Pragmatically, the allocation of goodwill may not be completed before the first reporting date after a
business combination, especially if the buyer uses provisional values to account for the
combination for the first time. The initial allocation of goodwill must be done before the end of the
first reporting period after the date of acquisition.
HKAS 36.88, 3.9.2 Testing cash generating units with goodwill for impairment
90
We have to consider the following two situations:
(a) Where goodwill has been allocated to a cash generating unit.
(b) Where goodwill has been allocated to a group of units because allocation to a specific cash
generating unit is impossible.
In the first instance, the annual impairment test is to be carried out on the cash generating unit to
which goodwill has been allocated. The carrying amount of the unit, including goodwill, is
compared with the recoverable amount. An impairment loss must be recognised when the
carrying amount of the unit is bigger than the recoverable amount.
In the second instance, where goodwill is not allocated to a CGU, the impairment test of that CGU is
carried out by comparing its carrying amount (excluding goodwill) with its recoverable amount. An
impairment loss must be recognised if the carrying amount is bigger than the recoverable amount.
198
The annual impairment test must be performed at the same time every year although it may be
performed at any time during an accounting period.
3.9.3 Impairment of goodwill where there is a non-controlling interest
If there is a non-controlling (minority) interest in a cash generating unit to which goodwill has
been allocated, and the non-controlling interest is measured as a proportion of the net assets of the
subsidiary, adjustment is required before comparing carrying amount and recoverable amount.
You may find it easier to come back to this section after studying the groups chapters where
alternative measurements of the non-controlling interest are discussed.
The issue here is that without adjustment, we are not comparing like with like:
 The carrying amount of goodwill represents only that goodwill attributable to the parent
company; however,
 The recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit includes the value of full goodwill
including that attributable to the non-controlling interest which is not recognised in the
Therefore, the carrying amount of the goodwill should be grossed up to include the goodwill
attributable to the non-controlling interest before the impairment test is conducted.
Example: Non-controlling interest

On 1 January 20X9 a parent acquires a 75% interest in a subsidiary for $2,400,000, when the
identifiable net assets of the subsidiary are $1,800,000. The non-controlling interest is measured as
a proportion of the net assets of the subsidiary. The subsidiary is a cash generating unit.
At 31 December 20X9, the recoverable amount of the subsidiary is $1,400,000. The carrying
amount of the subsidiary's identifiable assets is $1,600,000.
Calculate the impairment loss at 31 December 20X9.
Solution
At 31 December 20X9 the cash generating unit consists of the subsidiary's identifiable net assets
(carrying amount $1,600,000) and goodwill of $1,050,000 (2,400,000 + (25%  1,800,000) –
1,800,000). Goodwill is grossed up to reflect the 25% non-controlling interest.
At 31 December 20X9:
Goodwill Net assets Total
$'000 $'000 $'000
Carrying amount 1,050 1,600 2,650
Unrecognised non-controlling interest 350 – 350
1,400 1,600 3,000
Recoverable amount (1,400)
Impairment loss 1,600
Allocation of impairment loss
unrecognised (goodwill) (350) –
recognised (goodwill /net assets) (1,050) (200)
Carrying value – 1,400
The impairment loss is recognised by:
DEBIT Impairment loss (P/L) $1,250,000
CREDIT Goodwill $1,050,000
CREDIT Net assets $200,000
199
Financial Reporting
No journal entry is required in respect of the impairment loss allocated to the NCI goodwill as this is
unrecognised.
HKAS 3.10 Corporate assets

36.100,102
Corporate assets include group and divisional assets that do not generate cash inflows
independently from other assets and hence their carrying amount cannot be fully attributed to a
cash generating unit under review. Head office building, equipment or a research centre are
examples of corporate assets.
An entity should identify all the corporate assets that relate to a cash generating unit in an
impairment test of that unit.
(a) An entity compares the carrying amount of the unit (including the portion of the asset) with its
recoverable amount when a portion of the carrying amount of a corporate asset can be
allocated to the unit on a reasonable and consistent basis.
(b) If a portion of the carrying amount of a corporate asset cannot be reasonably and
consistently allocated to the unit, the entity:
(i) Recognises the impairment loss by comparing the carrying amount of the unit
(excluding the asset) with its recoverable amount.
(ii) Allocates a portion of the carrying amount of the asset on a reasonable and consistent
basis by identifying the smallest group of cash generating units that includes the cash
generating unit to which the asset belongs.
(iii) Recognises the impairment loss by comparing the carrying amount of that group of
cash generating units (including the portion of the asset allocated to the group of units)
with the recoverable amount of the group of units.
Example: Corporate assets

Rainbow has identified three CGUs within its business, and allocated assets to each as follows:
Carrying value of allocated assets
CGU 1 $640,000
CGU 2 $2,150,000
CGU 3 $1,300,000
Rainbow operates from a corporate campus with a carrying value of $2 million. This has not yet
been allocated to the CGUs, however it is considered that it can be allocated in full based on
carrying value.
The recoverable values of CGUs 1 to 3 are $980,000, $3,145,000 and $1,800,000 respectively.
What impairment losses (if any) have the CGUs suffered?
Solution
Recoverable Impairment
CV of assets HO allocation Total amount loss
$ $ $ $ $
CGU 1 640,000 312,958 952,958 980,000 -
CGU 2 2,150,000 1,051,345 3,201,345 3,145,000 56,345
CGU 3 1,300,000 635,697 1,935,697 1,800,000 135,697
4,090,000 2,000,000 6,090,000 192,042
Head office allocation:

CGU 1 640/4,090  $2 million = $312,958
CGU 2 2,150/4,090  $2 million = $1,051,345
CGU 3 1,300/4,090  $2 million = $635,697
200
HKAS
36.104,105
3.11 Allocating an impairment loss to the assets of a cash
generating unit
An impairment loss should be recognised for a cash generating unit if the recoverable amount for
the cash generating unit is less than the carrying amount in the statement of financial position for
all the assets in the unit.
When an impairment loss is recognised for a cash generating unit, the loss should be allocated
between the assets in the unit in the following order:
(a) First, to the goodwill allocated to the cash generating unit (if any).
(b) Then, to all other assets in the cash generating unit within the scope of HKAS 36 (see
section 4.2), on a pro rata basis.
In allocating an impairment loss, the carrying amount of an asset should not be reduced below the
highest of:
(a) Its fair value less costs to sell;
(b) Its value in use (if determinable); or
(c) Zero.
Any remaining amount of an impairment loss should be recognised as a liability if required by other
HKAS.
Example: Impairment loss (1)

On 31 December 20X1 Invest purchased all the shares of MH for $2 million. The net fair value of
the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed of MH at that date was $1.8 million.
MH made a loss in year ended 31 December 20X2 and at 31 December 20X2 the net assets of MH
– based on fair values at 1 January 20X2 – were as follows:
$'000
Capitalised development expenditure 200
Net current assets 250
1,750
An impairment review on 31 December 20X2 indicated that the recoverable amount of MH at that
date was $1.5 million. The capitalised development expenditure has no ascertainable external
market value and the current fair value less costs to sell of the property, plant and equipment is
$1,120,000. Value in use could not be determined separately for these two items.
Required
Calculate the impairment loss that would arise in the consolidated financial statements of Invest as
a result of the impairment review of MH at 31 December 20X2 and show how the impairment loss
would be allocated, stating the required journal entry.
Solution
Asset values Allocation of Carrying
at 31 Dec impairment value after
20X2 before loss impairment
impairment (W1)/(W2) loss
$'000 $'000 $'000
Goodwill (2,000 – 1,800) 200 (200) –
Property, plant and equipment 1,300 (180) 1,120
Development expenditure 200 (70) 130
Net current assets 250 – 250
1,950 (450) 1,500
201
Financial Reporting
The impairment loss is recognised by:

DEBIT Impairment loss expense (P/L) $450,000
CREDIT Goodwill $200,000
CREDIT Property, plant and equipment $180,000
CREDIT Development expenditure $70,000
WORKINGS
(1) Impairment loss
Carrying value 1,950
Recoverable amount 1,500
Impairment loss 450
Amount to allocate against goodwill 200

Amount to allocate pro-rata against other assets 250
(2) Allocation of the impairment losses on pro-rata basis
NBV if Actual
Initial Impairment fully loss Impaired
value pro-rated allocated Reallocation allocated value
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
PPE (250  1,300 217 1,083 (37) 180 1,120
1,300/1,500)
Dev exp (250  200 33 167 37 70 130
200/1,500)
The amount not allocated to the PPE because they cannot be taken below their recoverable
amount is allocated to other remaining assets pro-rata, in this case all against the development
expenditure.
Hence the development expenditure is reduced by a further 37 (217 – 180), making the total
impairment 70 (33 + 37).
The net current assets are not included when pro-rating the impairment loss as they are outside the
scope of HKAS 36.
Example: Impairment loss (2)

The Burgos Group is made up of two cash generating units (as a result of a combination of various
past 100% acquisitions), plus a head office, which was not allocated to any given cash generating
unit as it supports both divisions.
Due to falling sales as a result of an economic crisis, an impairment test was conducted at the year
end. The consolidated statement of financial position showed the following net assets at that date.
Head Unallocated
Division A Division B office goodwill Total
$m $m $m $m $m
Property, plant & equipment (PPE) 780 620 90 - 1,490
Goodwill 60 30 - 10 100
Net current assets 180 110 20 - 310
1,020 760 110 10 1,900
202
The recoverable amounts (including net current assets) at the year end were as follows:
$m
Division A 1,000
Division B 720
Group as a whole 1,825 (including Head office PPE at fair value less costs to sell of $80m)
The recoverable amounts of the two divisions were based on value in use. The fair value less costs
to sell of any individual item was substantially below this.
No impairment losses had previously been necessary.
Required
Discuss, with suitable computations showing the allocation of any impairment losses, the
accounting treatment of the impairment test.
Solution
Where there are multiple cash generating units, HKAS 36 Impairment of Assets requires two levels
of tests to be performed to ensure that all impairment losses are identified and fairly allocated.
First Divisions A and B are tested individually for impairment. In this instance, both are impaired
and the impairment losses are allocated first to any goodwill allocated to that unit and second to
other non-current assets (within the scope of HKAS 36) on a pro-rata basis. This results in an
impairment of the goodwill of both divisions and an impairment of the property, plant and
equipment in Division B only.
A second test is then performed over the whole business including unallocated goodwill and
unallocated corporate assets (the Head office) to identify if those items which are not a cash
generating unit in their own right (and therefore cannot be tested individually) have been impaired.
The additional impairment loss of (W2) $15m is allocated first against the unallocated goodwill of
$10m, eliminating it and then to the unallocated head office assets reducing them to $85m.
Divisions A and B have already been tested for impairment so no further impairment loss is
allocated to them or their goodwill as that would result in reporting them at below their recoverable
amount.
Carrying values after impairment test:
Division Division Head Unallocated
A B office goodwill Total
$m $m $m $m $m
PPE 780/(620 – 10)/(90 – 5) 780 610 85 - 1,475
Goodwill (60 – 20)/(30 – 30)/(10 – 10) 40 - - - 40
Net current assets 180 110 20 - 310
1,000 720 105 - 1,825
The impairment loss is recognised in the consolidated financial statements by:
DEBIT Impairment loss (profit or loss) (60m + $75m

15m)
CREDIT Goodwill (50m + 10m) $60m
CREDIT PPE (10m + 5m) $15m
203
Financial Reporting
WORKINGS
(1) Test of individual CGUs
Division A Division B Total
$m $m $m
Carrying value 1,020 760
Recoverable amount (1,000) (720)
Impairment loss 20 40 60
Allocated to:
Goodwill 20 30 50
Other assets in the scope of HKAS 36 - 10 10
20 40 60
(2) Test of group of CGUs

$m
Revised carrying value (1,000 + 720 + 110 + 10) 1,840
Recoverable amount (1,825)
Impairment loss 15
Allocated to:
Unallocated goodwill 10
Other unallocated assets 5
15
HKAS
36.122,123, 3.12 Reversal of an impairment loss
124
Topic highlights
Impairment of goodwill may never be reversed.
Where a cash generating unit has been impaired in the past, this impairment can be reversed. The
reversal of the loss is allocated to the assets of the unit, except for goodwill pro rata with the
carrying amounts of those assets. The increases in carrying amounts are treated in the same way
as reversals of individual asset impairment, in other words, the carrying amount of an asset cannot
increase above the lower of:
(a) Its recoverable amount
(b) The carrying amount of the asset net of depreciation had no impairment been recognised
previously
Cannon Co. operates in a number of countries, with its operations in each being classified as
separate cash generating units. In one of the countries of operation, Adascus, legislation was
passed two years ago restricting exports, and as a result management of Cannon expected
production to decrease by 30% in their Adascan operation. Accordingly the Adascan CGU was
tested for impairment and an impairment of $1.473 million recognised in profit:
204
Goodwill Assets
$'000 $'000
Cost at 1 January 20X1 1,000 2,000
Depreciation – (167)
1,000 1,833
Impairment (1,000) (473)
CV at 31 December 20X1 – 1,360
The average remaining useful life of assets remained unchanged after the impairment, at 11 years.
Two years later at 31 December 20X3, it is thought that the effect of the legislation is less drastic
than expected, and production is expected to increase by 25%. The recoverable amount of the
Adascan CGU is now $1.91 million.
Required
Calculate the reversal of the impairment loss.
HKAS 3.13 Disclosure

36.126,130,
131 HKAS 36 calls for substantial disclosure about impairment of assets. The information to be
disclosed includes the following:
For each class of asset:
(a) The amount of impairment losses recognised in profit or loss in the period and the line item
in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income where they are included.
(b) The amount of reversals of impairment losses recognised in the period and the line item in
the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income where they are included.
(c) The amount of impairment losses on revalued assets recognised in other comprehensive
income in the period.
(d) The amount of reversals of impairment losses on revalued assets recognised in other
comprehensive income in the period.
For each reportable segment (where HKFRS 8 is applicable):
(a) The amount of impairment losses recognised in profit or loss and in other comprehensive
income in the period.
(b) The amount of reversals of impairment losses recognised in profit or loss and in other
comprehensive income during the period.
For each material impairment loss recognised or reversed during the period for an individual
asset, including goodwill, or a cash generating unit:
(a) The events and circumstances that led to the recognition or reversal of the impairment loss.
(b) The amount of the impairment loss recognised or reversed.
(c) For an individual asset:
– The nature of the asset
– If the entity reports segment information in accordance with HKFRS 8, the reportable
segment to which the asset belongs
205
Financial Reporting
(d) For a cash generating unit:

– A description of the cash generating unit
– The amount of the impairment loss recognised or reversed by class of assets and
reportable segment (if HKFRS 8 applies)
– If the aggregation of assets for identifying the cash generating unit has changed, a
description of the old and new ways of aggregating assets and reasons for the change
(e) Whether the recoverable amount of the asset or cash generating unit is fair value less costs
to sell or value in use.
(f) If recoverable amount is fair value less costs to sell:
(i) The level of the fair value hierarchy (see Chapter 19) within which the measurement of
the fair value of the asset is categorised
(ii) For Level 2 and 3 category measurements, a description of the valuation techniques
used to measure fair value less costs of disposal and the reasons for any changes in
valuation technique
(iii) For Level 2 and 3 category measurements, each key assumption on which
management has based its determination of fair value less costs of disposal, and
discount rates where a present value technique is used.
(g) If recoverable amount is value in use, the discount rates used in the current and previous
estimates
For the aggregate impairment losses and the aggregate reversals of impairment losses
recognised during the period which are not material:
(a) The main classes of assets affected by impairment losses and reversals.
(b) The main events and circumstances that led to the recognition of these impairment losses
and reversals.
Additional disclosures are required where estimates are used to measure recoverable amounts of
cash generating units containing goodwill or intangible assets with indefinite useful lives.
Illustration
Impairment loss and subsequent reversal
During 20X0, due to regulatory restrictions imposed on the manufacture of a new product in the
Components segment, the Group assessed the recoverable amount of the related product line. The
product line relates to a new product that was expected to be available for sale in 20X1. A
regulatory inspection in 20X0, however, revealed that the product did not meet certain
environmental standards, necessitating substantial changes to the manufacturing process. As a
result, production was deferred and the expected launch date delayed.
The recoverable amount of the CGU (the production line that will produce the product) was
estimated based on its value in use, assuming that the production line would go live in August
20X3. Based on the assessment in 20X0, the carrying amount of the product line was determined
to be $765,000 higher than its recoverable amount and an impairment loss was recognised. In
20X1, following certain changes to the recovery plan, the Group reassessed its estimates and
$210,000 of the initially recognised impairment has been reversed.
The estimate of value in use was determined using a pre-tax discount rate of 8% (20X0: 7.8%).
The impairment loss and its subsequent reversal was allocated pro-rata to the individual assets
constituting the production line as follows:
206
Original
carrying Reversal in
amount Loss in 20X0 20X1
$ $ $
Plant and equipment 1,340,000 512,550 140,700
Capitalised development costs 660,000 252,450 69,300
2,000,000 765,000 210,000
The impairment loss and subsequent reversal were recognised in cost of sales.
3.14 Current developments

A proposed amendment to HKAS 36 would introduce guidance to specify that where an asset is an
investment in a subsidiary, joint venture or associate that is quoted in an active market, its fair
value is based on quoted prices for the investment held with no adjustment. This proposal is
contained within ED/2014/4 Measuring Quoted Investments in Subsidiaries, Joint Ventures and
Associates at Fair Value.

The main aspects of HKAS 36 to consider are:
 Indications of impairment of assets
 Measuring recoverable amount, as net selling price or value in use
 Measuring value in use
 Cash generating units
 Accounting treatment of an impairment loss, for individual assets and cash generating units
 Reversal of an impairment loss
207
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 38 Intangible Assets
Identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance

Controlled by the entity as a result of a past event
From which the entity expected future benefits to flow
Separately acquired Acquired in business Internally generated

combination
Research Development
Investigation Application of
undertaken to gain research findings for
new knowledge the production of
new or improved
materials, processes
etc
Expense to profit or
loss
Recognise if: Recognise if: Recognise if:

1 probable future 1 probable future 1 technically feasible
economic economic 2 intend to complete
benefits will flow benefits will flow 3 commercially viable
2 cost can be 2 fair value can be 4 probable economic benefits
measured reliably measured reliably 5 resources available to
complete
6 expenditure reliably measured
Measure at cost + Measure at fair Measure at directly attributable costs

directly value at date of since date when recognition criteria
attributable costs. acquisition. met.
Subsequent measurement
Cost model or Revaluation model Amortisation
Cost less Revalued amount Amortise over useful life

accumulated less subsequent Residual value assumed to be nil
amortisation less amortisation less Where useful life is indefinite an annual
accumulated subsequent impairment test replaces amortisation
impairment losses impairment losses
Only allowed where there is an active market i.e.

Items are homogenous
Willing buyers and sellers exist
Prices are public
208
HKAS 36 Impairment
Indicators of impairment Testing Accounting
External sources: Asset held at historic cost:

Fall in market value Impairment test is Impairment loss recognised in
Change in area of business required where there are profit or loss.
asset employed in indicators of impairment or
Increase in interest rates annually for:
Entity's net assets exceed Goodwill Asset held at revalued amount:
market capitalisation. Intangibles with an Impairment loss charged against
indefinite life revaluation reserve in respect of
Intangibles not yet the asset and then to profit or loss.
available for use
Internal sources
Obsolescence/damage
CGU:
Changes within entity
Impairment loss allocated to:
Evidence of under-
1 goodwill in the CGU
performance of asset 2 all other assets in the
Costs of maintaining asset
CGU within the scope of
higher than expected HKAS 36 on pro rata
Cash generated by an asset
basis.
lower than expected. NB loss allocated to goodwill may
never be reversed.
Test cash generating unit where it is not possible to calculate

the recoverable amount of a single asset:
Allocate goodwill to CGUs benefiting from synergies of
combination
Allocate corporate assets to CGUs if possible
Adjustment may be required to carrying amount of goodwill
where there is a non-controlling interest.
Impairment loss
arises where
Carrying amount > Recoverable

amount
Higher of
Fair value less costs to Value in use

sell
Future cash flows expected

to be derived from asset
discounted to present value
using pre-tax rate.
Disclosure requirements:
Impairment losses/reversals recognised in period on assets held at cost & assets at revalued amount
Additional disclosures for material impairment losses/reversals
209
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
The customer list is an internally generated item rather than a purchased item. It is likely to meet
the requirement to be identifiable as such a list may be sold to a competitor. The benefit of the list
is, however, unlikely to be controlled by Trainor Clothing. This is because an entity cannot control
the actions of its customers; those customers may choose to transfer their custom elsewhere.
$120,000 is not recognised as an intangible; instead it is recognised in profit or loss. This
conclusion is in line with HKAS 38 which specifically prohibits the recognition of a customer list as
an asset.
HKAS 38 prohibits the recognition of internally generated goodwill. Goodwill is not an identifiable
asset, nor is it controlled by an entity as a result of a past event. In addition, internally generated
goodwill is not capable of reliable measurement; Trainor Clothing is a different company to its
competitor and therefore the $500,000 recognised in that case is not appropriate here.
The brand is an acquired intangible asset. Where an intangible asset is acquired separately it is, by
definition, identifiable. Such an asset is also within the control of the acquiring entity as a result of a
past event. The acquisition of the asset is normally because there is an expectation of future
economic benefits. Cost can be measured reliably as the purchase price. Therefore the brand
Bonita Carina is recognised in Trainor Clothing’s statement of financial position initially at its cost of
$3 million.
Answer 2
At the end of 20X1, the production process is recognised as an intangible asset at a cost of
$190,000. This is the expenditure incurred since the date when the recognition criteria were met,
that is 1 December 20X1. The $310,000 expenditure incurred before 1 December 20X1 is
expensed, because the recognition criteria were not met. It will never form part of the cost of the
production process recognised in the statement of financial position.
This is recorded by:
DEBIT Intangible asset $190,000
DEBIT Development expense (P/L) $310,000
Answer 3
The beer pumping process project is in the development phase; based on the information provided,
the project is technically feasible, LDC can and does intend to complete the project and the project
will result in cost savings. Therefore provided that the related costs can be measured reliably they
should be capitalised. Capitalisation of costs is not allowed before all recognition criteria are met.
Testing and staff costs form part of the development costs and these should also be capitalised.
An allocation of the overheads of the R&D department do form part of the development costs to be
capitalised, as these are directly attributable costs. General overheads are not, however, directly
attributable costs and should be expensed.
Answer 4
The reversal of the impairment loss is recognised to the extent it increases the carrying amount of
the non-current asset to what it would have been had the impairment not taken place.
210
This means that the reversal of the impairment loss can only be recognised at $10m. The asset is
recognised at $130m and a reversal of the impairment loss of $10m is recognised in the statement
of profit or loss.
This is recognised by:
CREDIT Impairment loss expense (P/L) $10,000,000
Answer 5
Factors to consider would include the following:
(a) Legal protection of the brand name and the control of the entity over the (illegal) use by
others of the brand name (i.e. control over piracy).
(b) Age of the brand name.
(c) Status or position of the brand in its particular market.
(d) Ability of the management of the entity to manage the brand name and to measure activities
that support the brand name (e.g. advertising and PR activities).
(e) Stability and geographical spread of the market in which the branded products are sold.
(f) Pattern of benefits that the brand name is expected to generate over time.
(g) Intention of the entity to use and promote the brand name over time (as evidenced perhaps
by a business plan in which there will be substantial expenditure to promote the brand
name).
Answer 6
Stauffer brand
The Stauffer brand is an 'internally generated' intangible asset rather than a purchased one.
HKAS 38 specifically prohibits the recognition of internally generated brands, on the grounds that
they cannot be reliably measured in the absence of a commercial transaction. Stauffer will not
therefore be able to recognise the brand in its statement of financial position.
Licence
The licence is an intangible asset acquired by a government grant. It can be accounted for in one
of two ways:
 The asset is recorded at the nominal price (cash paid) of $1m and depreciated at $200,000
per annum of its five year life, or
 The asset is recorded at its fair value of $3m and a government grant is shown as deferred
income at $2m. The asset is depreciated over the five years at an annual rate of $600,000
per annum. The grant is amortised as income through profit or loss over the same period at
a rate of $400,000 per annum. This results in the same net cost of $200,000 in profit or loss
per annum as the first method.
Advertising campaign
The advertising campaign is treated as an expense. Advertising expenditure cannot be capitalised
under HKAS 38, as the economic benefits it generates cannot be clearly identified so no intangible
asset is created.
Patent
The patent is amortised to a nil residual value at $500,000 per annum based on its acquisition cost
of $8m and remaining useful life of 16 years.
211
Financial Reporting
The patent cannot be revalued under the HKAS 38 rules as there is no active market as a patent is
unique. HKAS 38 does not permit revaluation without an active market as the value cannot be
reliably measured in the absence of a commercial transaction.
Acquisition
The difference between the price that Stauffer paid and the fair value of the net assets of the
acquired company will represent goodwill. The research and development project must also be
valued at fair value in a business combination to ensure the goodwill is stated accurately, while in
the acquiree's own financial statements it would not be revalued as there is no active market
because it is unique. Consequently, in a business combination HKAS 38/HKFRS 3 (revised) permit
intangible assets that do not have an active market to be valued on an ‘arm's length’ basis.
The values attributed in the group financial statements on the acquisition date are therefore:
$m
Net assets (excluding R&D project) 12
R&D project 5
Goodwill (remainder) 1
Purchase price 18
The fair value of the research and development project is measured at the acquisition date, not at
the year end and so it is not recorded at $8m. The project will be amortised over the expected
useful life of the product developed once the product is available for production.
Answer 7
In identifying Shrub's cash generating unit, an entity considers whether, for example:
(a) Internal management reporting is organised to measure performance on a store-by-store
basis.
(b) The business is run on a store-by-store profit basis or on a region/city basis.
All Forest's stores are in different neighbourhoods and probably have different customer bases.
So, although Shrub is managed at a corporate level, Shrub generates cash inflows that are largely
independent from those of Forest's other stores. Therefore, it is likely that Shrub is a cash
generating unit.
Answer 8
It is likely that the recoverable amount of an individual magazine title can be assessed. Even
though the level of advertising income for a title is influenced, to a certain extent, by the other titles
in the customer segment, cash inflows from direct sales and advertising are identifiable for each
title. In addition, although titles are managed by customer segments, decisions to abandon titles
are made on an individual title basis.
Therefore, it is likely that individual magazine titles generate cash inflows that are largely
independent one from another and that each magazine title is a separate cash generating unit.
Answer 9
 At 31 December 20X3, the carrying amount of the assets are:
$'000
CV at 31 December 20X1 1,360
Depreciation X2 (1,360/11) (124)
Depreciation X3 (124)
1,112
 Recoverable amount is $1.91 million and the excess over carrying amount is therefore
$798,000.
212
 The impairment of goodwill cannot be reversed.

 The impairment of assets can be reversed provided that the new carrying amount is not in
excess of the carrying amount had no impairment arisen i.e. $1.5 million ($1.833m  9/11
years).
 Therefore, a reversal of $388,000 ($1.5m – $1.112m) is recognised in profit or loss by:
DEBIT Assets $388,000
CREDIT Impairment loss expense (P/L) $338,000
213
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
York Marble Limited 32 minutes

York Marble Limited (‘YM’) has operated a tile manufacturing plant in the city centre for more than
15 years. Due to a recent change in government policy on environmental protection and city
development, YM was ordered to close the production plant by the end of September 20Y1 and
return the leasehold land to the government early at a consideration based on the market price of
land with a similar remaining lease term and location.
As at 31 May 20Y1, YM had the following assets related to the production plant:
$m
Buildings and infrastructure 23.8
Production equipment 48.0
Electricity generator 5.2
Land under operating lease up to 20Z4 13.0
Inventories – Raw materials 8.4
Inventories – Finished products 6.4
According to the original lease, YM is required to dismantle the buildings and infrastructure before
returning the bare land to the government. Previously, the company has recognised a provision for
the dismantling to be carried out by the end of the lease term of the land in the cost of these
assets. The carrying amount of the provision at 31 May 20Y1 is $1.5 million. Based on a quotation
from a contractor, it costs $3 million for this exercise to be carried out by September 20Y1.
All production equipment will be relocated to another manufacturing plant of YM 60 km away for
continuing usage. The relocation and installation costs are estimated to be $4 million. YM agreed to
sell the electricity generator to another company at $4 million.The relocation cost will be borne by
the buyer.
Although the final consideration of the leasehold land to be paid by the government has yet to be
determined, the government has indicated to YM that the amount would be not less than
$35 million.
YM will continue manufacturing until the end of August and it is expected that all the raw materials
will be consumed for the production of tiles and sold at a profit. Half of the finished products were
made to order with a gross profit of 20% and delivered to customers in early June 20Y1. The
remaining half is obsolete and old model items which could only be sold at 40% of the cost.
Required
Discuss the accounting treatment under Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards that should be
adopted by YM for each individual asset as at 31 May 20Y1. (18 marks)
Winner Sports Limited 31 minutes

Winner Sports Limited (WSL) is a sports shoe manufacturer and it sells its products under two
different brands, Run Pro and Jog Pro, which were acquired in 20W8. Both units have been
established for the research and development, design, manufacturing, and marketing the products
of individual brands with their own production plant and sales teams. In the past two years, the
sales performance for Run Pro has deteriorated significantly due to the keen competition in the
market and the lack of new designs and models introduced, while Jog Pro has achieved a double
digit growth of sales. The management is considering to re-allocate resources to enhance the
profitability of the entity.
214
The statement of financial position showed the following assets at 30 June 20X2:
Run Pro Jog Pro Total
$'000 $'000 $'000
Brand 25,000 5,000 30,000
Plant and equipment 40,000 25,000 65,000
Development cost capitalised 6,000 3,000 9,000
Inventories 12,000 8,000 20,000
83,000 41,000 124,000
Both brands are determined to be of indefinite life. No impairment has been recognised since
acquisition.
The above are the only assets that are directly attributable to the brands. Corporate assets are
negligible.
For the purpose of preparation of the annual financial statements, the management has carried out
the following estimation:
Run Pro Jog Pro Total
$'000 $'000 $'000
Value in use 64,000 60,000 124,000
Fair value less cost to sell
– Unit as a whole 60,000 58,000 118,000
– Plant and equipment 36,000 22,000 58,000
– Development cost capitalised nil nil nil
Inventories are excluded from the cash generating unit (CGU) carrying value and the impact has
been properly incorporated in determining the value in use. Impact of other working capital is
minimal.
The fair value less costs to sell of individual items under plant and equipment are indeterminable.
Inventories are with net realisable value/fair value less costs to sell higher than their carrying
amount
Required
(a) Briefly discuss and advise whether WSL is required to conduct asset impairment review at
30 June 20X2. (3 marks)
(b) 'The total of value in use of both brands is higher than their total net assets, there is no
impairment issue.' Comment on this statement with reasons. (5 marks)
(c) Determine the impairment of assets with detail calculation, if any, to be recognised by WSL
at 30 June 20X2. (9 marks)
(Total = 17 marks)
HKICPA June 2013
215
Financial Reporting
216
chapter 9
Leases
Topic list
1 HKAS 17 Leases 6 Interpretations relating to lease accounting

1.1 Scope of HKAS 17 6.1 HK(SIC) Int-27 Evaluating the Substance
1.2 Types of lease of Transactions in the Legal Form of a
1.3 Other definitions Lease
1.4 Section summary 6.2 HK(IFRIC) Int-4 Determining Whether an
Arrangement Contains a Lease
2 Lessee accounting 6.3 HK-Int 4 Lease – Determination of the
2.1 Operating leases Length of Lease Term in respect of Hong
2.2 Finance leases Kong Land Leases
2.3 Recap
3 Lessor accounting
3.1 Operating leases 7.1 Proposed approach to accounting for leases
3.2 Finance leases
3.3 Manufacturer or dealer lessors
3.4 Lessors' disclosures for finance leases
4 Sale and leaseback transactions
5 Off-balance sheet finance explained
5.1 Reasons for off-balance sheet finance
5.2 The problem with off-balance sheet finance
Learning focus
Leasing transactions are extremely common in business and you will often come across
them in both your business and personal capacity. It is important for the accountant to be able
to advise from the perspective of both the lessor and the lessee. Off-balance sheet finance
and substance over form are both vital issues of which the accountant should be aware.
217
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.14 Leases 3
3.14.01 Identify the types of lease within the scope of HKAS 17 and define
the terminology used in relation to leases
3.14.02 Classify leases as operating or finance leases by looking at the
substance of the transaction
3.14.03 Account for operating leases from the perspective of both the
lessee and the lessor
3.14.04 Disclose the relevant information relating to operating leases in the
accounts of both the lessee and the lessor
3.14.05 Account for finance leases from the perspective of both the lessee
and the lessor
3.14.06 Disclose the relevant information relating to finance leases in the
accounts of both the lessee and the lessor
3.14.07 Account for manufacturer/dealer leases
3.14.08 Account for sale and leaseback transactions
3.14.09 Explain the term off-balance sheet finance and the importance of
substance over form
3.14.10 Explain how to determine whether an arrangement contains a lease
218
9: Leases | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 17 Leases
Topic highlights
HKAS 17 covers the accounting for lease transactions by both lessees and lessors. A lease is a
contract for the hire of a specific asset.
A lease is a contract between a lessee and lessor for the hire of a specific asset. The lessor retains
ownership of the asset but conveys the right of the use of the asset to the lessee for an agreed
period of time in return for the payment of specified rentals.
HKAS 17.2 1.1 Scope of HKAS 17

HKAS 17 is applied in accounting for all leases other than:
 Leases to explore for or use minerals, oil, natural gas and similar resources
 Licensing agreements for items such as films, video recordings, plays, manuscripts, patents
and copyrights
The standard is not applied as the basis of measurement for:
 Property held by lessee that is accounted for as an investment property
 Investment property provided by lessors under operating leases
 Biological assets held by lessees under finance leases
 Biological assets provided by lessors under operating leases
1.2 Types of lease

Topic highlights
There are two forms of lease: finance lease and operating lease.
In some cases, leasing can be considered to be a medium-term or long-term source of finance.

From the point of view of the lessee, therefore, leasing such an asset is very similar to
purchasing it using a loan. The lessee has all of the benefits and responsibilities of ownership
except for the capital allowances. These types of longer-term lease are known as finance leases.
Other leases are of a very different nature. For example, a businessman may decide to hire (lease)
a car for a week while his own is being repaired. A lease of this nature is for a short period of time
compared with the asset's useful life and the lessor will expect to lease it to many different lessees
during that life. Furthermore, the lessor rather than the lessee will be responsible for maintenance.
These types of lease are known as operating leases.
HKAS 17.4 1.2.1 Definitions
HKAS 17 Leases classifies leases as either finance leases or operating leases and requires that
different accounting treatment is applied for each.
In distinguishing between them, the standard gives the following definitions.
219
Financial Reporting
Key terms
Lease. An agreement whereby the lessor conveys to the lessee in return for a payment or series of
payments the right to use an asset for an agreed period of time.
Finance lease. A lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership
of an asset. Title may or may not eventually be transferred.
Operating lease. A lease other than a finance lease. (HKAS 17)
The classification of a lease as either finance or operating is therefore largely dependent upon the
transfer of risks and rewards. The next section explains what is meant by this term.
HKAS 17.7- 1.2.2 Risks and rewards
11
Risks are the risks of ownership, not other types of risk. These include:
 Possibility of losses from idle capacity
 Possibility of losses from technological obsolescence
 Variations in return due to changing economic conditions
Rewards are represented by:
 The expectation of profitable operation over the asset's economic life
 Unrestricted access to the asset
 Any gain from appreciation in value or realisation of a residual value.
HKAS 17 applies the same definitions and accounting principles to both lessees and lessors, but
the different circumstances of each may lead each to classify the same lease differently.
An assessment of risks and rewards may be inconclusive in deciding what type of lease a
particular arrangement is. In this instance, the standard provides examples of situations which
indicate an arrangement is a finance lease.
HKAS 17 provides the following examples of finance lease:
(a) The lease transfers ownership of the asset to the lessee by the end of the lease term.
(b) The lessee has the option to purchase the asset at a price which is expected to be
sufficiently lower than the fair value at the date the option becomes exercisable such that, at
the inception of the lease, it is reasonably certain that the option will be exercised.
(c) The lease term is for the major part of the economic life of the asset even if title is not
transferred.
(d) At the inception of the lease the present value of the minimum lease payments amounts to at
least substantially all of the fair value of the leased asset.
(e) The leased assets are of a specialised nature such that only the lessee can use them
without major modifications being made.
There are also some indicators of situations which individually or in combination could also lead to
a lease being classified as a finance lease.
(a) If the lessee can cancel the lease, the lessor's losses associated with the cancellation are
borne by the lessee.
(b) Gains or losses from the fluctuation in the fair value of the residual fall to the lessee (e.g. in
the form of a rent rebate equalling most of the sales proceeds at the end of the lease).
(c) The lessee has the ability to continue the lease for a secondary period at a rent which is
substantially lower than market rent.
220
HKAS 1.2.3 Classification of a lease

17.13,15A
Classification is made at the inception of the lease. Any revised agreement should be treated as
a new agreement over its term. In contrast, changes in estimates (e.g. of economic life or residual
value of the property) or changes in circumstances (e.g. default by the lessee) do not lead to a new
classification of a lease for accounting purposes.
Land and buildings
When a lease includes both land and building elements, an entity must consider each of these
elements in turn and classify them as finance or operating lease separately. With regard to the
land, the standard states that an important consideration is that land normally has an indefinite
economic life. This is likely to result in the land element being classified as an operating lease in
view of the low level of risks and rewards associated with the land which would have been
transferred to the lessee during the lease period.
Chin Garments Co has taken out a new lease on a factory building and surrounding land. The fair
value of the building is $70 million and the fair value of the land is $100 million. The lease is for 20
years with annual payments in arrears of $11 million. After 20 years, the business can extend the
lease for a further 20 years for an annual payment of $500,000.
Required
How is the lease classified in accordance with HKAS 17?
HKAS 17.4 1.3 Other definitions

HKAS 17 gives a substantial number of definitions.
Key terms
Minimum lease payments. The payments over the lease term that the lessee is or can be
required to make, excluding contingent rent, costs for services and taxes to be paid by and be
reimbursable to the lessor, together with:
(a) For a lessee, any amounts guaranteed by the lessee or by a party related to the lessee.
(b) For a lessor, any residual value guaranteed to the lessor by one of the following:
(i) The lessee
(ii) A party related to the lessee
(iii) An independent third party financially capable of meeting this guarantee.
However, if the lessee has the option to purchase the asset at a price which is expected to be
sufficiently lower than fair value at the date the option becomes exercisable for it to be reasonably
certain, at the inception of the lease, that the option will be exercised, the minimum lease payments
comprise the minimum payments payable over the lease term to the expected date of exercise of
this purchase option and the payment required to exercise it.
Interest rate implicit in the lease. The discount rate that, at the inception of the lease, causes the
aggregate present value of the:
(a) Minimum lease payments, and
(b) Unguaranteed residual value
to be equal to the sum of:
(a) The fair value of the leased asset
(b) Any initial direct costs
221
Financial Reporting
Initial direct costs are incremental costs that are directly attributable to negotiating and
arranging a lease, except for such costs incurred by manufacturer or dealer lessors. Examples of
initial direct costs include amounts such as commissions, legal fees and relevant internal costs.
Lease term. The non-cancellable period for which the lessee has contracted to lease the asset
together with any further terms for which the lessee has the option to continue to lease the asset,
with or without further payment, when at the inception of the lease it is reasonably certain that the
lessee will exercise the option.
A non-cancellable lease is a lease that is cancellable only in one of the following situations:
(a) Upon the occurrence of some remote contingency.
(b) With the permission of the lessor.
(c) If the lessee enters into a new lease for the same or an equivalent asset with the same
lessor.
(d) Upon payment by the lessee of an additional amount such that, at inception, continuation of
the lease is reasonably certain.
The inception of the lease is the earlier of the date of the lease agreement and the date of
commitment by the parties to the principal provisions of the lease. As at this date:
(a) A lease is classified as either an operating lease or a finance lease
(b) In the case of a finance lease, the amounts to be recognised at the lease term are
determined
Economic life is either the:
(a) Period over which an asset is expected to be economically usable by one or more users
(b) Number of production or similar units expected to be obtained from the asset by one or more
users
Useful life is the estimated remaining period, from the beginning of the lease term, without
limitation by the lease term, over which the economic benefits embodied in the asset are expected
to be consumed by the entity.
Guaranteed residual value is:
(a) For a lessee, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee or by a party
related to the lessee (the amount of the guarantee being the maximum amount that could, in
any event, become payable).
(b) For a lessor, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee or by a third
party unrelated to the lessor who is financially capable of discharging the obligations under
the guarantee.
Unguaranteed residual value is that portion of the residual value of the leased asset, the
realisation of which by the lessor is not assured or is guaranteed solely by a party related to the
lessor.
Gross investment in the lease is the aggregate of:
(a) The minimum lease payments receivable by the lessor under a finance lease
(b) Any unguaranteed residual value accruing to the lessor
Net investment in the lease is the gross investment in the lease discounted at the interest rate
implicit in the lease.
Unearned finance income is the difference between the:
(a) Gross investment in the lease
(b) Net investment in the lease
The lessee's incremental borrowing rate of interest is the rate of interest the lessee would have
to pay on a similar lease or, if that is not determinable, the rate that, at the inception of the lease,
222
the lessee would incur to borrow over a similar term, and with a similar security, the funds
necessary to purchase the asset.
Contingent rent is that portion of the lease payments that is not fixed in amount but is based on a
factor other than just the passage of time (e.g. percentage of sales, amount of usage, price indices,
market rates of interest).
(HKAS 17)
Some of these definitions are only of relevance when we look at lessor accounting in section 3.
1.4 Section summary

The following diagram should help you remember how to determine whether a lease is a finance
lease or an operating lease.
Is ownership transferred Yes

by the end of the lease term?
No
Does the lease contain a Yes

bargain purchase option?
No
Is the lease term for a Ye s

major part of the asset's
useful life?
No
Is the present value of minimum

lease payments greater than Ye s
or substantially equal to the
asset's fair value?
No
Operating lease Finance lease
2 Lessee accounting
Topic highlights
Lessee accounting:
 Operating leases: recognise rental expense on a straight line basis.
 Finance leases: record an asset in the statement of financial position and a liability to pay
for it (at the lower of fair value of the asset or present value of minimum lease payments);
apportion the finance charge to give a constant periodic rate of return.
223
Financial Reporting
HKAS 17.33 2.1 Operating leases

As stated in HKAS 17, rentals under an operating lease should be charged as an expense over
the period of the lease on a straight line basis. This is so even if unequal lease payments are
made, unless another systematic and rational basis is justified by the circumstances.
Example: Operating lease

Flora Co. entered an operating lease agreement in order to obtain use of a photocopier for a period
of three years starting on 1 October 20X9. The terms of the lease stated that payment of $2,500
should be made annually in arrears for each of the three years of the lease in addition to an initial
non-refundable deposit of $1,500.
What expense is recognised in Flora Co.'s financial statements for each year of the lease term, and
what journal entries are required to recognise the expense in each year?
Solution
Total amount payable $1,500 + (3  $2,500) = $9,000
Annual expense $9,000/3 years = $3,000
This expense is recognised in the years ended 31 December 20Y0 and 20Y1
Expense for y/e 31 Dec 20X9 $3,000  3/12 = $750
Expense for y/e 31 Dec 20Y2 $3,000 x 9/12 = $2,250
The 20X9 expense is recorded by:
DEBIT Operating lease expense $750
DEBIT Operating lease prepayment $750
CREDIT Cash $1,500
The 20Y0 expense is recorded by:
DEBIT Operating lease expense $3,000
CREDIT Cash $2,500
CREDIT Operating lease prepayment $500
CREDIT Cash $2,500
CREDIT Operating lease prepayment $250
CREDIT Operating lease accrual $250
DEBIT Operating lease accrual $250
CREDIT Cash $2,500
2.1.1 HK(SIC) Int-15 Operating Leases – Incentives

In negotiating a new or renewed operating lease, the lessor may provide incentives for the lessee
to enter into the agreement. Examples include an up-front cash payment to the lessee. The
question arises as to how incentives in an operating lease should be recognised in the financial
statements of both the lessee and the lessor.
HK(SIC) Int-15 provides that all incentives for the agreement of a new or renewed operating lease
should be recognised as an integral part of the net consideration agreed for the use of the leased
asset, irrespective of the incentive's nature or the form or the timing of payments.
224
The lessee should recognise the aggregate benefit of incentives as a reduction of rental expense
over the lease term, generally on a straight line basis.
Costs incurred by the lessee, including costs in connection with a pre-existing lease should be
accounted for in accordance with the relevant HKAS.
Example: Operating lease incentives

Fauna Co. enters into an operating lease agreement on 1 August 20X8 in order to obtain use of a
machine. The lease term is four years and $5,000 is payable annually in advance. As an incentive,
the lessor has agreed a reduction of 40% off the first year's rental payment.
What expense is recorded by Fauna Co. in the year ended 31 December 20X8 in respect of this
agreement and what journal entry is required to record this?
Solution
Total amount payable ($5,000  4) – $2,000 = $18,000
Annual expense $18,000/4 years = $4,500
Expense for y/e 31 Dec 20X8 $4,500  5/12 = $1,875
DEBIT Operating lease prepayment $1,125
CREDIT Cash $3,000
HKAS 17.35 2.1.2 Lessees' disclosures for operating leases

Disclosures of the following, which are in addition to the requirements under HKFRS 7 (see
Chapter 18), are required:
 The total of future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases for
each of the following periods:
– Not later than one year
– Later than one year and not later than five years
– Later than five years.
 The total of future minimum sublease payments expected to be received under
non-cancellable subleases at the end of the reporting period.
 Lease and sublease payments recognised as an expense for the period, with separate
amounts for minimum lease payments, contingent rents, and sublease payments.
 A general description of the lessee's significant leasing arrangements including, but not
limited to, the following:
– Basis on which contingent rent payments are determined
– Existence and terms of renewal or purchase options and escalation clauses.
Restrictions imposed by lease arrangements, such as those concerning dividends, additional debt,
and further leasing.
Illustration
Accounting policy
Rentals payable under operating leases are charged to profit or loss on a straight line basis over
the term of the relevant lease except where another more systematic basis is more representative
of the time pattern in which economic benefits from the lease asset are consumed.
225
Financial Reporting
Operating lease arrangements

20X3 20X2
$’000 $’000
Minimum lease payments under operating leases
recognised as an expense in the year 34,000 56,000
At the reporting date the Group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments
under non-cancellable operating leases, which fall due as follows:
20X3 20X2
$’000 $’000
Within one year 42,000 34,000
In the second to fifth years inclusive 66,000 68,000
After five years 24,000 -
132,000 102,000
Operating lease payments represent rentals payable by the Group for certain of its office
properties. Leases are negotiated for an average term of 6 years and rentals are fixed for an
average of 6 years with an option to extend for a further 4 years at the then prevailing market rate.
HKC entered into a non-cancellable agreement with a lessor company to acquire a major piece of
machinery for 3 years from 1 July 20X7. The lessor company incurred costs associated with
arranging the lease of $40,000. The machinery has an expected remaining useful life of 40 years at
1 July 20X7 and a carrying amount of $3.4 million. The terms of the lease agreement require an
initial non-refundable deposit of $12,000 and then monthly rentals of $3,000 paid in arrears.
HKC rents a number of items of machinery and equipment under similar terms; the average lease
term is 5 years.
Required
Prepare extracts from the financial statements of HKC Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X7 in
respect of the lease.
2.2 Finance leases

From the lessee's point of view there are two main accounting problems:
(a) Whether the asset should be capitalised as if it had been purchased.
(b) How the lease charges should be allocated between different accounting periods.
HKAS 2.2.1 Accounting treatment
17.20,25,27,
28 HKAS 17 requires that a finance lease is accounted for as follows:
1 An asset and corresponding liability are recorded
At the inception of the lease an asset and corresponding liability are recorded at the lower of
the fair value of the leased asset and the present value of the minimum lease payments.
Note that HKAS 17 uses the term ‘fair value’ in a way that differs from the definition of fair
value in HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement. Therefore, in respect of leases fair value
should be measured in accordance with HKAS 17 rather than HKFRS 13.
226
The interest rate implicit in the lease is used to determine the present value of the minimum
lease payments. If it is not practical to determine this rate then the lessee's incremental
borrowing rate may be used.
Any initial direct costs of the lessee are added to the amount recognised as an asset. These may
be incurred in connection with securing or negotiating the lease, but should only include costs
which are directly attributable to activities performed by the lessee to obtain the finance lease.
2 The asset is depreciated
The asset held under the finance lease is depreciated over the shorter of the lease term and
the useful life of the asset.
If there is a reasonable certainty that the lessee will obtain ownership at the end of the lease,
the asset should be depreciated over the asset's useful life. The policy of depreciation
adopted should be consistent with similar non-leased assets and calculations should follow
the bases set out in HKAS 16 (see Chapter 5).
HKAS 17 (revised) introduced guidance on impairment of leased assets by referring to HKAS 36.
3 Lease payments are recorded
Minimum lease payments should be split into the finance charge under the finance lease and
a reduction of the outstanding obligation for future amounts payable.
The finance charge allocated to the accounting periods should produce a constant periodic
rate of interest on the outstanding balance of the lease obligation for each accounting
period, or a reasonable approximation thereto.
The normal method applied in order to achieve this is the actuarial method, discussed in the
next section. An alternative method is the sum of digits method, however this is not examinable.
Contingent rents should be charged in the periods in which they are incurred.
2.2.2 Actuarial method
The actuarial method, which is the best and most scientific method for interest allocation, is
derived from the assumption that interest charged by the lessor will be the same as the lessor's
desired rate of return, multiplied by its capital investment.
(a) The capital investment is identical to the fair value of the asset (less any initial deposit paid
by the lessee) at the commencement of the lease.
(b) The amount of capital invested reduces as each instalment is paid. The interest on the lease
decreases gradually as capital is repaid. It follows that the interest accruing is greatest in the
early part of the lease term. We will go through a simple example of the actuarial method in
this section.
Example: Finance lease with payments in arrears
On 1 January 20X0, Gordon Co. leased an asset with a fair value of $38 million and a useful life of
five years. The lease term was five years and the interest rate implicit in the lease was 9.9%. The
company is required to make five annual instalments of $10 million on 31 December, with the first
payment on 31 December 20X0. Gordon Co has no other leased assets.
Show the lease obligation working for each year of the lease and identify amounts to be recognised
in profit or loss in 20X0. You should state all relevant journal entries for 20X0.
Solution
Interest is calculated as 9.9% of the outstanding capital balance at the beginning of each year. The
outstanding capital balance reduces each year by the capital element comprised in each
instalment. The outstanding capital balance at 1 January 20X0 is the $38 million fair value at which
both the asset and liability are initially recorded. Depreciation on the plant is to be provided for at
the rate of 20% per annum on a straight line basis assuming a residual value of nil.
227
Financial Reporting
Annual lease
Balance of lease at payment at Balance of lease
Year 1 Jan Interest 9.9% 31 Dec at 31 Dec
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
20X0 38,000 3,762 (10,000) 31,762
20X1 31,762 3,144 (10,000) 24,906
20X2 24,906 2,466 (10,000) 17,372
20X3 17,372 1,720 (10,000) 9,092
20X4 9,092 908 (10,000) -
Amounts to be included in profit or loss in 20X0 are: $m
Depreciation (38m/5 years) 7.600
Finance cost 3.762
Note that the $10m lease payment in 20X0 includes payment of the $3.762m interest for the year
plus a capital amount of $6.238m.
Journal entries
CREDIT Finance lease obligation $38,000,000
To recognise the asset and finance lease obligation at the commencement of the lease.
DEBIT Finance cost (profit or loss) $3,762,000
CREDIT Finance lease obligation $3,762,000
To recognise the finance cost accruing on the lease obligation.
DEBIT Finance lease obligation $10,000,000
CREDIT Cash $10,000,000
To recognise the payment of the lease instalment.
DEBIT Depreciation expense $7,600,000
CREDIT Accumulated depreciation $7,600,000
To recognise depreciation on the leased asset.
Example: Finance lease with deposit and payments in arrears

On 1 January 20X5 Jennifer Co. acquired a machine from Alice Co. under a finance lease. The
cash price of the machine was $7,710 while the minimum payments in the lease agreement totalled
$10,000. The agreement required the immediate payment of a $2,000 deposit with the balance
being settled in four equal annual instalments commencing on 31 December 20X5. The finance
charge of $2,290 represents interest of 15% per annum, calculated on the remaining balance of the
liability during each accounting period.
Required
Prepare a table showing the movement in the finance lease obligation over the lease term, using
the actuarial method.
Solution
Interest is calculated as 15% of the outstanding capital balance at the beginning of each year. The
outstanding capital balance reduces each year by the capital element comprised in each
instalment. The outstanding capital balance at 1 January 20X5 is $5,710 ($7,710 fair value less
$2,000 deposit).
228
Capital at Interest Capital at

Year 1 Jan 15% Instalment 31 Dec
$ $ $ $
20X5 5,710 856 2,000 4,566
20X6 4,566 685 2,000 3,251
20X7 3,251 488 2,000 1,739
20X8 1,739 261 2,000 –
2,290 8,000
In the above examples, repayments are made at the end of each reporting period i.e. in arrears. It
may be that repayments are made at the start of a reporting period, i.e. in advance, and in this case
the lease obligation table takes a slightly different format. The following example illustrates this.
Example: Finance lease with payments in advance
Jesmond acquired an asset by way of a five-year term finance lease on 1 July 20X0. The asset had
a fair value of $102,500 and a useful life of five years and the lease contract required five equal
payments in advance of $25,000 each. The interest rate implicit in the lease is 11%. Jesmond’s
year end is 30 June.
Draw up the lease liability table for Jesmond for the whole five-year period, identifying amounts for
inclusion in the statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 June 20X1 and preparing journal
entries for the first year of the lease term.
Solution
Interest at
B/ Repayment C/f 11% C/f
$ $ $ $ $
30.6.X1 102,500 (25,000) 77,500 8,525 86,025
30.6.X2 86,025 (25,000) 61,025 6,713 67,738
30.6.X3 67,738 (25,000) 42,738 4,701 47,439
30.6.X4 47,439 (25,000) 22,439 2,468 24,907
30.6.X5 24,907 (25,000)*
* There is a rounding difference of $93.
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 20X1
$
Depreciation ($102,500/5 years) 20,500
Finance cost 8,525
Note that in this example, interest is calculated after the repayment i.e. it is based on the amount
owed throughout a period. Therefore, the table includes items in a different order to that seen
previously.
Journal entries
DEBIT Property, plant and equipment $102,500
CREDIT Finance lease obligation $102,500
To recognise the asset and finance lease obligation at the commencement of the lease.
DEBIT Finance lease obligation $25,000
CREDIT Cash $25,000
To recognise the payment of the lease instalment.
DEBIT Finance cost (profit or loss) $8,525
CREDIT Finance lease obligation $8,525
To recognise the finance cost accruing on the lease obligation.
229
Financial Reporting

To recognise depreciation on the leased asset.
2.2.3 Finance leases with different payment schedules

In the examples above, all finance leases agreements have involved one annual payment. In some
cases, payments are required monthly or quarterly. Where this is the case, the working should be
drawn up as we have seen, with one row representing each payment period. Therefore, where
there are quarterly repayments, the table will include four rows for each accounting year:
B/f Interest 7% Repayment C/f
31.3.X1 119,400 8,358 (20,000) 107,758
30.6.X1 107,758 7,543 (20,000) 95,301
30.9.X1 95,301 6,671 (20,000) 81,972
31.12.X1 81,972 5,738 (20,000) 67,710
28,310
Finance charge Year end liability
HKAS 17.31 2.2.4 Lessees' disclosure for finance leases

HKAS 17 states that it is not appropriate to show liabilities for leased assets as deductions from the
leased assets and therefore these amounts should not be netted off.
In addition, a distinction should be made between current and non-current lease liabilities, if the
entity makes this distinction for other liabilities.
HKAS 17 also requires substantial disclosures to be provided in the notes to the accounts (in
addition to those required by HKFRS 7: see Chapter 18), including the following:
(a) The net carrying amount at the end of the reporting period for each class of asset.
(b) A reconciliation between the total of minimum lease payments at the end of the reporting
period, and their present value. In addition, an entity should disclose the total of minimum
lease payments at the end of the reporting period, and their present value, for each of the
following periods:
(i) Not later than one year
(ii) Later than one year and not later than five years
(iii) Later than five years.
(c) Contingent rents recognised as an expense for the period.
(d) Total of future minimum sublease payments expected to be received under non-
cancellable subleases at the end of the reporting period.
(e) A general description of the lessee's significant leasing arrangements including, but not
limited to, the following:
(i) The basis on which contingent rent payments are determined
(ii) The existence and terms of renewal or purchase options and escalation clauses
(iii) Restrictions imposed by lease arrangements, such as those concerning dividends,
additional debt, and further leasing.
230
Example: Lessee disclosures

These disclosure requirements will be illustrated for Gordon Co. (the first example in section 2.2.2).
We will assume that Gordon Co. makes up its accounts to 31 December and uses the actuarial
method, as shown in the example above, to apportion finance charges.
Solution
The company's accounts for the first year of the lease, the year ended 31 December 20X0, would
include the information given below.
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X0 (EXTRACTS)
$'000 $'000
Non-current assets
Assets held under finance leases
Plant and machinery at cost 38,000
Less accumulated depreciation ($38,000/5 years) 7,600
30,400
Non-current liabilities
Obligations under finance leases
(Balance at 31 December 20X1) 24,906
Current liabilities
Obligations under finance leases (31,762 – 24,906) 6,856
(Note that only the outstanding capital element is disclosed under liabilities, i.e. the total of the
minimum lease payments with future finance charges separately deducted.)
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X0 (EXTRACT)
$'000
Interest payable and similar charges
Interest on finance leases 3,762
Notes to the accounts

Accounting policy
Assets held under finance leases are recognised as assets of the Company at their fair value, or if
lower, at the present value of the minimum lease payments, each determined at the inception of
the lease. The corresponding liability to the lessor is included in the statement of financial position
as a finance lease obligation.
Lease payments are apportioned between finance expenses and the reduction of the lease
obligation so as to achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability.
Finance expenses are recognised immediately in profit or loss, unless they are directly attributable
to qualifying assets (in which case they are capitalised in accordance with HKAS 23 Borrowing
Costs). Contingent rents are recognised as expenses in the period in which they are incurred.
231
Financial Reporting
Obligations under finance leases

Present value of
Minimum lease minimum lease
payments payments
20X0 20W9 20X0 20W9
Amounts payable under finance leases – minimum $’000 $’000 $'000 $'000
lease payments
Within one year 10,000 - 6,856 -
In the second to fifth years inclusive 30,000 - 24,906 -
After five years - - - -
40,000 - 31,762 -
Less future finance charges (8,238) - n/a -
Present value of lease obligations 31,762 - 31,762 -
Less amount due for settlement within 12 months (6,856)

(shown within current liabilities)
Amount due for settlement after 12 months 24,906
It is the Company’s policy to lease certain equipment under finance leases. The average lease
term is 5 years. For the year ended 31 December 20X3, the average effective borrowing rate was
9.9%. Interest rates are fixed at the contract date. All leases are on a fixed repayment basis and no
arrangements have been entered into for contingent rental payments.
Potter leases an asset (as lessee) on 1 January 20X1, incurring $20,000 of costs in setting up the
agreement. Potter agrees to pay a non-refundable deposit of $58,000 on inception together with six
annual instalments of $160,000, payable in arrears.
Potter also guaranteed to the lessor that the lessor would receive at least $80,000 when the asset
is sold in the general market at the end of the lease term.
The fair value of the asset (equivalent to the present value of minimum lease payments) on
1 January 20X1 is $800,000. Its useful life to the company is five years.
The interest rate implicit in the lease has been calculated as 10%.
Required
(a) Prepare the relevant extracts from the statement of financial position and statement of profit
or loss of Potter in respect of the above lease for the year ended 31 December 20X1.
(b) Explain what would happen at the end of the lease if the asset could be sold by the lessor:
(i) For $80,000
(ii) For only $60,000
2.2.5 Arguments against capitalisation

The main argument in favour of capitalisation of assets acquired under a finance lease is
substance over form. The substance of the arrangement is that the lessee owns the asset, since
the risks and rewards of ownership have transferred to them and they in effect pay for the asset by
way of a financing arrangement.
232
The main arguments against capitalisation are as follows:

(a) Legal position. The benefit of a lease to a lessee is an intangible asset, not the ownership
of the equipment. It may be misleading to users of accounts to capitalise the equipment
when a lease is legally quite different from a loan used to purchase the equipment.
Capitalising leases also raises the question of whether other executory contracts should be
treated similarly, for example contracts of employment.
(b) Complexity. Many small businesses will find that they do not have the expertise necessary
for carrying out the calculations required for capitalisation.
(c) Subjectivity. To some extent, capitalisation is a somewhat arbitrary process and this may
lead to a lack of consistency between companies.
(d) Presentation. The impact of leasing can be more usefully described in the notes to financial
statements. These can be made readily comprehensible to users who may not understand
the underlying calculations.
2.3 Recap
The following diagram gives a useful summary of the accounting treatment for a finance lease
by a lessee.
Accounting for a finance lease by a lessee
Start
233
Financial Reporting
3 Lessor accounting
Topic highlights
Lessor accounting:
 Operating leases: record as long-term asset and depreciate over useful life, record income
on a straight line basis over the lease term.
 Finance leases: record the amount due from the lessee in the statement of financial position
at the net investment in the lease, recognise finance income to give a constant periodic rate
of return.
To a certain extent at least, the accounting treatment of leases adopted by lessors will be a mirror
image of that used by lessees.
HKAS 17.49-
53
3.1 Operating leases
3.1.1 Accounting treatment
An asset held by a lessor under an operating lease is treated as a long-term asset and
depreciation is recorded over its useful life. The depreciation basis should be the same as the
lessor's policy on similar non-lease assets which shall follow the guidance in HKAS 16.
In determining whether there is an impairment of the leased asset, the lessor should refer to the
issues discussed in HKAS 36.
Income under an operating lease, excluding charges for services such as insurance and
maintenance, should be recognised over the period of the lease on a straight line basis. This is so
even if the receipts are not on such a basis, unless another systematic and rational basis is identified
as more representative of the time pattern in which the benefit from the leased asset is receivable.
In accordance with HK(SIC)Int-15 Operating Leases – Incentives (see section 2.1.1), the lessor
should recognise the aggregate cost of incentives as a reduction of rental income over the lease
term, generally on a straight line basis.
Initial direct costs incurred by lessors in negotiating and arranging an operating lease should be
capitalised and amortised over the lease term. These costs are included in the carrying amount of
the leased asset and recognised as an expense over the lease term on the same basis as lease
income.
HKAS 17.56 3.1.2 Lessors' disclosures for operating leases

The following should be disclosed (on top of HKFRS 7 requirements).
 For each class of asset, the gross carrying amount, the accumulated depreciation and
accumulated impairment losses at the end of the reporting period:
– Depreciation recognised in income for the period
– Impairment losses recognised in income for the period
– Impairment losses reversed in income for the period.
 The future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases in the
aggregate and for each of the following periods:
– Not later than one year
– Later than one year and not later than five years
– Later than five years.
234
 Total contingent rents recognised in income.

 A general description of the lessor's leasing arrangements.
Illustration
Accounting policy
Rental income from operating leases is recognised on a straight line basis over the term of the
relevant lease. Initial direct costs incurred in negotiating and arranging an operating lease are
added to the carrying amount of the leased asset and recognised on a straight line basis over the
lease term.
Operating lease arrangements
Property rental income earned during the year was $12 million (20X2: $16.2 million). Direct
operating expenses arising on the investment property in the period amounted to $2 million (20X2:
$3.4 million). Certain of the Group’s properties held for rental purposes with a carrying amount of
$26 million have been disposed of since the reporting date. The remaining properties are expected
to generate rental yields of 6% on an ongoing basis. All of the properties have committed tenants
for the next 7 years. All operating lease contracts contain market review clauses in the event that
the lessee exercises its option to renew. Lessees do not have the option to purchase properties at
the expiry of the lease period.
At the reporting date the Group had contracted with tenants for the following future minimum lease
payments:
20X3 20X2
$’000 $’000
Within one year 12,000 12,000
In the second to fifth years inclusive 48,000 48,000
After five years 24,000 36,000
84,000 96,000
Moor Leasing Co leases a property to Rombald Hotel Co for 3 years from 1 July 20X4. Moor
Leasing Co incurs costs in arranging the lease of $136,000.
Details are as follows:
 The carrying amount of leased property at commencement of lease is $51 million
 The remaining useful life is 34 years
 An initial non-refundable deposit of $1.8 million is required to be paid by Rombald Hotel Co
 Monthly rentals of $75,000 are payable in arrears in accordance with the terms of the lease
Required
Prepare extracts from the financial statements of Moor Leasing Co for the year ended 31
December 20X4 in respect of the lease.
3.2 Finance leases

Some of the definitions listed in the Key terms in section 1 of this chapter are relevant to lessor
accounting and you should review them again.
 Unguaranteed residual value
 Gross investment in the lease
235
Financial Reporting
 Unearned finance income

 Net investment in the lease

17.36,38-41
According to HKAS 17, the amount due from the lessee under a finance lease is to be shown as
a receivable, at an amount of the net investment in the lease, in the statement of financial
position of the lessor.
The finance income under a finance lease should be recognised so as to generate a constant
periodic rate of return on the lessor's outstanding net investment in each period. A reasonable
approximation may be made to arrive at the constant periodic rate of return.
The lease payments (excluding costs for services) for the accounting period should be applied
against the gross investment in the lease. This will result in reducing both the principal and the
unearned finance income.
Regular review should be carried out on the estimated unguaranteed residual values used to
calculate the lessor's gross investment in a lease. If there has been a reduction in the value, the
income allocation over the lease term must be revised. Immediate recognition is required for any
reduction in respect of amounts already accrued.
The initial amount of the finance lease receivable should include the initial direct costs incurred
by lessors (e.g. commissions, legal fees and other costs that are directly attributable to negotiating
and arranging a lease).
Example: Finance leases: lessor accounting

Hire Co. leased an asset to another company with effect from 1 January 20X8. The terms of the
lease were as follows:
 Lease term of eight years
 Rentals of $11,000 are payable in advance
 The interest rate implicit in the lease is 12.8%
The fair value of the asset on 1 January 20X8 was $59,500 and legal fees associated with the
lease amounting to $500 were payable by Hire Co. on this date.
What amounts are recognised in Hire Co.'s financial statements for the year ended 31 December
20X8 in respect of the lease?
Solution
The net investment in the lease is calculated as:
$
Amount due from lessee (fair value of the asset) 59,500
Direct costs 500
60,000
This net investment reduces over the period of the lease due to payments received; it will also
increase due to interest receivable. In other words, the movement is the direct opposite of the
movement seen in the finance lease obligation of a lessee:
236
$
Balance 1 January 20X8 60,000
Instalment 1 January 20X8 (11,000)
Balance c/f 49,000
Interest at 12.8% 6,272
Balance at 31 December 20X8 55,272
Instalment 1 January 20X9 (11,000)
Balance c/f 44,272
Therefore, in the statement of financial position of Hire Co., a current and non-current asset is
recognised.
Non-current asset: Net investment in finance lease $44,272
Current asset: Net investment in finance lease (55,272 – 44,272) $11,000
Interest receivable of $6,272 is recognised in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income.
HKAS 17.42- 3.3 Manufacturer or dealer lessors

46
In some instances, manufacturers lease out assets which they have made, rather than sell them.
Similarly, dealers acquire assets for resale but in some circumstances may instead lease these out
to third parties.
Unlike normal lessor companies which buy assets at their fair value and in leasing them out make a
profit only on the financing arrangements, these companies acquire the asset in the first place for
less than fair value:
 Manufacturers acquire the asset for cost
 Dealers generally acquire the asset at a discount
Therefore, the manufacturer or dealer makes two types of income:
1 A profit or loss (being the difference between the cost /reduced price and fair value)
2 Interest from financing arrangements
HKAS 17 therefore requires the following accounting treatment:
(a) The selling profit/loss is recognised in income for the period as if it was an outright sale.
For this purpose:
– Revenue is the lower of the fair value of the asset or the present value of the minimum
lease payments calculated using a market rate of interest
– Cost of sales is the cost (or carrying amount if different) of the asset less the present
value of any unguaranteed residual value.
(b) If interest rates are artificially low, the selling profit is restricted to that which would apply
had a commercial rate been applied.
(c) Costs incurred in connection with negotiating and arranging a lease are recognised as an
expense when the selling profit is recognised (at the start of the lease term).
HKAS 17.55 3.3.1 Manufacturers or dealers and operating leases
A lessor who is a manufacturer or dealer should not recognise any selling profit on entering into
an operating lease because it is not the equivalent of a sale. The manufacturer or dealer has
retained the assets with a view to using them to generate rental income.
237
Financial Reporting
HKAS 17.47 3.4 Lessors' disclosures for finance leases

The following should be disclosed (in addition to the requirements of HKFRS 7):
(a) A reconciliation between the total gross investment in the lease at the end of the reporting
period, and the present value of minimum lease payments receivable at the end of the
reporting period. In addition, an entity should disclose the total gross investment in the lease
and the present value of minimum lease payments receivable at the end of the reporting
period, for each of the following periods:
(i) Not later than one year
(ii) Later than one year and not later than five years
(iii) Later than five years.
(b) Unearned finance income.
(c) The unguaranteed residual values accruing to the benefit of the lessor.
(d) The accumulated allowance for uncollectible minimum lease payments receivable.
(e) Contingent rents recognised in income in the period.
(f) A general description of the lessor's material leasing arrangements.
4 Sale and leaseback transactions

HKAS 17.58- In a sale and leaseback transaction, an asset is sold and then leased back by the same seller. The
65 lease payment and sale price are normally linked because they are part of the same package in the
negotiation. The type of lease involved determines the accounting treatment for the lessee and the
seller.
(a) In a sale and leaseback transaction which results in a finance lease, any apparent profit or
loss (that is, the difference between the sale price and the previous carrying amount) should
be deferred and amortised in the financial statements of the seller/lessee over the lease
term. It should not be recognised as income immediately since, in substance, there has been
no genuine sale.
(b) If the leaseback is an operating lease:
(i) Any profit or loss should be recognised immediately, provided it is clear that the
transaction is established at a fair value.
(ii) Where the sale price is below fair value, any profit or loss should be recognised
immediately except that if the apparent loss is compensated by future lease payments
at below market price it should to that extent be deferred and amortised over the
period for which the asset is expected to be used.
(iii) If the sale price is above fair value, the excess over fair value should be deferred
and amortised over the period over which the asset is expected to be used.
Immediate recognition of the loss (carrying value less fair value) is required where the fair value of
the asset at the time of the sale is less than the carrying amount in an operating lease.
A sale and leaseback should be accounted in the same way as other leases by the buyer or
lessor.
If the disclosure requirements of both the lessees and lessors are followed, it should result in
satisfactory disclosure of sale and leaseback transactions.
Example: Sale and finance leaseback

Osborne Co. owned an asset with a carrying amount of $840,000 on 1 March 20X8. On this date
Osborne Co. sold the asset to a bank for $1,320,000, being the present value of the minimum
lease payments, and then undertook to lease it back under a 40-year finance lease.
238
The annual rental is $39,000 payable in advance.

End of reporting period for Osborne Co. is 28 February.
Required
How should the transaction be accounted for by Osborne Co.?
Solution
At the date of sale/inception of the lease
$ $
On the sale of the asset:
DEBIT Cash 1,320,000
CREDIT Asset 840,000
Deferred income 480,000
On the lease back of the asset:
DEBIT Asset 1,320,000
CREDIT Finance lease obligation 1,320,000
On the payment of the first instalment:
DEBIT Finance lease obligation 39,000
CREDIT Cash 39,000
Amounts charged to the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year
ended 28 February 20X9 will include:
 Depreciation of the asset ($1,320,000/40 years) $33,000
 A release of the deferred income ($480,000/40 years) $12,000
 Interest accrued on the lease at the implicit rate
Example: Sale and operating leaseback

On 1 January 20X2 Cable Co. owned an asset with a carrying amount of $80,000. The fair value of
the asset on that date was $90,000.
In order to improve its liquidity position, Cable Co. has negotiated possible agreements to sell the
asset and lease it back under an operating lease for seven years. The financial controller is
currently assessing the four agreements.
The agreements are as follows:
Agreement 1 Sale for $90,000 with annual future lease payments at a market rate of $15,000
Agreement 2 Sale for $75,000 with annual future lease payments of $15,000
How would each of these agreements be accounted for in Cable Co.'s financial statements?
Solution
Agreement 1 Sale is for fair value and therefore a profit of $10,000 is recognised immediately
in profit or loss.
Agreement 2 Sale is for less than fair value however the loss is not compensated for by low
future rentals. Therefore, the loss of $5,000 is recognised immediately.
Agreement 3 Sale is for less than fair value and the loss is compensated for by low future
rentals. Therefore, the loss of $30,000 is recognised in the statement of financial
position and released to profit or loss over the lease term.
239
Financial Reporting
Agreement 4 Sale is for more than fair value. Therefore, a profit of $10,000 being the
difference between the fair value and carrying amount is recognised in profit or
loss immediately and the excess profit of $20,000 is recognised in the statement
of financial position and released to profit over the lease term.
5 Off-balance sheet finance explained

Topic highlights
HKAS 17 (revised) has closed many loopholes, but some still argue that it is open to
manipulation.
Key term
Off-balance sheet finance is the funding or refinancing of a company's operations in such a way
that, under legal requirements and traditional accounting conventions, some or all of the finance
may not be shown in its statement of financial position.
‘Off-balance sheet transactions’ are transactions which meet the above objective. These
transactions may involve the removal of assets from the statement of financial position, as well as
liabilities, and they are also likely to have a significant impact on profit or loss.
5.1 Reasons for off-balance sheet finance

Off-balance sheet transactions may be entered into for a number of reasons, including the
following:
(a) In some countries, companies traditionally have a lower level of gearing than companies in
other countries. Off-balance sheet finance is used to keep gearing low, probably because of
the views of analysts and brokers.
(b) A company may need to keep its gearing down in order to stay within the terms of loan
covenants imposed by lenders.
(c) A listed company with high borrowings is often expected (by analysts and others) to declare
a rights issue in order to reduce gearing. This has an adverse effect on a company's share
price and so off-balance sheet financing is used to reduce gearing and the expectation of a
rights issue.
(d) Analysts' short-term views are a problem for companies developing assets which are not
producing income during the development stage. Such companies will match the borrowings
associated with such developing assets, along with the assets themselves, off-balance
sheet. They are brought back into the statement of financial position once income is being
generated by the assets. This process keeps return on capital employed higher than it would
have been during the development stage.
(e) In the past, groups of companies have excluded subsidiaries from consolidation in an off-
balance sheet transaction because they carry out completely different types of business and
have different characteristics. The usual example is a leasing company (in say a retail group)
which has a high level of gearing. This exclusion is now disallowed.
You can see from this brief list of reasons that the overriding motivation is to avoid
misinterpretation.
In other words, the company does not trust the analysts or other users to understand the reasons
for a transaction and so avoids any effect such transactions might have by taking them off-balance
240
sheet. Unfortunately, the position of the company is then misstated and the user of the accounts is
misled.
You must understand that not all forms of 'off-balance sheet finance' are undertaken for cosmetic
or accounting reasons. Some transactions are carried out to limit or isolate risk, to reduce interest
costs and so on. In other words, these transactions are in the best interests of the company, not
merely a cosmetic repackaging of figures which would normally appear in the statement of financial
position.
5.2 The problem with off-balance sheet finance

Due to increasingly sophisticated off-balance sheet finance transactions, the users of financial
statements do not always have a proper or clear view of the state of the company's affairs. The
disclosures required by national company law and accounting standards did not in the past provide
sufficient rules for disclosure of off-balance sheet finance transactions and so very little of the true
nature of the transaction was exposed.
Whatever the purpose of such transactions, insufficient disclosure creates a problem. This
problem has been debated over the years by the accountancy profession and other interested
parties and some progress has been made (see the later sections of this chapter). However,
company collapses during recessions have often revealed much higher borrowings than originally
thought, because part of the borrowing was off-balance sheet.
The main argument used for banning off-balance sheet finance is that the true substance of the
transactions should be shown, not merely the legal form, particularly when it is exacerbated by
poor disclosure.
6 Interpretations relating to lease accounting

6.1 HK(SIC) Int-27 Evaluating the Substance of Transactions in
the Legal Form of a Lease
HK(SIC) Int-27 addresses issues that may arise when an arrangement between an entity and an
investor involves the legal form of a lease. It contains the following provisions:
(a) Accounting for arrangements between an entity and an investor should reflect the substance
of the arrangement. All aspects of the arrangement should be evaluated to determine its
substance, with weight given to those aspects and implications that have an economic effect.
In this respect, HK(SIC) Int-27 includes a list of indicators that individually demonstrate that an
arrangement may not, in substance, involve a lease under HKAS 17 Leases:
(i) An entity retains all of the risks and rewards of ownership of an underlying asset and
enjoys substantially the same rights to its use as before the arrangement.
(ii) The primary reason for the arrangement is to achieve a particular tax result.
(iii) An option is included on terms that make its exercise almost certain.
These indicators are particularly relevant in the case of sale and leaseback transactions,
where the substance of the transaction may be a secured loan.
(b) If an arrangement does not meet the definition of a lease, and is therefore outside the
scope of HKAS 17, HK(SIC) Int-27 considers:
(i) Whether a separate investment account and lease payment obligation that might
exist represent assets and liabilities of the entity.
(ii) How the entity should account for other obligations resulting from the arrangement.
(iii) How the entity should account for a fee it might receive from an investor.
241
Financial Reporting
HK(SIC) Int-27 includes a list of indicators that collectively demonstrate that, in substance,
a separate investment account and lease payment obligations do not meet the definitions
of an asset and a liability and should not be recognised by the entity.
Other obligations of an arrangement, including any guarantees provided and obligations
incurred upon early termination, should be accounted for under HKAS 37 or HKAS
39/HKFRS 9, depending on the terms. Further, it agreed that the criteria in HKAS 18.20
should be applied to the facts and circumstances of each arrangement in determining when
to recognise a fee as income that an entity might receive.
(c) A series of transactions that involve the legal form of a lease is linked, and therefore should
be accounted for as one transaction, when the overall economic effect cannot be
understood without reference to the series of transactions as a whole.
6.2 HK(IFRIC) Int-4 Determining Whether an Arrangement

Contains a Lease
6.2.1 The issue
In recent years arrangements have developed that do not take the legal form of a lease but which
convey rights to use assets in return for a payment or series of payments. Examples of such
arrangements include the following:
(a) Outsourcing arrangements.
(b) Telecommunication contracts that provide rights to capacity.
(c) Take-or-pay and similar contracts, in which purchasers must make specified payments
regardless of whether they take delivery of the contracted products or services.
6.2.2 HK(IFRIC) Int-4 treatment
The Interpretation specifies that an arrangement that meets the following criteria is, or contains, a
lease that should be accounted for in accordance with HKAS 17 Leases:
(a) Fulfilment of the arrangement depends upon a specific asset. The asset need not be
explicitly identified by the contractual provisions of the arrangement. Rather, it may be
implicitly specified because it is not economically feasible or practical for the supplier to fulfil
the arrangement by providing use of alternative assets.
(b) The arrangement conveys a right to control the use of the underlying asset. This is the
case if any of the following conditions are met:
(i) The purchaser in the arrangement has the ability or right to operate the asset or
direct others to operate the asset (while obtaining more than an insignificant amount of
the output of the asset).
(ii) The purchaser has the ability or right to control physical access to the asset
(while obtaining more than an insignificant amount of the output of the asset).
(iii) There is only a remote possibility that parties other than the purchaser will take more
than an insignificant amount of the output of the asset and the price that the purchaser
will pay is neither fixed per unit of output nor equal to the current market price at the
time of delivery.
Example: Gas
A manufacturing company enters into an arrangement with a utilities company to supply a minimum
amount of gas for a specified period of time. The utilities company builds a facility next to the
manufacturing company to produce the gas as it is not practical to rely on one of its existing
facilities. The utilities company maintains ownership and control over the facility. The utilities
company charges the manufacturing company a fixed capacity charge plus a variable amount
based on the costs incurred in generating the gas supplied.
242
This arrangement contains a lease since:

1. Fulfilment of the gas supply is dependent on the specific facility.
2. The price the manufacturing company will pay is neither fixed per unit of output nor equal to
the current market price per unit of output.
6.3 HK-Int 4 Lease – Determination of the Length of Lease Term in

respect of Hong Kong Land Leases
6.3.1 The issue
This Interpretation addresses the issue of how the length of the lease term of a Hong Kong land
lease should be determined for the purpose of applying the amortisation (depreciation)
requirements under HKAS 16 and HKAS 17, as appropriate.
6.3.2 HK-Int 4 treatment
The lease term of a Hong Kong land lease for the purpose of applying the amortisation
(depreciation) requirements under HKAS 16 and HKAS 17, as appropriate, shall be determined by
reference to the legal form and status of the lease. Renewal of a lease is assumed only when the
lessee has a renewal option and it is reasonably certain at the inception of the lease that the lessee
will exercise the option. Options for extending the lease term that are not at the discretion of the
lessee shall not be taken into account by the lessee in determining the lease term.
Consequently, lessees shall not assume that the lease term of a Hong Kong land lease will be
extended for a further 50 years, or any other period, while the HKSAR Government retains the sole
discretion as to whether to renew. Any general intention to renew certain types of property leases
expressed by the HKSAR Government is not sufficient grounds for a lessee to include such
extensions in the determination of the lease term for amortisation (depreciation).
Similarly, for the leases in the New Territories expiring shortly before 30 June 2047, the legal limit
in these leases shall be assumed to be the maximum lease term.
For those leases which extend beyond 30 June 2047 (e.g. those with an original lease term of 999
years), lessees shall assume that any legal rights under the leases that extend the lease term to
beyond 30 June 2047 will be protected for the full duration of the lease in the absence of any
indication to the contrary.
In August 2010, the IASB and American standards board, FASB, issued an Exposure Draft of a
new standard on leases with the intention of replacing IAS 17. A revised exposure draft was issued
in May 2013. It is highly likely that such a new standard will in turn be adopted by the HKICPA and
so replace HKAS 17. The 2013 exposure draft is currently being redeliberated and the IASB’s
current work plan suggests that a final standard will be issued in the second half of 2015.
7.1 Proposed approach to accounting for leases

The 2010 and 2013 Exposure Drafts both propose that there is no distinction between operating
and finance leases, and instead all leases are accounted for in the same way.
7.1.1 Lessee accounting
In the lessee's accounts, for all leases lasting more than one year a lease liability and a right-of-use
asset would be recognised, initially measured at the present value of fixed lease payments during
the non-cancellable period.
The recognition of lease expenses and cash flows would depend on whether the underlying asset
is consumed by the lessee. Type A leases would be those where the underlying asset is consumed
243
Financial Reporting
by the lessee (eg motor vehicles and equipment); Type B leases would be those where not more
than an insignificant amount of the underlying asset is consumed by the lessee (eg property).
Expenses and cash flows would be recognised as follows:
TYPE A LEASES TYPE B LEASES
Statement of profit or loss Amortisation and interest Single lease expense

Statement of cash flows Principal paid and interest paid Total cash paid
7.1.2 Lessor accounting

From a lessor perspective, leases are classified as type A or Type B as detailed above, and
accounted for as follows:
TYPE A LEASES TYPE B LEASES
Statement of financial position The asset is derecognised and The asset continues to be
instead a lease receivable is recognised
recognised together with a
residual asset (a retained
interest in the underlying
asset)
Statement of profit or loss Profit on the lease at the start Rental income is recognised
of the lease is recognised
together with interest income
7.1.3 Impact of the proposed changes

Practically, there are few changes proposed to the accounting treatment applied by lessors in
respect of finance leases or operating leases in respect of property. The proposed changes in
respect of operating lease agreements for plant and equipment are more significant.
244
Topic recap
HKAS 17 Leases
Lease – contract for the hire of a specific

asset
Finance lease Operating lease
A lease that transfers substantially all of the A lease other than a finance lease
risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an
asset. Legal title may or may not pass at the
end of the lease term
Lessee accounting Lessor accounting Lessee accounting Lessor accounting
Record asset and Record amount due Recognise rental Recognise non-
corresponding liability at from lessee at net expenditure on a current asset and
lower of fair value and investment in lease. straight line basis. depreciate.
PV of minimum lease
payments. Recognise finance Record income on
income to give constant a straight line basis
Depreciate asset over periodic rate of return. over the lease
shorter of lease term term.
and UL of asset. Manufacturers / dealers
recognise the difference
Allocate finance charge between cost of the
to give constant periodic asset and fair value as
rate of return (actuarial an outright sale.
method).
Sale and finance leaseback Sale and operating leaseback
Profit or loss deferred and amortised over the lease Sale at FV Recognise profit/loss
term immediately
Sale > FV Defer excess profit
If substance is a secured loan record proceeds as a Sale < FV Recognise profit/loss
financial liability (HK(SIC)Int 27) immediately but defer any
loss where compensated
for by low future lease
payments
245
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
Land and buildings leased together are considered separately for the purposes of lease
classification.
 A lease of land is normally treated as an operating lease, unless title is expected to pass at
the end of the lease term.
 A lease of buildings will be treated as a finance lease if it satisfies the requirements of
HKAS 17.
There is no indication that title will pass in respect of the land and therefore the lease in respect of
the land is classified as an operating lease. The ability to extend the lease for a secondary period
for below market rent suggests that the lease in respect of the building is a finance lease.
Therefore the lease payments will be split in line with the fair values of the land and the building.
$6,470,588 ($11,000,000  100/170) will be treated as payment on an operating lease for the land
and $4,529,412 ($11,000,000  70/170) will be treated as payment on a finance lease for the
building.
Answer 2
Statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X7 (extract)
$
Operating lease expense 20,000
Statement of financial position at 31 December 20X7 (extract)

$
Prepayment 10,000
Note – Operating lease arrangements
$
Minimum lease payments recognised as an expense in the year 20,000
At the reporting date the company had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease
payments under non-cancellable operating leases which fall due as follows:
$
Within one year (12m  3,000) 36,000
In the second to fifth years (18m  3,000) 54,000
After five years –
90,000
Operating lease payments represent rentals payable by the company in respect of machinery and
equipment. Leases are negotiated for an average term of five years and rentals are fixed for this
term.
WORKINGS
$
Total lease payments (3 yrs  12 m  $3,000) + $12,000 120,000
Annual charge therefore $120,000/3years 40,000
Expense in the year $40,000  6/12m 20,000
Cash paid in the year (6m  $3,000) + $12,000 30,000
Therefore prepayment 10,000
246
Answer 3
(a) Financial statement extracts
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X1
$
Depreciation [(800,000 + 20,000 – 80,000)/5)] 148,000
Finance costs (Working) 74,200
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X1 (EXTRACT)

$
Non-current assets
Leased asset [(800,000 + 20,000) – 148,000] 672,000
Finance lease liability – over one year (Working) 561,820
Current liabilities
Finance lease liability – within one year (Working) (656,200 – 561,820) 94,380
WORKING
Interest accrued at Payment Bal c/f
Bal b/f 10% 31 Dec 31 Dec
$ $ $ $
800,000
(58,000)
20X1 742,000 74,200 (160,000) 656,200
20X2 656,200 65,620 (160,000) 561,820
(b) Treatment of guaranteed residual value

At the end of the lease, the lessee will have an asset at residual value of $80,000 in its
statement of financial position and a finance lease liability of $80,000 representing the
residual value guaranteed to the lessor.
(i) If the lessor is able to sell the asset for the value guaranteed by the lessee, the lessee
has no further liability and derecognises the asset and lease liability:
$ $
DEBIT Finance lease liability 80,000
CREDIT Leased asset 80,000
(ii) If the lessor is unable to sell the asset for the value guaranteed by the lessee, the
lessee has a liability to make up the difference of $80,000 – $60,000 = $20,000:
Recognise impairment loss on asset (as soon as known during the lease term):
$ $
DEBIT Profit or loss 20,000
Make guaranteed payment to lessor and derecognise the asset and lease liability:
$ $
DEBIT Finance lease liability 80,000
CREDIT Cash 20,000
247
Financial Reporting
Answer 4
Statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X4 (extract)
$
Depreciation (752,000)
Operating lease income 783,333
Statement of financial position at 31 December 20X4 (extract)
$
Property 50,384,000
Current liabilities
Note – Operating lease arrangements
The company rents property out under arrangements classified as operating leases. Property rental
income earned in the year was $750,000. Direct operating expenses arising on the arrangement of
operating leases are added to the carrying amount of the underlying property and amortised over
the remaining useful life of the asset. The lessee does not have an option to purchase the property
at the expiry of the lease period.
At the reporting date the company had contracted with tenants for the following future minimum
lease payments:
$
Within one year (12m  75,000) 900,000
In the second to fifth years (18m  75,000) 1350,000
After five years
2,2500,000
WORKINGS
Income $
Total lease receipts (3 yrs  12 m  $75,000) + $1,800,000 4,500,000
Annual credit to income therefore $4,500,000/3years 1,500,000
Income in the year $1,500,000  6/12m 750,000
Deferred income
Income in the year 750,000
Cash received (6m  $75,000) + $1,800,000 2,250,000
Deferred income 1,500,000
Deferred income within one year ($1,500,000 – (12  $75,000)) 600,000
Deferred income in more than one year (balance) 900,000
Non-current asset
Property carrying amount at commencement of lease 51,000,000
Initial direct costs 136,000
51,136,000
Depreciation (51,136,000 / 34 years)  6/12m (752,000)
Carrying amount at 31 December 20X4 50,384,000
248
Exam practice
Thompson Manufacturing Inc. 27 minutes

On 1 January 20X7, Thompson Manufacturing Inc. (TMI), the lessor, entered into a non-cancellable
lease agreement for equipment with Silver Rod Company (SRC), the lessee. The following
information pertains to the lease:
Annual lease payment due at the beginning of each year, beginning on
1 January 20X7 $53,069
Option to purchase at the end of lease term $10,000
Lease term 5 years
Economic useful life of leased equipment 8 years
Lessor's manufacturing cost $200,000
Fair value of leased equipment at 1 January 20X7 $227,500
Estimated unguaranteed residual value of leased equipment at the end of
lease term $30,000
Lessor's implicit rate 12.93%
Lessee's incremental borrowing rate 10%
Required
(a) Discuss how the purchase option at the end of the lease term offered by TMI to SRC will
affect the classification of this lease by SRC. (3 marks)
(b) Prepare an amortisation schedule that would be suitable for TMI for the lease term.
(5 marks)
(c) Prepare all the journal entries that TMI should make for each of the years ended
31 December 20X7 and 20X8. (7 marks)
(Total = 15 marks)
HKICPA September 2008 (amended)
249
Financial Reporting
250
chapter 10
Inventories
Topic list
1 Accounting for inventories

1.1 Scope
1.2 Definitions
1.3 Measurement of inventories
1.4 Cost of inventories
1.5 Techniques for the measurement of cost
1.6 Cost formulae
1.7 Net realisable value (NRV)
1.8 Recognition as an expense
Learning focus
Inventory and short-term work-in-progress valuation has a direct impact on a company's gross
profit and it is usually a material item in any company's accounts. This is therefore an
important subject area as far as the statement of profit or loss is concerned as there are
different accounting treatments for inventories.
251
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.06 Inventories 3
3.06.01 Scope and definition of HKAS 2 Inventories
3.06.02 Calculate the cost of inventories in accordance with HKAS 2
3.06.03 Use accepted methods of assigning costs including the allocation of
overheads to inventories
3.06.04 Explain the potential impact of net realisable value falling below
cost and make the required adjustments
3.06.05 Calculate and analyse variances in a standard costing system and
advise on the appropriate accounting treatment to be adopted in
respect of inventories
3.06.06 Prepare a relevant accounting policy note and other required
disclosures in respect of inventories
252
10: Inventories | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 Accounting for inventories

Topic highlights
Inventory is measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
The inventory balance is significant to many companies both as an asset and due to its impact on
profits. The measurement of inventory, however, remains a highly subjective area and a number of
different methods may be used in practice.
HKAS 2 provides guidance on the measurement of inventory and its recognition as an expense.
HKAS 2.2,3 1.1 Scope

HKAS 2 applies to all inventories other than:
 Work in progress under construction contracts (covered by HKAS 11 Construction
Contracts)
 Financial instruments (covered by HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments)
 Biological assets (covered by HKAS 41)
The standard does not apply to the measurement of inventories held by:
 Producers of agricultural and forest products
 Commodity-broker traders
HKAS 2.6,8 1.2 Definitions

The standard provides the following definitions:
Key terms
Inventories are assets:
 Held for sale in the ordinary course of business
 In the process of production for such sale
 In the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process or in the
rendering of services
Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the
estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale.
orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (HKAS 2)
The definition of inventories in effect refers to:

 Finished goods, being those held for sale
 Work in progress (WIP), being those in the process of production, and
 Raw materials, being those supplies to be consumed in the production process.
HKAS 2.9 1.3 Measurement of inventories

The standard states that ‘Inventories shall be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable
value.’
These terms are explained in more detail in sections 1.4 and 1.7 of the chapter.
253
Financial Reporting
HKAS 2.10 1.4 Cost of inventories

Topic highlights
Cost includes all costs of purchase, costs of conversion and other costs incurred in bringing
inventories to their present condition and location.
The cost of inventories includes all:

 Costs of purchase
 Costs of conversion
 Other costs incurred
Each of these types of cost is covered in turn below.
HKAS 2.11 1.4.1 Costs of purchase
HKAS 2 states that the costs of purchase may include all of:
 Purchase price
 Import duties and other irrecoverable taxes
 Transport, handling and any other cost directly attributable to the acquisition of finished
goods, services and materials
Costs of purchase should be net of trade discounts, rebates and other similar amounts when
measuring inventory.
HKAS 2.12- 1.4.2 Costs of conversion
14
Costs of conversion of inventories includes:
(a) Costs directly related to the units of production, e.g. direct materials, direct labour.
(b) A systematic allocation of fixed and variable production overheads that are incurred in
converting materials into finished goods.
Key terms
Fixed production overheads are defined by the standard as those indirect costs of production
that remain relatively constant regardless of the volume of production such as depreciation and
maintenance of factory buildings and equipment and the cost of factory management and
administration. Fixed production overheads must be allocated to items of inventory on the basis
of the normal capacity of the production facilities. Normal capacity is the expected achievable
production based on the average over several periods/seasons, under normal circumstances, and
taking into account the capacity lost through planned maintenance. The standard makes the
following additional points:
 If it approximates to the normal level of activity then the standard states that the actual level
of production can be used.
 Low production or idle plant will not result in a higher fixed overhead allocation to each
unit.
 Unallocated overheads must be recognised as an expense in the period in which they were
incurred.
 In periods of abnormally high production, the fixed production overhead allocated to each
unit will be decreased, so that inventories are not measured at more than cost.
254
 Variable production overheads are allocated to each unit on the basis of the actual use of
production facilities. Variable production overheads are defined as those indirect costs of
production that vary directly, or nearly directly, with the volume of production, such as
indirect materials and labour. When a production process results in the simultaneous
production of more than one product, and the costs of conversion are not separately
identifiable, they should be allocated between products on a rational and consistent basis.
An example of an appropriate basis given in the standard is the sales value of each product
when complete.
HKAS 2.15- 1.4.3 Other costs

17
Other costs are included in the cost of inventories if they are incurred in bringing the inventories to
their present location and condition. Examples of such costs are non-production overheads and
the costs of designing products for specific customers. In limited circumstances, as identified by
HKAS 23, borrowing costs are also included in the cost of inventories.
The standard lists types of cost which would not be included in cost of inventories but should be
recognised as an expense in the period they are incurred:
(a) Abnormal amounts of wasted materials, labour or other production costs.
(b) Storage costs (except costs which are necessary in the production process before a further
production stage).
(c) Administrative overheads not incurred to bring inventories to their present location and
conditions.
(d) Selling costs.
Example: Cost of inventory

Highdef Co. manufactures component parts used in the production of televisions. The following
details are relevant to a production run in August 20X4:
Cost of raw materials per unit $85 after 15% trade discount
Import duty (raw materials) 5%
Labour costs per unit $25
Production overheads $400,000
Expected (normal) output 50,000 units
Actual output 40,000 units
The cost of each unit is therefore calculated as:
$
Direct materials 85.00
Import duty (5%  $85) 4.25
Direct labour 25.00
Overheads allocation ($400,000/50,000) 8.00
Cost 122.25
HKAS 2.19 1.4.4 Cost of inventory of a service provider

Service providers sometimes have inventory, for example the work in progress of a lawyer. This
work in progress should be measured at cost i.e. the costs of labour and attributable overheads,
excluding any profit margin.
Labour and costs relating to sales and general administrative personnel and non-attributable
overheads are not included in the cost of work in progress. They are expensed as incurred.
255
Financial Reporting
HKAS
2.21,22
1.5 Techniques for the measurement of cost
HKAS 2 allows that techniques for the measurement of cost may be used for convenience where
these approximate to cost. The two methods mentioned within the standard are as follows:
(a) Standard costs, which take into account normal levels of raw materials used, labour time
and so on. They are reviewed and revised on a regular basis.
(b) The retail method, which is often used in the retail industry where there are large numbers
of items with a rapid turnover and similar margins. Here, the only practical method of
inventory valuation may be to take the total selling price of inventories and deduct an overall
average profit margin, thus reducing the value to an approximation of cost. The percentage
must take into consideration reduced price lines. Sometimes different percentages are
applied to different retail departments.
Example: Measurement of cost

Assume that a manufacturing company has a budgeted standard total production cost of $1 per
unit for the year, based on a forecasted production of 1,000,000 units. There is no opening
inventory and the year end accounts show actual production of 1,000,000 units, closing inventory
of 200,000 units and an unfavourable cost variance of $100,000. The analysis shows that $80,000
of the variance comes from a charge in a purchase cost of goods resulting from a foreign currency
alignment early in the year and the remaining $20,000 is from a labour strike mid-year.
The $20,000 unfavourable variance from the labour strike is a period cost wholly recognised as an
expense since it was not incurred under normal operating conditions.
Unless the exchange movement happened under unusual circumstances, the price variance
resulting from exchange difference is regarded as arising under normal operating conditions. To
better reflect the cost of goods sold and the cost of closing inventory, the price variance will be
allocated between inventories and cost of goods sold based on the closing inventories of $200,000
as a percentage of the total number of units produced. The closing inventories at standard cost of
$200,000 are 20% of the actual production, so inventories will be allocated 20% of the $80,000
price variance i.e. $16,000. Cost of goods sold will be charged with the balance of $64,000. Closing
inventories will therefore amount to $216,000.
HKAS
2.23,25-27
1.6 Cost formulae
Topic highlights
Where inventory is not interchangeable, cost should be specifically identified. Where inventories
consist of interchangeable items, cost is assigned using the First in, First out (FIFO) or weighted
average formula.
Where items of inventory are not normally interchangeable or goods or services are produced and
segregated for specific projects, the cost of inventories should be specifically identified.
Where inventories consist of a number of interchangeable items, cost is assigned by using the
First In, First Out (FIFO) or weighted average cost formulae. Last In, First Out (LIFO) is not
permitted.
Under the weighted average cost method, a recalculation can be made after each purchase, or
alternatively only at the period end.
HKAS 2 requires that an entity should use the same cost formula for all inventories having
similar nature and use to the entity. For inventories with different nature or use (for example,
certain commodities used in one business segment and the same type of commodities used in
another business segment), different cost formulae may be justified. A difference in geographical
256
location of inventories (and in the respective tax rules), by itself, is not sufficient to justify the use of
different cost formulae.
Example: Inventory valuation (1)

Arneson Co. trades in widgets and has bought and sold the following inventory during the month of
September 20X1:
Date Volume Cost
1 September opening stock 100 units $2.00 each
3 September purchase 100 units $2.30 each
5 September sale 75 units
What is the cost of inventory at 30 September using
(a) FIFO
(b) Weighted average cost (period end)
(c) Weighted average cost (continuous)?
Solution
FIFO
Sales
Opening stock 100  $2.00 5 September 75 units
18 September 25 units
3.9 Purchase 100  $2.30 18 September 55 units
29 September 45 units
Closing stock 75 units
Sales are matched to the earliest purchases such that closing stock is made up of 75 units
purchased on 25 September. Closing stock is therefore measured at $180 (75 units  $2.40).
Weighted average (period end)
The weighted average cost of stocks during September is:
100 units  $2.00 200.00
100 units  $2.30 230.00
50 units  $2.35 117.50
80 units  $2.40 192.00
330 units 739.50
therefore weighted average cost per unit $2.24
Closing stock is therefore measured at $168 (75 units  $2.24)
Weighted average (continuous)
Date Purchases Sales Balance Weighted average price
1.9 100  $2 100 $2
3.9 100  $2.30 200 100  $2   100  $2.30 
 $2.15
100  100
257
Financial Reporting
5.9 75 125 $2.15

10.9 50  $2.35 175  50  $2.35   125  $2.15 
 $2.21
50  125
18.9 80 95 $2.21
25.9 80  $2.40 175  80  $2.40    95  $2.21
 $2.30
80  95
29.9 100 75 $2.30
Therefore, closing stock is measured at $172.50 (75 units × $2.30)
HKAS 2.28- 1.7 Net realisable value (NRV)

33
Topic highlights
NRV is the estimated selling price of an item of inventory less estimated costs to complete and sell
it.
Prudence requires that assets are not overstated. In the case of inventories, this means that they
should not be measured at an amount greater than the price that is expected to be realised from
their sale.
In some cases the cost of inventory may be greater than the amount for which it can be sold, for
example where:
 Goods are damaged or obsolete
 The costs to completion have increased
 The selling price has fallen
 The goods are to be sold at a loss as part of a marketing strategy
 Production errors have led to increased costs
In these cases, inventory is carried at the NRV which is less than cost.
Inventory is normally written down on an item by item basis, but sometimes it may be appropriate
to group similar or related items together. This grouping together is acceptable for, say, items in
the same product line, but it is not acceptable to write down inventories based on a whole
classification (e.g. finished goods) or a whole business.
The assessment of NRV should be based on the most reliable evidence available and should take
place at the same time as estimates are made of selling price. Fluctuations of price or cost should
be taken into account if they relate directly to events after the reporting period, which confirm
conditions existing at the end of the period.
The reasons why inventory is held should also be taken into account. For example, where
inventory is held to satisfy a firm contract, its NRV will be the contract price. Any additional
inventory of the same type held at the period end will, in contrast, be assessed according to
general sales prices when NRV is estimated.
At each period end, NRV must be reassessed and compared with cost. Where circumstances have
changed since the end of the previous period and there is a clear increase in NRV, then the
previous write down must be reversed to the extent that the inventory is then valued at the lower of
cost and the new NRV. This situation may arise when selling prices have fallen in the past and then
risen again.
On occasion a write down to NRV may be of such size, incidence or nature that it must be
disclosed separately.
258
HKAS 2.34 1.8 Recognition as an expense

An expense related to inventory is recognised in profit or loss in the following circumstances:
(a) When inventories are sold, the carrying amount of those inventories is recognised as an
expense by:
DEBIT Cost of sales
CREDIT Inventories
(b) Any write down of inventories to NRV and all losses of inventories are recognised as an
expense in the period the write down or loss occurs by:
DEBIT Expense account (e.g. Inventory written down)
CREDIT Inventories
The exact expense account is not defined by HKAS 2. Depending on the circumstances of the write
down, a company may use an inventory write down account, cost of sales or some other account.
(c) Any reversal of a previous write down of inventories, arising from an increase in NRV, is
recognised as a reduction in the amount of inventories recognised as an expense in the
period in which the reversal occurs by:
DEBIT Inventories
CREDIT Expense account
Again, the expense account is not defined, but it is likely to be the same as that account in which
the previous write down was recognised.
Example: Inventory valuation (2)

Given Co. has the following categories of inventory measured at cost in the draft statement of
financial position:
Cost Selling price Costs to sell
$m $m $m
Product A 4 6 0.5
Product B 10 11 1.5
Product C 8 12 2
Product D 14 16 3
36 45 7
Required
Determine the amount at which inventory should be measured.
Solution
Inventory must be measured line by line rather than as a whole, taking lower of cost and NRV in
each case:
Cost NRV Valuation
$m $m $m
Product A (Cost) 4.0 5.5 4.0
Product B (NRV) 10.0 9.5 9.5
Product C (Cost) 8.0 10.0 8.0
Product D (NRV) 14.0 13.0 13.0
34.5
Therefore it is measured at $34.5m (working) and should be written down by $500,000. This is
achieved by ($):
DEBIT Inventory written down 500,000
CREDIT Inventories 500,000
259
Financial Reporting
To recognise the write down of inventories to net realisable value.
Ramsbottom Co. is a manufacturer of components used in the motor industry. It makes two
products, XX1 and ZZ2.
Certain parts of the production process give rise to indirect costs specifically identifiable with only
one of these products, although other costs are not separately identifiable.
Budgeted cost information for March 20X1 is as follows:
XX1 ZZ2 Total
Budgeted output 1,000 units 1,200 units
$ $ $
Direct cost 365,000 380,000 745,000
Indirect production overheads
Identifiable 65,000 55,000 120,000
Other 80,000
During the month, costs were incurred in line with the budget, but due to a failure of calibration to a
vital part of the process, only 1,050 units of ZZ2 could be taken into inventory. The remainder
produced had to be scrapped, for zero proceeds.
Ramsbottom allocates indirect costs which are not specifically identifiable to an individual product
by reference to relative selling prices. This results in 55% being allocated to XX1 and 45% to ZZ2.
Required
Calculate the cost attributable to each product.
HKAS 2.36-
39
HKAS 2 requires the financial statements to disclose the following:
(a) The accounting policies adopted in measuring inventories, including the cost formula used
(b) The total carrying amount of inventories and the carrying amount in classifications
appropriate to the entity
(c) The carrying amount of inventories carried at fair value less costs to sell
(d) The amount of inventories recognised as an expense during the period
(e) The amount of any write down of inventories to net realisable value recognised as expense
and in the period
(f) The amount of any reversal of any write down of inventories to net realisable value
recognised as reduction in ‘the amount of inventories recognised as an expense in the
period’
(g) The circumstance or events that led to the reversal of a write down of inventories
(h) The carrying amount of inventories pledged as security for liabilities
Information about the carrying amounts held in different classifications of inventories and the extent
of the changes in these assets is useful to financial statement users. Common classifications of
inventories are merchandise, production supplies, materials, work in progress and finished goods.
The inventories of a service provider may be described as work in progress.
Some entities adopt a format for profit or loss that results in amounts being disclosed other than the
cost of inventories recognised as an expense during the period. Under this format, an entity
presents an analysis of expenses using a classification based on the nature of expenses. In this
260
case, the entity discloses the costs recognised as an expense for raw materials and consumables,
labour costs and other costs together with the amount of the net change in inventories for the
period.
Illustration
The following are illustrative disclosures in respect of inventories:
Significant accounting policies (extract)
Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost comprises direct materials,
and, where applicable, direct labour costs and those overheads that have been incurred in bringing
the inventories to their present location and condition. Cost is calculated using the weighted
average method. Net realisable value represents the estimated selling price less all estimated
costs of completion and costs to be incurred in marketing, selling and distribution.
Inventories
20X2 20X1
$’m $’m
Raw materials 12 14
Work-in-progress 35 28
Finished goods 17 18
64 60
Inventories classified as part of a disposal group held for
sale and measured at fair value less costs to sell 9 –
73 60
During the year, due to an increase in the estimated net realisable value of finished goods as a
result of changes in market preferences, a reversal of a previous write down of finished goods of
$Xm is recognised in cost of sales.
Inventories with a carrying amount of $Xm have been pledged as security for the Company’s
overdraft.
Hong Kong Floral Design Company (‘Floral’) manufactures silk flowers from its base in Hong
Kong. The annual inventory count was conducted on 31 May 20X4, being the year end, and the
following information has been determined from inventory sheets relating to work in progress:
$
Materials included in work in progress 320,000
Labour hours included in work in progress ($35 per hour) 460,250
In addition, the following overheads were incurred in the year:
$
Factory rent and rates 525,000
Floor supervisors’ salaries 320,000
Light, heat and power 345,000
Sales commission and distribution costs 210,000
Depreciation of production line machinery 187,000
Depreciation of delivery vehicles (used to deliver orders to customers) 165,000
Storage of finished goods 126,500
Light, heat and power, sales commission and distribution costs, depreciation and storage are all
considered to be variable costs.
261
Financial Reporting
Overheads are absorbed on the basis of labour hours; the normal number of hours worked in a
year by production staff are 150,000, however due to an unusually high number of black rainstorm
signals in the year, resulting in the closure of the factory and suspension of production, only
125,000 hours were worked in the year ended 31 May 20X4.
Required
What is the value of work in progress at 31 May 20X4?
262
Topic recap
HKAS 2 Inventories
Finished goods
Work in progress
Raw materials
Measure at the lower of:
Cost Net realisable value
Includes: Estimated selling price in the ordinary course

Cost of purchase of business less estimated costs of
Direct costs of conversion completion and estimated costs to make
Allocated overheads during the sale.
conversion
Costs of bringing the inventory to its
present location and condition
Where inventory items are not interchangeable

identify specific cost.
Where inventory items are interchangeable use

cost formulae to assign cost to an item:
FIFO Weighted average

Inventory is assumed to move A weighted average cost to be
"first in, first out" therefore cost allocated to each item of inventory
allocated to inventory items is is calculated either on a periodic or
the most recent purchase continuous basis.
prices.
Disclosures:
Accounting policies and cost formulae used
Carrying amount of inventories classified by type
Carrying amount of inventories measured at fair value less costs to sell
Inventories recognised as an expense in the period
Inventory write downs / reversal of write downs recognised in the period and circumstances that led to the
write down / reversal.
Carrying amount of inventories pledged as security
263
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
The total cost attributable to XX1 is calculated as:
$365,000 + $65,000 + (55%  $80,000) = $474,000
The cost per unit therefore being $474,000 / 1,000 = $474 each.
The total cost $474,000 attributable to XX1 can all be allocated to the inventories of XX1.
The total cost attributable to ZZ2 is:
$380,000 + $55,000 + (45%  $80,000) = $471,000
The cost per unit therefore being $471,000 / 1,200 = $392.50 each.
The allocation of the cost for ZZ2 is therefore:
$392.50  1,050 = $412,125 as inventories
$392.50  150 = $58,875 as an expense
The indirect costs not specifically identifiable with either product which are allocated to the
scrapped ZZ2 cannot be recovered into the cost of XX1.
Answer 2
The direct costs to be included in the measurement of inventories are:
$
Direct materials 320,000
Direct labour 460,250
780,250
Overheads are included in the carrying amount of inventory only if they relate to bringing the
inventory to its current location and condition at the reporting date.
Costs that do not contribute to the current location and condition of inventories are recognised in
profit or loss in appropriate cost categories:
Distribution costs $
Sales commission and distribution costs 210,000
Depreciation of delivery vehicles 165,000
Storage of finished goods 126,500
501,500
The remaining overheads are included in the measurement of work-in-progress as they are
relevant to bringing the inventory to its current location and condition.
Certain overheads are fixed and these are absorbed based on the normal level of production:
$
Factory rent, and rates 525,000
Floor supervisors' salaries 320,000
845,000
Normal level of activity 150,000 hours

Recovery rate per hour $845,000/150,000 $5.63/hour
264
The labour hours spent on work in progress are $460,250/$35 = 13,150 hours. Fixed overheads to
be included in the valuation of work-in-progress are therefore 13,150 hours  $5.63 = $74,035.
Actual hours worked by production staff in the year are 125,000. Therefore 125,000  $5.63 =
$703,750 of the fixed production overheads are absorbed into inventories. The remaining $845,000
– $703,750 = $141,250 are recognised in profit or loss in an appropriate cost category (likely to be
cost of sales or administrative expenses).
Variable overheads are absorbed based on the actual level of production:
$
Light, heat and power 345,000
Depreciation of production machinery 187,000
532,000
Actual level of activity 125,000

Recovery rate per hour $532,000/125,000 $4.26/hour
Variable production overheads to be included in the valuation of work-in-progress are therefore
13,150 hours  $4.26 = $56,019.
Work-in-progress is therefore measured at:
$
Direct costs 501,500
Fixed production overheads 74,035
Variable production overheads 56,019
631,554
265
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Xelon Company Limited 22 minutes

Xelon Company Limited (XCL) is a tablet PC accessories manufacturing company which produces
the finished goods in accordance with the indicated but not committed order quantities provided by
customers on a quarterly basis. The selling price is pre-determined together with the quarterly
order sheet.
At 31 October 20X3, XCL had 800,000 units of finished goods of a particular model on hand at a
weighted average cost per unit of $12. The customer advised XCL on the same date that a new
series of tablet PC with a different size would be introduced by Q1 20X4 and therefore, it would
only take up another 500,000 units of the existing model at $14 per unit before discontinuance of
the model (the Final Order).
The manufacture of the tablet PC accessories involves usage of specialised moulds developed
internally and cannot be used for other models. For the model mentioned, XCL capitalised the
mould production costs of $450,000 and depreciates the cost over the estimated useful life of 18
months commenced from January 20X3. Estimated selling price of the moulds as scrap metal is
$10,000.
Apart from the finished goods, XCL also has certain raw material purchased for the production of
this model and work in progress under production in the warehouse.
Required
(a) Discuss the differences between the measurement of net realisable value of inventories and
impairment assessment of property, plant and equipment. (4 marks)
(b) Advise XCL regarding the impact of the customer's Final Order on the carrying amount of (i)
inventories; and (ii) moulds, as at 31 October 20X3. (8 marks)
(Total = 12 marks)
HKICPA June 2014
266
chapter 11
Provisions, contingent
liabilities and contingent
assets
Topic list
1 HKAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets

1.1 Objective
1.2 Definitions
2 Provisions
2.1 Recognising a provision
2.2 Measuring a provision
2.3 Reimbursements
2.4 Changes in provisions
2.5 Use of provisions
2.6 Common scenarios
2.7 Summary of journal entries
2.8 Disclosure of provisions
3 Contingent liabilities and contingent assets
3.1 Contingent liabilities
3.2 Contingent assets
3.3 Summary
4 Interpretations relating to provision accounting
4.1 HK(IFRIC) Int-1 Changes in Existing Decommissioning, Restoration and Similar Liabilities
4.2 HK(IFRIC) Int-5 Rights to Interests from Decommissioning, Restoration and Environmental
Rehabilitation Funds
Learning focus
Accounting for uncertainty and contingencies requires some judgment and supporting
evidence in applying the accounting standards. You must learn the recognition criteria for
provisions and be able to apply them. You should also be able to advise the directors on the
implications for the financial statements of the changes proposed.
267
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.16 Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets 3
3.16.01 Define provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets within
the scope of HKAS 37
3.16.02 Distinguish provisions from other types of liabilities
3.16.03 Explain the criteria for recognition of provisions and apply them to
specific circumstances
3.16.04 Apply the appropriate accounting treatment for contingent assets
and liabilities
3.16.05 Disclose the relevant information relating to contingent liabilities in
the financial statements
3.16.06 Account for decommissioning, restoration and similar liabilities and
their changes
3.16.07 Disclose the relevant information relating to contingent assets in the
268
11: Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and

Contingent Assets
Published financial statements must include all the information necessary for a proper
understanding of the company's financial position.
In some cases this means that uncertain events must be reported. HKAS 37 provides guidance on
accounting for uncertainty with the result that provisions, or uncertain liabilities, may be included in
the statement of financial position and contingent assets and liabilities may be disclosed.
The provisions for liabilities covered by HKAS 37 are somewhat different from those ‘provisions’ for
depreciation and doubtful debts in your earlier studies.
There was no accounting standard dealing with provisions before the issue of HKAS 37. Provisions
often known as ‘big bath’ provisions are made by companies wanting to show their results in the
most favourable way. They made large ‘one off’ provisions in years where a high level of underlying
profits was generated. These provisions were then available to conceal expenditure in future years
when perhaps the underlying profits were not favourable.
That is to say, provisions were used to achieve profit smoothing. Since reported profits do not
represent the level of actual profits achieved in the year, profit smoothing is viewed as misleading.
1.1 Objective
HKAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets aims to make sure that
provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets are being dealt with based on appropriate
recognition criteria and measurement bases. In addition, sufficient information should be
disclosed in the notes to the financial statements to enable users to understand their nature, timing
and amount.

The following definitions are provided within the standard:
Key terms
A provision is a liability of uncertain timing or amount.
A liability is a present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is
A contingent liability is:
(a) A possible obligation that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed
only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly
within the control of the entity; or
(b) A present obligation that arises from past events but is not recognised because:
(i) It is not probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be
required to settle the obligation; or
(ii) The amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability.
A contingent asset is a possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be
confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not
wholly within the control of the entity.
(HKAS 37.10)
We shall meet more definitions as we consider the accounting treatment of provisions and
contingencies.
269
Financial Reporting
2 Provisions
Provisions are differentiated from other liabilities such as trade payables and accruals by the
HKICPA. The main difference is that there is uncertainty about the timing or amount of the future
expenditure for a provision. For certain accruals, uncertainty, though it exists, is generally much
less than for provisions.
HKAS 37 includes the criteria for recognising a provision as a liability in the statement of financial
position and also provides guidance for measuring such a provision. In addition, and due to the
subjective nature of the topic matter, it gives examples of common situations in which a provision
can be made.
HKAS 37.14 2.1 Recognising a provision

Topic highlights
Under HKAS 37, a provision should be recognised:
 When an entity has a present obligation, legal or constructive
 It is probable that a transfer of economic benefits will be required to settle it
 A reliable estimate can be made of its amount
HKAS 37 states that a provision should be recognised as a liability in the financial statements when:
 An entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event
 It is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required
to settle the obligation
 A reliable estimate can be made of the obligation
Some of these terms require further explanation, and this is given in the next two sections of the
chapter.
HKAS 2.1.1 Obligation
37.10,17-22
A legal obligation is a fairly easy idea to understand: it is a duty to act in a certain way deriving from
a contract, legislation, or some other operation of the law.
You should note that an event which does not currently give rise to a legal obligation may do so at
a later date due to changes in the law. In this case the obligation arises when new legislation is
virtually certain to be enacted as drafted; in many cases this is impossible to ascertain before
actual enactment.
You may not know what a constructive obligation is.
Key term
HKAS 37 defines a constructive obligation as:
‘An obligation that derives from an entity's actions where:
 By an established pattern of past practice, published policies or a sufficiently specific current
statement, the entity has indicated to other parties that it will accept certain responsibilities
 As a result, the entity has created a valid expectation on the part of those other parties that it
will discharge those responsibilities.’
The following question shows how this definition is applied and will help your understanding of a
constructive obligation.
270
(a) Black Gold Oil Co. drills for oil in locations worldwide. Mindful of the public perception of
such oil companies after recent disasters involving oil spills, Black Gold Oil Co. has recently
used press and television advertisements to promote its green credentials, and in particular,
has pledged to clean up any contamination that it causes.
In the year ended 31 December 20X0, Black Gold Oil Co. causes extensive contamination in
a country in which there is no environmental legislation.
Does a present obligation exist at 31 December 20X0?
(b) A well-known retailer is under legal obligation to refund money to customers who return
unwanted goods within a 28-day period. The retailer has announced a policy of extending
this return period to 60 days, and accordingly has printed this promise on its carrier bags.
Does the retailer have a present obligation as a result of a past event?
(c) On 12 October 20X3 the Board of West Royd Co decided to close one of its operating
divisions, resulting in a large number of redundancies. The decision was publicly announced
at a press conference on 15 November 20X3, the day after a staff meeting was held to
inform employees of the decision.
Does West Royd Co have a present obligation at 31 October 20X3?
In some instances, for example when a court case is underway, it is not clear whether there is a
present obligation. In these cases, all available evidence should be considered, and if it is more
likely than not that a present obligation exists at the reporting date, then a present obligation as a
result of a past event is deemed to exist.
HKAS 37.23- 2.1.2 Probable transfer of economic benefits

24
A transfer of economic benefits is regarded as ‘probable’ if the event is more likely than not to
occur for the purpose of HKAS 37 so the probability that the event will occur is greater than the
probability that it will not. The standard clarifies that the probability should be based on considering
the population as a whole, rather than one single item, in situations where there are a number of
similar obligations.
Illustration: Transfer of economic benefits

In the case of a warranty obligation of a company, though the probability of an outflow of economic
resources (transfer of economic benefits) may be extremely small in respect of one specific item,
the probability of some transfer of economic benefits is quite likely to be much higher when the
population is considered as a whole. A provision should be made for the expected amount when
there is a greater than 50% probability of some transfer of economic benefits.
HKAS 37.36-
38, 41
2.2 Measuring a provision
Topic highlights
The amount recognised as a provision should be the best estimate of the expenditure required to
settle the present obligation at the year end. This may be calculated using expected values when
the provision involves a large population of items.
271
Financial Reporting
The third criterion which must be met in order to recognise a provision is that a reliable estimate
can be made of the obligation.
HKAS 37 provides detailed guidance on how this estimate should be made. The overriding
requirement is that the amount recognised as a provision shall be the best estimate of the
expenditure required to settle the present obligation at the end of the reporting period.
The standard goes on to say that this is the amount that an entity would pay to settle the obligation
or transfer it to a third party at the reporting date, even though a settlement or transfer at this time
will often be impossible or prohibitively expensive.
The estimates will be determined by the judgment of the entity's management supplemented by
the experience of similar transactions, and in some cases the reports from independent experts.
A provision should be measured before any related tax effect.
HKAS 37.40 2.2.1 Most likely outcome
Where a single obligation is being measured, the most likely outcome may be the best estimate of
the liability. HKAS 37 does, however, stipulate that all possible outcomes are considered and
where these are mostly higher (or mostly lower) than the expected outcome, the best estimate will
be higher (or lower).
HKAS 37.39 2.2.2 Expected values

Where the provision being measured involves a large population of items, the obligation is
estimated by weighting all possible outcomes by their associated probabilities, i.e. expected value.
Alice Co. sells goods with a warranty under which customers are covered for the cost of repairs of
any manufacturing defect that becomes apparent within the first six months of purchase. The
company's past experience and future expectations indicate the following pattern of likely repairs.
Cost of repairs if all goods
% of goods sold Defects suffered from the defect
$m
75 None –
20 Minor 1.0
5 Major 4.0
What is the expected cost of repairs and how is a provision recorded?
HKAS 37.42- 2.2.3 Other considerations when measuring a provision

52
HKAS 37 requires that the following are considered when measuring a provision:
Risks and uncertainties
Risks and uncertainties surrounding an event should be taken into consideration when making the
best estimate of a provision required. Uncertainty does not, however, justify the creation of
excessive provisions or an overstatement of liabilities.
Discounting
Where the effect of the time value of money is material, the amount of a provision should be the
present value of the expenditure required to settle the obligation.
An appropriate discount rate should be used, and the standard requires this to be a pre-tax rate
that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money. The discount rate(s) should
not reflect risks for which future cash flow estimates have been adjusted.
272
Future events
Future events which may affect the amount required to settle the entity's obligation should be taken
into account where there is sufficient evidence that they will occur.
These events may include future changes in technology or new legislation. The standard does,
however state that in the case of new legislation, in most cases sufficient objective evidence will
not exist until the legislation is actually enacted.
Expected disposal of assets
Gains from the expected disposal of assets should not be taken into account in measuring a
provision, even if the expected disposal is closely linked to the event giving rise to the provision.
HKAS 37.53-
57
2.3 Reimbursements
Some or all of the expenditure needed to settle a provision may be expected to be recovered from
a third party through insurance contracts, indemnity clauses or supplier’s warranties. These
amounts may be reimbursed to the entity or paid directly to the party to who the amount is due.
If so, the reimbursement shall be recognised when, and only when, it is virtually certain that
reimbursement will be received if the entity settles the obligation.
Generally, however, the entity will remain liable for the amount due, and would be required to pay
all of this if the third party failed to pay. This is reflected in the accounting treatment:
 A provision is recognised for the full amount of the liability.
 The reimbursement should be treated as a separate asset, and the amount recognised
should not be greater than the provision itself.
 The provision and the amount recognised for reimbursement may be netted off in the
statement of profit or loss.
In some cases the entity will not be liable for the costs if the third party fails to pay. In this case
these costs are not included in the provision.
A corporate customer launched a legal case against Pioneer Machinery Co (‘PMC’) on 2 June
20X4 on the basis that a machine supplied by the company was faulty and as a result goods
produced by it were substandard, resulting in lost contracts and wasted materials.
PMC’s legal team has advised that the company has a 75% chance of losing the case and as a
result would have to pay $25,000,000 in damages.
PMC is covered by insurance for such an eventuality and if it loses the case against the customer it
is virtually certain that it can claim for the full amount of the loss net of a 10% excess.
Required
(a) Explain how the requirements of HKAS 37 are applied to this scenario and state the
necessary journal entries that should be made in the year ended 30 June 20X4.
(b) Identify amounts to be recognised in the financial statements of PMC in the year ended 30
June 20X4.
HKAS 37.59- 2.4 Changes in provisions

60
Provisions should be reviewed at each reporting date and adjusted to reflect the current
best estimate. If it is no longer probable that a transfer of economic benefits will be required to
settle the obligation, the provision should be reversed.
273
Financial Reporting
Where the effect of the time value of money is significant, so that a provision has been measured
at present value, the discount is unwound each year with a resulting increase to the provision. This
increase is recognised as a finance cost in profit or loss.
HKAS 37.61-
62
2.5 Use of provisions
A provision should be used only to set off expenditure for which the provision was originally recognised.
It is not permitted to set off expenditure against a provision formerly organised for another purpose
since this would conceal the impact of two different events.
HKAS 37.63-
65
2.6 Common scenarios
2.6.1 Future operating losses
No provisions should be recognised for future operating losses which do not meet the definition of
a liability and the general recognition criteria stated in the standard.
Expected future operating losses may, however, be indication of the impairment of assets related
to that operation.
HKAS 37.66- 2.6.2 Onerous contracts

68
Key term
An onerous contract is a contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under
the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be received under it. The unavoidable costs
under a contract reflect the least net cost of exiting from the contract, which is the lower of the cost
of fulfilling it and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to fulfil it. (HKAS 37.10)
If an entity has a contract that is onerous, the present obligation under the contract should be
recognised and measured as a provision.
A common example would be leasehold property which is vacated before the lease term ends. For
the remaining years of the lease, the cost of the property (future lease payments) exceeds the
benefits derived from the property (likely to amount to nil if it is to be left vacant). In this case,
provision should be made for the future unavoidable lease payments as at the date on which the
property is vacated. The provision is released as these payments are made in future years.
The provision is disclosed as current/non-current in accordance with HKAS 1. Practically this is
likely to mean that the total provision is split between the amount payable within one year and the
amount payable thereafter.
There is no obligation where cancellation of a contract does not result in the need to pay
compensation to another party.
HKAS 37.70- 2.6.3 Provisions for restructuring
83
One of the main purposes of HKAS 37 was to target abuses of provisions for restructuring.
Accordingly, HKAS 37 lays down strict criteria to determine when such a provision can be made.
Key term
HKAS 37 defines a restructuring as:
A programme that is planned and controlled by management and materially changes either:
 The scope of a business undertaken by an entity; or
 The manner in which that business is conducted.
(HKAS 37.10)
274
The HKAS gives the following examples of events that may fall under the definition of
restructuring.
 The sale or termination of a line of business
 The closure of business locations in a country or region or the relocation of business
activities from one country or region to another
 Changes in management structure, for example, the elimination of a layer of management
 Fundamental reorganisations that have a material effect on the nature and focus of the
entity's operations
The question is whether or not an entity has an obligation at the year end. In respect of
restructuring, the standard states that there is a constructive obligation if:
 The entity has a detailed formal plan for the restructuring
 The entity has raised a valid expectation in those affected that it will carry out the
restructuring by starting to implement that plan or announcing its main features to those
affected by it
A mere management decision is not normally sufficient. Management decisions may
sometimes trigger off recognition, but only if earlier events such as negotiations with employee
representatives and other interested parties have been concluded subject only to management
approval.
When the sale of an operation is involved in the restructuring, HKAS 37 states that no obligation is
to be recognised until the entity has entered into a binding sale agreement. Until then, the entity
will be able to alter its decision and withdraw from the sale even if its intentions have been
announced publicly.
The HKAS states that a restructuring provision should include only the direct expenditures arising
from the restructuring that are both:
 Necessarily entailed by the restructuring
 Not associated with the ongoing activities of the entity
The following costs should specifically not be included within a restructuring provision:
 Retraining or relocating continuing staff
 Marketing
 Investment in new systems and distribution networks
 Future operating losses
 Losses or gains on the expected disposal of assets
HKAS 37.19 2.6.4 Other scenarios

& Appendix
C (a) Warranties. A provision is appropriate where on past experience it is probable, i.e. more
likely than not, that some claims will emerge. The provision must be estimated, however, on
the basis of the class as a whole and not on individual claims. There is a clear legal
obligation in this case.
(b) Major repairs. In the past it has been quite popular for companies to provide for expenditure
on a major overhaul to be accrued gradually over the intervening years between overhauls.
Under HKAS 37 this is not permissible as HKAS 37 would argue that this is a mere intention
to carry out repairs, not an obligation. The entity can always sell the asset in the meantime.
The only solution is to treat major assets such as aircraft, ships, furnaces etc. as a series of
smaller assets where each part is depreciated over shorter lives. Therefore, any major
overhaul may be argued to be replacement and therefore classified as capital rather than
revenue expenditure.
(c) Self insurance. A number of companies have created a provision for self insurance based
on the expected cost of making good fire damage and so on instead of paying premiums to
an insurance company. Under HKAS 37 this provision is not justifiable as the entity has no
obligation until a fire or accident occurs. No obligation exists until that time.
275
Financial Reporting
(d) Environmental contamination. If the company has an environment policy such that other
parties would expect the company to clean up any contamination or if the company has broken
current environmental legislation then a provision for environmental damage must be made.
(e) Decommissioning or abandonment costs. When an oil company initially purchases an
oilfield it is put under a legal obligation to decommission the site at the end of its life. Prior to
HKAS 37 most oil companies built up the provision gradually over the life of the field so that
no one year would be unduly burdened with the cost.
HKAS 37, however, insists that a legal obligation exists on the initial expenditure on the field
and therefore a liability exists immediately. This would appear to result in a large charge to
profit or loss in the first year of operation of the field. However, the HKAS takes the view that
the cost of purchasing the field in the first place is not only the cost of the field itself but also
the costs of putting it right again. Therefore, all the costs of abandonment may be
capitalised.
2.7 Summary of journal entries

Journal entries to be made in respect of provisions are as follows;
To recognise a new provision (that is not a DEBIT Profit or loss* (e.g. warrant/legal
decommissioning/restoration provision) expense)
CREDIT Provision
To recognise a new provision DEBIT Property, plant and equipment
(decommissioning/restoration provision)
CREDIT Provision
To increase a provision DEBIT Profit or loss*
CREDIT Provision
To decrease a provision DEBIT Provision
CREDIT Profit or loss*
To use a provision for the intended purpose DEBIT Provision
CREDIT Cash
To release a provision DEBIT Provision
CREDIT Profit or loss*
*Entries to profit or loss should be made to an appropriate account, for example to a warranty costs
account in respect of a warranty provision or a legal costs account in respect of a provision for a
legal case.
2.8 Disclosure of provisions

HKAS
37.84,85,92 Disclosures for provisions fall into two parts.
 Disclosure of details of the change in carrying value of a provision from the beginning to
the end of the year, including:
– Carrying amount at the beginning and end of the period
– Additional provisions made in the period
– Amounts incurred and charged against the provision in the period
– Unused amounts reversed in the period
– The increase in the period in the discounted amount arising from the passage of time
and effect of any change in the discount rate
276
Note that comparative information is not required.

 Disclosure of the background to the making of the provision and the uncertainties affecting
its outcome, including for each class of provision:
– A brief description of the nature of the obligation and expected timing of any resulting
outflows of economic benefits
– An indication of the uncertainties about the amount or timing of outflows
– The amount of any expected reimbursement stating the amount of any asset that has
been recognised for the expected reimbursement
In very rare circumstances, such disclosure may prejudice seriously the position of the entity in a
dispute with other parties on the subject matter of the provision. In this case disclosure of the
above information is not required, however the following should be disclosed:
 the general nature of the dispute
 the fact that, and reason why, the information has not been disclosed
Illustration
Provisions
Restructuring Litigation Others
(Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) Total
$million $million $million $million
At 1 January 20X4 630 1,245 390 2,265
Provisions made in the year 92 210 60 362
Amounts used (180) (450) (30) (660)
Unused amounts reversed (25) (165) (85) (275)
Exchange difference 4 (5) – (1)
At 31 December 20X4 517 835 335 1,691
Notes
1 Restructuring
Restructuring provisions arose from a number of projects across the Group. These include
plans to close the manufacturing division in PRC. Restructuring provisions are expected to
result in future cash outflows when implementing the plans (usually over the following two to
three years).
2 Litigation
Litigation provisions have been set up to cover tax, legal and administrative proceedings that
arise in the ordinary course of business. These provisions cover several cases whose
detailed disclosure could be detrimental to the Group. The Group does not believe that any
of these litigation cases will have a material adverse impact on its financial position. The
timing of cash outflows depends on the outcome of proceedings.
3 Others
Other provisions are mainly in respect of onerous leases. These result from unfavourable
leases, breach of contracts or supply agreements above market prices in which the
unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contracts exceed the economic
benefits expected to be received or for which no benefits are expected to be received.
277
Financial Reporting
3 Contingent liabilities and contingent assets

Topic highlights
An entity should not recognise a contingent liability, but they should be disclosed where there is a
possible outflow of economic resources.
An entity should not recognise a contingent asset, but they should be disclosed where there is a
probable inflow of economic resources.
Now you understand provisions it will be easier to understand contingent assets and liabilities.
HKAS 37.10 3.1 Contingent liabilities

We saw the definition of a contingent liability earlier in the chapter. To recap, a contingent liability
is:
within the entity's control
 It is not probable that a transfer of economic benefits will be required to settle the
obligation
 The amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability
In other words, a contingent liability is an obligation that does not meet the HKAS 37 recognition
criteria for a provision because there is no present obligation, or the transfer of resources is only
possible or the amount cannot be measured reliably.
HKAS 37.27- 3.1.1 Accounting treatment
28
Contingent liabilities should not be recognised in financial statements but they should be
disclosed, unless the probability of an outflow of economic resources is remote.
HKAS 37.86- 3.1.2 Disclosure: contingent liabilities
88,92
A brief description must be provided of all material contingent liabilities unless they are likely to
be remote.
In addition, the following should be provided for each class of contingent liability, where practicable:
 An estimate of their financial effect
 Details of any uncertainties relating to the amount or timing of the outflow
 The possibility of any reimbursement
When determining classes of contingent liability, an entity should consider whether the nature of
items is sufficiently similar for aggregated amounts to fulfil the disclosure requirements.
Where a provision and contingent liability result from the same circumstances, an entity should
indicate the link between the provision and contingent liability.
dispute with other parties on the subject matter of the contingent liability. In this case disclosure of
the above information is not required, however the following should be disclosed:
 The general nature of the dispute
 The fact that, and reason why, the information has not been disclosed
278
Illustration
Contingent liabilities
During the reporting period, a customer of the Group instigated proceedings against it for alleged
defects in a product, which it claimed were the cause of a major fire in the customer’s premises on
18 August 20X3. Total losses to the customer have been estimated at $12 million and this amount
is being claimed from the Group.
The Group’s lawyers have advised that they do not consider that the lawsuit has merit and they
have recommended that it be contested. No provision has been made in these financial statements
as the group’s management do not consider that there is any probable loss.
3.2 Contingent assets

Earlier in the chapter we defined a contingent asset as a possible asset that arises from past
events and whose existence will be confirmed by the occurrence of one or more uncertain future
events not wholly within the entity's control.
37.31,33,34
A contingent asset must not be recognised. Only when the realisation of the related economic
benefits is virtually certain should recognition take place. At that point, the asset is no longer a
contingent asset.
Where a contingent asset offers a probable inflow of resources, it should be disclosed.
HKAS 3.2.2 Disclosure: contingent assets
37.89,92
Contingent assets must only be disclosed in the notes if they are probable.
In that case the following should be provided:
 A brief description of the nature of the contingent asset
 An estimate of its likely financial effect, where practicable, or a statement to the effect that it
is not practicable
dispute with other parties on the subject matter of the contingent asset. In this case disclosure of
the above information is not required, however the following should be disclosed:
 The general nature of the dispute
 The fact that, and reason why, the information has not been disclosed.
3.3 Summary
 The objective of HKAS 37 is to ensure that appropriate recognition criteria and measurement
bases are applied to provisions and contingencies and that sufficient information is disclosed.
 The HKAS seeks to ensure that provisions are only recognised when a measurable
obligation exists. It includes detailed rules that can be used to ascertain when an obligation
exists and how to measure the obligation.
 The standard attempts to eliminate the ‘profit smoothing’ which has gone on before it was
issued.
Explain the accounting treatment required in the following scenarios at 31 December 20X0:
(a) Rango Co., a healthcare provider, has been informed that due to upcoming legislation, it is
required to fit carbon monoxide detectors in all of its properties at a cost of $40,000. Any
279
Financial Reporting
failure to do so by 30 September 20X1 will result in penalties of $5,000. Rango has not
undertaken the work by 31 December 20X0.
(b) Greenfingers Co. specialises in the sale of gardening equipment. As part of a strategy to
streamline operations, the company has decided to divest its plant division. A probable
purchaser has been identified, although no agreement has been reached by 31 December
20X0. Until an agreement has been formalised, the directors of Greenfingers will not advise
their employees of the divestment. Redundancy costs associated with the restructuring are
expected to be $120,000, and a further $50,000 will be spent on retraining certain staff
members to work in the furniture division of the company.
You may wish to study the flow chart below, taken from HKAS 37, which is a good summary of its
requirements.
Cobo Co. manufactures goods which are sold with a one year warranty against defects.
(a) Should a provision be recognised for the cost of repairing faulty goods?
(b) Cobo Co.'s sales for the year are $40m. They anticipate that 60% of goods will not be faulty,
30% will need minor repairs that would cost $2m if all items were affected and 10% of goods
will need major repairs that would cost $4m if all items were affected. How much should be
provided for repairs?
Asia Electric Co (‘AEC’) operates power plants and sells electricity wholesale to domestic power
providers. The following issues are relevant to the company in the year ended 31 December 20X1:
280
1. The company constructed a hydro-electric power plant during the year that was ready for
use on 31 December 20X1. The construction cost of the plant amounted to $270 million .
Governmental planning permission was granted for the power plant on condition that AEC
dismantles the plant and restores the site on which it is located at the end of the plant’s
useful life (50 years). AEC estimates that the cost of this in 50 years will be $150 million and
the present value of this amount is $82 million. The accountant of AEC has created a
provision for $150 million and charged this as an exceptional expense in profit or loss.
2. In December 20X0 the former sales director of the company was dismissed. He brought an
unfair dismissal claim against AEC in February 20X1 and is seeking damages of $12 million.
The Company’s legal team has advised that the ex-employee has just a 55% chance of
winning her case the accountant has made no provision but has disclosed a contingent
liability in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X1.
Required
(a) Comment on the accounting treatment applied by the Company accountant, suggesting the
correct treatment where necessary.
(b) Prepare the necessary numerical disclosures to be reported in the financial statements in the
year ended 31 December 20X1.
4 Interpretations relating to provision accounting

4.1 HK(IFRIC) Int-1 Changes in Existing Decommissioning,
Restoration and Similar Liabilities
4.1.1 The issue
HK(IFRIC) Int-1 applies where an entity has included decommissioning, restoration and similar
costs within the cost of an item of property, plant and equipment under HKAS 16 and as a provision
(liability) under HKAS 37.
An example would be a liability that was recognised by the operator of an oil rig for costs that it
expects to incur in the future when the rig is shut down (decommissioned). Such a provision should
be discounted to present value.
HK(IFRIC) Int-1 addresses changes in the value of the provision that may arise from:
(a) Changes in the discount rate
(b) Revised estimates of the timing and amount of costs
4.1.2 Required treatment
Where an entity applies the cost model to property, plant and equipment, these changes in value of
the provision are required to be capitalised as part of the cost of the asset and depreciated over the
remaining life of the item to which they relate.
Where an entity applies the revaluation model to property, plant and equipment, the changes in
value of the provision must be recognised as follows:
(a) A decrease in the liability is recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated
within the revaluation surplus (other than where it reverses a revaluation deficit on the asset
that was previously recognised in profit or loss).
(b) An increase in the liability is recognised in profit or loss (other than where a credit balance
exists in the revaluation surplus in respect of that asset, in which case it is recognised in
other comprehensive income and reduces the revaluation surplus).
281
Financial Reporting
HK(IFRIC) Int-1 also deals with an increase in the liability that reflects the passage of time – also
referred to as the unwinding of the discount. This is recognised in profit or loss as a finance
cost as it occurs.
4.2 HK(IFRIC) Int-5 Rights to Interests from Decommissioning,

Restoration and Environmental Rehabilitation Funds
4.2.1 The issue
Some entities have an obligation to decommission assets or to perform environmental restoration.
Such entities may make contributions to a fund which is established to reimburse those costs of
decommissioning, restoration or rehabilitation when they are incurred. This fund may be set up to
meet the decommissioning costs of one contributor or for a number of contributors.
Matters for discussion with reference to HK(IFRIC) Int-5 are:
(a) How should the interest in a fund be dealt with by a contributor?
(b) How should an obligation be accounted for when a contributor has an obligation to make
additional contributions?
4.2.2 HK(IFRIC) Int-5 treatment
The following treatments are specified in HK(IFRIC) Int-5:
(a) If an entity recognises a decommissioning obligation under HKFRS and contributes to a fund
to segregate assets to pay for the obligation, it should apply HKFRS 10 Consolidated
Financial Statements, HKFRS 11 Joint Arrangements and HKAS 28 Investments in
Associates and Joint Ventures, to determine whether decommissioning funds should be
consolidated or accounted for under the equity method.
(b) When a fund is not consolidated or accounted for under the equity method, and that
fund does not relieve the contributor of its obligation to pay decommissioning costs, the
contributor should recognise:
(i) Its obligation to pay decommissioning costs as a liability
(ii) Its rights to receive reimbursement from the fund as a reimbursement under
HKAS 37
(c) A right to reimbursement should be measured at the lower of the:
(i) Amount of the decommissioning obligation recognised
(ii) Contributor's share of the fair value of the net assets of the fund attributable to
contributors
Changes in the carrying amount of this right (other than contributions to and payments from
the funds) should be recognised in profit or loss.
(d) When a contributor has an obligation to make potential additional contributions to the fund,
that obligation is a contingent liability within the scope of HKAS 37. When it becomes
probable that the additional contributions will be made, a provision should be recognised.
282
Topic recap
HKAS 37 Provisions,
Contingent Liabilities and
Contingent Assets
= accounting for uncertainty
Provisions Contingencies
Liability of uncertain timing and/or amount Liability of uncertain timing and/or amount Contingent asset
Recognise if: Possible obligation that arises from past Possible asset arising from past events
Present obligation (legal or events and whose existence will be whose existence will be confirmed by
constructive) as the result of a past confirmed by uncertain future events uncertain future events
event Or
Probable outflow of economic benefits Present obligation arising from past
Reliable estimate can be made of the events which is not recognised because:
obligation (i) outflow is not probable
(ii) amount can't be reliably
measured
Measure at:
Best estimate of expenditure Do not recognise unless virtually certain
Use expected values for a large (in which case not a contingent asset)
Do not recognise
population of items
Discount if the time value of money is
material
Disclose: Disclose the following unless the outflow Disclose where probable inflow:
Reconciliation of the carrying value of of resources is remote: Description of contingency
provisions at the start of the period to Description of contingency Estimate of financial effect
that at the end Estimate of financial effect
Background to the provision Details of uncertainties
Possibility of reimbursement
283
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
(a) Black Gold Oil Co. has a constructive obligation, as the advertising campaign has created a
valid expectation on the part of those affected by it that the entity will clean up the
contamination that it has caused.
(b) The retailer has a legal obligation to refund money for unwanted goods within a 28-day
period after the sale, and a constructive obligation to provide refunds for 32 days beyond
this.
The past event is the sale, and therefore the retailer has a present obligation as a result of a
past event.
(c) The decision to close was made on 12 October 20X3 and this was first announced to
affected parties (staff members) on 14 November 20X3. At the year-end of 31 October 20X3
a past event has occurred (the decision to close). However there is no legal or constructive
obligation. A constructive obligation does not arise until 14 November 20X3.
Answer 2
The cost is found using 'expected values' (75%  $NIL) + (20%  $1.0m) + (5%  $4.0m) =
$400,000.
The provision is recorded by:
DEBIT Warranty costs $400,000
CREDIT Warranty provision $400,000
Answer 3
(a) Provision
In respect of the case against PMC, a provision should be recognised. This is because the
recognition criteria are met as follows:
 A legal case is underway and therefore a present legal obligation exists as a result of
a past event (the provision of the machine)
 The legal team have advised that there is a 75% chance of PMC losing the case and
having to pay damages; 75% is deemed probable as it is more likely than not
 The amount of damages can be estimated reliably (by the legal team) at $25 million
Therefore a provision is made by:
DEBIT Legal damages expense $25,000,000

CREDIT Legal provision $25,000,000
Insurance
The insurance is a reimbursement. HKAS 37 states that it can be recognised as an asset
only where a provision has been recognised and it is virtually certain that insurance monies
will be received if PMC settles the claim for damages.
284
This is the case here and therefore PMC recognises an asset of 90%  $25 million = $22.5
million by:
DEBIT Legal damages asset $22,500,000

CREDIT Legal damages expense $22,500,000
(b) In PMC’s financial statements:

 A provision of $25 million is recognised in the statement of financial position
 An asset of $22.5 million is recognised in the statement of financial position; this is not
netted off against the provision
 A net amount of $2.5 million is recognised as a legal damages expense
Answer 4
(a) At 31 December 20X0, there is no legal obligation to fit the carbon monoxide detectors, and
therefore Rango should not make a provision for either the cost of doing so or the fines
which would be incurred if it were in breach of the legislation.
If Rango has still not fitted the detectors at the 20X1 year end (i.e. when the legislation is in
force), then it should make a provision for the penalty of $5,000 for which it is liable (rather
than the $40,000 cost of fitting the detectors). This is because there is still no obligation for
the costs of fitting detectors because no obligating event has occurred (the fitting of the
detectors). However, an obligation might arise to pay fines or penalties under the legislation
because the obligating event has occurred (the non-compliant operation of Rango).
(b) Greenfingers is planning a restructuring of its business. A provision in respect of
restructuring can only be made when a year-end obligation is evidenced by a detailed formal
plan and an expectation on the part of those affected that the restructuring will happen. As at
31 December 20X0, the employees of Greenfingers are unaware of the plan and therefore
this criterion is not met. Therefore, no provision can be made.
If a provision could be made (i.e. if the sale had been announced to employees, so giving
rise to a valid expectation that the restructuring will occur and thus creating a constructive
obligation) then provision would be for the $120,000 redundancy costs but not the $50,000
retraining costs.
Answer 5
(a) Yes. Cobo Co. cannot avoid the expenditure on repairing faulty goods. A provision should be
made for the estimated cost of repairs.
(b) The cost of the provision is found using expected values: (60%  $0m) + (30%  $2m) +
(10%  $4) = $1m.
Answer 6
(a) Hydro-electric power plant
The planning permission for the power plant requires that at the end of its useful life the plant
is removed and site restored.
 The granting of the planning permission means that AEC has a legal obligation to
incur restoration costs in the future. The past event is the construction of the power
plant. Therefore AEC has a legal obligation as a result of a past event at the reporting
date.
 The costs to be incurred in the future are a probable outflow of benefit.
 AEC has estimated the restoration costs at $150 million.
285
Financial Reporting
Therefore the HKAS 37 provision recognition criteria are met and the company accountant is
correct to make a provision.
The provision should be measured at the full cost of restoration as estimated at the time of
construction (i.e. it should not gradually accrue over the power plant’s life). HKAS 37
requires that provisions are measured at present value where the time value of money is
significant. This is the case here and so the provision is measured at $82 million rather than
$150 million.
Restoration costs form part of the cost of the power plant. Therefore the provision should not
be recognised in profit or loss but capitalised as part of PPE:
DEBIT PPE $82,000,000
CREDIT Restoration provision $82,000,000
This provision is gradually ‘wound up’ to $150 million over the 50 year life of the plant, with a
finance cost charged each year based on the rate used to discount $150 million to
$82 million.
Unfair dismissal case
The recognition criteria of HKAS 37 as applied as follows:
 AEC has received a claim in the year for damages arising from an event that
happened in the previous year. Therefore a legal obligation exists as a result of a past
event.
 The Company’s legal team consider there is a 55% chance of AEC losing the unfair
dismissal claim. This is more likely than not and therefore results in a probable outflow
of benefits.
 The amount of damages claimed is $12 million; this is a reliable estimate of the
outflow to settle the obligation.
Therefore a provision should be made for $12 million by:
DEBIT Legal costs $12,000,000
CREDIT Legal provision $12,000,000
(b) AEC
Extract from statement of financial position at 31 December 20X1
$’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (270 + 82) 352,000
Provisions 82,000
Current liabilities
Provisions 12,000
Extract from statement of profit or loss for year ended 31 December 20X1
$’000
Operating expenses 12,000
Note: Provisions
Restoration Legal Total
$’000 $’000 $’000
At 1 January 20X1 - - -
Provided in year 82,000 12,000 94,000
At 31 December 20X1 82,000 12,000 94,000
286
Exam practice
Darren Company Limited 23 minutes

Darren Company Limited (‘DCL’) is engaged in the manufacture of batteries. On the unaudited
statement of financial position as at 30 June 20X8, it has recognised the following provisions as
current liabilities:
(a) A provision for late delivery penalty
In May 20X8, DCL received a sales order for 7,000,000 units of rechargeable batteries for
which the agreed delivery date is 31 August 20X8. It is expected that DCL would earn a
gross profit of $1 per unit. Due to a shortage in the supply of raw materials, at the reporting
date, the management realised that they could only supply the goods at the earliest on
10 September 20X8. According to the sales contract, DCL would compensate the customer
for late delivery at $0.01 per unit per day.
(b) A provision for annual safety inspection of the production line
The last inspection was carried out in June 20X7. Due to a large backlog of sales orders, the
management decided to postpone the annual inspection until mid-September 20X8.
(c) A provision for the loss on sales of aged finished goods
The products were manufactured in late 20X6 with an expected normal usage period of two
years from the date of production. Due to the short expiry period, they were sold at a price
below cost in July 20X8.
(d) A provision for bonus payments to two executive directors
In accordance with the directors' service contract, two executive directors are entitled to
receive, in addition to monthly salaries, a bonus of equivalent to 5% of the profit before
taxation and the accrued bonus.
Required
Discuss the appropriateness of the provisions recognised by DCL. (13 marks)
XPrint Limited 31 minutes

XPrint Limited (XP), a printer manufacturer, had the following balances under current liabilities as
presented in its annual management accounts as at 31 March 20X3:
HK$’000
Provision for discount coupon 750
Warranty provision 5,640
Litigation provision 8,000
XP has developed a new printers model and targets to promote it to its old customers. A letter was
issued to 1,500 old customers to offer them a HK$500 discount to exchange the old model for the
new one on or before 30 April 20X3. It is expected that a profit will still be made at a discounted
selling price.
XP provides a one-year warranty provision for all the printers it sells. Customers can request a free
of charge repair service during the warranty period. A provision of HK$400,000 was made per
month. Total expenditure incurred for this service, mainly costs for labour and parts replacement,
was HK$3,160,000 during the year, which represented around 0.8% of the sales in the previous
year. The ratio for the past five years ranged from 0.64% to 1%. Total sales for the current year
amounted to HK$437 million.
287
Financial Reporting
XP was named as a defendant in a writ of summons, with a statement of claim by another printer
producer in relation to the alleged infringement of patent of design, claiming for a sum of HK$9.6
million. XP intended to settle with the plaintiff out of court. An offer letter of HK$3.8 million in
compensation was given to the plaintiff in January 20X3 and a counter-offer of HK$5 million
payable within one month was received in early March 20X3. The Board of XP approved to accept
the counter-offer of the plaintiff and made the payment on 20 April 20X3. The lawyer issued a fee
note of HK$650,000 to XP on 1 May 20X3 for the relevant legal service provided during the year.
Other than the existing HK$8 million provision relating to this case, XP had no other provision.
Required
(a) Explain and comment the appropriateness of the amount of the provisions recognised in the
management accounts at 31 March 20X3. (14 marks)
(b) The marketing director wrote the following email to the chief financial officer on 29 March
20X3: 'We just concluded the contract terms of a television advertisement for the new
products to be launched in the coming May with a cost of HK$1.8 million. As there was still
an un-utilised budget of HK$1.2 million for marketing expenses for this year, I suggest
making a partial provision for this expenditure first, please approve.' Do you agree the
recognition of the provision at 31 March 20X3? (3 marks)
(Total = 17 marks)
288
chapter 12
Construction contracts
Topic list
1 HKAS 11 Construction contracts

1.1 The accounting problem
1.2 Scope of the standard
1.3 Definitions
1.4 Contract revenue and contract costs
1.5 Combining and separating construction contracts
2 Accounting for construction contracts
2.1 Reliable estimate of outcome
2.2 Accounting treatment: outcome can be reliably estimated
2.3 Accounting treatment: outcome cannot be reliably estimated
2.4 Summary of the treatment of construction contracts in the statement of profit or loss
2.5 Construction contracts in the statement of financial position
2.6 Changes in estimates
2.7 Section summary
2.8 Disclosures
Learning focus
Long-term contracts are an everyday part of business in many industry sectors, particularly
construction. You should be able to advise a client how this type of contract is accounted for
and why.
289
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.07 Construction contracts 3
3.07.01 Define a construction contract
3.07.02 Explain when contract revenue and costs should be recognised in
3.07.03 Explain how contract revenue and costs should be measured and
apply these principles
3.07.04 Account for the expected loss and changes in estimates
3.07.05 Disclose information related to construction contracts in the
290
12: Construction contracts | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 11 Construction Contracts

Topic highlights
A construction contract is a contract specifically negotiated for the construction of an asset or a
combination of interrelated assets.

Imagine that you are the accountant at a company which is building a hospital under contract with
the government. The hospital will take four years to build and over that time your company will
have to pay for costs such as workers' wages and building materials. The government will make
periodic payments at pre-determined stages of construction.
How do you decide what amounts to include in the statement of profit or loss in each of the four
years?
This is the problem addressed by HKAS 11 Construction Contracts.
Example: Construction contract

Suppose that a contract is started on 1 January 20X1, with an estimated completion date of
31 December 20X2. The final contract price is $2,000,000. In the first year, to 31 December 20X1:
(a) Costs incurred amounted to $800,000.
(b) Half the work on the contract was completed.
(c) Certificates of work completed have been issued, to the value of $1,000,000. (Note. It is
usual, in a construction contract, for a qualified person such as an architect or engineer to
inspect the work completed, and if it is satisfactory, to issue certificates. This will then be the
notification to the customer that progress payments are due to the contractor. Progress
payments are commonly the amount of valuation on the work certificates issued, minus a
precautionary retention of 10%.)
(d) It is estimated with reasonable certainty that further costs to completion in 20X2 will be
$800,000.
What is the contract profit in 20X1, and what entries would be made for the contract at
31 December 20X1 if:
(a) Profits are deferred until the completion of the contract?
(b) A proportion of the estimated revenue and profit is credited to profit or loss in 20X1?
Solution
(a) If profits are deferred until the completion of the contract in 20X2, the revenue and profit
recognised on the contract in 20X1 would be nil, and the value of work in progress on
31 December 20X1 would be the costs incurred of $800,000.
$'000 $'000
DEBIT Work-in-progress 800
CREDIT Cash 800
HKAS 11 takes the view that this policy is unreasonable, because in 20X2, the total profit of
$400,000 would be recorded. Since the contract revenues are earned throughout 20X1 and
20X2, a profit of nil in 20X1 and $400,000 in 20X2 would be contrary to the accruals concept
of accounting.
291
Financial Reporting
(b) It is fairer to recognise revenue and profit throughout the duration of the contract.
As at 31 December 20X1 revenue of $1,000,000 should be matched with cost of sales of
$800,000 in the statement of profit or loss, leaving an attributable profit for 20X1 of
$200,000.
$'000 $'000
DEBIT Account receivable 1,000
Cost of sales 800
CREDIT Sales 1,000
Cash 800
The only entry in the statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X1 is a receivable
of $1,000,000 recognising that the company is owed this amount for work done to date. No
balance remains for work in progress, the whole $800,000 having been recognised in cost of
sales.
1.2 Scope of the standard

Topic highlights
HKAS 11 applies to construction contracts which span a period end.
HKAS 11 is applied in accounting for construction contracts in the financial statements of

contractors.
A construction contract within the scope of HKAS 11 does not have to last for a period of more than
one year. The main point is that the contract activity starts in one financial period and ends in
another, thus creating the problem: to which of two or more periods should contract income and
costs be allocated?
Where the rendering of services is directly related to a construction contract, for example services
provided by a project manager or architect, these services are also accounted for in accordance
with HKAS 11. In all other cases, the rendering of services, even where a service contract spans a
period end, is within the scope of HKAS 18.

HKAS 11 provides the following definitions.
Key terms
Construction contract. A contract specifically negotiated for the construction of an asset or a
combination of assets that are closely interrelated or interdependent in terms of their design,
technology and function or their ultimate purpose or use.
A fixed price contract is a construction contract in which the contractor agrees to a fixed contract
price, or a fixed rate per unit of output, which in some cases is subject to cost escalation clauses.
A cost plus contract is a construction contract in which the contractor is reimbursed for allowable
or otherwise defined costs, plus a percentage of these costs or a fixed fee.
(HKAS 11)
292
The definition of a construction contract includes:

(a) contracts for the construction of single assets such as bridges or roads
(b) contracts for the construction of inter-related assets such as refineries or complex pieces of
equipment
(c) contracts for services related to the construction of an asset such as project manager
services
(d) contracts for the destruction or restoration of assets
Contracts are further broken down into fixed price and cost plus contracts. The distinction between
these two types is relevant when accounting for construction contracts and is considered in
Section 2.1.
1.4 Contract revenue and contract costs

As well as the more formal definitions above, the standard includes detailed guidance on what
amounts should be included in contract revenue and contract costs.
HKAS 11.11- 1.4.1 Contract revenue
15
Contract revenue includes:
(a) The initial amount of revenue specified in the contract; and
(b) Variations in contract work, claims and incentive payments:
Examples of variations:
1 A variation, or instruction by the customer for a change in the scope of work to be performed,
may increase or decrease contract revenue.
2 A claim, being an amount that an entity seeks to collect from the customer as reimbursement
for extra costs, may increase contract revenue.
3 Cost escalation clauses in a fixed price contract will increase contract revenue.
4 Incentive payments, being additional amounts paid to a contractor if specified standards are
met or exceeded will increase contract revenue.
5 Penalties imposed on contractors due to delays will decrease contract revenue.
Variations are only included as part of contract revenue to the extent that:
(i) it is probable that they will result in revenue; and
(ii) they are capable of being reliably measured.
The result is that contract revenue is measured at the fair value of received or receivable revenue.
Example: Contract revenue

Loriload has a fixed price contract for $9 million to build a bridge. By the end of year 1 it is apparent
that the associated costs have increased by around 5% and accordingly in year 2 the customer
approves a variation of $500,000. The contract is completed in year 3.
What amount should be used as contract revenue in calculations in relation to the construction
contract at the end of the three years?
Solution
Year 1 $9 million
Year 2 $9.5 million
Year 3 $9.5 million
293
Financial Reporting
HKAS 11.16- 1.4.2 Contract costs

20
Contract costs consist of:
(a) Costs that relate directly to the specified contract.
(b) Costs that are attributable to contract activity in general and can be allocated to the contract
(c) Such other costs as are specifically chargeable to the customer under the terms of the
contract.
Costs that relate directly to a specific contract include the following:
 Site labour costs, including site supervision
 Costs of materials used in construction
 Depreciation of plant and equipment used on the contract
 Costs of moving plant, equipment and materials to and from the contract site
 Costs of hiring plant and equipment
 Costs of design and technical assistance that are directly related to the contract
 Estimated costs of rectification and guarantee work, including expected warranty costs
 Claims from third parties
Costs that are attributable to general contract activity and can be allocated to specific contracts
include:
 Insurance
 General costs of design and technical assistance
 Construction overheads
These costs should be allocated systematically and rationally, and all costs with similar
characteristics should be treated consistently. The allocation should be based on the normal level
of construction activity. Borrowing costs may be attributed in this way (see HKAS 23: Chapter 17).
Some costs cannot be attributed to contract activity and so the following should be excluded
from construction contract costs:
 General administration costs (unless reimbursement is specified in the contract)
 Selling costs
 R&D (unless reimbursement is specified in the contract)
 Depreciation of idle plant and equipment not used on any particular contract
Example: Contract costs

Alphabeta has commenced a contract on 1 August 20X1 for the construction of a motorway.
Information on contract costs incurred in the year ended 31 December 20X1 is as follows:
$'000
Surveyors' fees 12
Direct labour costs 134
Materials delivered to the site 250
Transport of heavy plant to site 10
The following information is also relevant:
 Overheads are to be apportioned at 35% of direct labour costs
 Inventory of materials on site at the 20X1 year end is $76,000
 The heavy plant was acquired at a cost of $90,000 two years ago and is being depreciated
over 10 years on a straight line basis.
What are contract costs incurred as at 31 December 20X1?
294
Solution
$'000
Surveyors’ fees 12
Direct labour costs 134
Overheads (35%  $134,000) 46.9
Materials (250,000 – 76,000) 174
Transport of heavy plant to site 10
Depreciation of heavy plant (5/12  10%  $90,000) 3.75
380.65
HKAS 11.7-9 1.5 Combining and separating construction contracts

HKAS 11 accounting rules are normally applied to each of an entity's construction contracts in turn.
Sometimes, however, one contract is split into component parts and each is accounted for
separately, or a group of contracts are grouped and accounted for together.
The construction of a series of assets under one contract should be treated as several contracts where:
 Separate proposals are submitted for each asset.
 Separate negotiations are undertaken for each asset; the customer can accept/reject each
individually.
 Identifiable costs and revenues can be separated for each asset.
A group of contracts should be treated as one single construction contract where:
 The group of contracts are negotiated as a single package.
 Contracts are closely interrelated, with an overall profit margin.
 The contracts are performed concurrently or in a single sequence.
2 Accounting for construction contracts

Topic highlights
Revenue and costs associated with a contract should be recognised according to the stage of
completion of the contract when the outcome of the activity can be estimated reliably. If a loss
is predicted on a contract, then it should be recognised immediately.
HKAS 2.1 Reliable estimate of outcome

11.23,24
The accounting treatment applied to a construction contract depends on whether the outcome of
the contract can be measured reliably. HKAS 11 provides guidance on when this is the case for
both fixed price and cost plus contracts:
(a) Fixed price contracts
In the case of a fixed price contract, the outcome of a construction contract can be estimated
reliably when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
(i) Total contract revenue can be reliably measured.
(ii) It is probable that economic benefits of the contract will flow to the entity.
(iii) Stage of contract completion at the period end and costs to complete the contract can
be reliably measured.
(iv) Costs attributable to the contract can be identified clearly and be reliably measured so
that actual costs can be compared to previous estimates.
295
Financial Reporting
(b) Cost plus contracts

In the case of a cost plus contract, the outcome of a construction contract can be estimated
reliably when both of the following conditions are satisfied:
(i) It is probable that economic benefits of the contract will flow to the entity,
(ii) The costs attributable to the contract (whether or not reimbursable) can be identified
clearly and be reliably measured.
HKAS 11.30 2.1.1 Determining the stage of completion
Topic highlights
The stage of completion of a contract is normally measured using the costs basis, sales basis or
physical completion basis.
One of the criteria listed above which indicates that the outcome of a fixed price contract can be
estimated reliably is that the stage of contract completion can be reliably measured.
How should you decide on the stage of completion of any contract? The standard lists several
methods:
 Proportion of contract costs incurred for work carried out to date
 Surveys of work carried out
 Physical proportion of the contract work completed
The proportion that contract costs incurred for work performed to date bear to the estimated total
contract costs:
Costs incurred to date  WIP inventories
% on total costs =  100%
Total costs  variation
Surveys of work performed, or physical proportion of the contract work completed:
Work certified
% on work performed =  100%
Total revenue  variation
2.2 Accounting treatment: outcome can be reliably estimated

HKAS 2.2.1 Profitable contract
11.22,26
Where the outcome of a contract can be reliably estimated and the contract is expected to be
profitable based on contract revenue, costs to date and expected costs to complete, the
percentage completion method is applied.
The percentage of completion method is an application of the accruals assumption. Contract
revenue is matched to the contract costs incurred in reaching the stage of completion, so revenue,
costs and profit are attributed to the proportion of work completed:
(a) Contract revenue is recognised as revenue in the accounting periods in which the work is
performed.
(b) Contract costs are recognised as an expense in the accounting period in which the work to
which they relate is performed.
(c) Where amounts have been recognised as contract revenue, but their collectability from the
customer becomes doubtful, such amounts should be recognised as an expense, not a
deduction from revenue.
296
Example: Profitable contract with reliably estimated outcome

Gosforth Construction assesses the stage of completion of its contracts by reference to costs
incurred as a percentage of total costs. The company commenced Contract A in 20X1. The
contract has a fixed price of $890,000, recorded costs during 20X1 are $389,000, of which $10,000
relates to unused inventory. Expected future costs are $150,000.
Required
How much profit should be reported in 20X1 in accordance with HKAS 11?
Solution
$
Costs incurred to date (389 – 10) 379,000
Estimated future costs (150 + 10) 160,000
Total estimated costs 539,000
The contract is therefore 70.3% (379,000/539,000) complete
Revenue to be recognised: $890,000  70.3% = $625,670
The profit earned to date is therefore $246,670 ($625,670 – $379,000)
Example: Inclusion in financial statements

Discovery Construction commenced a $4 million contract to build a velodrome in the year ended
31 December 20X3. Details of the contract costs are as follows:
31 Dec 20X3 31 Dec 20X4 31 Dec 20X5
Estimated total costs $3.2 million $3.3 million $3.3 million
Costs incurred to date $1.2 million $2.475 million $3.3 million
What amounts should be included in Discovery Construction’s financial statements for each of
these years?
Solution
1 Calculate expected profit
20X3 20X4 20X5
$'000 $'000 $'000
Contract price – estimated 800 700 700
total costs
2 Calculate percentage of completion
Costs incurred/total costs 37.5% 75% 100%
3 Calculate cumulative statement of profit or loss amounts
Revenue (% complete  1,500 3,000 4,000
revenue)
Cost of sales (costs incurred) (1,200) (2,475) (3,300)
Profit (% complete  300 525 700
expected profit)
297
Financial Reporting
4 Calculate statement of profit or loss amounts for each year (cumulative amounts minus
amounts previously recognised)
$'000 $'000 $'000
Revenue 1,500 1,500 1,000
Cost of sales (1,200) (1,275) (825)
Profit 300 225 175
It is evident from the first example above that when the contract costs incurred to date is used to
determine the stage of completion, then only the contract costs reflecting the work to date should
be incorporated in costs incurred to date.
 Costs relating to future activity, e.g. cost of materials delivered but not yet used, are to be
excluded.
 Payments in advance made to subcontractors are to be excluded.
HKAS 2.2.2 Loss-making contract

11.36,37
Topic highlights
When the outcome of a contract can be reliably estimated and the project is loss-making, the loss
must be recognised in the current year in full.
Any loss on a contract should be recognised as soon as it is foreseen. The loss will be the
amount by which total expected contract revenue is exceeded by total expected contract costs.
The amount of the loss is not affected by:
 Whether work has started on the contract
 The stage of completion of the work
 Profits on other contracts (unless they are related contracts treated as a single contract).
Example: Loss-making contract (1)

Randall has a contract to construct a new head office for a multinational company. The contract
price has been agreed as $7 million. When Randall first signed the contract, the estimated total
costs to completion were assessed as $6.2 million. By the end of the first year of the contract,
however, price rises have meant that estimated total costs are now $7.1 million. The contract is
assessed as 28% complete by the end of the first year, based on costs incurred.
What amounts should be recognised in profit or loss in the first year of the contract?
Solution
The expected loss of $100,000 must be recognised in full, and forms part of cost of sales.
Therefore:
$'000
Revenue (balancing figure) 1,988
Cost of sales (28%  $7.1m) + $100,000 (2,088)
Loss (100)
298
HKAS 11.32-
34
2.3 Accounting treatment: outcome cannot be reliably estimated
Topic highlights
When the outcome of a contract cannot be reliably estimated no profit or loss is recognised;
revenue is recognised to the extent that recognised costs incurred are recoverable.
When the contract's outcome cannot be reliably estimated the following treatment should be
followed:
1 Contract costs are recognised as an expense as incurred
2 Revenue is recognised to the extent that contract costs are recoverable
This no profit/no loss approach reflects the situation near the beginning of a contract, i.e. the
outcome cannot be reliably estimated, but it is likely that costs will be recovered.
Contract costs which cannot be recovered should be recognised as an expense straight away.
HKAS 11 lists the following situations where this might occur:
 The contract is not fully enforceable, i.e. its validity is seriously in question
 The completion of the contract is subject to the outcome of pending litigation or legislation
 The contract relates to properties which will probably be expropriated or condemned
 The customer is unable to meet its obligations under the contract
 The contractor cannot complete the contract or in any other way meet its obligations under
the contract
Where these uncertainties cease to exist, contract revenue and costs should be recognised as
normal, i.e. by reference to the stage of completion.
299
Financial Reporting
2.4 Summary of the treatment of construction contracts in the

statement of profit or loss
The following flow chart will help to summarise the accounting treatment seen in sections 2.1 – 2.3
of the chapter.
Does the construction period No Recognise contract revenue
span a period end? and expenses in the period in
which the contract is
undertaken.
Yes
Can the outcome of the No Recognise contract costs as

project be estimated reliably? incurred.
Recognise revenue to the
extent that contract costs are
recoverable.
Yes
Is the project expected to No Recognise the expected loss

make a profit? immediately.
Yes
Apply the percentage

completion method: revenue,
costs and profits are
recognised according to the
stage of completion of the
contract.
300
HKAS
11.43,44
2.5 Construction contracts in the statement of financial
position
The accounting treatment of construction contracts is profit or loss driven. Any amount included in
the statement of financial position is a balancing amount, calculated as:
Contract costs incurred X
Recognised profits less recognised losses X/(X)
Progress billings (X)
Amounts due from/to customers X/(X)
 Where an amount due from customers is calculated, this is normally shown within inventories.
 Where an amount due to customers is calculated, this is normally shown as ''payments on
account'' within payables.
 Any amount invoiced but unpaid is shown as a receivable.
Example: Loss-making contract (2)

Assume that in the previous example the customer had been billed a total of $1.5million, and had
paid $1,280,000 of this.
The amounts reported in the statement of financial position would therefore be:
$'000
Amounts due from customers (W) 388
Receivables 220
(W) $'000
Contract costs incurred 1,988
Recognised profits less recognised losses (100)
Progress billings (1,500)
Amounts due from customers 388
HKAS 11.38 2.6 Changes in estimates

According to HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, the effect
of any change in the estimate of contract revenue, costs or the outcome of a contract should be
treated as a change in accounting estimate. In other words, the change is accounted for
prospectively and does not affect amounts recognised in respect of previous years of a contract.
Example: Changes in estimates

Revenues and costs relating to a three-year contract commencing 1 January 20X5 are as follows:
20X5 20X6 20X7
$'000 $'000 $'000
Revenue per contract 1,200 1,200 1,200
Agreed variation - - 200
Total contract revenue 1,200 1,200 1,400
Contract costs incurred to date 263 700 1,320
Contract costs to completion 789 600 –
Total contract costs 1,052 1,300 1,320
Overall profit 148 (100) 80
% complete, using costs basis 25% 54% 100%
301
Financial Reporting
The 20X6 contract costs incurred to date include $200,000 which relates to additional work
required for unforeseen extras. In 20X6 the contractor negotiated with the customer to recover the
cost of this additional work, but it was not until 20X7 that it became probable that the customer
would accept this contract variation.
Required
What amounts should be recognised in profit or loss in each of the three years?
Solution
$'000
20X5 25%  expected profit of $148,000 37
20X6 Loss is expected and is recognised in full (100)

Less: profit previously recognised (37)
Loss recognised in 20X6 (137)
$'000
20X7 Overall actual profit 80
Add: cumulative loss previously recognised 100
Profit recognised in 20X7 180
2.7 Section summary

A methodical approach is crucial for the valuation of long-term construction contracts and the other
disclosure requirements under HKAS 11. The following method suggests a breakdown of the
process into five logical steps, and is to be applied where the outcome of a contract can be
estimated reliably.
1 The contract value is compared to the estimated total costs (costs to date plus estimated
costs to completion) to be incurred on the contract. If a foreseeable loss on the contract is
expected (that is, if the estimated total costs exceed the contract value), then this loss must
be charged against profits. If a loss has already been charged previously, then only the
difference between this loss and the loss currently estimated needs to be charged.
2 Apply the percentage of completion to date (or other formula given in the question) to the
calculation of the sales revenue attributable to the contract for the period (for example,
percentage of completion  total contract value, less revenue already recognised in previous
periods).
3 Calculate the cost of sales on the contract for the period.
$
Total contract costs  percentage complete (or follow instructions in question) X
Less any costs charged in previous periods (X)
X
Add foreseeable losses in full (not previously charged) X
Cost of sales on contract for the period X
4 Deduct the cost of sales for the period as calculated above (including any foreseeable loss)
from the sales revenue calculated at step 2 to give profit (loss) recognised for the period.
302
5 Calculate amounts due to/from customers for inclusion in the statement

of financial position
$
Contract costs incurred to date X
Recognised profits/(losses) to date X
X
Progress billings to date (X)
Amounts due from/(to) customers X
Note. The progress billings figure above represents the total billed revenue. Unpaid billed revenue
will be shown under trade receivables.
HKAS
11.39,40,42
2.8 Disclosures
The following should be disclosed in respect of construction contracts:
 The amount of contract revenue recognised as revenue in the period
 The methods used to determine the contract revenue recognised in the period
 The methods used to determine the stage of completion of contracts in progress
In addition, the following should be disclosed for contracts in progress at the reporting date:
 The aggregate amount of costs incurred and recognised profits (less recognised losses) to date
 The amount of advances received (amounts received before the related work is performed)
 The amount of retentions (amounts billed but unpaid until defects are rectified or conditions
specified in the contract are met)
An entity should also present:
 The gross amount due from customers for contract work as an asset
 The gross amount due to customers for contract work as a liability.
Illustration
The following shows the format of the note to the accounts in respect of construction contracts.
Numbers are for illustrative purposes only:
Amounts due from (to) customers for contract work
31.12.X4 31.12.X3
$’000 $’000
Contracts in progress at the end of the reporting
period
Contract costs incurred plus recognised profits less 2,500 1,890
recognised losses
Less: progress billings (2,315) (1,670)
185 220
Analysed for reporting purposes as: 230 230

Amounts due from contract customers
Amounts due to contract customers (45) (10)
185 220
At 31 December 20X4, retentions held by customers for contract works amounted to $62,000 (31
December 20X3: $55,000). Advances received from customers for contract work amounted to
$10,000 (31 December 20X3: nil).
303
Financial Reporting
At the start of 20X1 Globalle Company negotiated a fixed price contract of $14.0 million with
Oceanic for the construction of a container port. Globalle had estimated the costs of the contract to
be $13.3 million. Globalle estimates the stage of completion on its construction contracts by
reference to the physical proportion of the work completed.
During 20X1 the contract suffered protracted delays and difficulties, such that Globalle concluded
that there would be material cost overruns. It negotiated with Oceanic to try to get some
recompense for these unexpected difficulties in the form of contract variations, but without success.
At 31 December 20X1 when the contract was 30% physically complete, the costs incurred
amounted to $4.9 million and the costs to complete were estimated at $11.2 million.
Throughout 20X2 Globalle continued to try to win recompense from Oceanic, but without success. At 31
December 20X2 when the contract was 80% physically complete, the costs incurred amounted to $12.6
million and the costs to complete were estimated at $3.5 million. On that day and after these figures had
been drafted, Oceanic suddenly agreed in principle to a contract variation of $3.5 million, provided that
Globalle agreed to pay Oceanic a penalty for late completion of $280,000. Globalle agreed to these
terms and the relevant adjustments were made to the draft figures.
Required
Determine the following amounts in respect of the container port contract in Globalle’s financial
statements according to HKAS 11 Construction Contracts.
(a) The profit or loss to be recognised in the year ended 31 December 20X1.
(b) The revenue to be recognised in the year to 31 December 20X2.
(c) The profit or loss to be recognised in the year ended 31 December 20X2.
Aero Company has the following information in respect of a construction contract:
Total contract price $100,000
Cost incurred to date $48,000
Estimated cost to completion $32,000
Progress billings
(of which $50,000 has been received) $58,000
Percentage complete (cost basis) 60%
Required
(a) Prepare relevant extracts from the statement of profit or loss and statement of financial
position.
(b) Show how the statement of financial position would differ if progress billings were $64,000
(of which $50,000 received).
The IASB issued IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers in May 2014. The new
standard replaces IAS 11 and IAS 18; HKICPA will adopt the new standard as HKFRS 15 and it will
replace HKAS 11 and HKAS 18 in due course. The new standard was initially to be effective for
accounting periods starting on or after 1 January 2017, however it is now likely that the initial
application date will be deferred.
The new standard is considered in more detail in Chapter 14.
304
Topic recap
HKAS 11 Construction Contracts
Cost plus contract: contract in Contract specifically negotiated for the Fixed price contract: contract with
which the contractor is reimbursed construction of an asset or combination of a fixed price sometimes subject to
for costs plus a percentage of costs interrelated assets cost escalation clauses
or fixed fee
HKAS 11 applies where a contract spans

the period end
For a cost plus contract: Accounting treatment depends on whether For a fixed price contract:
Probable economic benefits will the outcome of the contract can be Contract revenue can be
flow to the entity reliably estimated reliably measured
Contract costs can be clearly Probable economic benefits
identified and measured will flow to entity
Stage of completion of contract
reliably measured
Costs to complete reliably
measured
Contract costs can be clearly
identified and measured
Can be reliably measured Can't be reliably measured
Profitable contract Loss-making contract No profit or loss is recognised.

Revenue is recognised to the extent
that recognised costs incurred are
recoverable
Revenue, costs and profit are Loss is recognised in full as soon as it is

recognised based on stage of foreseen
completion
Disclose:
Revenue recognised in period
Methods to determine revenue recognised
Methods to determine stage of completion
Costs incurred plus recognised profits (less recognised losses) to date
Advances received
Retentions
Amounts due from/to customers:
Costs incurred x
Recognised profits/losses x/(x)
Progress billings (x)
x/(x)
305
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
(a) $(2,100,000)
(b) $9,576,000
(c) $2,996,000
Profit / loss on contract 20X1 20X2
$'000 $'000
Contract price 14,000 14,000
Variation – 3,500
Penalty – (280)
14,000 17,220
Costs incurred to date (4,900) (12,600)
Estimated costs to completion (11,200) (3,500)
Profit / loss on contract (2,100) 1,120
Amounts to be recognised 20X2 20X2

20X1 cumulative (cum – 20X1)
$'000 $'000 $'000
Revenue (30%  $14m / 80%  $17.22m) 4,200 13,776 9,576
Costs (β) (6,300) 6,580
Loss (in full) (2,100)

Profit (80%  $1.12m) 896 2,996
At 31 December 20X1 the expected loss must be recognised immediately.

Under the agreement made on 31 December 20X2, the contract revenue is increased by the
variation and reduced by the penalty.
The profit for the year ended 31 December 20X2 is the profit to date, PLUS the loss recognised in
20X1.
306
Answer 2
(a) STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS (EXTRACTS) $
Revenue (60%  100,000) 60,000
Expenses (60%  80,000) (48,000)
Profit 12,000
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION (EXTRACTS)

Current assets
Gross amounts due from customers
Contract costs incurred to date 48,000
Recognised profits 12,000
60,000
Less: progress billings to date (58,000)
2,000
Trade receivables
Progress billings to date 58,000

Less: cash received (50,000)
8,000
WORKING
Overall expected profitability $

Total revenue 100,000
Total expected costs (48,000 + 32,000) (80,000)
Overall expected profit 20,000
(b) STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION (EXTRACTS) $
Current assets
Trade receivables
Progress billings to date 64,000
Less: cash received (50,000)
14,000
Current liabilities
Gross amounts due to customers
Contract costs incurred to date 48,000
Recognised profits 12,000
60,000
Less: progress billings to date (64,000)
(4,000)
307
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Construction contracts 34 minutes

Newtop Construction Company Limited is a construction company and has two contracts underway
as at 30 September 2012:
Contract A Contract B
$’000 $’000
Total agreed contract sum 42,000 65,000
Estimated total costs (original budget) 36,000 63,000
Costs incurred to date 25,600 30,000
Contract sum certified and billed to date 28,000 26,000
Total billing received to date 22,800 23,500
Revenue recognised up to 30 September 2011 18,200 N/A
Costs recognised up to 30 September 2011 15,600 N/A
Management has reassessed the cost budget and considered that the original budget of contract A
is reasonable while the budgeted total costs for contract B should be revised upward by 5%.
The stage of completion is determined based on the survey of work performed by external
architects at each month end.
Required
(a) Calculate the amounts to be recognised in profit or loss in the year ended
30 September 2012. (10 marks)
(b) Show the amounts to be disclosed and presented under HKAS 11 Construction Contracts for
Contacts In Progress as at 30 September 2012. (9 marks)
(Total = 19 marks)
HKICPA June 2013
308
chapter 13
Share-based payment
Topic list
1 HKFRS 2 Share-Based Payment

1.1 Introduction
1.2 Objective and scope
1.3 Definitions
2 Recognition and measurement of share-based payments
2.1 Equity settled share-based payment transactions
2.2 Cash settled share-based payment transactions
2.3 Share-based payments with a choice of settlement
2.4 Section summary
3 Share-based payment transactions – further issues
3.1 Group cash-settled share-based payment transactions
3.2 Treasury share transactions
4 Modifications to the terms and conditions on which equity instruments were granted, including
cancellations and settlements
4.1 Measurement in modification
5 Disclosure of share-based payment transactions
5.1 Nature and extent of share-based payment arrangements
5.2 Determination of fair value
5.3 Effect on profit or loss and financial position
6 Share-based payment transactions and deferred tax
6.1 Measurement of temporary difference
Learning focus
Share-based payment is a controversial area. It is, however relevant, as share option

schemes are common.
309
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.05 Share-based payment 2
3.05.01 Identify and recognise share-based payment transactions in
3.05.02 Account for equity-settled and cash-settled share-based payment
transactions
3.05.03 Account for share-based payment transactions with cash
alternatives
3.05.04 Account for unidentified goods or services in a share-based
payment transaction
3.05.05 Account for group and treasury share transactions
3.05.06 Disclosure requirement of share option
310
13: Share-based payment | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKFRS 2 Share-Based Payment

Topic highlights
Share-based payment transactions are those transactions where an entity receives goods or
services in return for its own equity instruments or an amount of cash related to the value of its
equity instruments.
1.1 Introduction
It is increasingly common for entities to issue shares or share options to other parties, such as
suppliers or employees, in return for goods or services received. In some instances neither shares
nor share options are issued, but cash consideration is promised at a later date, measured in
relation to share price. All of these transactions are examples of share-based payments.
Share option schemes are a common feature of directors’ remuneration packages and many
organisations also use such schemes to reward other employees. Share-based payments are also
a very common form of consideration for internet businesses which are notoriously loss making in
early years and therefore cash poor.
1.1.1 The accounting problem
Prior to the issue of HKFRS 2, no accounting guidance existed in relation to share-based
payments. This resulted in inconsistent treatment of expenses: those paid in cash were recognised
in profit or loss while those involving a share-based payment were not, because share options
initially had no value (since the exercise price is generally more than the market price of the share
on the date the option is granted).
As we shall see in this chapter, the issue of HKFRS 2 meant that companies were required to
recognise an expense in relation to share-based payments. As a result those companies which
made share-based payments saw a reduction in earnings, in some cases of a significant amount.
For this reason, HKFRS 2 remains controversial in practice.
HKFRS 2.1-6 1.2 Objective and scope

HKFRS 2 requires an entity to reflect in its profit or loss and financial position the effects of
share-based payment transactions, including expenses associated with transactions in which
share options are granted to employees.
The standard must be applied to all share-based payment transactions whether or not the goods or
services received under the share-based payment transaction can be individually identified,
including:
(a) Equity-settled share-based payment transactions
(b) Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
(c) Transactions in which the entity receives or acquires goods or services and the terms of the
arrangement provide either the entity or the supplier of those goods or services with a choice
of whether the entity settles the transaction in cash (or other assets) or by issuing equity
instruments.
The standard also applies to group-settled share-based transactions. That is where one group
entity receives goods or services and another entity within the group settles the share-based
payment transaction. In this case HKFRS 2 applies to both entities.
Certain transactions are outside the scope of the HKFRS:
(a) Transactions with employees and others in their capacity as a holder of equity instruments of
the entity (for example, where an employee receives additional shares in a rights issue to all
shareholders)
311
Financial Reporting
(b) The issue of equity instruments in exchange for control of another entity in a business
combination, or business under common control or the contribution of a business on the
formation of a joint venture.
HKFRS 2,
Appendix A
1.3 Definitions
The standard provides the following definitions.
Key terms
Share-based payment transaction is a transaction in which the entity:
(a) Receives goods or services from the supplier of those goods or services (including an
employee) in a share-based payment arrangement, or
(b) Incurs an obligation to settle the transaction with the supplier in a share-based payment
arrangement when another group entity receives those goods or services.
Share-based payment arrangement is an agreement between the entity (or another group entity)
and another party (including an employee) that entitles the other party to receive:
(a) Cash or other assets of the entity for amounts that are based on the price (or value) of equity
instruments (including shares or share options) of the entity or another group entity, or
(b) Equity instruments (including shares or share options) of the entity or another group entity
provided the specified vesting conditions are met.
Equity instrument is a contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after
deducting all of its liabilities.
Equity instrument granted is the right (conditional or unconditional) to an equity instrument of the
entity conferred by the entity on another party, under a share-based payment arrangement.
Share option is a contract that gives the holder the right, but not the obligation, to subscribe to the
entity's shares at a fixed or determinable price for a specified period of time.
Fair value is the amount for which an asset could be exchanged, a liability settled, or an equity
instrument granted could be exchanged, between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm's length
transaction.
Grant date is the date at which the entity and another party (including an employee) agree to a
share-based payment arrangement, being when the entity and the other party have a shared
understanding of the terms and conditions of the arrangement. At the grant date the entity confers
on the other party (the counterparty) the right to cash, other assets, or equity instruments of the
entity, provided the specified vesting conditions, if any, are met. If that agreement is subject to an
approval process (for example, by shareholders), the grant date is the date when that approval is
obtained.
Intrinsic value is the difference between the fair value of the shares to which the counterparty has
the (conditional or unconditional) right to subscribe or which it has the right to receive, and the price
(if any) the other party is (or will be) required to pay for those shares. For example, a share option
with an exercise price of $15 on a share with a fair value of $20, has an intrinsic value of $5.
312
Key terms (cont'd)

Measurement date is the date at which the fair value of the equity instruments granted is
measured. For transactions with employees and others providing similar services, the
measurement date is grant date. For transactions with parties other than employees (and those
providing similar services), the measurement date is the date the entity obtains the goods or the
counterparty renders service.
Vest means to become an entitlement. Under a share-based payment arrangement, a
counterparty's right to receive cash, other assets, or equity instruments of the entity vests when the
counterparty’s entitlement is no longer conditional on the satisfaction of any vesting conditions.
A vesting condition is a condition that determines whether the entity receives the services that
entitle the counterparty to receive cash, other assets or equity instruments of the entity under a
share-based payment arrangement. A vesting condition is either a service condition or a
performance condition.
A service condition is a vesting condition that requires the counterparty to complete a specified
period of service during which services are provided to the entity. If the counterparty, regardless of
the reason, ceases to provide service during the vesting period, it has failed to satisfy the condition.
A service condition does not require a performance target to be met.
A performance condition is a vesting condition that requires:
(a) The counterparty to complete a specified period of service (i.e. a service condition); the
service requirement can be explicit or implicit; and
(b) Specified performance targets to be met while the counterparty is rendering the service
required in (a).
The period of achieving the performance target(s):
(a) Shall not extend beyond the end of the service period; and
(b) May start before the service period on the condition that the commencement date of the
performance target is not substantially before the commencement of the service period.
A performance target is defined by reference to:
(a) The entity's own operations (or activities) or the operations or activities of another entity in
the same group (i.e. a non-market condition); or
(b) The price (or value) of the entity's equity instruments or the equity instruments of another
entity in the same group (including shares and share options) (i.e. a market condition).
A performance target might relate either to the performance of the entity as a whole or to some part
of the entity (or part of the group), such as a division or an individual employee.
A market condition is a performance condition upon which the exercise price, vesting or
exercisability of an equity instrument depends that is related to the market price (or value) of the
entity's equity instruments (or the equity instruments of another entity in the same group) such as:
(a) Attaining a specified share price or a specified amount of intrinsic value of a share option; or
(b) Achieving a specified target that is based on the market price (or value) of the entity's equity
instruments (or the equity instruments of another entity in the same group) relative to an
index of market prices of equity instruments in other entities.
A market condition requires the counterparty to complete a specified period of service (i.e. a
service condition); the service condition can be explicit or implicit.
Vesting period is the period during which all the specified vesting conditions of a share-based
payment arrangement are to be satisfied.
313
Financial Reporting
Note that the definition of fair value within HKFRS 2 differs from that within HKFRS 13 Fair Value
Measurement. When applying HKFRS 2, the definition contained within that standard should be
used rather than HKFRS 13.
Explain whether each of the following transactions are share-based transaction within the scope of
HKFRS 2:
1. Headingley makes a rights issue of shares to all shareholders, including employees who are
shareholders.
2. Horsforth issues shares to shareholders who are also employees at a discounted price.
3. Bramhope makes a cash payment to an employee that is based on a fixed multiple of the
company’s profit before tax.
4. Adel grants shares to a number of disadvantaged individuals in order to enhance its image
as a good corporate citizen.
5. Yeadon, an unlisted entity, allows its employees to use 50% of their bonus payment to
purchase share-appreciation rights. These rights entitle the employees to a cash payment
from Yeadon related to share price. As the company is unquoted, share price is determined
as five times EBITDA divided by the number of shares.
2 Recognition and measurement of share-based

HKFRS 2.7-8
payments
The basic principle presented in HKFRS 2 with regard to recognition is that an entity should
recognise goods or services received or acquired in a share-based payment transaction when it
obtains the goods or as the services are received.
The goods or services received should be recognised as an expense, or asset where appropriate.
The corresponding accounting entry depends on whether the share-based payment will be equity
or cash-settled.
HKFRS 2.10 2.1 Equity settled share-based payment transactions

Topic highlights
Equity-settled share-based payment transactions with parties other than employees are measured
at the fair value of the goods or services received and recognised in equity, normally immediately.
Equity settled share-based payment transactions with employees are measured at the fair value of
the equity instruments on the grant date and recognised in equity over the vesting period.
Goods or services received or acquired in an equity-settled share-based payment transaction

should be recognised in equity:
DEBIT Expense / asset
CREDIT Equity
The debit entry is made to an account relevant to the goods or services acquired. For example,
where the counterparty is an employee and the share-based payment transaction is consideration
for services provided, an appropriate account is staff costs; where the counterparty is a supplier of
goods for resale, an appropriate account is purchases or inventory.
314
HKFRS 2 does not specify which account within equity the credit entry should be made to. Practice
varies depending on local regulatory requirements. In some cases it is made to retained earnings,
whilst in others the credit is put to a share-based payment reserve, share option reserve or shares-
to-be-issued reserve until such time as the award has been settled. At this time the credit balance
is transferred to share capital, other reserves or retained earnings.
Before considering when this accounting entry is made, we must consider how an equity settled
share-based payment is measured.
HKFRS 2.11- 2.1.1 Measurement of equity-settled share-based payment transactions
13
The general principle in HKFRS 2 is that an entity should measure a share-based payment
transaction at the fair value of the goods or services received.
In the case of equity-settled transactions, the application of this rule depends on who the
transaction is with:
(a) Where the transaction is with employees and forms part of their remuneration package, it is
not normally possible to measure directly the services received. Therefore the transaction is
measured by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted at the grant date
(the indirect method).
(b) Where the transaction is with parties other than employees, there is a rebuttable
presumption that the fair value of the goods or services received can be estimated reliably,
and therefore the transaction is measured at this amount (the direct method).
(c) Where this is not the case, the entity should measure the transaction’s value using the
indirect method.
Where the indirect method (by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted) is
adopted to measure a transaction, fair value is based on the market prices, if available, taking into
consideration the terms and conditions upon which those equity instruments were granted.
In the absence of market prices, the fair value of the equity instruments granted should be
approximated using a valuation technique. (These are not within the scope of this exam.)
Example: Measurement of equity-settled share-based transactions

Barbar Co. issues 100 share options to each of its 1,000 employees on 1 July 20X1.
The fair value of the share options is $8 on grant date.
Required
How is the share-based transaction measured?
Solution
Equity-settled transactions with employees are measured by reference to the fair value of the
equity instruments granted on the grant date.
Therefore 100 options  1,000 employees  $8 = $800,000
HKFRS 2.1.2 Recognition of equity-settled share-based payment transactions

2.14,15
Immediate recognition
Where the equity instruments granted vest immediately i.e. the recipient party becomes entitled to
them immediately, then the transaction is accounted for in full on the grant date. This is normally
the case with transactions with parties other than employees, which are:
 measured at the fair value of the goods or services received, and
 recognised when the goods or services are provided.
315
Financial Reporting
In some cases the equity instruments granted to employees vest immediately (ie the employee is
not required to complete a specified period of service before becoming unconditionally entitled to
the equity instruments). Here, it is presumed that the services have already been received (in the
absence of evidence to the contrary). The entity should therefore recognise the transaction in full
on the grant date, by recognising the fair value of the equity instruments granted as an expense
and a corresponding increase in equity.
Recognition over a period
Where the counterparty to the transaction has to meet specified vesting conditions before they
are entitled to the equity instruments, and these are to be met over a specified vesting period, the
expense is spread over this vesting period.
The expense recognised in each year of the vesting period should be based on the best available
estimate of the number of equity instruments expected to vest. That estimate should be revised if
subsequent information indicates that the number of equity instruments expected to vest differs
from previous estimates.
On the vesting date, the entity should revise the estimate to equal the number of equity instruments
that actually vest.
Once the goods and services received and the corresponding increase in equity have been
recognised, the entity should make no subsequent adjustment to total equity after the vesting date.
Vesting conditions are either service or performance conditions and these are discussed in the next
two sections.
HKFRS 2.19- 2.1.3 Service conditions
21
As we have seen, a service condition is a vesting condition that requires the counterparty to
complete a specified period of service. If the counterparty ceases to provide that service during the
vesting period, it has failed to satisfy the service condition and the equity instruments are forfeited.
This type of vesting condition is most usually associated with share-based transactions with
employees.
Where the equity instruments granted do not vest until the employee completes a specified period
of service, the entity should account for those services as they are rendered by the employee
during the vesting period. For example, if an employee is granted share options on condition that
he or she completes three years' service, then the services to be rendered by the employee as
consideration for the share options will be received in the future, over that three-year vesting
period. Therefore, the fair value of the equity instruments granted should be spread over the three
years, with an expense and corresponding increase in equity recognised in each year.
Example: Equity-settled share-based payment transaction – service conditions (1)

Continuing with the example above:
(a) Assume that the share options issued by Barbar Co. to its employees vest immediately and
there is a three-year period over which the employees may exercise the share options.
Employees are entitled to exercise the options regardless of whether or not they remain in
the entity’s employment during the period of exercise.
(b) Assume that the share options issued by Barbar Co. on 1 July 20X1 do not vest until 1 July
20X3, and this is conditional upon the individual employees remaining in employment with
the company. It is not anticipated that any employees will leave before this date. This
assumption is confirmed at 1 July 20X3 when all 1,000 employees remain in employment.
Required
When is the transaction recognised in each instance assuming a year end of 30 June?
316
Solution
As we saw earlier, the total fair value for the share options issued at grant date is:
$8  1,000 employees  100 options = $800,000
(a) In this situation the options vest immediately i.e. the employees are immediately entitled to
them. It is therefore assumed that Barbar has already benefited from the services provided
by the employees in exchange for the options. Barbar Co. should therefore charge $800,000
to profit or loss as employee remuneration on 1 July 20X1 and the same amount will be
recognised as part of equity on that date:
DEBIT Employee remuneration expense $800,000
CREDIT Equity – Share-based payment $800,000
reserve
(b) In the second situation, the options do not vest until two years have passed, and they only
vest for those employees who continue to work for Barbar at this date.
It is assumed that all employees will continue to work for Barbar.
Therefore in this case the $800,000 is spread over the two years ended 30 June 20X2 and
20X3 with $400,000 recognised as an expense and in equity in each year:
20X2
reserve
20X3
reserve
Therefore in the financial statements:
20X2 20X3
$ $
Remuneration expense in profit or loss 400,000 400,000
Equity – share-based payment reserve 400,000 800,000
This ensures that the expense associated with the share-based payment is matched to the
period in which Barbar benefits from the employees’ services.
We shall consider in later examples how this might differ if some employees left Barbar Co.
before the vesting date.

Whiston Co. provides each of 200 managers with 500 share options on 1 January 20X1. Each
option has a fair value of $8 at the grant date, $10 on 1 January 20X2, $13 on 1 January 20X3 and
$12 on 31 December 20X3.
The options do not vest until 31 December 20X3 and are dependent on continued employment.
All 200 managers are expected to remain with the company.
Required
Explain the accounting treatment of the share options in each of the years 20X1, 20X2 and 20X3.
317
Financial Reporting
Solution
The total expense to be recognised over the three-year vesting period is:
200  500  $8 = $800,000
Note that the changes in the value of the options after grant date do not affect the charge to profit
or loss for equity-settled transactions.
The remuneration expense should be recognised over the vesting period of three years. An amount
of $266,667 should be recognised for each of the three years 20X1, 20X2 and 20X3 in profit or loss
with a corresponding credit to equity.
It is important to remember that the expense recognised in each year of the vesting period should
be based on the best available estimate of the number of equity instruments expected to vest.
Therefore if any employees are expected to leave within the vesting period, this should be taken
into account when calculating the expense.

The circumstances are as in the example above, however managers are expected to leave the
company as follows:
 At 31 December 20X1, it is estimated that 10% of managers will have left by the end of 20X3.
 At 31 December 20X2, it is estimated that 14% of managers will have left by the end of 20X3.
 By the end of 20X3, 20% of the original managers awarded share options have actually left.
Required
Explain the accounting treatment in each of the years 20X1, 20X2 and 20X3.
Solution
The expense to be recognised in each year in relation to the share options over the vesting period
is based on the estimated number of shares expected to vest. As options held by employees who
leave the company will not vest, these must be excluded from the amount recognised. Therefore:
Total expense
20X1 200 managers  90%  500 options  $8 fair value $720,000
This is divided by the three-year vesting period to give an annual expense in 20X1 of $240,000
To date two years of expense should have been recognised i.e. $688,000  2/3 $458,667
As $240,000 was recognised in 20X1, the 20X2 expense is $458,667 – $240,000 $218,667
All expense should now have been recognised as the vesting period is complete.
Therefore in 20X3 the expense is $640,000 – $240,000 – $218,667 $181,333
Armley Co. issues 10,000 options to each of the 50 directors and senior managers on 1 July 20X1.
The exercise price of the options is $4.50 per share. The scheme participants have to stay with the
company for four more years before being able to exercise their options.
318
At 31 December 20X1, it is estimated that 75% of the current directors and senior managers will
remain with the company for four years or more. The estimated figure is 70% by 31 December
20X2.
The fair value of an option is $3 at the grant date. Armley Co maintains a shares-to-be-issued
account within equity.
Required
Identify the journal entries required to record the share-based payment transaction in each of the
years ended 31 December 20X1 and 20X2.
An entity grants 100 share options on its $1 shares to each of its 500 employees on 1 January
20X5. Each grant is conditional upon the employee working for the entity over the next three years.
The fair value of each share option as at 1 January 20X5 is $15.
On the basis of a weighted average probability, the entity estimates on 1 January that 20% of
employees will leave during the three-year period and therefore forfeit their rights to share options.
Required
Show the accounting entries which will be required over the three-year period in the event of the
following:
 20 employees leave during 20X5 and the estimate of total employee departures over the
three-year period is revised to 15% (75 employees)
 22 employees leave during 20X6 and the estimate of total employee departures over the
three-year period is revised to 12% (60 employees)
 15 employees leave during 20X7, so a total of 57 employees left and forfeited their rights to
share options. A total of 44,300 share options (443 employees  100 options) are vested at
the end of 20X7.
You may assume that the entity maintains a share-based payment reserve in equity.
2.1.4 Performance conditions

HKFRS 2.19-
21 Performance conditions are vesting conditions that require:
(a) The counterparty to complete a specified period of service , and
(b) Specified performance targets to be met while the counterparty is rendering performance.
The performance targets may be market conditions or non-market conditions:
 Market conditions are related to the market price, or value of the equity instruments of the
reporting entity or another entity in the same group
 Non-market conditions are related to the operations and activities of the whole or part of a
reporting entity or another entity in the same group e.g. the achievement of earnings targets
When calculating the number of equity instruments expected to vest, only non-market performance
conditions are taken into account; market performance conditions are not taken into account, but
are instead relevant when estimating the fair value of the instruments at the grant date.
319
Financial Reporting
On 1 January 20X5 Collingham granted 100,000 share options to its Sales Director. The terms of
the share option scheme stated that in order for the options to vest:
1. The Sales Director would be required to work for Collingham for two years.
2. The share price of Collingham must increase at 15% per annum compound over the two
year vesting period.
At the date of grant the fair value of each share option was estimated at $55 taking into account the
estimated probability that the necessary share price growth would be achieved at 15%.
For the two years to 31 December 20X6 the increase in share price was 13% per annum
compound; the Sales Director remained employed throughout.
Required
How should the transaction be recognised?
2.1.5 Non-vesting conditions

A non-vesting condition is a condition other than a service or performance condition. For example,
non-vesting conditions may include:
 A target based on a commodity index (this is not a performance condition because it is not
related to the reporting entity’s operations or its share price)
 A requirement for employees to make contributions towards a share-based payment
transaction
 A requirement for a share option plan to continue in existence
Non-vesting conditions are taken into account when estimating the fair value of the equity
HKFRS 2.21A instruments granted; they are not relevant when determining the number of equity instruments
expected to vest.
On 1 January 20X4 Pannal enters into a share-based payment transaction with 20 sales
employees that entitles each employee to 10,000 free shares at the end of a three-year period
provided that :
(a) The employee completes the three-year service period with the entity from the date of the
grant of the award, and
(b) The employee buys 1,000 shares at fair value on the date of the grant of the award and
holds them for the three year period.
(c) The employee achieves annual sales in each of the three years of $250,000 or above.
At 31 December 20X4, 1 of the 20 employees has left Pannal. All employees acquired the 1,000
shares as required at the grant date; the leaver has sold his 1,000 shares as has another
individual. This individual is expected to remain in the employment of Pannal until 31 December
20X6. At 31 December 20X4 17 of the 19 sales employees working for Pannal at the year end had
achieved the required sales target. As a result of their failure to achieve these targets, one of the
remaining two employees is expected to leave the company before 31 December 20X6.
Required
Explain how this share-based payment transaction should be accounted for by Pannal in the year
ended 31 December 20X4, making reference to each of the three conditions that must be met in
order for the employees to be awarded the shares.
320
2.1.6 Summary of treatment of vesting and non-vesting conditions

Service Relevant when adjusting
conditions number of equity
instruments expected to
vest
Non-market conditions
(relate to operations and
activities)
Performance
conditions
Market conditions Relevant when determining
fair value of equity
(relate to share price)
instruments at grant date
Non-vesting
conditions
2.1.7 Multiple vesting dates

In the share-based payment schemes seen in the above examples, there is one date on which the
share options vest. It may, however, be the case that there are a number of vesting dates within one
scheme. In this case, the options relating to each vesting date should be accounted for separately.
Example: Equity-settled share-based payment transaction – multiple vesting dates

On 1 January 20X0, Newsome Co. granted 4,000 options to each of the four directors of the
company. Half of these vest on 31 December 20X1 and half on 31 December 20X2 on the
condition that the directors continue to be employed by Newsome Co. on the relevant vesting date.
It was expected that all of the directors would continue to be employed to 31 December 20X2.
However on 31 March 20X1, one of the directors left the company. This departure did not alter
expectations with regards to the remaining directors continuing in employment. All directors in
receipt of vested options exercised these options at the first opportunity.
On 1 January 20X0, the fair value of each option was estimated to be $50.
Newsome Co maintains a share-based payment reserve.
Required
Show the accounting treatment in each of the years ended 31 December 20X0, 20X1 and 20X2.
Solution
Although the 4,000 options are within the same scheme, they have different vesting dates: 2,000
vest in 20X1 and 2,000 vest in 20X2. In effect, these are two separate types of options and need to
be considered separately.
321
Financial Reporting
Options vesting in 20X1

Y/e 31 Options expected to vest FV of Charge to
Dec option profit or loss
$ $
20X0 2,000  4 = 8,000  50 = 400,000 1yr/2yrs 200,000
20X1 2,000  3 = 6,000  50 = 300,000 300,000
(200,000)
100,000
Options vesting in 20X2
Y/e 31 Options expected to vest FV of Charge to
Dec option profit or loss
$ $
20X0 2,000  4 = 8,000  50 = 400,000  1yr/3yrs 133,333
20X1 2,000  3 = 6,000  50 = 300,000  2yrs/3yrs 200,000

(133,333)
66,667
20X2 2,000  3 = 6,000  50 = 300,000 300,000

(200,000)
100,000
The expense in relation to the share-based payment scheme is recognised by :
$ $
20X0 DEBIT Directors’ remuneration (200,000 + 133,333) 333,333
CREDIT Share-based payment reserve 333,333
20X1 DEBIT Directors’ remuneration (100,000 + 66,667) 166,667
20X2 DEBIT Directors’ remuneration 100,000
HKFRS
2.31,32
2.2 Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
Topic highlights
Cash-settled share-based payment transactions are recognised as a liability and measured at the
fair value of that liability. They are remeasured at the end of each reporting period.
The following may be included as cash-settled share-based payment transactions:

 The grant of share appreciation rights to employees: instead of the entitlement to an equity
instrument, the employees are entitled to a future cash payment which is based on the
increase in the entity's share price from a specified level over a specified period of time, or
 The grant to its employees of a right to receive a future cash payment by giving them a right
to shares that are redeemable
A liability should be recognised where goods or services are received or acquired in a cash-settled
share-based payment transaction. It is recorded by a debit to an expense or asset account and a
credit to a liability account.
DEBIT Expense/asset
CREDIT Liability
322
As before, the account to which the debit entry is made will depend upon the counterparty and the
nature of the transaction.
The credit entry is made to an appropriate liability account eg a remuneration liability account or
trade payables account.
HKFRS 2.30 2.2.1 Measurement of cash-settled share-based payment transactions
The primary principle is that the fair value of the liability is used to measure the goods or services
acquired and the liability incurred by the entity.
The fair value of the liability should be reassessed at each reporting date till its settlement and
also at the date of settlement. Any changes in fair value are recorded as profit or loss for the
period.
HKFRS 2.32 2.2.2 Recognition of cash-settled share-based payment transactions
The services received from the employees, and a liability to pay for those services should be
recognised as services are rendered. For example, if a specified period of service has to be
completed by the employees before share appreciation rights are vested, the services received and
the related liability should then be recognised over that period.
Example: Cash-settled share-based payment transaction

Arthing Co. has provided a share incentive scheme to a number of its employees on 1 January
20X1. This allows for a cash payment to be made to the individuals concerned equal to the share
price at the end of a three-year period subject to the following conditions.
1 Vesting will be after three years
2 The share price must exceed $4
3 The employee must be with the company on 31 December 20X3
Each scheme issued will result in payment, subject to the conditions outlined, equal to the value of
10 shares at the end of the three-year period if the conditions are satisfied. The payments, once
earned, are irrevocable.
The Chief Operating Officer has been issued 20 such schemes.
The share prices over the next three years were as follows:
31 December 20X1 $4.20
Required
(a) Prepare the journal entries for the transactions of the share incentives issued to the Chief
Operating Officer.
(b) Assuming that on 1 January 20X1 four other individuals were also granted equivalent rights
to the Chief Operating Officer and that on 1 January 20X2, two of those individuals left the
company, prepare the journal entries for the transactions relating to the incentive schemes.
Solution
(a) Journal entries for transactions: Chief Operating Officer
The transactions are settled in cash and hence liabilities are created.
31 December 20X1 $ $
DEBIT Remuneration expense 280
CREDIT Remuneration liability 280
It is assumed that the current share price is the best estimate of the final share price.
(calculation note: 20  10  $4.20  1/3 = $280)
323
Financial Reporting
31 December 20X2
DEBIT Remuneration liability 280
CREDIT Remuneration expense 280
Reverses entries for 20X1 as share price is less than minimum
31 December 20X3
CREDIT Cash 880
(calculation note: 20  10  $4.40  3/3 = $880)
(b) Journal entries for transactions: all individuals
31 December 20X1 $ $
DEBIT Remuneration expense 1,400
CREDIT Remuneration liability 1,400
(calculation note: 20  10  5  $4.20  1/3 = $1,400)
31 December 20X2:
DEBIT Remuneration liability 1,400
CREDIT Remuneration expense 1,400
31 December 20X3
CREDIT Cash 2,640
(calculation note: 20  10  3  $4.40  3/3 = $2,640)
2.3 Share-based payments with a choice of settlement

Topic highlights
Where there is a choice of settlement and the counterparty has that choice, both a debt and equity
component of the share-based transaction is identified and accounted for separately.
Where there is a choice of settlement and the entity has that choice, a liability must be recognised
to the extent there is an obligation to deliver cash.
Accounting for share-based transactions with a choice of settlement depends on which party has
the choice.
 Where the counterparty has a choice of settlement, the entity is deemed to have granted a
compound instrument, and a liability component and an equity component are identified.
 Where the entity has a choice of settlement, the whole transaction is treated either, as cash-
settled or as equity-settled, depending on whether the entity has an obligation to settle in
cash.
HKFRS 2.3.1 Counterparty has choice of settlement
2.35,36,38
Where the counterparty to the transaction has a choice of settlement, a compound instrument has
been granted i.e. a debt and equity component must be identified.
Where the transaction is with parties other than employees and the fair value of the goods or
services received is measured directly, the entity shall measure the equity component of the
compound financial instrument as the difference between the fair value of the goods or
324
services received and the fair value of the debt component, at the date when the goods or
services are received.
Where the transaction is with employees, the fair value of the compound instrument is estimated as
a whole. The debt and equity components must then be valued separately. Normally transactions
are structured in such a way that the fair value of each alternative settlement is the same.
The entity is required to account separately for the goods or services received or acquired in
respect of each component of the compound financial instrument. The debt component is
accounted for in the same way as a cash-settled share-based payment. The equity component is
recognised in the same way as an equity-settled share-based payment.
HKFRS 2.41- 2.3.2 Entity has choice of settlement
43
Where the entity chooses what form the settlement will take, a liability should be recognised to the
extent that there is a present obligation to deliver cash.
This is the case where, for example, the entity is prohibited from issuing shares or where it has a
stated policy, or past practice, of issuing cash rather than shares.
Where a present obligation exists, the entity should record the transaction as if it is a cash-settled
share-based payment transaction.
If no present obligation exists, the entity should treat the transaction as if it was purely an equity-
settled transaction. On settlement, if the transaction was treated as an equity-settled transaction
and cash was paid, the cash should be treated as if it was a repurchase of the equity instrument by
a deduction against equity.
Example: Choice of settlement

On 1 January 20X7 an entity grants an employee a right under which he can, if he is still employed
on 31 December 20X9, elect to receive either 10,000 shares or cash to the value, on that date, of
9,000 shares.
The market price of the entity's shares is $310 at the date of grant, $370 at the end of 20X7, $430
at the end of 20X8 and $520 at the end of 20X9, at which time the employee elects to receive the
shares. The entity estimates the fair value of the share route to be $290. Show the accounting
treatment.
Solution
This arrangement results in a compound financial instrument.
The fair value of the cash route is:
9,000  $310 = $2.79m
The fair value of the share route is:
10,000  $290 = $2.90m
The fair value of the equity component is therefore:
$110,000 ($2,900,000 less $2,790,000)
The share-based payment is recognised as follows:
Liability Equity Expense
$ $ $
20X7 1/3  9,000  $370 1,110,000 1,110,000
$110,000  1/3 36,667 36,667
20X8 2/3  9,000  $430 2,580,000 1,470,000
$110,000  1/3 36,667 36,667
20X9 9,000  $520 4,680,000 2,100,000
$110,000  1/3 36,666 36,666
325
Financial Reporting
As the employee elects to receive shares rather than cash, $4,680,000 is transferred from liabilities
to equity at the end of 20X9. The balance on equity is $4,790,000.
2.4 Section summary

Equity-settled share-based payment transactions
 Total expenses on equity settlement is expensed to statement of profit or loss:
Number of shares granted  Fair value of options on grant date
Vesting period (years)
 Corresponding entry to equity

 Expensed annually over the vesting period
 No adjustment even though fair value of option changes
Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
 Total expenses on liability settlement expensed to statement of profit or loss:
Number of shares granted  Fair value of options at each reporting date
Vesting period (years)
 Corresponding entry to liability

 Only the residual amount is expensed to statement of profit or loss
 Expensed annually over the vesting period
Choice of settlement – counterparty’s choice
 Compound instrument is split into debt and equity components
 Debt component is accounted for as a cash-settled transaction
 Equity component is accounted for as an equity-settled transaction
Choice of settlement – entity’s choice
 Account for as cash-settled if there is an obligation to deliver cash
 Account for as equity-settled otherwise
3 Share-based payment transactions – further issues

Topic highlights
An entity that receives goods or services in a share-based payment transaction must account for
those goods or services no matter which entity in the group settles the transaction, and no matter
whether the transaction is settled in shares or cash.
3.1 Group cash-settled share-based payment transactions

Amendments to HKFRS 2 Share-based Payment: Group Cash-Settled Share-Based Payment
Transactions, which are effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2010 clarify how an
individual subsidiary in a group should account for some share-based payment arrangements in its
own financial statements.
HKFRS 3.1.1 Share-based payment transactions among group entities
2.43A-D
HKFRS 2 applies when an entity enters into a share-based payment transaction regardless of
whether the transaction is to be settled by the entity itself, or by another group member on behalf of
the entity.
326
The amendments to HKFRS 2 clarify the classification of share-based payment transactions for
both the entity that receives the goods or services, and the entity that settles the share-based
payment transaction.
The entity receiving the goods or services will recognise the transaction as an equity-settled
share-based payment transaction only if:
 the awards granted are its own equity instruments
 it has no obligation to settle the transaction
In all other circumstances, the entity will measure the transaction as a cash-settled share-based payment.
Subsequent remeasurement of such equity-settled transactions will only be carried out for changes
in non-market vesting conditions.
The entity responsible for settling the transaction will recognise it as an equity-settled share-
based payment only if the transaction is settled in its own equity instruments. In all other
circumstances, the transaction will be recognised by the entity that settles the award as a cash-
settled share-based payment.
The guidance can be illustrated for the most commonly occurring scenarios as follows.
Classification
Obligation to
Entity settle share- Subsidiary's
receiving based individual Consolidated
goods and payment financial financial
services transaction How is it settled? statements statements
Subsidiary Subsidiary Equity of the subsidiary Equity Equity

Subsidiary Subsidiary Cash Cash Cash
Subsidiary Subsidiary Equity of the parent Cash Equity
Subsidiary Parent* Equity of the parent Equity Equity
Subsidiary Parent* Cash Equity Cash
*The same classification will result if the settlement obligation lies with the shareholders or another
group entity (e.g. a fellow subsidiary).
As the classification may be different at the subsidiary and parent level, the amount recognised by
the entity receiving the goods or services may differ from the amount recognised by the entity
settling the transaction and in the consolidated financial statements.
Intragroup repayment arrangements will not affect the application of the principles described above
for the classification of group-settled share-based payment transactions.
Example: group cash-settled share-based transaction
On 1 January 20X1, Principal Co. implemented a share incentive scheme for the five members of
senior management at its subsidiary Sublime Co..
Principal will make a cash payment to the senior managers on 31 December 20X2 based on the
price of Sublime’s shares at that date, provided that the managers remain in service.
Ten share appreciation rights (SARs) are granted to each senior manager on 1 January 20X1,
each with a fair value of $80. The fair value of each SAR at 31 December 20X1 is $70 and at
31 December 20X2 is $90.
All five senior managers are expected to remain in employment until the settlement date.
Required
What entries are required to record this transaction in the financial statements of Principal, Sublime
and the Group?
327
Financial Reporting
Solution
Principal
Principal is the entity responsible for settling the transaction. As the transaction will not be settled in
Principal’s own equity instruments it must be recognised as a cash-settled share-based payment
transaction.
On initial recognition of the liability based on the fair value of the SARs at the grant date, a debit is
made to the cost of investment in Sublime. Remeasurements of the liability due to subsequent
movements in the fair value of the SARs are recognised in profit or loss. The reason for this will
become apparent shortly.
$ $
20X1 DEBIT Cost of investment in Sublime 2,000
(5  10 SARs  $80)/2 years
To record the liability after one year’s service based on initial fair value of the SARs.
$2,000 – (5  10 SARs  $70)/2 years
CREDIT Remuneration expense 250
To remeasure the liability based on the period end fair value of the SARs.
$ $
20X2 DEBIT Cost of investment in Sublime
(5  10 SARs  $80) – 2,000 2,000
To record the liability after two years’ service based on initial fair value of the SARs.
$ $
(5  10 SARs  $90) – $3,750
To remeasure the liability prior to settlement based on the period end fair value of the
SARs.
CREDIT Cash 4,500
To record the settlement of the transaction.
Sublime
Sublime is the entity receiving the services of the five senior managers. It has no obligation to settle
the transaction itself and therefore it must be recognised as an equity-settled share-based payment
transaction:
$ $
20X1 DEBIT Remuneration expense 2,000
(5  10 SARs  $80)/2 years
CREDIT Equity – share-based payment reserve 2,000
To record the first year’s service expense and corresponding increase in equity.
328

(5  10 SARs  $80) – $2,000
To record the second year's service expense and corresponding increase in equity.
As the transaction is treated as equity-settled in Sublime’s financial statements, no re-

measurement takes place.
Group
The Principal Group as the receiving entity has the obligation to settle in cash and therefore in the
consolidated accounts the transaction is accounted for as cash-settled:
$ $
(5  10 SARs  $70)/2 years
To recognise the liability at the end of the first year of service based on the fair value of
the SARs at this date.
(5  10 SARs  $90) – $1,750
To remeasure the liability at the settlement date based on the fair value of the SARs at
this date.
$ $
CREDIT Cash 4,500
To record the settlement of the transaction.
It should now be apparent why the entries in Principal’s records are split between amounts related
to the initial fair value of the SARs (debited to Cost of Investment) and subsequent
remeasurements (debited/credited to profit or loss).
On consolidation the cost of investment in Principal must be cancelled against the equity and
reserves in Sublime. As HKFRS 2 requires that the movement in equity in Sublime’s accounts is
based on the $80 fair value at the grant date, and not remeasured, it follows that the movement in
the cost of investment in Principal’s accounts must be based on the same amount. Therefore, any
remeasurements must be dealt with separately through profit or loss.
3.2 Treasury share transactions

Where a company holds a number of its own shares, those shares are known as "Treasury
shares".
Guidance on treasury share transactions previously contained within HK(Int)IFRIC 11 is
incorporated into HKFRS 2 with effect from 1 January 2010.
Where an entity grants rights to its own equity instruments to employees, and then either chooses
or is required to buy those equity instruments from another party, in order to satisfy its obligations
to its employees under the share-based payment arrangement, the transaction is accounted for as
an equity-settled transaction.
329
Financial Reporting
4 Modifications to the terms and conditions on

which equity instruments were granted, including
cancellations and settlements
Topic highlights
An entity might modify the terms and conditions on which the equity instruments were granted.
For example, it might reduce the exercise price of options granted to employees (i.e. reprice the
options), which increases the fair value of those options. The requirements to account for the
effects of modifications are expressed in the context of share-based payment transactions with
employees. However, the requirements shall also be applied to share-based payment transactions
with parties other than employees that are measured by reference to the fair value of the equity
instruments granted.
HKFRS 2.27-
29
4.1 Measurement in modification
The entity shall recognise, as a minimum, the services received measured at the grant date fair
value of the equity instruments granted, unless those equity instruments do not vest because of
failure to satisfy a vesting condition (other than a market condition) that was specified at grant date.
This applies irrespective of any modifications to the terms and conditions on which the equity
instruments were granted, or a cancellation or settlement of that grant of equity instruments. In
addition, the entity shall recognise the effects of modifications that increase the total fair value of
the share-based payment arrangement or are otherwise beneficial to the employee.
If a grant of equity instruments is cancelled or settled during the vesting period (other than a grant
cancelled by forfeiture when the vesting conditions are not satisfied):
(a) Cancellation
The entity shall account for the cancellation or settlement as an acceleration of vesting, and
shall therefore recognise immediately the amount that otherwise would have been
recognised for services received over the remainder of the vesting period.
(b) Payment made
Any payment made to the employee on the cancellation or settlement of the grant shall be
accounted for as the repurchase of an equity interest, i.e. as a deduction from equity,
except to the extent that the payment exceeds the fair value of the equity instruments
granted measured at the repurchase date. Any such excess shall be recognised as an
expense. However, if the share-based payment arrangement included liability components,
the entity shall remeasure the fair value of the liability at the date of cancellation or
settlement. Any payment made to settle the liability component shall be accounted for as an
extinguishment of the liability.
(c) New equity instruments are granted
If new equity instruments are granted to the employee and, on the date when those new
equity instruments are granted, the entity identifies the new equity instruments granted as
replacement equity instruments for the cancelled equity instruments, the entity shall account
for the granting of replacement equity instruments in the same way as a modification of the
original grant of equity instruments. The incremental fair value granted is the difference
between the fair value of the replacement equity instruments and the net fair value of the
cancelled equity instruments, at the date the replacement equity instruments are granted.
The net fair value of the cancelled equity instruments is their fair value, immediately before
the cancellation, less the amount of any payment made to the employee on cancellation of
the equity instruments that is accounted for as a deduction from equity.
330
If the entity does not identify new equity instruments granted as replacement equity
instruments for the cancelled equity instruments, the entity shall account for those new
equity instruments as a new grant of equity instruments.
If an entity or counterparty can choose whether to meet a non-vesting condition, the entity
shall treat the entity’s or counterparty’s failure to meet that non-vesting condition during the
vesting period as a cancellation.
If an entity repurchases vested equity instruments, the payment made to the employee shall
be accounted for as a deduction from equity, except to the extent that the payment exceeds
the fair value of the equity instruments repurchased, measured at the repurchase date. Any
such excess shall be recognised as an expense.
Example: Cancellation
Flummery Co. granted 3,000 share options to each of its 50 managers on 1 January 20X1. The
options only vest if the managers are still employed by the entity on 31 December 20X3.
The fair value of the options was estimated at $12 on the grant date and the entity estimated that
the options would vest with 48 managers.
In 20X2 the entity decided to base all incentive schemes around the achievement of performance
targets and as a result the existing share option scheme was cancelled on 30 June 20X2 when the
fair value of the options was $28 and the market price of the entity’s shares was $45.
Compensation was paid to the 49 managers in employment at that date, at the rate of $36 per
option.
Required
How should the entity recognise the cancellation?
Solution
The original cost to the entity for the share option scheme was:
3,000 shares  48 managers  $12 = $1,728,000
This was being recognised at the rate of $576,000 in each of the three years.
At 30 June 20X2 the entity should recognise a cost based on the amount of options it had vested
on that date. The total cost is:
3,000  49 managers  $12 = $1,764,000
After deducting the amount recognised in 20X1, the 20X2 charge to profit or loss is $1,188,000.
The compensation paid is:
3,000  49  $36 = $5,292,000
Of this, the amount attributable to the fair value of the options cancelled is:
3,000  49  $28 (the fair value of the option, not of the underlying share) = $4,116,000
This is deducted from equity as a share buyback. The remaining $1,176,000 ($5,292,000 less
$4,116,000) is charged to profit or loss.
331
Financial Reporting
5 Disclosure of share-based payment transactions

HKFRS 2.44 HKFRS 2 has extensive disclosure requirements including:
(a) Information that enables users of the financial statements to understand the nature and
extent of share-based payment arrangements that existed during the period.
(b) Information that enables users of the financial statements to understand how the fair value
of the goods or services received, or the fair value of the equity instruments granted,
during the period was determined.
(c) Information that enables users of the financial statements to understand the effect of share-
based payment transactions on the entity’s profit or loss for the period and on its financial
position.
HKFRS 2.45 5.1 Nature and extent of share-based payment arrangements

Information which aids an understanding of the nature and extent of share-based payment
arrangements includes the following:
(a) A description of each type of share-based payment arrangement that existed at any time
during the period.
(b) The number and weighted average exercise priced of share options outstanding at the
beginning of the period, granted during the period, forfeited during the period, exercised
during the period, expired during the period, outstanding at the end of the period and
exercisable at the end of the period.
(c) For share options exercised during the period, the weighted average share price at the date
of exercise.
(d) For share options outstanding at the end of the period, the range of exercise prices and
weighted average remaining contractual life.
HKFRS 2.47-
49
5.2 Determination of fair value
Information which enables an understanding of how fair value is determined includes the
disclosures below:
(a) If the entity has measured directly the fair value of goods or services received during the
period, the entity shall disclose how that fair value was determined.
(b) If the entity has rebutted the presumption that goods or services from parties other than
employees can be measured reliably, it shall disclose that fact, and give an explanation of
why the presumption was rebutted.
(c) If the entity has measured the fair value of goods or services received as consideration for
equity instruments of the entity indirectly, by reference to the fair value of the equity
instruments granted:
– For share options granted during the period, the weighted average fair value of those
options at the measurement date and information on how that fair value was
measured.
– For other equity instruments granted during the period (i.e. other than share options),
the number and weighted average fair value of those equity instruments at the
measurement date, and information on how that fair value was measured.
332
HKFRS
5.3 Effect on profit or loss and financial position
2.50,51
Information which enables an understanding of the effect of share-based payment transactions on
profit or loss and financial position includes the following:
(a) The total expense recognised for the period arising from share-based payment
transactions in which the goods or services received did not qualify for recognition as
assets and hence were recognised immediately as an expense, including separate
disclosure of that portion of the total expense that arises from transactions accounted for as
equity-settled share-based payment transactions.
(b) The total carrying amount of liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions at the
end of the period and the total intrinsic value at the end of the period of liabilities for which
the counterparty’s right to cash or other assets had vested by the end of the period.
Illustration
The following illustrative disclosure is taken from the HKFRS 2 Implementation Guidance:
Share-based payments
During the year ended 31 December 20X5, the Company had four share-based payment
arrangements as described below:
Type of Senior General Executive share Senior

arrangement management employee share plan management
share option option plan share-
plan appreciation
cash plan
Date of grant 1 January 20X4 1 January 20X5 1 January 2oX5 1 July 20X5
Number granted 50,000 75,000 50,000 25,000
Contractual life 10 years 10 years N/A 10 years
Vesting 1.5 years’ service Three years’ Three years’ Three years’
conditions and achievement service service and service and
of a share price achievement of a achievement of
target, which was target growth in atarget increase
achieved earnings per in market share.
share
The estimates fair value of each share option granted in the general employee share option plan is
$23.60. This was calculated by applying a binomial option pricing model. The model inputs were
the share price at grant date of $50, exercise price of $50, expected volatility of 30%, no expected
dividends, contractual life of ten years, and a risk-free interest rate of 5%. To allow for the effects of
early exercise, it was assumed that the employees would exercise the options after vesting date
when the share price was twice the exercise price. Historical volatility was 40%, which includes the
early years of the Company’s life; the Company expects the volatility of its share price to reduce as
it matures.
The estimated fair value of each share granted in the executive plan is $50.00, which is equal to
the share price at the date of grant.
333
Financial Reporting
Further details of the two share option plans are as follows:
20X4 20X5
Number of Weighted Number of Weighted

options average options average
exercise price exercise price
Outstanding at start of 0 - 45,000 $40

year
Granted 50,000 $40 75,000 $50
Forfeited (5,000) $40 (8,000) $46
Exercised 0 - (4,000) $40
Outstanding at end of year 45,000 $40 108,000 $46
Exercisable at end of year 0 $40 38,000 $40
The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised in the period
was $52. The options outstanding at 31 December 20X5 had an exercise price of $40 or $50, and
a weighted average remaining contractual life of 8.64 years.
20X4 20X5
$ $
Expense arising from share-based payment transactions 495,000 1,105,876
Expense arising from share and share option plans 495,000 1,007,000
Closing balance of liability for cash share appreciation plan - 98,867
Expense arising from increase in fair value of liability for cash - 9,200
share appreciation plan
6 Share-based payment transactions and deferred

tax
Topic highlights
A share-based payment will result in a deductible temporary difference and so deferred tax asset.
HKAS As we have seen, an entity is required to recognise an expense in relation to share options over
12.68A-C the vesting period. The related tax deduction is not, however, received until the options are
exercised. In addition, the accounting expense is based on the fair value of the options at the grant
date, whereas the tax allowable expense is based on the share price at the exercise date.
There is therefore a deferred tax implication. This is also true of other forms of share-based
payments where the tax deduction differs from the cumulative remuneration expense.
6.1 Measurement of temporary difference

The deductible temporary difference is measured as:
Carrying amount of share-based payment expense X
Less: tax base of share-based payment expense
(estimated amount tax authorities will permit as a deduction
in future periods, based on year end information) (X)
Temporary difference (X)
Deferred tax asset at X% X
334
If the amount of the tax deduction (or estimated future tax deduction) exceeds the amount of the
related cumulative remuneration expense, this indicates that the tax deduction relates also to an
equity item.
The excess is therefore recognised directly in equity.
Example: Deferred tax implications of share-based payment
Lamar Co. has the following share option scheme at 31 December 20X1:
Fair value
of options
Director’s Options at grant Exercise Vesting
name Grant date granted date price date
$ $
N Yip 1 January 20X0 20,000 2.50 3.75 12/20X1
D Chan 1 January 20X1 90,000 2.50 5.00 12/20X3
The price of the company’s shares at 31 December 20X1 is $7 per share and at 31 December
20X0 was $7.50 per share.
The directors must be working for Lamar on the vesting date in order for the options to vest.
No directors have left the company since the issue of the share options and none are expected to
leave before December 20X3. The shares can be exercised on the first day of the month in which
they vest.
In accordance with HKFRS 2 an expense of $25,000 has been charged to profits in the year ended
31 December 20X0 in respect of the share option scheme. The cumulative expense for the two
years ended 31 December 20X1 is $110,000.
Tax allowances arise when the options are exercised and the tax allowance is based on the
option’s intrinsic value at the exercise date.
Assume a notional tax rate of 16%.
Required
What are the deferred tax implications of the share option scheme?
Solution
Year to 31 December 20X0
Deferred tax asset:
$
Fair value (20,000  $7.50  1/2) 75,000
Exercise price of option (20,000  $3.75  1/2) (37,500)
Intrinsic value (estimated tax deduction) 37,500
Tax at 16% 6,000
The cumulative remuneration expense is $25,000, which is less than the estimated tax deduction of
$37,500. Therefore:
 a deferred tax asset of $6,000 is recognised in the statement of financial position
 there is deferred tax income of $4,000 (25,000  16%)
 the excess of $2,000 goes to equity
Year to 31 December 20X1
Deferred tax asset:
$
Fair value
(20,000  $7.50) 150,000
(90,000  $7  1/3) 210,000
360,000
335
Financial Reporting
Exercise price of options

(20,000  $3.75) (75,000)
(90,000  $4.50  1/3) (135,000)
Intrinsic value (estimated tax deduction) 150,000
Tax at 16% 24,000
Less: previously recognised (6,000)
18,000
The cumulative remuneration expense is $110,000, which is less than the estimated tax deduction
of $150,000. Therefore:
 A deferred tax asset of $24,000 is recognised in the statement of financial position at
31 December 20X1
 There is potential deferred tax income of $18,000 for the year ended 31 December 20X1
 Of this, $13,600 (16% ($110,000 – $25,000)) is recognised in the statement of profit or loss
 The remainder ($4,400) is recognised in equity.
Topic highlights
The IASB issued an exposure draft in 2014 that proposes narrow scope amendments to IFRS 2
(HKFRS 2).
The IASB issued ED/2014/5 Classification and Measurement of Share-Based Payment

Transactions in November 2014. The exposure draft proposes amendments to IFRS 2 (HKFRS 2)
that clarify certain classification and measurement issues, in particular:
 Accounting for cash-settled share-based payment transactions with an attached
performance condition.
 Classifying share-based payment transactions with a net settlement feature, and
 Accounting for modifications of share-based payment transactions from cash-settled to
equity settled.
7.0.1 Cash-settled share-based payment transactions with an attached
performance condition
IFRS 2 (HKFRS 2) does not currently address the effect of vesting conditions on the fair value of a
cash-settled share-based payment. The amendments clarify that the accounting treatment should
adopt the same approach as that applied to equity-settled share-based payment transactions (see
Section 2.1.4).
7.0.2 Share-based payment transactions with a net settlement feature
In some jurisdictions, when an employee is awarded share-based payments, these are taxed and
the awarding entity is required to withhold the relevant tax amount and transfer it to the authorities.
A net settlement feature exists where the terms of the employee share-based payment
arrangement allow or require the entity to meet this obligation by deducting equity instruments that
would otherwise be issued to the employee on exercise or vesting of a share-based payment.
The amendments proposed in the exposure draft clarify that where there is a net settlement
feature, the transaction is classified as equity-settled in its entirety providing that it would have
been classified as such had the net settlement feature not existed.
336
7.0.3 Modifications of share-based payment transactions for cash-settled to

equity-settled
The proposed amendment clarifies the accounting for two situations that IFRS 2 (HKFRS 2) does
not currently address:
1. Modifications to the terms and conditions of a share-based payment transaction that result in
it changing from a cash-settled to an equity-settled transaction.
2. Transactions in which a cash-settled share-based payment is settled and replaced by a new
equity-settled share-based transaction.
The amendments propose that:
 The liability recognised in respect of the original cash-settled share-based transaction is
derecognised on modification.
 The equity-settled share-based payment transaction is measured by reference to the
modification date fair value of the equity instruments granted as a result of the modification.
 The equity-settled share-based transaction is recognised to the extent that services have
been rendered up to the modification date.
 The difference between the carrying amount of the liability derecognised and the amount
recognised in equity at the same date is recognised in profit or loss immediately.
337
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKFRS 2 Share-Based Payment
Share-based payments are transactions where an entity receives goods

or services in return for its own equity instruments or an amount of cash
related to the value of its own equity instruments.
Where one group entity receives goods or services and another group
company settles the transaction the recipient company must still apply
the provisions of HKFRS 2
Equity-settled SBP Cash-settled SBP Choice of settlement
Transaction with Transaction with other Recognise as a liability Counterparty has Entity has choice
employees party measured at fair value choice
of the liability
Measure at fair value Measure at fair value of Identify debt and equity Recognise liability
of equity instrument goods/services Remeasure liability at component and to the extent there
on grant date received each reporting date account for each is an obligation to
until settlement and at separately deliver cash
settlement date
Recognise as Recognise as an
expense/in equity asset/expense and in
over the vesting equity, normally
period immediately
Vesting conditions
Service conditions and non-market based performance conditions are taken into account when determining the number of instruments
expected to vest.
Market-based performance conditions and non-vesting conditions are not. Instead they are inputs when determining fair value of an
instrument at the grant date.
Modifications
On cancellation or settlement the amount that would have been recognised over the remainder of the vesting period is measured
immediately
If payment is made to the other party on cancellation or settlement this is accounted for as the repurchase of an equity interest (and
expense where the payment exceeds fair value of the equity instruments)/extinguishment of liability.
Disclosures:
Information about the nature and extent of share-based payment arrangements
Information to enable users to understand how fair values were determined
Information to enable users to determine the effect on profit or loss and financial position
Share-based payments and deferred tax

A share-based payment results in a deductible temporary difference and so a deferred tax asset
338
Answer 1
1 This transaction is not within the scope of HKFRS 2 because it is an arrangement with
employees in their capacity as owners of equity instruments rather than their capacity as
employees.
2 This transaction is within the scope of HKFRS 2 because the favourable terms indicate that
Horsforth is dealing with the shareholders as employees rather than in their capacity as
equity holders.
3 In this transaction the cash payment is not based on Bramhope’s share price and therefore
the transaction is not within the scope of HKFRS 2.
4 The goods or services received by Adel in this transaction are unidentifiable. Despite this,
the transaction is within the scope of HKFRS 2. The goods and services received are likely
to include an expanded customer base, customer loyalty, employee loyalty and enhanced
reputation.
5 This is not a share-based payment transaction within the scope of HKFRS 2 because a fixed
multiple of EBITDA is unlikely to reflect the fair value of the entity’s share price.
Answer 2
The remuneration expense in respect of the options for the year ended 31 December 20X1 is
calculated as follows:
Fair value of options expected to vest at grant date:
(75%  50 employees)  10,000 options  $3 =$1,125,000
Annual charge to profit or loss therefore $1,125,000 / 4 years = $281,250
Charge to profit or loss for y/e 31 December 20X1 = $281,250  6/12 months = $140,625
The accounting entry for the year ending 31 December 20X1 is:
$ $
CREDIT Equity – shares-to-be-issued 140,625
In 20X2 the remuneration charge is for the whole year, and is calculated as:
(70%  50 employees)  10,000 options  $3 = $1,050,000
Charge to date is $1,050,000  1.5/4 years = $393,750
Therefore charge for the year is $393,750 – $140,625 = $253,125
The accounting entry is:

CREDIT Equity – shares- to-be-issued 253,125
Answer 3
20X5 $
Share-based payment reserve c/f and P/L expense ((500 – 75)  100  212,500
$15  1/3)
$ $
DEBIT Staff costs 212,500
339
Financial Reporting
20X6 $
Share-based payment reserve b/f 212,500
Profit or loss expense 227,500
Share-based payment reserve c/f ((500 – 60)  100  $15  2/3) = 440,000
$ $
20X7 $
Share-based payment reserve b/f 440,000
Profit or loss expense 224,500
Share-based payment reserve c/f (443  100  $15) = 664,500
$ $
Answer 4
The Sales Director satisfied the service requirement but the share price growth condition was not
met.
The share price growth is a market performance condition and is taken into account in estimating
the fair value of the options at grant date. No adjustment is made on the basis of performance
against the market condition.
The expense recognised as a staff cost in profit or loss in each of the two years is ½  100,000 
$55 = $2.75m. This is recognised each year by:
DEBIT Staff costs $2,750,000
CREDIT Equity – shares to be $2,750,000
issued
At 31 December 20X6, the shares do not vest, because the performance condition is not met. The
recognised expenses are not, however written back; the equity balance may be transferred to
another reserve such as retained earnings.
Answer 5
The transaction is due to be settled in equity instruments and therefore this is an equity-settled
share-based payment transaction accounted for in accordance with HKFRS 2.
Such a transaction is recognised over the vesting period (here three years) as an expense (here a
staff costs expense) with a corresponding credit to an equity account, often a share-based payment
reserve.
This type of transaction is measured at the fair value of the equity instruments on the grant date ie
1 January 20X4. The amount recognised in profit or loss and equity is dependent upon the number
of instruments expected to vest at 31 December 20X6. This in turn is dependent upon the attached
conditions.
HKFRS 2 refers to three types of conditions: service vesting conditions, performance vesting
conditions and non-vesting conditions. Performance conditions are further classified into market or
non-market conditions.
340
A service vesting condition is a requirement for a counterparty to complete a specified period of

service; in this case the requirement for employees to work for Pannal throughout the three year
period is a service vesting condition.
A performance vesting condition is a condition that requires the counterparty to complete a
specified period of service (here the 3 years of continued employment) and also requires specific
performance targets to be met. The performance targets may be market based (ie related to the
share price of the entity) or non-market based (ie related to operations). Performance conditions
may relate to the performance of the entity as a whole, part of the entity or an individual.
In this case the requirement for each employee to achieve an annual sales target is a non-market
performance vesting condition.
A non-vesting condition is a condition that is neither a service or a performance condition. In this
case the requirement for each employee to buy and hold 1,000 shares is a non-vesting condition.
HKFRS 2 requires that:
 Service conditions and non-market performance conditions are taken into account when
determining the number of equity instruments expected to vest.
 Market performance conditions and non-vesting conditions are not taken into account when
determining the number of equity instruments expected to vest, but instead are inputs when
determining the fair value of the equity instruments at the grant date.
Here 18 employees are expected to meet the service condition, being the twenty employees that
joined the scheme less the one that has already left less the one that is expected to leave as a
result of failing to achieve the sales target. Seventeen employees are expected to meet the non-
market performance target being the twenty employees that joined the scheme less the one that
has already left less the one that is expected to leave less a further employee.
Therefore the total amount recognised as a staff costs expense and credit to equity is calculated as
10,000 shares x 17 employees x fair value of an equity instrument at the grant date. The amount
recognised in the year ended 31 December 20X3 is a third of this total.
341
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Nextap Company Limited 18 minutes

Nextap Company Limited (NCL) granted each of its 240 managerial staff 20,000 share options on 1
July 20X1. Each option entitles the holder to subscribe to one share of NCL at HK$7.5. 8,000
share options (Type A) were immediately vested. The remaining 12,000 share options (Type B) do
not vest until 30 June 20X3 and are conditional upon the continued employment of the staff on that
day. The market price of NCL's shares at 1 July 20X1 was HK$8. NCL estimated that the fair
value of the Type B share option is HK$1.5 and 15% of the managerial staff will leave during the
two-year period and therefore forfeit their rights to the share options. During the financial year
ended 30 June 20X2, 22 managerial staff had left the company and 10 exercised the Type A option
to subscribe to the shares on 30 April 20X2. NCL has not revised its estimate of the total
managerial staff departures over the two-year period.
Required
(a) Prepare the journal entries for the share options issued by NCL during the year ended 30
June 20X2. (7 marks)
(b) Explain how the estimate of the total number of managerial staff departures will affect the
accounting for the share-based payment. (3 marks)
(Total = 10 marks)
342
chapter 14
Revenue
Topic list
1 Revenue recognition
1.1 Accrual accounting
1.2 Recognition at point of sale
1.3 Recognition at other times
2 HKAS 18 Revenue
2.1 Scope
2.2 Definitions
2.3 Measurement of revenue
2.4 Identification of the transaction
2.5 Recognition: sale of goods
2.6 Recognition: rendering of services
2.7 Recognition: interest, royalties and dividends
2.8 Determining whether an entity is an agent or principal
2.9 Revenue recognition: examples
2.10 Disclosure
3 Interpretations relating to revenue recognition
3.1 HK(IFRIC) Int-12 Service Concession Arrangements
3.2 HK(IFRIC) Int-13 Customer Loyalty Programmes
3.3 HK(IFRIC) Int-15 Agreements for the Construction of Real Estate
4.1 IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers
4.2 Five step approach
4.3 Modification to contracts
4.4 Contract costs
4.5 Presentation of contracts with customers
4.6 Disclosure
4.7 Application
4.8 Effect of HKFRS 15
Learning focus
Revenue is an important part of any commercial organisation’s financial statements. You

should therefore be able to explain the recognition and measurement criteria of HKAS 18 and
apply them in practice.
343
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.02 Revenue 3
3.02.01 Define revenue and identify revenue within the scope of HKAS 18
3.02.02 Measure revenue at the fair value of consideration received
3.02.03 Identify revenue transaction including multiple element
arrangements
3.02.04 Determine the recognition criteria for specified types of revenue
items including sales of goods, rendering of services and interest,
royalties and dividends
3.02.05 Disclose revenue as appropriate in the financial statements
3.02.06 Explain the recognition and measurement principles
3.02.07 Disclose revenue from contracts with customers as appropriate in
the financial statements
344
14: Revenue | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 Revenue recognition
Topic highlights
Revenue recognition is straightforward in most business transactions, but can be complicated in
some situations.
1.1 Accrual accounting

HKAS 1.28 Accrual accounting is the fundamental concept which underpins the financial statements. This
requires an entity to recognise income and expenses (the elements of financial statements) when
they satisfy the definitions and recognition criteria of the Conceptual Framework, even if cash
receipts and payments occur in a different period.
As a result, the point at which revenue is recognised is usually the same point at which any related
costs are recognised. A simple example involves buying goods for resale: the cost of the
purchases is carried as an asset in the statement of financial position until such time as they are
sold; they are then recognised as an expense in the trading account.
The decision has a direct impact on profit since under the prudence concept it would be
unacceptable to recognise the profit on sale until a sale had taken place in accordance with the
criteria of revenue recognition.
1.2 Recognition at point of sale

In most circumstances where goods are being sold, revenue is recognised as earned at the point
of sale, because at that point four criteria will generally have been met:
1 The product or service has been provided to the buyer.
2 The buyer has recognised his liability to pay for the goods or services provided. The
converse of this is that the seller has recognised that ownership of goods has passed from
himself to the buyer.
3 The buyer has indicated his willingness to hand over cash or other assets in settlement of
his liability.
4 The monetary value of the goods or services has been established.
Therefore, as you will be aware, the normal moment at which revenue should be recognised in the
statement of profit or loss is when the goods are sold.
Before the point of sale, there is not normally firm evidence that the above criteria will be met, in
particular:
 Until the production process is complete, there is a risk that a flaw or error in the process will
result in goods being written off.
 Even when the product is complete there is no guarantee that a buyer will be found.
If revenue is recognised after the point of sale, for example when cash is received, costs may
already have been charged and so will not necessarily be matched to revenue in the same period.
Furthermore, revenue recognition would then depend on fortuitous circumstances, such as the
cash flow of a company's customers, and might fluctuate misleadingly from one period to another.
1.3 Recognition at other times

There are times when revenue is recognised at other times than at the completion of a sale,
for example in the recognition of profit on long-term construction contracts. Under HKAS 11
Construction Contracts contract revenue and contract costs associated with the construction
contract should be recognised as revenue and expenses respectively by reference to the stage of
345
Financial Reporting
completion of the contract activity at the year end, once the outcome on the contract can be
estimated reliably.
(a) Owing to the length of time taken to complete such contracts, to defer taking profit into
account until completion may result in the statement of profit or loss reflecting, not so much a
fair presentation of the activity of the company during the year, but rather the results relating
to contracts which have been completed by the year end.
(b) Revenue in this case is recognised when production on, say, a section of the total contract is
complete, even though no sale can be made until the whole is complete.
2 HKAS 18 Revenue
Topic highlights
HKAS 18 Revenue is concerned with the recognition of revenues arising from fairly common
transactions.
 The sale of goods
 The rendering of services
 The use by others of entity assets yielding interest, royalties and dividends
Income, as defined by the HKICPA's Framework document, includes both revenues and gains.
Revenue is income arising in the ordinary course of an entity's activities and it may be called
different names, such as sales, fees, interest, dividends or royalties.
HKAS 18 governs the recognition of revenue in specific (common) types of transaction, being:
 The sale of goods
 The rendering of services
 Interest income
 Royalty income
 Dividend income
The standard also includes an appendix which provides examples of the measurement and
recognition rules in particular circumstances.
HKAS 18.1-6 2.1 Scope

HKAS 18 covers the revenue from specific types of transaction or events:
 Sale of goods (manufactured products and items purchased for resale)
 Rendering of services
 Use by others of entity assets yielding interest, royalties and dividends
Interest, royalties and dividends are included as income because they arise from the use of an
entity's assets by other parties.
Various types of revenue arising from leases, changes in value of financial instruments or other
current assets, insurance contracts, natural increases in agricultural assets and mineral ore
extraction, are covered by other standards and are therefore specifically excluded from this
standard. Reference can be made to the other specific standards for the accounting treatment of
these types of revenue.
346
HKAS 18.7,8 2.2 Definitions

The following definitions are given in the standard.
Key terms
Revenue is the gross inflow of economic benefits during the period arising in the course of the
ordinary activities of an entity when those inflows result in increases in equity, other than increases
relating to contributions from equity participants.
orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (HKAS 18)
Revenue does not include items which do not represent a flow of economic benefit into the entity,
e.g. sales taxes, value added taxes or goods and service taxes which are only collected for third
parties. The same should apply to revenues collected by an agent on behalf of a principal.
Revenue for the agent is only the commission earned from the principal for acting as an agent.
HKAS 2.3 Measurement of revenue

18.9,10
Topic highlights
Revenue is measured at the fair value of consideration received or receivable.
Revenue shall be measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable,
taking into account the amount of any trade discounts and volume rebates allowed by the
entity.
This is usually decided by agreement between the buyer and seller.
HKAS 18.11 2.3.1 Deferred consideration
When consideration is deferred beyond normal credit terms, the fair value of the amount receivable
may be less than the nominal amount of cash receivable.
In this case, the arrangement effectively constitutes a sales transaction with a financing
arrangement and results in both revenue (sales) income and interest income. The fair value of
sales consideration is determined by discounting all amounts receivable using an imputed rate of
interest. This is the more clearly determinable of either:
 The prevailing rate for a similar instrument of an issuer with a similar credit rating; or
 A rate of interest that discounts the nominal amount of the instrument to the current cash
sales price of the goods or services.
The difference between the fair value and nominal amount of consideration is recognised as
interest income.
Example: Sofa Co.

Sofa Co. manufactures and sells furniture. It provides all customers with two years' "interest free
credit". On 31 March 20X9, the last day of the accounting year, Sofa Co. made sales of $790,000,
with all customers taking advantage of the interest free credit option.
Sofa Co. has an imputed rate of interest of 6%.
What amounts are recorded in the financial statements of Sofa Co. in respect of the above sale in
the years ended 31 March 20X9, 20Y0 and 20Y1?
347
Financial Reporting
Solution
Sofa Co. must discount the $790,000 before recording revenue in respect of the sales:
2
$790,000  1/1.06 = $703,097
This discounted amount, which represents the fair value of consideration, is recognised as revenue
in the year ended 31 March 20X9 and as a receivable:
$ $
DEBIT Receivable 703,097
CREDIT Revenue 703,097
In the year ended 31 March 20Y0, the discount is unwound and the receivable increased by
$42,186 (6%  $703,097) to $745,283. This amount is also recognised as interest income:

CREDIT Interest income 42,186
In the year ended 31 March 20Y1, the discount is again unwound by $44,717 (6%  $745,283):

The receivable is now recorded at $790,000, and therefore when cash payment is received, it is
recorded by:
DEBIT Cash 790,000

CREDIT Receivable 790,000
HKAS 18.12 2.3.2 Exchanges of goods and services

Where goods and services are exchanged for other goods and services of a similar nature and
value, the transaction is not considered to generate revenue.
Where goods and services are exchanged for dissimilar goods or services, the transaction is
regarded as generating revenue, and the revenue is measured at the fair value of the goods or
services received (less any cash or cash equivalents paid).
Where the fair value of the goods or services received cannot be reliably measured, revenue is
measured at the fair value of goods or services given up (less any cash and cash equivalents
transferred).
HKAS 18.13 2.4 Identification of the transaction

Each transaction will usually be recognised in the financial statements as a whole. However, it may
be necessary to break a complicated transaction into its component parts. For example, a sale may
include both a transfer of goods and the provision of future services. The revenue from the latter
should be deferred and recognised as income over the period in which the service is performed.
Example: Component parts of transaction

On 1 March 20X4 Mainframe Co. contracted to deliver a customer a computer system on that date
and provide support and maintenance services for the following three years. The price of the
contract to provide both the computer system and support and maintenance services is $800,000.
The cost of providing support and maintenance services is $50,000 per annum and Mainframe
charges a standard 50% mark-up
What revenue is recognised in the financial statements of Mainframe in the year ended
31 December 20X4?
348
Solution
The revenue must be broken down into that relating to the provision of the computer system and
that relating to the three years of support and maintenance.
Example 11 of the Illustrative Examples issued alongside HKAS 18 states that the amount of
revenue allocated to an after-sales service such as that provided by Mainframe Co is the amount
that will cover the expected costs of the services under the agreement together with a reasonable
profit on those services.
The revenue relating to the support and maintenance is calculated based on the profit mark-up of
50%:
3 years  $50,000  150% = $225,000
Therefore, the revenue relating to the supply of the system is the balance of $800,000 – $225,000
= $575,000.
Revenue recognised in the year ended 31 December 20X4 is $637,500 ($575,000 + 10/36 
$225,000).
Other than example 11 of the Illustrative Examples, which relates specifically to selling a product
with subsequent services (on which the above example is based) there is no further guidance in
HKAS 18 with regard to the ‘unbundling’ of sales contracts and how revenue should be allocated to
each element of a transaction. In practice revenue relating to a contract containing multiple
components could be allocated in a number of ways. This is considered to be a shortfall of HKAS
18 and is addressed in the upcoming HKFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers (see
Section 4).
2.4.1 Considering separate transactions together
Conversely, seemingly separate transactions must be considered together if their commercial
substance is not apparent when considered apart.. An example would be to sell an asset and at the
same time enter into an agreement to buy it back at a later date. The second transaction negates
the substance of the first and so both must be considered together. This sale and repurchase
situation is considered in more detail in section 2.9.3 of this chapter.
HKAS 18.14 2.5 Recognition: sale of goods

Topic highlights
Generally revenue is recognised on the sale of goods when the entity has transferred to the buyer
the significant risks and rewards of ownership and when the revenue can be measured
reliably.
All of the following five conditions have to be fulfilled before revenue from the sale of goods can be
recognised:
(a) The entity has transferred to the buyer the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the goods
(b) The entity retains neither continuing managerial involvement to the degree usually
associated with ownership, nor effective control over the goods sold
(c) The amount of revenue can be measured reliably
(d) It is probable that the economic benefits associated with the transaction will flow to the entity
(e) The costs incurred or to be incurred in respect of the transaction can be measured reliably
349
Financial Reporting
HKAS 18.15- 2.5.1 Transfer of risks and rewards

17
The transfer of risks and rewards can only be decided by examining each transaction. Usually, the
transfer occurs at the same time as either the transfer of legal title, or the passing of
possession to the buyer. This is what happens when you buy something in a shop – both title and
possession pass from the seller to the purchaser when the purchaser buys the goods and leaves
the shop with them.
If significant risks and rewards remain with the seller, then the transaction is not a sale and
revenue cannot be recognised yet, for example if the receipt of the revenue from a particular sale
depends on the seller completing the specialist installation of an item.
It is possible for the seller to retain only an "insignificant" risk of ownership and for the sale and
revenue to be recognised. The main example here is where the seller retains title only to ensure
collection of what is owed on the goods. This is a common commercial situation, and when it arises
the revenue should be recognised on the date on which the goods are delivered to the customer.
HKAS 2.5.2 Probable economic benefits

18.18,19
Revenue can only be recognised once the inflow of economic benefits to the seller is probable,
thus the probability of the entity receiving the revenue arising from a transaction must be assessed.
It may only become probable that the economic benefits will be received when an uncertainty is
removed, for example when a foreign government permits funds to be remitted from a customer to
a seller in another country. Only when the uncertainty is removed should the revenue be
recognised.
This is in contrast with the situation where revenue has already been recognised but where the
collectability of the cash is now brought into doubt. Where recovery has ceased to be probable,
the amount should be recognised as an expense, not an adjustment of the revenue previously
recognised. These points also refer to services and interest, royalties and dividends in Section 2.7
below.
Revenue and expenses relating to the same transaction should be recognised at the same time (an
application of the matching concept). It is usually possible to estimate such expenses reliably at
the date of sale (e.g. warranty costs, shipment costs, etc.). Where they cannot be estimated
reliably, then revenue cannot be recognised; any consideration which has already been received is
treated as a liability.
2.6 Recognition: rendering of services

When the outcome of a transaction involving the rendering of services can be estimated reliably,
the associated revenue should be recognised by reference to the stage of completion of the
transaction at the reporting date.
HKAS 2.6.1 Estimated reliably
18.20,23
The outcome of a transaction can be estimated reliably when all of the following conditions are
satisfied:
(a) The amount of revenue can be measured reliably.
(b) It is probable that the economic benefits associated with the transaction will flow to the entity.
(c) The stage of completion of the transaction at the reporting date can be measured reliably.
(d) The costs incurred for the transaction and the costs to complete the transaction can be
measured reliably.
The parties to the transaction will normally have to agree the following before an entity can make
reliable estimates.
(a) Each party's enforceable rights regarding the service to be provided and received by the
parties
(b) The consideration to be exchanged
(c) The manner and terms of settlement
350
HKAS 2.6.2 Timing of service provision

18.24,25
Some services are provided at a single point in time eg a haircut, whereas others are provided over
a period of time eg a cleaning contract.
Where a service is provided at a single point in time, revenue is recognised when the service is
rendered, providing that the other recognition criteria are met.
Where a service is provided over an extended period of time, revenue is recognised by reference
to the stage of completion. There are various possible methods of determining the stage of
completion of a transaction, including:
 Surveys of work performed
 Services performed to date as a percentage of total services to be performed
 Costs incurred to date as a percentage of total estimated costs
For practical purposes, when services are performed by an indeterminate number of acts over a
period of time, revenue should be recognised on a straight line basis over the period, unless
there is evidence for the use of a more appropriate method. If one act is of more significance than
the others, then the significant act should be carried out before revenue is recognised.
HKAS 18.26- 2.6.3 Outcome cannot be estimated reliably

28
In uncertain situations, when the outcome of the transaction involving the rendering of services
cannot be estimated reliably, the standard requires that revenue is recognised only to the extent
of the expenses recognised that are recoverable.
This is particularly likely during the early stages of a transaction, but it is still probable that the
entity will recover the costs incurred. So the revenue recognised in such a period will be equal to
the expenses incurred, with no profit.
If the costs are not likely to be reimbursed, then they must be recognised as an expense
immediately. When the uncertainties cease to exist, revenue should be recognised as laid out in
the first paragraph of Section 2.6.1.
Property Solutions contracts to provide property repairs to customers over a given period, normally
24 months. During that time a fixed fee is paid by the customer and the company then attends
customer premises as required to attend to repairs. Sometimes it attends 4 times a year,
sometimes 10 and sometimes never, depending on variables outside the control of Property
Solutions, such as the weather. The company sets a fixed fee for existing customers based on the
level of callouts in the previous period. The accountant is currently recording an arbitrary amount of
the fixed fee on a given contract whenever there is a call out and then making adjustment for any
under or over provision at the end of the contract period.
Required
Advise how revenue in respect of repair contracts should be recognised by Property Solutions.
HKAS 18.29 2.7 Recognition: interest, royalties and dividends

Revenue arising from the use by others of the entity's assets yielding interest, royalties and
dividends is recognised when:
(a) It is probable that the economic benefits associated with the transaction will flow to the entity,
and
(b) The amount of the revenue can be measured reliably.
351
Financial Reporting
Once again, the points made above about probability and reliable measurement of
consideration on the sale of goods also apply here.
HKAS 2.7.1 Interest
18.30,32
Interest is recognised on a time proportion basis that takes into account the effective yield on the
asset.
The effective yield is the rate of interest required to discount the stream of future cash receipts
expected over the life of the asset to equate to the initial carrying amount of the asset.
When unpaid interest has accrued before an interest-bearing investment is acquired, the
subsequent interest received is allocated between pre and post acquisition periods. Only that
amount allocated to the post acquisition period is recognised as revenue.
HKAS 2.7.2 Royalties
18.30,33,
Illustrative Royalties are recognised on an accrual basis in accordance with the substance of the relevant
Guidance 20
agreement.
Royalties are usually recognised on the same basis that they accrue under the relevant
agreement. Practically this is often on a straight line basis over the life of the agreement.
Sometimes the true substance of the agreement may require some other systematic and rational
method of recognition.
Where rights are assigned for a fixed amount, the licensee is permitted to exploit those rights freely
and the licensor has no remaining obligations to perform, then the assignment is in effect a sale
and revenue should be recognised immediately. An example of this situation is a licensing
agreement to use software which is immediately downloaded by the purchaser.
In some cases the receipt of a royalty is contingent on a future event. Here revenue is recognised
only when it is probable that the royalty will be received. This is normally when the event has
occurred.
2.7.3 Dividends
Dividends are recognised when the shareholder's right to receive payment is established.
HKAS 18,
Illustrative
Guidance 21
2.8 Determining whether an entity is an agent or principal
An entity is acting as a principal when it has exposure to the significant risks and rewards
associated with the sale of goods or the rendering of services. Features that indicate that an entity
is acting as a principal include:
(a) The entity has the primary responsibility for providing the goods or services to the customer
or for fulfilling the order, for example by being responsible for the acceptability of the
products or services ordered or purchased by the customer;
(b) The entity has inventory risk before or after the customer order, during shipping or on return;
(c) The entity has latitude in establishing prices, either directly or indirectly, for example by
providing additional goods or services; and
(d) The entity bears the customer’s credit risk for the amount receivable from the customer.
An entity is acting as an agent when it does not have exposure to the significant risks and rewards
associated with the sale of goods or the rendering of services.
One feature indicating that an entity is acting as an agent is that the amount the entity earns is
predetermined, being either a fixed fee per transaction or a stated percentage of the amount billed
to the customer.
2.8.1 Measurement of revenue
The amount received by an agent from the customer is a gross amount ie it includes amounts
collected on behalf of the principal.
352
The amounts collected on behalf of the principal do not result in increases in equity for the agent
and consequently they are not recognised as revenue. Instead, for an agent, revenue is the
amount of commission that it is paid by the principal.
For the principal in a transaction, revenue is measured at the gross amount received by the agent
from the customer; the commission paid to the agent is recognised as a cost of sales.
Example: Principal and agent

Nile Trading Co operates a website on which customers can buy goods from a large number of
suppliers. The suppliers set prices shown on the website and, when advised of a sale by Nile
Trading Co, deliver goods purchased directly to customers. Customers pay when they order goods
and Nile Trading Co’s website processes these payments. Nile Trading received 6% of the sales
price as commission.
Required
Explain what revenue Nile Trading Co should recognise in respect of sales on its website.
Solution
Nile Trading Co is an agent acting on behalf of the numerous suppliers that sell goods on its
website. This is evidenced by the fact that it does not have exposure to the risks and rewards of a
sale and it is paid a stated percentage of the selling price.
Therefore Nile Trading Co should recognise 6% of the selling price as its commission when it has
met its obligation to provide services as agent. This is likely to be when it has advised suppliers of
a sale and processed payment.
Example: Principal and agent 2

Print Press Co is a book publisher. It sells books to Bookworm Stores Co, a bookseller, for onward
sale to individual customers. Print Press Co charges Bookworm Stores Co $24 per book, which is
80% of the recommended retail price. Bookworm Stores Co sells the books at their recommended
retail price.
Requirement
(a) Identify the amount of revenue to be recognised by each company if features of the
arrangement indicate that Bookworm Stores Co is acting as an agent for Print Press Co.
(b) Identify the amount of revenue to be recognised by Print Press Co if features of the
arrangement indicate that it is a principal selling directly to Bookworm Stores Co.
Solution
(a) If Print Press Co is a principal using Bookworm Stores Co as its agent then:
 Print Press Co will recognise revenue of $30 (100/80% x $24) per book and cost of
sales of $6 ($30 - $24), and
 Bookworm Stores Co will recognise revenue of $6 per book.
(b) If Print Press Co is selling directly to Bookworm Stored Co, it will recognise net revenue of
$24.
HKAS 2.9 Revenue recognition: examples

18,Illustrative
examples The appendix to HKAS 18 provides a number of examples of the application of the recognition
criteria. These examples assume that the amount of revenue can be measured reliably, it is
probable that economic benefits will flow to the entity and costs can be measured reliably.
353
Financial Reporting
The following transactions are common in practice.

2.9.1 Consignment sales
Consignment sales are transactions whereby one entity (the seller) sells goods to another (the
buyer) and that entity undertakes to sell the goods to a third party customer on behalf of the seller.
The goods which are transferred are often referred to as consignment inventory. The seller
normally retains legal title to the goods until such time as they are sold on to a third party.
This form of arrangement is common in the motor trade whereby a manufacturer sells cars to a
dealer who sells them on to the ultimate customer. Often where an onward sale is not achieved,
the dealer can return the cars to the manufacturer.
In this situation, the risks and rewards are not deemed to have passed from the seller (the
manufacturer) to the buyer (the dealer) until such time as an onward sale is made. Therefore, the
manufacturer does not record a sale until a car is sold to a third party. In the meantime, although
the cars are in the dealer’s showroom, they remain the inventory of the manufacturer.
2.9.2 Bill and hold sales
Bill and hold sales refer to those sales where the buyer requests that delivery of goods purchased
is delayed, however in the meantime accepts legal title and billing.
In these circumstances, revenue is recognised when the buyer takes title, provided that:
(a) it is probable that delivery will be made
(b) the goods are available for delivery
(c) the buyer acknowledges the delayed delivery
(d) normal payment terms apply
2.9.3 Sale and repurchase agreements
A sale and repurchase agreement refers to a transaction where one party sells an asset to another,
but the terms of the sale provide for the asset to be repurchased by the seller at a later date under
certain conditions, for example:
 The seller may be obliged to repurchase the asset (under a forward contract)
 The seller may choose to repurchase the asset (under a call option)
 The buyer may choose to require the seller to repurchase the asset (under a put option)
The accounting treatment applied must reflect the substance of the transaction, and therefore
revenue is only recognised where the seller has transferred the risks and rewards of ownership to
the buyer. Where the seller has retained the risks and rewards of ownership, the transaction is a
finance arrangement and does not result in revenue.
This form of arrangement is common amongst whisky distillers, who sell their stocks to banks while
they mature. When the whisky has matured, it is re-purchased by the distillery. The whisky is not, in
the meantime physically transferred to bank premises, but remains on site at the distillery. In this
case, the substance of the transaction is obviously a secured loan: the bank is effectively lending
money to the distillery secured on the whisky.
Example
Hong Kong Drinks Co (HKDC) sells maturing stock to Asia Bank on 1 January 20X3 for $8 million
when the market value of the stock was $14 million. HKDC holds a call option to repurchase the
inventory on 1 January 20X8 for $12 million when the market value of the stock is expected to be
$16 million. The stock will remain at HKDC premises throughout the 5 year period. HKDC’s credit
rating means that it would pay 8.447% per annum on borrowings.
Required
Illustrate how the sale and repurchase transaction is accounted for
354
Solution
HKDC retains the risks and rewards of ownership of the stock and retains managerial involvement
through the stock being retained at its premises. In addition the call option is structured so that the
market value of the stock significantly exceeds the repurchase price, so making the repurchase
economically compelling.
Therefore the sales proceeds are recognised as a loan with an annual finance cost of 8.447% by:
CREDIT Secured loan $8,000,000
The loan is wound up by:
B/f Finance cost C/f
$ $ $
20X3 8,000,000 675,760 8,675,760
20X4 8,675,760 732,841 9,40,8601
20X5 9,408,601 794,745 10,203,346
20X6 10,203,346 861,877 11,065,223
20X7 11,065,223 934,777* 12,000,000
*rounding difference
The finance cost is recognised each year by (using 20X3 figures):
DEBIT Finance cost $675,760
CREDIT Secured loan $675,760
When the stock is repurchased, this is recorded by:
DEBIT Secured loan $12,000,000
HKAS
18.35,36
2.10 Disclosure
The following items should be disclosed.
(a) The accounting policies adopted for the recognition of revenue, including the methods
used to determine the stage of completion of transactions involving the rendering of services.
(b) The amount of each significant category of revenue recognised during the period
including revenue arising from:
(i) the sale of goods
(ii) the rendering of services
(iii) interest
(iv) royalties
(v) dividends
(c) The amount of revenue arising from exchanges of goods or services included in each
significant category of revenue. (Exchanges of similar goods and services do not result in
revenue and therefore this relates only to exchanges of dissimilar goods and services – see
Section 2.3.2.)
Any contingent assets or liabilities, such as those relating to warranty costs, claims or penalties
should be treated according to HKAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
(covered earlier).
355
Financial Reporting
Consider the following scenarios and discuss how HKAS 18 should be applied to each
(a) Bradley Co. owns an office building which cost $5m and has a market value of $7m. On
1 April 20X2, Bradley Co. sold the building to Beck Co., a finance company, for $5.5m.
Bradley Co. has entered into an agreement to repurchase the building in three years' time for
$7m and Bradley Co. will continue to occupy the building after sale.
(b) Marianne Alltraders entered into a six-month contract to undertake accountancy training for a
customer over the period 1 September 20X2 to 28 February 20X3. The value of services
performed to the year end amounts to $45,000 out of a total contract value of $60,000.
All costs are expected to be recoverable.
(c) Maximum Velocity sold some bicycles to a customer for $15,000 on 1 October 20X2.
The customer has the right to return any unsold bikes before 30 April 20X3 for a full refund.
Maximum Velocity’s year end is 31 December.
(d) Admen performed advertising services for a customer costing $4,450 relating to a fixed price
$20,000 contract covering the period 1 December 20X2 to 31 March 20X3. Due to
fluctuating advertising costs, the expected total cost cannot be reliably measured at the year
end, but Admen is certain that the customer will pay the costs incurred to date.
The year end in all cases is 31 December 20X2.
3 Interpretations relating to revenue recognition

Topic highlights
Three Interpretations are relevant to revenue recognition:
 HK(IFRIC) Int-12 Service Concession Arrangements
 HK(IFRIC) Int-13 Customer Loyalty Programmes
 HK(IFRIC) Int-15 Agreements for the Construction of Real Estate
3.1 HK(IFRIC) Int-12 Service Concession Arrangements

HK(IFRIC) Int-12 was issued in order to clarify how existing HKICPA literature should be applied to
service concession arrangements.
3.1.1 What is a service concession arrangement?
Key term
Service concession arrangements are arrangements whereby a government or other body
(grantor) grants contracts for the supply of public services – such as roads, energy distribution,
prisons or hospitals – to private operators. I.e. this is a public-to-private arrangement.
(HK(IFRIC) Int-12)
3.1.2 Two types of service concession arrangements

HK(IFRIC) Int-12 identifies two types of service concession arrangement:
(a) One in which the operator has a contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset
from the government (grantor).
356
(b) One in which the operator receives an intangible asset being the right to charge for access
to the public sector asset that it constructs or upgrades.
HK(IFRIC) Int-12 allows for the possibility that both types of arrangement may exist within a
single contract: to the extent that the government has given an unconditional guarantee of
payment for the construction of the public sector asset, the operator has a financial asset; to the
extent that the operator has to rely on the public using the service in order to obtain payment, the
operator has an intangible asset.
3.1.3 Accounting – Financial asset model
HK(IFRIC) For the first type of arrangement the operator recognises a financial asset measured at fair value
Int-12.15-16 to the extent that it has an unconditional contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset
from or at the direction of the grantor for the construction services.
The operator has an unconditional right to receive cash if the grantor contractually guarantees to
pay the operator:
(a) Specified or determinable amounts;
(b) The shortfall, if any, between amounts received from users of the public service and
specified or determinable amounts, even if payment is contingent on the operator ensuring
that the infrastructure meets specified quality or efficiency requirements.
3.1.4 Accounting – Intangible asset model
HK(IFRIC) The operator recognises an intangible asset measured at fair value to the extent that it receives a
Int-12.17 right (a licence) to charge users of the public service. A right to charge users of the public service is
not an unconditional right to receive cash because the amounts are contingent upon the extent to
which the public uses the service.
3.1.5 Operation revenue
HK(IFRIC) The operator of a service concession arrangement recognises and measures revenue in
Int-12.14,20 accordance with HKAS 11 and 18 for the services it performs.
Example: Electricity Co.

Electricity Co. is a private sector entity, which has entered into an arrangement with government to
supply a minimum quantity of electricity for 30 years to the public within a specific district.
Electricity Co. designs and builds a power plant on government land to produce the needed
electricity and maintains control over all significant aspects of operating the power plant within the
terms of the agreement. The agreement provides for the following:
 The legal title to the power plant will be transferred to the government body at the end of the
arrangement.
 Electricity Co. is responsible for repairs, maintenance, and capital expenditure related to the
power plant.
 Electricity Co. must stand ready to deliver a minimum quantity of electricity each month.
 Electricity Co. is paid by the public directly, charge is based primarily on their own usage.
 The government regulates the prices that Electricity Co. may charge to the public such that
Electricity Co.'s return is capped by reference to operating costs and capital investment. The
government does not guarantee any minimum level of income for Electricity Co.
How should the above transaction be accounted for?
357
Financial Reporting
Solution
The transaction illustrates certain characteristics of a service concession arrangement that falls
within the scope of HK(IFRIC) 12:
 The arrangement is between a public sector entity (the government) and an entity from the
private sector (Electricity Co.);
 An infrastructure asset is constructed by Electricity Co. for the purpose of the arrangement,
and is used to supply electricity to public;
 The government (the grantor) has control over the use of the power plant through the
following means:
– The government specifies the goods to be delivered (electricity) and to whom the
electricity should be provided (the public in the specified district); and
– The income that Electricity Co. needs to generate to cover both its operating costs and
the initial capital outlay from constructing the facility is wholly dependent on the user’s
demand for the electricity, the demand risk borne by Electricity Co.. However, the
arrangement still falls within the scope of HK(IFRIC) 12 as the government controls
the pricing through a capping mechanism (provided the cap is considered to be
substantive) and controls the residual interest in the facility, through the agreement
specifying that the facility must revert to government at the end of the concession
period.
Electricity Co. provides construction services to the grantor by constructing the facility. However,
instead of receiving an unconditional right to receive cash, it has obtained a right to charge the
public for electricity usage, i.e. it has obtained an intangible asset.
As stated in HK(IFRIC) 12, Electricity Co. does not recognise the facility as its own property, plant
and equipment, even though it is fully exposed to demand risk in respect of the electricity users.
During the construction phase:
DEBIT Intangible asset
CREDIT Construction revenue
Being the fair value of construction service provided under development
DEBIT Construction cost
CREDIT Cash
Being construction costs incurred
During the operating phase:
DEBIT Cash
CREDIT Operating revenue
Being electricity charges levied on the users
DEBIT Operating costs
CREDIT Cash
Being operating cost incurred (e.g. fuel, employee cost etc.)
DEBIT Operating costs / Impairment
CREDIT Intangible asset
Being amortisation and/or impairment of the intangible asset during the year
If the government had guaranteed that Electricity Co. would receive a minimum amount, i.e.
had agreed to top up a short-fall in receipts from the public, Electricity Co. would recognise a financial
asset to the extent that it had an unconditional contractual right to receive cash (or another financial
asset) and an intangible asset for the right to receive cash from users above the guaranteed minimum.
358
3.2 HK(IFRIC) Int-13 Customer Loyalty Programmes

3.2.1 The issue
Customer loyalty programmes are programmes whereby customers who buy goods or services are
awarded credits by an entity. These may include reward points or travel miles and can be
redeemed in the future for free or discounted goods or services.
HK(IFRIC) Int-13 Customer Loyalty Programmes addresses accounting for such arrangements by
the entities which grant the credits.
The deferred amount is recognised as revenue only when the entity has fulfilled its obligations by
supplying the awards itself or paying a third party to do so.
3.2.2 Key provisions
The Interpretation requires that the proceeds of the initial sale are split between:
HK(IFRIC)  Revenue, and
Int-13.5-7,
AG1-3.
 Deferred revenue associated with the credits awarded
The proceeds recognised as deferred revenue are measured by reference to the fair value of the
credits awarded. The fair value of award credits should take into account:
 The amount of discounts or incentives that would otherwise be offered to customers who
have not earned award credits from an initial sale; and
 The proportion of award credits that are not expected to be redeemed by customers (any
expected forfeitures), If customers can choose from a range of different awards, the fair
value of the award credits will reflect the fair values of the range of available awards,
weighted in proportion to the frequency with which each award is expected to be selected.
The deferred amount is recognised as revenue only when the entity has fulfilled its obligations by
supplying the awards itself or paying a third party to do so.
HK(IFRIC) Int-13 gives a choice as to whether the amount allocated to the award credits should be:
(a) Equal to their fair value (irrespective of the fair values of the other components); or
(b) A proportion of the total consideration based on the fair value of the award credits relative to
the fair values of the other components of the sale.
In developing the HK(IFRIC) Int-13, it was decided that it should not be more prescriptive than
HKAS 18 Revenue, which does not specify which of the above should be used.
If at any time the expected costs of meeting the obligation exceed the consideration received, the
entity has an onerous contract for which HKAS 37 would require recognition of a liability.
If HK(IFRIC) Int-13 causes an entity to change its accounting policy for customer loyalty awards,
HKAS 8 applies.
Example: Loyalty points

Loyalty points can arise in one of two ways – either by the entity implementing its own loyalty
programmes (e.g. Park-N-Shop) or by a third party applying such loyalty programmes (e.g. HSBC
credit card providing a programme for participating retailers). The entity can also recognise this
deferred revenue by either allocating the deferred revenue systematically (amortisation) or on a
sale-by-sale basis. The following examples are shown on a sale-by-sale basis for convenience.
Case 1 is easy, according to paragraph 7 of the Interpretation:
If the entity supplies the awards itself, it shall recognise the consideration allocated to
award credits as revenue when award credits are redeemed and it fulfils its obligations to
supply awards. The amount of revenue recognised shall be based on the number of award
credits that have been redeemed in exchange for awards, relative to the total number
expected to be redeemed.
359
Financial Reporting
What that essentially means is this: take Park-N-Shop for example, which awards one point for
every $100 that a customer spends: every point can be redeemed for goods with a retail price of
$1. The company estimates that 80% of points awarded will be redeemed based on past
experience. The accounting entries following a sale of goods for $200 would be:
$ $
DEBIT Cash/credit card receivables 200.00
CREDIT Deferred revenue – Loyalty points ($200/$100  1 pt x 1.60
80%)
CREDIT Revenue 198.40
A portion of the consideration paid by the customer will be allocated to deferred revenue as above,
measured as the fair value of the points awarded. Then when the customer utilises their points the
next time they spend:
$ $
DEBIT Deferred revenue 1.60
CREDIT Revenue 100.00
So in essence a proportion of revenue is deferred until later.
Case 2 refers to paragraph 8 of the Interpretation:
If a third party supplies the awards, the entity shall assess whether it is collecting the
consideration allocated to the award credits on its own account (i.e. as the principal in the
transaction) or on behalf of the third party (i.e. as an agent for the third party).
(a) If the entity is collecting the consideration on behalf of the third party, it shall:
(i) Measure its revenue as the net amount retained on its own account, i.e. the
discounts or incentives that otherwise would be offered to customers that have
not earned the award credits; and
(ii) Recognise this net amount as revenue when the third party becomes obliged to
supply the awards and entitled to receive consideration for doing so. These
events may occur as soon as the award credits are granted. Alternatively, if the
customer can choose to claim awards from either the entity or a third party,
these events may occur only when the customer chooses to claim awards from
the third party.
(b) If the entity is collecting the consideration on its own account, it shall measure its
revenue as the gross consideration allocated to the award credits and recognise the
revenue when it fulfils its obligations in respect of the awards.
In paragraph 8(a)(i) and (ii) of the Interpretation the entity supplying the award credits is acting as
an agent of the third party supplying the awards, which may be the case with airline loyalty
programmes where retailers or other service firms pay the airline a cost per mile for using their
loyalty programmes. However in case (b) the reference is to a similar programme but where the
retailer acts as a principal on their own account.
Look first at the accounting entries in the situation of Paragraph 8(a). Say that a retailer has a
loyalty programme arrangement with an airline such that, for every $10 that the customer spends
with the retailer, he is awarded one point which can be redeemed for one mile.
The face value of each point is $1. For each point issued, the retailer will pay $0.8 to the airline.
Based on past experience it is expected that 90% of points will be redeemed.
The retailer may be identified as acting as an agent of the airline in respect of the loyalty points
element of the transaction, or the retailer may be identified as the principal, depending on the
circumstances (see Section 2.8).
360
Retailer as agent
If the retailer is considered to be the agent and makes a sale of $200 the accounting entries would
be:
$ $
CREDIT Commission income (20  $0.2 x 90%) 3.60
Liability to airline (20  $0.8 x 90%) 14.40
Revenue 182.00
Here the retailer recognises:
 Revenue income in respect of the sale of its own goods / services of $182
 Commission income in respect of the customer loyalty points at the net amount of $3.60
The benefits of such a scheme to the retailer are that they do not have to incur resources to
administer the scheme (the airline administers the redemptions) and they can exit the scheme at
any time with no obligation for the outstanding points.
Retailer as principal
If the retailer has collected the consideration allocated to the points on its own account, i.e. acting
as a principal rather than as an agent, then it is entitled to measure its income from the points at
the gross amount of $18 in the example above, but must separately recognise the $14.40 payable
to the airline as an expense.
$ $
CREDIT Income from loyalty programme (20 x $1 x 90%) 18
Revenue 182
And
DEBIT Loyalty programme expense (20 x $0.8 x 90%) 14.40
CREDIT Liability to airline 14.40
Regardless of whether the retailer is the agent of principal in the transaction, it recognises net
income of $3.60.
3.3 HK(IFRIC) Int-15 Agreements for the Construction of Real

Estate
HK(IFRIC) Int-15 Agreements for the Construction of Real Estate is effective for annual periods
beginning on or after 1 January 2009.
3.3.1 Reasons for issuing HK(IFRIC) Int-15
The issues addressed in the Interpretation were first published in a draft Interpretation D21 Real
Estate Sales in July 2007. In response to concerns expressed in relation to improving the
articulation between HKAS 11 Construction Contracts and HKAS 18 Revenue and providing
additional guidance on how to account for revenue in HKAS 18, the Hong Kong Financial Reporting
Interpretations Committee (HK(IFRIC)) provides guidance on the following two issues in HK(IFRIC)
Int-15:
 Determining whether an agreement for the construction of real estate is within the scope of
HKAS 11 or HKAS 18
 When revenue from the construction of real estate should be recognised
The Interpretation standardises accounting practice across jurisdictions for the recognition of
revenue among real estate developers for sales of units, such as apartments or houses, "off plan",
that is, before construction is complete.
361
Financial Reporting
3.3.2 Main features of HK(IFRIC) Int-15

The detailed guidance in HK(IFRIC) Int-15 assumes that the entity has previously analysed the
agreement for the construction of real estate and any related agreements and concluded that it will
retain neither continuing managerial involvement to the degree usually associated with ownership
nor effective control over the constructed real estate to an extent that would preclude recognition of
some or all of the consideration as revenue. If recognition of some of the consideration as revenue
is precluded, the following discussion applies only to the part of the agreement for which revenue
will be recognised.
In some circumstances, agreements may need to be split into separately identifiable components,
with each such component being accounted for separately and the fair value of the total
consideration received or receivable for the agreement allocated to each component. The seller
then applies the requirements of HK(IFRIC) Int-15 to any components for the construction of real
estate in order to determine whether each component is within the scope of HKAS 11 or HKAS 18.
3.3.3 Determining whether the agreement is within the scope of HKAS 11 or
HKAS 18
HKAS 11 applies when the agreement meets the definition of a construction contract set out in
paragraph 3 of HKAS 11. An agreement for the construction of real estate meets the definition of a
construction contract when the buyer is able to specify:
(a) The major structural elements of the design of the real estate before construction begins,
and/or
(b) Major structural changes once construction is in progress (whether or not it exercises that
ability).
In contrast, if construction could take place independently of the agreement and buyers have only
limited ability to influence the structural design of the real estate, the agreement will be for the sale
of goods or the rendering of services and within the scope of HKAS 18.
3.3.4 Accounting for revenue from construction of real estate
Construction contracts (within the scope of HKAS 11)
Where the agreement is a construction contract under HKAS 11, and the outcome of the contract
can be estimated reliably, revenue is recognised by reference to the stage of completion of the
contract activity in accordance with HKAS 11. HK (IFRIC) Int-15 has not introduced any new
requirements or guidance that will affect such contracts.
Agreements for the rendering of services (HKAS 18)
Where the agreement falls within the scope of HKAS 18, and the entity is not required to acquire
and supply construction materials, it may be only an agreement for the rendering of services. This
may arise, for example, in arrangements where the customer acts in essence as its own general
contractor and enters into agreements with individual suppliers for specific goods and services.
Where the entity is responsible only for assembling materials supplied by others (i.e. it has no
inventory risk for the construction materials), the agreement is an agreement for the rendering of
services.
In such circumstances, if the criteria in HKAS 18 are met, revenue is recognised by reference to
the stage of completion of the transaction using the percentage of completion method.
The requirements of HKAS 11 are generally applicable to the recognition of revenue and the
associated expenses for such a transaction.
Agreements for the sale of goods (HKAS 18)
An agreement for the construction of real estate will be an agreement for the sale of goods under
HKAS 18 if it involves the provision of services together with construction materials. For such
contracts, the applicable recognition criteria are those set out in HKAS 18.
362
The Interpretation focuses on the criteria that revenue can only be recognised when the entity has
transferred to the buyer control and the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the goods,
and distinguishes between circumstances in which these criteria are met "at a single point in time"
and "continuously as construction progresses".
If transfer of control and the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the real estate in its
entirety occurs at a single point of time (e.g. at completion, upon or after delivery), revenue is
recognised only when all the criteria in HKAS 18 are satisfied. Assuming that all of the other criteria
in HKAS 18 are met, this will be upon the occurrence of that single critical transfer of control and
the significant risks and rewards of ownership.
The Interpretation also envisages that the entity may transfer to the buyer control and the
significant risks and rewards of ownership of the work in progress in its current state as
construction progresses. In this case, if all of the criteria in HKAS 18 are met continuously as
construction progresses, revenue is recognised by reference to the stage of completion using the
percentage of completion method. The requirements of HKAS 11 are generally applicable to the
recognition of revenue and the associated expenses for such a transaction. Note that this form of
transaction is not applicable to property sales in Hong Kong.
3.3.5 Disclosures
When an entity recognises revenue using the percentage of completion method for agreements
that meet all the criteria in HKAS 18 continuously as construction progresses (see above), the
following disclosures are required:
 How the entity determines which agreements meet all the criteria in HKAS 18 continuously
as construction progresses
 The amount of revenue arising from such agreements in the period
 The methods used to determine the stage of completion of agreements in progress
For any such agreements that are in progress at the reporting date, the following disclosures are
also required:
 The aggregate amount of costs incurred and recognised profits (less recognised losses) to
date
 The amount of advances received
Additional guidance
HK(IFRIC) Int-15 is accompanied by an information note which, although not part of the
Interpretation, summarises its requirements in the form of two flowcharts, which are reproduced at
the end of this section.
In addition, three illustrative examples designed to assist in the application of the Interpretation
accompany HK(IFRIC) Int-15.
Example: Apartment purchase

An entity is developing residential real estate and starts marketing individual units (apartments)
while construction is still in progress. Buyers enter into a binding sale agreement that gives them
the right to acquire a specified unit when it is ready for occupation. They pay a deposit that is
refundable only if the entity fails to deliver the completed unit in accordance with the contracted
terms. Buyers are also required to make progress payments between the time of the initial
agreement and contractual completion.
The balance of the purchase price is paid only on contractual completion, when buyers obtain
possession of their unit. Buyers are able to specify only minor variations to the basic design but
they cannot specify or alter major structural elements of the design of their unit. In the jurisdiction,
no rights to the underlying real estate asset transfer to the buyer other than through the agreement.
Consequently, the construction takes place regardless of whether sale agreements exist.
How should the above transaction be accounted for?
363
Financial Reporting
Solution
In this transaction, the terms of the agreement and all the surrounding facts and circumstances
indicate that the agreement is not a construction contract. The agreement is a forward contract that
gives the buyer an asset in the form of a right to acquire, use and sell the completed real estate at
a later date and an obligation to pay the purchase price in accordance with its terms.
Although the buyer might be able to transfer its interest in the forward contract to another party, the
entity retains control and the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the work in progress in
its current state until the completed real estate is transferred. Therefore, revenue should be
recognised only when all the criteria of HKAS 18 are met (at completion in this example).
Alternatively, assume that, in the jurisdiction, the law requires the entity to transfer immediately to
the buyer ownership of the real estate in its current state of completion and that any additional
construction becomes the property of the buyer as construction progresses.
The entity would need to consider all the terms of the agreement to determine whether this change
in the timing of the transfer of ownership means that the entity transfers to the buyer control and
the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the work in progress in its current state as
construction progresses. For example, the fact that if the agreement is terminated before
construction is complete, the buyer retains the work in progress and the entity has the right to be
paid for the work performed, might indicate that control is transferred along with ownership. If it
does, and if all the criteria in HKAS 18 are met continuously as construction progresses, the entity
recognises revenue by reference to the stage of completion using the percentage of completion
method taking into account the stage of completion of the whole building and the agreements
signed with individual buyers.
(a) Realbuild operates in the house building sector and currently does not report under HKFRS.
In the market in which Realbuild operates, the custom is to sign a contract which includes a
completion date when funds are transferred and the keys passed to the buyer. Realbuild's
accounting policy is to recognise revenue on signing the contract. Where there is still
building work to be completed after the keys are passed to the buyer, Realbuild delays
revenue recognition until the completion of the work.
(b) BCN Productions is a film production house. The company licenses one of its new films to a
distributor in a foreign country over which BCN Productions has no control. The film is
expected to appear before the public over a period of six months and BCN Productions
intends to recognise the revenue over this period.
(c) KSoft is a start-up company that will develop bespoke software systems for corporate clients.
The company's policy is to invoice fixed amounts which include the software development
and fees for ongoing post-delivery support while the new software system is implemented.
KSoft intends to recognise the revenue for both elements on installation of the software.
Required
Advise the directors as to the acceptability of the above accounting policies for revenue recognition
under HKAS 18 Revenue.
364
HK(IFRIC) Analysis of a single agreement for the construction of real estate

Int-15
Implementati
on guidance Can components other than for the construction of real No
estate be identified within the agreement (e.g. a sale of land A
or provision of property management service)?
Yes
Split the agreement into separately identifiable components
Allocate the fair value of the consideration received or

receivable to each component
Separate components
Component(s) for the delivery of other Component for the construction of real estate
goods or services and directly related services (in accordance A
with HKAS 18)
Apply HKAS 18
Does the agreement or Yes The agreement or component is Revenue and costs are
A component meet the definition a construction contract within recognised by reference to the
of a construction contract? the scope of HKAS 11* stage of completion
No
Is the agreement or component The agreement or component is Revenue and costs are
Yes
only for the rendering of for the rendering of services recognised by reference to the
services? within the scope of HKAS 18 stage of completion
No
The agreement or component is Are the criteria for recognising Revenue and costs are
for the sale of goods within the revenue from the sale of goods Yes recognised by reference to the
scope of HKAS 18 ** met on a continuous basis? stage of completion
No Revenue is recognised when all

the conditions in paragraph 14
of HKAS 18 have been satisfied
* The construction contract may need to be segmented in accordance with paragraph 8 of HKAS 11
** Directly related services may need to be separated in accordance with paragraph 13 of HKAS 18
The IASB and US standard setter, FASB, issued IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers
in May 2014; this standard replaces all existing IFRS and US GAAP revenue requirements,
including IAS 11, IAS 18, IFRIC 13, IFRIC 15, IFRIC 18 and SIC 31.
When adopted by HKICPA as HKFRS 15, the new standard will replace HKAS 11 and HKAS 18,
together with the relevant Hong Kong interpretations.
365
Financial Reporting
The new standard was issued with an effective date of 1 January 2017, however the IASB has
issued an exposure draft proposing that this is delayed by a year to 1 January 2018.
4.1 IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers

HKFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers establishes a single, comprehensive
framework for accounting for the majority of contracts that result in revenue. These contracts may
be for the immediate sale of goods, or relate to goods or services provided over a longer period.
The standard establishes a methodology for both measuring and recognising the revenue.
4.1.1 Scope
HKFRS 15 does not apply to revenue arising from:
 Lease contracts within the scope of HKAS 17 Leases
 Insurance contracts within the scope of HKFRS 4 Insurance Contracts
 Financial instruments and other contractual rights or obligations within the scope of HKFRS
9 Financial Instruments, HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements, HKFRS 11 Joint
Arrangements, IAS 27 Separate Financial Statements and IAS 28 Investments in Associates
and Joint Ventures, and
 Non-monetary exchanges between entities in the same line of business to facilitate sales to
customers or potential customers
4.1.2 Definitions
Key terms
Revenue is income arising in the course of an entity’s ordinary activities
Income is increases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of inflows or
enhancements of assets or decreases of liabilities that result in an increase in equity, other than
A contract is an agreement between two or more parties that creates enforceable rights and
obligations.
A customer is a party that has contracted with an entity to obtain goods or services that are an
output of the entity’s ordinary activities in exchange for consideration.
(HKFRS 15)
4.2 Five step approach

HKFRS 15 takes a five-step approach to recognising revenue:
Step 1 Identify the contract
Step 2 Identify separate performance obligations
Step 3 Determine the transaction price
Step 4 Allocate transaction price to performance obligations
Step 5 Recognise revenue as or when each performance obligation is satisfied
Revenue is therefore recognised when control over goods or services is transferred to the
customer.
366
HKFRS 4.2.1 Step 1: Identify the contract

15.9,10, 17,
24 As defined above, a contract is an agreement between two or more parties that creates
enforceable rights and obligations. Enforceability of the rights and obligations in a contract is a
matter of law. A contract may be written, verbal or implied by an entity’s customary business
practices, published policies or specific statements but the following conditions must be met:
 The contract is approved by the parties to it and they are committed to performing the
relevant performance obligations
 The contract has commercial substance
 The parties’ rights and payment terms can be identified
 It is probable that the entity will collect the consideration to which it will be entitled
In some cases contracts are combined and accounted for as a single contract when specific criteria
are met.
4.2.2 Step 2: Identify performance obligations
HKFRS
15.22, 27, 29 Performance obligations are promises to provide goods or services to a customer. There may be
several distinct performance obligations within one contract; these are separately identified and
accounted for if:
 The promised good or service is distinct, i.e.:
– The good or service could be used by the customer either on its own or together with
other resources that are readily available to the customer, and
– The entity’s promise to transfer the good or service to the customer is separately
identifiable from other promises in the contract.
 Or a series of goods or services are substantially the same and have the same pattern of
transfer to the customer.
Example: Performance obligations 1

Monument Building Services Co (‘MBS’) constructs properties for customers. It has recently signed
a contract to build a retail outlet for Fashion Focus Co. MBS is responsible for designing the
building, purchasing raw materials, site preparation, construction, wiring, plumbing and finishing.
Required
Identify the performance obligation(s) in the contract.
Solution
MBS provides Fashion Focus Co with goods and services that are capable of being distinct (eg
building design services could be sold separately, as could the other elements of the contract.)
In the context of this contract, however, MBS provides a significant service of integrating the inputs
in order to produce a single output being the retail outlet. Therefore the provision of each good or
service is not separately identifiable and there is a single performance obligation, being the
development of the property.
Example: Performance obligations 2

Trainor Technical Services Co (‘TTS’) supplies computer aided design packages to customers. It
has recently signed a contract with Koala Design to provide a licence to use a software package,
and installation service (which does not involve customising the software package) and technical
support for 4 years. TTS is not the only company that could install the software and provide
technical support.
367
Financial Reporting
Required
Identify the performance obligation(s) in the contract.
Solution
Each element of the contract could be used by the customer individually and is separately
identifiable ie the provision of the licence by TTC is not dependent on or highly interrelated with
other goods and services promised in the contract and would not be significantly affected if Koala
Design elected to use one of TTC’s competitor’s installation services and technical support
services.
Therefore there are three distinct performance obligations in the contract, being:
1. Provision of the licence
2. Installation of the software
3. Provision of technical support
HKFRS 15.47 4.2.3 Step 3: Determine transaction price

- 72
The transaction price is the consideration that the selling company expects to be entitled to in
return for transferring goods or services. When determining transaction price, the following should
be considered:
 Variable consideration is included in the transaction price at its expected value or single
most likely amount; refunds and rebates to the customer reduce the selling price. Variable
consideration is included in the transaction price only to the extent that it is highly probable
that a significant amount will not be reversed when the uncertainty associated with the
variable consideration is resolved.
 The existence of a significant financing component in the contract. The transaction price
should reflect cash selling price when control of goods or services passes (therefore any
financing component does not form part of the transaction price).
 Non-cash consideration is measured at fair value, or, if this cannot be reasonably estimated,
by reference to the stand-alone selling price of the goods or services promised to the
customer in exchange for the consideration.
 Consideration payable to a customer (eg cash amounts or credit vouchers that an entity
pays or expects to pay to the customer) reduces the transaction price.
HKFRS 4.2.4 Step 4: Allocate transaction price to performance obligations
15.73-74,
78-79 The transaction price determined in step 3 (Section 4.2.3) must be allocated to the performance
obligations identified in step 2 (Section 4.2.2). Allocation is made in proportion to the individual
standalone selling price attached to each performance obligation.
If a standalone selling price is not directly observable, an entity should estimate this price using a
suitable method, for example:
(a) Adjusted market approach (i.e. estimating the price that a customer would be willing to pay in
the market in which it operates. This may require reference to competitors’ pricing, adjusted
for the entity’s costs and margins).
(b) Expected cost plus margin approach (ie forecasting expected costs of satisfying a
performance obligation and adding an appropriate margin).
(c) Residual approach (i.e. estimating the standalone selling price by reference to the total
transaction price less the sum of the observable standalone selling prices of other goods /
services promised in the contract).
Note that the HKAS 18 approach to measure revenue at the fair value of consideration is no longer
applicable under HKFRS 15.
368
Example: Allocation of transaction price

The contract between Trainor Technical Services Co (‘TTS’) and Koala Design (see previous
example) is priced at $6,000. The individual selling prices of each element are as follows:
 Provision of a licence $5,000
 Installation service $1,500
 Provision of technical support $3,000
Solution
Licence provision $5,000/$9,500  $6,000 = $3,158
Installation service $1,500/$9,500  $6,000 = $947
Technical support service $3,000/$9,500  $6,000 = $1,895
HKFRS 15.31 4.2.5 Step 5: Recognise revenue when performance obligations are satisfied
– 32, 25
As each performance obligation is satisfied the related element of the transaction price is
recognised as revenue. Depending on the performance obligation it may be satisfied at a single
point in time or over a period of time. A performance obligation is satisfied over time if one of the
following criteria is met:
(a) The customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits provided by the entity’s
performance as the entity performs (eg a cleaning service).
(b) The entity’s performance creates or enhances an asset that the customer controls as the
asset is created or enhanced (eg customised software that is being written into a customer’s
existing IT infrastructure).
(c) The entity’s performance does not create an asset with an alternative use to the entity and
the entity has an enforceable right to payment for performance completed to date.
HKFRS 15.38 Performance obligation satisfied at a single point in time
Where a performance obligation is satisfied at a single point in time, the following should be
considered in determining that time:
1. Whether the entity has a present right to payment for the asset
2. Whether the entity has transferred legal title to the asset
3. Whether the entity has transferred physical possession of the asset
4. Whether the entity has transferred the risks and rewards of ownership to the customer
5. Whether the customer has accepted the asset
HKFRS Performance obligation satisfied over a period of time
15.39-45,
B14-B19 Revenue is only recognised when an entity can reasonably measure the outcome of a performance
obligation. In the early stages of a contract this is not always possible, and in this case revenue is
recognised to the extent of costs incurred.
Where an entity can reasonably measure the outcome of a performance obligation, revenue is
recognised based on progress towards satisfaction of the performance obligation. Progress is
measured by way of either an input or output method (which must be used consistently for similar
performance obligations).
Input methods may include the proportion of costs incurred, labour hours or machine hours worked
or time elapsed. Output methods may include the number of units produced, work certified or
contract milestones.
369
Financial Reporting
4.3 Modifications to contracts

HKFRS
15.18, 20 A contract modification is a change to the scope / price of a contract such that it either creates new
or changes existing enforceable rights and obligations of the parties to the contract. Both parties to
the contract should approve such a modification.
A contract modification is accounted for as a new additional contract if:
(a) The scope of the contract changes because additional distinct goods or services are
promised (ie goods or services that could be sold separately), and
(b) The increase to the contract price reflects the standalone selling price of the additional goods
or services promised.
HKFRS 4.4 Contract costs

15.91, 93
HKFRS 15 deals with the costs of obtaining a contract and the costs of fulfilling a contract.
4.4.1 Costs of obtaining a contract
Any non-incremental costs of obtaining a contract are recognised immediately in profit or loss,
unless they can be charged to the customer regardless of whether the contract is obtained.
Incremental costs of obtaining a new contract are recognised as an asset if the costs are expected
to be recovered.
HKFRS 4.4.2 Costs of fulfilling a contract

15.95-98
Any costs to fulfil a contract that fall within the scope of another standard are accounted for in
accordance with that standard (eg HKAS 2).
HKFRS 15 requires that the following costs are recognised as an expense when incurred:
 General and administrative costs
 Abnormal costs such as wasted material that are not reflected in the cost of the contract
 Costs relating to performance obligations that have already been satisfied
 Costs that an entity cannot distinguish as relating to satisfied or unsatisfied performance
obligations
Costs that do not fall within the scope of another standard and are not identified above are are
recognised as an asset if all of the following conditions are met:
 The costs relate directly to an identifiable contract
 The costs generate or enhance resources of the entity that will be used to satisfy
performance obligation sin the future
 The costs are expected to be recovered
Capitalised costs are amortised over the period during which the goods and services to which they
relate are transferred to the customer.
HKFRS 4.5 Presentation of contracts with customers

15.105-108
In the statement of financial position, a contract with customers may be recognised as any of:
Contract asset Entity’s right to consideration in exchange for goods or services that
it has transferred to a customer when that right is conditional on
something other than the passage of time (for example the entity’s
performance).
Receivable Entity’s right to consideration that is unconditional ie only the
passage of time is required before payment is due.
370
Contract liability Entity’s obligation to transfer goods or services to a customer for

which the entity has received consideration (or the amount is due)
from the customer.
4.5.1 Offsetting
HKFRS HKFRS 15 makes the following points about offsetting:
15.105
 A single contract is presented either as a net contract asset or a net contract liability. Any
receivable is presented separately
 Contract assets and liabilities in respect of different customers are not offset
HKFRS
15.110
4.6 Disclosure
HKFRS 15 requires that an entity provides both qualitative and quantitative information about:
(a) Its contracts with customers
(b) The significant judgments and changes in judgments made in applying HKFRS 15 to those
contracts and
(c) Any assets recognised from the costs to obtain or fulfil a contract with a customer.
HKFRS 15 4.7 Application

Appendix B
HKFRS 15 includes Application Guidance, which explains how the provisions of the standard
should be applied to a number of situations. These include:
 Sales with a right of return
 Extended warranties
 Transactions involving an agent
 Customer options for additional goods /services
 Licensing
 Repurchase agreements
 Consignment arrangements
 Bill and hold arrangements
 Customer acceptance
4.8 Effect of HKFRS 15

The effect that HKFRS 15 will have on the amount and timing of revenue recognition will differ by
industry and transaction type. In some cases there will be no change to the amount and timing of
recognition, whereas in other cases changes may be significant. Examples of differences include
the following:
 Previously, there has been no guidance on accounting for extended warranties and
divergent practice has emerged. Guidance contained within HKFRS 15 now requires that
revenue is recognised for subsequent services such as extended warranties.
 Companies that issue customers with a ‘free’ mobile phone, the cost of which is recovered
through monthly contract payments must now recognise revenue when the phone is
provided at the start of the contract; previously widespread practice in this situation was to
recognise revenue on the provision of the handset only up to the amount of cash received
from the customer at the time.
371
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 18 Revenue Recognition
Measure at the fair value of consideration received or

receivable.
Discount deferred consideration; difference between cash
receivable and discounted amount is interest receivable.
Sale of goods Provision of services Interest, royalties and

dividends
Recognise when: Recognise when: Recognise when:

significant risks and rewards revenue can be measured probable economic
transferred to buyer reliably benefits will flow to the
no retention of managerial probable economic benefits entity
involvement / effective control will flow revenue can be
revenue can be measured stage of completion can be measured reliably
reliably measured reliably
probable economic benefits costs can be measured
will flow reliably
costs can be measured reliably
Examples:
Consignment sales recognised as revenue
when goods sold on to third party
Bill and hold sales revenue recognised when
buyer takes title provided that the goods are
available, payment terms are normal, delayed
delivery is acknowledged and delivery is
probable.
Sale and repurchase agreements may in
substance be secured loans.
Disclose:
Accounting policies
The amount of each significant category of revenue
The amount of revenue arising from exchanges of goods or services in each category.
HKAS
HK (IFRIC)
18 Revenue
Interpretations
Recognition
HK(IFRIC) Int-12 Service HK(IFRIC) Int-13 Customer HK(IFRIC) Int-15 Agreements

Concession Arrangements Loyalty Programmes for Construction of Real Estate
Recognise when: Where a customer is HKAS 11 applies where the

financial asset model applies awarded “credits” when buyer can specify major
where unconditional making a purchase, sales structural elements of design
contractual right to receive proceeds are split between before construction begins /
cash immediate revenue major structural changes once
intangible asset model applies deferred revenue associated construction is in progress.
to extent there is right to with the credits
charge users of service Otherwise HKAS 18 applies.
HKAS 11/18 may be applied.
372
Answer 1
The contract is for services that are performed by an indeterminate number of acts over (usually) a
two-year period.
In this case HKAS 18 requires that for practical purposes revenue is recognised on a straight-line
basis over the period, unless there is evidence for the use of another method that better reflects the
stage of completion.
As the number of call outs may vary significantly from year to year, it is unlikely that this is the
case. In particular it is impossible to identify what proportion of total call outs over the two year
period have occurred in any given accounting period before the two year period is complete.
Therefore it would appear that the accountant’s approach is incorrect.
Answer 2
(a) There are a number of factors that suggest the substance of this transaction is different to its
legal form. First, the building has a market value of $7m and is being sold for less than
market value, which immediately looks odd. Second, there is an agreement for Bradley Co.
to repurchase the assets in the future. If it were a genuine sale, this would be an unlikely
clause. Third, Bradley Co. retains occupancy of the building – again, if this were a genuine
sale it would be very unlikely that an asset would be sold and not occupied or used by the
purchaser.
Therefore, it seems obvious that the substance of this transaction is a secured loan. Bradley
Co. should continue to recognise the building in the statement of financial position as they
have the risks and rewards of ownership. The cash received from Beck Co. should be
recorded as a non-current liability and the finance on the loan should be charged in the
statement of profit or loss over the three-year period. The finance charge could be calculated
as the difference between the "sale" proceeds and the repurchase amount.
(b) Revenue should be accrued by Marianne Alltraders based on value of work performed rather
than accrued on a time apportioned basis in accordance with HKAS 18. Revenue recognised
is therefore $45,000.
(c) This is a consignment sale. Maximum Velocity should only recognise revenue in respect of
the bicycles when the significant risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred to
third party customers. The bikes remain in Maximum Velocity’s inventories until confirmation
has been received from the customer that they have been sold on.
(d) Since the outcome of the service transaction cannot be reliably measured at the year end,
only $4,450 is recognised as revenue by Admen rather than on a time apportioned basis.
This matches with the costs recognised ensuring that no profit is recorded until the outcome
can be reliably measured.
Answer 3
(a) The general rule under HKAS 18 Revenue is that revenue is recognised when the significant
risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred and there is no continuing managerial
involvement or effective control.
HK(IFRIC) 15 provides additional guidance regarding real estate sales and states that
revenue is recognised when the entity transfers control as well as the risks and rewards of
ownership, i.e. when the legal completion occurs and the keys are handed over in this case.
373
Financial Reporting
Realbuild's current policy recognises the revenue before this is the case: revenue should be
recognised on the contract completion date rather than on signing the contract.
Where there is continuing building work to be undertaken, revenue can be recognised
provided the property has been delivered, so Realbuild's policy needs to be amended here
as well. However, a provision is also required to be recognised for the cost of work yet to be
performed and this is charged to profit or loss at the same time as the revenue is recognised,
i.e. on delivery of the property.
Note. A house-builder such as Realbuild selling to the general public is entering into
contracts to sell goods rather than a construction contract, as the buyer is not able to specify
the major structural elements of the design, which would be an indication of a construction
contract.
(b) Licence fees (and royalty income) are normally recognised straight line over the life of the
agreement. However, where the licensee has no remaining obligations to perform, or, as in
this case, no control over the use of the images once licensed, the substance of the
transaction is a sale, and revenue should be recognised at the time when the licence is
granted, so BCN Productions' policy is not appropriate.
(c) HKAS 18 provides guidance on the recognition of revenue from the development of
customised software: it should be recognised by reference to the stage of completion of the
development including completion of the services provided for post-delivery support.
Consequently, it is not appropriate to recognise the revenue on installation: it should be
recognised over the period of development and support (although not necessarily straight
line as can be matched to the level of work done in each period).
374
Exam practice
Nero Fashion 29 minutes

Nero Fashion Limited (NFL) is a clothing manufacturer in mainland China and distributes its
products through the following channels:
 Counter sales at department stores – walk-in customers purchase and collect the goods
upon the issue of an invoice by and make cash or credit card payments to the department
stores. In accordance with the consignment contract signed between the department store
and NFL, the selling price is determined and inventory is managed by NFL, the sales teams
are employed by NFL while the cashier service is provided by the department stores. The
department stores pay 80% of the retail price of the goods sold to NFL on a monthly basis.
The department stores accept returns or exchanges of goods within seven days of the
invoice date and all these items are returned to NFL and the amounts deducted from the
total remitted to NFL.
 Distributors – NFL ships the goods to the designated location in accordance with the
instructions of the distributors, including the items and quantity requested. Distributors can
open their own retail store to sell the goods, but NFL will determine the retail prices for the
goods, which are normally the same as the prices offered in counter sales at department
stores. Goods are not returnable except for items with quality problems which can be
returned within seven days of delivery. The distributors have to sign and return an
acceptable confirmation at the completion of quality inspection or seven days of delivery,
whichever is earlier. NFL will issue an invoice to the distributors at 50% of the pre-
determined retailing price of items delivered on a monthly basis.
Based on the past three years historical data, less than 0.1% of sales were returned from
customers of department stores within the seven-day period and around 5% of sales were returned
from distributors before signing the confirmation under the above return policies.
Required
(a) Discuss how NFL should account for the sales revenue through these channels, with
reference to HKAS 18 Revenue.
(i) Counter sales at department stores (7 marks)
(ii) Distributors (6 marks)
(b) Discuss how NFL should account for monthly revenue if it will give a 10% discount of the
invoiced amount to the distributors when the respective annual quantity delivered is above
100,000 pieces. (3 marks)
(Total = 16 marks)
HKICPA June 2012 (amended)
Yammy Company Limited 36 minutes

Yammy Company Limited (YCL) is the sole distributor of Kammer trucks in Asia. The trucks are
manufactured in Europe and shipment is made monthly to Hong Kong based on the purchase
orders placed by YCL to Kammer. YCL offers its customers buying truck model 6.0 the following
payment plans:
Plan I: an initial deposit of $50,000 upon signing the provisional sales order, and $400,000 upon
delivery of the truck.
Plan II: an initial deposit of $30,000 upon signing the provisional sales order and 24 monthly
instalments of $20,000 each in arrears commenced from the date of delivery of the truck.
375
Financial Reporting
A customer choosing Plan II is required to enter into an insurance contract for two years at a pre-
paid premium of $6,000 per truck with Grant Insurance Inc. (GCC), an independent insurance
company, which takes full obligation of the insurance arrangement. The customer pays the full
insurance premium to YCL upon collection of the truck and YCL pays $5,500 to GCC on the same
date.
Sales orders of 12 trucks under Plan I and 20 trucks under Plan II were signed on
15 October 20X3. The trucks were delivered to customers on 30 November 20X3.
Required
(a) Prepare the journal entries to be entered in October, November and December 20X3 for
these two sales transactions. The effective interest rate is estimated to be 13%. (12 marks)
(b) YCL is planning to expand its business to Guangzhou in co-operation with Best Trade
Vehicle Limited (BT), a local car dealer. Discuss the factors for consideration in the
contractual arrangement with BT so that BT will only act as an agent of YCL in selling the
trucks. (8 marks)
(Total = 20 marks)
HKICPA June 2014
376
chapter 15
Income taxes
Topic list 5 Measurement of deferred tax

5.1 Full provision method
1 Current tax 5.2 Applicable tax rate
1.1 Definitions 5.3 Discounting
1.2 Recognition of current tax liabilities and
6 Recognition of deferred tax
assets
1.3 Measurement of current tax 7 Presentation of deferred tax
1.4 Recognition of current tax
1.5 Presentation of current tax 8 Summary flowchart
2 Introduction to deferred tax 9 Disclosure of income taxes

2.1 Calculation of deferred tax 9.1 Reconciliation
2.2 Definitions 10 Deferred taxation and business
2.3 Measurement of deferred tax combinations
2.4 Recognition of deferred tax 10.1 Temporary differences arising as a result
3 Taxable temporary differences of business combinations
3.1 Examples of taxable temporary differences 10.2 Recognition criteria
3.2 Taxable temporary differences which do 10.3 Application of the recognition criteria
not result in deferred tax liabilities 10.4 Recognition of deferred tax arising from
business combinations
4 Deductible temporary differences 10.5 Section summary
4.1 Examples of deductible temporary
differences 11 Interpretations relating to deferred tax
4.2 Recognition of deferred tax assets 11.1 HK(SIC) Int-21 Income Taxes –
4.3 Deductible temporary differences which do Recovery of Revalued Non-depreciable
not result in deferred tax assets Assets
4.4 Tax losses and credits carried forward 11.2 HK(SIC) Int-25 Income Taxes – Changes
4.5 Reassessment of unrecognised deferred in the Tax Status of an Entity or its
tax assets Shareholders
Learning focus
Tax in one form or another is relevant to all organisations. You should therefore ensure that
you fully understand its operation in the financial statements. Hence this topic may appear with
other topics. You must study it and understand its relationship with other assets and liabilities.
Of course, in a business situation, the deferred tax consideration is always an important topic
as it may change the investment decision.
377
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.18 Income taxes 2
3.18.01 Account for current tax liabilities in accordance with HKAS 12
3.18.02 Record entries relating to income tax in the accounting records
3.18.03 Identify temporary differences (both inside and outside difference)
and calculate deferred tax amounts
3.18.04 Account for tax losses and tax credits
3.18.05 Identify initial recognition exemption for assets and liabilities
3.18.06 Account for deferred tax relating to investments in subsidiaries,
associates and joint ventures
3.18.07 Determine when tax assets and liabilities can be offset
3.18.08 Disclose relevant information with regard to income taxes
378
15: Income taxes | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 Current tax
Topic highlights
Taxation consists of two components:
 Current tax
 Deferred tax
HKAS 12 Income Taxes covers both current and deferred tax.

 Current tax is the amount actually payable to the tax authorities in relation to the trading
activities of the entity during the period.
 Deferred tax is an accounting measure, used to match the tax effects of transactions with
their accounting impact and thereby produce less distorted results.
The parts of the standard relating to current tax are fairly brief, because this is the simple and
uncontroversial area. This section of the chapter deals with current tax and we come on to deferred
tax in Section 2.

These are some of the definitions given in HKAS 12. We will look at the rest later.
Key terms
Accounting profit. Profit or loss for a period before deducting tax expense.
Taxable profit/(tax loss). The profit (loss) for a period, determined in accordance with the rules
established by the taxation authorities, upon which income taxes are payable (recoverable).
Tax expense/(tax income). The aggregate amount included in the determination of profit or loss
for the period in respect of current tax and deferred tax.
Current tax. The amount of income taxes payable (recoverable) in respect of the taxable profit (tax
loss) for a period. (HKAS 12)
HKAS
12.12,13
1.2 Recognition of current tax liabilities and assets
Topic highlights
Current tax is the amount payable to the tax authorities in relation to the trading activities during
the period. It is generally straightforward.
The amount of tax payable (or receivable) must be calculated and then charged (or credited) to
profit or loss for the period and shown in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income.
Any unpaid tax in respect of the current or prior periods must be recognised as a liability.
Conversely, any excess tax paid in respect of current or prior periods over what is due should be
recognised as an asset.
1.2.1 Over and underprovisions
The year end tax liability (or asset) is generally an estimated amount, not settled until a later date.
It is often the case, therefore, that the liability (or asset) recognised is not equal to the amount
eventually paid (or recovered):
379
Financial Reporting
 Where the estimated tax liability exceeds the tax later paid to the authorities, tax has been
overprovided.
 Where the estimated tax liability is less than the tax later paid to the authorities, tax has been
underprovided.
This under- or over-provision must be adjusted for in the following year’s tax charged to profit or loss:
$
Estimated current year tax charge X
Under/over provision in respect of prior year X/(X)
Income tax charge for the year X
Moorland operates in Hong Kong and is subject to a 16.5% tax rate. In the year ended
31 December 20X1, the company had tax-adjusted profits of $760,000. In the year ended
31 December 20X0, a current year tax liability of $130,000 was recognised; tax subsequently paid
in respect of the year was $126,700.
(a) What amounts are recognised in Moorland’s financial statements in respect of tax in the year
ended 31 December 20X1. You should provide journal entries?
(b) How does your answer change if the tax paid in respect of 20X0 was $131,000?
HKAS 12.14 1.2.2 Tax losses carried back

HKAS 12 also requires recognition as an asset of the benefit relating to any tax loss that can be
carried back to recover current tax of a previous period. This is acceptable because it is probable
that the benefit will flow to the entity and it can be reliably measured. In Hong Kong, tax losses
carried back are not allowed from the tax perspective.
Taxes carried forward are considered in Section 4.4 of this chapter.
Example: Tax losses carried back

Dredger operates in a jurisdiction where trading losses may be carried back one year to offset
against trading profits for the purposes of tax. In the year ended 31 December 20X1, Dredger had
tax-adjusted profits of $126,000; in the following year, the company reported a tax-adjusted loss of
$46,000. Dredger pays tax at 20%.
Required
Calculate the tax effect and prepare the corresponding journal entry for 20X2.
Solution
Tax due on profits in 20X1 is $25,200 ($126,000  20%)
Tax repayment due on losses in 20X2 is $9,200 ($46,000  20%)
The taxable profits of 20X1 are sufficient to absorb the losses of 20X2 and therefore a repayment
for the full $9,200 can be claimed.
The double entry will be:
$ $
DEBIT Tax receivable (statement of financial position) 9,200
CREDIT Tax repayable (statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income) 9,200
The tax receivable will be shown as an asset until the repayment is received from the tax
authorities.
380
HKAS 12.46 1.3 Measurement of current tax

The measurement of current tax liabilities (assets) for the current and prior periods is
straightforward. Their measurement is the amount expected to be paid (or recovered from) the tax
authorities. The enacted (or substantively enacted) tax rates (and tax laws) at the end of reporting
period should be used.
HKAS
12.58,61A
1.4 Recognition of current tax
Current tax payable or repayable is recognised in profit or loss in the period to which it relates.
There are three exceptions to this rule:
(a) Tax arising from a business combination which is an acquisition (refer to sections 10 and
10.4 of this chapter).
(b) Tax arising from a transaction or event recognised in other comprehensive income
(c) Tax arising from a transaction or event recognised directly in equity
If a transaction or event is charged or credited to other comprehensive income or directly to equity,
it is logical to show its related tax in other comprehensive income or equity.
An example of this is where, under HKAS 8, a change in accounting policy that is applied
retrospectively, or a correction of a material prior period error is adjusted to the opening balance of
the retained earnings.
HKAS 12.77 1.5 Presentation of current tax

Tax assets and liabilities should be disclosed distinctly from other assets and liabilities in the
statement of financial position of an entity.
HKAS 12.71 The tax expense (income) relating to the current period should be presented on the face of the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.1.5.1 Offsetting current tax
assets and liabilities
Current tax assets and liabilities can be offset, but this should happen only when certain conditions
apply.
(a) The entity has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts.
(b) The entity intends to settle the amounts on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the
liability at the same time.
An entity may have a right to set off a current tax asset against a current tax liability when they
relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the taxation authority permits the
entity to make or receive a single net payment. The tax expense (income) related to the profit or
loss from ordinary activities should be shown in the statement of profit or loss and other
2 Introduction to deferred tax

Topic highlights
Deferred tax is an accounting measure, used to match the tax effects of transactions with their
accounting impact. It is quite complex.
Deferred tax is an accounting measure which recognises the future tax impact of assets and
liabilities currently held in the statement of financial position. It is important to realise that
deferred tax is not an amount currently payable to the tax authorities, or relevant to tax
practitioners; it is quite simply an accounting adjustment.
381
Financial Reporting
For example, if an entity holds an asset in its statement of financial position, it is reasonable to
assume that at some point in the future that asset will be realised (for example, an amount owed
will be received). At such a time as the asset is realised, tax will be payable on the related income
(assuming that tax arises on the cash receipt rather than when the asset is recognised for
accounting purposes). This tax payable at some point in the future is referred to as a deferred tax
liability.
Example: Deferred tax liability

Lightning Co. owns a non-current asset that cost $300 and has a carrying amount of $200.
Cumulative depreciation for tax purposes (sometimes known as capital allowances) is $180 and
the tax rate is 16.5%.
What is the deferred tax impact?
Solution
To date Lightning Co. has claimed tax depreciation on the asset of $180, and so received tax relief
for this amount.
In the future, as Lightning Co. continues to use the asset, it will recover the $200 carrying amount
of the asset (i.e. it will earn that $200 in revenue – and probably more besides).
Also in the future Lightning Co. will be able to claim a further $120 of tax depreciation ($300 original
cost less the $180 tax relief already claimed). This value for tax purposes is known as the "tax
base".
The net effect in the future is $80 taxable income ($200 carrying amount – $120 tax base). This is
known as a "taxable temporary difference".
When applying a tax rate of 16.5%, tax payable in the future on the net taxable income amounts to
$13.20.
Lightning Co. therefore recognises a deferred tax liability of $13.20.
Equally, if an entity has a liability, and tax relief is provided when payment is actually made to settle
the liability (rather than when the liability is recognised for accounting purposes), then there is a
future tax benefit, known as a deferred tax asset.
Example: Deferred tax asset

Monarchy Co. operates in a jurisdiction where general provisions for bad debts recognised in the
statement of financial position do not benefit from tax relief until such time as they are certified as a
bad debt. Monarchy Co. recognises such a provision in 20X1 for $200,000. It expects to be
certified as a bad debt in two years' time. The company has always paid tax on all income at 16.5%
and does not believe that this will change in the near future.
What is the deferred tax impact?
Solution
 In 20X1, Monarchy recognises a provision for a bad debt (a liability balance and
corresponding accounting expense) of $200,000.
 When the balance is certified as a bad debt (e.g. because the client’s company is liquidated)
Monarchy will be able to reduce taxable profits by the $200,000. This is not expected to
happen until 20X3.
 When the $200,000 is included as an allowable expense within taxable profits, it will result in
a reduction in tax payable of $33,000 ($200,000  16.5%).
382
 The $33,000 is not recognised as a current tax asset (i.e. a receivable) as the benefit is not
yet virtually certain.
 Instead, a deferred tax asset of $33,000 may be recognised in respect of the doubtful debt.
 This asset is only recognised if Monarchy Co. expects to have sufficient profits in two years'
time against which the bad debt expense may be relieved.
The remainder of this section of the chapter provides an overview of the process to recognise and
measure deferred tax. Later sections then consider each of the stages in the process in more
detail.
2.1 Calculation of deferred tax

The HKAS 12 method of calculating deferred tax assets and liabilities is as follows. It is referenced
to the examples in the above section in order to aid understanding:
Asset General provision

for bad debt
1 What is the carrying value of the item in the $200 asset ($200,000)
statement of financial position? provision
Note that for the purposes of this exercise, liabilities
should be regarded as negative amounts.
2 What is the "tax base" of the item? $120 asset Nil
Tax base is defined in the next section, but in (there is no liability
simple terms think of it as the carrying value of the / expense from the
item in a tax version of the statement of financial tax perspective
position. until the case is
certified as bad
debt)
3 What is the difference between carrying value and $80 ($200,000)
tax base – known as temporary difference?
4 What type of temporary difference?
A taxable temporary difference arises where Taxable Deductible
carrying value > tax base.
A deductible temporary difference arises where
tax base > carrying value
5 Apply tax rate to the temporary difference $13.20 $33,000
6 Deferred tax asset or liability?
A deferred tax liability arises from a taxable Liability Asset
temporary difference.
A deferred tax asset arises from a deductible
temporary difference.
The table above includes a number of new terms such as tax base and temporary difference. The
next section considers the HKAS 12 definitions of each of them.
383
Financial Reporting
Key terms
Deferred tax liabilities are the amounts of income taxes payable in future periods in respect of
taxable temporary differences.
Deferred tax assets are the amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of:
 Deductible temporary differences
 The carry forward of unused tax losses
 The carry forward of unused tax credits
Temporary differences are differences between the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the
statement of financial position and its tax base. Temporary differences may be either:
 Taxable temporary differences, which are temporary differences that will result in taxable
amounts in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount
of the asset or liability is recovered or settled; or
 Deductible temporary differences, which are temporary differences that will result in
amounts that are deductible in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the
carrying amount of the asset or liability is recovered or settled.
The tax base of an asset or liability is the amount attributed to that asset or liability for tax
purposes. (HKAS 12)
HKAS 12 provides further guidance on some of the definitions seen above, and sections 2.2.1 to
2.2.3 below consider tax base, temporary differences and deferred tax asset/liability in turn.
HKAS 12.7 2.2.1 Tax base
The tax base of an asset is the amount that will be deductible for tax purposes against any
taxable economic benefits that will flow to the entity when it recovers the carrying amount of the
asset.
Where those economic benefits are not taxable, the tax base of the asset is the same as its
carrying amount.
Make sure that you understand this idea by attempting the following self-test question.
State the tax base of each of the following assets:
(a) Interest receivable has a carrying amount of $1,000. The related interest revenue is not
taxable.
(b) Dividends receivable from a subsidiary have a carrying amount of $5,000. The dividends are
not taxable.
(c) A machine cost $10,000. For tax purposes, depreciation of $3,000 has already been
deducted in the current and prior periods and the remaining cost will be deductible in future
periods, either as depreciation or through a deduction on disposal. Revenue generated by
using the machine is taxable, any gain on disposal of the machine will be taxable and any
loss on disposal will be deductible for tax purposes.
(d) Trade receivables have a carrying amount of $10,000. The related revenue has already
been included in taxable profit (tax loss).
(e) A loan receivable has a carrying amount of $1 million. There are no tax consequences for
repayment of the loan.
384
HKAS 12.8 The tax base of a liability is its carrying amount, less any amount that will be deductible for tax
purposes in relation to the liability in future periods.
For revenue received in advance, the tax base of the resulting liability is its carrying amount, less
any amount of the revenue that will not be taxable in future periods.
State the tax base of each of the following liabilities:
(a) Current liabilities include accrued expenses with a carrying amount of $1,000. The related
expense will be deducted for tax purposes on an accrual basis.
(b) Current liabilities include revenue received in advance, with a carrying amount of $1,000.
The related revenue was taxed on an accrual basis.
(c) Current liabilities include accrued fines and penalties with a carrying amount of $100. Fines
and penalties are not deductible for tax purposes.
(d) A loan payable has a carrying amount of $1 million. There are no tax consequences for
repayment of the loan.
HKAS 12, HKAS 12 gives the following examples of circumstances in which the carrying amount of an asset
Illustrative or liability will be equal to its tax base.
Examples
 Accrued expenses have already been deducted in determining an entity's current tax
liability for the current or earlier periods.
 A loan payable is measured at the amount originally received and this amount is the same
as the amount repayable on final maturity of the loan.
 Accrued expenses will never be deductible for tax purposes.
 Accrued income will never be taxable.
2.2.2 Temporary differences

As we have already seen, a temporary difference (which may be taxable or deductible) arises
where there is a difference between the carrying amount of item and its tax base:
 Where carrying amount > tax base there is a taxable temporary difference
 Where carrying amount < tax base there is a deductible temporary difference
The approach to calculating temporary differences provided within HKAS 12 is known as a
"balance sheet approach". This is because the carrying amount of an item is found in the statement
of financial position and the tax base of an item is in effect its carrying amount for tax purposes.
It may be easier to think about the reason for deferred tax from a profit or loss point of view instead
(remembering that assets and liabilities are of course related to income and expenses!).
Accounting profits and taxable profits are different, as you will know from your tax studies. There
are two reasons for the differences:
(a) Permanent differences occur when revenue or expenses included in accounting profits are
excluded from the computation of taxable profits (for example, client entertainment expenses
may not be allowable for tax purposes).
(b) Temporary differences occur when revenue or expenses are included in both accounting
profits and taxable profits, but in different accounting periods. We have already seen two
examples of this – where depreciation on an asset is charged faster for tax purposes than for
accounting purposes, and where a provision is recognised as an expense when payable but
does not benefit from tax relief until paid.
385
Financial Reporting
In the long run, there is no difference between total taxable profits and total accounting profits
(except for permanent differences) so that temporary differences originate in one period and will be
reversed in one or more subsequent periods. Deferred tax is caused by temporary differences.
Sections 3 and 4 of this chapter consider taxable and deductible temporary differences in more detail.
2.2.3 Deferred tax assets and liabilities
Temporary differences give rise to deferred tax liabilities and assets:
 A taxable temporary difference results in a deferred tax liability.
 A deductible temporary difference results in a deferred tax asset.
Deferred tax assets also arise from unused tax losses that tax law allows to be carried forward.
HKAS 12.47 2.3 Measurement of deferred tax

A deferred tax asset or liability is measured by applying the tax rate to the temporary difference
calculated.
The tax rate applied to the temporary difference should be that which is expected to apply to the
period when the asset is realised or the liability is settled, based on tax laws in place by the
reporting date.
More detailed measurement rules are provided in Section 5 of this chapter.
HKAS 12.58 2.4 Recognition of deferred tax

Deferred tax assets and liabilities relating to all temporary differences should be aggregated and
the overall deferred tax liability or asset recorded in the financial statements.
From year to year, only the movement in this amount is recorded. The opposite entry is to the
deferred tax charge, which forms part of the overall tax charge in the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income.
More detailed recognition rules are provided in Section 6 of this chapter.
Example: Deferred tax

The following is relevant to Casares Co. in the year ended 31 December 20X1:
 Non-current assets originally cost $780,000. Accumulated depreciation to date is $210,000
and tax allowances given amount to $320,000 on a cumulative basis.
 Interest receivable in Casares' statement of financial position is $160,000. This will not be
taxed until it is received in the year ended 31 December 20X2.
 A provision for $98,000 for legal expenses payable is included in the statement of financial
position. This will not be allowable for tax purposes until it is paid in the year ended
31 December 20X2.
The tax rate applicable to Casares is 16.5%, and since all tax arises within the same taxation
authority deferred tax assets and liabilities may be offset.
At 31 December 20X0 the deferred tax liability reported in Casares' financial statements was
$22,430.
Required
Calculate amounts to be recognised in Casares’ financial statements in respect of deferred tax in
the year ended 31 December 20X1.
386
Solution
First, the deferred tax asset or liability must be considered for each of the items separately:
Non-current assets
Carrying amount (780,000 – 210,000) $570,000
Tax base (780,000 – 320,000) $460,000
Temporary difference $110,000
Taxable or deductible? Taxable since CA > TB
Deferred tax liability (110,000  16.5%) $18,150
Interest receivable
Carrying amount $160,000
Tax base $nil *
Deferred tax liability (160,000  16.5%) $26,400
*The tax base of an asset is the amount that will be deductible for tax purposes in the future. Here
nothing will be deductible – instead an amount will be taxable.
Provision
Carrying amount ($98,000)
Tax base $nil **
Taxable or deductible? Deductible since CA < TB
Deferred tax asset (98,000  16.5%) $16,170
** The tax base of a liability is its carrying amount ($98,000) less any amount deductible for tax
purposes in the future ($98,000).
In summary therefore:
$
Deferred tax liability 1 18,150
Deferred tax liability 2 26,400
Deferred tax asset (16,170)
Net deferred tax liability 28,380
The increase in deferred tax liability since 31 December 20X0 is $5,950 (28,380 – 22,430) and this
is accounted for by:
$ $
DEBIT Tax charge 5,950
CREDIT Deferred tax liability 5,950
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR CASARES
$
Tax charge – deferred tax 5,950
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION FOR CASARES AT 31 DECEMBER 20X1
$
Deferred tax liability 28,380
387
Financial Reporting
3 Taxable temporary differences

Topic highlights
Deferred tax liabilities arise from taxable temporary differences.
Remember the basic rule that a taxable temporary difference arises where the carrying amount of
an item in the statement of financial position exceeds its tax base, and this taxable temporary
difference results in a deferred tax liability.
Try to understand the reasoning behind the recognition of deferred tax liabilities on taxable
temporary differences.
(a) When an asset is recognised, it is expected that its carrying amount will be recovered in
the form of economic benefits that flow to the entity in future periods.
(b) If the carrying amount of the asset is greater than its tax base, then taxable economic benefits
will also be greater than the amount that will be allowed as a deduction for tax purposes.
(c) The difference is therefore a taxable temporary difference and the obligation to pay the
resulting income taxes in future periods is a deferred tax liability.
(d) As the entity recovers the carrying amount of the asset, the taxable temporary difference will
reverse and the entity will have taxable profit.
(e) It is then probable that economic benefits will flow from the entity in the form of tax
payments, and so the recognition of all deferred tax liabilities (except those excluded below)
is required by HKAS 12.
The following are examples of circumstances that give rise to taxable temporary differences.
HKAS 12, 3.1 Examples of taxable temporary differences

Illustrative
Examples HKAS 12 provides a number of examples of situations where taxable temporary differences may arise.
3.1.1 Transactions affecting the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income
(a) Depreciation of an asset is accelerated for tax purposes. When new assets are purchased,
allowances may be available against taxable profits which exceed the amount of
depreciation chargeable on the assets in the financial accounts.
(b) Development costs which have been capitalised will be amortised in profit or loss, but they
were deducted in full from taxable profit in the period in which they were incurred.
Example: Taxable temporary differences (1)
Leeming Bar Co. is engaged in research and development activities. In the year ended 31 August
20X2, the company spent $740,000 on such activities. $310,000 of this meets the requirements of
HKAS 38 and has been capitalised. To date no amortisation has been charged. For tax purposes
the full $740,000 qualifies for 100% relief in the year of expenditure. The applicable tax rate is
16.5%.
Required
What is the deferred tax impact of this expenditure?
Solution
Tax base $nil *
Therefore deferred tax liability (310,000  $51,150
16.5%)
388
*The tax base of an asset is the amount that will be deductible for tax purposes in the future. Here
nothing will be deductible in the future as tax relief has already been given.
HKAS 12, 3.1.2 Transactions that affect the statement of financial position
Illustrative
Examples (a) Depreciation of an asset is not deductible for tax purposes. No deduction will be available
for tax purposes when the asset is sold/scrapped.
(b) A borrower records a loan at proceeds received (amount due at maturity) less transaction
costs. The carrying amount of the loan is subsequently increased by amortisation of the
transaction costs against accounting profit. The transaction costs were, however, deducted
for tax purposes in the period when the loan was first recognised.
(c) A loan payable is measured on initial recognition at net proceeds (net of transaction costs).
The transaction costs are amortised to accounting profit over the life of the loan. Those
transaction costs are not deductible in determining the taxable profit of future, current or prior
periods.
(d) The liability component of a compound financial instrument (e.g. a convertible bond) is
measured at a discount to the amount repayable on maturity, after assigning a portion of the
cash proceeds to the equity component (see HKAS 32). The discount is not deductible in
determining taxable profit.
(e) Development costs may be capitalised and amortised over future periods in determining
accounting profit but deducted in determining taxable profit in the period in which they are
incurred. Such development costs have a tax base of nil as they have already been
deducted from taxable profit. The temporary difference is the difference between the carrying
amount of the development costs and their tax base of nil.
Example: Taxable temporary differences (2)

A company purchased a machine for production costing $200,000. At the end of 20X9 the carrying
amount is $120,000. The total depreciation allowance for tax purposes is $90,000 and the current
tax rate is 16.5%.
Required
Calculate the deferred tax liability for the machinery.
Solution
Tax base (200,000 – 90,000) $110,000
Therefore deferred tax liability (10,000  16.5%) $1,650
The logic behind this liability is as follows: In order to recover the carrying amount of $120,000, the
entity must earn taxable income of $120,000, but it will only be able to deduct $110,000 as a
taxable expense. The entity must therefore pay income tax of $10,000  16.5% = $1,650 when the
carrying amount of the asset is recovered.
HKAS 12.20 3.1.3 Fair value adjustments and revaluations

In the following examples, an asset in the statement of financial position is adjusted to be carried at
fair value, however such an adjustment is not made for tax purposes and original cost remains the
tax base.
389
Financial Reporting
(a) Current investments or financial instruments carried at fair value.

(b) Investment properties carried at fair value.
In the case of revalued property, plant and equipment, there is a taxable temporary difference
only where the revaluation does not affect current taxable profits.
If the revaluation affects the taxable profit for the current period, the tax base of the asset changes
to become equal to fair value (and so carrying value) and no temporary difference arises.
Example: Revaluation
During the year ended 31 December 20X1, Marshall revalues a non-current asset to $8,000,000.
The asset cost $6,000,000 three years ago and was being depreciated at 2% straight line. Capital
allowances were available at 4% straight line. Marshall’s rate of tax is 16.5%.
What deferred tax arises on the revaluation in 20X1, assuming that the revaluation gain is not
taxable in 20X1?
Solution
$'000
Carrying value of non-current asset prior to revaluation
($6,000,000  94%) 5,640
Revalued amount 8,000
Taxable temporary difference = revaluation gain 2,360
Therefore deferred tax liability (16.5%  2.36m) 389.4
HKAS
12.21,22
3.2 Taxable temporary differences which do not result in deferred
tax liabilities
There are two circumstances given in the standard where a taxable temporary difference does
not result in a deferred tax liability:
(a) The deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of goodwill.
(b) The deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a
transaction which:
(i) Is not a business combination (see Section 8)
(ii) At the time of the transaction affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit (tax
loss)
HKAS 12.22 3.2.1 Initial recognition of an asset or liability
A temporary difference can arise on initial recognition of an asset or liability, e.g. if part or all of the
cost of an asset will not be deductible for tax purposes. The nature of the transaction which led to
the initial recognition of the asset is important in determining the method of accounting for such
temporary differences.
If the transaction affects either accounting profit or taxable profit, an entity will recognise any
deferred tax liability or asset. The resulting deferred tax expense or income will be recognised in
profit or loss.
Where a transaction affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit it would be normal for an
entity to recognise a deferred tax liability or asset and adjust the carrying amount of the asset or
liability by the same amount. However, HKAS 12 does not permit this recognition of a deferred tax
asset or liability as it would make the financial statements less transparent. This will be the case
both on initial recognition and subsequently, nor should any subsequent changes in the
unrecognised deferred tax liability or asset as the asset is depreciated be made.
390
An example of the initial recognition of an asset in a transaction which does not affect either
accounting or taxable profit at the time of the transaction is an intangible asset with a finite life
which attracts no tax allowances. In this case, taxable profit is never affected, and amortisation is
only charged to accounting profit after the transaction.
Example: Initial recognition

As an example of the last paragraph, suppose Perris Co. intends to use an asset which cost
$10,000 in 20X7 through its useful life of five years. Its residual value will then be nil. The tax rate is
16.5%. Any capital gain on disposal would not be taxable (and any capital loss not deductible).
Depreciation of the asset is not deductible for tax purposes.
Required
State the deferred tax consequences in each of years 20X7 and 20X8.
Solution
As at 20X7, as it recovers the carrying amount of the asset, Perris Co. will earn taxable income of
$10,000 and pay tax of $1,650. The resulting deferred tax liability of $1,650 would not be
recognised because it results from the initial recognition of the asset.
As at 20X8, the carrying value of the asset is now $8,000. In earning taxable income of $8,000, the
entity will pay tax of $1,320. Again, the resulting deferred tax liability of $1,320 is not recognised,
because it results from the initial recognition of the asset.
The following question on accelerated depreciation should clarify some of the issues and introduce
you to the calculations.
Jojo Co. buys equipment for $50,000 on 1 January 20X1 and depreciates it on a straight line basis
over its expected useful life of five years. For tax purposes, the equipment is depreciated at 25%
per annum on a straight line basis. The tax rate is 15%.
Required
Show the current and deferred tax impact in years 20X1 to 20X5 of the acquisition of the
equipment.
4 Deductible temporary differences

Topic highlights
Deferred tax assets arise from deductible temporary differences.
The standard states that deferred tax assets can only be recognised when sufficient future
taxable profits exist against which they can be utilised.
Remember the basic rule that a deductible temporary difference arises where the carrying amount
of an asset or liability is less than its tax base, and this deductible temporary difference normally
results in a deferred tax asset.
Try to understand the reasoning behind the recognition of deferred tax assets on taxable
temporary differences:
(a) When a liability is recognised, it is assumed that its carrying amount will be settled in the
form of outflows of economic benefits from the entity in future periods.
391
Financial Reporting
(b) When these resources flow from the entity, part or all may be deductible in determining
taxable profits of a period later than that in which the liability is recognised.
(c) A temporary tax difference then exists between the carrying amount of the liability and its
tax base.
(d) A deferred tax asset therefore arises, representing the income taxes that will be
recoverable in future periods when that part of the liability is allowed as a deduction from
taxable profit.
(e) Similarly, when the carrying amount of an asset is less than its tax base, the difference
gives rise to a deferred tax asset in respect of the income taxes that will be recoverable in
future periods.
The following are common examples of situations that result in a deductible temporary difference.
HKAS 12,
Illustrative
4.1 Examples of deductible temporary differences
Examples HKAS 12 provides a number of examples of deductible temporary differences.
4.1.1 Transactions affecting the statement of profit or loss and other
(a) Retirement benefit costs (pension costs) are deducted from accounting profit as service is
provided by the employee. They are not deducted in determining taxable profit until the entity
pays either retirement benefits or contributions to a fund. (This may also apply to similar
expenses.)
(b) Accumulated depreciation of an asset in the financial statements is greater than the
accumulated depreciation allowed for tax purposes up to the end of the reporting period.
(c) The net realisable value of inventory, or the recoverable amount of an item of property,
plant and equipment falls and the carrying value is therefore reduced, but that reduction is
ignored for tax purposes until the asset is sold.
(d) Research costs (or organisation/other start-up costs) are recognised as an expense for
accounting purposes but are not deductible against taxable profits until a later period.
(e) Income is deferred in the statement of financial position, but has already been included in
taxable profit in current/prior periods.
A non-taxable government grant related to an asset is deducted in arriving at the carrying amount
of the asset but, for tax purpose, is not deducted from the asset’s depreciable amount (in other
words its tax base); the carrying amount of the asset is less than its tax base and this gives rise to
a deductible temporary difference. Government grants may also be set up as deferred income in
which case the difference between the deferred income and its tax base of nil is a deductible
temporary difference. (Note. Whichever method of presentation an entity adopts, a deferred tax
asset may not be recognised here according to the standard.)
Example: Deductible temporary differences (1)

Teide Co. owns a specialised machine which originally cost $4,000,000. In the year ended
31 October 20X2 as the result of economic recession, Teide undertook an impairment review and
found that the recoverable amount of the machine was $2,600,000, this being $800,000 lower than
carrying amount. At 31 October 20X2, tax allowances given in respect of the machine amounted to
$1,000,000.
Required
What amount of deferred tax is recognised in respect of the machine at 31 October 20X2?
392
Solution
Carrying amount (recoverable amount) $2,600,000
Tax base (4,000,000 – 1,000,000) $3,000,000
Therefore deferred tax asset (400,000  16.5%) $66,000
4.1.2 Fair value adjustments and revaluations

A fair value which is lower than cost may be shown for current investments or financial instruments.
However, no equivalent adjustment for tax is to be made.
HKAS 12.27-
30
4.2 Recognition of deferred tax assets
Although the circumstances listed above will result in a deductible temporary difference, they will
not necessarily result in a deferred tax asset.
This is because the recognition criteria of HKAS 12 state that a deferred tax asset can only be
recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which it can
be utilised.
4.2.1 Sufficient taxable profit
When can we be sure that sufficient taxable profit will be available against which a deductible
temporary difference can be utilised? HKAS 12 states that this will be assumed when sufficient
taxable temporary differences exist which relate to the same taxation authority and the same
taxable entity. These should be expected to reverse as follows:
(a) In the same period as the expected reversal of the deductible temporary difference.
(b) In periods into which a tax loss arising from the deferred tax asset can be carried back
or forward.
Only in these circumstances is the deferred tax asset recognised, in the period in which the
deductible temporary differences arise.
4.2.2 Insufficient taxable profit
What happens when there are insufficient taxable temporary differences (relating to the same
taxation authority and the same taxable entity)? It may still be possible to recognise the deferred
tax asset, but only to the following extent.
(a) Taxable profits are sufficient in the same period as the reversal of the deductible temporary
difference (or in the periods into which a tax loss arising from the deferred tax asset can be
carried forward or backward), ignoring taxable amounts arising from deductible temporary
differences arising in future periods.
(b) Tax planning opportunities exist that will allow the entity to create taxable profit in the
appropriate periods.
With reference to (b), tax planning opportunities are actions that an entity would take in order to
create or increase taxable income in a particular period before the expiry of a tax loss or tax credit
carry forward. For example, in some countries it may be possible to increase or create taxable
profit by electing to have interest income taxed on either a received or receivable basis, or
deferring the claim for certain deductions from taxable profit.
In any case, where tax planning opportunities advance taxable profit from a later period to an
earlier period, the utilisation of a tax loss or a tax credit carry forward will still depend on the
existence of future taxable profit from sources other than future originating temporary differences.
393
Financial Reporting
If an entity has a history of recent losses, then this is evidence that future taxable profit may not
be available.
Example: Deductible temporary differences (2)

Rombauld Co. recognises a liability of $75,000 for accrued product warranty costs on 31 December
20X1. These product warranty costs will not be deductible for tax purposes until the entity pays
claims. The tax rate is 16.5%.
Required
State the deferred tax implications of this situation.
Solution
Carrying amount ($75,000)
Tax base $nil *
Therefore deferred tax asset (75,000  16.5%) $12,375
*The tax base of the liability is nil (carrying amount of $75,000 less the $75,000 that will be
deductible for tax purposes when the warranty costs are paid).
The logic behind this is as follows: when the liability is settled for its carrying amount, the entity's
future taxable profit will be reduced by $75,000 and so its future tax payments by $75,000  16.5%
= $12,375.
4.3 Deductible temporary differences which do not result in

deferred tax assets
HKAS 12.33 4.3.1 Initial recognition of an asset or liability
There are circumstances where the overall rule for recognition of deferred tax asset is not allowed.
This applies where the deferred tax asset arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a
transaction which is not a business combination, and at the time of the transaction, affects neither
accounting nor taxable profit/tax loss.
The example given by the standard is of a non-taxable government grant related to an asset,
deducted in arriving at the carrying amount of the asset. For tax purposes, however, it is not
deducted from the asset's depreciable amount (i.e. its tax base). The carrying amount of the asset
is less than its tax base and this gives rise to a deductible temporary difference, however this is not
recognised as a deferred tax asset.
HKAS 12.34-
36
4.4 Tax losses and credits carried forward
HKAS 12 states that a deferred tax asset may be recognised by an entity which has unused tax
losses or credits (i.e. which it can offset against taxable profits) at the end of a period, to the extent
that it is probable future taxable profits will be available to set off the unused tax losses/credits.
The recognition criteria for deferred tax assets here is identical to the recognition criteria for
deferred tax assets arising from deductible differences. The fact that future taxable profits may not
be available is confirmed by the existence of unused tax losses. For an entity with a past record of
recent tax losses, a deferred tax asset arising from unused tax losses or credits should be
recognised only to the extent that it has adequate taxable temporary differences or where it is
certain that taxable profit will be available to set off the unused losses/credits.
394
The following are important criteria for assessing the probability that taxable profit will be available
against which unused tax losses/credits can be utilised:
 Availability of sufficient taxable temporary differences (same tax authority/taxable entity)
against which unused tax losses/credits can be utilised before they expire
 The likelihood that the entity will have taxable profits before the expiry of the unused tax
losses/credits
 The unlikely recurrence of unused tax losses resulting from identifiable causes
 Availability of tax planning opportunities (see above)
Deferred tax asset is not recognised if it is probable that taxable profit will not be available.
Example: Taxable profit not available

Jerome Co. has made trading profits for a number of years, however due to an economic downturn
in the first half of the year, reported a taxable loss of $270,000 in the year ended 31 December
20X1. In accordance with local tax law, Jerome intends to carry $130,000 of this back to 20X0 to
set against the taxable profits of that year, and carrying the remaining $140,000 forward
indefinitely. By the end of 20X1, management had identified an upturn in orders and felt that
Jerome would return to profit in 20X2.
What is the deferred tax impact, if any, of Jerome’s losses?
Jerome pays tax at 16.5%.
Solution
 The $130,000 carried back to 20X0 is relevant to current tax rather than deferred tax, and a
receivable of $21,450 should be recognised.
 It appears that the $140,000 carried forward will be able to be utilised by Jerome and
therefore a deferred tax asset of $23,100 can be recognised (16.5%  $140,000).
HKAS 12.37 4.5 Reassessment of unrecognised deferred tax assets

An entity should carry out a reassessment for all unrecognised deferred tax assets at the end of
each reporting period. The availability of future taxable profits and whether part or all of any
unrecognised deferred tax assets should now be recognised are the issues to be considered. This
may be due to an expected continuation in improvement of trading conditions. Conversely, a
previously recognised deferred tax asset may require decreasing or derecognising where future
taxable profits are no longer available.

The IASB issued ED/2014/3 Recognition of Deferred Tax Assets for Unrealised Losses in June 2014.
It proposed to amend IAS 12 (HKAS 12 ) to clarify that:
 Unrealised losses on debt instruments measured at fair value for accounting purposes and
at cost for tax purposes can give rise to deductible temporary differences. This is regardless
of whether the holder expects to recover the carrying amount of the debt instrument by
holding it until maturity or by through sale.
 Taxable profit against which an entity assesses a deferred tax asset for recognition is the
amount before any reversal of deductible temporary differences
395
Financial Reporting
5 Measurement of deferred tax

Topic highlights
A deferred tax asset or liability is measured by applying the tax rate which is expected to apply to
the period when the asset is realised or the liability is settled to the temporary difference. The
resulting amount is not discounted.
5.1 Full provision method

HKAS 12 adopts the full provision method of providing for deferred tax, in other words deferred tax
is provided for on all temporary differences, irrespective of the future plans of an entity.
This method has the advantage that it recognises that each temporary difference at the year end
has an effect on future tax payments. The disadvantage of full provision is that, under certain
types of tax system, it gives rise to large liabilities that may fall due only far in the future.
HKAS 12.47
5.2 Applicable tax rate
Where the tax rate fluctuates year to year, consideration must be given to which tax rate to apply
to temporary differences in calculating a deferred tax asset or liability.
HKAS 12 requires deferred tax assets and liabilities to be measured at the tax rates expected to
apply in the period when the asset is realised or liability settled, based on tax rates and laws
enacted (or substantively enacted) at the end of the reporting period.
This is referred to as the liability method.
HKAS 12.49 5.2.1 Different rates of tax
Some countries apply different tax rates to different levels of taxable income. Average tax rates
should then be used to measure the deferred tax assets and liabilities since these rates are
expected to be applied to the taxable profit (loss) of the periods in which the temporary differences
are expected to reverse.
HKAS 5.2.2 Manner of recovery or settlement
12.51,51A
In some jurisdictions either the tax rate or the tax base will differ depending on the way in which an
entity recovers or settles the carrying amount of an asset or liability.
For example, the tax rate applicable to income from the ongoing use of an asset may differ from
the tax rate applicable to a chargeable gain on its sale.
In this instance the entity must consider the expected manner of recovery or settlement. Deferred
tax liabilities and assets must be measured accordingly, using an appropriate tax rate and tax
base.
Example: Manner of recovery/settlement

Clio Co. has an asset with a carrying amount of $100,000 and a tax base of $60,000. If the asset
were sold, a tax rate of 18% would apply. A tax rate of 25% would apply to other income.
Required
State the deferred tax consequences if the entity:
(a) Sells the asset without further use.
(b) Expects to keep the asset and recover its carrying amount through use.
396
Solution
(a) A deferred tax liability is recognised of $(100,000 – 60,000)  18% = $7,200.
(b) A deferred tax liability is recognised of $(100,000 – 60,000)  25% = $10,000.
HKAS 12.51C In 2010, HKAS 12 was amended to include a rebuttable presumption that deferred tax on
investment properties carried at fair value under HKAS 40 should be measured based on recovery
through sale rather than use. The amendment was intended to avoid any subjective assessment in
trying to decide whether the carrying amount of an investment property will be recovered through
use or through sale.
As there is no capital gains tax in Hong Kong, this amendment will generally result in the deferred
tax liability on such investment properties being limited to the tax effect of any claw back on sale of
any depreciation allowances previously given. No deferred tax arises in respect of the excess of
fair value over cost.
Example
A company based in Hong Kong owns an investment property with a fair value carrying amount of
$10 million. The property cost $9 million. The tax base of the property is $8 million and the tax rate
on income is 16.5%.
Prior to the amendment to HKAS 12, if it were presumed that the carrying value of the property
would be recovered through use, the deferred tax liability would have been $330,000 (16.5% 
($10 million – $8 million)).
The amendment, however, means that it is presumed that the carrying value will be recovered
through sale. Therefore, the deferred tax liability is restricted to the excess of allowances given
i.e. $165,000 (16.5%  ($9million – $8million)).
The presumption is rebutted where the investment property is depreciable and is held with the
intention of consuming substantially all the economic benefits of the property through use rather
than sale, in other words, where the entity expects the asset’s income-generating ability to wear out
while the asset is still owned by the entity.
Crescent Co. owns a building with an original cost of $10m. In 20X1, the carrying value was $8m
and the asset was revalued to $15m. No equivalent adjustment was made for tax purposes. Total
depreciation allowance for tax purposes is $3m and the tax rate is 30%. If the asset is sold for more
than cost, the total tax depreciation allowance of $3m will be included in taxable income but sale
proceeds in excess of cost will not be taxable.
Required
(a) Expects to recover the carrying value through use,
(b) Expects to sell the building.
397
Financial Reporting
The facts are as in Self-test question 5 above, except that if the building is sold for more than cost,
the total tax depreciation allowance will be included in taxable income (taxed at 30%) and the sale
proceeds will be taxed at 40% after deducting an inflation-adjusted cost of $11m.
Required
(a) Expects to recover the carrying value through use,
(b) Expects to sell the building.
If the tax base is not immediately apparent in Self-test question 6 above, it may be helpful to
consider the fundamental principle of HKAS 12: that an entity should recognise a deferred tax
liability (asset) whenever recovery or settlement of the carrying amount of an asset or liability would
make future tax payments larger (smaller) than they would be if such recovery or settlement would
have no consequences.
HKAS
12.53,54 5.3 Discounting
The standard does not allow deferred tax assets and liabilities to be discounted. This is because
the complexities and difficulties involved will affect reliability.
Discounting would require detailed scheduling of the timing of the reversal of each temporary
difference, but this is often impracticable. In addition, if discounting were permitted, it would affect
comparability.
It is, however the case that some temporary differences are based on discounted amounts e.g.
retirement benefit obligations.
6 Recognition of deferred tax

HKAS As with current tax, deferred tax is normally recognised as income or an expense and included in
12.58,61A the profit or loss for the period. The amount recognised comprises:
(a) Deferred tax relating to temporary differences.
(b) Adjustments arising as a result of changes in the carrying amount of deferred tax assets and
liabilities due to changes in the tax rates, reassessment of the recoverability of deferred tax
assets or a change in the expected recovery of an asset.
The exceptions to recognition of deferred tax in profit or loss are where the tax arises from the
events below.
(a) A transaction or event which is recognised in other comprehensive income e.g. a
revaluation.
(b) A transaction or event which is recognised (in the same or a different period) directly in
equity e.g. the correction of an error.
(c) A business combination (other than the acquisition by an investment entity of a subsidiary
that is required to be measured at fair value through profit or loss) (see Section 10.4 of the
chapter).
Where transactions or events are recognised in other comprehensive income or directly in equity,
the related tax is also recognised in other comprehensive income or directly in equity.
Where it is not possible to determine the amount of tax that relates to items recognised in other
comprehensive income or directly in equity, such tax amounts should be based on a reasonable
pro rata allocation of the entity's tax.
398
Antenna Exports Co acquired shares in another company for $75 million on 15 March 20X4. The
company intends to hold the shares for several years and has made an election to measure them
at fair value through other comprehensive income. The shares have a fair value of $82 million at 31
December 20X4.
Antenna Exports Co pays tax at 17% and unrealised gains are taxed when the underlying item is
sold.
Required
Discuss the tax implications of the investment in the year ended 31 December 20X4.
7 Presentation of deferred tax

HKAS 12.74 Deferred tax assets and liabilities can be offset only if:
(a) The entity has a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax
liabilities, and
(b) The deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation
authority on either:
(i) The same taxable entity, or
(ii) Different taxable entities which intend either to settle current tax liabilities and assets
on a net basis, or to realise the assets and settle the liabilities simultaneously, in each
future period in which significant amounts of deferred tax liabilities or assets are
expected to be settled or recovered.
399
Financial Reporting
8 Summary flowchart
The following flowchart will help to summarise the approach to deferred tax that we have seen
throughout sections 2 to 7 of the chapter.
Is the item’s tax base different from its No No deferred tax implications
carrying value in the statement of
financial position?
Yes
Calculate the temporary difference

between the tax base and carrying
value of the item.
Does a taxable temporary difference No Is it probable that taxable

result (this is the case where tax base profits will be available in the
< carrying value) future against which the
deductible temporary
difference can be used?
Yes No
Apply the relevant tax rate to the A deferred tax asset is not
temporary difference. recognised in the financial
statements but the related
deductible temporary
difference should be disclosed.
Recognise the movement in the .

deferred tax asset/liability in:
 Profit or loss
 Other comprehensive income
 Equity (directly)
depending on where the underlying
transaction/event is recognised.
Offset the individual deferred tax

assets and liabilities only where there
is a legally enforceable right and they
relate to the same taxation authority.
400
The new financial controller of Gerard Callagher Co (‘GCC’) has been asked to work on the
calculation of the deferred tax balance for one of the company’s oversea’s subsidiaries for inclusion
in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X4. The subsidiary’s functional
currency is the Hong Kong Dollar. The balance on the deferred tax liability account of the
subsidiary at 31 December 20X3 was $2,300,800. The following information has been made
available to the financial controller.
1. The subsidiary has a small administrative office that was acquired in 20X1 at a cost of $60m.
Since its acquisition, the subsidiary has adopted a policy of revaluing property and the office
has a carrying amount of $70m at 31 December 20X4. A revaluation surplus of $14.2m was
recognised in the year.
2. The subsidiary’s manufacturing operations are run from a factory that cost $44m in 20W8,
with $26m of the cost attributable to the land on which the factory stands. The property has a
carrying amount of $15,840,500 at 31 December 20X4. The fair value of the property is
$15.85m. As this is substantially equal to the carrying amount, a revaluation surplus has not
been recognised.
3. On 31 March 2014, the company invested $9,500,000 in energy saving equipment for its
factory. This was determined to have a 10-year useful life.
4. The financial controller has increased the allowance for receivables from $1,800,000 to
$2,700,000. In addition, a specific allowance has been made for 75% of the $1,200,000
owed by a customer in financial difficulties. These allowances have been accounted for
correctly.
5. During the year, machinery at the subsidiary’s manufacturing premises malfunctioned,
resulting in excessive carbon emissions. As a result, the company was fined $250,000.
You have, from conversations with the tax department, gathered the following points about the
jurisdiction in which the subsidiary operates:
1. Industrial buildings built before 20X0 qualify for an industrial buildings allowance. This is 25%
of cost in the year of acquisition and 3% of cost on an annual basis thereafter. Neither
commercial property nor industrial buildings acquired after 20X0 qualify for tax allowances.
2. Energy saving equipment benefits from 100% tax relief in the year of acquisition.
3. Tax relief is provided on specific allowances for doubtful receivables when the allowance is
made; otherwise relief is provided only when an amount becomes irrecoverable.
4. Fines and penalties do not benefit from tax relief.
5. The corporate income tax rate is 28%.
6. Capital gains are not taxable.
7. Current tax assets and liabilities may be offset.
Required
Explain the deferred tax effect of each outstanding issue and calculate amounts to be recognised in
the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X4 in respect of deferred tax.
401
Financial Reporting
9 Disclosure of income taxes

The following disclosures are required in relation to income taxes:
1 The major components of tax expense in profit or loss, including the following:
(a) Current tax expense.
(b) Adjustments recognised in the period for the current tax of previous periods.
(c) The amount of deferred tax expense (income) relating to the origination and reversal
of temporary differences.
(d) The amount of deferred tax expense (income) relating to changes in tax rates or the
imposition of new taxes.
2 The aggregate deferred tax relating to items that are charged or credited directly to equity.
3 The amount of income tax (including deferred tax) relating to each component of other
4 An explanation of the relationship between tax expense and accounting profit in either or
both of the following forms:
(a) A numerical reconciliation between tax expense and the product of accounting profit
multiplied by the applicable tax rate(s), or
(b) A numerical reconciliation between the average effective tax rate and the applicable
tax rate.
5 An explanation of changes in the applicable tax rate(s) compared to the previous accounting
period.
6 The amount (and expiry date, if any) of deductible temporary differences, unused tax losses
and unused tax credits for which no deferred tax asset is recognised in the statement of
financial position.
7 In respect of each type of temporary difference:
(a) The amount of deferred tax assets and liabilities recognised in the statement of
financial position.
(b) The amount of deferred tax income or expense recognised in profit or loss.
8 The amount of a deferred tax asset and the nature of evidence supporting its recognition when:
(a) The utilisation of the deferred tax asset is dependent on future taxable profits in
excess of the profits arising from the reversal of existing taxable temporary
differences, and
(b) The entity has suffered a loss in either the current or preceding period in the tax
jurisdiction to which the deferred tax asset relates.
Illustration
The following are illustrative tax expense and deferred tax disclosure notes:
Income tax expense
Income tax recognised in profit or loss
Year ended 31 Year ended 31
December 20X3 December 20X2
$’000 $’000
Current tax 1,230 1,089
Under/(over) provision in prior year (12) 25
Deferred tax (70) (192)
Total income tax recognised in profit or loss 1,148 922
402
Hong Kong Profits Tax is calculated at 16.5% of the estimated assessable profit for both years.
Deferred tax
The following are the major deferred tax liabilities and assets recognised by the company and
movements thereon during the current and prior reporting periods:
Recognised Recognised Recognised
At in profit or in other At in profit or At 31
1 January loss comprehens Exchange 31 Decemb loss Exchange December
20X2 ive income differences er 20X2 differences 20X3
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Deferred tax assets

Property, plant and 33 (33) – – – – – –
equipment
Provisions 460 (105) – 355 (15) – 340
Tax loss carry-forward 49 113 – (2) 120 63 1 184
Other items 28 (22) – – 6 30 – 36
570 47 – (2) 481 78 1 560
Deferred tax liabilities
Property, plant and (1,280) 320 (12) 13 (959) (8) 20 (947)
equipment
Other items (17) (175) – – (192) – – (192)
(1,297) 145 (12) 13 (1,151) (8) 20 (1,139)
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset where the company has a legally enforceable right to
set off current tax assets and current tax liabilities and when the deferred taxes relate to the same
tax authority. The amounts determined after the appropriate offsetting are included in the statement
of financial position as follows:
20X3 20X2
$'000 $'000
Deferred tax assets 66 115
Deferred tax liabilities 645 785
At the reporting date, the company has unused tax losses of $1,650,000 available for offset against
future profits. A deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of $1,080,000 of such losses.
No deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of the remaining $570,000 as it is not
considered probable that there will be future taxable profits available in the relevant jurisdiction.
9.1 Reconciliation
Disclosure point number (4) listed above refers to a reconciliation between tax expense and
accounting profit. This should be presented as part of the income tax expense note (as illustrated
above). Two possible forms are suggested. The following example shows both possible forms:
Example: Reconciliation
Rugby Co. reports a profit before tax for the year ended 31 December 20X3 of $8.775m and a tax
expense of $3.977m. The tax rate applicable to the jurisdiction in which Rugby operates is 40%
(38% 20X2). Included in Rugby’s statement of profit or loss are the following items:
 Charitable donations of $500,000
 Fines for environmental pollution of $700,000
 A gain on disposal of machinery of $125,000
Net taxable temporary differences at 1 January 20X3 were $1,850,000.
Required
Draft the tax reconciliation as required by HKAS 12 in the two forms allowed.
403
Financial Reporting
Solution
The first form allowed reconciles between the product of accounting profit multiplied by the
applicable tax rate(s) and tax expense:
$'000 $'000
Profit before tax 8,775
Tax at applicable rate of 40% 3,510
Tax effect of expenses that are not deductible in determining
taxable profit:
Charitable donations (40%  500,000) 200
Fines for environmental pollution (40%  700,000) 280
480
Tax effect of income that is not taxable in determining taxable
profit:
Gain on disposal of property, plant and equipment (40%  (50)
125,000)
Increase in opening deferred tax resulting from an increase in 37
tax rate (1,850,000  2%)
Tax expense 3,977
The alternative form of the required disclosure reconciles the applicable tax rate to the average
effective tax rate:
%
Applicable tax rate 40.0
Tax effect of expenses that are not deductible for tax purposes:
Charitable donations (200/8,775  100%) 2.3
Fines for environmental pollution (280/8,775  100%) 3.2
Tax effect of income that is not taxable in determining taxable profit:
Gain on disposal of property, plant and equipment (50/8,775  100%)) (0.6)
Effect on opening deferred taxes of reduction in tax rate (37/8,775  100%) 0.4
Average effective tax rate 45.3
10 Deferred taxation and business combinations

Topic highlights
Temporary differences may arise as a result of business combinations.
There are a number of deferred tax implications of a business combination. Everything that
HKAS 12 states in relation to deferred tax and business combinations is brought together in this
section. Please note that accounting for business combinations is covered in the final section of
this book, Part D on group financial statements (chapters 27 to 31). You may find it easier to work
through this section of the chapter after those chapters.
10.1 Temporary differences arising as a result of business

combinations
Earlier in the chapter we considered a number of common situations which result in either a taxable
or deductible temporary difference.
When interests are held in subsidiaries, branches, associates or joint ventures, temporary
differences arise because the carrying amount of the investment (i.e. the parent's share of the net
assets including goodwill) becomes different from the tax base (often the cost) of the investment.
404
Reasons for these differences include the following:

 The existence of undistributed profits of subsidiaries, branches, associates and joint
ventures
 Changes in foreign exchange rates when a parent and its subsidiary are based in different
countries
 A reduction in the carrying amount of an investment in an associate to its recoverable
amount
The temporary difference in the consolidated financial statements may be different from the
temporary difference associated with that investment in the parent's separate financial statements
when the parent carries the investment in its separate financial statements at cost or revalued
amount.
HKAS 12 provides examples of both taxable and deductible temporary differences.
HKAS 12, 10.1.1 Taxable temporary differences
Illustrative
Examples In a business combination, such as when one company buys all the shares of another company,
the cost of the acquisition must be allocated to the fair values of the identifiable assets and
liabilities acquired as at the date of the transaction. Temporary differences can arise when the tax
bases of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired are not affected by the business
combination. For example, where the carrying amount of an asset is increased to fair value but the
tax base of the asset remains at cost to the previous owner, a taxable temporary difference arises
which results in a deferred tax liability and this will also affect goodwill.
The following are also provided by the standard as examples of situations which will result in a
taxable temporary difference:
(a) Unrealised losses resulting from intragroup transactions are eliminated by inclusion in
the carrying amount of inventory or property, plant and equipment.
(b) Retained earnings of subsidiaries, branches, associates and joint ventures are included in
consolidated retained earnings, but income taxes will be payable if the profits are distributed
to the reporting parent.
(c) Investments in foreign subsidiaries, branches or associates or interests in foreign joint
ventures are affected by changes in foreign exchange rates.
(d) An entity accounts in its own currency for the cost of the non-monetary assets of a foreign
operation that is integral to the reporting entity's operations but the taxable profit or tax
loss of the foreign operation is determined in the foreign currency.
On 31 December 20X1, Basil Co. acquired a 60% stake in Lemongrass Co.. Among Lemongrass’s
identifiable assets at that date was inventory with a carrying amount of $8,000 and a fair value of
$12,000. The tax base of the inventory was the same as the carrying amount.
The consideration given by Basil Co. resulted in the recognition of goodwill acquired in the
business combination.
Income tax is payable by Basil Co. at 25% and by Lemongrass at 20%.
Required
What is the deferred tax impact of this transaction in the Basil group financial statements?
405
Financial Reporting
Silver acquired 80% of Gold on 1 January 20X1. During the year ended 31 December 20X5, Silver
sold goods to Gold for HK$12 million, charging a margin of 25%. At the year-end, a third of these
goods remained unsold by Gold.
The tax rate is 15%.
Required
Prepare consolidation journals and provide explanations showing how this transaction should be
accounted for in the consolidated financial statements of Silver.
Red has owned 70% of the share capital of Yellow and 60% of the share capital of Green for many
years.
During the year, Yellow sold goods to Red at a total transfer price of HK$250 million, representing
a mark-up of 25%. At the reporting date inventory from Yellow which cost Red HK$25 million
remained in Red’s warehouse.
During the year, Green purchased goods from Yellow for HK$30 million. The transfer price is
established based on a margin of 20%. At the reporting date Green still has half of the goods in
inventory.
It is more likely than not that sufficient taxable profits will be available against which deductible
temporary differences can be utilised.
The tax rate is 16%.
Required
Explain and prepare the necessary consolidation journals to show the deferred tax effect of the
above transactions in the consolidated financial statements of the Red Group as at 31 March 20X6.
HKAS 12, 10.1.2 Deductible temporary differences

Illustrative
Examples In a business combination, when a liability is recognised on acquisition but the related costs are
not deducted in determining taxable profits until a later period, a deductible temporary difference
arises resulting in a deferred tax asset. A deferred tax asset will also arise when the fair value of an
identifiable asset acquired is less than its tax base. In both these cases goodwill is affected (see
below).
The standard also provides the following examples of situations will result in a deductible
temporary difference:
(a) Unrealised profits resulting from intragroup transactions are eliminated from the
carrying amount of assets, such as inventory or property, plant or equipment, but no
equivalent adjustment is made for tax purposes.
(b) Investments in foreign subsidiaries, branches or associates or interests in foreign joint
ventures are affected by changes in foreign exchange rates.
(c) A foreign operation accounts for its non-monetary assets in its own (functional) currency.
If its taxable profit or loss is determined in a different currency (under the presentation
currency method) changes in the exchange rate result in temporary differences. The
resulting deferred tax is charged or credited to profit or loss.
406
10.2 Recognition criteria

HKAS 12 provides recognition criteria for both deferred tax liabilities and assets in a business
combination situation.
HKAS 12.39 10.2.1 Deferred tax liability
Entities should recognise a deferred tax liability for all taxable temporary differences associated
with investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates, and interests in joint ventures, except to
the extent that both of these conditions are satisfied:
(a) The parent/investor/venturer is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary
difference.
(b) It is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future.
HKAS 12.44 10.2.2 Recognition of deferred tax asset
HKAS 12 requires that a deferred tax asset should be recognised for all deductible temporary
differences arising from investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates, and interests in joint
ventures, to the extent that (and only to the extent that) both these are probable that:
(a) The temporary difference will reverse in the foreseeable future
(b) Taxable profit will be available against which the temporary difference can be utilised
The prudence principle discussed above for the recognition of deferred tax assets should be
considered.
10.3 Application of the recognition criteria

HKAS 12.40 10.3.1 Undistributed profits
Where a parent company controls the dividend policy of its subsidiary, it can control the timing of
the reversal of temporary differences. In addition, it would often be impracticable to determine the
amount of income taxes payable when the temporary differences reverses.
Therefore, when the parent has determined that those profits will not be distributed in the
foreseeable future, the parent does not recognise a deferred tax liability. The same applies to
investments in branches.
HKAS 12.41 10.3.2 Foreign exchange
Where a foreign operation's taxable profit or tax loss (and therefore the tax base of its non-
monetary assets and liabilities) is determined in a foreign currency, changes in the exchange rate
give rise to temporary differences. These relate to the foreign entity's own assets and liabilities,
rather than to the reporting entity's investment in that foreign operation, and so the reporting entity
should recognise the resulting deferred tax liability or asset. The resulting deferred tax is charged
or credited to profit or loss.
HKAS 12.42 10.3.3 Associates

An investor in an associate does not control that entity and so cannot determine its dividend
policy. Therefore, unless there is an agreement requiring that the profits of the associate should not
be distributed in the foreseeable future, the investor should recognise a deferred tax liability arising
from taxable temporary differences associated with its investment in the associate. Where an
investor cannot determine the exact amount of tax, but only a minimum amount, then the deferred
tax liability should be that amount.
HKAS 12.43 10.3.4 Joint arrangements
In a joint arrangement, the agreement between the parties usually deals with profit sharing. When
a joint venturer or joint operator can control the sharing of profits and it is probable that the profits
will not be distributed in the foreseeable future, a deferred liability is not recognised.
407
Financial Reporting
10.3.5 Unrealised profits

As mentioned earlier, unrealised profits result in a deductible temporary difference and deferred tax
asset. This is because tax applies to individual companies and therefore each company’s profit is
taxed, even if this includes unrealised amounts from a group perspective. The profit is recognised
in the consolidated statement of profit or loss when the underlying item is transferred to a third
party and at this time the deferred tax asset is reversed.
Oregano Co. owns 70% of Thyme Co.. During 20X1 Thyme sold goods to Oregano for $120,000 at
a mark-up of 20% above cost. Half of these goods are held in Oregano’s inventories at the year
end. The rate of income tax is 30%.
Required
What is the deferred tax impact of this transaction in the Oregano group financial statements?
10.4 Recognition of deferred tax arising from business

HKFRS 3.24,
HKAS combinations
12.15,66-68
HKFRS 3 Business Combinations requires an entity to recognise any deferred tax assets (to the
extent that they meet the relevant recognition criteria) or deferred tax liabilities resulting from
temporary differences on a business combination as identifiable assets and liabilities at the date of
acquisition.
These deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities, consequently, will affect the amount of
goodwill or the bargain purchase gain the entity recognises.
An entity will not, however, recognise deferred tax liabilities arising from the initial recognition of
goodwill.
A business combination may result in a change in the probability of realising a pre-acquisition
deferred tax asset of the acquirer. There is a chance that the acquirer will recover its own deferred
tax asset that was not recognised before the combination of the businesses, e.g. by setting off
unused tax losses against the future taxable profit of the acquiree.
Alternatively, as a result of the business combination it might no longer be probable that future
taxable profit will allow the deferred tax asset to be recovered. The acquirer should recognise a
change in the deferred tax asset in the period of the business combination, but does not take it into
account in calculating the goodwill or bargain purchase gain it recognises in the business
combination.
The potential benefit of the acquiree's income tax loss carry forwards or other deferred tax assets
might not satisfy the criteria for separate recognition when a business combination is initially
accounted for but might be realised subsequently. An entity shall recognise acquired deferred tax
benefits that it realises after the business combination as follows:
(a) Acquired deferred tax benefits recognised within the measurement period that result from
new information about facts and circumstances that existed at the acquisition date shall be
applied to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill related to that acquisition. If the
carrying amount of that goodwill is zero, any remaining deferred tax benefits shall be
(b) All other acquired deferred tax benefits realised shall be recognised in profit or loss (or, if this
standard so requires, outside profit or loss).
408
On 1 September 20X1, Orchid acquired 90% of the ordinary share capital of Daffodil for
consideration totalling $1.75million. At the date of acquisition, Daffodil’s statement of financial
position showed net assets of $1.8million, although the fair value of inventory was assessed to be
$100,000 above its carrying amount.
Required
Explain the deferred tax implications, assuming a tax rate of 16.5%.
Dandelion purchased 75% of the ordinary share capital of Bluebell for $1.1m when the net assets
of Bluebell were $1m, giving rise to goodwill of $350,000. At 31 December 20X1 the following is
relevant:
1 Goodwill has not been impaired
2 The net assets of Bluebell amount to $1.2m
Required
What temporary difference arises on this investment at 31 December 20X1?
The Peninsula Group headed by Peninsula Co operates in a number of diverse industries
throughout South East Asia. It has recently appointed a new Managing Director from a country
where IFRS (HKFRS) are not applied. The Managing Director requires help in understanding how
the provision for deferred taxation would be calculated in the following situations under HKAS 12
Income taxes:
(i) A wholly owned overseas subsidiary, Linten Co a limited liability company, sold goods
costing $ 8.5 million to Peninsula Co on 1 September 20X5, and these goods had not been
sold by Peninsula Co before the year end. Peninsula Co had paid $ 11 million for these
goods. The Managing Director does not understand how this transaction should be dealt with
in the financial statements of the subsidiary and the group for taxation purposes. Linten Co
pays tax locally at 30%.
(ii) Fence, a limited liability company, is a wholly owned subsidiary of Peninsula Co, and is a
cash-generating unit in its own right. The value of the property, plant and equipment of
Fence at 31 October 20X5 was $ 6 million and purchased goodwill was $ 1 million before
any impairment loss. The company had no other assets or liabilities. An impairment loss of $
1•8 million had occurred at 31 October 20X5. The tax base of the property, plant and
equipment of Fence was $ 4 million as at 31 October 20X5. The directors wish to know how
the impairment loss will affect the deferred tax liability for the year. Impairment losses are not
an allowable expense for taxation purposes.
Assume a tax rate of 17%.
Required
Prepare notes for the Managing Director which detail, with suitable computations, how the
situations (i) and (ii) above will impact on the accounting for deferred tax under HKAS 12 Income
taxes in the group financial statements of the Peninsula Group.
409
Financial Reporting
Example: Deferred tax arising from business combinations

In recent years, Lily Co. has made the following acquisitions of other companies:
 On 1 January 20X6, it acquired 90% of the share capital of Blossom, resulting in goodwill of
$1.4 million.
 On 1 July 20X6 it acquired the whole of the share capital of Snowdrop for $6 million. At this
date the fair value of the net assets of Snowdrop was $4.5 million and their tax base was
$4 million.
The following information is relevant to Lily Group’s year ended 31 December 20X6:
Blossom
1 Blossom has made a provision amounting to $1.8 million in its accounts in respect of
litigation. This is tax allowable only when the cost is actually incurred. The case is expected
to be settled within 12 months.
2 Blossom has a number of investments classified as at fair value through profit or loss in
accordance with HKFRS 9. The remeasurement gains and losses recognised in profit or loss
for accounting purposes are not taxable/tax allowable until such date as the investments are
sold. To date the cumulative unrealised gain is $2.5 million.
3 Blossom has sold goods to Lily in the year making a profit of $1 million. A quarter of these
goods remain in Lily’s inventory at the year end.
Snowdrop
1 At its acquisition date, Snowdrop had unrelieved brought forward tax losses of $0.4 million.
It was initially believed that Snowdrop would have sufficient taxable profits to utilise these
losses and a deferred tax asset was recognised in Snowdrop’s financial statements at
acquisition. Subsequent events have proven that the future taxable profits will not be
sufficient to utilise the full brought forward loss.
2 At acquisition Snowdrop’s retained earnings amounted to $3.5 million. The directors of Lily
Group have decided that in each of the next four years to the intended listing date of the
group, they will realise earnings through dividend payments from the subsidiary amounting to
$600,000 per annum. Snowdrop has not declared a dividend for the current year. Tax is
payable on remittance of dividends.
3 $300,000 of the purchase price of Snowdrop has been allocated to intangible assets. The
recognition and measurement criteria of HKFRS 3 and HKAS 38 do not appear to have been
met, however the directors believe that the amount is allowable for tax and have calculated
the tax charge accordingly. It is believed that this may be challenged by the tax authorities.
Required
What are the deferred tax implications of the above issues for the Lily Group?
Solution
Acquisitions
Any fair value adjustments made for consolidation purposes will affect the group deferred tax
charge for the year.
A taxable temporary difference will arise where the fair value of an asset exceeds its carrying
value, and the resulting deferred tax liability should be recorded against goodwill.
A deductible temporary difference will arise where the fair value of a liability exceeds its carrying
value, or an asset is revalued downwards. Again, the resulting deferred tax amount (an asset)
should be recognised in goodwill.
In addition, it may be possible to recognise deferred tax assets in a group which could not be
recognised by an individual company. This is the case where tax losses brought forward, but not
410
considered to be an asset, due to lack of available taxable profits to set them against, can now be
used by another group company.
Goodwill
Goodwill arose on both acquisitions. According to HKAS 12, however, no provision should be made
for the temporary difference arising on this.
Blossom
1 A deductible temporary difference arises when the provision is first recognised. This results
in a deferred tax asset calculated as $540,000 (30%  $1.8m). The asset may, however,
only be recognised where it is probable that there will be future taxable profits against which
the future tax allowable expense may be set. There is no indication that this is not the case
for Blossom.
2 A taxable temporary difference arises where investments are revalued upwards for
accounting purposes but the uplift is not taxable until disposal. In this case the carrying
value of the investments has increased by $2.5 million, and this has been recognised in
profit or loss. The tax base has not, however changed. Therefore, a deferred tax liability
should be recognised on the $2.5 million, and in line with the recognition of the underlying
revaluation, this should be recognised in profit or loss.
3 This intra-group transaction results in unrealised profits of $250,000 which will be eliminated
on consolidation. The tax on this $250,000 will, however, be included within the group tax
charge (which comprises the sum of the individual group companies' tax charges). From the
perspective of the group there is a temporary difference. Deferred tax should be provided on
this difference using the tax rate of Lily (the recipient company).
Snowdrop
1 Unrelieved tax losses give rise to a deferred tax asset only where the losses are regarded as
recoverable. They should be regarded as recoverable only where it is probable that there
will be future taxable profits against which they may be used. It is indicated that the future
profits of Snowdrop will not be sufficient to realise all of the brought forward loss, and
therefore the deferred tax asset is calculated only on that amount expected to be recovered.
2 Deferred tax is recognised on the unremitted earnings of investments, except where:
(a) The parent is able to control the payment of dividends
(b) It is unlikely that the earnings will be paid out in the foreseeable future
Lily controls Snowdrop and is therefore able to control its dividend payments, however it is
indicated that $2.4million will be paid as dividends in the next four years. Therefore, a
deferred tax liability related to this amount should be recognised.
3 The directors have assumed that the $300,000 relating to intangible assets will be tax
allowable, and the tax provision has been calculated based on this assumption. However,
this is not certain, and extra tax may have to be paid if this amount is not allowable.
Therefore, a liability for the additional tax amount should be recognised.
Oscar acquired 80% of the ordinary shares in Dorian Limited (Dorian) on 1 July 2005.
At acquisition, a property owned and occupied by Dorian had a fair value HK$30 million in excess
of its carrying value. This property had a remaining useful life at that time of 20 years.
Oscar is preparing its financial statements as at 30 June 2015. Goodwill on the acquisition of
Dorian has been calculated as $40 million, before taking account of the property revaluation. Non-
controlling interest at acquisition, using the proportion of net assets method, has been recorded as
$28 million before taking account of the property revaluation. There has been no impairment of
goodwill.
411
Financial Reporting
The tax rate is 16%

Required
(a) How should this fair value difference be recorded in the consolidated financial statements at
30 June 2015?
(b) What is the deferred tax implication of the fair value adjustment?
Self-test question 16 – alternative version

Oscar acquired 80% of the ordinary shares in Dorian Limited (Dorian) on 1 July 2005.
At acquisition, a property owned and occupied by Dorian had a fair value HK$30 million in excess
of its carrying value. This property had a remaining useful life at that time of 20 years.
Oscar is preparing its financial statements as at 30 June 2015.
The tax rate is 16%
Required
(a) How should this fair value difference be recorded in the consolidated financial statements at
30 June 2015?
(b) What is the deferred tax implication of the fair value adjustment?
Jenner Holdings (Jenner) operates in the recruitment industry. On 1 February 20X0, Jenner
acquired 60% of Rannon. It is now 31 March 20X4, and the consolidated financial statements of
Jenner are being prepared.
On the date of acquisition, HK$40,800,000 of the purchase consideration was allocated to the
domain name ‘www.alphabettajob.com’ which Rannon had registered some years earlier.
www.alphabettajob.com is well known in the recruitment industry and a popular job search website
and as a result Jenner was able to establish a fair value using an income-based valuation method.
The domain name is not recognised in Rannon’s individual financial statements and has a tax base
of nil.
The Jenner Group amortises acquired domain names over 10 years. The tax rate applicable to the
profits of both companies is 17%.
Required
Prepare journals and explanations to show how this domain name should be treated in the
consolidated financial statements of the Jenner Group as at 31 March 20X4.
In 20X2 Hay Co acquired a subsidiary, Bee Co, which had deductible temporary differences of
$3m. The tax rate at the date of acquisition was 30%. The resulting deferred tax asset of $0.9m
was not recognised as an identifiable asset in determining the goodwill of $5m resulting from the
business combination. Two years after the acquisition, Hay Co decided that future taxable profit
412
would probably be sufficient for the entity to recover the benefit of all the deductible temporary
differences.
Required
Explain the accounting treatment of the subsequent recognition of the deferred tax asset in 20X4.
Lark, a limited company, has two wholly owned subsidiaries, Starling, another Hong Kong company
and Owl, which is located in Latviania. The following information is relevant to the year ended 31
August 20X8:
(a) Owl has made a tax adjusted loss equivalent to $6.5 million. This loss can only be relieved
through carry forward against future profits of Owl.
(b) During the year Starling has sold goods to Lark for $12 million, based on a 20% mark up.
Half of these goods are still in Lark's stock room at the year end.
Assume that the tax rate applicable to the group companies based in Hong Kong is 30%; the
Latvianian tax rate is 20%.
Required
What are the deferred tax implications of these issues for the consolidated financial statements of
the Lark group as at 31 August 20X8?
Pandar, a public limited company, has three 100% owned subsidiaries, Candar, Landar, and Endar
SA, a foreign subsidiary.
(a) The following details relate to Candar:
(i) Pandar acquired its interest in Candar on 1 January 20X3. The fair values of the
assets and liabilities acquired were considered to be equal to their carrying amounts,
with the exception of freehold property which was considered to have a fair value $1m
in excess of its carrying amount. The directors have no intention of selling the
property.
(ii) Candar has sold goods at a price of $6 million to Pandar since acquisition and made a
profit of $2 million on the transaction. The inventories of these goods remaining in
Pandar's statement of financial position as at 30 September 20X3, were $3.6 million.
(b) Landar undertakes various projects from debt factoring to investing in property and
commodities. The following details relate to Landar for the year ended 30 September 20X3:
(i) Landar has a portfolio of readily marketable government securities which are held as
current assets for financial trading purposes. These investments are stated at market
value in the statement of financial position with any gain or loss taken to profit or loss.
These gains and losses are taxed when the investments are sold. Currently the
accumulated unrealised gains are $8 million.
(ii) Landar has calculated it requires an allowance for credit losses of $2 million against its
total loan portfolio. Tax relief is available when a specific loan is written off.
(c) Endar SA has unremitted earnings of $20 million which would give rise to additional tax
payable of $2 million if remitted to Pandar's tax regime. Pandar intends to leave the
earnings within Endar for reinvestment.
413
Financial Reporting
(d) Pandar has unrelieved trading losses as at 30 September 20X3 of $10 million.
Current tax is calculated based on the individual company's financial statements (adjusted for tax
purposes) in the tax regime in which Pandar operates. Assume an income tax rate of 30% for
Pandar and 25% for its subsidiaries.
Required
Explain the deferred tax implications of the above information for the Pandar group of companies
for the year ended 30 September 20X3.
The Dipyrone Company owns 100% of the Reidfurd Company. During the year ended 31
December 20X7:
(a) Dipyrone sold goods to Reidfurd for $600,000, earning a profit margin of 25%. Reidfurd held
30% of these goods in inventory at the year end.
(b) Reidfurd sold goods to Dipyrone for $800,000, earning a profit margin of 20%. Dipyrone held
25% of these goods in inventory at the year end.
The tax base of the inventory in each company is the same as its carrying amount. The tax rate
applicable to Dipyrone is 26% and that applicable to Reidfurd is 33%.
Required
What is the deferred tax asset at 31 December 20X7 in Dipyrone's consolidated statement of
financial position under HKAS 12 Income taxes, and HKFRS 10 Consolidated financial statements?

In relation to deferred tax and business combinations you should be familiar with:
 Circumstances that give rise to taxable temporary differences
 Circumstances that give rise to deductible temporary differences
 Their treatment once an acquisition takes place
 Reasons why deferred tax arises when investments are held
 Recognition of deferred tax on business combinations
11 Interpretations relating to deferred tax

11.1 HK(SIC) Int-21 Income Taxes – Recovery of Revalued Non-
depreciable Assets
HK(SIC) Int-21 deals with cases where a non-depreciable asset (freehold land) is carried at
revaluation under HKAS 16.
The Interpretation deems that no part of such an asset’s carrying amount will be recovered through
use. Therefore the deferred tax asset or liability that arises from revaluation must be measured
based on recovery through sale of the asset.
In some jurisdictions, this will result in the use of a capital gains tax rate rather than the rate
applicable to corporate earnings.
414
HK(SIC) Int-12 has been incorporated into HKAS 12 as part of the amendments to HKAS 12 issued
in December 2010. It is therefore withdrawn for accounting periods starting on or after 1 January
2012.
11.2 HK(SIC) Int-25 Income Taxes – Changes in the Tax Status of

an Entity or its Shareholders
A change in the tax status of an entity or its shareholders may have consequences for an entity by
increasing or decreasing its tax liabilities or assets.
This may, for example, occur upon:
 The public listing of an entity's equity instruments
 The restructuring of an entity's equity
 A controlling shareholder's move to a foreign country.
As a result of such an event, an entity may be taxed differently; it may for example gain or lose tax
incentives or become subject to a different rate of tax in the future.
A change in the tax status of an entity or its shareholders may have an immediate effect on the
entity's current tax liabilities or assets. The change may also increase or decrease the deferred tax
liabilities and assets recognised by the entity, depending on the effect the change in tax status has
on the tax consequences that will arise from recovering or settling the carrying amount of the
entity's assets and liabilities.
A change in the tax status of an entity or its shareholders does not give rise to increases or
decreases in amounts recognised directly in equity. The current and deferred tax consequences of
a change in tax status shall be included in net profit or loss for the period, unless those
consequences relate to transactions and events that result, in the same or a different period, in a
direct credit or charge to the recognised amount of equity. Those tax consequences that relate to
changes in the recognised amount of equity, in the same or a different period (not included in net
profit or loss), shall be charged or credited directly to equity.
415
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 12 Income Taxes
Current
Currenttaxtax Current
Deferred
taxtax
Tax charge is adjusted for under/over Accounting measure to match tax

provision of previous period. effects of transactions with their
accounting impact
Tax charge is adjusted for under/over Compares carrying amount (CA) of

provision of previous period. asset/liability with its tax base (TB) to
find a temporary difference.
Tax base = amount attributed to an

Recognise in profit or loss for the asset or liability for tax purposes.
period other than:
tax on business combination
tax on item of OCI
tax on item in equity
CA > TB CA < TB
Taxable Deductible
temporary temporary
difference difference
Apply tax rate expected to apply when asset is

realised or liability settled, based on manner of
recovery/settlement
Deferred tax Deferred tax

liability asset
Do not discount to present value
Recognise only if
profits available
in future
Recognise in profit or loss unless deferred tax

arises from:
an item recognised in OCI
an item recognised in equity
a business combination (acquisition)
Offset deferred tax assets and liabilities only if:

legally enforceable right of set off
relate to taxes levied by the same authority
416
Application of HKAS 12
Individual
Current tax
company On
Current
consolidation
tax
Taxable Deductible Taxable Deductible

temporary temporary temporary temporary
differences differences differences differences
Unrealised Unrealised
Accelerated
Taxable Deductible
Impaired Taxable
lossed on Deductible
profits on
temporary
tax temporary
asset temporary
intragroup temporary
intragroup
depreciation
difference difference difference
transactions difference
transactions
Capitalised
Taxable Deductible
Deferred Fair
Taxable
value Deductible
Fair value
development
temporary temporary
income adjustments
temporary adjustments
temporary
difference
costs difference difference difference
Taxable
Loan at Deductible
Tax losses Changes
Taxable in Changes
Deductible
in
temporary
amortised temporary
carried temporary
exchange temporary
exchange
difference
cost difference
forward difference
rates difference
rates
Revaluation
Taxable Undistributed
Taxable
temporary
of PPE temporary
retained
difference difference
earnings
417
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
(a) The 20X0 tax charge was recognised by:
DEBIT Tax charge $130,000
CREDIT Current tax liability $130,000
On payment, the journal entry is:
DEBIT Current tax liability $126,700
CREDIT Cash $126,700
After payment, the current tax liability account has a credit balance of $3,300 remaining.
This is cleared to profit or loss by:
The 20X1 tax charge is recognised by:
DEBIT Tax charge ($760,000  16.5%) $125,400
The tax charge in 20X1 is therefore:
$
Current year tax liability 125,400
Overprovision in 20X0 3,300
 $125,400 is recognised as a current tax liability in the statement of financial position at
31 December 20X1
 $122,100 ($125,400 – $3,300) is recognised as tax charge in the statement of profit or
loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X1
(b) If the previous year’s tax was settled at $131,000, tax was underprovided. Therefore the
underprovision of $1,000 is added to the 20X1 tax charge to make it $126,400. The liability in
the statement of financial position remains unchanged at $125,400.
Answer 2
(a) The tax base of the interest receivable is $1,000.
(b) The tax base of the dividend is $5,000.
(c) The tax base of the machine is $7,000.
(d) The tax base of the trade receivables is $10,000.
(e) The tax base of the loan is $1 million.
In the case of (b), in substance the entire carrying amount of the asset is deductible against the
economic benefits. There is no taxable temporary difference. An alternative analysis is that the
accrued dividends receivable have a tax base of nil and a tax rate of nil is applied to the resulting
taxable temporary difference ($5,000). Under both analyses, there is no deferred tax liability.
Answer 3
(a) The tax base of the accrued expenses is $1,000.
(b) The tax base of the revenue received in advance is $1,000.
418
(c) The tax base of the accrued fines and penalties is $100.
(d) The tax base of the loan is $1 million.
Answer 4
The temporary differences associated with the equipment are as follows:
Year
20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5
$ $ $ $ $
Carrying amount 40,000 30,000 20,000 10,000 –
Tax base 37,500 25,000 12,500 – –
Taxable temporary difference 2,500 5,000 7,500 10,000 –
Opening deferred tax liability – 375 750 1,125 1,500
Deferred tax expense (income): bal fig 375 375 375 375 (1,500)
Closing deferred tax liability @ 15% 375 750 1,125 1,500 –
Answer 5
The tax base of the building is $7m ($10m – $3m).
(a) If the entity expects to recover the carrying amount by using the building, it must generate
taxable income of $15m, but will only be able to deduct depreciation of $7m. On this basis
there is a deferred tax liability of $2.4m (($15m – $7m)  30%).
(b) If the entity expects to recover the carrying amount by selling the building immediately for
proceeds of $15m the deferred tax liability will be computed as follows:
Taxable temporary Deferred
difference Tax rate tax liability
$'000 $'000
Total tax depreciation allowance 3,000 30% 900
Proceeds in excess of cost 5,000 Nil –
Total 8,000 900
Note. The additional deferred tax that arises on the revaluation is charged directly to equity:
see Answer 6 below.
Answer 6
(a) If the entity expects to recover the carrying amount by using the building, the situation is as
in answer 5 (a) in the same circumstances.
(b) If the entity expects to recover the carrying amount by selling the building immediately for
proceeds of $15m, the entity will be able to deduct the indexed costs of $11m. The net profit
of $4m will be taxed at 40%. In addition, the total tax depreciation allowance of $3m will be
included in taxable income and taxed at 30%. On this basis, the tax base is $8m ($11m –
$3m), there is a taxable temporary difference of $7m and there is a deferred tax liability of
$2.5m ($4m  40% plus $3m  30%).
Answer 7
A temporary difference arises when the shares are revalued as the tax treatment is different from
the accounting treatment. The fair value gain of $7m is recognised in other comprehensive income
in accordance with the HKFRS 9 classification of the investment.
The gain is a taxable temporary difference and the company should recognise a deferred tax
liability of $1,190,000 ($7m 17%), representing the future tax to pay on the gain recognised,
payable when the investments are sold.
419
Financial Reporting
This amount is recognised in other comprehensive income by:

DEBIT Other comprehensive income $1,190,000
CREDIT Deferred tax liability $1,190,000
Answer 8
Administrative office
The administrative office is commercial property and as such does not benefit from tax allowances.
Equally, no tax is charged on the capital gain that would be expected to arise on a disposal of the
office.
Therefore the difference between the carrying amount of the office and its tax base of $60m is a
permanent difference and there is no deferred tax impact.
Factory
The factory (excluding the land) is an industrial building and so benefits from an industrial buildings
allowance. Its tax base at 31 December 20X4 is calculated as:
$’000
Cost ($44m – $26m) 18,000
IBA 20W8 (25%  $18m) (4,500)
IBA 20W9 – 2014 (3%  $18m  6 years) (3,240)
Tax base at 31 December 20X4 10,260
The carrying amount of the property is $15,840,500, so resulting in a temporary difference of
$15,840,500 – $10,260,000 = $5,580,500
This is a taxable temporary difference because the carrying amount exceeds tax base. The
resulting deferred tax liability is 28% x $5,580,500 = $1,562,540
Energy-saving equipment
The energy saving equipment was acquired for $9,500,000 and had a 10-year useful life at
acquisition.
Depreciation for the year ended 31 December 20X4 is $9,500,000/10 years x 9/12months =
$712,500. The carrying amount of the equipment at the reporting date is therefore $9,500,000 -
$712,500 = $8,787,500.
The equipment benefits from 100% tax relief in 20X4. The tax base of an asset is defined as the
amount that will be deductible for tax purposes against taxable economic benefits that will flow to
an entity as the entity recovers the carrying amount of the asset.
As the subsidiary has already received a tax deduction for the full cost of the equipment, no further
amount will be deductible over the 10 years that the energy saving equipment is used. Therefore
tax base is nil.
A temporary difference of $8,787,500 – nil = $8,787,500 therefore arises. This is a taxable
temporary difference and results in a deferred tax liability of $8,787,500  28% = $2,460,500.
Allowance for receivables
Tax relief is provided for the expense associated with making a specific allowance for receivables
when the provision is made. The tax and accounting treatment are therefore aligned and there is
no deferred tax impact.
The expense associated with making any other allowance for receivables does not benefit from tax
relief until (and unless) the amount receivable is deemed irrecoverable.
Therefore the accounting and tax treatments are not aligned and there is a deferred tax impact.
420
The carrying amount of the allowance is ($2,700,000). The tax base of a liability (including a
provision) is its carrying amount ($2,700,000) less any amount that will be deductible for tax
purposes in future periods ($2,700,000) ie nil.
Therefore there is a temporary difference of $2,700,000. This is a deductible temporary difference
because the tax base is greater than the carrying amount (being a negative amount).
The resulting deferred tax asset is $2,700,000  28% = $756,000.
Fines and penalties
The fine is an expense for accounting purposes. However, it will never benefit from tax relief.
Therefore this is a permanent different and has no deferred tax effect.
Financial statements
The net deferred tax liability reported in the statement of financial position is:
$’000
Factory 1,562,540
Energy saving equipment 2,460,500
General allowance for receivables (756,000)
Net deferred tax liability 3,267,040
This is an increase in the liability since last year; the increase of $3,267,040 - $2,300,800 =
$966,240 is recognised as part of the tax charge in profit or loss by:
CREDIT Deferred tax liability $966,240
Answer 9
The excess of an asset’s fair value over its tax base at the time of a business combination results
in a deferred tax liability. As it arises in Lemongrass, the tax rate used is 20% and the liability is
$800 (($12,000 – $8,000)  20%).
The recognition of a deferred tax liability in relation to the initial recognition of goodwill is
specifically prohibited by HKAS 12.
Answer 10
Unrealised profit
There is an unrealised profit in inventory of HK$1,000,000 (25%  HK$12m  1/3). This is
eliminated from inventory of Gold and profit in Silver, the selling company. This is a downstream
transaction and the adjustment to profit is allocated to the owners of the parent company only
(HK$'000):
DEBIT Cost of sales 1,000
CREDIT Inventory 1,000
The debit to cost of sales also adjusts retained earnings in the consolidated statement of financial
position.
Deferred tax
The adjustment for unrealised profit gives rise to a deductible temporary difference of
HK$1,000,000, and so a deferred tax asset of HK$150,000 (HK$1,000,000  15%). The tax credit
to profit is treated in the same way as the underlying temporary difference and is allocated to the
owners of the parent company only (HK$'000):
DEBIT Deferred tax liability 150
CREDIT Income tax (SPLOCI) 150
421
Financial Reporting
The credit to income tax also adjusts retained earnings in the consolidated statement of financial
position.
Answer 11
On the sale of goods to Red and Green, as an individual company, Yellow has made and reported
a profit, and it will be taxed on this profit.
From a group perspective, the profit is not made until the goods are sold outside the group, and
equally tax is not relevant until this time.
Therefore, on consolidation, a provision is made against inventory for unrealised profit and a
deferred tax asset is recognised. The provision for unrealised profit creates a deductible temporary
difference as the provision for unrealised profit changes the carrying value of the asset, reducing it
in value, however the tax base remains unchanged.
The inventory sold by Yellow to Red has a carrying amount in the consolidated statement of
financial position at 31 March 20X6 of HK$25 million  100/125 = HK$20 million, but a tax base of
HK$25 million.
The inventory sold by Yellow to Green has a carrying amount in the consolidated statement of
financial position at 31 March 20X6 of HK$30 million  (1 – 20%)  50% = HK$12 million but a tax
base of HK$15 million.
The deductible temporary difference arising is therefore HK$8 million (HK$5m + 3m).
Deferred tax of HK$1,280,000 (16%  HK$8m) arises and should be recognised as a non-current
asset of the group (HK$000):
DEBIT Deferred tax asset 1,280
CREDIT Income taxes 1,280
DEBIT Attributable to NCI (30%  1,280) 384
CREDIT NCI (SOFP) (30%  1,280) 384
Answer 12
There is an unrealised profit relating to inventories still held within the group of ½  $20,000 =
$10,000, which must be eliminated on consolidation. But the tax base of the inventories is
unchanged, so it is higher than the carrying amount in the consolidated statement of financial
position and there is a deductible temporary difference of $10,000.
Answer 13
 The carrying amount of the inventory in the group accounts is $100,000 more than its tax
base (being carrying amount in Daffodil’s own accounts).
 Deferred tax on this temporary difference is 16.5%  $100,000 = $16,500.
 A deferred tax liability of $16,500 is recognised in the group statement of financial position.
 Goodwill is increased by ($16,500  90%) = $14,850.
Answer 14
 The tax base of the investment in Bluebell is the cost of $1.1m. The carrying value is the
share of net assets (75%  $1.2m) + goodwill of $350,000 = $1.25m
 The temporary difference is therefore $1.25m – $1.1m = $150,000.
 This is equal to the group share of post acquisition profits: 75%  $200,000 change in net
assets since acquisition.
422
Answer 15
Intra-group sale
Linten Co has made a profit of $ 2.5 million on its sale to Peninsula Co. Tax is payable on the
profits of individual companies. Linten Co is liable for tax on this profit in the current year and will
have provided for the related tax in its individual financial statements. However, from the viewpoint
of the group the profit will not be realised until the following year, when the goods are sold to a third
party. The profit must therefore be eliminated from the consolidated financial statements. Because
the group pays tax before the profit is realised there is a temporary difference of $2.5 million and a
deferred tax asset of $750,000 (30%  $2.5 million).
Impairment loss
The impairment loss in the financial statements of Fence reduces the carrying amount of property,
plant and equipment, but is not allowable for tax. Therefore the tax base of the property, plant and
equipment is different from its carrying amount and there is a temporary difference.
Under HKAS 36 Impairment of assets the impairment loss is allocated first to goodwill and then to
other assets:
Property,
plant and
Goodwill equipment Total
$m $m $m
Carrying amount at 31 October 20X5 1 6.0 7.0
Impairment loss (1) (0.8) (1.8)
– 5.2 5.2
HKAS 12 states that no deferred tax should be recognised on goodwill and therefore only the
impairment loss relating to the property, plant and equipment affects the deferred tax position.
The effect of the impairment loss is as follows:
Before After Difference
impairment impairment
$'000 $'000 $'000
Tax base (4,000) (4,000)
Temporary difference 2,000 1,200 0.8
Tax liability (17%) 340 204 136
Therefore the impairment loss reduces the deferred tax liability by $136,000
Answer 16
(a) Goodwill was originally calculated as HK$40 million. The fair value adjustment to the
property reduces goodwill by HK$24 million (being 80% of the HK$30 million FV adjustment).
The non-controlling interest at acquisition was initially recorded at HK$28 million. As a result
of the fair value uplift this must be adjusted up by HK$6 million to HK$34 million (20% ×
HK$30 million).
The journal to record the adjustments to property, goodwill and the NCI at the date of
acquisition is:
DEBIT Property $30m
CREDIT Goodwill $24m
CREDIT NCI $6m
423
Financial Reporting
The fair value uplift is subsequently depreciated such that by the reporting date its carrying
value is HK$15 million (10/20 yrs  HK$30 million). The journal to record the consolidation
adjustment for extra depreciation is (HK$000):
DEBIT Group retained earnings (80%  $15m) $12m
DEBIT NCI (20%  15,000) $3m
CREDIT Property – accumulated depreciation $15m
(b) At acquisition, property held within Dorian’s accounts is uplifted by HK$30 million as a
consolidation adjustment.
This results in a taxable temporary difference of HK$30 million, and so a deferred tax liability
of HK$4.8 million (16% × 30 million) at acquisition.
DEBIT Goodwill $3.84m
DEBIT Non-controlling interest (20% × $4.8m) $0.96m
CREDIT Deferred tax liability $4.8m
By the reporting date, HK$15 million of this temporary difference has reversed and therefore
a further journal is required to reduce the deferred tax liability by HK$2.4 million (16% × 15
million) (HK$000):
DEBIT Deferred tax liability $2.4m
CREDIT Retained earnings (80%  $2.4m ) $1.92m
CREDIT NCI (20%  $2.4m) $0.48m
Alternative answer 16
(a) The fair value adjustment to the property reduces goodwill by HK$24 million (being 80% of
the HK$30 million FV adjustment).
As a result of the fair value uplift, the non-controlling interest must be adjusted up by HK$6
million (20% × HK$30 million).
The journal to record the adjustments to property, goodwill and the NCI at the date of
acquisition is:
DEBIT Property $30m
CREDIT Goodwill $24m
CREDIT NCI $6m
The fair value uplift is subsequently depreciated such that by the reporting date its carrying
value is HK$15 million (10/20 yrs × HK$30 million). The journal to record the consolidation
adjustment for extra depreciation is:
DEBIT Group retained earnings (80% × $15m) $12m
DEBIT NCI (20% × 15,000) $3m
CREDIT Property – accumulated depreciation $15m
(b) At acquisition, property held within Dorian’s accounts is uplifted by HK$30 million as a
consolidation adjustment.
This results in a taxable temporary difference of HK$30 million, and so a deferred tax liability
of HK$4.8 million (16% × 30 million) at acquisition.
DEBIT Non-controlling interest (20% × $4.8m) $0.96m
424
By the reporting date, HK$15 million of this temporary difference has reversed and therefore
a further journal is required to reduce the deferred tax liability by HK$2.4 million (16% × 15
million):
DEBIT Deferred tax liability $2.4m
CREDIT Retained earnings (80% × $2.4m ) $1.92m
CREDIT NCI (20% × $2.4m) $0.48m
Answer 17
An intangible asset acquired in a business combination is recognised where it meets the definition
of an asset and is identifiable, ie it is either separable or arises from contractual or legal rights. This
is the case regardless of whether the acquiree recognises the asset on its individual statement of
financial position.
The Jenner Group amortises domain names over a 10-year (120 month) period. Rannon was
acquired 50 months prior to the reporting date, therefore the carrying amount of the domain name
as at 31 March 20X4 is 70/120  HK$40,800,000 = HK$23,800,000.
A deferred tax liability arises in respect of the fair value adjustment since this results in the carrying
amount of the domain name exceeding its tax base of nil. The deferred tax liability is 17% 
HK$23,800,000 = HK$4,046,000.
Amortisation since acquisition of 50/120 x HK$40,800,000 = HK$17,000,000 on the domain name
and the HK$2,890,000 (HK$17,000,000  17%) movement in the associated deferred tax liability
must also be accounted for and allocated between group retained earnings and the non-controlling
interest:
(a)
DEBIT Intangible assets HK$40,800,000
CREDIT Goodwill HK$40,800,000
To recognise fair value adjustment on acquisition.
DEBIT Retained earnings (60%  17%  HK$4,161,600

HK$40,800,000)
DEBIT Non-controlling interest (40%  17%  HK$2,774,400
HK$40,800,000)
CREDIT Deferred tax liability HK$6,936,000
To recognise deferred tax liability on fair value adjustment at acquisition.
(b)
DEBIT Retained earnings (60%  HK$17,000,000) HK$10,200,000
DEBIT Non-controlling interest (40%  HK$6,800,000
HK$17,000,000)
CREDIT Intangible assets HK$17,000,000
To recognise amortisation on the domain name since acquisition.
(c)
DEBIT Deferred tax liability HK$2,890,000
CREDIT Retained earnings (60%  HK$2,890,000) HK$1,734,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interest (40%  HK$1,156,000
HK$2,890,000)
To recognise the movement in deferred tax on the fair value adjustment since acquisition.
Answer 18
The entity recognises a deferred tax asset of $0.9m ($3m  30%) and, in profit or loss, deferred tax
income of $0.9m. Goodwill is not adjusted as the recognition does not arise within the
measurement period (ie within the 12 months following the acquisition).
425
Financial Reporting
Answer 19
(a) An unrelieved tax loss gives rise to a deferred tax asset, however only where there are
expected to be sufficient future taxable profits to utilise the loss.
There is no indication of Owl's future profitability, although the extent of the current year
losses suggests that future profits may not be available. If this is the case then no deferred
tax asset should be recognised.
If, however, the current year loss is due to a one-off factor, or there are other reasons why a
return to profitability is expected, then the deferred tax asset may be recognised at 20% ×
$6.5 million = $1.3 million.
(b) The intra-group sale gives rise to an unrealised year end profit of $12 million × 20/120 × ½ =
$1 million. Consolidated profit and inventory are adjusted for this amount.
This profit has, however, already been taxed in the accounts of Starling. A deductible
temporary difference therefore arises which will reverse when the goods are sold outside the
group and the profit is realised. The resulting deferred tax asset is $1 million × 30% =
$300,000.
This may be recognised to the extent that it is recoverable.
Answer 20
(a) (i) Fair value adjustments are treated in a similar way to temporary differences on
revaluations in the entity's own accounts. A deferred tax liability is recognised under
HKAS 12 even though the directors have no intention of selling the property as it will
generate taxable income in excess of depreciation allowed for tax purposes. The
deferred tax of $1m  25% = $0.25m is debited to goodwill, reducing the fair value
adjustments (and net assets at acquisition) and increasing goodwill.
DEBIT Property $1m
CREDIT Goodwill $1m
To recognise fair value uplift

To recognise deferred tax on fair value uplift
(ii) Provisions for unrealised profits are temporary differences which create deferred tax
assets and the deferred tax is provided at the receiving company's rate of tax. A
2
deferred tax asset would arise of (3.6  /6 ) @ 30% = $360,000.
DEBIT Deferred tax liability $360,000
CREDIT Income tax (SPLOCI) $360,000
(b) (i) The unrealised gains are temporary differences which will reverse when the
investments are sold therefore a deferred tax liability needs to be created of ($8m 
25%) = $2m.
DEBIT Income tax (SPLOCI) $2,000,000
CREDIT Deferred tax liability $2,000,000
(ii) The allowance is a temporary difference which will reverse when the currently
unidentified loans go bad and the entity will then be entitled to tax relief. A deferred tax
asset of ($2m at 25%) = $500,000 should be created.
DEBIT Deferred tax asset $500,000
426
(c) No deferred tax liability is required for the additional tax payable of $2m as Pandar controls
the dividend policy of Endar and does not intend to remit the earnings to its own tax regime
in the foreseeable future.
(d) Pandar's unrelieved trading losses can only be recognised as a deferred tax asset to the
extent they are considered to be recoverable. In assessing the recoverability there needs to
be evidence that there will be suitable taxable profits from which the losses can be deducted
in the future. To the extent Pandar itself has a deferred tax liability for future taxable trading
profits (e.g. accelerated tax depreciation) then an asset could be recognised.
Answer 21
$28,220
Under HKFRS 10, intra-group profits recognised in inventory are eliminated in full and HKAS 12
applied to any temporary differences that result. This profit elimination results in the tax base being
higher than the carrying amount, so deductible temporary differences arise. Deferred tax assets are
measured by reference to the tax rate applying to the entity who currently owns the inventory.
Dipyrone's eliminated profit
The profit on this intercompany sale is $600,000  25% = $150,000.
30% of these goods are in inventory at 31 December 20X7, so the unrealised profit is $150,000 
30% = $450,000.
The tax rate used in calculating any deferred tax asset is that of the entity that owns the inventory,
which is Reidfurd. The deferred tax asset is therefore $450,000  33% = $14,850.
Reidfurd's eliminated profit
The profit on this intercompany sale is $800,000  20% = $160,000.
25% of these goods are in inventory at 31 December 20X7, so the unrealised profit is $160,000 
25% = $40,000.
The tax rate used in calculating any deferred tax asset is that of the entity that owns the inventory,
which is Dipyrone. The deferred tax asset is therefore $40,000  26% = $10,400
427
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Healthy Supplement Inc 29 minutes

Healthy Supplement Inc. (HSI) was incorporated on 1 October 20X1 and is engaged in the design
and manufacture of nutrition products. Below is the computation of income tax for the first financial
year ended 30 September 20X2:
HK$'000
Adjusted for:
Non-taxable interest income (1,039)
Release of government grant to P/L (1,200)
Depreciation charged to P/L 15,933
Non-deductible legal and professional fees 1,358
Provision for product warranty charged to P/L 4,200
Depreciation allowance (38,500)
Government grant received 9,600
Warranty expenses paid (1,248)
Assessable profit 43,122
Income tax prepaid on 30 June 20X2 4,600
During the year, HSI acquired items of plant and equipment of HK$94,334,000 which are
depreciated on a straight line basis over useful lives of 3 to 10 years, all of them were still in use by
the entity. Included in this amount is HK$4,388,000 related to certain expenditure which is not tax
deductible under tax law. The non-tax deductible items were acquired on 1 April 20X2 and
depreciated for half a year out of an estimated useful life of 5 years up to the end of the reporting
period.
An asset-related government grant is taxable upon receipt while HSI adopted HKAS 20 to
recognise the grant to profit or loss over the expected useful lives of the related assets.
Warranty expenses are tax deductible when payment is made.
The standard income tax rate for HSI is 20%. A 2% tax rate deduction is provided for an entity's
first year of operation.
Required
(a) Calculate the current tax expense for the year ended and the current tax payable as at 30
September 20X2. (2 marks)
(b) Calculate the deferred tax assets/liabilities as at 30 September 20X2 and the deferred tax
credit/charge for the year then ended. (8 marks)
(c) Prepare the tax reconciliation for disclosure in the financial statements of HSI for the year
ended 30 September 20X2. (6 marks)
(Total = 16 marks)
428
Rider Games Inc 11 minutes

Rider Games Inc. (RGI) acquired a patented technology that expires in 10 years and a licence to
use a custom made software for 5 years at consideration of HK$4.5 million and HK$2.4 million
respectively on 1 October 20W9. Amortisation is calculated on an annual basis over a 5-year
estimated useful life for both intangible assets. For tax purposes, the cost of a patent is a non-
deductible expenditure and the software licence is fully deductible in the year of acquisition. Tax
rate applicable to RGI is 30%.
Required
Calculate the temporary differences and deferred tax asset / liability of RGI at the year end date of
30 September 20X3.
(6 marks)
429
Financial Reporting
430
chapter 16
Employee benefits
Topic list
5.3 Step 1 – Determine the deficit or surplus
1 HKAS 19 Employee Benefits
5.4 Step 2 – Determine the amount of the
1.1 Employee benefits
net defined benefit liability (asset)
5.5 Step 3 – Determine amounts to be
1.3 Definitions
2 Short-term employee benefits 5.6 Step 4 – Determine amounts to be
2.1 Recognition and measurement recognised in other comprehensive
2.2 Short-term paid absences income
2.3 Profit-sharing schemes and bonus plans 5.7 Further issues – past service costs and
settlements
3 Post-employment benefits 5.8 Further issues – the asset ceiling
3.1 Types of post-employment benefits 5.9 Further issues – employee contributions
3.2 Multi-employer plans 5.10 Summary of accounting treatment
4 Defined contribution plans 5.11 Disclosure of defined benefit plans
4.1 Recognition and measurement 6 Termination benefits
4.2 Disclosure 6.1 Recognition
5 Defined benefit plans 6.2 Measurement
5.1 Introduction to accounting treatment
5.2 Accounting steps
Learning focus
An increasing number of companies and other entities now provide a pension and other
employee benefits as part of their employees' remuneration package. In view of this trend, it is
important that there is standard best practice for the way in which employee benefit costs are
recognised, measured, presented and disclosed in the sponsoring entities' accounts. You
must ensure that you understand and can apply the rules of HKAS 19 as amended in 2011.
431
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.04 Employee benefits 2
3.04.01 Identify short-term employee benefits in accordance with HKAS 19
and apply the recognition and measurement principles in respect of
short-term employee benefits
3.04.02 Distinguish between defined contribution plans and defined benefit
plans
3.04.03 Account for defined contribution plans
3.04.04 Identify termination benefits in accordance with HKAS 19 and apply
the recognition and measurement principles in respect of
termination benefits
432
16: Employee benefits | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 19 Employee Benefits

Topic highlights
HKAS 19 Employee Benefits provides guidance on the accounting treatment to be applied to short-
term employment benefits, post-employment benefits (pensions), other long-term employment
benefits and termination benefits. Amendments to the standard in 2011 reduced the complexity of
accounting for employee benefits.
Before we look at HKAS 19, we should consider the nature of employee benefit costs and why
there is an accounting problem which must be addressed by a standard.
HKAS 19.5 1.1 Employee benefits

Companies generally provide their employees with a package of pay and benefits, which may
include some or all of the following:
 Short-term benefits including:
– Wages and salaries
– Contributions to Mandatory Provident Fund
– Paid annual leave
– Paid sick leave
– Paid maternity/paternity leave
– Profit shares and bonuses paid within 12 months of the year end
– Paid jury service
– Paid military service
– Non-monetary benefits, e.g. medical care, cars, free goods
 Post-employment benefits, e.g. pensions and post-employment medical care
 Other long-term benefits, e.g. profit shares, bonuses or deferred compensation payable later
than 12 months after the year end, sabbatical leave, long-service benefits
 Termination benefits, e.g. early retirement payments and redundancy payments
Benefits may be paid to the employees themselves, to their dependants (spouses, children, etc.) or
to third parties.

In the case of the short-term benefits listed above, the employee will receive the benefit at about
the same time as he or she earns it. The accounting is therefore relatively straightforward with the
costs of providing the benefit recognised as an expense in the employer's financial statements.
Accounting for the cost of deferred employee benefits is less clear cut. This is because of the
long time scale, complicated estimates and uncertainties involved in these types of benefit. In
addition, the costs could be viewed in a number of ways, for example as deferred salary to the
employee or as a deduction from the employee’s true gross salary.
In the past, entities accounted for these benefits simply by making a charge to the profit or loss of
the employing entity on the basis of actual payments made. This led to substantial variations in
reported profits of these entities and disclosure of information on these costs was usually sparse.
433
Financial Reporting
1.2.1 The accounting solution

HKAS 19 addresses the problem described above by prescribing how employee benefits should be
recognised and measured.
The standard requires an entity to recognise:
(a) A liability when an employee has provided a service in exchange for benefits to be received
by the employee at some time in the future.
(b) An expense when the entity receives the economic benefits from a service provided by an
employee regardless of when the employee received or will receive the benefits for providing
the service.
The application of these basic rules to each of the categories of employee benefits described in
Section 1.1 is provided in HKAS 19 and described throughout the remainder of this chapter. First,
however, we must consider a number of important definitions within the standard.

You should refer back to the following definitions as necessary as you work through the rest of this
chapter.
Key terms
Definitions of employee benefits

Employee benefits are all forms of consideration given by an entity in exchange for service
rendered by employees.
Short-term employee benefits are employee benefits (other than termination benefits) that are
expected to be settled wholly before 12 months after the end of the annual reporting period in
which the employees render the related service.
Post-employment benefits are employee benefits (other than termination benefits and short-term
employee benefits) which are payable after the completion of employment.
Termination benefits are employee benefits provided in exchange for the termination of an
employee’s employment as a result of either:
(a) An entity's decision to terminate an employee's employment before the normal retirement
date, or
(b) An employee's decision to accept an offer of benefits in exchange for the termination of
employment.
Other long-term employee benefits are all employee benefits other than short-term employee
benefits, post-employment benefits and termination benefits.
Definitions relating to classification of plans
Post-employment benefit plans are formal or informal arrangements under which an entity
provides post-employment benefits for one or more employees.
Defined contribution plans are post-employment benefit plans under which an entity pays fixed
contributions into a separate entity (a fund) and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay
further contributions if the fund does not hold sufficient assets to pay all employee benefits relating
to employee service in the current and prior periods.
Defined benefit plans are post-employment benefit plans other than defined contribution plans.
434
Key terms (cont'd)

Multi-employer plans are defined contribution plans (other than state plans) or defined benefit
plans (other than state plans) that:
(a) Pool the assets contributed by various entities that are not under common control; and
(b) Use those assets to provide benefits to employees of more than one entity, on the basis that
contribution and benefit levels are determined without regard to the identity of the entity that
employs the employees concerned.
Definitions relating to the net defined benefit liability (asset)
The net defined benefit liability (asset) is the deficit or surplus, adjusted for any effect of limiting
a net defined benefit asset to the asset ceiling.
The deficit or surplus is:
(a) The present value of the defined benefit obligation less
(b) The fair value of plan assets (if any).
The asset ceiling is the present value of any economic benefits available in the form of refunds
from the plan or reductions in future contributions to the plan.
The present value of a defined benefit obligation is the present value, without deducting any
plan assets, of expected future payments required to settle the obligation resulting from employee
service in the current and prior periods.
Plan assets comprise:
(a) Assets held by a long-term employee benefit fund
(b) Qualifying insurance policies
Fair value is the amount for which an asset could be exchanged or a liability settled between
knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm’s length transaction.
Definitions relating to defined benefit cost
Service cost comprises:
(a) Current service cost which is the increase in the present value of the defined benefit
obligation resulting from employee service in the current period.
(b) Past service cost, which is the change in the present value of the defined benefit obligation
for employee service in prior periods, resulting from a plan amendment (the introduction or
withdrawal of, or changes to, a defined benefit plan) or a curtailment (a significant reduction
by the entity in the number of employees covered by a plan); and
(c) Any gain or loss on settlement.
Net interest on the defined benefit liability (asset) is the change during the period in the net
defined benefit liability (asset) that arises from the passage of time.
Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability (asset) comprise:
(a) Actuarial gains and losses
(b) The return on plan assets, excluding amounts included in net interest on the defined benefit
liability (asset); and
(c) Any change in the effect of the asset ceiling, excluding amounts included in net interest on
the net defined benefit liability (asset).
435
Financial Reporting
Key terms (cont'd)

Actuarial gains and losses are changes in the present value of the defined benefit obligation
resulting from:
(a) Experience adjustments (the effects of differences between the previous actuarial
assumptions and what has actually occurred), and
(b) The effects of changes in actuarial assumptions.
The return on plan assets is interest, dividends and other income derived from the plan assets,
together with realised and unrealised gains or losses on the plan assets, less:
(a) Any cost of managing plan assets; and
(b) Any tax payable by the plan itself, other than tax included in the actuarial assumptions used
to measure the present value of the defined benefit obligation.
A settlement is a transaction that eliminates all further legal or constructive obligations for part or
all of the benefits provided under a defined benefit plan, other than a payment of benefits to, or on
behalf of employees that is set out in the terms of the plan and included in the actuarial
assumptions.
(HKAS 19)
2 Short-term employee benefits

Topic highlights
Short-term employee benefits are those benefits that are expected to be settled wholly before
12 months after the end of the period in which the employees provide the related services. The
cost of the benefits to be paid in exchange for the employee's services should be recognised in the
period on an accruals basis.
As mentioned in Section 1.1, short-term employee benefits include:

 Monetary benefits such as wages and salaries, annual leave, sick leave, maternity leave,
and profit shares and bonuses paid within 12 months.
 Non-monetary benefits such as medical care, housing and company cars.
HKAS 19.11 2.1 Recognition and measurement

HKAS 19 requires that short-term employee benefits are recognised in the period in which the
related service is provided by the employee as:
(a) A liability (after deducting any amount already paid), and
(b) An expense unless another standard (such as HKAS 2 or HKAS 16) requires or permits
inclusion in the cost of an asset.
The amount recognised should not be discounted.
Where the amount already paid exceeds the undiscounted amount of the benefits, the resulting
asset should be recognised as a prepayment to the extent that it will lead to a reduction in future
payments or refund.
The standard explains how these rules are applied in the case of short-term compensated
absences and profit-sharing and bonus plans.
436
HKAS
19.13-18
2.2 Short-term paid absences
Short-term paid absences include paid holiday leave, sick leave, maternity or paternity leave and
jury service leave. These are classified by the standard as either:
 Accumulating compensated absences, or
 Non-accumulating compensated absences.
Accumulating absences are those that can be carried forward and used in future periods if the
current period’s entitlement is not used in full; non-accumulating absences are those which cannot
be carried forward and lapse if the current year entitlement is not used.
2.2.1 Accounting treatment
The cost of accumulating absences should be recognised as an expense when the employee
provides the service which results in entitlement to such absences. Where there is an unused
entitlement at the reporting date, a liability is recognised, based on an estimated amount.
The cost of non-accumulating absences should be recognised as an expense when the absences
occur.
Example: Sick pay

An entity has 10 employees, each of whom is entitled to seven days of paid sick leave per annum.
Unused sick leave may be carried forward for one year. Current year leave must be used before carried
forward leave. At 31 December 20X8, each employee had, on average, two days of leave unused.
Based on past experience the entity expects eight employees to take no more than seven days of sick
leave in the coming year. The remaining two employees are expected to take nine days each.
Assuming that each sick day costs the entity $60, what liability for sick leave must be accrued in
the statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X8?
Solution
A liability must be recognised in the statement of financial position to the extent that the entity
expects to have to pay sick leave next year as a result of the entitlement that has accumulated at
31 December 20X8:
2 employees  2 days  $60 = $240
$ $
DEBIT Employee expense 240
CREDIT Liability 240
Being sick leave entitlement at 31 December 20X8 expected to be paid next year
HKAS
19.19-24
2.3 Profit-sharing schemes and bonus plans
HKAS 19 requires that an entity recognises the expected cost of profit-sharing and bonus
payments only when:
 The entity has a present legal or constructive obligation to make such payments as a result
of past events, and
 A reliable estimate of the obligation can be made.
In this case an expense and liability should be recognised.
Often conditions are attached to bonus payments, for example an employee must still be in the
entity's employment when the bonus becomes payable.
437
Financial Reporting
Therefore, an estimate should be made based on the expectation of the level of bonuses that will
ultimately be paid. A reliable estimate can only be made when:
 The formal terms of the plan include a formula to determine the amount of the benefit;
 The entity determines the amount payable before the financial statements are authorised for
issue; or
 Past practice provides clear evidence of the amount of a constructive obligation.
Example: Bonus plan

Lowdown Co. has a contractual agreement to pay a total of 5% of its net profit each year as a
bonus. The bonus is divided between the employees who are with the entity at its year end. The
following data is relevant:
Net profit $2,000,000
Average employees 50
Employees at start of year 60
Employees at end of year 40
Required
How should the expense be recognised?
Solution
An expense should be recognised for the year in which the profits were made and therefore the
employees' services were provided, for:
$2m  5% = $100,000
Each of the 40 employees remaining with the entity at the year end is entitled to $2,500. A liability
of $100,000 should be recognised if the bonuses remain unpaid at the year end.
3 Post-employment benefits
Topic highlights
There are two types of retirement benefit plan:
 Defined contribution plans
 Defined benefit plans
HKAS 3.1 Types of post-employment benefits

19.26-30
Post-employment benefits are those benefits provided to employees after they have stopped
working. They may include:
 Retirement benefits (pensions), and
 Other benefits such as post-employment life insurance or medical care.
Post-employment benefit schemes are often referred to as "plans". Employers (and sometimes
employees) make regular contributions to the plan and this money is invested in long-term assets
such as stocks and shares.
The return on the plan assets, and sometimes the proceeds of the sale of plan assets, is used to
pay for the post-employment benefits.
There are two types of post-employment benefit plans:
 Defined contribution, and
 Defined benefit.
438
3.1.1 Defined contribution plans

These plans involve fixed amounts (normally a percentage of an employee's salary) being paid into
the plan each year. These amounts, or contributions, may be made by the employer and current
employees.
The level of benefits paid out to former employees is resultant on how the plan's investments have
performed. In other words there is no guarantee of a fixed amount of benefit.
3.1.2 Defined benefit plans
These plans involve fixed amounts being paid out of the plan to former employees as benefits. The
fixed amount is normally calculated as a percentage (based on the number of years' service) of
final salary.
As before, contributions are made by the employer (and possibly current employees) and these are
invested. The level of contributions is not, however, fixed. Instead it is set at an amount that is
expected to result in sufficient investment returns to meet the obligation to pay the defined post-
retirement benefits.
Where it appears that there are insufficient assets in the fund, the employer will be required to
make increased contributions; where it appears that there are surplus assets in the fund, the
employer may stop paying contributions for a period (known as a contributions holiday).
HKAS
19.32-39
3.2 Multi-employer plans
Multi-employer plans were defined above in Section 1.3. They are retirement benefit plans in which
various entities contribute assets to a pool. These pooled assets are then used to provide benefits
to employees of the various contributing entities.
HKAS 19 requires that an entity should classify such a plan as a defined contribution plan or a
defined benefit plan, under the terms of the plan (including any constructive obligation that exceeds
the formal terms of the plan).
If the multi-employer plan is a defined contribution plan, it is accounted for as normal, by
recognising the contributions made to the plan as an expense.
If, on the other hand, the multi-employer plan is a defined benefit plan, then HKAS 19 requires the
entity to account for it as a defined benefit plan. However, it should do so only on a proportional
basis. In other words it recognises its proportionate share of the obligation, assets and cost
associated with the plan. It should also make all of the normal disclosures for defined benefit plans.
However, determining the extent to which an entity participates in a defined benefit multi-employer
plan may be problematic. Therefore, it may be difficult to determine reliably the appropriate
proportionate share of the relevant data. In this case, where there is insufficient information to
determine the relevant amounts to use defined benefit accounting, then the entity should recognise
the plan as a defined contribution plan. However, it should also make as many additional
disclosures as possible to enable users to understand the nature of the plan. For example, an
entity should disclose that the plan is, in fact, a defined benefit plan and information about any
known surplus or deficit.
4 Defined contribution plans

Topic highlights
Contributions to a defined contribution plan are recognised as an expense in the period in which
they are payable.
439
Financial Reporting
HKAS
19.51-52
4.1 Recognition and measurement
Accounting for defined contribution plans is relatively straightforward:
1 Contributions to a defined contribution plan should be recognised as an expense in the
period they are payable (except to the extent that labour costs may be included within the
cost of assets).
2 Any liability for unpaid contributions that are due as at the end of the period should be
recognised as a liability (accrued expense).
3 Any excess contributions paid should be recognised as an asset (prepaid expense), but
only to the extent that the prepayment will lead to, for example, a reduction in future
payments or a cash refund.
Where contributions are not payable during the period (or within 12 months of the end of the
period) in which the employee provides the services to which they relate, the amount recognised
should be discounted, to reflect the time value of money.
Example: Defined contribution plan

Highlife Co. agrees to contribute 4% of employees' total remuneration into a post-employment plan
each period.
In the year ended 31 December 20X1, the company paid total salaries of $16 million. A bonus of
$4 million based on the income for the period was paid to the employees in March 20X2.
The company had paid $760,000 into the plan by 31 December 20X1.
Required
Calculate the total expense for post-employment benefits for the year and the accrual which will
appear in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X1.
Solution
$
Salaries 16,000,000
Bonus 4,000,000
20,000,000  4% = $800,000
$ $
DEBIT Staff costs expense 800,000
CREDIT Cash 760,000
Accrual 40,000
HKAS 19.53 4.2 Disclosure

HKAS 19 requires that the following is disclosed in respect of defined contribution schemes:
(a) A description of the plan
(b) The amount recognised as an expense in the period
Illustration
Defined contribution plan
The Company operates a defined contribution retirement benefit scheme for all qualifying
employees. The assets of the scheme are held separately from those of the Company in funds
under the control of trustees. The total cost charged to profit or loss of $3.4 million represents
contributions payable to the scheme at a rate specified in the rules of the plan. At 31 December
440
20X4, contributions of $250,000 due in respect of the current reporting period had not been paid
over to the schemes.
5 Defined benefit plans

Topic highlights
Defined benefit plans are recognised in the statement of financial position. Changes in the plan are
broken down into their constituent parts and recognised in profit or loss or other comprehensive
income immediately.
5.1 Introduction to accounting treatment

As we have already discussed, contributions made to defined benefit plans may vary considerably
from year to year. The accounting treatment applied to defined contribution plans is therefore not
appropriate here, as expensing contributions would result in volatile profits.
Instead, HKAS 19 requires a net defined benefit liability (asset) to be shown in the statement of financial
position. This is defined as the deficit or surplus in a defined benefit plan and is calculated as:
(a) The present value of the defined benefit obligation (i.e. the obligation to pay future benefits to
employees) less
(b) The fair value of any plan assets
Where the present value of the defined benefit obligation exceeds the fair value of plan assets, a
plan is in deficit and an overall net defined benefit liability is recognised; where the fair value of plan
assets exceeds the present value of the defined benefit obligation, a plan is in surplus and an
overall net defined benefit asset is recognised.
Both the present value of the obligation and the fair value of the plan assets are normally
calculated and advised by an actuary. HKAS 19 provides guidance on this. The role of the
accountant is therefore to recognise the changes in these amounts from year to year in accordance
with HKAS 19.
HKAS 19.61 5.1.1 Constructive obligation

In determining the extent of the obligation to provide retirement benefits, an entity must assess not
only its legal obligation under the formal terms of a defined benefit plan, but also any constructive
obligation that arises from the entity’s informal practices.
Informal practices give rise to a constructive obligation where the entity has no realistic alternative
but to pay employee benefits, for example, where a change in an entity’s informal practices would
cause unacceptable damage to its relationship with employees.
441
Financial Reporting
HKAS 19.57
5.2 Accounting steps
HKAS 19 provides a four-step approach to accounting for defined benefit plans:
1 Determine the deficit or surplus (i) Use an actuarial technique in order to make a reliable
estimate of the cost to the entity of providing the post-
employment benefit that employees have earned in
current and past periods
(ii) Discount that benefit to determine the present value of
the defined benefit obligation
(iii) Deduct the fair value of plan assets from the present
value of the defined benefit obligation
2 Determine the amount of the The amount of deficit or surplus calculated in step 1 may
net defined benefit liability require adjustment for the effect of limiting a net defined
(asset) benefit asset to the asset ceiling.
3 Determine amounts to be These may include:
recognised in profit or loss (i) Current service cost
(ii) Past service cost and gain or loss on settlement
(iii) Net interest on the defined benefit liability (asset)
4 Determine remeasurements to These may include:

be recognised in other (i) Actuarial gains and losses
(ii) Return on plan assets excluding amounts included in net
interest on the defined benefit liability (asset)
(iii) Any change in the effect of the asset ceiling excluding
amounts included in net interest on the defined benefit
liability (asset).
Each of these steps is considered in more detail in the following sections of the chapter.
HKAS
19.58-59
5.3 Step 1 – Determine the deficit or surplus
Measurement of the deficit or surplus is not required at every period end. However, it must be
made sufficiently regularly such that reported amounts are not materially different from the actual
value at the reporting date.
HKAS 19 encourages, but does not require, the use of a qualified actuary.
The cost of providing future benefits in respect of current and past services should be estimated
using an actuarial technique, the projected unit credit method.
HKAS 5.3.1 Estimation of future cost using the projected unit credit method
19.67-68,75-80
The projected unit credit method assumes that each period of an employee’s service gives rise to
an additional "unit" of future benefit. Each of these units is measured separately and they are
added together to calculate the total obligation.
In measuring the obligation, the actuary must make a number of actuarial assumptions, both
demographic and financial, for example:
 What the defined benefits will be (this depends upon factors such as length of service and
final salary)
 When benefits will be paid (this depends upon retirement age)
 How many employees will draw a pension (this depends upon factors such as mortality rate)
442
The standard requires actuarial assumptions to be unbiased and mutually compatible. They should
also be based on "market expectations" at the year end, over the period during which the
obligations will be settled.
HKAS 5.3.2 Discount the future benefit to present value
19.83-86
After the future cost of the defined benefit obligation has been measured, it must be discounted to
present value using an appropriate discount rate.
The standard requires that this is determined by reference to market yields at the end of the
reporting period on high quality corporate bonds. A 2014 amendment to IAS 19 clarified that
the bonds should be denominated in the same currency as the benefits to be paid.
In the absence of a "deep" market in such bonds, the yields on comparable government bonds
should be used as reference instead.
The corporate bonds that are used to determine a discount rate should have a term to maturity that
is consistent with the expected maturity of the post-employment benefit obligations, although a
single weighted average discount rate is sufficient.
HKAS 5.3.3 Fair value of plan assets
19.8,113-115
In order to determine the deficit or surplus, the fair value of plan assets must be deducted from the
present value of the defined benefit obligation.
Plan assets are:
(a) Assets such as stocks and shares, held by a fund that is legally separate from the reporting
entity, which exists solely to pay employee benefits.
(b) Insurance policies, issued by an insurer that is not a related party, the proceeds of which can
only be used to pay employee benefits.
Investments which may be used for purposes other than to pay employee benefits are not plan
assets.
The standard requires that the plan assets are measured at fair value, defined as the amount for
which an asset could be exchanged or a liability settled between knowledgeable, willing parties in
an arm’s length transaction. HKAS 19 includes the following specific requirements:
(a) The plan assets should exclude any contributions due from the employer but not yet paid.
(b) Plan assets are reduced by any liabilities of the fund that do not relate to employee benefits,
such as trade and other payables.
HKAS 5.4 Step 2 – Determine the amount of the net defined benefit
19.63-64
liability (asset)
In the statement of financial position, the amount recognised as a defined benefit liability (or
asset) should be the following.
(a) The present value of the defined obligation at the year end, minus
(b) The fair value of the assets of the plan as at the year end (if there are any) out of which
the future obligations to current and past employees will be directly settled.
Where there is a net defined benefit asset, the amount of this may be limited by the "asset ceiling".
We shall discuss this in more detail later in the chapter.
HKAS 19.120 5.5 Step 3 – Determine amounts to be recognised in profit or loss

The change in the net defined benefit liability (asset) as measured by an actuary at the start and
the end of a financial period can be attributed to contributions made into the plan, payments made
out of the plan and three further components:
(a) Service costs
443
Financial Reporting
(b) Net interest on the net defined benefit liability (asset), and
(c) Remeasurements.
The first two of these components are recognised in profit or loss. The third is recognised in other
comprehensive income and is dealt with in Section 5.6.
5.5.1 Service costs
Service costs include:
 Current service cost, being the increase in the present value of the defined benefit obligation
resulting from employee services during the current period
 Past service cost, being the change in the obligation relating to employee services in prior
periods arising from amendments or curtailments to the pension plan
 Gains or losses on settlement of a defined benefit plan.
Current service costs normally arise in each financial year; past service costs and gains or losses
on settlement arise only where a pension plan is amended, curtailed or settled in a period. We shall
therefore concentrate on current service costs here and consider past service costs and gains or
losses on settlement in more detail in Section 5.7.
The current service cost is the increase in the present value of the defined benefit obligation
resulting from employee service in the current period. This increase arises from the fact that most
defined benefit pensions provide an incremental benefit for each year of service. The current
service cost is calculated using the projected unit credit method which we mentioned earlier.
Consider a situation where a defined benefit plan provides for a benefit of 2.5% of the employee's
salary in his/her final year, for each full year of service. The pension is payable from the age of 65.
If an employee is expected to earn $10,000 in his final year of employment, then each year of
service will result in an extra $250 for each year of retirement (assuming a 40-year working life). If
the employee is expected to live for 15 years after retirement, the benefit payable is the discounted
value at retirement date of $250 per annum for 15 years. The current service cost is the present
value of this discounted amount.
The current service cost increases the plan obligation and is charged to operating expenses in
profit or loss.
HKAS 5.5.2 Net interest on the net defined benefit liability (asset)
19.83, 123
Annual interest arises in respect of both the defined benefit obligation and the plan assets:
(i) An interest charge arises on the unwinding of the discount on the defined benefit obligation
as time passes, and
(ii) Interest income is recognised on the plan assets.
HKAS 19 requires that these two interest elements are calculated on a net basis as:
Net defined benefit liability (asset)  discount rate
 The net defined benefit liability (asset) should be determined as at the start of the
accounting period, taking account of changes during the period as a result of contributions
paid into the scheme and benefits paid out.
 The discount rate is that determined by reference to market yields (at the year end) on
high quality fixed-rate corporate bonds.
The net interest cost is charged to finance costs in profit or loss.
HKAS
19.122, 127
5.6 Step 4 – Determine amounts to be recognised in other
The third component of changes in a net defined benefit liability (asset) is remeasurements. These
are recognised in other comprehensive income and are never reclassified to profit or loss.
444
Remeasurements may include:

(a) Actuarial gains and losses;
(b) The return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest on the net defined
benefit liability (asset)); and
(c) Any change in the effect of the asset ceiling (excluding amounts included in net interest on
the net defined benefit liability (asset)).
The asset ceiling is a complication that is not relevant in every case, so it is dealt with separately,
later in the chapter.
HKAS 19.128 5.6.1 Actuarial gains and losses
We have already seen, in Section 5.3.1, that in measuring the defined benefit obligation, the
actuary must make a number of actuarial assumptions regarding issues such as mortality and
salary increases.
Actuarial gains and losses arise from changes to the defined benefit obligation because of changes
in actuarial assumptions and experience adjustments:
(a) Actual events: The calculation of the plan obligation and the current service cost is based
on estimates of numbers of employees remaining in the plan during the current year as well
as estimates about salary changes during the current year. Where staff leave or salaries are
increased by amounts different from those expected, the year end obligation will be different
from that previously expected.
(b) Actuarial assumptions are revised: The valuation of the plan obligation depends upon a
number of what are called actuarial assumptions. These include the discount rate, estimates
of staff remaining in the plan until retirement, projected salaries on retirement, mortality rates
and the length of time over which benefits need to be paid. These estimates can be changed
as the entity, or its actuaries, reassess the future.
(c) Actual returns on plan assets: The valuation of the plan assets includes an estimated rate
of return for the current year. At the year end the plan assets may have grown by an amount
different from that expected.
Such actuarial gains and losses are recognised in other comprehensive income.
5.6.2 Return on plan assets
A new valuation of the plan assets is carried out at each period end, using current fair values. Any
difference between the new value, and what has been recognised up to that date (normally the
opening balance, interest, and any cash payments into or out of the plan) is treated as a
"remeasurement" and recognised in other comprehensive income.
Example: Defined benefit plan

The following information relates to a defined benefit pension plan operated by Snow Co.:
$m
Present value of defined benefit obligation at 1 January 20X1 100
Present value of defined benefit obligation at 31 December 20X1 120
Fair value of plan assets at 1 January 20X1 60
Fair value of plan assets at 31 December 20X1 55
Current service cost 18
Contributions made into the scheme 12
Payments made to members of the scheme 15
The yield on a high quality corporate bond is 5%.
Calculate amounts to be recognised in profit or loss and other comprehensive income in the year
ended 31 December 20X1 and the value of the net defined benefit liability in the statement of
financial position at that date.
445
Financial Reporting
Solution
Net defined
Obligation Assets benefit liability
$m $m $m
At 1 January 20X1 100 60 40
Contributions 12
Payments (15) (15)
Interest (5%  100m)/(5%  60m) 5 3
108 60
Remeasurements (β) 12 (5)
At 31 December 20X1 120 55 65
In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the following amounts will
be recognised:
In profit or loss $m
Net interest on net defined benefit liability (5 – 3) 2
In other comprehensive income
Remeasurement losses on defined benefit liability (12 + 5) 17
[Note that the remeasurement in relation to both the asset and liability is a loss as it decreases the
asset and increases the liability.]
In the statement of financial position, the net defined benefit liability of $65m (120 – 55) will be
recognised.
JSX, a listed entity, has a defined benefits pension scheme. The following information relates to the
pension scheme for the year ended 31 October 20X8:
$
Current service cost 362,600
Contributions to scheme 550,700
Benefits paid 662,400
Fair value of scheme assets at 1 November 20X7 10,660,000
Fair value of scheme assets at 31 October 20X8 11,204,000
Present value of defined benefit obligation at 1 November 20X7 13,290,000
Present value of defined benefit obligation at 31 October 20X8 14,210,000
The yield on a high quality corporate bond was 4%.
Calculate the amount to be recognised in other comprehensive income in respect of the pension
scheme for the year ended 31 October 20X8.
5.7 Further issues – past service costs and settlements

Topic highlights
Past service costs arise when a pension plan is amended or curtailed; they are recognised
immediately in profit or loss.
Settlements occur when plan benefits are reduced. Gains or losses on settlement are recognised in
profit or loss immediately.
446
Although we have now met the most common items which reconcile the plan surplus or deficit at
the start and end of a period, there are two further complications which you must be able to deal
with:
 Past service cost
 Settlements
HKAS 5.7.1 Past service cost
19.102-106
Past service costs arise as a result of the amendment or curtailment of a defined benefits plan.
A plan amendment arises when an entity introduces a new defined benefits plan, withdraws an
existing plan, or changes the benefits payable under an existing plan.
A curtailment occurs when an entity significantly reduces the number of employees covered by a
plan.
In either case, the past service cost is the resulting change in the present value of the defined
benefit plan. The past service cost may be positive where new benefits are introduced or negative
where existing benefits are withdrawn. The amount is advised by an actuary.
Past service costs are recognised as an expense in profit or loss at the earlier of the following
dates:
(a) When the plan amendment or curtailment occurs
(b) When the entity recognises related restructuring costs in accordance with HKAS 37 or
termination benefits in accordance with HKAS 19 (see Section 6).
HKAS 5.7.2 Settlements
19.109,111
A settlement occurs when an employer enters into a transaction to eliminate all or part of its post-
employment benefit obligations, for example, a one-off transfer of obligations under a plan to an
insurance company through the purchase of an insurance policy.
The gain or loss on a settlement is the difference between:

(a) The present value of the defined benefit obligation being settled, as valued on the date of
the settlement; and
(b) The settlement price, including any plan assets transferred and any payments made by the
entity directly in connection with the settlement.
Any gains or losses on settlement are recognised immediately in profit or loss when the settlement
occurs.
A defined benefit plan provides for retirement benefits at the rate of 1% of salary per annum for all
employees from the commencement of their employment. On 31 December 20X1, the defined
benefit obligation is measured at $18 million and the plan assets have a fair value of $15.5 million.
Corresponding amounts at 31 December 20X2 are $22.5 million and $16 million.
On 1 January 20X2, the rules of the plan are changed to provide for benefit at the rate of 2% of
salary for employees with 15 or more years' service and the defined benefit obligation on the new
basis is $20 million. Other relevant information is as follows:
 Current service cost is $3 million for the year ended 31 December 20X2
 Market yields on high quality corporate bonds were 4% at 1 January 20X2 and
4.5% at 31 December 20X2
 An overall remeasurement loss of $1.2 million was identified
447
Financial Reporting
Required
What amount is recognised in profit or loss in respect of the defined benefit plan in the year ended
31 December 20X2?
HKAS
19.64-65, 83
5.8 Further issues – the asset ceiling
In Section 5.4 we said that a net defined benefit asset is limited by the "asset ceiling". This term
relates to a threshold established by HKAS 19 to ensure that any pension surplus is carried at no
more than its recoverable amount. In other words, the net defined benefit asset is restricted to the
amount of cash savings available to the entity in the future.
HKAS 19 defines the asset ceiling as: "the present value of any economic benefits available in the
form of refunds from the plan or reductions in future contributions to the plan".
The standard further requires that the discount rate used to calculate the present value of future
economic benefits is the same as that used to calculate the net interest on the net defined benefit
liability (asset) i.e. a rate determined by reference to market yields at the end of the reporting
period on high quality corporate bonds.
Where the net defined benefit asset is reduced to the asset ceiling threshold, the related write
down is treated as a remeasurement and recognised in other comprehensive income.
Example: The asset ceiling

Rowan Co. operates a defined benefit pension scheme for its employees. At 1 January 20X1 the
present value of the defined benefit obligation was $5 million and the fair value of the plan assets
was $5.7 million. Equivalent values at 31 December 20X1 were $5.94 million and $7.1 million.
For the year ended 31 December 20X1:
 Current service cost was $1.5 million
 The interest rate applicable to the net defined benefit asset was 3%
 Contributions of $2 million were made to the plan
 $800,000 was paid out to former employees of Rowan
The present value of future economic benefits in relation to the plan is $1.1 million.
What amount of remeasurement is recognised in other comprehensive income in the year ended
31 December 20X1?
Solution
Net defined
Obligation Assets benefit asset
$'000 $'000 $'000
At 1 January 20X1 5,000 5,700 700
Contributions 2,000
Payments (800) (800)
Interest (3%  5m)/(3%  5.7m) 150 171
5,850 7,071
Remeasurements (β) 90 29
At 31 December 20X1 5,940 7,100 1,160
Remeasurement due to asset ceiling (60)
Asset ceiling 1,100
448
Therefore, the total remeasurement amount recognised in other comprehensive income is:
$'000
Remeasurement loss on obligation 90
Remeasurement gain on assets (29)
Remeasurement loss due to asset ceiling 60
Net remeasurement loss 121
5.9 Further issues – employee contributions

Where employees make contributions to defined benefit plans, the accounting treatment of the
contributions depends on whether they are discretionary or required by the plan and whether they
are linked to service or not. Employee contributions are not linked to service when they are
required to reduce a deficit in the plan.
 If employee contributions are discretionary, they reduce service cost for the entity.
 If employee contributions are required by the formal terms of the plan:
– If they are linked to service, they reduce service cost for the entity
– If they are not linked to service, they affect remeasurements of the net defined benefit
liability/asset
Where contributions from employees are set out in the formal terms of the plan and they are linked
to service, the timing of recognition of the contributions is dependent on whether the amount of
contribution is related to the number of years of service. The amount of contribution is not related to
the number of years of service where it is a fixed amount, a fixed percentage of salary or
dependent on the employee's age.
 If the amount of contribution is related to the number of years of service, the contribution is
attributed to the periods of service.
 If the amount of contribution is not related to the number of years of service it may be
recognised as a reduction of the service cost in the period in which the related service is
rendered.
449
Financial Reporting
The following diagram provided in Appendix A of HKAS 19 summarises the varying treatments:
Contributions from employees or third parties

 
Set out in the terms of the plan (or arise from a constructive obligation Discretionary
that goes beyond those terms)
 
Linked to service Not linked to 
service (e.g. to 
reduce a deficit)
 
Dependent on Independent of 
number of years of number of years of 
service service
  
Reduce service Reduce service Affect re- Reduce service cost
cost by being cost in the period measurements upon payment to
attributed to periods in which the related the plan
of service service is rendered
5.10 Summary of accounting treatment

This section summarises the accounting treatment that we have met so far.
Opening figures Net defined benefit liability (asset):

 Present value of obligation, less
 Fair value of plan assets
As advised by actuary
Contributions As advised by the actuary DEBIT Plan assets
CREDIT Cash / other assets
Benefits paid Pension payments made to retired DEBIT Plan obligation
former employees CREDIT Plan assets
Current service Increase in plan obligation as a result DEBIT Operating expense (profit or loss)
cost of one extra year’s service. CREDIT Plan obligation
Past service cost Change in plan obligation as a result Improvement of benefits:
of improvement or withdrawal of DEBIT Operating expense (profit or loss)
benefits. CREDIT Plan obligation
Withdrawal of benefits:
DEBIT Plan obligation
CREDIT Operating expense (profit or
loss)
450
Gains or losses Difference between the present value Loss on settlement:

on settlement of the obligation on settlement date DEBIT Operating expense (profit or loss)
and the settlement amount. CREDIT Plan obligation
Gain on settlement:
DEBIT Plan obligation
CREDIT Operating expense (profit or
loss)
Net interest on Based on high quality corporate bond DEBIT Finance cost (profit or loss)
net defined yield at end of period and net defined CREDIT Plan obligation
benefit liability benefit liability (asset) at start of And
(asset) period.
DEBIT Plan assets
Discount rate %  net defined benefit
CREDIT Finance cost (profit or loss)
liability (asset) b/f
Remeasurements Due to actuarial differences, the actual DEBIT Other comprehensive income
return on plan assets differing from the CREDIT Plan obligation / assets
return calculated within net interest Or
and change in the effect of the asset
DEBIT Plan obligation / assets
ceiling. Calculated as a balancing
figure CREDIT Other comprehensive income
Closing figures Net defined benefit liability (asset):

 Present value of obligation, less
 Fair value of plan assets
HKAS 5.11 Disclosure of defined benefit plans

19.135
A reporting entity with a defined benefit pension plan should disclose information that:
(a) Explains the characteristics of its defined benefit plans and risks associated with them;
(b) Identifies and explains the amounts in its financial statements arising from defined benefit
plans, and
(c) Describes how defined benefit plans may affect the amount, timing and uncertainty of the
entity’s future cash flows.
HKAS 19.139 5.11.1 Characteristics and risks
Disclosures should include:
1. Characteristics of the plan should be disclosed including the nature of benefits provided, a
description of the regulatory framework in which the plan operates and a description of any
other entity’s responsibilities for the governance of the plan.
2. A description of the risks to which the plan exposes the entity should be provided with a
focus on unusual, entity or plan-specific risks and concentrations of risk.
3. A description of plan amendments, curtailments and settlements should be disclosed.
Illustration
Defined benefit pension schemes
The Company operates defined benefit schemes for qualifying employees. Under the schemes, the
employees are entitled to retirement benefits varying between 2% and 5% of final salary on
attainment of a retirement age of 65. No other post-retirement benefits are provided. The schemes
are funded schemes.
451
Financial Reporting
5.11.2 Amounts in the financial statements

HKAS 19.63-
64, 120, 140- The statement of financial position
144
In the statement of financial position, the amount recognised as a net defined benefit liability
should be calculated as:
$
Present value of defined benefit obligation at year end X
Fair value of plan assets at year end (X)
Net defined benefit liability X/(X)
If this total is a negative amount, there is a net defined benefit asset and this should be shown in
the statement of financial position as the lower of (a) and (b) below.
(a) The net defined benefit asset as calculated above
(b) The asset ceiling (see Section 5.8)
A reconciliation should be provided in the notes to the accounts for each of:
 Plan assets
 The present value of the defined benefit obligation
 The effect of the asset ceiling
In addition:
 The fair value of plan assets should be separated into classes that distinguish the nature and
risks of those classes of assets.
 Significant actuarial assumptions used to determine the present value of the defined
obligation should be disclosed.
The statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
The following amounts should be recognised in profit or loss:
 Current service cost
 Past service cost
 Gain or loss on settlement
 Net interest on the net defined benefit liability (asset)
Remeasurements should be recognised in other comprehensive income.
5.11.3 Amount, timing and uncertainty of cash flows
HKAS
19.145-147 A sensitivity analysis for each significant actuarial assumption at the end of the reporting period
should be disclosed with a description of methods and assumptions used to prepare it and changes
in these methods and assumptions from the previous period.
An indication of the effect of the plan on future cash flows is provided by disclosing a description of
funding arrangements, expected contributions to the plan in the next period and information about
the maturity profile of the defined benefit obligation.
Illustration
Employee benefits – actuarial assumptions and sensitivities
The following are the principal actuarial assumptions at the reporting date:
20X3 20X2
Discount rate at 31 December 5% 4.5%
Future salary increases 2% 2.5%
Inflation 3% 2%
452
The sensitivities regarding the principal assumptions used to measure scheme liabilities are set out
below:
Assumption Change in assumption Impact on scheme liabilities
Discount rate Increase/decrease by 0.5% Decrease/increase by 1.2%
Salary growth Increase/decrease by 0.5% Decrease/increase by 2%
Rate of inflation Increase/decrease by 0.5% Decrease/increase by 1.7%
Assumptions regarding future mortality are based on published statistics and mortality tables. The
current longevities underlying the values of the liabilities in the defined benefit plan are as follows:
20X3 20X2
Longevity at age 65 for current pensioners
Males 18.5 18.2
Females 21.5 20.8
Longevity at age 65 for current members aged 45
Males 19.2 19
Females 22.7 22.3
The calculation of the defined benefit obligation is sensitive to the mortality assumptions set out
above. As the actuarial estimates of mortality continue to be refined, an increase of one year in the
lives shown above is considered remotely possible in the next financial year. The effect of this
change would be an increase in the employee benefit liability of $500,000.
Lewis, a public limited company, has a defined benefit plan for its employees. The present value of
the future benefit obligations at 1 January 20X7 was $890m and fair value of the plan assets was
$1,000 million. Further data concerning the year ended 31 December 20X7 is as follows:
$m
Benefits paid to former employees 150
Contributions paid to plan 104
Present value of benefit obligations at 31 December 1,100 As valued by

Fair value of plan assets at 31 December 1,230 professional actuaries
Interest cost (gross yield on "blue chip" corporate bonds) 10%

On 1 January 20X7 the plan was amended to provide additional benefits with effect from that date
subject to a minimum employment period of eight years. The present value of the additional
benefits was calculated by actuaries at $30 million.
The present value of future economic benefits available to Lewis in respect of the plan was
$120 million at 31 December 20X7.
Required
Prepare the required notes to the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and
statement of financial position for the year ended 31 December 20X7 insofar as the information
provided allows.
Assume the contributions and benefits were paid on 31 December 20X7.
453
Financial Reporting
6 Termination benefits
Topic highlights
Termination benefits are recognised as a liability and expense when an entity is demonstrably
committed to them.
Termination benefits are those employee benefits provided in exchange for the termination of an
employee's employment as a result of either:
 An entity's decision to terminate an employee's employment before the normal retirement
date; or
 An employee's decision to accept an offer of benefits in exchange for the termination of
employment.
These benefits are dealt with separately in HKAS 19 as unlike other benefits, the event which gives
rise to an obligation is the termination rather than the service of the employee.

HKAS 19 states that termination benefits should be recognised in full as a liability and an expense
at the earlier of:
(i) When the entity can no longer withdraw the offer of termination benefits; and
(ii) When the entity recognises costs for a restructuring that is within the scope of HKAS 37 and
involves the payment of termination benefits.
HKAS 19.169 6.2 Measurement

Termination benefits are measured in accordance with the nature of the employee benefit:
 If the termination benefits are an enhancement of post-employment benefits, they are
accounted for as such.
 Otherwise:
– If the termination benefits are expected to be settled wholly before 12 months after the
end of the annual reporting period in which the termination benefit is recognised, then
they are accounted for as short-term employee benefits.
– If the termination benefits are not expected to be settled wholly before 12 months after
the end of the annual reporting period, then they are accounted for as other long-term
employee benefits.
Middleton Services Co (‘MSC’) announces a decision to close a factory located in PRC and
terminate all 150 employees on 1 June 20X4. The company agrees to pay $40,000 per employee
on termination and announces this to the workforce at the factory at the same time as it announces
the closure. Most employees will leave the company during June 20X4. However, to ensure that
remaining orders are completed, at least 30% of employees need to be retained until the factory is
closed at the end of January 20X5. As an incentive to encourage the required number of
employees to remain with MSC until closure, the company has offered those that stay a $75,000
payment on termination (rather than the $40,000 given to others), in addition to their usual wage
throughout the 8 months until the end of January 20X5. Based on this offer, MSC initially expects to
retain 50 employees until the closure of the factory. At 31 July 20X4 2 further employees leave the
factory, leaving 48 employees in service.
454
Required
Explain how amounts to be paid on the termination of the factory’s 150 employees should be
accounted for in MSC’s financial statements for the year ended 31 July 20X4
455
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 19 Employee
Benefits
Short-term employee Post-employment benefits Termination benefits

benefits
e.g. e.g. Benefits provided in

Annual leave Pensions exchange for termination of
Sick pay Post-employment an employee's employment
Medical care medical care
Recognise in the period Recognise as a liability and

the related service is expense at the earlier of:
provided by the employee when the entity can no
as a: longer withdraw the
liability offer of termination
expense benefits.
when the entity
recognises a cost for
restructuring involving
the payment of
termination benefits.
Defined contribution Defined benefit
Recognise contributions as an Recognise the net defined benefit liability/asset in the

expense in the period in which statement of financial position:
they are payable.
Accruals/prepayments may arise. Present value of obligation X
Less Fair value of plan assets (X)
Net defined benefit liability/(asset) X/(X)
An asset is limited by the asset ceiling to the present

value of future economic benefits in relation to the plan.
Each element of the change in the present value of the

obligation and fair value of plan assets is recognised
individually:
Obligation Assets Recognised in:

b/f X X
Contributions X
Benefits paid out (X) (X)
Current service cost X Profit or loss
Past service cost X/(X) Profit or loss
Loss on settlement X Profit or loss
Gain on settlement (X) Profit or loss
Net interest on defined X X Profit or loss
benefit liability / asset
Remeasurements X/(X) X/(X) Other
comprehensive
income
c/f X X
456
Answer 1
Assets Obligation
$ $
At 1 November 20X7 10,660,000 13,290,000
Contributions 550,700
Benefits paid (662,400) (662,400)
Net interest (4%  b/f assets/obligation) 426,400 531,600
Remeasurement loss on plan obligation (β) 688,200
Remeasurement gain on plan assets (β) 229,300
At 31 October 20X8 11,204,000 14,210,000
The remeasurement loss recognised in other comprehensive income is $458,900 (688,200 –
229,300)
Answer 2
The past service cost measured as the increase in the defined benefit obligation is $20m – $18m =
$2 million.
Net interest is calculated using the year-end market rate on a high quality corporate bond. This
rate is applied to the net defined benefit liability at the start of the year.
Therefore the total charge to profit or loss is:
$
Current service cost 3,000,000
Past service cost 2,000,000
Net interest 4.5%  (18m – 15.5m) 112,500
5,112,500
Answer 3
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
$m
Net defined benefit asset 1 120
NOTE TO THE STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Defined benefit expense recognised in profit or loss
$m
Past service cost 30
Interest cost 10%  (1,000 – 890) (11)
Defined benefit costs recognised in other
Remeasurement gain on defined benefit pension plan 52
(176 – 114 – 10) (W)
457
Financial Reporting
WORKINGS
Changes in the present value of the defined benefit obligation
$m
Opening defined benefit obligation 890
Past service cost 30
Interest cost 10%  890m 89
Benefits paid (150)
Remeasurement loss (β) 114
Closing defined benefit obligation 1,100
Changes in the fair value of plan assets
$m
Opening fair value of plan assets 1,000
Interest 10%  1,000 100
Contributions 104
Benefits paid (150)
Remeasurement gain (β) 176
Closing fair value of plan assets 1,230
Asset ceiling test
$m
Closing fair value of plan assets 1,230
Closing defined benefit obligation (1,100)
Closing net defined benefit asset 130
Asset ceiling (120)
Remeasurement loss 10
Answer 4
At 1 June 20X4, MSC expects to pay a total benefit in respect of closing the factory of:
$'000
50 employees  $75,000 3,750
100 employees  $40,000 4,000
7,750
Termination payment
Of this, $6,000,000 (150  $40,000) relates to termination of employment, as this would be the cost
to MSC of its decision to close the factory regardless of when employees are terminated.
A constructive obligation for this cost exists at 1 June 20X4 when the decision to close the factory
and make the termination payments is announced. Therefore a liability is recognised at this date
by:
DEBIT Termination expense (profit or loss) $6,000,000
CREDIT Liability for termination benefits $6,000,000
When the100 employees leave the factory in June and receive their termination benefit, the liability
is reduced by:
DEBIT Liability for termination benefits $4,000,000
(100  $40,000)
458
This is further reduced when an additional two employees leave at 31 July 20X4:
DEBIT Liability for termination benefits $80,000
(2 $40,000)
CREDIT Cash $80,000
The remaining $1,920,000 liability is reported as current at 31 July 20X4.
Additional payment
At 1 June 20X4, the additional expected payment of $1,750,000 (50  $35,000) is contingent on 50
employees providing a further eight months’ service and so it is payment for a service rather than
payment in respect of termination.
This amount is therefore recognised as a staff cost over the eight-month service period at $218,750
($1,750,000/8 months) per month. In June 20X4 this is recorded by:
DEBIT Staff costs $218,750
CREDIT Accrual for staff costs $218,750
At 31 July 20X4, a further month’s cost needs to be recorded and the accrual adjusted to reflect the
fact that two further employees have left service. The monthly cost is now $210,000 [(48 
$35,000)/8], meaning that the total accrual should be $420,000. The following adjustment journal is
therefore recorded:
DEBIT Staff costs ($420,000 – $218,750) $201,250
CREDIT Accrual for staff costs $201,250
The accrual recognised at 31 July 20X4 Is therefore $420,000.
459
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Employee benefits 22 minutes

The following information relates to the defined benefit employee compensation scheme of
Rhodes Co.:
Present value of obligation at start of 20X8 ($'000) 20,000
Market value of plan assets at start of 20X8 ($'000) 20,000
20X8 20X9
$'000 $'000
Current service cost 1,250 1,430
Benefits paid out 987 1,100
Contributions paid by entity 1,000 1,100
Present value of obligation at end of the year 23,000 20,400
Market value of plan assets at end of the year 21,500 17,840
Yield on corporate bonds at end of year 8% 9%
During 20X8, the benefits available under the plan were improved. The resulting increase in
the present value of the defined benefit obligation was $1 million.
On the final day of 20X9, Rhodes Co. divested of part of its business, and as part of the sale
agreement, transferred the relevant part of its pension fund to the buyer. The present value
of the defined benefit obligation transferred was $5.7 million and the fair value of plan assets
transferred was $5.4 million. Rhodes also made a cash payment of $200,000 to the buyer in
respect of the plan.
Assume that all transactions occur at the end of the year.
Required
(i) Calculate the net defined benefit liability as at the start and end of 20X8 and 20X9
showing clearly any remeasurement gain or loss on the plan each year. (6 marks)
(ii) Show amounts to be recognised in the financial statements in each of the years 20X8
and 20X9 in respect of the plan. (6 marks)
(Total = 12 marks)
Modest Holdings Limited 14 minutes

Modest Holdings Limited and its subsidiary (the 'MHL Group') is principally engaged in the
production, distribution and marketing of electronic products in Country X and Hong Kong. For
employees in Country X, MHL Group contributes on a monthly basis to various defined contribution
plans organised by the relevant municipal and provincial governments in Country X. For
employees in Hong Kong, MHL Group contributes to the Mandatory Provident Fund ('MPF')
scheme.
For employees in Country X
MHL Group’s required contributions to the defined contribution plans in Country X for 20X3 are
$3.5 million (translated from the local currency of Country X). Of this sum, MHL Group had paid
$3.2 million by the end of 20X3. MHL Group was told that the relevant fund assets maintained by
the municipal and provincial governments may be insufficient to finance the expected retirement
benefit obligations payable to all existing and future retired employees under these plans.
460
For employees in Hong Kong

Employees and employers who are covered by the MPF scheme are each required to make
regular mandatory contributions calculated at 5% of the employee’s relevant income to the MPF
scheme, subject to the minimum and maximum relevant income levels. For a monthly-paid
employee, the minimum and maximum relevant income levels are $7,100 and $25,000
respectively. On 17 July 20X3, the Legislative Council passed an amendment to the maximum
relevant income level (increased from $25,000 to $30,000 per month, applicable to contribution
periods commencing on or after 1 June 20X4).
For the month ended 31 December 20X3, the relevant income for the employees of MHL Group in
Hong Kong amounted to $10 million, with all the employees’ salaries ranged between $7,100 to
$25,000. MHL paid the salaries for the month on 31 December 20X3 and paid the relevant
mandatory contributions on 10 January 20X4.
Required
Assume that you are Yvonne Lam, the accounting manager at MHL, and you are required to draft a
memorandum in response to the question raised by Ms. Manni Tam, a Director of MHL, regarding
the retirement plans. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) Advise the appropriate accounting treatment for the retirement plans for employees in
Country X and in Hong Kong; and
(b) Prepare the relevant journal entries for the employee benefit payments to the employees in
Hong Kong.
(8 marks)
461
Financial Reporting
462
chapter 17
Borrowing costs
Topic list
1 HKAS 23 Borrowing Costs

1.1 Definitions
1.2 Recognition
Learning focus
Borrowing costs may be considered in the context of non-current assets or may be considered
in isolation. HKAS 23 concentrates particularly on the situation where the related borrowings
are applied to the construction of certain assets.
463
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.12 Borrowing costs 3
3.12.01 Identify the expenses which constitute borrowing costs in
3.12.02 Identify the assets which are qualifying assets
3.12.03 Determine when the capitalisation of borrowing costs shall
commence, be suspended and cease
3.12.04 Calculate the amount of borrowing costs to be capitalised from
specific borrowing and general borrowing
3.12.05 Prepare journal entries for borrowing costs, including expensed and
capitalised borrowing costs
3.12.06 Disclose relevant information with regard to borrowing costs
464
17: Borrowing costs | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 23 Borrowing Costs

Topic highlights
HKAS 23 looks at the treatment of borrowing costs, particularly where the related borrowings are
applied to the construction of certain assets. These are what are usually called "self-constructed
assets", where an entity builds its own inventory or non-current assets over a substantial period of
time.

Only two definitions are given by the standard.
Key terms
Borrowing costs. Interest and other costs incurred by an entity in connection with the borrowing of
funds.
Qualifying asset. An asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its
intended use or sale. (HKAS 23)
HKAS 23.6 1.1.1 Borrowing costs

The standard lists what may be included in borrowing costs:
(a) Interest expense calculated using the effective interest method as described in HKFRS 9
Financial Instruments
(b) Finance charges in respect of finance leases recognised in accordance with HKAS 17
Leases (See Chapter 9)
(c) Exchange differences arising from foreign currency borrowings to the extent they are
regarded as an adjustment to interest costs
HKAS 23.7 1.1.2 Qualifying assets
The standard says that any of the following may be qualifying assets:
 Inventories
 Manufacturing plants
 Power generation facilities
 Intangible assets
 Investment properties
Financial assets and inventories manufactured or produced over short periods are not qualifying
assets, nor are assets ready for sale or their intended use when purchased.
HKAS 23.8,9 1.2 Recognition

All eligible borrowing costs must be capitalised.
Only borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of
a qualifying asset can be capitalised as part of the cost of that asset. The standard lays out the
criteria for determining which borrowing costs are eligible for capitalisation.
All other borrowing costs are expensed to profit or loss.
The journal entry to record borrowing costs is therefore:
DEBIT Qualifying asset cost Eligible borrowing costs
Finance cost Ineligible borrowing costs
CREDIT Cash/Accrual Total borrowing costs
465
Financial Reporting
HKAS 23.10- 1.2.1 Borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation

15
It is necessary to identify those borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition,
construction or production of a qualifying asset, and to do this a distinction is made between
specific borrowings and general borrowings.
Specific borrowings
These borrowing costs would have been avoided had the expenditure on the qualifying asset not
been made. This is straightforward where funds have been borrowed for the financing of one
particular asset.
Once the relevant borrowings are identified with a specific asset, the amount of borrowing costs
to be capitalised during a period will be the actual borrowing costs incurred on those borrowings,
less any investment income on the temporary investment of those borrowings. It is not unusual to
invest some or all of the funds before they are actually used to finance the qualifying asset.
On 1 March 20X9 Vitality Co. borrowed $1.5 million to finance the production of a qualifying asset.
Work commenced immediately and the asset was expected to be complete within 6 months. Both
time and costs were, however underestimated and Vitality Co was forced to take an additional loan
of $450,000 on 1 August 20X9. The asset was completed on 31 December 20X9.
The interest rate attached to the initial loan was 8%; the interest rate on the second loan was 8.5%
Required
Ignoring compound interest, calculate the borrowing costs to be capitalised as part of the cost of
the asset at 31 December 20X9. Show the relevant journal entries with regard to borrowing costs.
General borrowings
Where an entity uses a number of debt instruments to finance a variety of assets, difficulties
arise since there is no direct link between particular borrowings and a specific asset. For example,
central borrowings are lent to different parts of the group or entity. Judgment is therefore
necessary, particularly where more complex situations can arise (e.g. foreign currency loans).
In a situation where general borrowings are acquired and applied in part to finance a qualifying
asset, then the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation is arrived at by applying the
“capitalisation rate” to the capital expenditure on the asset.
The capitalisation rate is computed as the weighted average of the borrowing costs applicable to
the entity's outstanding borrowings during the period, excluding specific borrowings made to obtain
a qualifying asset. However, the amount of these borrowing costs must not exceed actual
borrowing costs incurred.
It may be more appropriate to compute a weighted average for borrowing costs for individual
parts of the group or entity, though an overall weighted average can be used for a group or entity
sometimes.
Example: Capitalising interest

On 1 March 20X5 Dunedin Co. drew down $500,000 from existing general borrowings in order to
finance the construction of a new asset. Existing borrowings were as follows:
Bank loan $2,000,000 5% annual interest
Loan notes $6,000,000 8% annual interest
Construction of the asset commenced on 1 April 20X8 and was completed on 31 March 20X9.
What amount of interest must be capitalised in accordance with HKAS 23?
466
Solution
The weighted average cost of borrowing is:
5%  2m/(2m + 6m) + 8%  6m/(2m + 6m) = 7.25%
Therefore, interest to be capitalised is calculated as:
7.25%  $500,000  12/12 = $36,250
Tumble Co. had the following loans in place at the beginning and end of 20X8.
1 January 31 December
20X8 20X8
$m $m
9% Bank loan repayable 20Y0 150 150
8% Bank loan repayable 20Y1 90 90
7.5% debenture repayable 20Y2 – 200
The $200 million 7.5% debenture was issued on 1 July 20X8 to fund the construction of a qualifying
asset (a piece of mining equipment). Construction on the asset began on 1 July 20X8 and was
ongoing at the year end.
On 1 January 20X8, Tumble Co. began construction of a qualifying asset, a piece of machinery for
a hydro-electric plant, using existing borrowings. Expenditure drawn down for the construction was:
$25 million on 1 January 20X8, $30 million on 1 October 20X8. At the year end construction of the
machine was not yet complete.
Required
Prepare the required journal entries in respect of borrowing costs for the year ended 31 December
20X8.
HKAS 23.16 1.2.2 Carrying amount exceeds recoverable amount

As required by other HKFRS, the carrying amount of a qualifying asset must be written down or
written off in situations where the carrying amount (or expected ultimate cost) of the asset
exceeds its recoverable amount or net realisable value. These written down amounts may be
written back in future periods under certain circumstances (again as allowed by other HKFRS).
HKAS 23.17- 1.2.3 Commencement of capitalisation

19
Three events or transactions must be taking place for capitalisation of borrowing costs to be
started:
(a) Expenditure on the asset is being incurred
(b) Borrowing costs are being incurred
(c) Activities are in progress that are necessary to prepare the asset for its intended use or sale
Expenditure must result in cash payments, transfer of other assets or assumption of interest-
bearing liabilities. Any progress payments or grants received in connection with the asset will be
treated as deductions from expenditure. It is allowed by HKAS 23 to use the average carrying
amount of the asset during a period (including capitalised borrowing costs) as a reasonable
approximation of the expenditure to which the capitalisation rate is applied in the period.
Presumably more exact calculations can be used.
Activities necessary to prepare the asset for its intended sale or use encompass not only
physical construction work, but also technical and administrative work prior to construction, e.g.
obtaining permits. However, holding an asset when no production or development that changes the
467
Financial Reporting
asset's condition is taking place, e.g. where land is held without any associated development
activity, is to be excluded.
HKAS 23.20- 1.2.4 Suspension of capitalisation

21
Capitalisation of borrowing costs should be suspended for any extended periods where active
development is interrupted.
Any borrowing costs incurred during such periods should be expensed through profit or loss.
Capitalisation of borrowing costs is not normally suspended during:
 A period when substantial technical and administrative work is being carried out
 A temporary delay occurs which is a necessary part of getting an asset ready for intended
use, e.g. while inventories are maturing
HKAS 23.22- 1.2.5 Cessation of capitalisation

25
Once all the activities necessary to prepare the qualifying asset for its intended use or sale are
substantially complete, the capitalisation of borrowing costs should come to an end. This will
normally be the case when the physical construction of the asset is completed, though routine
administrative work and minor modifications may still be outstanding.
An asset may be completed in parts or stages and each part can be used while construction is still
in progress on the other parts. Capitalisation of borrowing costs should be terminated for each part
as it is completed. The example quoted in the standard is a business park consisting of several
buildings.
Example: Commencement, suspension and cessation of capitalisation

Lam Co. borrowed $10 million on 1 January 20X8 in anticipation of commencing work to build a
new head office later in the year. The interest rate provided by Lam Co.’s bank was 8% per annum,
and the loan had a term of five years. Construction began on 15 February and the property was
occupied for use on 20 December 20X8.
The following information is relevant:
1 February Expenditure on building materials began to be incurred
15 February Building work began
6 May Building work was suspended due to tropical storms, common to the
region through May and June
16 May Building work recommenced
30 November Building work is completed and approved by the regulatory authorities
1 December Decoration and finishing of the property to Lam Co.’s specification
commences
15 December Decoration and finishing work is completed.
What journal entries are required to record the borrowing costs in the year ended 31 December
20X8?
Solution
 Total borrowing costs incurred in the year are $10 million  8% = $800,000.
 Capitalisation of borrowing costs commences on 15 February when building work
commences and both expenditure and borrowing costs are being incurred.
 Capitalisation ceases on 30 November when the physical construction of the property is
complete. Decoration and finishing qualify as minor modifications not construction.
 Capitalisation does not cease during the temporary suspension of work for inclement
weather in May.
468
 Therefore, capitalised costs are:

$10 million  8%  288/365 days = $631,233
$ $
DEBIT Property under construction 631,233
Finance costs (800,000 – 631,233) 168,767
CREDIT Cash / interest accrual 800,000
HKAS 23.26 1.2.6 Disclosure

The following should be disclosed in the financial statements in relation to borrowing costs:
(a) Amount of borrowing costs capitalised during the period.
(b) Capitalisation rate used to determine the amount of borrowing costs eligible for
capitalisation.
On 1 January 20X8 Allan Lee Co. borrowed $20 million to finance the production of two assets,
both of which were expected to take a year to build. Production started at the beginning of 20X8.
The loan facility was drawn down on 1 January 20X8, and was utilised as follows, with the
remaining funds invested temporarily:
Asset X Asset Y
$m $m
1 January 20X8 4.0 6.0
1 July 20X8 7.0 3.0
The loan rate was 10% and Allan Lee can invest surplus funds at 8%.
Required
Ignoring compound interest, calculate the borrowing costs which may be capitalised for each of the
assets and consequently the cost of each asset as at 31 December 20X8. You should also provide
the journal entries in respect of borrowing costs in the year.
Autofact, a car manufacturer, prepares its accounts to 30 June each year. On 1 July 20X8, it
purchased for $20 million a leasehold interest in a site on which it began to construct a factory with
an estimated useful life of 30 years. The building cost $7million to construct and the plant and
equipment cost $5 million. The construction of the factory was complete on 31 March 20X9 and it
was brought into use on 1 July 20X9.
To finance this project, Autofact borrowed $32 million on 1 July 20X8. The rate of interest on the
loan was 5% per annum and it was repaid on 31 December 20X9.
Required
(a) Calculate the total amount to be included at cost in property, plant and equipment in respect
of this project at 30 June 20X9.
(b) Prepare relevant extracts from the notes to the accounts in respect of borrowing costs.
469
Financial Reporting
On 1 July 20X5, Edson entered into a $20 million contract with another entity for the construction of
a new head office. Edson’s new head office was completed at the end of June 20X6. During this
period the payment schedule to the contractor was as follows:
$’000
1 July 20X5 1,000
30 September 20X5 7,000
31 March 20X6 10,000
30 June 20X6 2,000
20,000
Edson’s borrowings at 30 June 20X6 were:
 A $7 million 10% 20Y0 loan note with simple interest payable annually. The loan notes were
issued on 1 July 20X5 specifically to raise funds for the head office project. The temporary
investment of funds until required resulted in interest income of $190,000.
 A $10 million 12.5% loan notes with simple interest payable annually. The loan note balance
has remained unchanged throughout the year.
 A $15 million 10% loan note with simple interest payable annually. The loan note balance
has remained unchanged throughout the year.
Required
(a) Calculate the total borrowing costs to be capitalised in the year ended 30 June 20X6.
(b) Prepare journal entries in respect of borrowing costs.
470
Topic recap
HKAS 23 Borrowing Costs
Eligible borrowing costs on qualifying assets MUST be

capitalised.
Eligible borrowing costs Qualifying assets
Borrowing costs Eligible
Interest and other costs Directly attributable to the An asset that necessarily
incurred by an entity in acquisition, construction or takes a substantial period of
connection with the production of a qualifying time to get ready for its
borrowing of funds. asset. intended use or sale.
Includes: Where general borrowings Includes:

Interest expense are acquired calculate the Inventories
calculated using the eligible borrowing cost as: Manufacturing plants
effective interest method weighted average interest Power generation facilities
Finance charges in rate of general borrowings Intangible assets
respect of finance leases ("capitalisation rate") × Investment properties
Exchange differences on capital expenditure on the Excludes:
foreign currency qualifying asset Financial assets
borrowings to the extent Inventories manufactured
they are regarded as an over short periods
adjustment to interest Assets ready for
costs. sale/intended use when
purchased
Commence capitalisation when: 1 expenditure on the asset is being incurred

2 borrowing costs are being incurred
3 activities are in progress to prepare the asset for use or sale
Suspend capitalisation when active development is interrupted for extended periods.
Cease capitalisation when the activities to prepare the asset for use or sale are substantially complete.
Disclose:
Amount of borrowing costs capitalised in period
Capitalisation rate used to determine the borrowing costs
eligible for capitalisation.
471
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
$
Borrowing costs
Initial loan: $1.5m  8%  6/12m 100,000
Second loan: $450,000  8.5%  10/12m 15,938
115,938
Journal entry
$ $
DEBIT Asset 115,938
CREDIT Accrued interest 115,938
To recognise interest costs capitalised as part of the cost of an asset.
Answer 2
Total borrowing costs incurred in the year are:
$’000
9% bank loan ($150m  9%) 13,500
8% bank loan ($90m  8%) 7,200
Debenture ($200m  7.5%  6/12m) 7,500
28,200
Borrowing costs to be capitalised are:
$’000
Mining equipment (debenture loan interest) 7,500
Hydro-electric plant machinery (Working) 2,803
10,303
Therefore the remaining $17,897,000 borrowing costs are recognised as an expense in the year.
Journal entry
$ $
DEBIT Mining equipment under construction 7,500,000
DEBIT Hydro-electric plant machinery under construction 2,803,000
DEBIT Finance costs (profit or loss) 17,897,000
CREDIT Accrued interest/bank 28,200,000
To recognise borrowing costs arising in the year
WORKING
 150   90 
Capitalisation rate = weighted average rate =  9%   +  8%   = 8.625%
 150  90   150  90 
3
Borrowing costs = ($25m  8.625%) + ($30m  8.625%  /12)
= $2.803m
472
Answer 3
Asset X Asset Y
$'000 $'000
Borrowing costs incurred
Asset X $11.0m  10% 1,100 –
Asset Y $9.0m  10% – 900
1,100 900
Less: investment income
6
To 30 June 20X8 $7.0m/$3.0m  8%  /12 (280) (120)
820 780
Cost of assets
Expenditure incurred 11,000 9,000
Borrowing costs 820 780
11,820 9,780
Journal entry
$ $
DEBIT Asset X 1,100,000
DEBIT Asset Y 900,000
CREDIT Accrued interest/bank 2,000,000
To recognise borrowing costs arising in the year
$ $
DEBIT Interest receivable/bank 400,000
CREDIT Asset X 280,000
CREDIT Asset Y 120,000
To recognise interest receivable on loan proceeds invested temporarily.
Answer 4
(a) The total amount to be included in property, plant and equipment at 30 June 20X9 is as
follows:
$'000
Lease 20,000
Building 7,000
Plant and equipment 5,000
Interest capitalised ($32,000  5%  9/12) 1,200
33,200
HKAS 23 states that capitalisation of borrowing costs must cease when substantially all the
activities necessary to prepare the asset for its intended use or sale are complete.
Accordingly, only nine months' interest (1 July 20X8 to 31 March 20X9) can be capitalised.
(b) Disclosure notes
Accounting policies
Borrowing costs
Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of a
qualifying asset are capitalised as part of the cost of the asset. All other borrowing costs are
recognised as an expense in the period in which they are incurred.
473
Financial Reporting
Property, plant and equipment

Included in the cost of additions to property, plant and equipment is interest amounting to
$1.2 million incurred on qualifying assets that has been capitalised during the year. The rate
used to determine the amount eligible for capitalisation is 5%.
Answer 5
(a) The expenditure of $20m is allocated as:
 $7 million to specific borrowings
 $13 million to general borrowings
Borrowing costs to be capitalised are therefore:
$’000
Specific borrowings ($7m x 10%) 700.0
General borrowings (Working) 357.5
1,057.5
Less interest income (190.0)
867.5
WORKING: general borrowings
The weighted average borrowing cost is (12.5%  10/25) + (10%  15/25) = 11%
Expenditure is allocated to general borrowings, and interest to be capitalised and calculated
as follows:
General
borrowing
Specific General costs to be
Expenditure borrowings borrowings Rate Period capitalised
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
1 July 20X5 1,000 1,000
30 September 7,000 6,000 1,000 X 11% X 9/12m 82,500
20X5
31 March 20X6 10,000 – 10,000 X 11% X 3/12m 275,000
30 June 20X6 2,000 – 2,000 X 11% X 0/12m 0
20,000 7,000 13,000 357,500
(b) Borrowing costs in the year are recognised by:

$ $
DEBIT Property 1,057,500
DEBIT Finance costs (profit or loss) 2,392,500
(working)
CREDIT Accrued interest / bank 3,450,000
To recognise borrowing costs incurred in the period.
$ $
DEBIT Interest receivable / bank 190,000
CREDIT Property 190,000
To recognise borrowing costs incurred in the period.
474
WORKING: Borrowing costs recognised in profit or loss

$’000
Specific loan borrowing costs ($7m  10%) 700
12.5% loan notes (12.5%  $10m) 1,250
10% loan notes (10%  $15m) 1,500
3,450
Less borrowing costs capitalised (1,057.5)
Borrowing costs recognised in profit or loss 2,392.5
475
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Rondo Hospitality Enterprise 27 minutes

Rondo Hospitality Enterprise (RHE) is a hotel operator. The management is considering investing
in a new hotel project with 150 rooms. The construction of the hotel building and installation of
equipment, furniture and fixtures is scheduled to commence on 1 March 20X3 and be completed by
the end of June 20X4. The hotel would be available for use at the same time. The total cost of
HK$200 million will be payable in five equal instalments beginning 1 March 20X3 and then payable
every 4 months.
Without any delay in the completion of the construction and other unforeseen events, RHE plans to
have the pre-opening activities for three months and then commence the operation of the new hotel
by 1 October 20X4.
RHE co-ordinates its financing activities through a centralised treasury function, with borrowings
being raised from various sources such as bond issues and bank loans, to finance general
requirements, including the acquisition and development of qualifying assets. It is expected that
the borrowing requirements of RHE will be much greater than the amounts to be incurred for the
hotel project.
The expected useful life of the hotel property is 30 years. It is expected that RHE needs to replace
certain equipment and furniture in the hotel rooms every five years in addition to carrying out
regular repair and maintenance works. Around HK$40 million of the budgeted expenditure is
attributable to these capitalised items. The structure of the building can be used until the end of the
hotel's useful life.
Required
(a) Calculate the borrowing costs to be capitalised for qualifying assets for the year ending 31
December 20X3 and 20X4. Assume the capitalisation rate to be applied to the expenditure
on the qualifying asset is 6.5%. (3 marks)
(b) Discuss the factors the management of RHE should consider in relation to the depreciation
of the hotel property. (6 marks)
(c) Calculate the depreciation to be charged for the year ending 31 December 20X4 with the
explanation, assuming a straight line basis is adopted by RHE for depreciation. (6 marks)
(Total = 15 marks)
476
chapter 18 Financial instruments
Topic list 6 HKAS 39: Impairment of financial assets
6.1 Objective evidence of impairment
1 Financial instruments 6.2 Accounting for an impairment
1.1 Background
1.2 Definitions 7 HKAS 39/HKFRS 9: Embedded derivatives
7.1 Examples of embedded derivatives
2 HKAS 32: Presentation of financial 7.2 Accounting treatment of embedded
instruments derivatives
2.1 Objective 7.3 Reassessment of embedded derivatives
2.2 Scope
2.3 Classification of financial instruments as 8 HKAS 39: Hedging
financial assets, financial liabilities and 8.1 Introduction
equity 8.2 Definitions
2.4 Specific classification rules 8.3 Types of hedge
2.5 Offsetting a financial asset and a 8.4 Conditions for hedge accounting
financial liability 8.5 Accounting treatment
2.6 Interest, dividends, losses and gains 8.6 Exposures qualifying for hedge
2.7 Section summary accounting
8.7 Recap
3 HKFRS 9: Recognition of financial
instruments 9 HKFRS 7: Disclosure of financial
3.1 Scope instruments
3.2 Initial recognition 9.1 Objective
3.3 Reclassification of financial instruments 9.2 Classes of financial instruments and
3.4 Derecognition levels of disclosure
3.5 Section summary 9.3 Statement of financial position
disclosures
4 HKFRS 9: Measurement of financial 9.4 Statement of profit or loss and other
instruments comprehensive income disclosures
4.1 Initial measurement 9.5 Other disclosures
4.2 Subsequent measurement of financial 9.6 Nature and extent of risks arising from
assets financial instruments
4.3 Subsequent measurement of financial 9.7 Capital disclosures
liabilities
4.4 Trade date v settlement date accounting 10 Current developments
4.5 Section summary
10.1 HKFRS 9: Amended classification and
5 HKAS 39: Recognition and measurement measurement rules
rules 10.2 HKFRS 9: Hedge accounting
5.1 Scope 10.3 HKFRS 9: Credit losses (impairment)
5.2 Recognition and derecognition
5.3 Classification and measurement of
financial assets
5.4 Classification and measurement of
financial liabilities
5.5 Reclassification of financial instruments
477
Financial Reporting
Learning focus
This is a highly controversial and very complex topic. You should concentrate on the essential
points. It is also the subject of ongoing change, as over a period of time HKAS 39 is being
replaced by HKFRS 9.
You need plenty of practice on the topics in this chapter in order to familiarise yourself with this
difficult area.
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.11 Financial assets, financial liabilities and equity instruments 2
3.11.01 Discuss and apply the criteria for the recognition and de-recognition
of a financial asset or financial liability
3.11.02 Discuss and apply the rules for the classification of a financial
asset, financial liability and equity, and their measurement
(including compound instrument)
3.11.03 Discuss and apply the treatment of gains and losses arising on
financial assets or financial liabilities
3.11.04 Discuss the circumstances that give rise to and apply the
appropriate treatment for the impairment of financial assets
3.11.05 Account for derivative financial instruments and simple embedded
derivatives, including the application of own-use exemption
3.11.06 Disclose relevant information with regard to financial assets,
financial liabilities and equity instruments
3.17 Hedge accounting 2
3.17.01 Identify fair value hedges, cash flow hedges and hedges for net
investment in accordance with HKAS 39
3.17.02 Account for fair value hedges, cash flow hedges and hedges for net
investment
478
18: Financial instruments | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 Financial instruments
Topic highlights
Accounting guidance on financial instruments is provided in four standards:
 HKAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation
 HKAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement
 HKFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures
 HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments
1.1 Background
Financial instruments have, in recent years, become increasingly complex. They vary from
straightforward, traditional instruments, such as loan stock or shares through to complex "derivative
instruments".
The emergence of more complex instruments towards the end of the 20th century created a
problem in that existing accounting guidance was insufficient. Accounting standards boards
worldwide were forced to address this through the development of lengthy and detailed standards.
In Hong Kong the relevant standards were:
 HKAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation, issued in 2004, which originally dealt with:
– the classification of financial instruments between liabilities and equity
– presentation of certain compound instruments
– disclosure of financial instruments
 HKAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, issued in 2006, which dealt
with:
– recognition and derecognition of financial instruments
– the measurement of financial instruments
– hedge accounting
Both of these standards have, subsequent to their original issue, been amended numerous times
as the topic to which they relate continually evolves. In addition, two new standards have been
issued:
 HKFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures, issued in 2005 replaced the part of HKAS 32
dealing with disclosure. In doing so, it revised, simplified and added to financial instrument
disclosure requirements.
 HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments, originally issued in 2009 replaced certain parts of HKAS 39,
in particular with respect to the classification of financial assets. HKFRS 9 was expanded in
2010 to include guidance on the classification and measurement of financial liabilities and
the derecognition of financial assets and liabilities. This standard was subsequently
expanded again in 2013 and finally completed in 2014.
This chapter is based on the requirements of HKAS 32, HKAS 39, HKFRS 7 and the 2010 issue of
HKFRS 9. HKFRS 9 2010 addresses the issue of the recognition and measurement of financial
instruments, and HKAS 39, the part of hedging and impairment of financial assets are examinable.
The later issues of HKFRS 9 are covered in section 10 of the chapter and are examinable as
current developments.
479
Financial Reporting
1.1.1 Examinable topics

The issue of which topics are examinable under which standard(s) is summarised in the table
below.
√ = fully examinable. Blank = not applicable.
Topic IAS 32 IFRS 7 IAS 39 IFRS 9 2010 IFRS 9 2014

Classification √ √ Revised
categories as
current issue
Offsetting √
Interest, √
dividends,
losses and gains
Disclosure √
Recognition √
Derecognition √
Measurement √
Reclassification √
Embedded √ √
derivatives
Impairment of √ As current
financial assets issue (expected
credit losses)
Hedging √ As current
issue (revised
rules)
HKAS 32.11,
HKFRS 9, 1.2 Definitions
Appendix A
A number of definitions are common to all four standards.
Key terms
Financial instrument. Any contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one entity and a
financial liability or equity instrument of another entity.
Financial asset. Any asset that is:
(a) cash;
(b) an equity instrument of another entity;
(c) a contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity; or to
exchange financial instruments with another entity under conditions that are potentially
favourable to the entity; or
(d) a contract that will or may be settled in the entity's own equity instruments and is a:
(i) non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable number of
the entity's own equity instruments
480
(ii) derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a fixed amount of
cash or another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity's own equity
instruments
Financial liability. Any liability that is a:
(a) contractual obligation to:
(i) deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity
(ii) exchange financial instruments with another entity under conditions that are potentially
unfavourable
(b) contract that will or may be settled in the entity's own equity instruments and is a:
(i) non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of
the entity's own equity instruments
instruments
Equity instrument. Any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after
Derivative. A financial instrument or other contract with all three of the following characteristics:
(a) Its value changes in response to the change in a specified interest rate, financial instrument
price, commodity price, foreign exchange rate, index of prices or rates, credit rating or credit
index, or other variable (sometimes called the "underlying")
(b) It requires no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller than would be
required for other types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to
changes in market factors
(c) It is settled at a future date (HKAS 32 and HKFRS 9)
HKAS 32.13- Some of the terms used within the definitions themselves need defining:
14
(a) A "contract" need not be in writing, but it must comprise an agreement that has "clear
economic consequences" and which the parties to it cannot avoid, usually because the
agreement is enforceable in law.
(b) An "entity" here could be an individual, partnership, incorporated body or government
agency.
HKAS 1.2.1 Financial assets and liabilities

32.AG4, AG8,
AG11-12, The definitions of financial assets and financial liabilities may seem complicated, but the
AG20-21
essential point is that while there may be a chain of contractual rights and obligations, it will lead
ultimately to the receipt or payment of cash or the acquisition or issue of an equity instrument.
Examples of financial assets and liabilities may include:
Financial assets Financial liabilities

Trade receivables Trade payables
An investment in shares Loans payable
A loan made to another party Redeemable preference shares
HKAS 32 makes it clear that the following items are not financial assets or liabilities:
481
Financial Reporting
 Physical assets, e.g. inventories, property, plant and equipment, leased assets and
intangible assets (patents, trademarks etc.)
 Prepaid expenses, deferred revenue and most warranty obligations
 Liabilities or assets that are not contractual in nature e.g. income taxes that are the result of
statutory requirements imposed by governments.
 Contractual rights/obligations that do not involve transfer of a financial asset, e.g.
commodity futures contracts, operating leases
Why do you think that physical assets and prepaid expenses do not qualify as financial
instruments?
Contingent rights and obligations meet the definition of financial assets and financial liabilities
respectively, even though many do not qualify for recognition in financial statements. This is
because the contractual rights or obligations exist because of a past transaction or event (e.g.
assumption of a guarantee).
HKAS 1.2.2 Primary and derivative instruments
32.AG15
The examples of financial assets and liabilities given in the previous section may be referred to as
"primary instruments". You should also be aware of derivative financial instruments.
A derivative is a financial instrument that derives its value from the price or rate of an underlying
item. Common examples of derivatives include the following:
 Forward contracts which are agreements to buy or sell an asset at a fixed price at a fixed
future date.
 Futures contracts, which are similar to forward contracts except that contracts are
standardised and traded on an exchange.
 Options, which are rights (but not obligations) for the option holder to exercise at a pre-
determined price; the option writer loses out if the option is exercised.
 Swaps, which are agreements to swap one set of cash flows for another (normally interest
rate or currency swaps).
A simple example of a forward contract may help you to understand how it derives its value from an
underlying item. Say a forward contract exists to sell an asset for $8 on a given date. At today's
date the market price of the asset is $5 and therefore it would be fair to say that the contract is
worth $3. This value cannot, however, be established without reference to the price of the
underlying item, being the market price of the asset. If the underlying item is volatile, then the
settlement of the derivative can lead to a very different result from the one originally envisaged.
Derivatives usually have no, or very little, initial cost. Therefore, before the development of
HKAS 32 and HKAS 39, they may not have been recognised in the financial statements at all, or
recognised at a value bearing no relation to the current value. This is obviously misleading and
leaves users of the accounts unaware of the uncertainty and risk to which a company holding
derivatives is exposed.
Part of the reason why HKAS 32 and HKAS 39 were developed was in order to correct this
situation.
2 HKAS 32: Presentation of financial instruments

HKAS 32.2 2.1 Objective
The objective of HKAS 32 is:
482
To establish principles for presenting financial instruments as liabilities or equity and for
offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities. It applies to the classification of financial
instruments, from the perspective of the issuer, into financial assets, financial liabilities and
equity instruments; the classification of related interest, dividends, losses and gains; and
the circumstances in which financial assets and financial liabilities should be offset.
(HKAS 32)
HKAS 32.4 2.2 Scope
HKAS 32 should be applied in the presentation of all types of financial instruments, whether
recognised or unrecognised.
Certain items are excluded:
(a) Interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, unless these are accounted for using
HKFRS 9 as allowed by HKAS 27, HKAS 28 and HKAS 31
(b) Employers' rights and obligations under employee benefit plans (HKAS 19: Chapter 16)
(c) Insurance contracts
(d) Financial instruments, contracts and obligations under share-based payment transactions
(HKFRS 2: Chapter 13)
2.3 Classification of financial instruments as financial assets,

financial liabilities and equity
Topic highlights
Financial instruments are classified as financial assets, financial liabilities or equity. Financial
instruments issued to raise capital must be classified as liabilities or equity.
The critical feature of a financial liability is the contractual obligation to deliver cash or another
financial instrument.
HKAS 32 requires that the issuer of a financial instrument classifies it, or its component parts, as a
financial asset, financial liability or equity based on:
 the substance of the contractual arrangement on initial recognition
 the definitions in the Key terms provided in section 1.2 above
The classification of the financial instrument is made when it is first recognised and this
classification will continue until the financial instrument is removed from the entity's statement of
financial position.
HKAS 32.16 2.3.1 Distinguishing financial liabilities and equity
Distinguishing a financial liability from equity may not be straightforward and therefore HKAS 32
provides additional guidance. The underlying principle is that of substance over form. Although
substance and legal form are often consistent with each other, this is not always the case.
An instrument is an equity instrument only if there is no contractual obligation to deliver cash or
another financial asset to another entity or to exchange another financial instrument with the
holder under potentially unfavourable conditions to the issuer.
Therefore, for example, a redeemable preference share is classified as a liability, rather than
equity, as there is an obligation to deliver cash at the redemption date. On the other hand, ordinary
shares are classified as equity as, although the holder of an equity instrument may be entitled to a
pro rata share of any distributions out of equity, the issuer does not have a contractual obligation to
make such a distribution.
A financial liability exists regardless of the way in which the contractual obligation to deliver
cash or a financial asset will be settled. The issuer's ability to satisfy an obligation may be
483
Financial Reporting
restricted, e.g. by lack of access to foreign currency, but this is irrelevant as it does not remove the
issuer's obligation or the holder's right under the instrument.
During the financial year ended 31 December 20X5, Kim issued the financial instrument described
below. Identify whether it should be classified as liability or equity, explaining in not more than 40
words the reason for your choice. You should refer to the relevant Hong Kong Accounting
Standards.
Redeemable preference shares with a coupon rate 5%. The shares are redeemable on
31 December 20X9 at premium of 20%.
2.4 Specific classification rules

As well as providing the general classification rules explained in the section above, HKAS 32 also
provides guidance on the classification of specific instruments and instruments with specific
characteristics. They are:
 puttable financial instruments and obligations arising on liquidation
 financial instruments with contingent settlement provisions
 financial instruments with settlement options
 compound instruments
 rights issues
The remainder of this section deals with each in turn.
HKAS 2.4.1 Puttable financial instruments and obligations arising on liquidation
32.16A-B,E
HKAS 32 was amended in 2008 to introduce criteria for certain puttable instruments and
obligations arising on liquidation to be classified as equity. Prior to these amendments, these
instruments would have been classified as financial liabilities.
Puttable financial instruments
A puttable financial instrument is an instrument where the holder can "put" the instrument i.e.
require the issuer to redeem it in cash. For example, some ordinary shares are puttable, and prior
to the revision to HKAS 32, these were classified as liabilities. They are now classified as equity,
but only if:
(a) the holder is entitled to a pro-rata share of the entity's net assets on liquidation.
(b) the instrument is in the class of instruments that is the most subordinate and all instruments
in that class have identical features.
(c) the instrument has no other characteristics that would meet the definition of a financial liability.
(d) the total expected cash flows attributable to the instrument over its life are based
substantially on the profit or loss, the change in the recognised net assets or the change in
the fair value of the recognised and unrecognised net assets of the entity (excluding any
effects of the instrument itself). Profit or loss or change in recognised net assets for this
purpose is as measured in accordance with relevant HKFRS.
In addition to the criteria set out above, the entity must have no other instrument that has terms
equivalent to (d) above and that has the effect of substantially restricting or fixing the residual
return to the holders of the puttable financial instruments.
Where the specified criteria are no longer met, or when they are subsequently met, the instrument
should be reclassified. If the instrument presented as equity is reclassified as a financial liability, it
will be measured at fair value at the date of reclassification with any difference between the fair
value and the carrying amount to be recognised in equity. When the inverse applies, the financial
liability will be reclassified to equity at its carrying amount at the date of reclassification.
484
HKAS 32.16C Obligations arising on liquidation

As a result of the amendment mentioned above, instruments imposing an obligation on an entity to
deliver to another party a pro-rata share of the net assets on liquidation should be classified as
equity.
The following examples illustrate the types of instruments impacted by the new requirements:
Classification Classification
under HKAS 32 under amended
Issued financial instrument before amendment HKAS 32
Share puttable throughout its life at fair value, Liability Equity

that is also the most subordinate, does not
contain any other obligation, with discretionary
dividends based on profits of the issuer
Share puttable at fair value, that is not the most Liability Liability
subordinate
Share puttable at fair value only on liquidation, Liability Compound (part
that is also the most subordinate, but contains equity, part liability)
a fixed non-discretionary dividend
Share puttable at fair value only on liquidation, Liability Equity
that is also the most subordinate, but contains
a fixed discretionary dividend and does not
contain any other obligation
Any of the instruments described above issued Liability Liability
by a subsidiary held by non-controlling parties,
in the consolidated financial statements
As identified above, puttable financial instruments or instruments that provide the holder with a pro
rata share of the net assets of the entity on liquidation should be classified as equity in the separate
financial statements of the issuer if they represent the residual class of instruments (and all the
relevant requirements are met).
Such instruments are not considered to be the residual interest in the consolidated financial
statements and therefore, as identified in the table above, non-controlling interests that contain an
obligation to transfer a financial asset to another entity should be classified as a financial liability in
the consolidated financial statements.
Even though the amendments permit certain instruments that were previously presented as
financial liabilities to now be presented as equity, derivatives over such equity instruments may not
be presented as equity.
Puttable instruments and instruments puttable only on liquidation that are classified as equity in the
separate or individual financial statements of the issuing entity and represent non-controlling
interests should be classified as financial liabilities in the consolidated financial statements of the
group.
HKAS 32.25 2.4.2 Financial instruments with contingent settlement provisions
The settlement of some financial instruments depends on events which are beyond the control of
both the holder and issuer of the instrument:
(a) The occurrence or non-occurrence of uncertain future events
(b) The outcome of uncertain circumstances
For example, an entity might have to deliver cash instead of issuing equity shares. In this situation
it is not immediately clear whether the entity has an equity instrument or a financial liability.
485
Financial Reporting
Such financial instruments should be classified as financial liabilities unless:

(a) the part of the contingent settlement provision that could require settlement in cash or
another financial asset (or otherwise in such a way that it would be a financial liability) is not
genuine;
(b) the issuer can be required to settle the obligation in cash or another financial asset (or
otherwise to settle it in such a way that it would be a financial liability) only in the event of
liquidation of the issuer; or
(c) the instrument is a puttable instrument classified as equity in accordance with HKAS 32.
HKAS 32.26 2.4.3 Financial instruments with settlement options
When a derivative financial instrument gives one party a choice over how it is settled (e.g. the
issuer can choose whether to settle in cash or by issuing shares) the instrument is a financial
asset or a financial liability unless all the alternative choices would result in it being an equity
instrument.
HKAS 2.4.4 Compound financial instruments
32.28,29,30,
32
Topic highlights
Compound instruments are split into equity and liability parts and presented accordingly in the
Where a financial instrument contains both a liability and an equity element, HKAS 32 requires that
these component parts are classified separately according to the substance of the contractual
arrangement and the definitions of a financial liability and an equity instrument.
A common type of compound instrument is convertible debt. On the issue of such debt, the holder
is granted an option to convert it into an equity instrument (usually ordinary shares) of the issuer
rather than redeem it. This is the economic equivalent of the issue of conventional debt plus a
warrant to acquire shares in the future.
In this case the instrument is presented as part liability, part equity, and the usual way to calculate
the split is to:
(a) calculate the value for the liability component based on similar instruments with no
conversions rights, and
(b) deduct this from the instrument as a whole to leave a residual value for the equity component.
The reasoning behind this approach is that an entity's equity is its residual interest in its assets
amount after deducting all its liabilities.
The sum of the carrying amounts assigned to liability and equity will always be equal to the
carrying amount that would be ascribed to the instrument as a whole.
The following example should make this split clearer.
Example: Valuation of compound instruments

Strauss Co. issues 1,000 convertible bonds at the start of 20X0. The bonds have a three-year term,
and are issued at par with a face value of $2,500 per bond, giving total proceeds of $2,500,000.
Interest is payable annually in arrears at a nominal annual interest rate of 5%. Each bond is
convertible at any time up to maturity into 300 common shares.
When the bonds are issued, the prevailing market interest rate for similar debt without conversion
options is 8%. At the issue date, the market price of one common share is $2. The dividends
expected over the three-year term of the bonds amount to 11 cents per share at the end of each
year. The risk-free annual interest rate for a three-year term is 4%.
486
Required
What is the value of the equity component in the bond issue?
Solution
The liability component is valued first, and the difference between the proceeds of the bond issue
and the fair value of the liability is assigned to the equity component. The present value of the
liability component is calculated using a discount rate of 8%, the market interest rate for similar
bonds having no conversion rights, as shown.
$
Present value of the principal: $2,500,000 payable at the end of three years
($2.5m  1/1.083)* 1,985,000
Present value of the interest: $125,000 payable annually in arrears for three
years ($125,000  (1/1.08 + 1/1.082 + 1/1.083) 322,137
Total liability component 2,307,137
Equity component (balancing figure) 192,863
Proceeds of the bond issue 2,500,000
* Note. Both the present value figures can be found using tables using an 8% discount factor for
the principal of 0.794 and for the interest of 2.577. In the case of the second (present value of the
interest), if tables are used, the present value is $322,125, giving an equity component balancing
figure of $192,875. The difference is due to rounding.
The split between the liability and equity components remains the same throughout the term of the
instrument, even if there are changes in the likelihood of the option being exercised. This is
because it is not always possible to predict how a holder will behave. The issuer continues to have
an obligation to make future payments until conversion, maturity of the instrument or some other
relevant transaction takes place.
On 1 January 20X1, an entity issued 100,000 6% convertible bonds at their par value of $20 each.
The bonds will be redeemed on 1 January 20X6. Each bond is convertible at the option of the
holder at any time during the five-year period. Interest on the bond will be paid annually in arrears.
The prevailing market interest rate for similar debt without conversion options at the date of issue
was 8%.
Required
At what value should the equity element of the hybrid financial instrument be recognised in the
financial statements of the entity at the date of issue?
At maturity a compound instrument may be redeemed or converted. Where the instrument is

redeemed for cash, the liability element of the instrument is derecognised and cash payment
recognised; where the instrument is converted, the liability element is derecognised and instead
recognised as equity. The original equity element of the instrument remains within equity, however
may be transferred to a different account within equity.
Convertible instruments that are not compound instruments
Certain types of convertible debt instrument meet the definition of a financial liability and therefore
are not compound instruments and do not require the split-accounting approach described above.
As we have seen the definition of a financial liability includes a contract that will or may be settled
in the entity's own equity instruments and is a:
487
Financial Reporting
(i) Non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of the
entity's own equity instruments
(ii) Derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a fixed amount of cash or
other financial asset for a fixed number of the entity's own equity instruments.
Where the 'fixed for fixed test' described in (ii) is failed, i.e. a fixed amount of cash (or other
financial asset) is not exchanged for a fixed number of equity instruments, the convertible debt
instrument is classified as a liability in its entirety.
The 'fixed for fixed' test is always failed in the following circumstances, and may be failed in others:
 Where the conversion ratio changes based on the issuing entity's share price, since the
number of equity instruments issued on conversion is not fixed
 Where the convertible debt instrument is denominated in a foreign currency, since the
amount of cash exchanged for shares on conversion is not fixed in the functional currency of
the issuing entity
Where the conversion option is not classified as equity it is an embedded derivative. Although the
convertible instrument is classified in its entirety as a liability, it is therefore made up of two liability
elements:
(i) A financial liability host instrument
(ii) A financial liability embedded derivative
For such instruments the entity must assess whether the embedded derivative should be separated
from its host contract and accounted for as a derivative (at fair value through profit or loss).The
accounting treatment applied to embedded derivatives and their host instruments is considered in
more detail in section 7 of this chapter.
HKAS 32.16 2.4.5 Rights issues
A 2009 amendment to HKAS 32 (effective for periods starting on or after 1 February 2010) requires
that rights, options or warrants to acquire a fixed number of the entity's own equity
instruments for a fixed amount of any currency are equity instruments if the entity offers the
rights, options or warrants pro rata to all of its existing owners of the same class of its own
non-derivative equity instruments.
This is a very narrow amendment and does not extend to other instruments that grant the holder
the right to purchase the entity's own equity instruments such as the conversion feature in
convertible bonds.
Example: Rights issue

Background
On 1 December 20X2, ABC offered all of its existing shareholders rights to acquire one new
common share for every three common shares held at a price of $15 per share. ABC's functional
currency is Y, and ABC has only one class of shares outstanding. There were a total of 3,000 rights
offered and they initially traded at $2 each.
The rights were subject to expiry on 31 December 20X2 and were fully subscribed on that date.
On 31 December 20X2, the common share price was $18 per share and the closing fair value of
the rights was $3 per share (i.e. $18 – $15).
Exchange rate: $/Y = 1.5/1
Accounting treatment prior to amendment
The rights offered in $ would have been accounted for as derivative liabilities. On 1 December
20X2, a liability of Y4,000 ($2  3,000 ÷ 1.5) would have been recognised with a corresponding
debit to equity, representing the distribution of the rights to common shareholders. Subsequently,
the liability would have been re-measured at fair value, increasing to Y6,000 (3,000  $3 ÷ 1.5),
and a loss of Y2,000 (Y6,000 – Y4,000) would have been recognised in profit or loss. On exercise
488
of the rights, the cash proceeds of Y30,000 ($15  3,000 ÷ 1.5) and the closing fair value of the
rights of Y6,000 would have been credited to equity.
Accounting treatment after the amendment
The rights offered in $ would be classified as equity. Hence, no liability or gain or loss would be
recognised in respect of the rights. On exercise of the rights, the cash proceeds of $30,000 would
be credited to equity.
Journal entries for accounting treatment prior to amendment
Y Y
1 December 20X2
DEBIT Equity (statement of changes in equity) 4,000
CREDIT Derivative liability 4,000
Being the issue of rights
31 December 20X2
DEBIT Profit or loss 2,000
CREDIT Derivative liability 2,000
Being the remeasurement of the liability to fair value
31 December 20X2
DEBIT Derivative liability 6,000
Cash 30,000
CREDIT Equity 36,000
Being the exercise of rights in full
Journal entries for accounting treatment after the amendment

Y Y
31 December 20X2
DEBIT Cash 30,000
CREDIT Equity 30,000
Being the exercise of rights in full
HKAS 32.42, 2.5 Offsetting a financial asset and a financial liability

AG38A-F
Financial assets and liabilities are normally presented separately in the statement of financial
position. A financial asset and financial liability should only be offset, with the net amount reported
in the statement of financial position, when:
(a) there is a legally enforceable right of set off that is:
 Available immediately (rather than being contingent on a future event), and
 Exercisable by either counterparty.
(b) the entity intends to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability
simultaneously, i.e. at the same moment
This will reflect the expected future cash flows of the entity in these specific circumstances. In all
other cases, financial assets and financial liabilities are presented separately.
HKAS
HKAS 32.35
32.35,36,40, 2.6 Interest, dividends, losses and gains
41
Topic highlights
Interest, dividends, losses and gains are treated according to whether they relate to an equity
instrument or a financial liability.
The HKAS 32 guidance considered so far all relates to the classification of financial instruments for
presentation in the statement of financial position. The standard also considers how financial
489
Financial Reporting
instruments are presented in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and
statement of changes in equity:
Financial liabilities Equity instruments

Interest, dividends, gains and losses are Dividends are recognised directly in equity
recognised in profit or loss. (and so disclosed in the statement of changes
in equity).
Transaction costs are a deduction from equity.
You should look at the requirements of HKAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements for further
details of disclosure, and HKAS 12 Income Taxes for disclosure of tax effects.
2.7 Section summary

 Financial instruments issued to raise capital must be classified as liabilities or equity.
 The substance of the financial instrument is more important than its legal form.
 The critical feature of a financial liability is the contractual obligation to deliver cash or
another financial instrument.
 Compound instruments are split into equity and liability parts and presented accordingly.
 Interest, dividends, losses and gains are treated according to whether they relate to an
equity instrument or a financial liability.
3 HKFRS 9: Recognition of financial instruments

Topic highlights
HKFRS 9 applies to the recognition of financial assets and liabilities with effect from 1 January
2018 and may be early adopted.
3.1 Scope
Entities that early adopt HKFRS 9 are required to apply it to all types of financial instruments with
the exception of the following:
(a) Investments in subsidiaries, associates, and joint ventures that are accounted for under
HKASs 27, 28 and 31.
(b) Leases covered in HKAS 17.
(c) Employee benefit plans covered in HKAS 19.
(d) Equity instruments issued by the entity e.g. ordinary shares issued, or options and
warrants.
(e) Insurance contracts, including financial guarantee contracts to which HKFRS 4 is applied.
(f) Contracts for contingent consideration in a business combination, covered in HKFRS 3.
(g) Loan commitments that cannot be settled net in cash or another financial instrument.
(h) Financial instruments, contracts and obligations under share-based payment transactions,
covered in HKFRS 2.
(i) Rights to reimburse the entity for expenditure required to settle a provision recognised in
(j) Rights and obligations under HKFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
490
HKFRS 9, 3.2 Initial recognition

3.1.1
Topic highlights
Financial instruments are recognised when the entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions
of the instrument.
Financial assets are classified as measured at amortised cost or fair value. Financial liabilities are
classified at fair value through profit or loss or amortised cost.
HKFRS 9 requires that financial instruments are recognised in the statement of financial position
when the entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.
Notice that this is different from the recognition criteria in the Conceptual Framework and in most
other standards. Items are normally recognised when there is a probable inflow or outflow of
resources and the item has a cost or value that can be measured reliably.
HKFRS 9, 3.2.1 Classification of financial assets

4.1.1-4.1.2
On recognition, HKFRS 9 requires that financial assets are classified as measured at either:
 amortised cost, or
 fair value
This classification is made on the basis of both:
(a) the entity's business model for managing the financial assets, and
(b) the contractual cash flow characteristics of the financial asset.
A financial asset is classified as measured at amortised cost where:
(a) the objective of the business model within which the asset is held is to hold assets in order to
collect contractual cash flows, and
(b) the contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are
solely payments of principal and interest on the principal outstanding.
Note that the 2014 issue of HKFRS 9 introduces a further classification category for financial
assets; this is discussed in more detail within the current developments section of the chapter.
3.2.2 Application of classification criteria
An application of the HKFRS 9 rules means that:
 Equity investments must be measured at fair value. This is because contractual cash flows
on specified dates are not a characteristic of equity instruments. Where an equity instrument
is not held for trading, an entity may make an irrevocable election at initial recognition to
measure it at fair value through other comprehensive income.
 All derivatives are measured at fair value.
 A debt instrument may be classified as measured at either amortised cost or fair value
depending on whether it meets the criteria above. Even where the criteria are met at initial
recognition, a debt instrument may be classified as measured at fair value through profit or
loss if doing so eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition
inconsistency (sometimes referred to as an "accounting mismatch") that would otherwise
arise from measuring assets or liabilities or recognising the gains and losses on them on
different bases.
491
Financial Reporting
The following decision tree may help you to classify financial assets in accordance with HKFRS 9:
Is the financial asset held in No
order to collect future
contractual cash flows?
Yes
Do the contractual terms of the No
financial asset give rise to
cash flows on specified dates?
Yes
Are the cash flows solely No
payments of principal and
interest on the principal
outstanding?
Yes
Measure at amortised cost Measure at fair value
Is the financial asset

an equity instrument
not held for trading
form which an election
has been made ?
yes no
Measure at FVTOCI Measure at FVTPL
HKFRS 9,
4.2.1 3.2.3 Classification of financial liabilities
On initial recognition, HKFRS 9 require that financial liabilities are classified as either:
(a) at fair value through profit or loss, or
(b) financial liabilities at amortised cost
A financial liability is classified at fair value through profit or loss if:
(a) it is held for trading, or
(b) upon initial recognition it is designated at fair value through profit or loss.
Derivatives are always measured at fair value through profit or loss.
HKFRS 9, 3.3 Reclassification of financial instruments

4.4.1-4.4.2
Topic highlights
Financial assets may be reclassified from one category to another in certain circumstances.
HKFRS 9 requires that when an entity changes its business model for managing financial assets, it
should reclassify all affected financial assets. This reclassification applies only to debt instruments,
as equity instruments must be classified as measured at fair value.
HKFRS 9 prohibits the reclassification of financial liabilities.
492
HKFRS 9,
3.2.3-3.2.6
3.4 Derecognition
Topic highlights
Financial assets should be derecognised when the rights to the cash flows from the asset expire
or where substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred to another party.
Financial liabilities should be de-recognised when they are extinguished.
Derecognition refers to the removal of a previously recognised financial instrument from an entity's
3.4.1 Derecognition of financial assets
A financial asset should be derecognised by an entity when:
(a) the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire, or
(b) the entity transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial
asset to another party
The following are examples of the transfer of substantially all risks and rewards of ownership:
 An unconditional sale of a financial asset
 A sale of a financial asset together with an option to repurchase the financial asset at its fair
value at the time of repurchase
The standard also provides examples of situations where the risks and rewards of ownership have
not been transferred:
 A sale and repurchase transaction where the repurchase price is a fixed price or the sale
price plus a lender's return
 A sale of a financial asset together with a total return swap that transfers the market risk
exposure back to the entity
 A sale of short-term receivables in which the entity guarantees to compensate the transferee
for credit losses that are likely to occur.
3.4.2 Derecognition of financial liabilities
A financial liability is derecognised when it is extinguished i.e. when the obligation specified in the
contract is discharged or cancelled or expires.
Where an existing borrower and lender of debt instruments exchange one financial instrument for
another with substantially different terms, this is accounted for as an extinguishment of the original
financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability.
Similarly, a substantial modification of the terms of an existing financial liability or a part of it should
be accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new
financial liability.
For this purpose, a modification is "substantial" where the discounted present value of cash flows
under the new terms, discounted using the original effective interest rate, is at least 10% different
from the discounted present value of the cash flows of the original financial liability.
The difference between the carrying amount of a financial liability (or part of a financial liability)
extinguished or transferred to another party and the consideration paid, including any non-cash
assets transferred or liabilities assumed, shall be recognised in profit or loss.
Example: Derecognition
A number of years ago Beijing Company issued loan stock with the following terms:
 Interest to be paid annually in arrears at a rate of 5.5%
 Loan to be repaid on 31 December 20X7
493
Financial Reporting
Taking into account the transaction costs, the effective interest rate was 6%. Beijing had paid all
interest and capital due up to 31 December 20X1, and at that date the carrying amount of the loan
was $10 million.
During 20X1, the worldwide economic recession caused Beijing to suffer financial difficulties, and
an agreement to revise the terms of the loan stock from 20X2 onwards was reached with lenders.
The revised terms included an extension to the term of the loan and an increase to the coupon
rate.
The effective interest rate of the revised terms, excluding transaction costs was 8% per annum.
The present value of the cash flows, excluding transaction costs, under the revised terms was
$10.5 million at 6% and $9.5 million at 8%.
Transaction costs of $700,000 were payable on 1 January 20X2 in respect of the negotiations for
the revised terms.
How should the revision to the terms of the loan be treated in Beijing’s financial statements?
Solution
The revised terms negotiated by Beijing are such that the original loan should be derecognised and
a new financial liability recognised.
Derecognition of the old loan and recognition of the new liability is required if the present value of
the cash flows under the new terms is 10% or more different from the present value of the original
loan. The cash flows under the new terms must be discounted at the 6% effective interest rate of
the original loan and include the $700,000 transaction costs.
HKFRS 9. With transaction costs payable at the start of the period of the revised terms, they are added on in
B3.3.6 full to the $10.5m present value, giving a total of $11.2m. This is 12% different from the $10.0m
present value of the old loan, so the original loan should be derecognised and the new financial
liability recognised.
Discuss whether the following financial instruments would be derecognised.
(a) ABC sells an investment in shares, but retains a call option to repurchase those shares at
any time at a price equal to their current market value at the date of repurchase.
(b) DEF enters into a stocklending agreement where an investment is lent to a third party for a
fixed period of time for a fee.
(c) XYZ sells title to some of its receivables to a debt factor for an immediate cash payment of
90% of their value. The terms of the agreement are that XYZ has to compensate the factor
for any amounts not recovered by the factor after six months.
A financial liability which is extinguished i.e., when the obligation specified in the contract is
discharged or cancelled or expires, should be derecognised by an entity.
HKFRS 9, 3.4.3 Partial derecognition

3.2.2
Partial derecognition of a financial asset or liability is possible on condition that the derecognised
part comprises only:
(a) identifiable cash flows
(b) a share of the total cash flows on a fully proportionate (pro rata) basis
For example, a holder of bonds has the right to two separate sets of cash inflows: those relating to
the principal and those relating to the interest. It could retain the right to receive the principal and
sell the right to receive interest to another party.
494
Where only part of a financial asset is derecognised, the carrying amount of the asset should be
allocated between the part retained and the part transferred based on their relative fair values on the
date of transfer. A gain or loss should be recognised based on the proceeds for the portion transferred.
On derecognition, the amount to be included in net profit or loss for the period is calculated as
follows:
$ $
Carrying amount of asset/liability (or the portion of asset/liability) transferred X
Less: proceeds received/paid X
any cumulative gain or loss reported as other comprehensive income X
(X)
Profit or loss X
3.5 Section summary

 HKFRS 9 applies to the recognition of financial assets and liabilities where it is early
adopted. Financial instruments are recognised when the entity becomes a party to the
contractual provisions of the instrument.
 HKFRS 9 requires that financial assets are classified as measured at amortised cost or fair
value and financial liabilities are classified at fair value through profit or loss or amortised
cost.
 Financial assets are reclassified from one category to another in certain circumstances.
Financial liabilities may not be reclassified.
 Financial assets should be derecognised when the rights to the cash flows from the asset
expire or where substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred to
another party.
 Financial liabilities should be derecognised when they are extinguished.
4 HKFRS 9 : Measurement of financial instruments

Topic highlights
Financial instruments are initially measured at fair value. Transaction costs increase this amount
for financial assets classified as measured at amortised cost and decrease this amount for financial
liabilities classified as measured at amortised cost.
The classification of financial assets and financial liabilities is of particular importance in terms of
how they are measured throughout their life.
HKFRS 9, 4.1 Initial measurement

5.1.1, 5.1.2A
Financial assets
HKFRS 9 requires that financial assets are initially measured at the transaction price, i.e. the fair
value of consideration given, except where part of the consideration given is for something other
than the financial asset. In this case the financial asset is initially measured at fair value evidenced
by a quoted price in an active market for an identical asset (i.e. an HKFRS 13 level 1 input) or
based on a valuation technique that uses only data from observable markets. The difference
between the fair value at initial recognition and the transaction price is recognised as a gain or loss.
In the case of financial assets not measured at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL), transaction
costs directly attributable to the acquisition of the financial asset increase this amount.
495
Financial Reporting
The correct journal entry to initially recognise a financial asset is therefore:

Financial assets NOT at FVTPL
DEBIT Financial asset Fair value +
transaction costs
CREDIT Cash/bank/payable Fair value
CREDIT Cash/bank/payable Transaction costs
Financial assets at FVTPL

DEBIT Financial asset Fair value
CREDIT Cash/bank/payable Fair value
and
DEBIT Transaction costs (profit or loss) Transaction costs
Financial liabilities
HKFRS 9 require that financial liabilities are initially measured at transaction price, i.e. the fair value
of consideration received except where part of the consideration received is for something other
than the financial liability. In this case the financial liability is initially measured at fair value
determined as for financial assets (see above). Transaction costs are deducted from this amount
for financial liabilities unless they are measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Financial liabilities NOT at FVTPL

DEBIT Cash/bank/receivable Fair value
CREDIT Cash/bank/payable Fair value -
transaction costs
Financial liabilities at FVTPL
DEBIT Cash/bank/receivable Fair value
CREDIT Financial liability Fair value
and
DEBIT Transaction costs (profit or loss) Transaction costs
HKFRS 9,
5.2.1
4.2 Subsequent measurement of financial assets
Topic highlights
Financial assets are subsequently measured at:
 fair value with changes in value recognised in other comprehensive income or profit or loss,
or
 amortised cost with interest recognised in profit or loss.
As the classifications suggest, financial assets are measured, subsequent to initial recognition at:
 fair value, or
 amortised cost.
496
HKFRS 4.2.1 Financial assets measured at fair value

13.76,81,86
Where a financial asset is measured at fair value, the gain or loss resulting from remeasurement at
each reporting date is recognised in profit or loss (or other comprehensive income where an
irrevocable election has been made in relation to equity instruments).
The exception to this is where a financial asset is part of a hedging relationship.
Note that on disposal of an equity instrument that is measured at fair value through other
comprehensive income, cumulative fair value changes are not reclassified to profit or loss.
Example: Asset measurement

On 6 November 20X3 Stripe Co. acquires a listed equity investment with the intention of holding it
in the long term. The investment cost $500,000 which was paid in cash. At Stripe Co.'s year end of
31 December 20X3, the market price of an identical investment is $520,000. How is the asset
initially and subsequently measured?
Stripe Co. has elected to present changes in the fair value of the equity investment in other
Solution
 The asset is initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration, being $500,000 by:
DEBIT Equity investment $500,000
CREDIT Cash/bank $500,000
 At the period end it is remeasured to $520,000 by:
DEBIT Equity investment $20,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income $20,000
 This results in the recognition of $20,000 in other comprehensive income.
HKAS 39.9, 4.2.2 Financial assets measured at amortised cost

HKFRS9.5.4.
1 HKFRS 9 does not itself define amortised cost, however it does refer to the definition of this and
other relevant terms within HKAS 32 and HKAS 39. The example which follows the definitions will
help you to understand their application.
Key terms
Amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability is the amount at which the financial asset or
liability is measured at initial recognition minus principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative
amortisation using the effective interest method of any difference between that initial amount and
the maturity amount, and minus any reduction (directly or through the use of an allowance account)
for impairment or uncollectability.
The effective interest method is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial
instrument and of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant period. The
effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or
receipts through the expected life of the financial instrument to the net carrying amount of the
financial asset or liability. (HKAS 39)
Example: Financial asset measured at amortised cost

On 1 January 20X5 Abacus Bee Co. (ABC) purchases a debt instrument for its fair value of
$100,000. Abacus paid in cash and incurred no transaction costs. The debt instrument is due to
mature on 31 December 20X9. The instrument has a principal amount of $125,000 and the
instrument carries fixed interest at 4.72% that is paid annually. (The effective interest rate is 10%.)
497
Financial Reporting
How should ABC account for the debt instrument over its five-year term?
Solution
ABC will receive interest of $5,900 (125,000  4.72%) each year and $125,000 when the
instrument matures.
ABC must allocate the discount of $25,000 and the interest receivable over the five-year term at a
constant rate on the carrying amount of the debt. To do this, it must apply the effective interest rate
of 10%.
The following table shows the allocation over the years:
Profit or loss: Interest received during
Amortised cost at Interest income year Amortised cost
Year beginning of year for year (@10%) (cash inflow) at end of year
$ $ $ $
20X5 100,000 10,000 (5,900) 104,100
20X6 104,100 10,410 (5,900) 108,610
20X7 108,610 10,861 (5,900) 113,571
20X8 113,571 11,357 (5,900) 119,028
20X9 119,028 11,872 (125,000 + 5,900) –
Each year the carrying amount of the financial asset is increased by the interest income for the
year and reduced by the interest actually received during the year. In the year ended 31 December
20X5 this is recorded by:
DEBIT Financial asset - debt $100,000
CREDIT Cash/bank $100,000
To recognise the acquisition of the instrument on 1 January 20X5.
DEBIT Cash/bank $5,900
DEBIT Financial asset – debt $4,100
CREDIT Investment income $10,000
To recognise investment income in respect of the debt instrument.
Investments whose fair value cannot be reliably measured should be measured at cost.
Note that interest income is recognised in profit or loss each year, being the amount of interest
actually received plus the interest income related to the winding up of the financial asset to its
redemption value.
St Ives purchased a $20 million 6% debenture at par on 1 January 20X1 when the market rate of
interest was 6%. Interest is paid annually on 31 December. The debenture is redeemable at par on
31 December 20X2.
The market rate of interest on debentures of equivalent term and risk changed to 7% on
31 December 20X1.
Required
Show the charge or credit to profit or loss for each of the two years to 31 December 20X2 if the
debentures are classified as:
(a) financial assets at amortised cost.
(b) financial assets at fair value through profit or loss.
Fair value is to be calculated using discounted cash flow techniques.
498
HKFRS 9,
4.2.3 Reclassification
5.6.1-5.6.3
In section 3.3 we saw that in some circumstances an entity must reclassify financial assets from
one category to another.
Where financial assets are reclassified, that reclassification is applied prospectively from the
reclassification date. Previously recognised gains, losses or interest are not restated.
If an entity reclassifies a financial asset so that it is now measured at fair value, its fair value is
determined at the reclassification date. Any gain or loss arising from a difference between the
previous carrying amount and fair value is recognised in profit or loss.
If an entity reclassifies a financial asset so that it is now measured at amortised cost, its fair value
at the reclassification date becomes its new carrying amount.
HKFRS 9, 4.3 Subsequent measurement of financial liabilities

5.3.1
Topic highlights
Financial liabilities are subsequently measured at fair value or amortised cost with gains and losses
Except for financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss (including most derivatives), all
financial liabilities should be recognised and measured at amortised cost. The exceptions should
be measured at fair value. However, if the fair value cannot be measured reliably, they should then
be measured at cost.
4.3.1 Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost
The definitions seen above in relation to financial assets at amortised cost remain relevant here.
Again, their application is best seen through examples.
Example: Finance cost

On 1 January 20X5 a company issued $200,000 loan notes. Issue costs were $320. The loan
notes do not carry interest, but are redeemable at a premium of $41,613 on 31 December 20X6.
The effective finance cost of the loan notes is 10%.
(a) What is the finance cost in respect of the loan notes for the year ended 31 December 20X6,
and what is the carrying amount of the loan notes at that date?
(b) What journal entries are required in respect of the loan notes in 20X5 and 20X6?
Solution
(a) The premium on redemption of the loan notes represents a finance cost. The effective rate of
interest must be applied so that the debt is measured at amortised cost.
At the time of issue, the loan notes are recognised at their net proceeds of:
$199,680 (200,000 – 320).
The finance cost for the year ended 31 December 20X6 is calculated as follows:
B/f Interest @ 10% C/f
$ $ $
20X5 199,680 19,968 219,648
20X6 219,648 21,965 241,613
499
Financial Reporting
(b) The issue of the loan notes is initially recognised by:

DEBIT Cash/bank $199,680
CREDIT Financial liability $199,680
Interest in 20X5 is recognised by:

DEBIT Finance costs $19,968
Interest in 20X6 is recognised by:

DEBIT Finance costs $21,965
On 1 January 20X2, an entity issued a debt instrument with a coupon rate of 5% at a par value of
$1,000,000. The directly attributable costs of issue were $30,000. The debt instrument is repayable
on 31 December 20X8 at a premium of $260,000.
Required
What is the total amount of the finance cost associated with the debt instrument?
A $294,000
B $318,000
C $514,000
D $640,000
Grumble Co. issues a bond for $839,619 on 1 January 20X2. No interest is payable on the bond,
but it will be held to maturity and redeemed on 31 December 20X4 for $1m. The bond has not been
designated as at fair value through profit or loss.
Required
Calculate the charge to profit or loss of Grumble Co. for the year ended 31 December 20X2 and
the balance outstanding at 31 December 20X2.
HKFRS 9, 4.3.2 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

5.7.1
A financial liability which is held for trading and classified as fair value through profit or loss is
remeasured to fair value each year in accordance with HKFRS 13 (see chapter 19) with any gain or
loss recognised in profit or loss unless it is part of a hedging relationship (see section 6).
HKFRS 9 HKFRS 9 introduces rules specific to financial liabilities that are designated as measured at fair
B5.7.16 value through profit or loss. In this case the gain or loss in a period must be classified into:
 gain or loss resulting from credit risk; and
 other gain or loss.
The gain or loss resulting from credit risk is established either:
1 as the amount of change in the fair value that is not attributable to changes in market
conditions giving rise to market risk, or
500
2 using an alternative method which an entity believes to more faithfully represent changes in
value due to credit risk.
The gain or loss as a result of credit risk is recognised in other comprehensive income, unless it
creates or enlarges an accounting mismatch (in which case it is recognised in profit or loss). The
other gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss.
On derecognition any gains or losses recognised in other comprehensive income are not
reclassified to profit or loss.
HKFRS 9, 4.4 Trade date v settlement date accounting

3.1.2-3.1.6,
Appendix A A regular way purchase or sale of financial assets shall be recognised and derecognised using
trade date accounting or settlement date accounting.
Key terms
A regular way purchase or sale is a purchase or sale of a financial asset under a contract whose
terms require delivery of the asset within the time frame established generally by regulation or
convention in the marketplace concerned.
HKFRS 9 refers to two methods of accounting, being trade date and settlement date accounting.
An entity shall apply the same method consistently for all purchase and sales of financial assets
that are classified in the same way in accordance with HKFRS 9. For this purpose, assets that the
definition of held for trading form a separate classification from assets designated as measured at
fair value through profit or loss. In addition, investments in equity instruments accounted for using
the option provided in HKFRS 9 (irrevocable election to present in other comprehensive income
subsequent changes in the fair value of an investment in an equity instrument) form a separate
classification.
The trade date is the date on which an entity commits to purchase or sell an asset, and trade date
accounting results in:
 the recognition of an asset to be received and liability to pay for it on the trade date, and
 the derecognition of an asset to be sold and corresponding receivable on the trade date
(together with any gain or loss).
The settlement date is the date on which an asset is delivered to or by an entity, and settlement
date accounting results in:
 the recognition of an asset on the settlement date and
 the derecognition of an asset on the settlement date.
When trade date accounting is used interest does not start to accrue until the settlement date when
title passes.
When settlement date accounting is used:
(a) An asset subsequently measured at amortised cost is recognised initially at its fair value on
the trade date.
(b) Any change in the fair value of the asset to be received between the trade and settlement
date is not recognised for assets measured at amortised cost.
(c) Any change in the fair value of the asset to be received between the trade and settlement
date is recognised in profit or loss or other comprehensive income for assets measured at
fair value.
Example: Trade date and settlement date accounting

Gaylord entered into a contractual commitment on 27 December 20X4 to purchase a financial
asset for $1,000. On 31 December 20X4, the entity’s reporting date, the fair value was $1,005.
501
Financial Reporting
The transaction was settled on 5 January 20X5 when the fair value was $1,007. The entity has
classified the asset as at fair value through profit or loss in accordance with HKFRS 9.
Required
How should the transactions be accounted for under trade date accounting and settlement date
accounting?
Solution
Trade date accounting
 On 27 December 20X4, the entity should recognise the financial asset and the liability to the
counterparty at $1,000.
 At 31 December 20X4, the financial asset should be remeasured to $1,005 and a gain of $5
 On 5 January 20X5, the liability to the counterparty of $1,000 will be paid in cash. The fair
value of the financial asset should be remeasured to $1,007 and a further gain of $2
Settlement date accounting
 No transaction should be recognised on 27 December 20X4.
 On 31 December 20X4, a receivable of $5 should be recognised (equal to the fair value
movement since the trade date) and the gain recognised in profit or loss.
 On 5 January 20X5, the financial asset should be recognised at its fair value of $1,007. The
receivable should be derecognised, the payment of cash to the counterparty recognised and
the further gain of $2 recognised in profit or loss.
4.5 Section summary

 Financial instruments are initially measured at fair value. Transaction costs increase this
amount for financial assets that are not measured at FVTPL and decrease this amount for
financial liabilities that are not measured at FVTPL.
 Financial assets are subsequently measured at fair value with changes recognised in profit
or loss or other comprehensive income or at amortised cost with interest recognised in profit
or loss.
 Financial liabilities are subsequently measured at fair value or amortised cost with gains and
losses recognised in profit or loss.
5 HKAS 39: Recognition and measurement rules

Topic highlights
Unless an entity early adopts HKFRS 9, HKAS 39 remains applicable until it is withdrawn in 2018.
It is therefore important that you understand the HKAS 39 recognition and measurement rules too.
5.1 Scope
HKAS 39.2
The scope of HKAS 39 is identical to that of HKFRS 9 (see section 3.1).
502
5.2 Recognition and derecognition

HKAS
39.14,17,39 HKAS 39 requires that financial instruments are recognised in the statement of financial position
when the entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. This is the same
as the requirements of HKFRS 9.
HKAS 39 also includes substantially the same derecognition rules as HKFRS 9.
HKAs 39.9 5.3 Classification and measurement of financial assets

The HKFRS 9 classification rules for financial assets seen in section 3.2 are a significant
simplification of the HKAS 39 rules. HKAS 39 requires financial assets to be classified as one of
four types, being:
Fair value through profit Financial assets that are:

or loss (FVTPL) (a) held for trading, i.e. it is:
• acquired principally for the purpose of sale in the short-term
• part of a portfolio of financial instruments that are managed
together and for which there is evidence of a recent pattern of
short-term profit taking, or
• a derivative.
(b) designated as such. This is only allowed where:
• it eliminates or significantly reduces an accounting mismatch
• a group of assets is managed and its performance evaluated
on a fair value basis.
Held to maturity (HTM) Financial assets with fixed or determinable payments and fixed
maturity that:
• a company has the intention and ability to hold to maturity
• do not meet the definition of loans and receivables
• are not designated as fair value through profit or loss or
available-for-sale.
Loans and receivables Non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments
that are not quoted in an active market, other than:
• Those that the entity intends to sell immediately or in the near
term, which should be classified as held for trading and those
that the entity upon initial recognition designates as at fair
value through profit or loss
• Those that the entity upon initial recognition designates as
available-for-sale, or
• Those for which the holder may not recover substantially all of
the initial investment, other than because of credit
deterioration, which shall be classified as available-for-sale.
Available for sale (AFS) Non-derivative financial assets designated as available-for-sale or
not classified under any of the other three headings
503
Financial Reporting
5.3.1 Initial and subsequent measurement

HKAS 39.43,
46 The following table summarises the measurement requirements of HKAS 39 in respect of financial
assets:
Classification Initial Transaction Subsequent Gains and losses

measurement costs measurement recognised in:
FVTPL Fair value Expense Fair value Profit or loss
HTM Fair value Add to initial Amortised cost Profit or loss
measurement
Loans and Fair value Add to initial Amortised cost Profit or loss
receivables measurement
AFS Fair value Add to initial Fair value Other
measurement comprehensive
income
FVTPL and AFS financial assets are remeasured to fair value at each reporting date. Fair value is
determined in accordance with HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement (see chapter 19). Note that on
the disposal of an AFS financial asset, cumulative amounts recognised in other comprehensive
income are reclassified to profit or loss.
HTM financial assets and loans and receivables are measured at amortised cost, calculated as
discussed in section 4 of this chapter.
Raincloud Trading Co (‘RTC’) acquires a listed equity investment on 6 May 20X1 with the intention
of holding it for the long term. The investment cost $13 million and RTC incurred transaction costs
of $500,000. At RTC’s year-end of 31 December 20X1 the market price of an identical investment
is $14.6 million.
Required
How is the asset initially and subsequently measured?
On 1 January 20X1 Monsoon Machinery Co (‘MMC’) purchases a quoted debt instrument for its
fair value of $10 million. The debt instrument is due to mature on 31 December 20X5 and the entity
has the intention to hold the debt instrument till maturity. The instrument has a principal amount of
$12.5 million and the instrument carries fixed interest at 4.72% that is paid annually. (The effective
interest rate is 10%.)
Required
How should MMC account for the debt instrument over its five-year term?
504
5.4 Classification and measurement of financial liabilities

HKAS 39.9
The requirements of HKAS 39 and HKFRS 9 are converged in terms of the classification and
measurement of financial liabilities. HKAS 39 requires that financial liabilities are classified as
either:
(a) at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL), or
(b) financial liabilities at amortised cost
A financial liability is classified at fair value through profit or loss if:
(a) it is held for trading, or
(b) upon initial recognition it is designated at fair value through profit or loss.
Derivatives are always measured at fair value through profit or loss.
5.4.1 Initial and subsequent measurement
HKAS
39.43,47 The following table summarises the measurement requirements of HKAS 39 in respect of financial
liabilities:
Classification Initial Transaction Subsequent Gains and losses

measurement costs measurement recognised in:
FVTPL Fair value Expense Fair value Profit or loss

Other financial Fair value Deduct from Amortised cost Profit or loss
liabilities initial
measurement
Unlike HKFRS 9, HKAS 39 does not split the gain or loss arising on financial liabilities that are
designated as FVTPL and account for that part arising from credit risk separately.
HKAS 39.50-
54
5.5 Reclassification of financial instruments
In limited circumstances HKAS 39 requires or permits that non-derivative financial assets are
reclassified.
5.5.1 Reclassification out of the HTM category
If an entity no longer has the ability or intention to hold a held-to-maturity financial asset to maturity
it is reclassified to the available for sale category.
On reclassification:
 It is remeasured to fair value
 Any gain or loss is recognised in other comprehensive income.
Such a reclassification, or the sale of a held-to-maturity asset before the maturity date triggers a
penalty in accordance with the HKAS 39 ‘tainting rules’. The held-to-maturity category is now
deemed to be tainted and as a result:
1 All remaining held-to-maturity financial assets are reclassified as available for sale and
remeasured to fair value, and
2 The held-to-maturity category is unavailable to the entity for the remainder of the financial
year and the two subsequent financial years.
This penalty is avoided only where the financial asset sold or reclassified is insignificant compared
to the total amount of held-to-maturity assets or the reclassification was:
 Within three months of maturity, or
 After the entity has collected substantially all amounts of principal, or
 Outside the entity’s control.
505
Financial Reporting
Example
On 1 January 20X3, Ramsey Smith Co (‘RSC’) classifies a portfolio of eight newly issued ten-year
bonds as held-to-maturity investments. On 30 April 20X4, the entity sells half of the assets for their
fair value of $2,500 each. At that date the amortised cost of each financial asset using the effective
interest method was $2,100. On 1 January 20X7, the fair value of each bond was $2,750. The
entity has a 31 December reporting date.
Required
How should the above be accounted for?
Solution
On 30 April 20X4 the held-to-maturity category becomes tainted when RSC sells more than an
insignificant amount (50%) of the held-to-maturity financial assets.
At that date, the remaining financial assets must be reclassified as available-for-sale. They should
be measured at $10,000 (4 × $2,500) and the gain of $1,600 (4 × ($2,500 – $2,100)) recognised in
The category of held-to-maturity investments is unavailable for classification for the remainder of
the 20X4 financial year and the two following financial years.
The financial assets may be reclassified as held-to-maturity on 1 January 20X7 when the
classification is cleansed.
On that date, the fair value of $11,000 (4 × $2,750) becomes the new amortised cost and the total
gain of $2,600 (4 × ($2,750 – $2,100)) recognised in other comprehensive income is amortised to
profit or loss over the remaining six-year term to maturity, using the effective interest rate method.
5.5.2 Reclassification out of the FVTPL and AFS categories

Reclassification out of the fair value through profit or loss and available for sale categories is
allowed in limited circumstances. It is not allowed for:
 Derivatives
 Financial assets that are designated as fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition.
The criteria for reclassification are as follows.
(a) If a debt instrument would have met the definition of loans and receivables, had it not been
required to be classified as held for trading at initial recognition, it may be reclassified out of
fair value through profit or loss provided the entity has the intention and ability to hold the
asset for the foreseeable future or until maturity.
(b) If a debt instrument was classified as available for sale, but would have met the definition of
loans and receivables if it had not been designated as available for sale, it may be
reclassified to the loans and receivables category provided the entity has the intention and
ability to hold the asset for the foreseeable future or until maturity.
(c) Other debt instruments or any equity instruments may be reclassified from fair value through
profit or loss to available for sale or, in the case of debt instruments only from fair value
through profit or loss to held to maturity if the asset is no longer held for selling in the short
term. Such cases will be rare.
Reclassified assets must be measured at fair value at the date of reclassification and this becomes
the new cost, or amortised cost of the financial asset. Previously recognised gains and losses
cannot be reversed.
For assets reclassified out of AFS, amounts previously recognised in other comprehensive income
must be reclassified to profit or loss.
506
5.5.3 Accounting subsequent to reclassification

After the reclassification date, the normal HKAS 39 requirements apply. For example, in the case of
financial assets measured at amortised cost, a new effective interest rate will be determined. If a
fixed rate debt instrument is reclassified as loans and receivables and held to maturity, this
effective interest rate will be used as the discount rate for future impairment calculations.
Reclassified debt instruments are treated differently. If, after the instrument has been reclassified,
an entity increases its estimate of recoverability of future cash flows, the carrying amount is not
adjusted upwards (in accordance with existing HKAS 39 rules). Instead, a new effective interest
rate must be applied from that date on. This enables the increase in recoverability of cash flows to
be recognised over the expected life of the financial asset.
6 HKAS 39: Impairment of financial assets

HKAS 39.58
Topic highlights
Financial assets measured at amortised cost must be tested for impairment when there is objective
evidence of impairment. Any loss is recognised in profit or loss.
Although HKFRS 9 guidance on the impairment of financial assets (credit losses) has now been
issued, the HKAS 39 rules remain examinable; HKFRS 9 credit loss guidance is considered as a
current development at the end of this chapter.
At each year-end, an entity should assess whether there is any objective evidence that a financial
asset or group of assets is impaired. Note that this is not necessary for financial assets measured
at fair value with changes recognised in profit or loss as any impairment is recognised for these
assets when they are remeasured at each period end.
Can you think of three examples of indications that a financial asset or group of assets may be
impaired?
HKAS 39.59-
60
6.1 Objective evidence of impairment
Where there is objective evidence of impairment, an entity should determine the amount of any
impairment loss.
It may not be possible to identify a single, discrete event that caused the impairment. Rather the
combined effect of several events may have caused the impairment. Losses expected as a result
of future events, no matter how likely, are not recognised.
Objective evidence that a financial asset or group of assets is impaired includes observable data
that comes to the attention of the holder of the asset about the following events:
(a) Significant financial difficulty of the issuer or obligor.
(b) A breach of contract, such as a default or delinquency in interest or principal payments.
(c) The lender, for economic or legal reasons relating to the borrower's financial difficulty, granting
to the borrower a concession that the lender would not otherwise consider.
(d) It becoming probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy or other financial reorganisation.
(e) The disappearance of an active market for that financial asset because of financial difficulties.
507
Financial Reporting
(f) Observable data indicating that there is a measurable decrease in the estimated future cash
flows from a group of financial assets since the initial recognition of those assets, although the
decrease cannot yet be identified with the individual financial assets in the group, including:
(i) Adverse changes in the payment status of borrowers in the group (e.g. an increased
number of delayed payments or an increased number of credit card borrowers who
have reached their credit limit and are paying the minimum monthly amount).
(ii) National or local economic conditions that correlate with defaults on the assets in the
group (e.g. an increase in the unemployment rate in the geographical area of the
borrowers, a decrease in property prices for mortgages in the relevant area, a
decrease in oil prices for loan assets to oil producers, or adverse changes in industry
conditions that affect the borrowers in the group).
The disappearance of an active market because an entity's financial instruments are no longer
publicly traded is not evidence of impairment. A downgrade of an entity's credit rating is not, of
itself, evidence of impairment, although it may be evidence of impairment when considered with
other available information. A decline in the fair value of a financial asset below its cost or
amortised cost is not necessarily evidence of impairment (for example, a decline in the fair value of
an investment in a debt instrument that results from an increase in the risk-free interest rate).
HKAS 39.63-
65 6.2 Accounting for an impairment
6.2.1 Impairment of financial assets carried at amortised cost
The impairment loss is the difference between the asset's carrying amount and its recoverable
amount. The asset's recoverable amount is the present value of estimated future cash flows,
discounted at the financial instrument's original effective interest rate.
The amount of the loss should be recognised in profit or loss.
If the impairment loss decreases at a later date (and the decrease relates to an event occurring
after the impairment was recognised) the reversal is recognised in profit or loss. The carrying
amount of the asset must not exceed the original amortised cost.
Example: Impairment
Floribunda has a 7% loan receivable of $1m. Interest is payable annually in arrears and the
principal is repayable in three years' time. The amortised cost of the loan is $1m. The original
effective rate of interest was 7% and the current effective interest rate is 8%.
The borrower is in financial difficulty and Floribunda has granted a concession in that no annual
interest is payable and the principal will be repaid in three years' time at a premium of 10%.
Required
Explain how the carrying amount of the loan should be calculated.
Solution
 The financial difficulty of, and the granting of a concession to, the issuer are both objective
evidence of impairment.
 The recoverable amount should be calculated as $839,185 by discounting the $1.1m agreed
repayment at the original effective interest rate of 7% over a four-year period.
 An impairment loss of $160,815 is therefore recognised in profit or loss.
 In Year 1, interest income of $58,743 (7%  $839,185) should be recognised and the
carrying amount of the loan increased to $897,928. This process should be repeated through
Years 2 to 4, at which point the loan will be carried at $1.1m immediately prior to repayment.
508
6.2.2 Impairment of assets measured at cost

Unquoted equity instruments are carried at cost if their fair value cannot be reliably measured. The
impairment loss is the difference between the asset's carrying amount and the present value of
estimated future cash flows, discounted at the current market rate of return for a similar financial
instrument. Such impairment losses cannot be reversed.
6.2.3 Impairment of assets measured at fair value through other
comprehensive income (FVTOCI)
Any impairment loss on a financial asset measured at FVTOCI should be removed from equity and
recognised in net profit or loss for the period even though the financial asset has not been
derecognised.
The impairment loss is the difference between its acquisition cost (net of any principal repayment
and amortisation) and current fair value less any impairment loss on that asset previously
Impairment losses relating to equity instruments cannot be reversed. Impairment losses relating to
debt instruments may be reversed if, in a later period, the fair value of the instrument increases and
the increase can be objectively related to an event occurring after the loss was recognised.
7 HKAS 39 / HKFRS 9: Embedded derivatives

Topic highlights
Embedded derivatives are derivative instruments that are embedded within a host contract that
may or may not be a financial instrument.
Derivative contracts may be "embedded" in contracts that are not themselves derivatives (and may
not be financial instruments). These non-derivatives are known as host contracts, and may
comprise:
 leases
 sale or purchase contracts
 insurance contracts
 construction contracts
 a debt or equity instrument
7.1 Examples of embedded derivatives

Possible examples include:
(a) Contingent rentals based on sales included as a term in a lease of retail premises:
"Host"
Lease Accounted for as normal
contract
Embedded Contingent Treat as derivative, i.e. re-

derivative rentals measured to fair value with
changes recognised in profit or
loss
(b) A bond which is redeemable in five years' time with part of the redemption price based on
the increase in the Hong Kong Index.
509
Financial Reporting
(c) An embedded derivative caused by changes in the foreign exchange can be found in a
construction contract which is priced in a foreign currency.
HKFRS 9,
4.3.2-4.3.4
7.2 Accounting treatment of embedded derivatives
The accounting treatment for embedded derivatives differs depending on whether HKAS 39 or
HKFRS 9 is applied.
7.2.1 HKAS 39 rules
When an entity becomes party to a host contract with an embedded derivative, it must assess
whether the embedded derivative should be separated from its host contract and accounted for as
a derivative (at fair value through profit or loss). It must separate the embedded derivative if:
(a) The economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative are not closely related to
those of the host contract, and
(b) A separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded derivative would meet the
definition of a derivative, and
(c) The hybrid instrument is not measured at fair value with changes recognised in profit or loss
(in which case there is no benefit to separating the embedded derivative).
7.2.2 HKFRS 9 rules
HKFRS 9 simplifies accounting guidance in relation to embedded derivatives. Where HKFRS 9 is
applied, if the host contract is a financial asset within the scope of the standard, the classification
HKFRS 9,
4.3.2 and measurement rules of the standard are applied to the entire hybrid contract.
The same rules as HKAS 39 apply where this is not the case.
Earlier in the chapter we saw that where convertible debt is denominated in a foreign currency or
has a variable conversion ratio based on share price, then it is not split into equity and liability
components for accounting purposes. Instead the conversion option is treated as an embedded
derivative within a financial liability host contract.
Applying the HKFRS 9 guidance detailed above, the embedded derivative is separated from the
debt instrument host and accounted for separately since:
(a) The economic characteristics and risks of a debt contract are not closely related to those of a
share warrant
(b) A separate share warrant meets the definition of a derivative
(c) The debt instrument is not measured at fair value through profit or loss (unless specifically
designated as such to provide more relevant information)
Therefore two financial liabilities are recognised:
(i) A debt instrument measured at amortised cost, and
(ii) An embedded derivative (representing the conversion option) measured at fair value through
profit or loss.
HKFRS 9,
B4.3.1
7.3 Reassessment of embedded derivatives
Where HKAS 39 is applied, HK(IFRIC) Int-9 Reassessment of Embedded Derivatives is also
applicable.
This states that an entity is not permitted to reassess the treatment of an embedded derivative
throughout the life of a contract unless there is a significant change to the terms of the contract.
Where HKFRS 9 is applied, this guidance is now incorporated into the contents of the standard.
510
8 HKAS 39: Hedging

Topic highlights
Hedge accounting means designating one or more instruments so that their change in fair value is
offset by the change in fair value or cash flows of another item.
HKFRS 9 guidance on hedge accounting was added to the standard in 2013. For the purposes of
the Module A syllabus, the 2013 edition of HKFRS 9 is examined as a current development and is
discussed in more detail in section 10 of this chapter. This section focuses on the HKAS 39
hedging guidance.
8.1 Introduction
It is normal business practice for a company to engage in hedging activities in order to reduce their
exposure to risk and uncertainty, such as changes in prices, interest rates or foreign exchange
rates. For example, an entity may have a fixed amount of foreign currency to pay on a particular
date, and hedge against unfavourable exchange rate movements by taking out a forward contract
to purchase the currency it needs to meet its obligation from a third party at a particular exchange
rate.
In this instance the forward contract is a derivative and so measured at fair value with changes in
value recognised in profit or loss. An accounting hedge involves recognising these changes in
value at the same time as any opposite gain or loss on a year end revaluation and then settlement
of the payable so as to minimise the impact on profit or loss of the transaction. This is an example
of a hedge that happens automatically.
HKAS 39 provides the guidance relating to hedging and allows hedge accounting where there is
a designated hedging relationship between a hedging instrument and a hedged item. It is
prohibited otherwise. Hedge accounting is therefore not mandatory.

The definitions in HKAS 39 relevant to hedging are given below.
Key terms
Hedging, for accounting purposes, means designating one or more hedging instruments so that
their change in fair value is an offset, in whole or in part, to the change in fair value or cash flows of
a hedged item.
A hedged item is an asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted future transaction that:
(a) exposes the entity to risk of changes in fair value or changes in future cash flows, and that
(b) is designated as being hedged.
A hedging instrument is a designated derivative or (in limited circumstances) another financial
asset or liability whose fair value or cash flows are expected to offset changes in the fair value or
cash flows of a designated hedged item. (A non-derivative financial asset or liability may be
designated as a hedging instrument for hedge accounting purposes only if it hedges the risk of
changes in foreign currency exchange rates.)
Hedge effectiveness is the degree to which changes in the fair value or cash flows of the hedged
item attributable to a hedged risk are offset by changes in the fair value or cash flows of the
hedging instrument.
(HKAS 39)
511
Financial Reporting
Generally only assets, liabilities etc. that involve external parties can be designated as hedged
items. The foreign currency risk of an intragroup monetary item (e.g. payable/receivable between
two subsidiaries) may qualify as a hedged item in the group financial statements if it results in an
exposure to foreign exchange rate gains or losses that are not fully eliminated on consolidation.
This can happen (per HKAS 21) when the transaction is between entities with different functional
currencies.
In addition, the foreign currency risk of a highly probable group transaction may qualify as a
hedged item if it is in a currency other than the functional currency of the entity and the foreign
currency risk will affect profit or loss.
HKAS 39.86 8.3 Types of hedge

There are three types of hedge covered by HKAS 39:
(a) Fair value hedges, which involve hedging against a change in the value of a recognised
asset or liability (the above example involving a foreign currency payable is an example of a
fair value hedge)
(b) Cash flow hedges, which involve hedging against a change in the value of future certain
cash flows (for example, where an entity is due to receive a payment in foreign currency),
and
(c) Net investment hedges, which involves hedging an investment in a foreign group company.
The formal definitions of each type of hedge are as follows:
Key terms
Fair value hedge. A hedge of the exposure to changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or
liability or an unrecognised firm commitment, or an identified portion of such an asset, liability or
firm commitment, that is attributable to a particular risk and could affect profit or loss.
Cash flow hedge. A hedge of the exposure to variability in cash flows that:
(a) is attributable to a particular risk associated with a recognised asset or liability (such as all or
some future interest payments on variable rate debt) or a highly probable forecast
transaction (such as an anticipated purchase or sale), and that
(b) could affect profit or loss.
Hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation. HKAS 21 defines a net investment in a
foreign operation as the amount of the reporting entity's interest in the net assets of that operation.
A forecast transaction is an uncommitted but anticipated future transaction.
A firm commitment is a binding agreement for the exchange of a specified quantity of resources
at a specified price on a specified future date or dates.
(HKAS 39)
We shall consider each type of hedge in detail in a moment, but first it is important to understand
the conditions for hedge accounting.
HKAS 39.88 8.4 Conditions for hedge accounting

Topic highlights
Hedge accounting is permitted in certain circumstances, provided the hedging relationship is
clearly defined, measurable and actually effective.
512
Before a hedging relationship qualifies for hedge accounting, all of the following conditions must
be met:
(a) The hedging relationship must be formally documented (including the identification of the
hedged item, the hedging instrument, the nature of the hedged risk and the assessment of
the hedging instrument's effectiveness in offsetting the exposure to changes in the hedged
item's fair value or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk). The hedging relationship must
also be designated at its inception as a hedge based on the entity's risk management
objective and strategy.
(b) There is an expectation that the hedge is highly effective in offsetting changes in fair value or
cash flows ascribed to the hedged risk. (Note. The hedge does not have to be fully
effective.)
(c) For cash flow hedges, it must be highly probable that there is a forecast transaction since
such a transaction is the subject of the hedge. In addition, the transaction must present an
exposure to variations in cash flows that could eventually affect profit and loss.
(d) Reliable measurement of the effectiveness of the hedge.
(e) The assessment of the hedge is carried out on an ongoing basis (annually) and it has been
effective during the reporting period.
Effectiveness
Hedge effectiveness must be tested regularly and must fall within the range 80% to 125%. If it falls
outside e.g. 75% or 130%, then hedge accounting cannot be applied. Both the hedged item and
hedging instrument will be accounted for based on their respective accounting standard.
Change in hedging instrument
Hedge effectiveness =
Change in hedged item
8.5 Accounting treatment

Topic highlights
There are three types of hedge: fair value hedge; cash flow hedge; hedge of a net investment in a
foreign operation. The accounting treatment of a hedge depends on its type.
HKAS 39.89 8.5.1 Fair value hedges

In a fair value hedge, the hedged item is a recognised asset or liability. When hedge accounting is
applied, this is remeasured to fair value at the period end in accordance with HKFRS 13 Fair Value
Measurement and any gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk is
The hedging instrument is a derivative and in accordance with HKAS 39 / HKFRS 9 any gain or
loss resulting from re-measuring the hedging instrument at fair value is also recognised in profit
or loss.
Example: Fair value hedge (1)

A company owns inventories of 30,000 gallons of oil which cost $660,000 on 1 December 20X8.
In order to hedge the fluctuation in the market value of the oil the company signs a futures contract
to deliver 30,000 gallons of oil on 31 March 20X9 at the futures price of $25 per gallon.
The market price of oil on 31 December 20X8 is $27 per gallon and the futures price for delivery on
31 March 20X9 is $30 per gallon.
513
Financial Reporting
Required
Explain the impact of the transactions on the financial statements of the company:
(a) without hedge accounting
(b) with hedge accounting.
Solution
The futures contract was intended to protect the company from a fall in oil prices (which would
have reduced the profit when the oil was eventually sold). However, oil prices have actually risen,
so that the company has made a loss on the contract.
Without hedge accounting
The futures contract is a derivative and therefore must be remeasured to fair value at 31 December
20X8 under HKAS 39. The loss on the futures contract is recognised in profit or loss:
$ $
DEBIT Profit or loss (30,000  (30 – 25)) 150,000
CREDIT Financial liability 150,000
With hedge accounting
The loss on the futures contract is recognised in profit or loss as before, however with hedge
accounting, the inventories are also remeasured to fair value:
$
Fair value at 31 December 20X8 (30,000  27) 810,000
Cost (660,000)
Gain 150,000
The gain is also recognised in profit or loss:
$ $
DEBIT Inventory 150,000
CREDIT Profit or loss 150,000
With hedging the net effect on profit or loss is zero compared with a loss of $150,000 without
hedging.

As at 1 January 20X3, a company purchases a debt instrument that has a principal amount of
$1 million at a fixed interest rate of 6% per year. The instrument is classified as a financial asset
measured at fair value. The fair value of the instrument is $1 million.
The company is exposed to a risk of the decline in the fair value of the instrument if the market
interest rate increases because of the fixed interest rate.
The company enters into an interest rate swap. It exchanges the fixed interest rate payments it
receives on the bond for floating interest rate payments, in order to offset the risk of a decline in fair
value. If the derivative hedging instrument is effective, any decline in the fair value of the bond
should be offset by opposite increases in the fair value of the derivative instrument. The company
designates and documents the swap as a hedging instrument. On entering into the swap, the swap
has a fair value of zero.
Assuming market interest rates have increased to 7%, the fair value of the bond will have
decreased to $960,000.
At the same time, the company determines that the fair value of the swap has increased by
$40,000. Since the swap is a derivative, it is measured at fair value with changes in fair value
recognised in profit or loss. The changes in fair value of the hedged item and the hedging
514
instrument exactly offset each other; the hedge is 100% effective and the net effect on profit or loss
is zero.
Required
Explain the impact of the transactions on the financial statements of the company with hedge
accounting.
Solution
20X3 20X3
$'000 $'000 $'000
Debt instrument (hedged item) 1,000 (40) 960
Derivative asset (hedging instrument) – 40 40
Cash (1,000)
$'000
Loss on debt instrument (40)
Gain on derivative 40
No ineffectiveness –
Gains and losses on hedged item and hedging instrument are both taken to the statement of profit
or loss.
Journal entries
On 1 January 20X3
$ $
DEBIT Financial asset 1,000,000
CREDIT Cash/bank/payable 1,000,000
To recognise the debt instrument at its fair value.
On 31 December 20X3
$ $
DEBIT Profit or loss $40,000
CREDIT Financial asset $40,000
To remeasure the debt instrument to fair value at the reporting date.
And
$ $
DEBIT Financial asset - derivative $40,000
CREDIT Cash/bank/payable $40,000
To measure the interest swap at fair value at the reporting date.

Assuming the information is the same as above. However, the company determines that the fair
value of the swap has increased by $45,000 instead of $40,000.
Required
Explain the impact of the transactions on the financial statements of the company.
515
Financial Reporting
Solution
Change in hedging instrument
Hedge effectiveness =
Change in hedged item
$45,000
=
$40,000
= 112.5%
Hedge effectiveness of 112.5% is still within the window of 80% – 125%. Thus, hedge accounting
may be applied.
20X3 20X3
$'000 $'000 $'000
Debt instrument (hedged item) 1,000 (40) 960
Derivative asset (hedging instrument) – 45 45
Cash (1,000)
$'000
Loss on debt instrument (40)
Gain on derivative 45
Ineffective hedge 5
This results in an ineffective hedge of $5,000 gain recognised in profit or loss.
Journal entries
On 1 January 20X3
$ $
DEBIT Financial asset 1,000,000
CREDIT Cash/bank/payable 1,000,000
To recognise the debt instrument at its fair value.
On 31 December 20X3
$ $
DEBIT Profit or loss $40,000
CREDIT Financial asset $40,000
To remeasure the debt instrument to fair value at the reporting date.
And
$ $
DEBIT Financial asset - derivative $45,000
To measure the interest swap at fair value at the reporting date.
HKAS 39.95- 8.5.2 Cash flow hedges

96
A cash flow hedge involves hedging future cash flows. Initially therefore, only the hedging
instrument (the derivative) is recognised.
The part of the gain or loss arising from an effective hedge of a hedging instrument is recognised
in other comprehensive income while the ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging
instrument should be recognised in profit and loss.
516
Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income are accumulated in a separate component of

equity. At a given reporting date this will be the lower of:
(i) the cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument from the inception of the hedge and
(ii) the cumulative change in fair value (present value) of the expected future cash flows on the
hedged item from inception of the hedge.
When the separate component of equity has been adjusted to this amount, any remaining gain or
loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in profit or loss.
In the case where a hedging transaction results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or
liability, changes in the value of the hedging instrument recognised in other comprehensive income:
(a) are adjusted against the carrying value of the asset or liability
(b) are reclassified from equity to profit or loss as a reclassification adjustment in the same
period or periods during which the hedged forecast cash flows affect profit or loss (such as in
the periods that depreciation expense is recognised).
Example: Basic cash flow hedge

Randall Co. expected to purchase an item of plant for 20 million South African Rand in one year's
time on 31 August 20X2. In order to offset the risk of movement in the exchange rate, Randall
enters into a forward contract to purchase Rand 20 million in one year for a fixed amount
($20,500,000). The forward contract is designated as a cash flow hedge and has an initial fair value
of zero.
At the year end (31 December 20X1), the Rand has appreciated and the value of Rand 20 million is
$20,650,000. The machine will still cost Rand 20 million so the company concludes that the hedge
is 100% effective. Thus the entire change in the fair value of the hedging instrument is recognised
directly in other comprehensive income:
$ $
DEBIT Forward contract 150,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income 150,000
The effect of the cash flow hedge is to lock in the price of Rand 20 million for the item of plant. The
other comprehensive income of $150,000 will either:
(i) be reclassified to profit or loss as the machine is depreciated, or
(ii) be deducted from the initial carrying amount of the machine.
Example: Cash flow hedge

Sparkle is a manufacturer and retailer of gold jewellery.
On 31 October 20X1, the cost of Sparkle's inventories of finished jewellery was $8.280 million with
a gold content of 24,000 troy ounces. At that date their sales value was $9.938 million.
The selling price of gold jewellery is heavily dependent on the current market price of gold (plus a
standard percentage for design and production costs).
Sparkle's management wished to reduce their business risk of fluctuations in future cash inflow
from sale of the jewellery by hedging the value of the gold content of the jewellery. In the past this
has proved to be an effective strategy.
Therefore, it sold futures contracts for 24,000 troy ounces of gold at $388 per troy ounce at
31 October 20X1. The contracts mature on 30 October 20X2.
On 30 September 20X2 the fair value of the jewellery was $9.186m and the forward price of gold
per troy ounce for delivery on 30 October 20X2 was $352.
517
Financial Reporting
Required
Explain how the above transactions would be treated in Sparkle's financial statements for the year
ended 30 September 20X2.
Solution
Sparkle is hedging the volatility of the future cash inflow from selling the gold jewellery. The futures
contracts can be accounted for as a cash flow hedge in respect of those inflows, providing the
criteria for hedge accounting are met.
The gain on the forward contract should be calculated as:
$
Forward value of contract at 31.10.X1 (24,000  $388) 9,312,000
Forward value of contract at 30.9.X2 (24,000  $352) 8,448,000
Gain on contract 864,000
The change in the fair value of the expected future cash flows on the hedged item (which is not
recognised in the financial statements) should be calculated as:
$
At 31.10.X1 9,938,000
At 30.9.X2 9,186,000
752,000
As this change in fair value is less than the gain on the forward contract, the hedge is not fully
effective and only $752,000 of the gain on the forward should be recognised in other
comprehensive income. The remainder should be recognised in profit or loss:
$ $
DEBIT Financial asset (Forward a/c) 864,000
Profit or loss 112,000
Note that the hedge is still highly effective (and hence hedge accounting should continue to be
used):
$864,000/$752,000 = 115% which is within the 80% – 125% range.
Example: Cash flow hedge – interest rate swap

On 1 January 20X1, Arlington Co. lends $10 million to another entity, with a maturity date of three
years later on 31 December 20X3. The interest rate attached to the loan is variable at HIBOR +
2%, and interest is due annually on 31 December.
Arlington expects interest rates to decline and so simultaneously enters an interest rate swap on
1 January 20X1 in order to hedge its position.
The terms of the swap are as follows:
 There is no initial cost
 The notional principal is $10 million
 Arlington will receive fixed interest at 7%
 Arlington will pay variable interest at HIBOR
 Net settlement is made annually on 31 December, and the swap is also repriced on this
date.
518
The fair value of the swap, determined by projecting future settlement amounts using the current
year's variable rate and discounting these to present value is:
31 December 20X1 $300,000
31 December 20X2 $125,000
31 December 20X3 nil
HIBOR at each of these dates is:

31 December 20X1 7%
31 December 20X2 6%
31 December 20X3 5%
All criteria for cash flow hedge accounting have been met and the hedging relationship is expected
to be 100% effective at inception and on an ongoing basis.
What journal entries are required in respect of the loan and cash flow hedge throughout the three-
year term?
Solution
The purpose of the cash flow hedge is to fix the interest receivable at 9%. Interest receivable per
the terms of the loan agreement is:
31 December 20X1 $10m  (7% + 2%) = $900,000
31 December 20X2 $10m  (6% + 2%) = $800,000
31 December 20X3 $10m  (5% + 2%) = $700,000
The net settlement in respect of the swap on each of these dates is:
Date Swap receipt at 7% Swap payment at Swap net
HIBOR
$ $ $
31 December 20X1 700,000 (700,000) Nil
31 December 20X2 700,000 (600,000) 100,000
31 December 20X3 700,000 (500,000) 200,000
Therefore, in each of the three years, the total amount of the interest income (i.e. loan interest
income + net position on the swap) is $900,000.
The journal entries are as follows:
1 January 20X1
$ $
DEBIT Loan receivable 10,000,000
CREDIT Cash 10,000,000
To record the inception of the loan.

(Note. No entry is required in respect of the swap as it was acquired at no cost)
31 December 20X1
DEBIT Cash 900,000
To record the receipt of interest in respect of the loan.
DEBIT Interest rate swap 300,000

To record the fair value of the interest rate swap.
519
Financial Reporting
31 December 20X2
DEBIT Cash 800,000
DEBIT Cash 100,000

To record the cash received on net settlement of the interest rate swap.
DEBIT Other comprehensive income 100,000

To recycle into earnings amounts in OCI on account of the cash flow hedge, so that they are
matched with the relevant cash flow.

CREDIT Interest rate swap 175,000
To reduce the carrying value of the interest rate swap from its initial fair value of $300,000 to
current fair value of $125,000.
31 December 20X3
DEBIT Cash 700,000
DEBIT Cash 200,000

To record the cash received on net settlement of the interest rate swap.

To recycle into earnings amounts in OCI on account of the cash flow hedge, so that they are
matched with the relevant cash flow.

CREDIT Interest rate swap 125,000
To adjust the carrying value of the interest rate swap to current fair value.

CREDIT Loan receivable 10,000,000
To record repayment of the loan at the maturity date.
520
HKAS 39.102 8.5.3 Hedges of a net investment

Hedges of a net investment arise in the consolidated accounts where a parent company takes a
foreign currency loan in order to buy shares in a foreign subsidiary. The loan and the investment
need not be denominated in the same currency, however assuming that the currencies perform
similarly against the parent company's own currency, it should be the case that fluctuations in the
exchange rate affect the asset (the net assets of the subsidiary) and the liability (the loan) in
opposite ways, hence gains and losses are hedged.
In this type of accounting hedge, the hedging instrument is the foreign currency loan rather than a
derivative.
You may understand this type of hedge better after studying Chapter 31, Consolidation of foreign
operations, but in a simple sense, without applying hedging rules:
(a) The loan would be retranslated to the parent's own currency at the year end using the spot
exchange rate; any resultant gain or loss would be recognised in profit or loss.
(b) Prior to consolidation, the subsidiary's accounts would be translated into the parent's own
currency with any gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income.
(c) On consolidation, the gain or loss on the loan would affect consolidated profit or loss and the
loss or gain on the translation of the subsidiary's net assets would affect consolidated
reserves.
The net investment hedge ensures that the gains and losses are both recognised in other
comprehensive income and accumulated in reserves by:
 recognising the portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument that is determined to be
effective in other comprehensive income
 recognising the ineffective portion in profit or loss
Any gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is reclassified to profit or loss on the
disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation.
8.6 Exposures qualifying for hedge accounting

HKAS 39 was amended in 2008 to clarify what can be designated as a hedged risk and when an
entity may designate a portion of the cash flows of a financial instrument as a hedged item.
The risks specified are:
 interest rate risk
 foreign currency rate risk
 credit risk
 prepayment risk
The portions of the cash flows of a financial instrument that may be designated as a hedged item
are one or more of the following:
(a) The cash flows of a financial instrument for part of its time period to maturity.
(b) A percentage of the cash flows of a financial instrument.
(c) The cash flows of a financial instrument associated with a one-sided risk of that instrument.
(d) Any contractually specified cash flows of a financial instrument that are independent from the
other cash flows of that instrument.
(e) The portion of the cash flows of an interest bearing financial instrument that is equivalent to a
financial instrument with a risk-free rate.
(f) The portion of the cash flows of an interest bearing financial instrument that is equivalent to a
financial instrument with a quoted or variable inter-bank rate.
521
Financial Reporting
8.7 Recap
 Hedge accounting means designating one or more instruments so that their change in fair
value is offset by the change in fair value or cash flows of another item.
 Hedge accounting is permitted in certain circumstances, provided the hedging relationship
is clearly defined, measurable and actually effective.
 There are three types of hedge: fair value hedge; cash flow hedge; hedge of a net
investment in a foreign operation.
 The accounting treatment of a hedge depends on its type.
9 HKFRS 7: Disclosure of financial instruments

Topic highlights
HKFRS 7 specifies the disclosures required for financial instruments. In addition, HKFRS 13
disclosures are applied where financial instruments are measured at fair value. HKFRS 7 requires
qualitative and quantitative disclosures about exposure to risks arising from financial instruments
and specifies minimum disclosures about credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk.
HKFRS 7 was issued in 2005 to replace the disclosure requirements of HKAS 32. In doing so it has
revised and enhanced disclosure requirements in response to new techniques and approaches to
measuring risk management. The standard requires qualitative and quantitative disclosures
about exposure to risks arising from financial instruments, and specifies minimum disclosures
about credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk.
The HKICPA maintains that users of financial instruments need information about an entity's
exposures to risks and how those risks are managed, as this information can influence a user's
assessment of the financial position and financial performance of an entity or of the amount,
timing and uncertainty of its future cash flows.
In June 2011 HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement was issued. As a result, disclosures in relation to
financial instruments measured at fair value were relocated from HKFRS 7 to HKFRS 13.
HKFRS 7.1 9.1 Objective

The objective of HKFRS 7 is to require entities to provide disclosures in their financial statements
that enable users to evaluate:
(a) the significance of financial instruments for the entity's financial position and performance.
(b) the nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments to which the entity is
exposed during the period and at the reporting date, and how the entity manages those
risks.
The principles in HKFRS 7 complement the principles for recognising, measuring and presenting
financial assets and financial liabilities in HKAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation, HKAS 39
Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement and HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments.
HKFRS 7.6 9.2 Classes of financial instruments and levels of disclosure

When HKFRS 7 requires disclosures by class of financial instrument, an entity must group financial
instruments into classes that are appropriate to the nature of the information disclosed and that
take into account the characteristics of those financial instruments. Sufficient information should be
provided to permit reconciliation to the line items presented in the statement of financial position.
522
HKFRS 7.7-
19
9.3 Statement of financial position disclosures
The following must be disclosed in the notes to the financial statements:
(a) Carrying amount of financial assets and liabilities by HKAS 39 or HKFRS 9 category.
(b) Details of financial instruments designated as at fair value through profit or loss and financial
assets designated as at fair value through other comprehensive income.
(c) Reason for any reclassification between fair value and amortised cost (and vice versa).
(d) The carrying amount of financial assets the entity has pledged as collateral for liabilities
or contingent liabilities and the associated terms and conditions.
(e) When financial assets are impaired by credit losses and the entity records the impairment in
a separate account (e.g. an allowance account used to record individual impairments or a
similar account used to record a collective impairment of assets) rather than directly reducing
the carrying amount of the asset, it must disclose a reconciliation of changes in that
account during the period for each class of financial assets.
(f) The existence of multiple embedded derivatives, where compound instruments contain
these.
(g) Defaults and breaches.
HKFRS 7.13C The December 2011 amendment to HKFRS 7 in respect of offsetting financial assets and financial
liabilities requires an entity to disclose information about rights of offset and related arrangements.
As a minimum the following should be disclosed:
(a) The gross amounts of financial assets and financial liabilities under an enforceable master
netting agreement (i.e. an agreement whereby a single net settlement of all financial
instruments covered by the arrangement may be made) or similar;
(b) Amounts offset in accordance with the HKAS 32 criteria;
(c) Net amounts presented in the statement of financial position;
(d) Amounts subject to an enforceable master netting agreement not included in (b);
(e) The net amount after deducting (d) from (c).
HKFRS 7.20 9.4 Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
disclosures
The entity must disclose the following items of income, expense, gains or losses, either on the
face of the financial statements or in the notes:
(a) Net gains/losses by HKAS 39 or HKFRS 9 category (broken down as appropriate: for
example, interest, fair value changes, dividend income)
(b) Interest income/expense
(c) Impairment losses by class of financial asset.
HKFRS 7.21 9.5 Other disclosures

Entities must disclose in the summary of significant accounting policies the measurement basis
used in preparing the financial statements and the other accounting policies that are relevant to an
understanding of the financial statements.
523
Financial Reporting
HKFRS 7.22- 9.5.1 Hedge accounting

24
Disclosures must be made relating to hedge accounting, as follows:
(a) Description of hedge.
(b) Description of financial instruments designated as hedging instruments and their fair value
at the reporting date.
(c) The nature of the risks being hedged.
(d) For cash flow hedges, periods when the cash flows will occur and when they will affect
profit or loss.
(e) For fair value hedges, gains or losses on the hedging instrument and the hedged item.
(f) The ineffectiveness recognised in profit or loss arising from cash flow hedges and net
investments in foreign operations.
HKFRS 7.25, 9.5.2 Fair value
26,29
HKFRS 7 retains the following general requirements in relation to the disclosure of fair value for
those financial instruments measured at amortised cost:
(a) For each class of financial assets and financial liabilities an entity shall disclose the fair
value of that class of assets and liabilities in a way that permits it to be compared with its
carrying amount.
(b) In disclosing fair values, an entity shall group financial assets and financial liabilities into
classes, but shall offset them only to the extent that their carrying amounts are offset in the
It also states that disclosure of fair value is not required where:
 carrying amount is a reasonable approximation of fair value
 for investments in equity instruments that do not have a quoted market price in an active
market for an identical instrument, or derivatives linked to such equity instruments
HKFRS HKFRS 13 has additional disclosure requirements in respect of the fair value of financial
13.91,93, 95, instruments. These are discussed in more detail in chapter 19.
97
9.6 Nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments

In undertaking transactions in financial instruments, an entity may assume or transfer to another
party one or more of different types of financial risk as defined below. The disclosures required
by the standard show the extent to which an entity is exposed to these different types of risk,
relating to both recognised and unrecognised financial instruments.
Credit risk The risk that one party to a financial instrument will cause a financial loss for
the other party by failing to discharge an obligation.
Currency risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in foreign exchange rates.
Interest rate risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market interest rates.
Liquidity risk The risk that an entity will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations
associated with financial liabilities.
Loans payable Loans payable are financial liabilities, other than short-term trade payables
on normal credit terms.
524
Market risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market prices. Market risk comprises three
types of risk: currency risk, interest rate risk and other price risk.
Other price risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market prices (other than those arising from
interest rate risk or currency risk), whether those changes are caused by
factors specific to the individual financial instrument or its issuer, or factors
affecting all similar financial instruments traded in the market.
Past due A financial asset is past due when a counterparty has failed to make a
payment when contractually due.
HKFRS 7.33 9.6.1 Qualitative disclosures

For each type of risk arising from financial instruments, an entity must disclose:
(a) the exposures to risk and how they arise.
(b) its objectives, policies and processes for managing the risk and the methods used to
measure the risk.
(c) any changes in (a) or (b) from the previous period.
HKFRS 7.34- 9.6.2 Quantitative disclosures
38
For each financial instrument risk, summary quantitative data about risk exposure must be
disclosed. This should be based on the information provided internally to key management
personnel. More information should be provided if this is unrepresentative of an entity's exposure to
risk.
Information about credit risk must be disclosed by class of financial instrument:
(a) Maximum exposure at the year end without taking account of collateral held or other credit
enhancements. (This disclosure is not required where the carrying amount of financial
instruments best represents the maximum exposure to credit risk.)
(b) A description of collateral held as security and of other credit enhancements, and their
financial effect, in respect of the maximum exposure to credit risk (whether as disclosed in
(a) or represented by carrying amount).
(c) Information about the credit quality of financial assets that are neither past due nor impaired.
(d) Information about the credit quality of financial assets whose terms have been renegotiated.
(e) An analysis of the age of financial assets that are past due as at the end of the reporting
period but not impaired.
(f) An analysis of financial assets that are individually determined to be impaired as at the end
of the reporting period, including the factors the entity considered in determining that they
are impaired.
(g) Collateral and other credit enhancements obtained during the reporting period and held at
the reporting date, including the nature and carrying amount of the assets and policy for
disposing of assets not readily convertible into cash.
Example: Credit risk disclosure (1)
An entity holds equity investments in other entities. Its management asserts that the HKFRS 7
credit risk disclosures are not relevant.
Do the credit risk disclosures required by HKFRS 7 apply to an entity's holdings of equity
investments?
Solution
The definition of equity in HKAS 32 requires the issuer to have no obligation to pay cash or transfer
other assets. It follows that such equity investments are subject to price risk, not credit risk. Most of
the HKFRS 7 credit risk disclosures are not therefore relevant to investments in equity instruments.
525
Financial Reporting
However, HKFRS 7 requires entities to disclose an analysis of financial assets that are impaired.
This disclosure is relevant and should be given for impaired equity investments that are available
for sale.
Example: Credit risk disclosure (2)

HKFRS 7 defines credit risk as "the risk that one party to a financial instrument will cause a
financial loss for the other party by failing to discharge an obligation". If an entity issues a financial
guarantee, the financial loss will not result from a default by the other party of the contract (the
holder), but from a default by the third party (the debtor). Does this mean that the credit risk of
financial guarantees can be excluded from the disclosure of the maximum exposure to credit risk?
Solution
No, the credit risk of financial guarantees should be included in the disclosures, as HKFRS 7
clarifies that the definition of credit risk includes that arising from financial guarantees.
HKFRS 7.39 9.6.3 Liquidity risk

For liquidity risk entities must disclose:
 a maturity analysis of both derivative and non-derivative financial liabilities
 a description of the way risk is managed
Within the maturity analysis, any amounts repayable under a loan agreement that includes a clause
giving the lender the unconditional right to demand repayment at any time must be classified in the
earliest time bracket.
Example: Liquidity risk (1)

HKFRS 7 requires the disclosure of a maturity analysis for financial liabilities that shows the
remaining contractual maturities.
Should the following financial instruments be shown in one maturity bracket, or split across the
maturity brackets in which the cash flows occur?
(a) A derivative which has multiple cash flows
(b) A loan which has annual contractual interest payments
(c) A loan which has annual contractual interest and principal repayments
Solution
All the financial instruments should be split across the maturity brackets in which the cash flows
occur. The requirement is to disclose each of the contractual payments in the period when they are
due (including principal and interest payments). The objective of this particular disclosure is to
show the liquidity risk of the entity.
Example: Liquidity risk (2)

HKFRS 7 requires entities to disclose (a) a maturity analysis for financial liabilities that shows the
remaining contractual maturities; and (b) a description of how it manages the liquidity risk inherent
in (a).
Does this mean that a maturity analysis for financial assets based on remaining contractual
maturities, is no longer required?
526
Solution
Yes, HKFRS 7 requires a maturity analysis based on the remaining contractual maturity only for
financial liabilities. Management can choose to disclose the maturity analysis showing remaining
contractual maturity for financial assets also as one of the disclosures to comply with the
requirement in HKFRS 7. However, it is not obligatory.
In practice, an entity should disclose a maturity analysis of financial assets and financial liabilities
showing expected maturity if this is the information provided to key management personnel to
manage the business. However, a maturity analysis based on the remaining contractual maturity
for financial liabilities should be disclosed.
HKFRS 7.40- 9.6.4 Market risk: sensitivity analysis

41
An entity shall disclose a sensitivity analysis for each type of market risk to which the entity is
exposed at the reporting date, showing how profit or loss and equity would have been affected by
changes in the relevant risk variable that were reasonably possible at that date; the methods and
assumptions used in preparing the sensitivity analysis; and changes from the previous period in the
methods and assumptions used, and the reasons for such changes.
Assuming that a reasonably possible change in the relevant risk variable had occurred at the
reporting date and had been applied to the risk exposures in existence at that date:
Disclosures required in connection with market risk are:
(a) sensitivity analysis, showing the effects on profit or loss of changes in each market risk.
(b) if the sensitivity analysis reflects interdependencies between risk variables, such as interest
rates and exchange rates the method, assumptions and limitations must be disclosed.
9.6.5 Risk variables that are relevant to disclosing market risk
Market risk
Interest
rate risk Yield curve of market interest rates
Currency risk Foreign exchange rates
Other price
risk
Equity price risk Prices of equity instruments
Commodity price risk Market prices of commodities
Prepayment risk
Residual value risk
9.7 Capital disclosures

Certain disclosures about capital are required. An entity's capital does not relate solely to financial
instruments, but has more general relevance. Accordingly, those disclosures are included in
HKAS 1, rather than in HKFRS 7.
527
Financial Reporting
The final issue of HKFRS 9 in 2014 was the culmination of a long-standing project carried out by
the IASB and FASB. HKFRS 9 has been issued gradually over a period of 5 years:
 the 2009 standard introduced guidance on the classification and measurement of financial
assets.
 the 2010 standard added guidance on the classification and measurement of financial
liabilities and embedded derivatives.
 the 2013 standard introduced requirements on hedge accounting
 the 2014 standard added a final chapter on credit losses (impairment) together with
amended classification and measurement guidance relating to financial assets.
For the purposes of Module A, the 2013 and 2014 issues of the standard are not fully examinable.
These are dealt with as current developments, and more detail is provided below.
HKFRS 10.1 HKFRS 9: Amended classification and measurement rules

9.4.1.1-4.1.4
The 2014 issue of HKFRS 9 added a classification category for financial assets so that financial
assets must be classified as measured at:
 amortised cost
 fair value through other comprehensive income (FVTOCI)
 fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL).
In the previous issue of HKFRS 9, although an investment in an equity instrument could be
designated as measured at FVTOCI, there was no option for a debt instrument to be measured in
this way.
In line with the previous issue of HKFRS 9, classification is made on the basis of both:
(a) the entity's business model for managing the financial assets, and
(b) the contractual cash flow characteristics of the financial asset.
The previous guidance as regards classifying a financial asset as measured at amortised cost
remains. This classification applies where:
(a) the objective of the business model within which the asset is held is to hold assets in order to
collect contractual cash flows, and
New guidance as regards classifying a financial asset as measured at fair value through other
comprehensive income is added. This applies where:
(a) the financial asset is held within a business model whose objective is achieved both by
collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets, and
As a result of this new guidance, debt instruments meeting the criteria are classified as fair value
through other comprehensive income.
Where financial assets meet the amortised cost or FVTOCI criteria they must be classified as such
unless an irrevocable election is made at initial recognition to designate them as measured at
FVTPL in order to eliminate or significantly reduce an accounting mismatch.
Financial assets that do not meet these criteria are measured at fair value through profit or loss.
528
10.1.1 Decision tree

The following decision tree will help with the classification of financial assets:
Do the contractual terms of the financial No FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT

asset give rise on specified dates to OR LOSS
cash flows that are solely payments of (FVTPL) unless equity instrument
principal and interest on the principal designated as FAIR VALUE
outstanding? THROUGH OTHER
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
(FVTOCI)
Yes No
Is the objective of the business model No Is the objective of the business

within which the asset is held only to model within which the asset is held
hold assets in order to collect is to
contractual cash flows? (i) collect contractual cash flows
and
(ii) sell financial assets.
Yes Yes
AMORTISED COST FAIR VALUE THROUGH OTHER

COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
(FVTOCI)
Note that Appendix B to HKFRS 9 provides examples of:

 financial instruments with contractual cash flows that are solely payments of principal and
interest on the principal outstanding
 business models with the objective of collecting contractual cash flows from financial assets
 business models with the objective of collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial
assets.
HKFRS 10.1.2 Application of HKFRS 9 classification criteria
9.4.1.4-4.1.5
An application of the HKFRS 9 rules means that:
 An equity investment must be measured at fair value through profit or loss unless an
irrevocable election has been made at initial recognition to measure it at fair value through
 All derivatives are measured at fair value.
 A debt instrument may be classified as measured at either amortised cost or fair value
depending on whether it meets the criteria above. Even where the criteria are met at initial
recognition, a debt instrument may be classified as measured at fair value through profit or
loss if doing so eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition
inconsistency (sometimes referred to as an 'accounting mismatch') that would otherwise
arise from measuring assets or liabilities or recognising the gains and losses on them on
different bases.
529
Financial Reporting
10.1.3 Summary of measurement rules

HKFRS
9.5.2.1-5.2.3 HKFRS 9 measurement rules are applied to the new categories of financial asset as follows:
Amortised cost FVTOCI FVTOCI FVTPL

(Debt) (Equity)
Interest /dividend Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss
revenue
Expected credit Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss
losses (see below)
Foreign exchange Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss
gains / losses
Other gains / losses - OCI OCI Profit or loss
on remeasurement
Gain/loss on Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss but Profit or loss
derecognition with amounts OCI is not
previously reclassified.
recognised in
OCI reclassified
to profit or loss
Classifying financial assets in accordance with HKFRS 9 should result in the provision of more
useful information in the financial statements. For example:
 where a debt instrument is held in the long term to collect contractual cash flows, the fair
value of that instrument is of limited relevance to users.
 where the purpose of holding an instrument is to collect income but also to sell the asset, the
fair value gives an indication of selling price and so becomes more relevant.
Example:
On 1 July 20X1 Booker Williams (‘BW”) acquired $40 million 5% loan stock at a cost of $38 million.
Further information is as follows:
 interest is payable annually in arrears
 the loan stock will be redeemed at a 5% premium on 30 June 20X4
 the effective interest rate attached to the loan stock is 8.49%
 the fair value of the loan stock is $38.8 million at 30 June 20X2 and $40.8 million at 30 June
20X3.
 The loan stock is held by BW within a business model whose objective is achieved both by
collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets.
Required
(a) Calculate amounts to be recognised in the financial statements of BW for the years ended 30
June 20X2 and X3
(b) State the relevant journal entries in the year ended 30 June 20X2
(c) State the relevant journal entries to recognise the disposal of the loan stock on 1 July 20X3
for $41 million
Solution
(a) The loan stock is classified as FVTOCI and initially measured at fair value of $38 million.
530
At amortised cost the loan stock would be measured as:

y/e b/f Interest at Cash flow c/f
8.49%  c/f
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
20X2 38,000 3,226 (2,000) 39,226
20X3 39,226 3,330 (2,000) 40,556
20X4 40,556 3,443 (44,000) -
(20X4 is shown for completeness)
Applying the same interest and cash flows, but remeasuring the asset to fair value at each
period end:
y/e b/f Interest at Cash flow c/f Fair value c/f
8.49%  change
c/f
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
20X2 38,000 3,226 (2,000) 39,226 (426) 38,800
20X3 38,800 3,330 (2,000) 40,130 670 40,800
(b) Journal entries in respect of the loan stock in 20X2 are as follows:
DEBIT Financial asset at FVTOCI $38,000,000
To recognise the loan stock at fair value (consideration)
DEBIT Financial asset at FVTOCI $3,226,000
CREDIT Finance income $3,226,000
To recognise finance income for the year
CREDIT Financial asset at FVTOCI $2,000,000
To recognise the receipt of 5% interest
CREDIT Financial asset at FVTOCI $426,000
To remeasure the financial asset to fair value.
(c)
(670,000 – 426,000)
CREDIT Financial asset at FVTOCI $40,800,000
CREDIT Gain on disposal (profit or loss) $444,000
To derecognise the loan stock, recognise the gain on disposal and reclassify cumulative
amounts recognised in other comprehensive income to profit or loss.
10.2 HKFRS 9: Hedge accounting

New requirements on hedge accounting were incorporated into HKFRS 9 in 2013. The
requirements replace the 'rule-based' requirements for hedge accounting currently in HKAS 39,
and align the accounting more closely with risk management activities of an entity.
531
Financial Reporting
The new model for hedge accounting differs from that in HKAS 39 in the following key areas:
 Eligibility of hedging instruments
 Eligibility of hedged items
 Qualifying criteria for applying hedge accounting
 Rebalancing
 Discontinuation of hedging relationships
 Accounting for the time value component of options and forward contracts
There are also limited changes in the accounting for hedge relationships.
10.2.1 Eligibility of hedging instruments
HKAS 39 permits entities to designate derivative instruments as hedging instruments; in addition
non-derivative financial instruments may be hedging instruments for hedges of foreign currency
risk.
Under HKFRS 9 eligibility of a financial instrument as a hedging instrument depends on whether
the instrument is measured at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) rather than whether it is a
derivative instrument. Therefore non-derivative instruments may be used as a hedging instrument
for all types of risks, not only foreign currency risks, provided they are measured at FVTPL.
10.2.2 Eligibility of hedged items
HKAS 39 permits entities to designate recognised assets or liabilities, firm commitments, highly
probable forecast transactions, and net investments in foreign operations as hedged items. In
addition, for financial assets and financial liabilities, entities may designate certain risk components
of the asset or liability (e.g. interest-rate risk, foreign currency risk) as the hedged item, provided
that the risk is separately identifiable and reliably measurable.
HKFRS 9 also allows entities to designate risk components of non-financial assets and liabilities as
hedged items provided that the risk component is separately identifiable and can be reliably
measured.
In addition the new standard allows certain group exposures to be designated as a hedged item.
10.2.3 Qualifying criteria for applying hedge accounting
The HKAS 39 80%-125% hedge effectiveness test of whether a hedging relationship qualifies for
hedge accounting has been removed by HKFRS 9 and replaced with a principles-based approach.
To qualify for hedge accounting under HKFRS 9, the following criteria must all apply:
(a) An economic relationship must exist between the hedged item and the hedging instrument,
i.e. the hedging instrument and the hedged item must be expected to have offsetting
changes in fair value;
(b) The effect of credit risk must not dominate the fair value changes, i.e. the fair value changes
due to credit risk are not a significant driver of the fair value changes of either the hedging
instrument or the hedged item; and
(c) The hedge ratio of the hedging relationship (quantity of hedging instrument vs quantity of
hedged item) must be the same as that resulting from the quantity of the hedged item that
the entity actually hedges and the quantity of the hedging instrument that the entity actually
uses to hedge that quantity of hedged item.
This allows genuine hedging relationships to be accounted for as such whereas the HKAS 39 rules
sometimes prevented management from accounting for an actual hedging transaction as a hedge.
10.2.4 Rebalancing
Rebalancing is a new concept introduced in HKFRS 9. It refers to adjustments (where there is
already a hedging relationship) to the designated quantities of the hedged item or the hedging
instrument for the purpose of maintaining a hedge ratio that complies with the hedge.
532
The standard requires rebalancing to be undertaken if the risk management objective remains the
same, but the hedge effectiveness requirements are no longer met. Where the risk management
objective for a hedging relationship has changed, rebalancing does not apply and the hedging
relationship must be discontinued.
10.2.5 Discontinuation of hedging relationships
Unlike under HKAS 39, under the new standard, an entity is not allowed to discontinue hedge
accounting where the hedging relationship still meets the risk management objective and
continues to meet all other qualifying criteria.
10.2.6 Accounting for the time value component of options and forward
contracts
Under HKAS 39 the part of an option that reflects time value and the forward element of a forward
contract are treated as derivatives held for trading purposes so creating volatility in profit or loss.
Under HKFRS 9, the time value component of an option is treated as a cost of hedging, and
presented in other comprehensive income. This is intended to decrease inappropriate volatility in
profit or loss and it should be more consistent with risk management practices.
The new standard also allows an entity to elect for the forward element of a forward contract either
in the same way as HKAS 39 (in profit or loss) or in a similar way to the part of an option that
reflects time value
10.2.7 Accounting for hedge relationships
IFRS 9/HKFRS 9 retains the three types of hedge recognised in HKAS 39: fair value hedges, cash
flow hedges and hedges of a net investment.
The accounting for these has generally not changed, with the following exceptions:
 In a fair value hedge, if the hedged item is an investment in an equity instrument held at fair
value through other comprehensive income, the gains and losses on both the hedged
investment and the hedging instrument are recognised in other comprehensive income. This
ensures that hedges of investments of equity instruments held at fair value through other
comprehensive income can be accounted for as hedges.
 In a cash flow hedge of a forecast transaction, if a non-financial asset or liability is
recognised, an entity must remove the effective portion of the hedge recognised in other
comprehensive income and include it in the initial cost or carrying amount of the non-
financial item. The option which existed under HKAS 39 to reclassify the effective portion to
profit or loss when the hedged item affects earnings is removed.
HKFRS 9. 10.3 HKFRS 9: Credit losses (impairment)

5.5.1 – 5.5.11
The impairment requirements of HKFRS 9 are applied to:
 debt instruments meausured at amortised cost or FVTOCI
 lease receivables (HKAS 17)
 contract assets (HKFRS 15)
 loan commitments within the scope of HKFRS 9 and not measured at FVTPL
 financial guarantee commitments not measured at FVTPL.
Debt and equity instruments measured at FVTPL are not within the scope of HKFRS 9 credit loss
guidance because they are measured at fair value with gains and losses recognised in profit or loss
in the same way as an impairment loss.
Equity instruments measured at FVTOCI are also scoped out of the guidance because changes in
fair value, including those arising as a result of impairment are recognised in other comprehensive
income.
533
Financial Reporting
10.3.1 Approach to impairment

HKAS 39 uses an 'incurred loss' model for the impairment of financial assets. This model assumes
that all loans will be repaid until evidence to the contrary exists, that is until the occurrence of an
event that triggers an impairment indicator. Only at this point is the impaired loan written down to a
lower value.
HKFRS 9 differs from this in that an ‘expected loss’ model is applied. There are three approaches
to impairment:
1. A general approach
2. A simplified approach (relevant to trade receivables)
3. A purchased (or originated) credit impaired approach, which is applicable where a financial
asset is credit impaired when initially recognised.
10.3.2 General approach
HKFRS
9.5.5.1-5.5.8 Under the general approach:
At initial recognition Recognise 12 month expected
credit losses
After initial recognition, a three stage approach is taken:
Stage 1 Recognise 12 month expected
credit losses
Credit risk has not increased
significantly since initial
recognition
Stage 2 Recognise lifetime expected

credit losses
Credit risk has increased
significantly since initial Interest calculated on gross
recognition amount of asset
Stage 3 Recognise lifetime expected

credit losses
There is objective evidence of
impairment at the reporting Interest calculated on net
date amount of asset
HKFRS Credit losses

9.B5.5.28-
5.5.29 Twelve month credit losses are the lifetime credit losses expected to arise from a default that
occurs within the next 12 months.
Lifetime credit losses are the expected credit losses that would arise is a default occurred at any
time in the term of a financial asset.
The measurement of credit losses is based on the present value of cash shortfalls calculated as:
Present value of principal and interest cash flows that are contractually due to an X
entity
Present value of cash flows an entity expects to receive (X)
Credit losses X
534
HKFRS Significantly increased credit risk (stage 1 to stage 2)

9.B5.5.15-
5.5.21 Stage 2 is reached when there is a significant increase in credit risk (ie the risk a borrower will
default); the Application Guidance to HKFRS 9 provides information that should be considered
when assessing credit risk, for example a downgrade in the borrower’s credit rating or adverse
changes in business, financial or economic conditions.
In addition there is a rebuttable presumption that the credit risk of a financial asset has increased
significantly when contractual payments are more than 30 days past due.
The movement from stage 1 to stage 2 is not irreversible; where credit losses have previously been
measured at a lifetime amount, at a subsequent reporting date they are measured at a 12 month
amount if a significant increase in credit risk is no longer evident.
Evidence of impairment (stage 2 to stage 3)
HKFRS 9 provides examples of evidence of impairment, including the significant financial difficulty
of the borrower and breach of contract.
Interest
For financial assets at stages 1 and 2, interest is calculated on the gross carrying amount of the
financial asset (before credit losses are taken into account).
For financial assets at stage 3 interest is calculated on the financial asset’s carrying amount net of
credit losses.
Example
On 1 January 20X4 Lord Robinson (‘LR’) acquired an investment in $600,000 8% loan stock. The
investment is measured at amortised cost.
At 1 January 20X4 there is a 6% probability that the borrower will default on the loan during 20X4
resulting in a 100% loss.
At 31 December 20X4 there is 1% probability that the borrower will default on the loan before 31
December 20X5 resulting in a 100% loss.
At 31 December 20X5 the borrower is expected to breach its covenants as a result of cash flow
problems. There is a 40% probability of the loan defaulting over the remainder of its term.
At 31 December 20X6 the borrower breached its covenants and there is a 70% probability of
default over the remainder of the loan term.
Required
What impairment loss and interest revenue are recognised at initial recognition and in each of the
years ended 31 December 20X4, 20X5 and 20X6?
Solution
Impairment allowance Interest revenue
1 January 20X4 6%  $600,000 = $36,000 -
31 December 20X4 1%  $600,000 = $6,000 $600,000  8% = $48,000
(stage 1)
31 December 20X5 40%  $600,000 = $240,000 $600,000  8% = $48,000
(stage 2)
31 December 20X6 70%  $600,000 = $420,000 ($600,000 – $420,000)  8% =
$14,400
(stage 3)
535
Financial Reporting
10.3.3 Simplified approach – trade and lease receivables

HKFRS
9.5.5.15&B.5. For trade receivables and contract assets that do not have an HKFRS 15 financing element, the
5.35 loss allowance is measured as lifetime expected credit losses from initial recognition.
This is the same as 12 month credit losses as the maturity of these assets is generally 12 months
or less.
For other trade receivables and for lease receivables, the entity can choose (as a separate
accounting policy for trade receivables and for lease receivables) to either:
 apply the 3 Stage general approach described in section 10.3.2 ,or
 recognise an allowance for lifetime expected credit losses from initial recognition.
A provision matrix may be used to calculate lifetime credit losses for trade receivables/contract
assets. This involves grouping trade receivables (or contract assets) based on customer bases or
groupings with different historical loss patterns (eg region, type of customer, product type).
Historical provision rates are then applied, although these may be adjusted to reflect relevant
current information.
Example:
Expected default Gross carrying Credit loss
rate amount allowance
Current 0.5% $560,000 $2,800
1 – 30 days past due 1.2% $490,000 $5,880
31 – 60 days past due 3.4% $250,000 $8,500
61 – 90 days past due 4% $90,000 $3,600
Over 90 days past due 10.8% $55,000 $5,940
$26,720
HKFRS 10.3.4 Purchased credit-impaired approach

9.5.5.13
A financial asset is described as ‘credit-impaired’ when one or more events that have a negative
effect on future expected cash flows have already occurred.
Where financial assets are already credit-impaired when they are purchased/originated, the
following approach is taken:
 Purchased credit-impaired financial assets are initially measured at the transaction price
without an allowance for expected contractual cash shortfalls that are implicit in the purchase
price.
 Lifetime credit losses are included in the estimated cash flows for the purposes of calculating
the effective interest rate.
 Interest revenue is calculated on the net carrying amount at the credit-adjusted effective
interest rate.
 Expected credit losses are discounted using the credit adjusted effective interest rate.
 Subsequent changes from the initial expected credit losses are recognised immediately in
profit or loss.
536
10.3.5 Recognition of credit losses

HKFRS 9.
5.5.8 &B8E Impairment losses are recognised in profit or loss with a corresponding credit entry as follows:
Financial assets at amortised cost An allowance account, which is offset against
the carrying amount of the financial asset so
that a net position is presented in the statement
of financial posiiton.
Financial assets at FVTOCI An ‘accumulated impairment amount’ in other
The carrying amount remains at fair value in the
Loan commitments and financial guarantee A provision account, which is presented as a
contracts separate liability
537
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 32 Presentation of Financial

Instruments
Financial assets Financial liabilities Equity
Cash Contractual obligation to

Any contract that evidences
Equity instrument of another deliver cash/another financial
a residual interest in the
entity asset
assets of an entity after
Contractual right to receive Contractual obligation to
deducting all of its liabilities
cash/a financial asset exchange financial
Contractual right to exchange instruments under
financial instruments under unfavourable conditions
favourable conditions Certain contracts settled by
Certain contracts settled by delivery of entity's own equity
receipt of entity's own equity instruments
instruments.
Puttable financial instruments may be classified as either liability

or equity depending on the conditions.
Financial instruments with

contingent settlement
provisions are financial
liabilities unless possibility of
settlement is remote.
Financial
Text instruments with settlement options are either financial assets
or financial liabilities
Compound financial instruments are split into a debt and equity

component.
Rights
issues/options/warrants are
equity where the entity offers
them pro rata to all existing
owners.
Financial assets and liabilities are only offset where an entity:

has a legally enforceable right of set off and
intends to settle on a net basis or realise the asset and liability
simultaneously.
538
HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments
Financial assets Financial liabilities

Classified as measured at either: Classified as measured at either:
Amortised cost Fair value Amortised cost FV through profit or

If: loss
aim is to hold assets If:
to collect contractual held for trading or
cash flows and designated as FV
cash flows of through profit or
principal and interest loss on initial
arise on specified recognition.
dates.
Equity instruments Derivatives

Derivatives
May be reclassified if an entity changes its business Reclassification is not allowed.

model for managing financial assets.
Initially measured at transaction price/fair value. Initially measured at transaction price/fair value.
Transaction costs are added for assets measured at Transaction costs are deducted for liabilities
amortised cost. measured at amortised cost.
Interest on amortisation Remeasured annually Interest on amortisation Remeasured annually

recognised in profit or with changes in fair recognised in profit or with changes in fair
loss. value recognised in loss. value recognised in
Tested for impairment profit or loss unless profit or loss. If
when indications exist, asset is equity not held designated as
with any loss for trading (OCI). measured at FV then
recognised in profit or gains or losses due to
loss. credit risk are
recognised in OCI.
Derecognise when: Derecognise when the obligation specified in the

contractual rights to cash flows of asset contract is discharged or cancelled or expires.
expire, or Substantial modification of the terms of a financial
risks and rewards of ownership transferred liability is an extinguishment.
Embedded derivatives
Derivatives embedded within host contracts
such as leases or a debt instrument.
If host contract is a financial asset, HKFRS 9 rules If host contract is not a financial asset, split derivative
are applied to the whole hybrid contract. and host contract and account separately.
539
Financial Reporting
HKAS 39 Hedging
Conditions for hedge accounting:

1 Hedge is formally documented
2 Hedge is expected to be highly effective (80% – 125%)
3 Forecast transaction is highly probable (cash flow
hedges)
4 Effectiveness of hedge can be measured reliably
assessment of hedge carried out on ongoing basis
and effective during period.
Fair value hedge Cash flow hedge Net investment hedge
Hedged item (an asset or liability) is Hedged item is a future cash flow. Hedged item is the investment in a
remeasured to fair value at the period foreign subsidiary within consolidated
end and the gain or loss recognised in Hedging instrument (derivative) is accounts.
profit or loss. remeasured to fair value and the
effective gain or loss is recognised in Hedging instrument is the loan taken to
Hedging instrument (derivative) is also OCI. fund the acquisition of the subsidiary.
remeasured to fair value and the gain
or loss recognised in profit or loss. This is reclassified to profit or loss Gains and losses on both are matched
when the effect of the future cash flow in other comprehensive income.
is recognised in profit or loss.
HKFRS 7 Disclosure of Financial Instruments
Significance of financial instruments on Nature and extent of risks arising from financial
financial position and performance instruments and their management
Statement of financial position disclosures Qualitative and quantitative disclosure for:

Statement of comprehensive income credit risk
disclosures currency risk
Hedge accounting interest rate risk
Fair value of financial instruments at liquidity risk
amortised cost loans payable
market risk
other price risk
past due (overdue asset)
540
Answer 1
Refer to the definitions of financial assets and liabilities given in section 1.2:
(a) Physical assets: control of these creates an opportunity to generate an inflow of cash or
other assets, but it does not give rise to a present right to receive cash or other financial
assets.
(b) Prepaid expenses, etc.: the future economic benefit is the receipt of goods/services rather
than the right to receive cash or other financial assets.
Answer 2
Liability. The preference shares require regular distributions to the holders but more importantly
have the debt characteristic of being redeemable. Therefore, according to HKAS 32 Financial
Instruments: Presentation they must be classified as liability.
Answer 3
Note. The method to use here is to find the present value of the principal value of the bond, $2m
(100,000  $20) and the interest payments of $120,000 annually (6%  $2m) at the market rate for
non-convertible bonds of 8%, using the discount factor tables. The difference between this total
and the principal amount of $2m is the equity element.
$
Present value of principal $2m  0.681 1,362,000
Present value of interest $120,000  3.993 479,160
Liability value 1,841,160
Principal amount 2,000,000
Equity element 158,840
Answer 4
(a) ABC should derecognise the asset as its option to repurchase is at the prevailing market
value.
(b) DEF should not derecognise the asset as it has retained substantially all the risks and
rewards of ownership. The stock should be retained in its books even though legal title is
temporarily transferred.
(c) XYZ has received 90% of its transferred receivables in cash, but whether it can retain this
amount permanently is dependent on the performance of the factor in recovering all of the
receivables. XYZ may have to repay some of it and therefore retains the risks and rewards of
100% of the receivables amount. The receivables should not be derecognised. The cash
received should be treated as a loan.
The 10% of the receivables that XYZ will never receive in cash should be treated as interest
over the six-month period; it should be recognised as an expense in profit or loss and
increase the carrying amount of the loan.
At the end of the six months, the receivables should be derecognised by netting them
against the amount of the loan that does not need to be repaid to the factor. The amount
remaining is bad debts which should be recognised as an expense in profit or loss.
541
Financial Reporting
Answer 5
(a) Amortised cost (b) FV through P/L
20X1 20X2 20X1 20X2
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Profit or loss
Interest income (W1)/(W2) 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,387
Gain/(loss) due to change in
FV (W2) – – (187) –
1,200 1,200 1,013 1,387
Statement of financial
position
Financial asset (W1)/(W2) 20,000 – 19,813 –
WORKINGS
1 Amortised cost
$'000
Cash – 1.1.20X1 20,000
Effective interest at 6% (same as nominal as no discount on 1,200
issue/premium on redemption)
Coupon received (nominal interest 6%  20m) (1,200)
At 31.12.20X1 20,000
Effective interest at 6% 1,200
Coupon and capital received ((6%  20m) + 20m) (21,200)
At 31.12.20X2 –
2 Fair value
$'000
Cash 20,000
Effective interest (as above) 1,200
Coupon received (as above) (1,200)
Fair value loss (balancing figure) (187)
At 31.12.20X1 (W3) 19,813
Interest at 7% (7%  19,813) 1,387
Coupon and capital received ((6%  20m) + 20m) (21,200)
At 31.12.20X2 –
3 Fair value at 31.12.20X1
$'000
Interest and capital due on 31.12.20X2 at new market rate 19,813
(21.2m/1.07)
Answer 6
D $
Issue costs 30,000
Interest $1,000,000  5%  7 350,000
Premium on redemption 260,000
Total finance cost 640,000
542
Answer 7
The bond is a "deep discount" bond and is a financial liability of Grumble Co.. It is measured at
amortised cost. Although there is no interest as such, the difference between the initial cost of the
bond and the price at which it will be redeemed is a finance cost. This must be allocated over the
term of the bond at a constant rate on the carrying amount.
To calculate amortised cost we need to calculate the effective interest rate of the bond:
1,000,000
= 1.191 over three years
839,619
1/3
To calculate an annual rate, we take the cube root, (1.191) = 1.06, so the annual interest rate is
6%
The charge to the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is $50,377
($839,619  6%)
The balance outstanding at 31 December 20X2 is $889,996 ($839,619 + $50,377)
Answer 8
The equity investment is classified as available-for-sale. It does not meet the criteria to be
classified as any other type of financial asset:
 RTC intends to hold it in the long term and so it is not held for trading and therefore is not
classified as at fair value through profit or loss.
 Payments are not fixed or determinable (a dividend may be received but this is not
guaranteed) and so the investment is neither held-to-maturity nor loans and receivables.
The investment is initially measured at fair value (cost) plus transaction costs:
DEBIT Available-for-sale financial asset $13,500,000
To record the acquisition of the equity investment and related transaction costs
Subsequently at the year-end, the investment is re-measured to fair value:
DEBIT Available-for-sale financial asset $1,100,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income $1,100,000
To re-measure the equity investment to fair value.
Answer 9
The financial asset is classified as held-to-maturity since it has fixed payments and fixed maturity
and MMC has the positive intention and ability to hold it to maturity. (Note that it cannot be
classified as loans and receivables as it is quoted.)
MMC will receive interest of $590,000 (12.5m  4.72%) each year and $12.5 million when the
instrument matures.
MMC must allocate the discount of $2.5 million and the interest receivable over the five year term at a
constant rate on the carrying amount of the debt. To do this, it must apply the effective interest rate of
10%.
543
Financial Reporting
The following table shows the allocation over the years.

Year Amortised cost at Profit or loss: Interest received Amortised cost at
beginning of year Interest income for during year (cash end of year
year (@10%) inflow)
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
20X1 10,000 1,000 (590) 10,410
20X2 10,410 1,040 (590) 10,860
20X3 10,860 1,090 (590) 11,360
20X4 11,360 1,136 (590) 11,906
20X5 11,906 1,184 (12,500 + 590) –
Each year the carrying amount of the financial asset is increased by the interest income for the
year and reduced by the interest actually received during the year.
Answer 10
A financial asset or group of assets is impaired when its recoverable amount is less than its
carrying amount. Possible indications would be:
(a) a trade receivable balance where it is now learnt that the credit customer is in financial
difficulties
(b) a borrower not paying an interest payment on time
(c) an investment in shares where the underlying company has filed for bankruptcy protection
544
Exam practice
Sonna Inc. 30 minutes

(a) On 1 January 20X1, Sonna Inc. (SC) issued HK$2,000 million of three-year Hong Kong
Interbank Borrowing Rate (HIBOR) plus 180 basis points variable rate bond at par value.
Interest is payable annually. On the same date, SC entered into an interest rate swap with a
bank by paying 2 per cent fixed interest amount and receiving HIBOR plus 180 basis points
for three-year and exchange at the dates of interest payment dates. SC measures the bond
at amortised cost.
Required:
(i) Explain the difference between the fair value interest rate risk and the cash flow
interest rate risk in the context of a bank loan. (2 marks)
(ii) Explain what a hedged item and hedging instrument are and discuss how hedge
accounting affects the accounting treatment of a hedging instrument in the financial
statements under cash flow hedges. (6 marks)
(iii) Assuming hedge accounting is not adopted, explain the accounting treatment for the
bond and interest rate swap if the market interest rate is increased by 0.5% on 30
September 20X1, the current year end date (no quantification of the effect is required).
(5 marks)
(b) On 1 August 20X1, SC entered into a non-cancellable purchase order to acquire equipment
from Monta Corporation, a Japanese entity, at Yen 300 million. Payment is made upon
delivery of the equipment to Hong Kong on 31 December 20X1. On 30 September 20X1,
SC entered into a forward contract to exchange Yen 300 million at a pre-determined
exchange rate between the Yen and Hong Kong dollar on 31 December 20X1. The
functional currency of SC is the Hong Kong dollar.
Required
Discuss the accounting implications for the purchase contract and forward contract if fair
value hedge accounting is adopted. (4 marks)
(Total = 17 marks)
Good product limited 29 minutes

Good Product Limited (GPL), a Bermuda company listed on the Hong Kong Stock Exchange, has
issued a Hong Kong Dollar convertible bond (CB) with a principal amount of HK$500 million on 1
July 20X3. GPL adopts 31 December as its financial year-end. The coupon interest is 3% per
annum and payable annually in arrears. The maturity of the CB is 30 June 20X9. The holders are
entitled to redeem at par together with any accrued interest upon maturity. The CB holders are
entitled to convert the CB into 100 million ordinary shares of HK$1 each of GPL on or before
maturity.
On 1 October 20X3, certain holders exercised their options to convert into shares in GPL for a
principal amount of HK$50 million.
The prevailing market interest rate of a similar type of instrument without a conversion option is
6.3%. The functional currency and presentation currency of GPL is Renminbi (RMB) and HK dollar
(HK$) respectively.
On 1 July 20X3, the fair value of the conversion option was HK$80 million and the fair value of the
liability component was HK$420 million. On 1 October 20X3, the fair value of the conversion option
545
Financial Reporting
was HK$70 million and the fair value of the liability component was HK$430 million. On 31
December 20X3, the fair value of the conversion option was HK$100 million and the fair value of
the liability component was HK$420 million.
For a compound instrument issued by GPL, GPL adopts an accounting policy to account for the
debt component at amortised cost and the conversion option, being an equity component is not
remeasured. For a hybrid instrument issued by GPL, GPL adopts an accounting policy to account
for the debt component at amortised cost and the conversion / early redemptions option, being a
derivative component, at fair value through profit or loss.
Required
(a) Discuss the accounting implications and prepare the journal entries with detailed calculations
for the issue of CB on 1 July 20X3. (5 marks)
(b) Prepare the journal entries with detailed calculations for the partial conversion of CB on 1
October 20X3. (5 marks)
(c) Assume there had not been any conversion in part (b), prepare the journal entries with
detailed calculations for the CB as at 31 December 20X3 and discuss the classification of
current / non-current of the CB in the statement of financial position. (6 marks)
(Note: Ignore any tax effect)
(Total = 16 marks)
546
chapter 19
Fair value measurement
Topic list
1 HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement

1.1 Scope
1.2 Definition of fair value
2 Measurement approach
2.1 The asset or liability
2.2 The highest and best use
2.3 Principal or most advantageous market
2.4 Valuation techniques
3 Application of HKFRS 13 to financial instruments
3.1 Financial assets
3.2 Liabilities and own equity instruments
4 Disclosure
Learning focus
HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement provides guidance on how fair value should be
determined when another standard requires an item to be measured at fair value.
547
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
LO3.17 Hedge accounting 2
3.17.02 Account for fair value hedges, cash flow hedges and hedges for net
investment
Prepare the financial statements for an individual entity in accordance
with Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards and statutory reporting
requirements
LO4.01 Primary financial statement preparation 3
4.01.01 Prepare the statement of financial position, the statement of profit or
loss and other comprehensive income, the statement of changes in
equity and the statement of cash flows of an entity in accordance
with Hong Kong accounting standards
Prepare the financial statements for a group in accordance with Hong
Kong Financial Reporting Standards and statutory reporting
requirements
LO4.06 Business combinations 3
4.06.05 Explain the recognition principle and measurement basis of
identifiable assets and liabilities and the exception
4.06.12 Explain and account for measurement period adjustments
LO4.07 Investments in associates 3
4.07.03 Explain the reasons for and impact of equity accounting, including
notional purchase price allocation on initial acquisition, fair value
adjustments, upstream and downstream transactions, and uniform
accounting policies
548
19: Fair value measurement | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement

Topic highlights
HKFRS 13 is applicable where other standards require or permit an item to be measured at
fair value.
The IASB and American standard-setter, FASB, added a project on fair value measurement to their
agenda in 2005 with the aim of developing a single source of guidance for all fair measurements
required or permitted by IFRS. Previously individual standards had included requirements on
determining and disclosing fair value. However as new standards were developed these
requirements became dispersed and inconsistent. Furthermore, whilst some standards provided
extensive fair value guidance, others contained very limited guidance. The effect of this was
diversity in practice, so resulting in reduced comparability among different entities’ financial
statements.
The fair value project was completed in 2011 when IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement was issued;
this was subsequently adopted by HKICPA as HKFRS 13. The standard defines fair value and
provides a single framework for its measurement. It also provides requirements for the disclosure
of items measured at fair value in the financial statements and those items not measured at fair
value but for which fair value must be disclosed. On the issue of HKFRS 13, fair value
measurement and disclosure guidance was deleted from a number of existing standards.
1.1 Scope
HKFRS 13.5-
7 HKFRS 13 applies where another standard either requires or permits fair value measurement and /
or disclosures about fair value measurement. It also applies where a standard requires
measurement at modified fair value, eg fair value less costs to sell. The standard applies to both
initial and subsequent measurement.
HKFRS 13 does not apply to the following:
(a) the measurement and disclosure requirements do not apply to:
 share-based payment transactions (HKFRS 2)
 leasing transactions (HKAS 17)
 measurements that have similarities to fair value but are not fair value eg net
realisable value (HKAS 2) and value in use (HKAS 36).
(b) the disclosure requirements do not apply to:
 defined benefit plan assets measured at fair value (HKAS 19)
 retirement benefit plan investments measured at fair value (HKAS 26)
 assets for which recoverable amount is fair value (HKAS 36)
1.2 Definition of fair value
Key terms
Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a
liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.
Orderly transaction is a transaction that assumes exposure to the market for a period before the
HKFRS 13 measurement date to allow for marketing activities that are usual and customary for transactions
Appendix A
involving such assets or liabilities; it is not a forced transaction (eg a forced liquidation or distress
sale).
549
Financial Reporting
Market participants are buyers and sellers in the principal (or most advantageous) market for the
asset or liability that have all of the following characteristics:
(a) they are independent of each other ie they are not related parties as defined in HKAS 24,
although the price in a related party transaction may be used as an input to a fair value
measurement if the entity has evidence that the transaction was entered into at market
terms.
(b) they are knowledgeable, having a reasonable understanding about the asset or liability and
the transaction using all available information, including information that might be obtained
through due diligence efforts that are usual and customary.
(c) they are able to enter into a transaction for the asset or liability.
(d) they are willing to enter into a transaction for the asset or liability, ie they are motivated but
not forced or otherwise compelled to do so.
(HKFRS 13)
This definition of fair value is referred to as an ‘exit price’, in other words the determination of fair
value assumes that a party owns an asset (or has incurred a liability) and wishes to transfer it
rather than assuming that a party wants to acquire the asset or liability.
HKFRS Entities do not necessarily sell assets at the prices paid to acquire them or transfer liabilities at the
13.57-60 prices received to assume them. Where an HKFRS requires that an item is initially measured at fair
value, the difference between the two values may therefore lead to the recognition of a day one
gain or loss. Such gains or losses may commonly be recognised for assets or liabilities within the
scope of:
 HKFRS 3 Business Combinations (the gain on a bargain purchase)
 HKAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement or HKFRS 9 Financial
Instruments
1.2.1 Orderly transaction
HKFRS
Fair value is determined by reference to an orderly transaction. Note that the following are not
13.B43 considered orderly transactions:
(a) a transaction in which there is only one potential buyer for an item.
(b) a transaction that was entered into and performed in a time that is not long enough to carry
on marketing and due diligence efforts that are usual and customary for transactions
involving such items.
(c) a transaction which the seller is compelled to enter into and complete (eg for financial
reasons or regulatory instruction)
(d) a transaction in which the seller is near bankruptcy/receivership
2 Measurement approach
Fair value is a market-based, rather than an entity-specific, measurement. It is therefore measured
using the assumptions that market participants would use when pricing the asset under current
market conditions, taking into account any relevant characteristics of the asset. Whether an entity
actually intends to hold an asset or settle a liability is irrelevant when measuring fair value.
HKFRS 13 states that in order to determine the fair value of an item, all of the following should be
HKFRS 13. considered:
B2
1. The asset or liability that is being measured
2. The highest and best use (for a non-financial asset)
3. The principal or most advantageous market
4. Appropriate valuation technique(s)
550
2.1 The asset or liability

The characteristics of the particular asset or liability that is being fair valued should be considered if
HKFRS 13.11 buyers and sellers would take those characteristics into account when pricing the asset or liability.
Characteristics may include:
 the condition and location of the asset
 restrictions on the sale or use of the asset
Restrictions that affect fair value measurement are those that apply to the item itself; restrictions
that apply to the entity that holds the item are not taken into account as they would not be
transferred to a potential purchaser. The following example demonstrates this point.
Example: Restriction of use
Green Flower Co owns land that is subject to a legal right for a utility company to run power lines
across it. Without the power lines the land could be sold for $900,000; with the power lines, it could
be sold for $750,000.
Required
Explain how the fair value of the land is determined
Solution
The legal right to run power lines across the land is a restriction attached to the land and would be
transferred to a purchaser. Therefore the fair value of the land must take the restriction into account
and is $750,000.
2.1.1 Unit of account

HKFRS 13.14
Key terms
Unit of account is the level at which an asset or liability is aggregated or disaggregated in an IFRS
for recognition purposes.
Fair value measurements are based on an asset or a liability's unit of account, which is specified
by each FRS where a fair value measurement is required. For most assets and liabilities, the unit of
account is the individual asset or liability, but in some instances may be a group of assets or
liabilities.
Example: Unit of account
When determining the fair value of an entity’s 75% investment in the 100,000 equity shares of
another company, the unit of account may either be:
 each individual share, such that total fair value of the investment is 75,000  fair value per
share, or
 the 75% shareholding, such that the total fair value may be determined to include a control
premium.
The issue of the unit of account for shareholdings is currently under review by the IASB, and an
exposure draft was issued in 2014 which proposes that quoted investments in subsidiaries,
associates and joint ventures are measured as the quoted price multiplied by the quantity of
shares, without adjustment.
551
Financial Reporting
2.2 The highest and best use

HKFRS
13.27-29 HKFRS 13 requires that the fair value of a non-financial asset is determined based on its highest
and best use ie its use that would maximise the value of the asset or the business within which the
asset would be used. Highest and best use is determined from the point of view of market
participants, even if the entity intends a different use.
The highest and best use should be:
 physically possible
 legally permissible, and
 financially feasible.
This requirement applied to non-financial assets because unlike liabilities and financial assets, non-
financial assets can be used or exploited within several different models eg they could be held for
own use, leased to others or sold. Where a non-financial asset is held for own use, it may on its
own have little value, but when considered together with other assets, have significant value.
Example: Highest and best use
A donor gives land to the Burley Residents’ Association (‘BRA’), a not-for-profit neighbourhood
association, specifying that it must be used as a children’s playground. The BRA determines that
this restriction would not be transferred to a purchaser if it sold the land. Furthermore the BRA is
not restricted from selling the land. If the land were not used as a playground, it could be sold to be
used for residential development, achieving a selling price of $2million; based on continuing use as
a playground, the land could be sold for $800,000.
Required
Explain how the fair value of the land is determined.
Solution
There are two issues to consider: the donor restriction and how the land is used.
 The donor restriction on the land use is specific to the BRA and would not be transferred to a
purchaser of the land. Therefore this is not taken into account when determining fair value
 The fair value of the land is therefore the higher of fair value based on use as a playground
or based on use for residential development. In this case, therefore, fair value is $2 million.
Hornblower Pacific (‘HP’) acquires a research and development project as part of a business
combination. HP does not intend to complete the project, as if it were completed, it would compete
with one of HP’s own technologies under development. Instead HP intends to ‘lock up’ the project
to prevent its competitors from accessing the technology. Therefore the project principally provides
defensive value to HP by improving the prospects for the output of its own project and preventing
competitor access to the developed technology.
Required
How might the highest and best use of the project be determined for the purpose of measuring fair
value in order to apply HKFRS 3?
552
2.3 Principal or most advantageous market

HKFRS 13
Appendix A As we have seen, fair value is the exit price in an orderly transaction between market participants.
As defined in section 1.2, market participants are buyers and sellers in the principal or most
advantageous market for an item.
Key terms
Principal market is the market with the greatest volume and level of activity for the asset or
liability.
Most advantageous market is the market that maximises the amount that would be received to
sell the asset or minimises the amount that would be paid to transfer the liability after taking into
account transaction costs and transport costs.
(HKFRS 13)
The principal market should be considered first:

HKFRS
13.15-19  where there is no principal market, the most advantageous market is considered
 where there is a principal market, fair value must be measured in that market even if another
more advantageous market exists.
If there is no evidence to the contrary, the market in which an entity would normally sell and asset
or transfer a liability is presumed to be the principal (or most advantageous) market.
Note that the principal (or most advantageous) market may be different for two entities selling the
same item. For example, two subsidiaries in a group may both sell the same item, but the principle
market for each is their own domestic market.
2.3.1 Transaction and transport costs
Transaction and transport costs may be incurred in order to sell an asset or transfer a liability.
HKFRS These costs are relevant to the determination of fair value as follows:
13.25-26
 both transaction and transport costs are included when considering what is the most
advantageous market
 only transport costs are included when determining fair value in the principal or most
advantageous market.
The following information relates to the inventory held by Pacific Components on its acquisition by
Global Parts Co.
Product line 1 (100,000 units)
Market Asia Europe Africa
Sales volume in previous 12 months 240,300 180,300 90,200
$ $ $
Selling price per unit 350 390 325
Transaction costs 10 20 15
Transport to market costs 5 30 20
Net price received 335 340 290
Product line 2 (500 units)

Sales volume in previous 12 months 10,000 - 10,000
Selling price per unit 2,300 2,450
Transaction costs 100 50
Transport to market costs 60 220
Net price received 2,140 2,180
553
Financial Reporting
Required
Determine the fair value of the inventory for the purposes of applying HKFRS 3 Business
Combinations.
Tower Investments acquired a property by way of a finance lease in the year ended 31 December
20X3. It sublets the property to small businesses. The lease stipulates that the property must be
used for commercial rather than residential purposes. This restriction is not imposed by the
planning authorities and therefore at a future date the property could be used for residential
purposes. The owner has established that were the property to be sold at 31 December 20X3, it
would raise $29million if sold as a residential apartment block or $25million if sold as offices. In
either case, legal fees of 1% of the sale price would be incurred.
Required
Explain how the fair value of the property is determined.
2.4 Valuation techniques

HKFRS
13.61-66, B5- HKFRS 13 requires use of a valuation technique that is ‘appropriate in the circumstances’ and that
11
maximises the use of relevant observable inputs and minimises the use of unobservable inputs.
The standard does not require the use of a specific valuation technique, nor does it provide a
hierarchy of techniques, however in given circumstances it accepts that one technique may be
more appropriate than another.
In certain cases valuation techniques are straightforward, for example in the case of quoted
securities with an active market. In this case, fair value is determined based on quoted prices. In
other situations more complex valuation techniques must be used, for example in the case of an
unquoted subsidiary or associate investment.
In cases where multiple valuation techniques are appropriate, fair value is the point within the
range of values that is most representative of fair value in the circumstances.
2.4.1 Valuation approaches
The standard discusses three widely used valuation approaches:
Approach Techniques
Market approach A valuation technique that uses prices and other relevant information
generated by market transactions involving identical or comparable
assets and liabilities.
Cost approach A valuation technique that reflects the amount that would be required
currently to replace the service capacity of an asset.
Income approach A valuation technique that converts future amounts (eg cash flows or
income) to a single discounted amount. The fair value measurement is
determined on the basis of the value indicated by current market
expectations about those future amounts.
Entities must use a valuation technique (or techniques) consistent with one of these three
approaches to measure fair value in a given situation.
554
Certain techniques are better suited to particular circumstances. For example, an income approach
is better suited to a service industry whereas a cost or asset based approach may be better suited
to a property company.
Whichever valuation technique is selected should be applied consistently from period to period. A
change of valuation technique is only appropriate if the change results in a measurement that is
equally or more representative of fair value in the circumstances. This may be the case if:
 new markets develop
 available information changes
 valuation techniques improve
 market conditions change
A change in technique may also be required where there are quoted prices for an item but market
activity declines. In this case the emphasis must be on whether a transaction price is based on an
orderly transaction, rather than a forced sale.
A change in valuation technique is considered to be a change of accounting estimate in
accordance with HKAS 8, and must be disclosed in the financial statements.
2.4.2 Fair value hierarchy
In order to use a valuation technique, additional information, or ‘inputs’ are required. For example in
the case of an equity investment in a listed company:
INPUT VALUATION
TECHNIQUE
SHARE PRICE SHARE PRICE X FAIR VALUE

NO. OF SHARES
(MARKET
APPROACH)
HKFRS
HKFRS 13 introduces a fair value hierarchy that categorises inputs to valuation techniques into
13.72, 73, 76, three levels: level 1, level 2 and level 3. Level 1 inputs are observable and the most reliable; level
81, 82, 86 3 inputs are unobservable and the least reliable type of input.
The objective of this hierarchy is to increase consistency and comparability in fair value
measurements and related disclosures,
The fair value hierarchy gives the highest priority to level 1 inputs and the lowest priority to level 3
inputs:
 Level 1 inputs are quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or
liabilities that the entity can access at the measurement date.
 Level 2 inputs are inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are
observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly, for example:
 Quoted prices for similar assets in active markets
 Quoted prices for identical or similar assets in non-active markets
 Inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset such as interest rates
Further examples are provided in HKFRS 13 Appendix B paragraph B35.
 Level 3 inputs are unobservable inputs for the asset or liability, using the entity's own
assumptions about market exit value. Further examples are provided in HKFRS 13 Appendix
B paragraph B36.
Level 3 inputs are used to measure fair value to the extent that relevant observable inputs are not
available, so allowing for situations where there is little, if any, market activity for an asset at the
measurement date.
555
Financial Reporting
An items fair value is categorised according to the lowest level input. Therefore a fair value
measurement of quoted shares based on the unadjusted share price is a level 1 measurement,
whereas a fair value measurement of an unquoted investment using a valuation technique based
on discounted cash flows is a level 3 measurement.
Example: Fair value hierarchy
The fair value of an equity investment in an unquoted healthclub company, Fit Fast Co is
determined based upon the company’s earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation
(EBITDA), multiplied by a published price earnings ratio applicable to quoted companies in the
healthcare and fitness sector adjusted for lack of marketability.
Required
What level are the inputs used in determining fair value and what is the category of the fair value
measurement?
Solution
The inputs are:
The price earnings ratio applicable to quoted companies in the same sector is a level 1 input,
however the adjustment to it for lack of marketability is a level 3 input. The EBITDA of Fit Fast Co
Is a level 2 input.
Therefore overall the measurement is a Level 3 measurement.
The following table details examples of inputs that may be used to measure fair value:
Asset or liability Input
Level 1 Equity shares in a listed company Unadjusted quoted prices in an active market
Level 2 Licensing arrangement arising Royalty rate in the contract with the unrelated
from a business combination party at inception of the arrangement
Cash-generating unit Valuation multiple (eg a multiple of earnings or
revenue or a similar performance measure)
derived from observable market data, eg from
prices in observed transactions involving
comparable businesses
Finished goods inventory at a Price to customers adjusted for differences
retail outlet between the condition and location of the
inventory item and the comparable (ie similar)
inventory items
Building held and used Price per square metre derived from observable
market data, eg prices in observed transactions
involving comparable buildings in similar locations
Level 3 Cash-generating unit Financial forecast (eg of cash flows or profit or
loss) developed using the entity’s own data
Three-year option on exchange- Historical volatility, ie the volatility for the shares
traded shares derived from the shares’ historical prices
Interest rate swap Adjustment to a mid-market consensus (non-
binding) price for the swap developed using data
not directly observable or otherwise corroborated
by observable market data
556
3 Application of HKFRS 13 to financial instruments

The use of fair value accounting is permitted or required in some instances by both HKAS 39 and
HKFRS 9. Additional guidance is provided in HKFRS 13 on how the standard is applied to financial
assets and liabilities and own equity instruments.
HKFRS 13.70 3.1 Financial assets

The following should be considered where a financial asset is being fair valued:
 If a quoted item has a bid price (the price that buyers are willing to pay) and an ask price (the
price that sellers are willing to achieve), the price within the bid-ask spread that is most
representative of fair value is used to measure fair value. The use of bid prices for financial
assets and the use of ask prices for financial liabilities is permitted but not required. HKFRS
13 does not preclude the use of mid-market pricing.
 In the case of equity shares, a control premium is considered when measuring the fair value
of a controlling interest. Similarly, any non-controlling interest discount is considered where
measuring a non-controlling interest.
 If an entity holds a position in a single asset or liability (including a position comprising a
large number of identical assets or liabilities, such as a holding of financial instruments) and
the asset or liability is traded in an active market, the fair value of the asset or liability shall
be measured within Level 1 as the product of the quoted price for the individual asset or
liability and the quantity held by the entity. That is the case even if a market’s normal daily
trading volume is not sufficient to absorb the quantity held and placing orders to sell the
position in a single transaction might affect the quoted price.
 An exposure draft is currently in issue that proposes that a subsidiary, associate or joint
venture investment in quoted equity shares is always measured as a multiple of the share
price, with no adjustment for a premium associated with influence or control.
 The valuation of unlisted equity investments involves significant judgment and different
valuation techniques are likely to result in different fair values, however this does not mean
that any of the techniques are incorrect. Certain techniques are better suited to particular
types of business, for example an asset based approach is relevant to property companies
whilst an income approach is more relevant to service businesses. It is likely that valuation
will be based on some unobservable inputs and as a result the overall fair value will be
classified as a level 3 measurement.
HKFRS 3.2 Liabilities and own equity instruments

13.34, 42
Liabilities and own equity instruments must be measured on the assumption that the liability or
equity is transferred to a market participant at the measurement date and therefore:
 a liability would remain outstanding and the market participant would be required to fulfill the
obligation
 an entity’s own equity instrument would remain outstanding and the market participant would
take on the rights and responsibilities associated with the instrument.
This differs (sometimes significantly so) from a measurement that is based on the assumption of
settlement of a liability or cancellation of an entity’s own equity instrument.
HKFRS 13 further requires that the fair value of a liability must factor in non-performance risk.
Anything that could influence the likelihood of an obligation being fulfilled is considered a non-
performance risk, including an entity’s own credit risk.
Example: Fair value of liabilities
Manford Co has a bank loan with a face value of $1million that attracts a market rate of interest.
Due to market concern regarding non-performance risk of Manford Co, the market value of the loan
557
Financial Reporting
to the bank is just $800,000. The bank will not agree to discount the amount paid by Manford Co to
extinguish the loan.
Taper Co is seeking similar financing to the bank loan and has a similar credit profile to Manford
Co. Taper Co is indifferent to obtaining a new bank loan or assuming Manford Co’s bank loan.
Required
What is the fair value (transfer value) of Manford Co’s bank loan?
Solution
As Taper Co has the same credit profile as Manford Co, if it were to take out a bank loan, the bank
would lend only $800,000 (the market value of Manford Co’s loan) in return for the same cash flows
as are outstanding in respect of Manford Co’s loan. This is because the bank would require a
higher rate of interest to compensate for the increased credit risk.
Therefore the transfer value (fair value ) of Manford Co’s loan is $800,000.
Colne Co and Padiham Co individually enter into legal obligations to each pay $200,000 to Lanco
Co in seven years in exchange for some goods.
Colne Co has a very good credit rating and can borrow at 4%. Padiham Co’s credit rating is lower
and it can borrow at 8%.
Required
What is the fair value of the legal obligation that Colne Co and that Padiham Co must record in
their financial statements?
3.2.1 Summary flowchart

HKFRS
13.37-40 The specific approach to fair value liabilities and an entity’s own equity instruments sometimes
differs from the concepts to fair value an asset and is summarised in the following flowchart:
Is there a quoted price for the Yes

transfer of an identical or a Use quoted
similar liability or entity’s own price
equity instrument?
No
Yes Is there an identical item held No

by another entity as an asset?
Measure fair value of the Measure the fair value of the

liability or equity instrument liability or equity instrument
from the perspective of using a valuation technique
market participant that holds from the perspective of a
the identical item as an asset market participant that owes
at the measurement date. the liability or has issued the
equity.
558
4 Disclosure
HKFRS
13.91-99 HKFRS 13 requires disclosures to help users assess:
(a) for assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring or non-recurring basis after
initial recognition, the valuation techniques and inputs used to develop those measurements.
(b) for recurring fair value measurements (i.e. those measured at each period end) using
significant unobservable (level 3) inputs, the effect of the measurements on profit or loss or
other comprehensive income for the period.
In order to achieve this, the following should be disclosed as a minimum for each class of financial
assets and liabilities measured at fair value (asterisked disclosures are also required for financial
assets and liabilities measured at amortised cost but for which fair value is disclosed):
(a) The fair value measurement at the end of the period, and for non-recurring measurements
the reason for the measurement.
(b) The level of the fair value hierarchy within which the fair value measurements are
categorised in their entirety.*
(c) For assets and liabilities measured at fair value at each reporting date (recurring fair value
measurements), the amounts of any transfers between level 1 and level 2 of the fair value
hierarchy and reasons for the transfers
(d) For fair value measurements categorised within level 2 and 3 of the hierarchy, a description
of the valuation techniques and inputs used in the fair value measurement, plus details of
any changes in valuation techniques.*
(e) For fair value measurements categorised within level 3 of the fair value hierarchy,
quantitative information about the significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value
measurement.
(f) For recurring fair value measurements categorised within level 3 of the fair value hierarchy:
 A reconciliation from the opening to closing balances
 The amount of unrealised gains or losses recognised in profit or loss in the period and
the line item in which they are recognised
 A narrative description of the sensitivity of the fair value measurement to changes in
unobservable inputs
(g) For recurring and non-recurring fair value measurements categorised within level 3 of the fair
value hierarchy, a description of the valuation processes used by the entity.
(h) For recurring and non-recurring fair value measurements, if the highest and best use of a
non-financial asset differs from its current use, a disclosure of that fact and why the asset is
being used in a different way from its highest and best use.*
An entity should also disclose its policy for determining when transfers between levels of the fair
value hierarchy are deemed to have occurred.
For each class of assets and liabilities that are not measured at fair value but for which fair value is
disclosed, the asterisked (*) information listed above is required.
559
Financial Reporting
Example: Fair value disclosures

Fair value measurement
$'m Fair value measurements at the end of the
reporting period using
Description 31.12.X9 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
inputs inputs inputs
Trading equity securities 45 45 – –
Non-trading equity securities 32 – – 32
Corporate securities 9 9 - –
Investment property 6 - - 6
Total recurring fair value 92 54 - 38

measurements
Land held for sale 4.5 - 4.5 -

Total non-recurring fair value 4.5 - 4.5 -
measurements
The company has measured land held for sale at fair value on a non-recurring basis as a result of
its classification as held for sale.
There have been no transfers between levels 1 and 2 during the year.
Company policy is to recognise transfers into and out of the different fair value hierarchy levels at
the date the event or change in circumstances causing the transfer occurred.
Valuation processes for level 3 fair values
The company engages qualified valuers to determine the fair value of the group’s financial
instruments that are in level 3 of the fair value hierarchy every 6 months. The fair value of
investment property is determined at the end of each reporting period.
The following table sets out the amount of total gains or losses for the period included in profit or
loss in relation to assets measured on a recurring basis using level 3 of the fair value hierarchy:
Non-trading Investment
equity securities properties Total
$’m $’m $’m
Unrealised gains and losses (1.2) 0.8 (0.4)
Valuation techniques
The following valuation techniques are used:
Level 1
Equity and corporate securities Quoted share prices.
Level 2
Land held for sale Sale comparison approach: sale prices of comparable land in
similar location are adjusted for differences in key attributes such
as land size. The valuation model is based on price per square
metre.
Level 3
Non-trading equity securities Discounted cash flow method. Key unobservable inputs are:
weighted average cost of capital, revenue growth rate, discount
for lack of marketability and control premium.
Investment properties Income approach based on estimated rental values. Key
unobservable inputs are discount rate, expected vacancy rate
and rental growth rate.
560
Topic recap
HKFRS 13 Fair value measurement
Fair value = exit price
Measurement approach
Asset or liability Highest and best use (non

financial asset)
Condition / location Fair value based on highest

Restrictions on sale/use and best use that is
Unit of account Physically possible
Legally permissible
Financially feasible
Principal or most Valuation techniques

advantageous market
If no principal market, use Market approach

most advantageous Cost approach
Most advantageous Income approach
market gives highest price
after transaction and
transport costs
Transaction costs not part Fair value hierarchy
of fair value Level 1 inputs – quoted
prices
Level 2 inputs – other
observable inputs
Level 3 inputs –
unobservable inputs
Disclosure: information to assess:

valuation techniques and inputs for assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring or non-recurring
basis after initial recognition
the effect of measurements on profit or loss or other comprehensive income for the period in the case of
recurring fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs.
561
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
The highest and best use of the project is determined on the basis of use of the project by market
participants, which may be:
(a) Continuing with the development
If market participants would continue to develop the project and that use would maximise the
value of the group of assets or of assets and liabilities in which the project would be used (ie
the asset would be used in combination with other assets or with other assets and liabilities).
The fair value of the project would be measured on the basis of the price that would be
received in a current transaction to sell the project, assuming that the R&D would be used
with its complementary assets and the associated liabilities and that those assets and
liabilities would be available to market participants.
(b) Ceasing development for competitive reasons
If market participants would lock up the project and that use would maximise the value of the
group of assets or of assets and liabilities in which the project would be used.
received in a current transaction to sell the project, assuming that the R&D would be used (ie
locked up) with its complementary assets and the associated liabilities and that those assets
and liabilities would be available to market participants.
(c) Ceasing development
If market participants would discontinue development because the project is not expected to
provide the required rate of return and would not provide defensive value through being
locked up.
received in a current transaction to sell the project on its own (which might be zero).
Answer 2
Product line 1
 Product line 1 is sold in three markets – Asia, Europe and Africa.
 Asia is the principal market as it has the greatest sales volume.
 If a principal market exists then the price in that market must be used to establish fair value.
 Fair value takes into account transport costs but not transaction costs.
 The selling price of product line 1 in Asia is $350 and transport costs are $5. Therefore the
fair value of one unit is $345.
 The fair value of inventory held is therefore 100,000  $345 = $34,500,000.
Product line 2
 Product line 2 is sold in equal volumes in Asia and Africa. Therefore there is no principal
market.
 The most advantageous market is Africa as each sale in this market results in greater net
proceeds ($2,180) than each sale in Asia.
562
 Although transaction costs are taken into account when determining the most advantageous
market, fair value once determined is not adjusted for these costs.
 Fair value is based on the African market despite the fact that the fair value of $2,230 (selling
price $2,450 less transport costs of $220) is less than the equivalent amount in the Asian
market ($2,300 - $60 = $2,240).
 The fair value of inventory held is therefore 500  $2,230 = $1,115,000.
The total fair value of inventory is $34,500,000 + $1,115,000 = $35,615,000
Answer 3
The fair value is determined in accordance with HKFRS 13 by reference to exit (selling) prices. It is
assumed that the property will be sold to a market participant that will use the property in its highest
and best use. In this case the higher value is $29m for residential purposes.
Where there is a restriction in use of an asset, as is the case here, HKFRS 13 considers whether
that restriction would be passed on to a purchaser in a future sale. That is not the case here – the
property could be used on a residential basis in the future. Therefore the current restriction in use is
not relevant when determining fair value.
Transaction costs are not taken into account when determining fair value and therefore the 1%
legal fees are not relevant.
Fair value is therefore $29 million.
Answer 4
The fair value of Colne Co’s promise is approximately $152,000. This is the present value of
7
$200,000 in seven years at 4% ($200,000 x 1/1.04 ).
The fair value of Padiham Co’s promise is approximately $116,600. This is the present value of
7
$200,000 in seven years at 8% ($200,000 x 1/1.08 ).
These two values are different, even though the amount and period are the same, due to the
different risk profiles of the two companies.
563
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Zegard Investment Limited 32 minutes

Zegard Investment Limited (ZIL) has a portfolio of investments at 30 June 20X3 with costs as
follows:
$ million
3,000,000 ordinary shares of Long Pont Limited (LP), a company listed on London 9.0
Stock Exchange, which represent less than 1% of the total number of issued shares
of LP.
400 ordinary shares of Printon Medical Inc. (PMI), a privately owned entity, which 8.0
accounted for 10% equity interest in PMI.
6 million shares of Micro Vision Company (MVC), a privately owned entity, with total 12.0
number of issued shares of 14 million. ZIL can appoint three out of eight directors to
the board of MVC.
A loan lent to Goldstan Enterprise (GE) on 1 January 2013, carried interest at HIBOR 15.0
plus 4% payable in arrears at the anniversary date of the lending, repayable on 31
December 20X6. The rate of HIBOR is determined at 1 January of each annual
period.
Required
(a) Explain the appropriate accounting treatment (including classification between current and
non-current presentation) for the above investments in the consolidated statement of
financial position of ZIL as at 30 June 20X3 in accordance with HKFRS 9 Financial
Instruments and other applicable standards. (14 marks)
(b) For those investments which will be subsequently measured at fair value after acquisition,
identify the appropriate level of fair value hierarchy under HKFRS 13 Fair Value
Measurement. (4 marks)
(Total = 18 marks)
564
chapter 20
Statements of cash flows
Topic list
1 Cash flows and HKAS 7

1.1 Cash flows: advantages
1.2 HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows
2 Single company statements of cash flows
2.1 Presentation of a statement of cash flows
2.2 Cash generated from operations
2.3 Specific cash flows
2.4 Disclosure
2.5 Producing a statement of cash flows
3 Consolidated statements of cash flows
3.1 Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries
3.2 The non-controlling interest
3.3 Associates and joint ventures
3.4 Foreign currency cash flows
Learning focus
Statements of cash flows are very relevant in practice. They are a required element of a set of
financial statements and often provide more useful information than that within the other
financial statements with regard to liquidity.
565
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
requirements
4.01 Primary financial statement preparation 3
4.09 Consolidated financial statement preparation 3
4.09.03 Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows
566
20: Statements of cash flows | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 Cash flows and HKAS 7

Topic highlights
Statements of cash flows are a useful addition to the financial statements of companies because
it is recognised that accounting profit is not the only indicator of a company's performance.
A statement of cash flows focuses on the sources and uses of cash and is a useful indicator of
company’s liquidity and solvency.
Cash is a key element of any business. It must be monitored and managed in order to maintain a
liquid position. While the statement of financial position provides a period end cash balance, this in
itself does not provide any indication of how an entity generates, uses and manages its cash.
Similarly, profit, while providing a good indication of the performance of an entity does not provide
any indication of the liquidity of a business, since it is calculated using the accrual basis.
The statement of cash flows is therefore required to form part of a set of financial statements by
HKAS 1. HKAS 1 does not, however, prescribe the format and content of a statement of cash
flows. This guidance is provided within HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows.
Before considering the standard, it is important to appreciate the advantages of cash flow
information.
1.1 Cash flows: advantages

The main advantages of using cash flow accounting (including both historical and forecast cash
flows) are as follows.
(a) A company's ability to generate cash affects its survival. Cash flow accounting addresses
this critical issue.
(b) Since "profit" is dependent on accounting conventions and concepts, cash flow is viewed as
more comprehensive.
(c) Cash flow is factual, objective and is not subject to as much manipulation as profits.
(d) Both long-and short-term creditors have more interest in an entity's ability to repay them than
in its profitability. Cash flow accounting is more direct than "profits" in pointing out the
availability of cash.
(e) Cash flow reporting is better than traditional profit reporting in the comparison of the results
of different companies.
(f) The needs of all users are better satisfied by cash flow reporting.
(i) It provides management with information that is useful in decision making ("relevant
costs" to a decision are future cash flows in management accounting). Traditional
profit accounting does not provide exclusive help in decision making.
(ii) A satisfactory basis for stewardship accounting is provided by cash flow accounting for
shareholders and auditors.
(iii) Cash flow accounting better serves the information needs of creditors and employees.
(g) When compared with profit forecasts, cash flow forecasts are more useful and easier to
prepare.
(h) It is easier to audit cash flow accounts than accounts prepared based on the accruals
concept.
(i) The accrual concept can be confusing whereas cash flows are easily understood.
(j) Cash flow accounting can be retrospective and also prospective in providing a forecast for
the future. This information can be of great value to all users of accounting information.
567
Financial Reporting
(k) Variance statements, which compare actual cash flows against the forecast, can be used to
monitor forecasts.
Looking at the same question from a different angle, readers of accounts can be misled by the
profit figure.
(a) Shareholders might believe that if a company makes a profit after tax of, say $1 million then
this is the amount which it could afford to pay as a dividend. Unless the company has
sufficient cash available to stay in business and also to pay a dividend, the shareholders'
expectations would be wrong.
(b) Employees might believe that if a company makes profits, it can afford to pay higher wages
next year. This opinion may not be correct: the ability to pay wages depends on the
availability of cash.
(c) Creditors might consider that a profitable company is a going concern.
(i) If a company builds up large amounts of unsold inventories of goods, their cost
would not be chargeable against profits, but cash would have been used up in making
them, thus weakening the company's liquid resources.
(ii) A company might capitalise large development costs, having spent considerable
amounts of money on research and development, but only charge small amounts
against current profits. As a result, the company might show reasonable profits, but
get into severe difficulties with its liquidity position.
(d) Management might suppose that if their company makes a historical cost profit, and
reinvests some of those profits, then the company must be expanding. This is not the case:
in a period of inflation, a company might have a historical cost profit but a current cost
accounting loss, which means that the operating capability of the firm will be declining.
(e) Survival of a business entity depends not so much on profits as on its ability to pay its debts
when they fall due. Such payments might include "profit and loss" items such as material
purchases, wages, interest and taxation etc., but also capital payments for new non-current
assets and the repayment of loan capital when this falls due (e.g. on the redemption of
debentures).
1.2 HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows

Topic highlights
HKAS 7 provides the format of a statement of cash flows and guidance on the required content.
1.2.1 Objective
The objective of this standard is to require the provision of information about the historical changes
in cash and cash equivalents of an entity by means of a statement of cash flows which classifies
cash flows during the period from operating, investing and financing activities.
1.2.2 Scope
Users of an entity's financial statements are interested in how the entity generates and uses cash
and cash equivalents. This is the case regardless of the nature of the entity's activities. Therefore,
all entities must provide a statement of cash flows as an integral part of an entity's financial
statements.
HKAS 7.6-9 1.2.3 Definitions
The standard gives the following definitions, the most important of which are cash and cash
equivalents.
568
Key terms
Cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits.
Cash equivalents are short-term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known
amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.
Cash flows are inflows and outflows of cash and cash equivalents.
Operating activities are the principal revenue-producing activities of the entity and other activities
that are not investing or financing activities.
Investing activities are the acquisition and disposal of long-term assets and other investments not
included in cash equivalents.
Financing activities are activities that result in changes in the size and composition of the
contributed equity and borrowings of the entity. (HKAS 7)
The standard expands on the definition of cash equivalents: they are held to meet short-term cash
commitments rather than for investment or other long-term purposes. They are required to:
1 be readily convertible to a known amount of cash and therefore their maturity date should
normally be three months from its acquisition date
2 be subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.
Based on the definition, therefore:
 Deposits available on demand are cash equivalents;
 Deposits with a fixed maturity of more than three months are not cash equivalents;
 Pledged deposits (amounts held by banks as security) are not cash equivalents;
 Money market holdings, short-term government bonds and treasury bills are cash
equivalents;
 Equity investments (i.e. holdings of ordinary shares in other companies) are not cash
equivalents;
 Preference share investments are cash equivalents where acquired within a short period
of their maturity and with a specified redemption date;
 Where bank overdrafts are repayable on demand and are treated as part of an entity's total
cash management system, an overdrawn balance is included in cash and cash equivalents;
 Loans and other borrowings are not cash equivalents, but instead are classified as cash
flows from financing activities.
Movements between different types of cash and cash equivalents are not included in cash flows.
The investment of surplus cash in cash equivalents is part of cash management, not part of
operating, investing or financing activities.
2 Single company statements of cash flows

Topic highlights
Cash flows are classified as cash flows from operating, investing and financing activities in a
statement of cash flows. Cash flows from operating activities may be calculated using the direct or
indirect method.
569
Financial Reporting
HKAS
7.10,11
2.1 Presentation of a statement of cash flows
According to HKAS 7, reported cash flows during a period should be classified into operating,
investing and financing activities in a statement of cash flows.
The way of presenting cash flows under operating, investing and financing activities is dependent
on the nature of the reporting entity. The classification enables users to understand the impact of
each activity on cash and cash equivalents and their interrelationship.
HKAS 7.13- 2.1.1 Operating activities

15
This section of the statement of cash flows shows whether, and to what extent, companies can
generate cash from their operations. It is this cash from day-to-day trading which must, in the
end pay for all cash outflows relating to other activities, such as paying loan interest, tax and
dividends.
The standard gives the following as examples of cash flows from operating activities.
 Cash receipts from the sale of goods and the rendering of services
 Cash receipts from royalties, fees, commissions and other revenue
 Cash payments to suppliers for goods and services
 Cash payments to and on behalf of employees
 Cash payments/refunds of income taxes unless they can be specifically identified with
financing or investing activities
 Cash receipts and payments from contracts held for dealing or trading purposes
The effects of these transactions are all included in the calculation of profit or loss, however certain
items may be included in the net profit or loss for the period which do not relate to operational cash
flows. For example, the profit or loss on the disposal of property, plant and equipment will be
included in net profit or loss, but the cash flows will be classed as investing. However, cash
payments to manufacture or acquire assets held for rental to others and subsequently held for sale
as described in paragraph 68A of HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment are cash flows from
operating activities. The cash receipts from rents and subsequent sales of such assets are also
cash flows from operating activities.
HKAS 7.16 2.1.2 Investing activities
Cash flows from investing activities show the extent of new investment in assets that will generate
future income and cash flows. Only expenditures that result in a recognised asset in the statement
of financial position are eligible for classification as investing activities.
The standard gives the following examples of cash flows arising from investing activities.
 Cash payments to acquire property, plant and equipment, intangibles and other long-term
assets, including those relating to capitalised development costs and self-constructed
 Cash receipts from sales of property, plant and equipment, intangibles and other long-term
assets
 Cash payments to acquire shares or debentures of other entities
 Cash receipts from sales of shares or debentures of other entities
 Cash advances and loans made to other parties
 Cash receipts from the repayment of advances and loans made to other parties
 Cash payments for or receipts from futures/forward/option/swap contracts except when the
contracts are held for dealing purposes, or the payments/receipts are classified as financing
activities
570
HKAS 7.17 2.1.3 Financing activities

Cash flows from financing activities show the share of cash claimed by capital providers during the
period. This serves as an indicator of likely future interest and dividend payments.
The standard gives the following examples of cash flows which might arise under these headings:
 Cash proceeds from issuing shares
 Cash payments to owners to acquire or redeem the entity's shares
 Cash proceeds from issuing debentures, loans, notes, bonds, mortgages and other short- or
long-term borrowings
 Cash repayments of amounts borrowed
 Cash payments by a lessee for the reduction of the outstanding liability relating to a finance
lease
2.1.4 Example of statement of cash flows
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9
$'000 $'000
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash receipts from customers 34,630
Cash paid to suppliers and employees (32,400)
Cash generated from operations 2,230
Interest paid (320)
Income taxes paid (820)
Net cash from operating activities 1,090
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (840)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 30
Interest received 250
Dividends received 250
Net cash used in investing activities (310)
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issuance of share capital 330
Proceeds from long-term borrowings 330
Payment of finance lease liabilities (100)
Dividends paid* (1,250)
Net cash used in financing activities (690)
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 90
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 230
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period 320
* This could also be shown as an operating cash flow
Cash and cash equivalents:
20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Cash on hand and balances with banks 50 35
Short-term investments 270 195
Cash and cash equivalents 320 230
571
Financial Reporting
HKAS 7.18 2.2 Cash generated from operations

The standard offers a choice of method for the calculation of cash generated from operations:
(a) The direct method involves disclosing major classes of gross cash receipts and gross cash
payments
(b) The indirect method involves adjusting the profit or loss for the effects of:
1 transactions of a non-cash nature
2 any deferrals or accrual of past or future operating cash receipts or payments and
3 items of income or expense associated with investing or financing cash flows
The example shown above in section 2.1.4 uses the direct method.
HKAS 7.19 2.2.1 The direct method
The direct method involves listing cash receipts and cash payments in respect of day-to-day
transactions. A simple example may be as follows:
$
Cash in respect of cash sales X
Cash received from credit customers X
Cash purchases (X)
Cash paid to credit suppliers (X)
Cash expenses paid (including wages) (X)
Cash generated from operations X
The most obvious way to obtain information about gross cash receipts and payments is simply to
extract the information from the accounting records. An alternative method involves adjusting sales,
cost of sales and other items in the statement of profit or loss for:
 changes in inventories, receivables and payables during the period
 other non-cash items
 other items for which the cash effects are investing or financing cash flow.
Practically, this involves reconstructing nominal ledger accounts in order to extract cash flows. This
may be a laborious task, however, and the indirect method described below may be easier.
HKAS 7.20 2.2.2 The indirect method

This method is undoubtedly easier from the point of view of the preparer of the statement of cash
flows. The profit or loss for the period is adjusted for the following:
 Changes during the period in inventories, operating receivables and payables
 Non-cash items, e.g. depreciation, provisions, profits/losses on the sales of assets
 Other items, the cash flows from which should be classified under investing or financing
activities.
A proforma of such a calculation is as follows:
$
Profit before taxation (statement of profit or loss) X
Depreciation X
Loss (profit) on sale of non-current assets (working capital) X
(Increase)/decrease in inventories (X)/X
(Increase)/decrease in receivables (X)/X
Increase/(decrease) in payables X/(X)
Cash generated from operations X
Interest (paid)/received (X)
Income taxes paid (X) )
Net cash flows from operating activities X
572
It is important to understand why certain items are added and others subtracted. Note the
following points:
(a) Depreciation is not a cash expense, but is deducted in arriving at the profit figure in the
statement of profit or loss. It makes sense, therefore, to eliminate it by adding it back.
(b) By the same logic, a loss on a disposal of a non-current asset (arising through
underprovision of depreciation) needs to be added back and a profit deducted.
(c) An increase in inventories means less cash – you have spent cash on buying inventory.
(d) An increase in receivables means the company's debtors have not paid as much, and
therefore there is less cash.
(e) A decrease in payables means the company has paid more to suppliers and so has less
cash.
The illustration below shows a full statement of cash flows using the indirect method.
Illustration: Indirect method

STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS (INDIRECT METHOD) FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER
20X9
$'000 $'000
Profit before taxation 2,630
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 540
Investment income (450)
Interest expense 390
3,110
Increase in trade and other receivables (600)
Decrease in inventories 1,000
Decrease in trade payables (1,280)
Interest paid (320)
Income taxes paid (820)
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (840)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 30
Dividends received 250

Proceeds from issue of share capital 330
Proceeds from long-term borrowings 330
Payment of finance lease liabilities (100)
Dividends paid* (1,250)
Net cash used in financing activities (690)

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 90
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 230
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period 320
* This could also be shown as an operating cash flow
573
Financial Reporting
Cash and cash equivalents:

20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Cash on hand and balances with banks 50 35
Short-term investments 270 195
Cash and cash equivalents 320 230
2.2.3 Indirect versus direct

Use of the direct method is encouraged, but not required, by HKAS 7, as this method provides
information which may be useful in estimating future cash flows, which is not available under the
indirect method.
2.3 Specific cash flows

HKAS 2.3.1 Interest and dividends
7.31,34
Sources (cash inflows) and uses (outflows) of cash relating to interest and dividends should be
separately disclosed. Each cash flow should be classified consistently from period to period either
as operating, investing or financing.
Dividends paid by the entity can be classified in one of two ways:
(a) As a financing cash flow, showing the cost of obtaining financial resources.
(b) As a component of cash flows from operating activities so that users can assess the
entity's ability to pay dividends out of operating cash flows.
Interest paid or received is calculated by reference to the statement of profit or loss amount for the
year adjusted for any accrual or other statement of financial position amount.
Dividends paid or received are identified in the notes to a set of financial statements.
Example: Interest
Odile Co. reports the following amounts in its financial statements relating to interest:
$
Finance costs in the statement of profit or loss 8.7
Interest accrued at start of year 1.2
Interest accrued at end of year 3.1
What is Odile Co.’s interest paid?
Solution
Interest paid is calculated as 1.2m + 8.7m – 3.1m = $6.8 million.
HKAS 2.3.2 Taxes on income

7.35,36
Cash flows relating to taxes should also be separately disclosed. They should be classified as
items under operating activities unless they can be specifically identified with financing and
investing activities.
It is often difficult to match cash flows arising from taxes with the originating underlying transaction,
therefore tax cash flows are usually classified as arising from operating activities.
Tax paid (or refunded) is calculated by reference to the tax charge (or credit) for the year, adjusted
for any statement of financial position amounts.
574
Example: Taxes on income

Allister's estimated tax payable for the year ended 31 March 20X1 is $89,100. The equivalent figure
for the year ended 31 March 20X0 was $97,200. The tax charge reported in the statement of profit
or loss for the year ended 31 March 20X1 was $101,000, which included a $12,000 increase in
deferred tax.
What tax was paid in the year?
Solution
$
Tax liability b/f 97,200
Tax charge ($101,000 – $12,000) 89,000
186,200
Tax liability c/f (89,100)
Tax paid 97,100
2.3.3 Finance lease payments

Rentals under a finance lease include capital and interest elements. These are split out for the
purpose of inclusion in the statement of cash flows and reported as "financing" and "operating"
cash flows respectively.
Example: Lotus Co.

The notes to the financial statements of Lotus Co. show the following in respect of finance leases:
Year ended 31 December 20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Amounts payable within one year 12 8
Within 2-5 years 110 66
122 74
Less finance charges allocated (14) (8)
108 66
Additions to non-current assets acquired under finance leases were shown in the non-current asset
note at $56,000.
What is the capital repayment to be shown in the statement of cash flows for Lotus Co. in the year
ended 31 December 20X9?
Solution
Finance leases
$'000
Balance at 31 December 20X8 66
Additions for the year 56
Balance at 31 December 20X9 (108)
Capital repayment (balancing fig) 14
2.3.4 Cash flows associated with non-current assets

Where non-current assets are acquired through purchase, rather than lease, the additions figure in
the non-current asset note (adjusted for any outstanding amount owed) equates to the cash
outflow.
575
Financial Reporting
Where non-current assets are disposed of, the cash proceeds is calculated by adding any profit on
disposal (or deducting any loss) to (from) the carrying value of the disposals (identified from the
non-current asset note).
Example: Cash flows associated with non-current assets
The following extracts are taken from the financial statements of Rooibus for the year ended
30 September 20X0:
20X0 20W9
$m $m
Cost of PPE 520 420
Accumulated depreciation 165 189

Depreciation charge 55
Loss on disposal of PPE 5.5
Other comprehensive income
Revaluation surplus (land) 20
Assets costing $85m were disposed of in the year.
Required
What cash has Rooibus paid to acquire new non-current assets in the period, and what are the
proceeds of sale of old non-current assets?
Solution
Cost $m Depreciation $m
b/f 420 b/f 189
Additions (balancing) 165 Charge 55
Revaluation 20 Disposals (balancing) (79)
Disposal (85) c/f 165
c/f 520
Cash paid to acquire non-current assets $165m
Proceeds of sale of non-current assets (85m – 79m – 5.5m) $0.5m
2.3.5 Borrowings and share capital

When calculating the proceeds of a share or loan issue or loan repaid, the balance outstanding at
the start of the period should be compared with the balance at the end of the period.
2.4 Disclosure
HKAS 7.43 2.4.1 Non cash transactions
Investing and financing transactions that do not require the use of cash or cash equivalents shall
be excluded from a statement of cash flows. Such transactions shall be disclosed elsewhere in the
financial statements in a way that provides all the relevant information about these investing and
financing activities.
HKAS 2.4.2 Components of cash and cash equivalents
7.45,46
The components of cash and cash equivalents should be disclosed and a reconciliation should be
presented, showing the amounts in the statement of cash flows reconciled with the equivalent
items reported in the statement of financial position.
576
It is also necessary to disclose the accounting policy used in deciding the items included in cash
and cash equivalents, in accordance with HKAS 1, but also because of the wide range of cash
management practices worldwide.
HKAS 2.4.3 Other disclosures

7.48,50
All entities should disclose, together with a commentary by management, any other information
likely to be of importance.
(a) Restrictions on the use of or access to any part of cash equivalents.
(b) The amount of undrawn borrowing facilities which are available.
(c) Cash flows which increased operating capacity compared to cash flows which merely
maintained operating capacity.
Illustration
Accounting policies
For the purpose of the consolidated statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise
cash on hand and demand deposits, and short-term highly liquid investments that are readily
convertible into known amounts of cash, are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value, and
have a short maturity of generally within three months when acquired, less bank overdrafts which
are repayable on demand and form an integral part of the Group’s cash management.
For the purpose of the statement of financial position, cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on
hand and at banks, including term deposits and assets similar in nature to cash, which are not
restricted as to use.
Cash and cash equivalents
20X4 20X3
$’000 $’000
Cash and bank balances other than time deposits 290,000 276,000
Time deposits with original maturity of less than three - 37,000
months when acquired
Cash and cash equivalents 290,000 313,000
Bank balances other than time deposits earn interest at floating rates based on daily bank deposit
rates. Short-term time deposits are made for varying periods of between one day and three months
depending on the immediate cash requirements of the Group, and earn interest at the respective
short term time deposit rates. The bank deposits are deposited with creditworthy banks with no
recent history of default.
2.5 Producing a statement of cash flows

Remember the steps involved in preparation of a statement of cash flows using the indirect
method:
Step 1
Set out the proforma leaving plenty of space.
Step 2
Complete the reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash from operating activities, as far as
possible.
Step 3
Calculate the following where appropriate.
 Tax paid
 Dividends paid
 Interest paid/received
577
Financial Reporting
 Purchase and sale of non-current assets

 Issues of shares
 Repayment of loans
Step 4
Work out the profit if not already given using: opening and closing balances, tax charge and
dividends.
Step 5
Slot the figures into the statement and any notes required.
Example: Kowloon Co.

Set out below are the financial statements of Kowloon Co.. You are the financial controller, faced
with the task of implementing HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows.
KOWLOON CO.
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR
ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9
$'000
Revenue 2,553
Cost of sales (1,814)
Gross profit 739
Other income: interest received 25
Distribution costs (125)
Administrative expenses (264)
Finance costs (75)
Profit before tax 300
Income tax expense (140)
Profit for the year 160
KOWLOON CO.
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER
20X9 20X8
Assets $'000 $'000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 380 305
Intangible assets 250 200
Investments – 25
Current assets
Inventories 150 102
Receivables 390 315
Short-term investments 50 –
Cash at bank 2 1
Total assets 1,222 948
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Share capital 360 300
Revaluation surplus 100 91
Retained earnings 260 180
Long-term loan 170 50
Current liabilities
Trade payables 127 119
Bank overdraft 85 98
Taxation 120 110
Total equity and liabilities 1,222 948
578
The following information is available:

(a) The proceeds of the sale of non-current asset investments amounted to $30,000.
(b) Fixtures and fittings, with an original cost of $85,000 and a net book value of $45,000, were
sold for $32,000 during the year.
(c) The following information relates to property, plant and equipment.
31.12.20X9 31.12.20X8
$'000 $'000
Cost 720 595
Accumulated depreciation (340) (290)
Net book value 380 305
(d) 50,000 $1 ordinary shares were issued during the year at a premium of 20 cents per share.
(e) The short-term investments are highly liquid and are close to maturity.
(f) Dividends of $80,000 were paid during the year.
Required
Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year to 31 December 20X9 using the format laid out in
HKAS 7.
Solution
KOWLOON CO.
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9
$'000 $'000
Depreciation charge (W1) 90
Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment (45 – 32) 13
Profit on sale of non-current asset investments (30 – 25) (5)
Interest expense (net) (75 – 25) 50
(Increase)/decrease in inventories (102 – 150) (48)
(Increase)/decrease in receivables (315 – 390) (75)
Increase/(decrease) in payables (127 – 119) 8
333
Interest paid (75)
Dividends paid (80)
Tax paid (110 + 140 – 120) (130)
Net cash from operating activities 48
Payments to acquire property, plant and equipment (W2) (201)
Payments to acquire intangible non-current assets (250 – 200) (50)
Receipts from sales of property, plant and equipment 32
Receipts from sale of non-current asset investments 30
Issue of share capital (360 – 300) 60
Long-term loan (170 – 50) 120
Net cash from financing activities 180
Increase in cash and cash equivalents 64
Cash and cash equivalents at 1.1.X9 (97)
Cash and cash equivalents at 31.12.X9 (33)
579
Financial Reporting
ANALYSIS OF CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

31.12.X9 31.12.X8
$'000 $'000
Cash at bank 2 1
Short-term investments 50 -
Overdraft (85) (98)
(33) (97)
WORKINGS
1 Depreciation charge
$'000
Accumulated depreciation at 31 December 20X8 290
Accumulated depreciation on assets sold (85 – 45) (40)
Accumulated depreciation 31 December 20X9 (340)
Charge for the year (90)
2 Purchase of property, plant and equipment
$'000
Cost at 31 December 20X8 595
Revaluation (100 – 91) 9
Cost on assets sold (85)
Cost 31 December 20X9 (720)
Purchase for the year (balancing fig) (201)
3 Consolidated statements of cash flows

Topic highlights
A consolidated statement of cash flows includes extra line items for cash flows associated with:
 acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries
 non-controlling interests
 associates and joint ventures
Note that accounting for group financial statements is covered in Section D of this Learning Pack.
HKAS Consolidated statements of cash flows are prepared in the same way as a single company
7.37,39 statement of cash flows, however they include extra line items:
 Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries are reported as cash flows from investing activities
 Dividends paid to the non-controlling interests are reported as cash flows from financing
activities
 Dividends received from associates and joint ventures accounted for using the equity
method are reported as cash flows from operating activities
Cash flows that are internal to the group should be eliminated in the preparation of a consolidated
statement of cash flows.
Example: Elimination of intra-group cash flows
Cann Co. disposed of property, plant and equipment with a carrying value of $215,000 in the year
ended 31 October. The company reported a profit on the combined disposals of $39,500. Included
within the disposal figures was a machine sold to Cann's subsidiary Wood Co. for $12,400.
During the year, Wood disposed of property, plant and equipment with a carrying value of $43,000,
recording a loss on disposal of $5,600. All disposals were made to companies outside the group.
580
What amount will be reported as proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment in the
consolidated statement of cash flows?
Solution
Cann $'000 $'000
Carrying amount on disposal 215.0
Profit on disposal 39.5
254.5
Less: intercompany proceeds (12.4)
242.1
Wood
Carrying amount on disposal 43.0
Loss on disposal (5.6)
37.4
Consolidated proceeds on disposal 279.5
You should also remember that adjustments made to consolidated profit for non-cash items in the
reconciliation to cash flows from operating activities should reflect the amounts included within the
consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. Therefore, for example,
the amount of depreciation or profit on disposal should take into account any consolidation
adjustment.
Example: Consolidation adjustments
Landon Co. acquired 80% of Crowther Co. a number of years ago. In the year ended 31 December
20X1, Landon reported a depreciation charge of $560,000 and Crowther reported a depreciation
charge of $320,000. At the start of that year, Landon transferred a machine to Crowther with a
resulting increase in depreciation of $10,000 per annum.
The adjustment required to consolidated profit for the purposes of calculating cash flows from
operating activities is therefore:
$'000
Landon depreciation 560
Crowther depreciation 320
Consolidation adjustment (10)
Added back to profit in respect of depreciation 870
HKAS
7.39,42 3.1 Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries
Where a subsidiary undertaking joins or leaves a group during a financial year the cash flows of
the group should include the cash flows of the subsidiary undertaking concerned for the same
period as that for which the group's statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
includes the results of the subsidiary undertaking.
If a subsidiary is acquired or disposed of during the accounting period the net cash effect of the
purchase or sale transaction should be shown separately under "Cash flows from investing
activities".
581
Financial Reporting
The net cash effect is the cash purchase price/cash disposal proceeds net of any cash or cash
equivalents acquired or disposed of:
Subsidiary acquired Subsidiary disposed of

Cash price (X) Cash proceeds X
Subsidiary's cash and cash equivalents Subsidiary's cash and cash equivalents
at acquisition date X at disposal date (X)
Cash to acquire subsidiary (X) Proceeds of sale of subsidiary X
As the cash effect of the acquisition/disposal of the subsidiary is dealt with in a single line item,
care must be taken not to double count the effects of the acquisition/disposal when looking at the
movements in individual asset balances.
Each of the individual assets and liabilities of a subsidiary acquired/disposed of during the period
must be excluded when comparing group statements of financial position for cash flow calculations
as follows:
 Where a subsidiary is acquired in the period: property, plant and equipment, inventories,
payables, receivables etc. at the date of acquisition should be subtracted from the movement
on these items.
 Where a subsidiary is disposed of in the period: property, plant and equipment,
inventories, payables, receivables etc. at the date of disposal should be added to the
movement on these items.
Example: Disposal of subsidiary
Extracts from the statements of financial position of the Burke Group at 31 December are as
follows:
20X2 20X1
$'000 $'000
Current assets
Inventory 664 791
Trade receivables 515 532
Cash 214 431
Current liabilities
During the year ended 31 December 20X2, the Burke Group sold its controlling interest in Bryan
Co. for $6.5 million in cash. On the disposal date, balances included in Bryan’s statement of
financial position were as follows:
$'000
Current assets
Inventory 103
Trade receivables 45
Cash 79
Current liabilities
Trade payables 67
(a) What adjustments are required to consolidated profit in respect of working capital in order to
calculate cash flows from operating activities?
(b) What is the cash flow reported in investing activities in respect of the disposal of Bryan Co.?
582
Solution
(a) Working capital adjustments must take account of the disposal of Bryan Co.
$'000
Inventory
b/f 791
c/f 664
Decrease 127
Less: amount attributable to disposal (103)
Decrease in inventory (added back to profit) 24
Trade receivables
b/f 532
c/f 515
Decrease 17
Increase in receivables (deducted from profit) (28)
Trade payables
b/f 645
c/f 590
Decrease 55
Increase in payables (added back to profit) 12
(b) Proceeds from disposal of Bryan Co.

$'000
Cash proceeds 6,500
Cash in Bryan Co. at disposal (79)
Proceeds from disposal of Bryan Co. 6,421
HKAS 7.40 3.1.1 Disclosure

An entity shall disclose, in aggregate, in respect of both obtaining and losing control of subsidiaries
or other businesses during the period each of the following:
(a) The total consideration paid or received.
(b) The portion of the consideration consisting of cash and cash equivalents.
(c) The amount of cash and cash equivalents in the subsidiaries or other businesses over which
control is obtained or lost.
(d) The amount of the assets and liabilities other than cash or cash equivalents in the
subsidiaries or other businesses over which control is obtained or lost, summarised by each
major category.
Disclosures (c) and (d) are not required in respect of subsidiaries controlled by investment entities
and measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Illustration
The following illustrates the disclosure requires where a subsidiary is acquired:
Business combinations
Consideration transferred
583
Financial Reporting
The Company acquired 100% of the equity shares in Subsidiary Co during the year. Consideration
transferred was as follows:
Subsidiary Co
$000
Cash 5,600
Contingent consideration arrangement 350
5,950
The contingent consideration requires the Company to pay the vendors an additional $500,000 if
Subsidiary Co’s profit before interest and tax in the two years post-acquisition exceeds $1million.
$350,000 represents the estimated fair value of this obligation.
Assets acquired and liabilities recognise at the date of acquisition
Subsidiary Co
$000
Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents 90
Trade and other receivables 350
Inventories 180
Non-current assets
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables (210)
Deferred tax liabilities (340)
5,320
HKAS 7.42A
3.1.2 Changes in ownership interest with no loss of control
Changes in ownership interests in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control, such as the
subsequent purchase or sale by a parent of a subsidiary's equity instruments, are accounted for as
equity transactions (see HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements) unless the subsidiary is
held by an investment entity and measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Accordingly, the resulting cash flows are classified in the same way as other transactions with
owners, as cash flows from financing activities.
3.2 The non-controlling interest

The group statement of cash flows should only deal with flows of cash and cash equivalents which
are external to the group, so all intra-group cash flows should be eliminated.
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests should be included under the heading "Cash from
financing activities" and disclosed separately.
The following are extracts of the consolidated results for Marcus Company for the year ended
31 December 20X9.
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS (EXTRACT)
$'000
Group profit before tax 200
Profit attributable to:
Owners of the parent 126
Non-controlling interests 42
168
584
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION (EXTRACT)

20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Non-controlling interests 362 345
Calculate the dividends paid to the non-controlling interest during the year.
Solution
The non-controlling interests share of profit after tax represents retained profit plus dividends paid.
NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST
$'000
Balance as at 31 December 20X8 345
Profit for the period 42
Balance as at 31 December 20X9 (362)

Dividend paid (balancing fig) 25
3.3 Associates and joint ventures

The following cash flows should be included in a consolidated statement of cash flows in respect of
an associate or joint venture:
 Cash inflows from sales to the associate or joint venture
 Cash outflows from purchases from the associate or joint venture
 Dividends from the associate or joint venture
 Investments in an associate or joint venture
As transactions and balances between group companies and associates/joint ventures are not
cancelled for the purpose of producing consolidated financial statements, the normal approach to
adjusting consolidated operating profit for movements in working capital will ensure that cash
inflows from sales to associates/joint ventures and cash outflows on purchases from
associates/joint ventures are included within consolidated cash flow from operating activities.
Within the reconciliation of profit to cash flows from operating activities, however, the share of profit
from a joint venture or associate must be eliminated. This is treated as a non-cash item of income
and deducted from consolidated profit in calculating consolidated cash flows from operating
activities.
Instead, the dividend actually received from the associate/joint venture is included in the operating
cash flows section of the statement of cash flows. This is calculated by reconciling the opening
investment in associate/joint venture balance to the closing balance.
Where a group invests in or divests of an associate or joint venture in the year, the associated cash
flow is disclosed within the investing activities section of the statement of cash flows.
Example: Associate
The following are extracts of the consolidated results of Connie Company for the year ended
31 December 20X9.
585
Financial Reporting
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS (EXTRACT)

$'000
Group profit before tax 224
Share of associate's profit after tax 36
260
Tax (group) 42
Profit after tax 218
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION (EXTRACTS)

20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Investment in associate 312 306
Calculate the dividend received from the associate.
Solution
The associate profit after tax represents retained profit plus dividend.
ASSOCIATE
$'000
Balance as at 31 December 20X8 306
Share of profit for the period 36
Balance as at 31 December 20X9 (312)

Dividend received from associate (balancing fig) 30
3.4 Foreign currency cash flows

Foreign exchange issues are relevant to the consolidated statement of cash flows in two situations:
(i) Where an entity has transacted during the period in a currency other than its own
functional/reporting currency
(ii) Where a subsidiary has a different functional currency from that of the rest of the group.
3.4.1 Transactions in foreign currency – settled
In accordance with HKAS 21, where transactions denominated in a foreign currency have taken
place during a period, and been subsequently settled, any foreign exchange gain or loss is
For the purposes of preparing the statement of consolidated cash flows, no adjustment is required
in respect of these exchange gains or losses, as they represent amounts realised in cash flows.
The following example will help you to understand this.
Example: Settled transactions

Flora Co. sold goods denominated in pounds sterling in the year ended 31 October 20X1. At the
date of the transaction, a trade receivable and revenue of $40,000 were recorded after applying the
spot exchange rate on the date of the transaction. Before the period end, the customer paid the
amount due, which on the date of payment could be exchanged by Flora for $37,000. Accordingly,
Flora recognised an exchange loss of $3,000.
HKAS 7 requires that the applicable exchange rate in the case of foreign currency cash flows is
that applied on the date of the cash flow. Therefore, $37,000 must be reported as a cash inflow
within cash flows from operating activities in Flora's statement of cash flows.
586
As this amount is already included within profit for the year, no further adjustment is required:
$'000
Revenue 40
Exchange loss (3)
Net amount reported in profit 37
3.4.2 Transactions in foreign currency – unsettled

Where a foreign currency transaction has taken place during the period, however is not settled at
the period end, any monetary items are re-translated in accordance with HKAS 21 giving rise to an
exchange difference recognised in profit or loss. In addition a "foreign currency" balance is included
in the year-end statement of financial position.
On preparation of the statement of cash flows, therefore:
(i) the exchange gain or loss forms an adjustment within the reconciliation of profit to cash flows
from operating activities;
(ii) the exchange gain or loss is taken into account when calculating the movement in the
relevant monetary balance.
The following example will help you to understand why this is the case.
Example: Unsettled transactions

Webb Co. purchased goods denominated in Zloty during the year ended 31 December 20X2 for
ZTY 150,000. This was Webb’s first transaction with a new supplier. At the date of the purchase
the ZTY:$ exchange rate was 1.25:1 and accordingly a purchase and payable were recorded at
$120,000. At the period end, Webb had not paid the amount due to the supplier and the trade
payable balance was retranslated using the closing rate to $100,000, resulting in an exchange gain
of $20,000.
In respect of this transaction, a $100,000 expense is therefore reported in profit ($120,000
purchases net of $20,000 exchange gain).
In preparing the statement of cash flows, HKAS 7 requires that the gain on retranslation is
deducted from profits (which include the $100,000 net expense) as a non-cash item, so meaning
that the transaction in Zloty has a net effect on cash of:
$'000
Expense within profit figure (100)
Deduct non-cash gain (20)
(120)
It is clear from the scenario that no cash flow has occurred in respect of this transaction and the
adjustment for movement in payables must therefore serve to eliminate the $120,000. In order to
make the increase in trade payables equal to the $120,000 and so eliminate it in full, the exchange
gain must once again be taken into account:
$'000
ZTY payables b/f –
ZTY payables c/f 100
Increase 100
Remove effect of exchange gain 20
Increase in trade payables (add back to profit in reconciliation) 120
Therefore, the net effect on cash flows from operating activities is nil ($100,000 expense – $20,000
gain + $120,000 increase in payables).
587
Financial Reporting
3.4.3 Foreign subsidiary

The cash flows of a foreign subsidiary must be translated into the functional currency of the group
for inclusion in the consolidated statement of cash flows.
The applicable exchange rate is the spot rate on the dates of the cash flows, however the average
rate for a period may be used if this approximates to the actual rate. HKAS 21 does not allow the
use of the closing rate.
The draft consolidated accounts for Bestway Co. are shown below:
DRAFT CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31
DECEMBER 20X8
$'000
Operating profit 13,365
Share of profits after tax of associates 4,950
Finance cost (1,350)
Income tax (4,860)
Profit for the year 12,105
Attributable to: owners of the parent 11,205
non-controlling interest 900
12,105
DRAFT CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER
20X8 20X7
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Assets
Non-current assets
Buildings 18,675 19,800
Machinery 16,200 2,700
34,875 22,500
Goodwill 900 -
Investments in associates 13,590 12,690
49,365 35,190
Current assets
Cash 40,635 16,380
75,060 36,855
124,425 72,045
588
20X8 20X7
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Equity
Share capital 61,407 36,855
Retained earnings 31,005 22,500
92,412 59,355
Non-controlling interest 1,035 –
93,447 59,355
Loans 19,530 6,030
Deferred tax 270 117
19,800 6,147
Current liabilities
Trade payables 6,660 4,320
Income tax 4,158 1,953
Accrued finance charges 360 270
11,178 6,543
124,425 72,045
Notes
1 There had been no acquisitions or disposals of buildings during the year. The depreciation
charge for the year was $1,125,000 for buildings and $1,800,000 for machinery. Machinery
costing $3m was sold for $3m resulting in a profit of $900,000.
2 On 1 January 20X8 Bestway Co. acquired a 75% interest in Oneway Co.. The net assets at
acquisition were as follows:
$'000
Machinery 1,485
Inventories 288
Trade receivables 252
Cash 1,008
Trade payables (612)
Income tax (153)
2,268
Non-controlling interest (567)
1,701
Goodwill 900
2,601
7,920,000 shares issued as part consideration 2,475
Balance of consideration paid in cash 126
2,601
3 A dividend of $2,700,000 was paid during the year.
Required
Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows for the Bestway Group for the year ended
31 December 20X8 as required by HKAS 7.
Consolidated statement of financial position of the Jade Group as at 31 December
589
Financial Reporting
20X5 20X4
Non-current assets $m $m
Goodwill 9 13
Investment in associate 17 14
616 467
Current assets
Inventories 99 93
Short-term deposits 3.5 2
Cash 18 12
257.5 221
873.5 688
Equity attributable to owners of the parent
Revaluation surplus 5 -
575 482
Non-controlling interest 8 17.5
583 499.5
Borrowings 140 100
Finance lease obligations 15 4.5
Deferred tax 30 27.5
185 132
Current liabilities
Trade payables 90.5 49.5
Accrued interest 0.7 0.9
Finance lease obligations 7.5 1
Income tax payable 6.8 5.1
105.5 56.5
873.5 688
Consolidated statement of profit or loss of the Jade Group for the year ended 31 December 20X5
20X5
$m
Revenue 98.5
Cost of sales (55)
Gross profit 43.5
Other operating expenses (21)
Profit from operations 22.5
Finance cost (10)
Gain on sale of subsidiary 3
Share of profit of associate 5
Profit before tax 20.5
Tax (4.8)
Profit after tax 15.7
Owners of the parent 12.6
Non-controlling interest 3.1
590
Notes:
1 There was no other comprehensive income
2 Land was revalued upwards during the year and depreciation of $8 m was charged to profit
or loss in respect of other property, plant and equipment. Additions of plant include $30
million acquired under finance leases. A factory was disposed of in the year for $25 million in
cash; its carrying amount was $29.5 million at the date of disposal and the loss of disposal is
included within cost of sales.
3 During the year, Jade disposed of a subsidiary for $39 million cash consideration. At the date
of disposal the net assets of the subsidiary were:
$m
Property, plant and equipment 63.5
Inventory 2
Trade receivables 4.5
Cash 3.5
Trade payables (13)
Income tax (0.5)
Borrowings (20)
40
An 80% shareholding in the subsidiary had been acquired seven years previously for a cash
payment of $22 million, when its net assets were $22.5million, giving rise to $4 million goodwill.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of cash flows of the Jade Group for the year ended 31
December 20X5. No notes are required.
Topic highlights
As a result of the IASB’s Disclosure Initiative, amendments have been proposed to IAS 7
(HKAS 7) in order to improve the quality of cash flow information provided in financial
statements.
The Disclosure Initiative is a portfolio of projects designed to improve the information provided in
financial reports. The first output of the Initiative related to IAS 1 (HKAS 1); the second phase
relates to cash flows and IAS 7 (HKAS 7).
ED/2014/6 proposes that IAS 7 is amended to:
1 Require a reconciliation of the opening and closing amounts in the statement of financial
position of all amounts from which cash flows are classified as financing activities, with the
exception of equity items. Movements to be disclosed would include:
 Changes from financing cash flows
 Changes from obtaining or losing control of subsidiaries/other businesses
 Other non-cash changes (eg exchange differences and changes in fair value)
2 Improve disclosures about restrictions on cash and cash equivalent balances. such as tax
liabilities that would arise if foreign cash were transferred to an entity’s main country of
operations.
The first of the proposed changes would result in improved disclosure of debt movements in
a period; the second would enable users to better understand the liquidity position of an
entity.
591
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows
A statement of cash flows is a useful indicator of a

company's liquidity and solvency.
Presentation Consolidated statement of cash flows
Cash flows from operating activities Direct method: Acquisition/Disposal of subsidiary

may include: include gross Cash paid on acquisition/received on
cash receipts from sales operating cash flows disposal is stated net of cash in the
cash payments for operating subsidiary on disposal date
expenses Acquisition/disposal is taken into account
cash flows associated with income Indirect method: when calculating movements in working
tax adjust profit for non- capital and cash flows.
interest paid cash items, accrued
dividends paid /deferred amounts
and non-operating
cash flows.
Non-controlling interest
Include dividends paid to the non-controlling
may include:
interest as a cash flow from financing
receipts from the sale of non-
activities.
current assets and investments
payments to acquire non-current
assets and investments
Associates/joint ventures
interest received
Eliminate share of profit or loss in
dividends received
calculation of cash generated from
operations
Include dividend received from
associate/JV as cash flow from operating
activities
Cash flows from financing activities Foreign currency cash flows

may include: Do not adjust for exchange
proceeds of share / debt issue differences on settled amounts
payments on redemption of shares Adjust for exchange differences on
repayments of debt unsettled amounts
dividends paid Translate cash flows of a foreign
subsidiary at spot rate on the date of the
cash flows (or average rate) for inclusion
in consolidated statement of cash flows
Change in cash and cash
equivalents (including deposits
available on demand, money market
holdings, government bonds, treasury
bills, overdrafts repayable on demand)
Disclose: Non-cash transactions Components of cash & cash

equivalents
592
Answer 1
BESTWAY CO
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER
20X8
$'000 $'000
Net profit before tax 16,965
Adjustments for:
Depreciation (1,125 + 1,800) 2,925
Profit on sale of plant (900)
Share of associate's profits (4,950)
Interest payable 1,350
Operating profit before working capital changes 15,390
Increase in trade and other receivables (16,650 – 11,475 – 252) (4,923)
Increase in inventories (17,775 – 9,000 – 288) (8,487)
Increase in trade payables (6,660 – 4,320 – 612) 1,728
Interest paid (270 + 1,350 – 360) (1,260)
Income taxes paid (W1) (2,655)
Net cash used in operating activities (207)
Purchase of subsidiary undertaking (W2) 882
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W3) (15,915)
Proceeds from sale of plant 3,000
Dividends from associate (W4) 4,050
Dividends paid to non-controlling interest (W5) (432)
Net cash used in investing activities (8,415)
Issue of ordinary share capital (W6) 22,077
Issue of loan notes (19,530 – 6,030) 13,500
Dividends paid (2,700)
Net cash from financing activities 32,877
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 24,255
Cash at 1.1.X8 16,380
Cash at 31.12.X8 40,635
593
Financial Reporting
WORKINGS
1 Taxation
$'000 $'000
Opening balance
Income tax 1,953
Deferred tax 117
2,070
Statement of profit or loss expense 4,860
On acquisition of subsidiary 153
Closing balances
Income tax 4,158
Deferred tax 270
(4,428)
Cash outflow 2,655
2 Purchase of subsidiary
$'000
Cash received on acquisition 1,008
Less cash consideration (126)
Cash inflow 882
3 Purchase of tangible non-current assets: machinery
$'000
Carrying value at 1 Jan X8 2,700
Depreciation (1,800)
Disposal (3,000 – 900) (2,100)
On acquisition of subsidiary 1,485
285
Cash outflow on additions 15,915
Carrying value at 31 Dec 20X8 16,200
4 Dividends from associate
$'000
Opening balance 12,690
Share of profit after tax 4,950
17,640
Closing balance (13,590)
Cash inflow 4,050
5 Non-controlling interest
$'000
Opening balance –
Profit for year 900
On acquisition 567
1,467
Closing balance (1,035)
Cash outflow 432
6 Issue of ordinary share capital
$'000
Closing balance 61,407
Non-cash consideration (2,475)
Opening balance (36,855)
Cash inflow 22,077
594
Answer 2
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR JADE GROUP FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER
20X5
$m $m
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 8
Loss on disposal of property (25 – 29.5) 4.5
Gain on sale of subsidiary (3)
Share of profit of associate (5)
Finance costs 10
Increase in trade receivables (137 – (114-4.5)) (27.5)
Increase in inventories (99-(93-2) (8)
Increase in trade payables (90.5 – (49.5-13)) 54
Cash generated from operations 53.5
Finance costs paid (W1) (10.2)
Income taxes paid (W2) (0.1)
Net cash from operating activities 43.2
Sale of property 25
Purchases of property, plant and equipment (W3) (216)
Dividends received from associate (W4) 2
Proceeds from sale of subsidiary net of cash balance (39-3.5) 35.5
Net cash used in investing activities (153.5)
Proceeds from issue of share capital (230 – 150) 80
Repayment of finance lease obligations (W5) (13)
Cash proceeds of borrowings (W6) 60
Dividends paid to equity shareholders of parent (W7) (4.6)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interest (W8) (4.6)
Net cash from financing activities 117.8
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 7.5
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period (12 + 2) 14
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period (18 + 3.5) 21.5
Workings
1 Finance costs
$m
Opening balance 0.9
Statement of profit or loss 10
10.9
Closing balance (0.7)
Cash inflow 10.2
595
Financial Reporting
2 Taxation
$m $m
Opening balance
Income tax 5.1
Deferred tax 27.5
32.6
Statement of profit or loss expense 4.8
On disposal of subsidiary (0.5)
Closing balances
Income tax 6.8
Deferred tax 30
(36.8)
Cash outflow 0.1
3 Purchase of PPE
$m
Carrying amount b/f 440
Revaluation 5
Finance lease additions 30
Depreciation (8)
Disposal (29.5)
On disposal of subsidiary (63.5)
374
Cash outflow on additions 216
Carrying amount c/f 590
4 Dividend from associate
$m
Opening balance 14
Share of profits 5
19
Closing balance (17)
Cash inflow 2
5 Finance lease
$m
Opening balance (1 + 4.5) 5.5
New leases 30
35.5
Closing balance (7.5 + 15) (22.5)
Cash inflow 13
6 Borrowings
$m
Opening balance 100
Disposal of subsidiary (20)
80
Cash inflow 60
596
7 Dividend paid to owners of the parent

$m
Opening balance 332
Profits attributable to owners of the parent 12.6
344.6
Cash outflow 4.6
8 Dividend paid to the non-controlling interest
$m
Opening balance 17.5
Profits attributable to the NCI 3.1
Disposal of subsidiary (20% x 400) (8)
12.6
Closing balance (8)
Cash outflow 4.6
597
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Chong Co. 36 minutes

Chong Co. provides bookkeeping services for over 1,000 clients. The company now plans to
expand into banking and finance services but feels to do so it may have to expand the office. This
has prompted worries about the company's current cash flow position, especially the cash flow
from its present operations, and whether the cash flow is sufficient to support such a relocation and
expansion.
The directors of Chong Co. require cash flow information quickly and have asked you to provide a
calculation of the company’s net cash flow from operating activities for the year ended 31 October
20X7. Unfortunately, the urgency of the request has meant that the company's statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income is not yet available. However, they have provided you
with the following information:
SUMMARISED DRAFT STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 OCTOBER
20X7 20X6
$'000 $'000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment at cost 1,240 1,016
Less depreciation 276 232
964 784
Current assets
Receivables 380 319
Cash at bank 64 1
444 320
Total assets 1,408 1,104

Capital and reserves
Equity share capital 740 460
Retained profits 224 86
964 546
Long-term bond 120 280
Deferred taxation 72 44
192 324
Current liabilities
Bank overdraft - 56
Taxation payable 40 32
252 234
1,408 1,104
598
Additional cash flow information:

(i) Property, plant and equipment costing $52,000, and in respect of which $32,000
depreciation had been provided, was disposed of during the year. The items were sold for
$16,000. Operating profit includes any profits or losses on disposal.
(ii) The company paid a dividend of $40,000 during the year.
(iii) A finance charge of $15,000 has been recognised as an expense for the year. The actual
cash payment was $12,000.
(iv) The tax charge of $88,000 includes deferred tax of $28,000.
(v) Part of the bond was repaid during the year. This incurred a redemption penalty of $8,000
which has been written off against income.
Required
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows in accordance with HKAS 7 to calculate the company's
net cash flow from operating activities. (Note: a full statement of cash flows showing "cash
flow from investing activities" and "cash flow from financing activities" is NOT required in
answer to this part of the question.) (12 marks)
(b) Comment on whether the "net cash flow from operating activities" calculated in (a) above is
sufficient to support the proposed expansion of the office. (8 marks)
(Total = 20 marks)
599
Financial Reporting
600
chapter 21
Related party disclosures
Topic list
1 HKAS 24 Related Party Disclosures

1.1 Objective
1.2 Scope
1.3 Definitions
1.4 Disclosure
1.5 The importance of disclosure
1.6 Section summary
Learning focus
Related party transactions are a controversial area of accounting. They are, however,
relatively common in practice. You must be able to identify related parties and make the
necessary disclosures.
601
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.20 Related party disclosures 3
3.20.01 Identify the parties that may be related to a business entity in
3.20.02 Identify the related party disclosures
3.20.03 Explain the importance of being able to identify and disclose related
party transactions
602
21: Related party disclosures | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 24 Related Party Disclosures

Topic highlights
HKAS 24 is a disclosure standard. It does not prescribe any debits or credits. Its aim is to help
users understand whether the financial statements may have been affected by transactions which
were not on normal commercial terms. These sorts of transactions can arise when an entity has
transactions with entities or individuals who influence or are influenced by the entity. These entities
and individuals are called related parties. Disclosures of these transactions increase the
accountability of management to users of the financial statements.
Users of financial statements would normally and reasonably assume that the transactions
reported in those financial statements took place on normal commercial terms, i.e. on what is called
an arm's length basis.
If the two parties to the transaction were in some way closely related, e.g. family members or fellow
companies in a group, normal commercial terms may not apply. One party may influence or be
influenced by the other.
Therefore, HKAS 24 requires full disclosure of transactions with certain parties who are defined as
being related to the reporting entity which is producing the financial statements.
It is important to remember that disclosure of a related party transaction does not necessarily mean
there is anything wrong with the transaction. The transaction may in fact be on normal commercial
terms, or, if it is not, there may be very good reasons which are in the best interests of the entity. It
is simply about providing users with information which may be of interest to them and to allow them
to draw their own conclusions about the nature of the transaction, its effect on the financial
statements, its appropriateness and the stewardship of management.

HKAS 24 aims to ensure that financial statements contain the disclosures necessary to draw
attention to the possibility that the reported financial position and results may have been affected
by the existence of related parties and by material transactions with them. In other words, this is a
standard which is primarily concerned with disclosure.
HKAS 24.3 1.2 Scope

According to the standard, related party transactions and outstanding balances are to be presented
in separate financial statements of a parent, venturer or investor as well as in consolidated financial
statements. Disclosures should be in accordance with HKAS 27 and HKFRS 10.
This is an amendment to the previous version of HKAS 24 which did not require disclosure in the
separate financial statements of a parent or wholly-owned subsidiary that are made available or
published with the group's financial statements.
Related party transactions and outstanding balances with other entities in the group are to be
disclosed in an entity's financial statements. However, no intragroup transactions and balances
except for those between an investment entity and its subsidiaries are to be shown as they are
eliminated in the preparation of consolidated financial statements.
An investment entity is a particular type of parent company defined in Chapter 27.

The following important definitions are given by the standard. The definitions of control and
significant influence are the same as those given in HKAS 27, 28 and 31.
603
Financial Reporting
Key terms
Related party is a person or entity that is related to the entity that is preparing its financial
statements.
(a) A person or a close member of that person's family is related to a reporting entity if that
person:
(i) has control or joint control over the reporting entity;
(ii) has significant influence over the reporting entity; or
(iii) is a member of the key management personnel of the reporting entity or of a parent of
the reporting entity.
(b) An entity is related to a reporting entity if any of the following conditions applies:
(i) the entity and the reporting entity are members of the same group
(ii) one entity is an associate or joint venture of the other entity (or an associate or joint
venture of a group of which the other entity is a member)
(iii) both entities are joint ventures of the same third party
(iv) one entity is a joint venture of a third entity and the other entity is an associate of the
third entity
(v) the entity is a post-employment benefit plan for the benefit of employees of either the
reporting entity or an entity related to the reporting entity. If the reporting entity is itself
such a plan, the sponsoring employers are also related to the reporting entity
(vi) the entity is controlled or jointly controlled by a person identified in (a)
(vii) the person identified in (a)(i) has significant influence over the entity or is a member of
the key management personnel of the entity (or a parent of the entity)
(viii) the entity, or any member of a group of which it is a part, provides key management
personnel services to the reporting entity or to the parent of the reporting entity.
Related party transaction is a transfer of resources, services or obligations between a reporting
entity and a related party, regardless of whether a price is charged.
Control is the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain
benefits from its activities.
Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of
an entity, but is not control over those policies. Significant influence may be gained by share
ownership, statute or agreement.
Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control over an economic activity.
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning,
directing and controlling the activities of the entity, directly or indirectly, including any director
(whether executive or otherwise) of that entity.
Close members of the family of a person are those family members who may be expected to
influence, or be influenced by, that person in their dealings with the entity and include:
(a) that person's children and spouse or domestic partner
(b) children of that person's spouse or domestic partner; and
(c) dependants of that person or that person's spouse or domestic partner (HKAS 24)
HKAS 1.3.1 Related party relationships

24.10,12
When considering each possible related party relationship, attention must be paid to the
substance of the relationship, not merely the legal form.
604
The standard also clarifies that in the definition of a related party:

 an associate includes subsidiaries of the associate
 a joint venture includes subsidiaries of the joint venture
For example, an associate's subsidiary and the investor that has significant influence over the
associate are related to each other.
Example: Parent and subsidiaries

Parent entity has a controlling interest in Subsidiaries A, B and C, and has significant influence
over Associates 1 and 2. Subsidiary C has significant influence over Associate 3.
Are they related parties of each other?
Solution
For Parent’s separate financial statements, both subsidiaries and all three associates are classified
as related parties.
For Subsidiary A's financial statements, Parent, Subsidiaries B and C, and all three associates are
classified as related parties.
For Subsidiary B's separate financial statements, Parent, Subsidiaries A and C, and all three
associates are related parties.
For Subsidiary C's financial statements, Parent, Subsidiaries A and B and all three associates are
related parties.
For the financial statements of Associates 1, 2 and 3, Parent and Subsidiaries A, B and C are their
related parties. Associates 1, 2 and 3 are not classified as related to each other.
For Parent's consolidated financial statements, Associates 1, 2 and 3 are related to the Group.
HKAS 24.11 1.3.2 Relationships which are not related parties

HKAS 24 lists the following which are not necessarily related parties.
(a) Two entities simply because they have a director or other key management personnel in
common or because a member of key management personnel of one entity has significant
influence over the other entity.
(b) Two venturers, simply because they share joint control over a joint venture.
(c) Certain other bodies, simply as a result of their role in normal business dealings with the
entity:
(i) providers of finance
(ii) trade unions
(iii) public utilities
(iv) government departments and agencies of a government that does not control, jointly
control or significantly influence the reporting entity
simply by virtue of their normal dealings with an entity (even though they may affect the
freedom of action of an entity or participate in its decision-making process).
(d) Any single customer, supplier, franchisor, distributor, or general agent with whom the entity
transacts a significant amount of business, simply by virtue of the resulting economic
dependence.
605
Financial Reporting
HKAS 24.21 1.3.3 Related party transactions

HKAS 24 provides examples of transactions which may take place between related parties. They
include:
 purchases or sales of goods (finished or unfinished)
 purchases or sales of property and other assets
 rendering or receiving of services
 leases
 transfer of research and development
 transfers under licence agreements
 provision of finance
 provisions of guarantees and collateral security
 settlement of liabilities on behalf of the entity or by the entity on behalf of another party.
HKAS 1.4 Disclosure

24.13,17-
19,23,24 A notable feature of HKAS 24 is that it is almost wholly concerned with disclosures. Its provisions
supplement those disclosure requirements required by national company legislation and other
HKAS (especially HKAS 1 and HKFRS 12).
1.4.1 Parent – subsidiary relationship
Relationships between parents and subsidiaries must be disclosed irrespective of whether any
transactions have taken place between the related parties. An entity must disclose the name of its
parent and, if different, the ultimate controlling party. This will enable a reader of the financial
statements to be able to form a view about the effects of a related party relationship on the
reporting entity.
If neither the parent nor the ultimate controlling party produces financial statements available for
public use, the name of the next most senior parent that does so shall also be disclosed.
1.4.2 Key management personnel
An entity should disclose key management personnel compensation in total for each of the
following categories:
 Short-term employee benefits
 Post-employment benefits
 Other long-term benefits
 Termination benefits
 Share-based payment
If an entity obtains key management personnel services from another entity ('the management
entity'), the entity is not required to apply these requirements to the compensation paid or payable
by the management entity to the management entity's employees or directors.
1.4.3 Related party transactions
Where related party transactions have occurred during the period, the nature of the related party
relationship should be disclosed together with (as a minimum):
(a) The amount of the transactions
(b) The amount of outstanding balances, including commitments, and
(i) Their terms and conditions including whether they are secured and the nature of the
consideration to be provided in settlement; and
(ii) Details of any guarantees given or received
(c) Provisions for doubtful debts related to the amount of outstanding balances, and
606
(d) The expense recognised during the period in respect of bad and doubtful debts due from
related parties.
Amounts incurred by the entity for the provision of key management personnel services that are
provided by a separate management entity should be disclosed.
These disclosures should be made separately for the following categories of related party:
 The parent
 Entities with joint control or significant influence over the entity
 Subsidiaries
 Associates
 Joint ventures in which the entity is a venture
 Key management personnel of the entity or its parent
 Other related parties
Substantiation is a must if an entity decides to disclose that related party transactions were made
on terms equivalent to those that prevail in arm's length transactions.
Items of a similar nature may be disclosed in aggregate except when separate disclosure is
necessary for an understanding of the effects of related party transactions on the financial
statements of the entity.
Illustration
The following is an example of a related party disclosure
Related party transactions
Balances and transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties of
the Company, have been eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed in this note. Details of
transactions between the Group and other related parties are disclosed below:
Trade sales Trade purchases Amounts due Amounts due to
from related related parties
parties
20X4 20X3 20X4 20X3 20X4 20X3 20X4 20X3
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Fellow 456 342 210 198 34 45 17 19
subsidiaries
Holding company 634 567 – – 78 65 – –
Sales of goods to related parties were made at the Group’s usual list price less average discounts
of 6%. Purchases were made at market price discounted to reflect the quantity of goods purchased
and the relationship between the parties.
The amounts outstanding are unsecured and will be settled in cash. No guarantees have been
given or received. No expense is recognised in the period for bad or doubtful debts in respect of
amounts due from related parties. The above amounts due from / to related parties are included in
trade and other receivables and trade and other payales respectively.
Loans to / from related parties
20X4 20X3
$’000 $’000
Loans from fellow subsidiaries 4,000 3,200
The Group also received consultancy services from a company controlled by D Light, a director of
the Company, for which a management fee of $28,000 was charged.
607
Financial Reporting
Compensation of key management personnel

The remuneration of directors and other key management personnel during the year was as
follows:
20X4 20X3
$000 $000
Short-term employee benefits 1,200 1,100
Post-employment benefits ,500 450
Share-based payments 800 900
Termination benefits – 230
Other long-term benefits – –
2,500 2,680
The remuneration of directors and key management personnel is determined by the remuneration
committee having regard to the performance of individuals and market trends.
HKAS 1.4.4 Government related entities
24.25,26
The disclosures listed above need not be made in respect of transactions with:
(a) a government that has control, joint control or significant influence over the reporting entity,
and
(b) another entity that is a related party because the same government has control, joint control
or significant influence over both the reporting entity and the other entity.
Instead, the reporting entity should disclose:
(a) the name of the government and the nature of its relationship with the reporting entity
(b) information in sufficient detail to enable users of the financial statements to understand the
effect of related party transactions on those financial statements, including:
(i) the nature and amount of each individually significant transaction, and
(ii) for other transactions that are collectively significant, a qualitative or quantitative
indication of their extent.
1.5 The importance of disclosure

As we have already said, in the absence of information to the contrary, users of the financial
statements are likely to assume that an entity has entered into all of its transactions on an arm's
length basis, and acted in its own interests throughout an accounting period. Therefore they would
assume that the entity's results and position are a true reflection of the performance of the entity
and the stewardship of the management.
Where related party transactions have occurred this is not always the case. For example, the
following may affect the financial statements:
 The provision of a longer credit period to related parties
 A lower selling price to related parties
 Transactions which would not occur without the related party relationship
 Transactions with third parties which are affected by a related party relationship
Such transactions may have an adverse effect on the financial statements. Take, for example, the
situation where a director of Company A is the majority shareholder in Company B, and uses the
position of influence in Company A to ensure that Company A buys goods from Company B at
inflated prices. The profits of Company A are therefore lower than they might otherwise be and the
profits of Company B are higher. The shareholders of Company A are entitled to know about this
related party transaction so that they may assess its effect on the profits of Company A, and the
stewardship of the director.
608
Of course not all related party transactions are on preferential terms for one party or the other,
however they may be. The disclosures required by the standard are therefore designed to allow
users of the accounts to assess this.
1.6 Section summary

HKAS 24 is primarily concerned with disclosure. You should learn the following:
 Definitions: these are very important
 Relationships covered
 Relationships that may not necessarily be between related parties
 Disclosures: again, very important, representing the whole purpose of the standard
Anthony Co. (A) is an 80% owned subsidiary of Basso Co. (B). The directors of A are W, X, Y and
Z. Which of the following are related parties of A?
C, which is not part of the B group, but of which W is a director.
D, who owns 20% of the shares in A.
E, the financial controller of A (who is not a director of A).
F, the wife of the chairman of P, a company in the B group.
Heathcliff Co has the following relationships with a number of other companies:
 Control over Rochester
 Significant influence over two companies, Lockwood and Fairfax
 Joint control with another party, Wildfell, over a joint venture, Markham
 Joint control with another party, Eyre, over a joint venture, Haworth
Required
Apply the HKAS 24 definition of a related party to identify which companies are related to each
other.
Tennant Lilley Co, which runs a chain of garages, has two directors: Louis Richardson, who holds a
55% share in the company (which gives him control) and Flora McDonald, who holds a 25% share
in the company. The remaining 20% of shares are held equally by two external investment firms.
Flora McDonald also has a 40% shareholding (which gives her significant influence) in a McDonald
family company, eparts.com, and this company is a major supplier to Tennant Lilley Co. Flora has
no involvement in the day to day running of the company. Louis Richardson holds no shares other
than those in Tennant Lilley, but is a non-executive director of a toy manufacturing company,
Playwell.
Louis’ wife, Emma, owns 100% of the shares and is the sole director of a private company, Emma
Designs Co, which designs, sells and makes evening gowns.
609
Financial Reporting
During the year ended 31 December 20X6:

1 Emma Designs Co operated from a spare unit owned by Tennant Lilley, paying a total of
$400,000 rent. An amount of $26,000 is outstanding at the year-end.
2 Eparts.com provided Tennant Lilley with vehicle parts in transactions totalling $1.3million. At
the year end Tennant Lilley owes eparts.com $230,000.
3 Playwell used Tennant Lilley Co to service and repair its distribution vehicles. The cost of
this service over the year amounted to $120,000. There is no outstanding balance on
Playwell’s account in Tennant Lilley’s receivables ledger at the year end.
4 Tennant Lilley recognised the following amounts as directors’ remuneration :
Louis Richardson Flora McDonald
$ $
Salary 200,000 170,000
Bonus 30,000 25,000
Pension expense 20,000 17,000
Share options 3,400 4,800
(a) Identify which parties are related to Tennant Lilley Co in accordance with HKAS 24.
(b) Identify the disclosures that must be made in accordance with HKAS 24
(c) Draft the disclosures insofar as the information allows.
610
Topic recap
HKAS 24 Related Party Disclosures
Objective: to ensure that financial statements contain the disclosures

necessary to draw attention to the possibility that financial position and
performance may have been affected by material transactions with related
parties.
Related party Related party transaction
A person (or close family member of that A transfer of resources, services or

person) is related to an entity if they obligations between a reporting entity
Control/jointly control the entity and a related party regardless of
Have significant influence over the entity whether a price is charged
Are key management personnel
An entity is related to another entity if:

They are members of the same group
Include:
Purchases/sales of goods/services
One is an associate or joint venture of the
Purchases/sales of assets
other
Leases
Both are joint ventures of another party
Transfers of research and
One is a joint venture and the other an
associate of another party development
Transfers under licence
One is a post-employment benefits plan of the
Provision of finance
other or of an entity related to the other
Provision of guarantees
The entity is controlled/jointly controlled by a
Settlements of liabilities
person listed above
A person listed above is key management
personnel or has significant influence of the
other entity
The entity or a member of the same group
provides key management personnel services
to the reporting entity or its parent
Not included:
Two entities with key management personnel
in common
Two venturers which share control over a joint
venture
Bodies engaged in normal business dealings
such as providers of finance
Any single customer, supplier etc as a result
of economic dependence.
Disclose:
Relationships between parents and subsidiaries (regardless of whether they have transacted)
Name of parent/ultimate controlling party
Key management personnel compensation (categorised)
Where related party transactions have occurred, disclose by category of related party:
- Nature of the related party relationship
- Amount of transactions
- Outstanding balances and provisions against them
- Bad debt expense recognised in respect of related parties
611
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
Basso Group
F
Wife of chairman of P
R/P
B P
80%
20% Directors
D A W, X, Y and Z
Financial controller of A
Director
E C
1 C and A are subject to common influence from W, but C is not a related party unless one or
both companies have subordinated their own separate interests in entering into a
transaction. (This assumes that W is the only director to serve on both boards; if there were
a common nucleus of directors, a related party relationship would almost certainly exist.)
2 D is almost certainly not a related party. According to the definition, D might be presumed to
be a related party, but the existence of a parent company means that D is unlikely to be able
to exert significant influence over A in practice (depends on your argument).
3 E may be a related party, despite the fact that he or she is not a director. A financial
controller would probably come within the definition of key management personnel. The
issue would be decided by the extent to which E is able to control or influence the policies of
the company in practice.
4 F may be a related party. Companies P and A are under common control and F presumably
falls within the definition of close family of a related party of B. F is not a related party if it can
be demonstrated that she has not influenced the policies of A in such a way as to inhibit the
pursuit of separate interest.
Answer 2
Heathcliff  Heathcliff is related to Rochester by virtue of part (b)(i) of the definition of a
related party.
 Heathcliff is related to both associates Lockwood and Fairfax and both joint
ventures, Markham and Haworth by virtue of part (b) (ii).
 It is not necessarily related to Eyre and Wildfell, although the substance of the
relationship with these companies may show them to be related.
612
Rochester  Rochester is related to Heathcliff as stated above (part (b)(i) of the definition).
 It is also a member of the group that has significant influence over Lockwood
and Fairfax and joint control over Markham and Haworth and therefore it is
related to these 4 companies (part (b)(ii) of the definition).
 Rochester is not related to Eyre and Wildfell (unless the substance of its
relationship with them reveals this to be the case).
Lockwood  As stated previously, Lockwood is related to both Heathcliff and Rochester
(part (b)(ii)).
 It is also related to Haworth and Markham (part (b)(iv) of the definition)
 It is not related to Fairfax, Eyre and Wildfell (unless the substance of its
Fairfax  Again, as for Lockwood, Fairfax is related to Heathcliff and Rochester (part
(b)(ii)) as well as Haworth and Markham (part (b)(iv)).
 It is not related to Lockwood, Eyre and Wildfell (unless the substance of its
Markham  As described above, Markham is related to Heathcliff and Rochester (part (b)(ii)
and Lockwood and Fairfax (part (b)(iv)).
 It is also related to its other joint venturer, Wildfell (part (b) (ii))
 It is related to the other joint venture of Heathcliff, Haworth (part (b)(iii))
 It is not related to Eyre (unless the substance of the relationship suggests this
is the case)
Haworth  As described above, Haworth is related to Heathcliff and Rochester (part (b)(ii),
Lockwood and Fairfax (part (b)(iv)) and Markham (part (b)(iii))
 It is also related to its other joint venturer, Eyre (part (b) (ii))
 It is not related to Wildfell (unless the substance of the relationship suggests
this is the case)
Wildfell  As identified, Wildfell is related to Markham (part (b)(ii) but is only related to
other companies in the scenario if the substance of its relationship with them
reveals this to be the case.
Eyre  As identified, Eyre is related to Haworth (part (b)(ii) but is only related to other
companies in the scenario if the substance of its relationship with them reveals
this to be the case.
Answer 3
(a) Louis Richardson is related by virtue of the fact he controls Tennant Lilley and is a member
of the company’s key management personnel.
Emma Richardson is also related because she is a close family member of Louis
Richardson.
Flora McDonald is related to Tennant Lilley because she is a member of the company’s key
management personnel.
Playwell may be related to Tennant Lilley, depending on whether Louis Richardson’s non-
executive director role makes him key management personnel of the company. Key
management personnel is defined by HKAS 24 as persons with authority and responsibility
for planning, directing and controlling the activities of an entity, including any director
(whether executive or otherwise) of that entity. This definition would suggest that a non-
613
Financial Reporting
executive director is key management personnel and therefore Playwell is related to Tennant
Lilley.
Emma Designs Co is related to Tennant Lilley as it is controlled by Emma Richardson.
Eparts.com is not related to Tennant Lilley. Flora McDonald has significant influence over
eparts.com but that company would only be related to Tennant Lilley if Flora McDonald had
control over Tennant Lilley, which she does not.
(b) A related party transaction is a transfer of resources, services or obligations between a
reporting entity and a related party, regardless of whether a price is charged. Therefore
almost all transactions between a reporting entity and its related parties must be disclosed.
The following are related party transactions of Tennant Lilley:
 The rent agreement between Emma Designs Co and Tennant Lilley Co.
 The service and repair contract between Playwell and Tennant Lilley Co
 The employment services provided to Tennant Lilley by its directors.
(c) Related party transactions
The Company is related to:
 Emma Designs Co, a company owned by the wife of Louis Richardson, who controls
Tennant Lilley.
 Playwell, a company of which Louis Richardson is a non-executive director. [Note: this
assumes that Louis Richardson’s non-executive director role makes him key
management personnel of the company, as argued above.]
During the year the Company provided services to Playwell and rented a property to Emma
Designs Co. The total amount of these transactions in the year was as follows:
Provision of services Rental of property
$ $
Other related parties 120,000 400,000
The amounts outstanding at the year end in respect of these transactions was:
Provision of services Rental of property
$ $
Other related parties - 26,000
No amount has been provided for this amount and no amount was recognised in profit or
loss in respect of bad or doubtful debts with a related party in the year.
Remuneration of key management personnel
The remuneration of the directors, who are key management personnel of the group, is set
out below in aggregate for each of the categories specified in HKAS 24 Related Party
Disclosures. Further information is provided in the Directors’ Remuneration report.
$
Short-term employee benefits 425,000
Post-employment benefits 37,000
Share-based payments 8,200
614
Exam practice
Company A 25 minutes
The following table sets out the details of shareholders and members of the board of directors of
five entities:
Shareholders Member of board of Director(s)
Company A Mr. Kwok (75%) Mr. Kwok

Growth Investment Limited (GIL) Mrs. Kwok (wife of Mr. Kwok)
(25%) Mr. Ma on behalf of GIL
Company B Mrs. Kwok (50%) Mrs. Kwok
Ms. Chan (50%) Ms. Chan
Company C GIL (100%) Mr. Wang
Company D Mr. Ma (100%) Mr. Ma
Company E Mr. Scott (50%) Mr. Scott
Mr. Smith (50%) Mr. Smith
Mrs. Kwok
Required
Determine and explain whether the following entities and persons are related parties of Company A
under HKAS 24 Related Party Disclosures.
(a) Company B
(b) Company C
(c) Company D
(d) Company E
(e) GIL
(f) Mr. Ma
(g) Ms. Chan
(h) Mr. Wang
(14 marks)
HKICPA June 2011
615
Financial Reporting
616
chapter 22
Accounting policies,
changes in accounting
estimates and errors; events
after the reporting period
Topic list
1 HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in 5 HKAS 10 Events after the Reporting Period
Accounting Estimates and Errors 5.1 Objective
1.1 Objective 5.2 Definitions
1.2 Definitions 5.3 Events after the reporting period
2 Accounting policies 5.5 Further disclosure
2.1 Selection of accounting policy 5.6 Summary decision tree
2.2 Changes in accounting policy
2.3 Disclosing changes in accounting policy
3 Accounting estimates
3.1 Accounting for a change in accounting
estimate
3.2 Disclosure of a change in accounting
estimate
4 Errors
4.1 Accounting treatment to correct an error
4.2 Disclosure of an error
Learning focus
HKAS 8 is relevant to all organisations preparing financial statements in accordance with

HKFRS; it is important that you know how accounting policies should be selected, and when
they, and accounting estimates can be changed.
HKAS 10 is also very relevant in practice as all entities have a period between the reporting
date and authorising of the accounts during which time significant events may occur.
617
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.01 Accounting policies, changes in accounting estimates and 3
errors
3.01.01 Distinguish between accounting policies and accounting estimates
in accordance with HKAS 8
3.01.02 Account for a change in accounting policy
3.01.03 Account for a change in accounting estimate
3.01.04 Correct a prior period error
3.15 Events after the reporting period 3
3.15.01 Explain the period during which there is responsibility for reporting
events in accordance with HKAS 10
3.15.02 Define adjusting and non-adjusting events
3.15.03 Explain when the financial statements should be prepared on a
basis other than going concern
618
22: Accounting policies, changes in accounting estimates and errors; events after the reporting period
| Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in

Accounting Estimates and Errors
Topic highlights
HKAS 8 deals with the treatment of changes in accounting estimates, changes in accounting
policies and errors.

The objective of HKAS 8 is to prescribe:
 The criteria for selecting and changing accounting policies
 The accounting treatment and disclosure of:
– changes in accounting policies,
– changes in accounting estimates, and
– corrections of errors.
The standard is intended to enhance the relevance and reliability of an entity's financial statements,
and the comparability of those financial statements over time and with the financial statements of
other entities.
The standard was extensively revised in October 2008. The new title reflects the fact that the
material on determining profit or loss for the period has been transferred to HKAS 1.

Key terms
Accounting policies are the specific principles, bases, conventions, rules and practices adopted
by an entity in preparing and presenting financial statements.
A change in accounting estimate is an adjustment of the carrying amount of an asset or a
liability, or the amount of the periodic consumption of an asset, that results from the assessment of
the present status of, and expected future benefits and obligations associated with, assets and
liabilities. Changes in accounting estimates result from new information or new developments and,
accordingly, are not corrections of errors.
Material. Omissions or misstatements of items are material if they could, individually or collectively,
influence the economic decisions that users make on the basis of the financial statements.
Materiality depends on the size and nature of the omission or misstatement judged in the
surrounding circumstances. The size or nature of the item, or a combination of both, could be the
determining factor.
Prior period errors are omissions from, and misstatements in, the entity's financial statements for
one or more prior periods arising from a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that:
 was available when financial statements for those periods were authorised for issue
 could reasonably be expected to have been obtained and taken into account in the
preparation and presentation of those financial statements
Such errors include the effects of mathematical mistakes, mistakes in applying accounting policies,
oversights or misinterpretations of facts, and fraud.
619
Financial Reporting
Key terms (cont'd)

Retrospective application is applying a new accounting policy to transactions, other events and
conditions as if that policy had always been applied.
Retrospective restatement is correcting the recognition, measurement and disclosure of amounts
of elements of financial statements as if a prior period error had never occurred.
Prospective application of a change in accounting policy and of recognising the effect of a
change in an accounting estimate, respectively, are:
 applying the new accounting policy to transactions, other events and conditions occurring
after the date as at which the policy is changed
 recognising the effect of the change in the accounting estimate in the current and future
periods affected by the change
Impracticable. Applying a requirement is impracticable when the entity cannot apply it after
making every reasonable effort to do so. It is impracticable to apply a change in an accounting
policy retrospectively or to make a retrospective restatement to correct an error if one of the
following applies.
 The effects of the retrospective application or retrospective restatement are not
determinable.
 The retrospective application or retrospective restatement requires assumptions about what
management's intent would have been in that period.
 The retrospective application or retrospective restatement requires significant estimates of
amounts and it is impossible to distinguish objectively information about those estimates
that:
(i) provides evidence of circumstances that existed on the date(s) at which those
amounts are to be recognised, measured or disclosed; and
(ii) would have been available when the financial statements for that prior period
were authorised for issue, from other information. (HKAS 8.5)
2 Accounting policies
Topic highlights
Changes in accounting policy are applied retrospectively.
HKAS 8.7,10-
13
2.1 Selection of accounting policy
Where an HKFRS specifically applies to a transaction, then the relevant accounting policy should
be determined by applying that standard or interpretation.
Where there is no applicable HKFRS, management should use its judgment in developing and
applying an accounting policy that results in information that is relevant and reliable. Management
should refer to:
(a) the requirements in HKFRS dealing with similar and related issues.
(b) the definitions, recognition criteria and measurement concepts for assets, liabilities and
expenses in the Conceptual Framework.
Management may also consider the most recent pronouncements of other standard-setting
bodies that use a similar conceptual framework to develop standards, other accounting literature,
including Accounting Guidelines and Accounting Bulletins, and accepted industry practices if these
do not conflict with the sources above.
620
An entity must select and apply its accounting policies for a period consistently for similar
transactions, other events and conditions, unless a HKFRS specifically requires or permits
categorisation of items for which different policies may be appropriate. If an HKFRS requires or
permits categorisation of items, an appropriate accounting policy must be selected and applied
consistently to each category.
HKAS 2.2 Changes in accounting policy

8.14,16,17
The same accounting policies are usually adopted from period to period, to allow users to analyse
trends over time in profit, cash flows and financial position. Changes in accounting policy will
therefore be rare and should be made only if the change:
(a) is required by an HKFRS, or
(b) results in the financial statements providing reliable and more relevant information about the
effects of transactions, other events or conditions on the entity's financial position, financial
performance or cash flows.
The standard highlights two types of event which do not constitute changes in accounting policy.
(a) Adopting an accounting policy for a new type of transaction or event not dealt with
previously by the entity.
(b) Adopting a new accounting policy for a transaction or event which has not occurred in the
past or which was not material.
In the case of tangible non-current assets, if a policy of revaluation is adopted for the first time then
this is treated, not as a change of accounting policy under HKAS 8, but as a revaluation under
HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment (see Chapter 5). The following paragraphs do not
therefore apply to a change in policy to adopt revaluations.
HKAS 2.2.1 Accounting for a change in accounting policy
8.19,22-25
Where a change in accounting policy is the result of the initial application of an HKFRS, that
change should be accounted for in accordance with the specific transitional provisions, if any, in
that HKFRS. For example, HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement, issued in June 2011 should be
applied prospectively from the first date on which it is applied.
Otherwise, a change in accounting policy should be applied retrospectively.
Retrospective application means that the new accounting policy is applied to transactions and
events as if it had always been in use. In other words, the policy is applied from the earliest date
such transactions or events occurred.
Where it is impracticable (see Key terms) to apply a change in accounting policy retrospectively
because the cumulative amount of change cannot be determined, it should be applied
prospectively.
Example: Retrospective application
A training company capitalises all equipment based on cost but has not depreciated it over its
useful life due to the amounts involved being immaterial. In advance of extensive capital
expenditure, the company now wishes to change its accounting policy and apply in full the
provisions of HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment.
Details of the equipment are as follows:
Fair value Useful life/
Acquisition as at remaining useful
date Cost 1 January 20X6 life (years)
$ $
Equipment A 1 January 20X5 6,000 unknown 10
Equipment B Unknown 10,000 8,000 10
The value-in-use is the same as fair value at 1 January 20X6. The financial period of the company
ends on 31 December. Opening retained earnings are $700,000 on 1 January 20X5 and the
621
Financial Reporting
company made a profit of $20,000 for the year ended 31 December 20X6 and $30,000 for the year
ended 31 December 20X5 (excluding any adjustment for depreciation). In the year ended
31 December 20X6, the company elects to adopt HKAS 16 in full.
1 January 1 January 31 December
20X5 Depreciation 20X6 Depreciation 20X6
$ $ $
Equipment A 6,000 ÷ 10
Cost 6,000 6,000 6,000
Accumulated depreciation – (600) (600) (600) (1,200)
1 January Impairment 1 January 31 December
20X5 loss 20X6 Depreciation 20X6
$ $ $
Equipment B 8,000 ÷ 10
Cost 10,000 (2,000) 8,000 8,000
Accumulated depreciation – – (800) (800)

Alternative
1 December 31 December 1 January
20X5 Depreciation 20X5 Revaluation 20X6
$ $ $
Equipment B
Cost 10,000 10,000 ÷ 10 10,000 8,000
Accumulated depreciation – (1,000) (1,000) (2,000) –
1,000
Carrying amount 10,000 9,000 Impairment loss 8,000
As the company did not depreciate the equipment the carrying amount of the equipment would
have been the original cost of $6,000 and $10,000 as at 31 December 20X6. As there has been a
change in accounting policy in 20X6, the financial statements must be adjusted to present non-
current assets as though HKAS 16 has always been applied. The table above depicts the changes
in carrying amount if HKAS 16 had been applied on the initial recognition of the equipment.
Under these circumstances, the company must apply HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in
Accounting Estimates and Errors to adopt HKAS 16 and present one year's comparative
information. The financial statement extracts will be as follows:
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION RESTATED – EXTRACTS
1 January 31 December 31 December
20X5 Comparative 20X5 20X6
$ $ $
Equipment A 6,000 ÷ 10
Cost 6,000 6,000 6,000
Accumulated depreciation – (600) (600) (600) (1,200)
6,000 5,400 4,800
622
1 January 31 December 31 December

20X5 Comparative 20X5 20X6
$ $ $
Equipment B 8,000 ÷ 10
Cost 10,000 (2,000) 8,000 8,000
Accumulated depreciation – – (800) (800)
10,000 8,000 7,200
Retained earnings 700,000 +27,400 727,400 +18,600 746,000
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME RESTATED –

EXTRACTS
31 December 31 December
Year ended 20X5 20X6
$ $
Profit before depreciation 30,000 20,000
Depreciation Equipment A (600) (600)
Equipment B 0 (800)
Impairment Equipment B – –
27,400 18,600
Alternative presentation
Profit before depreciation 30,000 20,000
Depreciation Equipment A (600) (600)
Equipment B (1,000) (800)
Impairment Equipment B (1,000) –
27,400 18,600
Based on the above extract, the 20X6 profit would be adjusted for depreciation of $1,400 and the
opening retained earnings also adjusted for 20X5's depreciation/impairment charge of $2,600. One
year's comparative must be presented which means the profits for last year and the opening
retained earnings for last year are recalculated.
The adjustment must be made from the original date it affects the financial statements, this is
known as retrospective application.
HKAS
8.29,30
2.3 Disclosing changes in accounting policy
As a result of a change in accounting policy, retrospective adjustments should be reported as an
adjustment to the opening balance of each affected component of equity.
Comparative information should also be restated unless it is impracticable to do so. This means
that all comparative information must be restated as if the new policy had always been in force,
with amounts relating to earlier periods reflected in an adjustment to opening reserves of the
earliest period presented.
Certain disclosures are required when a change in accounting policy has a material effect on the
current period or any prior period presented, or when it may have a material effect in subsequent
periods.
These include:
(a) reasons for the change
(b) amount of the adjustment for the current period and for each period presented
(c) amount of the adjustment relating to periods prior to those included in the comparative
information
(d) the fact that comparative information has been restated or that it is impracticable to do so
623
Financial Reporting
An entity should also disclose information relevant to assessing the impact of new HKFRS on the
financial statements where these have not yet come into force.
Illustration
Due to the limited number of areas of choice available within HKFRS, most changes in accounting
policy are the result of new or amended standards. Illustrative disclosure notes detailing newly
implemented amendments and upcoming amendments are as follows:
Changes in Accounting Policies
The HKICPA has issued a number of amendments to HKFRSs and one new Interpretation that are
first effective for the current accounting period of the Company. Of these, the following
developments are relevant to the Company’s financial statements:
(a) Amendments to HKAS 32, Financial instruments: Presentation – Offsetting financial
assets and financial liabilities
The amendments to HKAS 32 clarify the offsetting criteria in HKAS 32. The amendments do
not have a significant impact on the Company’s financial statements.
(b) Amendments to HKAS 36, Recoverable amounts disclosure for non-financial assets
The amendments to HKAS 36 modify the disclosure requirements for impaired non-financial assets.
Among them the amendments expand the disclosures required for an impaired asset or cash
generating unit whose recoverable amount is based on fair value less costs of disposal. The
amendments do not have a significant impact on the Company’s financial statements.
Future changes in accounting policies
The Company has not early applied the following amendments and new standards that have been
issued by the HKICPA but are not yet effective for the year ended 31 December 2014. The
adoption of the following amendments or standards will not result in substantial changes to the
Company’s accounting policies.
Effective for
accounting periods
beginning on or after
Amendments to HKAS 16 Clarification of acceptable methods of January 1, 2016

and HKAS 38 depreciation and amortisation
HKFRS 15 Revenue from contracts with customers January 1, 2017
HKFRS 9 Financial instruments January 1, 2018
3 Accounting estimates
HKAS
8.32,33
Topic highlights
Changes in accounting estimate are not applied retrospectively.
Estimates arise in relation to business activities because of the uncertainties inherent within
them. Judgments are made based on the most up-to-date information and the use of such
estimates is a necessary part of the preparation of financial statements. It does not undermine their
reliability.
Examples of accounting estimates include:
 a necessary irrecoverable debt allowance
 useful lives of depreciable assets
 provision for obsolescence of inventory
 warranty obligations
624
HKAS 8.36
3.1 Accounting for a change in accounting estimate
The effect of a change in an accounting estimate should be included in the determination of net
profit or loss in one of:
(a) the period of the change, if the change affects that period only.
(b) the period of the change and future periods, if the change affects both.
In other words the change is applied prospectively.
Changes may occur in the circumstances which were in force at the time the estimate was
calculated, or perhaps additional information or subsequent developments have come to light.
An example of a change in accounting estimate which affects only the current period is the
irrecoverable debt estimate. However, a revision in the life over which an asset is depreciated
would affect both the current and future periods, in the amount of the depreciation expense.
Reasonably enough, the effect of a change in an accounting estimate should be included in the
same expense classification as was used previously for the estimate. This rule helps to ensure
consistency between the financial statements of different periods.
The materiality of the change is also relevant. The nature and amount of a change in an
accounting estimate that has a material effect in the current period (or which is expected to have a
material effect in subsequent periods) should be disclosed. If it is not possible to quantify the
amount, this impracticability should be disclosed.
HKAS 3.2 Disclosure of a change in accounting estimate

8.39,40
Where there is a change in accounting estimate, an entity must disclose the nature and amount of
the change that has an effect in the current period or is expected to have an effect in future
periods, unless it is impracticable to estimate that effect.
If the amount of the effect in future periods is not disclosed because estimating it is impracticable,
that fact must be disclosed.
Illustration: Prospective application

All equipment is capitalised based on cost and depreciated over its useful life. As at 1 January
20X6, the equipment's productivity is lower than expected and machines frequently break down.
A re-assessment of the remaining useful life has been done. Details of the equipment are as
follows:
Original useful life Remaining useful
Acquisition from life from 1 Jan
date Cost 1 January 20X5 20X6
Equipment 1 January 20X5 $10,000 10 years 5 years
1 January 1 January 31 December

20X5 20X6 20X6
$ $ $
Equipment 10,000 ÷ 10 10,000 9,000 ÷ 5 9,000
Cost 10,000 (1,000) (1,800) (1,800)
Acc depreciation – (1,000) 9,000 7,200
10,000
When the useful life changes, the depreciation charge will change resulting in $1,800 being
charged in the 20X6 financial statements. No adjustment to the comparative figures is required.
625
Financial Reporting
4 Errors
Topic highlights
Prior period errors must be corrected retrospectively.
Errors discovered during a current period which relate to a prior period may arise through:
 mathematical mistakes
 mistakes in the application of accounting policies
 misinterpretation of facts
 oversights
 fraud
Most of the time these errors can be corrected through net profit or loss for the current period.
Where they are material prior period errors, however, this is not appropriate. The standard
considers two possible treatments.
HKAS 8.42- 4.1 Accounting treatment to correct an error

45
Prior period errors must be corrected retrospectively. This involves:
(a) either restating the comparative amounts for the prior period(s) in which the error occurred
(b) or, when the error occurred before the earliest prior period presented, restating the opening
balances of assets, liabilities and equity for that period
so that the financial statements are presented as if the error had never occurred.
Only where it is impracticable to determine the cumulative effect of an error on prior periods can
an entity correct an error prospectively.
HKAS 8.49 4.2 Disclosure of an error
The following must be disclosed in relation to an error:
(a) Nature of the prior period error.
(b) For each prior period, to the extent practicable, the amount of the correction.
(i) For each financial statement line item affected
(ii) If HKAS 33 applies, for basic and diluted earnings per share
(c) The amount of the correction at the beginning of the earliest prior period presented.
(d) If retrospective restatement is impracticable for a particular prior period, the
circumstances that led to the existence of that condition and a description of how and from
when the error has been corrected.
Subsequent periods need not repeat these disclosures.
626
During 20X7 Gordon Co. discovered that certain items had been included in inventory at
31 December 20X6, valued at $4.2 million, which had in fact been sold before the end of the
reporting period and included correctly in revenue.
The following figures for 20X6 (as reported) and 20X7 (draft) are available:
20X6 20X7 (draft)
$'000 $'000
Sales 47,400 67,200
Cost of goods sold (34,570) (55,800)
Profit before taxation 12,830 11,400
Income taxes (2,245) (1,880)
Profit for the period 10,585 9,520
Retained earnings at 1 January 20X6 were $13 million. The cost of goods sold for 20X7 includes
the $4.2 million error in opening inventory. The income tax rate was 16% for 20X6 and 20X7. No
dividends have been declared or paid.
Required
(a) Show the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for 20X7, with the
20X6 comparative, and retained earnings.
(b) Prepare a disclosure note in respect of the error as required by HKAS 8.
Sherry Campbell Co (‘SCC’) runs a number of restaurants and hotels in Hong Kong. The Company
accountant has prepared draft financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X4. Extracts
are as follows:
 Retained profit for the year $255 million (20X3: $130 million)
 Opening retained earnings $985 million (20X3: $890 million)
Profit is stated before depreciation has been charged.
The following issues have not yet been dealt with by the Company accountant:
1 An industrial dishwashing machine was acquired from an Indian supplier on 1 January 20X3
at a cost of Rs 2 million. The cost was incorrectly treated as a cost of sales. The exchange
rate on the purchase date was 1 Rs: $0.12. At 31 December 20X3 it was 1 Rs: $0.11 and at
31 December 20X4 it was 1 Rs: $0.115.
2 An oven range originally costing $920,000 had a carrying amount of $368,000 at 1 January
20X4.
3 SCC had been charging depreciation at a rate of 15% on cost. However, it is now thought
that a rate of 20% is more appropriate.
4 SCC acquired an investment property on 1 January 20X2 at a cost of $250 million and
immediately let it to small business tenants. This is the company’s only investment property
and it elected to apply the cost model, adopting a 50 year useful life. At 31 December 20X4,
the SCC Board decided that the HKAS 40 fair value model should be adopted in order that
more relevant and reliable information were included in the financial statements. The
property had a fair value of $263 million at 31 December 20X2, $275 million at 31 December
20X3 and $279 million at 31 December 20X4.
627
Financial Reporting
Required
Draft extracts from the statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income and statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 20X4,
including 20X3 comparative amounts.
5 HKAS 10 Events after the Reporting Period

Topic highlights
HKAS 10 identifies events arising between the reporting date and date on which the financial
statements are authorised for issue as either adjusting or non-adjusting. HKAS 10 should be
familiar from your earlier studies, but it still could come up in part of a question.

HKAS 10 prescribes:
 when an entity should adjust its financial statements for events after the reporting period; and
 the disclosures that an entity should give about the date when the financial statements were
authorised for issue and about events after the reporting period.
Key term
The standard defines events after the reporting period as:
Those events, favourable and unfavourable, that occur between the end of the reporting period and
the date when the financial statements are authorised for issue.
It goes on to classify such events as one of two types:
(a) those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period
(adjusting events after the reporting period); and
(b) those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting period (non-adjusting
events after the reporting period).
HKAS 10.4-7 5.3 Events after the reporting period

The definition above defines an event after the reporting period as an event that occurs between
the reporting date and the date that the financial statements are authorised for issue:
End of reporting period Date of authorisation

↓ ↓
Accounting period Events after the reporting period
The authorisation process varies from entity to entity:

(a) Where an entity must submit its financial statements to shareholders for approval after the
financial statements have been issued, the date of authorisation is the same as the date of issue;
628
(b) Where the management of an entity must issue the financial statements to a supervisory
board for approval, the date of authorisation is the date on which the management
authorises the financial statements for issue to the supervisory board.
Events after the reporting period include all events up to the date when the financial statements are
authorised for issue, even if those events occur after the public announcement of profit or of other
selected financial information.
HKAS 10.9 5.3.1 Adjusting events
Adjusting events add information on conditions that existed at the reporting date. They may include
the following:
(a) The settlement after the reporting period of a court case which confirms an entity had a
present obligation at the end of the reporting period.
(b) The bankruptcy of a customer after the reporting period which confirms that the receivables
balance was overstated at the end of the reporting period.
(c) The sale of inventories after the year end at an amount lower than cost which confirms that
inventories were overstated at the end of the reporting period.
(d) The determination after the reporting period of the cost of assets purchased or proceeds of
the sale of assets before the end of the reporting period.
(e) The determination after the reporting period of the amount of profit-sharing or bonus
payments which confirms the existence of obligation at the end of the reporting period.
(f) The discovery of fraud or errors showing the financial statements are incorrect.
Any event after the reporting period which indicates that an entity is no longer a going concern is
classified as an adjusting event.
HKAS 5.3.2 Non-adjusting events
10.12,22
Non-adjusting events provide information about conditions arising after the reporting date.
Examples may include the following:
(a) The destruction of a non-current asset in the period after the reporting date due to fire or
flood.
(b) A decline in the fair value of investments after the reporting date due to circumstances
arising after the reporting date.
(c) A major business combination after the reporting period.
(d) An announcement of a plan to discontinue an operation.
(e) Purchases of assets, classification of assets as held for sale (HKFRS 5), disposals of assets
or expropriation of assets by government.
(f) An announcement of or commencement of a major restructuring.
(g) Share transactions after a reporting period.
(h) Abnormally large changes after the reporting period in foreign exchange rates.
(i) Changes in tax rates or tax laws enacted or announced after the reporting period.
(j) Entering into significant commitments.
(k) Commencing litigation due to events arising after the reporting period.
HKAS 10 is also clear that an equity dividend declared after the end of the reporting period is a
non-adjusting event and should not be recognised as a liability. This is because there is no
obligation at the reporting date; the obligation does not arise until the dividend is declared.
629
Financial Reporting

The accounting treatment of an event after the reporting period depends on how it is classified.
HKAS 5.4.1 Adjusting events
10.8,14,19
As the name suggests, the financial statements are adjusted to reflect an adjusting event. For
example, the bankruptcy of a customer after the reporting period should be written off in the year-
end financial statements as irrecoverable.
Disclosures within the financial statements should also be updated in the light of the adjusting
event.
Where an event after the reporting date results in going concern issues, for example, management
decides that it intends to liquidate the business or cease trading or that it has no other choice but to
either cease trading or liquidate the business or there is a deterioration in operating results or
financial position, the financial statements should be presented to reflect this decision. Therefore,
the going concern assumption is no longer appropriate and the financial statements should be
prepared on the break-up basis. Break-up basis accounts are discussed in more detail in section
13.2, Chapter 2.
HKAS 5.4.2 Non-adjusting events
10.10,21
Non-adjusting events do not result in adjustment to the financial statements, however where non-
adjusting events are material, they should be disclosed.
The following should be disclosed for each material category of non-adjusting event after the
reporting period:
(a) The nature of the event, and
(b) An estimate of its financial effect, or a statement that such an estimate cannot be made.
Illustration
Events after the reporting period
On 1 February 20X5, the premises of a Subsidiary Co were seriously damaged by fire. Insurance
claims have been put in hand but the cost of refurbishment is currently expected to exceed these
by $2 million.
HKAS 10.17 5.5 Further disclosure

In addition to the disclosures in respect of both adjusting and non-adjusting events, an entity must
disclose the date when the financial statements were authorised for issue and who gave that
authorisation.
If the entity's owners or others have the power to amend the financial statements after issue, the
entity must also disclose that fact.
Example: Adjusting or non-adjusting events

A company has a financial year end of 31 December 20X0 and the financial statements are
authorised for issue on 31 March 20X1. The following events have arisen during the three months
after the end of the reporting period:
1 The inventory of motor vehicles has deteriorated in value due to legislation passed on
31 January 20X1 which increases road tax and the new policy to introduce a one car per
family limit.
2 An ordinary dividend of $0.1 million is declared after the reporting date.
3 The credit department discovered that a major customer owing $2 million has gone into
liquidation.
630
Required
Discuss the implication of the above events and indicate whether they are adjusting or non-
adjusting events.
Solution
The impairment of inventory is a non-adjusting event because legislation is not passed until after
the reporting date. Therefore, at the reporting date the value of inventory is unaffected.
The dividend declared after the reporting date is non-adjusting also because as at the reporting
date there is no obligation to pay a dividend.
The discovery of an irrecoverable debt in the post-reporting date period provides evidence that the
debt could not be paid at the reporting date. Therefore, it is an adjusting event.

A decision tree for application of HKAS 10 is a useful summary of the key learning points:
Does an event fall in the period after No The event is not an event after the
the reporting date and before the reporting date and is outside the
financial statements are authorised for scope of HKAS 10
issue?
Yes
Does the event provide additional No Is the event material, disclosure of

evidence about a condition that which could influence the economic
existed at the reporting date, or does it decisions made by users?
relate to going concern matters?
Yes Yes No
The event should be adjusted for in Disclose the No adjustment or

the financial statements and nature and disclosure is
disclosures updated if necessary financial effect of necessary in the
the non- financial
adjusting event statements
in a note to the
financial
statements
631
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting

Estimates and Errors
Accounting policies Accounting estimates Errors
Specific principles, bases, Arise because of uncertainties Omissions from and

conventions, rules and and require judgment to be misstatements in prior
practices adopted by an applied e.g. useful lives of period financial statements
entity in preparing and depreciable assets, warranty arising from a failure to use
presenting financial obligations, allowance for reliable information
statements. receivables. available for use or
obtainable when the
financial statements were
prepared.
Accounting policies are A change in accounting
selected by applying relevant estimates is applied
HKFRS. prospectively so that it affects
only current/future accounting
If no HKFRS is available, periods.
management should apply
judgment and the policy
should result in relevant and
reliable information.
Unless impracticable,
correct retrospectively.
A change in accounting
policy only arises where:
required by an HKFRS
it results in more reliable Disclose: Disclose:
and relevant reporting The nature and amount of the Nature of the error
change unless impracticable to Amount of correction for
A voluntary change is estimate each prior period
applied retrospectively so Amount of correction at
that financial statements are the beginning of the
presented as if the policy had earliest prior period
always been applied. presented
Changes resulting from the

introduction of a new HKFRS
are applied in accordance
with the transitional
provisions of that HKFRS.
Disclose:
Reasons for change
Amount of adjustment for
the current and prior
periods
The fact that comparative
information is restated (or
that it is impracticable)
632
HKAS 10 Events after the

Reporting Period
Events which occur between

the end of the reporting period
and when the financial
statements are authorised for
issue.
Adjusting events Non-adjusting events
Events which provide evidence Events which are indicative of

of conditions that existed at the conditions that arose after the
end of the reporting period. reporting period.
Adjust the financial statements Event impacts going Event does not
and disclosures to reflect the concern. impact going
event. concern.
Adjust the financial Do not adjust the

statements so that financial statements.
they are prepared on
the break-up basis
rather than going
concern basis.
If material, disclose:
nature of the
event
estimated
financial effect
633
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
(a) STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
20X6 20X7
$'000 $'000
Sales 47,400 67,200
Cost of goods sold (W1) (38,770) (51,600)
Profit before tax 8,630 15,600
Income tax (W2) (1,573) (2,552)
Profit for the year 7,057 13,048
RETAINED EARNINGS
20X6 20X7
Opening retained earnings $'000 $'000
As previously reported 13,000 23,585
Correction of prior period error (4,200 – 672) – (3,528)
As restated 13,000 20,057
Closing retained earnings 20,057 33,105
WORKINGS
1 Cost of goods sold 20X6 20X7
$'000 $'000
As stated in question 34,570 55,800
Inventory adjustment 4,200 (4,200)
38,770 51,600
2 Income tax 20X6 20X7
$'000 $'000
As stated in question 2,245 1,880
Inventory adjustment (4,200  16%) (672) 672
1,573 2,552
(b) Prior period error

Some products that had been sold in 20X6 were incorrectly included in inventory at 31
December 20X6 at $4.2million. The financial statements of 20X6 have been restated to
correct this error. The effect of the restatement on those financial statements is summarised
below.
Effect on 20X6
$
(Increase) in cost of goods sold (4,200)
Decrease in income tax expense 672
(Decrease) in profit (3,528)
(Decrease) in inventory (4,200)
Decrease in income tax payable 672
Decrease in equity (3,528)
634
Answer 2
Dishwashing machine
The machine was incorrectly accounted for at the date of purchase; this is a prior period error and
must be corrected retrospectively ie as if the error had not occurred.
The machine should have been recognised as a non-current asset at 1 January 20X3 measured at
$240,000 (Rs 2 million  0.12).
This is a non-monetary asset and is not therefore subsequently re-measured in line with changing
exchange rates.
The machine should have been depreciated in the year ended 31 December 20X3 by 15% 
$240,000 = $36,000. The carrying amount at 31 December 20X3 should therefore be $240,000 –
$36,000 = $204,000.
The machine should have been depreciated in the year ended 31 December 20X4 by 20% 
$240,000 = $48,000. The carrying amount at 31 December 20X4 should therefore be $204,000 –
$48,000 = $156,000
Oven range
Rate of depreciation is an accounting estimate and any change to the rate is accounted for
prospectively, with no adjustment made to comparative balances or opening retained earnings.
Depreciation was previously charged at $138,000 ($920,000  15%) per annum.
The carrying amount of the oven range at 1 January 20X4 is $368,000.
Depreciation in the year ended 31 December 20X4 is $184,000 ($920,000  20%).
The carrying amount of the oven rangey at 31 December 20X4 is therefore $184,000 ($368,000 –
$184,000)
Investment property
HKAS 40 allows investment property to be measured using either the cost or the fair value model.
Where the fair value model is adopted, changes in fair value are recognised in profit or loss.
A change from one model to another is a change in accounting policy and must be accounted for
retrospectively.
The necessary adjustments are calculated as follows:
Cost model Fair value model Adjustment
$000 $000 $000
1 January 20X2 250,000 250,000
Profit or loss y/e (5,000) 13,000 18,000
31 December 20X2
31 December 20X2 245,000 263,000
Profit or loss y/e (5,000) 12,000 17,000
31 December 20X3
31 December 20X3 240,000 275,000
Profit or loss y/e Depreciation not yet 4,000 4,000
31 December 20X4 accounted for
31 December 20X4 279,000
Therefore the carrying amount of the property in the statement of financial position is $279 million
at 31 December 20X4 and $275 million at 31 December 20X3.
The gain on re-measurement recognised in the statement of profit or loss is $4 million in the year
ended 31 December 20X4 and $17 million in the previous year.
In the statement of changes in equity, retained earnings brought forward at 1 January 20X2 are
subject to a prior period adjustment of $18million.
635
Financial Reporting
Extracts from the statement of financial position at

30 June 20X4 30 June 20X3
$000 $000
Dishwashing machine 156 204
Oven range 184 368
Investment property 279,000 275,000
Extracts from the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year
ended
30 June 20X4 30 June 20X3
$000 $000
Depreciation of dishwashing machine 36 48
Depreciation of oven range 184 138
Gain on re-measurement of investment property 4,000 12,000
Extracts from the statement of changes in equity
Retained earnings
$000
At 1 July 20X2 890,000
Prior period adjustment 18,000
As restated 908,000
Profit for year ended 30 June 20X3 (restated – W1) 146,952
At 1 July 20X3 1,054,952
Profit for year ended 30 June 20X4 (W1) 258,780
At 30 June 20X4 1,313,732
W1 Adjustments to draft profit
y/e 30 June 20X4 y/e 30 June 20X3
$000 $000
Draft profit 255,000 130,000
Depreciation of dishwashing machine (36) (48)
Depreciation of oven range (184) Already recorded
Investment property 4,000 17,000
Revised profit 258,780 146,952
636
Exam practice
Star Workshop Inc 20 minutes

In the preparation of the financial statements for the year ended 31 March 20X2 of Star Workshop
Inc. (SW), the financial controller identified the following transactions / events which happened after
the end of the reporting period but before the date when the financial statements are authorised for
issue:
(a) A customer informed SW on 3 April 20X2 that all the goods delivered to the customer's
warehouse on 25 March 20X2 were not produced in accordance with the agreed
specification. SW reproduced the order and shipped the replacement goods to the customer
on 10 April 20X2. The invoice of $8 million issued on 25 March 20X2 has not been cancelled
and the customer had settled when it confirmed the acceptance of the replacement goods.
(4 marks)
(b) The production of a plant has been suspended since 15 April 20X2 due to the sudden
shortage of electricity supply. Sales orders of $15 million received in February 20X2 with a
planned production and delivery in May 20X2 could not be fulfilled. According to the terms of
the sale contracts, SW agreed to compensate the counterparty by 20% of the contract price
for breach of contract. (4 marks)
(c) An official letter issued on 8 April 20X2 by the local government regarding the approval of a
subsidy of $5 million has been received. The subsidy was given to SW because of the
employment of more than 1,000 local workers during the six months ended 31 December
20X1. According to the published government notice, enterprises are encouraged to employ
local workers and, subject to approval, a discretionary subsidy will be granted. SW applied
for the subsidy on 8 March 20X2. (3 marks)
Required
Discuss how the above transactions/events should be dealt with in the financial statements of SW
for the year ended 31 March 20X2.
(Total = 11 marks)
Strong Ability Company 29 minutes

In the preparation of the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X3 of Strong
Ability Company Limited (SAC), the following events have taken place after the end of the reporting
period but before the date when the financial statements are authorised for issue (i.e. 30 April
20X4):
(a) On 30 December 20X3, the directors of SAC proposed final dividends for the year ended 31
December 20X3 to the shareholders of SAC. Subsequently, the dividends were declared on
29 April 20X4 and payable on 15 May 20X4. Historically, SAC has the past practice of
paying dividends. (3 marks)
(b) SAC built up an additional structure outside its premises in June 20X3. On 30 November
20X3, a notice was issued by the Building Authorities against the premises owner in relation
to the unauthorised building works carried out during the year and SAC is required to rectify
it on or before 30 June 20X4. Otherwise, a maximum penalty of $400,000 will be imposed.
The cost to remove the unauthorised building works is $500,000 and its removal was
completed on 20 April 20X4. (4 marks)
(c) A disposal of certain production lines has been completed after approval from shareholders
of SAC on 15 January 20X4. The sale and purchase agreement was signed between SAC
637
Financial Reporting
and the buyer on 30 November 20X3 which has been approved by the board of directors but
subject to the approval of the shareholders of SAC. (You should comment on the
classification of these production lines as at 31 December 20X3). (5 marks)
(d) The new Companies Ordinance has come into effect from 3 March 20X4. The financial
controller of SAC is considering the impact on financial reporting and the directors’ report.
(You should advise not less than four changes in respect of these two areas). (4 marks)
Required
Discuss the implications for each of the above events.
(Total = 16 marks)
638
chapter 23
Earnings per share
Topic list
1 HKAS 33 Earnings Per Share

1.1 Objective of HKAS 33
1.2 Scope of HKAS 33
1.3 Definitions
1.4 Basic EPS
1.5 Weighted average number of ordinary shares: the effect of changes in capital
1.6 Diluted EPS
1.7 Diluted EPS: contingently issuable ordinary shares
1.8 Summary of approach to calculating diluted EPS
1.9 Presentation
1.10 Disclosure
1.11 Significance of earnings per share
1.12 Limitation of EPS
Learning focus
HKAS 33 is applicable to listed entities. You should be aware of the calculation of EPS and,
since this is a measurement of performance, how it can be manipulated.
639
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.22 Earnings per share 3
3.22.01 Explain the meaning and significance of a company’s earnings per
share
3.22.02 Calculate the earnings per share, including the impact of a bonus
issue, a rights issue and an issue of shares at full market value in
3.22.03 Explain the relevance of a company’s diluted earnings per share
3.22.04 Discuss the limitations of using earnings per share as a
performance measure
640
23: Earnings per share | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 33 Earnings Per Share

Topic highlights
Earnings per share is a measure of the amount of profits earned by a company for each ordinary
share. Earnings are profits after tax and preference dividends.
HKAS 33.1 1.1 Objective of HKAS 33

HKAS 33 provides guidance on calculating and disclosing earnings per share (EPS). The purpose
of disclosing EPS is to enable comparison of the performance of an entity, both over time and with
other entities.
HKAS 33.2-4 1.2 Scope of HKAS 33

HKAS 33 has the following scope restrictions:
(a) Only companies with (potential) ordinary shares which are publicly traded need to present
EPS (including companies in the process of being listed).
(b) EPS need only be presented on the basis of consolidated results where the parent's
results are shown as well.
(c) Where companies choose to present EPS, even when they have no (potential) ordinary
shares which are traded, they must do so according to HKAS 33.

The following definitions are given in HKAS 33.
Key terms
Ordinary share. An equity instrument that is subordinate to all other classes of equity instruments.
Potential ordinary share. A financial instrument or other contract that may entitle its holder to
ordinary shares.
Options, warrants and their equivalents. Financial instruments that give the holder the right to
purchase ordinary shares.
Contingently issuable ordinary shares are ordinary shares issuable for little or no cash or other
consideration upon the satisfaction of specified conditions in a contingent share agreement.
Contingent share agreement. An agreement to issue shares that is dependent on the satisfaction
of specified conditions.
Dilution is a reduction in earnings per share or an increase in loss per share resulting from the
assumption that convertible instruments are converted, that options or warrants are exercised, or
that ordinary shares are issued upon the satisfaction of specified conditions.
Antidilution is an increase in earnings per share or a reduction in loss per share resulting from the
that ordinary shares are issued upon the satisfaction of certain conditions.
(HKAS 33.5)
1.3.1 Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares are defined above as those shares which are subordinate to other classes of
share capital. This means that ordinary shares participate in profit for the period only after other
types of shares, e.g. preference shares. The standard also notes that there may be more than
641
Financial Reporting
one class of ordinary shares and ordinary shares of the same class have the same right to receive
dividends.
1.3.2 Potential ordinary shares
HKAS 33 identifies the following examples of potential ordinary shares:
(a) Financial liabilities or equity instruments, including preference shares, that are
convertible into ordinary shares
(b) Share warrants and options
(c) Shares that would be issued upon the satisfaction of certain conditions resulting from
contractual arrangements, such as the purchase of a business or other assets
HKAS 33.10 1.4 Basic EPS

Topic highlights
Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit or loss for the period attributable to ordinary
shareholders by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period.
Basic EPS is calculated as:

Profit / (loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period
Both of the terms within this calculation require further explanation.

HKAS 1.4.1 Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders
33.12,14,16
The profit or loss attributable to ordinary shareholders for a period is calculated as:
 profit after all items of income and expense (including tax and non-controlling interests),
less
 profit after tax attributable to irredeemable preference shareholders, including preference
dividends and differences arising on the settlement of preference shares.
Note that the adjustment above only related to irredeemable preference shares since amounts
relating to preference shares classified as debt (redeemable preference shares) are included in
profit or loss for the period.
Preference dividends deducted from profit consist of the following:
(a) Preference dividends on non-cumulative preference shares declared in respect of the period.
(b) Preference dividends for cumulative preference shares required for the period, whether or
not they have been declared (excluding those paid/declared during the period in respect of
previous periods).
If an entity purchases its own preference shares for more than their carrying amount the excess
should be treated as a return to the preference shareholders and deducted from profit or loss
attributable to ordinary equity holders.
Example: Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders

Sunwin Co. is a listed company with the following shares in issue at 31 December 20X0:
Number of shares
Ordinary shares 100 million
Irredeemable cumulative preference shares 10 million
Redeemable preference shares 20 million
642
On 30 June 20X0, 5 million irredeemable cumulative preference shares of the same class as the
10 million remaining were cancelled and shareholders paid 67c per share. At this date the shares
had a carrying amount of 50c each.
Fixed dividends on preference shares are as follows:
 Irredeemable cumulative preference shares: 3c every six months
 Redeemable preference shares: 5c per annum
Profit after tax reported for the year ended 31 December 20X0 was $36,900,000.
Required
What are profits attributable to ordinary shareholders for the purposes of calculating basic EPS?
Solution
$
Profit after tax 36,900,000
Redeemable preference share dividend does not need
adjustment as it will already have been accounted for as a
finance cost within the calculation of profit
Irredeemable preference dividend:
1.1.X0 – 30.6.X0 15m shares  3c (450,000)
1.7.X0 – 31.12.X0 10m shares  3c (300,000)
Excess paid to cancel shares (67c – 50c)  5m (850,000)
Profits attributable to ordinary shareholders 35,300,000
HKAS 33.19- 1.4.2 Weighted average number of ordinary shares

24
The number of ordinary shares used should be the weighted average number of ordinary shares
outstanding during the period. This figure therefore reflects changes in capital during the period
due to new share issues and so on.
The time-weighting factor is the number of days the shares were outstanding compared with the
total number of days in the period. A reasonable approximation is usually adequate.
Shares are usually included in the weighted average number of shares from the date
consideration is receivable which is usually the date of issue. HKAS 33 does provide the
following guidance on the application of this rule:
Consideration Start date for inclusion
In exchange for cash When cash is receivable

On the voluntary reinvestment of dividends on ordinary or The dividend payment date
preference shares
As a result of the conversion of a debt instrument to ordinary Date interest ceases accruing
shares
In place of interest or principal on other financial instruments Date interest ceases accruing
In exchange for the settlement of a liability of the entity The settlement date
As consideration for the acquisition of an asset other than cash The date on which the
acquisition is recognised
For the rendering of services to the entity As services are rendered
Ordinary shares issued as purchase consideration in an acquisition should be included as of the

date of acquisition because the acquired entity's results will also be included from that date.
643
Financial Reporting
Where a uniting of interests takes place the number of ordinary shares used for the calculation is
the aggregate of the weighted average number of shares of the combined entities, adjusted to
equivalent shares of the entity whose shares are outstanding after the combination.
Ordinary shares that will be issued on the conversion of a mandatorily convertible instrument are
included in the calculation from the date the contract is entered into.
If ordinary shares are partly paid, they are treated as a fraction of an ordinary share to the extent
they are entitled to dividends relative to fully paid ordinary shares.
Contingently issuable shares (including those subject to recall) are included in the computation
when all necessary conditions for issue have been satisfied.
1.4.3 Required basic EPS
Basic EPS should be calculated for profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of the
parent entity and profit or loss from continuing operations attributable to those equity holders
(if this is presented).
1.5 Weighted average number of ordinary shares: the effect of

HKAS 33.26 changes in capital
Where there is a change in the share capital structure of an entity, the issue with regard to earnings
per share is ensuring that like is compared with like. This will become more clear as you read
through sections 1.5.1 to 1.5.3 and work the examples within them.
1.5.1 New share issues and share buy backs
Where new shares are issued at market price the number of shares will increase and there is a
corresponding increase in resources which may be utilised to generate profits.
Where ordinary shares are issued but not fully paid, they are treated in the calculation of basic
earnings per share as a fraction of an ordinary share to the extent that they were entitled to
participate in dividends during the period relative to a fully paid ordinary share. Therefore, if
2 million shares are issued, but only half of the issue price is paid and therefore the shareholder is
entitled to only 50% of a dividend, then only 1 million shares (i.e. 50%  2 million) are included in
the calculation of weighted average number of shares.
Where a share buy back takes place, there is a reduction in the number of shares and a
corresponding decrease in resources available to generate profits (as cash is paid by the entity to
the selling shareholders).
In both of these cases, therefore, EPS after the share issue or buy back can be compared on a like
for like basis with EPS before the event as the increase (or decrease) in the numerator of the EPS
fraction corresponds to the increase (or decrease) in the denominator of the fraction.
Example: Issue of ordinary shares at full market price

The profit after tax of AB Co. for the year ended 31 December 20X5 was $3,000,000.
At 31 December 20X4 the company had in issue 1,000,000 ordinary shares.
On 1 July 20X5, AB Co. issued 400,000 ordinary shares at the full market price for cash.
What is the basic EPS for the year ended 31 December 20X5?
644
Solution
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding for year 20X5:
6 months
1,000,000 + 400,000  = 1,200,000
12 months
$3,000,000
Therefore, EPS for year 20X5 = = $2.50
1,200,000
HKAS 1.5.2 Bonus issues, share splits and reverse share splits
33.28,29
Events such as bonus issues change the number of shares outstanding, without a corresponding
change in resources.
Here it is necessary to make adjustments so that the current and prior period EPS figures are
comparable.
Bonus issues and share splits can be considered together as they have a similar effect.
In both cases, ordinary shares are issued to existing shareholders for no additional
consideration. The number of ordinary shares has increased without an increase in resources.
Therefore, the number of ordinary shares outstanding before the event must be adjusted for
the proportionate change in the number of shares outstanding as if the event had occurred at the
beginning of the earliest period reported.
Reverse share splits are a consolidation of ordinary shares which generally reduces the number of
ordinary shares outstanding without a corresponding reduction in resources. However, when the
overall effect is a share repurchase at fair value, the reduction in the number of ordinary shares
outstanding is the result of a corresponding reduction in resources. The weighted average number
of ordinary shares outstanding for the period in which the combined transaction takes place is
adjusted for the reduction in the number of ordinary shares from the date the special dividend is
recognised.
Example: Issue of ordinary share by bonus issue

The profit of CD Co. for the year ended 31 December 20X6 was $5,600,000. For the year ended
31 December 20X7 this increased to $7,000,000.
The company had issued share capital of 1,000,000 ordinary shares as at 31 December 20X6.
On 1 July 20X7, CD Co. issued 400,000 ordinary shares fully paid by way of capitalisation of
reserves in the proportion of 2 for 5.
What is the basic EPS of CD Co. for both years?
Solution
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding for year 20X7:
2
1,000,000 + 1,000,000  /5 = 1,400,000
An alternative calculation of this amount is as follows:
1 Jan 20X7 – 30 June 1,000,000  7/5  6/12 months 700,000
20X7
Bonus issue 400,000
1 July 20X7 – 31 Dec 1,400,000  6/12 months 700,000
20X7
1,400,000
Calculation using the tabular approach may prove easier to use in examples where there is more
than one issue in the year.
645
Financial Reporting
Note that the bonus fraction of 7/5 is calculated as the number of shares post bonus issue/number
of shares pre bonus issue, and is applied to all periods in the table before the bonus issue.
$7,000,000
EPS (20X7) = = $5.00
1,400,000
$5,600,000
Original EPS (20X6) = = $5.60
1,000,000
$5,600,000
Restated EPS (20X6) = = $4.00
1,400,000
The restated EPS for 20X6 may alternatively be calculated using the reciprocal of the bonus
fraction ($5.60  5/7 = $4.00).
Note. Number of shares for all earlier accounting periods should be adjusted by the new issue as
the reserves used for the bonus issue are carried down from prior periods.
HKAS 33, 1.5.3 Rights issues

Appendix
A.A2 A rights issue of shares is an issue of new shares to existing shareholders at a price below the
current market value. The offer of new shares is made on the basis of x new shares for every y
shares currently held, e.g. a 1 for 3 rights issue is an offer of one new share at the offer price for
every three shares currently held.
As the issue price is below market value, a rights issue is treated as a combination of an issue at
fair value and a bonus issue.
In order to calculate the weighted average number of shares when there has been a rights issue,
an adjustment factor is required:
Pre rights issue price of shares
Adjustment factor =
Theoretical ex - rights price (TERP)
The TERP is the theoretical price at which the shares would trade after the rights issue and takes
into account the diluting effect of the bonus element in the rights issue. It is calculated as:
Total market value of original shares pre rights issue + Proceeds of rights issue
TERP =
Number of shares post rights issue
The adjustment factor is used to increase the number of shares in issue prior to the rights issue for
the bonus element.
The comparative EPS for the previous period is adjusted by the reciprocal of the rights adjustment
factor.
Example: Theoretical ex-rights value
The following information is provided for an entity which is making a rights issue.
20X2 20X3
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity $600,000 $720,000
Shares outstanding before rights issue: 100,000 shares
Rights issue: One new share for each five outstanding shares (20,000 new shares total)
Exercise price: $5.00
Date of rights issue: 1 March 20X3
Market price of one ordinary share immediately before exercise on 1 March 20X3: $8.00
Reporting date 31 December
Required
Calculate the theoretical ex-rights value per share and the basic EPS for each of the years 20X2
and 20X3.
646
Solution
1 Theoretical ex-rights price is calculated as:
100,000  $8.00  +(20,000  $5.00) = 900,000

= $7.50
120,000 120,000
An alternative calculation is:

$
Old shares 5 @ $8.00 = 40.00
New shares 1 @ $5.00 = 5.00
6 45.00 therefore $45.00/6 = $7.50
2 The adjustment factor is therefore $8.00/$7.50

3 The weighted average number of ordinary shares for 20X3 is therefore calculated as:
1 January – 28 February 100,000 shares  $8.00  2/12 17,778

$7.50
1 March – 31 December 120,000 shares  10/12 100,000
Weighted average 117,778
1 Basic EPS for 20X3 is therefore $720,000/117,778 shares = $6.11

2 Basic EPS for 20X2 as originally reported is $600,000/100,000 shares = $6.00
3 Basic EPS for 20X2 as adjusted is $6.00  $7.50/$8.00 = $5.63
Gardner Edson Co has reported the following after tax profit figures in recent years:
$’m
20X6 110
20X7 150
20X8 180
On 1 January 20X6 and 20X7, the number of shares outstanding was 5,000,000. During 20X7, the
company announced a rights issue with the following details:
Rights: 1 new share for every 5 outstanding
Exercise price: $5
Las date to exercise rights 1 March 20X7
The market value of one share in Gardner Edson Co immediately prior to exercise on 1 March
20X7 was $11.
Required
Calculate earnings per share for each of the years 20X6, 20X7 and 20X8.
Random Co., a listed company, had 5 million ordinary shares in issue at 1 January 20X1. Between
this date and 31 December 20X2, the following share issues took place:
1 May 20X1 1 for 5 bonus issue
1 October 20X1 Cash issue: 1 million shares were issued at $3.50. $2.10 has been paid in
respect of each share and accordingly holders of these 1m shares are entitled
647
Financial Reporting
to 60% dividends until such time as the share is fully paid on

31 December 20X1.
1 August 20X2 1 for 7 rights issue at $3.55. The issue was fully subscribed and the market
price of a share immediately prior to the issue was $3.65.
Profits for the years ended 31 December 20X1 and 20X2 are $4,981,500 and $6,165,200
respectively.
Required
(a) What is the basic earnings per share as reported in 20X1 and 20X2?
(b) What is the restated 20X1 basic earnings per share figure for inclusion in the 20X2 financial
statements?
1.6 Diluted EPS

Topic highlights
Diluted EPS is calculated by adjusting the net profit attributable to ordinary shareholders and the
weighted average number of shares outstanding for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary
shares.
Like basic EPS, diluted EPS provides a measure of the interest of each ordinary share in the profits
of an entity. Unlike basic earnings per share, diluted EPS takes into account dilutive potential
ordinary shares outstanding during the period.
Diluted EPS is therefore the calculation of what the EPS would have been if all the dilutive potential
ordinary shares had been actual shares in issue during the period.
HKAS 33.41- 1.6.1 Dilutive potential ordinary shares
44
Dilutive potential ordinary shares are securities which do not (at present) have any "claim" to a
share of equity earnings, but may be converted to ordinary shares and so give rise to such a
claim in the future. They include:
 options or warrants
 convertible loan stock or convertible preference shares
 equity shares which at present are not entitled to any dividend, but will be entitled after
some future date.
If these instruments are converted into ordinary shares, the number of shares ranking for dividend
will increase, however the profits figure will generally not increase proportionately. Therefore, such
a conversion will reduce the profits attributable to each share. In other words they will have a
dilutive effect on EPS.
Diluted EPS is therefore calculated to indicate to investors the possible effects of a future dilution.
Note that only dilutive potential ordinary shares form part of the diluted EPS calculation.
Potential ordinary shares may also be anti-dilutive. In this case a conversion would increase the
number of ordinary shares but increase earnings to a greater extent, meaning that EPS increases
overall.
In determining whether potential ordinary shares are dilutive or antidilutive, each issue or series of
potential ordinary shares is considered separately rather than in aggregate.
648
HKAS 33.31, 1.6.2 Calculation of diluted earnings per share

44
Diluted earnings per share is calculated as:
Profits in basic EPS + effect on profit of dilutive potential ordinary shares
Number of shares in basic EPS + dilutive potential ordinary shares
This calculation is achieved in steps, with each group of potentially dilutive ordinary shares added
in turn from the most dilutive to the least dilutive. Options and warrants are generally included first
as they do not affect the profits part of the calculation.
After each addition, diluted EPS is calculated and the diluted earnings per share is the lowest figure
calculated at any stage in the sequence.
HKAS 1.6.3 Impact of potential ordinary shares on profits

33.33,35
The earnings calculated for basic EPS should be adjusted by the post-tax (including deferred tax)
effect of converting potential ordinary shares.
Adjustments may include:
 any dividends on dilutive potential ordinary shares that were deducted to arrive at earnings
for basic EPS.
 interest recognised in the period for the dilutive potential ordinary shares.
 any other changes in income or expenses (fees and discount, premium accounted for as
yield adjustments) that would result from the conversion of the dilutive potential ordinary
shares.
The conversion of some potential ordinary shares may lead to changes in other income or
expenses. For example, the reduction of interest expense related to converting some convertible
loan stock and the resulting increase in net profit for the period may lead to an increase in the
expense relating to a non-discretionary employee profit-sharing plan. When calculating diluted
EPS, the profit or loss for the period is adjusted for any such consequential changes in income or
expense.
HKAS 1.6.4 Impact of potential ordinary shares on weighted average number of
33.36,39,40
shares
The number of shares calculated for basic EPS should be increased by the weighted average
number of ordinary shares that would be issued on the conversion of all the dilutive potential
ordinary shares into actual ordinary shares in issue.
It should be assumed that dilutive ordinary shares were converted into ordinary shares at the
beginning of the period or, if later, at the actual date of issue.
There are two other points:
(a) The computation assumes the most advantageous conversion rate or exercise rate from
the standpoint of the holder of the potential ordinary shares.
(b) A subsidiary, joint venture or associate may issue potential ordinary shares that are
convertible into either ordinary shares of the subsidiary, joint venture or associate, or
ordinary shares of the reporting entity. If these potential ordinary shares have a dilutive effect
on the consolidated basic EPS of the reporting entity, they are included in the calculation of
diluted EPS.
HKAS 33.45- 1.6.5 Share options
47A
Share options are potential ordinary shares which will not impact future profits. Therefore only the
denominator (i.e. number of shares) is affected in the diluted earnings per share calculation.
The exercise price of share options is generally lower than the market value of a share, and
therefore any exercise of options is viewed as an issue of shares at full (average) market value and
649
Financial Reporting
an issue of "free" shares. It is these "free" shares which are dilutive. The denominator of the DEPS
calculation is increased by the number of "free" shares issuable to reflect this.
Note that where the exercise price of share options exceeds average market value in a period, the
options are not dilutive.
Example: A listed company has issued share options

The profit after tax of XY Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X3 was $3,000,000.
Capital structure
Issued share capital as at 31 December 20X2: 2,000,000 ordinary shares.
On 1 January 20X3, XY Ltd issued 50,000 share options each of which entitled the holder to one
ordinary share on payment of $2. The average fair value of one ordinary share during 20X3 was
$4.
Solution
Discussion: A company should assume the exercise of options in calculating diluted EPS. The
assumed proceeds from these issues should be considered to have been received from the issues
of shares at fair value. The difference between the number of shares issued and the number of
shares that would have been issued at fair value should be treated as an issue of ordinary shares
for no consideration.
The exercise of options has no impact on profits.
$3,000,000
Basic EPS (20X3) = = $1.50
2,000,000
For calculation of Diluted EPS (20X3)
Shares
Number of ordinary shares in issue during 20X3 2,000,000
Number of shares under share options 50,000
Number of shares that would have been issued at fair value = (50,000  $2/$4)
Therefore, number of shares issued for no consideration 25,000
2,025,000
$3,000,000
Therefore, diluted EPS (20X3) = = $1.48
2,025,000
Where expenses related to employee share options have not yet been recognised in profit or loss
in accordance with HKFRS 2, a further adjustment is required to the calculation of diluted earnings
per share.
Here, the expense which has not yet been recognised is calculated as a per share option amount.
This is then added to the exercise price, before the number of "free" shares is calculated.
Example: Share options (continued)

Assume that in the above example, the share options in issue have been awarded to employees
and $15,000 expense has not yet been recognised in accordance with HKFRS 2.
Therefore:
Exercise price per share = $2 + ($15,000/50,000) = $2.30
Proceeds raised on exercise of options = $2.30  50,000 = $115,000
$115,000 / $4 = 28,750 shares would be issued at fair value, therefore 50,000 − 28,750 = 21,250
"free" shares would be issued
650
Diluted EPS is therefore based on 2,021,250 shares:

$3,000,000
Diluted EPS (20X3) = = $1.48
2,021,250
HKAS 33.49- 1.6.6 Convertible instruments

50
Convertible loan stock may be dilutive or anti-dilutive. In order to ascertain which the case is, a
stand-alone earnings per share amount should be calculated as:
Post tax interest saved on conversion of loan stock
Maximum number of potential ordinary shares in respect of the stock
If the amount calculated is less than basic earnings per share, the loan stock is dilutive and should
be included in diluted earnings per share.
Example: Loan stock

Ollivander Co. has a basic earnings per share of 45c for the year ended 30 April 20X1, based on
30 million shares.
The company has in issue $4 million 5% loan stock convertible into ordinary shares at a rate of
20 per $100 in 20X9.
Ollivander pays tax at a rate of 26%.
What is Ollivander’s diluted earnings per share for the year ended 30 April 20X1?
Solution
The increase in profits on conversion is: $4 million  5%  74% = $148,000
The number of potential ordinary shares is $4 million / $100  20 = 800,000
Earnings per share is therefore $148,000/800,000 = 18.5c. As this is lower than the basic earnings
per share of 45c, the convertible loan stock is dilutive and should be considered in the calculation
of diluted earnings per share:
Diluted earnings per share
Profits for the year attributable to ordinary shareholders: 45c  30million = $13.5 million.
$13,500,000  $148,000
DEPS  44.31c
30,000,000  800,000
Convertible preference shares are antidilutive whenever the amount of the dividend on such shares
declared in or accumulated for the current period per ordinary share obtainable on conversion
exceeds basic earnings per share.
In this case the instrument should be ignored for the purposes of calculating diluted EPS.
Lytton Co. has calculated amounts for basic earnings per share for the year ended 28 February
20X5 in accordance with HKAS 33 as:
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders $29,295,000
Weighted average number of ordinary shares 46,500,000
The following is also relevant at 28 February 20X5:
1 There are 100,000 vested employee share options outstanding with an exercise price of $3.20
651
Financial Reporting
2 Lytton is also financed via $10 million 6% loan stock convertible into ordinary shares at a
rate of:
18 per $100 in 20X6
20 per $100 in 20X7
22 per $100 in 20X8
3 The average market value of a Lytton ordinary share in the year ended 28 February 20X5
was $4.20
4 Lytton pays tax at a rate of 25%
What is diluted earnings per share for the year ended 28 February 20X5?
HKAS 33.52 1.7 Diluted EPS: contingently issuable ordinary shares

Contingently issuable shares may form:
 part of the consideration for the acquisition of another entity. In this case they will only be
issued if certain targets are met in the future.
 a performance reward for senior staff members, payable if certain targets are met.
With regard to the calculation of EPS, the following apply in respect of contingently issuable
shares:
(a) Until such time as the shares are issued they should not be taken into account when
calculating basic EPS.
(b) They should be taken into account when calculating diluted EPS if the conditions leading to
their issue have already been satisfied. If the conditions are not satisfied, the number of
contingently issuable shares used in the diluted EPS calculation is the number of shares if
the end of the period were the end of the contingency period.
(c) Contingently issuable shares are included from the beginning of the period (or from the date
of the contingent share agreement, if later).
Restatement is not permitted if the conditions are not met when the contingency period expires.
For example, Company A issued contingently issuable ordinary shares (CIOS) on 1 July 20X7. The
conditions are satisfied on 1 July 20X9.
Year ended Basic EPS Diluted EPS
31 December Do not include the CIOS Include, from 1 July 20X7 to 31 December 20X7,
20X7 since the conditions were the CIOS shares that would be issuable if
not satisfied as at that date. 31 December 20X7 was the end of the contingency
period.
31 December Do not include the CIOS Include, from 1 January 20X8 to 31 December
20X8 since the conditions were 20X8, the CIOS that would be issuable if
not satisfied as at that date. 31 December 20X8 was the end of the contingency
period.
31 December Include the CIOS from Include, from 1 January 20X9 to 30 June 20X9, the
20X9 1 July 20X9. CIOS that would be issuable at 30 June 20X9.
Restatement of 20X7 and 20X8's diluted EPSs is not permitted.
HKAS 33.53 1.7.1 Contingent on future earnings

The condition for contingent issue may be achieving or maintaining a specified level of earnings for
a particular period.
652
In this case, if the effect is dilutive, the calculation of diluted EPS is based on the number of
ordinary shares that would be issued if the amount of earnings at the end of the reporting period
were the amount of earnings at the end of the contingency period.
Because earnings may change in future periods, the calculation of basic EPS does not include
such CIOS until the end of the contingency period because not all necessary conditions have been
satisfied.
HKAS 33.54 1.7.2 Contingent on future market price of the ordinary shares
The number of ordinary shares contingently issuable may depend on the future market price of the
ordinary shares.
In that case, if the effect is dilutive, the calculation of diluted EPS is based on the number of
ordinary shares that would be issued if the market price at the end of the reporting period were the
market price at the end of the contingency period.
If the condition is based on an average of market prices over a period of time that extends beyond
the end of the reporting period, the average for the period of time that has lapsed is used.
Because the market price may change in a future period, the calculation of basic EPS does not
include such CIOS until the end of the contingency period because not all necessary conditions
have been satisfied.
HKAS 33.55 1.7.3 Contingent on both future earnings and future market price of the
ordinary shares
The number of ordinary shares contingently issuable may depend on future earnings and future
prices of the ordinary shares. In such cases, the number of ordinary shares included in the diluted
EPS calculation is based on both conditions (i.e. earnings to date and the current market price at
the end of the reporting period).
CIOS are not included in the diluted EPS calculation unless both conditions are met.
Example: Contingently issuable shares

QQ Co. had 20,000,000 ordinary shares outstanding as at 1 January 20X6. On 1 July 20X6, it
acquired a business from YY Co.. In accordance with the agreement, the initial consideration of
$20 million is to be satisfied by the issue of 1,000,000 ordinary shares in QQ Co. and, if the
average annual profit of the business acquired for the following three financial years ending 31
December 20X8 is more than $8 million, additional shares should be issued to YY Co. at 1 July
20X9. The number of shares to be issued will be calculated as follows:
Average annual profit – $8,000,000
20
The audited financial statements of the business for the year ended 31 December 20X6, 20X7 and
20X8 report a profit of $12,000,000, $5,000,000 and $4,000,000 respectively.
Required
Calculate the weighted average number of shares (WANOS) to use when calculating basic and
diluted EPS of QQ Co. for each of the three years ended 31 December 20X6, 20X7 and 20X8.
Solution
Year ended 31 December 20X6
As the conditions for the issue of the additional ordinary shares to YY Co. have not been satisfied
as at 31 December 20X6, no contingently issuable shares were considered outstanding for
inclusion in the computation of basic EPS for the year ended 31 December 20X6. The denominator
of basic EPS was calculated as follows:
6
20,000,000 + (1,000,000  /12) = 20,500,000 shares
653
Financial Reporting
The original contingency period is the three-year period ending 31 December 20X8. Assuming the
contingency period ended at 31 December 20X6, the average annual profit was $12,000,000 and
according to the agreement 200,000 ordinary shares should be issued to YY Co.:
$12,000,000 – $8,000,000
= 200,000 shares
20
The denominator of the diluted EPS was calculated as follows:
6
20,500,000 + (200,000  /12) = 20,600,000 shares
of basic EPS was 21,000,000 shares.
Assuming the contingency period ended at 31 December 20X7, the average annual profit was:
$12,000,000  $5,000,000
= $8,500,000
2
and according to the agreement 25,000 ordinary shares should be issued to YY Co.:
$8,500,000 – $8,000,000
= 25,000 shares
20
The denominator of the diluted EPS was calculated as follows:
21,000,000 + 25,000 = 21,025,000 shares
Restatement of diluted EPS for the year ended 31 December 20X6 previously reported is not
permitted.
of basic EPS was 21,000,000 shares.
Assuming the contingency period ended at 31 December 20X8, the average annual profit was:
$12,000,00 0  $5,000,000  $4,000,000
= $7,000,000
3
and according to the agreement no ordinary shares should be issued to YY Co.
654
1.8 Summary of approach to calculating diluted EPS

Diluted EPS
Identify potential ordinary shares (eg options and

convertibles)
Calculate standalone EPS for each group of

potential ordinary shares
Standalone EPS =
Profit saved on issue of potential ordinary shares
Number of potential ordinary shares
If standalone EPS > BEPS, potential If standalone EPS < BEPS, potential
ordinary shares are anti-dilutive and ordinary shares are dilutive and
are ignored included in DEPS
Rank dilutive potential ordinary shares

from most to least dilutive
Add to EPS calculation one at a time

on a cumulative basis starting with
most dilutive potential ordinary shares
PAOS from basic EPS + profit saved

WANOS from basic EPS + potential
OS
DEPS is the lowest EPS calculated at

any stage.
HKAS 1.9 Presentation

33.64,66.68,
69 An entity should present on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income the basic and diluted EPS for profit and loss:
 from continuing operations
 for the period
for each class of ordinary share that has a different right to share in the net profit for the period.
The basic and diluted EPS should be presented with equal prominence for all periods presented.
If an entity is reporting a discontinued operation, the basic and diluted EPS for the discontinuing
operation must also be presented.
655
Financial Reporting
Disclosure must still be made where the EPS figures (basic and/or diluted) are negative (i.e. a loss
per share).
Comparative EPS figures should also be presented. If, in the current period, the number of ordinary
or potential ordinary shares outstanding changes as a result of a capitalisation, bonus issue, share
split or reverse share split, comparative basic and diluted earnings per share should be adjusted
retrospectively.
1.10 Disclosure
In addition to EPS figures, an entity must disclose:
HKAS 33. 70 (a) The profit attributable to ordinary shareholders used in the EPS and diluted EPS calculations
and a reconciliation of this to profit for the period.
(b) The weighted average number of ordinary shares used in the EPS and diluted EPS
calculations and a reconciliation of these amounts to each other.
(c) Instruments that could potentially dilute basic EPS but which are not included in the
calculation of diluted EPS because they are anti-dilutive.
(d) Any transactions after the reporting date which would have changed significantly the number
of ordinary shares or potential ordinary shares at the period end had the transactions
occurred before that date.
Case study
Earnings per share
(a) Basic earnings per share
The calculation of the basic earnings per share is based on the consolidated profit
attributable to owners of the Company of approximately HK$296,780,000 (20X3:
HK$278,360,000) and the weighted average of 3,915,245,000 ordinary shares (20X3:
3,850,671,000 ordinary shares) in issue during the year, calculated as follows:
Weighted average number of ordinary shares
20X4 20X3
‘000 ‘000
Issued ordinary shares at the beginning of the year 3,850,671 3,847,245
Effect of new shares issued 64,574 –
3,915,245 3,850,671
(b) Diluted earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share for the years ended 30 June 20X4 and 20X3 was the same as the
basic earnings oer share because the exercise prices of the Company’s outstanding share
options were higher than the average market price of the Company’s shares during both
periods.
1.11 Significance of earnings per share

EPS is one of the most frequently quoted statistics in the financial analysis of listed companies.
Because of the widespread use of the price/earnings (P/E) ratio as a yardstick for investment
decisions, it has become increasingly important. Since the P/E ratio is calculated as the market
price per share divided by the EPS, it is important that a standard method of calculating EPS is
used by all quoted companies.
It seems that reported and forecast EPS can, through the P/E ratio, have a significant effect on a
company's share price. Thus, a share price might fall if it looks as if EPS is going to be low. This
656
is not very rational, as EPS can depend on many, often subjective, assumptions used in preparing
the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. It does not necessarily bear any
relation to the value of a company, and of its shares. Nevertheless, in practice the market is
sensitive to EPS.
EPS is commonly used as a means of assessing the stewardship and management role
performed by company directors and managers. Remuneration packages are often linked to EPS
growth, thereby increasing the pressure on management to improve EPS. The danger of this,
however, is that management effort may go into distorting results to produce a favourable EPS.
1.12 Limitations of EPS

Although EPS is an important ratio, it does have a number of limitations. Users of the ratio should
be aware of these limitations and the opportunities for manipulation:
 Its calculation is complex and may not be understood by non-accountants.
 It is based on historic profits, which may not be indicative of future profits.
 It is affected by accounting policy and changes in policy.
 It ignores risk; the maximisation of EPS does not guarantee benefits or capital growth to
shareholders.
 It does not take account of the capital structure of an entity, so is not directly comparable
between two companies.
 It is open to manipulation by share buy-backs which increase EPS, but also increase a
company's risk by increasing its borrowings.
657
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 33 Earnings Per Share
Earnings per share is a measure of the amount of profits earned

by a company for each ordinary share
Basic EPS Diluted EPS
Basic EPS profit + effect on profit

Profit/loss attributable to ordinary shareholders
of dilutive potential ord shares
Weighted average ordinary shares
No of shares in basic EPS + dilutive
potential ordinary shares
Profit/loss attributable to Weighted average ordinary Options:

ordinary shareholders shares No effect on profit
Increase no of shares by
"free" shares
Profit X Time apportion calculation Convertible loan

for new share issues stock/preference shares:
Amounts attributable (X) Increase profit by post-tax
to irredeemable interest saved
preference share Increase no of shares
holders __
X
Bonus issue: Adjust
number of shares before
issue by: Contingently issuable
ordinary shares are only
No of shares after issue taken into account if conditions
No of shares before issue leading to their issue are
satisfied.
Rights issue: Adjust number of 1 Check if potential

shares before issue by: ordinary shares are
individually dilutive or
Pre-rights issue share price anti-dilutive
Theoretical ex-rights price 2 Add in dilutive potential
ordinary shares one at a
time starting with the
most dilutive
Theoretical ex-rights price: 3 Diluted EPS is the
Market value of ordinary shares pre rights issue lowest calculated EPS
+ proceeds of rights issue figure at any stage.
No of shares post rights issue
Disclose basic and diluted EPS from continuing and discontinued (where relevant) operations on the
face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
658
Answer 1
20X6 20X7 20X8
$ $ $
20X6 EPS as originally reported
$110,000,000/5,000,000 22
20X6 EPS restated for rights issue =
10 20
($110,000,000/5,000,000) 
11
20X7 EPS including effects of rights issue 25.4
150,000,000
 5m× 2 / 12×11/ 10  +  6m×10 / 12 
20X8 EPS 30
$180,000,000/6,000,000
Working – theoretical ex-rights price
Fair value of all outstanding shares + total received from exercise of rights
No shares outstanding prior to exercise + no shares issued in exercise
 $11×5,000,000  +  $5×1,000,000  = $10

6,000,000
Therefore the bonus fraction is 11/10
Answer 2
(a) 20X1
1 Jan 20X1 – 5,000,000  6/5  4/12 months 2,000,000
30 April 20X1
Bonus issue 5m/5 1,000,000
1 May 20X1 – 6,000,000  5/12 months 2,500,000
30 Sept 20X1
Part paid cash issue
1m  60% 600,000
1 Oct 20X1 – 6,600,000  3/12 months 1,650,000
31 Dec 20X1
6,150,000
4,981,500
Therefore, earnings per share is = 81.00c
6,150,000
659
Financial Reporting
20X2
NB the part paid shares are now fully paid and therefore the opening balance of shares is
7m rather than 6.6m
1 Jan 20X2 – 7,000,000  3.65/3.64  7/12 months 4,094,551
31 July 20X2
Rights issue 7m/7 1,000,000
1 August 20X2 – 8,000,000  5/12 months 3,333,333
31 Dec 20X2
7,427,884
Computation of theoretical ex-rights price
Fair value of all outstanding shares
 total received from exercise of rights ($3.65  7) + ($3.55  1)
= = $3.64
Number of shares outstanding prior to 8
exercise  number of shares issued in exercise
6,165,200
Therefore earnings per share is = 83.00c
7,427,884
(b) Restated 20X1 basic EPS

3.64
81c  = 80.78c
3.65
Answer 3
$29,295,000
Basic EPS = = 63 cents
46.5 million
Consider dilutive effects of options:

Proceeds raised on exercise: 100,000  $3.20 = $320,000
Therefore, shares issued at market value: $320,000/$4.20 = 76,190
"Free" shares: 100,000 – 76,190 = 23,810
Consider dilutive effect of loan stock:
Post tax interest saving ($10m  6%  75%) = $450,000
Additional shares ($10m/$100  22) = 2,200,000
(note that the worst case conversion scenario is assumed)
EPS of this instrument is therefore 20.45 cents. As this is less than basic EPS, the instrument is
dilutive and should be taken into account in the calculation of diluted EPS.
Diluted EPS is therefore 61.05c:
Basic 29,295,000 63.00c
46,500,000
With options 29,295,000 62.97c

46,500,000 + 23,810
With loan stock 29,295,000 + 450,000 61.05c

46,500,000 + 23,810 + 2,200,000
660
Exam practice
Silver Coin Holdings Limited 23 minutes

Silver Coin Holdings Limited reported the following information in relation to the results and equity
structure for each of the years ended 30 June 20X8 and 20X9:
Year ended 30 June 20X8 20X9
Profit for the year (before interest expense) $32,800,000 $8,000,000
Equity structure:
Ordinary shares ("OS") 220,000,000 228,500,000
Redeemable, convertible preference shares ("PS") issued 3,000,000 2,000,000
on 1 July 20X7
Cumulative annual dividend of $0.30 per share
Convertible into eight ordinary shares per preference share
Outstanding share options 1,000,000 1,000,000
Average market price of one ordinary share during the year $1.80 $1.65
The PS were issued at $10 which represented the then market price on the date of issue.
1,000,000 PS were converted into OS on 1 January 20X9. 500,000 ordinary shares were issued to
new investors at $1.40 per share on 1 October 20X8. No dividend was declared by the company
during the year ended 30 June 20X8, $0.45 dividend was declared to PS holders on 31 December
20X8.
All 1,000,000 share options, with exercise price for one ordinary share at $1.50 per option, were
granted to employees on 1 July 20X6. Each grant is conditional upon the employee working for the
company over two years.
The company did not have other borrowings outstanding during both the two years ended 30 June
20X9.
Required
(a) Calculate the basic earnings per share for each of the years ended 30 June 20X8 and 20X9.
(7 marks)
(b) Calculate the diluted earnings per share for the year ended 30 June 20X9. (6 marks)
(Total = 13 marks)
(Note. Tax effect is ignored and a reasonable approximation of the weighted average number of
shares by the number of months that the shares are outstanding as a proportion of the total months
in a year is adequate.)
661
Financial Reporting
662
chapter 24
Operating segments
Topic list
1 HKFRS 8 Operating Segments

1.1 Objective of HKFRS 8
1.2 Scope of HKFRS 8
1.3 Definitions
1.4 Identifying reportable segments
1.5 Disclosures
1.6 Is the objective of HKFRS 8 met?
1.7 Key criticisms of HKFRS 8
1.8 Summary of HKFRS 8
Learning focus
Listed companies are required to apply HKFRS 8 Operating Segments and you must be able
to identify reportable operating segments and the required disclosures.
663
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.23 Operating segments 3
3.23.01 Identify and discuss the nature of segmental information to be
disclosed in accordance with HKFRS 8
3.23.02 Explain when operating segments should be aggregated and
disaggregated
3.23.03 Disclose the relevant information for operating segments and
appropriate entity-wide information
664
24: Operating segments | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKFRS 8 Operating Segments

Topic highlights
HKFRS 8 Operating Segments requires that a listed entity identifies reportable operating segments
and discloses financial information in respect of them.
Many entities now operate on a multinational basis in a number of different geographical and
product markets. These distinct markets may operate very differently from one another and be
subject to different levels of risks and returns, and differing future prospects.
The reason for segment reporting is to provide users of accounts with information on such
segments so that they can make a better assessment of an entity's past performance and position,
and identify which segments of an entity are successful and which are less so.
1.1 Objective of HKFRS 8

An entity should disclose information to enable users of its financial statements to evaluate the
nature and financial effects of the business activities in which it engages and the economic
environments in which it operates.
HKFRS 8.2 1.2 Scope of HKFRS 8

HKFRS 8 applies only to entities:
 whose equity or debt securities are traded in a public market (i.e. on a stock exchange); or
 which is in the process of listing securities in a public market.
It also applies to group financial statements where the parent meets the above criteria. In group
accounts, only consolidated segmental information needs to be shown.
HKFRS 8.5,7 1.3 Definitions

HKFRS 8 provides one definition:
Key term
An operating segment is a component of an entity:
(a) that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses
(including revenues and expenses relating to transactions with other components of the
same entity),
(b) whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity's chief operating decision maker
to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its
performance, and
(c) for which discrete financial information is available. (HKFRS 8)
The term "chief operating decision maker" identifies a function, not necessarily a manager with a
specific title. That function is to allocate resources and to assess the performance of the entity's
operating segments.
1.4 Identifying reportable segments

Topic highlights
Reportable segments are operating segments or aggregation of operating segments that meet
the "10% test".
665
Financial Reporting
HKFRS 8 requires entities within its scope to report financial and descriptive information about its
reportable segments, so the first task is to understand which segments are reportable. Reportable
segments are either individual operating segments or aggregations of operating segments (see
below) that meet the specified criteria (the "10% test" explained below).
HKFRS 8.12 1.4.1 Aggregation of operating segments

Two or more operating segments below the thresholds may be aggregated to produce a reportable
segment if the segments have similar economic characteristics, and the segments are similar in:
 the nature of the products and services
 the nature of the production processes
 the type or class of customer for their products and services
 the methods used to distribute their products or provide their services
 if applicable, the nature of the regulatory environment (e.g. banks).
HKFRS 1.4.2 Quantitative thresholds

8.13,15,19
An entity should report separate information about each operating segment that:
(a) has been identified as meeting the definition of an operating segment, and
(b) segment total is 10% or more of total:
(i) revenue (internal and external)
(ii) profits for all segments reporting a profit (or all segments in loss if greater), or
(iii) assets
At least 75% of total external revenue must be reported by operating segments. Where this is not
the case, additional segments must be identified (even if they do not meet the 10% thresholds).
Operating segments that do not meet any of the quantitative thresholds may be reported
separately if management believes that information about the segment would be useful to users of
HKFRS 8 suggests that there may be a limit to the number of reportable segments that an entity
separately discloses before information becomes too detailed. It suggests that when the number of
reportable segments increases above ten, the entity should consider whether a practical limit has
been reached.
Styledesign, a listed clothing manufacturer, trades in five business areas which are reported
separately in its internal accounts provided to the chief operating decision maker. The results of
these segments for the year ended 31 December 20X1 are as follows.
OPERATING SEGMENT INFORMATION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X1
Revenue Segment Segment Segment
External Internal Total profit/(loss) assets liabilities
$m $m $m $m $m $m
Ladies' fashion: Asia 14 7 21 1 31 14
Rest of world 56 3 59 13 778788 34
Mens' fashion 59 8 67 9 104 35
Childrens' fashion 22 0 22 (2) 30 12
Sportswear 12 3 15 2 18 10
Uniforms 18 24 42 (1) 54 19
181 45 226 22 315 124
666
Required
Which of the operating segments of Styledesign constitute a "reportable" operating segment under
HKFRS 8 Operating Segments for the year ending 31 December 20X1?
1.4.3 Decision tree to assist in identifying reportable segments

The following decision tree will assist in identifying reportable segments.
Management to identify
operating segments reporting
Yes Aggregate
Any operating segments meet segments if
all aggregation criteria? desired
No
Yes Any operating segments meet the

quantitative threshold of ≥ 10% total
revenue / 10% total profit (or loss if
greater) / 10% total assets?
No
Aggregate Yes Any remaining operating

segments if segments meet a majority of
desired aggregation criteria?
No
Do identified reportable Yes
segments account for 75% of
the total external revenue?
No
Report additional segment
These are reportable Aggregate remaining segments

segments to be disclosed into "all other segments"
HKFRS
8.29,30
1.4.4 Restatement of previously reported information
If an entity changes the structure of its internal organisation in a manner that causes the
composition of its reportable segments to change, the corresponding information for earlier periods,
including interim periods, shall be restated unless the information is not available and the cost to
develop it would be excessive. The determination of whether the cost is excessive shall be made
for each individual item of disclosure. Following a change in the composition of its reportable
segments, an entity shall disclose whether it has restated the corresponding items of segment
information for earlier periods.
If an entity has changed the structure of its internal organisation in a manner that causes the
composition of its reportable segments to change and if segment information for earlier periods,
including interim periods, is not restated to reflect the change, the entity shall disclose in the year
in which the change occurs segment information for the current period on both the old basis and
667
Financial Reporting
the new basis of segmentation, unless the necessary information is not available and the cost to
develop it would be excessive.
HKFRS 8.20-
24,28, 1.5 Disclosures
32,33,34
Topic highlights
HKFRS 8 disclosures are of:
 general information about segments
 financial information about segments
– segment profit or loss
– segment assets
– segment liabilities
– basis of measurement
Disclosures are also required about the revenues derived from products or services and about the
countries in which revenues are earned or assets held, even if that information is not used by
management in making decisions.
Disclosures required by the HKFRS are extensive, and best learned by looking at the example and
proforma, which follow the list.
(a) General information
(i) Factors used to identify the entity's reportable segments
(ii) Judgments made by management in applying the aggregation criteria
(iii) Types of products and services from which each reportable segment derives its
revenues
(b) Information about profit or loss, assets and liabilities
For each reportable segment the entity must disclose a measure of profit or loss.
The following further items must also be disclosed if they are included in the measure of
segment profit or loss reported to the chief operating decision maker, or are otherwise
regularly reported to the chief operating decision maker:
External
Revenue
Interest revenue Inter-co segment
Interest expense
Depreciation and amortisation
Other material non-cash items
Material items of income/expense (HKAS 1)
Profit Share of profit of associates/joint ventures equity
accounted
Profit or loss (as reported to chief operating
decision maker)
Income tax expense
A measure of total assets and liabilities is also reported for each reportable segment if such
amounts are regularly provided to the chief operating decision maker.
668
The following further items must also be disclosed if they are included in the measure of
segment assets reported to the chief operating decision maker, or are otherwise regularly
reported to the chief operating decision maker:
Investment in associates and joint ventures equity

Assets
accounted
Additions to non-current assets (other than financial
instruments, deferred tax assets, net defined
benefit assets and rights under insurance
contracts)
(c) An explanation of the measurements of segment profit or loss, segment assets and segment
liabilities for each reportable segment.
(d) A reconciliation of the total of:
 Total reportable segments’ revenue to entity revenue
 Total reportable segments’ measured of profit or loss to entity profit or loss before tax
 Total reportable segments’ assets (where reported) to entity assets
 Total reportable segments’ liabilities (where reported) to entity liabilities
 Other total reportable segments’ amounts disclosed to equivalent entity amounts
(e) External revenue from external customers for each product and service (unless the cost of
developing this information would be excessive).
(f) Geographical information
External revenue
(2) By:
 Entity's country of domicile, and
Geographical areas
 All foreign countries (subdivided if
(1)
Non-current assets material)
Notes
1 Non-current assets excludes financial instruments, deferred tax assets, post-
employment benefit assets, and rights under insurance contracts.
2 External revenue is allocated based on the customer's location.
(g) Information about reliance on major customers (i.e. those who represent more than 10%
of external revenue).
1.5.1 Disclosure example from HKFRS 8
The following example is adapted from the HKFRS 8 Implementation Guidance, which emphasises
that this is for illustrative purposes only and that the information must be presented in the most
understandable manner in the specific circumstances.
The hypothetical company does not allocate tax expense (tax income) or non-recurring gains and
losses to reportable segments. In addition, not all reportable segments have material non-cash
items other than depreciation and amortisation in profit or loss. The amounts in this illustration,
denominated in thousands of dollars, are assumed to be the amounts in reports used by the chief
operating decision maker.
669
Financial Reporting
Illustration: Disclosure example from HKFRS 8

Car All
parts Software Finance other Totals
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Revenues from external
(a)
customers 8,000 21,500 5,000 1,000 35,500
Intersegment revenues – 4,500 – – 4,500
Interest revenue 1,250 2,500 – – 3,750
Interest expense 950 1,800 – – 2,750
(b)
Net interest revenue – – 1,000 – 1,000
Depreciation and
amortisation 300 1,550 1,100 – 2,950
Reportable segment profit 270 3,200 500 100 4,070
Other material non-cash
items:
Impairment of assets 200 – – – 200
Reportable segment assets 7,000 15,000 57,000 2,000 81,000
Expenditure for reportable
segment non-current
assets 1,000 1,300 600 – 2,900
Reportable segment
liabilities 4,050 9,800 30,000 – 43,850
Notes
(a) Revenues from segments below the quantitative thresholds are attributable to four operating
segments of the company. Those segments include a small property business, an
electronics equipment rental business, a software consulting practice and a warehouse
leasing operation. None of those segments has ever met any of the quantitative thresholds
for determining reportable segments.
(b) The finance segment derives a majority of its revenue from interest. Management primarily
relies on net interest revenue, not the gross revenue and expense amounts, in managing
that segment. Therefore, as permitted by HKFRS 8, only the net amount is disclosed.
670
1.5.2 Suggested proforma

Information about profit or loss, assets and liabilities
Segment Segment Segment All other Inter Entity
A B C segments segment total
Revenue – external
customers X X X X – X
Revenue – inter segment X X X X X –
X X X X (X) X
Interest revenue X X X X (X) X
Interest expense (X) (X) (X) (X) X (X)
Depreciation and
amortisation (X) (X) (X) (X) – (X)
Other material non-cash
items X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X)
Material income/expense
(HKAS 1) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X)
Share of profit of
associate/JVs X X X X – X
Segment profit before tax X X X X (X) X
Income tax expense (X) (X) (X) (X) – (X)
Unallocated items X/(X)
Profit for the year X
Segment assets X X X X (X) X
Investments in X X X X – X
associate/JVs
Unallocated assets X
Entity's assets X
Expenditures for
reportable assets X X X X (X) X
Segment liabilities X X X X (X) X
Unallocated liabilities X
Entity's liabilities X
Information about geographical areas

Country of Foreign Total
domicile countries
Revenue – external customers X X X
Non-current assets X X X
1.6 Is the objective of HKFRS 8 met?

The objective of HKFRS 8 is to enable users of financial statements to evaluate the nature and
financial effects of the different business activities in which it engages and the economic
environments in which it operates.
As detailed above, the nature of different business activities and economic environments is
provided primarily by way of general information disclosures; the financial effects are disclosed in
segment financial information.
As we have seen, a managerial approach is taken to identifying reportable operating segments. It
follows that disclosures are made on the same basis as is used by management to make decisions
about the allocation of a company’s resources and to assess the performance of the business .
This approach benefits users who are able to see the company ‘through the eyes of management’.
671
Financial Reporting
The post-implementation review of IFRS 8 (HKFRS 8) published by the IASB in 2013 concluded
that the use of this management perspective has made communication with investors easier. It also
noted that the benefits are increased where all aspects of an entity’s reporting align, so that
operating segment disclosures and management commentary are based on the same segments.
There do, however, remain a number of criticisms of HKFRS 8, as detailed in the next section.
1.7 Key criticisms of HKFRS 8

(a) Identification of a chief operating decision maker is difficult in practice.
(b) Some commentators have criticised the "managerial approach" as leaving segment
identification too much to the discretion of the entity.
(c) The managerial approach may mean that financial statements of different entities are not
comparable.
(d) Segments identified and reported in accordance with HKFRS 8 are not necessarily the same
as business or geographic units referred to in narrative sections of the annual report. This
inconsisitency may confuse users and make the preparation of the annual report more
difficult.
(e) The segments may include operations with different risks and returns.
(f) There is no defined measure of segment profit or loss.
(g) Some companies believe that an opt out for the provision of segmental data should be
provided if companies believe that such disclosure will result in the publication of
commercially sensitive information likely to prejudice the long-term performance of the
company.
1.8 Summary of HKFRS 8

HKFRS 8 is a disclosure standard which applies only to listed companies:
 Segment reporting is necessary for a better understanding and assessment of:
– past performance
– the economic environment
– informed judgments
 HKFRS 8 adopts the managerial approach to identifying segments.
 The standard gives guidance on how segments should be identified and what information
should be disclosed for each.
It also sets out requirements for related disclosures about products and services, geographical
areas and major customers.
672
Alwoodley Foods, a listed company based in Hong Kong, is engaged in business activities as
follows:
Results reviewed by Quantitative
Managing Director thresholds met
Retail sales (bakery) Yes Yes
Online sales (bakery) Yes No
Catering services (business market) Yes No
Catering services (domestic market) Yes No
Manufacturing (bakery products) Yes Yes
Publishing – cook books and magazines Yes Yes
Publishing - website No No
Leasing – offices Yes No
Leasing – manufacturing sites Yes No
It has been determined that the Managing Director of Alwoodley Foods is the chief operating
decision maker. A measure of profit or loss is reported to her but no measure of assets or liabilities
is reported.
When aggregated the business and domestic catering services operations meet the quantitative
threshold. The online sales and office leasing operations also meet the quantitative thresholds
when aggregated.
Discrete financial information is available for the business activities for the year ended 31
December 20X1:
SEGMENT INFORMATION FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X1
Revenue Revenue by location of customer
External Internal Total Hong Kong PRC Other
$m $m $m $m $m $m
Retail sales (bakery) 129 - 129 78 34 17
Online sales (bakery) 7 7 7 - -
Catering services (business) 48 7 55 52 3 -
Catering services (domestic) 11 - 11 11 - -
Manufacturing (bakery) 3 37 40 38 2 -
Publishing – books and 32 - 32 15 12 5
magazines
Publishing - website 3 - 3 3 - -
Leasing - offices 13 - 13 13 - -
Leasing – manuf’g sites 10 5 15 12 3 -
Adjustments - (49) (49) (49)
Total reported 256 - 256 180 54 22
Alwoodley Foods has no investments in other companies,
Required
(a) Prepare an operating segments disclosure note for Alwoodley Foods in accordance with
HKFRS 8 insofar as the information provided allows.
(b) Identify the additional information that is required in order to provide a complete HKFRS 8
disclosure note for Alwoodley Foods.
673
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKFRS 8 Operating Segments
Requires that a listed entity identifies reportable operating segments and

discloses financial information in respect of them
Operating segment is a component of an entity:

That engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and
incur expenses
Whose results are regularly reviewed by the entity's chief operating decision
maker
For which discrete financial information is available
Reportable segments Disclosures
A segment is reportable if:

1 it meets the definition of an operating General information about segments
segment Financial information for each
2 the segment total ≥ 10% of total: segment:
- revenue – Profit or loss
- profits (for all segments in profit, or all – Total assets
in loss if greater), or – Total liabilities
- assets – Other items reported to the chief
operating decision maker
External revenue
Geographical information
Reliance on major customers
If reportable segments do not make up ≥
75% total external revenue, additional
segments not meeting the 10% test are
reported.
674
Answer 1
Revenue as % of Profit or loss as % of
total revenue profit of all segments Assets as % of total
($226m) in profit ($25m) assets ($315m)
Ladies' fashion * 35.4% 56% 34.6%
Mens' fashion 29.6% 36% 33.0%
Childrens' fashion 9.7% 8% 9.5%
Sportswear 6.6% 8% 5.7%
Uniforms 18.6% 4% 17.1%
* The ladies' fashion segments are aggregated due to their similar economic characteristics
At 31 December 20X1 three of the five operating segments are reportable operating segments:
Ladies' fashion
All size criteria are met
Mens' fashion
All size criteria are met
Children's fashion
The children's fashion segment is not separately reportable as it does not meet the quantitative
thresholds. It can, however, still be reported as a separate operating segment if management
believes that information about the segment would be useful to users of the financial statements.
Alternatively, the group could consider amalgamating it with another segment, providing the two
operating segments have similar economic characteristics and share a majority of the
"aggregation" criteria, which may be the case, particularly if "uniforms" refers to school uniforms.
Otherwise it would be disclosed in an "All other segments" column.
Sportswear
The sportswear segment does not meet the quantitative thresholds and therefore is not separately
reportable. It can also be reported separately if management believes the information would be
useful to users. Alternatively, the group may be able to amalgamate it with another segment,
providing the operating segments have similar economic characteristics and share a majority of the
"aggregation" criteria. Otherwise, it would also be disclosed in an "All other segments" column.
Uniforms
The uniforms segment meets the quantitative threshold in respect of revenue and assets and so is
reported separately.
Note. HKFRS 8.15 states that at least 75% of total external revenue must be reported by operating
segments. This condition has been met as the reportable segments (excluding children's wear and
sportswear) account for 81% of total external revenue (147/181).
Answer 2
Alwoodley Foods
(a) Operating segments disclosure note
Reportable segments are those segments of the business that meet the HKFRS 8 definition
of an operating segment and meet quantitative thresholds as set by HKFRS 8.
675
Financial Reporting
The company’s reportable segments are as follows:

 The Retail sales segment sells bakery products through retail outlets.
 The Manufacturing segment produces bakery goods which are mainly sold to other
segments of the Company
 The Publishing segment produces and sells cook books and magazines.
 The Catering services segment provides catering services to the business and
domestic markets.
 ‘Other segments’ consists of online sales of bakery goods, web publishing and the
leasing of properties to internal and external customers.
For reporting purposes, the Catering services segment combines the business catering
services segment and the domestic catering services segment, as these segments have
similar economic characteristics and meet a majority of the HKFRS 8 aggregation criteria.
Management monitors the operating results of business segments separately for the
purpose of making decisions about resources to be allocated and of assessing performance.
Operating segment results
Retail Manufacturing Publishing Catering Other Adjustments Company
sales
$m $m $m $m $m $m $m
Revenue
External 129 3 3 59 62 - 256
Internal - 37 - 7 5 (49) -
Total 129 40 3 66 67 (49) 256
Geographical information
Revenue from external customers $m
Hong Kong 180
PR China 54
Other countries 27
256
The revenue information above is based on the location of the customer.
Workings
An operating segment as defined by HKFRS 8 must have its operating results regularly
reviewed by the entity’s chief operating decision maker.
This is not the case for the publishing (website) operations. Therefore these operations do
not form an operating segment.
In order to be reportable, operating segments must meet quantitative criteria.
Therefore Retail sales, Manufacturing and Publishing are all individually reportable.
Two or more operating segments below the quantitative thresholds made be aggregated to
produce a reportable segment if the segments have similar economic characteristics and the
segments meet a majority of the aggregation criteria, ie they have similar products or
services, production processes, types of customers, distribution methods and regulatory
environments.
It may be assumed that he business and domestic catering services have similar economic
characteristics and share a majority of the aggregation criteria and so these are combined
into ‘Catering services’.
This is not the case for the online sales and office leasing operations and so these are not
aggregated to make them reportable.
676
(b) An entity must disclose a measure of profit or loss for each reportable segment as reviewed
by the chief operating decision maker. Therefore this information is required and must be
disclosed for the four reportable segments.
In addition the following information is required for each of the four reportable segments and
should be disclosed if included in the measure of profit or loss or otherwise reviewed by the
chief operating decision maker:
 interest revenue and expense
 depreciation and amortisation and other material non-cash items
 material items of income/expense
 income tax expense
In order to reconcile the amounts above to entity wide equivalent amounts, the same
information is required for the non-reportable segments.
The geographical information should be extended to include information on the location of
non-current assets and therefore the carrying amount of non-current assets is required
according to whether it is based in Hong Kong, PRC or another country.
Information on reliance on major customers is required and should be disclosed.
677
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
HKFRS 8 18 minutes
Ms. Li, the finance manager of a company listed on The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited, is
assessing the segment reporting requirements under HKFRS 8 Operating Segments included in
the financial statements of the company and has tentatively concluded that:
(a) the company has a free choice in determining a business activity or business activities as an
operating segment;
(b) the company can have 12 reportable segments;
(c) segment information should be prepared in conformity with the accounting policies adopted
for preparing and presenting the financial statements of the company; and
(d) during the financial year, the company disposed of the businesses of one of its reportable
segments. The company is required to restate the comparatives segment information in the
financial statements for the current year.
Required
Please comment on the above conclusions with reference to HKFRS 8 Operating Segments.
(10 marks)
HKICPA May 2007
678
chapter 25
Interim financial reporting
Topic list
1 HKAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting

1.1 Objective
1.2 Scope
1.3 Definitions
1.4 Minimum components
1.5 Form and content
1.6 Periods covered
1.7 Materiality
1.8 Recognition and measurement principles
1.9 Applications of the recognition and measurement principles
1.10 Use of estimates
1.11 HK(IFRIC) Int-10 Interim Financial Reporting and Impairment
Learning focus
The preparation of interim financial statements is relevant for evaluating the performance of a
listed entity. Therefore, the application of accounting standards is very important to measure
the performance in a consistent manner.
679
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.24 Interim financial reporting 3
3.24.01 Identify the circumstances in which interim financial reporting is
required in accordance with HKAS 34
3.24.02 Explain the purpose and advantages of interim financial reporting
3.24.03 Explain the recognition and measurement principles of interim
financial statements and apply them
3.24.04 Disclose the relevant information for interim financial statements
including seasonality
680
25: Interim financial reporting | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 HKAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting

Topic highlights
HKAS 34 does not mandate which entities should publish an interim financial report. For entities
that do publish such reports, it lays down principles and guidelines for their production. However, it
is up to government and regulators to decide what specific rules should apply to Hong Kong.
1.1 Objective
The objective of HKAS 34 is to prescribe the minimum content of an interim financial report
and to prescribe the principles for recognition and measurement in complete or condensed
financial statements for an interim period.
Relevant and reliable interim financial reporting enhances users' understanding of the performance
and position of an entity. In addition, it may be a requirement for some companies.
The advantages of interim reporting are:
(a) Financial information is more useful if provided more frequently and in a timely manner.
(b) It provides up to date information, since investors do not only make investment and
divestment decisions at period ends.
(c) Investors can see the impact of events soon after they occur.
(d) Interim information may help to project financial amounts for the full year.
(e) Interim results can provide evidence of trends and seasonality which is not evident from
annual results.
HKAS 34.1 1.2 Scope

The standard does not make the preparation of interim financial reports mandatory for any
company, taking the view that this is a matter for governments, securities regulators, stock
exchanges or professional accountancy bodies to decide within each country. HKICPA encourages
publicly traded entities to provide interim financial reports that conform to the recognition,
measurement, and disclosure principles set out in this standard.
The standard recommends that in respect of public listed companies,
(a) an interim financial report should be produced by such companies for at least the first six
months of their financial year (i.e. a half year financial report)
(b) the report should be available no later than 60 days after the end of the interim period.
Thus, a company with a year ending 31 December should prepare an interim report for the half
year to 30 June and this report should be available before the end of August.

The following definitions are used in HKAS 34.
Key terms
Interim period is a financial reporting period shorter than a full financial year.
Interim financial report means a financial report containing either a complete set of financial
statements (as described in HKAS 1) or a set of condensed financial statements (as described in
this standard) for an interim period. (HKAS 34)
681
Financial Reporting
HKAS 34.6,8
1.4 Minimum components
The standard specifies the minimum component elements of an interim financial report:
 Condensed statement of financial position
 Condensed statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
 Condensed statement of changes in equity
 Condensed statement of cash flows
 Selected explanatory notes
The rationale for requiring only condensed statements and selected note disclosures is that entities
need not duplicate information in their interim report that is contained in their report for the previous
financial year. Interim statements should focus more on new events, activities and
circumstances.
HKAS 34.
9-11
1.5 Form and content
HKAS 1 should be followed when full financial statements are given as interim financial statements,
otherwise HKAS 34 states the minimum contents that should be disclosed.
Where condensed financial statements are given instead, they should include, at least, those
headings and subtotals that appeared in its most recent annual financial statements and selected
explanatory notes. Additional items or notes should be presented if their omission results in
misleading condensed interim financial statements.
Where an entity is within the scope of HKAS 33 Earnings Per Share it should present basic and
diluted EPS for the interim period.
HKAS 1.5.1 Selected explanatory notes
34.15,15A,
According to HKAS 34, an entity should include in its interim report an explanation of events and
transactions that are significant to an understanding of changes in financial position and
performance since the end of the last reporting period. Information disclosed in relation to those
events and transactions should update the relevant information presented in the most recent
annual financial report.
It is not necessary for the notes to the interim accounts to provide relatively insignificant updates to
the information provided in the most recent annual financial report.
Give some examples of the events and transactions for which disclosures would be required if they
were significant.
1.5.2 Additional disclosures

HKAS
34.16A, 19 In addition to disclosing significant events and transactions, an entity should include the following in
its interim financial statements:
(a) A statement that the same accounting policies and methods of computation are followed
in the interim statements as compared with the most recent annual financial statements. If
any policy or method has changed, a description of the nature and effect of the change is
required.
(b) Explanatory comments on the seasonality or 'cyclicality' of operations.
(c) The nature and amount of items affecting assets, liabilities, equity, net income or cash
flows, that are unusual, because of their nature, size or incidence.
682
(d) Nature and amount of changes in estimates of amounts reported in earlier interim reports
of the same financial year, or prior financial years.
(e) The issue, repayment and repurchase of equity or debt securities.
(f) Dividends paid on ordinary shares and dividends paid on other shares.
(g) Where segment information is provided in the annual financial statements, the following
should be disclosed in the interim financial statements:
(i) Revenues from external customers (if included in the measure of profit reviewed by
the chief operating decision maker);
(ii) Intersegment revenues (if included in the measure of profit reviewed by the chief
operating decision maker);
(iii) A measure of segment profit or loss;
(iv) A measure of total assets and liabilities for a particular reportable segment if such
amounts are regularly provided to the chief operating decision maker and if there has
been a material change from the amount disclosed in the last financial statements for
that reportable segment;
(v) A description of differences in the basis of segmentation or measurement of profit or
loss from the last annual financial statements;
(vi) A reconciliation of total profit or loss of reportable segments to the entity's profit or loss
before tax and discontinued operations.
(h) Events after the interim period that have not been reflected in the financial statements for the
interim period;
(i) The effect of the acquisition or disposal of subsidiaries during the interim period.
(j) For financial instruments, the disclosures about fair value required by HKFRS 13 Fair Value
Measurement and HKFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures.
(k) For entities becoming or ceasing to be investment entities, the relevant HKFRS 12
disclosures.
An amendment to HKAS 34 made in 2014 clarifies that these disclosures must be given either in
the interim financial statements or incorporated by cross-reference from the interim financial
statements to some other statement (eg management commentary). The other statement must be
available to users of the financial statements on the same terms as the interim statements and at
the same time. This amendment is effective retrospectively for annual periods starting on or after 1
January 2016.
Except as required above, the disclosures required by other HKFRS are not required if an entity's
interim financial report includes only condensed financial statements and selected explanatory
notes rather than a complete set of financial statements.
The entity should also disclose the fact that the interim report has been produced in compliance
with HKAS 34 on interim financial reporting.
Illustration
The following are examples of select disclosure notes required in interim reports:
1 General information
The condensed interim consolidated financial statements are for the six months ended 30
June 20X3 and have been prepared in accordance with HKAS 34. They do not include all of
the information required in annual financial statements in accordance with HKFRS and
should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements for the year ended
31 December 20X2.
683
Financial Reporting

The Group has applied the same accounting policies and methods of computation in its
interim consolidated financial statements as in its 20X2 annual financial statements, except
for those that relate to new standards and interpretations effective for the first time for
periods beginning on or after 1 January 20X3.
3 Use of estimates and judgments
The judgments, estimates and assumptions applied in the interim financial statements,
including the key sources of estimation uncertainty were the same as those applied in the
Group’s last annual financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X2. The only
exception is the estimate of the provision for income taxes, which is determined in the interim
financial statements using the estimated average annual effective income tax rate applied to
the pre-tax income of the interim period5.
4 Significant events and transactions
The Group’s management believes that the Group is well positioned despite the continuing
difficult economic circumstances. Factors contributing to the Group’s strong position are:
 No significant decline in order intake. Further, the Group has several long-term
contracts with a number of its customers.
 The Group does not expect to need additional borrowing facilities in the next 12
months as a result of its significant financial resources, existing facilities and strong
liquidity reserves. The Group has significant headroom to comply with its debt
covenants.
 The Group’s major customers have not experienced financial difficulties. Credit quality
of trade receivables as at 30 June 20X3 is considered to be good.
5 Seasonal business
As with all retailers in Hong Kong, the Group is heavily dependent on successful sales in the
final quarter of the year. Sales tend to peak for the Christmas season and then decline after
the holidays. Increased sales from September to December and declining sales in January
and February result in lower revenue for the first half of the year and higher revenue for the
second half.
HKAS 34.20 1.6 Periods covered

As required by the standard, financial information for the following periods or as at the following
dates should be provided in interim financial reports:
(a) Statement of financial position data as at the end of the current interim period, and
comparative data as at the end of the most recent financial year.
(b) Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income data for the current interim
period and cumulative data for the current year to date, together with comparative data for
the corresponding interim period and cumulative figures for the previous financial year.
(c) Statement of changes in equity data should be for both the current interim period and for
the year to date, together with comparative data for the corresponding interim period, and
cumulative figures, for the previous financial year.
(d) Statement of cash flows data should be cumulative for the current year to date, with
comparative cumulative data for the corresponding interim period in the previous financial
year.
684
HKAS 34.23
1.7 Materiality
In deciding how to account for an item in an interim financial report, materiality should be assessed
in relation to the interim period financial data. It should be recognised that interim measurements
may rely to a greater extent on estimates than annual financial data.
HKAS 34.28 1.8 Recognition and measurement principles

HKAS 34 strongly emphasises the recognition and measurement principles and the guidelines for
their practical application. The guiding principle is that identical recognition and measurement
principles should be used in an entity's interim and annual financial statements.
To illustrate, a cost that is not regarded as an asset in the year-end statement of financial position
should not be treated so in the statement of financial position for an interim period, Likewise, an
accrual of income or expense for a transaction that has not been incurred (or a deferral of income
or expense) is not suitable for interim reporting, just as it is for year-end reporting.
A remeasurement of the amounts that were reported in a financial statement of a previous interim
period may have to be carried out in a later interim period or at the year-end because of the
application of this recognition and measurement principle. Disclosure of the nature and amount of
any significant reassessments is required.
HKAS 34.37 1.8.1 Revenues received occasionally, seasonally or cyclically
The revenue recognition principle should be applied consistently in both interim and year-end
reports. Revenue which is not recurring i.e. received as an occasional item, or of seasonal or
cyclical nature, should not be anticipated or deferred in the annual financial statements, as well as
in the interim financial statements.
HKAS 34.39 1.8.2 Costs incurred unevenly during the financial year
Anticipation or deferral of these costs (i.e. recorded as accruals or prepayments) is done only if it
would be appropriate to do so in the annual financial statements.
To illustrate, it would not be appropriate to anticipate expenses which have not yet been incurred
e.g. part of the cost of a major advertising campaign happening later in the reporting year, where
no expenses have been incurred. On the other hand, it would be necessary to anticipate a rental
cost of a property where the rental is paid in arrears.
HKAS 34
Illustrative 1.9 Applications of the recognition and measurement principles
examples
Section B Specific applications of the recognition and measurement principles are provided in an appendix
to the standard. Some of these examples are explained below, by way of explanation and
illustration.
1.9.1 Payroll taxes and insurance contributions paid by employers
The assessment of these costs is done annually in some countries, though they are paid at an
uneven rate during the year. A large portion of the taxes is paid in the earlier phase of the year
while a much smaller portion is paid in the later part of the year. This situation thus entails the use
of an estimated average annual tax rate in an interim statement, not the actual tax paid since the
taxes are assessed on an annual basis, even though the payments pattern is uneven.
As an employer, Hung Line Co is required to pay 3% of annual salaries into an insurance fund.
Contributions are capped at $500,000, which means that no contributions for salaries in excess of
this amount are required.
One of Hung Line Co’s directors earns a monthly salary of $50,000.
685
Financial Reporting
Required
What amount should be recognised as an expense in Hung Line’s interim financial statements for
the first 6 months of the year in respect of insurance contributions relating to the director?
1.9.2 Cost of a planned major periodic maintenance or overhaul

In the absence of a legal or constructive obligation to carry out major periodic maintenance or
overhaul, the cost of this kind of work in the later phase of the year must not be anticipated in an
interim financial statement. The fact that a maintenance or overhaul is planned and is carried out
annually is not a justification for the anticipation of the cost in an interim financial report.
1.9.3 Other planned but irregularly-occurring costs
Likewise, no accrual is to be made in an interim report for costs such as charitable donations or
employee training costs which are planned to be incurred later in the year. These costs are
considered as discretionary, even if they occur regularly and are planned.
1.9.4 Year-end bonus
Unless there is a legal or constructive obligation to pay a year-end bonus (e.g. a contractual
obligation, or a regular past practice) and a reliable measure on the size of the bonus, such a
bonus should not be provided for in an interim financial statement.
Example: Bonus
BlueBear's year end is 31 December and it is currently preparing interim financial statements for
the six months to 30 June 20X1. It has a contractual agreement with its staff that it will pay them
an annual bonus equal to 8% of their annual salary if the full year's output exceeds 5,000,000 units.
Budgeted output is 5,500,000 units and the entity has achieved budgeted output during the first six
months of the year. Annual salaries are estimated to be $80 million, with the salary cost in the first
half year to 30 June being $35 million.
Required
How should the bonus be reflected in the interim financial statements?
Solution
It is probable that the bonus will be paid, given that the actual output already achieved in the year is
in line with budgeted figures, which exceed the required level of output. So a bonus of $2.8 million
(8%  $35m) should be recognised in the interim financial statements at 30 June 20X1.
1.9.5 Holiday pay

The same principle is to be applied to holiday pay. An accrual must be made for any unpaid
accumulated holiday pay in the interim financial report if the holiday pay is an enforceable
obligation on the employer.
1.9.6 Non-monetary intangible assets
Expenses might be incurred during an interim period on items that might or will generate non-
monetary intangible assets. According to HKAS 38 Intangible Assets, with the exception of those
costs that constitute part of the cost of an identifiable intangible asset, other costs relating to the
generation of non-monetary intangible assets (e.g. development expenses) should be recognised
as an expense when incurred. Costs that were initially recognised as an expense cannot be treated
as part of the cost of an intangible asset in a later period. The same approach should be adopted in
interim financial statements as mentioned in HKAS 34. That is to say, unless a cost will eventually
686
be part of a non-monetary intangible asset that has not yet been recognised, it would not be
appropriate to have it 'deferred'; it should be expensed in the interim report.
1.9.7 Depreciation
Depreciation and amortisation should be calculated and charged in an interim statement only on
non-current assets already acquired. No such calculation is required for those non-current assets
to be acquired later in the financial year.
1.9.8 Foreign currency translation gains and losses
HKAS 21 should be applied and the amounts should be computed based on the same principles as
at the financial year end.
1.9.9 Tax on income
An income tax expense (tax on profits), calculated based on an estimated average annual tax rate
for the year, should be included in the interim statements of an entity. To illustrate, suppose a tax
rate of 20% is to be applied on the first $500,000 of a company's profit and 22% on profits above
$500,000. A company which makes a profit of $500,000 in its first half year, and expects to make
$500,000 in the second half year should apply an expected annual average tax rate of 21% in the
interim financial report, not 20%. Since income tax on company profits is charged on an annual
basis, an effective annual rate is therefore considered as appropriate for each interim period.
Suppose a company earns pre-tax income of $300,000 in the first quarter of the year, but expects a
loss of $100,000 in each of the following three quarters, so that net income before tax for the whole
year is zero. Assume also that the tax rate for the current year is 20%. The loss will not be
anticipated in this case and thus a tax charge of $60,000 should be recorded for the first quarter of
the year (20% of $300,000) and a negative tax charge of $20,000 for each of the next three
quarters, if actual losses are the same as anticipated.
Where the tax year and the financial year of a company do not coincide, a separate estimated
weighted average annual tax rate should be used in the interim periods that fall within the tax year.
Tax credits are given, based on amounts of capital expenditure or research and development and
so on, to set off against the tax payable in some countries. If these credits are calculated and
granted annually, it is appropriate to include anticipated tax credits within the calculation of the
estimated average tax rate for the year. This average tax rate is then applied to calculate the
income tax for interim periods. However, in the case of a tax benefit relating to a specific one-time
event, it should be recognised within the tax expense for the interim period in which the event
occurs.
Flyman is currently preparing interim financial statements for the six months to 30 June 20X1. Its
profit before tax for the six-month period to 30 June 20X1 is $5 million. The business is seasonal
and the profit before tax for the six months to 31 December 20X1 is almost certain to be $9 million.
Income tax is calculated as 14% of reported annual profit before tax if it does not exceed $10
million. If annual profit before tax exceeds $10 million the tax rate on the whole amount is 16%.
Required
Under HKAS 34 what should the taxation charge be in the interim financial statements?
1.9.10 Inventory valuations

Inventories should be valued in the same manner in both interim reports and final accounts, though
the valuation in interim reports may rely more heavily on estimates.
The net realisable value of inventories should be estimated from selling prices and the related
costs to complete and dispose of at interim dates.
687
Financial Reporting
Example: Inventory valuation

Callcut is currently preparing interim financial statements for the half year to 30 June 20X1. The
price of its products tends to vary. At 30 June 20X1, it has inventories of 500,000 units, at a cost
per unit of $5.00. The net realisable value of the inventories is $4.50 per unit at 30 June 20X1.
The expected net realisable value of the inventories at 31 December 20X1 is $5.10 per unit.
Required
How should the value of the inventories be reflected in the interim financial statements?
Solution
The value of the inventories in the interim financial statements at 30 June 20X1 is the lower of cost
and NRV at 30 June 20X1. This is:
500,000  $4.50 = $2.25m
HKAS 34.41 1.10 Use of estimates

It is vital that accounting information must be reliable and free from material error. However, a
certain degree of accuracy and reliability might have to be sacrificed for the sake of timeliness and
cost-benefits. This is particularly true where much less time can be devoted to the preparation of
interim financial statements than at the financial year end. The standard therefore recognises that
estimates for assessing values or even some costs will have to be used, to a greater extent, in
interim financial reporting than in year-end reporting.
An appendix to HKAS 34 gives some examples of the use of estimates.
(a) Inventories. An entity might not need to carry out a full inventory count at the end of each
interim period. Instead, it may be sufficient to estimate inventory values using sales margins.
(b) Provisions. An entity might employ outside experts or consultants to advise on the
appropriate amount of a provision, as at the year end (for example, a provision for
environmental or site restoration costs). It will probably be inappropriate to employ an expert
to make a similar assessment at each interim date. Similarly, an entity might employ a
professional valuer to revalue non-current assets at the year end, whereas at the interim
date(s) the entity will not rely on such experts.
(c) Income taxes. The rate of income tax (tax on profits) will be calculated at the year end by
applying the tax rate in each country/jurisdiction to the profits earned there. At the interim
stage, it may be sufficient to estimate the rate of income tax by applying the same 'blended'
estimated weighted average tax rate to the income earned in all countries/jurisdictions.
The principle of materiality applies to interim financial reporting, as it does to year-end reporting.
In assessing materiality, it needs to be recognised that interim financial reports will rely more
heavily on estimates than year-end reports. Materiality should be assessed in relation to the interim
financial statements themselves, and should be independent of 'annual materiality' considerations.
If an estimate of an amount reported in an interim period changes significantly during the second
period of the financial year but a separate financial report is not published for that second period,
the nature and amount of that change in estimate should be disclosed in a note to the annual
financial statements for that financial year.
688
1.11 HK(IFRIC) Int-10 Interim Financial Reporting and Impairment

There is a prominent conflict about the recognition and reversal in financial statements of
impairment losses on goodwill and certain financial assets between the requirements of HKAS 34
Interim Financial Reporting and those in other standards. HK(IFRIC) Int-10 concludes the following:
(a) An entity must not reverse an impairment loss recognised in a previous interim period in
respect of goodwill or an investment in either an equity instrument or a financial asset carried
at cost.
(b) An entity must not extend this consensus by analogy to other areas of potential conflict
between HKAS 34 and other standards.
689
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting
Lays down the principles and guidelines for production of

interim financial statements
Does not mandate which entities should produce them
Minimum components:
Condensed statement of financial position
Condensed statement of profit or loss and other
Condensed statement of changes in equity
Condensed statement of cash flows
Selected notes
Basic and diluted EPS if within scope of HKAS 33
The same headings and sub-totals as those in the most
recent annual financial statements should be used.
Notes should include an explanation of significant events and
transactions in the interim period and comments on
seasonality.
Recognition and measurement principles:
Should be identical to those applied in the annual

Seasonal revenue is not anticipated/deferred
Unevenly incurred costs are not anticipated/
deferred unless appropriate.
Example applications of recognition and measurement

principles:
No accrual made for planned costs in second half of
year e.g. maintenance or overhaul
No accrual made for year-end bonus unless there is a
legal or constructive obligation to pay
Include an income tax expense based on an
estimated average annual tax rate for the year
Estimates for assessing values or costs will have to be used

to a greater extent in interim financial reporting than in year-
end financial reporting, e.g.
Estimation of inventory values in the place of a full
inventory count
Using management estimates in interim reports to
measure revaluations or provisions rather than
external experts.
690
Answer 1
HKAS 34 provides the following list of events and transactions for which disclosures would be
required if they were significant:
(a) The write down of inventories to net realisable value and the reversal of such a write-down
(b) Recognition of a loss from the impairment of financial assets, property, plant and equipment,
intangible assets, or other assets, and the reversal of such a loss
(c) Reversal of any provisions for the costs of restructuring
(d) Acquisitions and disposals of items of property, plant and equipment
(e) Litigation settlements
(f) Corrections of prior period errors
(g) Changes in the business or economic circumstances that affect the fair value of the entity's
financial assets and financial liabilities, whether those assets and liabilities are recognised at
fair value or amortised cost
(h) Any loan default or breach of a loan agreement that has not been remedied on or before the
end of the reporting period
(i) Related party transactions
(j) Transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy used in measuring the fair value of
financial instruments
(k) Changes in the classification of financial assets as a result of a change in the purpose or use
of those assets, and
(l) Changes in contingent liabilities or contingent assets.
This list is not exhaustive.
Individual HKFRS provide guidance regarding disclosure requirements for many of the items listed
above. When the events or transactions listed are significant, the interim report should provide an
explanation of and update to the relevant information included in the financial statements of the last
annual reporting period.
Answer 2
The director’s annual salary is 12  $50,000 = $600,000. This is in excess of the $500,000
contribution cap.
The annual contribution for the director is therefore $500,000  3% = $15,000.
Although the salary in the first six months of the year is $300,000 and below the contributions cap,
to recognise a contributions expense of 3%  $300,000 = $9,000 would mean that an unequal
expense of $6,000 is recognised in the second half of the year.
Therefore the expense to be recognised in the interim financial statements is $15,000  6/12 =
$7,500.
691
Financial Reporting
Answer 3
The taxation charge in the interim financial statements is based upon the weighted average rate for
the year. In this case the entity’s tax rate for the year is expected to be 16%. The taxation charge in
the interim financial statements will be $5m  16% = $800,000.
692
Exam practice
Hintrim 18 minutes
Hintrim's accounting year ends on 31 December each year and it is currently preparing interim
financial statements for the half year to 30 June 20X4.
The financial controller is unsure about how to deal with three issues relating to HKAS 34 Interim
Financial Reporting, and has asked for your help.
(a) Hintrim has a contractual agreement with its staff that it will pay them an annual bonus equal
to 10% of their annual salary if the full year's output exceeds one million units. Budgeted
output is 1.4 million units and the entity has achieved budgeted output during the first six
months of the year. Annual salaries are estimated to be $100 million, with the cost in the first
half year to 30 June being $45 million.
How should the bonus be reflected in the interim financial statements?
(b) The price of Hintrim's products tends to vary. At 30 June 20X4, it has inventories of 100,000
units, at a cost per unit of $1.40. The net realisable value of the inventories is $1.20 per unit
at 30 June 20X4. The expected net realisable value of the inventories at 31 December 20X4
is $1.55 per unit.
How should the value of the inventories be reflected in the interim financial statements?
(c) Hintrim's profit before tax for the six-month period to 30 June 20X4 is $6 million. The
business is seasonal and the profit before tax for the six months to 31 December 20X4 is
almost certain to be $10 million. Income tax is calculated as 25% of reported annual profit
before tax if it does not exceed $10 million. If annual profit before tax exceeds $10 million the
tax rate on the whole amount is 30%.
Advise the financial controller. (10 marks)
693
Financial Reporting
694
chapter 26
Presentation of financial
statements
Topic list
1 Reporting financial performance

1.1 HKAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements
1.2 Statement of financial position
1.3 Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
1.4 Statement of changes in equity
1.5 Other aspects of HKAS 1
2 HK(IFRIC) Int-17 Distributions of Non-cash Assets to Owners
2.1 The issue
2.2 Key provisions
Learning focus
HKAS 1 affects all entities and you must be familiar with the requirements of the standard.
695
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
requirements
4.01 Primary financial statement preparation 3
4.01.02 Explain the minimum line items that should be presented in the
financial statements and criteria for additional line items
4.02 Financial statement disclosure requirements 3
4.02.01 Disclose accounting policy and items required by the HKFRS,
Companies Ordinance and other rules and regulations
4.02.02 Explain the importance to disclose significant judgment and
estimates
696
26: Presentation of financial statements | Part C Accounting for business transactions
1 Reporting financial performance

Topic highlights
HKAS 1 (Revised) provides guidance on the content and format of a set of financial statements.
HKAS 1.10 1.1 HKAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements

HKAS 1 (Revised) states that a complete set of financial statements includes the following:
(a) A statement of financial position as at the end of the period.
(b) A statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the period.
(c) A statement of changes in equity for the period.
(d) A statement of cash flows for the period.
(e) Notes, comprising a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory
information.
(f) Comparative information in respect of the preceding period.
(g) A statement of financial position as at the beginning of the preceding period when an entity
applies an accounting policy retrospectively or makes a retrospective restatement of items in
its financial statements, or when it reclassifies items in its financial statements.
These financial statements must be clearly identified and distinguished from other information in
the same published document.
The statement of cash flows is dealt with in Chapter 20 of this Learning Pack; the statements of
financial position, profit or loss and other comprehensive income and changes in equity are
considered in more detail in later sections of this chapter.
The IASB is currently engaged in a number of Disclosure Initiative projects, with the objective of
improving presentation and disclosure requirements of existing standards. The first of these
projects was completed in 2014 and resulted in amendments to IAS 1 (HKAS 1). The amendments
are detailed in the relevant sections of this chapter and are effective from 1 January 2016.
1.1.1 Terminology
HKAS 1 was revised in 2007 and some of the names of the main financial statements were
changed. The title 'statement of comprehensive income' was further changed to be 'statement of
profit or loss and other comprehensive income' by a 2011 amendment to the standard.
The use of the new terms listed above is not mandatory; and in practice, an entity may continue to
use the 'old' titles such as 'balance sheet' instead of 'statement of financial position'. The following
table lists the old names alongside the new:
Old New
Balance sheet Statement of financial position
Income statement Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
Cash flow statement Statement of cash flows
1.1.2 Performance reporting

HKAS 1 (Revised) focuses on aggregating transactions with similar characteristics and therefore
requires that changes in equity are classified as one of two types, and reported accordingly:
(a) Changes in equity arising from transactions with owners in their capacity as owners (e.g.
dividends and share issues) are reported in the statement of changes in equity.
697
Financial Reporting
(b) Changes in equity arising from all other transactions are reported in the statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income.
The statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income therefore includes both:
 the profit or loss for the period and
 other comprehensive income.
HKAS 1.7 Other comprehensive income is defined by HKAS 1 (Revised) as income and expense (including
reclassification adjustments) that are not recognised in profit or loss as required or
permitted by other HKFRS. The standard goes on to list the components of other comprehensive
income as:
(a) changes in the revaluation surplus
(b) those actuarial gains and losses on defined benefit plans not recognised in profit or loss
(c) gains and losses arising from translating the financial statements of a foreign operation
(d) gains and losses from investments in equity instruments measured at fair value through
other comprehensive income
(e) the effective portion of gains and losses on hedging instruments in a cash flow hedge.
HKAS 1.38, 1.1.3 Comparative information

38A
Other than where HKFRS permit otherwise, comparative information should be presented for the
preceding period for all amounts reported in the current period’s financial statements. Comparative
narrative information should also be provided where this is relevant to an understanding of the
current period’s financial statements.
As a minimum, an entity should present:
 two statements of financial position
 two statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
 two statements of cash flows
 two statements of changes in equity, and
 related notes.
HKAS 1.40A, 1.1.4 Additional statement of financial position
40B
HKAS 1 (Revised) requires that a statement of financial position is presented as at the beginning of
the preceding period when an entity:
(i) applies an accounting policy retrospectively, makes a retrospective restatement of items in
its financial statements or reclassifies items in its financial statements, and
(ii) the retrospective application or restatement or the reclassification has a material effect on
the information in the statement of financial position at the beginning of the preceding period.
In effect, this will result in the presentation of three statements of financial position when there is a
material prior period adjustment: one at the end of the current period, one at the end of the
preceding period and one at the start of the preceding period.
698
1.2 Statement of financial position

1.2.1 Proforma
The HKAS 1 (Revised) format is given below.
ABC GROUP – STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AT 31 DECEMBER
20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Goodwill 80,800 91,200
Other intangible assets 227,470 227,470
Investments in equity investments measured at fair value
through other comprehensive income 142,500 156,000
901,620 945,460
Current assets
Other current assets 25,650 12,540
564,880 578,740
Total assets 1,466,500 1,524,200
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Other components of equity 10,200 21,200
903,700 782,900
Non-controlling interests 70,050 48,600
Total equity 973,750 831,500
Long-term borrowings 120,000 160,000
Deferred tax 28,800 26,040
Long-term provisions 28,850 52,240
Total non-current liabilities 177,650 238,280
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 115,100 187,620
Short-term borrowings 150,000 200,000
Current portion of long-term borrowings 10,000 20,000
Current tax payable 35,000 42,000
Short-term provisions 5,000 4,800
Total current liabilities 315,100 454,420
Total liabilities 492,750 692,700
Total equity and liabilities 1,466,500 1,524,200
699
Financial Reporting
HKAS 1.2.2 Disclosure requirements

1.54,55,58,59
As a minimum HKAS 1 (Revised) requires that the statement of financial position (balance sheet)
includes the following line items if they are material:
(a) Property, plant and equipment
(b) Investment property
(c) Intangible assets
(d) Financial assets (excluding amounts shown under (e), (h) and (i))
(e) Investments accounted for using the equity method
(f) Biological assets
(g) Inventories
(h) Trade and other receivables
(i) Cash and cash equivalents
(j) The total of assets classified as held for sale and assets included in disposal groups
classified as held for sale in accordance with HKFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and
(k) Trade and other payables
(l) Provisions
(m) Financial liabilities (excluding amounts shown under (k) and (l))
(n) Liabilities and assets for current tax, as defined in HKAS 12 Income Taxes
(o) Deferred tax liabilities and deferred tax assets, as defined in HKAS 12
(p) Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale in accordance with HKFRS 5
(q) Non-controlling interests, presented within equity, and
(r) Issued capital and reserves attributable to owners of the parent.
Additional line items should be presented when they are relevant to an understanding of an entity's
position. In deciding whether additional items should be presented separately, HKAS 1 (revised)
requires that assessment is made of:
 the nature and liquidity of assets
 the function of assets within the entity, and
 the amounts, nature and timing of liabilities.
Where different measurement bases are used for different classes of assets (e.g. historic cost or
revalued amount), the standard suggests that their nature or function differs and they should be
presented separately.
As a result of the IASB’s Disclosure Initiative. HKAS 1 has been amended to address the issue of
HKAS 1.55A subtotals in the statement of financial position. Subtotals should:
 Contain only line items made up of amounts recognised and measured in accordance with
other HKFRS;
 Be presented and labelled in such a way that the subtotal is understandable;
 Be consistent from one period to the next; and
 Not be given more prominence than subtotals and totals required by HKFRS.
700
HKAS 1.2.3 Current/non-current classification

1.60,66,69,72,
74,75 An entity must present current and non-current assets, and current and non-current liabilities,
as separate classifications in the statement of financial position except where a presentation
based on liquidity provides more relevant and reliable information. In this case, all assets and
liabilities should be presented broadly in order of liquidity.
HKAS 1 (Revised) provides the criteria for classification of an asset or liability as current. Any other
items are classified as non-current:
Current asset Current liability
(a) The entity expects to realise, sell or (a) The entity expects to settle the liability in
consume the asset in its normal its normal operating cycle
operating cycle
(b) The asset is held primarily for trading (b) The liability is held primarily for trading
(c) The entity expects to realise the asset (c) The liability is due to be settled within
within 12 months after the reporting 12 months after the reporting period
period
(d) The asset is cash or a cash equivalent (d) The entity does not have an
unless the asset is restricted from being unconditional right to defer settlement of
exchanged or used to settle a liability for the liability for at least 12 months after
at least the 12 months after the reporting the reporting period. Terms of a liability
period that could, at the option of the
counterparty, result in its settlement by
the issue of equity instruments do not
affect the classification
A long-term financial liability due to be settled within 12 months of the end of reporting period
should be classified as a current liability, even if an agreement to refinance, or to reschedule
payments, on a long-term basis is completed after the reporting period and before the financial
statements are authorised for issue.
End of reporting Agreement to Date financial Settlement date

period refinance on long- statements <12 months after
term basis authorised for issue the reporting period
A long-term financial liability that is payable on demand because the entity breached a
condition of its loan agreement should be classified as current at the end of reporting period even
if the lender has agreed after the reporting period, and before the financial statements are
authorised for issue, not to demand payment as a consequence of the breach.
Condition of loan End of reporting Lender agrees not Date financial

agreement period to enforce payment statements
breached. Long- resulting from approved for issue
term liability breach
becomes payable
on demand
However, if the lender has agreed by the end of reporting period to provide a period of grace
ending at least 12 months after the reporting period within which the entity can rectify the
breach and during that time the lender cannot demand immediate repayment, the liability is
classified as non-current.
701
Financial Reporting
HK Interpretation 5 was issued in November 2010. It sets out the conclusions of the HKICPA in
relation to whether a term loan subject to a repayment on demand clause should be classified as
current or non-current.
HKICPA concludes that the classification depends on the rights and obligations of the lender and
borrower as contractually agreed and in force at the reporting date. Where a lender has an
unconditional right to call the loan at any time, it must be classified by the borrower as current,
regardless of the probability of the lender exercising their right within 12 months.
HKAS 1.79 1.2.4 Disclosure of share capital and reserves
HKAS 1 requires that the following information is disclosed either in the statement of financial
position or statement of changes in equity or notes to the accounts:
(a) For each class of share capital:
(i) the number of shares authorised
(ii) the number of shares issued and fully paid, and issued but not fully paid
(iii) par value per share, or that the shares have no par value
(iv) a reconciliation of the number of shares outstanding at the beginning and end of the
period
(v) the rights of each class of shares
(vi) shares held by the entity itself or a subsidiary or an associate, and
(vii) shares reserved for issue under options and contracts for the sale of shares, including
terms and amounts, and
(b) A description of the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity.
Note that the new Companies Ordinance in Hong Kong abolishes the concepts of authorised share
capital and par value per share from 2014.
The following are assets and liabilities of a boat and ship building company at 31 December 20X4:
(a) Specialist steel that is used in the construction of warships. The steel is left over from a
recently completed order; it is unlikely to be used within 12 months as the company has no
current orders for warships.
(b) Two completed small fishing boats that are available for sale to the general public.
(c) An amount of $6million due from a customer that has contracted the company to build a
tugboat. $3.7million of the $6million has been billed to the customer.
(d) A part complete tourist boat that the company intends to offer for sale to local river cruise
companies when complete. The boat is likely to take 14 months to complete.
(e) The company has an outstanding bank loan of $60million. The maturity date attached to the
loan was 20Y0, however the company has breached a covenant during 20X4 making it
repayable on demand. The bank has stated that it will not demand repayment.
Required
Explain how these assets should be presented in the statement of financial position of the boat and
shipbuilding company at 31 December 20X4.
702
HKAS 1.3 Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income

1.10,10A
HKAS 1 (Revised) allows the presentation of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income in one of two ways:
(a) As a single statement ('the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income')
(b) As two statements:
(i) A statement of profit or loss
(ii) A statement which details other comprehensive income.
1.3.1 Proforma: single statement
The following proforma shows the format of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income where a single statement is used.
Illustration: Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (single
statement) given in HKAS 1
ABC GROUP – STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9 (SINGLE STATEMENT)
20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Revenue 390,000 355,000
Cost of sales (245,000) (230,000)
Gross profit 145,000 125,000
Other income 20,667 11,300
Distribution costs (9,000) (8,700)
Administrative expenses (20,000) (21,000)
Other expenses (2,100) (1,200)
Finance costs (8,000) (7,500)
Share of profit of associates 35,100 30,100
Income tax expense (40,417) (32,000)
Profit for the year from continuing operations 121,250 96,000
Loss for the year from discontinued operations – (30,500)
Other comprehensive income:
Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss
Gains on property revaluation 933 3,367
Remeasurements of defined benefit pension plans (667) 1,333
Share of other comprehensive income of associates 400 (700)
Income tax relating to items that will not be reclassified to profit or (350) (2,100)
loss
Items that may be reclassified to profit or loss
Exchange differences on translating foreign operations 5,334 10,667
Investments in equity instruments (24,000) 26,667
Cash flow hedges (667) (4,000)
Income tax relating to items that may be reclassified to profit or 5,017 (7,234)
loss
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 14,000) 28,000
Total comprehensive income for the year 107,250 93,500
703
Financial Reporting
20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Profit attributable to
Owners of the parent 97,000 52,400
121,250 65,500
Total comprehensive income attributable to
107,250 93,500
Earnings per share (in currency units)
Basic and diluted 0.46 0.30
1.3.2 Proforma: two statements

The two statement approach to the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is
shown in the following illustration:
Illustration: Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (in two
statements) given in HKAS 1
ABC GROUP – STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9
20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
Revenue 390,000 355,000
Other income 20,667 11,300
Changes in inventories of finished goods and work in
progress (115,100) (107,900)
Work performed by the entity and capitalised 16,000 15,000
Raw material and consumables used (96,000) (92,000)
Employee benefits expense (45,000) (43,000)
Depreciation and amortisation expense (19,000) (17,000)
Impairment of property, plant and equipment (4,000) –
Other expenses (6,000) (5,500)
Finance costs (15,000) (18,000)
Share of profit of associates 35,100 30,100
Profit for the year from continuing operations 121,250 96,000
Loss for the year from discontinued operation – (30,500)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 121,250 65,500
Profit attributable to
121,250 65,500
Earnings per share (in currency units)
Basic and diluted 0.46 0.30
704
ABC GROUP – STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

20X9 20X8
$'000 $'000
PROFITS FOR THE YEAR 121,250 65,500
Gains on property revaluation 933 3,367
Remeasurements of defined benefit pension plans (667) 1,333
Share of other comprehensive income of associates 400 (700)
Income tax relating to items that will not be reclassified to (350) (2,100)
profit or loss
Exchange differences on translating foreign operations 5,334 10,667
Investments in equity instruments (24,000) 26,667
Cash flow hedges (667) (4,000)
Income tax relating to items that may be reclassified to profit 5,017 (7,234)
or loss
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax (14,000) 28,000
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 107,250 93,500
Total comprehensive income attributable to
107,250 93,500
HKAS 1.81A, 1.3.3 Disclosure requirements

82,82A 85-
87,92, 93, 99 In addition to the profit or loss section and other comprehensive income section, the following
should be presented in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income:
(a) Profit or loss
(b) Total other comprehensive income
(c) Comprehensive income for the period, being the total of profit or loss and other
Profit or loss section
The profit or loss section should include line items that present the following amounts for the
period:
(a) Revenue
(b) Gains and losses arising from the derecognition of financial assets measured at amortised
cost
(c) Finance costs
(d) Impairment losses
(e) Share of the profit or loss of associates and joint ventures accounted for using the equity
method
(f) If a financial asset is reclassified out of amortised cost to fair value through profit or loss, any
gain or loss arising from a difference between the previous carrying amount and its fair value
at the reclassification date
705
Financial Reporting
(g) If a financial asset is reclassified out of fair value through other comprehensive income to fair
value through profit or loss, any cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in other
comprehensive income that is reclassified to profit or loss
(h) Tax expense
(i) A single amount for the total of discontinued operations.
Additional line items, headings and subtotals should be presented when such presentation is
relevant to an understanding of the entity's financial performance.
An analysis of expenses by either nature or function, whichever provides information that is reliable
and more relevant, should also be disclosed either in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income or in the notes to the accounts.
When items of income or expense are material, their nature and amount must be disclosed
separately, either in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income or in the notes
to the accounts.
HKAS 1 does not permit the following in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income:
 The offsetting of income and expenses (unless required or permitted by an HKFRS)
 The presentation of any items of income or expense as extraordinary items.
Other comprehensive income section
As a result of the Disclosure Initiative HKAS 1 requires that other comprehensive income arising
from associates and joint ventures is presented separately from the rest of other comprehensive
income.
Consequently, the other comprehensive income section presents line items for the amounts for the
period of:
(a) Items of other comprehensive income classified by nature and grouped into those that:
 will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
 will be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss when specific conditions are met.
(b) The share of the other comprehensive income of associates and joint ventures accounted for
using the equity method, separated into the share of items that:
 will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
 will be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss when specific conditions are met.
Items of other comprehensive income should be presented either:
 net of related tax effects, or
 before related tax effects, with one amount shown for the aggregate amount of income tax
relating to those items.
Where the second approach is adopted, the amount of tax should be allocated between those
items which may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss and those which will not.
Reclassification adjustments relating to components of other comprehensive income should be
disclosed either in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income or in the notes
to the accounts. These are amounts reclassified to profit or loss in the current period that were
recognised in other comprehensive income in previous periods. Users can use this information to
assess the impact of reclassifications on profit or loss.
Additional line items, headings and subtotals should be presented when such presentation is
relevant to an understanding of the entity's financial performance.
706
1.3.4 Subtotals
HKAS 1.85A
The guidance on subtotals applicable to the statement of financial position (see section 1.2.2) is
also applicable to the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
For any subtotals presented in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the
line items should be disclosed that reconcile those subtotals back to the line items required by
HKFRS.
1.3.5 Allocation of profit and total comprehensive income
HKAs 1.81B
The following items must also be disclosed in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income as allocations for the period:
(a) Profit or loss for the period attributable to:
(i) non-controlling interests
(ii) owners of the parent.
(b) Total comprehensive income for the period attributable to:
(i) non-controlling interests
(ii) owners of the parent.
(a) Explain what is other comprehensive income and why these items are not recognised in
profit or loss.
(b) Explain what is reclassification and why disclosure of reclassification adjustments is
important.
HKAS 1.4 Statement of changes in equity

1.106,106A
The statement of changes in equity provides a reconciliation of the shareholders' funds brought
forward and shareholders' funds carried forward. Shareholders' funds consist of ordinary share
capital, share premium, revaluation reserve, retained earnings and any other components of equity.
The following should be disclosed:
(a) Total comprehensive income for the period, showing separately the total amounts
attributable to owners of the parent and to the non-controlling interests.
(b) For each component of equity, the effects of retrospective application or retrospective
restatement recognised in accordance with HKAS 8, and
(c) For each component of equity, a reconciliation between the carrying amount at the beginning
and the end of the period, separately disclosing changes resulting from:
(i) profit or loss;
(ii) other comprehensive income; and
(iii) transactions with owners in their capacity as owners, showing separately contributions
by and distributions to owners, and changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries that
do not result in a loss of control.
An analysis of the other comprehensive income reported in the statement of changes in equity
must be provided either:
 within the statement of changes in equity itself, or
 in the notes to the accounts.
707
Financial Reporting
The analysis should identify, for each balance within shareholders' funds, individual items of other
comprehensive income aggregated within it. This enables users of the accounts to see in which
reserve each type of other comprehensive income is accumulated.
1.4.1 Proforma
ABC GROUP – STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY FOR THE YEAR ENDED
31 DECEMBER 20X9
Financial
Translation assets Cash Non-
Share Retained of foreign at FV flow Revaluation controlling Total
capital earnings operations through OCI hedges surplus Total interests equity
Balance at $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
1 January 600,000 118,100 (4,000) 1,600 2,000 – 717,700 29,800 747,500
20X8
Changes in
accounting
policy – 400 – – – – 400 100 500
Restated
balance 600,000 118,500 (4,000) 1,600 2,000 – 718,100 29,900 748,000
Changes
in equity
for 20X8
Dividends – (10,000) – – – – (10,000) – (10,000)

Total
comprehensive
income for the
year – 53,200 6,400 16,000 (2,400) 1,600 74,800 18,700 93,500
Balance at
31 December
20X8 600,000 161,700 2,400 17,600 (400) 1,600 782,900 48,600 831,500
Changes in
equity for
20X9
Issue of share
capital 50,000 – – – – – 50,000 – 50,000
Dividends – (15,000) – – – – (15,000) – (15,000)
Total
comprehensive
income for the
year – 96,600 3,200 (14,400) (400) 800 85,800 21,450 107,250
Transfer to
retained
earnings – 200 – – – (200) – – –
Balance at
31 December
20X9 650,000 243,500 5,600 3,200 (800) 2,200 903,700 70,050 973,750
The accountant of Chinatea Co. has returned to work after a sabbatical break of some years. She
is unaware of the issue of HKAS 1 (revised) or the new Companies Ordinance and has prepared
draft financial statements as follows in accordance with what she remembers of HKAS 1 prior to
the revision:
708
BALANCE SHEET AT 31 DECEMBER 20X9

$ $
Non-current assets 525,000
Long term receivable 10,000
535,000
Current assets
Inventories 31,200
Receivables 56,450
Cash 10,900
98,550
633,550
Share capital and reserves
Ordinary share capital (40,000 shares) 40,000
Profits reserve 379,540
419,540
Liabilities
Current liabilities 114,010
Loan stock 20Y6 100,000
214,010
633,550
INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9

$
Turnover 1,235,000
Administrative expenses (267,020)
Distribution and other expenses (115,230)
Interest payable (7,400)
Tax (33,700)
Profit after tax 71,650
Dividends (25,000)
Retained profit 46,650

(a) The accountant has prepared a working schedule of non-current assets as follows:
Land and Fixtures and
buildings fittings Patent Total
$ $ $ $
Cost b/f 700,000 200,000 30,000 930,000
Additions – 15,000 – 15,000
Cost c/f 700,000 215,000 30,000 945,000
Depreciation b/f 337,500 60,000 2,500 400,000
Charge for year 12,500 5,000 2,500 20,000
Depreciation c/f 350,000 65,000 5,000 420,000
Carrying value 350,000 150,000 25,000 525,000
There have been no disposals of non-current assets in the period.

(b) A property was to be revalued at the end of the reporting period to $600,000. The property
had cost $400,000 including $80,000 in respect of land. Depreciation on the property at the
709
Financial Reporting
end of the reporting period was $180,000. This has not been reflected in the financial
statements. Deferred tax relating to the revaluation amounts to $95,000.
(c) Current liabilities include a short-term provision of $20,000 and tax liability of $33,700.
(d) There was a 1 for 3 bonus issue of shares in the year which was funded by the proceeds of
previous share issues.
(e) The long-term receivable balance relates to a customer who has been given an extended
two-year credit period.
Required
Re-draft the financial statements of Chinatea Co., including a statement of changes in equity in
accordance with HKAS 1 (revised). Comparatives are not required.
1.5 Other aspects of HKAS 1

As well as prescribing the format and content of the financial statements, HKAS 1 provides
guidance on the general features of financial statements.
HKAS 1.5.1 True and fair view and compliance with HKFRS
1.15,16,18,19,
20,23 Financial statements must present a true and fair view of the financial position, performance and
cash flows of an entity. In other words, they must faithfully represent the effects of transactions and
other events in accordance with the basic principles of the Conceptual Framework.
The application of HKFRS and additional disclosure where necessary is presumed to result in a
true and fair view, and an entity which complies with HKFRS should state this fact in the notes to
the accounts. Inappropriate accounting treatments are not rectified either by disclosure of the
accounting policies used or by notes or explanatory material.
In extremely rare circumstances, compliance with a requirement of an HKFRS or HK(IFRIC) may
be so misleading that it would conflict with the objective of financial statements set out in the
Conceptual Framework, in which case the entity shall depart from that specific requirement.
In the case of such a departure, the entity must disclose the following:
1 That management has concluded that the financial statements present fairly the entity's
financial position, financial performance and cash flows.
2 That it has complied with applicable HKFRS except that it has departed from a particular
requirement to achieve a true and fair view.
3 Full details of the departure, and
4 The impact on the financial statements for each item affected and for each period presented.
If the relevant regulatory framework prohibits departure from the requirement, the entity shall, to the
maximum extent possible, reduce the perceived misleading aspects of compliance by disclosing:
1 The relevant HKFRS, the nature of the requirement and the reason why complying with the
requirement is misleading.
2 For each period presented, the adjustments to each item in the financial statements that
would be necessary to achieve a true and fair view.
HKAS 1.25 1.5.2 Going concern

As part of the process of preparing financial statements, the management of an entity should
assess the entity's ability to continue as a going concern.
Where doubt exists as to this ability, any uncertainties should be disclosed.
710
Where an entity is not a going concern, the financial statements should not be prepared on a going
concern basis and this fact should be disclosed together with:
 the basis on which the financial statements have been prepared
 the reason why the entity is not regarded as a going concern.
HKAS 1.5.3 Materiality, offsetting and aggregation

1.29,30, 30A,
31 HKAS 1 provides the following definition of material:
Key term
determining factor.
(HKAS 1 (revised))
The standard requires that:

(a) each material class of similar items is presented separately
(b) items of a dissimilar nature or function should be presented separately unless they are
immaterial
(c) assets and liabilities and income and expenses are not offset unless required or permitted by
another HKFRS.
If a line item in the financial statements is not individually material, it is aggregated with other items;
an item which is not sufficiently material to warrant separate presentation in an individual statement
may warrant separate presentation in the notes.
The Disclosure Initiative amendments to HKAS 1 clarified that an entity may not obscure useful
information by aggregating or disaggregating information. Therefore, for example, material items
with different characteristics should not be aggregated and useful information should not be
obscured with immaterial information.
The Disclosure Initiative amendments also clarified the interaction between materiality and
disclosure:
 The materiality guidance in HKAS 1 applies to the financial statements as a whole including
the primary statements and notes;
 Disclosures are only required if information is material;
 This also applies even where a standard has specific disclosure requirements, even where
those disclosures are required ‘as a minimum’.
 Additional disclosure may be required if the information specifically required by HKFRS is
insufficient to understand the impact of particular transactions, events or conditions.
HKAS 1.5.4 Disclosure of accounting policies
1.117,122
An entity must provide a summary of accounting policies and within it disclose the following:
(a) The measurement basis (or bases) used in preparing the financial statements, and
(b) The other accounting policies used that are relevant to an understanding of the financial
statements.
Illustrative accounting policy disclosure notes are included in select chapters of this Learning Pack.
An entity must disclose, in the summary of significant accounting policies and/or other notes, the
judgments made by management in applying the accounting policies that have the most
significant effect on the amounts of items recognised in the financial statements. Their disclosure
711
Financial Reporting
helps users to better understand the reported position and performance. Significant judgments
may include:
 Whether the risks and rewards of ownership of assets have been transferred to/from another
party.
 Whether sales of goods are financing arrangements rather than revenue generating
activities.
HKAS 1.125 1.5.5 Estimation uncertainty
An entity must disclose in the notes information regarding key assumptions about the future, and
other sources of measurement uncertainty, that have a significant risk of causing a material
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year.
HKAS 1.5.6 Dividends
1.107,137
Entities may not present dividends on equity instruments in the statement of profit or loss. Equity
dividends must be presented on the face of the statement of changes in equity or in the
notes.
This reflects the fact that an equity dividend distribution is an owner change in equity, which must
be presented separately from non-owner changes in equity.
Equity dividends declared after the reporting date but before the financial statements are
authorised for issue should be considered as a non-adjusting event after the reporting period.
HKAS 1 permits an entity to make this disclosure either:
1 on the face of the statement of financial position as a separate component of equity
2 in the notes to the financial statements
HKAS 1.112- 1.5.7 Notes to the financial statements

114
The notes to the financial statements:
(a) present information about the basis of preparation of the financial statements and the
specific accounting policies applied (see section 5.5);
(b) disclose the information required by FRSs that is not presented elsewhere; and
(c) provide information that is not presented elsewhere in the financial statements but is relevant
to an understanding of any of them.
As a result of the Disclosure Initiative, amendments to HKAS 1 have ben made to clarify the
requirements of the standard with respect to the presentation of notes. In particular the
understandability and comparability of the financial statements should be considered when
determining a systematic approach to presenting notes. For example the structure of the notes
may:
 give prominence to those notes that are most relevant to an understanding of financial
position and performance by grouping together information about particular activities;
 group together notes relating to items measured in a similar way eg assets at fair value; or
 follow the order of the primary statements, e.g.:
1 A statement of compliance with HKFRS
3 Supporting information for items in the primary financial statements, in order
4 Other disclosures eg contingent liabilities.
712
1.5.8 Other matters

As well as those matters covered above, HKAS 1 (Revised) also requires the following:
(a) The accrual basis of accounting is used in the preparation of all financial statements except
for the statement of cash flows.
(b) Assets and liabilities and income and expenses are not offset unless permitted or required
by another HKFRS.
(c) A complete set of financial statements including comparative is presented at least annually.
(d) The presentation and classification of items in the financial statements is consistent from one
period to the next unless another presentation or classification becomes more appropriate or
an HKFRS requires another presentation or classification.
(e) Except when HKFRS permit or require otherwise, an entity shall disclose comparative
information in respect of the previous period for all amounts reported in the current period's
The accountant of Worldwide Components Co (‘WCC') is currently preparing the statutory accounts
for the year ended 20X4 for some of the Group subsidiaries. She had identified that one of the
subsidiaries, that produces a single high tech component, is being sued for copyright violation by a
much larger competitor. There is a possibility that the subsidiary will lose the case and as a result
may not be able to continue to trade.
Required
(a) Advise the accountant with regard to the preparation of the statutory accounts for the
subsidiary.
(b) Identify factors that may indicate that a company is not a going concern.
2 HK(IFRIC) Int-17 Distributions of Non-cash Assets

to Owners
2.1 The issue
Topic highlights
When an entity declares a distribution and has an obligation to distribute the assets concerned to
its owners, it must recognise a liability for the dividend payable.
On declaring a distribution of non-cash assets, this Interpretation addresses the following issues:
(a) When should the entity recognise the dividend payable?
(b) How should an entity measure the dividend payable?
(c) When an entity settles the dividend payable, how should it account for any difference
between the carrying amount of the assets distributed and the carrying amount of the
dividend payable?
The interpretation applies only where:
 all owners of the same class of equity instruments are treated equally in a distribution
 the asset is not controlled by the same party before and after the transfer.
713
Financial Reporting
2.2 Key provisions

2.2.1 When to recognise a dividend payable
The liability to pay a dividend shall be recognised when the dividend is appropriately authorised
and is no longer at the discretion of the entity, which is the date:
(a) when declaration of the dividend, e.g. by management or the board of directors, is approved
by the relevant authority, e.g. the shareholders, if the jurisdiction requires such approval, or
(b) when the dividend is declared, e.g. by management or the board of directors, if the
jurisdiction does not require further approval.
2.2.2 Measurement of a dividend payable
An entity shall measure a liability to distribute non-cash assets as a dividend to its owners at the
fair value of the assets to be distributed.
If an entity gives its owners a choice of receiving either a non-cash asset or a cash alternative, the
entity shall estimate the dividend payable by considering both the fair value of each alternative and
the associated probability of owners selecting each alternative.
At the end of each reporting period and at the date of settlement, the entity shall review and adjust
the carrying amount of the dividend payable, with any changes in the carrying amount of the
dividend payable recognised in equity as adjustments to the amount of the distribution.
2.2.3 Accounting for any difference between the carrying amount of the
assets distributed and the carrying amount of the dividend payable
when an entity settles the dividend payable
When an entity settles the dividend payable, it shall recognise the difference, if any, between the
carrying amount of the assets distributed and the carrying amount of the dividend payable in profit
or loss.
2.2.4 Presentation and disclosures
An entity shall present the difference as a separate line item in profit or loss.
An entity shall disclose the following information, if applicable:
(a) The carrying amount of the dividend payable at the beginning and end of the period; and
(b) The increase or decrease in the carrying amount recognised in the period as result of a
change in the fair value of the assets to be distributed.
If, after the end of a reporting period but before the financial statements are authorised for issue, an
entity declares a dividend to distribute a non-cash asset, it shall disclose:
(a) the nature of the asset to be distributed;
(b) the carrying amount of the asset to be distributed as of the end of the reporting period; and
(c) the estimated fair value of the asset to be distributed as of the end of the reporting period, if
it is different from its carrying amount, and the information about the method used to
determine that fair value required by HKFRS 7.
James Wheelwright owns 80% of Kowloon Trucks Co., established by his shareholding of 100% of
the Class A voting shares in that company. The remaining 20% of the company is owned by Asia
Motors Co. (which is not related to Mr Wheelwright). Asia Motors Co. holds 100% of the Class B
voting shares in Kowloon Trucks Co..
During the year Kowloon Trucks Ltd paid a dividend to its Class A and B shareholders. Kowloon
Trucks Co. and Asia Motors Co. agreed that an unwanted property would be transferred from
714
Kowloon Trucks Co. to Asia Motors Co. in lieu of a Class B share cash dividend. The property had
a carrying amount of $4.5milion at the date of the transfer and a fair value of $5.2 million.
Required
Explain the appropriate accounting treatment for this transaction
At the start of 2015, the IASB proposed amendments to IAS 1 in order to clarify the criteria for the
classification of a liability as either current or non-current. The amendments are likely to be adopted
by the HKICPA.
The proposed amendments address an apparent inconsistency within IAS 1 (HKAS 1):
 Paragraph 69(d) of IAS 1 states that a liability is current when an entity does not have an
unconditional right to defer settlement of that liability for at least 12 months after the reporting
period.
 Paragraph 73 states that an obligation is non-current if an entity expects, and has the
discretion, to refinance or roll over an obligation for at least 12 months after the reporting
period under an existing loan facility.
These paragraphs provide two inconsistent bases for the classification of a liability as non-current:
 An unconditional right to defer settlement for at least 12 months (in paragraph 69(d)), and
 An expectation, and the discretion, to roll over an obligation for at least 12 months (in
paragraph 73).
In order to address this inconsistency, the IASB propose to delete the word ‘unconditional’ from
paragraph 69(d) and change the word ‘discretion’ in paragraph 73 to ‘right’. As a result it will be
explicit that only rights in place at the end of a reporting period affect the classification of a liability.
In addition, two further amendments are proposed:
1 The inclusion of an explanation of the link between a settlement of a liability and outflow of
resources by stating within paragraph 69 that settlement refers to ‘the transfer to the
counterparty of cash, equity instruments, other assets or services.’
2 Reorganisation of guidance in the standard to group similar examples together in order to
distinguish between circumstances that do affect rights in existence at the reporting date
and those that do not.
715
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements
A complete set of financial statements includes:

Statement of financial position at the end of the period
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the period
Statement of changes in equity for the period
Statement of cash flows for the period
Notes to the financial statements
Comparative information in respect of the preceding period
Statement of financial position at the start of the preceding period when material
retrospective adjustment has taken place
Statement of financial Statement of profit or loss Statement of changes in

position and other comprehensive equity
income
Minimum disclosure Minimum disclosure Reconciliation of each

requirements requirements component of equity b/f and
c/f
Separately classified current Other comprehensive Disclose:

and non-current assets and income and related tax Total comprehensive
liabilities effects must be grouped into: income attributable to
Amounts that will parent/NCI
Current include assets and not be reclassified Retrospective
liabilities expected to be to profit or loss adjustments
realised/settled in the normal Amounts that may Transactions with
operating cycle or expected be reclassified to owners in their capacity
to be realised/settled within profit or loss as owners
12 months The share of OCI of
equity accounted
All other items are classified investments that will nor
as non-current be reclassified to profit
or loss
The share of the OCI of
equity accounted
investments that may be
Shares and reserves reclassified to profit or
disclosures including: loss
Number of shares in
issue
Rights of each class of
shares
Nature and purpose of
each reserve
Other aspects of HKAS 1:

Financial statements must present a true and fair view; this is presumed to result when an entity
complies with HKFRS
In extremely rare circumstances the requirements of an HKFRS may be departed from; disclosure of
the departure is required
Any uncertainties regarding going concern should be disclosed
A summary of accounting policies must be disclosed
Key assumptions and measurement uncertainty should be disclosed
716
Answer 1
(a) The specialist steel is raw material inventory. It will be used within the normal operating cycle
of the company and therefore it is classified as a current asset. As there are currently no
orders for warships the company should assess whether the inventory might be impaired.
(b) The completed fishing boats are finished goods inventory. They are held for the purpose of
being traded and are expected to be sold in the normal operating cycle of the company.
Therefore they are classified as current assets even if a sale is not expected within 12
months.
(c) The amount due from a customer forms part of trade and other receivables. It is expected to
be realised in the normal operating cycle of the company and is therefore classified as
current. It is irrelevant to classification and recognition that part of the $6m has been billed
and part has not.
(d) The part complete boat is work-in-progress inventory. Even though it will take 14 months to
complete, and possibly even longer to sell, it is classified as a current asset. This is because
the inventory is subject to a sale in the ordinary course of business.
(e) The loan is repayable on demand and is therefore classified as current; this is regardless of
the bank’s statement that it will not demand repayment.
Answer 2
(a) Other comprehensive income (‘OCI’) includes items identified by HKAS 1 that are not
recognised in profit or loss and are not recognised directly in equity but are accumulated in
equity.
HKAS 1 specifies the following types of OCI:
 Exchange differences on translating foreign operations
 Gains/losses on the hedging instrument in a cash flow hedge
 Gains on property revaluation
 Gains/losses on certain financial assets
 Remeasurements of defined benefit pension schemes
There is no obvious principle that results in the recognition of these gains and losses in OCI
rather than profit or loss. They all reflect re-measurements as a result of movements in a
price or valuation, but so do some items that are included in profit or loss (eg gains or losses
on investment properties measured at fair value).
(b) In some cases other comprehensive income may be reclassified to profit or loss at a later
date; in other cases it is not. HKAS 1 requires that other comprehensive income is presented
on the basis of whether it may or may not be reclassified (or ‘recycled’) to profit or loss.
For example exchange gains or losses in relation to a foreign operation that are recognised
as OCI are reclassified and reported as part of the gain or loss on the eventual disposal of
the operation.If cumulative exchange differences in this situation amount to a loss, the
reclassification adjustment is made by:
DEBIT Gain / loss on disposal of foreign X
operation (profit or loss)
CREDIT Other comprehensive income X
Reclassification adjustments must be disclosed in order to inform users of amounts that were
included as income or expenses in other comprehensive income in a previous period and
717
Financial Reporting
are included in profit or loss in the current period. Without this information, users are unable
to identify the profit or loss attributable to the current year’s activities or to fully understand
the impact of the underlying events that affect OCI/profit or loss.
Answer 3
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF CHINATEA CO. AT 31 $
DECEMBER 20X9
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (905,000 – 25,000 (W1)) 880,000
Other intangible assets (W1) 25,000
905,000
Current assets
Inventories 31,200
Trade receivables (56,450 + 10,000) 66,450
Cash and cash equivalents 10,900
108,550
Total assets 1,013,550
Share capital 40,000
Retained earnings 379,540
Revaluation surplus 285,000
704,540
Loan notes 100,000
Deferred tax (on revaluation) 95,000
195,000
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables (114,010 – 33,700 – 20,000) 60,310
Current tax payable 33,700
Short term provisions 20,000
Total current liabilities 114,010
Total liabilities 309,010
Total equity and liabilities 1,013,550
718
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR CHINATEA

CO. FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9
$
Revenue 1,235,000
Gross profit 495,000
Distribution costs (115,230)
Finance costs (7,400)
Income tax expense (33,700)
Other comprehensive income that will not be reclassified to profit or loss
Gains on property revaluation (W1) 380,000
Income tax relating to components of other comprehensive income (95,000)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 285,000
Total comprehensive income for the year 356,650
STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY FOR CHINATEA CO. FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31
DECEMBER 20X9
Retained Revaluation
Share capital earnings surplus Total
$ $ $ $
At 1 January 20X9 40,000 332,890 - 372,890
Dividends - (25,000) - (25,000)
Total comprehensive income - 71,650 285,000 356,650
At 31 December 20X9 40,000 379,540 285,000 704,540
WORKINGS
1 Non-current assets
Land and Fixtures and
buildings fittings Patent Total
$ $ $ $
Cost b/f 700,000 200,000 30,000 930,000
Additions – 15,000 – 15,000
Revaluation 200,000 – – 200,000
Cost c/f 900,000 215,000 30,000 1,145,000
Depreciation b/f 337,500 60,000 2,500 400,000

Charge for year 12,500 5,000 2,500 20,000
Revaluation (180,000) – – (180,000)
Depreciation c/f 170,000 65,000 5,000 240,000
Carrying value
730,000 150,000 25,000 905,000
The revaluation surplus recognised as other comprehensive income is therefore $380,000

($200,000 + $180,000).
719
Financial Reporting
2 New share issue

As the new share issue is made from the proceeds of previous share issues (ie share capital), no
reserves transfer is necessary. This transaction is therefore not evident in the statement of
changes in equity.
Within the financial statements, however, the company must disclose the number of shares in issue
at the current and previous year ends, being:
 40,000 at 31 December 20X9
 30,000 (3/4  40,000) at 31 December 20X8.
Answer 4
(a) The subsidiary makes a single component and is being sued by a larger competitor for
copyright violation.
If the subsidiary loses the case it is probable that it will go out of business as it will no longer
have a product. The management must therefore assess the situation in order to assess the
likelihood of losing the case.
If the subsidiary is expected to lose the case then the financial statements should not be
prepared on the going concern basis. Instead a break-up basis should be used. This is not
described by HKAS 1 but will result in a different presentation and measurement of items in
the financial statements. HKAS 1 does require that disclosure is made of the fact that the
financial statements are not prepared on a going concern basis and the basis on which they
are prepared. The reason why the entity is not a going concern should also be disclosed.
If the subsidiary is expected to win the case then the financial statements should be
prepared on the going concern basis, however disclosure should be made of the material
uncertainties that cast doubt on the company’s ability to continue as a going concern.
(b) In assessing going concern, management should take into account all available information
including that about the future (at least 12 months beyond the reporting date). The following
factors may indicate that a company is not a going concern:
 Low levels of current and expected profitability
 Negative operating cash flows (historic or budgeted)
 Adverse key financial ratios
 Inability to pay dividends
 Expected inability to meet debt repayment schedules
 A growth in levels of competition
 A decline for demand for products/failure to reinvest in new products.
 An inability to agree suitable financing with the bank/withdrawal of financial support
from bank
 Financing long term assets through short-term finance such as an overdraft.
 Withdrawal of supplier credit
 Pending legal or regulatory proceedings against the entity.
Answer 5
This payment is covered by HK(IFRIC) Int- 17 Distribution of non-cash assets to owners.
This interpretation applies only where all shareholders of the same class of equity instruments are
treated equally. Asia Motors Co. is the sole Class B shareholder in Kowloon Trucks Co. and
therefore it applies in this case.
HK (IFRIC) Int-17 does not apply where the asset being transferred is controlled by the same
parties before and after the transfer.
The interpretation states that the dividend payment should be recorded at the fair value of the asset
transferred, being $5,2 million.
The difference of $700,000 between the fair value and the carrying amount of the asset is
recognised as a gain in profit and loss and disclosed.
720
Exam practice
AZ 27 minutes
AZ is a listed manufacturing company. Its finished products are stored in a nearby warehouse until
ordered by customers. AZ has performed very well in the past, but has been in financial difficulties
in recent months and has been re-organising the business to improve performance.
The trial balance for AZ at 31 March 20X3 was as follows:
$'000 $'000
Sales 124,900
Cost of goods manufactured in the year to
31 March 20X3 (excluding depreciation) 94,000
Distribution costs 9,060
Administrative expenses 16,020
Restructuring costs 121
Interest received 1,200
Loan interest paid 639
Land and buildings (including land $20,000,000) 50,300
Accumulated depreciation at 31 March 20X2:
Buildings 6,060
Investment properties (at fair value) 24,000
Inventories at 31 March 20X2 4,852
Trade receivables 9,330
Bank and cash 1,190
Ordinary shares, fully paid 20,430
6% redeemable preference shares 1,000
Revaluation surplus 3,125
Retained earnings at 31 March 20X2 27,137
Ordinary dividends paid 1,000
Preference dividends paid 60
7% loan stock 20X7 18,250
Trade payables 8,120
Proceeds of share issue 2,400
214,292 214,292
Additional information provided:

(i) The property, plant and equipment are being depreciated as follows:
Buildings 5% per annum straight line
Plant and equipment 25% per annum diminishing balance
Depreciation of buildings is considered an administrative cost while depreciation of plant and
equipment should be treated as a cost of sale.
(ii) On 31 March 20X3 the land was revalued to $24,000,000.
(iii) Income tax for the year to 31 March 20X3 is estimated at $161,000. Ignore deferred tax.
721
Financial Reporting
(iv) The closing inventories at 31 March 20X3 were $5,180,000. An inspection of finished goods
found that a production machine had been set up incorrectly and that several production
batches, which had cost $50,000 to manufacture, had the wrong packaging. The goods
cannot be sold in this condition but could be repacked at an additional cost of $20,000.
They could then be sold for $55,000. The wrongly packaged goods were included in closing
inventories at their cost of $50,000.
(v) The preference shares will be redeemed for $1,000,000 in 20X9. Preference dividends are
paid on 31 March each year.
(vi) The 7% loan is a 10-year loan due for repayment by 31 March 20X7. Interest on this loan
needs to be accrued for the six months to 31 March 20X3.
(vii) The restructuring costs in the trial balance represent the cost of a major restructuring of the
company to improve competitiveness and future profitability.
(viii) No fair value adjustments were necessary to the investment properties during the period.
(ix) During the year the company issued two million new ordinary shares for cash at $1.20 per
share. The proceeds have been recorded as 'Proceeds of share issue'.
Required
Prepare the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statement of changes
in equity for AZ for the year to 31 March 20X3 and a statement of financial position at that date.
Notes to the financial statements are not required, but all workings must be clearly shown.
(15 marks)
722
Part D
Group financial statements
723
Financial Reporting
724
chapter 27
Principles of consolidation
Topic list
1 Introduction to group accounting

1.1 Single economic entity and purpose of consolidated accounts
1.2 Group companies
1.3 Definitions
1.4 Levels of investment
2 Principles of consolidation
2.1 Control
2.2 Consolidated accounts
2.3 Consolidation procedures
3 Disclosure of interests in other entities
3.1 Disclosure of consolidated subsidiaries
3.2 Disclosure of unconsolidated subsidiaries (investment entities)
4 HKFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations
4.1 Scope of HKFRS 3 (revised)
4.2 Definitions
4.3 Accounting for a business combination
5 Goodwill
5.1 Consideration transferred
5.2 Non-controlling interests
5.3 Fair value of identifiable assets acquired
5.4 Measurement period adjustments
5.5 Subsequent accounting
5.6 Disclosures
Learning focus
You are very likely to come across groups of companies in practice and in your exam. It is
important that you can identify different types of group companies and know how to account
for them.
The goodwill calculation (including gain on bargain purchase) and the related treatment are
also vital for the preparation of group financial statements.
725
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes

Competency
level
requirements
4.03 Principles of consolidation 3
4.03.01 Identify and describe the concept of a group as a single economic
entity
4.03.02 Define a subsidiary and when a group should start and stop
consolidating a subsidiary
4.03.03 Explain what constitutes control and the impact of potential voting
rights
4.03.04 Describe the reasons why the directors of a company may not want
to consolidate a subsidiary and the circumstances in which non-
consolidation is permitted
4.03.05 Explain the purpose of consolidated financial statements
4.03.06 Explain the importance of eliminating intra-group transactions
4.03.07 Explain the importance of uniform accounting policies and
coterminous year ends in the preparation of consolidated accounts
4.03.08 Apply the appropriate accounting treatment of consolidated goodwill
4.06 Business combinations 3
4.06.01 Explain the scope of business combinations in accordance with
HKFRS 3 (revised)
4.06.02 Identify business combination and the difference between
acquisition of asset and business
4.06.03 Determine the acquisition date of an acquisition
4.06.04 Identify the identifiable assets (including intangibles) and liabilities
acquired in a business combination
4.06.05 Explain the recognition principle and measurement basis of
identifiable assets and liabilities and the exception
4.06.06 Explain what contingent consideration is and how to account for it
initially and subsequently
4.06.07 Explain how to account for acquisition-related costs, including those
related to issue debt or equity securities
4.06.08 Determine what is part of the business combination transaction and
the consideration
4.06.09 Calculate goodwill (including bargain purchase) and account for it
4.06.11 Account for non-controlling interest when the subsidiary has
negative equity balance
4.06.12 Explain and account for measurement period adjustments
4.10 Financial statement disclosure requirement 3
4.10.01 Disclose the relevant information for business combinations
occurred during and subsequent to the reporting period
726
27: Principles of consolidation | Part D Group financial statements
1 Introduction to group accounting

Topic highlights
A group of companies develops when a parent company buys one or more subsidiaries. The group
should be regarded as a single economic entity for the purposes of accounting.
A group of companies is the result of one company (the parent company) buying a controlling
share in one or more other companies (subsidiaries). This situation is very common where a parent
company:
 buys a customer in order to secure custom
 buys a supplier in order to secure supplies
 buys a competitor in order to increase market share
 buys an overseas company in order to gain entry to a new geographical market, or
 buys another company in order to diversify.
1.1 Single economic entity and purpose of consolidated accounts

As groups grow, there is likely to be a very high level of buying and selling activity between group
companies (intra-group sales). Often such sales do not take place at market prices. Similarly one
group company may lend to another without charging interest or one company may provide
management services to another free of charge.
These group transactions distort the individual financial statements of each group company,
making it difficult for a user of the accounts to understand the performance and position of the
group as a whole.
Furthermore, where there are a large number of group companies, there may be many individual
sets of financial statements. Shareholders in the parent company (and so, by definition, the group)
cannot be expected to digest each individual set of financial statements in order to gain an
understanding of the group overall.
Therefore, financial statements are prepared for the group as a single economic entity. In other
words a single statement of financial position is prepared which combines the position of the parent
and all its subsidiaries and a single statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is
prepared which combines the performance of the parent and all its subsidiaries. Since a single
entity cannot transact with itself, the effects of any intra-group transactions are stripped out of these
consolidated financial statements.
Users of the accounts are therefore able to understand the position and performance of the group
as a result only of its transactions with parties outside the group.
The single economic entity concept and production of consolidated accounts is an example of the
concept of substance over form, whereby the commercial substance of the group of companies as
a whole has more relevance from an accounting perspective than the position of the individual
companies as legal entities.
1.2 Group companies

Above we have considered a group of companies to consist of a parent company and one or
more subsidiary companies which are controlled by the parent company. It is true that
consolidated financial statements are only prepared where a parent company has at least one
subsidiary, however other investments, including associates and joint arrangements may also be
identified and must be represented in the consolidated financial statements.
727
Financial Reporting
HKAS 28.3,
HKFRS 10,
1.3 Definitions
Appendix A,
HKFRS 11, A number of definitions are given in the relevant standards, including the following relating to group
Appendix A entities:
Key terms
Group. A parent and its subsidiaries. (HKFRS 10)
Parent. An entity that controls one or more entities. (HKFRS 10)
Subsidiary. An entity that is controlled by another entity. (HKFRS 10)
Control. An investor controls an investee when the investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable
returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through
power over the investee. (HKFRS 10)
Consolidated financial statements are the financial statements of a group in which the assets,
liabilities, equity, income, expenses and cash flows of the parent and its subsidiaries are presented
as those of a single economic entity. (HKFRS 10)
Power. Existing rights that give the current ability to direct the relevant activities.
(HKFRS 10)
Relevant activities. Activities of the investee that significantly affect the investee's returns.
(HKFRS 10)
Associate. An entity over which the investor has significant influence. (HKAS 28)
the investee but is not control or joint control of those policies. (HKAS 28)
Joint arrangement. An arrangement of which two or more parties have joint control.
(HKFRS 11)
Joint operation. A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the
arrangement have rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, relating to the
arrangement. (HKFRS 11)
Joint venture. A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement
have rights to the net assets of the arrangement. (HKFRS 11)
Some of these definitions are considered in more detail later in this and subsequent chapters.
1.4 Levels of investment

Before we move on to discuss the principles of consolidation, the following table is useful in
summarising different types of group investment and how they are accounted for.
Required treatment in group

Investment Criteria accounts
Subsidiary Control Full consolidation (HKFRS 3
(revised)/HKFRS 10)
Associate Significant influence Equity accounting (HKAS 28)
Joint arrangement Contractual arrangement Equity accounting (HKFRS 11/HKAS
(joint venture) 28)
Investment which is none Asset held for accretion of As for single company accounts per
of the above wealth HKFRS 9
728
We will be looking at six accounting standards in this and the next three chapters. HKFRS 10 to 12
and the revised versions of HKAS 27 and 28 (known as HKAS 27 (2011) and HKAS 28 (2011))
were issued in June 2011 as a "package of five" standards. They are applicable together and must
be applied to periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013:
 HKFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations
 HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements
 HKFRS 11 Joint Arrangements
 HKFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
 HKAS 27 (2011) Separate Financial Statements
 HKAS 28 (2011) Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
HKFRS 9 was covered in Chapter 18.
Note that this chapter includes mention of HKAS 27 (revised). Before 2011, HKAS 27 was entitled
Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements, and HKAS 27 (revised) refers to this standard
rather than HKAS 27 (2011) Separate Financial Statements. The 'old' HKAS 27 is included in order
to provide some detail of the original definition of control, now superseded by that provided in
HKFRS 10.
2 Principles of consolidation
Topic highlights
Consolidated financial statements are prepared where a parent controls another entity. The
definition of control includes three elements.
HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements is applied in the preparation and presentation of

consolidated financial statements. It provides guidance on establishing a parent-subsidiary
relationship and prescribes the principles of consolidation.
2.1 Control
As we have already seen, a parent-subsidiary relationship is established when one entity controls
another. The definition of control provided in HKAS 27 (revised) has now been superseded by that
provided in HKFRS 10.
HKFRS 10.6, 2.1.1 HKFRS 10 definition of control

8
HKFRS 10, issued in June 2011 provides an amended definition, and identifies three separate
elements of control.
HKFRS 10 states that an investor controls an investee if and only if it has all of the following:
(a) Power over the investee (see below)
(b) Exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee (see below),
and
(c) The ability to use its power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor’s returns
(see below).
If there are changes to one or more of these three elements of control, then an investor should
reassess whether it controls an investee.
HKFRS 2.1.2 Power
10.10-12, 14,
B11, B15, Power is defined as existing rights that give the current ability to direct the relevant activities
B18, B22-
B24, B41-
of the investee. There is no requirement for that power to have been exercised.
B45, B47-B50
729
Financial Reporting
Relevant activities may include:

 selling and purchasing goods or services
 managing financial assets
 selecting, acquiring and disposing of assets
 researching and developing new products and processes
 determining a funding structure or obtaining funding.
Existing rights may take the form of voting rights (including potential voting rights) or other rights.
Regardless of the source, rights are only relevant to determining the existence of power where they
are substantive. Effective or de facto control may also exist. Each of these terms is discussed in
more detail below.
Voting rights
In some cases assessing power is straightforward, for example, where power is obtained directly
and solely from having the majority of voting rights or potential voting rights, and as a result the
ability to direct relevant activities.
Potential voting rights may arise from convertible instruments or options. When considering these
in the context of determining power, the purpose and design of the instrument should be
considered, alongside the purpose and design of any other involvement with the investee. Potential
voting rights may, alone, or in combination with other rights, give the ability to direct relevant
activities.
Other rights
Where power is not determined by voting rights, assessment is more complex and more than one
factor must be considered. HKFRS 10 gives the following examples of rights, other than voting or
potential voting rights, which individually, or alone, can give an investor power:
 Rights to appoint, reassign or remove key management personnel who can direct the
relevant activities
 Rights to appoint or remove another entity that directs the relevant activities
 Rights to direct the investee to enter into, or veto changes to transactions for the benefit of
the investor
 Other rights, such as those specified in a management contract.
HKFRS 10 suggests that the ability rather than contractual right to achieve the above may also
indicate that an investor has power over an investee.
An investor can have power over an investee even where other entities have significant influence
or other ability to participate in the direction of relevant activities.
Substantive rights
When assessing whether an investor has power over an investee, only substantive rights should
be considered. For a right to be substantive, the holder must have the practical ability to
exercise that right when decisions about relevant activities need to be made.
A right may not be substantive if:
 There are barriers to exercising the rights (eg financial penalties, operational barriers to deter
the holder from exercising the rights or legal requirements that prevent the holder from
exercising its rights).
 The exercise of rights involves more than one party and there is no mechanism in place to
provide those parties with the practical ability to exercise their rights collectively.
 The party that holds the rights would not benefit from exercising them eg when potential
voting rights are not in the money or would not result in synergy benefits.
730
Protective rights are not substantive rights. Protective rights are rights designed to protect the
interest of the party holding those rights without giving that party power over the entity to which the
rights relate eg rights held by a lender that can be used to prevent a borrower from undertaking
activities that could significantly change the credit risk of the borrower.
Example: Substantive rights

Cane Nash Company (CNC) holds a third of the shares in Smeaton Moor Co (SMC). The
remaining shares in SMC are held equally by another two companies. CNC also holds debt
instruments in SMC that are convertible into ordinary shares at any time for a fixed price. These
instruments are currently just out of the money. If the debt were converted, CNC would hold 60%
voting shares in SMC and would benefit from realising synergies.
Required
Does CNC have power over SMC?
Solution
Yes CNC has power over SMC because it holds voting rights together with substantive potential
voting rights that give it the current ability to direct the relevant activities of SMC.
De facto control
As we have seen, power exists where an investor has the practical ability to direct an investee’s
relevant activities. The standard is clear that this can sometimes be achieved when an investing
company holds only a minority of voting rights and no potential voting rights or other rights. In
order to assess whether this is the case, the following should be considered:
 The size of the investor’s shareholding relative to others
 Potential voting rights held by the investor and other parties
 Other contractual rights
 Any other facts such as the investor’s voting patterns at previous shareholders’ meetings.
The following situations taken from HKFRS 10 illustrate de facto control:
1. Investor 1 holds 45% of the ordinary shares in Company A, a company whose relevant
activities are directed by votes attached to ordinary shares. The remaining 55% of shares
are held by hundreds of unrelated investors who each own less than 1% of Company A.
There are no arrangements for these shareholders to act collectively and past experience
indicates that few exercise their voting rights at all.
Investor 1 has power over Company A.
2. Investor 2 holds 45% of the voting rights of Company B. Two other investors each hold 26%
of the voting rights. The remaining 3% voting rights are held by three other shareholders in
equal part. There are no other arrangements that affect decision making.
Investor 2 does not have power over Company B because the two investors holding 26%
could readily co-operate to outvote Investor 2.
3. Investor 3 holds 45% of the voting rights of Company C. Eleven other shareholders each
hold 5% of the voting rights of the company. None of the shareholders has contractual
arrangements to consult others or make collective decisions.
The distribution of voting rights is inconclusive in this case; other facts and circumstances
should be considered.
HKFRS 10 contains no specific thresholds to indicate when the distribution of voting rights is
sufficient to reach a conclusion regarding power. Therefore a high level of judgment is required in
this area.
731
Financial Reporting
HKFRS 2.1.3 Returns

10.15, B57
An investor must have exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee
in order to establish control.
This is the case where the investor's returns from its involvement have the potential to vary as a
result of the investee's performance.
Returns may include:
 dividends
 remuneration for servicing an investee's assets or liabilities
 fees and exposure to loss from providing credit support
 returns as a result of achieving synergies or economies of scale through an investor
combining use of their assets with use of the investee's assets.
HKFRS 2.1.4 Link between power and returns
10.17, B59
In order to establish control, an investor must be able to use its power to affect its returns from its
involvement with the investee. This is the case even where the investor delegates its decision
making powers to an agent.
Example: Control
Abacus and Bandero each hold 50% of the voting rights in Candice, a company that they
established. The shareholder’s agreement between Abacus and Bandero states that:
1. The purpose of Candice is to acquire, manage and sell commercial property with the
objective of generating capital gains.
2. All decisions regarding major capital activities and associated financing require the
agreement of both Abacus and Bandero.
3. Abacus is responsible for the day to day management activities of Candice, such as
identifying tenants, negotiating rental agreements and rent collection. Abacus is paid for
these services at cost plus a fixed margin.
Required
Analyse the situation to identify which party/parties may control Candice.
Solution
In order to establish which party/parties control Candice, it is necessary to identify which has power
over Candice, a right to returns from the company and can use its power to affect returns.
It is likely that both capital activities and day to day management activities will affect Candice’s
returns significantly. It must therefore be established which set of activities has the greatest effect
on returns.
The fact that the stated objective of Candice is to generate capital gains may indicate that capital
activities have the most significant impact. If so, it is likely that Abacus and Bandero have joint
control as these activities are directed by joint decision making.
If day to day management activities are considered to be more significant, it should be concluded
that Abacus has control of Candice as it directs these activities unilaterally.
2.2 Consolidated accounts

HKFRS 10.19
Where a parent controls one or more subsidiaries, HKFRS 10 requires that consolidated financial
statements are prepared to include all subsidiaries, both foreign and domestic other than:
732
 those held for sale in accordance with HKFRS 5

 those held under such long-term restrictions that control cannot be operated.
The rules on exclusion of subsidiaries from consolidation are necessarily strict, because this is a
common method used by entities to manipulate their results. If a subsidiary which carries a large
amount of debt can be excluded, then the gearing of the group as a whole will be improved. In
other words, this is a way of taking debt out of the consolidated statement of financial position.
HKFRS 10 is clear that a subsidiary should not be excluded from consolidation simply because it is
loss making or its business activities are dissimilar from those of the group as a whole. HKFRS 10
rejects the latter argument: exclusion on these grounds is not justified because better information
can be provided about such subsidiaries by consolidating their results and then giving additional
information about the different business activities of the subsidiary, e.g. under HKFRS 8 Operating
Segments.
HKFRS 10.4 2.2.1 Exemption from preparing group accounts
A parent need not present consolidated financial statements in the following circumstances:
(a) If all of the following apply:
(i) It is a wholly-owned subsidiary or it is a partially owned subsidiary of another
entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have been
informed about, and do not object to, the parent not presenting consolidated financial
statements
(ii) Its securities are not publicly traded
(iii) It is not in the process of issuing securities in public securities markets, and
(iv) The ultimate or intermediate parent publishes consolidated financial statements that
comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.
(b) If the parent is an investment entity which is required to measure its subsidiaries at fair value
through profit or loss (see below).
A parent that does not present consolidated financial statements must comply with the HKAS 27
(2011) rules on separate financial statements.
HKFRS 2.2.2 Investment entities
10.27-33
An investment entity is defined as an entity that:
(a) obtains funds from one or more investors for the purpose of providing those investors with
investment management services;
(b) commits to its investors that its business purpose is to invest funds solely for returns from
capital appreciation, investment income or both; and
(c) measures and evaluates the performance of substantially all of its investments on a fair
value basis.
Investment entities therefore include private equity organisations, venture capital organisations,
pension funds and other investment funds.
Prior to the introduction of guidance specific to investment entities, these entities were required to
apply HKFRS 10 and consolidate all subsidiaries which they controlled. Investors and other users
of the accounts felt, however, that this did not result in useful information; the most useful and
relevant information would be to recognise investments at fair value.
As a result, since 2012, HKFRS 10 has included a requirement that investment entities measure
subsidiaries at fair value through profit or loss rather than consolidate them.
This requirement applies only to the subsidiaries of an investment entity which do not provide
services which relate to the investment entity’s activities. Subsidiaries which provide investment-
related services are consolidated as normal.
733
Financial Reporting
In January 2015, amendments to HKFRS 10 further clarified the application of the investment entity
exemption. These are effective from 1 January 2016:
1 The exemption from preparing consolidated financial statements (section 2.2.1) is still
available to a parent even where the ultimate (or intermediate) parent is an investment entity
and measures all of its subsidiaries at fair value rather than produce consolidated financial
statements.
2 The requirement to consolidate as normal a subsidiary that provides services to an
investment entity only applies where:
(a) the subsidiary itself is not an investment entity and
(b) the subsidiary’s main purpose is to provide services and activities that are related to
the investment activities of the investment entity parent.
2.3 Consolidation procedures

Topic highlights
Consolidated financial statements are prepared by combining the assets; liabilities, income and
expenses of a parent and its subsidiaries on a line by line basis and cancelling any intra-group
amounts.
Financial statements prepared to the same date should be used.
HKFRS 10 does not deal with methods of accounting for business combinations and the calculation
of goodwill (this is covered by HKFRS 3 (revised)), but it does provide guidance on consolidation
procedures.
HKFRS 10. 2.3.1 Preparation of consolidated financial statements

22, B86
Consolidated financial statements are prepared by combining the financial statements of the parent
and its subsidiaries on a line by line basis. Practically, this involves adding together the parent's
and its subsidiaries' assets, liabilities, income and expenses. In addition:
 the carrying amount of the parent's investment in each subsidiary and the parent's proportion
of equity in each subsidiary are eliminated
 non-controlling interests representing the equity of subsidiaries which does not belong to the
parent are recognised.
The application of these procedures is considered in more detail in the next chapter.
HKFRS 2.3.2 Intra-group transactions
10.B86
As the consolidated financial statements are prepared for a group as a single economic entity,
intra-group balances and transactions should be eliminated as part of the consolidation process.
As we have already said, these amounts may be distorted due to the group relationship, and so
may result in the presentation of misleading group performance or position.
To take an example, assume that a group company bought an asset from a non-group company
paying the market price of $100 and sold this to another group company for $300, so making a
$200 profit. The second company then sold the asset to a third group company for $600, so making
a $300 profit. If the effects of this intra-group transaction were not eliminated from the consolidated
accounts, assets and profits would both be overstated by $500.
HKRS 10, 2.3.3 Coterminous year end
B92,93
In most cases, all group companies will prepare accounts to the same reporting date. One or more
subsidiaries may, however, prepare accounts to a different reporting date from the parent and the
bulk of other subsidiaries in the group.
734
In such cases the subsidiary may prepare additional statements to the reporting date of the rest of
the group, for consolidation purposes. If this is not possible, the subsidiary's accounts may still be
used for the consolidation, provided that the gap between the reporting dates is three months or
less.
Where a subsidiary's accounts are drawn up to a different accounting date, adjustments should
be made for the effects of significant transactions or other events that occur between that date and
the parent's reporting date.
HKFRS 2.3.4 Uniform accounting policies
10.B87
Consolidated financial statements should be prepared using uniform accounting policies for like
transactions and other events in similar circumstances.
Adjustments must be made where members of a group use different accounting policies, so that
their financial statements are suitable for consolidation.
HKFRS 2.3.5 Date of inclusion/exclusion
10.20, B88,
HKFRS 3, The results of subsidiary undertakings are included in the consolidated financial statements from
Appendix A
the acquisition date, defined as the date on which the investor obtains control of the investee.
Income and expenses of the subsidiary should be based on the asset and liability values
recognised in the consolidated financial statements at this date. For example, future depreciation
should be calculated based upon the fair value of the related asset at the acquisition date.
The results of subsidiary undertakings should cease to be included within the consolidated financial
statements on the date on which the parent ceases to control the subsidiary. From this date the
investment is accounted for as an associate in accordance with HKAS 28 or a financial asset in
accordance with HKFRS 9.
HKAS 2.3.6 Accounting for subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates in the
27(2011).10
parent's separate financial statements
A parent company will usually produce its own, single company financial statements. HKAS 27
(2011) Separate Financial Statements provides accounting guidance to be applied in the
preparation of these single company statements. In these statements, investments in subsidiaries,
joint ventures and associates included in the consolidated financial statements should be either:
(a) accounted for at cost, or
(b) in accordance with HKFRS 9 or
(c) using the equity method in accordance with HKAS 28.
The option to measure an investment using the equity method was introduced as a 2014
amendment to HKAS 28. The amendment is effective from 1 January 2016.
Where subsidiaries are classified as held for sale in accordance with HKFRS 5 they should be
accounted for in accordance with HKFRS 5 in the parent’s separate financial statements.
3 Disclosure of interests in other entities

HKFRS 12.7 HKFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities was issued in June 2011 as part of the 'package of
five standards' relating to consolidation. It removes all disclosure requirements from other standards
relating to group accounting and provides guidance applicable to consolidated financial statements.
The standard requires disclosure of:
(a) the significant judgments and assumptions made in determining the nature of an interest in
another entity or arrangement, and in determining the type of joint arrangement in which an
interest is held
(b) information about interests in subsidiaries (including those which are not consolidated as a
result of the investment entity exception), associates, joint arrangements and structured
entities that are not controlled by an investor.
735
Financial Reporting
Disclosures requirements in respect of associates and joint arrangements are given in Chapter 29.
HKFRS
12.10-19
3.1 Disclosure of consolidated subsidiaries
An entity should disclose information which enables users of the consolidated financial statements:
(a) to understand:
(i) the composition of the group
(ii) the interest that non-controlling interests have in the group's activities and cash flows.
(b) to evaluate:
(i) the nature and extent of significant restrictions on its ability to access or use assets
and settle liabilities of the group
(ii) the nature of, and changes in, the risks associated with interests in subsidiaries
(iii) the consequences of changes in its ownership interest in a subsidiary where control is
not lost
(iv) the consequences of losing control in a subsidiary in the reporting period.
3.1.1 Non-coterminous year ends
Where the financial statements of a subsidiary used to prepare consolidated financial statements
are prepared to a date different from that of the consolidated financial statements, the following
must be disclosed:
(a) The date of the end of the reporting period of the financial statements of the subsidiary.
(b) The reason for using a different date.
3.1.2 Non-controlling interests
The following should be disclosed for each of a group's subsidiaries that have non-controlling
interests that are material to the reporting entity:
(a) The name of the subsidiary
(b) The principal place of business/country of incorporation of the subsidiary
(c) The proportion of ownership interests held by non-controlling interests
(d) The proportion of voting rights held by non-controlling interests if different from the proportion
of ownership interests held
(e) The profit or loss allocated to non-controlling interests of the subsidiary during the reporting
period
(f) Accumulated non-controlling interests of the subsidiary at the end of the reporting period
(g) Summarised financial information about the subsidiary.
3.1.3 The nature and extent of significant restrictions
The following must be disclosed:
(a) Significant restrictions on the group's ability to access or use the assets and settle the
liabilities of the group, such as:
(i) those that restrict the ability of a parent or subsidiaries to transfer cash or other assets
to or from other entities in the group.
(ii) guarantees or other requirements that may restrict dividends and other capital
distributions being paid or loans and advances being made or repaid to or from other
entities in the group.
(b) The nature and extent to which protective rights of non-controlling interests can significantly
restrict the entity's ability to access or use the assets and settle the liabilities of the group.
736
(c) The carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements of the assets and liabilities to
which those restrictions apply.
3.1.4 Nature of the risks associated with an entity's interests in subsidiaries
The terms of any contractual arrangements that could require the parent or its subsidiaries to
provide financial support to a subsidiary should be disclosed, including events or circumstances
that could expose the reporting entity to a loss.
If during the reporting period a parent or any of its subsidiaries has, without being contractually
required to do so, provided financial support to a subsidiary, it should disclose:
(a) the type and amount of support provided
(b) the reasons for providing the support.
If during the reporting period a parent or any of its subsidiaries has, without being contractually
required to do so, provided financial support to a previously unconsolidated entity and that
provision of support resulted in a controlling relationship, an explanation of the relevant factors in
reaching that decision must be disclosed.
Any current intentions to provide support to a subsidiary including providing assistance in obtaining
financial support should be disclosed.
3.1.5 Changes in ownership which do not result in the loss of control
A schedule must be presented that shows the effects on equity attributable to owners of the parent
of any changes in its ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in the loss of control.
3.1.6 Loss of control
If control of a subsidiary has been lost during a reporting period, the following should be disclosed:
(a) The gain or loss on disposal
(b) The portion of the gain or loss attributable to measuring any retained investment at fair value
on the date on which control is lost
(c) The line items in profit or loss in which the gain or loss is recognised.
HKFRS 3.2 Disclosure of unconsolidated subsidiaries (investment

12.19A-G
entities)
An investment entity is required to disclose:
(a) the fact that the exception to consolidation is applied and that subsidiaries are instead
measured at fair value through profit or loss
(b) details of each unconsolidated subsidiary including name, place of business and proportion
of ownership interest held
(c) the nature and extent of any significant restrictions on the ability of an unconsolidated
subsidiary to transfer funds to the investment entity
(d) any current commitments or intentions to provide support to an unconsolidated subsidiary
(e) details of non-contractual support provided to an unconsolidated subsidiary in the period
(f) the terms of any contractual arrangements that may require the provision of financial support
to an unconsolidated subsidiary
(g) details of non-contractual support provided in the period to an unconsolidated structured
entity that the investment entity did not control but which resulted in control being achieved.
737
Financial Reporting
Illustration
The following illustration relates to a group with consolidated subsidiaries:
Group composition
The Company has three subsidiaries that are material to the Group in 20X3 and 20X2.
 the Group holds a majority of voting rights in 2 subsidiaries, Arran and Diabeg
 the Group holds less than a majority of voting rights in Sutherland (see below).
Non-controlling interests have a material interest in two subsidiaries.
All Group companies prepare financial statements to a 31 December reporting date.
Sutherland
Although the Group has less than half the voting rights in Sutherland, management has determined
that the Group controls Sutherland, This is on the basis that the remaining voting rights in
Sutherland are widely dispersed, historical attendance at shareholder meetings shows that the
Group has been able to control the outcome of voting, and there is no indication that other
shareholders exercise their votes collectively.
Non-controlling interests
The following subsidiaries have material NCI:
Principal place Operating segment NCI NIC

of business / 20X3 20X2
country of
incorporation
Diabeg India Consumer products 20% 20%

Sutherland PRC Beverages 55% 55%
The following is summarised financial information for Diabeg and Sutherland, prepared in
accordance with HKFRS, modified for fair value adjustments on acquisition and differences in the
Group’s accounting policies. The information is before inter-company eliminations with other
companies in the Group
Diabeg Sutherland
In $’000 20X3 20X2 20X3 20X2
Revenue 32,000 30,500 21,800 20,900
Profit 8,000 8,200 4,200 3,800
Profit attributable to NCI 1,600 1,640 2,310 2,090
Other comprehensive income - - - 100
Total comprehensive income 8,000 8,200 4,200 3,900
Total comprehensive income 1,600 1,640 2,310 2,145
attributable to NCI
Current assets 2,780 2,810 1,120 1,310

Non-current assets 4,800 4,600 9,500 7,300
Current liabilities (1,560) (1,780) (1,340) (1,230)
Non-current liabilities (1,000) (980) (3,400) (1,500)
Net assets 5,020 4,650 5,880 4,700
Net assets attributable to NCI 1,004 930 3,124 2,585
Cash flows from operating activities 1,780 1,690 2,400 2,100

Cash flows from investing activities (340) (780) (2,300) (150)
Cash flows from financing activities 50 (130) 2,000 (50)
Net increase in cash and cash 1,490 780 2,100 1,900
equivalents
Dividends paid to the NCI in the year 40 - 55 55
738
There are no significant restrictions on the Group’s ability to access or use the assets and settle the
liabilities of the Group.
4 HKFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations

Topic highlights
HKFRS 3 (revised) provides guidance on the measurement of net assets acquired in a business
combination, the non-controlling interest and goodwill arising on a business combination.
We have seen that HKFRS 10 defines control and prescribes procedures for the preparation of
consolidated financial statements. HKFRS 3 Business Combinations, revised in 2008, is the
second relevant standard on group accounting, and provides guidance on the following:
(a) The recognition and measurement of the assets and liabilities acquired when a parent
company achieves control over a subsidiary or other business
(b) The recognition and measurement of any non-controlling interest in the subsidiary or business
(c) The recognition and measurement of goodwill arising on the acquisition of a subsidiary or
business
(d) Necessary disclosures to provide information to evaluate a business combination.
HKFRS 3.2 4.1 Scope of HKFRS 3 (revised)

HKFRS 3 (revised) applies to business combinations, defined as transactions in which an
acquirer obtains control of one or more businesses (see section 4.3). It does not apply to:
 the accounting for the formation of a joint arrangement in the financial statements of the joint
arrangement itself
 the acquisition of an asset or group of assets that does not constitute a business
 a combination between entities or businesses under common control
 the acquisition of a subsidiary that is required to be measured at fair value through profit or
loss by an investment entity.
Where a group of assets and liabilities is purchased which does not constitute a business, the
assets and liabilities are recognised in the purchaser's financial statements in accordance with
relevant standards including HKAS 16 and HKAS 38. The cost of the group is allocated to the
individual identifiable assets and liabilities on the basis of their fair values at the date of acquisition.
Goodwill does not arise on such a purchase.
HKFRS 3, 4.2 Definitions

Appendix A
In addition to those definitions seen earlier in the chapter, HKFRS 3 (revised) provides the
following:
Key terms
Acquirer is the entity that obtains control of the acquiree.
Acquiree is the business or businesses that the acquirer obtains control of in a business
combination.
Non-controlling interest is the equity in a subsidiary not attributable, directly or indirectly, to a
parent.
739
Financial Reporting
Contingent consideration. Usually, an obligation of the acquirer to transfer additional assets or

equity interests to the former owners of an acquiree as part of the exchange for control of the
acquiree if specified future events occur or conditions are met.
Goodwill is an asset representing the future economic benefits arising from other assets acquired
in a business combination that are not individually indentified and separately recognised.
Identifiable. An asset is identifiable if it either:
(a) is separable, i.e. capable of being separated or divided from the entity and sold, transferred,
licensed, rented or exchanged, either individually or together with a related contract,
identifiable asset or liability, regardless of whether the entity intends to do so, or
(b) arises from contractual or other legal rights, regardless of whether those rights are
transferable or separable from the entity or from other rights and obligations.
(HKFRS 3 (revised))
HKFRS 3.4-5
and B7-B12
4.3 Accounting for a business combination
An entity shall determine whether a transaction or other event is a business combination which
requires that the assets acquired and liabilities assumed constitute a business. If the assets
acquired are not a business, the reporting entity shall account for the transaction or other event as
an asset acquisition.
Definition of a business
A business consists of inputs and processes applied to those inputs that have the ability to create
outputs. Although businesses usually have outputs, outputs are not required for an integrated set to
qualify as a business. The three elements of a business are defined as follows:
(a) Input: Any economic resource that creates, or has the ability to create, outputs when one or
more processes are applied to it. Examples include non-current assets (including intangible
assets or rights to use non-current assets), intellectual property, the ability to obtain access
to necessary materials or rights and employees.
(b) Process: Any system, standard, protocol, convention or rule that when applied to an input or
inputs, creates or has the ability to create outputs. Examples include strategic management
processes, operational processes and resource management processes. These processes
typically are documented, but an organised workforce having the necessary skills and
experience following rules and conventions may provide the necessary processes that are
capable of being applied to inputs to create outputs. (Accounting, billing, payroll and other
administrative systems typically are not processes used to create outputs.)
(c) Output: The result of inputs and processes applied to those inputs that provide or have the
ability to provide a return in the form of dividends, lower costs or other economic benefits
directly to investors or other owners, members or participants.
To be capable of being conducted and managed for the purposes defined, an integrated set of
activities and assets requires two essential elements – inputs and processes applied to those
inputs, which together are or will be used to create outputs. However, a business need not include
all of the inputs or processes that the seller used in operating that business if market participants
are capable of acquiring the business and continuing to produce outputs, for example, by
integrating the business with their own inputs and processes.
The nature of the elements of a business varies by industry and by the structure of an entity's
operations (activities), including the entity's stage of development. Established businesses often
have many different types of inputs, processes and outputs, whereas new businesses often have
few inputs and processes and sometimes only a single output (product). Nearly all businesses also
have assets, but a business need not have liabilities.
740
An integrated set of activities and assets in the development stage might not have outputs. If not,
the acquirer should consider other factors to determine whether the set is a business. Those
factors include, but are not limited to, whether the set:
(a) has begun planned principal activities;
(b) has employees, intellectual property and other inputs and processes that could be applied to
those inputs;
(c) is pursuing a plan to produce outputs; and
(d) will be able to obtain access to customers that will purchase the outputs.
HKFRS 3 (revised) requires that business combinations are accounted for by applying the
acquisition method. This involves:
(a) identifying the acquirer
(b) determining the acquisition date
(c) recognising and measuring the identifiable assets acquired, liabilities assumed and non-
controlling interests in the acquiree
(d) recognising and measuring goodwill.
HKFRS3.6-7 4.3.1 Identifying the acquirer
For each business combination, one of the combining entities must be identified as the acquirer, in
other words a business combination is not considered to be a merger.
HKFRS 3.8-9 4.3.2 Determining the acquisition date
The acquisition date is the date on which the acquirer gains control of the acquiree. This is
normally the date on which consideration is transferred and assets and liabilities are acquired.
The date may, however, be earlier or later, for example where written agreement provides for this.
HKFRS 4.3.3 Recognising and measuring assets, liabilities and the

3.10,11,18
non-controlling interests
The acquirer should recognise at the acquisition date:
 Identifiable assets acquired
 Liabilities assumed
 Non-controlling interest
 Goodwill
In doing so, the acquirer should apply the recognition criteria of the Conceptual Framework. This
may result in the acquirer recognising some assets and liabilities that the acquiree had not
previously recognised, for example intangible assets generated internally by the acquiree.
The identifiable assets recognised should be measured at fair value at the acquisition date.
The application of these principles is seen in more detail in section 5 of this chapter.
HKFRS 3.32 4.3.4 Recognising and measuring goodwill
Goodwill is measured as the excess of the fair value of consideration transferred plus the
amount of non-controlling interests over the fair value of identifiable net assets of the
acquiree on the acquisition date.
In some cases this will result in a positive amount of goodwill; in others a negative amount is
calculated, referred to as a gain on a bargain purchase.
Goodwill and the elements of the calculation of goodwill are considered in more detail in the next
section of this chapter.
Where an acquisition is achieved in steps, there may be an extra element to the calculation; step
acquisitions are considered in a later chapter.
741
Financial Reporting
5 Goodwill
Topic highlights
Goodwill is calculated as the excess of consideration plus the non-controlling interests over the fair
value of identifiable net assets acquired.
The non-controlling interests can be measured as a proportion of the net assets of the acquiree or
at fair value.
Goodwill is created by good relationships between a business and its customers:

 through reputation for high quality products or standard or service
 through good customer service
 through the personality of staff members.
Internally generated goodwill is not recognised in the statement of financial position (see Chapter
8). This is because:
(a) Goodwill is inherent in the business but has not been paid for and it does not possess an
'objective' value. How much such goodwill is worth can be guessed, but the guesswork is a
matter of subjective opinion and is not based on concrete facts.
(b) Goodwill keeps changing from day to day. It might be damaged by one bad act of customer
relations and improved by a good one. Staff with a good personality might retire or leave the
entity and new staff need time to familiarise themselves with the job, and so on. Since the
value of goodwill is continually changing, it cannot practically be recorded in the accounts of
the business.
Whereas a business that builds up internally generated goodwill over time cannot objectively value
this goodwill, at such time as that business is sold, its goodwill becomes measurable. This is
because the price paid to purchase an existing business will generally exceed the sum of the
values of the individual assets within the business. The excess represents payment for the goodwill
of the business. Goodwill may therefore be recognised:
 in the financial statements of an individual company where that company buys an
unincorporated business
 in consolidated financial statements where a parent company buys a subsidiary.
5.0.1 Measurement of purchased goodwill

The value of the goodwill is a matter for the purchaser and seller to agree upon in fixing the
purchase/sale price. Two approaches may be taken to this issue:
1 The selling price of the business is agreed by the seller and the buyer without specifically
considering the value of goodwill. The purchased goodwill will then be the excess of the
purchase consideration over the value of the identifiable net assets of the new business.
2 Negotiation is a major element in the computation of goodwill. There are various ways of
valuing goodwill and a majority of them are related to the profit record of the acquired
business.
It does not matter how goodwill is calculated, the amount recorded by the buyer will be the
difference between the purchase consideration and his own valuation of the net assets acquired.
If A values his net assets at $40,000, goodwill is agreed at $21,000 and B agrees to pay $61,000
for the business when the net assets are valued at only $38,000, then the goodwill recorded by B
will be $23,000 ($61,000 – $38,000).
742
5.0.2 Calculating purchased goodwill

Goodwill arising on a business combination is calculated as:
$
Consideration transferred X
Amount of any non-controlling interests X
Less: net acquisition-date fair value of identifiable assets acquired
and liabilities assumed (X)
X
We shall consider each of the elements of the calculation in turn.
HKFRS 3.37 5.1 Consideration transferred

Consideration or payment transferred to achieve a controlling share in another business may take
a number of forms including:
 cash
 other assets
 ordinary or preference instruments
 debt instruments
Consideration may be immediate or deferred. Where it is deferred, payment may be contingent
upon an event, or upon the acquiree attaining certain financial or non-financial goals.
The basic principle of HKFRS 3 (revised) is that consideration transferred in a business
combination should be measured at fair value.
5.1.1 Share consideration
Where consideration takes the form of equity or other shares of the investor, the transaction may
be referred to as a share-for-share exchange. In other words the shareholders of the acquiree are
exchanging their shares in that company for shares in the acquirer.
Shares that are issued by the acquirer as consideration are measured at their fair value on the
acquisition date, regardless of whether they are issued immediately or at some date in the future.
HKFRS 3.39- 5.1.2 Contingent consideration

40
Contingent consideration is defined by HKFRS 3 (revised) as:
 an obligation of the acquirer to transfer additional assets or equity interests to the former
owners of an acquiree as part of the exchange for control of the acquiree if specified future
events occur or conditions are met, or
 the right of the acquirer to the return of previously transferred consideration if specified
conditions are met.
Therefore, contingent consideration may be a liability/equity (in the first case) or an asset (in the
second case) of the acquirer.
Contingent consideration is a part of many transactions where there are substantial uncertainties
about how the acquired business will perform post-transaction.
A common example of a contingent consideration liability is an earn-out clause, with future
additional payments of consideration conditional on reaching milestones, or on the level of sales or
profitability.
A contingent consideration asset may arise if the acquiree fails to meet targets, fails to pass
regulatory reviews or fails to meet covenants and the former owners are therefore required to
return to the acquirer consideration already paid.
Under HKFRS 3 (revised), contingent consideration is to be recognised at acquisition-date fair
value as part of the consideration transferred. Fair value may be estimated through the use of a
number of different methods.
743
Financial Reporting
Example: Contingent consideration (1)

Anderson Co. enters into an agreement to acquire all of the ordinary share capital of Potter Co.on
15 December 20X0. Consideration of $100m is paid on 1 January 20X1. In addition, the purchase
agreement stipulates that a further payment will be required dependent on the earnings of Potter
Co. post acquisition. The terms of the contract call for additional cash consideration to be paid two
years after the acquisition in the event that Potter Co.’s earnings exceed $5m in each of the next
two years subject to an earnings cap of $7m. For earnings in excess of $5m, Anderson Co. is
required to pay 20% of the excess to the previous shareholders. In this situation, the minimum
amount that could be paid is nil and the maximum is $0.4m (($7m – $5m)  20%).
Management have used a simulation model to ascertain the fair value of the contingent
consideration and estimated it to be $0.25 million.
On the acquisition date the fair value of the identifiable net assets of Potter Co. was $96m.
(a) Identify the acquisition date.
(b) What goodwill arises on the acquisition of Potter Co.?
(b) State how the investment in Potter Co. is recorded in the individual financial statements of
Anderson Co. in the year ended 31 October 20X1.
Solution
(a) The acquisition date is the date on which Anderson gains control of Potter. Unless written
agreement states otherwise, this is the date on which consideration is paid, therefore 1
January 20X1.
(b)
$'000
Cash consideration 100,000
Fair value of contingent consideration 250
Fair value of identifiable net assets of acquiree (96,000)
Goodwill 4,250
(c) Anderson Co. records the investment in Potter Co. by: $'000 $'000
DEBIT Investment 100,250
CREDIT Cash 100,000
Liability for contingent consideration 250
Contingent consideration may be payable in the form of equity, a debt instrument or (as in the
above example) cash. In the case of equity or debt, it is classified in the acquirer's financial
statements in accordance with HKAS 32.
The subsequent accounting for contingent consideration will depend on the type of contingent
HKFRS 3.58 consideration, how it is classified and why a change in the fair value of the consideration arose:
(a) If the change in fair value is due to additional information obtained within the measurement
period (see section 5.4) that affects the position at the acquisition date, goodwill should be
remeasured.
(b) If the change is due to events which took place after the acquisition date, for example,
meeting earnings targets:
(i) Contingent consideration classified as equity is not remeasured and its subsequent
settlement is accounted for within equity.
(ii) Contingent consideration classified as an asset or a liability that:
744
 Is within the scope of HKFRS 9 is measured at fair value at each reporting date
with any gain or loss recognised in profit or loss in accordance with that
standard
 Is not within the scope of HKFRS 9 is measured at fair value at each reporting
date with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss.
Example: Contingent consideration (2)

To continue with the above example, assume the following:
(a) Further information has been received by the management of Anderson Co. on 1 June 20X1
which has led them to re-assess the acquisition date fair value of the contingent
consideration to be $0.2m.
(b) At the end of the first year of the earnout period, Potter Co. reports earnings of $8 million.
The fair value of contingent consideration in relation to the second year at this stage is
estimated to be $0.1m.
Considering each of these separately, how are the calculation of goodwill and Anderson Co.’s
journal to recognise the investment in Potter Co. affected?
Solution
(a) In this instance the goodwill arising in Potter Co. is remeasured:
$'000
Fair value of contingent consideration 200
Fair value of identifiable net assets of acquiree (96,000)
Goodwill 4,200
Anderson Co. should therefore have recorded the investment in Potter Co. by:
$'000 $'000
CREDIT Cash 100,000
Liability for contingent consideration 200
Adjustment to the original acquisition journal made is therefore required:
$'000 $'000
DEBIT Liability for contingent consideration 50
CREDIT Investment 50
(b) In this instance, goodwill is not remeasured because the change in the estimated fair value
of contingent consideration is due to events which took place after the acquisition date; it
remains at the acquisition date amount of $4.25m (see section 5.4 for further explanation).
The liability in Anderson’s financial statements is, however adjusted to reflect the new
estimate of the amount of contingent consideration payable:
Payable in respect of: $'000
Year 1 (($7m – $5m)  20%) 400
Year 2 100
500
Therefore:
$'000 $'000
DEBIT Profit or loss (500 – 250) 250
CREDIT Liability for contingent consideration 250
745
Financial Reporting
HKFRS 3.51 5.1.3 Pre-existing relationships

All consideration transferred will need to be carefully analysed to determine whether it is really part
of the business combination transaction. Pre-existing relationships between the acquirer and the
acquiree will need to be accounted for separately from the business combination. For example, the
acquirer may have a payable balance due to the acquiree, which is effectively settled through the
business combination. Where the former owners or employees receive payments, a number of
factors have been included to assist the identification of whether this is for future services or not,
and should be accounted for as compensation.
HKFRS 3.53 5.1.4 Acquisition-related costs
Under HKFRS 3 (revised) costs relating to an acquisition must be recognised as an expense
at the time of the acquisition. They are not regarded as an asset or as part of the cost of
acquisition. Costs of issuing debt or equity are to be accounted for under the rules of HKFRS 9
(Chapter 18, sections 2.6 and 4).
HKFRS 3.19 5.2 Non-controlling interests

The revised HKFRS 3 views the group as an economic entity. This means that it treats all
providers of equity including non-controlling interests as shareholders in the group, even if
they are not shareholders in the parent. It is for this reason that the non-controlling interests form
part of the calculation of goodwill.
The question now arises as to how it should be valued.
HKFRS 3 (revised) applies a different rule to the measurement of the non-controlling interest
depending on whether or not the relevant shareholders are entitled to a proportionate share of the
entity’s net assets in the event of liquidation.
Where holders of the non-controlling interest are entitled to a proportionate share of the net assets
on a liquidation, HKFRS 3 (revised) requires that the non-controlling interest in the acquiree is
measured either at:
 fair value or
 the non-controlling interests' proportionate share of the acquiree's identifiable net assets.
Where holders of the non-controlling interest are not entitled to a proportionate share of the net
assets on a liquidation, the non-controlling interest should be measured at fair value.
The non-controlling interests measured at fair value will be different from the non-controlling
interests measured at proportionate share of the acquiree's net assets. The difference is
goodwill attributable to the non-controlling interests. This will become more apparent when we see
some examples.
HKFRS 5.2.1 Measurement at fair value
3.B44-45
The non-controlling interest is measured at its fair value, determined in accordance with HKFRS
13.
The amount of consideration transferred by an acquirer is not usually indicative of the fair value of
the non-controlling interests, because consideration transferred by the acquirer will generally
include a control premium. Therefore, it is not normally appropriate to determine the fair value of
the acquired business as a whole or that of the non-controlling interests by extrapolating the fair
value of the acquirer's interest. Hence, adopting this option means that additional time and
expertise may be needed to determine the fair value of the non-controlling interests.
The result of the application of the fair value method is that recognised goodwill represents all of
the goodwill of the acquired business, not just the acquirer's share.
Example: Fair value option

Entity B has 40% of its shares publicly traded on an exchange. Entity A purchases the
60% non-publicly traded shares in one transaction, paying $630,000. Based on the trading price of
746
the shares of entity B at the date of gaining control, a fair value of $400,000 is assigned to the 40%
non-controlling interests, indicating that entity A has paid a control premium of $30,000. The fair
value of entity B's identifiable net assets is $700,000.
Calculate goodwill measuring the non-controlling interests
(a) as a proportion of the net assets of the acquiree
(b) at fair value
Solution
(a) Non-controlling interests measured as a proportion of the net assets of the acquiree
Goodwill:
$'000
Consideration 630
Non-controlling interests ($700  40%) 280
910
Fair value of identifiable net assets (100%) (700)
Goodwill 210
(b) Non-controlling interests measured at fair value
Goodwill:
$'000
Consideration 630
1,030
Fair value of identifiable net assets (100%) (700)
Goodwill 330
The first method calculates only the amount of goodwill associated with the controlling interests.
The second method calculates goodwill to be $120,000 higher. This $120,000 is the goodwill
associated with the non-controlling interests. The second calculation could be stripped out into the
two elements as:
Controlling Non-controlling
interests interests
$'000 $'000
Consideration/fair value 630 400
Share of identifiable net assets (60%/40%) (420) (280)
Goodwill 210 120
Note that goodwill is not proportionate. If the total goodwill were split proportionately in the ratio
60:40, then the controlling interests would be allocated $198,000 and the non-controlling interests
$132,000. This is not the case due to the control premium associated with a controlling interest.
The premium to acquire control may reflect the value of synergies between the parent and
subsidiary.
5.2.2 Choice of method

Where available, the choice of measurement method for the non-controlling interests is made for
each business combination (rather than being an accounting policy choice).
It will require management to carefully consider their future intentions regarding the acquisition of
the non-controlling interests, as, where less than 100% of the acquired business is purchased, the
two methods will potentially result in significantly different amounts of goodwill.
Measuring the non-controlling interest at fair value may prove to be a difficult exercise, however,
there are benefits:
747
Financial Reporting
 This method will increase reported net assets in the statement of financial position.
 Testing goodwill for impairment will be easier as there is no need to gross up part-owned
subsidiaries.
It should, however be noted that since goodwill as initially measured will be greater in the
statement of financial position, there is a greater likelihood of an impairment arising and any
impairment losses will be greater than those arising if the non-controlling interest had been
measured as a proportion of net assets.
Another consideration when deciding how to measure the non-controlling interest is whether an
entity intends to acquire more shares in the subsidiary at a future date.
As you will see in Chapter 30, where an existing interest in a subsidiary is increased, goodwill is not
recalculated and instead the parent's equity is adjusted (normally reduced) by the difference
between consideration paid for the additional interest and the change in the non-controlling
interest's net assets (including any goodwill).
This adjustment to the parent's equity is less where non-controlling interest goodwill is recognised
than where the non-controlling interest is simply measured as a proportion of net assets.
The following table summarises the impact at various stages of the two methods of measuring the
non-controlling interest:
Fair value Proportion of net assets
NCI in statement of financial Higher as the NCI balance Lower as the NCI balance is
position at acquisition date includes NCI goodwill. the proportion of net assets of
the subsidiary owned by the
NCI.
Goodwill in statement of Higher as goodwill includes Lower as the balance includes
financial position at both group and NCI goodwill. only the group goodwill.
acquisition date
NCI in statement of financial There is a lower risk of the NCI Higher risk of the NCI balance
position at subsequent balance being negative if the becoming negative as losses
dates subsidiary is loss-making since are allocated.
the starting position was
higher.
Impairment testing Less complex as the carrying More complex: the carrying
value of goodwill is compared amount of goodwill must be
with recoverable amount. grossed up prior to comparing
with recoverable amount.
Impairment of goodwill Goodwill impairment related to Goodwill impairment related to
100% of the acquiree is the parent's interest is
recognised. recognised.
Allocation of impairment Any impairment losses to date The impairment losses are
losses at the reporting date are allocated between the allocated to the parent.
parent and NCI based on
ownership interests.
Subsequent acquisition Lower impact on parent's Higher impact on parent's
equity because the NCI has a equity as a result of the lower
higher carrying value prior to carrying value of the NCI prior
the acquisition. to the acquisition.
748
5.3 Fair value of identifiable assets acquired

HKFRS
3.11,12,18, HKFRS 3 (revised) requires that the net assets of the acquiree on the acquisition date are
HKFRS 13. 9- measured at fair value for inclusion within the consolidated financial statements and the goodwill
33,76, 81, 86
calculation except in limited, stated cases. The assets and liabilities must:
(a) meet the definitions of assets and liabilities in the Conceptual Framework.
(b) be part of what the acquiree (or its former owners) exchanged in the business combination
rather than the result of separate transactions.
HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement provides extensive guidance on how the fair value of assets
and liabilities should be established. This standard is covered in detail in chapter 19.
Fair values may be incorporated into the books of the acquiree in either of the following ways:
(a) The subsidiary company might incorporate any necessary revaluations in its own books
of account. In this case, we can proceed directly to the calculation of goodwill and in turn the
consolidation, taking asset values and reserves figures straight from the subsidiary
company's statement of financial position.
(b) The revaluations may be made as a consolidation adjustment without being
incorporated in the subsidiary company's books. In this case, we must make the necessary
adjustments to the subsidiary's statement of financial position as a working. Only then can
we proceed to the consolidation. Such adjustments are normally incorporated into the
goodwill working, as shown in the following example.
Example: Fair value adjustments

Polly Co. acquired 75% of the $20,000 ordinary shares of Surrey Co. on 1 September 20X8 for
$51,000. At that date the fair value of Surrey Co.'s non-current assets was $23,000 greater than
their carrying amount, and the balance of retained earnings was $21,000. The non-controlling
interests are measured as a proportion of the net assets of the acquiree.
Calculate the goodwill arising on the business combination.
Solution
Goodwill
$ $
Consideration transferred 51,000
Non-controlling interests (64,000 (below)  25%) 16,000
67,000
Share of net assets acquired as represented by
Ordinary share capital 20,000
Fair value adjustment 23,000
(64,000)
Goodwill 3,000
Large Co. acquired 90% of the ordinary shares in Small Co. on 31 May 20X8, transferring
$300,000 cash immediately, $100,000 in one year's time and 20,000 Large Co. shares to the
shareholders of Small Co.. Large Co. also agreed to issue a further 10,000 shares in one year’s
time if Small Co. achieved an increase in profits of 5% over that year. At the acquisition date the
equity and reserves section of Small Co.'s statement of financial position included the following
balances:
749
Financial Reporting
$
Share capital (100,000 shares) 100,000
Revaluation reserve 50,000
1 The fair value of Small Co.'s land was $60,000 in excess of its book value, however Small
Co. had not yet completed a revaluation exercise for the year.
2 Small Co. had not included a provision for legal costs of $40,000 in the accounts, despite the
recognition criteria of HKAS 37 being met.
3 The share price of Large Co. shares on the acquisition date was $1.60
4 The share price of Small Co. shares on the acquisition date was $1.25
5 An appropriate discount rate is 6%
6 The fair value of the contingent consideration is estimated to be 90% of the value of the
share price on the acquisition date.
7 In the year following the acquisition, Small Co. increased profits by 8%.
Required
(a) What goodwill arises on the acquisition of the controlling interests in Small Co., assuming
that the non-controlling interests is measured at fair value?
(b) How is the investment recognised in the separate financial statements of Large Co. on the
acquisition date?
(c) What journals must Large Co. make subsequent to the acquisition in respect of the deferred
and contingent consideration (assuming that it is paid)?
The following sections consider specific guidance on establishing the fair value of specific assets
and liabilities in the case of a business combination.
HKFRS 3.11 5.3.1 Restructuring and future losses
An acquirer should not recognise liabilities for future losses or other costs expected to be
incurred as a result of the business combination.
HKFRS 3 (revised) explains that a plan to restructure a subsidiary following an acquisition is not a
present obligation of the acquiree at the acquisition date. Neither does it meet the definition of a
contingent liability. Therefore an acquirer should not recognise a liability for such a
restructuring plan as part of allocating the cost of the combination unless the subsidiary was
already committed to the plan before the acquisition.
This prevents creative accounting. An acquirer cannot set up a provision for restructuring or
future losses of a subsidiary and then release this to profit or loss in subsequent periods in order to
reduce losses or smooth profits.
HKFRS 3.B31 5.3.2 Intangible assets
The acquiree may have intangible assets, such as development expenditure. These can be
recognised separately from goodwill only if they are identifiable. An intangible asset is identifiable
only if it:
or exchanged, either individually or together with a related contract, asset or liability
(b) arises from contractual or other legal rights.
750
HKFRS 5.3.3 Contingent liabilities

3.23,56
Contingent liabilities of the acquiree are recognised if they create a present obligation and their
fair value can be measured reliably. A contingent liability must be recognised even if the
outflow is not probable, provided there is a present obligation.
This is a departure from the normal rules in HKAS 37; contingent liabilities are not normally
recognised, but only disclosed.
After their initial recognition, the acquirer should measure contingent liabilities that are recognised
separately at the higher of:
(a) the amount that would be recognised in accordance with HKAS 37
(b) the amount initially recognised.
HKFRS 3.29 5.3.4 Reacquired rights
If the acquirer reacquires a right that it had previously granted to an acquiree (for example, the use
of a trade name), the right will be recognised as an identifiable intangible asset, separately from
goodwill.
HKFRS 3.27 5.3.5 Indemnification assets
Indemnification assets, such as an indemnity for an uncertain tax position or contingent liability, are
recognised and measured based on the same measurement principles and assumptions as the
related liability.
HKFRS 5.3.6 Other exceptions to the recognition or measurement principles
3.24,26,30,31
HKFRS 3 (revised) requires that the relevant standard is applied in measuring and recognising the
following:
(a) Deferred tax: use HKAS 12 values.
(b) Employee benefits: use HKAS 19 values.
(c) Share-based payment: use HKFRS 2 values.
(d) Assets held for sale: use HKFRS 5 values.
HKFRS 3.45-
50
5.4 Measurement period adjustments
Sometimes elements of the goodwill calculation such as the fair value of a particular asset or
contingent consideration can only be determined provisionally by the end of the reporting period in
which an acquisition takes place.
Where this is the case, goodwill is initially calculated based on those provisional values, and
management will then continue to work to identify actual values after the reporting date for as long
as the measurement period lasts.
The measurement period is that period of time immediately after the acquisition date when the
acquirer may still be obtaining the information needed to identify and measure each element of the
goodwill calculation:
 Consideration transferred
 The non-controlling interest
 The fair value of the net assets of the acquiree.
During this period the acquirer may adjust any provisional amounts to reflect new information
obtained about facts and circumstances that existed as of the acquisition date. Amounts are
adjusted retrospectively i.e. as if the actual amount had always been known. This means that the
amount of goodwill initially calculated and the fair value of net assets or consideration initially
recognised may change.
The measurement period ends on the earlier of:
 the date by which the acquirer has received all the information it was seeking or learns that
the information cannot be obtained, or
 12 months after the acquisition date.
751
Financial Reporting
Any further adjustments after the measurement period should be recognised only to correct an
error in accordance with HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors.
Any subsequent changes in estimates are dealt with in accordance with HKAS 8 (i.e. the effect is
recognised in the current and future periods). HKAS 8 requires an entity to account for an error
correction retrospectively, and to present financial statements as if the error had never occurred by
restating the comparative information for the prior period(s) in which the error occurred.
Example: Measurement period adjustments

Yeltsin Co. acquired 100% of Johnson Co. on 1 March 20X1, agreeing to pay cash consideration of
$78 million. The provisional fair value allocated to the net assets of Johnson Co. at the acquisition
date was $71 million, however the management of Yeltsin Co. have engaged third party experts in
order to reliably measure the fair value of the intangible assets of Johnson Co. at this date.
The reporting date of Yeltsin Co. is 30 June 20X1, and at this date the third party experts have not
yet concluded their work.
On 18 August 20X1, the experts report to management that the fair value of one of Johnson’s
intangible assets is $2m greater than the provisional value allocated to it. They also confirm the
presumption that the asset has an indefinite useful life.
Required
Calculate the value of goodwill recognised in the financial statements of the Yeltsin Group on
30 June 20X1 and 30 June 20X2.
Solution
30 June 20X1
$m
Consideration transferred 78
Provisional fair value of net assets acquired (71)
Goodwill 7
30 June 20X2
$m
Actual fair value of net assets acquired (71m + 2m) (73)
Goodwill 5
Therefore goodwill is initially recognised at $7m in the consolidated financial statements at 30 June
20X1, however at 30 June 20X2 the amount is reduced to $5m with a corresponding increase of
$2m to group intangible assets:
$m $m
DEBIT Intangible assets 2
CREDIT Goodwill 2
As the adjustment is made retrospectively the 20X1 comparative financial statements provided in
20X2 are adjusted to reflect the lower value of goodwill.
Ariadne Co. acquired all of the share capital of Rebecca Co. on 30 September 20X7. At the
Ariadne Group's year end of 31 December 20X7, management have still not ascertained the fair
value of an item of property, plant and equipment held by Rebecca Co. at the acquisition date. A
provisional value of $300,000 is allocated to the asset, which had a remaining useful life of five
years at the acquisition date.
752
On 1 March 20X8, Ariadne received an independent valuer's report which allocated the asset a fair
value of $400,000 on the acquisition date.
Required
What amounts are reported in the group accounts in the year ended 31 December 20X7 and
31 December 20X8 in respect of the asset? You should provide comparative information as at
31 December 20X8.
5.5 Subsequent accounting

Topic highlights
Purchased positive goodwill is retained in the statement of financial position as an intangible
asset under the requirements of HKFRS 3 (revised). It must then be reviewed for impairment
annually.
A bargain purchase is reassessed. If a bargain purchase remains, it is recognised as a gain in
profit or loss.
5.5.1 Positive goodwill

Positive goodwill acquired in a business combination is recognised as an asset and is initially
measured at cost. Cost is the excess of the cost of the combination over the acquirer's interest in
the net fair value of the acquiree's identifiable assets, liabilities, and contingent liabilities.
After initial recognition goodwill acquired in a business combination is measured at cost less any
accumulated impairment losses. It is not amortised. Instead it is tested for impairment at least
annually, in accordance with HKAS 36 Impairment of Assets.
HKFRS 3.34- 5.5.2 Bargain purchase

36
A bargain purchase (sometimes referred to as negative goodwill) arises when the net of the
acquisition-date amounts of the identifiable assets acquired and the liabilities assumed exceeds the
consideration transferred. This may occur where there is a forced sale, or the purchased company
is loss-making. Alternatively, it may be the result of the application of recognition and measurement
rules within HKFRS 3 (revised).
Before recognising a gain on a bargain purchase, the acquirer must reassess whether it has
correctly identified all of the assets acquired and all of the liabilities assumed and must
recognise any additional assets or liabilities that are identified in that review. The acquirer must
then review the procedures used to measure the amounts this HKFRS requires to be recognised at
the acquisition date for all of the following:
(a) The identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed
(b) The non-controlling interests in the acquiree, if any
(c) For a business combination achieved in stages, the acquirer's previously held interest in the
acquiree.
(d) The consideration transferred.
The purpose of this review is to ensure that the measurements appropriately reflect all the available
information as at the acquisition date.
5.5.3 Non-controlling interests at the end of reporting period
It is important to realise that the measurement of the non-controlling interests (NCI) at either fair
value or as a proportion of net assets only applies at the date of acquisition.
753
Financial Reporting
Subsequent to acquisition the non-controlling interests at a given reporting date can be calculated
either by:
(a) calculating the NCI share of the net assets of the acquiree at the reporting date (as adjusted
for consolidation purposes). Where the fair value method is used the NCI goodwill must be
added to this, or
(b) calculating the NCI share of post-acquisition reserves movement (as adjusted for
consolidation purposes) and adding this to NCI as measured at the acquisition date.
Example: Goodwill
On 1 January 20X9, Flatley Co. acquired 70% of the ordinary shares of Gringo Co. at a cost of
$700,000. The net assets of Gringo Co. at this date were $740,000. The non-controlling interests
had a fair value of $250,000.
In the year to 31 December 20X9, Gringo retained profits of $100,000.
What goodwill arises on the acquisition of Gringo, and what is the value of the non-controlling
interests at 31 December 20X9 assuming that the non-controlling interests is measured:
(a) as a proportion of the net assets of the acquiree
(b) at fair value?
Solution
Goodwill
Proportion of net assets Fair value
method method
$ $
Consideration 700,000 700,000
NCI (30%  $740,000)/fair value 222,000 250,000
922,000 950,000
Net assets of acquiree (740,000) (740,000)
Goodwill 182,000 210,000
Non-controlling interests at 31 December 20X7

Non-controlling interests at acquisition 222,000 250,000
Share of retained profits (30%  $100,000) 30,000 30,000
252,000 280,000
Proportion of net assets Fair value

method method
$ $
Or
Share of net assets at reporting date
30%  ($740,000 + $100,000) 252,000 252,000
Goodwill ($250,000 – (30%  $740,000)) – 28,000
252,000 280,000
In rare cases a subsidiary may have a negative equity balance. In this case the non-controlling
interests is reported as a deficit balance in the consolidated statement of financial position in
accordance with HKFRS 10. In other words, a group does not cease to allocate the non-controlling
interests' share of losses to them simply because this would result in a negative balance.
754
Graham Collins Co (‘GCC’) acquired control of a supplier Loweth Lane (‘LL’), through the
acquisition of an 84% equity shareholding in that company on 1 August 20X3. GCC elected to
measure the NCI at fair value. The agreed consideration was:
 $29 million cash payable on the acquisition date
 $10 million loan notes payable on the first anniversary of the acquisition and contingent upon
LL achieving stated profits targets.
 1 share in GCC issued on the acquisition date for every 15 acquired in LL.
At the acquisition date, LL’s share capital amounted to 5 million shares with a carrying amount of
$18 million and the company’s reported reserves were $30.4 million.
Additional information
1 The quoted share price of GCC at 1 August 20X3 was $21.50 and the fair value of a share in
LL, determined using an income based valuation technique was $10.15
2 At 1 August 20X3, the fair value of the contingent consideration was determined to be $9.8
million; at 31 December 20X3, as a result of the poor performance of LL, the fair value of this
consideration was considered to be $4.3 million.
3 The financial statements of LL prepared as at the acquisition date included:
 $750,000 relating to licensing fees paid to GCC for the right to use technology
developed by that company. The remaining licence term is 5 years. GCC has recently
charged other suppliers $1m for licences for a 10 year period.
 A balance of $200,000 due from GCC in respect of goods delivered. The balance was
settled at acquisition and formed part of the cash paid by GCC on 1 August 20X3.
 A $500,000 provision in respect of a legal case brought against GCC by a customer.
The $500,000 carrying amount of the provision was estimated at 31 December 20X2;
at the acquisition date, legal advisers suggested that a more accurate measurement of
the expected settlement was $550,000. The case was subsequently settled at
$475,000 in October 20X3.
 A property with a carrying amount of $6 million. The property is currently used for
industrial purposes and based on that use has an estimated market value of
$6.3million. Surveyors have advised GCC that the property would achieve $6.6
million if sold on the basis of conversion to ‘warehouse apartments’.
Required
(a) State the journal entry required in GCC’s accounts on 1 August 20X3 to recognise the
acquisition
(b) Calculate goodwill arising on the acquisition of LL by GCC at 1 August 20X3 (the acquisition
date). You should explain the calculation of LL’s identifiable net assets at the acquisition
date.
(c) Explain how the contingent consideration is accounted for at 31 December 20X3
(d) Calculate goodwill as recognised at 31 December 20X3 and subsequent period ends.
HKFRS 3.59-
63, B64
5.6 Disclosures
HKFRS 3 (revised) requires that an acquirer discloses information to enable the users of its
financial statements to evaluate the nature and financial effect of a business combination that
755
Financial Reporting
occurs during the current period or after the end of the period but before the financial statements
are authorised for issue. This information should include:
 the name and a description of the acquiree
 the acquisition date
 the percentage of voting equity interests acquired
 the reasons for the business combination
 a qualitative description of the factors that make up the goodwill recognised
 the acquisition date fair value of the total consideration transferred and each major class of
consideration
 for contingent consideration:
– the amount recognised at acquisition
– a description of the arrangement
– an estimate of the range of outcomes
 details of acquired receivables
 amounts recognised for each class of assets and liabilities acquired
 disclosure in accordance with HKAS 37 for contingent liabilities recognised
 the amount of goodwill expected to be deductible for tax purposes
 details of transactions that are recognised separately from the acquisition of assets and
assumption of liabilities in the business combination
 the amount of acquisition related costs and how they are recognised (including the line item)
 the amount of a gain in a bargain purchase and a description of reasons why the transaction
resulted in a gain
 the amount of any non-controlling interests and the measurement basis applied
 valuation techniques used to determine the fair value of the non-controlling interests where
relevant.
 The fair value of the retained interest where a business combination is achieved in stages
and details of any gain recognised in remeasuring this interest to fair value
 The amounts of revenue and profit or loss of the acquiree included in the consolidated
statement of profit or loss since acquisition
 The revenue and profit or loss of the Group for the current reporting period as though the
acquisition date for all business combinations that occurred in the period was as at the
beginning of the period.
Illustration
On 1 September 20X3 the Fanfare Group acquired 85% of the issued share capital of Devonald
Distribution Co. for cash consideration of $87 million. Devonald Distribution Co. is a logistics
company with a worldwide distribution network. The Fanfare Group has used the services of
Devonald Distribution Co. for a number of years and the acquisition has been made in order to
secure the company’s ongoing service and achieve synergies. The transaction has been
accounted for using the acquisition method of accounting.
756
Book value Fair value

$'000 $'000
Net assets acquired
Trade and other receivables 16,500 16,500
Trade and other payables (12,300) (12,300)
Current tax liabilities (18,900) (18,900)
Bank loans (64,000) (64,000)
Deferred tax liabilities (76,400) (76,400)
92,500
Non-controlling interest measured at fair value 11,000
Total consideration 87,000
Goodwill 5,500
Consideration satisfied by:

Cash 87,000
The goodwill arising on the acquisition of Devonald Distribution Co is attributable to the anticipated
future operating synergies that will be achieved by the combination.
The fair value of the non-controlling interest is a level 2 measurement in accordance with HKFRS
13, determined using an income valuation technique.
The IASB issued ED/2014/4 Measuring Quoted Investments in Subsidiaries, Joint Ventures and
Associates at Fair Value in September 2014. This proposes amendments to IFRS 10 (HKFRS 10),
IFRS 12 (HKFRS 12), IAS 27 (HKAS 27) and IAS 28 (HKAS 28) as well as IAS 36 (HKAS 36) and
IFRS 13 (HKFRS 13).
As a result of the proposed amendments, standards would clarify that the fair value of an
investment that is quoted in an active market is determined on the basis of an individual quoted
market price without adjustment in the following cases.
 IFRS 10 (HKFRS 10) Consolidated Financial Statements – where an investment entity
measures its subsidiaries at fair value.
 IFRS 12 (HKFRS 12) Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities – where the fair value of each
material joint venture and associate measured using the equity method is disclosed
IAS 27 (HKAS 27) Separate Financial Statements- where an entity measures investments in
subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures at fair value in its separate financial statements.
IAS 28 (HKAS 28) Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures – where certain entities, such as
mutual funds, can elect to measure their investments in associates and joint ventures at fair value.
757
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
Principles of consolidation
Levels of investment
Subsidiary Associate Joint arrangement Investment

control significant contractual accretion of wealth
consolidate influence arrangement and financial asset
equity account joint control Chapter 18
Chapter 29 equity account a
joint venture
with a joint
operation, include
joint operator’s
share of assets,
liabilities, revenue
and expenses
Chapter 29
HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial

HKFRS 3 Business Combinations
Statements
Control is established where an investor Goodwill:

has: Consideration transferred X
1 power over the investee Non-controlling interests X
2 exposure to variable returns from its Fair value of net assets of acquiree (X)
involvement with the investee X
3 the ability to use the power to affect
returns
Consideration:
Contingent consideration included at
fair value
Payment in respect of pre-existing
relationships is not part of
Consolidated financial statements must consideration
be prepared for all subsidiaries under the Most acquisition-related costs are
control of a parent other than those held recognised as an expense, with the
for sale. exception of share and debt issue
costs
In certain circumstances a parent
company which is itself a subsidiary is
exempt from preparing consolidated Non-controlling interest is measured at
financial statements. either fair value or as a proportion of the
net assets of the acquiree.
Investment entities must measure
subsidiaries at fair value through profit or
loss rather than consolidate them unless Net assets of the acquiree are measured
they provide services relating to at fair value:
investment activities. Fair value adjustments are either
recognised by the acquiree or made as
a consolidation adjustment.
Provisions for future losses/
Consolidation procedures:
restructuring are not recognised
The parent's and subsidiaries'
Intangible assets are recognised if
financial statements are combined
identifiable
on a line by line basis.
Contingent liabilities are recognised at
Intra-group balances and
fair value if reliable
transactions are eliminated.
Adjustments must be made where a
subsidiary has a different year-end
from a parent. Positive goodwill is recognised as an
Uniform accounting policies are
asset and tested for impairment
applied. annually
A subsidiary is included from the
Negative goodwill is reviewed and is
date on which control is obtained. then recognised as a gain on bargain
purchase.
758
Answer 1
(a) $ $
Deferred cash consideration ($100,000  1/1.06) 94,340
Equity consideration (20,000  $1.60) 32,000
Contingent equity consideration (10,000  $1.60 
90%) 14,400
440,740
Non-controlling interests (10,000  $1.25) 12,500
453,240
Fair value of net assets
Land – fair value adjustment 60,000
Provision – fair value adjustment (40,000)
(419,000)
Goodwill 34,240
Note that Small's actual 8% increase to profits in the year following acquisition does not
affect the measurement of the contingent equity consideration (and so the calculation
of goodwill). This contingent consideration is measured at its estimated fair value at the
acquisition date. Subsequent changes to this fair value are only made where
information becomes available during the measurement period which affects the fair
value at the acquisition date.
(b)
DEBIT Investment $440,740
CREDIT Cash/Bank $300,000
CREDIT Liability $94,340
CREDIT Share capital $32,000
CREDIT Shares to be issued $14,400
To recognise the investment in Small Co. in Large Co.’s individual financial statements.
(c) Y/e 31 May 20X9

DEBIT Finance cost (6% x $94,340) $5,660
CREDIT Liability $5,660
To recognise the unwinding of the discount on the deferred consideration.
31 May 20X9
DEBIT Liability $100,000
CREDIT Cash $100,000
To recognise payment of the deferred consideration
759
Financial Reporting
31 May 20X9
DEBIT Shares to be issued $14,400
CREDIT Share capital $14,400
To recognise the issue of the contingent deferred shares.
Answer 2
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AT 31 DECEMBER
20X7 – EXTRACT $
Property, plant and equipment (W) 285,000
WORKING
Provisional value of asset 300,000
Depreciation (300,000 / 5 years)  3/12 (15,000)
285,000
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AT 31 DECEMBER 20X8 20X7

20X8 – EXTRACT $ $
Property, plant and equipment (W)

300,000 380,000
WORKING
Fair value of asset 400,000
Depreciation to 31 Dec 20X7 (400,000 / 5 years)  3/12 (20,000)
380,000
Depreciation for y/e 31 Dec 20X8 (400,000 / 5 years) (80,000)
300,000
The property, plant and equipment balance in the 20X7 comparative financial statements as
reported in 20X8 is increased by $95,000. This increase is balanced by the following adjustments
also made to the 20X7 figures:
The carrying value of goodwill is decreased by $100,000 being the difference between the
acquisition date provisional value and fair value. The depreciation expense is increased by $5,000
being the difference between the depreciation charge as recognised in the 20X7 financial
statements, based on the provisional value and the depreciation charge for 20X7 based on the fair
value ($'000):
$'000 $'000
DEBIT Property, plant and equipment 95
DEBIT Depreciation expense 5
CREDIT Goodwill 100
Answer 3
(a) In GCC’s financial statements the investment is recognised by:
DEBIT Investment in LL (financial asset) $44,620,000
DEBIT Trade payable $200,000
CREDIT Loan notes to be issued $9,800,000
CREDIT Share capital $6,020,000
To record the acquisition of the subsidiary and settlement of the trade account with LL.
760
Working 1
The investment in LL is a financial asset investment in GCC’s separate financial statements
and as such is measured initially at its fair value:
$000
Cash (working 2) 28,800
Loan notes (at fair value) 9,800
Shares issued (working 3) 6,020
44,620
Working 2
$200,000 of the cash payment is in respect of a pre-existing relationship, being the balance
due from GCC for goods supplied. This does not form part of the consideration for the
acquisition.
Working 3
The share consideration is recognised at fair value, equating to the number of shares issued
in GCC multiplied by the quoted share price:
(84%  5m)/15 = 280,000 shares
at fair value of $21.50 per share = $6,020,000
(b) Goodwill arising on acquisition
$000 $000
Consideration transferred (cost of investment) – part (a) 44,620
Fair value of the NCI (16%  5m shares  $10.15) 8,120
52,740
Identifiable net assets at acquisition date:
Reserves as reported 30,400
Trade receivable settled replaced by cash 0
Adjustment to carrying amount of provision ($550,000 – (50)
$500,000)
Fair value adjustment to property ($6.6million – $6 million) 600
(48,950)
Goodwill 3,790
Notes
 The licence is a reaquired right in accordance with HKFRS 3. No adjustment is
made to LL’s financial statements in respect of this; HKFRS 3 requires that this
is measured based on the remaining contractual term of the contract regardless
of the possibility of contract renewals.
 LL’s trade receivable account of $200,000 with GCC has been settled, however
there is no change to net assets as LL receives cash instead.
 The fair value of the provision is the acquisition date estimate of the outflow of
resources required to settle the obligation, being $550,000
 The property is measured at fair value in accordance with HKFRS 13. Therefore
the highest and best use of the property is considered and the fair value is
$6.6 million.
761
Financial Reporting
(c) At 31 December 20X3:

The contingent consideration is remeasured to fair value in the financial statements of
GCC, with any gain or loss recognised in profit or loss. This does not, therefore, affect
the carrying amount of goodwill:
DEBIT Loan notes to be issued ($9.8 – $5,500,000
$4.3)
CREDIT Gain on remeasurement of loan $5,500,000
notes to fair value
To remeasure the contingent consideration.
(d) Goodwill at subsequent year ends
LL’s legal case is settled before the period end and within the ‘measurement period,
which lasts a maximum of 12 months after the acquisition date. The settlement of the
case provides new information about facts and circumstances that existed at the
acquisition date, and therefore goodwill is adjusted to reflect the settlement amount:
$000 $000
Consideration transferred (cost of investment) – part (a) 44,620
Fair value of the NCI (16%  5m shares  $10.15) 8,120
52,740
Identifiable net assets at acquisition date:
Reserves as reported 30,400
Trade receivable settled replaced by cash 0
Adjustment to carrying amount of provision ($500,000 – 25
$475,000)
Fair value adjustment to property ( as part (b)) 600
(49,025)
Goodwill 3,715
762
Exam practice
XYZ 18 minutes
XYZ is a listed entity engaged in the provision of recruitment services, preparing financial
statements to 30 June each year. Part of the directors' long term strategy is to identify opportunities
for the takeover of other related businesses. In 20X1, the directors decided to expand their
operations into the second major city of the country in which XYZ operates by taking over an
existing recruitment agency. On 1 July 20X1, XYZ paid $14,700,000 for 800,000 of the 1,000,000
shares in the successful AB Agency. At that date, AB had share capital of $1,000,000 and retained
earnings of $2,850,000. At the date of acquisition, AB's brand name was valued by specialists at
$2,900,000 and following the acquisition it has been recognised in the consolidated financial
statements of XYZ. Apart from retained earnings, AB has no other reserves.
AB has continued to be very successful and, therefore, XYZ's directors have been seeking further
acquisitions. On 1 April 20X7, XYZ gained control of a small online recruitment business, paying
$39.60 per share to acquire 60,000 out of 100,000 issued shares in the CD Agency. CD's share
capital is $100,000 and retained earnings at 1 July 20X6 were $700,000; at 30 June 20X7, they
were $780,000. CD paid no dividends during the year ended 30 June 20X7. CD's profits can be
assumed to accrue evenly over time. Since acquisition CD has continued to produce growth in both
profit and market share.
The directors follow the accounting treatment required for goodwill arising on consolidation by
HKFRS 3 Business Combinations (revised). It is group policy to measure NCI at acquisition at full
fair value. The fair value of the NCI shares at acquisition was $17 per share for AB and $35 per
share for CD. XYZ has no investments other than those in AB and CD.
Required
Calculate the balance of goodwill on acquisition to be included in the consolidated financial
statements of XYZ for the year ended 30 June 20X8. (10 marks)
763
Financial Reporting
764
chapter 28
Consolidated accounts:
accounting for subsidiaries
Topic list
1 Consolidated financial statements

1.1 Mechanics of consolidation
2 Consolidated statement of financial position
2.1 Goodwill
2.2 Group reserves
2.4 Fair value adjustments
2.5 Intra-group transactions
3 Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
3.3 Mid-year acquisitions
4 Recap of simple consolidation techniques
5 Complex groups
5.1 Vertical groups
5.2 D-shaped groups
Learning focus
Group accounting is relevant to many entities. You should be able to perform a simple
consolidation.
765
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Kong Reporting Standards and statutory reporting requirements
4.04 Acquisition of subsidiaries 3
4.04.01 Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for a
simple/complex group structure including pre and post acquisition
profits, non-controlling interests and goodwill
4.04.02 Prepare a consolidated statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for a simple/complex group structure,
dealing with an acquisition and the non-controlling interest
4.09 Consolidated financial statement preparation 3
4.09.01 Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position in
compliance with HKFRS 10
4.09.02 Prepare a consolidated statement of profit or loss and other
766
28: Consolidated accounts: accounting for subsidiaries | Part D Group financial statements
1 Consolidated financial statements

Topic highlights
Consolidated financial statements are prepared by adding together the parent and subsidiary's
assets, liabilities, income and expenses and eliminating the cost of the investment in the subsidiary
against the parent's equity in the subsidiary.
As we saw in the last chapter, HKFRS 10 requires a parent to present consolidated financial
statements, in which the accounts of the parent and subsidiary (or subsidiaries) are combined and
presented as a single entity.
1.1 Mechanics of consolidation

The basic mechanics of consolidation seen in the last chapter were as follows:
(a) Add together the parent's and subsidiaries' assets, liabilities, income and expenses on a line
by line basis, eliminating any intra-group balances or transactions.
(b) Eliminate the carrying amount of the parent's investment in each subsidiary and the parent's
proportion of equity in each subsidiary.
(c) Recognise non-controlling interests representing the equity of subsidiaries which does not
belong to the parent where relevant.
In this chapter we shall apply these rules to both the consolidated statement of financial position
and consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income in turn.
2 Consolidated statement of financial position

Topic highlights
The consolidated statement of financial position includes only the parent's share capital.
The basic principles of the consolidated statement of financial position require that the assets and
liabilities of a parent and subsidiary company are added together, and the parent's investment in
the subsidiary is eliminated against the equity of that subsidiary. Therefore, only the parent
company's share capital is shown in the consolidated accounts. In the simplest case the journal
required to achieve this is:
DEBIT Share capital of subsidiary
DEBIT Pre-acquisition reserves of subsidiary
CREDIT Parent’s investment in subsidiary
The following example illustrates this.
Example: Consolidated statement of financial position

Let us assume that the parent company buys all of the ordinary shares in the subsidiary for
$100,000:
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION AT ACQUISITION DATE
Parent Subsidiary Adjustments Consolidated
$ $ $ $
Non-current assets 160,000 90,000 250,000
Investment in subsidiary 100,000 - (100,000) -
Current assets 58,000 30,000 88,000
318,000 120,000 338,000
767
Financial Reporting
Parent Subsidiary Adjustments Consolidated

$ $ $ $
Share capital 100,000 30,000 (30,000) 100,000

Retained earnings 180,000 70,000 (70,000) 180,000
Liabilities 38,000 20,000 58,000
318,000 120,000 338,000
The adjustments column shows the effect of the consolidation adjustment journal:
$ $
DEBIT Share capital of subsidiary 30,000
DEBIT Pre-acquisition reserves of subsidiary 70,000
CREDIT Parent’s investment in subsidiary 100,000
To recognise the acquisition of subsidiary.
In this instance the $70,000 retained earnings of the subsidiary must have been made pre-
acquisition and they are therefore eliminated and not available to the group.
2.1 Goodwill
Topic highlights
Goodwill is recognised as an asset in the consolidated statement of financial position and tested for
impairment annually.
In the example above, the 100% investment in the subsidiary was purchased for $100,000 on a
date when the net assets of the subsidiary were $100,000. Therefore no goodwill arose. As we saw
in the last chapter, however, this is an unusual situation.
We shall now introduce goodwill into the consolidation process.
Example: Goodwill
The following statement of financial position relates to A Co. and B Co. as at 31 December 20X7.
A Co. B Co.
$ $
Non-current assets 4,000 3,200
Investment in B Co. 3,800 –
Current assets 2,400 500
10,200 3,700
Represented by:
Reserves 1,900 500
9,900 3,500
Current liabilities 300 200
10,200 3,700
A Co. acquired all of the share capital of B Co. on 31 December 20X7.
The consolidation process now involves:
1 adding together the assets and liabilities of A and B
2 eliminating the investment in B shown in A's books against B's equity
3 calculating and including goodwill in the consolidated statement of financial position
768
Goodwill is calculated as:

$
Consideration 3,800
Net assets of B Co. (3,500)
300
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF A CO AS AT 31 DECEMBER
20X7
Consolidated
A Co. B Co. Adjustments A Co.
$ $ $ $
Non-current assets 4,000 3,200 – 7,200
Investment in B Co. 3,800 – (3,800) –
Goodwill – – 300 300
Current assets 2,400 500 – 2,900
10,200 3,700 10,400
Represented by:
Share capital 8,000 3,000 (3,000) 8,000

Reserves 1,900 500 (500) 1,900
9,900 3,500 9,900
Current liabilities 300 200 – 500
10,200 3,700 10,400
Note. Consolidation adjustments are memoranda only, they are not part of bookkeeping
procedures in the individual company's accounting records.
Consolidation adjustment
$ $
DEBIT Share capital 3,000
Pre-acquisition reserves (B Co.) 500
Goodwill on consolidation 300
CREDIT Cost of investment 3,800
To recognise the acquisition of B Co and goodwill arising
2.2 Group reserves

Topic highlights
Group reserves are calculated as all of the parent company's reserves plus the group share of the
post-acquisition reserves in the subsidiary.
In both of the examples seen so far, the consolidation is performed on the date of the acquisition
and therefore group reserves are equal to the parent company's reserves.
In the following example, we shall see how the post-acquisition profits of a subsidiary are taken into
account in calculating group reserves.
Example: Group retained earnings

This example continues from the previous example (Goodwill) but has moved on a year, during
which time B Co. has made post-acquisition profits of $200.
769
Financial Reporting
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF A CO. AND B CO. AT 31 DECEMBER 20X8

A Co. B Co.
$ $
10,800 4,300
Represented by:
Reserves 1,900 700
9,900 3,700
10,800 4,300
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF A CO AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X8
Consolidated
$ $ $ $
Goodwill – – 300 300
10,800 4,300 11,600
Represented by:
Share capital 8,000 3,000 (3,000) 8,000
Reserves 1,900 700 (500) 2,100
9,900 3,700 10,100
Current liabilities 900 600 – 1,500
10,800 4,300 11,600
The acquisition journal in this case is the same as that in the example before. The difference is
that in removing $500 of B’s reserves, $200 post acquisition reserves remain to be carried
across to form part of group reserves.
This example shows how group retained earnings comprise all of the parent company's retained
earnings plus the group share (100% in this case) of the subsidiary's post acquisition retained
earnings.

Topic highlights
The non-controlling interests are shown in the equity and liabilities section of the consolidated
statement of financial position. The acquisition date measurement (fair value or a proportion of net
assets) increases by the non-controlling interest's share of post-acquisition reserves.
So far we have only dealt with situations where the parent company owns all of the share capital in
the subsidiary. As we saw in the last chapter, however, there may be a non-controlling interest in
the subsidiary. This may be measured at fair value or as a proportion of the net assets in the
subsidiary, and the next two examples consider each of these situations.
770
Example: Non-controlling interests (1)

This example is based on the same information as that previously, but we shall assume that A Co.
acquires only 2,400 of the 3,000 shares of B Co., and that the non-controlling interests are
measured as a proportion of the net assets of the subsidiary.
Note that in this example the statement of financial position is being prepared at the acquisition
date.
A Co. B Co.
$ $
10,200 3,700
Represented by:
Reserves 1,900 500
9,900 3,500
10,200 3,700
Goodwill working
Consideration 3,800
Non-controlling interests at date of acquisition ($3,500  20%) 700
4,500
Less: net assets of B Co.
Share capital 3,000
Reserves 500
(3,500)
Goodwill 1,000
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF A CO AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X7
Consolidated
$ $ $ $
Goodwill – – 1,000 1,000
10,200 3,700 11,100
Represented by:
Share capital 8,000 3,000 (3,000) 8,000
Reserves 1,900 500 (500) 1,900
9,900 3,500 9,900
Non-controlling interests – – 700 700

Current liabilities 300 200 500
10,200 3,700 11,100
771
Financial Reporting
$ $
Goodwill on consolidation 1,000
To recognise the acquisition of B Co and resulting goodwill and non-controlling interests
The non-controlling interests in net assets are shown within the equity and liabilities section of the
statement of financial position. This amount represents the net assets of the subsidiary which
legally belong to its non-controlling shareholders.
The goodwill calculated in this example of $1,000 is attributable to the parent company, A Co, only.
Example: Non-controlling interests (2)

Again, this example is based on the same information as previous worked examples but this time
we'll assume that A Co. acquires only 2,400 of the 3,000 shares of B Co. and the fair value of the
20% non-controlling interests was $950. The non-controlling interest is measured at fair value at
the acquisition date.
A Co. B Co.
$ $
10,200 3,700
Represented by:
Reserves 1,900 500
9,900 3,500
10,200 3,700
GOODWILL WORKING
Consideration 3,800
Non-controlling interests (at fair value) 950
4,750
Less: Net assets of B Co.
Share capital 3,000
Reserves 500
(3,500)
Goodwill 1,250
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF A CO. AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X7
Consolidated
$ $ $ $
Goodwill – – 1,250 1,250
10,200 3,700 11,350
772
Consolidated
$ $ $ $
Represented by:
Share capital 8,000 3,000 (3,000) 8,000
Reserves 1,900 500 (500) 1,900
9,900 3,500 9,900
Non-controlling interests – – 950 950
10,200 3,700 11,350
$ $
To recognise the acquisition of B Co and resulting goodwill and non-controlling interests
Again, the non-controlling interests is represented in the bottom half of the consolidated statement
of financial position, however this time at fair value.
The goodwill calculated in this example of $1,250 is 'full goodwill' being the goodwill attributable to
both A Co. and the non-controlling interests.
2.3.1 Non-controlling interests and post acquisition profits

Now we shall consider how a non-controlling interest impacts the mechanics of the consolidation
when we also have post acquisition retained earnings to consider.
Example: NCI and post acquisition profits (1)

This example is based on the same information as previous worked examples but now assume
that:
 A Co. acquires only 2,400 of the 3,000 shares of B Co.
 The non-controlling interests are measured as a proportion of the net assets of the
subsidiary.
 B Co. has made post-acquisition profits of $200.
On 31 December 20X8, the statements of financial position of A Co. and B Co. are as follows:
A Co. B Co.
$ $
10,800 4,300
Represented by:
Reserves 1,900 700
9,900 3,700
10,800 4,300
773
Financial Reporting
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF A CO. AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X8

Adjustment Adjustment Consolidated
A Co. B Co. (i) (ii) A Co.
$ $ $ $ $
Non-current assets 5,000 3,500 – – 8,500
Investment in B Co. 3,800 – (3,800) – –
Goodwill – – 1,000 – 1,000
Current assets 2,000 800 – – 2,800
10,800 4,300 12,300
Represented by:
Share capital 8,000 3,000 (3,000) – 8,000
Reserves 1,900 700 (500) (40) 2,060
9,900 3,700 10,060
Non-controlling interests – – 700 40 740
Current liabilities 900 600 – – 1,500
10,800 4,300 12,300
(i) Goodwill working

$ $
Consideration 3,800
Non-controlling interests at date of acquisition ($3,500  20%) 700
4,500
Share capital 3,000
Reserves 500
(3,500)
Goodwill 1,000
(ii) Post-acquisition profits in B Co.

Post-acquisition profits of B Co. 200
NCI share of post acquisition profits of B Co. (20%  $200) 40
Consolidation adjustments
(i) $ $
To recognise the acquisition of B Co. and the resulting goodwill and non-controlling interest
(ii)
DEBIT Reserves 40
CREDIT Non-controlling interests 40
To allocate the NCI share of B Co.’s post-acquisition profits
The following example again includes post-acquisition profits in the subsidiary, but this time the
non-controlling interest is measured at fair value at the acquisition date.
774
Example: NCI and post acquisition profits (2)

Use the same information as the previous examples but this time assume that:
 A Co. acquires only 2,400 of the 3,000 shares of B Co.
 the non-controlling interest at acquisition is measured at fair value of $950.
 B Co. has made a post-acquisition profit of $200.
On 31 December 20X8, the statements of financial position of A Co. and B Co. are as follows:
A Co. B Co.
$ $
10,800 4,300
Represented by:
Reserves 1,900 700
9,900 3,700
10,800 4,300
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF A CO. AS AT 31 DECEMBER
20X8
Adjustment Adjustment Consolidated

A Co. B Co. (i) (ii) A Co.
$ $ $ $ $
Non-current assets 5,000 3,500 – – 8,500
Investment in B Co. 3,800 – (3,800) – –
Goodwill – – 1,250 – 1,250
Current assets 2,000 800 – – 2,800
10,800 4,300 12,550
Represented by:
Share capital 8,000 3,000 (3,000) 8,000
Reserves 1,900 700 (500) (40) 2,060
9,900 3,700 10,060
Non-controlling – – 950 40 990
interest
Current liabilities 900 600 - 1,500
10,800 4,300 12,550
(i) Goodwill working

$ $
Cost of investment 3,800
Non-controlling interests (fair value) 950
4,750
Share capital 3,000
Reserves 500
(3,500)
Goodwill 1,250
775
Financial Reporting
(ii) Post-acquisition profits in B Co.

$
Post-acquisition profits in B Co. 200
NCI share of post acquisition profits of B Co. (20%  $200) 40
(i) $ $
To recognise the acquisition of B Co. and resulting goodwill and NCI

(ii)
DEBIT Reserves 40
CREDIT Non-controlling interests 40
To allocate the NCI share of post-acquisition profits in B Co.
2.4 Fair value adjustments

Topic highlights
Where the book value of the subsidiary's assets and liabilities at the acquisition date is not equal to
fair value, adjustment must be made on consolidation.
As we saw in the last chapter, HKFRS 3 (revised) requires that for the purposes of consolidation
and the calculation of goodwill the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary are measured at fair value.
This may mean that adjustments are required as part of the consolidation process.
Example: Fair value adjustments

A Co. acquired 800 shares of B Co. representing 80% of the share capital on 1 January 20X7 when
B Co.'s reserves were $300. The statements of financial position of A Co. and B Co. as at 31
December 20X7 were as follows:
A Co. B Co.
$ $
Non-current assets, at cost 3,200 1,500
Less: Accumulated depreciation (1,000) (400)
2,200 1,100
Current assets 800 500
4,300 1,600
Represented by:
Reserves 700 400
3,700 1,400
4,300 1,600
776
The non-current assets of B Co. were valued at $1,400 on 1 January 20X7, and were estimated to
have a remaining useful life of seven years. The revaluation was not recorded in the books of B
Co..
B Co. provides depreciation at 10% per annum on cost of non-current assets. There have been no
additions or disposal of non-current assets since 1 January 20X7.
The non-controlling interests are measured as a proportion of the net assets of the subsidiary.
APPROACH TO QUESTION AND WORKINGS

1 Set up a consolidation schedule
2 Calculate the acquisition date fair value adjustment:
$
Carrying amount at 31 December 20X7 1,100
Add back 1 year’s depreciation (10%  1,500) 150
1,250
Fair value of non-current assets at date of acquisition (1,400)
Fair value adjustment at date of acquisition (150)
Consolidation journal $ $
DEBIT Non-current assets 150
CREDIT Reserves 150
To recognise fair value adjustment on consolidation
3 Calculate goodwill on consolidation:
$ $
Consideration 1,300
Non-controlling interests at date of acquisition
($1,450  20%) 290
1,590
Share capital 1,000
Reserves 300
Fair value adjustment 150
1,450
Goodwill 140
DEBIT Goodwill 140
DEBIT Reserves (300 + 150) 450
CREDIT Investment 1,300
CREDIT Non-controlling interest 290
To recognise the acquisition of B Co. and resulting goodwill and non-controlling
interest.
4 Calculate additional depreciation required in respect of the fair value adjustment
$
Depreciation provided in the books of B Co. ($1,500  10%) 150
Depreciation based on fair value $1,400 (200)
7 years
Depreciation adjustment on consolidation (50)
777
Financial Reporting
DEBIT Reserves 50
CREDIT Non-current assets 50
To record additional depreciation on fair value adjustment.
5 Allocate non-controlling interest share of post acquisition profit in B Co.
$
Post acquisition profits in B Co.
Per B Co.’s statement of financial position 400
Fair value adjustment at acquisition (W2) 150
Pre-acquisition reserves (W3) (450)
Post-acquisition additional depreciation (W4) (50)
50
NCI share of post acquisition reserves (20%  50) 10
DEBIT Reserves 10
To allocate the non-controlling interest share of B Co.’s post-acquisition profits
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION OF A CO. AS AT 31 DECEMBER

20X7
Adjustments Consolidated
A Co. B Co. 2 3 4 5 A Co.
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
Non-current 3,200 1,500 150 4,850
assets
Accumulated (1,000) (400) (50) (1,450)

depreciation
2,200 1,100 3,400
Investment in 1,300 - (1,300) -
B Co.
Goodwill 140 140
Current 800 500 1,300
assets
4,300 1,600 4,840

Represented
by:
Share capital 3,000 1,000 (1,000) 3,000
Reserves 700 400 150 (450) (50) (10) 740
Non-
controlling 290 10 300
interests
Current
liabilities 600 200 800
4,300 1,600 4,840
Note that there is no revaluation reserve in the consolidated statement of financial position since
there is none in A Co.'s books, and that in B Co.'s books is a fair value adjustment on acquisition
with no post-acquisition movement.
778
2.4.1 Deferred tax considerations

Fair value adjustments have implications for deferred tax. Please look back to Section 10 of
Chapter 15 for detailed consideration of these.

Topic highlights
Intra-group balances and any unrealised profits must be eliminated on consolidation.
One of the basic principles underlying consolidation is that of viewing a group as a single economic
entity. Therefore any intra-group (intercompany) transactions must be eliminated on consolidation
so that the consolidated financial statements show only transactions with third parties outside the
group.
Common intra-group transactions include:
 one company lending money to another group company
 trading between group companies
 one company selling a non-current asset to another company.
We shall consider each of these in turn.
2.5.1 Intra-group lending
As a result of intra-group lending one group company will show a loan in their statement of financial
position and another group company will show an investment (or receivable).
On consolidation these should be eliminated against each other and are therefore not added
across to form part of group borrowings or group investments.
2.5.2 Intra-group trading
Intra-group trading may result in one group entity recognising a receivable at the period end and
another recognising a payable. These may be referred to as "current accounts". Again they should
be cancelled against each other prior to the consolidation.
Where the amounts outstanding are not equal due to cash in transit, the recipient company should
account for the cash in transit as if it had been received prior to the period end. The receivable and
payable amounts will then be equal and may be cancelled.
A further result of intra-group trading is that of unrealised profits in stock. These are profits made by
one group company selling to another. Until such time as the inventory in question is sold outside
the group, the profit is not realised. Therefore, on consolidation, the unrealised profit in closing
stock should be eliminated from the selling company's profits as part of the consolidation, and the
closing inventory of the group should be recorded at cost to the group.
Example: Unrealised profit in stock

(a) A Co. acquired 100% of the share capital of B Co. on 1 January 20X7 when the reserves of
B Co. were $40m. During the year ended 31 December 20X7, A Co. sold goods to B Co. at a
price of $40m to include a 25% margin based on selling price.
At 31 December 20X7, B Co. had half of these goods in stock.
The inventory and reserves reported in the accounts of A Co. and B Co. as at 31 December
20X7 were:
A Co. B Co.
$m $m
Inventory 54 42
Reserves 100 50
779
Financial Reporting
The profit recorded by A Co. on sale of the goods to B Co. is $40m  25% = $10m. From the
viewpoint of the group, $5m (1/2 x $10m) is unrealised and should be eliminated from A Co's
profits prior to consolidation.
$ $
DEBIT A Co.'s cost of sales 5m
CREDIT Inventory 5m
To eliminate the unrealised profit in inventory.
Consolidated inventory = $54m + $42m – $5m = $91m
Consolidated reserves = ($100m – $5m) + ($50m – $40m)  100% = $105m
(b) Now suppose that B Co sold the goods to A Co rather than vice versa. This time the
consolidation adjustment is made to B Co’s books as follows:
$ $
DEBIT B Co.'s cost of sales 5m
CREDIT Inventory 5m
Consolidated reserves = $100m + ($50m – $40m – $5m)  100% = $105m
(c) Now suppose that A Co holds 80% of the shares in B Co rather than 100% of the shares and
the NCI was measured at acquisition at $12m.
This makes no difference to calculated amounts if A Co is the selling company, however it
does result in changes if B Co is the selling company.
$ $
DEBIT B Co.'s cost of sales 5m
CREDIT Inventory 5m
Consolidated reserves = $100m + ($50m – $40m – $5m)  80% = $104m
Non-controlling interest = $12m + ($50m – $40m – $5m)  20% = $13m
Group reserves are $1 less than seen previously because only 80% of the subsidiary’s
retained profit (after adjustment for the unrealised profit) is included. The remaining 20% is
allocated to the non-controlling interest.
Therefore where there is a non-controlling interest and the subsidiary is the selling company,
the NCI is allocated its share of the unrealised profit.
2.5.3 Intra-group transfers of non-current assets

It is common for group companies to transfer non-current assets from one to another depending on
where they are needed. Often the transferor makes a profit on such a transaction. As above, this
profit is unrealised until such time as the non-current asset is sold outside the group and therefore
it must be eliminated on consolidation.
Here there is also the extra complication of depreciation, which must, for the purpose of the
consolidated accounts, be based on the original cost of the asset to the group.
780
Example: Intra-group transfers of non-current assets

A Co. acquired 80% of the share capital of B Co. on 1 January 20X6. On 1 January 20X8,
A Co. sold non-current assets which were acquired on 1 January 20X7 at $80,000 to B Co. for
$90,000. Both A Co. and B Co. provide depreciation at 10% on cost per annum.
$
Original cost 80,000
Less: accumulated depreciation (8,000)
Carrying amount at date of transfer 72,000
Selling price to B Co. (90,000)
Profit recorded in A Co. books 18,000
On 31 December 20X8, the consolidation adjustment on excess depreciation charge by B Co. from
the viewpoint of the group is:
$
Accumulated depreciation provided in the books of B Co. ($90,000  10%) 9,000
Accumulated depreciation since transfer based on cost of non-current assets
(8,000)
of the group ($80,000  10%)
Excess depreciation charge 1,000
Therefore, relevant consolidation adjustments are:
$ $
DEBIT Consolidated reserves 18,000
CREDIT Consolidated non-current assets 18,000
To eliminate the unrealised profit on sale of non-current assets.
DEBIT Consolidated accumulated depreciation 1,000
CREDIT Consolidated reserves 1,000
To eliminate excess depreciation charged as a result of intra-group transfer of non-current
asset.
2.5.4 Deferred tax considerations

Intra-group have implications for deferred tax. Please look back to Section 10 of Chapter 15 for
detailed consideration of these.
3 Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other

Topic highlights
A consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is prepared by adding
across income and expenses on a line by line basis. Profit and total comprehensive income are
allocated to the non-controlling interests and owners of the group.
A consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is prepared by adding
all the individual items in the subsidiary's statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income to those in the parent company's accounts.
Similar complications as those seen in relation to the statement of financial position are relevant.
781
Financial Reporting

Where a subsidiary is partially owned, the relevant proportion of its profits and other
comprehensive income must be allocated to the non-controlling interests.
Both the profit or loss and total comprehensive income attributable to the non-controlling interests
and the owners of the parent should be shown separately at the end of the consolidated statement
of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.

Topic highlights
Intra-group income and expenditure is cancelled on consolidation. Any unrealised profits must also
be eliminated.
The effects of intra-group lending, trading and transfers of assets will all need to be eliminated from
the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
In the case of intra-group lending, interest receivable in the lender's books is cancelled against
interest payable in the borrower's books prior to consolidation.
In the case of intra-group trading, sales in one group company's books are cancelled against cost
of sales in another group company's books prior to consolidation. Where there is an unrealised
profit in inventory this must also be eliminated. We saw the elimination of an unrealised profit from
a statement of financial position perspective in section 2.5. A debit entry was made to the selling
company’s reserves and a credit entry to consolidated inventories. When dealing with the
consolidated statement of profit or loss, the debit element of this entry results in an adjustment to
cost of sales. The following example illustrates this.
Example: Intra-group trading

The following information relates to A Co. and its 70% owned subsidiary, B Co., for the year ended
31 December 20X7.
A Co. B Co.
$ $
Revenue 300 200
Gross profit 120 80
Expenses (80) (55)
Retained profit for the year 40 25
During the year 20X7, B Co. sold goods to A Co. for $40, making a profit of $10. At the year end
half of the goods remained in inventory, therefore there is an unrealised profit of $5.
Consolidation adjustments:
(i) $ $
DEBIT Revenue 40
CREDIT Cost of sales 40
To cancel intra-group sales.
(ii) $ $
DEBIT Cost of sales 5
CREDIT Inventory (SOFP) 5
782
The consolidated statement of profit or loss should be:

A Co. B Co. Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Consolidated
(i) (ii) (ii) A Co.
$ $ $ $ $
Revenue 300 200 (40) 460
Cost of sales (180) (120) 40 (5) (265)
Gross profit 120 80 195
Expenses (80) (55) (135)
Retained profit 40 25 60
Allocated to 40 25 (3.5) (7.5) 54
owners of
parent (70%)
Allocated to (1.5) 7.5 6
NCI (30%)
Notice that because B Co was the selling company, the unrealised profit is allocated between the
owners of the parent and the NCI in proportion to their ownership interests.
In the case of intra-group transfers of non-current assets, any profit or loss arising in the year must
be eliminated from the consolidated profit or loss. In addition, in the year of transfer and
subsequent years, adjustment must be made so that the depreciation charge recorded in the
consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is based on the cost of
the asset to the group. As before, adjustment is made to the selling company’s books. Where the
selling company is the subsidiary and there is a non-controlling interest, the relevant percentage of
the adjustment is allocated to the NCI.
Example: Intra-group transfer of assets
The following information relates to A Co. and its 70% owned subsidiary, B Co., for the year ended
31 December 20X7.
A Co. B Co.
$ $
Revenue 500 400
Other income 90 30
Expenses (270) (180)
Retained profit for the year 100 110
During the year, A Co. transferred an asset used for administrative purposes to B Co. making a
profit of $80. As a result of the transfer depreciation has increased by $8 per annum.
Consolidation adjustments:
(i) $ $
DEBIT Other income 80
CREDIT Non-current assets (SOFP) 80
To eliminate the unrealised profit in non-current assets.
(ii) $ $
DEBIT Non-current assets (SOFP) 8
CREDIT Operating expenses 8
To eliminate the additional depreciation charged as a result of the intra-group transfer of a non-
current asset.
783
Financial Reporting
The consolidated statement of profit or loss should be:
A Co. B Co. Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Consolidated

(i) (ii) (ii) A Co.
$ $ $ $ $
Revenue 500 400 900
Cost of sales (220) (140) (360)
Other income 90 30 (80) 40
Expenses (270) (180) 8 (442)
Retained 100 110 138
profit for the
year
Allocated to 100 110 (80) 8 (33) 105
owners of the
parent (70%)
Allocated to 33 33
the NCI
(30%)
3.3 Mid-year acquisitions

Topic highlights
Where a subsidiary is acquired mid-year, its results must be pro-rated prior to consolidation.
Where a subsidiary is acquired mid-year, care must be taken to ensure that the subsidiary's results
are included in the consolidation only from the date of acquisition. Practically, this will involve pro-
rating the subsidiary's results prior to adding across.
Example: Mid-year acquisitions

The statements of profit or loss of A Co. and B Co. for the year ended 31 December 20X7 are
given below:
A Co. B Co.
$ $
Revenue 300 200
Gross profit 120 80
Administrative and distribution expenses (40) (30)
Profit before taxation 80 50
Taxation (15) (8)
Profit after tax 65 42
A Co. acquired 70% of the ordinary share capital of B Co. on 1 April 20X7.
784
The consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X7 is:
A Co. B Co. Calculation Consolidated

A Co.
$ $ $
Revenue 300 200 $300 + ($200  9/12) 450
9
Cost of sales (180) (120) $180 + ($120  /12) (270)
Administrative and
distribution expenses (40) (30) $40 + ($30  9/12) (62.5)
Profit before taxation 80 50 117.5
Taxation (15) (8) $15 + ($8  9/12) (21)
Profit after taxation 65 42 96.5
Allocated to:
Owners of the parent (70%) 65 29.4 $65 +($29.4 x 9/12) 87.05
Non-controlling interests (30%) 12.6 ($12.6 x 9/12) 9.45
96.5
4 Recap of simple consolidation techniques

The summary given below is very brief but it encompasses all the major rules which must be
applied when preparing consolidated financial statements.
Approach to consolidated statement of financial position

1 Prepare a consolidation working schedule
2 Calculate and record in the schedule, as a consolidation adjustment, any fair value
adjustment at the acquisition date. Recognising or increasing a liability will result in a debit to
reserves; recognising or increasing an asset will result in a credit to reserves.
3 Calculate goodwill and record the ‘standing’ journal in the schedule:
DEBIT Goodwill
DEBIT Share capital
DEBIT Reserves
CREDIT Investment
CREDIT NCI
4 Calculate and record in the schedule any post-acquisition depreciation resulting from an
acquisition date fair value adjustment.
DEBIT Fair value adjustment
CREDIT Property, plant and equipment
5 Calculate and record in the schedule any unrealised profit in inventory or non-current assets:
DEBIT Cost of sales
CREDIT Inventory / Non-current asset
6 Eliminate any intra-group balances such as loans, current accounts and cash in transit.
7 Calculate the NCI share of post-acquisition profits in the subsidiary and allocate these to the
NCI.
DEBIT Attributable to non-controlling interest
CREDIT NCI
785
Financial Reporting
8 Add across the consolidation schedule.

The balances which are left should represent:
 Assets 100% P plus 100% S +/- adjustments
 Share capital: P only.
 Reserves: 100% P plus group share of post-acquisition retained reserves of S less
consolidation adjustments.
 Non-controlling interests:
Proportion of net assets method: NCI share of S's consolidated net assets
Fair value method: NCI share of S's consolidated net assets plus NCI share of goodwill
 Liabilities 100% P plus 100% S +/- adjustments
Approach to consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
1 Set up a consolidation working schedule, pro-rating the subsidiary’s results in the case of a
mid-year acquisition.
2 Eliminate intra-group sales and purchases
3 Eliminate unrealised profits in inventory
4 Eliminate any intragroup dividends received and paid
5 Allocate profits between the parent and non-controlling interest.
Note:
Pre-acquisition dividends
There are two ways to calculate the pre-acquisition element of a dividend:
 To the extent that post-acquisition profits are insufficient to cover the dividend, the
distribution must be out of pre-acquisition profits. This method is more commonly used in
practice.
 Apportion the dividend on a time basis between the pre- and post-acquisition periods,
so that only post-acquisition dividends are taken to P's reserves.
– For pre-acquisition dividends: Debit Dividend receivable/cash, Credit Cost of
investment.
– For post-acquisition dividends: Debit Dividend receivable/cash, Credit Reserves.
Now try the following questions to practise the topics listed above.
786
Bootie Co. has owned 80% of Goose Co.'s equity since its incorporation. On 31 December 20X8 it
despatched goods which cost $80,000 to Goose, at an invoiced cost of $100,000. Goose received
the goods on 2 January 20X9 and recorded the transaction then. The two companies' draft
accounts as at 31 December 20X8 are shown below:
STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS
Bootie Goose
$'000 $'000
Revenue 5,000 1,000
Cost of sales 2,900 600
Gross profit 2,100 400
Other expenses 1,700 320
Net profit 400 80
Income tax 130 25
STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
$'000 $'000
Opening balance 2,260 285
Total comprehensive income (profit) for the year 270 55
Dividends (130) (40)
Closing balance 2,400 300
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION
Bootie Goose
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and 1,920 200
equipment
Investment in Goose 80 –
2,000 200
Current assets
Inventory 500 120
Bank and cash 390 35
1,540 195
3,540 395
Equity
Share capital 2,000 100
2,400 300
Current liabilities
Dividend payable 100 40
Tax 130 25
1,140 95
3,540 395
Required
Prepare draft consolidated financial statements (ignoring tax).
787
Financial Reporting
The draft statements of financial position of Okay and its subsidiary Chestnut at 30 September
20X8 are as follows:
Okay Chestnut
$ $ $ $
Non-current assets
Tangible assets, carrying amount
Land and buildings 225,000 270,000
Plant 202,500 157,500
427,500 427,500
Investment
Shares in Chestnut at cost 562,500
Current assets
Inventory 255,000 180,000
Receivables 375,000 90,000
Bank 112,500 22,500
742,500 292,500
1,732,500 720,000
Okay Chestnut
$ $
Equity
Share capital 1,125,000 450,000
1,575,000 652,500
Current liabilities 157,500 67,500
1,732,500 720,000
The following information is also available:

(a) Okay purchased 360,000 of the 450,000 shares in Chestnut some years ago when that
company had a credit balance of $105,000 in retained earnings. The goodwill had been
impaired and was fully written off through profit or loss by 30 September 20X7.
(b) For the purpose of the acquisition, the land of Chestnut was revalued at $120,000 in excess
of its book value. This was not reflected in the accounts of Chestnut. Land is not
depreciated.
(c) At 30 September 20X8 Chestnut owed Okay $15,000 for goods purchased.
(d) The inventory of Chestnut includes goods purchased from Okay at a price which includes a
profit to Okay of $10,500.
(e) It is the group's policy to value the non-controlling interests at its proportionate share of the
fair value of the subsidiary's identifiable net assets.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position for Okay as at 30 September 20X8
(ignoring tax).
788
You are provided with the following statements of financial position for Shakier and Minoa.
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 OCTOBER 20X0
Shakier Minoa
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Non-current assets, at carrying amount
Plant 325 70
Fixtures 200 50
525 120
Investment
Shares in Minoa at cost 200
Current assets
Inventory at cost 220 70
Receivables 145 105
Bank 100 –
465 175
1,190 295
Equity
Ordinary shares 700 170
915 220
Current liabilities
Payables 275 55
Bank overdraft – 20
275 75
1,190 295
The following information is also available:
(a) Shakier purchased 70% of the issued ordinary share capital of Minoa four years ago, when
the retained earnings of Minoa were $20,000. There has been no impairment of goodwill.
(b) For the purposes of the acquisition, plant in Minoa with a book value of $50,000 was
revalued to its fair value of $60,000. The revaluation was not recorded in the accounts of
Minoa. Depreciation is charged at 20% using the straight line method.
(c) Shakier sells goods to Minoa at a mark up of 25%. At 31 October 20X0, the inventories of
Minoa included $45,000 of goods purchased from Shakier.
(d) Minoa owes Shakier $35,000 for goods purchased and Shakier owes Minoa $15,000.
(e) It is the group's policy to value the non-controlling interests at fair value.
(f) The market price of the shares of the non-controlling shareholders just before the acquisition
was $1.50.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of Shakier as at 31 October 20X0 (ignoring
tax).
789
Financial Reporting
5 Complex groups
A parent company must prepare consolidated financial statements for all subsidiaries within its
control, whether that control is direct or indirect.
So far, we have considered only direct control, for example a situation where P owns 80% of S.
This section of the chapter considers two types of complex groups in which indirect control is also
evident:
 Vertical groups
 D-shaped groups
5.1 Vertical groups

Vertical groups are those where there is a sub-subsidiary, for example:
P
90%
S1
75%
S2
Here:
 P owns 90% of S1, and therefore S1 is a subsidiary of P
 S1 owns 75% of S2 and therefore S2 is a subsidiary of S1
 As P controls S1 which in turn controls S2, S2 is within the control of P (referred to as a sub-
subsidiary)
In this case the consolidated financial statements of P should include the assets, liabilities and
results of both S1 and S2.
The consolidation is performed in the same way as the simple consolidations seen earlier in the
chapter, however the calculation of goodwill becomes more complex, and is based on:
 an effective group interest of P in S2 of 67.5% (90%  75%)
 an effective non-controlling interest in S2 of 32.5%, being
25% owned directly by other shareholders in S2
7.5% (10%  75%) owned indirectly by other shareholders in S1
5.1.1 Goodwill calculation

Goodwill in the sub-subsidiary is calculated from the perspective of the parent company, and
therefore includes only the parent's share of the cost of the investment in the sub-subsidiary and
calculations based on the effective shareholdings.
Example: NCI as proportion of net assets

Tremendous owns 80% of the shares in Fabulous, and has done for many years. On
1 January 20X1, Fabulous acquired a 70% holding in Excellent at a cost of $9 million. On that date
the fair value of the net assets of Excellent was $8 million (made up of $3m ordinary shares and
$5m retained earnings).
What goodwill arises in the Tremendous consolidated financial statements at 31 December 20X1
on the acquisition of Excellent, assuming that the non-controlling interest is measured as a
proportion of net assets of the acquiree?
790
Solution
 The group effective shareholding is 56% (80%  70%)
 Therefore the effective non-controlling interest is 44%
$'000
Cost of investment (80%  $9m) 7,200
NCI (44%  $8m) 3,520
Net assets of acquiree (8,000)
Goodwill 2,720
Note that the goodwill arising on the acquisition of Fabulous would be calculated in the normal way,
separately from the goodwill arising on the acquisition of Excellent.
Example: NCI at fair value

The facts are as for the example above, however the NCI in Excellent is now measured at fair
value based on a share price of $3.50.
Solution
$'000
Cost of investment (80%  $9m) 7,200
NCI (44%  3m  $3.50) 4,620
Goodwill 3,820
In both of these examples the sub-subsidiary is acquired after the subsidiary. It may be the case
that a vertical group develops where a parent company buys a subsidiary which itself already holds
a sub-subsidiary. In this case separate calculations are still required for the goodwill arising in both
the subsidiary and sub-subsidiary, but the acquisition date for both is the same, being the date on
which the parent company acquired the subsidiary (and so the sub-subsidiary). The date on which
the subsidiary acquired the sub-subsidiary is irrelevant.
5.1.2 Non-controlling interest and group reserves
Both non-controlling interests and group reserves are based on the respective effective
shareholdings of the non-controlling interest and group.

The facts are as in the first example above (NCI measured as a proportion of net assets), and the
retained earnings of Excellent as at 31 December 20X1 are $6.2 million.
(a) What is the non-controlling interest in respect of Excellent in both the statement of financial
position at 31 December 20X1 and statement of profit or loss then ended?
(b) What share of Excellent's retained earnings are included in the group retained earnings
balance?
791
Financial Reporting
Solution
(a) Statement of financial position $'000
Non-controlling interest at acquisition 3,520
Share of post acquisition profits 44% (6.2m – 5m) 528
Non-controlling interest 4,048
Statement of profit or loss

Non-controlling interest in profit 528
(b) Retained earnings
Share of Excellent's retained earnings 56% (6.2m – 5m) 672
Below are the statements of financial position of three companies, Alpha, Beta and Gamma as at
31 December 20X5:
Alpha Beta Gamma
$'000 $'000 $'000
Investments
300,000 shares in Beta 450
240,000 shares in Gamma 320
Current assets 890 610 670
1,340 930 670
Share capital 600 400 300

Reserves 400 300 100
1,000 700 400
1,340 930 670
1 Alpha acquired its interest in Beta on 1 January 20X2. Beta acquired its interest in Gamma
on 1 January 20X3.
2 The retained earnings of Beta and Gamma were:
1 January 20X3 1 January 20X2
$'000 $'000
Beta 100 80
Gamma 60 50
Beta has 400,000 shares in issue and Gamma has 300,000 shares in issue.
3 Alpha Group's policy is to value non-controlling interests at the date of acquisition at the
proportionate share of the fair value of the acquiree's identifiable assets acquired and
liabilities assumed. The fair values of the identifiable net assets of Beta and Gamma were
equivalent to their book values at the respective date of acquisition.
4 Beta and Gamma form separate cash generating units. An impairment review carried out at
31 December 20X5 revealed that Beta had a recoverable amount of $780,000 (including its
investment in Gamma) and that no impairment losses were required in respect of the group's
investment in Gamma.
792
Required
(a) Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of Alpha and its subsidiary
companies as at 31 December 20X5.
(b) Calculate the goodwill and consolidated reserves at 31 December 20X5 on the assumption
that Alpha acquired Beta on 1 January 20X3 and that Beta had acquired Gamma on
1 January 20X2 (ignoring impairment losses).
5.2 D-shaped groups

D-shaped groups are those where a parent company controls a subsidiary and the parent company
and subsidiary together control a further subsidiary:
P
80%
40% S1
40%
S2
Here:
 P owns 80% of S1 and therefore S1 is a subsidiary of P.
 P owns 40% of S2 directly and another 40% indirectly through S1. S2 is therefore a sub-
subsidiary of P.
As with vertical groups, an effective interest is calculated in S2 and the consolidation is based on
this percentage. In this case the relevant percentage is 72% (being a 40% direct holding and a
32% indirect holding calculated as 80%  40%). The non-controlling interest effective percentage is
therefore 28%.
5.2.1 Goodwill, non-controlling interest and retained earnings
The calculations for goodwill, the non-controlling interest and retained earnings are the same as
those seen in the case of vertical groups, with one exception. Goodwill arising in the sub-subsidiary
must include two elements to cost, being:
 the cost of the parent's direct holding
 the parent's share of the subsidiary's holding in the sub-subsidiary (i.e. the indirect holding).
Example: Goodwill
Goose acquired 90% of Duck a number of years ago. On 1 January 20X1, Duck and Goose both
acquired 30% of Gander, each paying $4 million for their 30% share. On this date the net assets of
Gander amounted to $10 million.
Required
What goodwill arises on the acquisition assuming that the non-controlling interest is measured as a
proportion of net assets?
793
Financial Reporting
Solution
 Group effective holding is 57% (30% + (90%  30%))
 Therefore the NCI share is 43%
$'000
Cost of direct holding 4,000
Cost of indirect holding ($4m  90%) 3,600
NCI (43%  $10m) 4,300
Goodwill 1,900
On 1 January 20X5 Goldman, a public limited company acquired 60% of Shapwell, a public limited
company.
On 30 July 20X3 Goldman acquired 10% of Benton, a public limited company, and on the same
day Shapwell acquired 80% of Benton.
The statements of financial position of the three companies as at 31 December 20X9 are as
follows:
Goldman Shapwell Benton
$m $m $m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 2,978 1,650 810
Investment in Shapwell 900 – –
Investment in Benton 27 240 –
3,905 1,890 810
Current assets
Inventories 400 180 270
Trade receivables 510 325 189
Cash 140 105 116
1,050 610 575
4,955 2,500 1,385
Equity
Ordinary share capital 750 320 150
Retained earnings 2,805 1,572 850
3,555 1,892 1,000
Current liabilities
Trade payables 1,400 608 385
4,955 2,500 1,385
During the year, Shapwell sold goods to Benton for $ 220m including a mark-up of 25%. Half of
these goods remain in inventories at the year-end.
The retained earnings of the three companies at the acquisition dates were:
30.7.X3 1.1.X5
$m $m
Goldman 1,610 1,860
Shapwell 700 950
Benton 40 100
The book values of the identifiable net assets at the acquisition date are equivalent to their fair
values. The fair value of Goldman's 10% holding in Benton on 1 January 20X5 was $ 50m.
794
Goldman and Shapwell hold their investments in subsidiaries at cost in their separate financial
statements. It is group policy to measure the non-controlling interests at fair value at acquisition.
The directors valued the non-controlling interests in Shapwell at $ 536m and Benton at $ 210m on
1 January 20X5.
No impairment losses have been necessary in the consolidated financial statements to date.
Required
(a) Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of Goldman group as at 31
December 20X9.
(b) Another company, Sword has an 80% holding in Dagger, which in turn has a 55% holding in
Pistol. Explain why it is important to establish the dates of acquisition of the two companies
when preparing the consolidated financial statements.
795
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
Accounting for subsidiaries – basic groups
Consolidated statement of financial Consolidated statement of profit or loss

position and other comprehensive income
Mechanics: Mechanics:
1 add assets and liabilities on a line by 1 add income and expenditure on a
line basis line by line basis (pro rate for mid-
2 eliminate P's investment in S against year acquisition)
the equity of S 2 eliminate dividend income from S in
3 recognise the non-controlling P's SOCI
interest 3 recognise the non-controlling
4 include P's share capital only interest in profits
Calculate goodwill:
FV of consideration paid X Goodwill impairment charge
NCI at acquisition X
FV of net assets of acquiree (X)
X
Recognise as an asset and test
for impairment annually.
Calculate NCI: NCI in profits:

NCI at acquisition date X Profits of subsidiary X
NCI share post acq'n reserves X Adjustments X/(X)
X X
NCI at acquisition is either: × NCI%

proportion of net assets in
subsidiary, or
fair value
Calculate group reserves:

P's reserves X
Group share of S's post acq'n
reserves X
Adjustments X/(X)
X
Adjust subsidiary's net assets at Fair value adjustments may result in

acquisition/in SOFP for fair value additional depreciation on
adjustments at acquisition consolidation
Intra-group balances are eliminated Intra-group income and expenditure is

eliminated
Unrealised profits are eliminated against Unrealised profits are eliminated against
the selling company's reserves the selling company’s profits
796
Complex groups
Vertical D-shaped
P P
80%
80%
40% S1
S1
40%
70%
S2
S2
Consolidated financial Consolidated financial

statements include assets, statements include assets,
liabilities and results of P, S1 liabilities and results of P, S1
and S2 and S2
Goodwill calculation in S1 is Goodwill calculation in S1 is
as normal as normal
Goodwill calculation in S2 Goodwill calculation in S2
based on group effective based on group effective
holding of 56%; cost = 80% of holding of 72%; cost = 80% of
the cost of S1's investment in the cost of S1's investment in
S2 S2
NCI and group reserves NCI and group reserves
calculations in respect of S2 calculations in respect of S2
are also based on group are also based on group
effective holding effective holding
797
Financial Reporting
Note: Although we have used a consolidation schedule in the chapter, these answers are prepared
in a variety of ways in order to display that there is flexibility in how you prepare a consolidation.
Answer 1
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the Bootie Group for the year ended 31 December 20X8
Bootie Goose Total (W2)(ii) (W3)(ii) (W3)(iv) Group
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Revenue 5,000 1,000 6,000 (100) 5,900
Cost of (2,900) (600) (3,500) 100 (20) (3,420)
sales
Gross 2,100 400 4,600 2,480
profit
Other (1,700) (320) (2,020) (2,020)
expenses
Net profit 400 80 480 (20) 460
Income tax (130) (25) (155) (155)
Profit for 270 55 325 (20) 305
the year
Attributable
to:
Owners of 270 55 325 (11) (20) 294
the parent
NCI 11 11
305
Consolidated statement of financial position for the Bootie Group as at 31 December 20X8
Bootie Goose Total (W1) (W2)(i) (W3)(i) (W3)(iii) (W3)(iv) (W4) Group
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Non-current
assets
PPE 1,920 200 2,120 2,120
Investment 80 - 80 (80) -
in Goose
2,000 200 2,200 2,120
Current
assets
Inventory 500 120 620 100 (20) 700
Trade 650 40 690 (100) 590
receivables
Bank and 390 35 425 425
Cash
1,540 195 1,735 1,715
3,540 395 3,935 3,835
798
Bootie Goose Total (W1) (W2)(i) (W3)(i) (W3)(iii) (W3)(iv) (W4) Group
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Equity &
liabilities
Equity
Share 2,000 100 2,100 (100) 2,000
capital
Retained 400 200 600 (40) (20) 32 572
earnings
2,400 300 2,700
Non- 20 40 60
controlling
interest
2,632
Current
liabilities
Trade 910 30 940 100 (100) 940
payables
Dividend 100 40 140 (32) 108
payable
Tax 130 25 155 155
1,140 95 1,235 1,203
3,540 395 3,935 3,835
Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the Bootie Group for the year ended 31 December
20X8
Share Retained
capital earnings NCI Group
$’000 $’000 $’000 $'000
Opening balance (W5) 2,000 416 57 2,408
Group profit for the year 294 11 294
Dividends (130) (8) (130)
Closing balance 2,000 572 60 2,572
WORKINGS
1 Elimination of investment
The cost of Bootie’s investment in Goose is eliminated against Goose’s share capital and the
NCI recognised by:
DEBIT Share capital $100,000
CREDIT NCI $20,000
CREDIT Investment in Goose $80,000
Note that since the shares in Goose were acquired on that company’s incorporation, no
goodwill arises. The NCI must be measured at the carrying amount of its shares in Goose of
$20,000 (20%  $100,000).
2 Allocation of profits of Goose
(i) Since incorporation Goose has made retained profits of $200,000. 20% of these are
allocated to the NCI by:
DEBIT Retained earnings (20%  $200,000) $40,000
CREDIT NCI $40,000
(ii) Of these retained earnings, $55,000 are made in the year. 20% of these are allocated
to the NCI by:
DEBIT Profit attributable to owners of the parent $11,000
CREDIT NCI $11,000
799
Financial Reporting
3 Intercompany sale
(i) Bootie despatched goods before the year end at an invoiced amount of $100,000; at
the year end, Goose’s books must be adjusted as though it had received and
accounted for the goods by:
DEBIT Inventory $100,000
CREDIT Trade payables $100,000
(note that purchases are usually recorded as a debit to cost of sales, however at the
period end any remaining inventory is credited out of cost of sales and debited to
inventory. The journal above achieves this outcome in a single step.)
(ii) The intercompany sales are eliminated by:
DEBIT Revenue $100,000
CREDIT Cost of sales $100,000
(iii) The intercompany balances are eliminated by:
DEBIT Trade payables $100,000
CREDIT Trade receivables $100,000
(iv) The unrealised profit of $20,000 ($100,000 – $80,000) is eliminated by:
DEBIT Cost of sales $20,000
CREDIT Inventory $20,000
As Bootie is the seller, the adjustment to profit is allocated to the owners of the parent only.
The adjustment is recognised in retained earnings in the statement of financial position.
4 Dividend
Bootie’s dividend does not require adjustment as it is payable outside the group.
Part of Goose’s dividend ($32,000 being 80% x $40,000) is payable within the group and
requires elimination. This is achieved by:
DEBIT Dividend payable $32,000
CREDIT Consolidated retained earnings $32,000
Dividends payable outside the group are therefore $138,000 ($130,000 + (20%  $40,000)).
5 Proof of brought forward amounts
Group retained earnings $’000
Retained earnings of Bootie b/f 260
80% of retained earnings of Goose b/f (80%  185) 148
408
Non-controlling interest $’000

Share capital of Goose b/f 100
Retained earnings of Goose b/f 185
285
X 20% 57
800
Answer 2
OKAY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 30 SEPTEMBER 20X8
Okay Chestnut W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 Consol’d
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Land and 225 270 120 615
buildings
Plant 202.5 157.5 360
Goodwill 22.5 (22.5) -
Inventory 255 180 (10.5) 424.5
Receivables 375 90 (15) 450
Bank 112.5 22.5 135
1,984.5
Share 1,125 450 (450) 1,125
capital
Retained 450 202.5 (105) (22.5) (15) (10.5) (19.5) 495
earnings
NCI 135 19.5 154.5
Current 157.5 67.5 (15) 210
liabilities
1,984.5
WORKINGS
360,000
1 Group structure: = 80%
450,000
2 Goodwill
$ $
Non-controlling interests (675,000  20%) 135,000
697,500
Less: net assets acquired
(675,000)
Goodwill 22,500
$ $
DEBIT Goodwill 22,500
DEBIT Reserves 105,000
DEBIT Revaluation reserve 120,000
CREDIT Investment 562,500
CREDIT NCI 135,000
To recognise the acquisition of Chestnut and resulting goodwill and NCI.
3 Goodwill impairment
Goodwill is fully impaired, therefore:
$ $
DEBIT Retained earnings 22,500
CREDIT Goodwill 22,500
To record the goodwill impairment.
801
Financial Reporting
4 Intra-group balances
Intra-group balances are eliminated by:
DEBIT Payables 15,000
CREDIT Receivables 15,000
To cancel intra-group balances.
5 Unrealised profit
6 Post-acquisition profits
$'000
Post acquisition profits (202.5 – 105) 97.5
Attributable to NCI (20%) 19.5
CREDIT NCI 19,500
To allocate the NCI share of post-acquisition profits.
Answer 3
SHAKIER
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 OCTOBER 20X0
$'000 $'000
Non-current assets
Plant (W4) 397
Fixtures (200 + 50) 250
647
Intangible asset: goodwill (W1) 77
724
Current assets
Inventory (W5) 281
Receivables (W6) 200
Bank 100
581
1,305
Share capital 700
Retained earnings (W2) 221
921
Non-controlling interests (W3) 84
1,005
Current liabilities
Payables (W7) 280
Bank overdraft 20
300
1,305
802
WORKINGS
1 Goodwill
$'000 $'000
Consideration transferred 200.0
Fair value of the non-controlling 76.5
interest (30%  170,000  $1.50)
276.5
Net assets acquired
Share capital 170
Retained earnings 20
Revaluation surplus (60 – 50) 10
(200.0)
Goodwill in parent 76.5
2 Retained earnings
$'000 $'000
Shakier 215.0
PUP (W5) 9.0
Additional depreciation on plant (8 (W4)  70%) 5.6
(14.6)
200.4
Minoa: 70%  (50 – 20) 21.0
221.4
3 Non-controlling interests
$'000 $'000
Share capital 170
Revaluation 10
Less: excess depreciation (8)
2
222
Non-controlling interest in subsidiary's identifiable net 67
assets: 30%  $222,000
Goodwill attributable to NCI (76.5 – (200  30%)) 17
4 Plant
$'000 $'000
Shakier 325
Minoa
Per question 70
Revalued (60 – 50) 10
Depreciation on revalued plant (10  20%  4) (8)
72
397
5 Inventory
$'000 $'000
Shakier 220
Minoa 70
Less: PUP (45  25/125) (9)
61
281
803
Financial Reporting
6 Receivables
$'000 $'000
Shakier 145
Less: intragroup 35
110
Minoa 105
Less: intragroup 15
90
200
7 Payables
$'000 $'000
Shakier 275
Less: intragroup 15
260
Minoa 55
Less: intragroup 35
20
280
Answer 4
(a) ALPHA GROUP CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT
31 DECEMBER 20X5
$'000
Goodwill (W2) 84
Current assets (890 + 610 + 670) 2,170
2,254
Share capital 600

Reserves (W3) 559
1,159
1,414
Current liabilities (340 + 230 + 270) 840
2,254
WORKINGS
1 Group structure
Alpha
= 75%
Beta Non-controlling interests 25%
= 80%
Gamma Group effective interest (80%  75%) 60%

... Non-controlling interests 40%
100%
804
2 Goodwill
Beta Gamma
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Consideration transferred 450 (320  240

Non-controlling interests (480  25%)/(360  40%) 120 75%) 144
Fair value of identifiable net assets at

acquisition:
Reserves at 1.12.20X2/1.12.20X3 80 60
(480) (360)
90 24
Impairment losses (see below) (30)
60 24
84
Impairment losses – Beta $'000

'Notional' goodwill (gross*) (90 
100
75 ) 120
Net assets 700
820
Recoverable amount (780)
Impairment loss (gross) 40
Impairment loss recognised (net) (40  75%) 30
* Where non-controlling interests are measured at the date of acquisition at the
proportionate share of the fair value of the acquiree's identifiable assets
acquired and liabilities assumed (i.e. not at 'full' fair value), part of the
calculation of the recoverable amount of the CGU relates to the unrecognised
non-controlling interest share of the goodwill.
For the purpose of calculating the impairment loss, the carrying amount of the
CGU is therefore notionally adjusted to include the non-controlling interests in
the goodwill by grossing it up.
The resulting impairment loss calculated is only recognised to the extent of the
parent's share.
This adjustment is not required where non-controlling interests are measured
at fair value at acquisition.
3 Consolidated reserves
Alpha Beta Gamma
$'000 $'000 $'000
Per question 400 300 100
Reserves at acquisition (W2) (80) (60)
220 40
Group share of post acquisition reserves:
Beta (220  75%) 165
Gamma (40  60%) 24
Group impairment losses to date (W2) (30)
559
805
Financial Reporting
Beta Gamma
$'000 $'000
NCI at acquisition (W2) 120 144
NCI share of post acquisition reserves:
Beta ((W3) 220  25%) 55
Gamma ((W3) 40  40%) 16
Less: NCI share of investment in Gamma (320  25%) (80)
95 160
255
(b) Alpha acquired Beta on 1 January 20X3 and Beta acquired Gamma on 1 January
20X2
Revised workings:
2 Goodwill
Beta Gamma
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Consideration transferred 450 240

Non-controlling interests (500  25%)/(360  125 144
40%)
FV of identifiable net assets at

acq'n:
Reserves at 1.12.20X3 100 60
(500) (360)
75 24
99
3 Consolidated reserves
Alpha Beta Gamma
$'000 $'000 $'000
Per question 400 300 100
Reserves at acquisition (W2) (100) (60)
200 40
Group share of post acq'n
reserves:
Beta (200  75%) 150
Gamma (40  60%) 24
574
Note. All other figures in the consolidated statement of financial position would be the
same as in part (a). The consolidated statement of financial position would appear as
follows:
806
ALPHA GROUP CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT

31 DECEMBER 20X5
$'000
Goodwill (from above) 99
Current assets (890 + 610 + 670) 2,170
2,269
Share capital 600
Reserves (from above) 574
1,174
1,429
Current liabilities (340 + 230 + 270) 840
2,269
Non-controlling interests working – same result, figures in bold have changed
Beta Gamma
$'000 $'000
NCI share of post acquisition reserves:
Beta ((W3) 200  25%) 50
Gamma ((W3) 40  40%) 16
Less: NCI share of investment in Gamma (320  25%) (80)
95 160
255
Answer 5
(a) GOLDMAN GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X9
$m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (2,978 + 1,650 + 810) 5,438
Goodwill (W2) 320
5,758
Current assets
Inventories (400 + 180 + 270 – (W5) 22) 828
Trade receivables (510 + 325 + 189) 1,024
Cash (140 + 105 + 116) 361
2,213
7,971
Ordinary share capital 750
Retained earnings (W3) 3,623
4,373
Non-controlling interests (W4) 1,205
5,578
Current liabilities
Trade payables (1,400 + 608 + 385) 2,393
7,971
807
Financial Reporting
Workings
1 Group structure
Goldman
1.1.X5 60%
30.7.X3
Shapwell 10%
30.7.X3 80%
Benton Effective interest (60% × 80%) + 10% 58%
Non-controlling interests 42%
100%
2 Goodwill (including step acquisition of Benton)

Goldman in Goldman in
Shapwell Benton
$m $m $m $m
Consideration transferred 900 144
Fair value of non-controlling interests 536 210
Fair value of 10% equity interest in Benton 50
Fair value of identifiable net assets at acq'n:

Pre-acquisition retained earnings (1.1.X5) 950 100
(1,270) (250)
166 154
320
3 Retained earnings
Goldman Shapwell Benton
$m $m $m
Per question 2,805 1,572 850
P/L gain on investment in Benton (50 – 27) 23
Less unrealised profit (W5) (22)
Retained earnings at acq'n (W2) (950) (100)
600 750
Group share of post acq'n ret'd earnings:
Shapwell (600  60%) 360
Benton (750  58%) 435
3,623
Shapwell Benton
$m $m
NCI share of post acq'n ret'd earnings:
Shapwell 600  40%) 240
Benton (750  42%) 315
Less NCI share of investment in Benton (240  40%) (96)
680 525
1,205
808
5 Unrealised profit on inventories

25
Mark-up = $ 220m  = $ 44m  ½ = $22m
125
(b) This is a vertical group. Sword controls Dagger and Dagger controls Pistol, therefore
Sword has indirect control of Pistol. This is despite the fact that Sword holds just 44%
of the shares in Pistol (80%  55%).
Pistol and Dagger are therefore both consolidated into the Sword group accounts.
It is relevant whether Sword acquired Dagger before Dagger acquired Pistol or Dagger
acquired Pistol before Sword acquired Dagger as this impacts the calculation of
retained earnings and the non-controlling interest.
If Dagger already held Pistol when it was acquired by Sword, then the acquisition date
of both companies into the group would be the date on which Sword acquired Dagger.
Therefore post acquisition earnings would be any earnings arising in either company
after this date.
If Dagger acquired Pistol subsequent to being acquired by Sword then two acquisition
dates would be relevant – the two companies joined the group on different dates.
Post acquisition earnings allocated to the group (in retained earnings) and NCI for the
subsidiary would be calculated based on the date on which Sword acquired Dagger.
Post acquisition earnings for Pistol would be based on the date on which Dagger
acquired Pistol.
809
Financial Reporting
Exam practice
Smart Computer Limited 22 minutes

On 1 October 20X9, Smart Computer Limited (SCL) acquired an 80% interest in Breakthrough Disc
Company (BDC) at a consideration of $72 million. Fair value of BDC shares at that date was $45
each.
The carrying amount of identifiable net assets of BDC reported on its statement of financial position
at the date of acquisition was $42 million. Other than the property, plant and equipment with a
carrying amount of $60 million and fair value of $76 million, there were no differences between the
carrying amount and the fair value for all other reported assets and liabilities.
An internally generated intangible asset with fair value of $8 million was identified. Both the
property, plant and equipment and the intangible asset have an estimated useful life of 10 years
from the date of acquisition.
Post-acquisition profit reported by BDC before adjustment of depreciation and amortisation
attributable to fair value up to 1 April 20Y0 was $8 million.
SCL adopts the accounting policy to measure any non-controlling interests in the acquiree at fair
value.
Required
Assuming that BDC is not subject to income tax in any jurisdiction,
(a) calculate the amount of goodwill recognised for the acquisition. (7 marks)
(b) calculate the amount of non-controlling interests in BDC as at 1 April 20Y0 to be reflected in
the consolidated statement of financial position of SCL.
(5 marks)
(Total = 12 marks)
Bailey 45 Minutes
Bailey, a public limited company, has acquired shares in two companies. The details of the
acquisitions are as follows:
Fair value Ordinary
Ordinary Reserves of net share
Date of share at assets at Cost of capital
Company acquisition capital acquisition acquisition investment acquired
$m $m $m $m $m
Hill 1 January 20X6 500 440 1,040 720 300
Campbell 1 May 20X9 240 270 510 225 72
810
The draft financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X9 are as follows:
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X9
Bailey Hill Campbell
Non-current assets $m $m $m
Property, plant and equipment 2,300 1,900 700
Investment in Hill 72720 – –
Investment in Campbell 225 – –
3,245 1,900 700
Current assets 3,115 1,790 1,050
6,360 3,690 1,750
Equity
Share capital 1,000 500 240
Reserves 3,430 1,800 330
4,430 2,300 570
Non-current liabilities 350 290 220
Current liabilities 1,580 1,100 960
6,360 3,690 1,750
STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9
Bailey Hill Campbell
$m $m $m
Revenue 5,000 4,200 2,000
Cost of sales (4,100) (3,500) (1,800)
Distribution and administrative expenses (320) (175) (40)
Dividend income from Hill and Campbell 36 - -
Profit before tax 616 525 160
Income tax expense (240) (170) (50)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 376 355 110

Gain on revaluation of property (net of deferred tax) 50 20 10
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 426 375 120
Dividends paid in the year (from post-acquisition profits) 250 50 20

The following information is relevant to the preparation of the group financial statements of the
Bailey group:
1 The fair value difference in Hill relates to property, plant and equipment being depreciated
through cost of sales over a remaining useful life of 10 years from the acquisition date.
2 During the year ended 31 December 20X9, Hill sold $200 million of goods to Bailey. Three
quarters of these goods had been sold by the year end. The profit on these goods was
40% on sales price. There were no opening inventories of intragroup goods nor any
intragroup balances at the year end.
3 It is the group's policy to value non-controlling interests at fair value at the date of acquisition.
The fair value of the non-controlling interests in Hill at 1 January 20X6 was $450 million.
4 Cumulative impairment losses on recognised goodwill in Hill at 31 December 20X9
amounted to $20 million, of which $15 million arose during the year. It is the group's policy to
recognise impairment losses on positive goodwill in administrative expenses. No impairment
losses have been necessary on the investment in Campbell.
811
Financial Reporting
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position for the Bailey group as at 31 December
20X9 and the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year
then ended.
(25 marks)
812
chapter 29
Consolidated accounts:
accounting for associates
and joint arrangements
Topic list
1 Associates
1.1 Definitions
1.2 Excluded associates
1.3 The equity method
1.4 Application of the equity method
1.5 Consolidation adjustments
1.6 Losses in an associate
1.8 Indirect investment in an associate
2 Joint arrangements
2.1 Definitions
2.2 HKFRS 11 Joint Arrangements
3 Disclosure requirements
3.1 Nature, extent and financial effects of an entity’s interests in joint arrangements and associates
Learning focus
This chapter
Type here builds on the basic principles of consolidated accounts seen in the previous
chapters. Associates and joint arrangements are common and you should know how to
account for them.
813
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Kong Reporting Standards and statutory reporting requirements
4.07 Investments in associates 3
4.07.01 Define an associate in accordance with HKAS 28 (2011)
4.07.02 Explain what significant influence is and apply the principle
4.07.03 Explain the reasons for and impact of equity accounting, including
notional purchase price allocation on initial acquisition, fair value
adjustments, upstream and downstream transactions, and uniform
accounting policies
4.07.04 Account for investors' share of losses of an associate in excess of
its investments in associates
4.07.05 Explain the impairment test and related treatments for investments
in associates
4.07.07 Prepare the disclosure in respect of associates
4.08 Interest in joint arrangements 3
4.08.01 Define joint arrangements in accordance with HKFRS 11
4.08.02 Explain the difference among jointly controlled operations and joint
ventures
4.08.03 Explain how an entity should account for a joint venture
4.08.04 Account for the transactions between a venturer and a joint venture
4.08.05 Disclose the relevant information in the venturer's financial
statements
814
29: Consolidated accounts: accounting for associates and joint arrangements | Part D Group financial statements
1 Associates
Topic highlights
An associate is an entity over which an investor has significant influence. This is assumed where at
least 20% of the voting power is held by an investor but may be achieved in other ways.
As we saw in Chapter 27, an associate is something less than a subsidiary, but more than a simple
investment. HKAS 28 (2011) provides guidance on which entities meet the definition of an
associate and how they should be accounted for within the consolidated financial statements.
HKAS 28 (2011) does not apply to investments in associates or joint ventures held by venture
capital organisations, mutual funds, unit trusts, and similar entities that are measured at fair value
in accordance with HKFRS 9.
Note that in the separate financial statements of the investor, an interest in an associate is
accounted for either:
 at cost, or
 in accordance with HKFRS 9.
HKAS 1.1 Definitions

28(2011).3
HKAS 28 (2011) provides a number of definitions:
Key terms
Associate. An entity, including an unincorporated entity such as a partnership, over which an
investor has significant influence and which is neither a subsidiary nor an interest in a joint venture.
the investee but is not control or joint control over those policies.
Equity method. A method of accounting whereby the investment is initially recorded at cost and
adjusted thereafter for the post acquisition change in the investor's share of the investee’s net
assets. The investor’s profit or loss includes its share of the profit or loss of the investee’s profit or
loss and the investor’s other comprehensive income includes its share of the investee’s other
(HKAS 28 (2011))
HKAS 28 1.1.1 Significant influence

(2011).5-6
Significant influence is defined as the 'power to participate', but not to 'control' (which would make
the investment a subsidiary).
Significant influence can be determined by the holding of voting rights (usually attached to shares)
in the entity. HKAS 28 (2011) states that if an investor holds 20% or more of the voting power of
the investee, it can be presumed that the investor has significant influence over the investee,
unless it can be clearly shown that this is not the case.
Significant influence can be presumed not to exist if the investor holds less than 20% of the voting
power of the investee, unless it can be demonstrated otherwise.
The existence of significant influence is evidenced in one or more of the following ways:
(a) Representation on the board of directors (or equivalent) of the investee
(b) Participation in the policy making process
(c) Material transactions between investor and investee
(d) Interchange of management personnel
(e) Provision of essential technical information.
815
Financial Reporting
HKAS 28
(2011).17
1.2 Excluded associates
HKAS 28 (2011) applies to all investments in associates unless the investment is classified as
'held for sale' in accordance with HKFRS 5 in which case it should be accounted for under HKFRS
5.
An investor is exempt from applying HKAS 28 (2011) accounting procedures under the following
circumstances:
(a) If it is a parent exempt from preparing consolidated financial statements under HKFRS 10.
(b) All of the following apply:
(i) The investor is a wholly-owned subsidiary or it is a partially owned subsidiary of
another entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote,
have been informed about, and do not object to, the investor not applying the equity
method.
(ii) Its securities are not publicly traded.
(iii) It is not in the process of issuing securities in public securities markets.
(iv) The ultimate or intermediate parent publishes consolidated financial statements that
comply with HKFRS.
HKAS 28 was amended in 2015 to clarify that the second exemption (exemption (b)) applies even
where the investor’s ultimate or intermediate parent is an investment entity as defined by HKFRS
10 and it measured its investments at fair value in its consolidated financial statement. Investment
entities are defined in chapter 27.
Even where an investee operates under severe long-term restrictions that significantly impair its
ability to transfer funds to the investor, the accounting requirements of HKAS 28 (2011) must be
applied. Significant influence must be lost before the equity method ceases to be applicable.
HKAS 28
(2011).10-11,
1.3 The equity method
22, 27,33 HKAS 28 (2011) requires that associates are accounted for using the equity method in
consolidated financial statements. Note that consolidated financial statements will only be
prepared where there is also at least one subsidiary.
Under the equity method:
(a) the investment in an associate is initially recognised at cost and the carrying amount is
increased or decreased to recognise the investor's share of the profit or loss of the investee
after the date of acquisition. It is decreased by any distributions received from an investee.
(b) the investor's share of the profit or loss of the investee is recognised in the investor's profit or
loss and their share of the other comprehensive income of the investee is recognised in
Therefore, the investment in associate is shown in the consolidated financial statements in just one
line in the statement of financial position and a maximum of two in the statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income. This treatment reflects the fact that the associate and its income
streams are not controlled.
The use of the equity method should be discontinued from the date that the investor ceases to
have significant influence.
When preparing the consolidated financial statements, the most recent available financial statements
of the associate should be used. Where practicable, these should be prepared to the same reporting
date as the financial statements of the investor. Where this is not practicable, the difference
between the end of the reporting period of the associate and that of the investor shall be no
more than three months, and adjustment should be made for transactions during this time.
816
Uniform accounting policies should be applied in the investor's and associate's accounts and where
this is not the case, the associate's accounts should be adjusted. This requirement does not apply
where an associate is an investment entity that measures its interests in subsidiaries at fair value.
1.4 Application of the equity method

Topic highlights
The equity method should be applied in the consolidated accounts:
 Statement of financial position: include investment in associate at cost plus (or minus) the
group's share of the associate's post-acquisition retained total comprehensive income.
 Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income: include group share of
associate's profit after tax and other comprehensive income.
The application of the equity method results in the following line items being included in the
consolidated financial statements:
 Investment in associate shown as a non-current asset
 Share of profit (loss) of associate
 Share of associate's other comprehensive income
1.4.1 Consolidated statement of financial position

The investment in associates recognised in the consolidated statement of financial position is
initially measured at cost. This amount will increase (decrease) each year by the amount of the
group's share of the associate's total comprehensive income retained for the year.
HKAS 28.27 A group’s share in an associate is the aggregate of the holdings in that associate by a parent.
Therefore if a parent has recognised a loan to the associate in its separate financial statements,
this is transferred to become part of the total investment in associates in the consolidated financial
statements.
The group share of the associate's reserves is also included within the group reserves figure in the
equity section of the consolidated statement of financial position.
Example: Associate
Panda Co. acquires 30,000 of the 120,000 ordinary shares in Aardvark for $100,000 cash on
1 January 20X1. In the year to 31 December 20X1, Aardvark earns profits after tax of $80,000,
from which it declares a dividend of $20,000. Aardvark reports no other comprehensive income.
How will Aardvark's results be accounted for in the individual and consolidated accounts of Panda
Co. for the year ended 31 December 20X1?
Solution
Individual accounts
1 record at cost on 1 January 20X1
$ $
DEBIT Investment in associate 100,000
CREDIT Cash 100,000
817
Financial Reporting
2 record dividend income

$ $
DEBIT Cash (25%  $20,000) 5,000
CREDIT Investment income from shares in associates 5,000
Unless there is an impairment the investment remains held at cost of $100,000 in Panda’s
statement of financial position permanently.
Consolidated accounts
In the consolidated accounts of Panda Co. equity accounting principles will be applied, and
therefore:
 in the consolidated statement of financial position the investment is carried at cost plus
Panda's share of Aardvark's retained profits.
 Panda's share of Aardvark's profits is included in the consolidated statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income (25%  $80,000 = $20,000).
 Panda's share of the dividend paid by Aardvark (25%  $20,000 = $5,000) is already
included in Panda's profits and therefore only $15,000 is brought in as a consolidation
adjustment by:
$ $
DEBIT Investment in associates 15,000
Investment income 5,000
CREDIT Share of profits of associates 20,000
The asset 'Investment in associates' is then stated at $115,000, being cost plus the group share of
post-acquisition retained profits.
On acquisition of the associate shareholding, although the investment is always initially carried at
cost, the consideration paid is notionally allocated to the fair value of the net assets acquired.
(a) Where the cost of the investment exceeds the fair value of net assets acquired, notional
goodwill exists within the carrying value of the investment in the statement of financial
position. This is not recognised separately as goodwill and is not amortised.
(b) Where the cost of the investment is less than the fair value of net assets acquired, the
difference is included as income in the determination of the investor's share of the
associate's profit or loss in the period in which the investment is acquired.
1.4.2 Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income
Under equity accounting, the associate's revenue, cost of sales and so on are not aggregated with
those of the group. Instead, the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income will only include the group share of the associate's profit after tax and other comprehensive
income for the year.
In effect, this is the corresponding treatment to the associate's parent company's treatment: the
investing company is the non-controlling interests here.
818
PRO-FORMA CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS (FOR ILLUSTRATION)

$'000
Revenue 2,000
Cost of sales 800
Gross profit 1,200
Distribution costs and administrative expenses 500
700
Interest and similar income receivable 50
750
Finance costs (40)
710
Share of profit (after tax) of associate 30
Profit before taxation 740
Income tax expense – parent company and subsidiaries 240
500
Set out below are the draft accounts of Parent Co. and its subsidiaries and of Associate Co..
Parent Co. acquired 20% of the equity capital of Associate Co. five years ago when the latter's
retained earnings stood at $60,000.
SUMMARISED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
Parent Co. and
subsidiaries Associate Co.
$'000 $'000
Investment in Associate at cost 80 –
Loan to Associate Co. 30 –
Loan from Parent Co. – (30)
700 220
700 220
SUMMARISED STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS
Parent Co. and
subsidiaries Associate Co.
$'000 $'000
Taxation 30 20
90 80
Required
Prepare the summarised consolidated accounts of Parent Co.
Note. Assume that there are no non-controlling interests in the subsidiary companies.
819
Financial Reporting
Peter Co. bought 30,000 ordinary shares representing 30% of the share capital on 31 December
20X6 in Agnes Co. at a cost of $60,000 when the statement of financial position of Agnes was as
follows:
AGNES CO.
DRAFT STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AT DATE OF SHARE PURCHASE
ASSETS $
Non-current assets
Goodwill 50,000
Tangible assets 200,000
250,000
Current assets 80,000
Total assets 330,000
Equity
Non-current liabilities: 7% loan notes 120,000
Total equity and liabilities 330,000
During the year to 31 December 20X7 Agnes Co. made a profit before tax of $90,000 and the
taxation charge on the year's profits was $20,000. A dividend of $30,000 was paid on 31 December
out of these profits.
The statement of financial position of Agnes Co. on 31 December 20X7 was as follows:
ASSETS $
Non-current assets
Goodwill 50,000
Tangible assets 210,000
260,000
Current assets 110,000
Total assets 370,000
Equity
Non-current liabilities: 7% loan notes 120,000
Total equity and liabilities 370,000
Calculate the amounts for the associate which would appear in the consolidated accounts of the
Peter group, in accordance with the requirements of HKAS 28 (2011).
820
1.5 Consolidation adjustments

Topic highlights
Intra-group transactions with an associate are not cancelled but the group share of any unrealised
profit is eliminated. Fair value adjustments may also be required.
An associate is not deemed to be part of the single economic entity that is the group. That is
because its assets and liabilities and therefore resulting income and expenditure are not controlled
within the group.
Since an associate is not considered to be part of the group, there is no need to eliminate intra-
group transactions.
Certain consolidation adjustments do, however, remain relevant, in particular unrealised profits,
referred to by HKAS 28 (2011) as the effect of upstream and downstream transactions, and fair
value adjustments.
HKAS 28 1.5.1 'Upstream' and 'downstream' trading transactions
(2011).28
"Upstream" transactions are sales made by an associate to the parent company or a group
subsidiary. "Downstream" transactions are sales made by the parent company or a group
subsidiary to an associate.
The group share of unrealised profits and losses resulting from 'upstream' and 'downstream'
transactions are eliminated.
Although HKAS 28 is clear as to the amount of elimination for an upstream or downstream
transaction, it does not specify how the adjustment should be made. Common entries are as
follows:
Upstream transaction (associate is the seller), where A% is the parent's holding in the associate,
and PUP is the provision for unrealised profit:
DEBIT Cost of sales of parent PUP  A%
CREDIT Group inventories PUP  A%
OR
DEBIT Share of profit of associate PUP  A%
CREDIT Group inventories PUP  A%
Downstream transaction (parent or subsidiary is the seller):
DEBIT Cost of sales of parent/subsidiary PUP  A%
CREDIT Investment in associate PUP  A%
Example: Downstream transaction

P Co., a parent with subsidiaries, holds 30% of the equity shares in A Co. During the year,
P Co. makes sales of $100,000 to A Co. at cost plus a 25% mark-up. At the year-end, A Co. has all
these goods still in inventories.
25
P Co. has made an unrealised profit of $20,000 ($100,000  /125) on its sales to the associate A.
The group's share of this is 30%, i.e. $6,000. This must be eliminated.
The double entry is:
$ $
DEBIT P: Cost of sales 6,000
CREDIT Investment in associate (A) 6,000
821
Financial Reporting
Because the sale was made to the associate, the group's share of the unsold inventories forms part
of the investment in associate at the year end. If the sale had been from the associate A to P, i.e.
an upstream transaction, the double entry would have been:
$ $
DEBIT P: Cost of sales 6,000
CREDIT P: Inventories 6,000
If preparing the consolidated statement of profit or loss, you would deduct the $6,000 from the
group share of the associate's profit.
Note. In the examples above, the debit could be to items other than cost of sales, depending on
the subject of the intra-group transaction.
HKAS 28 1.5.2 Transfers of non-current assets

(2011).28-29
Where a parent company transfers a non-current asset to an associate (a downstream transaction)
or an associate transfers a non-current asset to its parent company (an upstream transaction),
again only the group share of the unrealised profit (including any additional depreciation charge
related to the asset) is eliminated.
Where downstream transactions provide evidence of an impairment loss to an asset, such a loss is
recognised in full by the group. Where upstream transactions provide evidence of an impairment
loss to an asset, the investor recognises its share of the loss.
Example
The Cook Group has held a 40% interest in Redding Co, which gives it significant influence over
that company, for many years. On 12 October 20X4, a Cook Group company transfers a machine
used for packaging to Redding Co for its fair value of $450,000. At that date the asset had a
carrying amount of $490,000 and a remaining useful life of 10 years.
Required
What journal entries are required on consolidation in respect of this transfer?
Solution
The transfer is from a Cook Group company to Redding Co, therefore it is a downstream
transaction.
The asset has a fair value of $450,000 and the sale at this amount provides evidence of an
impairment loss of $40,000.
This loss is recognised in full by the Cook Group.
On the sale, in its individual company accounts the selling company (a member of the Cook Group)
makes the following entries:
$ $
DEBIT Sales and distribution expenses 40,000
DEBIT Cash 450,000
CREDIT Property plant and equipment 490,000
To derecognise the machine and recognise the resulting loss.
Therefore the $40,000 loss is already recognised in full in the financial statements of the Cook
Group Company. This ensures that no further adjustment is required on consolidation. (Note that
Redding Co recognises the machine at $450,000, being cost and therefore no adjustment is
required to the carrying amount of the investment in Redding).
822
1.5.3 Transfer of assets that constitute a business

HKAS
28.31A, 31B The accounting treatment described above for downstream transactions (from the parent to
associate) relates only to assets that do not constitute a business as defined by HKFRS 3 Business
Combinations (see chapter 27).
HKAS 28 was amended in 2014 to introduce a requirement that any gains or losses from
downstream transactions involving assets that do constitute a business are recognised in full in the
investor’s financial statements.
When deciding whether assets transferred constitute a business, HKAS 28 requires that assets
sold in multiple arrangements may need to be accounted for as a single transaction.
1.5.4 Fair value adjustments
HKAS 28 As we have already said, on acquisition of an associate, the cost of the investment is notionally
(2011).32
allocated to the fair value of the net assets acquired.
Where a fair value adjustment is made for the purposes of this exercise, appropriate adjustments to
the investor's share of the associate's profits or losses after acquisition are also made to account,
for example, for depreciation of the depreciable assets based on their fair values at the acquisition
date.
On 1 July 20X4 Peninsula Traders Co acquires a 40% interest in Island Imports Co for $30 million.
Peninsula Traders determines that the investment meets the definition of an associate in
accordance with HKAS 28. At the acquisition date the book value of the net assets of Island
Imports Co total $54 million. The following information is relevant:
1 Property with a book value of $10 million has a fair value of $15 million. The property has a
remaining useful life of 25 years.
2 Included in the net assets of Island Imports Co is goodwill relating to an acquisition that took
place in 20X0. The goodwill has a carrying amount of $4 million.
3 Island Imports Co has not recognised brand names with a total fair value of $5 million
because these were developed internally. They are determined to have a remaining useful
life of 5 years at the date of acquisition.
4 A supplier of Island Imports Co has brought an action against the company and is claiming
damages of $1 million. Island Imports Co has not recognised a liability on account of its legal
team advising that the probability of having to pay this amount is just 30%. The fair value of
the contingent liability is $700,000. This is unchanged at 31 December 20X4.
5 Island Imports Co reports profits of $8 million and no other comprehensive income in the
year ended 31 December 20X4. This accrues evenly throughout the year.
6 Island Imports pays no dividends in the year ended 31 December 20X4.
Required
(a) State the journal entries required in respect of the acquisition of Island Imports Co in
Peninsula Trader’s individual accounts in the year ended 31 December 20X4
(b) Show the notional allocation of the purchase consideration to the net assets of Island
Imports at 1 July 20X4.
(c) State the journal entries required on consolidation in the year ended 31 December 20X4 in
respect of Island Imports Co.
(d) Prepare extracts from the consolidated statement of financial position and statement of profit
or loss in respect of the investment in Island Imports Co.
823
Financial Reporting
HKAS 28
1.6 Losses in an associate
(2011).38-39
Where an investor is loss making and the parent company's share of losses equals or exceeds its
interest in the associate, the parent must discontinue recognising its share of further losses.
For this purpose the investment in the associate includes:
 initial cost
 the group share of the associate's post-acquisition retained total comprehensive income
 other long term interests such as long-term loans or preference shares.
After the interest in the associate is reduced to zero, additional losses are provided for and a
liability recognised to the extent that the investor has incurred legal or constructive obligations or
made payments on behalf of the associate.
Should the associate return to profit, the parent may resume recognising its share of profits only
after they equal the share of losses not recognised.
Example: Carrying amount

The Letters Group has a 40% associate investment in Alpha Co which cost $500,000 on 1 January
20X2, including a premium representing notional goodwill. The results of Alpha Co. in recent years
have been as follows:
Year ended 31 December Retained total comprehensive income
$
20X2 100,000
20X3 (1,000,000)
20X4 (500,000)
20X5 100,000
20X6 500,000
What is the carrying amount of the investment in Alpha Co. in each of these years in the
consolidated financial statements of the Letters Group?
Solution
31 December 20X2 $500,000 + (40%  $100,000) $540,000
31 December 20X3 $540,000 + (40%  ($1m)) $140,000
31 December 20X4 $140,000 + (40%  ($500,000)) Nil
($60,000 losses unrecognised)
31 December 20X5 –$60,000 + (40%  $100,000) Nil
($20,000 losses unrecognised and
unrecovered)
31 December 20X6 –$20,000 + (40%  $500,000) $180,000

HKAS 39 sets out a list of indications that a financial asset (including an associate) may have
become impaired (see Chapter 18). Any impairment loss is recognised in accordance with HKAS
36 Impairment of Assets for each associate individually.
An investment in an associate is treated as a single asset for the purposes of impairment testing
and therefore an impairment loss is not allocated to any asset, including goodwill, that forms part of
the carrying amount of the investment in associate. Accordingly, impairment charged is capable of
being reversed in full
Example – impairment of an associate
On 1 January 20X8, Carroll Lynch Group (CLG) acquired 30% of the ordinary shares in Riordan
Co, gaining significant influence. The investment cost $30m, which was paid in cash. Riordan Co
824
incurred a loss of $10million for the year ended 31 December 20X8 and did not declare a dividend.
At 31 December 20X8 the fair value of CLG’s investment in Riordan Co is $27.5 million and
estimated costs to sell the investment are $1.0 million.
Required
Determine amounts to be recognised in the consolidated financial statements of CLG in the year
ended 31 December 20X8 in respect of the investment in Riordan.
Solution
On 1 January 20X8 the investment in Riordan is initially measured in the separate financial
statements of the investor at cost of $30 million by:
DEBIT Investment in Riordan $30m
CREDIT Cash/bank $30m
To recognise the investment in Riordan.
On consolidation at 31 December 20X8, the investment is transferred to be an investment in an
associate by:
DEBIT Investment in associate $30m
CREDIT Investment in Riordan $30m
To transfer the investment to investments in associates.
CLG recognises its $3m (30% x $10m) share of Riordan’s losses for the year by:
DEBIT Share of loss of associate (CSPL) $3m
CREDIT Investment in associate $3m
To recognise the group share of Riordan’s loss.
The carrying amount of the investment in associate is $27m and the recoverable amount is $26.5m
($27.5m - $1.0m). Therefore an impairment loss of $500,000 is recognised by:
DEBIT Impairment loss (CSPL) $500,000
CREDIT Investment in associate $500,000
To recognise the impairment loss in respect of the associate.
In the consolidated financial statements of CLG for the year ended 31 December 20X8, the
following amounts are recognised:
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION $ ‘000
Investment in associate 26,500
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS $ ‘000

Share of loss of associate 3,000
Impairment loss 500
1.8 Indirect investment in an associate

Where the investment in an associate is held by a subsidiary in which there is a non-controlling
interest, the non-controlling interests shown in the consolidated financial statements of the group
should include the non-controlling interests of the subsidiary's interest in the results and net
assets of the associated company.
This means that the group accounts must include the 'gross' share of net assets and total
comprehensive income in accounting for the non-controlling interests separately. For example,
we will suppose that P Co. owns 80% of S Co. which owns 25% of A Co., an associate of P Co..
The relevant amounts for inclusion in the consolidated financial statements would be as follows:
825
Financial Reporting
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS

Operating profit (P 100% + S 100%)
Share of profit after tax of associate (A 25%)
Tax (P 100% + S 100%)
Non-controlling interests (S 20% + A 5%*)
Retained profits (P 100% + S 80% + A 20%)
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
Investment in associated company (figures based on 25% holding)
((20%  shareholders' funds of S) + (5%*  post-acquisition retained earnings of A))
Group retained earnings ((100%  P) + (80%  post-acquisition of S) + (20%  post-acquisition
of A))
* 20%  25% = 5%
2 Joint arrangements
Topic highlights
A joint venture is a contractual arrangement where two or more parties jointly control an economic
activity.
When two or more entities wish to enter into a business arrangement together, however do not
want to create a formal long-term partnership, it is common to form a joint venture. This type of
business vehicle generally exists to fulfil short term projects, such as the construction of a building
or structure. When the project is complete, the joint venture ceases to exist.
There are different forms of joint venture, as we shall see, but essentially, entities which form the
joint venture (venturers) contribute assets, expertise and in some cases equity to the venture. In
return they are entitled to a share of the profits of the joint venture.
HKFRS 11 Joint Arrangements was issued in June 2011 and replaced HKAS 31 Interests in Joint
Ventures. HKFRS 11 considers the different forms of joint venture which may be undertaken and
how each form should be accounted for.
This section of the chapter considers definitions in relation to joint arrangements and then explains
the requirements of HKFRS 11.
HKFRS 11,
Appendix A
2.1 Definitions
Before thinking about the different types of joint venture and how they are accounted for, we must
consider the definitions provided by HKFRS 11.
Key terms
Joint control. The contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement, which exists only
when decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing
control.
arrangement have rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities relating to the arrangement.
have rights to the net assets of the arrangement.
(HKFRS 11)
826
HKFRS 11.7- 2.1.1 Joint control

13
The definition above specifically refers to a contractually agreed sharing of control and states that
this exists only when decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the
parties sharing control. Where there is no contractual arrangement to establish joint control, or
where there is a contractual arrangement but unanimous consent is not required to make
decisions, then there is no joint control.
HKFRS 11 makes additional points about joint control:
 No single party controls the arrangement on its own.
 A party with joint control of an arrangement can prevent any of the other parties from
controlling the arrangement.
 An arrangement can be a joint arrangement even if not all parties have joint control; some
parties to a joint arrangement may participate but not have joint control.
 Judgment should be applied when assessing whether a party has joint control of an
arrangement.
Example: Joint control

Three parties establish an arrangement. Abacus has 50% of the voting rights in the arrangement,
Bacchus has 30% and Cornelius has 20%. The contractual arrangement between the parties
specifies that at least 75% of votes are required to make decisions about relevant activities of the
arrangement.
In this case, Abacus can block a decision, however does not control the arrangement alone as it
needs the agreement of Bacchus. Therefore, Abacus and Bacchus have joint control of the
arrangement as decisions about relevant activities cannot be made without their unanimous
consent. Cornelius is a participating party to the arrangement, however does not have joint control.
Contractual arrangement
HKFRS 11, HKFRS 11 states that the contractual arrangement may be evidenced in a number of ways
B2, B4 including:
 a written contract between the controlling parties
 minutes of discussions between controlling parties
 incorporation of the arrangement in the articles or by-laws of the joint arrangement.
The contractual arrangement will deal with issues such as:
(a) the purpose, activity and duration of the joint venture
(b) the appointment of the board of directors and voting rights of the controlling parties
(c) capital contributions by the controlling parties
(d) the sharing by the controlling parties of the output, income, expenses or results of the joint
venture.
One party may be identified in the contractual arrangement as the operator or manager of the joint
venture. This does not indicate that that party controls the joint arrangement, simply that they are
acting within the financial and operating policies agreed by the controlling parties in accordance
with the contractual arrangement.
If it is evident that the operator does have control of the activity then the arrangement is a
subsidiary of the operator rather than a joint operation or venture.
Unanimous consent
HKFRS 11. Joint control exists only when decisions about the relevant activities of a joint arrangement require
B5-B9 the unanimous consent of the parties that collectively control the arrangement.
827
Financial Reporting
In some cases unanimous consent is implicit. In the example above, a 75% majority is required to
make decisions. Therefore Abacus and Bacchus have implicit joint control because a 75% majority
cannot be achieved without their unanimous consent.
In other situations, the required threshold to make decisions about relevant activities can be met by
more than one combination of parties agreeing together. In this case unanimous consent only
exists if the contractual arrangement specifies which parties must agree unanimously to decisions
about the relevant activities of the arrangement.
Example – unanimous consent
Three parties establish an arrangement: Austen has 50% of the voting rights, Bronte and Christie
both have 25%. The contractual agreement between the parties specifies that at least 75% of
voting rights are required to make decisions about the relevant activities of the arrangement.
In this situation, either Austen and Bronte or Austen and Christie can agree to reach 75% of voting
rights. Therefore, unanimous consent only exists if the contractual agreement between the parties
stipulates which two parties must agree unanimously to decisions about the relevant activities of
the management. If the contractual agreement does not stipulate which parties must agree, there is
no unanimous consent and this is not a joint arrangement within the scope of HKFRS 11.
2.2 HKFRS 11 Joint Arrangements

Topic highlights
Joint arrangements are classified as either joint operations or joint ventures.
HKFRS 11 classes joint arrangements as either joint operations or joint ventures. The classification
of a joint arrangement as a joint operation or a joint venture depends upon the rights and
obligations of the parties to the arrangement.
A joint operation is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control (the joint
operators) have rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, of that joint arrangement. A
joint arrangement that is not structured through a separate entity is always a joint operation.
A joint venture is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control (the joint
venturers) of the arrangement have rights to the net assets of the arrangement.
A joint arrangement that is structured through a separate entity may be either a joint operation or a
joint venture. In order to ascertain the classification, the parties to the arrangement should assess
the terms of the contractual arrangement together with any other facts or circumstances to assess
whether they have:
 rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, in relation to the arrangement
(indicating a joint operation)
 rights to the net assets of the arrangement (indicating a joint venture).
Detailed guidance is provided in the appendices to HKFRS 11 in order to help this assessment,
giving consideration to, for example, the wording contained within contractual arrangements.
Can you think of any examples of situations where the following may occur?
(a) Joint operation not structured through a separate entity.
(b) Joint venture structured through a separate entity.
828
HKFRS 2.2.1 Accounting for joint operations

11.20, 26
HKFRS 11 requires that a joint operator recognises line-by-line the following in relation to its
interest in a joint operation:
(a) Its assets, including its share of any jointly held assets
(b) Its liabilities, including its share of any jointly incurred liabilities
(c) Its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint operation
(d) Its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation, and
(e) Its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly.
This treatment is applicable in both the separate and consolidated financial statements of the joint
operator.
HKFRS 11 was amended in 2014 to address the issue of how to account for the acquisition of a
HKFRS joint operation. Guidance on this issue was not previously included in HKFRS 11 and as a result
11.21A,
B33A-D
divergence in practice has emerged:
 some entities have applied the principles of HKFRS 3 Business Combinations and allocated
consideration to the fair value of assets and liabilities acquired, recognising any excess as
goodwill;
 other entities have allocated consideration to assets and liabilities on the basis of their
relative fair values, and so not recognised goodwill.
The amendment therefore clarifies that the principles of HKFRS 3 must be applied on the
acquisition of an interest in a joint operation where that joint operation constitutes a business as
defined by HKFRS 3 (see chapter 27).
Therefore on the acquisition of a joint operation meeting the definition of a business, the joint
operator must:
(a) measure the identifiable assets and liabilities at fair value (or in accordance with HKFRS 3);
(b) recognise acquisition costs in accordance with HKFRS 3;
(c) recognise goodwill for the excess consideration given;
(d) perform an impairment test for the cash-generating unit to which goodwill is allocated
annually.
The amendments are effective from 1 January 2016.
HKFRS 2.2.2 Accounting for joint ventures

11.24, 26
In its consolidated financial statements, HKFRS 11 requires that a joint venturer recognises its
interest in a joint venture as an investment and accounts for that investment using the equity
method in accordance with HKAS 28 (2011) Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures unless
the entity is exempted from applying the equity method (see section 1.2 which is also applicable to
joint ventures).
In its separate financial statements, a joint venturer should account for its interest in a joint venture
in accordance with HKAS 27 (2011) Separate Financial Statements (see Chapter 27 section 2.3.6).
2.2.3 Application of HKAS 28 (2011) to joint ventures
The consolidated statement of financial position is prepared by:
 including the interest in the joint venture at cost plus share of post-acquisition total
 including the group share of the post-acquisition total comprehensive income in group reserves
The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income will include:
 the group share of the joint venture's profit or loss
 the group share of the joint venture's other comprehensive income.
829
Financial Reporting
The use of the equity method should be discontinued from the date on which the joint venturer
ceases to have joint control over, or have significant influence on, a joint venture.
HKAS 28 2.2.4 Transactions between a joint venturer and a joint venture

(2011), 28-29
Upstream transactions
A joint venturer may sell or contribute assets to a joint venture so making a profit or loss. Any
such gain or loss should, however, only be recognised to the extent that it reflects the substance of
the transaction.
Therefore:
 Only the gain attributable to the interest of the other joint venturers should be recognised in
 The full amount of any loss should be recognised when the transaction shows evidence that
the net realisable value of current assets is less than cost, or that there is an impairment
loss.
Downstream transactions
When a joint venturer purchases assets from a joint venture, the joint venturer should not recognise
its share of the profit made by the joint venture on the transaction in question until it resells the
assets to an independent third party, i.e. until the profit is realised.
Losses should be treated in the same way, except losses should be recognised immediately if they
represent a reduction in the net realisable value of current assets, or a permanent decline in the
carrying amount of non-current assets.
AB Co. contributes inventories to a 50:50 joint venture it has undertaken with CD Co.. The
historical cost of the inventories is recorded in AB Co.'s books of account at $1m.
What gain or loss should AB Co. recognise in its financial statements when the fair value (net
realisable value) of the inventories is estimated at the date of transfer and recorded by the joint
venture as:
(a) $1.2 million?
(b) $0.8 million?
3 Disclosure requirements
An entity should disclose information about significant judgments and assumptions made in
determining:
 that it has joint control of an arrangement or significant influence over another entity, and
 the type of joint arrangement (joint operation or joint venture) when the arrangement is
structured through a separate vehicle.
It should also disclose information to allow users of the financial statements to evaluate:
 the nature, extent and financial effects of its interests in joint arrangements and associates,
including the nature and effects of its contractual relationship with other investors.
 the nature of, and changes in, risks associated with interests in joint ventures and
associates.
830
3.1 Nature, extent and financial effects of an entity's interests in

joint arrangements and associates
For each joint arrangement and associate that is material to the reporting entity the following
should be disclosed:
(a) The name of the joint arrangement or associate.
(b) The nature of the entity's relationship with the joint arrangement or associate.
(c) The principal place of business/country of incorporation of the joint arrangement or
associate.
(d) The proportion of ownership interest held by the entity/proportion of voting rights held.
For each joint venture and associate that is material to the reporting entity the following should be
disclosed:
(a) Risks associated with an entity's interests in joint ventures and associates.
(b) Whether the investment in the joint venture or associate is measured using equity method or
fair value.
An entity should disclose:
(a) commitments that it has relating to its joint ventures separately from the amount of other
commitments
(b) contingent liabilities incurred relating to its interests in joint ventures or associates,
separately from the amount of other contingent liabilities.
Illustration
The following illustration relates to associates; disclosure in respect of joint arrangements would
take the same form.
Associates
The Group has two associates that are material to the Group, both of which are equity accounted.
Copper Steel
Nature of relationship with Strategic retailer providing Supplier of raw materials to the
the Group access to new customers in Group
Asia
Principal place of business / Hong Kong PRC
country of incorporation
Ownership interest / voting 40% 35%
rights held
Fair value of ownership $40,650,000 N/A
interest (if listed)
It is 1 December 20X9.
Aardvark Co., a company with subsidiaries, entered into an agreement with Bilton Co., a public
limited company, on 1 December 20X8. For an investment of $50 million, each of the companies
holds one half of the equity in an entity, Dante Co., a public limited company, which operates
offshore oil rigs. The contractual arrangement between Aardvark Co. and Bilton Co. establishes
joint control of the activities that are conducted in Dante Co.. The main feature of Dante Co.’s legal
831
Financial Reporting
form is that Dante Co., not Aardvark Co. or Bilton Co., has rights to the assets, and obligations for
the liabilities, relating to the arrangement.
The terms of the contractual arrangement are such that:
(a) Dante Co. owns the oil rigs. The contractual arrangement does not specify that Aardvark Co.
or Bilton Co. have rights to the oil rigs.
(b) Aardvark Co. and Bilton Co. are not liable in respect of the debts, liabilities or obligations of
Dante Co.. If Dante Co. is unable to pay any of its debts or other liabilities or to discharge its
obligations to third parties, the liability of each party to any third party will be limited to the
unpaid amount of that party’s capital contribution.
(c) Aardvark Co. and Bilton Co. have the right to sell or pledge their interests in Dante Co..
(d) Each party receives a share of the income from operating the oil rig in accordance with its
interest in Dante Co..
Dante Co. made an after-tax profit of $5,600,000 in the period ended 30 November 20X9. There
are no impairments during the year.
During the same year, Aardvark Co. joined with Fennel Co. to set up Karling Co., a foreign
incorporated entity, to mine for petroleum in Northern Asia. Aardvark Co and Fennel Co. each
have a 50% stake and joint control in Karling Co. Aardvark Co. and Fennel Co each transferred a
number of their own assets to Karling Co. on incorporation. A contractual arrangement is signed
by both Aardvark Co. and Fennel Co. such that their own assets would revert to them on the
liquidation of Karling Co.. The agreement also clarifies that each party would be individually liable
for the liabilities of Karling Co. in proportion to their respective shareholdings on the liquidation of
the company.
Aardvark Co. also owns a 10% interest in a pipeline, which is used to transport the oil from the
offshore oil rigs to a refinery on the land. Aardvark Co. has joint control over the pipeline and has to
pay its share of the maintenance costs. Aardvark Co. has the right to use 10% of the capacity of
the pipeline.
Required
(i) Discuss how the above arrangements would be accounted for in Aardvark Co.’s financial
statements for the year ended 30 November 20X9. (8 marks)
(ii) Based on the information above, state the amounts which should be shown in Aardvark
Co.’s consolidated statement of financial position and consolidated statement of profit or loss
for the year ended 30 November 20X9 in respect of Dante Co..
832
Topic recap
Associates HKFRS 11 JOINT Arrangements
An entity over which an investor has An arrangement of which at least 2 parties

significant influence which is neither a have joint control, i.e.:
subsidiary nor an interest in a joint There is a contractual agreement to
venture. share control, and
Decisions about relevant activities
require the unanimous consent of the
parties sharing control.
Significant influence:
Power to participate but not control
Presumed where investor holds ≥ 20%
voting shares Joint Venture Joint Operation
Evidenced by: A joint arrangement A joint arrangement
- Board representation where the parties that where parties that
- Participation in the policy making have joint control of have joint control
process the arrangement have rights to the
- Material transactions between have rights to the net assets and
investor and investee assets of the obligations for the
- Interchange of management arrangement. liabilities relating to
personnel the arrangement.
- Provision of essential technical
information Includes all joint
arrangements not
structured through a
separate entity.
Apply the Equity method

Recognise line by
line the investor's
share of:
Assets
CSOFP: investment recognised at cost + Liabilities
the investor's share of post-acquisition total Revenue
comprehensive income – impairment Expenses
losses. In separate and
consolidated
CSPLOCI: Investor's share of profit or loss financial statements.
and other comprehensive income Apply HKFRS 3 on
recognised. acquisition if the JO
constitutes a
Intra-group transactions are not business
cancelled
Fair value adjustments may be required
Gains and losses resulting from
“upstream” and “downstream”
transactions are recognised only to the
extent of unrelated investors' interests
in the associate or joint venture
Gains or losses on a downstream
transfer of assets that constitute a
business are recognised in full
When downstream transactions provide
evidence of a reduction in the net
realisable value of assets/an
impairment loss, losses shall be
recognised in full by the investor.
Disclosures:
How joint control or significant influence over another entity has been determined
How the type of joint arrangement is determined when the arrangement is structured through a
separate vehicle
The nature, extent and financial effects of interests in joint arrangements and associates
The nature of, and changes in, risks associated with interests in joint ventures and associates.
833
Financial Reporting
Answer 1
PARENT CO.
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE
INCOME
$'000
Net profit 120
Share of profits of associate (20%  80) 16
Income tax expense 30
Profit attributable to the owners of Parent Co. 106
PARENT CO.
Parent and Adjustment 1 Adjustment 2 Group

subsidiaries
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Property, plant 400 400
and equipment
Interest in 80 30 12 122
associate
Loan to associate 30 (30) -
712
Retained 500 12 512
earnings
712
1 Loan to associate
DEBIT Interest in associate 30
CREDIT Loan to associate 30
To transfer the loan to become part of the investment in associate
2 Post acquisition retained earnings
DEBIT Interest in associate 20%  (120-60) 12
CREDIT Retained earnings 12
834
Answer 2
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS
$
Group share of associate's profit after tax 30%  (90,000 – 20,000) 21,000
$
Interest in associate 72,000
The asset 'interest in associate' comprises:
Cost 60,000
Share of post-acquisition retained earnings 30%  (150,000 – 110,000) 12,000
72,000
Answer 3
(a) Peninsula Trader Co’s individual accounts:
1 July 20X4
$ $
DEBIT Financial asset investment 30,000,000
CREDIT Cash 30,000,000
To recognise the acquisition of an investment in Island Imports Co.
(b)
Book value at 1 July 20X4 Fair value at 1 July 20X4
($) ($)
Property, plant and 10,000,000 15,000,000
equipment
Goodwill 4,000,000 -
Intangible assets - 5,000,000
Contingent liability - (700,000)
Other net assets 40,000,000 40,000,000
Total 54,000,000 59,300,000
40% interest 23,720,000
Cost of investment 30,000,000
Notional goodwill 6,280,000
Note: goodwill is not an identifiable asset and so is excluded from the fair value statement of
financial position.
(c) Journal entries on consolidation at 31 December 20X4
1. $ $
DEBIT Investment in associate 30,000,000
CREDIT Financial asset investment 30,000,000
To transfer the investment in Island Imports Co to be recognised as an associate.
2. $ $
DEBIT Investment in associate (W) 1,600,000
CREDIT Share of profits of associate (CSPLOCI) 1,600,000
To recognise the group share of the associate’s profits since acquisition.
(W) $8,000,000  6/12m  40% = $1,600,000
835
Financial Reporting
3. $ $
DEBIT Share of profits of associate (W) 40,000
CREDIT Investment in associate 40,000
To recognise additional depreciation on the fair value adjustment
(W) $5 million /25 years = $200,000 additional depreciation per annum
For the post acquisition period: $200,000  6/12m = $100,000
Group share: $100,000  40% = $40,000
4. $ $
DEBIT Share of profits of associate (W) 200,000
CREDIT Investment in associate 200,000
To recognise additional depreciation on the fair value adjustment
(W) $5 million /5 years = $1,000,000 amortisation per annum
For the post acquisition period: $1,000,000  6/12m = $500,000
Group share: $500,000  40% = $200,000
(d) Consolidated statement of financial position at 31 December 20X4
$ ‘000
Investment in associate (30,000 + 1,600 – 40 – 200) 31,360
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X4
$ ‘000
Share of profits of associate (1,600 – 40 – 200) 1,360
Answer 4
(a) An example of a joint operation may involve building an aircraft. Say that Boeing is to build
the body of the aircraft and the engines are to be built by Rolls Royce as specified by the
airline customer for the aircraft. You can see that different parts of the manufacturing
process are carried out by each of the joint operators. In the Rolls Royce factory, workers
will work on the engines for the Boeing plane alongside others working on engines for
different aircraft.
Each operator, Boeing and Rolls Royce, bears its own costs and takes a share of revenue
from the aircraft sale. That share is decided in the contractual arrangement between the
venturers.
Other examples may arise in the oil, gas and mineral extraction industries. In such
industries companies may, say, jointly control and operate an oil or gas pipeline. Each
company transports its own products down the pipeline and pays an agreed proportion of
the expenses of operating the pipeline (perhaps based on volume).
A further example is a property which is jointly controlled, each operator taking a share of
the rental income and bearing a portion of the expense.
In each case, the key issue is that the joint controller is entitled to a share of assets and
liabilities of the joint arrangement, rather than a share of net assets.
(b) A common situation is where two or more entities transfer the relevant assets and liabilities
to a joint venture in order to combine their activities in a particular line of business.
In other situations, an entity wishing to start operations in a foreign country will set up a joint
venture with the government of the foreign country (or an agency of it).
836
Answer 5
(a) AB Co. has made a profit of $0.2 million, but only 50% of this can be considered as realised,
ie that part attributable to the other venturer. AB Co. should therefore recognise a gain of
$0.1 million.
(b) A loss of $0.2 million has been made on the inventories, the entire amount of which should
be recognised by AB Co.. It is known that the loss will be made, even though the inventories
have not yet been sold, and the standard requires that the full loss should be recognised
immediately when they represent a reduction in the net realisable value.
Answer 6
Dante Co
Dante Co. is a joint arrangement between Aardvark Co. and Bass Co.. To determine how Dante
Co. should be accounted for in Aardvark Co.’s financial statements, it is necessary to consider
whether Dante Co. is a joint venture or a joint operation, according to HKFRS 11 Joint
Arrangements.
A joint arrangement is an arrangement, as here, of which two or more parties have joint control. A
joint venture is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have control of the arrangement have
rights to the net assets of the arrangement. A joint operation is a joint arrangement whereby the
parties that have control of the arrangement have rights to the assets, and obligations for the
liabilities, relating to the arrangement. Where a joint arrangement is not structured through a
separate entity, it is always a joint operation.
Dante Co. is a separate entity. As such, it could be either a joint operation or joint venture, so other
facts must be considered.
There are no facts that suggest that Aardvark Co. or Bass Co. have rights to substantially all the
benefits of the assets of Dante Co. nor an obligation for its liabilities.
Each party’s liability is limited to any unpaid capital contribution.
As a result, each party has an interest in the net assets of Dante Co. and should account for it as a
joint venture using the equity method as required by HKAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint
Ventures.
This requires the investment in the joint venture to be recognised in the statement of financial
position at cost plus or minus the investor’s share of the total comprehensive income of the joint
venture after acquisition minus any distributions received by the investor and minus any impairment
losses.
In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the investor’s share of the joint
venture’s profit after tax and other comprehensive income is recognised.
Karling Co
As this joint arrangement is structured as a separate entity, Karling Co. could be either a joint
operation or joint venture. The terms of the contractual arrangement must be considered to
determine which form of joint arrangement it is. As the contractual arrangement gives Aardvark
Co. and Fennel Co. rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities of Karling Co., this is a joint
operation.
Pipeline
Although Aardvark Co.’s interest in the pipeline is only 10%, it has joint control over the pipeline.
Therefore it is appropriate to account for the pipeline as a joint arrangement under HKFRS 11.
The pipeline is a jointly controlled asset, and it is not structured through a separate vehicle.
Accordingly, the arrangement is a joint operation.
837
Financial Reporting
Both Karling Co. and the Pipeline are accounted for as a joint operation. HKFRS 11 Joint
Arrangements requires that a joint operator recognises line-by-line the following in relation to its
interest in a joint operation:
(i) Its assets, including its share of any jointly held assets
(ii) Its liabilities, including its share of any jointly incurred liabilities
(iii) Its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint operation
(iv) Its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation, and
(v) Its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly.
This treatment is applicable in both the separate and consolidated financial statements of the joint
operator.
In the consolidated financial statements of Aardvark Co., equity accounting principles will be used
to account for the investment in Dante Co..
In the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the profit for the
year will include the $ 2,800,000 group share of Dante Co’s profit after tax (50%  $5,600,000).
The investment in Dante Co. is shown as ‘investment in joint ventures’ in the consolidated
statement of financial position. The initial investment will be recorded at cost as follows (assuming,
for simplicity, that the consideration is paid in cash):
DEBIT Investment in joint ventures $50,000,000
At the end of the year, the carrying amount of the investment is adjusted for the amount of the
group's share of the joint venture's total comprehensive income retained for the year.
DEBIT Investment in joint ventures $2,800,000
CREDIT Income from shares in joint ventures $2,800,000
The investment in joint ventures is then stated at $52,800,000, being cost plus the group share of
post-acquisition retained total comprehensive income.
838
Exam practice
Asia Polyethylene 90 Minutes

Assume that you are Miss Charmaine Yuen, the accounting manager of Asia Polyethylene Limited
(APE), which is a company incorporated in Hong Kong. APE and its subsidiaries (APE Group) are
principally engaged in the production and distribution of high density polyethylene (HDPE) which is
widely used for the production of plastic bags, bottle caps and fluid containers in Hong Kong. Now,
APE intends to expand its business for the production and distribution of HDPE worldwide.
Brazil Polyethylene (BPE) and Curitiba Polyethylene (CPE)
On 1 April 20X2, APE, BPE and CPE (the parties), which are not related companies, signed an
agreement in which they have agreed the terms according to which they will conduct the
manufacturing and distribution of HDPE worldwide. The parties have agreed to conduct
manufacturing and distribution activities according to the details described below:
Diadema Polyethylene (DPE)
The parties have agreed to undertake the manufacturing and distribution activity by establishing a
new incorporated entity, DPE, in which APE has a 60% ownership interest and hence 60% voting
rights, BPE has 20% and CPE has 20%. The contractual agreement specifies that at least 90% of
the voting rights are required to make decisions about activities that significantly affect the returns
of DPE. In accordance with the agreement, DPE would manufacture and distribute the HDPE in
various overseas countries according to the needs of the various markets where DPE sells the
product. The contractual arrangement among APE, BPE and CPE did not specify that the parties
have rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, relating to DPE.
Embu Polyethylene (EPE) and Fatima Polyethylene (FPE)
APE acquired 80% of the shares of EPE for $26.55 million on 1 April 20W9. At the acquisition
date, EPE’s reported retained earnings were $12.25 million. The excess of APE’s acquisition cost
over its share of EPE’s book value was assigned to plant and equipment that had a fair value of
$2.5 million greater than book value and a remaining life of five years at the acquisition date, and
the balance to goodwill. Non-controlling interests are to be measured at their fair value at the
acquisition date, i.e. $6 million. The investment in EPE is carried at cost. There has been no
change in the share capital of EPE since the date of acquisition.
On 1 April 20X1, APE acquired 30% of the ordinary shares in FPE for $7.45 million. FPE should
be accounted for as an associate. The book value of FPE’s net assets was the same as their fair
value as at the acquisition date. There has been no change in the share capital of FPE since the
date of acquisition.
839
Financial Reporting
An extract of the financial statements of the three companies for the year ended
31 March 20X2 is shown below.
APE EPE FPE

$'000 $'000 $'000
Sales 80,000 35,750 18,000
Cost of sales (55,000) (24,500) (12,000)
Other income (including gain on disposal and
EPE’s dividend) 3,700 – –
Depreciation expense (8,000) (1,700) (400)
Interest expense (5,900) (1,600) (550)
Other expenses (3,800) (4,200) (2,850)
Profit for the year 11,000 3,750 2,200
Retained earnings, 1 April 20X1 44,000 22,500 11,250
Dividends declared (3,500) (1,250) –
Retained earnings, 31 March 20X2 51,500 25,000 13,450
Plant and equipment, net 43,000 19,000 10,800

Investment in EPE, cost 26,550 – –
Investment in FPE, cost 7,450 – –
Other investments 20,750 1,250 –
Inventory 41,250 20,000 10,400
Receivables 10,000 11,000 9,000
Cash and cash equivalents 7,500 8,750 5,800
156,500 60,000 36,000
Share capital 30,000 15,000 7,500

Retained earnings 51,500 25,000 13,450
Payables 75,000 20,000 15,050
156,500 60,000 36,000
On 1 April 20X1, APE held inventory of $2.5 million purchased from EPE during the year ended 31
March 20X1; these goods had been manufactured by EPE at a cost of $1.6 million. During the year
ended 31 March 20X2, EPE sold goods costing $6 million to APE for $9 million. APE sold the
inventory of $2.5 million on hand at the beginning of the year, but held 35% of its current year’s
purchases from EPE on 31 March 20X2.
APE sold plant and equipment at a transfer price of $10 million (with an original carrying amount of
$8 million) to FPE on 1 April 20X1. On that date, that plant and equipment had a remaining useful
life of five years.
Bankrupt Customer
APE has a financial year end of 31 March 20X2 and the financial statements are to be authorised
for issue on 15 June 20X2. On 15 May 20X2, it was discovered that a customer owing $650,000
had gone into bankruptcy. The adjustments, if necessary, have not been recorded in the draft
financial statements listed above.
Ms. Pindy Lee, a director of APE is concerned about the implications of the above transactions and
information. She wonders if it is necessary for APE to take into account the results of the above
investments, arrangements and events and if it may make a difference in the consolidation
process.
840
Assume that you are Charmaine Yuen, the accounting manager, and you are required to draft a
memorandum to Ms. Pindy Lee, a Director of APE. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) For the investment in DPE in the consolidated financial statements of APE, identify and
justify the applicable financial reporting standard, and advise the appropriate classification
and accounting treatment.
(You are not required to describe the detailed accounting method.) (13 marks)
(b) Discuss and advise as to the accounting treatments for the bankrupt customer in the
consolidated financial statements of APE for the year ended 31 March 20X2. (7 marks)
(c) Prepare an annex to your memorandum, showing the worksheets for:
(i) the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of APE
for the year ended 31 March 20X2, (10 marks)
(ii) the consolidated statement of financial position of APE as at 31 March 20X2, and
(10 marks)
(iii) the consolidated statement of changes in equity of APE for the year ended 31 March
20X2. (10 marks)
(Ignore the deferred tax implications. Consolidation adjustments are to be shown in the form
of a worksheet. For part 1(c)(i) and (ii), you may use the template in green colour paper
provided and/or the script booklet for Case Questions to prepare your answers. You are
required to show the detailed calculations for each figure, journal entries are not required.)
(Total = 50 marks)
841
Financial Reporting
842
chapter 30
Changes in group
structures
Topic list
2 Step acquisitions
2.1 Application of acquisition accounting
1 Disposals
2.2 Calculation of goodwill when control is
1.1 Types of disposal
acquired
1.2 Full disposal of a subsidiary
2.3 Preparation of the consolidated financial
1.3 Partial disposal of subsidiary: subsidiary
statements
to subsidiary
2.4 Increased shareholding in subsidiary
1.4 Partial disposal of subsidiary: subsidiary
to associate 3 Merger accounting for common control
1.5 Partial disposal of subsidiary: subsidiary combinations
to financial asset 3.1 Introduction
1.6 Reclassification adjustments 3.2 The principles
1.7 Full disposal of associate 3.3 The procedures
1.8 Partial disposal of associate: associate 3.4 Accounting period covered by a newly
to financial asset formed parent
1.9 Disclosure requirements on the disposal 3.5 Disclosures in addition to those required
of an investment by applicable HKFRS
3.6 Earnings per share
Learning focus
The acquisition and disposal of investments in group companies is a common occurrence in

business. The 'clean' transactions that we have already seen where a controlling shareholding
is purchased on one date are not always how an acquisition is achieved. Gradual (or step)
acquisitions are common and you must be able to deal with both these and disposals – either
of a whole investment or part of an investment.
843
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
requirements
4.03 Principles of consolidation 3
4.03.09 Explain how to account for changes in parent's ownership interest in
a subsidiary without losing control
4.05 Disposal of subsidiaries 3
4.05.01 Account for the disposal of a subsidiary by a group
4.05.02 Account for the change of ownership in subsidiaries without loss of
control
4.06 Business combinations 3
4.06.10 Explain the accounting for step acquisition
4.07 Investments in associates 3
4.07.06 Account for the disposal of an associate
4.11 Merger accounting for common control combinations 2
4.11.01 Describe the principles and practices of merger accounting
4.11.02 Apply merger accounting to a common control combination
844
30: Changes in group structures | Part D Group financial statements
1 Disposals
Topic highlights
A subsidiary or associate may be disposed of in its entirety or in part, so that the status of the
investment changes.
A parent company may choose to dispose of all or part of its investment in a subsidiary or
associate. A gain or loss on disposal is normally calculated and included in the consolidated
financial statements as well as the parent company's individual accounts.
The treatment of the disposal and calculation of any gain or loss depends upon the type of
disposal.
1.1 Types of disposal

The type of disposal may be categorised as one of the following, each of which we shall deal with
in turn in this chapter:
 Full disposal of a subsidiary
 Partial disposal of a subsidiary such that the investment remains a subsidiary
 Partial disposal of a subsidiary such that the investment becomes an associate
 Partial disposal of a subsidiary such that the investment becomes a financial asset
 Full disposal of an associate
 Partial disposal of an associate such that the investment becomes a financial asset.
Before considering each type of disposal in turn, we must consider the issue of loss of control.
HKFRS 3 (revised) and HKFRS 10 do not consider the second situation above to be a disposal, as
control is not lost. This situation is therefore accounted for in a different way from other partial
disposals.
1.1.1 Loss of control or significant influence
HKFRS consider a disposal to involve the loss of control or significant influence; this has been
referred to as 'crossing an accounting boundary'. The date of disposal is therefore the date on
which control or significant influence is lost.
845
Financial Reporting
The diagram below may help you visualise the boundary:
HKFRS 9 HKAS 28 (2011) / HKFRS 10

HKFRS 11
10% Loss of control but retaining financial

asset
40%
Loss of control but retaining an
associate or a jointly controlled entity
Loss of significant influence or joint

10%
control but retaining a financial asset
0% Passive 20% Significant 50% Control 100%

influence / joint
control
As you will see from the diagram, where an interest in a subsidiary is reduced from say 80% to
60%, this does not involve crossing that all-important 50% threshold.
HKAS 1.1.2 Subsidiary held for sale
27(2011).10
HKAS 27 (2011) requires that in the separate financial statements of the investor, a subsidiary,
jointly controlled entity or associate is held at cost, using the equity method or in accordance with
HKFRS 9.
HKAS 27 (2011) is aligned with HKFRS 5 by clarifying that a parent entity that accounts for an
investment in a subsidiary in accordance with HKFRS 9 (in its separate financial statements) and
subsequently classifies the investment as held for sale (or held in a disposal group classified as
held for sale) would continue to account for the investment in accordance with HKFRS 9.
HKFRS 5 measurement requirements only apply to investments that are held at cost.
HKFRS 10.25 1.2 Full disposal of a subsidiary

Topic highlights
Where a subsidiary is disposed of in full a gain or loss on disposal is recognised in the parent's
individual and the consolidated accounts. The amount of the gain or loss will be different in the
individual and the consolidated accounts. The results of the subsidiary are consolidated to the date
of disposal.
Where a subsidiary is disposed of, a profit or loss on disposal will be recognised in both the
parent's individual and the consolidated financial statements. The calculation of each of these
amounts will be different.
846
1.2.1 Gain or loss in parent company's accounts

The gain or loss on disposal in the parent company's individual accounts is relatively
straightforward. Proceeds are compared with the carrying value of the investment sold:
$
Fair value of consideration received X
Less: carrying value of investment disposed of (X)
Profit/(loss) on disposal X/(X)
The profit on disposal may be taxable and where it is, the tax is based on the parent's gain rather
than the group's.
1.2.2 Gain or loss in consolidated accounts
The calculation of the gain or loss in the consolidated accounts is a little more complex:
$ $
Fair value of consideration received X
Less: net assets of subsidiary at disposal date X
goodwill at disposal date X
non-controlling interests at disposal date (X)
(X)
Group profit/(loss) X/(X)
This gain or loss may need to be disclosed separately if it is material.
The difference between the gain or loss in the parent company’s account and the gain or loss in the
consolidated accounts is always calculated as the increase (or decrease) in the subsidiary’s net
assets between the acquisition and disposal date that are relevant to the investment that has been
disposed of.
Example: Gain on disposal

AB Co. acquired 75% of CD Co. in 20W9 for $12 million when the net assets of CD Co. were
$15million. The NCI was measured as a proportion of net assets. During 20X8 AB Co. disposed of
its entire shareholding in CD Co. for $20 million when the net assets of CD Co. were $24 million.
Required
(a) Calculate AB Co.’s gain on disposal and the group gain on disposal.
(b) Reconcile the two amounts.
Solution
(a)
AB Co’s gain $’000
Fair value of consideration received 20,000
Less: carrying value of investment disposed of (12,000)
Gain on disposal 8,000
Group gain $’000 $’000

Less: net assets of subsidiary at disposal date 24,000
goodwill at disposal date ($12m – (75%  $15m) 750
non-controlling interests at disposal date ($24m  25%) (6,000)
(18,750)
Group profit 1,250
847
Financial Reporting
(b)
Reconciliation $’000
Group gain on disposal 1,250
Share of increase in reserves between acquisition and disposal 6,750
75% ($24m – $15m)
AB Co gain 8,000
1.2.3 Preparation of the consolidated financial statements

Where there has been a full disposal of a subsidiary during the accounting period:
(a) That subsidiary is not recognised in the statement of financial position at the period end, nor
is any non-controlling interest.
(b) The results of the subsidiary are included in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income only until the date on which control is lost.
(c) The non-controlling interests in profit and total comprehensive income represents the NCI
share of these amounts only until control is lost.
If the subsidiary is classified as a discontinued operation per HKFRS 5 the consolidated
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income should include in one line "Profit for
the period from discontinued operations", being the group profit on disposal plus the
subsidiary's profit for the year to disposal.
Land Co. has owned 80% of the ordinary share capital in Rover Co. for a number of years. The
investment cost $980,000 when the net assets of Rover Co. were $1.175 million and goodwill of
$45,000 arose on acquisition, $5,000 relating to the non-controlling interests which was measured
at fair value. Goodwill has not been impaired. On 30 June 20X9 Land Co. disposed of the whole
shareholding in Rover Co. for $1.2 million. At the date of disposal Rover Co. had net assets of $1
million and non-controlling interests of $205,000.
(a) What gain is reported in Land Co.'s individual accounts?
(b) What gain is reported in the Land Group consolidated accounts?
(c) Reconcile the individual company and consolidated gain.
HKFRS 10.23 1.3 Partial disposal of subsidiary: subsidiary to subsidiary

Topic highlights
Where control is not lost on the disposal of shares there is no gain or loss in the consolidated
accounts; instead the transaction results in an adjustment to shareholders' funds.
As we have already said, where a controlling shareholding is retained, the 'accounting boundary' is
not crossed and HKFRS 3 (revised) and HKFRS 10 do not consider the transaction to be a
disposal.
In the parent company's individual accounts a profit or loss is recognised on the disposal of the
investment calculated in the same way as we saw earlier, being proceeds less carrying amount of
the investment.
In the consolidated financial statements, however:
 no gain or loss on disposal is calculated
 goodwill is not re-calculated
 the transaction is accounted for through shareholders' equity.
848
1.3.1 Adjustment to shareholders' equity

The adjustment to shareholders' equity is calculated as the difference between the proceeds
received and the change in the non-controlling interests as a result of the transaction.
Example: Adjustment on disposal

Manta Co. acquired 90% of Ray Co. in 20X6 and at this time goodwill was calculated as $65,000
using the proportion of net assets method to value the non-controlling interests. Goodwill has been
impaired by $15,000 since acquisition.
On 31 August 20X9 Manta Co. disposed of a 20% holding in Ray Co. for $120,000; on this date the
net assets of Ray Co. were $560,000.
What adjustment is required as a result of the disposal?
Solution
1 Adjustment required to the non-controlling interests:
At disposal date: $
NCI based on old shareholding (10%  $560,000) 56,000
NCI based on new shareholding (30%  $560,000) 168,000
Adjustment required 112,000
The non-controlling interests must be increased by $112,000.
2 Journal adjustment is therefore:
$ $
DEBIT Bank/cash 120,000
CREDIT NCI 112,000
Shareholders' equity ($120,000 – $112,000) 8,000
Example: Adjustment on disposal 2

On 12 December 20X3 Celine Co. acquired 80% of Cumming Co.. The NCI was measured at fair
value at the acquisition date and goodwill arising on acquisition totalled $400,000. Of this,
$350,000 was attributable to the group and $50,000 to the NCI. Goodwill has not been impaired
since the acquisition date.
On 31 August 20X8, Celine Co. disposed of a 10% holding in Cumming Co. for $370,000. On this
date the net assets of Cumming Co. were $3.2million.
What adjustment is required on disposal?
Solution
1 Adjustment required to the non-controlling interests:
At disposal date: $ $
NCI based on old shareholding
Net assets: 20% x $3,200,000 640,000
Goodwill 50,000
710,000
NCI based on new shareholding
Net assets: 30% x $3,200,000 960,000
Goodwill (30%/20% x $50,000) 75,000
1,035,000
Adjustment required 325,000
The non-controlling interests must be increased by $112,000.
849
Financial Reporting
2 Journal adjustment is therefore:

$ $
DEBIT Bank/cash 370,000
CREDIT NCI 325,000
Shareholders' equity ($370,000 – $112,000) 45,000
In 20X8, A acquired a 100% equity interest in B for cash consideration of $125,000.
B's identifiable net assets at fair value were $100,000. Goodwill of $25,000 was identified and
recognised. In the subsequent years, B increased net assets by $20,000 to $120,000. This is
reflected in equity attributable to the parent. A then disposed of 30% of its equity interest to non-
controlling interests for $40,000. In A’s separate financial statements the investment was measured
at cost and the disposal has been correctly accounted for.
What adjustment is required in respect of the disposal in the preparation of the consolidated
financial statements?
1.3.2 Preparation of the consolidated financial statements (subsidiary to

subsidiary)
In the statement of financial position:
 the non-controlling interests are based on the year-end percentage
 goodwill on acquisition is unchanged as a result of the partial sale of the shareholding
 parent's equity is adjusted as above.
In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income:
 the subsidiary's results are included for the whole accounting period
 the non-controlling interests are based on pro-rated profits and total comprehensive income
 there is no profit or loss on disposal.
HKFRS 10.25 1.4 Partial disposal of subsidiary: subsidiary to associate

Topic highlights
Where a subsidiary becomes an associate or financial asset, a gain or loss is recognised in the
consolidated accounts. This includes the gain on the shares disposed of and the revaluation of the
shares retained.
In this instance control is lost and therefore a gain or loss on disposal must be calculated in both
the parent company's and the consolidated financial statements.
The gain or loss in the parent company's accounts is again calculated as proceeds less carrying
amount of investment, and any tax due will be based on this figure.
850
1.4.1 Gain in the consolidated accounts

Where control is lost, the gain in the consolidated accounts is calculated as:
$ $
Proceeds X
Fair value of interest retained X
X
Less: net assets of subsidiary recognised prior to disposal
Net assets X
Goodwill X
Non-controlling interests (X)
(X)
Profit / loss X/(X)
It may seem odd that the fair value of the interest retained forms part of this calculation, but this is
because the gain is essentially made up of two parts:
 A realised gain on the shares disposed of
 An unrealised gain on the revaluation of the shares retained to fair value.
The following example will help you to see this.
Example: Gain or loss

Ives Group acquired 95% holding in Hunt Co. in 20X6, which it held until 31 May 20X9 when a 55%
shareholding was sold for $670,000, so reducing Ives Group's investment to 40%.
At the disposal date the net assets of Hunt Co. were $900,000, goodwill arising on acquisition had
been fully impaired and the fair value of a 40% interest in Hunt was $390,000.
The non-controlling interests are valued using the proportion of net assets method.
Required
What gain or loss arises on the disposal in the consolidated financial statements?
$ $
Proceeds 670,000
Fair value of interest retained 390,000
1,060,000
Less: Amounts recognised prior to disposal
Net assets of Hunt 900,000
Goodwill (fully impaired) –
NCI at disposal (5%  $900,000) (45,000)
(855,000)
Gain on disposal 205,000
The gain can be analysed as follows:
Gain on disposal
$
Proceeds 670,000
Net assets disposed of ($900,000  55%) (495,000)
175,000
Gain on revaluation of retained interest
Fair value of retained interest 390,000
Net assets retained ($900,000  40%) (360,000)
30,000
851
Financial Reporting
The gain that relates to the shares that have been disposed of can be reconciled to the parent
company as illustrated previously.

associate)
 The interest in the associate is equity accounted for based on the year-end shareholding.
For this purpose, the cost of the investment is taken to be the fair value of the interest
retained at the date the investment became an associate holding.
 The results of the investment are pro-rated and:
– consolidated until the disposal date
– equity accounted thereafter.
 The gain or loss on disposal, calculated as above is recognised.
Example: Partial disposals

Linda Co. bought 100% of the voting share capital of Vivi Co. on its incorporation on
1 January 20X2 for $160,000. Vivi Co. earned and retained $240,000 from that date until
31 December 20X7. At that date the statements of financial position of the company and the group
were as follows:
Linda Co. Vivi Co. Consolidated
$'000 $'000 $'000
Investment in Vivi 160 – –
Other net assets 1,000 500 1,500
1,160 500 1,500
Reserve 560 240 800
1,160 500 1,500
It is the group's policy to value the non-controlling interests at its proportionate share of the fair
value of the subsidiary's identifiable net assets.
On 1 January 20X8 Linda Co. sold 40% of its shareholding in Vivi Co. for $280,000. The profit on
disposal (ignoring tax) in the financial statements of the parent company is calculated as follows:
Linda
$'000
Fair value of consideration received 280
Carrying value of investment (40%  160) (64)
Profit on sale 216
We now move on to calculate the adjustment to equity for the group financial statements.
Because only 40% of the 100% subsidiary has been sold, leaving a 60% subsidiary, control is
retained. This means that there is no group profit on disposal in profit or loss for the year.
Instead, there is an adjustment to the parent's equity, which affects group reserve.
852
Point to note
The adjustment to parent's equity is calculated as follows:
$'000
Increase in non-controlling interests in net assets at the date of disposal (40%  400*) (160)
Adjustment to parent's equity 120
*Share capital 160
Reserve 240
400
This increases group reserve and does not go through group profit or loss for the year. (Note that
there is no goodwill in this example, as the subsidiary was acquired on incorporation.)
Solution: Subsidiary status
The statements of financial position immediately after the sale will appear as follows:
$'000 $'000 $'000
Investment in Vivi (160 – 64) 96 – –
Other assets 1,280 500 1,780
1,376 500 1,780
Retained earnings (Note) 776 240 920
1,376 500 1,620
1,780
Note. Linda's reserves are $560,000 + $216,000 profit on disposal. Group reserves are increased
by the adjustment above: $800,000 + $120,000 = $920,000.
Solution: Associate status

Using the above example, assume that Linda Co. sold 60% of its holding in Vivi Co. for $440,000.
The fair value of the 40% holding retained was $200,000.
The gain or loss on disposal in the books of the parent company is calculated as follows:
Parent
company
$'000
Carrying value of investment (60%  160) (96)
Profit on sale 344
This time control is lost, so there will be a gain in group profit or loss, calculated as follows:
$'000
Fair value of investment retained 200
Less: Net assets of Vivi Co. at date control lost (400)
Group profit on sale 240
(Note. There was no goodwill arising on the acquisition, otherwise this goodwill would be deducted
in the calculation.)
853
Financial Reporting
The statements of financial position now appear as follows:

$'000 $'000 $'000
Investment in Vivi (Note 1) 64 -– 200
Other assets 1,440 500 1,440
1,504 500 1,640
Retained earnings (Note 2) 904 240 1,040
1,504 500 1,640
Notes
1 The investment in Vivi is at fair value in the group accounts. It is equity accounted based on
the fair value at the date control was lost plus the share of post-acquisition retained earnings.
As yet there are no retained earnings because control has only just been lost at
31 December 20X7.
2 Linda's reserves are $560,000 + the profit on sale of $344,000 i.e. $904,000. Group retained
earnings are $800,000 (per question) plus group profit on the sale of $240,000, i.e.
$1,040,000.
HKFRS 10.25 1.5 Partial disposal of subsidiary: subsidiary to financial

asset
As in the case of a partial disposal which results in a subsidiary holding becoming an associate,
where a subsidiary becomes a financial asset, control is lost. Therefore, a gain or loss on disposal
is recognised in the consolidated financial statements.
This is calculated using the same method as that shown in section 1.4.1. In other words, the
retained investment is revalued to fair value and the gain or loss on this revaluation forms part of
the overall gain or loss on disposal.
Again, the gain or loss for inclusion in the parent company's own financial statements is the
difference between the proceeds and the carrying amount of the investment sold.
financial asset)
 the investment is recognised at its fair value at the date of disposal
 thereafter it is accounted for in accordance with HKFRS 9.
 the results of the investment are pro-rated and consolidated until the date of disposal
 thereafter only dividend income is included
 a gain or loss on disposal is recognised.
HKFRS 1.6 Reclassification adjustments

10.B98-99
Where control of a subsidiary is lost, any amounts recognised in other comprehensive income at
the date of disposal in relation to the subsidiary should be accounted for in the same way as if the
parent company had directly disposed of the assets that they relate to.
Therefore, for example, where the subsidiary applies HKAS 39 and holds available for sale
financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income, then on disposal, the amounts
of other comprehensive income recorded in the consolidated accounts in relation to these are
reclassified to profit or loss (recycled) and form part of the gain on disposal.
854
If the subsidiary holds revalued assets, the revaluation surplus previously recognised in
consolidated other comprehensive income should be transferred to group retained earnings.
Example: Reclassification adjustments on loss of control

In 20X7, A acquired a 100% equity interest in B for cash consideration of $125,000.
B's identifiable net assets at fair value were $100,000. Goodwill of $25,000 was identified and
recognised.
In the subsequent years, B increased net assets by $20,000 to $120,000. Of this, $15,000 was
reported in profit or loss and $5,000, relating to financial assets held at fair value through other
comprehensive income, was reported within other comprehensive income. A then disposed of 75%
of its equity interest for cash consideration of $115,000. The resulting 25% equity interest is
classified as an associate under HKAS 28 (2011) and has a fair value of $38,000.
The gain recognised in profit or loss on disposal of the 75% equity interest is:
$
Fair value of residual interest 38,000
Gain previously reported in other comprehensive income 5,000
158,000
Less: net assets and goodwill derecognised (145,000)
Gain 13,000
Noel Co. bought 80% of the share capital of Fanny Co. for $324,000 on 1 October 20X5.
At that date Fanny Co.'s retained earnings balance stood at $180,000. The statements of financial
position at 30 September 20X8 and the summarised statements of profit or loss to that date are
given below:
Noel Co. Fanny Co.
$'000 $'000
Non-current assets 360 270
Investment in Fanny Co. 324 –
1,054 640
Equity
Ordinary shares 540 180
Reserves 414 360
1,054 640
Tax (45) (36)
No entries have been made in the accounts for any of the following transactions.
Assume that profits accrue evenly throughout the year.
It is the group's policy to value the non-controlling interests at its proportionate share of the fair
value of the subsidiary's identifiable net assets.
Ignore tax on the disposal.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss at 30
September 20X8 in each of the following circumstances. (Assume no impairment of goodwill.)
(a) Noel Co. sells its entire holding in Fanny Co. for $650,000 on 30 September 20X8.
855
Financial Reporting
(b) Noel Co. sells one quarter of its holding in Fanny Co. for $160,000 on 30 September 20X8.
In the following circumstances you are required to calculate the gain on disposal, group retained
earnings and carrying value of the retained investment at 30 September 20X8.
(c) Noel Co. sells one half of its holding in Fanny Co. for $340,000 on 30 June 20X8, and the
remaining holding (fair value $250,000) is to be dealt with as an associate.
(d) Noel Co. sells one half of its holding in Fanny Co. for $340,000 on 30 June 20X8, and the
remaining holding (fair value $250,000) is to be dealt with as a financial asset at fair value
through other comprehensive income.
1.7 Full disposal of associate

Topic highlights
Where an associate is fully or partially disposed of, a gain or loss is recognised in the consolidated
financial statements. The gain or loss on a partial disposal includes the revaluation of the retained
investment.
Where an associate is disposed of in full, a gain arises in both the parent and group financial
statements.
The gain in the parent's financial statements is calculated in the same way as we have seen
previously: proceeds less carrying amount of investment.
In the consolidated financial statements, the gain or loss is calculated as:
$ $
Proceeds X
Less: Cost of investment X
Share of post-acquisition profits retained by associate at disposal X
Impairment of investment to date (X)
(X)
Profit/(loss) X/(X)
In the consolidated financial statements in the year of disposal:
 no investment is recognised in the statement of financial position
 the group share of the associate's results is included in the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income to the date of disposal.
1.8 Partial disposal of associate: associate to financial asset

Where part of an associate shareholding is disposed of such that it becomes a financial asset (for
example, a 40% holding becomes a 10% holding), then significant influence is lost.
In this case a gain arises in the parent company's financial statements, calculated as before, and a
gain is also calculated in the consolidated financial statements, calculated as:
$ $
Proceeds X
Fair value of interest retained X
X
Less: Cost of investment X
Share of post-acquisition profits retained by associate at disposal X
Impairment of investment to date (X)
(X)
Profit/(loss) X/(X)
856
Note that like the gain calculation in respect of part disposals of subsidiaries, this calculation
includes the fair value of the financial asset retained. Therefore, once again, the gain is made up of
two elements:
 A gain on disposal, and
 A gain on the revaluation of the financial asset.
1.8.1 Preparation of the consolidated financial statements (associate to

financial asset)
 the investment is recognised at its fair value at the date of disposal
 thereafter it is accounted for in accordance with HKFRS 9.
 the group share of the associate's results is included to the date of disposal
 thereafter only dividend income is included
 a gain or loss on disposal is recognised.
1.9 Disclosure requirements on the disposal of an investment

HKFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities requires particular disclosures where there is a
change in ownership of a subsidiary.
Where there is a change in ownership that does not result in a loss of control, a schedule must be
presented that shows the effects on equity attributable to owners of the parent of the change in
ownership interest.
If control of a subsidiary has been lost during a reporting period, the following should be disclosed:
(a) The gain or loss on disposal.
(b) The portion of the gain or loss attributable to measuring any retained investment at fair value
on the date on which control is lost.
(c) The line items in profit or loss in which the gain or loss is recognised.
Trinidad Co. bought 70% of the stated capital of Tobago Co. for $ 120 million on 1 January 20X6.
At that date Tobago Co.'s retained earnings stood at $10 million.
The statements of financial position at 31 December 20X8, summarised statements of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income to that date and movement on retained earnings are given below.
Trinidad Tobago Co.
Group
$’m $’m
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION
Non-current assets
Investment in Tobago Co. 120 –
320 80
1,210 220
Equity
Retained reserves 400 90
900 190
1,210 220
857
Financial Reporting
SUMMARISED STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Profit before interest and tax 100 20
Income tax expense (40) (8)
Other comprehensive income (not reclassified to P/L), 10 6
net of tax
MOVEMENT IN RETAINED RESERVES

Balance at 31 December 20X7 330 72
Balance at 31 December 20X8 400 90
Trinidad Co. sold one half of its holding in Tobago Co. for $120 million on 30 June 20X8. At that
date, the fair value of the 35% holding in Tobago Co. was slightly more at $130 million due to a
share price rise. The remaining holding meets the definition of an associate. This does not
represent a discontinued operation.
No entries have been made in the accounts for the above transaction.
Assume that profits and other comprehensive income accrue evenly throughout the year.
It is the group's policy to measure the non-controlling interest at acquisition at fair value. The fair
value of the non-controlling interest on 1 January 20X6 was $51.4million
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income and a reconciliation of movement in retained reserves for the year ended
31 December 20X8. (Ignore income taxes on the disposal. No impairment losses have been
necessary to date.)
2 Step acquisitions
Topic highlights
The acquisition method is only applied when control is achieved. Therefore, goodwill only arises on
the acquisition of a subsidiary, either in one or a number of transactions.
When a parent company gradually builds up an investment in another company to a stage where it
controls that company, this is referred to as a step acquisition.
For example a company may:
 initially purchase a 10% share in a company, so achieving a financial asset accounted for in
 then increase the shareholding to 40%, so achieving an associate investment accounted for
in accordance with HKAS 28 (2011)
 finally increase the shareholding to 75%, so achieving a subsidiary investment accounted for
in accordance with HKFRS 10 and HKFRS 3 (revised).
858
2.1 Application of acquisition accounting

It is important to realise acquisition accounting is only applied on the date that control is achieved
and therefore goodwill does not arise until this time. The date on which subsidiary status is
achieved is therefore referred to as the acquisition date.
Earlier in the chapter we looked at 'crossing the accounting boundary' in the context of disposals.
The same 'accounting boundary' principle applies to acquisition accounting:
HKFRS 9 HKAS 28 (2011) HKFRS 10

/ HKFRS 11
10%
40%
0% Passive 20% Significant 50% Control 100%

influence/
joint control
Goodwill is identified and net assets remeasured to fair value only in respect of the transaction that
achieved control, and not in respect of any earlier or subsequent acquisitions of equity interests.
When more shares are acquired in an existing subsidiary, goodwill is not recalculated; we shall
consider this situation later in the chapter.
HKFRS
3.32,41,42
2.2 Calculation of goodwill when control is acquired
Topic highlights
Where control is achieved any previously held interest is revalued to fair value; the gain or loss is
On the date on which control is achieved, previously held interests (measured in accordance with
HKFRS 9 or HKAS 28 (2011)) are remeasured to fair value and this value is included in
calculating goodwill.
Any gain or loss arising from the remeasurement will be recognised in profit or loss.
The calculation of goodwill now becomes:
$
Non-controlling interests X
Fair value of previously held interest X
X
Fair value of net assets of acquiree (X)
Goodwill X
859
Financial Reporting
Example: Financial asset under HKFRS 9 becomes a subsidiary

A acquired a 75% controlling interest in B in two stages.
1 In 20X3, A acquired a 15% equity interest for cash consideration of $10,000. A classified the
interest as financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income in accordance
with HKFRS 9. From 20X3 to the end of 20X7, A reported fair value increases of $2,000 in
other comprehensive income (OCI).
2 In 20X8, A acquired a further 60% equity interest for cash consideration of $60,000.
A identified net assets of B with a fair value of $80,000. A elected to measure non-controlling
interests at their share of net assets. On the date of acquisition, the previously-held 15%
interest had a fair value of $12,500.
$
In 20X8, A will include $500 in profit or loss, being the
gain on 'disposal' re-measurement of 15% investment to fair value ($12,500 – $12,000). In
accordance with HKFRS 9, the OCI recognised in respect of the equity investments is not
reclassified to profit or loss on 'disposal'.
In 20X8, A will measure goodwill as follows:
Fair value of consideration given for controlling interests 60,000
Non-controlling interests (25%  $80,000) 20,000
Fair value of previously-held interest 12,500
92,500
Less: fair value of net assets of acquiree (80,000)
Goodwill 12,500
Example: Associate becomes a subsidiary

C acquired a 75% controlling interest in D in two stages.
1 In 20X3, C acquired a 40% equity interest for cash consideration of $40,000.
C classified the interest as an associate under HKAS 28 (2011). At the date that C acquired
its interest, the fair value of D's identifiable net assets was $80,000. From 20X3 to 20X7,
C equity accounted for its share of undistributed profits totalling $5,000, and included its
share of revaluation gain of $3,000 in other comprehensive income (OCI). Therefore, in
20X7, the carrying amount of C's interest in D was $48,000.
2 In 20X8, C acquired a further 35% equity interest for cash consideration of $55,000.
C identified net assets of D with a fair value of $110,000. C elected to measure non-
controlling interests at fair value of $30,000. On the date of acquisition, the previously-held
40% interest had a fair value of $50,000.
The 20X3 acquisition of the initial shares is recognised in the consolidated financial statements of
C by:
The subsequent acquisition in 20X8 is recognised in the separate financial statements of C by:
Therefore a total investment of $95,000 is recognised in C’s financial statements.
Consolidated financial statements
The investment in associate is measured in the consolidated financial statements at cost ($40,000
as above) plus group share of post acquisition retained total comprehensive income.
860
Between 20X3 and 20X8 in the C Group financial statements a total of $8,000 is therefore
recognised to increase the carrying amount of the Investment. This is recorded by:
CREDIT Retained earnings $5,000
CREDIT Revaluation reserve $3,000
The carrying amount of the investment immediately prior to the acquisition of more shares is
therefore $48,000.
At this stage the existing shareholding must be treated as if disposed of and reacquired at its fair
value of $50,000. The net effect of this is the recognition of a gain of $2,000 by:
CREDIT Profit or loss (gain on disposal of $2,000
investment in associate)
(The revaluation gain of $3,000 previously recognised in OCI is not reclassified to profit or loss
because it would not be reclassified if the interest in D were disposed of.).
The further acquisition of shares is recognised at cost (as in C’s separate financial statements), so
giving a total carrying amount of the investment at this stage of the consolidation of $105,000
($50,000 existing shareholding after equity accounting and remeasurement to fair value + $55,000
new shareholding at cost).
On the 20X8 acquisition C will measure goodwill as follows:
$
Fair value of consideration given for controlling interests 55,000
Non-controlling interests (fair value) 30,000
Fair value of previously-held interest 50,000
Sub-total 135,000
Less: fair value of net assets of acquiree (110,000)
Goodwill 25,000

DEBIT Goodwill $25,000
DEBIT Share capital and reserves $110,000
CREDIT Investment ($55,000 + $50,000) $105,000
CREDIT NCI $30,000
Therefore the carrying amount of the investment is eliminated and replaced with the group share of
its net assets on acquisition.
2.3 Preparation of the consolidated financial statements

As we saw earlier in the chapter, a mid-year change in the status of an investment requires that its
results are pro-rated and accounted for accordingly.
2.3.1 Financial asset to subsidiary
When a financial asset becomes a subsidiary:
 in the consolidated statement of financial position the investment is consolidated based upon
the year-end shareholding; goodwill is recognised on the acquisition.
 in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income:
– Until the date on which control was achieved, only dividend income is shown
– After the date on which control was achieved, results are consolidated.
861
Financial Reporting
2.3.2 Associate to subsidiary

When an associate becomes a subsidiary:
 again, in the consolidated statement of financial position the investment is consolidated
based upon the year-end shareholding; goodwill is recognised on the acquisition.
 in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income:
– Until the date on which control was achieved, the investment's results are equity
accounted
– After the date on which control was achieved the results are consolidated.
HKFRS
10.B96 2.4 Increased shareholding in subsidiary
Topic highlights
An increase in shareholding in an existing subsidiary is treated as a transaction between owners
with an adjustment made to reserves; goodwill is not recalculated.
Where an investment goes from, for example, a 60% subsidiary to an 80% subsidiary, the 50%
threshold has not been crossed, so there is no re-measurement to fair value and no gain or loss to
profit or loss for the year. The increase is treated as a transaction between owners. As with
disposals, ownership has been reallocated between parent and non-controlling shareholders.
Accordingly the parent's equity is adjusted. HKFRS 10 does not give detailed guidance as to how
to measure the amount to be allocated to the parent and non-controlling interests to reflect a
change in their relative interests in the subsidiary. In most cases, however, the best approach is to
recognise the change as the difference between the fair value of consideration paid and the
decrease in non-controlling interests. (As the parent's share has increased, the NCI share has
decreased.)
$
Fair value of consideration paid (X)
Decrease in NCI in net assets at date of transaction X
Decrease in NCI in goodwill at date of transaction (Note) X
Adjustment to parent's equity (X)
Note. This line is only required where non-controlling interests are measured at fair value at the
date of acquisition.
Example: Increase of shareholding in subsidiary

A parent owns an 80% interest in a subsidiary which has net assets of $4,000. The carrying
amount of the non-controlling interests is $800. The parent acquires an additional 10% interest
from the non-controlling interests for $500.
The parent company will already have accounted for the acquisition in its separate financial
statements by:
$ $
DEBIT Investment 500
CREDIT Cash 500
For consolidation purposes the adjustment required to the parent’s equity is:
$
Fair value of consideration paid (500)
Decrease in NCI in net assets at date of transaction (10%  $4,000) 400
Adjustment to parent's equity (100)
862
Therefore the required adjustment on consolidation is as follows:

$ $
DEBIT Equity – non-controlling interests 400
Equity – controlling interests 100
The remainder of the investment in the parent’s financial statements (relating to the original 80%
holding) is eliminated by way of the standing journal to recognise goodwill.
Example: Parent acquires non-controlling interest

In 20X8, A acquired a 75% equity interest in B for cash consideration of $90,000. B's identifiable
net assets at fair value were $100,000. The fair value of the 25% non-controlling interests (NCI)
was $28,000. Goodwill, on the two alternative bases for measuring non-controlling interests at
acquisition, is calculated as follows:
NCI at NCI at
% of net assets fair value
$ $
Fair value of consideration 90,000 90,000
115,000 118,000
Fair value of net assets 100,000 100,000
Goodwill 15,000 18,000
In the subsequent years, B increased net assets by $20,000 to $120,000. This is reflected in the
carrying amount within equity attributed to non-controlling interests as follows:
NCI at NCI at
$ $
Non-controlling interests at acquisition 25,000 28,000
Increase (25%  $20,000) 5,000 5,000
In 20X8, A then acquired the 25% equity interest held by non-controlling interests for cash
consideration of $35,000. The adjustment to equity will be:
NCI at NCI at
$ $
Carrying amount of non-controlling interests 30,000 33,000
Negative movement in parent equity 5,000 2,000
As indicated in HKFRS 3 (revised 2008), the reduction in equity is greater where the option was
taken to measure non-controlling interests at acquisition date as a proportionate share of the
acquiree's identifiable net assets. The treatment has the effect of including the non-controlling
interest's share of goodwill directly in equity. This outcome will always occur where the fair value
basis is greater than the net asset basis at acquisition date.
863
Financial Reporting
Example: Parent acquires part of a non-controlling interest

The facts are as in the previous example: The parent acquires non-controlling interests above
except that, rather than acquire the entire non-controlling interests, A acquires an additional 15%
equity interest held by non-controlling interests for cash consideration of $21,000. The adjustment
to the carrying amount of non-controlling interests will be:
NCI at NCI at
$ $
Balance as in the previous example 30,000 33,000
Transfer to parent (15/25) 18,000 19,800
10% interest carried forward 12,000 13,200*
The adjustment to equity will be:
Change to non-controlling interests (as above) 18,000 19,800
Negative movement 3,000 1,200
* It is assumed that non-controlling interests are reduced proportionately. Under the fair value
10 th
option, the closing balance represents /25 of the acquisition date fair value (11,200) plus 10%
of the change in net assets since acquisition (2,000).
Good, whose year end is 30 June 20X9 has a subsidiary, Will, which it acquired in stages. The
details of the acquisition are as follows:
Holding Retained earnings Purchase
Date of acquisition acquired at acquisition consideration
% $m $m
1 July 20X7 20 270 120
1 July 20X8 60 450 480
The share capital of Will has remained unchanged since its incorporation at $300 million. The fair
values of the net assets of Will were the same as their carrying amounts at the date of the
acquisition. Good did not have significant influence over Will at any time before gaining control of
Will. The group policy is to measure non-controlling interests at its proportionate share of the fair
value of the subsidiary's identifiable net assets. The fair value of a 20% interest on 1 July 20X8 was
$130m.
Required
(a) Calculate the goodwill on the acquisition of Will that will appear in the consolidated statement
of financial position at 30 June 20X9.
(b) Calculate the profit on the derecognition of any previously held investment in Will to be
reported in group profit or loss for the year ended 30 June 20X9.
Example: Step acquisition of a subsidiary

Happy acquired 25% of the 800,000 shares of Frankie on 1 January 20X8 for $2,020,000 when
Frankie's reserves were standing at $5,800,000. The fair value of Frankie's identifiable assets and
liabilities at that date was $7,200,000. Both Happy and Frankie are stock market listed entities.
At 31 December 20X8, the fair value of Happy's 25% stake in Frankie was $2,440,000.
864
A further 35% stake in Frankie was acquired on 30 September 20X9 for $4,025,000 (equivalent to
the fair value of $14.375 per share on that date) giving Happy control over Frankie. The fair value
of Frankie's identifiable assets and liabilities at that date was $9,400,000, and Frankie 's reserves
stood at $7,800,000.
For consistency with the measurement of other shares, Happy holds all investments in subsidiaries
and associates as financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income in its separate
financial statements in accordance with HKFRS 9 and as permitted by HKAS 27 (2011).
At 31 December 20X9, the fair value of Happy's 60% holding in Frankie was $7,020,000 (and total
cumulative gains recognised in other comprehensive income in Happy's separate financial
statements amounted to $975,000).
Summarised statements of financial position of the two companies at that date show:
Happy Frankie
$'000 $'000
Non-current assets
Investment in Frankie 7,020 –
45,670 7,600
Current assets 12,700 2,200
58,370 9,800
Equity
Share capital 10,200 800
Reserves 40,720 7,900
50,920 8,700
Liabilities 7,450 1,100
58,370 9,800
The difference between the fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities of Frankie and their
book value relates to the value of a plot of land. The land had not been sold by 31 December 20X9.
Income and expenses are assumed to accrue evenly over the year. Neither company paid
dividends during the year.
Group policy is to measure non-controlling interests at the date of acquisition at their proportionate
share of the net fair value of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed.
No impairment losses on recognised goodwill have been necessary to date.
Required
(a) Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of Happy Group as at 31 December
20X9 in the following circumstances:
(i) The 25% interest in Frankie allowed Happy significant influence over the financial and
operating policy decisions of Frankie.
(ii) The other 75% of shares were held by a single shareholder and Happy was allowed
no influence in the running of Frankie until acquiring control.
(b) Show the consolidated current assets, non-controlling interests and reserves figures if Happy
acquired an additional 10% interest in Frankie on 1 January 20Y0 for $1,200,000.
865
Financial Reporting
Solution
Parts (a)(i) and (a)(ii) to the example would generate the same overall answer.
(a) HAPPY GROUP
$'000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (38,650 + 7,600 + (W6) 800) 47,050
Goodwill (W2) 1,260
48,310
Current assets (12,700 + 2,200) 14,900
63,210
Reserves (W3)/(W4) 40,660
50,860
54,660
Liabilities (7,450 + 1,100) 8,550
63,210
WORKINGS
1 Group structure
Part (i) 30 31
September December
1 January 20X9 20X9
20X9
SOCI
9
Associate – Equity account  /12 Consolidate
3
 /12
Had 25% Acquired 35% Consol in

associate SOFP
25% + 35%
with 40%
= 60%
NCI
Subsidiary
Part (ii)
30 31
1 January September December
20X9 20X9 20X9
SOCI
Consolidate
3
 /12

financial asset SOFP
25% + 35%
with 40%
= 60%
NCI
Subsidiary
866
2 Goodwill
$'000 $'000
Non-controlling interests (9,400  40%) 3,760
FV of P's previously held equity interest
(800,000  25%  $14.375) 2,875
10,660
Less: Fair value of identifiable assets acq'd
and liabilities assumed:
Share capital 800
Reserves 7,800
Fair value adjustments (W6) 800
(9,400)
1,260
3 Consolidated reserves (if previously held as an associate) (i)
Happy Frankie Frankie
$'000 $'000 $'000
25% 60%
Per question 40,720 7,800 7,900
Profit on derecognition of
investment (note) 355
Fair value movement (W6) - -
Reserves at acquisition (5,800) (7,800)
2,000 100
Share of post acqn reserves
Frankie – 25% (2,000  25%) 500
Frankie – 60% (100  60%) 60
Less: Fair value gain recognised
in Happy's separate FS (975)
40,660
Note. Profit on derecognition of 25% associate
$'000
Fair value at date control obtained (200,000 shares  $14.375) 2,875
P's share of carrying value [2,020 + ((7,800 – 5,800)  25%)] (2,520)
355
4 Consolidated reserves (if previously held as a financial asset) (ii)
Happy Frankie
$'000 $'000
Per question 40,720 7,900
Profit on derecognition of investment* 855
Reserves at acquisition (7,800)
100
Frankie – share of post acquisition reserves
(100  60%) 60
Less: Fair value gain recognised in Happy's
separate FS (975)
40,660
* Profit on derecognition of 25% investment
867
Financial Reporting
$'000
Cost (2,020)
855
$'000
Net assets at year end per question 8,700
Fair value adjustment (W6) 800
9,500
 NCI share 40% = $3,800,000
6 Fair value adjustments
At acquisition At year end
Measured at date control achieved 30 September 31 December
(only) 20X9 Movement 20X9
$'000 $'000 $'000
Land (9,400 – (800 + 7,800)) 800 – 800

(b) (i) Current assets (14,900 – 1,200) = $13,700,000
(ii) Non-controlling interests
$'000
9,500
 30% = $2,850,000
Consolidated reserves
$'000
Per part (a) 40,660
Adjustment to parent's equity on acq'n of 10% (W) (250)
40,410
Note. No other figures in the statement of financial position are affected.
WORKING
Adjustment to parent's equity on acquisition of additional 10% of Frankie
$'000
Fair value of consideration paid (1,200)
Decrease in NCI in net assets at acq'n (9,500  10%) 950
(250)
Example: Step acquisition of a subsidiary with non-controlling interest at fair value

The facts are the same as in the previous example, except that group policy is to measure non-
controlling interests at the date of acquisition at fair value. The fair value of the non-controlling
interests at acquisition was $4,600,000.
868
Solution
Parts (a)(i) and (a)(ii) to the example would generate the same overall answer.
(a) HAPPY GROUP
$'000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (38,650 + 7,600 + (W2) 800) 47,050
Goodwill (W2) 2,100
49,150
Current assets (12,700 + 2,200) 14,900
64,050
Reserves (W3)/(W4) 40,660
50,860
55,500
Liabilities (7,450 + 1,100) 8,550
64,050
WORKINGS
1 Group structure
Part (i)
1 January 30 September 31 December

20X9 20X9 20X9
SOCI
9
Associate – Equity account  /12 Consolidate
3
 /12

associate SOFP
25% + 35%
with 40%
= 60%
NCI
Subsidiary
Part (ii)
1 January 30 September 31 December

20X9 20X9 20X9
SOCI
Consolidate
3
 /12

financial asset SOFP
25% + 35%
with 40%
= 60%
NCI
Subsidiary
869
Financial Reporting
2 Goodwill
Group NCI
$'000 $'000 $'000
FV NCI 4,600
FV P's previously held equity
interest 2,875
Fair value of identifiable assets
acq'd and liabilities assumed:
Share capital 800
Reserves 7,800
Fair value adjustments (W6) 800
9,400
 60%/40% (5,640) (3,760)
1,260 840
2,100
3 Consolidated reserves (if previously held as an associate) (i)

Happy Frankie Frankie
$'000 $'000 $'000
25% 60%
Per question 40,720 7,800 7,900
Profit on derecognition of 355
investment (Note)
Reserves at acquisition (5,800) (7,800)
2,000 100
Share of post acqn reserves
Frankie – 25% (2,000  25%) 500
Frankie – 60% (100  60%) 60
Less: fair value gain recognised
in Happy's separate FS (975)
40,660
Note. Profit on derecognition of 25% associate
$'000
P's share of carrying value [2,020 + ((7,800 – 5,800)  25%)] (2,520)
355
870
4 Consolidated reserves (if previously held as financial assets) (ii)

Happy Frankie
$'000 $'000
Per question 40,720 7,900
Profit on derecognition of investment (Note) 855
Reserves at acquisition (7,800)
100
Frankie – share of post acquisition reserves
(100  60%) 60
Less: fair value gain recognised in Happy's
separate FS (975)
40,660
Note. Profit on derecognition of 25% investment

$'000
Cost (2,020)
855
Note. The profit would be the same whether the financial asset had been revalued or
not, as any revaluation above original cost previously recognised in other
comprehensive income is transferred to profit or loss.
$'000 $'000
9,500
 40% 3,800
NCI in goodwill (W2) 840
4,640
6 Fair value adjustments
At acquisition At year end
Measured at date control achieved 30 September 31 December
(only) 20X9 Movement 20X9
$'000 $'000 $'000
Land (9,400 – (800 + 7,800)) 800 – 800
3 Merger accounting for common control combinations

3.1 Introduction
Topic highlights
A key issue involved in a business combination is to determine whether a particular arrangement
should be classified as an acquisition or a merger (pooling of interests or uniting of interests).
HKFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations applies to all business combinations except where a
combination is specifically excluded from its scope. For those business combinations outside the
scope of HKFRS 3 (revised), for example, business combinations involving entities or businesses
871
Financial Reporting
under common control, there is no specific accounting standard addressing the appropriate
accounting treatment.
HKFRS 3 (revised) defines a business combination involving entities or businesses under common
control as 'a business combination in which all of the combining entities or businesses are
ultimately controlled by the same party or parties both before and after the business combination,
and that control is not transitory. HKICPA has issued Accounting Guideline 5 (AG5) to give
guidance on how such combinations should be accounted for, given that they fall outside the scope
of HKFRS 3 (revised). AG5 refers to these combinations as 'common control combinations' to
distinguish them from other business combinations which fall within or outside the scope of HKFRS
3 (revised).
HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, contains requirements
for the selection of accounting policies in the absence of a HKFRS that specifically applies to an
issue. Common control combinations fall outside the scope of HKFRS 3 (revised). Accordingly, an
entity selects an appropriate accounting policy in accordance with the requirements set out in
HKAS 8 and many entities consider that merger accounting is an appropriate accounting policy for
common control combinations.
AG5 sets out the basic principles and procedures of merger accounting when recognising a
common control combination.
It should be noted that interspersing a shell entity between a parent entity and a single subsidiary
does not represent the combination of two businesses and accordingly is not addressed in AG5.
In practice, these transactions may be accounted for by applying a principle similar to that for a
reverse acquisition.
An essential difference exists between a business combination effected by the purchase of a
company's shares for cash and that executed by an exchange of shares.
A business combination involving a share exchange which is characterised by a continuity of
ownership is regarded as a pooling of interests of both parties rather than an acquisition, and
should be accounted for differently.
3.2 The principles

The concept underlying the use of merger accounting to account for a common control combination
is that no acquisition has occurred and there has been a continuation of the risks and benefits to
the controlling party (or parties) that existed prior to the combination. Use of merger accounting
recognises this by accounting for the combining entities or businesses as though the separate
entities or businesses were continuing as before.
In applying merger accounting, financial statement items of the combining entities or businesses for
the reporting period in which the common control combination occurs, and for any comparative
periods disclosed, are included in the consolidated financial statements of the combined entity as if
the combination had occurred from the date when the combining entities or businesses first came
under the control of the controlling party or parties.
Where the combining entities or businesses include an entity or a business previously acquired
from a third party, the financial statement items of such entity or business are only included in the
consolidated financial statements of the combined entity from the date of the previous acquisition
using the acquisition values recognised at that date.
A single uniform set of accounting policies is adopted by the combined entity. Therefore, the
combined entity recognises the assets, liabilities and equity of the combining entities or businesses
at the carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements of the controlling party or parties
prior to the common control combination. If consolidated financial statements were not previously
prepared by the controlling party or parties, the carrying amounts are included as if such
consolidated financial statements had been prepared, including adjustments required for
conforming the combined entity's accounting policies and applying those policies to all periods
presented. These carrying amounts are referred to below as existing book values from the
controlling parties' perspective. There is no recognition of any additional goodwill or excess of
872
the acquirer's interest in the net fair value of the acquiree's identifiable assets, liabilities and
contingent liabilities over cost at the time of the common control combination to the extent of the
continuation of the controlling party or parties' interests. Similarly, in accordance with HKFRS 10,
the effects of all transactions between the combining entities or businesses, whether occurring
before or after the combination, are eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial statements
of the combined entity.
3.3 The procedures

In the consolidated financial statements under merger accounting:
1 No adjustment is required to the carrying values of the assets and liabilities of the acquired
company on consolidation, except to achieve uniformity of accounting policies of the
combining companies.
2 There is no distinction between pre- and post-acquisition reserves. The distributable
reserves of the acquired company are not capitalised and remain distributable.
3 The consolidated statement of profit or loss includes the results of each of the combining
entities or businesses from the earliest date presented (i.e. including the comparative period)
or since the date when the combining entities or businesses first came under the control of
the controlling party or parties, where this is a shorter period, regardless of the date of the
common control combination. The consolidated statement of profit or loss also takes into
account the profit or loss attributable to the non-controlling interests recorded in the
consolidated financial statements of the controlling party.
4 Comparative figures should be presented as if the companies had been combined
throughout the previous period and at the previous reporting date unless the combining
entities or businesses first came under common control at a later date.
5 No amount is recognised as consideration for goodwill or excess of acquirer's interest in the
net fair value of acquiree's identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities over cost at
the time of common control combination, to the extent of the continuation of the controlling
party or parties' interests.
6 Expenditure incurred in relation to a common control combination that is to be accounted for
by using merger accounting is recognised as an expense in the period in which it is
incurred. Such expenditure includes professional fees, registration fees, costs of furnishing
information to shareholders, and salaries and other expenses involved in achieving the
common control combination. It also includes any costs or losses incurred in combining
operations of the previously separate businesses.
7 Consolidation is performed in accordance with HKFRS 10. The principal consolidation
entries are as follows:
(a) The effects of all transactions between the combining entities or businesses, whether
occurring before or after the common control combination, are eliminated; and
(b) Since the combined entity will present one set of consolidated financial statements, a
uniform set of accounting policies is adopted which may result in adjustments to the
assets, liabilities and equity of the combining entities or businesses.
3.4 Accounting period covered by a newly formed parent

A common control combination may be effected by setting up a new parent which acquires the
issued shares or equity of the combining entities or businesses in exchange for the issue of its own
shares. In such cases, the first accounting period of the new parent will frequently be a period of
less than a year, ending on the reporting date chosen for the group. This will normally be the
existing reporting date of one or more of the combining entities or businesses.
Frequently, the date of formation of the new parent will not coincide with the beginning or end of
the group's accounting periods. Strictly, if the parent is a Hong Kong incorporated company, the
873
Financial Reporting
Companies Ordinance requires the consolidated financial statements to cover the accounting
period of the parent. It could be argued that this requirement prevents the disclosure of
comparative information. In substance, however, where the combining entities or businesses are
continuing to trade as before, but with a new legal parent, it is appropriate to prepare consolidated
financial statements as if the parent had been in existence throughout the reported periods
presented with a prominent footnote explaining the basis on which consolidated financial
statements are prepared.
3.5 Disclosures in addition to those required by applicable

HKFRS
Entities applying AG5 in accounting for a common control combination using the principles of
merger accounting shall disclose in their consolidated financial statements the fact that this
Guideline has been used.
Entities shall disclose the accounting policy applied in accounting for a common control
combination by using the principles of merger accounting. Details of the accounting policy shall
include, but not be limited to, a discussion of the specific principles and bases applied under
merger accounting.
Bearing in mind the necessity of showing a true and fair view, entities applying AG5 shall disclose
in their consolidated financial statements significant details of the common control combinations.
For each common control combination accounted for by using merger accounting, the following
information shall be disclosed:
(a) The names of the combining entities (other than the reporting entity);
(b) The date of the common control combination;
(c) The composition of the consideration and fair value of the consideration other than shares
issued;
(d) The nature and amount of significant accounting adjustments made to the net assets and net
profit or loss of any entities or businesses to achieve consistency of accounting policies, and
an explanation of any other significant adjustments made to the net assets and net profit or
loss of any entity or business as a consequence of the common control combination; and
(e) A statement of the adjustments to consolidated reserves.
3.6 Earnings per share

Ordinary shares issued as part of a common control combination which is accounted for using
merger accounting are included in the calculation of the weighted average number of shares
for all periods presented because the consolidated financial statements of the combined entity are
prepared as if the combined entity had always existed. Therefore, the number of ordinary shares
used for the calculation of basic earnings per share in a common control combination which is
accounted for using merger accounting is the aggregate of the weighted average number of shares
of the entity whose shares are outstanding after the combination.
Example: Merger accounting

Pear has three subsidiaries, Xero, Yoho and Apex.
Pear acquired 100% of Xero for $28,000 many years ago. At that time, Pear recorded goodwill of
$13,000 and fair value of identifiable assets acquired of $15,000 (which is equal to the then
carrying amounts of the assets acquired).
Pear set up Yoho with a party outside the group, Shareholder S, many years ago. Pear's cost of
investment in Yoho was $15,000, being 75% of the share capital of Yoho.
On 1 January 20X0, Pear formed a new entity, Apex, through share capital injection of $20,000.
874
On 31 December 20X1, Apex acquired 100% shareholdings in Xero and Yoho from Pear and
Shareholder S. In return, Apex issued 14,000 and 6,000 ordinary shares to Pear and Shareholder
S, respectively. Apex, Xero and Yoho have financial year ends of 31 December. The fair values of
assets and liabilities of Yoho as at 31 December 20X1 are equal to their carrying values.
Ignore any tax effect arising from the business combination.
Before the business After the business

combination combination
Pear Pear
New parent 85%
entity
Apex
100% 100% 75%

100% 100%
Apex Xero Yoho Xero Yoho
The statements of profit or loss of Apex, Xero and Yoho for the year ended 31 December 20X1 are:
Apex Xero Yoho
$ $ $
Revenue 3,000 40,000 50,000

Profit or loss (5,000) 20,000 20,000
The statements of financial position of Apex, Xero and Yoho as at 31 December 20X1 are:
Apex Apex Xero Yoho
(before issue (after issue
of shares) of shares*)
$ $ $ $
Investment in subsidiaries – 233,000 – –
Other assets 13,000 13,000 100,000 120,000

Net assets 13,000 246,000 100,000 120,000
Capital 20,000 253,000 10,000 20,000
Accumulated profits (losses) (7,000) (7,000) 90,000 100,000
13,000 246,000 100,000 120,000
* The 20,000 new shares issued by Apex as consideration are recorded at a value equal to
the deemed cost of acquiring Xero and Yoho ($233,000). The deemed cost of acquiring Xero
is $113,000, being the existing book values of net assets of Xero as at 31 December 20X1
($100,000) plus remaining goodwill arising on the acquisition of Xero by Pear ($13,000). The
deemed cost of acquiring Yoho is $120,000, being the existing book values of net assets of
Yoho as at 31 December 20X1. The deemed cost used in this example is for illustrative
purposes only and does not necessarily represent the value to be reported in the individual
financial statements of Apex as the cost of acquiring the subsidiaries.
875
Financial Reporting
The statements of profit or loss of Apex, Xero and Yoho for the year ended 31 December 20X0 are:
Apex Xero Yoho
$ $ $
Revenue 2,000 38,000 45,000
Profit or loss (3,000) 15,000 12,000
The statements of financial position of Apex, Xero and Yoho as at 31 December 20X0 are:
Apex Xero Yoho
$ $ $
Net assets 18,000 80,000 100,000
Capital 20,000 10,000 20,000

Accumulated profits (losses) (2,000) 70,000 80,000
18,000 80,000 100,000
Required
Prepare the consolidated financial statements of Apex for the year ending 31 December 20X1
(including the comparative figures, which would be presented for 20X0).
Solution
As Apex, Xero and Yoho are under the common control of Pear before and after the business
combination, the business combination is specifically excluded from the scope of HKFRS 3
(revised).
The directors of Apex choose to account for the acquisition of the shareholdings in Xero and Yoho
using the principles of merger accounting.
Under the principles of merger accounting, the assets and liabilities of Xero and Yoho are
consolidated in the financial statements of Apex using the existing book values as stated in the
consolidated financial statements of Pear immediately prior to the combination. This procedure
requires recording of goodwill arising on the original acquisition of Xero by Pear and non-controlling
interests in Yoho as stated in the consolidated financial statements of Pear immediately prior to the
combination. There is no recognition of any additional goodwill or excess of the acquirer's interest
in the net fair value of the acquiree's identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities over cost
at the time of this combination.
The consolidated statement of profit or loss of Apex for the year ended 31 December 20X1 is:
Apex Xero Yoho Adjustments Consolidated
$ $ $ $ Adj $
Revenue 3,000 40,000 50,000 93,000
Profit or loss (5,000) 20,000 20,000 35,000

Attributable to the 5,000 (Y1) (5,000)
former non-controlling
interests in Yoho
Attributable to the 30,000
equity holders of
Apex
Adjustment
Y1 Being an adjustment to reflect the profit attributable to the non-controlling interests in Yoho
prior to the combination. ($20,000  25%)
876
The consolidated statement of financial position of Apex as at 31 December 20X1 is:

$ $ $ $ Adj $
Goodwill 13,000 (X1) 13,000
Investment in (113,000) (X3) –
Xero and Yoho 233,000 – – (120,000) (Y5)
Other assets 13,000 100,000 120,000 233,000
Net assets 246,000 100,000 120,000 246,000
Capital 253,000 10,000 20,000 (10,000) (X3) 253,000

(20,000) (Y5)
Other reserve – – – (85,000) (X3) (160,000)
(75,000) (Y5)
Retained earnings (7,000) 90,000 100,000 (5,000) (X2) 153,000
(25,000) (Y4)
246,000 100,000 120,000 246,000
Adjustments
Relating to Xero:
X1 Being an adjustment to record goodwill arising on the original acquisition of Xero by Pear as
stated in the consolidated financial statements of Pear immediately prior to the combination
($13,000).
X2 Being an adjustment to eliminate the accumulated profits of Xero generated prior to the
original acquisition of Xero by Pear ($5,000).
X3 Being an adjustment to eliminate the share capital of Xero against the related investment
cost of Apex. An adjustment of $85,000 has been made to a separate reserve in the
consolidated financial statements of Apex ($113,000 – $28,000).
Relating to Yoho:
Y4 Being an adjustment to reflect the profits attributable to the non-controlling interests in Yoho
prior to the combination ($100,000  25%).
Y5 Being an adjustment to eliminate the share capital of Yoho against the related investment
consolidated financial statements of Apex ($120,000  75% – $15,000).
The consolidated statement of profit or loss of Apex for the year ended 31 December 20X0 is:
$ $ $ $ Adj $
Revenue 2,000 38,000 45,000 85,000
Profit or loss (3,000) 15,000 12,000 24,000

Attributable to the 3,000 (Y1) (3,000)
non-controlling
interests
Attributable to the 21,000
equity holders of
Apex
Adjustment
Y1 Being an adjustment to reflect the profit attributable to the non-controlling interests in Yoho
prior to the combination ($12,000  25%).
877
Financial Reporting
The consolidated statement of financial position of Apex as at 31 December 20X0 is:

$ $ $ $ Adj $
Goodwill 13,000 (X2) 13,000
Investment in Xero 203,000 (1) –
and Yoho – – – (113,000) (X4)
(90,000) (Y5)
Other assets 18,000 80,000 100,000 198,000
Net assets 18,000 80,000 100,000 211,000
Capital
20,000 10,000 20,000 203,000 (1) 223,000
(10,000) (X4)
(20,000) (Y5)
Other reserve – – – (85,000) (X4) (160,000)
(75,000) (Y5)
Non-controlling interests 25,000 (Y5) 25,000
Retained earnings (2,000) 70,000 80,000 (5,000) (X3) 123,000
(20,000) (Y5)
18,000 80,000 100,000 211,000
Note: The comparative figures are restated as if the entities had been combined at the previous
end of reporting period. The consolidated share capital represents the share capital of Apex
adjusted for the share capital issued for the purposes of the business combination.
Adjustments
1 Being an adjustment to push back the capital issued for the purposes of the business
combination ($203,000, of which $113,000 relating to Xero and $90,000 relating to Yoho).
The aim of the consolidated financial statements in merger accounting is to show the
combining entities' results and financial positions as if they had always been combined.
Consequently, the share capital in respect of 14,000 shares issued for the purposes of the
business combination has to be shown as if it had always been issued.
Relating to Xero:
X2 Being an adjustment to record goodwill arising on the original acquisition of Xero by Pear as
stated in the consolidated financial statements of Pear immediately prior to the combination
($13,000).
X3 Being an adjustment to eliminate the accumulated profits of Xero generated prior to the
original acquisition of Xero by Pear ($5,000).
X4 Being an adjustment to eliminate the share capital of Xero against the related investment
consolidated financial statements of Apex.
Relating to Yoho:
Y5 Being an adjustment to eliminate the share capital of Yoho against the related investment
cost of Apex. Prior to the business combination, Pear only had 75% equity interest in Yoho.
Non-controlling interests of $25,000 were recorded as at 31 December 20X0. An adjustment
of $75,000 has been made to a separate reserve in the consolidated financial statements of
Apex.
Earnings per share
Based on the same facts as per the above example, the calculation of basic earnings per share for
each period presented in the consolidated financial statements of Apex is based on the
consolidated profit (excluding the profit attributable to the non-controlling interests), and on the
40,000 shares (comprising 20,000 shares of Apex in issue throughout the two years ended
31 December 20X1 and 20,000 shares of Apex issued on 31 December 20X1 as consideration for
the equity interests in Xero and Yoho).
878
Topic recap
Changes in group structures
Disposals
Subsidiary Associate
Full disposal: Full disposal:

Gain/loss in parent's SPLOCI Gain/loss in parent's SPLOCI
Gain/loss in consolidated SPLOCI Gain/loss in consolidated SPLOCI
Investment not included in CSOFP Investment not included in CSOFP
Consolidate subsidiary's results in CSPLOCI to Equity account associate's results in
disposal date CSPLOCI to disposal date
Part disposal: subsidiary → subsidiary: Part disposal: associate → financial

Gain/loss in parent's SPLOCI asset:
No gain/loss in consolidated SPLOCI Gain/loss in parent's SPLOCI
Instead adjust equity by: Gain/loss in consolidated SPLOCI
Investment in CSOFP at fair value of
FV of consideration received X retained investment on disposal date
Change in NCI in net assets (X) Equity account for results to disposal
X/(X) date then include dividend income.
NCI in CSOFP based on year end NCI%
NCI in CSPLOCI calculated by pro-rating results
of subsidiary
Part disposal: subsidiary → associate

Gain/loss in parent's SPLOCI
Gain/loss in consolidated SPLOCI
Equity account for investment in CSOFP (cost =
fair value of retained investment on disposal date)
Pro-rate subsidiary's results and consolidate/equity
account in CSPLOCI.
Part disposal: subsidiary → financial asset

Gain/loss in parent's SPLOCI
Gain/loss in consolidated SPLOCI
Investment in CSOFP at fair value of retained
investment on disposal date
Consolidate results to disposal date then include
dividend income.
Group gain on disposal of Parent company gain on Group gain on disposal of

subsidiary disposal of investment associate
Consideration X Consideration X Consideration X
FV ret'd interest X Carrying value of FV ret'd interest X
Net assets X investment Cost of inv't X
Goodwill X disposed of (X) Post acq profits X
NCI (X) X Impairment (X)
(X) (X)
X/(X) X/(X)
879
Financial Reporting
Step acquisitions
Financial asset → subsidiary Associate → subsidiary Subsidiary → subsidiary
CSOFP: consolidate based on CSOFP: consolidate based on Adjust shareholders' equity by:
year-end holding. year-end holding. FV consideration paid (X)
Decrease in NCI at
CSPLOCI: include dividend CSPLOCI: equity account to date date of transaction X
income to date control attained, control attained, then consolidate Decrease in NCI
then consolidate results. results. goodwill at date of
transaction X
X
Goodwill arises when control is attained:

Non-controlling interest X
Fair value of previously held interest X
X
Fair value of net assets acquired (X)
Goodwill X
Merger accounting
Apply AG5 Merger Accounting for

Common Control Transactions
Single uniform set of accounting CSPLOCI includes the combined Consolidation performed in
policies adopted; otherwise no results of the combining entities accordance with HKFRS 10.
adjustment is made to the carrying from the earliest date presented /
values of assets and liabilities in date of combination if earlier.
the acquired company.
No distinction between No goodwill is

pre and post recognised.
acquisition reserves.
880
Answer 1
(a) Land Co.'s accounts $'000
Less: carrying value of investment disposed of (980)
Profit on disposal 220
(b) Consolidated accounts $'000 $'000

Less: net assets of subsidiary at disposal date 1,000
goodwill at disposal date 45
non-controlling interests at disposal date (20%  $1m) + $5,000 (205)
(840)
Group profit 360
(c) Reconciliation of gain amounts $'000
Gain in consolidated accounts 360
Increase in reserves between acquisition and disposal date
At disposal 1,000
At acquisition (1,175)
Loss (175)
X 80% (140)
Gain in Land Co.’s accounts 220
Answer 2
In A’s individual financial statements the disposal has been recognised correctly by:
$ $
DEBIT Cash 40,000
CREDIT Investment (30% x $125,000) 37,500
CREDIT Gain on disposal (parent’s equity) 2,500
In the consolidated financial statements the disposal would be recognised (on a standalone basis) by:
$ $
DEBIT Cash 40,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interest (W) 36,000
CREDIT Parent’s equity 4,000
(W) The adjustment to equity will be:
$
Amount recognised as non-controlling interests (30%  120,000) 36,000
Positive movement in parent equity 4,000
Therefore on consolidation the following adjustment is required:

$ $
CREDIT Non-controlling interests 36,000
CREDIT Parent's equity 1,500
The investment that has been reinstated will be eliminated by way of the standing journal to
recognise goodwill on acquisition.
881
Financial Reporting
Answer 3
(a) Complete disposal at year end (80% to 0%)
Noel Fanny Adjustment 1 Adjustment 2 Disposal Consolidated
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Non-current 360 270 (270) 360
assets
Investment 324 (324)
Goodwill 36 (36)
Current 370 370 (370) 1,020
assets 650
1,380
Share capital 540 180 (180) 540
Reserves 414 360 (180) (36) 182 740
NCI 72 36 (108) -
Current 100 100 (100) 100
liabilities
1,380
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30

SEPTEMBER 20X8
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Profit before 153 126 279
tax
Profit on 182 182
disposal
Tax (45) (36) (81)
108 90 380
Owners of 108 90 (18) 182 362
parent
NCI 18 18
380
WORKINGS
1 Goodwill
$'000
NCI: 20%  (180 + 180) 72
396
Net assets (180 + 180) (360)
36
Consolidation adjustment journal $'000 $'000

DEBIT Goodwill 36
DEBIT Share capital 180
DEBIT Reserves 180
To recognise the acquisition and related goodwill and non-controlling interest.
882
2 Allocate profits between acquisition date and disposal date to NCI

$
Post-acquisition profits (360 – 180) 180,000
NCI share (20%) 36,000
Of these, $18,000 (90,000 x 20%) relate to the current year
Consolidation adjustment journal (SOFP) $'000 $'000
DEBIT Reserves 36
To allocate the NCI share of post-acquisition profits
In addition 20% of the profits of Fanny Co. arising in the year are allocated to the NCI:
Consolidation adjustment journal (SPL) $'000 $'000
DEBIT Profits attributable to owners of parent 18
CREDIT Non-controlling interest in profit 18
To allocate the NCI share of post-acquisition profits in the current year
3 Profit on disposal of Fanny Co.

$'000 $'000
Less: net assets at disposal 540
Goodwill 36
NCI (540  20%) (108)
(468)
182

DEBIT Cash 650
DEBIT NCI 108
DEBIT Disposal date liabilities of Fanny 100
CREDIT Goodwill 36
CREDIT Disposal date current assets of Fanny 370
CREDIT Disposal date non-current assets of Fanny 270
CREDIT Reserves 182
To recognise the group gain on disposal of Fanny Co.
(b) Partial disposal: subsidiary to subsidiary (80% to 60%)

Noel Fanny Adjustment Adjustment Disposal Consolidated
1 (part (a) 2 (part (a)
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Non-current 360 270 630
assets
Investment 324 (324)
Goodwill 36 36
Current assets 370 370 160 900
1,566
Share capital 540 180 (180) 540
Reserves 414 360 (180) (36) 52 610
NCI 72 36 108 216
Current 100 100 200
liabilities
1,566
883
Financial Reporting
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 SEPTEMBER 20X8
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Profit before 153 126 279
tax
Profit on
disposal –
Tax (45) (36) (81)
108 90 198
Owners of 108 90 (18) 180
parent
NCI 18 18
198
WORKING: Disposal
Adjustment is made to equity as control is not lost. $'000
NCI before disposal 80% (360 + 180) 432
NCI after disposal 60% (360 + 180) (324)
Required adjustment 108

DEBIT Current assets (cash) 160
CREDIT NCI 108
CREDIT Reserves 52
(c) Partial disposal: subsidiary to associate (80% to 40%)
1 Profit on disposal
$'000 $'000
Fair value of 40% investment retained 250
Less: Net assets when control lost
((540 – (90  3/12)) 517.5
Goodwill (part (a)) 36
NCI (517.5  20%) (103.5)
(450)
140
2 Group reserves
Noel Fanny 40%
Reserves Fanny Reserve
$'000 $'000 $'000
At date of disposal 414
Group profit on disposal (W1) 140
Fanny: share of post acquisition
earnings (157.5  80%) 126
Fanny: share of post acquisition
earnings (22.5  40%) 9
689
At date of disposal
(360 – (90  3/12))/per question 414 337.5 360.0
Retained earnings at acquisition/
on disposal 414 (180.0) (337.5)
157.5 22.5
884
3 Investment in associate
$'000
Fair value at date control lost (new 'cost') 4250
Share of post acquisition reserves (90  3/12  40%) 9
259
(d) Partial disposal: subsidiary to financial asset (80% to 40%)
1 Profit on disposal – as in part (c)
2 Group reserves
$'000
Noel Co.'s reserves 414
Group profit on disposal (W1) 140
Fanny: share of post acquisition reserves (157.5 (see below)  80%) 126
680
Fanny
$'000
At date of disposal (360 – (90  3/12)) 337.5
Reserves at acquisition (180.0)
157.5
3 Retained investment – at $250,000 fair value.
Answer 4
TRINIDAD GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31.12.X8
$’m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 200.00
Investment in Tobago 133.15
333.15
Current assets 1,010.00
1,343.15
Share capital 500.00
Retained reserves 533.15
1,033.15
Current liabilities 310.00
1,343.15
TRINIDAD GROUP
INCOME FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31.12.X8
$’m
Profit before interest and tax 110.00
Profit on disposal of shares in subsidiary 80.30
Share of profit of associate 2.10
Income tax expense (44.00)
Profit for the year 148.40
Other comprehensive income (not reclassified to P/L) net of tax 13.00
Share of other comprehensive income of associate 1.05
Other comprehensive income for the year 14.05
Total comprehensive income for the year 162.45
885
Financial Reporting
$’m
Owners of the parent 146.60
Non-controlling interests 1.80
148.40
Total comprehensive income attributable to:
Owners of the parents 159.75
Non-controlling interests 2.70
162.45
TRINIDAD GROUP
CONSOLIDATED RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENT IN RETAINED RESERVES
$’m
Balance at 31 December 20X7 (W7) 373.40
Total comprehensive income for the year 159.75
Balance at 31 December 20X8 533.15
Workings
Consolidation schedule for Trinidad – statement of financial position at 31 December 20X8
Trinidad (W2) (W3(i)) (W6) Consolidated
$’m $’m $’m $’m $’m
PPE 200 200
Investment in Tobago/Ass 120 (60) 70 3.15 133.15
320 333.15
Current assets 890 120 1,010
1,210 1,343.15

Retained reserves 400 60 70 3.15 533.15
900 1,033.15
1,210 1,343.15
886
Consolidation schedule for Trinidad – statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
for the year ended 31 December 20X8
Trinidad Tobago Total (W2) (W3 (ii)) (W6) Consolidated
(6/12)
$’m $’m $’m $’m $’m $’m $’m
PBIT 100 10 110 110
Profit on disposal 60 20.3 80.3
Share of profit of 2.1 2.1
Tobago
Tax (40) (4) (44) (44)
Profit for year 60 6 66
148.4
OCI net of tax 10 3 13 13

Share of OCI of 1.05 1.05
associate
TCI 70 9 79
162.45
Profit attributable
to:
Owners of 60 4.2 64.2 60 20.3 2.1 146.6
Trinidad
NCI 1.8 1.8 1.8
TCI attributable
to:
Owners of 70 6.3 76.3 60 20.3 3.15 159.75
Trinidad
NCI 2.7 2.7 2.7
1 Timeline
1.1.X8 30.6.X8 31.12.X8
SOCI
Subsidiary – 6/12 Associate – 6/12
Group gain on Equity account

disposal in SOFP
2 Parent gain on disposal

The disposal has not been recognised in Trinidad’s accounts. This is achieved by ($’m):
DEBIT Cash 120
CREDIT Investment (120/2) 60
CREDIT Gain on disposal 60
To recognise the disposal in Trinidad’s accounts.
Note that the gain on disposal is accumulated in retained earnings in the statement of
financial position.
887
Financial Reporting
3 Group gain on disposal

The group gain on disposal is calculated as follows:
$’m $’m
Fair value of consideration received 120.0
Fair value of 35% investment retained 130.0
Less share of carrying amount when control lost
Net assets 190 – (18 × 6/12) 181.0
Goodwill (W4) 61.4
Less non-controlling interests (W5) (72.7)
(169.7)
80.3
This incorporates two elements:
(i) A gain of $ 70million on the revaluation of the retained holding from cost of $60million
to fair value of $130million
(ii) A gain of $10.3 million on the disposal.
The parent and group gains on the disposal of the 35% holding are reconciled as follows:
$’m $’m
Group gain on disposal 10.3
Group share of S’s profits from acquisition to disposal
date
Disposal date (90 – (18  6/12)) 81
Acquisition date (10)
 70% 71 49.7
Parent gain on disposal 60
Therefore by recognising the parent’s gain (W2), we have already recognised the group gain
on disposal together with 70% of the profits made by Tobago for the period that it was a
subsidiary of Trinidad.
(i) Adjustment must, however, be made for the $70million gain on the revaluation of the
retained 35% ($’m):
DEBIT Investment in associate 70
To recognise the fair value uplift to the retained holding.
(ii) In addition for reporting purposes, the group gain on disposal rather than the parent
gain must be reported in the consolidated statement of profit or loss ($’m):
DEBIT Retained earnings (80.3-60) 20.3
CREDIT Profit on disposal (SPLOCI) 20.3
To ensure that the group gain is reported in profit or loss.
Note that this journal cancels out within retained earnings; the journal is to achieve the
correct presentation only.
888
4 Goodwill – Tobago
$’m $’m
Consideration transferred 120.0
Non-controlling interests (FV) 51.4
Less:
Share capital 100
Retained reserves 10
(110.0)
61.4
5 Non-controlling interests at date of disposal

$’m $’m
Non-controlling interest at acquisition (FV) 51.4
NCI share of post-acqn retained earnings (30%  71(W4)) 21.3
72.7
6 Investment in associate
The group share of the profits and in the associate since 30 June 20X8 are 35% of (6/12m 
$ 12 million) ie $ 2.1million. The group share of OCI is 35%  6/12m  $ 6 million = $ 1.05
million. These are recognised by ($’m):
DEBIT Investment in associate 3.15
CREDIT Share of profits of associate 3.15
CREDIT Share of OCI of associate 1.05
To recognise group share of the associate’s profits since the disposal date.
The credit entries accumulate in retained reserves in the statement of financial position.
7 Retained reserves b/f - proof
Trinidad Tobago
$’m $’m
Per Q 330.0 72
Less: Pre-acquisition retained reserves - (10)
330.0 62
Tobago – Share of post-acq. ret'd reserves (62  70%) 43.4
373.4
889
Financial Reporting
Answer 5
(a) Goodwill (at date control obtained)
$m $m
Non-controlling interests (750  20%) 150
Fair value of previously held equity interest 130
760
Less: Fair value of identifiable assets acquired and
liabilities assumed
Share capital 300
7 (750)
10
(b) Profit on derecognition of investment
$m
Fair value at date control obtained 130
Cost (120)
10
890
Exam practice
Most Capital Limited 54 minutes

Assume that you are Ms. Pindy Lee, the accounting manager of Most Capital Limited ('MCL'). MCL
is a company incorporated and listed in Hong Kong and is principally engaged in the manufacturing
of sanitary ware.
As at 1 April 20X7, MCL had two subsidiaries, First Successful Limited ('FSL') and Second Winning
Limited ('SWL'). A summary of the acquisitions of these subsidiaries by MCL is as follows:
Retained
% Cost of earnings at Net assets at
Date of acquisition acquired investment acquisition date acquisition date
$'000 $'000 $'000
FSL 31 March 20X6 70 20,000 15,000 25,000
SWL 31 March 20X6 60 10,000 7,000 15,000
The fair value of the identifiable net assets of these subsidiaries at the respective date of
acquisition was the same as the carrying amount of those assets. All goodwill arising on the
acquisitions was found to be fully impaired so was written off in the consolidated financial
statements for the year ended 31 March 20X7.
The retained earnings of MCL, FSL and SWL, as at 31 March 20X7, were $32 million, $20 million
and $8 million respectively. The companies did not have any reserves other than retained earnings.
The details of the issued share capital of MCL, FSL and SWL as at 31 March 20X7 are as follows:
Issued Number of
capital shares
$ million million
MCL 60 10
FSL 10 5
SWL 8 8
MCL made a rights issue of one share for every two ordinary shares that was fully exercised on
1 January 20X8. The exercise price was $9 per share and the fair value of one ordinary share of
MCL immediately before the rights issue was $12. The issued share capital of FSL and SWL has
not changed since their acquisition by MCL.
891
Financial Reporting
The following table summarises information from the three companies' statements of profit or loss
for the year ended 31 March 20X8:
MCL FSL SWL
$'000 $'000 $'000
Revenue 300,000 140,000 72,500
Cost of sales (243,000) (112,000) (58,000)
Gross profit 57,000 28,000 14,500
Distribution costs (15,000) (7,500) (4,000)
Administrative expenses (10,000) (5,000) (2,500)
Depreciation and amortisation (3,000) (1,500) (1,000)
Profit from operations 29,000 14,000 7,000
Finance costs 4,000 (2,000) (1,000)
Profit before tax 25,000 12,000 6,000
Tax (7,000) (5,000) (2,000)
Profit of the year 18,000 7,000 4,000
On 30 September 20X7, MCL sold 2.4 million shares in SWL for $8 million. The gain on this
disposal has not been included in the above statements of profit or loss. The fair value of the
remaining holding was $5 million at the date of disposal.
On 31 March 20X8, MCL sold all its plant and equipment, with an original purchase cost of
$20 million and a carrying amount of $12 million, to a bank for its fair value of $16 million cash.
MCL then leased the plant and equipment back from the bank under a finance lease over four
years. The lease arrangement called for annual year-end payments of $1.6 million. At the end of
the lease term, the bank is obligated to return the plant and equipment to MCL at an amount that
has the overall effect, taking into account the lease payments, of providing the bank with a yield of
the best lending rate minus 1% per annum. The remaining useful lives of the plant and equipment
at 31 March 20X8 ranged from 8 to 10 years. No entries relating to the disposal have been
recorded by MCL and the group.
During the year ended 31 March 20X8, FSL sold goods to MCL at an invoiced value of
$1 million. FSL usually sold goods at cost plus 25%. Half of the goods were still held in MCL's
inventory at 31 March 20X8.
MCL has adopted an accounting policy which depreciates plant and equipment using the straight
line method over a 10-year life with no residual value. It is also the group's policy that interests in
subsidiaries and associates are carried at cost in the separate financial statements and non-
controlling interests are valued using the proportion of net assets method. SWL's results for the six
months ended 30 September 20X7 were exactly half of its annual results in the year ended
31 March 20X8.
You have then added the gain on disposal of investment in SWL into MCL's financial statements
and prepared draft consolidated financial statements of MCL for the year ended 31 March 20X8.
After you sent these draft consolidated financial statements to MCL's directors for review, one of
the directors, who is not a certified public accountant, sent you an email as follows:
892
To: Pindy LEE, Accounting Manager, MCL

From: Faria LEE (Director)
c.c.: Beverly CHOW, Emily WILSCON, Charmaine YUEN (Directors)
Date: 18 May 20X8
Consolidated financial statements of MCL as at 31 March 20X8
Could you please clarify the following points relating to MCL's draft consolidated financial
statements which I have just reviewed.
(a) So far as I understand, we have already disposed of all our plant and equipment. I am not
aware that we have purchased any new plant and equipment. Why is there still an amount
of $12 million of plant and equipment in the consolidated statement of financial position?
(b) I find two new items, namely an 'Investment in an associate' in the consolidated balance
sheet and a 'Share of profit of an associate' in the consolidated statement of profit or loss for
the year ended 31 March 20X8. Why are these items with the consolidated financial
statements?
(c) I note that the amount of gain on disposal of our investment in SWL as shown in our
separate statement of profit or loss and that in the consolidated statement of profit or loss
are different. Why is there such a difference?
(d) I note that MCL made a rights issue during the year. Will this have any impact on the EPS of
MCL for the year?
I would appreciate your clarification in time for the upcoming board meeting.
Best regards,
Faria
Required
Prepare a memorandum in response to the issues raised by Ms. Faria Lee. In your memorandum,
you should:
(a) discuss the reasons for the amount of $12 million of plant and equipment as shown in the
consolidated statement of financial position; (5 marks)
(b) discuss how MCL should account for its interest in SWL before and after the disposal of the
2.4 million shares in SWL (no computation is expected in this part); (10 marks)
(c) discuss why the amount of the gain on disposal of the investment in SWL as shown in the
separate statement of profit or loss and in the consolidated statement of profit or loss is
different; and (5 marks)
(d) discuss with appropriate calculation, the impact of the rights issue on the earnings per share
of MCL for the year ended 31 March 20X8. (10 marks)
(Total = 30 marks)
893
Financial Reporting
894
chapter 31
Consolidation of foreign
operations
Topic list
1 HKAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates

1.1 Objective
1.2 Definitions
2 Foreign currency transactions in individual company accounts
2.1 Foreign currency transactions: initial recognition
2.2 Foreign currency transactions: settlement before the period end
2.3 Foreign currency transactions: settlement after the period end
2.4 Recognition of exchange differences
3 Consolidation of foreign operations
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Translation of financial statements to presentation currency
3.3 Exchange differences
3.4 Further matters relating to the consolidation of foreign operations
Learning focus
We conclude the coverage of group accounts with a chapter on consolidating foreign

subsidiaries.
The issue of foreign currency, be it recording a few foreign currency transactions or
consolidating several foreign currency subsidiaries, is relevant to a large number of
companies. It is therefore important that you understand how transactions and financial
statements are translated, and how the resulting exchange differences are recognised.
Once the translaton has been done, the general principles of consolidation apply.
895
Financial Reporting
Learning outcomes
Competency
level
Reporting Standards
3.19 The effects of changes in foreign exchange rates 2
3.19.01 Determine the functional currency of an entity in accordance with
HKAS 21
3.19.02 Translate foreign operation financial statements to the presentation
currency
3.19.03 Account for foreign currency transactions within an individual
company and in the consolidated financial statements
3.19.04 Account for disposal or partial disposal of a foreign operation
896
31: Consolidation of foreign operations | Part D Group financial statements
1 HKAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange

Rates
Topic highlights
HKAS 21 provides accounting guidance on the translation of foreign currency transactions and
foreign currency financial statements. It prescribes which exchange rates should be used and how
exchange differences are recognised.
HKAS 21.1-2 1.1 Objective

An entity may be involved in foreign activities in two ways:
(a) It may be involved in transactions in foreign currencies, such as buying or selling goods.
For example, an Indian company might buy materials from Canada, pay for them in US
dollars, and then sell its finished goods in Germany receiving payment in Euros, or perhaps
in some other currency. If the company owes money in a foreign currency at the end of the
accounting year, or holds assets which were bought in a foreign currency, those liabilities or
assets must be translated into the local currency (in this Learning Pack $), in order to be
shown in the books of account.
(b) It may have foreign operations, for example an overseas subsidiary. This subsidiary is
likely to trade, and keep accounts, in its own local currency. However, in order to consolidate
its results into the group accounts, its financial statements must be translated into the
currency in which the group reports.
HKAS 21 provides guidance on how foreign currency transactions should be translated and
accounted for, and how the financial statements of foreign operations should be translated into a
presentation currency prior to consolidation.
In particular, the standard considers:
 which exchange rate to use, and
 how exchange differences should be recognised in the financial statements.
Sections 2 and 3 of this chapter deal with foreign currency transactions in individual companies and
the translation of foreign currency financial statements. First, however, we must consider a number
of important definitions.

The following definitions are given within HKAS 21:
Key terms
Foreign currency is a currency other than the functional currency of the entity.
Functional currency is the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity
operates.
Presentation currency is the currency in which the financial statements are presented.
Exchange rate is the ratio of exchange for two currencies.
Exchange difference is the difference resulting from translating a given number of units of one
currency into another currency at different exchange rates.
Spot exchange rate is the exchange rate for immediate delivery.
897
Financial Reporting
Key terms (cont'd)

Closing rate is the spot exchange rate at the end of the reporting period.
Monetary items are units of currency held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in a
fixed or determinable number of units of currency.
Foreign operation is an entity that is a subsidiary, associate, joint venture or branch of a reporting
entity, the activities of which are based or conducted in a country or currency other than those of
Net investment in a foreign operation is the amount of the reporting entity's interest in the net
assets of that operation. (HKAS 21)
1.2.1 Functional and presentation currencies

As defined above, the functional currency of an entity is the currency of the primary economic
environment in which the entity operates, in other words the currency in which it normally spends
and receives cash.
Each entity should determine its functional currency and measure its results and financial position
in that currency.
For most individual companies the functional currency will be the currency of the country in which
they are located and in which they carry out most of their transactions.
Regardless of its functional currency, an entity can choose any currency to be its presentation
currency i.e. the currency in which the financial statements are presented.
HKAS 21.9- 1.2.2 Determining functional currency
10
HKAS 21 states that there are both primary factors and secondary factors should be considered in
determining functional currency.
Primary factors
(a) The currency that mainly influences sales prices for goods and services (often the
currency in which prices are denominated and settled).
(b) The currency of the country whose competitive forces and regulations mainly determine
the sales prices of its goods and services.
(c) The currency that mainly influences labour, material and other costs of providing goods
or services (often the currency in which prices are denominated and settled).
If the primary factors are sufficient to determine the functional currency, there is no need to
consider secondary factors. If not, however, the following secondary factors may also provide
evidence of an entity's functional currency.
Secondary factors
(a) The currency in which funds from financing activities (raising loans and issuing equity) are
generated.
(b) The currency in which receipts from operating activities are usually retained.
HKAS 21.11 1.2.3 Determining whether a foreign operation has the same functional
currency as the parent
Where a parent has a foreign operation a number of factors are considered in order to decide
whether the functional currency is the same as that of the parent:
(a) Whether the activities of the foreign operation are carried out as an extension of the
parent, rather than being carried out with a significant degree of autonomy.
(b) Whether transactions with the parent are a high or a low proportion of the foreign
operation's activities.
898
(c) Whether cash flows from the activities of the foreign operation directly affect the cash
flows of the parent and are readily available for remittance to it.
(d) Whether the activities of the foreign operation are financed from its own cash flows or by
borrowing from the parent.
Where these indicators are mixed, management must use judgment, giving priority to primary
factors in section 1.2.2 above.
Example: Foreign operation

State in each of the following cases whether the foreign operation has the same functional currency
as the parent:
(a) Lomas Co. operates in Thailand, selling goods manufactured by its parent company Real
Co., based in Hong Kong. All sales proceeds are remitted to Real Co. on a monthly basis.
(b) Ariadne Co. operates in South Africa. It imports 30% of the goods it sells from its Australian
parent company Thor Co.; the remainder come from third party suppliers. Ariadne usually
maintains cash reserves in South African Rand, however as a result of expansion has
recently utilised these and supplemented them with borrowings from the Bank of South
Africa.
Solution
(a) Lomas operates as an extension of Real, therefore it can be concluded that its functional
currency is the same as that of Real.
(b) Ariadne obviously has a significant degree of automony:
– 70% of purchases are from third party suppliers.
– Cash reserves (when available) are maintained in local currency.
– It is able to secure (and presumably service) borrowings in its own right rather than
rely on the parent company.
We can therefore conclude that the functional currency of Ariadne is the Rand.
HKAS 21.13,
35 1.2.4 Change in functional currency
The functional currency of an entity can be changed only if there is a change to the underlying
transactions, events and conditions that are relevant to the entity. For example, an entity's functional
currency may change if there is a change in the currency that mainly influences the sales price of
goods and services.
Where there is a change in an entity's functional currency, the entity translates all items into the
new functional currency prospectively (i.e., from the date of the change) using the exchange rate
at the date of the change.
Hong Kong Foods (‘HKF’) acquired 52% of the ordinary shares of another company, T42Co., on 1
May 20X7. T42 Co. is located in India and operates several tea plantations.
The income of T42 Co. is denominated and settled in rupees. The output of the tea plantations is
routinely traded in rupees and its price is determined initially by local supply and demand. T42 Co.
pays 40% of its costs and expenses in Hong Kong Dollars with the remainder being incurred locally
and settled in rupees. T42’s management has a considerable degree of authority and autonomy in
carrying out the operations of T42 and is not dependent upon HKF or other group companies for
finance.
899
Financial Reporting
Required
Recommend which currency is the functional currency of T42 Co., applying the principles set out in
HKAS 21.
2 Foreign currency transactions in individual company

accounts
Topic highlights
Foreign currency transactions are initially translated at the spot rate on the transaction date.
Balances relating to monetary items are re-translated at the reporting date. An exchange gain or
loss may be recognised on re-translation and settlement.
It is increasingly common for individual entities to engage in transactions denominated in a foreign

currency. They may:
 sell to foreign customers
 buy from foreign suppliers
 borrow from foreign banks.
In each of these instances the foreign currency transaction must be translated to the functional
currency of the entity before it is recorded in the accounts. Where a balance denominated in
foreign currency remains at the period end, this may require re-translating.
HKAS
21.21,22
2.1 Foreign currency transactions: initial recognition
HKAS 21 states that a foreign currency transaction should initially be translated to the functional
currency, by applying the spot exchange rate between the reporting currency and the foreign
currency at the date of the transaction.
An average rate for a period may be used if exchange rates do not fluctuate significantly.
For example, suppose a local company buys a large consignment of goods from a supplier in
Singapore. The order is placed on 1 March and the agreed price is SG$124,000. At the time of
delivery the rate of foreign exchange was SG$4 to $1. The local company would record the amount
owed in its books as follows.
$ $
DEBIT Purchases (124,000 ÷ 4) 31,000
CREDIT Payables account 31,000
2.2 Foreign currency transactions: settlement before the period

end
When the outstanding foreign currency balance is settled, an exchange difference is likely to arise.
This is because exchange rates commonly fluctuate.
To consider the example given above, let's assume that the Singapore supplier is paid on 1 July,
and on this date the rate of exchange was SG$5 to $1. The local company is obliged to pay
SG$124,000, and can obtain this amount on 1 July for $24,800 (SG$124,000 ÷ 5). The company
has therefore made an exchange gain of $6,200, being the difference between the amount of the
payable in the books and the amount actually paid:
$ $
DEBIT Payables account 31,000
CREDIT Cash 24,800
Exchange gain 6,200
900
2.3 Foreign currency transactions: settlement after the period end

HKAS 21.23
Where a foreign currency balance is not settled before the end of the reporting period, it may
require re-translating for inclusion in the period end accounts.
HKAS 21 requires that foreign currency balances are classified as either monetary or non-
monetary for this purpose. Monetary items are cash or amounts that will be settled in cash, for
example receivables, payables and loans. Non-monetary items are balances such as non-current
assets and inventories which do not involve a transfer of cash.
The following rules apply at each period end:
(a) Monetary items are re-translated using the closing rate.
(b) Non-monetary items which are carried at historical cost are not re-translated (i.e. they
continue to be reported based on the spot exchange rate on the date of acquisition).
(c) Non-monetary items which are carried at fair value are not re-translated (i.e. they continue to
be reported based on the exchange rates that existed when fair value was determined).
Example: Exchange
Silk Co. sells goods to a Japanese company on 1 May 20X9, and agrees that payment should be
made in Japanese Yen at a price of ¥116,000 at the end of July 20X9. Silk Co. prepares its
accounts to 30 June. Relevant exchange rates are:
1 May 20X9 ¥10.75 to $1
30 June 20X9 ¥11 to $1
31 July 20X9 ¥11.6 to $1
Silk Co. would record the sale as follows:
$ $
DEBIT Receivables account (¥116,000 ÷ 10.75) 10,791
CREDIT Sales 10,791
At the period end, Silk Co must re-translate the receivable amount based on the spot rate on
30 June 20X9. The re-translated receivables balance will be $10,545 (¥116,000 ÷ 11). Therefore:
$ $
DEBIT Exchange loss 246
CREDIT Receivables account ($10,791 – $10,545) 246
An exchange loss arises as the receivables amount has lost value in $.
When the ¥116,000 are paid at the end of July, Silk Co. will convert them into $, to obtain
(¥116,000 ÷ 11.6) $10,000. Therefore, a further loss arises:
$ $
DEBIT Cash 10,000
Exchange loss 545
CREDIT Receivables account 10,545
HKAS 21.28 - 2.4 Recognition of exchange differences

29
As we have seen, exchange differences arise where the exchange rate changes between the
transaction date and the reporting and settlement date.
These exchange differences should be recognised in profit or loss:
 Exchange differences relating to items settled in the period in which they arise are
recognised in that period.
 Exchange differences relating to items which are not settled in the period in which they arise
are recognised in more than one period:
901
Financial Reporting
– At each reporting date an exchange difference is recognised on re-translation

– At the settlement date a further exchange difference is recognised.
Exchange differences relating to trading items (such as receivables and payables) are usually
recognised as operating expenses or income, and exchange differences relating to financing are
usually recognised as part of interest expense or income.
HKAS 12 Income Taxes should be applied when there are tax effects arising from gains or losses
on foreign currency transactions. Where exchange losses are allowable expenses in a particular
jurisdiction, tax relief will be given. Exchange gains may be treated as taxable income.
FineRt is a retailer of artworks and sculptures. The company has a year end of 31 December 20X1
and uses $ as its functional currency. On 28 October 20X1, FineRt purchased 10 paintings from a
supplier for 920,000 pesas each, a total of 9,200,000 pesas.
Exchange rates were as follows:
28 October 20X1 $1:1.8 pesa
12 December 20X1 $1:1.9 pesa
31 December 20X1 $1:2.0 pesa
1 February 20X2 $1:2.4 pesa
FineRt sold seven of the paintings for cash on 12 December 20X1 with the remaining three
paintings being sold on 1 February 20X2. All 10 of the paintings were paid for by FineRt on
1 February 20X2.
Required
What accounting entries are made in respect of the payable amount on each of the key dates?
When a gain or loss on a non-monetary item is recognised in other comprehensive income (for
example, where property is revalued), any related exchange differences should also be
recognised in other comprehensive income.
3 Consolidation of foreign operations

Topic highlights
Individual group entities must translate their financial statements into a common group presentation
currency prior to consolidation by applying the method specified in HKAS 21.
3.1 Introduction
Now that you have covered the main aspects of foreign currency translation in a single company
context, you are ready to tackle consolidation of foreign operations (usually a subsidiary). Apart
from the foreign currency aspects, the usual consolidation rules apply (intra-group transactions,
non-controlling interest etc). Look back to Chapters 27 to 30 if unsure of any of these rules.
HKAS 21.38-
40
3.2 Translation of financial statements to presentation currency
An individual entity may choose to present its financial statements in any currency, including one
which is different from its functional currency.
Where a group contains individual entities with different functional currencies, each of their financial
statements must be translated into a common presentation currency prior to consolidation.
902
Where financial statements are required to be translated into a presentation currency, and the
functional currency of the reporting entity is not hyperinflationary, the following procedures are
applied:
(a) Assets and liabilities in the statement of financial position are translated at the closing rate at
the year end.
(b) Income and expenses in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income are
translated at the spot rates applicable on the dates of the transactions, although an average
rate is usually used for practical purposes where the exchange rate does not fluctuate
significantly.
(c) Resulting exchange differences are recognised in other comprehensive income.
Share capital is translated at the historical rate on the date of acquisition and reserves form a
balancing figure to include the exchange difference.
HKAS 21.41 3.3 Exchange differences

The exchange difference arising on the translation of financial statements to the presentation
currency is due to:
 translating income/expense items at the exchange rates at the date of transactions (or
average rate), whereas assets/liabilities are translated at the closing rate
 translating the opening net investment (opening net assets) in the foreign entity at a
closing rate different from the closing rate at which it was previously reported .
The exchange difference for inclusion within other comprehensive income can therefore be
calculated in the following way:
$ $
Opening net assets at closing rate X
Opening net assets at opening rate (X)
Exchange gain/(loss) X/(X)
Retained profits at closing rate X
Retained profits at average rate (X)
Exchange gain/loss X/(X)
Overall exchange gain/loss X/(X)
The gain or loss is accumulated in reserves in the consolidated statement of financial position.
Where a subsidiary in which an exchange difference arises is not wholly-owned, a proportion of
accumulated exchange differences is allocated to the non-controlling interest and therefore form
part of the non-controlling interest in the consolidated statement of financial position.
HKAS 12 Income Taxes should be applied when there are tax effects arising on the translation of
the financial statements of foreign operations.
Example: Exchange difference

Stockpot has a wholly-owned foreign subsidiary, Crockpot, with net assets at 1 January 20X1 of
N$800 million. Crockpot made a profit for the year ending 31 December 20X1 of N$280 million.
The functional currency of Crockpot is the N$.
Stockpot’s consolidated financial statements were prepared to 31 December 20X1 and the
presentation currency is Hong Kong dollars.
Exchange rates were as follows:
1 January 20X1 N$2.0:$1
31 December 20X1 N$3.0:$1
Average rate for 20X1 N$2.5:$1
903
Financial Reporting
Required
(a) How would the exchange gain or loss on the investment in Crockpot be recognised in the
consolidated financial statements of Stockpot for the year ending 31 December 20X1
assuming that Stockpot maintains a foreign exchange reserve?
(b) How would your answer differ if Stockpot held 80% of the shares in Crockpot rather than
100%?
Solution
(a) Calculation of exchange difference $m $m
Net assets at 1 January 20X1 at rate on 31.12.X0 N$800 @ 2.0 400
Net assets at 1 January 20X1 at rate on 31.12.X1 N$800 @ 3.0 267 133 loss
Profit for the year at average rate N$280 @ 2.5 112

Profit for the year at 31 December 20X1 rate N$280 @ 3.0 93 19 loss
152 loss
INCOME FOR STOCKPOT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X1 (EXTRACT)
Other comprehensive income $m
Exchange difference on translating foreign operations (152)
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION FOR STOCKPOT AT 31

DECEMBER 20X1 (EXTRACT)
Foreign exchange reserve (152)
(b) If Stockpot owned 80% rather than 100% of Crockpot, the exchange difference is allocated
between the group and non-controlling interest in proportion to their respective ownership
interests.

INCOME FOR STOCKPOT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X1 (EXTRACT)
Other comprehensive income $m
Exchange difference on translating foreign operations (152)
Allocated to group (80%) (122)

Allocated to non-controlling interest (20%) (30)
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION FOR STOCKPOT AT 31

DECEMBER 20X1 (EXTRACT)
Foreign exchange reserve (122)

Non-controlling interest (30)
904
Example: Translation of foreign subsidiary financial statements

Mariol Co. operates in Rhineland and has identified the Gilder as its functional currency. The
summarised financial statements of Mariol for the year ended 31 December 20X1 are as follows:
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION Gilder 000
Current assets
Inventory 350
Receivables 500
Cash 160
2,410
Share capital 600

Liabilities 460
2,410

Revenue 3,500
Expenses (1,150)
Tax (170)
190
At the start of December, Mariol issued an invoice for goods provided to a new customer, Blarney
Co., based in Liffeland. The invoice was denominated in Punt, as agreed with the customer, and
was for Pt 1.2 million. This invoice is not reflected in the financial statements above and at the
period end remains unpaid.
100% of the share capital of Mariol was purchased by Rhonda Co. on 1 January 20X1 and Rhonda
requires Mariol to translate its financial statements into $ before reporting its financial results.
Relevant exchange rates are:
Gilder:$ Punt: Gilder
1 January 20X1 1:8.5 not known
1 December 20X1 1:9 5:1
31 December 20X1 1:10 5.5:1
Average for 20X1 1:8 not known
Required
Prepare the translated financial statements of Mariol ready for submission to its parent company.
Solution
First the transaction with Blarney must be reflected in the financial statements:
1 December 20X1 Gilder 000 Gilder 000
DEBIT Receivables (1,200/5) 240
CREDIT Sales 240
To record the transaction at the point of sale.
31 December 20X1
DEBIT Exchange loss (240 – (1,200/5.5)) 22
CREDIT Receivables 22
To measure the receivables at the year end.
905
Financial Reporting
Next the financial statements are translated:

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION Gilder 000 Gilder 000 Exch. rate $'000
Property, plant and equipment 1,400 1:10 14,000
Current assets
Inventory 350 1:10 3,500
Receivables 500 + 240 718 1:10 7,180
– 22
Cash 160 1:10 1,600
2,628 26,280
Share capital 600 1:8.5 5,100
Retained earnings 1,350 + 1,568 β 13,124
240 – 22
Foreign exchange reserve (W) 3,456
Liabilities 460 1:10 4,600
2,628 26,280
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS
AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE
INCOME
Revenue 3,500 + 3,740 1:8 29,920
240
Cost of sales (1,990) 1:8 (15,920)
Expenses (1,150) 1:8 (9,200)
Exchange loss (0+22) (0+22) 1:8 (176)
Tax (170) 1:8 (1,360)
408 3,264
Exchange gain on translation (W) 3,456
Total comprehensive income 6,720
WORKING
Exchange gain
Opening net assets G1,760 At OR 8.5 14,960
At CR 10 17,600
2,640 gain
Retained profits G408 At AR 8 3,264
At CR 10 4,080
816 gain
Overall gain 3,456
3.4 Further matters relating to the consolidation of foreign

operations
HKAS 21.47 3.4.1 Goodwill and fair value adjustments
Goodwill arising under HKFRS 3 Business Combinations from the acquisition of a foreign operation
should initially be calculated in the functional currency of the subsidiary. It is then treated as an
asset of the foreign operation and should be translated at the closing rate each year.
Similarly, any fair value adjustments made on consolidation are treated as an asset or liability of the
foreign operation and are translated at closing rate each year.
906
The exchange differences arising are recorded as other comprehensive income in the consolidated
accounts and accumulated in group equity.
Example: Goodwill
Surf Co. acquired 100% of Wave Co. for consideration of ¥78.6 million (foreign currency) on 1 April
20X8 when the net assets of Wave Co. were ¥66 million. Surf Co.'s presentation currency is the $
and relevant exchange rates are:
1 April 20X8 ¥12:$1
31 March 20X9 ¥11:$1
At what amount is goodwill recognised in the consolidated statement of financial position on
31 March 20X9 and what amount is recognised as an exchange difference on goodwill for the
period?
Solution
Goodwill
¥'000 Rate $'000
Net assets of Wave at 1 April 20X8 (66,000)
At 1 April 20X8 12,600 12 * 1,050
Foreign exchange gain – Balance 95
At 31 March 20X9 12,600 11 ** 1,145
* Historical rate
** Closing rate
Goodwill is therefore reported in the statement of financial position at $1,145,000 and an exchange
gain of $95,000 is recognised in other comprehensive income.
HKAS 3.4.2 Intragroup balances and exchange differences

21.32,45
When a parent has a foreign subsidiary, consolidation procedures are applied as normal.
Therefore, intra-group transactions and balances are eliminated.
However, transactions between parent and foreign subsidiary can lead to exchange gains and
losses in the individual books and records of each entity. These exchange gains and losses are
recognised in the profit or loss of each entity in accordance with the normal rules in transactions in
foreign currencies.
On consolidation any exchange gains and losses in the individual profit or loss of parent and
subsidiary which do not eliminate are reported in the consolidated profit or loss.
There is one exception to this rule: where exchange differences arise on a long term intra-group
loan from parent to subsidiary that is not planned or likely to be received or paid in the foreseeable
future.
In this case, the balance is regarded as part of the parent's investment in the foreign subsidiary.
Therefore, the exchange gain or loss arising on the translation of this balance, which was
recognised in the profit or loss in the parent's separate financial statements, is recognised in
other comprehensive income in the consolidated financial statements. This will require a
consolidation adjustment transferring the gain or loss from the parent's own profit or loss where it
was initially recognised to other comprehensive income in the consolidated accounts.
3.4.3 Different reporting dates
Because of different laws in different countries, it can happen that the foreign operation's reporting
date is different from that of the parent. In this case HKFRS 10 allows the use of the foreign
operation's accounts as at its own reporting date to be consolidated with the accounts of the parent
907
Financial Reporting
as at the parent's own reporting date as long as the foreign operation’s reporting date is within
three months of the parent’s. However, adjustments are made for any significant changes in
exchange rates which took place in the intervening period between the two dates.
HKAS 21.48- 3.4.4 Disposal of foreign entity
49
A parent may dispose or part dispose of its foreign subsidiary. For this purpose, a full disposal
includes:
 a disposal of all interests held in a subsidiary
 any disposal where control over the subsidiary is lost.
A part disposal is any other reduction in ownership in a foreign subsidiary i.e. where control is
retained.
Full disposal
On disposal, a profit or loss on disposal is calculated as normal. In addition, historical cumulative
exchange differences arising on consolidation and included in group reserves up to the date of
disposal are reclassified to profit or loss.
Therefore the gain or loss on disposal is made up of two elements:
1 The actual gain or loss on disposal
2 The reclassified cumulative exchange differences
This means that these exchange differences are effectively recognised twice. The first time they
are recognised in other comprehensive income as they arise each period on consolidation. They
are then recognised for a second time, albeit in a different place, when they are transferred to the
profit or loss on disposal. This double recognition is sometimes called recycling of profits or losses.
Note that the cumulative exchange differences that have been attributed to the non-controlling
interests are derecognised as part of the non-controlling interest balance. They therefore have an
impact on the gain or loss calculated on disposal, as discussed in Chapter 30.
Partial disposal
If the parent part disposes of a foreign subsidiary such that it still retains control after the disposal,
the cumulative exchange differences previously recognised in other comprehensive income are re-
allocated between the group and non-controlling interest in proportion to the new ownership
interests.
Trinity acquired 90% of its foreign subsidiary Merrion on 1 January 20X2. Merrion is based in
Uberland where the local currency is the Uber (U). Trinity's investment in Merrion cost U68 million
and on the acquisition date, the retained earnings of Merrion amounted to U66 million.
The statements of financial position of the two companies at 31 December 20X4 are as follows:
Trinity Merrion
$'000 U'000
Non-current assets
Property plant and equipment 128,000 112,500
Investments 34,000 –
162,000 112,500
Current assets
Receivables 17,500 22,500
Cash 3,500 2,500
195,000 152,500
908
Trinity Merrion
$'000 U'000
Equity
126,000 84,000
Long-term borrowings 20,000 12,000
Deferred tax 15,500 20,000
35,500 32,000
Current liabilities
Trade payables 19,500 18,500
Tax 12,000 10,000
Bank overdraft 2,000 8,000
33,500 36,500
195,000 152,500
The following information is relevant:
(1) As a result of the movement in exchange rates, Trinity have decided to impair the goodwill
arising on the acquisition of Merrion in full at 31 December 20X3.
(2) Trinity measures the non-controlling interest as a proportion of the fair value of the net
assets of the acquiree.
(3) During 20X3 Merrion began selling goods to Trinity, achieving a margin of 25%. At the
reporting date, Trinity held goods in stock which it had purchased from Merrion on the last
day of the year for U2.5 million. Trinity had recorded these goods using the closing exchange
rate of U2.5:$1.
(4) Merrion reported profits of U6 million and U8 million in the years ended 31 December 20X2
and 20X3 respectively. It has paid no dividends in either year.
Exchange rates are as follows:
1 January 20X2 U2.0:$1
Average for 20X2 U2.1:$1
31 December 20X2 U2.2:$1
1 August 20X3 U2.3:$1
31 December 20X3 U2.5:$1
Average for 20X3 U2.4:$1
Required
Translate the statement of financial position of Merrion at 31 December 20X3 into $ and prepare
the consolidated statement of financial position of the Trinity group at 31 December 20X3.
You should work to the nearest $'000.
909
Financial Reporting
Topic recap
HKAS 21 The Effects of Changes in

Foreign Exchange Rates
Functional currency (FC) is the currency of the primary economic

environment in which the entity operates
Presentation currency (PC) is the currency in which the financial
statements are presented.
To determine functional currency, primary factors:

Currency that influences sales prices
Currency of country whose regulations/competition determines
sales prices
Currency that influences costs
Individual company accounts Consolidated accounts
Apply spot rate to transactions Translate foreign subsidiary accounts to presentation currency
before recording in the accounts
At period end retranslate monetary Statement of financial position:

items at closing rate → exchange all assets and liabilities at closing rate
difference
Record settlement at spot rate on Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income:
settlement date → exchange all income and expenditure at average rate
difference
Recognise exchange differences in Exchange difference arises:

profit or loss
Opening net assets at opening rate X
Opening net assets at closing rate X
X/(X)
Retained profit at average rate X
Retained profit at closing rate X
X/(X)
X/(X)
Recognise exchange difference in other comprehensive income of

subsidiary.
Goodwill/FV adjustments are calculated in functional currency and

translated at closing rate each year. Exchange differences are
recognised in other comprehensive income of group.
Some exchange differences on intragroup balances will not be

eliminated on consolidation; these are reported in group profit or
loss.
On disposal of foreign subsidiary, cumulative exchange

differences in reserves are reclassified to profit or loss.
910
Answer 1
Factors to consider in determining functional currency of T42Co
HKAS 21 The effects of changes in foreign exchange rates defines functional currency as 'the
currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates'. Each entity, whether
an individual company, a parent of a group, or an operation within a group, should determine its
functional currency and measure its results and financial position in that currency.
An entity should consider the following factors:
(1) What is the currency that mainly influences sales prices for goods and services (this will
often be the currency in which sales prices for its goods and services are denominated and
settled)?
(2) What is the currency of the country whose competitive forces and regulations mainly
determine the sales prices of its goods and services?
(3) What is the currency that mainly influences labour, material and other costs of providing
goods or services? (This will often be the currency in which such costs are denominated and
settled.)
Applying the first of these, it appears that T42's functional currency is the rupee. The price it
charges is denominated and settled in rupees and is determined by local supply and demand.
However, when it comes to costs and expenses, T42 pays in a mixture of Hong Kong Dollars and
rupees so that aspect is less clear-cut.
Other factors may also provide evidence of an entity's functional currency:
(1) It is the currency in which funds from financing activities are generated.
(2) It is the currency in which receipts from operating activities are usually retained.
T42 Co. does not depend on group companies for finance. Furthermore, T42 Co. operates with a
considerable degree of autonomy, and is not under the control of the parent as regards finance or
management. It also generates sufficient cash flows to meet its cash needs. These aspects point
away from the Hong Kong Dollar as the functional currency.
The position is not clear-cut, and there are arguments on both sides. However, on balance it is the
rupee that should be considered as the functional currency, since this most faithfully represents the
economic reality of the transactions, both operating and financing, and the autonomy of T42 Co. in
relation to the parent company.
Answer 2
28 October 20X1
The paintings are purchases and the purchase is translated into $ using the spot rate (i.e. the
exchange rate on the date of the transaction):
$ $
DEBIT Purchases (9.2m/1.8) 5,111,111
CREDIT Payable 5,111,111
31 December 20X1
At the year end, the payable balance is re-translated using the closing rate (the exchange rate at
the period end). The resulting gain is recognised in profit or loss for the year:
Retranslate payable to 9.2m/2 = $4.6m
911
Financial Reporting
DEBIT Payable 511,111

CREDIT Exchange gain 511,111
1 February 20X2
On the settlement date, an exchange gain arises, being the difference between the cash required
to purchase 9.2 million pesas and the carrying value of the payable extinguished:
DEBIT Payable 4,600,000
CREDIT Cash (9.2m/2.4) 3,833,333
Exchange gain 766,667
Answer 3
Consolidated statement of financial position for the Trinity Group at 31 December 20X3
Trinity Merrion W3 W4(i) W4(ii) W4(iii) W5 W6 Consolidated
$000 $000 $000 $000 $000 $000 $000 $000 $000
Property plant and equipment 128,000 45,000 173,000
Investments 34,000 – (34,000) –
Goodwill 2,500 (500) (2,000) –
162,000 45,000 173,000
Inventories 12,000 6,000 (250) 17,750
Receivables 17,500 9,000 26,500
Cash 3,500 1,000 4,500
195,000 61,000 221,750
Share capital 10,000 2,000 (2,000) 10,000
Retained earnings 116,000 39,190 (33,000) (2,000) (619) (225) 119,346
FX reserve (7,590) 759 (500) (7,331)
NCI (759) 3,500 619 (25) 3,335
126,000 33,600 125,350
Long-term borrowings 20,000 4,800 24,800
Deferred tax 15,500 8,000 23,500
35,500 12,800 48,300
Trade payables 19,500 7,400 26,900
Tax 12,000 4,000 16,000
Bank overdraft 2,000 3,200 5,200
33,500 14,600 48,100
195,000 61,000 221,750
Workings
1 Translation of Merrion's statement of financial position
Merrion Rate Merrion
U'000 $'000
Non-current assets
Property plant and equipment 112,500 2.5 45,000
Current assets
Inventories 15,000 2.5 6,000
Receivables 22,500 2.5 9,000
Cash 2,500 2.5 1,000
152,500 61,000
Equity
Share capital 4,000 2 2,000
Pre-acquisition retained earnings 66,000 2 33,000
Post-acquisition retained earnings 14,000 W2 6,190
Exchange difference W3 (7,590)
84,000 33,600
912
Merrion Rate Merrion

U'000 $'000
Long-term borrowings 12,000 2.5 4,800
Deferred tax 20,000 2.5 8,000
32,000 12,800
Current liabilities
Trade payables 18,500 2.5 7,400
Tax 10,000 2.5 4,000
Bank overdraft 8,000 2.5 3,200
36,500 14,600
152,500 61,000
2 Translation of post-acquisition retained earnings
Year Profits Exchange Profits
U’000 Rate $’000
20X2 6,000 2.1 2,857
20X3 8,000 2.4 3,333
6,190
3 Exchange differences
The exchange difference since acquisition must be calculated
Arising in 20X2
Opening net assets $ $
Opening rate (70,000,000/2.0) (35,000,000)
Closing rate (70,000,000/2.2) 31,818,182
Loss (3,181,818)
Profit for the year
Average rate (6,000,000/2.1) (2,857,143)
Closing rate (6,000,000/2.2) 2,727,273
Loss (129,870)
Exchange loss for the year (3,311,688)
Arising in 20X3
Opening net assets (84m – 8m) $ $
Opening rate (76,000,000/2.2) (34,545,454)
Closing rate (76,000,000/2.5) 30,400,000
Loss (4,145,454)
Profit for the year
Average rate (8,000,000/2.4) (3,333,333)
Closing rate (8,000,000/2.5) 3,200,000
Loss (133,333)
Exchange loss for the year (4,278,787)
$
Exchange loss in 20X2 3,311,688
Exchange loss in 20X3 4,278,787
Cumulative exchange loss in the exchange rate reserve 7,590,475
To the nearest ‘000 7,590
On consolidation, the NCI share of the exchange loss is allocated to the NCI by ($’000):
DEBIT NCI 759
CREDIT Foreign exchange reserve (10%  7,590) 759
913
Financial Reporting
4 Goodwill
U'000 $’000
Consideration 68,000
NCI (10%  70m) 7,000
Net assets (66 + 4) (70,000)
Goodwill 5,000
Retranslation of goodwill
At 1.1.X3 5,000 2 2,500
At 31.12.X3 5,000 2.5 2,000
Foreign exchange reserve 500
(i) The consolidation journal to originally recognise the acquisition is ($'000):
DEBIT Share capital (U4,000/2) 2,000
CREDIT NCI (U7,000/2) 3,500
CREDIT Investment (U68,000/2) 34,000
(ii) The retranslation of goodwill is effected by ($'000):
DEBIT Foreign exchange reserve 500
CREDIT Goodwill 500
(iii) The goodwill impairment is effected by ($'000):
CREDIT Goodwill 2,000
5 Post acquisition retained earnings
The NCI is allocated its share of post acquisition retained earnings being $6,190,000  10%
= $619,000 ($'000):
DEBIT Retained earnings 619
CREDIT NCI 619
6 Unrealised profit
Merrion has charged a margin of 25% and therefore 25% of the cost to Trinity is profit. The
unrealised profit on the $1m (U2.5m/2.5) is therefore $250,000.
The seller is Merrion and therefore 10% of the profit is attributable to the NCI ($'000):
DEBIT Retained earnings (90%) 225
DEBIT NCI (10%) 25
CREDIT Inventory 250
914
Exam practice
Home 27 minutes
The statements of profit or loss for Home and its wholly owned subsidiary Foreign for the year
ended 31 July 20X6 are shown below.
Home Foreign
$'000 Crowns '000
Revenue 3,000 650
Cost of sales (2,400) (550)
Finance costs (15) (10)
Profit (loss) before tax 385 (38)
Income tax (102) 10
Profit (loss) for the year 283 (28)
Notes
1 The presentation currency of the group is the HK $ and Foreign's functional currency is the
Crown.
2 Home acquired 100% of the ordinary share capital of Foreign on 1 August 20X4 for 204,000
Crowns. Foreign's share capital at that date comprised 1,000 ordinary shares of 1 Crown
each, and its reserves were 180,000 Crowns. In view of its subsidiary's losses, Home's
directors conducted an impairment review of the goodwill at 31 July 20X6. They concluded
that the goodwill had lost 20% of its value during the year (before taking exchange
differences into account). The impairment should be reflected in the consolidated financial
statements for the year ended 31 July 20X6.
3 On 1 June 20X6, Home purchased an item of plant for 32,000 Florins. At the year end, the
payable amount had not yet been settled. No exchange gain or loss in respect of this item is
reflected in Home's statement of profit or loss above.
4 Exchange rates are as follows:
On 1 August 20X4: 1.7 Crowns = $1
On 31 July 20X6: 2.2 Crowns = $1
Average rate for year ended 31 July 20X6: 2.4 Crowns = $1
On 1 June 20X6: 1.5 Florins = $1
On 31 July 20X6: 1.6 Florins = $1
5 During the year, Foreign made sales of 50,000 Crowns to Home. None of the items
remained in inventory at the year end.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of profit or loss for the Home group for the year ended 31 July
20X6. (Work to the nearest HK $100.) (15 marks)
915
Financial Reporting
916
Answers to exam practice
questions
917
Financial Reporting
918
Answers to exam practice questions
Chapter 1 Legal environment

Question 1
The statement given by the executive director is incorrect.
Section 379 of the new Companies Ordinance requires every company to prepare a statement of
financial position which gives a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company as at the
end of its financial year and a statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income which
gives a true and fair view of the company for the financial year.
Directors are responsible for ensuring that the financial statements are accurate and presented in
accordance with the laws and regulations (e.g. Companies Ordinance and Rules governing the
Listing of Securities of The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited) that apply to the company.
Directors of a company must take all reasonable steps to ensure that proper books and accounts
are kept so as to give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company, and explain its
transactions.
The role of the directors carries a high level of responsibility in respect of financial reporting although
they can employ a professional accountant and delegate the task to the professional accountant.
The statement given by the financial controller is incorrect.
The financial controller, being a professional accountant in business, involved in the preparation
and reporting of the financial or management information made public and used by others inside or
outside the listed company is expected to observe the same fundamental principles set out in the
Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (the ‘Code’) and the same standards of behaviour
and competence as applied to other certified public accountants who work in practising offices.
Section 320.1 of the Code states that a professional accountant in business should prepare or
present the financial information fairly, honestly and in accordance with relevant professional
standards so that the information will be understood in its context.
Section 320.2 states that a professional accountant in business who has responsibility for the
preparation or approval of the general purpose financial statements of an employing organisation
should ensure that those financial statements are presented in accordance with the applicable
financial reporting standards.
HKAS 36.10 requires that irrespective of whether there is any indication of impairment, an entity
shall test goodwill acquired in a business combination for impairment annually. A failure to perform
such impairment tests for the purpose of the preparation of the financial statements constitutes
non-compliance with financial reporting standards.
If the failure was due to the threats to compliance with the fundamental principles, section 320.6 of
the Code states that where it is not possible to reduce the threat to an acceptable level, a
professional accountant in business should refuse to remain associated with information they
consider is, or may be, misleading.
Question 2
Directors have statutory duties and duty of care, skill and diligence laid down in the Companies
Ordinance, as well as common law duties of reasonable care and skill, fiduciary duties in equity,
and must act honestly and in good faith for the benefit of the company.
Directors must act for a proper purpose.
Their conduct is compared to the standard that would be exercised by a reasonably diligent person
having:
(a) The general knowledge, skill and experience that may reasonably be expected of a person
carrying out the functions carried out by the director in relation to the company (objective
test); and
919
Financial Reporting
(b) The general knowledge, skill and experience that the director has (subjective test).
Directors are responsible for the preparation of financial statements in accordance with the
financial reporting framework required by the law or jurisdiction, and for such internal control as the
directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
It is improper to state all the cost of acquisition of the patent as a software licence in the financial
statements in order to mislead the tax authority for the calculation of the tax deductible expenditure.
The creation of fictitious agreements or invoices for recording assets is improper/a fraud.
To make any false statement in connection with a claim for any deduction for tax purposes, or to
prepare or maintain or authorise the preparation or maintenance of any false books of account or
other records, or/and make use of any fraud for tax purposes may constitute an offence under the
relevant tax law.
Chapter 2 Financial reporting framework

Question 1
The statement is incorrect.
HKAS 1.15 states that financial statements shall present a true and fair view of the financial
position, financial performance and cash flows of an entity. A true and fair view requires the faithful
representation of the effects of transactions, other events and conditions in accordance with the
definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, income and expenses set out in the
Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting (the ‘Conceptual Framework’). The application of
HKFRSs, with additional disclosure when necessary, is presumed to result in financial statements
that achieve a true and fair view.
S.4.1 of the Conceptual Framework states that the financial statements are normally prepared on
the assumption that an entity is a going concern and will continue in operation for the foreseeable
future. Hence, it is assumed that the entity has neither the intention nor the need to liquidate or
curtail materially the scale of its operations.
If such an intention or need exists, the financial statements may have to be prepared on a different
basis and, if so, the basis used should be disclosed.
HKAS 1.25 states that an entity shall prepare financial statements on a going concern basis unless
management either intends to liquidate the entity or cease trading, or has no realistic alternative
but to do so.
HKAS 10.14 states that an entity shall not prepare its financial statements on a going concern
basis if management determine after the reporting period either that it intends to liquidate the entity
or to cease trading or has no realistic alternative but to do so.
Under the historical cost basis, assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid
or the fair value of the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition.
Liabilities are recorded at the amount of proceeds received in exchange for the obligation, or in
some circumstances (for example, income taxes), at the amounts of cash or cash equivalents
expected to be paid to satisfy the liability in the normal course of business.
Under the current financial reporting standards, elements of financial statements can be/are
required to be measured at a base other than historical cost. Fair value measurement is
allowed/required for certain assets and liabilities, which may be above or below the value
measured on historical cost basis. Furthermore, inventories should be measured at the lower of
cost and net realisable value according to HKAS 2. Net realisable value is the estimated selling
price of an item of inventory less estimated costs to complete and sell it.
920
For an entity which does not prepare financial statements on a going concern basis, assets and
liabilities which are originally measured at historical cost may need to be measured on realisable
(settlement) value.
When an entity does not prepare financial statements on a going concern basis, it shall disclose
that fact, together with the basis on which it prepared the financial statements and the reason why
the entity is not regarded as a going concern.
Question 2
Mr. Kong’s behaviour is unethical.
As a professional accountant he must comply with the fundamental principles of integrity,
objectivity, professional competence and due care, confidentiality and professional behaviour as
set out in section 100.5 of the Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (the ‘Code’).
A professional accountant in business is expected to encourage an ethics-based culture in an
employing organisation that emphasises the importance that senior management places on ethical
behaviour (300.5 of the Code).
A professional accountant in business should not knowingly engage in any business, occupation,
or activity that impairs or might impair integrity, objectivity or the good reputation of the profession
and as a result would be incompatible with the fundamental principles (300.6 of the Code).
A professional accountant in business who has responsibility for the preparation or approval of the
general purpose financial statements of an employing organisation shall be satisfied that those
financial statements are presented in accordance with the applicable financial reporting standards.
Ms. Yuen has been threatened with dismissal if she does not comply with Mr. Kong's wishes.
However, in complying with Mr. Kong's wishes, Ms. Yuen would become associated with fraudulent
transactions and misleading information and be in direct breach of the fundamental principles laid
out in the Code.
Safeguards should be applied to eliminate threats, such as consultation with superiors within the
employing organisation, the audit committee or those charged with governance of the organisation
or with a relevant professional body.
If Ms. Yuen believes that unethical behaviour or actions by Mr. Kong will continue to occur within
the company, she may consider obtaining legal advice.
In the extreme situation where all available safeguards have been exhausted and it is not possible
to reduce the threat to an acceptable level, Ms. Yuen should refuse to be associated with
information she determines is misleading and may conclude that it is appropriate to resign from the
company (300.15 of the Code).
Question 3
Mr Lee’s behaviour is unethical.
As a professional accountant, he has to comply with the fundamental principles of integrity,
objectivity, professional competence and due care, confidentiality and professional behaviour as
set out in s.100.5 of the Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (the ‘Code’).
When a professional accountant holds a senior position within an organisation, a professional
accountant in business is expected to encourage an ethics-based culture in the employing
organization that emphasizes the importance that senior management places on ethical behaviour
(300.5 of the Code).
A professional accountant in business shall not knowingly engage in any business, occupation, or
activity that impairs or might impair integrity, objectivity or the good reputation of the profession and
as a result would be incompatible with the fundamental principles (300.6 of the Code).
921
Financial Reporting
Self-interest threat may be created as Ms. Wong participates in the incentive compensation
arrangements offered by the entity so that she can get a high bonus if she co-operates with Mr.
Lee.
Safeguards shall be applied to eliminate threats, such as ethics and conduct programmes, policies
and procedures to empower and encourage employees to communicate with senior management
within the entity, the audit committee or those charged with governance of the organisation or
consultation with another appropriate professional accountant (300.14 of the Code).
Ms. Wong should note that creating a forged document is a criminal offence and should refuse to
co-operate.
In circumstances where Ms. Wong believes that unethical behaviour or actions by Mr. Lee will
continue to occur within the company, she may consider obtaining legal advice.
In those extreme situations where all available safeguards have been exhausted and it is not
possible to reduce the threat to an acceptable level, Ms. Wong shall refuse to be or remain
associated with information she determines is misleading and may conclude that it is appropriate to
resign from the company (300.15 of the Code).
Chapter 3 Small company reporting

(a) A private company that is not a member of a group qualifies to report under the SME-FRF
without shareholder approval if it does not exceed two of:
 total annual revenue of $100m
 total assets of $100m at the reporting date
 100 employees
These thresholds must be met for two consecutive years in order to become eligible to use
the SME-FRF in the third year.
STL is comfortably within all of these thresholds in the years ended 31 December 20W8 and
20W9 and so may report under the SME-FRF in the year ended 31 December 20X0. The
company is also within the thresholds in that year.
The company does not meet the total revenue or total assets threshold in the year ended 31
December 20X1. It may, however, continue to report under the SME-FRF as it has not failed
the tests for two consecutive years.
(b) STL is eligible to prepare its financial statements under HKFRS for Private Entities as it does
not have public accountability and publishes general purpose financial statements for
external users.
(c) The statement is partially correct.
Section 17.15 of the HKFRS for Private Entities requires that an entity measures all items of
property, plant and equipment after initial recognition at cost less any accumulated
depreciation and any accumulated impairment losses. Therefore, accounting for impairment
is appropriate.
Only the cost model is allowed. The revaluation model is not an option for the subsequent
measurement of property, plant and equipment.
(d) In accordance with Section 1.3 of the HKFRS for Private Entities, an entity has public
accountability for the purposes of the HKFRS for Private Entities if it is in the process of
issuing publicly traded equity or debt securities.
Only private companies and companies limited by guarantee may satisfy the reporting
exemption criteria set out in s.359 of the new CO for reporting under the SME-FRF and
SME-FRS.
922
Accordingly, for the purpose of incorporation of the historical financial information of STL in
its prospectus, STL is not qualified for reporting under either the SME-FRF or HKFRS for
Private Entities.
Chapter 4 Non-current assets held for sale and

discontinued operations
HKAS 36.18 defines the recoverable amount as the higher of an asset's or cash generating unit's
fair value less costs to sell and its value in use.
Rocket Running Limited ("RR") as a disposal group with an estimated fair value less costs
to sell of HK$85,000,000
HKFRS 5.23 requires an impairment loss recognised for a disposal group to reduce the carrying
amount of the assets in the group that are within the scope of the measurement requirements of
the HKFRS, in order of allocation set out in HKAS 36.104 and 122.
The allocation of the impairment loss is as follows:
Carrying amount Allocation of Carrying
reported impairment amount after
immediately loss allocation of
before impairment
classification as loss
held for sale
HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000

Goodwill 2,400 (2,400) –
Intangible assets 12,500 (1,007) 11,493
Property, plant and
equipment 48,300 (3,893) 44,407
Financial assets held for
trading 8,000 8,000
TOTAL 92,300 (7,300) 85,000
An impairment loss of HK$7,300,000 (HK$92,300,000 less HK$85,000,000) should be recognised

when the group is initially classified as held for sale.
The impairment loss reduces the amount of goodwill first. The residual loss is allocated to other
non-current assets to which the measurement requirements of HKFRS 5 are applicable pro rata
based on the carrying amounts of these assets (i.e. intangible assets and property, plant and
equipment).
Closure of the retailing operation of Soft Walking Limited ("SW") and abandonment of non-
current assets
Super Shoes Limited should not classify the non-current assets of SW as held for sale that are to
be abandoned as their carrying amount would be recovered principally through continuing use.
There is an indication that the assets of SW may be impaired and the recoverable amount should
be estimated in accordance with HKAS 36.18 to 23.
Irrespective of whether there is any indication of impairment, goodwill should be tested for
impairment annually in accordance with HKAS 36.80 to 99.
923
Financial Reporting
The recognition of impairment loss is as follows:

Carrying amount Impairment Carrying
reported loss amount after
immediately recognised allocation of
before impairment impairment
loss
HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000
Goodwill 2,700 (2,700) –
Property, plant and
equipment 18,800 (18,800) –
Inventories 6,400 (2,560) 3,840
TOTAL 29,200 (24,060) 5,140
Goodwill and property, plant and equipment are considered fully impaired as both the fair value
less costs to sell and value in use are nil.
Inventories are stated at net realisable value of 60% of the cost in accordance with HKAS 2.9.
Chapter 5 Property, plant and equipment

Hotel Property One
Land use right is accounted for as an operating lease under HKAS 17.
Carrying amount as at 31 December 20X5
= RMB45,000,000  (1 – 2.5/75)
= RMB43,500,000.
An owner-managed hotel is owner-occupied property, rather than investment property.
Accordingly, the building is treated as property, plant and equipment under HKAS 16 and
measured by the cost model.
Cost of the building (capitalised the amortisation of land cost over the development period)
= RMB303,000,000 + [45,000,000  1.5/75]
= RMB303,900,000.
Accumulated depreciation up to 31 December 20X5 (1 full year)
= RMB303,900,000/ 50  1
= RMB6,078,000.
Carrying amount as of 31 December 20X5
= RMB303,900,000 – 6,078,000
= RMB297,822,000.
Hotel Property Two
The land use right is accounted for as an operating lease under HKAS 17.
Carrying amount as of 31 December 20X5
= RMB48,000,000  (1 – 2.25/60)
= RMB46,200,000.
924
The building is held to earn rental without provision of any ancillary services to the occupant.
Accordingly, the building is treated as investment property under HKAS 40 and stated at fair value
as of 31 December 20X5.
Carrying amount = fair value = RMB340,000,000.
Under HKAS 17, separate measurement of the land and buildings elements is not required when
the lessee's interest in both land and buildings is classified as an investment property in
accordance with HKAS 40 and the fair value model is adopted. Accordingly, there is an alternative
treatment to state the whole property, i.e. both land and building, at RMB440,000,000
(RMB100,000,000 + 340,000,000).
Chapter 6 Investment property

Question 1
Building A – Warehouse
As a warehouse for storage of inventories, it was accounted for as property, plant and equipment
under HKAS 16 prior to the vacating of the warehouse.
At 31 December 20X7, this building should continue to be classified as property, plant and
equipment after removal of the inventories to the new production plant in Shenzhen as CLL has no
intention of selling it.
Accordingly, the building is carried at cost less any accumulated depreciation and any accumulated
impairment loss.
Cost less accumulated depreciation: $20 million  (1– (8/30)) = $14.67 million.
As the fair value of the building ($28 million) is higher than the cost less accumulated depreciation
($14.67 million), no impairment is recognised.
Building B – Director's quarter
As a director's quarter, it was formerly accounted for as property, plant and equipment under
HKAS 16 prior to being vacated.
At 31 December 20X7, this building should be classified as a non-current asset held for sale under
HKFRS 5 as its carrying amount will be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than
through continuing use.
The building was available for immediate sale in its present condition subject only to the terms that
are usual and customary for sales of such assets as it had already been vacated.
Also, as the management of CLL had made the decision to sell the building in a board meeting and
appointed a property agent to actively identify potential buyers, it can assume that a sale is highly
likely.
At 31 December 20X7, the building should be measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair
Carrying amount = $36 million  (1 – (10/30)) = $24 million.
Fair value less costs to sell = $22 million  (1 – 0.5%) = $21.89 million.
Accordingly, Building B is stated at $21.89 million on the statement of financial position as at
31 December 20X7.
Building C – Earning rental income
As a building held for earning rental income, it was accounted for as investment property under
HKAS 40 prior to being vacated.
925
Financial Reporting
As in the case of Building B, this building should be classified as a non-current asset held for sale
under HKFRS 5.
According to HKFRS 5.5, the measurement provisions of HKFRS 5 do not apply to the non-current
assets that are accounted for in accordance with the fair value model in HKAS 40.
Since CLL accounts for investment property at fair value model, Building C will continue to be
measured in accordance with HKAS 40.
The fair value of Building C at 31 December 20X7 is $22 million.
Question 2
(a) Tower A is reclassified from an investment property under HKAS 40 to an owner-occupied
property under HKAS16 upon commencement of occupation for own use at end of March
20X3 (or since April 20X3).
Tower B is treated as an investment property continuously, but transferred from under
construction to completed property upon completion of the construction by end of May
20X3(or since June 20X3).
Tower C is reclassified from owner-occupied property to investment property upon the end of
the owner-occupation from 1 April 20X3.
Tower D is derecognised as an asset from 1 May 20X3 under the sales and operating lease
back arrangement.
(b) Carrying amount at 30 June 20X3:
Tower A – Owner-occupied property stated at cost model
Deemed cost at 31 March 20X3: fair value of HK$26.4 million
Depreciation for 3 months ended 30 June 20X3:
HK$ 26.4 million  (0.25 year / 47.25 years) = HK$ 0.14 million
Cost less accumulated depreciation:
HK$26.4 million – 0.14 million = HK$26.26 million
Tower B – investment property stated at fair value of HKD19.2 million
Tower C – investment property stated at fair value of HKD40.0 million
(c) Amounts recognised in the income statement for the six months ended 30 June 20X3:
Fair value gain on investment properties = HK$2 million
Tower A: HK$26.4 million – 25.8 million = HK$0.6 million
Tower B: HK$19.2 million – (14.2 million + 3.8 million) = HK$1.2 million
Tower C: HK$40.0 million – (38.0 million + 1.8 million) = HK$0.2 million
Depreciation of owner-occupied properties = HK$0.41 million
Tower A: HK$0.14 million
Tower C: HK$30 million  (0.25/50) or (3mths/ 600mths)= HK$0.15 million
Tower D: HK$18 million / 50  4/12 or HK$18 million / 600 mths  4mths = HK$0.12 million
Gain on disposal of owner-occupied property = HK$13.02 million
Tower D: HK$30 million – (17.1 million - 0.12 million) = HK$13.02 million
Operating lease expense of Tower D = HK$0.16 million (HK$0.08 million x 2)
926
Amount recognised in the other comprehensive income for the six months ended
30 June 20X3:
Revaluation gain on reclassification of owner-occupied property to investment property
Tower C: HK$38.0 million – (28.5 million - 0.15 million) = HK$9.65 million
Chapter 7 Government grants

Question 1
The $10,000,000 government grant falls under the requirements of HKAS 20 Accounting for
Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance, which defines government grants
as assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in return for past or
future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the entity.
According to HKAS 20, PMT should not recognise the grant until there is reasonable assurance
that it will comply with the conditions attaching to them and the grants will be received.
That is, if PMT has no plan, or it is unlikely that PMT will meet the employment targets within the
next four years, PMT should not recognise the government grant.
If there is reasonable assurance that PMT will comply with the conditions, PMT should recognise
the government grant as income over the periods necessary to match the grant with the related
costs which it is intended to compensate, i.e. the $25,000,000 acquisition cost of the equipment, on
a systematic basis.
PMT may either set up the government grant as deferred income of $10,000,000 and amortise it
over eight years on a straight line basis; or
PMT may deduct the government grant of $10,000,000 in arriving at the carrying amount of the
equipment for its research and development centre, i.e. the initial carrying amount of the equipment
would be $15,000,000.
Question 2
Interest-free loan from government
According to HKAS 20.10A, the benefit of a government loan at a below-market rate, which is
defined as assistance by the government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in return
for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the entity.
In this case, the loan shall be recognised and measured in accordance with the existing accounting
standard for financial instruments and the benefit of the below-market rate of interest shall be
measured as the difference between the initial carrying value of the loan determined in accordance
with the existing accounting standard for financial instruments and the proceeds received. The
benefit should be accounted for as a government grant in accordance with HKAS 20.
MHL Group should consider the conditions and obligations that have been, or must be, met when
identifying the costs for which the benefit of the loan is intended to compensate.
According to HKAS 20.7, MHL Group should not recognise the grant until there is reasonable
assurance that it will comply with the conditions attaching to them and the grant will be received.
Therefore, if it is unlikely that MHL Group will meet the employment targets within the next five
years, MHL Group should not recognise the government grant.
If there is reasonable assurance that MHL Group will comply with the conditions, MHL Group
should recognise the government grant as income over the periods necessary to match the grant
with the related costs which it is intended to compensate, i.e. the $50 million acquisition cost of the
equipment, on a systematic basis.
927
Financial Reporting
Presentation of grants related to assets

Government grants related to assets shall be presented in the statement of financial position either
by setting up the grant as deferred income or by deducting the grant in arriving at the carrying
amount of the asset (HKAS 20.24).
MHL Group may:
 set up the government grant as a deferred income and amortise it over ten years on a
straight-line basis; or
 deduct the government grant in calculating the carrying amount of the equipment for its
research and development centre. The grant is recognised in profit or loss over the life of
the depreciable asset as a reduced depreciation expense.
Chapter 8 Intangible assets and impairment of assets

Question 1
YM is required to assess at each reporting date whether there is any indication that an asset may
be impaired. If any such indication exists, YM must estimate the recoverable amount of the asset.
The closure of the production plant and return of the leasehold land to the government is
considered as an indicator of possible impairment of assets for YM, i.e. a significant change with an
adverse effect on the entity has taken place in the period or is expected to in the near future with
the result that the asset's expected use or useful life will change.
An impairment test of assets, other than inventories in this case, involves comparing the carrying
amount of the asset with its recoverable amount.
HKAS 36.2a specifies that inventories are outside the scope of the standard. Instead the
requirements of HKAS 2 are applied. This requires inventories to be measured at the lower of cost
and net realisable value.
Net realisable value is the estimated selling price of an item of inventory less estimated costs to
complete and sell it.
Building and infrastructure:
This should be presented as property, plant and equipment rather than an asset available for sale,
as it is to be abandoned.
The recoverable amount at 31 May 20Y1 is the higher of:
 fair value less costs to sell = nil
 value in use = the present value of the future cash flows expected to be derived from the
operation from June to end of August 20Y1.
An impairment loss must be recognised calculated as the excess of $23.8 million over the
estimated value in use.
The provision for dismantling must be increased to $3 million by September 20Y1. Assuming the
time value of money for the four months from June to September 20Y1 is ignored, an additional
$1.5 million is therefore recognised.
Production equipment:
This is presented as property, plant and equipment as YM do not plan to dispose of it.
The recoverable amount at 31 May 20Y1 is equal to the carrying amount of $48 million.
No impairment loss is recognised as YM can continue to use the equipment in another
manufacturing plant.
928
No provision for relocation and installation cost is recognised as there is no present obligation at
31 May 20Y1.
Electricity generator:
This is presented as property, plant and equipment, as YM intend to continue manufacturing until
the end of August 20Y1 and it is expected that the electricity generator would not be available for
immediate sale as at 31 May 20Y1.
It is measured at the lower of carrying amount and recoverable amount.
The recoverable amount is the higher of:
 fair value less costs to sell = $4 million
Assuming the value in use is less than the fair value less costs to sell of $4 million, the impairment
loss recognised is $1.2 million ($5.2 million – $4 million).
Land under operating lease:
This is presented as a prepaid lease payment as YM intends to continue manufacturing and so use
the land until the end of August 20Y1 and therefore the land would not be available for immediate
sale as at 31 May 20Y1. It is measured at the lower of carrying amount and recoverable amount.
The recoverable amount is the higher of:
 fair value less costs to sell = not less than $35 million (assuming the costs to sell is minimal)
No impairment is recognised as the recoverable amount is expected to be greater than the carrying
amount of $13 million.
Inventories – raw material:
These are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
The cost is $8.4 million.
As it is expected that all the raw materials will be consumed for the production of tiles and sales at
a profit, the net realisable value is higher than the cost.
Therefore the inventories are measured at $8.4million.
Inventories – finished products:
Again these are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
The cost is $6.4million.
Net realisable value is
 $3.2 million  100/80 = $4 million for that half of the goods made to order
 $3.2 million  40% = $1.28 million for the remaining half of the goods
The goods are therefore measured at $4.48 million, being:
 $3.2 million (cost) for that half of the goods made to order
 $1.28 million (NRV) for the remaining half of the goods.
929
Financial Reporting
Question 2
(a) Based on the information provided in the question, the significant deterioration of Run Pro’s
sales performance is an impairment indicator. When such an indication exists, the entity
shall estimate the recoverable amount of the asset of Run Pro.
The brand, being an intangible asset with indefinite useful life, and therefore no amortisation
is recognised, is required to be tested for impairment at least annually, irrespective of
whether there is any indication of impairment.
Accordingly, WSL is required to perform an asset impairment review in both Run Pro and
Jog Pro at 30 June 20X2.
(b) An asset or cash generating unit (CGU) is considered to be impaired when its recoverable
amount declines below its carrying amount.
The recoverable amount of an asset or a CGU is the higher of its fair value less costs to sell
and its value in use.
The recoverable amount is determined for an individual asset, unless the asset does not
generate cash inflows that are largely independent of those from other assets or groups of
assets.
If that is the case, the recoverable amount is determined for the CGU to which the asset
belongs, unless either:
The asset’s fair value less costs to sell is higher than its carrying amount; or
The asset’s value in use can be estimated to be close to its fair value less costs to sell and
fair value less costs to sell can be determined.
A CGU is the smallest group of assets that generates largely independent cash inflows. This
may be a single asset or group of assets.
Based on the information provided, each brand is considered as a cash generating unit.
The value in use of the group of assets (i.e. the intangible asset, plant and equipment,
developed cost capitalised and inventories) under individual brands and fair value less costs
to sell of each of the two brands and individual categories of assets are determinable.
HKAS 36 has a bottom-up approach to impairment testing.
It is incorrect to compare the aggregate value in use with the total net assets of both brands
to determine whether an individual brand or other asset is impaired.
(c)
Run Pro Jog Pro
$'000 $'000
Net assets of the CGU, other than inventories (a) 71,000 33,000
Value in use of the CGU (b) 64,000 60,000
Fair value less cost to sell of the CGU (c) 60,000 58,000
The recoverable amount (d) (The higher of (b) and (c)) 64,000 60,000
Recoverable amount > Carrying amount of assets under the CGU NO YES
Impairment issue YES NO
Excess of net assets over the recoverable amount (d) – (a) = (e) (7,000)
According to the result above, the brand "Run Pro" is considered impaired and the
impairment loss, HK$7 million, should be first allocated pro-rata on the basis of the carrying
amount of each individual assets.
930
Allocation of impairment loss on pro-rata basis:

Carrying Impairment After
value Pro-rated allocation
$'000 $'000 $'000
Brand 25,000 (7,000 x 25/71) 2,465 22,535
Plant and equipment 40,000 (7,000 x 40/71) 3,944 36,056 (note 1)
Development cost 6,000 (7,000 x 6/71) 591 5,409 (note 2)
71,000 7,000 64,000
When allocating an impairment loss to individual assets within a CGU, the carrying amount
of an individual asset should not be reduced below the highest of (i) its fair value less costs
to sell (if determinable); (ii) its value in use (if determinable); and (iii) zero.
If this results in an amount being allocated to an asset which is less than its pro rata share of
the impairment loss, the excess is allocated to the remaining assets within the CGU on a pro
rated basis.
Note 1: Plant and Equipment
Fair value less cost to sell (f) 36,000
Carrying amount (g) 40,000
(f) – (g) = (h) (4,000)
Note 2: Development cost

Capitalized without determinable fair value less costs to sell nor 6,000
value in use (i)
Both development cost and plant & equipment fulfilled the requirement above and no excess
impairment loss should reallocate to other assets.
Chapter 9 Leases
(a) Purchase option regarding classification of the lease by SRC
According to HKAS 17.10, if the lessee (SRC) has the option to purchase the asset at a price
that is expected to be sufficiently lower than the fair value at the date the option becomes
exercisable for it to be reasonably certain, at the inception of the lease, that the option will be
exercised, it would normally lead to a lease being classified as a finance lease.
The option price is $10,000. In view of the fact that SRC estimated the economic useful life
of the leased equipment to be eight years while the lease term is just five years, plus the fair
value of the leased equipment at 1 January 20X7 is $227,500, it is reasonable to expect that
the option price is sufficiently lower than the then fair value after five years. Therefore, SRC
should classify the lease as a finance lease.
(b) 12.93% is the implicit rate that, at the inception of the lease, causes the aggregate present
value of the minimum lease payment and the unguaranteed residual value to be equal to the
fair value of the leased asset:
931
Financial Reporting
Present
Annual Unguaranteed value
lease residual at implicit rate
Date payment value 12.93%
$ $ $
01/01/20X7 53,069 53,069
01/01/20X8 53,069 46,993 = 53,069 / (1.1293)1
01/01/20X9 53,069 41,612 = 53,069 / (1.1293)2
01/01/20Y0 53,069 36,848 = 53,069 / (1.1293)3
01/01/20Y1 53,069 32,629 = 53,069 / (1.1293)4
31/12/20Y1 30,000 16,333 = 30,000 / (1.1293)5
227,484
Year Balance of lease Annual lease Interest Balance of lease

net investment payment 12.93% net investment
at 1 Jan at 31 Dec at 31 Dec
$ $ $ $
20X7 227,500 53,069 22,554 196,985
20X8 196,985 53,069 18,608 162,524
20X9 162,524 53,069 14,153 123,608
20Y0 123,608 53,069 9,121 79,660
20Y1 79,660 53,069 3,438 30,029
(c) Journal entries that TMI should make for each of the years ended 31 December 20X7 and
20X8:
20X7 $ $
DEBIT Lease payment receivable 227,500
CREDIT Revenue 227,500
To record the revenue and the lease payment receivable for the
finance lease of the equipment.
DEBIT Cost of sales 200,000
To record the cost of sales for the finance lease of the equipment.
DEBIT Cash 53,069
CREDIT Lease payment receivable 53,069
To record the receipt of the lease payment.
To record the interest income for the year recognised at the
implicit rate.
20X8
DEBIT Cash 53,069
CREDIT Lease payment receivable 53,069
To record the receipt of the lease payment.
To record the interest income for the year recognised at the
implicit rate.
932
Chapter 10 Inventories
(a) Net realisable value of inventories is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of
business less the estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make
the sale.
Assessment of impairment of property, plant and equipment involves comparing the carrying
amount of the asset with its recoverable amount, which is the higher of its fair value less
costs of disposal and its value in use.
Fair value less costs of disposal is the amount obtainable from the sale of an asset or cash
generating unit in an arm’s length transaction between knowledgeable, willing parties, less
the costs of disposal.
Value in use is the present value of the future cash flows expected to be derived from an
asset or cash-generating unit.
(b) The Final Order provides indicator that only 500,000 units would be sold at a price above the
unit cost.
If there is no possible way to sell them to other customers, the net realisable value of the
remaining 300,000 units will be nil, a write down of inventories up to $3,600,000 (300,000 x
$12) would be recognised.
The inventories of the finished goods, after write down the inventories, will be carried at
$6,000,000 as at 31 October 20X3.
For raw material purchased for the production of this model and work in progress under
production, net realisable value is assessed with consideration of alternative use and their
estimated selling price.
For the moulds used to produce the item concerned, a total of 10 months depreciation of
$250,000 has been recognised and the carrying amount as at 31 October 20X3 is $200,000.
The Final Order provides indicators that there would be no more new sales of the items and
therefore the mould should be subject to impairment testing.
Value in use is considered nil and the recoverable amount should be determined based on
fair value less costs to sell. Given the estimated selling price of scrap metal is $10,000, an
impairment of $190,000 will be recognised.
Chapter 11 Provisions, contingent liabilities and

contingent assets
Question 1
(a) Under HKAS 37, a provision should be recognised when and only when:
An entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, and it is
probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle
the obligation, and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
According to HKAS 37.19, it is only those obligations arising from past events that exist
independently of the reporting entity's future actions that are recognised as provisions.
The provision for the late delivery penalty is a provision for future operating losses as the
delivery date of the 7,000,000 units of rechargeable battery is 31 August 20X8.
Since the delivery will be expected on 10 September 20X8, the compensation per unit will be
$0.1 per unit (10 days  $0.01) and the total compensation will be $700,000.
This compensation will reduce the expected gross profit, but will not result in an onerous
contract for DCL.
Accordingly, no provision is required for this late delivery penalty as at 30 June 20X8.
933
Financial Reporting
(b) As at 30 June 20X8, DCL has no obligation to perform the safety inspection of the production
line, accordingly no provision should be recognised.
The cost for the inspection should be recognised as expense when incurred.
OR
The information provided in the question has not stated whether DCL, by an established
pattern of past practice, published policies or a sufficiently specific current statement, has
indicated to other parties that it must carry out the safety inspection on an annual basis and
therefore, it has created a valid expectation on the other parties in respect of this activity.
If there is evidence to prove the above, this can be considered as a constructive obligation
and therefore a provision should be provided.
(c) Any future loss on sales of aged finished goods should be considered in the measurement of
the net realisable value of the inventory under HKAS 2 instead of HKAS 37.
The net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less
the estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale.
Sales of finished goods at a price below the cost immediately after the date of the statement
of financial position (July 20X8) is a strong indicator of the amount of net realisable value at
30 June 20X8.
Accordingly, this should be recorded as a write down of inventories and no separate
provision should be recognised in the current liabilities.
(d) DCL has an obligation to pay the bonus to two executive directors in accordance with the
directors' service contract.
It should be possible to make a reliable estimate of the provision amount based on the
amount of profit before tax and the accrued bonus.
Accordingly, a provision should be recognised as at 30 June 20X8.
Question 2
A provision should be recognised when and only when:
 An entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;
 It is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to
settle the obligation; and
 A reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
Provision for discount coupon
XP had the obligation to give the discount upon issue of the letter and before the expiry date.
As XP is still able to make a profit, after the deduction of HK$500, for the sales of the new printer,
there are no outflow of resources nor transfer of economic benefits.
It may be possible for XP to make an estimate of number of new sales with the usage of the
discount coupon should there have been a similar scheme in the past.
Conclusion:
A provision should only be recognised when all the conditions under HKAS 37.14 are met.
No provision should be recognised at 31 March 20X3. Accordingly, the provision for the discount
coupon of HK$750,000 should be reversed.
934
Warranty provision
XP has a contractual obligation to provide the free of charge repair service.
XP needs to incur and has incurred the cost for labour and parts replacement for the repair service,
there will be a transfer of economic benefits.
It is presumed that XP can make an estimate of the amount to be incurred for the provision of the
repair service in respect of the product sales made in the year based on the historical performance.
Conclusion:
A provision should be recognised at 31 March 20X3.
The amount recognised should be the best estimate of the expenditure recognised to settle the
present obligation at the end of the reporting period.
With the presumption that the ratio of expenditure incurred to the sales of the past five years is a
reliable estimate of the amount to be incurred for repair services, XP should adjust downward the
provision to an amount ranging from HK$2.80 million (HK$437 million x 0.64%) to HK$4.37 million
(HK$437 million x 1%).
OR
Assuming 0.8% of the sales is considered to be the best estimate of the amount to be incurred for
the repair service, XP can adjust downward to approximately HK$3.5 million (437 million  0.8%).
Litigation provision
XP is considered to have an obligation to compensate the plaintiff that arises from a past sales
transaction.
The compensation of cash payment represents a transfer of economic benefits for XP.
It is presumed that XP could make an estimate of the compensation amount taking into
consideration the offer given by XP and counter-offer from the plaintiff approved by the Board.
The payment made in April is an adjusting event after the reporting period.
Conclusion:
The provision should be adjusted downward to HK$5,650,000, i.e. HK$5 million compensation to
plaintiff and HK$650,000 legal fee for provided services.
(b) Disagree with the comment:
No provision should be recognised at 31 March 20X3 for the cost of television advertising to
be launched after the end of the reporting period because:
 The agreement is executory and XP had no present obligation (or XP had future
obligation only) for the future services to be received from the counter-party.
 HKAS 37 does not allow artificial ‘smoothing” of results by early recognition in the
profit or loss before the costs are actually incurred.
935
Financial Reporting
Chapter 12 Construction contracts

(a)
Amounts recognised in profit or loss for the year ended 30 September 2012:
Contract A Contract B Total
$'000 $'000 $'000
Revenue W1 9,800 26,000 35,800
Cost of services recognised W2 (8,400) (27,150) (35,550)
Profits (loss) recognised 1,400 (1,150) 250
Working:
1 Revenue:
$'000 $'000
Contract sum certified and billed to date 28,000 26,000
Less: Revenue previously recognised up to (18,200) ---
30 September 2011
9,800 26,000
2 Cost of service recognised:

$'000 $'000
Total agreed contract sum 42,000 65,000
% of completion 28,000 / 42,000 x 100% 26,000 / 65,000 x 10%
= 66.67% =40%
Revised estimated total contract 36,000 x 100% 63,000 x 105%

cost
= 36,000 = 66,150
Cost to recognised 36,000 x 66.67% 66,150 x 40%

= 24,000 = 26,460
Less: Cost recognised up to 30 (15,600) --

September 2011
Sub-total [A] = 8,400 = 26,460
Foreseeable loss recognised for Contract B:

$'000
Estimated contract sum 65,000
Revised estimated total contract (66,150)
cost
Foreseeable loss (1,150)
Less loss recognised (26,000 – 460

26,460)
Additional loss to recognise[B] (690)
Total cost of service recognised
[A]+[B] 8,400 27,150
936
Alternative for Contract B:

Contract B
$'000
Revised estimated total contract cost (63,000  105%) 66,150
Less total contract sum (65,000)
Total loss to be recognised, including foreseeable loss 1,150
Revenue recognised 26,000

Add total lost to be recognised 1,150
Total cost of service recognised 27,150
(b)
The amounts to be disclosed and presented under HKAS 11 at 30 September 2012:
Contract A Contract B Total
$'000 $'000 $'000
Costs incurred 25,600 30,000 55,600
Recognised profits (loss) W1 4,000 (1,150) 2,850
Progress billings (28,000) (26,000) (54,000)
Amount due from customers for contract works 1,600 2,850 4,450
Receivable W2 5,200 2,500 7,700

Working:
1. Recognised profits for contract A:
Alternative 1 = $28,000,000 × (42,000,000 – 36,000,000) /42,000,000 = $4,000,000
Alternative 2 = $18,200,000 – 15,600,000 + 1,400,000 = $4,000,000
Alternative 3 = (42,000,000 – 36,000,000 × 66.67% = 4,000,000
2. Receivable:
Contract A: ($28,000,000 – 22,800,000 = $5,200,000)
Contract B: ($26,000,000 – 23,500,000 = $2,500,000)
Chapter 13 Share-based payment

(a)
On 1 July 20X1
DEBIT Staff expense HK$960,000
CREDIT Equity – share-based payment reserve HK$960,000
{240  8,000  HK$(8 – 7.50)}
On 30 April 20X2
DEBIT Equity – Share-based payment reserve HK$40,000
DEBIT Cash HK$600,000
CREDIT Capital/Equity HK$640,000
(10  8,000  HK$0.5) and (10  8,000  HK$7.5)
On 30 June 20X2
DEBIT Staff expense HK$1,836,000
CREDIT Equity – share-based payment reserve HK$1,836,000
(240  85%  12,000  HK$1.5 / 2)
937
Financial Reporting
(b) Managerial staff who leave during the two-year period will forfeit their rights to the share
options. Accordingly, those staff who left during the vesting period will not be entitled to any
share-based benefit.
Under HKFRS 2, the share-based payment expense recognised in each year of the vesting
period should be based on the best available estimate of the number of equity instruments
expected to vest.
The estimate should be revised if subsequent information indicates that the number of equity
instruments expected to vest differs from previous estimates.
On the vesting date, the entity should revise the estimate to equal the number of equity
instruments that actually vest.
Chapter 14 Revenue
(a) (i) Counter sales at department stores:
NFL has the primary responsibility for providing the goods to the customers of
department stores with its sales team.
NFL retains inventory risk as the ownership of the goods has not been transferred to
department stores.
NFL has latitude in establishing prices while the department stores will only share 20%
of the invoice amounts for the service provided.
Customers' credit risk is borne by the department stores but it is considered as a weak
indicator for department store operation.
Taking into consideration the features listed above, it is considered that NFL acts as a
principal because it has exposure to the significant risks and rewards associated with
the sale of goods while the department stores act as an agent and service provider
rather than customers of NFL.
Significant risks and rewards of ownership are transferred to the department store
customers when they acquire possession of the goods and invoices are issued by the
department store.
The return or exchange offered to the customers represents only an insignificant risk
of ownership as past history demonstrates that the return rate is insignificant.
Revenue is therefore recognised at the time of sale to the department store
customers.
The amount recognised as revenue of NFL is the gross selling price charged to the
customers.
The 20 per cent of the retail prices retained by the department stores is a selling and
distribution expense of NFL and is not offset against the revenue.
(ii) Distributors:
NFL has no primary responsibility for providing the goods to their retail store
customers.
NFL does not bear inventory risk after the delivery of goods to distributors as the
goods are non-returnable unless there are quality problems.
Although NFL has latitude in establishing price charges for the goods to be sold by the
distributors at their own retail store, it is the distributors to bear their customers’ credit
risk.
938
Taking into consideration the features listed above, we can conclude that the
distributors are acting as principal rather than agent of NFL as they have exposure to
the significant risks and rewards associated with the sales of goods at their own retail
stores. The distributors are therefore considered to be the customers of NFL.
Revenue is recognised by NFL when the goods are delivered and accepted by the
distributors either after their quality inspection or after the 7 days return period has
elapsed.
The amount recognised as the revenue of NFL is the invoice price, i.e. 50% of the pre-
determined retail price of the items delivered and accepted by the distributors.
(b) HKAS 18.10 states that the amount of revenue arising on a transaction is usually determined
by agreement between the entity and the buyer. It is measured at the fair value of the
consideration received or receivable taking into account the amount of any trade discounts
and volume rebates allowed by the entity.
NFL should estimate the distributors to whom the company is likely to give the volume
discount, i.e. annual quantity delivery will be above 100,000 pieces, at the time of sale on a
monthly basis, and recognise revenue net of the amount of volume discount.
The final discount will be true up to the end of the year for the actual amount of discount
given. The discount should be presented as a reduction in revenue.
Chapter 15 Income taxes

Question 1
(a) Current tax computation
Current tax for the year: HK$43,122,000  18% = HK$7,761,960
Current tax payable at 30 September 20X2: HK$7,761,960 – HK$4,600,000
= HK$3,161,960
(b) Deferred tax computation
Deferred tax charge for the year:
Temporary difference on plant and equipment:
Carrying amount = HK$94,334,000 – HK$15,933,000
= HK$78,401,000
Tax base = HK$(94,334,000 – 4,388,000 – 38,500,000) + (HK$4,388,000  (1–10%))
= HK$51,446,000 + HK$3,949,200
= HK$55,395,200
Taxable temporary difference = HK$78,401,000 – 55,395,200 = HK$23,005,800
Alternative method for calculation of temporary difference:
Depreciation allowance of HK$38,500,000
Less: Deprecation charged to P/L of HK$15,933,000
Add: Depreciation charged to P/L attributable to non-deductible item of HK$438,800
(HK$4,388,000  10%)
= HK$23,005,800
Deductible temporary difference on government grant: HK$9,600,000 – HK$1,200,000
= HK$8,400,000
939
Financial Reporting
Deductible temporary difference on warranty provision: HK$4,200,000 – HK$1,248,000

= HK$2,952,000
Net taxable temporary difference: HK$23,005,800 – HK$8,400,000 – HK$2,952,000
= HK$11,653,800
Deferred tax charge and liabilities recognised = HK$11,653,800  20%
= HK$2,330,760
(c) Tax reconciliation for the year ended 30 September 20X2:
Reconciliation at 18% Reconciliation at 20%
Profit before tax HK$54,018,000 HK$54,018,000
HK$ HK$
Tax thereon 9,723,240 10,803,600
Tax effect on non-taxable income (187,020) (207,800)
[HK$1,039,000]
Tax effect on non-deductible expense 323,424 359,360
[HK$1,358,000 + (HK$4,388,000  10%)]
Tax effect on 2% tax rate deduction N/A (862,440)
[HK$43,122,000  2%]
Deferred tax recognised at different tax 233,076 N/A
rate [HK$11,653,800  2%]
Tax charge for the year 10,092,720 10,092,720
(HK$7,761,960 + 2,330,760)
Question 2
Temporary differences at 30 September 20X3 = Carrying amount less tax base
Where tax base of asset = Carrying amount – taxable amount + deductible amount
Patent:
Carrying amount = HK$4.5 million x 1/5 = HK$0.9 million
Tax base = HK$(0.9 – 0.9 + 0) = 0
Temporary difference is HK$0.9 million.
Deferred tax at 30 September 20X3:
Patent being a non-tax deductible expenditure and the initial recognition is not part of a business
combination and does not affect either accounting profit or taxable profit, therefore no deferred tax
liability should be recognised.
Software licence:
Carrying amount = HK$2.4 million x 1/5 = HK$0.48 million
Tax base = HK$(0.48 – 0.48 + 0) = 0
Temporary difference is HK$0.48 million.
Deferred tax at 30 September 20X3:
Deferred tax liability: HK$0.48 million x 30% = HK$144,000
940
Chapter 16 Employee benefits

Question 1
(i)
Obligation Assets Net (SOFP) Net
$'000 $'000 $'000 (SPLOCI)
$'000
20X8 b/f 20,000 20,000 -
Net interest at 8% 1,600 1,600 -
Past service cost 1,000 1,000
Benefits paid (987) (987)
Contributions paid in 1,000
22,863 21,613
Remeasurement losses 137 (113) 250
20X8 c/f 23,000 21,500 1,500
20X9 b/f 23,000 21,500

Net interest at 9% 2,070 1,935 135
Settlement (5,700) (5,400) See below
Benefits paid (1,100) (1,100)
Contributions paid in 1,100
19,700 18,035
Remeasurement losses 700 (195) 895
20X9 c/f 20,400 17,840 2,560
 During 20X8, there is an improvement in the future benefits available under the plan
and as a result there is a past service cost of $1million, being the increase in the
present value of the obligation as a result of the change.
 During 20X9, Rhodes sells part of its operations and transfers the relevant part of the
pension scheme to the purchaser. This is a settlement. The overall gain on settlement
is calculated as:
$'000
Present value of obligation settled 5,700
Fair value of plan assets transferred on settlement (5,400)
Cash transferred on settlement (200)
Gain 100
(ii) STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
20X8 20X9
$'000 $'000
Net defined benefit liability 1,500 2,560
941
Financial Reporting

20X8 20X9
Profit or loss $'000 $'000
Past service cost 1,000 -
Gain on settlement - (100)
Net interest - 135

Remeasurement loss on defined pension plan 250 895
Question 2
To : Ms. Manni Tam, Director
From : Yvonne Lam, Accounting Manager
Date : dd/mm/yyyy
Subject : Appropriate accounting treatment of retirement plans
I refer to your query regarding the appropriate accounting treatment for the retirement plans.
Retirement plans
HKAS 19 Employee Benefits prescribes the accounting and disclosure by employers for employee
benefits, including the post-employment retirement benefits. Post-employment benefit plans are
classified as either defined contribution plans or defined benefit plans.
In this case, both the retirement plans for employees in Hong Kong and in Country X are defined
contribution plans.
Under these defined contribution plans, MHL Group is required to pay fixed contributions into a
separate entity (a fund) and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay further contributions
if the fund does not hold sufficient assets to pay all employee benefits relating to employee service
in the current and prior periods.
HKAS 19 requires MHL Group to recognise contributions to the defined contribution plan when an
employee has rendered service in exchange for those contributions.
For employees in Country X
For employees in Country X, the income statement should show an expense of $3.5 million while
the statement of financial position should show an accrual of $300,000. MHL Group has no further
liability since this is a defined contribution plan.
For employees in Hong Kong
For employees in Hong Kong, MHL Group are required to calculate an employee’s relevant income
and the amount of mandatory contributions for each contribution period (generally the payroll
period), deduct the amount from the employee’s income as his/her mandatory contributions, and
pay the employee’s contributions, together with the employer’s contributions from their own funds.
Since the relevant income for December 20X3 is $10 million, the amount of mandatory
contributions from employees and MHL Group would be $1 million ($10 million x 10%) and
$500,000 should be deducted from the amount paid to the employees. As a result:
For the month ended 31 December 20X3:
Dr Employee benefits expense $10,000,000
Cr MPF Payable (SOFP) (employee’s $500,000
portion)
Cr Bank $9,500,000
(Amount $500,000 has been deducted from gross salary and recognised as a liability)
942
Dr Employee benefits expense $500,000

Cr MPF Payable (SOFP) (employer’s $500,000
portion)
(Employer’s portion has to be accrued)
The total mandatory contributions must be paid to the MPF trustee on or before the contribution
day. Thus when MHL Group settle the contributions on 10 January 20X4:
Dr MPF Payable (SOFP) (employee + $1,000,000
employer)
Cr Bank $1,000,000
(Total contribution amount actually paid)
I hope the above explanation has answered your question. Please feel free to contact me if you
have further queries.
Best Regards,
Yvonne Lam
Chapter 17 Borrowing costs

(a)
For the year ending 31 December 20X3:
HK$
HK$40 million  10/12  6.5% 2,166,667
HK$40 million  6/12  6.5% 1,300,000
HK$40 million  2/12  6.5% 433,333
Total borrowing cost capitalised 3,900,000
For the year ending 31 December 20X4:
HK$
HK$120 million  6/12  6.5% 3,900,000
HK$40 million  4/12  6.5% 866,667
Total borrowing cost capitalised 4,766,667
(b) Depreciation is the systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an asset over its
useful life. In order to comply with the requirements of HKAS 16 relating to deprecation, it is
necessary to identify:
 The parts (components) of each item of property, plant and equipment that are to be
depreciated separately, such as the structure of the hotel building, furniture and
fixtures and equipment that can be considered as significantly different components.
 The cost of each separately depreciable component.
 The amount eligible for capitalisation.
 The estimated residual value of each separately depreciable component, which is
likely to be immaterial in most instances.
 The length of time during which the component will be commercially useful to the
entity taking into consideration the expected physical wear and tear, obsolescence,
and legal or other limits on the use of the assets, for example the length of the
operating lease term.
943
Financial Reporting
 The time when the asset is available for use, i.e. when it is in the location and
condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by
management, and therefore deprecation of an asset begins. For the hotel property of
RHE, it should start for depreciation at the date of the pre-opening activities start, i.e. 1
July 20X4.
 The most appropriate depreciation method, which reflects the pattern in which the
assets' future economic benefits are expected to be consumed by the entity, for each
separately depreciable component.
(c) The equipment and furniture in the hotel rooms at a cost of HK$40 million and the
corresponding borrowing cost capitalised are considered as separately depreciable
components with a useful life of 5 years.
The remaining cost of the hotel construction of HK$160 million and the corresponding
borrowing cost capitalised are depreciated over 30 years.
Total borrowing costs capitalised : HK$8,666,667 (HK$3,900,000 + HK$4,766,667)
Allocated to equipment and furniture: HK$1,733,333 (40/200 x HK$8,666,667)
Allocated to hotel building structure: HK$6,933,334 (160/200 x HK$8,666,667)
Depreciation for 6 months from 1 July to 31 December 20X4:
[(HK$40,000,000 + HK$1,733,333) / 5  6/12] + [(HK$160,000,000 + HK$6,933,334) /
30  6/12]
= HK$4,173,333 + HK$2,782,222
= HK$6,955,555
Chapter 18 Financial instruments

Question 1
(a) (i) A fixed rate bank loan exposes the borrower to fair value interest rate risk, i.e. the
change in market interest rate will affect the fair value of the bank loan.
A variable rate bank loan exposes the borrower to cash flow interest rate risk, i.e. the
change in market interest rate will affect the cash flow of the bank loan with an
increase or decrease in payment of loan interest.
(ii) A hedging instrument is a designated derivative or (for a hedge of the risk of changes
in foreign currency exchange rates only) a designated non-derivative financial asset or
non-derivative financial liability whose fair value or cash flows are expected to offset
changes in the fair value or cash flows of a designated hedged item.
A hedged item is a recognised asset, liability, unrecognised firm commitment, highly
probable forecast transaction or net investment in a foreign operation that exposes the
entity to risk of changes in fair value or future cash flows and is designated as being
hedged.
Hedge accounting recognises the offsetting effect on profit or loss of changes in the
fair values of the hedging instrument and the hedged item. The objective is to ensure
that the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in profit or loss in the
same period when the item that is being hedged affects profit or loss.
Without adopting the hedge accounting, the hedging instrument, if it is a derivative, will
normally be measured at fair value through profit or loss. The hedged item may adopt
a different accounting treatment under HKFRS which results in a mis-match of the
effects of changes in the fair value.
944
If a cash flow hedge meets the conditions for hedge accounting during the period, it
shall be accounted for as follows:
(a) The portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument that is determined to
be an effective hedge shall be recognised in other comprehensive income and
(b) The ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument shall be
If a hedge of a forecast transaction subsequently results in the recognition of a non-
financial asset or a non-financial liability, the amount that had been recognised in
other comprehensive income shall be:
(a) reclassified from equity to profit or loss as a reclassification adjustment in the
same period or periods during which the hedged forecast cash flows affect profit
or loss or
(b) included in the initial cost or other carrying amount of the asset or liability.
(iii) The variable rate bond of SC has a cash flow exposure to changes in the market rate
of interest.
An increase in the market interest rate, assuming other variables affecting the
valuation of the bond are unchanged, theoretically means that the fair value of a
variable rate bond will not change while a fixed rate bond will decrease.
Since SC measures the bond at amortised cost, the increase in the market interest
rate of 0.5% will not result in any adjustment to the carrying amount of the bond.
The interest rate swap, as a derivative, is measured at fair value through profit or loss,
if hedge accounting is not adopted.
An increase in the market interest rate of 0.5 per cent will result in SC receiving more
under the variable rate interest amount in exchange for paying 2 per cent fixed interest
amount.
Theoretically, the fair value of the interest rate swap should be increased and a gain
will be recognised in profit or loss.
(b) If SC designates the hedge as a fair value hedge, the non-cancellable purchase order in Yen
is considered as a firm commitment to be hedged (hedged item) in connection with the spot
foreign currency risk.
The Yen forward contract is considered to be as the hedging instrument.
As a financial derivative, the Yen forward contract will have been reported at fair value on
each reporting date, with gains or losses reported in profit or loss.
Under a fair value hedge, the change in fair value of the firm commitment related to the
hedged risk will also be recognised in profit or loss and adjusts the carrying amount of the
hedged item. This applies if the hedged item is otherwise measured at cost. For SC's
hedged item which is an unrecognised firm commitment, its cumulative change in the fair
value attributable to the hedged risk is recognised as an asset or liability.
Question 2
(a) As the functional currency of GPL is RMB while the settlement of the CB is HK$, it does not
fulfil the definition of equity instrument, that is, to be settled by exchanging a fixed amount of
cash for a fixed number of its own equity instruments. Accordingly, under GPL's accounting
policies, the debt component of the CB is carried at amortised cost and the conversion
option is accounted for as a derivative at fair value through profit or loss.
In accordance with HKFRS9 B4.3.3, when the CB is a hybrid instrument, that is, the
embedded conversion option classified as a derivative and the host instrument, the initial
945
Financial Reporting
carrying amount of the host instrument is the residual amount after separating the embedded
derivative.
Journal entries for the issue of CB on 1 July 20X3:
Dr Cash / Bank HK$500 million
Cr Convertible Bond – liability HK$420 million
Cr Derivative – conversion option HK$80 million
(b) Carrying amount of the debt component of the CB to be converted at 1 October 20X3:
HK$(420 million)  [1 + (6.3%  3/12)]  HK$ (50/500) million = HK$42.66 million
Carrying amount of derivative component of the CB to be converted at 1 October 20X3:
HK$70(500-430) million  HK$ (50/500) million = HK$7 million
Journal entries for the conversion of CB into shares on 1 October 20X3:
Dr Convertible Bond – liability HK$42.66 million
Dr Derivative – conversion option HK$7 million
Cr Equity HK$49.66 million
(c) Effective interest expense of the debt component of the CB for the year ended
31 December 20X3:
HK$420 million  (6.3%*6/12) = HK$13.23 million
Fair value change of derivative component of the CB for the year ended 31 December 20X3:
Initial fair value (HK$80 million) – year-end fair value (HK$100 million)= fair value loss of
HK$20 million
Journal entries for the year ended 31 December 20X3:
Finance cost – effective interest HK$13.23 million
Fair value change – profit or loss HK$20 million
Cr Convertible Bond – liability HK$13.23 million
Cr Derivative – conversion option HK$20 million
The CB should be classified as non-current at the statement of financial position. With the
maturity on 30 June 20X9, the issuer has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the
liability for at least twelve months after the reporting period. Under HKAS 1.69(d), it
mentions the terms of a liability that could, at the option of the counterparty, result in its
settlement by the issue of equity instruments that do not affect its classification.
Chapter 19 Fair value measurement

(a) Investment in the equity shares of LP and PMI shall be measured at fair value:
They are not a financial asset with contractual terms which give rise on specific dates to
cash flows that are sole payments of principal amount and interest on the principal amount
outstanding.
The gain or loss arising from the fair value change shall be recognised in profit or loss unless
ZIL has elected to present gains or losses on that investment in other comprehensive
income providing that the investment in the equity instruments is not held for trading.
946
Being an unquoted equity investment, cost may be an appropriate estimate of fair value of
investment in PMI, this may be the case if sufficient more recent information is not available
to determine fair value, or if there is a wide range of possible fair value measurement and
cost represents the best estimate of fair value within that range.
Investment in the equity instrument of MVC is considered as an investment in an associate
as ZIL holds more than 20 per cent of the voting power of MVC and has representation on
the board of directors of MVC and therefore is able to participate in policy-making processes.
Investment in MVC will be accounted for under equity method, i.e. initially recognised at cost
and the carrying amount is increased or decreased to recognise ZIL’s share of the profit or
loss of MVC after the date of acquisition. ZIL’s share of the profit or loss of MVC is
recognised in ZIL’s profit or loss. Distributions received from MVC reduce the carrying
amount of the investment. Adjustments to the carrying amount may also be necessary for
changes in ZIL’s proportionate interest in MVC arising from changes in MVC’s other
The loan to GE is on contractual terms that give rise on specified dates to cash flow is solely
payment of principal and the interest on the principal amount outstanding.
Providing that the loan to GE held by ZIL within a business model whose objective is to hold
the investment in order to collect contractual cash flows, the loan to GE shall be measured at
amortised cost. Otherwise they are measured at fair value.
The equity investments in LP and PMI will be presented as a non-current asset unless it is
expected to be realized within twelve months of the reporting period and it should be
presented as a current asset.
The investments in associate, MVC, will be presented as a non-current asset.
The loan to GE with a repayment date after twelve months of the reporting period will be
presented as a non-current asset.
(b) For the equity investment in LP, it is expected that the fair value is measured with level 1
input, i.e. quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets that ZIL can
access at the measurement date.
For the equity investment in PMI, as it is unquoted, it is expected that the fair value is
measured with unobservable input,
i.e. level 3, or even with observable input, it requires adjustment using an unobservable input
and if that adjustment results in a significantly higher or lower fair value measurement, the
resulting measurement would still be categorised within level 3 of the fair value.
947
Financial Reporting
Chapter 20 Statements of cash flows

(a) Chong Co.
EXTRACT FROM THE STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR THE YEAR ENDED
31 OCTOBER 20X7
$'000
Profit before tax (W1) 266
Depreciation charge for the year (W2) 76
Loss on disposal of assets (W3) 4
Finance charge 15
Redemption penalty 8
Operating profit before changes in working capital 369
Increase in receivables (61)
Increase in payables 66
Cash generated from operations 374
Interest paid (12)
Income tax paid (W4) (52)
Net cash flow from operating activities 310
(b) To examine whether the net cash flow from operating activities is sufficient to support the
proposed relocation and expansion we must first consider the other uses to which the cash
flow has been put:
$'000
Net capital expenditure (W5) 260
Bond repayment (W6) 171
431
Extent to which financed by new issue of shares (740-460) 280
Net cash requirement to finance capital expenditure and bond 151
Dividend 40
Overall net cash requirement 191
Net cash flow from operating activities 310
Increase in cash at bank 119
The above shows that the company's overall net cash requirement during the year was
easily met by available cash flow from operations. However, the company would have to
forecast future cash flow and consider relocation costs and any likely future capital
commitments before deciding whether future cash flows would be sufficient to fund the
relocation.
Also, the above shows that net capital expenditure was financed by a new issue of shares
and that much of the net cash flow from operating activities was used to repay part of the
bond. The company would have to balance the likelihood of these events recurring* with the
need to fund the above relocation costs.
* The company would also need to consider the likely impact of this on the equity/debt ratio
(up from 1.95:1 to 8:1).
948
W1 Calculation of "profit before tax"

$'000
Retained profit at 31.10.X7 224
Retained profit at 31.10.X6 86
Increase in retained profit during the year 138
Add dividend paid 40
Tax charge in statement of profit or loss 88
Profit for the year before tax 266
W2 Calculation of depreciation charge for the year

$'000
Accumulated depreciation: at 31.10.X7 276
at 31.10.X6 232
Net increase for the year 44
Depreciation on disposals 32
Depreciation charge for the year 76
W3 Calculation of profit or loss on disposal
$'000
Proceeds from disposal 16
Cost of assets 52
Less depreciation 32
20
Loss on disposal 4
W4 Tax paid calculation
Opening balances: $'000

Deferred tax 44
Income tax 32
76
Tax charge 88
164
Closing balances:
Deferred tax 72
Income tax 40
112
Tax paid 52
W5 Calculation of net capital expenditure

$'000
Closing balance 31.10.X7 1,240
Opening balance 31.10.X6 1,016
224
Cost of disposals 52
Capital expenditure during year 276
Less proceeds from disposal of assets 16
260
949
Financial Reporting
W6 Calculation of bond repayment

$'000
Liability at start of year 280
Add amortised interest (Finance charge $15,000 – cash paid 3
$12,000)
283
Redemption penalty 8
291
Liability at year end 120
171
Chapter 21 Related party disclosures

(a) Company B: (Yes) Mrs. Kwok, a joint venturer of Company B, is:
a member of the key management personnel of Company A [HKAS 24.9 (b) (vi)] OR a close
member of the family of Mr. Kwok who controls Company A [HKAS 24.9 (b) (vi)]
(b) Company C: (Yes) A wholly owned subsidiary of GIL. Company A is an associate of GIL
[HKAS 24.9(b)(ii)]
(c) Company D: (Yes) Being wholly owned by Mr. Ma, a member of the key management
personnel of Company A [HKAS 24.9 (b) (vi)]
(d) Company E: (Yes) Mr. Kwok, the controlling shareholder of Company A, is the husband of
Mrs. Kwok, who is a key management personnel of Company E. [HKAS 24.9 (b) (vii)]
(e) GIL: (Yes) Company A is an associate of GIL [HKAS 24.9 (b) (ii)]
(f) Mr. Ma: (Yes) A member of the key management personnel of Company A [HKAS 24.9
(a)(iii)]
(g) Ms. Chan: (No) Not a person or a close member of the family of a person as set out in
HKAS 24.9 (a)
(h) Mr. Wang: (No) Not a person or a close member of the family of a person as set out in
HKAS 24.9 (a)
Chapter 22 Accounting policies, changes in

accounting estimates and errors; events
after the reporting period
Question 1
(a) This is an adjusting event under HKAS 10. SW should reverse the recognition of the HK$8
million sales during the year ended 31 March 20X2 and record the inventory as the lower of
cost and net realisable value after considering the rework cost.
The notice from the customer on 3 April 20X2 has indicated that the goods received on 25
March 20X2 were not accepted. This is an event after the reporting period that provides
evidence of circumstances (the condition of goods) that existed at the end of reporting
period.
SW accepted the complaint of the customer and has replaced the goods shipped after the
reporting period.
The customer confirmed only the acceptance of the replaced goods, which was after the
reporting period.
950
(b) This is a non-adjusting event under HKAS 10. SW should recognise the HK$3 million (20%
of HK$15 million) compensation for the breach of contract in the period subsequent to 31
March 20X2.
The sales orders were received and the sales contracts were signed before the end of the
reporting period. At the reporting date there was no indication that SW would fail to fulfil the
sales orders.
The failure in the production and delivery of orders was due to the suspension of production
from 15 April 20X2, and therefore not a condition that existed at 31 March 20X2.
If this event is considered to be material, SW should disclose the nature of the event and its
financial effect in the notes to the financial statements.
(c) This is a non-adjusting event under HKAS 10. SW should not recognise the HK$5 million
subsidy as government grant in the year ended 31 March 20X2. It should however recognise
the subsidy as government grant in the period subsequent to 31 March 20X2.
It is possible to argue that there is reasonable assurance that SW would comply with the
conditions attached (HKAS 20.7 (a)). The relevant employment period of local workers was
the six months ended 31 December 20X1 and the application for the subsidy was on 8
March 20X2, which is during the year ended 31 March 20X2.
However, there was no reasonable assurance that the subsidy would be received
(HKAS 20.7 (b)) at 31 March 20X2, as the subsidy is discretionary and subject to approval
by the local government which was not obtained until 8 April 20X2.
If this event is considered to be material, SW should disclose the nature of the event and its
financial effect in the notes to the financial statements.
Question 2
(a) This is an non-adjusting event under HKAS 10.
Given SAC declares dividends to holders of equity instruments (as defined in HKAS 32
Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation) on 29 April 20X4, it shall not recognise
those dividends as a liability at the end of the reporting period (i.e. 31 December 20X3)
because no obligation exists at that time.
The amount of dividends proposed or declared before the financial statements are
authorised for issue but not recognised as a distribution to owners during the period, and the
related amount per share are disclosed in the notes in accordance with HKAS 1.137.
(b) This is an adjusting event under HKAS 10.
The unauthorised building works were carried out during the year ended 31 December 20X3
which provides evidence of the non-compliance that existed at the end of the reporting
period.
Therefore, the cost of removal of HK$500,000 should be provided in the financial statements
for the year ended 31 December 20X3 while the maximum penalty of HK$400,000 is not
required to be provided when the entity has rectified the illegal building works before the
financial statements are authorised to be issued.
(c) The production lines for sale may be classified as assets held for sale under HKFRS 5. For
assets to be classified as held for sale, there are two conditions: (i) the relevant assets must
be available for immediate sale in its present condition and (ii) its sale must be highly
probable.
It depends on whether the production lines are abandoned at year-end which are available
for immediate sale in their present condition.
For the sale to be highly probable, HKFRS 5.8 sets out the following criteria:
951
Financial Reporting
(i) the appropriate level of management must be committed to a plan to sell the asset
and an active programme to locate a buyer and complete the plan must have been
initiated;
(ii) the asset (or disposal group) must be actively marketed for sale at a price that is
reasonable in relation to its current fair value;
(iii) the sale should be expected to qualify for recognition as a completed sale within one
year from the date of classification; and
(iv) actions required to complete the plan should indicate that it is unlikely that significant
changes to the plan will be made or that the plan will be withdrawn.
The probability of shareholders’ approval should be considered as part of the assessment of
whether the sale is highly probable. If the management of SAC is the same as the
shareholders of SAC or if there are any discussions with a majority of shareholders, the sale
may be considered as highly probable.
(d) Financial Reporting
1. The new Companies Ordinance (new CO), the 10th Schedule has been replaced by
Schedule 4. Instead of a long list of specific items to disclose, Schedule 4 contains
only 5 items.
Items to be disclosed under Schedule 4:
(i) the aggregate amount of outstanding loans made under the authority of ss.280
and 281 (these are loans made to eligible employees to enable them to buy
shares in the company);
(ii) the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the applicable
accounting standards (as mentioned above);
(iii) if a group produces consolidated financial statements, the following must be
included in the notes to the consolidated financial statements:
• the parent’s company level statement of financial position; and
• a note disclosing the movement in the parent company’s reserves.
(iv) the name of the parent undertaking and the parent undertaking’s country of
incorporation or its principal place of business; and
(v) auditors’ remuneration.
2. New provisions are introduced in the new CO to allow a greater number of private
companies to prepare simplified directors' report and financial statements under SME-
FRS.
3. The new CO adopts the concept of no-par value for all shares in Hong Kong
companies. The concepts of ’nominal value”’, ‘share premium’, ’capital redemption
reserve’ and ‘authorised share capital’ are abolished.
4. The entity has flexibility to choose whether to pay for redemptions or share buy-backs
out of capital or distributable profits.
Directors' report
5. A new ’business review’ section must be included in the directors’ report unless the
company is exempt.
6. Disclosure of significant transactions, arrangements or contracts entered into by the
company, where a director has a material interest, has been moved to the financial
statements and will therefore be subject to audit.
952
Chapter 23 Earnings per share

(a) Year ended 30 June 20X8:
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders =
$32,800,000 – (3,000,000  $0.3) = $31,900,000
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding for the year = 220,000,000
Basic earnings per share = $31,900,000 / 220,000,000 = 14.5 cents
Year ended 30 June 20X9:
$8,000,000 – (3,000,000  $0.15 + 2,000,000  $0.15) = $7,250,000
(Or
$8,000,000 – (1,000,000  $0.15 + 2,000,000  $0.3) = $7,250,000)
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding for the year =
(220,000,000  3/12) + (220,500,000  3/12) + (228,500,000  6/12)
= 224,375,000
(Or
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding for the year =
(220,000,000  12/12) + (500,000  9/12) + (8,000,000  6/12)
= 224,375,000)
Basic earnings per share = $7,250,000 / 224,375,000 = 3.231 cents
(b) Year ended 30 June 20X9:
The potential impact of preference share conversion on earnings:
$750,000/ (1,000,000  8  6/12 + 2,000,000  8) = $0.0375
No adjustment to the preference share dividend as the earnings per incremental share is
higher than the basic earnings per share (3.231 cents) and therefore considered anti-dilutive.
Adjusted profit attributable to ordinary shareholders = $7,250,000
Adjusted weighted average number of ordinary shares:
No adjustment for the conversion of the preference shares
Weighted average number of shares under option = 1,000,000
Weighted average number of shares that would have been issued at average market price:
(1,000,000  $1.5) / $1.65 = 909,091
Weighted average number of shares assumed to be issued for nil consideration: (1,000,000
– 909,091) = 90,909
Weighted average number of ordinary shares used to calculate diluted earnings per share:
224,375,000 + 90,909 = 224,465,909
Diluted earnings per share = $7,250,000 / 224,465,909 = 3.230 cents
953
Financial Reporting
Chapter 24 Operating segments

(a) The conclusion is incorrect. The entity does not have a free choice. HKFRS 8.5 states an
operating segment is a component of an entity:
(i) that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenue and incur
expenses (including revenues and expenses relating to transactions with other
components of the same entity),
(ii) whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity's chief operating decision
maker to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess
its performance, and
(iii) for which discrete financial information is available.
(b) A reportable segment consists of an operating segment, or an aggregation of two or more
operating segments, that exceed the quantitative thresholds specified in HKFRS 8.13.
In general, an entity shall report separately information about an operating segment that
meets any of the following quantitative thresholds:
(i) Its reported revenue, including both sales to external customers and intersegment
sales or transfers, is 10% or more of the combined revenue, internal and external, of
all operating segments.
(ii) The absolute amount of its reporting profit or loss is 10% or more of the greater, in
absolute amount, of (i) the combined reported profit of all operating segments that did
not report a loss and (ii) the combined reported loss of all operating segments that
reported a loss.
(iii) Its assets are 10% or more of the combined assets of all operating segments.
Operating segments that do not meet any of the quantitative thresholds may be considered
reportable, and separately disclosed, if management believes that information about the
segment would be useful to users of the financial statements.
HKFRS 8.19 states that there may be a practical limit to the number of reportable segments
that an entity separately discloses beyond which segment information may become too
detailed. Although no precise limit has been determined, as the number of segments that are
reportable increases above 10, the entity should consider whether a practical limit has been
reached. An evaluation should be made of the criteria adopted by the management for
aggregation to determine if an appropriate aggregation of operating segments has been
performed.
Accordingly, it is possible for an entity to report 12 reportable segments.
(c) The conclusion is incorrect. HKFRS 8 does not require that segment information be provided
in accordance with the same generally accepted accounting principles used to prepare the
According to HKFRS 8.25, the amount of each segment item reported shall be the measure
reported to the chief operating decision maker for the purposes of making decisions about
allocating resources to the segment and assessing its performance.
Adjustments and elimination made in preparing an entity's financial statements and
allocations of revenues, expenses and gains or losses shall be included in determining
reported segment profit or loss only if they are included in the measure of the segment profit
or loss that is used by the chief operating decision maker.
Similarly, only those assets and liabilities that are included in the measures of the segment
assets and segment liabilities that are used by the chief operating decision maker shall be
reported for that segment.
954
(d) The conclusion is incorrect. The company is not required to remove from the prior year
amounts the portion of the operating segment that was disposed of prior to the end of the
current year.
The disposal of a portion of an operating segment is not considered a change of the
structure of an entity's internal organisation in a manner that causes the composition of its
reportable segments to change, which would require restatement of prior periods in
accordance with HKFRS 8.29.
Furthermore, if management judges that an operating segment identified as a reportable
segment in the immediately preceding period is of continuing significance, information about
that segment shall continue to be reported separately in the current period even if it no
longer meets the criteria for reportability in HKFRS 8.13.
Chapter 25 Interim financial reporting

(a) It is probable that the bonus will be paid, given that the actual output already achieved in the
year is in line with budgeted figures, which exceed the required level of output. So a bonus of
$4.5 million should be recognised in the interim financial statements at 30 June 20X4.
(b) The value of the inventories in the interim financial statements at 30 June 20X4 is the lower
of cost and NRV at 30 June 20X4. This is:
100,000  $1.20 = $120,000
(c) The taxation charge in the interim financial statements is based upon the weighted average
rate for the year. In this case the entity's tax rate for the year is expected to be 30%. The
taxation charge in the interim financial statements will be $1.8 million.
Chapter 26 Presentation of financial statements

AZ CO. STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR
THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 20X3
$'000
Revenue 124,900
Cost of sales (W1) (94,200)
Gross profit 30,700
Distribution costs (W1) (9,060)
Administrative expenses (W1) (17,535)
Other expenses (W1) (121)
Finance income 1,200
Finance costs [60 + (18,250  7%)] (1,338)
Gain on land revaluation 4,000
Other expenses represent the cost of a major restructuring undertaken during the period.
955
Financial Reporting
AZ CO.
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 MARCH 20X3
$'000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (W2) 48,262
Investment properties 24,000
72,262
Current assets
Inventories (5,180 – (W3) 15) 5,165
Trade receivables 9,330
15,685
87,947
Equity
Share capital (20,430 + (W4) 2,400) 22,830
Retained earnings (27,137 – 1,000 + 3,685) 29,822
Revaluation surplus (3,125 + 4,000) 7,125
59,777
Redeemable preference shares 1,000
7% debentures 20X7 18,250
19,250
Current liabilities
Trade payables 8,120
Income tax payable 161
Interest payable (1,278 – 639) 639
8,920
87,947
AZ CO.
STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 20X3
Share Retained Revaluation Total
capital earnings surplus
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Balance at 1 April 20X2 20,430 27,137 3,125 50,692
Issue of share capital 2,400 2,400
Dividends (1,000) (1,000)
Total comprehensive income for the year 3,685 4,000 7,685
Balance at 31 March 20X3 22,830 29,822 7,125 59,777
WORKINGS
1 Expenses
Cost of sales Distribution Admin Other
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Per TB 94,000 9,060 16,020 121
Opening inventories 4,852
Depreciation on buildings (W2) 1,515
Depreciation on P&E (W2) 513
Closing inventories (5,180 – (W3) 15) (5,165)
94,200 9,060 17,535 121
956
2 Property, plant and equipment

Land Buildings P&E Total
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Cost b/d 20,000 30,300 3,720 54,020
Acc'd depreciation b/d – (6,060) (1,670) (7,730)
20,000 24,240 2,050 46,290
Depreciation charge for year:
$30,300  5% – (1,515) (1,515)
($3,720 – $1,670)  25% (513) (513)
20,000 22,725 1,537 44,262
Revaluation (balancing figure) 4,000 – – 4,000
CV c/d 24,000 22,725 1,537 48,262
3 Inventories
$'000
Defective batch:
Selling price 55
Cost to complete: repackaging required (20)
NRV 35
Cost (50)
Write off required (15)
4 Share issue
The proceeds have been recorded separately in the trial balance. This requires a transfer to
the appropriate accounts:
$'000 $'000
DEBIT Proceeds of share issue 2,400
CREDIT Share capital (2,000  $1.20) 2,400
To transfer the proceeds of the share issue to the share capital account.
Chapter 27 Principles of consolidation

Consolidated goodwill
$'000
AB (W1) 11,350
CD (W2) 2,916
14,266
WORKINGS
1 Goodwill on acquisition of AB
$'000 $'000
Purchase consideration 14,700
NCI share (W3) 3,400
Less: Net fair value of identifiable assets and liabilities acq'd:
Net tangible assets (1,000 + 2,850) 3,850
Brand name 2,900
(6,750)
Goodwill on acquisition 11,350
957
Financial Reporting
2 Goodwill on acquisition of CD
$'000
Purchase consideration (39.6  60,000) 2,376
NCI share (W4) 1,400
Net assets acquired at 1 April 20X3
(100 + (700 + (80  9/12))) (860)
Goodwill on acquisition 2,916
3 NCI at acquisition of AB
Number of shares = 200,000
Fair value = 200,000  $17

= $3,400,000
4 NCI at acquisition of CD
Number of shares = 100,000 – 60,000
= 40,000
Fair value = 40,000  $35
= $1,400,000
Chapter 28 Consolidated accounts: accounting for

subsidiaries
Smart Computer Limited
(a) The amount of goodwill is calculated as follows:
Consideration transferred: HK$72 million
Amount of non-controlling interests: HK$45  2,000,000  20% = HK$18 million
Identifiable net assets of BDC acquired:
Net carrying amount in the books of BDC = HK$42 million
Fair value adjustments:
Property, plant and equipment = HK$76 – HK$60 million = HK$16 million
Intangible asset = HK$8 million
Net of the acquisition date amounts of the identified assets acquired and the liabilities
assumed = HK$[42 + 16 + 8] million = HK$66 million
Goodwill acquired = HK$[72 + 18 – 66] million = HK$24 million
(b) Non-controlling interests in BDC as at 1 April 20Y0 to be reflected in the consolidated

statement of financial position of SCL:
Net of the acquisition date amounts of the identified assets acquired and the liabilities
assumed (as above) = HK$66 million
Post acquisition profit reported by BDC before adjustment of depreciation and amortisation
attributable to fair value up to 1 April 20Y0 = HK$8 million
958
Additional depreciation for the period from 1 October 20X9 to 31 March 20Y0:
= HK$16 million / 10  0.5
= HK$0.8 million
Additional amortisation for the period from 1 October 20X9 to 31 March 20Y0:
= HK$8 million / 10  0.5
= HK$0.4 million
Adjusted post acquisition profit of BDC incorporated into the consolidated financial
statements of SCL up to 1 April 20Y0 = HK$[8 – 0.8 – 0.4] million = HK$6.8 million
Non-controlling interest of 20% = HK$18 million + [HK$6.8 million  20%]

= HK$19.36 million
Bailey
BAILEY GROUP
Non-current assets $m
Property, plant and equipment (2,300 + 1,900 + (W2) 100 – (W6) 40) 4,260
Goodwill (130 – 20 (W2)) 110
Investment in associate (225 + (W3) 18) 243
4,613
Current assets (3,115 + 1,790 – (W4) 20) 4,885
9,498
Share capital 1,000
Reserves (3,430 + 1,800 - (W2) 440 – (W2) 12 + (W3) 18 – (W4) 12 – (W5) 544
- (W6) 24) 4,216
5,216
Non-controlling interests ((W2) 450 – (W2) 8 – (W4) 8 + (W5) 544 – (W6) 16)
962
6,178
Non-current liabilities (350 + 290) 640
Current liabilities (1,580 + 1,100) 2,680
9,498
BAILEY GROUP
INCOME FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X9
$m
Revenue (5,000 + 4,200 – (W4) 200) 9,000
Cost of sales (4,100 + 3,500 + (W6) 10 – (W4) 200 + (W4) 20) (7,430)
Gross profit 1,570
Distribution costs and administrative expenses (320 + 175 + (W2) 15) (510)
Share of profit of associate (W3) 22
Income tax expense (240 + 170) (410)
Gain on revaluation of property (net of deferred tax) (50 + 20) 70
Share of other comprehensive income of associate (W3) 2
Other comprehensive income, net of tax 72
Total comprehensive income for the year 744
959
Financial Reporting
$m
Non-controlling interests ((40% x 355) – (W2) 6 – (W4) 8 – (W6) 4) 124
672
Non-controlling interests ((40% x 375) – (W2) 6 – (W4) 8 – (W6) 4) 132
744
WORKINGS
1 Group structure
Bailey
1.1.X6 (4 years ago) 1.5.X9 (current year)
300 72
= 60% = 30%
500 240
Hill Campbell
Pre-acqn reserves $440m $270m
2 (i) Goodwill (Hill)
$m $m
Non-controlling interests (at "full" fair value) 450
Fair value of net assets at acquisition
Share capital 500
Reserves 440
(1,040)
130
Consolidation adjustment journal ($m)
DEBIT Goodwill 130
DEBIT Share capital 500
DEBIT Reserves 440
DEBIT Property, plant and equipment 100
CREDIT Investment in H 720
CREDIT NCI 450
To recognise the acquisition of Hill and associated goodwill and NCI.
(ii) Impairment losses to date
Consolidation adjustment journal ($m):
DEBIT Reserves (60%) 12
DEBIT NCI (40%) 8
CREDIT Goodwill 20
To recognise the cumulative goodwill impairment
$15m of the debit entry relates to the impairment loss arising in the year and therefore
this is reported in the SPLOCI as part of administrative expenses. 40% of this is
attributable to the NCI ($6m).
3 Post acquisition reserves of associate (Campbell)
$m
Share of post acquisition retained reserves ((330-270)  30%) 18
960

DEBIT Investment in Campbell 18
CREDIT Reserves 18
To recognise the group share of Campbell’s post acquisition reserves.
In the SPLOCI, the group share of Campbell’s profit and OCI in the year is recognised by
($m):
CREDIT Share of profit of associate (110 × 30% × 8/12) 22
CREDIT Share of OCI of associate (10  30%  8/12) 2
These two credit entries together total $24million. The group share of the post-acquisition
dividend paid by Campbell (30% x $20m = $6m) is deducted from this amount to give the
total credit entry made to reserves in the SOFP in the journal above.
4 Intragroup sales and URP
Intragroup sales are $200m and the resulting URP is $20m (1/4 x 200m x 40%)
DEBIT Revenue 200
CREDIT Cost of sales 200
To eliminate intragroup sales in the SPLOCI
And
DEBIT Cost of sales 20
CREDIT Inventory 20
To eliminate the URP.
The debit entry is split between the NCI and group and therefore in the SOFP the debit
entries are:
DEBIT Reserves (60% x 20) 12
DEBIT NCI (40% x 20) 8
The $8m attributable to the NCI also reduces NCI profits in the SPLOCI.
5 Post acquisition reserves of subsidiary (Hill)
Hill
$m
Per question 1,800
Pre-acquisition (440)
1,360
NCI share of post-acquisition reserves:
1,360  40% 544
6 Fair value adjustment (Hill)

At acquisition Movement Year end
1/1/X6 X6, X7, X8, X9 31/12/X9
$m $m $m
Property, plant and equipment 100 * (40) 60
(W2) (1,040 – 500 – 440)
Goodwill (W2) Reserves (W4) Add to PPE

Add 1 year to
cost of sales
* additional depreciation = 100  4/10 = 40
961
Financial Reporting

DEBIT Reserves (60% x 40) 24
DEBIT NCI (40% x 40) 16
CREDIT PPE 40
To recognise depreciation on the fair value adjustment in the SOFP.
In the SPLOCI the current year depreciation of $10m is recognised by debiting cost of sales.
40% ($4m) is allocated to the NCI.
Chapter 29 Consolidated accounts: accounting for

associates and joint arrangements
To : Ms. Pindy Lee, Director of APE
From : Charmaine Yuen, Accounting Manager
Date : dd/mm/yyyy
Subject : Various investments, bankrupt customer and consolidated financial statements of APE
I refer to your queries regarding the various investments and the bankrupt customer and their
impact on the consolidated financial statements of APE.
(a) Applicable financial reporting standard
The arrangement for the investment in DPE has three parties: APE has 60% of the voting
rights in DPE, BPE has 20% and CPE has 20%. The contractual arrangement among APE,
BPE and CPE specifies that at least 90% of the voting rights are required to make decisions
about the relevant activities of DPE. Even though APE can block any decision, APE cannot
control DPE because it needs the agreement of both BPE and CPE.
Since we cannot control DPE, it is not a subsidiary of APE.
The terms of the contractual arrangement requiring at least 90% of the voting rights to make
decisions about the relevant activities imply that APE, BPE and CPE have joint control of
DPE because decisions about the relevant activities of DPE cannot be made without APE,
BPE and CPE agreeing. Thus it has implicitly specified that APE, BPE and CPE are
required to agree unanimously to decisions about the relevant activities of the arrangement.
HKFRS 11 defines joint control as the contractually agreed sharing of control of an
arrangement, which exists only when decisions about the relevant activities (i.e. activities
that significantly affect the returns of the arrangement) require the unanimous consent of the
parties sharing control.
In this case, DPE shall be considered as a joint arrangement as it is an arrangement of
which two or more parties have joint control. The agreement sets up the terms under which
APE, BPE and CPE conduct the manufacturing and distribution of HDPE. These activities
are undertaken through joint arrangements whose purpose is either the manufacturing or the
distribution of HDPE.
Therefore, HKFRS 11 Joint Arrangements is to be applied by all entities (APE, BPE and
CPE) that are a party to this joint arrangement.
General principles
HKFRS 11 requires a party to a joint arrangement to determine the type of joint arrangement
in which it is involved by assessing its rights and obligations arising from the arrangement.
HKFRS 11 classifies joint arrangements into two types - joint operations and joint ventures.
APE should determine the type of joint arrangement in which it is involved by considering its
rights and obligations.
962
Diadema Polyethylene (DPE)

APE, BPE and CPE carry out the manufacturing and distribution activities through DPE,
whose legal form confers separation between the parties and the entity.
In addition, the contractual arrangement dealing with the manufacturing and distribution
activity did not specify that the parties have rights to the assets, and obligations for the
liabilities, relating to DPE.
There are no contractual arrangements and no other facts and circumstances that indicate
that the parties have rights to substantially all the economic benefits of the assets relating to
DPE or that the parties have an obligation for the liabilities relating to that arrangement.
DPE is a joint venture.
A joint venture is defined in HKFRS 11 as a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have
joint control of the arrangement (i.e. APE, BPE and CPE as joint venturers) have rights to the
net assets of the arrangement.
HKFRS 11 requires a joint venturer to recognise an investment and to account for that
investment using the equity method in accordance with HKAS 28 Investments in Associates
and Joint Ventures, unless the entity is exempted from applying the equity method as
specified in that standard.
Therefore, the parties (APE, BPE and CPE) should recognise their rights to the net assets of
DPE as investments in joint ventures and account for them using the equity method.
(b) Bankrupt customer
HKAS 10 Events after the Reporting Period defines events after the reporting period as
those events, favourable and unfavourable, that occur between the end of the reporting
period and the date when the financial statements are authorised for issue.
Two types of events can be identified:
 those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting
period (adjusting events after the reporting period); and
 those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting period (non-
adjusting events after the reporting period).
HKAS 10 specifies that the receipt of information after the reporting period indicating that an
asset was impaired at the end of the reporting period is an adjusting event after the reporting
period that requires an entity to adjust the amounts recognised in its financial statements.
The bankruptcy of a customer that occurs after the reporting period usually confirms that a
loss existed at the end of the reporting period on an accounts receivable and therefore APE
needs to adjust the carrying amount of the accounts receivable. Therefore, it is an adjusting
event.
On the basis of this objective evidence about the existence of impairment in the account
receivable, APE should recognise the impairment (bad debt) losses for the year ended
31 March 20X2.
DEBIT Other expenses (impairment) HK$650,000
CREDIT Receivables HK$650,000
I hope the above explanation has answered your questions. For further details, please refer
to the annex. Please feel free to contact me if you have further queries.
Best regards,
Charmaine Yuen
963
Financial Reporting
(c) (i) APE – Worksheet for the Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other
Comprehensive Income for the year ended 31 March 20X2
APE EPE DEBIT Ref CREDIT Consolidated

HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000
Sales 80,000 35,750 9,000 6 106,750
Cost of sales (55,000) (24,500) 5 900 (70,650)
6 7,950
Other income
(including gain on
disposal and EPE’s
dividend) 3,700 – 1,000 3 2,100
600 E2
Depreciation
expense (8,000) (1,700) 500 2 (10,200)
Interest expense (5,900) (1,600) (7,500)
Other expenses (3,800) (4,200) 650 1(c) (8,650)
Share of profits of E1 660 780
FPE
E2 120
Profit attributable
to:
Owners of the
parent 12,010
Non-controlling
interests 620 7 620
12,630
964
(c) (ii) APE – Worksheet for the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at
31 March 20X2
APE EPE DEBIT Ref CREDIT Consolidated

HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000 HK$'000
Plant and
equipment, net 43,000 19,000 2,500 1,2 1,500 63,000
Investment in
EPE, cost 26,550 – 1 26,550 –
Investment in E1,
FPE 7,450 – 660 E2 480 7,630
Goodwill – – 2,800 1 2,800
Other
investments 20,750 1,250 22,000
Inventory 41,250 20,000 6 1,050 60,200
Receivables 10,000 11,000 1(c) 650 20,350
Cash and cash
equivalents 7,500 8,750 16,250
156,500 60,000 192,230
Share capital 30,000 15,000 15,000 1 30,000

Retained
earnings 51,500 25,000 59,190
Non-controlling
interests – – 8,040
Payables 75,000 20,000 95,000
156,500 60,000 192,230
965
Financial Reporting
(c) (iii) APE – Worksheet for the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity for the
year ended 31 March 20X2
Non-
Share Retained controlling
capital earnings Total interest Total equity
HK'000 HK'000 HK'000 HK'000 HK'000
Balance at
1 April 20X1 30,000 50,680* 80,680 7,670** 88,350
Changes in equity
Dividends (3,500) (3,500) (3,500)
Dividend paid to
NCI (250) (250)
Total
comprehensive
income for the
year 12,010 12,010 620 12,630
Balance at
31 March 20X2 30,000 59,190 89,190 8,040 97,230
Workings:
W1
Retained earnings,
1 April 20X1 44,000 22,500 12,250 1 50,680*
800 2
2,050 4
720 5
W2
Non-controlling
interests,
1 April 20X1 200 2,1 6,000 7,670**
- 4 2,050
180 5
966
Journal entries and reconciliations are not required

HK$'000 HK$'000
CJE 1 Elimination of investment in EPE
DEBIT Plant and equipment 2,500
CREDIT Investment in EPE 26,550
CREDIT Non-controlling interests (SOFP) 6,000
CJE 2 Past and current depreciation on undervalued plant and equipment

DEBIT Opening retained earnings =2,500k/5  2  80% 800
DEBIT Non-controlling interests (SOFP) = 2,500k/5  2 
20%NCI 200
DEBIT Depreciation=2,500/5 years 500
CREDIT Accumulated depreciation 1,500
CJE 3 Eliminate dividend income

DEBIT Dividend income (1,250k x 80%) 1,000
DEBIT Non-controlling interests (SOFP) (1,250k  20% NCI) 250
CREDIT Dividends declared 1,250
CJE 4 Assign post-acquisition RE to NCI

DEBIT Opening retained earnings (1/4/20W9 to 31/3/20X1) 2,050
Assign post-acquisition RE to NCI 20%  (RE 31/3/20X1 22,500k – pre-acq 12,250k)
CJE 5 Realisation of opening unrealised profit in inventory

DEBIT Opening retained earnings 80% 720
DEBIT Non-controlling interests (SOFP) 20% NCI 180
CREDIT Cost of sales (2,500k – 1,600k) 900
CJE 6 Elimination of intercompany sale of inventory

DEBIT Sales 9,000
CREDIT Cost of sales 7,950
CREDIT Inventory 35% unsold x (9,000k – 6,000k) 1,050
CJE 7 Allocate current profit for the year to non-controlling interests

DEBIT Non-controlling interests (PL) 620
CREDIT Non-controlling interests (SOFP) 620
HK$'000 20%
Profit for the year before adjustment 3,750 750
Less: depreciation on undervalued plant and equipment CJE 2 (500) (100)
Add: previous year’s unrealised profit now realised CJE 5 (2,500k – 1,600k) 900 180
Less: current year's unrealised profit CJE 6 [35%  (9,000k-6,000k)] (1,050) (210)
Adjusted profit 3,100
NCI's share 20% 620 620
NCI = 6,000k – 200k – 250k + 2,050k – 180k + 620k = 8,040k
967
Financial Reporting
EA1 Share of FPE’s current year post-acquisition profits

DEBIT Investment in FPE (2,200k  30%) 660
CREDIT Share of profits of FPE 660
EA2 Elimination of intercompany sales of PPE (10,000k–8,000k)  4 years / 5 years

unrealised  30% Associate
DEBIT Gain on disposal* 600

CREDIT Investment in FPE 480
CREDIT Share of profits of associates 120
Reconciliation of NCI as at 31 March 20X2

HK$'000
NCI’s share of EPE’s net assets at book value
(15,000k + 25,000k)  20% 8,000
NCI’s share of EPE’s FV adjustment (unamortised)
(2,500k  2/5)  20% 200
NCI’s share of implicit goodwill
(6,000k – 20%  29,750k) 50
Less: NCI’s share of unrealised profit of upstream sale
(9,000k – 6,000k)  35% unsold  20% NCI (210)
8,040
Reconciliation of Investment in FPE as at 31 March 20X2

HK$'000
Share of FPE’s net assets at book value
(7,500k + 13,450k)  30% 6,285
Share of implicit goodwill
(7,450k – 30%  (7,500k+11,250k)) 1,825
Less: unrealised profit on intercompany sales of PPE (480)
7,630
*Alternatively, share of profits of associates may be debited instead of gain on disposal, i.e. EA2
Elimination of intercompany sales of PPE (10,000k–8,000k)  4 years / 5 years unrealised  30%
Associate
DEBIT Share of profits of FPE* 480

CREDIT Investment in FPE 480
968
Chapter 30 Changes in group structures

To: Faria LEE (Director), MCL
From: Pindy LEE, Accounting Manager, MCL
c.c.: Beverly CHOW, Emily WILSCON, Charmaine YUEN (Directors)
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
I refer to your email dated 18 May 20X8 regarding your queries about the draft consolidated
financial statements for MCL as at 31 March 20X8.
(a) Plant and equipment
In accordance with HK(SIC)-Int 27, we are required to evaluate the substance of the
transaction with the bank which involves the legal form of a lease.
Since the overall economic effect of the transactions cannot be understood without reference
to the series of transactions as a whole, it is concluded that the series of the sale and the
lease is linked and shall be accounted for as one transaction.
The sale and leaseback arrangement with the bank does not, in substance, involve a sale as
MCL retains substantially all the risks and rewards incident to ownership of the underlying
asset and enjoys substantially the same rights to its use as before the arrangement.
If the legal form is ignored, the substance of the arrangement is a financing arrangement in
which the seller-lessee (MCL) borrows money from the lessor (the bank) using the asset as
security.
Since MCL's risks and rewards incident to owning the plant and equipment have not
substantively changed, the amount of $12 million of plant and equipment should remain in
the consolidated statement of financial position.
(b) The investment in SWL from 31 March 20X7 to 31 March 20X8
1 Status before and after the disposal
Before the disposal, MCL held 60% of the issued shares of SWL.
In accordance with HKFRS 10, control is presumed to exist:
 power is achieved through holding the majority of votes
 MCL has exposure to variable returns from the investment (such as dividends)
 it is assumed that voting power can be used to affect these returns.
Therefore, SWL was a subsidiary of MCL at 31 March 20X7, and MCL was a parent at
that date.
After the disposal of 2,400,000 shares in SWL, MCL held a 30% interest in SWL in
total.
MCL had significant influence, but not control, over SWL from the date of the disposal,
i.e. 30 September 20X7.
Thereafter, SWL was classified as an associate under HKAS 28 Investments in
Associates and Joint Ventures from the date that it ceased to be a subsidiary.
2 The effect of disposal on MCL's financial statements
MCL's remaining 30% investment in SWL should be accounted for using the equity
method in MCL's consolidated financial statements under which the investment would
initially be recognised at cost as of 30 September 20X7.
The fair value of the investment at the date that SWL ceased to be a subsidiary, i.e.
30 September 20X7, shall be regarded as the cost on initial measurement.
969
Financial Reporting
During the period from 1 October 20X7 to 31 March 20X8 (after the disposal of the
2,400,000 shares), the investment in 30% equity interest in SWL shall be accounted
for by the equity method.
Under the equity method, the investment should be initially recognised at cost and the
carrying amount increased or decreased to recognise MCL's share of SWL's profit or
loss after the date SWL became an associate. MCL's share of SWL's profit or loss will
be recognised in MCL's consolidated profit or loss.
HKFRS 10 states that the income and expenses of a subsidiary are included in the
consolidated financial statements from the acquisition date, i.e. the date on which the
acquirer effectively obtains control of the acquiree, until the date on which the parent
ceases to control the subsidiary. Thus, SWL's income and expenses from 1 April 20X7
to 30 September 20X7 should be included in the consolidated financial statements for
the year ended 31 March 20X8.
The difference between the proceeds from the disposal of the subsidiary plus the fair
value of the interest retained and the carrying amount of the net assets as of the date
of disposal is recognised in the consolidated statement of profit or loss as the gain or
loss on the disposal of the subsidiary.
In MCL's separate financial statements for the year ended 31 March 20X8, the
investment in SWL would continue to be accounted for at cost.
(c) Difference in gains on disposal at entity and consolidated level
During the period from 1 April 20X7 to 30 September 20X7 (before the disposal of the
2,400,000 shares), the investment in 60% equity interest in SWL shall be accounted for as a
subsidiary.
The difference between the proceeds from the disposal of a 30% equity interest in SWL plus
the fair value of the 30% equity interest retained and the carrying amount of the net assets in
the consolidated financial statements as of the date of disposal is recognised in the
consolidated statement of profit or loss as the gain or loss on the disposal of the subsidiary.
The relevant carrying amount as of the date of disposal to be recognised in the consolidated
statement of financial position should have already been increased or decreased to
recognise MCL's share of SWL's profit or loss after the date of acquisition since MCL's share
of SWL's profit or loss will be recognised in MCL's consolidated profit or loss.
However, when separate financial statements are prepared, investments in subsidiaries shall
be accounted for either at cost, or in accordance with HKFRS 9.
In this case, MCL stated the investment at cost. Thus the calculation of gain or loss on
disposal will be based simply on the difference between proceeds from the disposal and the
cost of the investment.
(d) Impact of rights issue on EPS of MCL for 20X8
In this rights issue, the exercise price ($9) of the rights issue is less than the fair value of the
shares ($12). Therefore such a rights issue includes a bonus element.
In calculating the basic EPS for the current year, the number of ordinary shares from 1 April
20X7 to 31 December 20X7 to be used in calculating basic earnings per share would be
adjusted by the following bonus factor:
Fair value per share immediately prior to the exercise of rights
Theoretical ex-rights fair value per share
Theoretical ex-rights price to identify the bonus factor:

The theoretical ex-rights fair value per share is calculated by adding the aggregate fair value
of the shares immediately prior to the exercise of the rights to the proceeds from the exercise
970
of the rights, and dividing by the number of shares outstanding after the exercise of the
rights.
 2 shares at fair value of $12 prior to rights issue = $24
 1 share at discounted rights issue price of $9 = $9
 Ex-rights price (3 shares at fair value of $33 after issue) = $33/3 = $11
The bonus factor = $12 / $11 = 1.09
Since the rights issue is made part way through the year (1 January 20X8), a time-
apportionment is required.
Thus, weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding:
 10,000,000 shares  12/11  9/12 = 8,181,818
 plus (10,000,000 + 5,000,000) shares  3/12 = 3,750,000 = 11,931,818
The comparative basic EPS i.e. basic EPS for the year ended 31 March 20X7, should be
adjusted accordingly by dividing by the factor of 1.09.
I hope the above explanation has answered your questions. Please feel free to contact me if
you have further queries.
Best regards
Pindy Lee
Chapter 31 Consolidation of foreign operations

Question 1
HOME GROUP – CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS
FOR YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 20X6
$'000
Revenue (3,000 + 270.8 (W2) – (50/2.4)) 3,250.0
Cost of sales (2,400 + 229.2 (W2) – (50/2.4)) (2,608.4)
Gross profit 641.6
Distribution costs (32 + 17.1 (W2)) (49.1)
Administrative expenses (168 + 36.3 (W2)) (204.3)
Impairment of goodwill (W3) (1.9)
Exchange difference (W4) 1.3
Finance costs (15 + 4.2 (W2)) (19.2)
Income tax (102 – 4.2 (W2)) (97.8)
Profit for year 270.6
971
Financial Reporting
Workings
1 Group structure
Home
1.8.X4 100%
Foreign Pre-acquisition reserves = 180,000 Crowns

2 Translation of Foreign
Foreign Exchange Foreign
Crowns 000 rate $'000
Revenue 650 2.4 270.8
Cost of sales (550) 2.4 (229.2)
Distribution costs (41) 2.4 (17.1)
Administrative exp (87) 2.4 (36.3)
Finance costs (10) 2.4 (4.2)
Income tax (credit) 10 2.4 4.2
3 Goodwill
Crowns Crowns Rate $
Consideration transferred 204,000 1.7 120,000
Less fair value of net assets
acquired
Share capital 1,000
Reserves 180,000
(181,000) 1.7 (106,471)
At 1 August 20X4 23,000 1.7 13,529
Impairment loss: 20% (4,600) 2.4 (1,917)
Exchange difference balance (3,248)
At 31 July 20X6 18,400 2.2 8,364
4 Exchange difference on plant
As the payable is a monetary liability, it must be retranslated at the closing rate at the year
end and the exchange difference recognised in profit or loss:
$
Payable at closing rate (32,000 florins/1.6) 20,000
Original payable (32,000 florins/1.5) (21,333)
Reduction in payable = exchange gain (1,333)
972
Question bank – questions
973
Financial Reporting
974
SECTION A – Case questions

Question 1 90 minutes
Assume that you are Mr. Ricky Cheung, the accounting manager of Pacific Limited ("PCF"). PCF is
a conglomerate listed on the Stock Exchange of Hong Kong with many subsidiaries. PCF acquired
the equity interest in Sanata Limited ("SNT") by two successive purchases with details as follows:
Date Acquisition cost paid Fair value of SNT as an entity % acquired
HK$ HK$
1 April 20X9 6,000,000 24,000,000 25%

31 March 20Y0 26,000,000 40,000,000 65%
The financial year of both PCF and SNT ends on 31 March. The fair value of non-controlling
interests is measured as a proportionate interest in the fair value of the subsidiary as an entity. In
PCF’s individual financial statements SNT is measured at cost. Information relating to SNT is as
follows:
1 April 20X9 1 April 20X9 31 March 20Y0 31 March 20Y0
Book value Fair value Book value Fair value
HK$ HK$ HK$ HK$
Intangibles – 3,600,000 – 3,200,000

Inventory 2,000,000 2,400,000 4,000,000 4,800,000
Other net assets 18,000,000 18,000,000* 24,000,000 24,000,000*
Net identifiable assets 20,000,000 24,000,000* 28,000,000 32,000,000*
Share capital 8,000,000 8,000,000
Retained earnings 12,000,000 20,000,000
20,000,000 28,000,000
* The fair values of other net assets and net identifiable assets are stated before considering the
impact of deferred tax. Following the business combination, the tax bases of the assets and
liabilities of SNT remain unchanged.
The net profit of SNT for the year ended 31 March 20Y0 was HK$8,000,000. The intangibles of
SNT had a remaining useful life of 6 years from 1 April 20X9 and all inventories were sold within
two months from the year end. Both PCF and SNT did not declare any dividends during the year
ended 31 March 20Y0. The accounting policy of PCF is to account for the investment in associates
at cost in its separate financial statements.
Customer loyalty programme
SNT is a regional chain of convenience stores. It operates a customer loyalty programme and it
grants programme members loyalty points when they spend a specified amount on foodstuffs.
Programme members can redeem the points for further foodstuffs. The points have no expiry date.
Before 1 April 20X8, the entity granted 200,000 points. Management expected 180,000 of these
points to be redeemed. Management has measured the fair value of each loyalty point to be HK$1.
During the year ended 31 March 20X9, 81,000 of the points were redeemed in exchange for
foodstuffs. In the year ended 31 March 20Y0, management revised its expectations. It expected
190,000 points to be redeemed altogether. During the year, 90,000 points were redeemed.
You have prepared the draft consolidated financial statements of PCF for the year ended
31 March 20Y0. After you sent these draft consolidated financial statements to PCF's directors for
review, one of the directors, who is not a certified public accountant, sent you an email as follows:
975
Financial Reporting
To: Ricky Cheung, Accounting Manager, PCF

From: Emily Chen (Director)
c.c.: David Ip, Susan Tse, Richard Chung (Directors)
Date: 18 May 20Y0
Consolidated financial statements of PCF as at 31 March 20Y0
Could you please clarify the following points relating to PCF's draft consolidated financial
(A) I find that there is an item called "gain on step acquisition" in the consolidated financial
statements. You told me that it is somewhat related to the remeasurement of the previously
held equity interest in SNT at its acquisition-date fair value. What is it all about?
(B) I find that there are intangibles in the consolidated financial statements that I cannot find in
the financial statements of PCF and SNT.
(C) It seems to me that goodwill is the difference between the amount that I paid and the value
that I obtained from the investment. However, I cannot obtain the goodwill figure that you
computed in the consolidated financial statements.
(D) I know that there will be tax-effect entries for fair value adjustments. However, why is this tax
effect affecting the value of the goodwill?
(E) I find that portion of the revenue from the sales of foodstuffs by SNT has not been
recognised in the same period as the sales are made. You told me that it is due to the
customer loyalty programme. What is it all about?
I would appreciate your clarification for the upcoming board meeting.
Best regards,
Emily
Required
Assume that you are the accounting manager, and you are required to draft a memorandum to Ms.
Chen, a Director of PCF. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) discuss and calculate the effect of the business combination, at 31 March 20Y0, on the
25 per cent equity interests in SNT held by PCF in the separate financial statements of PCF
and at consolidated level (ignore taxation); (14 marks)
(b) discuss the rationale for the recognition of the intangibles in the consolidated financial
statements that are not recognised in the financial statements of SNT; (10 marks)
(c) calculate the amount of goodwill as at 31 March 20Y0 if deferred tax implications are
ignored; (5 marks)
(d) discuss the rationale and calculate the effect on goodwill if deferred tax implications follow
from recognising the difference between the fair values and book values of the identifiable
net assets is taken into consideration (assuming a tax rate of 16 per cent); and (10 marks)
(e) discuss and calculate the amount of revenue in relation to 200,000 loyalty points, granted
before 1 April 20X8, to be recognised for the year ended 31 March 20X9 and 31 March
20Y0. (11 marks)
(Total = 50 marks)
976
Assume that you are Mr. Vincent Lee, the accounting manager of Peter Wong Equipment Group
Limited (PWE). PWE is a company incorporated in Bermuda with limited liability. Its shares are
listed on The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited (the “Hong Kong Stock Exchange”).
The consolidated financial statements are presented in Hong Kong dollars, which is the same as
the functional currency of PWE. PWE has a number of subsidiary companies in various countries.
On 1 April 20X1, PWE acquired an equity interest in Sandy Jolly Limited (SJL), a company
incorporated in Hong Kong. The following are the extracts of the draft consolidated financial
statements of PWE for the year ended 31 March 20X2 and the statement of financial position of SJL
as at 1 April 20X1, the date of acquisition.
Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of PWE (the Group)
for the year ended 31 March 20X2 (extract)
HK$’000
Revenue 853,000
Gross profit 52,650
Finance costs (2,300)
Share of profits of associates 1,650
Tax expense (1,050)
Profit for the year (Note 1) 15,850
Other comprehensive income – amounts that may be reclassified to profit or loss:

Exchange differences on translating foreign subsidiaries (Note 6) 5,000
Profit for the year attributable to:

Owners of PWE 13,950
Non-controlling interests 1,900
15,850
Total comprehensive income for the year attributable to:

Owners of PWE 17,950
20,850
Statements of Financial Position (extract)
PWE Consolidated SJL

31 Mar 20X2 31 Mar 20X1 at acquisition
HK$’000 HK$’000 HK$’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (Note 3) 279,500 244,500 35,500
Prepaid land lease payment 21,600 22,200 –
Goodwill (Note 4) 9,000 7,500 –
Investment in associates 16,000 15,500 –
Certificate of deposit (Note 7) 7,500 – –
Current assets
Trade and other receivables 44,000 47,250 10,250
Cash and cash equivalents (Note 8) 1,000 9,000 1,250
Total assets 378,600 345,950 47,000
977
Financial Reporting

Share capital (Note 2) 95,000 65,000 13,000
Retained earnings 58,900 53,200 10,500
Other reserves (Note 5) 104,000 100,000 17,000
257,900 218,200 40,500
Non-controlling interest 27,500 18,600 –
Total equity 285,400 236,800 40,500
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 34,900 56,650 4,500
Interest payable 1,250 500 –
Taxation payable 7,050 7,000 2,000
Bank loans 50,000 45,000 –
Total equity and liabilities 378,600 345,950 47,000
Additional information
1 Profit for the year has been arrived at after charging (crediting):
HK$’000
Auditor’s remuneration 1,000
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 32,600
Exchange loss arising on translating the foreign currency bank deposits 500
Exchange loss arising on translating the foreign currency bank loans 1,260
Impairment loss recognised in respect of trade receivables 711
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment (Note 3) 2,500
Operating lease rentals 200
Release of prepaid land lease payments 600
2 PWE issued 3,000,000 new ordinary shares (in addition to 10,000,000 existing shares) at
HK$10 each, which have a total fair value of HK$30,000,000 at the acquisition date, and
paid cash of HK$4,000,000, in consideration for 80% of SJL’s shares. At the date of
acquisition, all of SJL’s assets and liabilities were recorded at their fair values. The fair value
of non-controlling interests of SJL was recorded as HK$8,000,000 on the acquisition date.
During the year, PWE did not make any further issue of ordinary shares.
3 An analysis of the movement on the Group’s property, plant and equipment during the year
showed that the property, plant and equipment with a carrying amount of HK$29,000,000
was sold for HK$26,500,000.
4 During the year, no goodwill has suffered from any impairment and the Group has not repaid
any bank loans.
5 The increase in the other reserves is solely attributed to the controlling shareholders' share
of the translation reserve arising on the translation of foreign subsidiaries.
6 The exchange difference arising on the translation of foreign subsidiaries is summarised as
below:
HK$'000
Trade and other receivables 4,500
Trade and other payables (1,500)
5,000
7 The certificate of deposit is a 5-year certificate of deposit that pays 4% compounded semi-
annually with a maturity date of 31 December 20X6.
978
8 Included in cash and cash equivalents are foreign currency demand deposits. An exchange
loss of HK$500,000 arises on the translation of these foreign currency demand deposits.
You have prepared the draft consolidated financial statements of PWE for the year ended
31 March 20X2. After you sent these draft consolidated financial statements to PWE’s directors for
review, one of the directors, who is not a certified public accountant, sent you an e-mail as follows:
To: Vincent Lee, Accounting Manager, PWE

From: Fatima Choi (Director)
c.c.: Jason Lam, Andy Cheng, Nick Chan (Directors)
Date: 16 May 20X2
Re: Consolidated financial statements of PWE as at 31 March 20X2
Could you please clarify the following points relating to PWE’s draft consolidated financial
(A) I find that you have deducted HK$7,500,000 from our cash and bank balances and
separately included it as “certificate of deposit”. The way you have done it reduces our
reported cash and cash equivalents a lot. You should not do so! It is even worse that you
included it as a non-current asset. The way you have done that not only significantly
reduces our reported cash and cash equivalent but also results in net current liability. I don't
want people to think that we have liquidity problems. I demand you adjust the cash and cash
equivalent by adding back this "certificate of deposit".
(B) You told me that various HKFRSs have been issued but we have not applied them. Why
don’t we apply those HKFRSs as they have been issued? Do we need to tell our
shareholders on this matter?
(C) I find that PWE have acquired a new subsidiary and therefore goodwill arises. How should
we disclose this acquisition of a subsidiary in our consolidated financial statements? How do
you calculate the amount of goodwill?
(D) I find that it is difficult to obtain the figures in the consolidated statement of cash flows. Can
you tell me more about how you arrive at each figure?
Please clarify and adjust in time for the upcoming board meeting.
Best regards,
Fatima
Assume that you are the accounting manager, a certified public accountant, and you are required
to draft a memorandum to Fatima Choi, a Director of PWE. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) discuss the appropriate treatment of the certificate of deposit with reference to:
(i) the accounting standards; and (5 marks)
(ii) the ethical issues (6 marks)
(b) discuss the disclosure requirements relating to the fact that various new HKFRSs have been
issued but are not yet effective and are not early adopted; (6 marks)
(c) briefly describe the presentation requirement of the cash flow effects of the acquisition of
SJL. Show the calculation of goodwill and the net cash flow arising on the acquisition of
SJL; and (10 marks)
(d) prepare an annex to your memorandum showing the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows,
using the indirect method, for PWE for the year ended 31 March 20X2, beginning with profit
before tax. All figures should be rounded to the nearest HK$’000. (23 marks)
(Total = 50 marks)
979
Financial Reporting
Assume that you are Mr. Tommy Lau, the accounting manager of Papaya Limited (PPY). PPY is a
company incorporated in Hong Kong and is principally engaged in the manufacturing of consumer
products. PPY acquired 80 per cent of the ordinary shares of Sheffield Limited (SFL) for
HK$25,600,000 on 1 April 20X7.
At the acquisition date, SFL reported retained earnings of HK$12,000,000 and no revaluation
reserve. The carrying amount of all assets and liabilities approximated the fair value except for
intangible assets. The fair and book values of the intangible assets of SFL (with a remaining life of
ten years), excluding deferred tax liability on fair value adjustments, is HK$18,500,000 and
HK$16,000,000 respectively at the date of acquisition.
Non-controlling interests are measured as the non-controlling interest's proportionate share of the
acquiree's net identifiable assets as at acquisition date. Investment in SFL was carried at cost. Both
companies did not have any reserves other than retained earnings and revaluation reserves.
On 1 April 20X7, PPY commenced construction of a plant which was expected to take three years
to complete. In the year ended 31 March 20Y0, HK$600,000 interest which qualified for
capitalisation had not been capitalised in the draft accounts.
On 1 April 20X9, PPY held inventory purchased from SFL during the year ended 31 March 20X9
for HK$1,200,000 which had been manufactured by SFL at a cost of HK$800,000. During the year
ended 31 March 20Y0, SFL sold goods costing HK$3,200,000 to PPY for HK$4,800,000. PPY sold
the inventory on hand at the beginning of the year, but continued to hold 40 per cent of its 20X9
purchases from SFL on 31 March 20Y0. It is the group's accounting policy to allocate to non-
controlling interests the adjustments to unrealised profits from upstream transactions. The tax rate
for the years of assessment from 20X7/X8 to 20X9/Y0 was 16.5 per cent.
PPY holds an investment property which was let out, charging arm’s length rentals, to a senior
manager of SFL. PPY acquired this property on 1 April 20X9 at a price of HK$6,000,000. The
estimated useful life of the property was 50 years from 1 April 20X9. The fair value of the property
at 31 March 20Y0 remains at HK$6,000,000 and the rental income to PPY for the year ended
31 March 20Y0 amounts to HK$300,000. This property is included in PPY's statement of financial
position at its fair value as an investment property. PPY adopts the revaluation model for property,
plant and equipment, except for construction in progress, which is stated at cost. Intangible assets
are carried at cost. Depreciation is provided using the straight line method.
The draft financial data of the two companies for the year ended 31 March 20Y0 are shown below:
PPY SFL
HK$ HK$
Sales 80,000,000 38,400,000
Cost of sales* (51,200,000) (25,600,000)
Gross profit 28,800,000 12,800,000
Other income (Dividend income) 1,280,000 –
Distribution costs (3,000,000) (2,300,000)
Administrative expenses (5,000,000) (2,500,000)
Finance costs (5,760,000) (1,120,000)
Profit before tax 16,320,000 6,880,000
Income tax expense (3,520,000) (2,080,000)
Profit for the year 12,800,000 4,800,000
Other comprehensive income that will not be reclassified to
profit or loss: revaluation surplus 6,000,000 1,200,000
Total comprehensive income for the year 18,800,000 6,000,000
* Cost of sales includes the depreciation of the plant and amortisation of intangible assets
980
Share capital earnings surplus Total equity
HK$ HK$ HK$ HK$
PPY
Balance, 1 April 20X9 32,000,000 36,400,000 4,000,000 72,400,000
Total comprehensive income – 12,800,000 6,000,000 18,800,000
Dividends – (3,200,000) – (3,200,000)
Balance, 31 March 20Y0 32,000,000 46,000,000 10,000,000 88,000,000
HK$ HK$ HK$ HK$
SFL
Balance, 1 April 20X9 16,000,000 21,800,000 1,000,000 38,800,000
Total comprehensive income – 4,800,000 1,200,000 6,000,000
Dividends – (1,600,000) – (1,600,000)
Balance, 31 March 20Y0 16,000,000 25,000,000 2,200,000 43,200,000
PPY SFL
HK$ HK$
Property, plant and equipment, net 40,000,000 7,600,000
Investment property 20,800,000 12,000,000
Investment in SFL, at cost 25,600,000 –
Intangible assets, net – 11,200,000
Inventories 51,200,000 21,600,000
Trade and other receivables 25,000,000 14,000,000
Cash and cash equivalents 23,000,000 10,400,000
185,600,000 76,800,000
Share capital 32,000,000 16,000,000

Retained earnings 46,000,000 25,000,000
Revaluation surplus 10,000,000 2,200,000
88,000,000 43,200,000
Trade and other payables 47,600,000 13,600,000
Long-term loan 50,000,000 20,000,000
185,600,000 76,800,000
You have prepared the draft consolidated financial statements of PPY for the year ended 31 March
20Y0. After you sent these draft consolidated financial statements to PPY’s directors for review,
one of the directors, who is not a certified public accountant, sent you an email as follows:
To: Tommy Lau, Accounting Manager, PPY

From: Gabriel Wong (Director)
c.c.: Renee Ho, Chris Wong, Adrian Cheung (Directors)
Date: 8 May 20Y0
Consolidated financial statements of PPY as at 31 March 20Y0
Could you please clarify the following points relating to PPY's draft consolidated financial
(A) I am puzzled about the investment property. The figure that was found in the PPY's
statement of financial position was not the same as that in the consolidated one.
(B) I find that it is difficult to obtain the figures in the consolidated statement of financial position.
Can you tell me more about how you arrived at each figure?
981
Financial Reporting

Best regards,
Gabriel
Required
Assume that you are Tommy Lau, the accounting manager, and you are required to draft a
memorandum to Gabriel Wong, a Director of PPY. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) discuss the reason for the different figures for the investment property in the consolidated
financial statements and in the financial statements of PPY; and (7 marks)
(b) prepare an annex to your memorandum showing worksheets for:
(i) the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, and
(12 marks)
(ii) the consolidated statement of financial position. (26 marks)
(Total = 45 marks)
(Consolidation adjustments are to be shown in the form of a worksheet. You have to show
the detailed calculations of each figure though journal entries are not required.)
982
Assume that you are Mr. Ricky Lam, the accounting manager of Sun Tech Limited ("STL"). STL is
a company incorporated and listed in Hong Kong and is principally engaged in the manufacturing of
electronic products.
In June 20X8, STL made an offer to the shareholders of Moon-night Limited ("MNL") to acquire a
controlling interest in the 400 million shares of MNL. STL was prepared to pay $1.50 cash per
share, provided that 70% of the shares could be acquired. The directors of MNL recommended that
the offer be accepted. By 1 July 20X8, when the offer expired, 75% of the shares had changed
hands and were now in the possession of STL.
STL also acquired 25% of the 400 million shares of Earth-ray Limited ("ERL") on 1 July 20X8 for a
cash consideration of $145 million. A summary of the acquisition of the shares of MNL and ERL by
STL is as follows:
Share capital Retained
Date of % Cost of at acquisition earnings at Net assets at
acquisition acquired investment date acquisition date acquisition date
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
MNL 1 July 20X8 75 450,000 400,000 160,000 560,000
ERL 1 July 20X8 25 145,000 400,000 180,000 580,000
The following table summarises information from the three companies' statements of profit or loss
for the year ended 30 June 20X9:
STL MNL ERL
$'000 $'000 $'000
Revenue 878,900 388,900 300,000
Cost of sales (374,400) (112,400) (120,000)
Gross profit 504,500 276,500 180,000
Other income 14,000 16,000 15,000
Distribution and administrative costs (216,200) (115,800) (120,000)
Depreciation and amortisation (30,000) (10,000) (10,000)
Tax (112,400) (50,000) (24,000)
The fair value of the identifiable net assets of MNL and ERL at the date of acquisition was the
same as the carrying amount of those assets. Neither company had any reserves other than
retained earnings.
During the year ended 30 June 20X9, STL sold goods to MNL and ERL at an invoiced value of
$100 million and $15 million respectively. STL invoiced goods to its subsidiary and associated
company at cost plus 20%. One-third (1/3) of the goods and half (1/2) of the goods were still held in
MNL's inventory and in ERL's inventory respectively at 30 June 20X9.
On 1 July 20X8, MNL sold equipment to STL for $60 million. At that date, the carrying amount of
the equipment was $52 million and the equipment was estimated to have a remaining useful life of
10 years. The resulting gain was recorded as other income by MNL. STL has adopted an
accounting policy which depreciates plant and equipment using the straight line method with no
residual value. It is also the group policy that non-controlling interest shall be measured at the non-
controlling interest's proportionate share of the subsidiary's identifiable net assets.
Joint venture
STL is considering a joint venture with Johnson Limited ("JSL"). STL and JSL will have equal
interests in the joint venture, which will be set up as a separate legal entity. JSL will contribute
$10 million in cash while STL will contribute machinery which is stated in its statement of financial
position at a cost of $12 million and a carrying amount of $8 million. The machinery has a fair value
983
Financial Reporting
assessed as $10 million on the basis of its depreciated replacement cost. It is noted that the
significant risks and rewards of ownership of the contributed machinery can be transferred to the
joint venture and the resulting gain can be reliably measured.
You have prepared draft consolidated financial statements of STL for the year ended
30 June 20X9. After you sent these draft consolidated financial statements to STL's directors for
review, one of the directors, who is not a certified public accountant, sent you an email as follows:
To: Ricky Lam, Accounting Manager, STL

From: Sunny Sun (Director)
c.c.: Susan Chow, Emily Tsim, Rachael Lau (Directors)
Date: 18 September 20X9
Consolidated financial statements of STL as at 30 June 20X9
Could you please clarify the following points relating to STL's draft consolidated financial
(a) I have not found any goodwill in either of the financial statements of STL and MNL. Why is
there such an item in the consolidated statement of financial position?
(b) It seems to be a good idea to invest in the joint venture. By contributing our machinery to the
joint venture, a gain on disposal will be recorded. Do you agree?
(c) I note that you have made tax-effect entries for adjustments for intragroup transactions. As
tax is charged on individual entities, why have these tax effect entries been made?
(d) I note that the amount of sales from STL to ERL has not been eliminated. Why don't we
eliminate all these sales as ERL is our investee? Did we overstate our profit, particularly
when ERL has not resold all the inventory transferred from STL?
I would appreciate your clarification in time for the next board meeting.
Best regards,
Sunny
Required
Prepare a memorandum in response to the issues raised by Mr. Sunny Sun. In your
memorandum, you should:
(a) briefly discuss the reason for the goodwill and calculate the amount of goodwill as shown in
the consolidated statement of financial position; (5 marks)
(b) discuss how STL should account for its contribution to the joint venture and prepare the
relevant journal entries in STL's separate financial statements and in the consolidated
financial statements; (10 marks)
(c) discuss why tax effects of adjustments for intragroup transactions are needed. Illustrate, with
appropriate calculation, by using the intragroup sales of goods from STL to MNL as an
example (assume a tax rate of 16%); (7 marks)
(d) explain why the amount of sales from STL to ERL has not been eliminated in the
consolidated statement of profit or loss. Discuss and calculate the amount of ERL's profit that
STL should share (assume a tax rate of 16%). (8 marks)
(Total = 30 marks)
984
Assume that you are Mr. John Chan, the accounting manager of Global Resources Limited
("GRL"), which is a company incorporated in Hong Kong and listed in the Growth Enterprise Market
of The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited. GRL and its subsidiaries (GRL Group) are
principally engaged in the natural resources business in the People's Republic of Bangladesh; and
the provision of medical equipment services and related accessories, and the provision of medical
research and development services in mainland China. Now, GRL intends to disinvest its
investment in the medical research and development business.
Asia Medical Research Limited ("AMR")
On 1 April 20X8, GRL acquired 600,000 of the 1,000,000 ordinary shares issued by Asia Medical
Research Limited ("AMR") for $7.5 million in cash. On that date, the fair value of the net identifiable
assets of AMR was the same as their carrying amount, and the share capital and retained earnings
of AMR were $1 million and $9 million respectively with no other components of equity. GRL is
entitled to appoint three out of the five directors on the board. All board decisions are made by
simple majority resolution. On 1 April 20Y1, AMR issued 500,000 shares to a new investor, Simon
Firth Limited ("SFL"), for $8 million. As a result, GRL's shareholdings in AMR decreased to 40%.
In addition, SFL has the right to appoint two new directors to the board making a total of seven
directors on the board. The fair value of GRL's investment in AMR was valued at $9.6 million on
1 April 20Y1.
China Development Services Limited ("CDS")
On 1 April 20Y0, GRL acquired 2,640,000 ordinary shares in China Development Services Limited
("CDS") for $12 million in cash. Thus GRL owns 2,640,000 out of the 4,000,000 shares of CDS,
giving it a 66% interest. On 1 April 20Y1, CDS issued 400,000 shares to a new investor, Michael
Sun Limited ("MSL"), for $5.5 million. As a result, GRL's shareholdings in CDS decreased to 60 per
cent. The carrying amount of CDS's net identifiable assets in the consolidated financial statements
of GRL, as at 31 March 20Y1, was $12.9 million.
Other relevant information:
(i) At the date of acquisition, the fair values of CDS's assets were equal to their carrying
amounts with the exception that the fair value of CDS's inventory was $500,000 below its
carrying amount; and it was written down by this amount shortly after acquisition as an
impairment loss and it has not changed in its fair value since then.
(ii) On 2 April 20Y0, GRL sold an item of plant to CDS at $2.5 million. Its carrying amount prior
to the sale was $2 million. The estimated remaining useful life of the plant at the date of sale
was five years. GRL, AMR and CDS depreciate their property, plant and equipment using
the straight line method.
(iii) There were no intra-group payables or receivables at 31 March 20Y1. No dividends were
paid during the year by any of the said companies.
(iv) It is the group's policy to measure non-controlling interests at its proportionate share of the
subsidiary's net identifiable assets at the acquisition date. Goodwill arising from the
acquisition of AMR and CDS has not subsequently been impaired. For the assets of both
AMR and CDS, no gain or loss has been previously recognised in other comprehensive
income.
Ms. Linda Ho, a director of GRL is concerned about the implications of the above transactions and
information. She wondered if it may result in any gain or loss to be recognised and if it may make
any difference in the consolidation process.
985
Financial Reporting
The draft statements of financial position of the companies at 31 March 20Y1 are:
GRL AMR CDS Total
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 18,400 9,000 10,400 37,800
Investment in AMR 7,500 - - 7,500
Investment in CDS 12,000 - - 12,000
Current assets
Inventory 5,900 3,000 4,200 13,100
Accounts receivable 2,200 2,000 1,500 5,700
Cash 1,000 1,000 2,000 4,000
47,000 15,000 18,100 80,100

Share capital 19,000 1,000 4,000 24,000
Retained earnings
At 31 March 20Y0 16,000 10,000 6,500 32,500
For the year ended 31 March 20Y1 8,000 1,000 2,400 11,400
43,000 12,000 12,900 67,900
Non-current liability
Debenture - 2,000 1,000 3,000
Current liability
Accounts payable 4,000 1,000 4,200 9,200
47,000 15,000 18,100 80,100
Required
Assume that you are John Chan, the accounting manager, and you are required to draft a
memorandum to Ms. Linda Ho, a Director of GRL. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) discuss and advise, with calculations, the accounting treatments for the investment in AMR
in the consolidated financial statements of GRL on 1 April 20Y1;
(14 marks)
(b) discuss and advise, with calculations, the accounting treatments for the investment in CDS in
the consolidated financial statements of GRL on 1 April 20Y1; and
(10 marks)
(c) prepare an annex to your memorandum showing worksheets for the consolidated statement
of financial position of GRL as at 1 April 20Y1 after considering the transactions and other
information. Ignore the deferred tax implications.
(26 marks)
(Total = 50 marks)
(Consolidation adjustments are to be shown in the form of a worksheet. You have to show
the detailed calculations of each figure, but journal entries are not required.)
986
Assume that you are Miss Melody Li, the accounting manager of Magic Holding Limited (MHL),
which is a company incorporated in Hong Kong. MHL’s functional and presentation currency is the
Hong Kong dollar (HKD).
On 31 December 2011, MHL acquired 80% of the ordinary share capital of Stone Dove Limited
(SDL), which is located in Australia. At the date of acquisition, SDL’s share capital was 24 million
Australian dollars (AUD24 million) and the retained earnings were AUD30 million. SDL had not
issued any share capital since its acquisition by MHL. The following financial statements relate to
MHL and SDL for the year ended 31 December 20X2.
Statement of retained earnings of MHL and SDL for the year ended 31 December 20X2
MHL SDL
HKD’000 AUD’000
Retained earnings, 1 January 694,500 30,000
Profit after tax 90,000 10,000
Retained earnings, 31 December 784,500 40,000
Statement of financial position for MHL and SDL as at 31 December 20X2
MHL SDL
HKD’000 AUD’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets 1,170,000 76,000
Investment in SDL 427,500 –
Current assets
Inventory 225,000 6,000
Accounts receivable 120,000 12,000
Cash 27,000 6,600
Total assets 1,969,500 100,600

1,534,500 64,000
Non-current liabilities 120,000 32,000
Current liabilities 315,000 4,600
Total equity and liabilities 1,969,500 100,600
Additional information:
 The book values of SDL’s assets and liabilities approximated their fair values except for a
patent whose fair value was greater than the book value by AUD10 million on 31 December
20X1. SDL had not revalued its assets since its acquisition by MHL. The patent had a
remaining economic life of ten years from 31 December 20X1 and no residual value. The
patent is recorded as a non-current asset.
 Non-controlling interests are measured at their proportionate share in the recognised
amounts of the acquiree's identifiable net assets.
 The Australia dollar is the currency of the primary economic environment in which SDL
operates. Therefore, the functional currency of SDL is considered to be the Australian dollar
(AUD).
987
Financial Reporting
 The following exchange rates are relevant to the financial statements:

Date AUD1 to HKD
31 December 20X1 7.60
31 December 20X2 8.10
Average rate for 20X2 7.80
 There was no impairment of goodwill since the date of acquisition.
 The relevant Australian corporate tax rate is 30%.
Earnings per share
To calculate the earnings per share of MHL for the year ended 31 December 20X2, the following
information has been obtained:
The number of ordinary shares outstanding at the beginning of the year, i.e. 1 January 20X2, was
23,250,000. On 1 October 20X2, 5,000,000 shares of MHL has been issued for cash.
Warrants to buy 3,000,000 ordinary shares of MHL at HKD60 per share for a period of five years
were issued on 1 January 20X2. No warrants were exercised in 20X2.
On 1 January 20X2, convertible bonds with a principal amount of HKD10 million due in 10 years
were issued for cash at HKD1,000 at par. The convertible bonds have a coupon rate of 4% per
annum, which is equivalent to the effective interest rate. Each HKD1,000 bond is convertible into
20 ordinary shares of MHL. No bonds were converted in 20X2.
The average market price of an ordinary share of MHL from 1 January 20X2 to
31 December 20X2 was HKD100. The relevant Hong Kong tax rate is 16.5%.
Intangible assets
One of the directors, Ms. Tess Chow, noticed that a patent of SDL has been recognised in the
consolidated financial statements of MHL at its fair value on 31 December 20X1 though it is only
recognised on cost basis in the financial statements of SDL. She would like to recognise also the
intangible assets of MHL in the consolidated financial statements of MHL at their fair values and
thus she has asked for your opinion on the following items:
 MHL has a brand name, Magica, which has become well known since MHL developed it ten
years ago. Valuation experts have valued the brand name at HKD5 million. Tess would like
to recognise this brand name as an intangible asset and report it at HKD5 million in the
consolidated financial statements of MHL.
 MHL owns a 20-year patent which it acquired five years ago for HKD2 million and
recognised at cost in the separate financial statements of MHL. Valuation experts have
valued this patent at HKD10 million. Tess would like to report this patent at HKD10 million in
the consolidated financial statements of MHL.
Question 1 (50 marks – approximately 90 minutes)
Assume that you are Melody Li, the accounting manager, and you are required to draft a
memorandum to Ms. Tess Chow, a Director of MHL. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) For the consolidated financial statements of MHL, advise the appropriate accounting
treatment for the brand name and the patent of MHL as mentioned by Tess.
(6 marks)
(b) Calculate the basic and diluted earnings per share attributable to ordinary equity
holders of the parent for the consolidated financial statements of MHL for the year
ended 31 December 20X2, on the basis that the profit attributable to ordinary equity
holders of the parent for the year ended 31 December 20X2 is HKD147,189,600.
(9 marks)
988
(c) Calculate the total translation reserves to be presented in the consolidated statement
of financial position of MHL as at 31 December 20X2.
(You may consider analyse into translation reserves on net assets, fair value adjustment and
goodwill, or use other presentation method to calculate the translation reserves).
(14 marks)
(d) Prepare an annex to your memorandum showing the worksheets for the consolidated
statement of financial position of MHL as at 31 December 20X2. (21 marks)
(Recognise the deferred tax implications at the relevant tax rate. Assume that appropriate
accounting treatments have been made in the statements of retained earnings and
statements of financial position as presented.
Consolidation adjustments are to be shown in the form of a worksheet. For Question 1(d),
you may use the template in green colour paper provide and/or the script booklet for Case
Questions to prepare your answers. You have to show the detailed calculations of each
figure, but journal entries are not required).
Assume that you are Mr. Raymond Wong, the accounting manager of Debussy Limited (DBL),
which is principally engaged in the manufacture and sale of musical instruments. DBL is a
company incorporated in Hong Kong and is listed on the Main Board of the Stock Exchange of
Hong Kong. The financial year end date of DBL is 30 September. DBL acquired 70% of the
ordinary shares of Stanford Limited (STF) for $768 million on 1 October 20W8.
At the acquisition date, STF reported retained earnings of $350 million and a revaluation reserve of
$10 million. The carrying amount of all assets and liabilities approximated the fair value except for
intangible assets. The book and fair values of the intangible assets of STF (with a remaining useful
life of eight years), excluding deferred tax liability on fair value adjustments, were $40 million and
$120 million respectively at the date of acquisition.
Non-controlling interests are measured as the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share in the
recognised amounts of the acquiree’s net identifiable assets as at the acquisition date. Investment
in STF was carried at cost. Both companies had no reserves other than retained earnings and
revaluation reserves.
On 1 October 20X1, DBL held inventory purchased from STF at an invoiced price of
$36 million which had been manufactured by STF at a cost of $24 million. During the six months
ended 31 March 20X2, STF sold musical instruments costing $96 million to DBL for $144 million.
As at 31 March 20X2, DBL had sold the entire beginning inventory, but continued to hold 35% of its
current period purchases from STF.
DBL adopted the revaluation model for property, plant and equipment while intangible assets were
carried at cost. Depreciation and amortisation is provided using the straight-line method. The tax
rate for the years of assessment from 20W8/W9 to 20X1/X2 was 16.5%.
On 1 May 20X2, DBL entered into a contract with Forever Young Limited (FYL). The contract
requires DBL to make a ten-year variable rate $30 million loan to FYL while FYL at the same time
makes a ten-year fixed rate loan for the same amount to DBL. There are no transfers of principal
at inception of the two loans, since DBL and FYL have a netting agreement. During the ten years,
DBL will pay a fixed rate of 3% per six months and receive a variable amount based on six-month
HIBOR, reset on a semi-annual basis. The fixed and variable amounts are determined on the
basis of a principal amount of $30 million.
989
Financial Reporting
The draft financial data of the two companies for the six months ended 31 March 20X2 are shown
below:
DBL STF
$'000 $'000
Sales 2,400,000 1,152,000
Cost of sales (1,536,000) (769,000)
Gross profit 864,000 383,000
Other income (including dividend income) 38,000
Distribution costs (90,000) (69,000)
Administrative expenses* (150,000) (75,000)
Finance costs (172,000) (34,000)
Profit for the period 384,000 144,000
Other comprehensive income that will not be reclassified to
profit or loss: revaluation surplus 180,000 36,000
Total comprehensive income for the period 564,000 180,000
* Administrative expenses include the amortisation of intangible assets.

$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
DBL
Balance, 1 October 20X1 960,000 1,092,000 120,000 2,172,000
Total comprehensive income – 384,000 180,000 564,000
Dividends – (96,000) – (96,000)
Balance, 31 March 20X2 960,000 1,380,000 300,000 2,640,000
STF
Balance, 1 October 20X1 480,000 654,000 30,000 1,164,000
Total comprehensive income – 144,000 36,000 180,000
Dividends – (48,000) – (48,000)
Balance, 31 March 20X2 480,000 750,000 66,000 1,296,000
DBL STF
$'000 $'000
Property, plant and equipment, net 1,824,000 788,000
Investment in STF, at cost 768,000 –
Intangible assets, net – 136,000
Inventory 1,536,000 648,000
Trade and other receivables 750,000 420,000
5,568,000 2,304,000
990
DBL STF
$'000 $'000
Retained earnings 1,380,000 750,000
Revaluation surplus 300,000 66,000
2,640,000 1,296,000
Trade and other payables 1,428,000 408,000
Long term loan 1,500,000 600,000
5,568,000 2,304,000
You have prepared the draft condensed consolidated financial statements of DBL for the six
months ended 31 March 20X2. After you sent these draft condensed consolidated financial
statements to DBL’s directors for review, one of the directors, Ms. Janice Lam, sent you an e-mail
as follows:
To: Raymond Wong, Accounting Manager, DBL

From: Janice Lam (Director)
c.c.: Lucas Chong, Josiah Wong, Andrea Cheung (Directors)
Date: 7 May 20X2
Condensed consolidated financial statements of DBL for the six months ended 31 March 20X2
Could you please clarify the following points relating to DBL’s draft condensed consolidated
financial statements which I have just reviewed.
(a) I know that our interim financial report has complied with the requirements of HKAS 34, and
thus we have complied with this HKFRS. Why don’t you say that we have complied with
HKFRSs in the notes to the financial statements? By the way, I understand that we have to
disclose segment information in our annual financial statements. However, this is only the
interim financial report; I don’t think we need to disclose segment information!
(b) I am puzzled about the disclosure in relation to related parties. Who actually are the related
parties of DBL? I understand that I am related to DBL because I am a director of DBL, but I
don’t think my private business, Beethoven Limited (BTV), is related. Although I have a
100% investment in BTV, which purchases musical instruments regularly from STF, it is not
related to DBL in any sense!
(c) I know that we have just entered into a contract with FYL. How shall we account for this
contract?
(d) I find that it is difficult to obtain the figures in the condensed consolidated financial
statements. Can you tell me more about how you arrived at each figure?
Best regards,
Janice

Assume that you are Raymond Wong, the accounting manager, and you are required to draft a
memorandum to Janice Lam, a Director of DBL. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) briefly discuss and advise whether DBL should describe its condensed interim
financial report as complying with HKFRSs; (4 marks)
(b) briefly discuss and advise whether the segment information should be disclosed in
DBL’s interim financial report; (4 marks)
991
Financial Reporting
(c) discuss and identify the related party relationship among DBL, BTV and STF in their
respective financial statements; (7 marks)
(d) briefly discuss and advise the appropriate accounting treatment of the contract with
FYL. Detail calculation is not required; and (5 marks)
(e) prepare an annex to your memorandum showing worksheets for:
(i) the condensed consolidated statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for the six months ended 31 March 20X2, and
(11 marks)
(ii) the condensed consolidated statement of financial position as at
31 March 20X2. (19 marks)
(Consolidation adjustments are to be shown in the form of a worksheet. For Question
1(e), you may use the template in green colour paper provided and/or the script
booklet for Case Questions to prepare your answers. You are required to show the
detailed calculations for each figure, journal entries are not required.)
Assume that you are Miss Karen Lam, the accounting manager of Proper Holdings Limited (PHL),
which is a company incorporated in Hong Kong. PHL had a partially-owned subsidiary, Sunderland
Limited (SDL), and an 25% associate, Assorted Limited (ASL), for many years.
On 1 January 20X2, PHL acquired an 85% interest in Supercar Limited (“SPC”) by issuing
10,560,000 ordinary shares (with a fair value of $13,200,000) and paying $2,272,000 in cash. The
fair value of non-controlling interests at the date of acquisition was $2,880,000. There is no
impairment of goodwill since the date of acquisition of SPC. PHL classifies cash received from
investment income under the category of investing activities.
Fair value of the net identifiable assets of SPC as at the acquisition date is as follows:-
$’000
Non-current asset
Machinery 7,920
Current assets
Inventory 1,536
Accounts receivable 1,344
Cash and cash equivalent 5,376
Current liabilities
Accounts payable 3,264
Tax payable 816
992
The draft consolidated financial statements for PHL are as follows:

Draft consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of PHLfor the year
ended 31 December 20X2
$’000
Dividends from long-term investments 9,300
Interest expense (9,000)
Share of profit from associates 21,000
Taxation (29,700)
Profit for the year and total comprehensive income 80,700
Profit for the year and total comprehensive income attributable to:
Owners of PHL 74,700
80,700
Draft consolidated statements of financial position of PHL as at 31 December
20X2 20X1
$’000 $’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Goodwill 6,256
Buildings at net book value 122,680 132,000
Machinery at cost 180,000 84,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation (72,000) 108,000 (66,000) 18,000
Financial assets measured at fair value 24,600 24,600
through other comprehensive income
Current assets
Inventory 118,500 60,000
Accounts receivable 111,000 76,500
829,500 480,300

Other reserves 40,000 40,000
596,080 375,700
622,980 395,700
993
Financial Reporting
20X2 20X1
Obligation under finance lease 882 1,280
Bank borrowings 129,318 38,920
Current liabilities
Accounts payable 44,002 28,428
Obligation under finance lease 398 372
Tax payable 29,520 13,800
Accrued interest 2,400 1,800
829,500 480,300
Non-current assets
There have been no acquisitions or disposals of buildings during the year ended
31 December 20X2. During the year, machinery with an original cost of $28 million was sold for
$30 million resulting in a gain of $6 million. The gain on the disposal was included in the operating
profit and there was a new machinery acquired in 20X2.
Leased machinery
On 1 January, 20X1, PHL leased a machinery under a five-year non-cancellable lease agreement.
Equal annual payments of $487,805 that are due on 31 December each year provide the lessor
with a 7% return on net investment. Titles to the machinery will pass to PHL at the end of the
lease. The fair value of the machinery is $2,000,000 and the expected useful life is 8 years. The
present value factor for an annuity for 5 periods discounted at 7% is 4.100.
Share - based payment
On 1 November 20X1, PHL approved a plan that granted the top executive of its subsidiary, SDL,
options to purchase a total of 1,000,000 shares of PHL’s ordinary shares at $1.25 per share. The
options were granted on 1 January 20X2, vest on 31 December 20X5, and may be exercised from
1 January 20X6 to 31 December 20X7. Using the Black-Scholes model, the fair value of each
option was estimated at $0.50.
Assume that you are Karen Lam, the accounting manager, and you are required to draft a
memorandum to Ms. Tess Chow, a Director of PHL. In your memorandum, you should:
(a) Briefly describe the disclosure requirement under HKAS 7 relating to the acquisition
of a subsidiary and prepare a disclosure note to the consolidated financial statements
on the net cash flows in the acquisition of SPC as a subsidiary. (6 marks)
(b) Advise the appropriate accounting treatment, with journal entries, for the
share-based payment made by PHL in the individual financial statements of SDL and
PHL, and in the consolidated financial statements of PHL for the year ended 31
December 20X2. (The correct entries have already been made in the draft consolidated
financial statements as presented). (10 marks)
(c) In relation to the leased machinery of PHL, for the first two years (up to
31 December 20X2) (Round to nearest dollar):
(i) advise PHL (lessee) as to the appropriate accounting treatment for the lease and
calculate the outstanding lease liabilities; and
(ii) prepare the relevant journal entries for PHL (lessee) of the lease.
(13 marks)
(d) Prepare an annex to your memorandum showing the consolidated statement of cash
flows of PHL for the year ended 31 December 20X2, using the indirect method starting
with profit before taxation. (21 marks)
994
SECTION B – Short / Essay questions

(a) Mr. K. Chow is a member of the Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants
("HKICPA"). His brother, Mr. V. Chow, is also a member of HKICPA and acts as an
independent non-executive director and the chairman of the audit committee of a company
listed on the Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited. For the audit committee meeting to be
held next week, Mr. V. Chow received a copy of draft audited annual financial statements for
the year ended 30 June 20X9 (the "Accounts") which reported a significant increase in profit.
They discussed the company's financial performance and position with reference to the
information shown in the Accounts. Mr. K. Chow acquired shares in the company on the
following day.
Required
Discuss the appropriateness of behaviours of both Mr. K. Chow and his brother, Mr. V. Chow
in the context of Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants of HKICPA. (5 marks)
(b) "No goodwill is recognised in the financial statements prepared under merger accounting for
a business combination under common control. However, goodwill can still appear in the
consolidated financial statements after applying merger accounting for a business
combination under common control." Discuss. (5 marks)
(Total = 10 marks)
Howard Development Limited ("HDL") has financial difficulties and successfully renegotiated the
contractual terms of a bank loan of principal HK$200 million on 30 June 20X9, the date of the
statement of financial position:
Original Modified
Term of interest 8 per cent payable yearly in 6 per cent payable yearly in
arrears arrears since 1 July 20X9
Date of repayment 30 June 20Y0 30 June 20Y3
The original effective interest rate is 8 per cent. No fees for renegotiating the finance are payable.
The holders of 100 units of HK$1 million, 4 per cent convertible bonds (the "Bonds") of HDL have
agreed to convert the Bonds into 250 million ordinary shares on 30 June 20X9 and waive the
payment of interest. Each unit of the Bonds was originally convertible into two million ordinary
shares and with a maturity date of 30 June 20Y0. Interest is payable yearly in arrears.
The carrying amount of the Bonds as at 30 June 20X9 is as follows:
HK$
Current liabilities:
The Bonds (effective interest rate: 8 per cent) 96,296,296
Bonds interest payable 4,000,000
Equity:
Convertible bonds equity reserve 7,133,058
The market price of the ordinary shares of HDL on 30 June 20X9 was HK$0.45.
995
Financial Reporting
Required
(a) Discuss the accounting treatment for HDL in relation to the modification of the terms of the
bank loan. (8 marks)
(b) Prepare the journal entries that HDL should make on 30 June 20X9 in relation to the
conversion of the Bonds. (7 marks)
(Total = 15 marks)
Modern Department Store ("MDS") adopted a share option scheme which allows the board of
directors of the company to award share options to employees at nil consideration. On 1 April
20X8, 2,000,000 share options were granted to the Chief Operating Officer ("the COO"). Subject to
the continued employment of the COO with the company, one-fourth of the awarded share options
shall become vested at the end of each anniversary from the date of grant. MDS expects that all
the awarded share options will vest.
On 1 April 20Y0, MDS entered into an agreement with the COO to cancel the unvested awarded
share options at a consideration of HK$5,500,000.
Fair value of the share options of MDS (assuming same for different vesting dates):
1 April 20X8 HK$8
31 March 20X9 HK$3
31 March 20Y0 HK$5
1 April 20Y0 HK$5
Required
(a) Calculate the amount of compensation expense in relation to the share options awarded by
MDS for the years ended 31 March 20X9 and 31 March 20Y0 respectively. (4 marks)
(b) Explain the accounting implication of and calculate the compensation expense upon the
cancellation of the unvested awarded share options on 1 April 20Y0 to the financial
statements of MDS for the year ending 31 March 20Y1. (7 marks)
(c) Assuming that the share options were awarded to the director of Bargain Store (BS), a
subsidiary of MDS, instead of the COO of the company, without any intra-group charge for
such share-based payment arrangement, explain the accounting implication for the financial
statements of BS for the year ended 31 March 20Y0. (3 marks)
(Total = 14 marks)
Anna Manufacturing Limited ("AML"), a company listed on the Hong Kong Stock Exchange, had a
convertible bond (CB) with a principal amount of HK$800 million issued on 1 December 20X8.
Fixed interest at 6 per cent per annum is payable annually in arrears. The holders are entitled to
convert the CB into 50 million ordinary shares of AML at any time before the redemption by AML at
30 November 20Y2 at principal amount.
On 1 April 20Y0, the holders of CB exercised their options to convert into shares in AML. On the
same date, AML borrowed an interest-free loan of HK$500 million from its major shareholder for a
term of two years.
996
Effective interest rate of AML's other external borrowings was 8 per cent and 6 per cent per annum
on 1 December 20X8 and 1 April 20Y0 respectively.
The functional currency of AML is the Hong Kong dollar.
Required
(a) Prepare journal entries for the issue of CB on 1 December 20X8. (5 marks)
(b) Prepare journal entries for the conversion of CB into shares on 1 April 20Y0. (5 marks)
(c) Prepare journal entries for the recognition of the interest-free loan on 1 April 20Y0. (4 marks)
(Total = 14 marks)
(Note. Tax effect is ignored.)
Cleantech Motor Limited ("CML") is an overseas company incorporated in the British Virgin Islands
and registered under the Hong Kong Companies Ordinance in October 20X8 with a share capital of
HK$60 million contributed by two shareholders in cash. It is not a member of a corporate group.
During 20X9, CML incurred approximately HK$28 million for the development activities for an
electrical vehicle project, out of which approximately HK$5 million is not yet paid at the end of
financial period. A letter of intent has been signed with an automobile manufacturing company for
licensing the technology from CML at a consideration of not less than HK$50 million if it is
successfully developed. It was so far unable to complete the technical feasibility study on the
computerised energy saving monitoring system and no module is available for testing. The other
asset of the entity is cash kept at a bank. CML has 100 employees. The management does not
have intention to raise funds publicly at this moment.
Required
You are the auditors of CML. Advise the directors of CML whether they can prepare the financial
statements as at 31 December 20X9 in accordance with the Small and Medium-sized Entity
Financial Reporting Standard.
(6 marks)
(a) Paper Box Limited ("PBL") is a manufacturer of paper-based packaging products. Due to
insufficient production capacity to meet the market demand for its products, PBL leased two
new printing machines from United Machinery Corporation ("UMC") for a fixed term of four
years. Monthly rental for the two machines is $200,000 for the first year and then increased
by $10,000 annually. The lease is non-cancellable and there are no rights to extend the
lease term or purchase the machines at the end of the term. The machines are required to
be returned to UMC upon expiry of the lease term. UMC sells similar machines at a price of
$12,000,000 per unit and the estimated useful life of each machine is 10 years.
Required
Discuss PBL's accounting treatment of the lease arrangement with UMC. (5 marks)
(b) PBL has three other printing machines which have been used for four years and their
estimated useful life is ten years. The carrying amount and the estimated fair value of the
machines are $15,000,000 and $18,000,000 respectively on 1 October 20Y1. On the same
date, PBL entered into an agreement with Easy Finance Limited (EFL) to sell the three
machines at $17,000,000 and lease them back for five years with an annual future lease
997
Financial Reporting
payment of $4,500,000. At the end of the lease term, PBL has an option to buy the
machines from EFL at $50,000.
Required
"As PBL has sold the machines to EFL, no amount should be reflected in the balance of
plant and equipment on the statement of financial position of PBL" according to PBL’s Chief
Operating Officer.
(i) Do you agree with the Chief Operating Officer? Explain PBL's accounting treatment
for the lease arrangement with EFL. (Discount rate of 8 per cent is used, if applicable)
(8 marks)
(ii) Discuss the impact on the accounting treatment of PBL of shortening the lease term to
three years with an annual future lease payment of $4,000,000 and cancellation of
PBL's options to buy the machines from EFL. (4 marks)
(Total = 17 marks)
Marsh Global Limited ("MG") is a company listed on The Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited
with an issued capital of 1,000 million ordinary shares. The board of directors is considering the
funding needs to finance the expansion of its businesses in mainland China, and two options are
under discussion:
Option 1: A rights issue of 200 million ordinary shares at $5 per rights share.
Option 2: A four-year convertible bond of $1,000 million with semi-annual interest of 2 per cent
payable on 1 April and 1 October. Every $8 bond can be converted into 1 ordinary
share of MG from 1 July 20Y2 until 31 December 20Y5, the redemption date of the
convertible bond.
The relevant fund raising exercise is planned to be completed by the end of December 20Y1.
Required
You are the Chief Financial Officer of MG and you are requested by the board of directors to
prepare an analysis of the impact of these two options on:
(a) the financial position of MG as at 31 December 20Y1. (5 marks)
(b) the earnings per share of MG for the year ending 31 December 20Y2, assuming
(i) the estimated profit before finance expenses is $800 million, and
(ii) the funds raised and the expansion of business in mainland China will only affect the
earnings of MG from 20Y3; and
(6 marks)
(c) the disclosure of financial risks under HKFRS 7. (4 marks)
(Total = 15 marks)
(Assume MG's bank borrowings are carried at an interest rate of 2.5 per cent semi-annually and
ignore the tax effect.)
998
On 1 July 20X8, Gibb Investment Inc. ("GII") entered into contracts for the following financial
instruments:
(a) An investment in 300,000 units of mandatorily convertible bonds ("Bonds") issued by a listed
company with a principal amount of in aggregate $15 million, carrying an interest rate of 6%
per annum payable semi-annually in arrears on 30 June and 31 December up to and
including 31 December 20Y0. On 31 December 20Y0, each unit of the Bonds will be
mandatorily converted into one share in the listed company at the conversion price of $50
per share.
(b) A deposit of a principal amount of $10 million with a commercial bank carries an interest rate
of 2.5% per annum and has a maturity date of 30 June 20Y0. Interest will be receivable at
maturity together with the principal. In addition, an additional 3% interest per annum will be
payable by the bank if the exchange rate of HKD against RMB exceeds or is equal to $1.15
to RMB 1.
Gll's functional currency is Hong Kong dollars.
Required
Explain how GII shall account for the above financial instruments in the financial statements for the
year ended 31 December 20X8. (15 marks)
Bestpoint Printing Limited ("BP"), established in the People’s Republic of China (PRC), is a wholly-
owned subsidiary of Glory Publishing Group ("GP"). BP is entitled to a two-year exemption from
foreign enterprise income tax (FEIT) from its first profit-making year, as computed under PRC
accounting standards (PRC GAAP) and tax regulations. For the following three years, it enjoyed a
50% reduction in the rate of FEIT. 20X3 was BP's first profit-making year. The standard tax rate for
BP was 24% for the periods up to 31 December 20X7. With the enactment of the new tax law
during 20X7, BP will be subject to FEIT at 25% for the year beginning 1 January 20X8. GP is
subject to Hong Kong profits tax at 17.5%.
BP acquired a printing machine on 1 July 20X3 at a cost of $20 million. For the purpose of FEIT
calculations, the machine is depreciated over 10 years with a residual value of 10% of the cost
from the corresponding date of acquisition, which is the same for the preparation of BP's PRC
GAAP financial statements. In the preparation of GP's consolidated financial statements, the
machine is depreciated over 16 years with nil residual value.
Required
(a) Calculate the deferred tax asset or liability position in relation to the machine at
31 December 20X7 accounted for in GP's consolidated financial statements. (5 marks)
(b) Prepare the journal entry(ies) to record the deferred income taxes at 31 December 20X8 for
GP's consolidated financial statements with calculations supporting the balances recorded.
(5 marks)
(c) Assuming GP has a deferred tax asset of $500,000 in respect of its own plant and
equipment at 31 December 20X8, explain how the deferred taxes will appear on the
consolidated statement of financial position at that date. (2 marks)
(Total = 12 marks)
999
Financial Reporting
1000
Question bank – answers
1001
Financial Reporting
1002
Question bank – answers
SECTION A – Case questions

Answer 1
To: Ms. Chen, Director of PCF
From: Ricky Cheung, Accounting Manager, PCF
c.c.: David Ip, Susan Tse, Richard Chung (Directors)
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Subject: Report on business combination
I refer to your email dated 18 May 20Y0 regarding your queries about the draft consolidated
financial statements for PCF as at 31 March 20Y0.
(a) Effect of business combination on the 25 per cent equity interest in SNT
On 1 April 20X9, PCF acquired the 25 per cent equity interest in SNT at a cost of
$6,000,000. Thus the investment in SNT would be stated initially at cost, i.e. $6,000,000.
On 31 March 20Y0, PCF obtained control of SNT in which it held an equity interest
immediately before the acquisition date.
HKFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations refers to such a transaction as a "business
combination achieved in stages", sometimes also referred to as a "step acquisition".
In accordance with paragraph 42 of HKFRS 3 (revised), in a business combination achieved
in stages, the acquirer shall remeasure its previously held equity interest in the acquiree at
its acquisition-date fair value and recognise the resulting gain or loss, if any, in profit and
loss.
On consolidation, PCF should then remeasure this 25 per cent equity interest at its
acquisition-date fair value and recognise the resulting gain or loss in profit and loss.
A business combination should not have any effect at the level of separate financial
statements. The investment in SNT should simply be accounted for at cost in the separate
financial statements of PCF, i.e. $6,000,000 + $26,000,000 = $32,000,000.
Gain on step acquisition at consolidation level
Since PCF had a 25 per cent equity interest in SNT during the year ended 31 March 20Y0,
PCF had significant influence over SNT and thus PCF had to account for SNT's profit for the
year ended 31 March 20Y0 using the equity method at consolidation level (HKAS 28 (2011)
Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures):
$
Net profit of SNT for the year ended 31 March 20Y0 8,000,000
Less: amortisation of intangibles ($3.6m / 6 years) (600,000)
Less: cost of sales from revalued inventory (400,000)
Adjusted net profit for SNT 7,000,000
The carrying amount of the previously held equity interests at consolidated level would be
equal to:
$
The original acquisition cost for the 25% interest 6,000,000
Plus: share of profit after acquisition (25%  $7,000,000) 1,750,000
The carrying amount of previously held interests at consolidated level 7,750,000
Gain on step acquisition on previously held interest at consolidated level would be equal to:
The remeasured acquisition-date fair value of the 25% equity interest $
(25%  $40,000,000) 10,000,000
Less: carrying amount of the 25% equity interest at consolidated level (7,750,000)
Thus, gain on step acquisition at consolidated level would be 2,250,000
1003
Financial Reporting
(b) Recognition of intangibles

The recognition principle under HKFRS 3 (revised) states that "as of the acquisition date, the
acquirer shall recognise, separately from goodwill, the identifiable assets acquired, the
liabilities assumed and any non-controlling interest in the acquiree".
Accordingly, the acquirer should recognise an acquiree's intangible assets separately from
goodwill, if the recognition criteria are met, i.e.:
 to qualify for recognition as part of applying the acquisition method, the identifiable
assets acquired and liabilities assumed must meet the definitions of assets and
liabilities in the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting at the acquisition date.
 in addition, to qualify for recognition as part of applying the acquisition method, the
identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed must be part of what the acquirer
and the acquiree (or its former owners) exchanged in the business combination
transaction rather than the result of separate transactions.
Paragraph 13 of HKFRS 3 (revised) states that "the acquirer's application of the recognition
principle and conditions may result in recognising some assets and liabilities that the
acquiree had not previously recognised as assets and liabilities in its financial statements".
For example, the acquirer recognises the acquired identifiable intangible assets, such as a
brand name, a patent or a customer relationship, that the acquiree did not recognise as
assets in its financial statements because it developed them internally and charged the
related costs to expense.
An intangible asset is identifiable if it meets either the separability criterion or the contractual-
legal criterion.
 An intangible asset that meets the contractual-legal criterion is identifiable even if the
asset is not transferable or separable from the acquiree or from other rights and
obligations.
 The separability criterion means that an acquired intangible asset is capable of being
separated or divided from the acquiree and sold, transferred, licensed, rented or
exchanged, either individually or together with a related contract, identifiable asset or
liability.
An intangible asset that the acquirer would be able to sell, license or otherwise exchange for
something else of value meets the separability criterion even if the acquirer does not intend
to sell, license or otherwise exchange it.
An acquired intangible asset meets the separability criterion if there is evidence of exchange
transactions for that type of asset or an asset of a similar type, even if those transactions are
infrequent and regardless of whether the acquirer is involved in them.
An intangible asset that is not individually separable from the acquiree or combined entity
meets the separability criterion if it is separable in combination with a related contract,
identifiable asset or liability.
Since goodwill is a payment for anticipated benefits that are not capable of being individually
identified and separately recognised, it is inappropriate for an identifiable intangible asset to
be subsumed in goodwill.
Thus an acquirer should recognise an intangible asset of the acquiree in the consolidated
financial statements if it meets the definition of an intangible asset and its fair value is
included in the exchange transaction relating to the business combination.
1004
Question bank - answers
(c) Amount of goodwill as at 31 March 20Y0

$
Fair value of consideration transferred 26,000,000
Amount of non-controlling interest (10%  $40,000,000) 4,000,000
Fair value of the previously held interest (25%  $40,000,000) 10,000,000
40,000,000
Less: Fair value of SNT's recognised net identifiable assets (32,000,000)
Goodwill 8,000,000
(d) Deferred tax

HKAS 12 requires the recognition of deferred tax liabilities or deferred tax assets on taxable
or deductible temporary differences. Temporary differences arise when the tax bases of the
identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed are not affected by the business
combination or are affected differently (paragraph 19).
Paragraph 18 of HKAS 12 states that temporary differences arise when the identifiable
assets acquired and liabilities assumed in a business combination are recognised at their fair
values in accordance with HKFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations, but no equivalent
adjustment is made for tax purposes.
When the carrying amount of an asset is increased to fair value but the tax base of the asset
remains at cost to the previous owner, a taxable temporary difference arises which results in
a deferred tax liability. The resulting deferred tax liability increases goodwill.
In Hong Kong, the Inland Revenue Department does not allow reductions in the carrying
amount of goodwill as a deductible expense in determining taxable profit. Moreover, the cost
of goodwill is often not deductible when a subsidiary disposes of its underlying business.
Therefore, goodwill has a tax base of nil. Any difference between the carrying amount of
goodwill and its tax base of nil is a taxable temporary difference.
However, HKAS 12 does not permit the recognition of the resulting deferred tax liability
because goodwill is measured as a residual.
In this case:
 the carrying amount of the inventory ($4,000,000) is increased to its fair value
($4,800,000) but the tax base will remain at cost,
 a taxable temporary difference ($800,000) arises,
 which results in a deferred tax liability of 16%  $800,000
 = $128,000 and this affects the amount of goodwill.
A temporary difference may also arise on initial recognition of an asset or liability, for
example if part or all of the cost of an asset is not deductible for tax purposes
(paragraph 22).
In this case:
 intangibles are recognised at $3,200,000 which will not be deductible for tax purposes,
 a taxable temporary difference of $3,200,000 arises.
 Thus in accounting for the business combination, a deferred tax liability of 16% 
$3,200,000
 = $512,000 should be recognised and this affects the amount of goodwill.
1005
Financial Reporting
Thus the goodwill, after considering the deferred tax implication of the fair value differences
will be:
$
Original goodwill amount 8,000,000
+ deferred tax liability for inventory 128,000
+ deferred tax liability for intangibles 512,000
8,640,000
Or:
 In this case, the carrying amount of net identifiable assets ($28,000,000) is increased
to its fair value ($32,000,000) but the tax base will remain at cost,
 a taxable temporary difference of $4,000,000 arises,
 which results in a deferred tax liability of 16%  $4,000,000
 = $640,000 and this affects the amount of goodwill.
$
Original goodwill amount 8,000,000
+ deferred tax liability for inventory and intangibles 640,000
8,640,000
Or:
$
Total fair value 40,000,000
– Fair value of SNT's recognised net identifiable assets, after tax
($32,000,000 – $128,000 – $512,000) 31,360,000
8,640,000
(e) Customer loyalty programme
According to the HK(IFRIC)-Int 13, SNT should apply paragraph 13 of HKAS 18 and account
for points of the loyalty programme as a separately identifiable component of the sales
transactions in which they are granted (the "initial sales").
The fair value of the consideration received or receivable in respect of the initial sales shall
be allocated between the award credits (the loyalty points) and the other component of the
sale.
Since SNT supplies the awards itself, SNT shall recognise the consideration allocated to
loyalty points as revenue only when loyalty points are redeemed and it fulfils its obligations to
supply awards. In other words, a portion of the consideration shall be allocated to loyalty
points and recognition of revenue thereof shall be deferred.
In this case, since SNT's management has measured the fair value of each loyalty point to
be $1, SNT shall recognise $200,000 ($1  200,000) as revenue only when the loyalty points
are redeemed and thus the recognition of revenue of this portion of consideration amounting
to $200,000 has been deferred to a period after 1 April 20X8.
The amount of revenue recognised shall be based on the number of award credits that have
been redeemed in exchange for awards, relative to the total number expected to be
redeemed.
Year ended 31 March 20X9
As at 31 March 20X9, 81,000 of the points have been redeemed in exchange for foodstuffs.
Thus the amount of revenue to be recognised for the year ended 31 March 20X9
= (number of points redeemed / total number of points expected to be redeemed)
 $200,000
= (81,000 points / 180,000 points)  $200,000
= $90,000
1006
Year ended 31 March 20Y0

In the year ended 31 March 20Y0, the management of SNT revised its expectations. It
expected 190,000 points to be redeemed altogether. This revised estimate of the total
number of points expected to be redeemed shall be used.
During this year, 90,000 points are redeemed, bringing the total number redeemed to 81,000
+ 90,000 = 171,000 points.
The cumulative revenue to date = (cumulative number of points redeemed / revised estimate
of total number of points expected to be redeemed)  $200,000.
Thus, the cumulative revenue that SNT recognises is (171,000 points / 190,000 points) 
$200,000 = $180,000.
SNT has recognised revenue of $90,000 in the year ended 31 March 20X9, so the amount of
revenue to be recognised in the year ended 31 March 20Y0
= cumulative revenue to date – cumulative revenue recognised to date
= $180,000 – $90,000
= $90,000
I hope the above explanation has answered your questions. Please feel free to contact me if
you have further queries.
Best regards,
Ricky Cheung
1007
Financial Reporting
Answer 2
To : Ms. Choi, Director of PWE
From : Vincent Lee, Accounting Manager, PWE
c.c. : Jason Lam, Andy Cheng, Nick Chan (Directors)
Date : dd/mm/yyyy
Subject : Consolidated financial statements of PWE as at 31 March 20X2
I refer to your e-mail dated 16 May 20X2 regarding your queries about the draft consolidated
financial statements of PWE as at 31 March 20X2.
(a) (i) Certificate of deposit
Paragraph 54 of HKAS 1 (Revised) Presentation of Financial Statements requires
cash and cash equivalents to be presented as a line item in the statement of financial
position.
Cash is defined by HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows as cash on hand and demand
deposits while cash equivalents are defined as short-term, highly liquid investments
that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an
insignificant risk of changes in value.
Since the certificate of deposit (HK$7,500,000) has a maturity more than three months
from the date of acquisition, it cannot meet the definition of cash and cash equivalents.
Therefore, we cannot include the certificate of deposit amounting to HK$7,500,000
(20X1: nil) in the cash and cash equivalents.
Classified as non-current
HKAS 1 (Revised) Presentation of Financial Statements specifies the classification of an asset as
current when:
(a) it expects to realise the asset, or intends to sell or consume it, in its normal operating cycle;
(b) it holds the asset primarily for the purpose of trading;
(c) it expects to realise the asset within twelve months after the reporting period; or
(d) the asset is cash or a cash equivalent (as defined in HKAS 7) unless the asset is restricted
from being exchanged or used to settle a liability for at least twelve months after the
reporting period.
All other assets should be classified as non-current. Since the certificate of deposit of
HK$7,500,000 (20X1: nil) is not expected to be realised within twelve months after the reporting
period, it cannot be classified as current and therefore it should be classified as a non-current
asset.
(a) (ii) Ethical issues
A distinguishing feature of the accountancy profession is its acceptance of the
responsibility to act in the public interest. In acting in the public interest, a professional
accountant shall observe and comply with the Code of Ethics for Professional
Accountants.
With all the relevant facts discussed above, clearly we are not allowed to include the
certificate of deposit into the cash and cash equivalents and it would violate
fundamental principles such as integrity, objectivity, professional competence and due
care as well as professional behaviour:
 Integrity - A professional accountant should be straightforward and honest in all
professional and business relationships. It would not be honest if I
misrepresent the certificate of deposit as cash and cash equivalents when in
fact it is not.
1008
 Objectivity - A professional accountant should not allow bias, conflict of interest

or undue influence of others to override professional or business judgments. It
would not be objective if I included the certificate of deposit as cash and cash
equivalents with the mere intention to present a better financial position.
 Professional Competence and Due Care - A professional accountant should act
diligently and in accordance with applicable technical and professional
standards when providing professional services. I must act diligently in
accordance with the accounting standards and thus I cannot allow the inclusion
of the certificate of deposit as cash equivalents.
 Professional Behaviour - A professional accountant should comply with relevant
laws and regulations and should avoid any action that discredits the profession.
I cannot compromise with an action that discredits our profession. Thus I cannot
include the certificate of deposit as cash equivalents.
Therefore, in this case, if the intention is merely for the purpose of increasing the amount of
cash and cash equivalents to be presented in the statement of financial position, it would not
be ethical and it would not be acceptable under the Code of Ethics for Professional
Accountants.
Having considered all these issues, I would suggest, as an alternative course of action,
that we may provide a disclosure note to show the total amount of cash and bank deposits
and highlight the fact that the total amount of cash and bank deposits actually did not drop
significantly (20X2: HK$8,500,000, 20X1: HK$9,000,000).
(b) Disclosure requirement as various HKFRSs are not early adopted
According to paragraph 30 of HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting
Estimates and Errors, when an entity has not applied a new HKFRS that has been issued
but is not yet effective, the entity shall disclose:
(a) this fact (i.e. PWE has not applied the new HKFRS because it has been issued but is
not yet effective); and
(b) known or reasonably estimable information relevant to assessing the possible impact
that application of the new HKFRS will have on the entity’s financial statements in the
period of initial application.
Therefore, PWE has to disclose:
(a) the title of the new HKFRS;
(b) the nature of the impending change or changes in accounting policy (e.g. HKFRS 9
Financial Instruments (as issued in November 2009) introduces new requirements for
the classification and measurement of financial assets. HKFRS 9 Financial
Instruments (as revised in November 2010) adds requirements for financial liabilities
and for derecognition);
(c) the date by which application of the HKFRS is required (e.g. HKFRS 9 Financial
Instruments is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2015, with
earlier application permitted);
(d) the date at which it plans to apply the HKFRS initially; and
(e) either:
(i) a discussion of the impact that the initial application of the HKFRS is expected
to have on the entity’s financial statements; or
(ii) if that impact is not known or reasonably estimable, a statement to that effect.
1009
Financial Reporting
(c) Cash flow effects of the acquisition of SJL

According to paragraph 39 of HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows, the aggregate cash flows
arising from obtaining control of subsidiaries shall be presented separately and classified as
investing activities.
In particular, PWE should disclose, in aggregate, in respect of obtaining control of SJL during
the period each of the following:
(a) the total consideration paid (HK$34,000,000);
(b) the portion of the consideration consisting of cash and cash equivalents
(HK$4,000,000);
(c) the amount of cash and cash equivalents in the subsidiary over which control is
obtained (HK$1,250,000); and
(d) the amount of the assets and liabilities other than cash or cash equivalents in the
subsidiary over which control is obtained, summarised by each major category.
The net cash outflow arising on the acquisition and the fair value of the assets acquired and
liabilities assumed were as follows:
HK$'000 HK$'000
Total consideration paid 34,000
Fair value of non-controlling interests (20%) 8,000
42,000
Trade and other receivables 10,250
Trade and other payables (4,500)
Taxation payable (2,000)
Less: Fair value of identifiable net assets 40,500
Goodwill 1,500
Total consideration paid 34,000

Non-cash consideration – fair value of shares issued (30,000)
Cash consideration paid 4,000
Less: Cash and cash equivalents of SJL (1,250)
Cash outflow on acquisition, net of cash acquired 2,750
I hope the above explanation has answered your questions. For the details, please refer to
the annex. Please feel free to contact me if you have further queries.
Best regards,
Vincent Lee
(d) Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows of PWE for the year ended 31 March 20X2
HK$'000 HK$'000
Operating activities
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 32,600
Impairment loss recognised in respect of trade receivables 711
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 2,500
Release of prepaid land lease payments 600
Finance costs 2,300
Exchange loss arising on translating foreign currency bank loans 1,260
Exchange loss arising on translating foreign currency bank deposits 500
Share of profits of associate (1,650)
Operating profits before working capital changes 55,721
1010
HK$'000 HK$'000
Decrease in trade and other receivables

(44,000 – (47,250 – impairment 711) – exchange 4,500 –
new 10,250) 17,289
Decrease in trade and other payables
(34,900 – 56,650 – exchange 1,500 – new 4,500) (27,750)
Interest paid (500 + SPLOCI 2,300 – 1,250) (1,550)
Tax paid (7,000 + SPLOCI 1,050 + new 2,000 – 7,050) (3,000)
Investing activities
Acquisition of subsidiary, net of cash acquired (c)
(4,000 – 1,250) (2,750)
Increase in certificate of deposit (7,500)
Dividend received from associate (W1) 1,150
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W2) (61,100)
Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment 26,500
Financing activities
New bank loans raised (W3) 3,740
Dividend paid to non-controlling interest (W4) (2,000)
Dividend paid (W5) (8,250)
Net cash used in financing activities (6,510)
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents (9,500)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 9,000
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents
(exchange gain on translation of foreign subsidiaries 2,000 –
exchange loss on foreign currency bank deposits 500) 1,500
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period 1,000
Workings: (All figures in HK$‘000)
W1 Opening investment in associates 15,500 + SPLOCI 1,650 – dividend = closing
16,000, thus dividend received from associates = 1,150
W2 Opening PPE 244,500 + addition – depreciation 32,600 – disposal 29,000 + new
35,500 = closing 279,500, thus addition = 61,100
W3 Opening bank loans 45,000 + new bank loans raised + translation loss 1,260 = closing
bank loans 50,000, thus new bank loans raised = 3,740
W4 Opening NCI 18,600 + new 8,000 + SPLOCI 2,900 – dividend to NCI = closing 27,500,
thus dividend to NCI = 2,000
W5 Opening retained earnings and other reserves (53,200+100,000) + SPLOCI 17,950 –
dividend = closing (58,900+104,000), thus dividend paid = 8,250
1011
Financial Reporting
Answer 3
To: Gabriel Wong (Director), PPY
From: Tommy Lau, Accounting Manager, PPY
c.c.: Renee Ho, Chris Wong, Adrian Cheung (Directors)
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
I refer to your email of 8 May 20Y0 concerning the draft consolidated financial statements of PPY
as at 31 March 20Y0.
(a) Investment property
HKAS 40 defines an investment property as a property held to earn rentals or for capital
appreciation or both, rather than for use in the production or supply of goods or services or
for administrative purposes; or sale in the ordinary course of business.
From the perspective of PPY, the property is an investment property because it meets the
definition stated above by leasing it to another party (a senior manager of SFL). Therefore,
PPY correctly treats the property as an investment property in its separate financial
statements.
However, PPY’s property is leased to, and occupied by, an employee of its subsidiary (SFL).
Paragraph 9(c) of HKAS 40 specifies that owner-occupied property includes property
occupied by employees (whether or not the employees pay rent at market rates) and it is one
of the examples of items that are not investment property and are therefore outside the
scope of HKAS 40.
From the perspective of the group, an employee of SFL is an employee of the group. Thus
the property does not qualify as an investment property in the consolidated financial
statements, because the property is owner-occupied from the perspective of the group.
Therefore, the relevant investment property, with a fair value of HK$6 million, has to be
reclassified as property, plant and equipment in the consolidated financial statements.
Nonetheless, the rent paid by the senior manager of SFL to PPY is not an intragroup income
and expense and thus the relevant rental income is not eliminated in preparing the
consolidated financial statements.
Best regards,
Tommy Lau
1012
(b) Annex
(i) Worksheet for the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other
PPY SFL Eliminations Consolidated

DEBIT CREDIT
HK$ HK$ (HK$) working(s) (HK$) HK$
Sales 80,000,000 38,400,000 4,800,000 W7 113,600,000
Cost of sales (51,200,000) (25,600,000) 640,000 W7 4,800,000 (72,490,000)
250,000 W2/W6 400,000
Gross profit 28,800,000 12,800,000 41,110,000
Other income
(Dividend
income) 1,280,000 – 1,280,000 W3 –
Distribution costs (3,000,000) (2,300,000) (5,300,000)
Administrative
expenses (5,000,000) (2,500,000) (7,500,000)
Finance costs (5,760,000) (1,120,000) (a) 600,000 (6,280,000)
Profit before tax 16,320,000 6,880,000 22,030,000
Income tax
expense (3,520,000) (2,080,000) 66,000 W6/W7 105,600 (5,519,150)
W2 41,250
Profit for the year 12,800,000 4,800,000 16,510,850
Other
comprehensive
income:
revaluation
surplus 6,000,000 1,200,000 7,200,000
Total
comprehensive
income 18,800,000 6,000,000 23,710,850

Owners of the parent 15,632,680
Non-controlling interests 878,170 W4 878,170
16,510,850
Owners of the parent 878,170 W4 22,592,680
Non-controlling interests 240,000 W4a 1,118,170
23,710,850
1013
Financial Reporting
(ii) Worksheet for consolidated statement of financial position

DEBIT CREDIT
HK$ HK$ (HK$) working(s) (HK$) HK$
Property, plant
and equipment,
net 40,000,000 7,600,000 600,000 (a) 54,200,000
6,000,000 (b)
Investment
properties 20,800,000 12,000,000 (b) 6,000,000 26,800,000
Investment in
SFL, at cost 25,600,000 – W1 25,600,000 –
Goodwill – – 1,530,000 W1 1,530,000
Other intangible
assets, net – 11,200,000 2,500,000 W1/W2 750,000 12,950,000
Deferred tax
asset – – 105,600 W7 105,600
Inventories 51,200,000 21,600,000 W7 640,000 72,160,000
Trade and other
receivables 25,000,000 14,000,000 39,000,000
Cash and cash
equivalents 23,000,000 10,400,000 33,400,000
185,600,000 76,800,000 240,145,600
Share capital 32,000,000 16,000,000 16,000,000 W1 32,000,000

Retained
earnings 46,000,000 25,000,000 56,071,480
Revaluation
surplus 10,000,000 2,200,000 11,760,000
88,000,000 43,200,000 99,831,480
Non-controlling
interests – – W1 6,017,500 8,825,370
100,000 W2 16,500
320,000 W3/W4 878,170
W4a 240,000
W5 1,960,000
W5a 200,000
80,000 W6 13,200
Deferred tax
liability 123,750 W2/W1 412,500 288,750
Trade and other
payables 47,600,000 13,600,000 61,200,000
Long term loan 50,000,000 20,000,000 70,000,000
185,600,000 76,800,000 49,816,020 49,816,020 240,145,600
1014
WORKING:
Reconciling consolidated retained earnings and consolidated revaluation surplus

DEBIT CREDIT
HK$ HK$ (HK$) working (HK$) HK$
Retained
earnings,
1 April 20X9 36,400,000 21,800,000 400,000 W2 66,000 43,638,800
320,000 W6 52,800
12,000,000 W1
1,960,000 W5
Profit for the
year
attributable to
the owners of
the parent 12,800,000 4,800,000 15,632,680
Dividends
declared (3,200,000) (1,600,000) W3 1,600,000 (3,200,000)
Retained
earnings,
31 March 20Y0 46,000,000 25,000,000 56,071,480
PPY SFL DEBIT Eliminations CREDIT Consolidated

HK$ HK$ (HK$) working (HK$) HK$
Revaluation
surplus, 1 April
20X9 4,000,000 1,000,000 200,000 W5a 4,800,000
Revaluation for
the year 6,000,000 1,200,000 6,960,000
Revaluation
surplus,
31 March 20Y0 10,000,000 2,200,000 11,760,000
1015
Financial Reporting
Note. The journal entries are for illustrative purpose only. They are not required by the question.
HK$ HK$
W1 - Elimination of investment in subsidiary
DEBIT Share capital 16,000,000
DEBIT Retained earnings 12,000,000
DEBIT Goodwill 1,530,000
DEBIT Intangible assets 2,500,000
CREDIT Investment in SFL 25,600,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interests (30,087,500  20%) 6,017,500
W2 - Past and current amortisation on revalued intangible assets

DEBIT Opening retained earnings (2.5m/10  2  80%) 400,000
DEBIT Non-controlling interests (2.5m/10  2  20%) 100,000
DEBIT Amortisation (2.5m/10) 250,000
CREDIT Accumulated amortisation 750,000
DEBIT Deferred tax liability (750,000  16.5%) 123,750

CREDIT Opening retained earnings (400,000  16.5%) 66,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interests (100,000  16.5%) 16,500
CREDIT Tax expense (250,000  16.5%) 41,250
W3 - Eliminate dividend income

DEBIT Dividend income (1,600,000  80%) 1,280,000
DEBIT Non-controlling interests (1,600,000  20%) 320,000
CREDIT Dividends declared 1,600,000
W4 - Current income to Non-controlling interests

DEBIT Non-controlling interests (SPLOCI) 878,170
HK$
Profit of SFL before adjustment 4,800,000
Add: previous year's unrealised profit now realised (1.2m – 0.8m) 400,000
Tax effects on previous year's unrealised profit (400,000  16.5%) (66,000)
Less: current year's unrealised profit (40%  (4.8m – 3.2m)) (640,000)
Tax effects on current year unrealised profit (640,000  16.5%) 105,600
Less: amortisation on revalued intangible assets (250,000)
Tax effects on amortisation on revalued intangible assets
(250,000  16.5%) 41,250
Adjusted profit 4,390,850
Non-controlling interests' share (20%) 878,170
1016
W4a - Current revaluation surplus to Non-controlling interests

HK$ HK$
DEBIT Non-controlling interests (SPLOCI) (1,200,000  20%) 240,000
W5 - Assign post-acquisition Retained Earnings to Non-controlling interests

DEBIT Opening retained earnings (from 1 April 20X7 to
31 March 20X9) [20%  (21.8m-12m)] 1,960,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interests (SOFP) 1,960,000
W5a - Assign post-acquisition revaluation surplus to Non-controlling interests

DEBIT Opening revaluation surplus (from 1 April 20X7 to
31 March 20X9) [20%  (1m-0m)] 200,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interests 200,000
W6 - Realisation of opening unrealised profit in inventory

DEBIT Opening retained earnings 320,000
DEBIT Non-controlling interests 80,000
CREDIT Cost of sales 400,000
DEBIT Tax expense (400,000  16.5%) 66,000

CREDIT Opening retained earnings (320,000  16.5%) 52,800
CREDIT Non-controlling interests (80,000  16.5%) 13,200
W7 - Elimination of intercompany sale of inventory

DEBIT Sales 4,800,000
CREDIT Cost of sales 4,800,000
DEBIT Cost of sales (1.6m  40%) 640,000
DEBIT Deferred tax asset (640,000  16.5%) 105,600
CREDIT Tax expense 105,600
HK$
Reconciliation of Non-controlling interests in SOFP:
Shareholders’ equity of SFL at 31 March 20Y0 43,200,000
Fair value adjustment of intangible assets 2,500,000
Tax on fair value adjustment of intangible assets (2.5m  16.5%) (412,500)
Accumulated amortisation on fair value adjustment of intangible assets
(2.5m/10  3) (750,000)
Tax on acc. amortisation on fair value adjustment of intangible assets 123,750
Unrealised profit on upstream sale (640,000)
Tax on unrealised profit on upstream sale 105,600
Adjusted shareholders' equity of SFL at 31 March 20Y0 44,126,850
NCI's share @ 20% 8,825,370
1017
Financial Reporting
or
20% NCI
Shareholders' equity of SFL at 31 March 20Y0 43,200,000 8,640,000
Fair value adjustment of intangible assets 2,500,000 500,000
Tax on fair value adjustment of intangible assets
(2.5m  16.5%) (412,500) (82,500)
Accumulated amortisation on fair value adjustment of
intangible assets (2.5m/10  3) (750,000) (150,000)
Tax on acc. amortisation on fair value adjustment of
intangible assets 123,750 24,750
Unrealised profit on upstream sale (640,000) (128,000)
Tax on unrealised profit on upstream sale 105,600 21,120
Adjusted shareholders' equity of SFL at 31 March 20Y0 44,126,850 8,825,370
Answer 4
To: Sunny Sun (Director), STL
From: Ricky Lam, Accounting Manager, STL
c.c.: Susan Chow, Emily Tsim, Rachael Lau (Directors)
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
I refer to your email dated 18 September 20X9 regarding your queries about the draft consolidated
financial statements for STL as at 30 June 20X9.
Goodwill
Goodwill is an asset representing the future economic benefits arising from other assets acquired
in a business combination that are not individually identified and separately recognised.
HKFRS 3 (revised) requires the acquirer, having recognised the identifiable assets, the liabilities
and any non-controlling interests, to identify any difference between:
 the aggregate of the consideration transferred, any non-controlling interest in the acquiree
and, in a business combination achieved in stages, the acquisition-date fair value of the
acquirer's previously held equity interest in the acquiree; and
 the net identifiable assets acquired.
The difference is generally recognised as goodwill.
The amount of goodwill is calculated as follows:
Consideration transferred ($1.50  75%  400 million shares) = $450 million
Amount of non-controlling interest in MNL ($560 million  25%) = $140 million
Total = $450 million + $140 million = $590 million
Identifiable net assets of MNL acquired = $560 million
Goodwill acquired = $30 million

Contribution to joint venture
In accordance with HKAS 28 (2011), when a venturer contributes assets to a joint venture,
recognition of any portion of a gain or loss from the transaction shall reflect the substance of the
transaction.
In applying to non-monetary contributions to a joint venture in exchange for an equity interest in the
joint venture, HKAS 28 (2011) states that a venturer shall recognise in profit and loss for the period
the portion of a gain or loss attributable to the equity interests of the other venturers except when
the contribution transaction lacks commercial substance.
1018
If the above mentioned exception applies, the gain or loss is regarded as unrealised and therefore
is not recognised in profit and loss.
In this case, it is reasonable to assume that the exception does not apply and therefore the gain
should be recognised in profit or loss.
Therefore STL shall recognise that portion of the gain that is attributable to the interests of the
other venturer, i.e. 50%.
The journal entries for STL, in its separate financial statements, to record its contribution to the joint
venture, are:
$m $m
DEBIT Interests in JV – capital contribution 10
Accumulated depreciation – machinery 4
CREDIT Interests in JV – unrealised gain on contribution of machinery 1
Other income – gain on contribution of machinery to JCE 1
Machinery 12
According to HKAS 28 (2011), in the consolidated financial statements of the venturer, unrealised
gains or losses on non-monetary assets contributed to joint ventures shall be eliminated against
the investment under the equity method. Such unrealised gains or losses shall not be presented as
deferred gains or losses in the venturer's consolidated statement of financial position.
It is not appropriate to present unrealised gains or losses on non-monetary assets contributed to
joint ventures as deferred items since such items do not meet the recognition criteria for assets or
liabilities as defined in the Conceptual Framework.
Therefore, STL shall make the following adjustment under the equity method, in addition to the
above adjustment, in its consolidated financial statements:
$m $m
DEBIT Interests in JV – unrealised gain on contribution of machinery 1
CREDIT Machinery held in JV 1
Tax effect of consolidation adjustments for intragroup transactions
Since taxes are being charged on the individual entities, the consolidation adjustments will not
affect the current tax liability, i.e. the amount that is expected to be paid in tax.
However, tax-effect adjustments are necessary when, during the consolidation, adjustments are
made to the carrying amounts of assets.
The consolidation adjustments relating to the carrying amount of assets will affect the differences
between the tax base and the carrying amount of an asset. This then affects future tax (deferred
tax amounts) rather than current tax payable.
HKAS 12 provides examples of circumstances that give rise to deductible temporary differences
e.g.: "unrealised profits resulting from intragroup transactions are eliminated from the carrying
amount of assets, such as inventory or property, plant or equipment, but no equivalent adjustment
is made for tax purposes".
In this case, to eliminate intragroup sales and unrealised profit on inventory on downstream sales,
inventory is to be reduced by ($100,000,000  20/120  1/3) = $5,555,555 as the cost to the
consolidated group differs from that to the subsidiary (MNL).
In MNL's accounts, the inventory is carried at $100,000,000 and has a tax base of $100,000,000,
giving rise to no temporary differences.
From the group's point of view, the inventory has a carrying amount of $94,444,445, giving a
temporary difference of $5,555,555.
As the expected future deduction is greater than the assessable amount, a deferred tax asset
exists for the group, though there is no effect on the amount of tax payable in the current period.
Deferred tax asset thereof = $5,555,555  16% = $888,888
1019
Financial Reporting
STL's share of ERL's current year profit

According to HKAS 28 (2011), if an investor holds, directly or indirectly, 20% or more of the voting
power of the investee, it is presumed that the investor has significant influence. Thus ERL would be
regarded as an associate of STL.
The equity method would be applicable whereby the investment in ERL would be initially
recognised at cost and adjusted thereafter for the post-acquisition change in STL's share of ERL's
net assets. STL's profit or loss will include STL's share of the profit or loss of ERL.
Since STL has transferred the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the inventories to the
associate, the transaction should be recognised as sales. Thus no elimination of sales is required.
Nonetheless, HKAS 28 (2011) requires that profits and losses resulting from "upstream" (sales of
assets from an associate to the investor) and "downstream" (sales of assets from the investor to an
associate) transactions between an investor (including its consolidated subsidiaries) and an
associate are recognised in the investor's financial statements only to the extent of unrelated
investors' interests in the associate.
Therefore, the investor's share in the profits and losses resulting from these transactions should be
eliminated. When STL sells goods to ERL (an associate), STL should not recognise its share of the
profit or loss from the transaction in its consolidated financial statements until the goods or assets
have been resold to an independent party.
STL's share of any unrealised profit or loss in the inventories that were retained by ERL at the end
of the reporting period is eliminated as follows:
ERL's profit for the year ended 30 June 20X9 = $41,000,000
STL's share = $41,000,000  25% = $10,250,000
Less: Elimination of unrealised profit (after tax) on intercompany transaction
Total unrealised profit: $15,000,000  20/120  1/2 = $1,250,000
STL's share = $1,250,000  25% = $312,500

Less: Tax effect $312,500  16% = $50,000
Elimination of unrealised profit (after tax) $312,500 – $50,000 = $262,500
Thus STL's share of ERL's adjusted profit = $10,250,000 – $262,500 = $9,987,500
I hope the above explanation has answered your questions. Please feel free to contact me if you
have further queries.
Best regards
Ricky Lam
1020
Answer 5
To : Ms. Linda HO, Director of GRL
From : John Chan, Accounting Manager
Date : dd/mm/yyyy
Subject : Investment in subsidiaries and consolidated financial statements of GRL as at 1 April
20Y1 after the transactions
I refer to your message regarding your queries about the investment in subsidiaries and the draft
consolidated financial statements of GRL as at 1 April 20Y1 after the transactions.
(a) Investment in AMR
The issue of shares by AMR to SFL has reduced GRL's interest in AMR to 40 per cent, i.e.
less than 50 per cent. Also, GRL is entitled to appoint only three out of the total seven seats
in the board of directors. Therefore, GRL has lost control of AMR.
Since GRL holds 20 per cent or more of the voting power of AMR, there is a presumption
that GRL has significant influence over AMR and hence AMR should be accounted for as an
associate.
In this case, GRL should stop consolidating AMR from the date that control was lost, i.e.
1 April 20Y1.
Paragraph 25 of HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements states that if a parent loses
control of a subsidiary, the parent should derecognise the assets and liabilities of the former
subsidiary from the consolidated statement of financial position and recognise any
investment retained in the former subsidiary at its fair value when control is lost.
A partial disposal of the investment in AMR, as a subsidiary, but retaining an interest as an
associate creates the recognition of a gain or loss on the entire interest.
Since the loss of control of a subsidiary is a significant economic event, the retained interest,
ie the new investor-investee relationship, is recognised and measured at fair value at the
date when control is lost.
A gain or loss should be recognised on the part that has been disposed of and a further
holding gain or loss is recognised on the investment retained, being the difference between
the fair value of the investment and the carrying amount of the investment.
On 1 April 20Y1, the carrying amounts of AMR that should be derecognised =
100% of the net identifiable assets of AMR = $12 million
+ goodwill ($7.5 million + 40%  ($1 million + $9 million) – $10 million = $1.5 million)
= $13.5 million
GRL should derecognise the carrying amount of any non-controlling interests (NCI) in AMR
(the former subsidiary) at the date when control is lost (including any components of other
comprehensive income attributable to them).
On 1 April 20Y1, non-controlling interest, measured at its proportionate share of the AMR’s
net identifiable assets, should be 40%  $12 million = $4.8 million.
GRL should also recognise the fair value of the consideration received from the transaction.
However, in this case, GRL has not received any consideration from the transaction.
Any investment retained in AMR (the former subsidiary) should be recognised at its fair value
at the date when control is lost. Thus, GRL should recognise its investment in AMR at its fair
value on 1 April 20Y1, i.e. $9.6 million.
1021
Financial Reporting
GRL should also reclassify to profit or loss, or transfer directly to retained earnings any gain
or loss previously recognised in other comprehensive income. However, for the assets of
AMR, no gain or loss has been previously recognised in other comprehensive income.
The resulting difference, i.e.
Investment in AMR = $9.6 million
+ Non-controlling interest = $4.8 million
- Net identifiable assets of AMR = $12 million
- Goodwill = $1.5 million
= $0.9 million
should be recognised as a gain or loss in profit or loss attributable to the parent.

The corresponding consolidation journal entry is summarised as below:
$m $m
DEBIT Investment in AMR 9.6
DEBIT Non-controlling interest 4.8
DEBIT Debenture of AMR 2
DEBIT Accounts payable of AMR 1
CREDIT PPE of AMR 9
CREDIT Inventory of AMR 3
CREDIT Accounts receivable of AMR 2
CREDIT Cash of AMR 1
CREDIT Goodwill 1.5
CREDIT Gain on disposal 0.9
Alternatively, candidates may exclude AMR from the consolidation and prepare a terminal
entry:
DEBIT Investment in AMR 9.6
CREDIT Investment in AMR 7.5
CREDIT Retained earnings (11m – 9m)  60% 1.2
CREDIT Gain on disposal 0.9
(b) Investment in CDS

The issue of shares by CDS to MSL has reduced GRL's interest in CDS from 66 per cent to
60 per cent. Since GRL holds more than 50 per cent of the voting power of CDS, there is a
presumption that GRL has retained control of CDS and hence CDS should remain as a
subsidiary.
Paragraph 23 of HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements states that "changes in a
parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are
accounted for as equity transactions’’ (i.e. transactions with owners in their capacity as
owners).
This means that no gain or loss from these changes should be recognised in profit or loss. It
also means that no change in the carrying amounts of the subsidiary’s assets (including
goodwill) or liabilities should be recognised as a result of such transactions.
This adopted approach is consistent with the fact that non-controlling interests are treated as
a separate component of equity.
In such circumstances, the carrying amounts of the controlling and non-controlling interests
shall be adjusted to reflect the changes in their relative interests in the subsidiary.
Previously, the carrying amount of NCI = 34% of $12.9 million = $4,386,000
After the transaction, NCI = 40% of ($12.9 + $5.5) million = $7,360,000
Thus, NCI increases by $7,360,000 – $4,386,000 = $2,974,000
1022
Any difference between the amount by which the non-controlling interests are adjusted and
the fair value of the consideration paid or received shall be recognised directly in equity and
attributed to the owners of the parent.
Thus the difference between the consideration received ($5,500,000) and the amount that
NCI is adjusted ($2,974,000), amounting to $2,526,000, should be recognised directly in
equity attributable to the owners of the parent.
The corresponding consolidation journal entry is summarised as below:
$ $
CREDIT Non-controlling interest 2,974,000
CREDIT Equity attributable to owners of the parent 2,526,000
Alternatively:
DEBIT Non-controlling interest 4,386,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interest 7,360,000
CREDIT Equity attributable to owners of the parent 2,526,000
Best regards,
John Chan
(c)
GRL – CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 1 APRIL 20Y1
Adjustment
GRL AMR CDS DEBIT CREDIT Group
$'000 $'000 $'000 ref $'000 $'000 ref $'000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and 18,400 9,000 10,400 W3 100 500 W3 28,400
equipment 9,000 (a)
Goodwill W1 5,400 1,500 (a) 5,400
W5 1,500
Investments in CDS 12,000 - - 12,000 W1 -
Investment in AMR 7,500 - - 7,500 W5 -
Investment in (a) 9,600 9,600
associate
Current assets
Inventory 5,900 3,000 4,200 W2 500 500 W1 10,100
3,000 (a)
Accounts receivable 2,200 2,000 1,500 2,000 (a) 3,700
Cash 1,000 1,000 2,000 (b) 5,500 1,000 (a) 8,500
47,000 15,000 18,100 65,700
1023
Financial Reporting

Adjustment
GRL AMR CDS DEBIT CREDIT Group
$'000 $'000 $'000 ref $'000 $'000 ref $'000
Share capital 19,000 1,000 4,000 W1 4,000 19,000
W5 1,000
Retained earnings 24,000 11,000 8,900 W1 6,500 500 W2 27,614
W3 500 100 W3
W4 986 900 (a)
W5 9,000
W6 800
Other components
of equity - - - 2,526 (b) 2,526
43,000 12,000 12,900 49,140
Non-controlling - - - (a) 4,800 3,400 W1 7,360

interests
986 W4
2,974 (b)
4,000 W5
800 W6
Debenture - 2,000 1,000 (a) 2,000 1,000
Current liability
Accounts payable 4,000 1,000 4,200 (a) 1,000 8,200
47,000 15,000 18,100 65,700
Alternative
GRL – CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 1 APRIL 20Y1
Adjustment
GRL CDS DEBIT CREDIT Group
$'000 $'000 ref $'000 $'000 ref $'000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and 18,400 10,400 W3 100 500 W3 28,400
equipment
Goodwill W1 5,400 5,400
Investment in AMR 7,500 - 7,500 (a) -

Investments in CDS 12,000 - 12,000 W1 -
Investment in (a) 9,600 9,600
associate
Current assets
Inventory 5,900 4,200 W2 500 500 W1 10,100
Accounts receivable 2,200 1,500 3,700

Cash 1,000 2,000 (b) 5,500 8,500
47,000 18,100 65,700
1024
Adjustment
GRL CDS DEBIT CREDIT Group
$'000 $'000 $'000 $'000 $'000
Share capital 19,000 4,000 W1 4,000 19,000
Retained earnings 24,000 8,900 W1 6,500 500 W2 27,614

W3 500 100 W3
W4 986 1,200 (a)
900 (a)
Other components of
equity - - 2,526 (b) 2,526
43,000 12,900 49,140
Non-controlling - - 3,400 W1 7,360
interests
986 W4
2,974 (b)
Debenture - 1,000 1,000
Current liability
Accounts payable 4,000 4,200 8,200
47,000 18,100 65,700
Goodwill calculations (not required by the question)
Investment in Investment in
AMR CDS
$'000 $'000
Purchase consideration 7,500 12,000

NCI (10m  40%) 4,000 (10m  34%) 3,400
11,500 15,400
Fair value of net identifiable (1m + 9m) (4m + 6.5m – 0.5m)
assets 10,000 10,000
Goodwill 1,500 5,400
Journal entries not required by the question
(All figures in $'000)
W1 Elimination of investment in CDS

CREDIT Inventory 500
CREDIT Investment in CDS 12,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interests (NCI) 3,400 (4,000 + 6,500 –
500)  34%
W2 Impairment of inventory (fair value realisation)
DEBIT Inventory 500

1025
Financial Reporting
W3 Adjustment of 20Y0 unrealised profit in plant (downstream)
DEBIT Retained earnings 500 (2,500 – 2,000)

CREDIT Plant 500
DEBIT Acc. depreciation 100 (500 / 5 years)
W4 Allocation of post-acquisition profit to NCI of CDS
DEBIT Retained earnings 986 (2,400 + inventory 500)

 34%
CREDIT NCI 986
If AMR is included in the consolidation worksheet:
W5 Elimination of investment in AMR

CREDIT Investment in AMR 7,500
CREDIT NCI 4,000 (1,000 + 9,000)  40%
W6 Allocation of post-acquisition profit to NCI of AMR
DEBIT Retained earnings 800 (11,000 – 9,000)  40%

CREDIT NCI 800
Question 6
To: Ms. Tess Chow, Director of MHL
From: Melody Li, Accounting Manager
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Subject: Brand name, patent, earnings per share and the consolidated financial statements of
MHL
I refer to your queries regarding the brand name, patent, earnings per share and the consolidated
financial statements of MHL.
Answer 1(a)
Brand name
The brand name, Magica, is an internally generated intangible asset.
HKAS 38 establishes a much higher hurdle for the recognition of internally generated
assets than purchased ones. In particular, it specifically prohibits the recognition of
internally generated brands.
HKAS 38.64 states that expenditure on internally generated brands cannot be
distinguished from the cost of developing the business as a whole.
Therefore, MHL should not recognise the brand name in its consolidated statement of
financial position.
1026
Patent
Since the patent is expected to expire in 20 years, it should be amortised to a nil residual value at
HKD2 million / 20 years, i.e. HKD100,000 per annum.
A patent cannot be revalued under HKAS 38 because there is no active market as a patent is
unique (HKAS 38.78).
HKAS 38 does not permit revaluation without an active market as the value cannot be reliably
measured in the absence of a commercial transaction.
Therefore, MHL should not revalue the patent in its consolidated statement of financial position.
Answer 1(b)
Earnings per share
The basic and diluted earnings per share of MHL for the year ended 31 December 20X2
are calculated as follows:
Shares fraction weighted
outstanding average
1 Jan to 30 Sep 23,250,000 9/12 17,437,500
Issued on 1 Oct 5,000,000
1 Oct to 31 Dec 28,250,000 3/12 7,062,500
Weighted average number of shares 24,500,000
Basic EPS = HKD147,189,600 / 24,500,000 = HKD6.01
Considering the dilutive effects of the warrants:
The proceed raised on the exercise of the warrants is 3,000,000 x exercise price of HKD60 =
HKD180,000,000
To raise the same amount, the number of shares to be issued at market value of HKD100 would be
HKD180,000,000 / HKD100 = 1,800,000 shares
Thus “free shares” = 3,000,000 shares – 1,800,000 shares = 1,200,000 shares*
(*alternatively, it can be calculated as [(100 – 60) / 100] × 3,000,000 = 1,200,000 shares)
Considering the dilutive effects of convertible bonds:
Interest saving after tax = HKD10 million × 4% × (1–16.5%) = HKD334,000
Additional shares = HKD10 million / HKD1,000 × 20 = 200,000 shares.
The EPS of this convertible bond is therefore HKD334,000 / 200,000 shares = HKD1.67
As this is smaller than the basic EPS (HKD6.01), the convertible bond is dilutive and should be
taken into account in the calculation of the diluted EPS.
Diluted EPS with warrants and convertible bonds is HKD(147,189,600 + 334,000) / (24,500,000 +
1,200,000 + 200,000) shares = HKD147,523,600 / 25,900,000 shares = HKD5.70.
1027
Financial Reporting
Answer 1(c)
Translation reserve for SDL
Translation reserve on goodwill
Goodwill
AUD’000
Net assets at book value* 54,000
Add: fair value adjustment after deferred tax** 7,000
Adjusted fair value of net assets 61,000
NCI 20% share 12,200

Cost of acquisition (HKD427,500,000 / 7.6) 56,250
68,450
Goodwill *7,450
* Share capital (AUD24,000,000) + retained earnings (AUD30,000,000) = AUD54,000,000

** Fair value adjustment (AUD10,000,000) less deferred tax = AUD10,000,000 × (1-30%) =
AUD7,000,000
*** Goodwill is treated as an asset of the foreign operation.
Thus Translation reserve on goodwill:
AUD’000 Rate HKD’000
Goodwill, 1 Jan 7,450 7.60 56,620
Goodwill, 31 Dec 7,450 8.10 60,345
Translation reserve 3,725
Translation reserve on fair value adjustment (patent)

Fair value adjustment b/f 10,000 7.60 76,000
Amortisation for 20X2 (1,000) 7.80 (7,800)
68,200
Fair value adjustment c/f 9,000 8.10 72,900
Group share 80% 3,760

NCI's share 20% 940
Translation reserve on Deferred tax on fair value adjustment

DTL, 1 January 3,000 7.60 22,800
Change in 20X2 (300) 7.80 (2,340)
20,460
DTL, 31 January 2,700 8.10 21,870

NCI's share 20% 282
1028
or Group share after tax = 3,760 – 1,128 = 2,632 (i.e. 3,760 × (1 – 30%))
NCI share after tax = 940 – 282 = 658 (i.e. 940 × (1 – 30%))
Translation reserve on net assets:
Net assets (at book value) b/f (24,000 + 30,000) 54,000 7.60 410,400
Net profit for 20X2 10,000 7.80 78,000
488,400
Net assets (at book value) c/f 64,000 8.10 518,400
Translation reserve *30,000
Therefore, total Translation reserve for the group: HKD'000

Translation reserve on goodwill 3,725
Translation reserve on fair value adjustment 2,632
Translation reserve on net assets 24,000
30,357
*Alternative for calculating Translation reserve on net assets
SDL
Translated statement of retained earnings for the year ended 31 December 20X2
Profit after tax 10,000 7.80 78,000
Retained earnings, 1 January 30,000 7.60 228,000
Retained earnings, 31 December 40,000 306,000
* profit after tax is translated at average rate.
SDL
Translated statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X2
AUD'000 Rate HKD'000
Non-current assets 76,000 8.10 615,600
Current assets:
Inventory 6,000 8.10 48,600

Accounts receivable 12,000 8.10 97,200
Cash 6,600 8.10 53,460
Total assets 100,600 814,860
Current liabilities 4,600 8.10 37,260

Non-current liabilities 32,000 8.10 259,200
Share capital 24,000 7.60 182,400
Retained earnings (from above) 40,000 306,000
Translation reserve (balancing figure) *30,000
100,600 814,860
1029
Financial Reporting
Alternative for calculating total Translation reserve

translate year end FCTR
SDL ex-rate ex-rate difference CI (80%) NCI (20%)
Net asset at BV 54,000 7.6 8.1 27,000 21,600 5,400
FV adjustment 10,000 7.6 8.1 5,000 4,000 1,000
DTL (3,000) 7.6 8.1 (1,500) (1,200) (300)
61,000 7.6 8.1 30,500 24,400 6,100
Goodwill 7,450 7.6 8.1 3,725 3,725 –
Value at acq. date 68,450 7.6 8.1 34,225 28,125 6,100
Profit after tax 0,000 7.8 8.1 3,000 2,400 600
Amortisation of FV (1,000) 7.8 8.1 (300) (240) (60)
DTL on amortisation 300 7.8 8.1 90 72 18
Total 77,750 37,015 30,357 6,658
I hope that the above explanation has answered your questions. For further details please refer to
the annex. Please feel free to contact me if you have further queries
Best regards,
Melody Li
Answer 1(d)
MHL – Worksheet for the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 20X2
MHL SDL Consolidated
HKD'000 HKD'000 HKD'000 Ref. HKD'000 HKD'000
Non-current 1,170,000 615,600 76,000 1, 2 7,800 1,858,500
assets 4,700 4
Investment in
SDL 427,500 – 1 427,500 –
Goodwill 56,620 1
3,725 3 60,345
Current assets
Inventory 225,000 48,600 273,600
Receivables 120,000 97,200 217,200
Cash 27,000 53,460 80,460
1,969,500 814,860 2,490,105
Share capital 750,000 182,400 182,400 1 750,000

228,000 1
Retained 7,800 2 2,340
earnings 784,500 306,000 14,508 5 842,532
3 3,725
1,128 4 3,760
Translation 30,000 6,000 6 30,357
reserve
1 92,720
Non-controlling 282 4 940
Interests
5 14,508
6 6,000 113,886
1030
Current 315,000 37,260 352,260

liabilities
2,340 2,4 1,410
DTL 1 22,800 21,870
Non-current
liabilities 120,000 259,200 379,200
1,969,500 814,860 2,490,105
Journal entries and reconciliations are not required
CJE 1 HKD'000 HKD'000
Dr Share capital 182,400
Dr Retained earnings 228,000
Dr Non-current assets 76,000
Dr Goodwill 56,620
Cr Deferred tax liability 22,800
Cr Investment in SDL 427,500
Cr NCI 92,720
CJE 2
Dr Amortisation 7,800
Cr Accumulated amortisation 7,800
[10 million ÷ 10 years × 7.80] (Amortisation on undervalued assets)
Dr DTL (7,800 × 30%) 2,340

Cr Tax expenses 2,340
(Tax effect on amortisation expenses)
CJE 3
Dr Goodwill 3,725
Cr Translation reserve (Goodwill) 3,725
(Translation gain on goodwill)
CJE 4
Dr Non-current assets 4,700
Cr Translation reserve (FV adjustment) 3,760
Cr NCI 940
Dr Translation reserve (FV adjustment) 1,128
Dr NCI 282
Cr DTL 1,410
(Allocation of translation gain on fair value adjustment)
Or net Translation reserve 2,632, NCI 658
CJE 5
Dr Income to NCI 14,508
Cr NCI 14,508
NCI's share of net profit calculated as follows:

Net profit of SDL (in HKD000) 78,000
Less: amortisation of FV adjustment, after tax (5,460) [7,800 ×
(1 – 30%)]
72,540
NCI's share @20% 14,508
1031
Financial Reporting
CJE 6
Dr Translation reserve 6,000
Cr NCI 6,000
(NCI's share of Translation reserve on net assets: 20% of HKD30 million)
Reconciliation of NCI:
20% NCI
HKD'000 HKD'000
Net assets 518,400 103,680
FV adjustment
72,900 – 21,870 51,030 10,206
569,430 113,886
Alternative calculation for various items in consolidated statement of financial position

SDL SDL MHL Consolidated
AUD'000 HKD'000 HKD'000 HKD'000
Note 1
Non-current asset 76,000
FV adjustment 10,000
Amortisation of FV (1,000)
85,000
closing rate 8.1 688,500 1,170,000 1,858,500
Note 2
Goodwill (1c) 7,450
closing rate 8.1 60,345 60,345
Note 3
Retained earnings
current year profit 10,000
additionalamortisation (1,000)
tax impact (30%) 300
9,300
average rate 7.8 72,540
controlling interest 80%
58,032 784,500 842,532
Note 4
Total adjusted net assets (1c) 77,750
less: goodwill (only controlling
interest) (7,450)
70,300
NCI portion (20%) 14,060
closing rate 8.1 113,886 113,886
Note 5
Deferred tax liabilities (DTL)
on FV adjustment (10,000 × 30%) 3,000
on amortisation (1,000 × 30%) (300)
2,700
closing rate 8.1
21,870 21,870
1032
Question 7
To: Ms. Janice Lam, Director of DBL
From: Raymond Wong, Accounting Manager, DBL
c.c.: Lucas Chong, Josiah Wong, Andrea Cheung (Directors)
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Subject: Condensed consolidated financial statements of DBL for the six months ended 31
March 20X2
I refer to your e-mail dated 7 May 20X2 regarding your queries about the draft condensed
consolidated financial statements of DBL for the six months ended 31 March 20X2.
Answer 1(a)
Compliance with HKFRS
HKAS 34.19 specifies that if an entity’s interim financial report is in compliance with HKAS 34, that
fact shall be disclosed.
However, an interim financial report shall not be described as complying with HKFRSs unless it
complies with all the requirements of HKFRSs.
Condensed financial statements do not comply with all the requirements of HKFRSs.
Therefore DBL’s interim financial report cannot be described as complying with HKFRSs.
Answer 1(b)
Segment information
In accordance with HKAS 34.16A(g), disclosure of segment information is required in an entity's
interim financial report only if HKFRS 8 Operating Segments requires that entity to disclose
segment information in its annual financial statements.
HKFRS 8 applies to the separate financial statements of an entity (HKFRS 8.2(a)(i)) and the
consolidated financial statements of a group with a parent (HKFRS 8.2(b)(i)) whose equity
instruments are traded in a public market. As DBL is listed on the Main Board of the Stock
Exchange of Hong Kong, segment information is required to be disclosed.
Therefore, DBL should disclose the relevant segment information under the
HKAS 34.16A(g) in its interim financial report since HKFRS 8 Operating Segments does require
DBL to disclose segment information in its annual financial statements.
Answer 1(c)
Related party relationship
HKAS 24 (Revised) defines a related party as a person or entity that is related to the entity that is
preparing its financial statements.
A person is related to a reporting entity if that person is a member of the key management
personnel of the reporting entity or of a parent of the reporting entity (HKAS 24.9(a)(iii)).
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning,
As you (Janice) are the director of DBL, you are a related party of DBL (key management
personnel) and STF (key personnel of the parent of STF) pursuant to HKAS 24.9(a)).
1033
Financial Reporting
DBL and STF are related parties to each other according to HKAS 24.9(b)(i) since they are
members of the same group. In addition, for financial statements of both DBL and STF, BTV is a
related party as BTV is controlled by you (Janice), who is a related party falling into the scope of
HKAS 24.9(a) (HKAS 24.9(b)(vi)).
For BTV’s financial statements, DBL and STF are related parties to BTV because BTV is controlled
by you and you are a key management personnel of DBL which is the parent of STF (HKAS
24.9(b)(vii) and (a)(i)).
Answer 1(d)
Contract with FYL
The contract with FYL meets the definition of a derivative (HKFRS 9) because its value changes in
response to changes in an underlying variable (HIBOR), there is no initial net investment, and
settlements occur at future dates.
The contractual effect of the loans is the equivalent of an interest rate swap arrangement with no
initial net investment. Therefore, it should be accounted for as a derivative under HKFRS 9.
Guidance on implementing HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments specifies that non-derivative
transactions should be aggregated and treated as a derivative when the transactions result, in
substance, in a derivative.
Indicators of this would include:
 they are entered into at the same time and in contemplation of one another.
 they have the same counterparty.
 they relate to the same risk.
there is no apparent economic need or substantive business purpose for structuring the
transactions separately that could not also have been accomplished in a single transaction.
Under HKFRS 9, DBL should recognise the derivative as a financial asset or a financial liability in
its statement of financial position when, and only when, DBL becomes party to the contractual
provisions of the instrument.
The default assumption with regard to derivatives under HKFRS 9 is that they are to be measured
at fair value with changes in fair value taken to profit and loss.
I hope the above explanation has answered your questions. For the details, please refer to the
annex. Please feel free to contact me if you have further queries.
Best regards,
Raymond Wong
1034
Answer 1(e)
Annex
(i) Worksheet for the condensed consolidated statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for the six months ended 31 March 20X2
DBL STF Eliminations Consolidated

$000 $000 Dr($000) working Cr($000) $000
Sales 2,400,000 1,152,000 144,000 W7 3,408,000
Cost of sales (1,536,000) (769,000) 16,800 W7 144,000 (2,165,800)
W6 12,000
Gross profit 864,000 383,000 1,242,200
Other income
(including dividend
income) 38,000 – 33,600 W3 4,400
Distribution costs (90,000) (69,000) (159,000)
Administrative
expenses (150,000) (75,000) 5,000 W2 (230,000)
Finance costs (172,000) (34,000) (206,000)
Income tax
expense (106,000) (61,000) 1,980 W6/W7 2,772 (165,383)
W2 825
Profit for the period 384,000 144,000 486,217
Other
comprehensive
income that will not
be reclassified to
profit or loss:
revaluation surplus 180,000 36,000 216,000
Total
comprehensive
income 564,000 180,000 702,217
Profit attributable
to:
Owners of the
parent 445,472
Non-controlling
interests 40,745 W4 40,745
486,217
Owners of the
parent 650,672
Non-controlling
interests 51,545 W4&4a 51,545
702,217
1035
Financial Reporting
(ii) Worksheet for the condensed consolidated statement of financial position as at 31

March 20X2
$000 $000 Dr($000) working Cr($000) $000
Property, plant and
equipment, net 1,824,000 788,000 2,612,000
Investment in STF,
at cost 768,000 – W1 768,000 –
Goodwill – – 133,240 W1 133,240
Other intangible
assets, net – 136,000 80,000 W1/W2 35,000 181,000
Deferred tax asset – – 2,772 W7 2,772
Inventory 1,536,000 648,000 W7 16,800 2,167,200
Trade and other
receivables 750,000 420,000 1,170,000
Cash and cash
equivalents 690,000 312,000 1,002,000
5,568,000 2,304,000 7,268,212
Share capital 960,000 480,000 480,000 W1 960,000

Retained earnings 1,380,000 750,000 1,629,723
Revaluation
surplus 300,000 66,000 339,200
2,640,000 1,296,000 2,928,923
Non-controlling
interests – – W1 272,040 395,864
9,000 W2 1,485
14,400 W3/W4 40,745
W4a 10,800
W5 91,200
W5a 6,000
3,600 W6 594
Deferred tax liability 5,775 W2/W1 13,200 7,425
Trade and other
payables 1,428,000 408,000 1,836,000
Long term loan 1,500,000 600,000 2,100,000
5,568,000 2,304,000 7,268,212
WORKING:
Reconciling consolidated retained earnings and consolidated revaluation surplus
$'000 $'000 Dr($'000) working Cr($'000) $'000
Retained earnings,
1 October 20X1 1,092,000 654,000 21,000 W2 3,465 1,280,251
8,400 W6 1,386
350,000 W1
91,200 W5
Profit for the period
attributable to the
owners of the
parent 384,000 144,000 445,472
Dividends declared (96,000) (48,000) W3 48,000 (96,000)
Retained earnings,
31 March 20X2 1,380,000 750,000 1,629,723
1036

$'000 $'000 Dr($'000) working Cr($'000) $'000
Revaluation
surplus, 1 October
20X1 120,000 30,000 6,000 W5a 134,000
10,000 W1
Revaluation for the
period attributable
to the owners of
the parent (less
10,800 for NCI) 180,000 36,000 205,200
Revaluation
surplus, 31 March
20X2 300,000 66,000 339,200
Note. The journal entries are for illustrative purpose only. They are not required by the question.
W1 - Elimination of investment in subsidiary
$'000 $'000
Dr Share capital 480,000
Dr Retained earnings 350,000
Dr Revaluation reserve 10,000
Dr Goodwill 133,240
Dr Intangible assets 80,000
Cr Deferred tax liability($80m × 16.5%) 13,200
Cr Investment in STF 768,000
Cr Non-controlling interests (BS) (906.8m × 30%) 272,040
W2 - Past and current amortisation on revalued intangible assets
$'000 $'000
Dr Opening retained earnings ($80m/8*3*70%) 21,000
Dr Non-controlling interests (SOFP) ($80m/8*3*30%) 9,000
Dr Amortisation ($80m/8*0.5) 5,000
Cr Accumulated amortisation 35,000
Dr Deferred tax liability ($35m × 16.5%) 5,775

Cr Opening retained earnings ($21m × 16.5%) 3,465
Cr Non-controlling interests ($9m × 16.5%) 1,485
Cr Tax expense ($5m × 16.5%) 825
W3 - Eliminate dividend income
$'000 $'000
Dr Dividend income ($48m × 70%) 33,600
($48m × 30%
Dr Non-controlling interests (SOFP) 14,400
NCI)
Cr Dividends declared 48,000
W4 - Current income to Non-controlling interests
$'000 $'000
Dr Non-controlling interests (SPLOCI) 40,745
Cr Non-controlling interests (SOFP) 40,745
1037
Financial Reporting
$'000 $'000
Profit of STF before adjustment 144,000
Add: previous period's unrealised
($36m-24m) 12,000
profit now realised
Tax effects on previous period's
($12m × 16.5%) (1,980) 10,020
unrealised profit
Less: current period's unrealised profit (35%*(144m - 96m)) (16,800)
Tax effects on current period
($16.8m × 16.5%) 2,772 (14,028)
unrealised profit
Less: amortisation on revalued intangible assets (5,000)
Tax effects on amortisation on
($5m × 16.5%) 825 (4,175)
revalued intangible assets
Adjusted profit 135,817
Non-controlling interests' share (30%) 40,745
W4a - Current revaluation surplus to Non-controlling interests

$'000 $'000
Dr Non-controlling interests ($36m × 30% NCI) 10,800
(SPLOCI)
W5 - Assign post-acquisition Retained Earnings to Non-controlling interests
$'000 $'000
Dr Opening retained earnings (from [30% NCIx($654m – 350m)] 91,200
1 October20W8 to
30September20X1)
W5a - Assign post-acquisition revaluation surplus to Non-controlling interests
$'000 $'000
Dr Opening revaluation surplus [30% NCIx($30m – 10m)] 6,000
(from 1 October20W8 to
30 September20X1)
W6 - Realisation of beginning unrealised profit in inventory
$'000 $'000
Dr Opening retained earnings 8,400
Dr Non-controlling interests (SOFP) ($12m × 30%) 3,600
Cr Cost of sales ($36m – $24m) 12,000
Dr Tax expense ($12m × 16.5%) 1,980

Cr Opening retained earnings ($8.4m × 16.5%) 1,386
Cr 594
(SOFP) ($3.6m × 16.5%)
W7 - Elimination of intercompany sale of inventory
$'000 $'000
Dr Sales 144,000
Cr Cost of sales 144,000
Dr Cost of sales (48m × 35%) 16,800
Cr Inventory 16,800
Dr Deferred tax asset ($16.8m × 16.5%) 2,772

Cr Tax expense 2,772
1038
Reconciliation of Non-controlling interests (SOFP):

Shareholders' equity of STF at 31 March 20X2 1,296,000
Fair value adjustment of intangible assets 80,000
Tax on fair value adjustment of intangible (80m × 16.5%) (13,200) 66,800
assets
Accumulated amortisation on fair value (80m/8 × 3.5) (35,000)
adjustment of intangible assets
Tax on acc. amortisation on 5,775 (29,225)
fair value adjustment of intangible assets
Unrealised profit on upstream sale (16,800)
Tax on unrealised profit on upstream sale 2,772 (14,028)
Adjusted shareholders' equity of STF at 31 March 20X2 1,319,547
NCI's share @ 30% 395,864
or
30% NCI
Shareholders' equity of STF at 31 March 20X2 1,296,000 388,800
Fair value adjustment of intangible assets 80,000 24,000
Tax on fair value adjustment of intangible (80m × 16.5%) (13,200) (3,960)
assets
Accumulated amortisation on fair value (80m/8 × 3.5) (35,000) (10,500)
adjustment of intangible assets
Tax on acc. amortisation on fair value adjustment of intangible assets 5,775 1,733
Unrealised profit on upstream sale (16,800) (5,040)

Tax on unrealised profit on upstream sale 2,772 831
Adjusted shareholders' equity of STF at 31 March 20X2 1,319,547 395,864
Question 8
To Ms. Tess Chow, Director of PHL
From Karen Lam, Accounting Manager
Date dd/mm/yyyy
Subject Goodwill and net cash flows on acquisition of SPC, share based payment, leased
machinery and consolidated statement of cash flows of PHL.
I refer to your queries regarding the note showing the calculation of goodwill and net cash flows on
acquisition of SPC, the share based payment, the leased machinery and the consolidated
statement of cash flows of PHL.
Answer 1(a)
HKAS 7.39 requires that the aggregate cash flows arising from obtaining or losing control of
subsidiaries or other businesses units shall be presented separately and classified as investing
activities.
Therefore PHL should disclose, in aggregate, in respect of obtaining control of SPC as a subsidiary
during the year each of the following:
(a) the total consideration paid;
(b) the portion of the consideration consisting of cash and cash equivalents;
(c) the amount of cash and cash equivalents in the subsidiaries over which control is obtained;
and
1039
Financial Reporting
the amount of the assets and liabilities other than cash or cash equivalents in the subsidiaries over
which control is obtained, summarised by each major category (HKAS 7.40).
Obtaining control of subsidiary
During the year, the Group obtained control of subsidiary SPC. The fair values of assets acquired
and liabilities assumed were as follows:
$'000 $'000
Fair value of identifiable net assets acquired
Machinery 7,920
Inventory 1,536
Accounts receivable 1,344
Cash and cash equivalent 5,376
Accounts payable (3,264)
Taxation payable (816) 12,096
Add: Goodwill on acquisition 6,256
Less: Fair value of NCI (2,880)
Total consideration 15,472
Non-cash consideration (13,200)
Cash and cash equivalent acquired (5,376)
Net cash (inflow) on acquisition of a subsidiary (3,104)
Answer 1(b)
Accounting for share based payment (SBP) transaction is governed by HKFRS 2.
SDL, being the entity receiving the services of its top executives, shall measure the services
received as either an equity-settled or a cash settled SBP transaction by assessing:
(i) the nature of the awards granted, and
(ii) its own rights and obligations (para. 43A)
Since the awards are granted by its parent and there is no indication that SDL has an obligation to
settle, SDL shall measure the services received as an equity-settled SBP transaction (para. 43B).
SDL shall subsequently re-measure such SBP transaction only for changes in non-market
performance conditions.
PHL, being the entity settling a SBP transaction when another entity (SDL) in the group receives
the services, shall recognise the transaction as an equity-settled SBP transaction as it is settled in
its own equity instruments (para. 43C).
From the consolidated group’s perspective, the group receives services as consideration for its
own equity instrument; therefore, it should be accounted for as an equity-settled SBP transaction.
$ $
Staff cost ($0.5 x 1,000,000 × 1/4) 125,000
Cr Equity / contribution from PHL 125,000
In PHL's books
$ $
Dr Investment in SDL ($0.5 × 1,000,000 × 1/4) 125,000
Cr Other reserves (equity) – ESOP 125,000
In consolidated financial statements of PHL

$ $
Dr Equity – contribution from PHL 125,000
Cr Investment in SDL 125,000
1040
As a result, in the group’s consolidated financial statements:

1. The staff cost will increase by $125,000
2. Other reserves (equity) – ESOP will increase by $125,000
The net effect is similar to the case where PHL issues its own equity instruments to its own
employees under HKFRS 2.
Answer 1(c)(i)
Since the title to the machinery will pass to PHL (the lessee) and the present value of the minimum
lease payments ($487,805 × 4.100 approximates to $2,000,000) amounts to substantially all of the
fair value of the leased machinery, it is a finance lease to PHL (the lessee).
PHL should record both the asset and an obligation under finance lease at the present value of the
leased machinery (i.e. $2,000,000).
Lease Amortisation Schedule (Lessee)
(7%) Interest on Annual Lease Lease Liability
Date Lease Liability Payment Recovery Lease Liability
1 January 20X1 $2,000,000
31 December 20X1 $140,000 $487,805 $347,805 $1,652,195
31 December 20X2 $115,654 $487,805 $372,151 $1,280,044
Answer 1(c)(ii)
The relevant journal entries for PHL (lessee) for the lease for the first two years (up to 31
December 20X2) are as follows:
1 January 20X1 $ $
Leased Machinery 2,000,000
Cr Obligation under finance lease 2,000,000
31 December 20X1
Interest expense 140,000
Obligation under finance lease 347,805
Cr Cash 487,805
Depreciation 250,000
Cr Accumulated depreciation 250,000
31 December 20X2
Obligation under finance lease 372,151
Cr Cash 487,805
Depreciation 250,000
Cr Accumulated depreciation 250,000
I hope the above explanation has answered your questions. For further details, please refer to the
annex. Please feel free to contact me if you have further queries.
Best regards,
Karen Lam
1041
Financial Reporting
Answer 1(d)
Consolidated statement of cash flows for PHL for the year ended 31 December 20X2
Cash flows from operating activities $'000 $'000
Adjustment for:
Depreciation (W1) 19,320
Gain on disposal of PPE (6,000)
Share of profit from associates (21,000)
Dividends from long-term investments (9,300)
Increase in inventory (118,500 – 60,000 – 1,536) (56,964)

Increase in accounts receivable (33,156)
(111,000 – 76,500 – 1,344)
Increase in accounts payable (44,002 – 28,428 – 3,264) 12,310 (85,790)

Interest paid (opening 1,800 + P/L 9,000 – closing 2,400) (8,400)
Tax paid (opening 13,800 + 29,700 – 29,520+ 816) (14,796)

Proceeds from disposal of machinery 30,000
Purchase of machinery (W1) (116,080)
Dividend received 9,300
Dividend received from associates 15,000
(opening 60,000 + P/L 21,000 – closing 66,000)
Net cash inflow on acquisition of a subsidiary 3,104

Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares (W2) 150,480
Proceeds from bank borrowings (129,318 – 38,920) 90,398
Payments under finance lease (W3) (372)
Dividend paid to non-controlling interests (W4) (1,980)
Dividend paid (opening 150,000 + P/L 74,700 – 206,700) (18,000)
Net cash from financing activities 220,526
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 163,264
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year 109,200
Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year 272,464
1042
(W1) Depreciation of building and machinery and purchase of machinery

Building at carrying amount
Opening 132,000  closing 122,680, thus depreciation for building = 9,320
Machinery Cost Acc. depreciation
$’000 $’000
b/f 84,000 66,000
Disposal (28,000) (4,000)
From new subsidiary 7,920
Addition by cash 116,080
Depreciation _______ 10,000
c/f 180,000 72,000
Total Depreciation = 9,320 + 10,000 = 19,320
(W2) Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares

Share capital
$’000
b/f 185,700
For acquisition 13,200
Addition by cash 150,480
c/f 349,380
(W3) Payments under finance lease

$’000
b/f 1,652 (non-current 1,280 + current 372)
Capital repayment
to lessor under finance lease (372)
c/f 1,280 (non-current 882 + current 398)
(W4) Dividend paid to non-controlling interests (NCI)

$’000
b/f 20,000
Income to NCI 6,000
FV of NCI of new subsidiary 2,880
Dividend paid to NCI (1,980)
c/f 26,900
1043
Financial Reporting
SECTION B – Short / Essay questions

Answer 9
(a) In accordance with the Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants of HKICPA (the "Code"):
Mr. V. Chow, as the independent non-executive director of the listed company, should
consider the need to maintain confidentiality of information within the listed company.
Mr. V. Chow should not disclose the confidential information contained in the draft audited
financial statements of the listed company to Mr. K. Chow without proper and specific
authority.
Both Mr. K. Chow and Mr. V. Chow should not use confidential information acquired as a
result of professional and business relationships to their personal advantage or the
advantage of third parties.
Both Mr. K. Chow and Mr. V. Chow should comply with relevant laws and regulations and
should avoid any action that discredits the profession.
The trading of shares by Mr. K. Chow would constitute insider dealing under the Securities
and Futures Ordinance.
Insider dealing in relation to the listed securities of a corporation takes place when, inter alia,
a person who is "connected with the corporation" and who is knowingly in possession of
"relevant information" deals in listed securities of the corporation or counsels or procures
another person to do so knowing or having reasonable cause to believe that such person
would deal in them. Relevant information is specific information about a corporation which is
not generally known to persons accustomed or likely to deal in the listed securities of that
corporation but which would materially affect the price of the securities if it were.
(b) Goodwill can still be recognised in the financial statements prepared under merger
accounting for a business combination under common control.
The concept underlying the use of merger accounting to account for a common control
combination is that no acquisition has occurred and there has been a continuation of the
risks and benefits to the controlling party (or parties) that existed prior to the combination.
The net assets of the combining entities or businesses are consolidated using the existing
book value from the controlling parties' perspective.
The assets and liabilities of the acquired entity or business should be recorded at the book
values as stated in the financial statements of the controlling party.
That is, it will require recording of:
– the fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities of the acquired entity or business
at the date of original acquisition from third parties by the controlling party.
– any remaining goodwill arising on the previous acquisition and non-controlling interest
recorded in the consolidated financial statements of the controlling party.
There is no recognition of any additional goodwill or excess of acquirer's interest in the net
fair value of the acquiree's identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities over cost at
the time of common control combination to the extent of the continuation of the controlling
party or parties' interest.
1044
Answer 10
(a) HDL must determine whether the modification is considered to be an extinguishment of the
original bank loan in accordance with HKFRS 9.
HKFRS 9, 3.3.2 requires an exchange between an existing borrower and lender of debt
instruments with substantially different terms to be accounted for as extinguishment of the
original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability. Similarly, a substantial
modification of the terms of an existing financial liability is accounted for as an
extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability.
B3.3.6 of HKFRS 9 states that the terms are substantially different if the discounted present
value of the cash flows under the new terms, including any fees paid net of any fees received
and discounted using the original effective interest rate, is at least 10 per cent different from
the discounted present value of the remaining cash flows of the original financial liability.
The modified cash flow of the bank loan is as follows:
Year ended Payments

HK$ million
30 June 20Y0 12.00
30 June 20Y1 12.00
30 June 20Y2 12.00
30 June 20Y3 212.00
Present value at 30 June 20X9 discounting at original effective interest rate of 8% is

HK$186.75 million.
As the difference between the amortised cost of the bank loan at the date of modification, 30
June 20X9 (HK$200 million) and the present value of the new bank loan, discounted by the
original effective interest rate (HK$186.75 million), is less than 10 per cent ([HK$200 million –
HK$186.75 million]/ HK$200 million  100% = 6.625%), the modification is not considered as
extinguishment of the original bank loan.
No gain or loss is recognised for the modification and the carrying amount of the bank loan is
still HK$200 million.
The bank loan was originally repayable on 30 June 20Y0 and classified as current liability.
The modification of the maturity date of the bank loan results in such liability to be settled
more than 12 months after the reporting period. Accordingly, it is classified as non-current
liability in the statement of financial position as at 30 June 20Y0.
(b) In accordance with AG35 of HKAS 32, an entity may amend the terms of a convertible
instrument to induce early conversion, for example by offering a more favourable conversion
ratio or paying other additional consideration in the event of conversion before a specific
date. The difference, at the date the terms are amended, between the fair value of the
consideration the holder receives on conversion of the instrument under the revised terms
and the fair value of the consideration the holder would have received under the original
terms is recognised as a loss in profit or loss.
1045
Financial Reporting
Journal entries that HDL should make on 30 June 20X9:
HK$ HK$
DEBIT Expense 18,500,000

CREDIT Convertible bonds equity reserve 18,500,000
To record the amendment of the terms of conversion (100  (2,500,000 – 2,000,000) 

HK$0.45) – HK$4,000,000.
DEBIT Convertible bonds 96,296,296

Interest payable 4,000,000
Convertible bonds equity reserve 25,633,058
CREDIT Share capital 125,929,354
To record the conversion of the bonds under the amended terms of conversion and waive
interest payable.
Answer 11
(a) Share-based compensation expense for the year ended 31 March 20X9:
= [(2,000,000 / 4  HK$8)] + [(2,000,000 / 4  HK$8) / 2] + [(2,000,000 / 4  HK$8) / 3] +

[(2,000,000 / 4  HK$8) / 4]
= HK$4,000,000 + HK$2,000,000 + HK$1,333,333 + HK$1,000,000 = HK$8,333,333
Share-based compensation expense for the year ended 31 March 20Y0:
= [(2,000,000 / 4  HK$8) / 2] + [(2,000,000 / 4  HK$8) / 3] + [(2,000,000 /4  HK$8) / 4]

= HK$2,000,000 + HK$1,333,333 + HK$1,000,000 = HK$4,333,333
(b) Accounting implication of cancellation of unvested awarded share options on 1 April 20Y0:
According to HKFRS 2.28, if a grant of equity instruments is cancelled or settled during the
vesting period (other than a grant cancelled by forfeiture when the vesting conditions are not
satisfied):
(a) The entity shall account for the cancellation or settlement as an acceleration of
vesting, and shall therefore recognise immediately the amount that otherwise would
have been recognised for services received over the remainder of the vesting period.
(b) Any payment made to the employee on the cancellation or settlement of the grant
shall be accounted for as the repurchase of an equity interest, i.e. as a deduction from
equity, except to the extent that the payment exceeds the fair value of the equity
instruments granted, measured at the repurchase date. Any such excess shall be
recognised as an expense.
Share-based compensation expense originally to be recognised from 1 April 20Y0 to
31 March 20Y2:
= [(2,000,000 / 4  HK$8) / 3] + [(2,000,000 / 4  HK$8) / 4  2]
= HK$1,333,334 + HK$2,000,000 = HK$3,333,334
1046
OR
Accumulated compensation expense recognised up to 31 March 20Y0:

HK$8,333,333 + HK$4,333,333 = HK$12,666,666
[(2,000,000  HK$8) – HK$12,666,666] = HK$3,333,334

Payment exceeds the fair value of the share options granted and cancelled, measured at
1 April 20Y0:
= HK$5,500,000 – [(2,000,000 / 4  2)  HK$5]
= HK$500,000
Total compensation expense recognised upon cancellation of unvested awarded share

options on 1 April 20Y0 = HK$3,333,334 + HK$500,000 = HK$3,833,334
(c) According to HK(IFRIC) – Int 11 para. 8, provided that the share-based arrangement is
accounted for as equity-settled in the consolidated financial statements of the parent, the
subsidiary shall measure the services received from its employees in accordance with the
requirements applicable to equity-settled share-based payment transactions, with a
corresponding increase recognised in equity as a contribution from the parent.
The journal entries to be recorded by BS for the year ended 31 March 20Y0 were:
HK$ HK$
DEBIT Share compensation expense 4,333,333
CREDIT Contribution from MDS 4,333,333
Answer 12
(a) The value of the financial liability component of the CB at initial recognition:
2 3
[(6%  HK$800 / 1.08) + (6%  HK$800 / 1.08 ) + (6%  HK$800 / 1.08 ) + (6%  HK$800 /
4 4
1.08 ) + (HK$800 / 1.08 )] million
= HK$[44.4 + 41.2 + 38.1 + 35.3 + 588] million

= HK$747 million
The initial carrying amount of the equity component of the CB:

= HK$(800 – 747) million = HK$53 million
Journal entries for the issue of the convertible bond (CB) on 1 December 20X8:
HK$m HK$m
DEBIT Cash 800
CREDIT Convertible Bond – liability 747
CREDIT Equity – conversion option 53
(b) Carrying amount of the financial liability component of the CB at 1 April 20Y0:
HK$[(747 million  1.08) – (800 million  6%)]  [1 + (0.08 × 4/12)]

= HK$(806.76 – 48) million  1.027
= HK$779 million
1047
Financial Reporting
Journal entries for the conversion of CB into shares on 1 April 20Y0:

HK$m HK$m
DEBIT Convertible Bond – liability 779
DEBIT Equity – conversion option 53
CREDIT Share capital 832
CREDIT
(c) HKFRS 9 requires an entity to measure the financial liability at fair value, plus transaction
costs that are directly attributable to the issue of the financial liabilities, at initial recognition.
Measurement of the fair value of the interest-free loan of HK$500 million based on the
effective interest rate of other borrowings of AML, i.e. 6 per cent:
HK$500 million / 1.062 = HK$445 million
The journal entries for the recognition of the interest-free loan on 1 April 20Y0:
HK$m HK$m
DEBIT Bank or Cash 500
CREDIT Loan from a shareholder 445
Equity – contribution from a shareholder 55
Answer 13
Overseas companies are subject to the same qualifying criteria to use the SME-FRF as Hong Kong
companies.
CML does not carry out a banking business, an insurance business or a regulated business
licenced under Part V of the Securities and Futures Ordinance. Nor does it, insofar as can be
concluded from the information provided, accept loans of money at interest by way of trade or
business. Therefore the company is eligible to use the SME-FRF if the stipulated criteria are met.
CMLis a private company that is not a member of a group. Therefore, regardless of its size, it can
apply the SME-FRF if both of its shareholders give written approval every year that it is applied.
Under SME-FRS s.4 Intangible assets, an intangible asset arising from development phase of an
internal project should be recognised if, and only if, an entity can demonstrate all the conditions set
out in 4.7 are fulfilled.
One of these conditions is the technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so that it will
be available for use or sale. Based on the information stated, CML did not demonstrate that this
condition has been met. Accordingly, the HK$28 million expenditure cannot be recognised as an
intangible asset, but charged to profit or loss.
As a result, the total assets of CML at 31 December 20X9 were estimated to be approximately
HK$37 million [= 60 – (28 – 5) million].
Provided that both shareholders of CML agree to prepare the financial statements in accordance
with the SME-FRS, CML qualifies for reporting under the SME-FRS for the year ended
31 December 20X9.
1048
Answer 14
(a) Classification of lease
PBL should account for the lease with UMC as an operating lease, since:
 there is no transfer of ownership of those two printing machines nor option to
purchase the machines by PBL.
 the lease term of four years is not the majority of the ten-year economic life of the
machines.
 the total gross rental over the lease term is [($200,000  12) + ($210,000  12) +
($220,000  12) + ($230,000  12)] = $10,320,000. The present value of the minimum
lease payments is not substantially all of the fair value of the leased assets, i.e.
$24,000,000 [$12,000,000  2].
Alternative:
The total gross rental over the lease term is [($200,000  12) + ($210,000  12) + ($220,000
 12) + ($230,000  12)] = $10,320,000. Assuming a discount rate of 8 per cent is used, the
present value of the above minimum lease payment amounts (calculated based on yearly
basis at accrual) is approximately $8,507,000 which is not substantially all of the fair value of
the leased assets, i.e. $24,000,000 [$12,000,000  2].
Accordingly, risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the machines are not transferred.
Accounting treatment
The lease payments shall be recognised as an expense on a straight line basis over the
lease term.
Monthly expense recognised = $10,320,000 / 48 = $215,000.
(b) (i) The chief operating officer of PBL is incorrect.

In this case, PBL is entering into an arrangement with a finance house to sell three
machines at a profit and then lease them back over a five-year term.
In order to establish the accounting treatment of this transaction, it is necessary to
decide whether this is a sale and leaseback arrangement within the scope of HKAS
17. If so, it will be necessary to establish whether the lease arrangement is finance or
operating in nature.
HK(SIC)-Int 27 deals with evaluating the substance of transactions involving the legal
form of a lease. It states that HKAS 17 applies when the substance of an arrangement
includes the conveyance of the right to use an asset for an agreed period of time. It
further states that the following indicators demonstrate that an arrangement may not,
in substance, involve a lease under HKAS 17:
(a) An entity retains all of the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an
underlying asset and enjoys substantially the same rights to its use as before
the arrangement; and
(b) An option is included on terms that make its exercise almost certain.
Risks and rewards
 The remaining estimated useful life for the assets is six years while the lease
term is five years, which can be interpreted as the major part of the economic
life of the asset.
 PBL has an option to buy the machines from EFL for $50,000 at the end of the
five-year lease term.
1049
Financial Reporting
 Assuming the purchase option is exercised, gross payments in respect of the

agreement over five years total $22,550,000. The present value of this
minimum lease payment is approximately $18,010,000 at a discount rate of 8
per cent. This is considered to be substantially equal to the fair value of the
leased assets.
The substance and economic reality are therefore that PBL has not transferred
substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the machines to the
lessor.
Almost certainly exercisable option
As the current fair value of the machines (with a remaining six-year useful life) is
$18,000,000, it is reasonable to consider that the $50,000 option price at the end of
the lease is sufficiently lower than fair value at the date the option becomes
exercisable that the option will be exercised by PBL.
It can therefore be concluded that the transaction is not within the scope of HKAS 17.
Rather than a sale and leaseback transaction, it is a means whereby the finance
house provides finance to PBL using the assets as security.
Accounting treatment
As the transaction is classified as a financing transaction, the $17 million proceeds
received are recognised as a financial liability in accordance with HKFRS 9.
Tutorial note
If this transaction were within the scope of HKAS 17 (if, for example there were no
repurchase option) it would be accounted for as a sale and finance leaseback. The
original asset with carrying amount of $15 million would be derecognised and a
finance lease asset and liability of $17 million would be recognised and accounted for
in line with the requirements of HKAS 17.
The profit of $2 million would be deferred and amortised over the lease term.
(b) (ii) If the lease term is shortened to three years with an annual future lease payment of
$4,000,000 and without PBL's option to buy the machines from EFL:
 The total lease payment would be $12,000,000, the present value of which
would not be substantially equal to the fair value of the leased assets
($18,000,000) nor the proceeds received ($17,000,000).
 PBL would not retain the ownership of the machines nor have an option to
purchase the machines at the end of the lease term.
In this case the transaction would be treated as a sale and operating leaseback. A
$4 million operating lease expense would be recognised in each of the three years of
the lease.
As the sale price of $17,000,000 is below fair value of $18,000,000, the profit,
calculated as the difference between $17,000,000 and $15,000,000, would be
recognised immediately in profit or loss.
Answer 15
(a) The financial position of MG as at 31 December 20Y1 is affected as follows:
Option 1
The rights issue is an equity transaction and will increase MG's net assets by $1,000 million.
Option 2
The convertible bond is a compound financial instrument which contains both a liability and
an equity component.
1050
 Liability component shown as a non-current liability:

PV of eight semi-annual interest payments of $20 million and redemption of $1,000
million at 31 December 20Y5 (market interest rate 2.5 per cent per semi-annual) =
$964.15 million.
 Equity component:
$35.85 million [$1,000 – 964.15 million] (ignoring the tax effect).
(b) Calculation of the earnings per share of MG for the year ending 31 December 20Y2,
assuming the estimated profit is $800 million, is as follows:
Rights issue
With the rights issue, the number of shares of MG used for the computation of EPS will
increase to 1,200 million.
The EPS calculated based on an estimated profit of $800 million will decrease from $0.8
($800/1,000) to $0.67 ($800/1,200) per share.
Convertible bond
The convertible bond will not affect the number of shares for the basic EPS calculation, but
will decrease the profit for the year 20Y2 due to interest payments (ignoring the tax effect):
$m
April 20Y2 interest $964.15  2.5% 24.10
October 20Y2 interest ($964.15 + 24.10 – 20)  2.5% 24.21
48.31
The basic EPS calculated based on an estimated profit of $751.69 million ($800 million –
$48.31 million) will decrease from $0.8 ($800 / 1,000) to $0.752 ($751.69 / 1,000) per share.
The convertible bonds are dilutive with an individual EPS of $0.386 ($48.31 million / 125
million shares).
Diluted EPS is therefore calculated as $0.711 (($751.69 + $48.31) / (1,000 + 125))
(c) The disclosure of financial risk under HKFRS 7
HKFRS 7.33 requires MG to disclose the financial instruments'
(a) exposure to risk and how it arises,
(b) its objectives, policies and processes for managing the risk and the methods used to
measure the risk and
(c) any changes of (a) and (b) from the previous period.
The convertible bonds are at a fixed rate and subject to fair value interest rate risk, as an
increase / decrease of the market interest rate will increase/decrease the fair value of the
convertible bonds.
HKFRS 7.39(a) requires the preparation of a maturity analysis for the convertible bonds that
shows the remaining contractual maturities, analysed by time bands showing the contractual
undiscounted cash payments and allocated to the earliest period in which MG can be
required to pay.
HKFRS 7.39(c) requires MG to describe in the financial statements how the management of
MG manages the liquidity risk inherent in the items disclosed in the maturity analysis.
1051
Financial Reporting
Answer 16
Classification of financial assets
GII's investments are both financial assets. According to HKFRS 9, financial assets are classified
as measured at either amortised cost or fair value depending on:
1 the entity's business model for managing the financial assets and
2 the contractual cash flow characteristics of the financial assets.
In particular, a financial asset is measured at amortised cost where:
1 the asset is held within a business model where the objective is to hold assets in order to
collect contractual cash flows
2 the contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are
For this purpose, interest is consideration for the time value of money and for the credit risk
associated with the principal amount.
Embedded derivatives
Derivatives embedded within a host which is a financial asset within the scope of HKFRS 9 are not
separated out for accounting purposes; instead the entire hybrid contract is accounted for as one
and classified as measured at amortised cost or fair value through profit or loss in accordance with
the guidelines above.
Application: convertible bonds
For the holder, convertible bonds are a financial asset within the scope of HKFRS 9. The standard
requires that the holder analyses the instrument in its entirety (rather than split it into the host
contract and conversion option, as was required under HKAS 39).
GII will be entitled to receive a contracted interest payment of $450,000 ($15 million  6% / 2) on
31 December 20X8, 30 June 20X9, 31 December 20X9, 30 June 20Y0 and 31 December 20Y0
from the listed company. These contractual interest payments are not only consideration for the
time value of money and credit risk; they are also linked to the value of the equity of the issuer of
the bonds.
Therefore, the bonds should be classified as at fair value through profit or loss.
At initial recognition at 1 July 20X8, the financial asset will be measured at fair value.
After initial recognition, the asset will be measured at fair value with gains or losses recognised in
profit or loss.
Application: deposit with commercial bank
The deposit is considered a financial asset classified as held at amortised cost.
The additional 3% interest is an example of an embedded derivative, however, as the host contract
is a financial asset, the derivative is not separated out for the purposes of accounting and the entire
hybrid contract is accounted for together.
Answer 17
(a) Deferred tax position at 31 December 20X7 accounted for in GP's consolidated financial
statements:
Carrying amount of the printing machine at 31 December 20X7:
$20,000,000  [1 – (4.5 years/16 years)] = $14,375,000
Tax base at 31 December 20X7:
$20,000,000  [1 – (1 – 0.1)  (4.5 years/10 years)] = $11,900,000
1052
Taxable temporary difference:

Carrying amount – tax base
= $14,375,000 – $11,900,000 = $2,475,000
Deferred tax liability:
(1)
$2,475,000  25% = $618,750
1 Deferred tax assets and liabilities shall be measured at the tax rates that are expected
to apply to the period when the asset is realised or the liability is settled, based on tax
rates (and tax laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting
date. 20X3 is the first profit-making year for GP, the company will have full tax
exemption for 20X3 and 20X4, and then be subject to 50% reduction for 20X5 to 20X7
(i.e. 12%). Afterward, the tax rate is 25%. As the taxable temporary difference will be
reversed after 20X7, the tax rate applied for deferred tax computation is 25%.
(b) Journal entries to record the deferred income taxes at 31 December 20X8 for GP's
consolidated financial statements:
$ $
DEBIT Deferred tax – Statement of profit or loss 137,500
Carrying amount of the printing machine at 31 December 20X8:
$20,000,000  [1 – (5.5 years/16 years)] = $13,125,000
Tax base at 31 December 20X8:
$20,000,000  [1 – (1 – 0.1)  (5.5 years/10 years)] = $10,100,000
Taxable temporary difference:
Carrying amount – tax base
= $13,125,000 – $10,100,000 = $3,025,000
Deferred tax liability:
$3,025,000  25% = $756,250
Increase in deferred tax liability in 20X8:
= $756,250 – $618,750 = $137,500
(c) Amount of deferred taxes to be shown on GP's consolidated statement of financial position
at 31 December 20X8:
Deferred tax asset $500,000
Deferred tax liability $756,250
GP's deferred tax asset cannot be offset against the deferred tax liability of BP as the two
entities' income taxes are NOT levied by the same taxation authority.
1053
Financial Reporting
1054
Glossary of terms
1055
Financial Reporting
1056
Glossary of terms
A service condition is a vesting condition that requires the counterparty to complete a specified
period of service during which services are provided to the entity. If the counterparty, regardless of
the reason, ceases to provide service during the vesting period, it has failed to satisfy the condition.
A service condition does not require a performance target to be met.
A performance condition is a vesting condition that requires:
(a) The counterparty to complete a specified period of service (i.e. a service condition); the
service requirement can be explicit or implicit; and
(b) Specified performance targets to be met while the counterparty is rendering the service
required in (a).
The period of achieving the performance target(s):
(a) Shall not extend beyond the end of the service period; and
(b) May start before the service period on the condition that the commencement date of the
performance target is not substantially before the commencement of the service period.
A performance target is defined by reference to:
(a) The entity's own operations (or activities) or the operations or activities of another entity in
the same group (i.e. a non-market condition); or
(b) The price (or value) of the entity's equity instruments or the equity instruments of another
entity in the same group (including shares and share options) (i.e. a market condition).
A performance target might relate either to the performance of the entity as a whole or to some part
of the entity (or part of the group), such as a division or an individual employee.
A market condition is a performance condition upon which the exercise price, vesting or
exercisability of an equity instrument depends that is related to the market price (or value) of the
entity's equity instruments (or the equity instruments of another entity in the same group) such as:
(a) Attaining a specified share price or a specified amount of intrinsic value of a share option; or
(b) Achieving a specified target that is based on the market price (or value) of the entity's equity
instruments (or the equity instruments of another entity in the same group) relative to an
index of market prices of equity instruments in other entities.
A market condition requires the counterparty to complete a specified period of service (i.e. a
service condition); the service condition can be explicit or implicit.
Accounting estimates. Judgements, based on up to date information that must be made in order
to apply an accounting policy, e.g. useful life and residual value of an asset.
Accounting policies. The specific principles, bases, conventions, rules and practices adopted by
an entity in preparing and presenting financial statements.
Accounting profit. Profit or loss for a period before deducting tax expense.
Accrual basis. The effects of transactions and other events are recognised when they occur (and
not as cash or its equivalent is received or paid) and they are recorded in the accounting records
and reported in the financial statements of the periods to which they relate.
Acquiree. The business or businesses that the acquirer obtains control of in a business
combination. Referred to in HKFRS 10 as the investee.
Acquirer. The entity that obtains control of the acquiree. Referred to in HKFRS 10 as the investor.
Active market. A market in which all the following conditions exist:
(a) The items traded in the market are homogenous
(b) Willing buyers and sellers can normally be found at any time; and
(c) Prices are available to the public.
1057
Financial Reporting
Actuarial gains and losses comprise:

(a) Experience adjustments (the effects of differences between the previous actuarial
assumptions and what has actually occurred)
(b) The effects of changes in actuarial assumptions.
Adjusting event. An event that adds information on conditions that existed at the reporting date.
Amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability. The amount at which the financial asset or
liability is measured at initial recognition minus principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative
amortisation using the effective interest method of any difference between that initial amount and
the maturity amount, and minus any reduction (directly or through the use of an allowance account)
for impairment or uncollectability.
Antidilution. An increase in earnings per share or a reduction in loss per share resulting from the
that ordinary shares are issued upon the satisfaction of certain conditions.
Asset. A resource which is:
(a) Controlled by the entity as a result of events in the past
(b) Something from which the entity expects future economic benefits to flow
.Asset ceiling is the present value of any economic benefits available in the form of refunds from a
defined benefit pension plan or reductions in future contributions to the plan.
Assets. Probable future economic benefits obtained or controlled by a particular entity as a result
of past transactions or events. Assets are rights or other access to future economic benefits
controlled by an entity as a result of past transactions or events.
Associate. An entity, including an unincorporated entity such as a partnership, over which the
investor has significant influence and that is neither a subsidiary nor an interest in a joint venture.
Bargain purchase Arises when the net of the acquisition-date amounts of the identifiable assets
acquired and the liabilities assumed exceeds the consideration transferred. It may also be referred
to as negative goodwill.
Basic earnings per share. The profit or loss attributable to ordinary shareholders divided by the
weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period.
Bearer plant a living plant that:
(a) Is used in the production or supply of agricultural produce
(b) Is expected to bear produce for more than one period
(c) Has a remote likelihood of being sold as agricultural produce except for individual scrap
sales
Bearer plants are within the scope of HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment.
Borrowing costs. Interest and other costs incurred by an entity in connection with the borrowing of
funds.
Break-up basis. Financial statements are prepared on the break-up basis where an entity is not
assessed to be a going concern. Assets and liabilities may be measured and presented differently
from in financial statements prepared on the going concern basis.
Capital maintenance The concept that profits can only be made when the capital of an
organisation is restored to or maintained at the level that it was at the start of an accounting period.
Carrying amount. The amount at which an asset is recognised after deducting any accumulated
depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.
Cash. Comprises cash on hand and demand deposits.
1058
Glossary of terms
Cash equivalents. Short-term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known
amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.
Cash flow hedge. Hedge of the exposure to variability in cash flows that:
(a) is attributable to a particular risk associated with a recognised asset or liability (such as all or
some future interest payments on variable rate debt) or a highly probable forecast
transaction (such as an anticipated purchase or sale), and that
(b) could affect profit or loss.
Cash flows. Inflows and outflows of cash and cash equivalents.
Cash generating unit. The smallest identifiable group of assets for which independent cash flows
can be identified and measured.
Cash-settled share-based payment transaction. A share-based payment transaction that is
settled in an amount of cash determined by reference to share price.
Change in accounting estimate. An adjustment of the carrying amount of an asset or a liability, or
the amount of the periodic consumption of an asset, that results from the assessment of the
present status of, and expected future benefits and obligations associated with, assets and
liabilities. Changes in accounting estimates result from new information or new developments and,
accordingly, are not corrections of errors.
Chief operating decision maker. Identifies the function (not necessarily an individual) that
allocates resources and assesses the performance of an entity’s operating segments.
Close members of the family of a person. Those family members who may be expected to
influence, or be influenced by, that person in their dealings with the entity and include:
(a) that person's children and spouse or domestic partner
(b) children of that person's spouse or domestic partner; and
(c) dependants of that person or that person’s spouse or domestic partner.
Closing rate. The spot exchange rate at the end of the reporting period.
Comparability. An enhancing qualitative characteristic. Information is more useful if it can be
compared with similar information about other entities or the same entity for another period.
Compound instrument A financial instrument that is split into equity and liability parts and
presented accordingly in the statement of financial position.
Conceptual framework A statement of generally accepted theoretical principles which form the
frame of reference for financial reporting.
Consolidated financial statements. The financial statements of a group in which the assets,
liabilities, equity, income, expenses and cash flows of the parent and its subsidiaries are presented
as those of a single economic entity.
Construction contract. A contract specifically negotiated for the construction of an asset or a
combination of assets that are closely interrelated or interdependent in terms of their design,
technology and function or their ultimate purpose or use.
Constructive obligation. An obligation that derives from an entity's actions where:
 By an established pattern of past practice, published policies or a sufficiently specific current
statement, the entity has indicated to other parties that it will accept certain responsibilities, and
 As a result, the entity has created a valid expectation on the part of those other parties that it
will discharge those responsibilities.
Contingent asset. A possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be
confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not
wholly within the control of the entity.
1059
Financial Reporting
Contingent consideration. Usually, an obligation of the acquirer to transfer additional assets or

equity interests to the former owners of an acquiree as part of the exchange for control of the
acquiree if specified future events occur or conditions are met.
Contingent liability
within the control of the entity; or
(i) It is not probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be
required to settle the obligation; or
(ii) The amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability.
Contingent rent. That portion of the lease payments that is not fixed in amount but is based on a
factor other than just the passage of time (e.g. percentage of sales, amount of usage, price indices,
market rates of interest).
Contingent share agreement. An agreement to issue shares that is dependent on the satisfaction
of specified conditions.
Contingently issuable ordinary shares. Ordinary shares issuable for little or no cash or other
consideration upon the satisfaction of specified conditions in a contingent share agreement.
Control. An investor controls an investee when the investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable
returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through
power over the investee.
Corporate governance. The system by which companies are directed and controlled.
Cost. The amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of other consideration given to
Cost model. A measurement model allowed by HKAS 40 Investment Property. Where it is applied,
investment property is measured in accordance with the historical cost model of HKAS 16 at cost
less accumulated depreciation less accumulated impairment losses.
Cost plus contract. A construction contract in which the contractor is reimbursed for allowable
or otherwise defined costs, plus a percentage of these costs or a fixed fee.
Credit losses Impairment losses on financial assets. They may be:
 12 month credit losses, i.e. the lifetime credit losses expected to arise from a default that
occurs within 12 months, or
 Lifetime credit losses, i.e. the expected credit losses if a default occurred at any time in the
term of a financial asset.
Costs to sell. The incremental costs directly attributable to the disposal of an asset (or disposal
group), excluding finance costs and income tax expense.
Current asset An asset that:
(a) An entity expects to realise, sell or consume the asset in its normal operating cycle
(b) Is held primarily for trading
(c) An entity expects to realise the asset within 12 months after the reporting period
(d) Is cash or a cash equivalent unless the asset is restricted from being exchanged or used to
settle a liability for at least the 12 months after the reporting period
Current cost. Assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash equivalents that would have to be
paid if the same or an equivalent asset was acquired currently. Liabilities are carried at the
1060
Glossary of terms
undiscounted amount of cash or cash equivalents that would be required to settle the obligation
currently.
Current liability A liability that:
(a) An entity expects to settle the liability in its normal operating cycle
(b) Is held primarily for trading
(c) Is due to be settled within 12 months after the reporting period
(d) An entity does not have an unconditional right to defer settlement of for at least 12 months
after the reporting period. Terms of a liability that could, at the option of the counterparty,
result in its settlement by the issue of equity instruments, do not affect the classification
Current service cost. The increase in the present value of the defined benefit obligation resulting
from employee service in the current period.
Current tax. The amount of income taxes payable (recoverable) in respect of the taxable profit (tax
loss) for a period.
D-shaped group A group in which the parent company controls a subsidiary and the parent
company and subsidiary together control a further subsidiary.
Deferred tax assets. The amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of:
 Deductible temporary differences
 The carry forward of unused tax losses
 The carry forward of unused tax credits
Deferred tax liabilities. The amounts of income taxes payable in future periods in respect of
taxable temporary differences.
Defined benefit plans. Post-employment benefit plans other than defined contribution plans.
Defined contribution plans. Post-employment benefit plans under which an entity pays fixed
contributions into a separate entity (a fund) and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay
further contributions if the fund does not hold sufficient assets to pay all employee benefits relating
to employee service in the current and prior periods.
Depreciable amount. The cost of an asset, or other amount substituted for cost, less its residual
value.
Depreciable assets. Assets which:
 Are expected to be used during more than one accounting period.
 Have a limited useful life.
 Are held by an entity for use in the production or supply of goods and services, for rental to
others, or for administrative purposes.
Depreciation. The systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an asset over its useful life.
Derivative. A financial instrument or other contract with all three of the following characteristics:
(a) Its value changes in response to the change in a specified interest rate, financial instrument
price, commodity price, foreign exchange rate, index of prices or rates, credit rating or credit
index, or other variable (sometimes called the "underlying")
(b) It requires no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller than would be
required for other types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to
changes in market factors
(c) It is settled at a future date.
Development. The application of research findings or other knowledge to a plan or design for the
production of new or substantially improved materials, devices, products, processes, systems or
services before the start of commercial production or use.
1061
Financial Reporting
Diluted earnings per share Earnings per share calculated after adjusting the net profit attributable
to ordinary shareholders and the weighted average number of shares outstanding for the effects of
all dilutive potential ordinary shares.
Dilution. A reduction in earnings per share or an increase in loss per share resulting from the
that ordinary shares are issued upon the satisfaction of specified conditions.
Discontinued operation. A component of an entity that either has been disposed of or is classified
as held for sale and:
(a) Represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations
geographical area of operations or
Disposal group. Group of assets to be disposed of, by sale or otherwise, together as a group in a
single transaction, and liabilities directly associated with those assets that will be transferred in the
transaction. (In practice, a disposal group could be a subsidiary, a cash-generating unit or a single
operation within an entity.)
Dividends. Distributions of profit to holders of equity investments, in proportion with their holdings,
of each relevant class of capital.
Earnings per share. A measure of the amount of profits earned by a company for each ordinary
share.
Economic life. Either the:
(a) Period over which an asset is expected to be economically usable by one or more users, or
(b) Number of production or similar units expected to be obtained from the asset by one or more
users.
Effective interest method. A method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial instrument
and of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant period. The effective
interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts through
the expected life of the financial instrument to the net carrying amount of the financial asset or
liability.
Embedded derivative A derivative that is embedded within a host contract that may or may not be
a financial instrument.
Employee benefits. All forms of consideration given by an entity in exchange for service rendered
by employees.
Entity specific value. The present value of the cash flows an entity expects to arise from the
continuing use of an asset and from its disposal at the end of its useful life, or expects to incur
when settling a liability.
Equity. The residual interest in the assets of the entity after deducting all its liabilities.
Equity instrument granted. The right (conditional or unconditional) to an equity instrument of the
entity conferred by the entity on another party, under a share-based payment arrangement.
Equity instrument. A contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after
Equity method. A method of accounting whereby an interest in a jointly controlled entity is initially
recorded at cost and adjusted thereafter for the post acquisition change in the venturer's share of
net assets of the jointly controlled entity. The profit or loss of the venturer reflects the venturer's
share of the profit or loss of the jointly controlled entity.
Equity-settled share-based payment transaction. A share-based payment transaction that is
settled in equity instruments.
1062
Glossary of terms
Event after the reporting period. Those events, favourable and unfavourable, that occur between
the end of the reporting period and the date when the financial statements are authorised for issue.
Exchange difference. The difference resulting from translating a given number of units of one
currency into another currency at different exchange rates.
Exchange rate. The ratio of exchange for two currencies.
Expenses. Decreases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of outflows or
depletions of assets or incurrences of liabilities that result in decreases in equity, other than those
relating to distributions to equity participants.
Fair value. The price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an
Fair value hedge. A hedge of the exposure to changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or
liability, or an identified portion of such an asset or liability, that is attributable to a particular risk
and could affect profit or loss.
Fair value hierarchy A hierarchy of inputs to a valuation technique as established by HKFRS 13.
Fair value model. A measurement model allowed by HKAS 40 Investment Property. Where it is
applied, investment property is measured at fair value at each reporting date with changes
Fair value less costs to sell. The amount obtainable from the sale of an asset or cash generating
unit in an arm's length transaction between knowledgeable, willing parties, less the costs of
disposal.
Faithful representation. A fundamental qualitative characteristic. Financial information should
faithfully represent the phenomena it purports to represent. To be a perfectly faithful representation,
a depiction should be complete, neutral and free from error.
FIFO (First In First Out). A cost formula uses in the measurement of cost of inventory that
assumes that the first inventories to be purchased will be the first to be sold.
Finance lease. A lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership
of an asset. Title may or may not eventually be transferred.
Financial asset. Any asset that is:
(a) cash;
(b) an equity instrument of another entity;
(c) a contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity; or to
exchange financial instruments with another entity under conditions that are potentially
favourable to the entity; or
(d) a contract that will or may be settled in the entity's own equity instruments and is a:
(i) non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable number of
the entity's own equity instruments; or
instruments.
Financial instrument. Any contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one entity and a
financial liability or equity instrument of another entity.
Financial liability. Any liability that is a:
(a) Contractual obligation to:
(i) deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity
1063
Financial Reporting
(ii) exchange financial instruments with another entity under conditions that are potentially
unfavourable
(b) Contract that will or may be settled in the entity's own equity instruments and is a:
(i) non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of
the entity's own equity instruments; or
instruments.
Financing activities. Activities that result in changes in the size and composition of the contributed
equity and borrowings of the entity.
Firm commitment is a binding agreement for the exchange of a specified quantity of resources at
a specified price on a specified future date or dates.
Fixed price contract. A construction contract in which the contractor agrees to a fixed contract
price, or a fixed rate per unit of output, which in some cases is subject to cost escalation clauses.
Fixed production overheads. Defined by the standard as those indirect costs of production that
remain relatively constant regardless of the volume of production such as depreciation and
maintenance of factory buildings and equipment and the cost of factory management and
administration. Fixed production overheads must be allocated to items of inventory on the basis
of the normal capacity of the production facilities. Normal capacity is the expected achievable
production based on the average over several periods/seasons, under normal circumstances, and
taking into account the capacity lost through planned maintenance. The standard makes the
following additional points:
 If it approximates to the normal level of activity then the standard states that the actual level
of production can be used.
 Low production or idle plant will not result in a higher fixed overhead allocation to each unit.
 Unallocated overheads must be recognised as an expense in the period in which they were
incurred.
 In periods of abnormally high production, the fixed production overhead allocated to each
unit will be decreased, so that inventories are not measured at more than cost.
 Variable production overheads are allocated to each unit on the basis of the actual use of
production facilities.
Foreign currency. A currency other than the functional currency of the entity.
Foreign operation. An entity that is a subsidiary, associate, joint venture or branch of a reporting
entity, the activities of which are based or conducted in a country or currency other than those of
Forecast transaction is an uncommitted but anticipated future transaction.
Forgivable loans. Loans which the lender undertakes to waive repayment of under certain
prescribed conditions.
Functional currency. The currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity
operates.
Future economic benefit. The potential to contribute, directly or indirectly, to the flow of cash and
cash equivalents to the entity. The potential may be a productive one that is part of the operating
activities of the entity. It may also take the form of convertibility into cash or cash equivalents or a
capability to reduce cash outflows, such as when an alternative manufacturing process lowers the
cost of production.
GAAP (generally accepted accounting principles) All the rules, from whatever source, that
govern accounting.
1064
Glossary of terms
Gains. Increases in economic benefits. As such they are no different in nature from revenue.
Going concern. The entity is normally viewed as a going concern, that is, as continuing in
operation for the foreseeable future. It is assumed that the entity has neither the intention nor the
necessity of liquidation or of curtailing materially the scale of its operations.
Goodwill. An asset representing the future economic benefits arising from other assets acquired in
a business combination that are not individually indentified and separately recognised.
Government. Government, government agencies and similar bodies whether local, national or
international.
Government assistance. Action by government designed to provide an economic benefit specific
to an entity or range of entities qualifying under certain criteria.
Government grants. Assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in
return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the
entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value
placed upon them and transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the
normal trading transactions of the entity.
Grant date. The date at which the entity and another party (including an employee) agree to a
share-based payment arrangement, being when the entity and the other party have a shared
understanding of the terms and conditions of the arrangement. At grant date the entity confers on
the other party (the counterparty) the right to cash, other assets, or equity instruments of the entity,
provided the specified vesting conditions, if any, are met. If that agreement is subject to an
approval process (for example, by shareholders), grant date is the date when that approval is
obtained.
Grants related to assets. Government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying
for them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire non-current assets. Subsidiary conditions
may also be attached restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which they
are to be acquired or held.
Grants related to income. Government grants other than those related to assets.
Gross investment in the lease. The aggregate of:
(a) The minimum lease payments receivable by the lessor under a finance lease
(b) Any unguaranteed residual value accruing to the lessor
Group. A parent and all its subsidiaries.
Guaranteed residual value.
(a) For a lessee, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee or by a party
related to the lessee (the amount of the guarantee being the maximum amount that could, in
any event, become payable).
(b) For a lessor, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee or by a third
party unrelated to the lessor who is financially capable of discharging the obligations under
the guarantee.
Hedge effectiveness. The degree to which changes in the fair value or cash flows of the hedged
item attributable to a hedged risk are offset by changes in the fair value or cash flows of the
hedging instrument.
Hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation. HKAS 21 defines a net investment in a
foreign operation as the amount of the reporting entity's interest in the net assets of that operation.
Hedged item. An asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted future transaction that:
(a) exposes the entity to risk of changes in fair value or changes in future cash flows, and that
(b) is designated as being hedged.
1065
Financial Reporting
Hedging. For accounting purposes, means designating one or more hedging instruments so that
their change in fair value is an offset, in whole or in part, to the change in fair value or cash flows of
a hedged item.
Hedging instrument. A designated derivative or (in limited circumstances) another financial asset
or liability whose fair value or cash flows are expected to offset changes in the fair value or cash
flows of a designated hedged item. (A non-derivative financial asset or liability may be designated
as a hedging instrument for hedge accounting purposes only if it hedges the risk of changes in
foreign currency exchange rates.)
Historical cost. Assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair
value of the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition. Liabilities are
recorded at the amount of proceeds received in exchange for the obligation, or in some
circumstances (for example, income taxes), at the amounts of cash or cash equivalents expected
to be paid to satisfy the liability in the normal course of business.
HKFRS due process The process followed by HKICPA in setting a new HKFRS.
Identifiable. An asset is identifiable if it either:
licensed, rented or exchanged, either individually or together with a related contract,
identifiable asset or liability, regardless of whether the entity intends to do so.
(b) arises from contractual or other legal rights, regardless of whether those rights are
transferable or separable from the entity or from other rights and obligations.
Impairment loss. The amount by which the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its recoverable amount.
Impracticable. Applying a requirement is impracticable when the entity cannot apply it after
making every reasonable effort to do so.
Inception of the lease. The earlier of the date of the lease agreement and the date of commitment
by the parties to the principal provisions of the lease. As at this date:
(a) A lease is classified as either an operating lease or a finance lease
(b) In the case of a finance lease, the amounts to be recognised at the lease term are
determined.
Income. Increases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of inflows or
enhancements of assets or decreases of liabilities that result in increases in equity, other than
Incremental costs. Initial direct costs are incremental costs that are directly attributable to
negotiating and arranging a lease, except for such costs incurred by manufacturer or dealer
lessors. Examples of initial direct costs include amounts such as commissions, legal fees and
relevant internal costs.
Initial direct costs. Incremental costs that are directly attributable to negotiating and arranging a
lease, except for such costs incurred by manufacturer or dealer lessors. Examples of initial direct
costs include amounts such as commissions, legal fees and relevant internal costs.
Intangible asset. An identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance.
Integrated report A concise communication about how an organisation’s strategy, governance,
performance and prospects, in the context of its external environment, lead to the creation of value
in the short, medium and long tem.
Interest. The charge for the use of cash or cash equivalents or amounts due to the entity.
Interest cost. The increase during a period in the present value of a defined benefit obligation
which arises because the benefits are one period closer to settlement.
1066
Glossary of terms
Interest rate implicit in the lease. The discount rate that, at the inception of the lease, causes the
aggregate present value of the:
(a) Minimum lease payments
(b) Unguaranteed residual value
to be equal to the sum of:
(a) The fair value of the leased asset
(b) Any initial direct costs.
Interim financial report. A financial report containing either a complete set of financial statements
(as described in HKAS 1) or a set of condensed financial statements (as described in HKAS 34)
for an interim period.
Interim period. A financial reporting period shorter than a full financial year.
Intrinsic value. The difference between the fair value of the shares to which the counterparty has
the (conditional or unconditional) right to subscribe or which it has the right to receive, and the price
(if any) the other party is (or will be) required to pay for those shares. For example, a share option
with an exercise price of $15 on a share with a fair value of $20, has an intrinsic value of $5.
Inventories. Assets:
 Held for sale in the ordinary course of business
 In the process of production for such sale
 In the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process or in the
rendering of services.
Investing activities. The acquisition and disposal of long-term assets and other investments not
included in cash equivalents.
Investment entity. An entity which:
 obtains funds from one or more investors for the purpose of providing those investors with
investment management services
 commits to its investors that its business purpose is to invest funds solely for returns from
capital appreciation, investment income or both, and
 measures and evaluates the performance of substantially all of its investments on a fair
value basis.
Investment property. Property (land or a building – or part of a building – or both) held (by the
owner or by the lessee under a finance lease) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both,
rather than for:
(a) Use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes
(b) Sale in the ordinary course of business.
Joint control. The contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement, which exists only when
decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control.
arrangement have rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities relating to the arrangement.
Joint operator. A party to a joint operation that has joint control of that joint operation.
have rights to the net assets of the arrangement.
Joint venturer. A party to a joint venture that has joint control of that joint venture.
1067
Financial Reporting
Key management personnel. Those persons having authority and responsibility for planning,
Lease. An agreement whereby the lessor conveys to the lessee in return for a payment or series of
payments the right to use an asset for an agreed period of time.
Lease term. The non-cancellable period for which the lessee has contracted to lease the asset
together with any further terms for which the lessee has the option to continue to lease the asset,
with or without further payment, when at the inception of the lease it is reasonably certain that the
lessee will exercise the option.
Lessee's incremental borrowing rate of interest. The rate of interest the lessee would have to
pay on a similar lease or, if that is not determinable, the rate that, at the inception of the lease, the
lessee would incur to borrow over a similar term, and with a similar security, the funds necessary to
purchase the asset.
Legal obligation A duty to act in a certain way deriving from a contract, legislation or some other
operation of the law.
Level 1 inputs Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that an
entity can access at the fair value measurement date.
Level 2 inputs Inputs other than quoted prices (Level 1 inputs) that are observable for an asset.
Level 3 inputs Unobservable inputs for an asset or liability using an entity’s own assumptions
about market exit value.
Liability. A present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is
Liquidation. The "end of the road" for the company. It occurs when it is certain that the life of the
company will come to an end. The process by which this occurs is called winding up. You can use
the terms "liquidation" and "winding up" to mean broadly the same thing. However, the company
does not have to be in financial difficulties to be wound up. The members of the company may
decide at any time to take such action, and in some cases are obliged to do so (for example, if the
company were set up to achieve a specific purpose and this has been fully achieved, there is no
reason for the company to go on trading).
Liquidity. The availability of sufficient funds to meet deposit withdrawals and other short-term
financial commitments as they fall due.
Losses. Decreases in economic benefits. As such they are no different in nature from other
expenses.
Management commentary A narrative report that accompanies financial statements. Known as
management discussion and analysis in Hong Kong.
Market participants are buyers and sellers in the principal (or most advantageous) market for the
asset or liability that have all of the following characteristics:
(a) they are independent of each other ie they are not related parties as defined in HKAS 24,
although the price in a related party transaction may be used as an input to a fair value
measurement if the entity has evidence that the transaction was entered into at market
terms.
(b) they are knowledgeable, having a reasonable understanding about the asset or liability and
the transaction using all available information, including information that might be obtained
through due diligence efforts that are usual and customary.
(c) they are able to enter into a transaction for the asset or liability.
(d) they are willing to enter into a transaction for the asset or liability, ie they are motivated but
not forced or otherwise compelled to do so.
1068
Glossary of terms
determining factor.
Measurement. The process of determining the monetary amounts at which the elements of the
financial statements are to be recognised and carried in the statement of financial position and
statement of comprehensive income.
Measurement date. The date at which the fair value of the equity instruments granted is
measured. For transactions with employees and others providing similar services, the
measurement date is grant date. For transactions with parties other than employees (and those
providing similar services), the measurement date is the date the entity obtains the goods or the
counterparty renders service.
Measurement period. The measurement period is that period of time immediately after the
acquisition date when the acquirer may still be obtaining the information needed to identify and
measure each element of the goodwill calculation. It ends on the earlier of the date when all
information sought by the acquirer is either obtained or found to be unavailable and 12 months
from the acquisition date.
Minimum lease payments. The payments over the lease term that the lessee is or can be
required to make, excluding contingent rent, costs for services and taxes to be paid by and be
reimbursable to the lessor, together with:
(a) For a lessee, any amounts guaranteed by the lessee or by a party related to the lessee.
(b) For a lessor, any residual value guaranteed to the lessor by one of the following:
(i) The lessee
(ii) A party related to the lessee
(iii) An independent third party financially capable of meeting this guarantee.
However, if the lessee has the option to purchase the asset at a price which is expected to be
sufficiently lower than fair value at the date the option becomes exercisable for it to be reasonably
certain, at the inception of the lease, that the option will be exercised, the minimum lease payments
comprise the minimum payments payable over the lease term to the expected date of exercise of
this purchase option and the payment required to exercise it.
Monetary items. Units of currency held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in a fixed
or determinable number of units of currency.
Most advantageous market The market that maximises the amount that would be received to sell
an asset or minimises the amount that would be paid to transfer a liability after taking into account
transaction and transport costs.
Multi-employer plans. Defined contribution plans (other than state plans) or defined benefit plans
(other than state plans) that:
(a) pool the assets contributed by various entities that are not under common control
(b) use those assets to provide benefits to employees of more than one entity, on the basis that
contribution and benefit levels are determined without regard to the identity of the entity that
employs the employees concerned.
Net defined benefit liability (asset). The deficit or surplus when the fair value of pension plan
assets is deducted from the present value of the defined benefit obligation, adjusted for any effect
of limiting a net defined benefit asset to the asset ceiling.
Net interest on the defined benefit liability (asset) is the change during the period in the net
defined benefit liability (asset) that arises from the passage of time.
1069
Financial Reporting
Net investment in a foreign operation. The amount of the reporting entity's interest in the net
assets of that operation.
Net investment in the lease. The gross investment in the lease discounted at the interest rate
implicit in the lease.
Net realisable value. The estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the
estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale.
Non-adjusting event. An event that provides information about conditions arising after the
reporting date.
Non-cancellable lease. A lease that is cancellable only in one of the following situations:
(a) Upon the occurrence of some remote contingency.
(b) With the permission of the lessor.
(c) If the lessee enters into a new lease for the same or an equivalent asset with the same
lessor.
(d) Upon payment by the lessee of an additional amount such that, at inception, continuation of
the lease is reasonably certain.
Non-controlling interest. The equity in a subsidiary not attributable, directly or indirectly, to a
parent.
Non-current asset. An asset intended for use on a continuing basis in the entity's activities, i.e. it
is not intended for resale.
Obligation. A duty or responsibility to act or perform in a certain way. Obligations may be legally
enforceable as a consequence of a binding contract or statutory requirement. Obligations also
arise, however, from normal business practice, custom and a desire to maintain good business
relations or act in an equitable manner.
Off-balance sheet finance. The funding or refinancing of a company's operations in such a way
that, under legal requirements and traditional accounting conventions, some or all of the finance
may not be shown in its statement of financial position.
Onerous contract. A contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the
contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be received under it. The unavoidable costs
under a contract reflect the least net cost of exiting from the contract, which is the lower of the cost
of fulfilling it and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to fulfil it.
Operating activities. The principal revenue-producing activities of the entity and other activities
that are not investing or financing activities.
Operating lease. A lease other than a finance lease.
Operating segment. A component of an entity:
(a) that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses
(including revenues and expenses relating to transactions with other components of the
same entity),
(b) whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity's chief operating decision maker
to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its
performance, and
(c) for which discrete financial information is available.
Options, warrants and their equivalents. Financial instruments that give the holder the right to
purchase ordinary shares.
Ordinary share. An equity instrument that is subordinate to all other classes of equity instruments.
Orderly transaction is a transaction that assumes exposure to the market for a period before the
measurement date to allow for marketing activities that are usual and customary for transactions
1070
Glossary of terms
involving such assets or liabilities; it is not a forced transaction (eg a forced liquidation or distress
sale).
Other comprehensive income Defined items of income and expense that are not initially
Other long-term employee benefits. Employee benefits (other than post-employment benefits
and termination benefits) that are not due to be settled within 12 months after the end of the period
in which the employees render the related service.
Owner-occupied property. Property held by the owner (or by the lessee under a finance lease) for
use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes.
Parent. An entity that controls one or more entities.
Past service cost. The change in the present value of the defined benefit obligation for employee
service in prior periods, resulting from a plan amendment (the introduction or withdrawal of, or
changes to, a defined benefit plan) or a curtailment (a significant reduction by the entity in the
number of employees covered by a plan).
Plan assets comprise:
(a) assets held by a long-term employee benefit fund
(b) qualifying insurance policies
Post-employment benefit plans. Formal or informal arrangements under which an entity provides
post-employment benefits for one or more employees.
Post-employment benefits. Employee benefits (other than termination benefits) which are
payable after the completion of employment.
Potential ordinary share. A financial instrument or other contract that may entitle its holder to
ordinary shares.
Power. Existing rights that give the current ability to direct the relevant activities.
Present value of a defined benefit obligation. The present value, without deducting any plan
assets, of expected future payments required to settle the obligation resulting from employee
service in the current and prior periods.
Present value. The present discounted value of the future net cash flows in the normal course of
business.
Presentation currency. The currency in which the financial statements are presented.
Principal market The market with the greatest volume and level of activity for an asset or liability.
Prior period errors. Omissions from, and misstatements in, the entity's financial statements for
one or more prior periods arising from a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that:
 was available when financial statements for those periods were authorised for issue
 could reasonably be expected to have been obtained and taken into account in the
preparation and presentation of those financial statements.
Property, plant and equipment. Tangible items that are:
 Held for use in the production or supply of goods or services, for rental to others, or for
administrative purposes
 Expected to be used during more than one period
Prospective application of a change in accounting policy and of recognising the effect of a
change in an accounting estimate, respectively, are:
 applying the new accounting policy to transactions, other events and conditions occurring
after the date as at which the policy is changed
1071
Financial Reporting
 recognising the effect of the change in the accounting estimate in the current and future
periods affected by the change.
Provision. A liability of uncertain timing or amount.
Puttable financial instrument An instrument where the holder can ’put’ the instrument i.e. require
the issuer to redeem it in cash.
Qualifying asset. An asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its
intended use or sale.
Qualitative characteristics The attributes, as identified in the Conceptual Framework, that make
the information provided in financial statements useful to investors, lenders and creditors.
Qualitative characteristics are split into fundamental characteristics (relevance and faithful
representation) and enhancing characteristics (comparability, verifiability, timeliness and
understandability).
Realisable value. The amount of cash or cash equivalents that could currently be obtained by
selling an asset in an orderly disposal.
Receiver A person or firm appointed by a company’s creditors to act if a company has broken the
terms of a debenture.
Reclassification adjustments The reclassification of an amount previously recognised as other
comprehensive income to profit or loss. Only limited items as defined in HKFRS may be
reclassified.
Recognition. The process of incorporating in the statement of financial position or statement of
comprehensive income an item that meets the definition of an element and satisfies the following
criteria for recognition:
(a) It is probable that any future economic benefit associated with the item will flow to or from
the entity.
(b) The item has a cost or value that can be measured with reliability.
Recoverable amount (of an asset). The higher of an asset's fair value less costs to sell and its
value in use.
Related party. A person or entity that is related to the entity that is preparing its financial
statements.
Related party transaction. A transfer of resources, services or obligations between a reporting
entity and a related party, regardless of whether a price is charged.
Relevance. Information has the quality of relevance when it influences the economic decisions of
users by helping them evaluate past, present or future events or confirming, or correcting, their
past evaluations.
Relevant activities. Activities of the investee that significantly affect the investee's returns.
Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability (asset) comprise:
(a) actuarial gains and losses

(b) the return on plan assets, excluding amounts included in net interest on the defined benefit
liability (asset); and
(c) any change in the effect of the asset ceiling, excluding amounts included in net interest on
the net defined benefit liability (asset).
Reporting entity. An entity for which there are users who rely on the financial statements as their
major source of financial information about the entity.
Research. Original and planned investigation undertaken with the prospect of gaining new
scientific or technical knowledge and understanding.
1072
Glossary of terms
Residual value. The estimated amount that an entity would currently obtain from disposal of the
asset, after deducting the estimated costs of disposal, if the asset were already of the age and in
the condition expected at the end of its useful life.
Restructuring. A programme that is planned and controlled by management and materially
changes either:
 The scope of a business undertaken by an entity; or
 The manner in which that business is conducted.
Retrospective application. Applying a new accounting policy to transactions, other events and
conditions as if that policy had always been applied.
Retrospective restatement. Correcting the recognition, measurement and disclosure of amounts
of elements of financial statements as if a prior period error had never occurred.
Return on plan assets. Interest, dividends and other revenue derived from the plan assets,
together with realised and unrealised gains or losses on the plan assets, less any cost of
administering the plan (other than those included in the actuarial assumptions used to measure the
defined benefit obligation) and less any tax payable by the plan itself.
Revaluation. Restatement of assets and liabilities.
Revenue. The gross inflow of economic benefits during the period arising in the course of the
ordinary activities of an entity when those inflows result in increases in equity, other than increases
relating to contributions from equity participants.
Royalties. Charges for the use of non-current assets of the entity, e.g. patents, computer software
and trademarks.
Service concession arrangements. Arrangements whereby a government or other body grants
contracts for the supply of public services – such as roads, energy distribution, prisons or hospitals
– to private operators.
Service cost comprises:
(a) Current service cost which is the increase in the present value of the defined benefit
obligation resulting from employee service in the current period.
(b) Past service cost, which is the change in the present value of the defined benefit obligation
for employee service in prior periods, resulting from a plan amendment (the introduction or
withdrawal of, or changes to, a defined benefit plan) or a curtailment (a significant reduction
by the entity in the number of employees covered by a plan); and
(c) Any gain or loss on settlement.
Settlement A transaction that eliminates all further legal or constructive obligations for part or all of
the benefits provided under a defined benefit plan, other than a payment of benefits to, or on behalf
of employees that is set out in the terms of the plan and included in the actuarial assumptions.
Settlement date The date on which an asset is delivered to or by an entity (relevant to financial
instruments)
Settlement value. The undiscounted amounts of cash or cash equivalents expected to be paid to
satisfy the liabilities in the normal course of business.
Share option. A contract that gives the holder the right, but not the obligation, to subscribe to the
entity's shares at a fixed or determinable price for a specified period of time.
Share-based payment arrangement. An agreement between the entity (or another group entity)
and another party (including an employee) that entitles the other party to receive:
(a) cash or other assets of the entity for amounts that are based on the price (or value) of equity
instruments (including shares or share options) of the entity or another group entity, or
(b) equity instruments (including shares or share options) of the entity or another group entity
provided the specified vesting conditions are met.
1073
Financial Reporting
Share-based payment transaction. A transaction in which the entity:

(a) receives goods or services from the supplier of those goods or services (including an
employee) in a share-based payment arrangement, or
(b) incurs an obligation to settle the transaction with the supplier in a share-based payment
arrangement when another group entity receives those goods or services.
Short-term employee benefits. Employee benefits (other than termination benefits) that are due
to be settled within 12 months after the end of the period in which the employees render the related
service.
Significant influence. The power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of an
entity, but is not control or joint control over those policies. Significant influence may be gained by
share ownership, statute or agreement.
SME-FRF Sets out the conceptual basis and qualifying criteria for the preparation of financial
statements in accordance with the SME-FRS.
SME-FRS Sets out recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure requirements for an
entity that prepares and presents financial statements in accordance with SME-FRS.
Solvency. The availability of cash over the longer term to meet financial commitments as they fall
due.
Spot exchange rate. The exchange rate for immediate delivery.
Step acquisition The acquisition of a subsidiary achieved in stages rather than in a single
transaction.
Subsidiary. An entity, including an unincorporated entity such as a partnership, that is controlled
by another entity (known as the parent).
Substance over form. The principle that transactions and other events are accounted for and
presented in accordance with their substance and economic reality and not merely their legal form.
Sustainability report A report that incorporates the issue of sustainability in an environmental,
social and ethical context.
Tax base of an asset or liability. The amount attributed to that asset or liability for tax purposes.
Tax expense/(tax income). The aggregate amount included in the determination of profit or loss
for the period in respect of current tax and deferred tax.
Taxable profit/(tax loss). The profit (loss) for a period, determined in accordance with the rules
established by the taxation authorities, upon which income taxes are payable (recoverable).
Temporary differences. Differences between the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the
statement of financial position and its tax base. Temporary differences may be either:
 Taxable temporary differences, which are temporary differences that will result in taxable
amounts in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount
of the asset or liability is recovered or settled; or
 Deductible temporary differences, which are temporary differences that will result in
amounts that are deductible in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the
carrying amount of the asset or liability is recovered or settled.
Termination benefits. Employee benefits payable as a result of either an:
(a) entity's decision to terminate an employee's employment before the normal retirement date
(b) employee's decision to accept voluntary redundancy in exchange for those benefits
The deficit or surplus is:
(a) The present value of the defined benefit obligation less
(b) The fair value of plan assets (if any).
1074
Glossary of terms
Theoretical ex-rights price (TERP) The theoretical price at which the shares would trade after a
rights issue, taking into account the diluting effect of the bonus element in the rights issue.
Timeliness. An enhancing characteristic which means having information available in time to be
capable of influencing decisions.
Trade date The date on which an entity commits to purchase or sell an asset (relevant to financial
instruments)
True and fair Financial statements are true and fair when they depict a faithful representation of
transactions and events in accordance with the Conceptual Framework.
Understandability. An enhancing qualitative characteristic. Classifying, characterising and
presenting information clearly and concisely makes it understandable.
Unearned finance income. The difference between the:
(a) Gross investment in the lease
(b) Net investment in the lease
Unguaranteed residual value. That portion of the residual value of the leased asset, the
realisation of which by the lessor is not assured or is guaranteed solely by a party related to the
lessor.
Unit of account is the level at which an asset or liability is aggregated or disaggregated in an IFRS
for recognition purposes.
Useful life. The estimated remaining period, from the beginning of the lease term, without limitation
by the lease term, over which the economic benefits embodied in the asset are expected to be
consumed by the entity.
Value in use. The present value of the future cash flows expected to be derived from an asset.
Variable production overheads. Those indirect costs of production that vary directly, or nearly
directly, with the volume of production, such as indirect materials and labour.
Verifiability. An enhancing qualitative characteristic. Different knowledgeable and independent
observers could reach consensus that a depiction is a faithful representation.
Vertical group A group in which the parent controls a subsidiary and that subsidiary in turn
controls one or more further subsidiaries.
Vest. To become an entitlement. Under a share-based payment arrangement, a counterparty's
right to receive cash, other assets, or equity instruments of the entity vests when the counterparty’s
entitlement is no longer conditional on the satisfaction of any vesting conditions.
Vested employee benefits. Employee benefits that are not conditional on future employment.
Vesting conditions are the conditions that determine whether the entity receives the services that
entitle the counterparty to receive cash, other assets or equity instruments of the entity, under a
share-based payment arrangement. Vesting conditions are either service conditions or
performance conditions. Service conditions require the counterparty to complete a specified period
of service. Performance conditions require the counterparty to complete a specified period of
service and specified performance targets to be met (such as a specified increase in the entity's
profit over a specified period of time). A performance condition might include a market condition. A
market condition is a condition that is related to the market price or value of an entity’s equity
instruments.
Vesting period. The period during which all the specified vesting conditions of a share-based
payment arrangement are to be satisfied.
Weighted Average Cost Method. A cost formula uses in the measurement inventory that uses
weighted averages to determine the cost of items of inventory.
1075
Financial Reporting
1076
Index
1077
Financial Reporting
1078
Index
Note: Key Terms and their page references are given in bold
Closing rate, 898

A Code of Ethics, 43
Accounting Bulletins ("ABs"), 34, 39 Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants,
Accounting estimate, 619, 624 41
Accounting Guideline 5 (AG5), 872 Companies, 6
Accounting Guidelines, 39 Companies Ordinance, 7, 12, 18, 21, 34, 40
Accounting Guidelines ("AGs"), 34, 39 Company secretary, 15
Accounting policies, 619, 620, 735 Comparability, 52
Accounting profit, 379 Comparative information, 698
Accounting standards and choice, 37 Complex groups, 790
Acquiree, 739 Compliance with HKFRS, 60
Acquirer, 739 Compound financial instruments, 486
Acquisition-related costs, 746 Conceptual framework, 44
Active market, 184 Conceptual Framework, 66
Actuarial gains and losses, 436, 445 Conceptual Framework for Financial
Actuarial method, 227 Reporting (the Conceptual Framework), 39
Adjusting events, 629 Confidentiality, 42
Aggregation, 711 Consolidated accounts, 732
Amortisation, 185 Consolidated financial statements, 728
Amortised cost, 497 Consolidated statement of cash flows, 580
Annual General Meeting, 15 Consolidated statement of financial position,
Annual Return, 16 767
Antidilution, 641 Consolidated statement of profit or loss and
Approved share registrars, 31 other comprehensive income, 781
Asset, 54, 55, 175 Consolidation techniques, 785
Asset ceiling, 435 Construction contract, 291, 292
Associate, 407, 585, 728 Constructive obligation, 270
Auditors, 19 Contingent asset, 269, 279
Available for sale (AFS), 503 Contingent consideration, 740, 743
Contingent liabilities, 278
Contingent liability, 269
B Contingent rent, 223
Contingent rights and obligations, 482
Balance sheet, 697 Contingent share agreement, 641
Bargain purchase, 753 Contingently issuable ordinary shares,
Basic EPS, 642 641, 652
Bearer plant, 117 Contract, 366
Bonus issues, 645 Contract costs, 294, 370
Borrowing costs, 465 Contract revenue, 293
Break-up basis, 61 Control, 604, 728, 729
Business combinations, 729 Convertible debt, 486
Convertible instruments, 651
C Corporate assets, 200
Corporate governance, 10
Capital maintenance, 57 Corporate Governance Committee of the
Capitalisation rate, 466 Hong Kong Institute of CPAs, 10
Carrying amount, 117, 143, 191 Corporate Governance Disclosure in Annual
Cash, 569 Reports – A Guide to Current
Cash equivalents, 569 Requirements and Recommendations for
Cash flow hedge, 512, 516 Enhancement, 10
Cash flows, 567, 569 Cost, 622
Cash generating unit, 197 Cost approach, 554
Cash generating units, 197 Cost formulae, 256
Cash-settled share-based payment Cost model, 121, 147
transactions, 322 Cost plus contract, 292
Classification of financial assets, 491 Costs to sell, 101
Classification of financial liabilities, 492 Credit losses, 533
1079
Financial Reporting
Current / non-current classification, 701 Entity specific value, 117

Current cost, 59 Equity, 54, 56
Current developments, 66, 207, 243, 304, Equity instrument, 312, 481
336, 365, 528, 591, 715, 757 Equity settled share-based payment
Current tax, 379 transactions, 314
Customer, 366 Errors, 626
Estimates, 688
Estimation uncertainty, 712
D Ethics, 42
Debt instruments, 17 Event after the reporting period, 628
Deductible temporary differences, 384, Exchange difference, 897
391, 406 Exchange differences, 901, 903
Deferred tax, 334, 381 Exchange rate, 897
Deferred tax assets, 384, 386 Exchanges of assets, 120
Deferred tax liabilities, 384 Exemption from preparing group accounts,
Deferred taxation and business 733
combinations, 404 Expected values, 272
Defined benefit liability, 452 Expenses, 56, 57
Defined benefit plans, 434, 439, 441
Defined contribution plans, 434, 439 F
Depreciable amount, 122
Depreciable assets, 122 Fair presentation, 60
Depreciation, 121, 122, 687 Fair value, 101, 117, 143, 161, 191, 253,
Depreciation methods, 123 312, 347, 435, 481, 549, 740
Derecognition, 128 Fair value adjustments, 776, 906
Derecognition of financial assets, 493 Fair value hedge, 512, 513
Derecognition of financial liabilities, 493 Fair value hierarchy, 555
Derivative, 481 Fair value less costs to sell, 101
Derivative instruments, 482 Fair Value Measurement, 549
Development, 180 Fair value model, 146
Diluted EPS, 648 Fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL), 503
Dilution, 641 Faithful representation, 52
Direct method, 572 Finance lease, 220, 226, 235
Directors' responsibilities, 12 Financial asset, 480
Disclosure Initiative, 591 Financial instrument, 480
Disclosure requirements for companies listed Financial liability, 481
on the GEM, 41 Financial position, 54
Disclosure requirements for companies listed Financial Reporting Council (FRC), 32
on the Main Board, 40 Financial Reporting in Hong Kong, 77
Discontinued operation, 97, 107 Financial Reporting Standards Committee
Discounting, 398 ("FRSC") of the Hong Kong Institute of
Disposal group, 97 CPAs, 35
Disposal of foreign entity, 908 Financing activities, 569, 571
Disposals (group accounting), 845 Fixed price contract, 292
Dividends, 712 Fixed production overheads, 254
D-shaped groups, 793 Foreign currency, 687, 897
Due process, 35 Foreign currency cash flows, 586
Foreign operation, 898
Foreign subsidiary, 588
E Forgivable loans, 161
Earnings per share, 874 Framework, 346
Economic life, 222 Full provision method, 396
Effective interest method, 497 Functional currency, 897, 898
Effective interest rate, 497 Fundamental principles, 42
Effectiveness, 513 Future economic benefit, 55, 58
Elements of financial statements, 54
Embedded Derivatives, 509 G
Employee benefits, 433, 434
Employee contributions, 449 GAAP, 45
1080
Index
GAAP for Small and Medium-sized Entities, HK(SIC) Int-27 Evaluating the Substance of
46 Transactions in the Legal Form of a Lease,
Gains, 57 241
Generally Accepted Accounting Principles HK(SIC) Int-32 Intangible Assets – Website
(GAAP), 45 Costs, 188
Going concern, 53, 710 HK(SIC) Interpretations, 38
Goodwill, 198, 740, 742, 768, 790, 793, 859, HKAS 1 Presentation of Financial
906 Statements, 490, 697
Government, 161 HKAS 2 Inventories, 253
Government assistance, 161, 166 HKAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows, 568
Government grants, 161, 162 HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in
Government related entities, 608 Accounting Estimates and Errors, 381,
Grant date, 312 622, 752
Grants related to assets, 161, 163 HKAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in
Grants related to income, 161, 164 Accounting Estimates and Errors, 619
Gross investment in the lease, 222 HKAS 10 Events after the Reporting Period,
Group, 728 628
Group reserves, 769, 791 HKAS 11 Construction Contracts, 291
Growth Enterprise Market, 41 HKAS 11 Construction Contracts, 362
Guaranteed residual value, 222 HKAS 12 Income Taxes, 379, 490, 903
HKAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment,
117
H HKAS 17 Leases, 219, 241
Hedge accounting, 531 HKAS 18 Revenue, 346, 362
Hedge effectiveness, 511 HKAS 19 Employee Benefits, 433
Hedge of a net investment in a foreign HKAS 20 Government Grants, 161
operation, 512 HKAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Hedged item, 511 Exchange Rates, 897
Hedges of a net investment, 521 HKAS 23 Borrowing Costs, 465
Hedging, 511 HKAS 24 Related Party Disclosures, 603
Hedging instrument, 511 HKAS 32 Financial Instruments:
Held for sale, 98 Presentation, 479
Held to maturity (HTM), 503 HKAS 32: Presentation of financial
Highly probable sale, 99 instruments, 482
Historical cost, 59 HKAS 33 Earnings Per Share, 641, 682
HK(IFRIC) Int-1 Changes in Existing HKAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting, 681
Decommissioning, Restoration and Similar HKAS 36 Impairment of Assets, 190, 753
Liabilities, 281 HKAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities
HK(IFRIC) Int-10 Interim Financial Reporting and Contingent Assets, 269
and Impairment, 689 HKAS 38 Intangible Assets, 175
HK(IFRIC) Int-13 Customer Loyalty HKAS 39 Embedded Derivatives, 509
Programmes, 359 HKAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition
HK(IFRIC) Int-15 Agreements for the and Measurement, 479
Construction of Real Estate, 361 HKAS 39 Hedging, 511
HK(IFRIC) Int-4 Determining whether an HKAS 39 Recognition and measurement
Arrangement contains a Lease, 242 rules, 502
HK(IFRIC) Int-5 Rights to Interests from HKAS 40 Investment Property, 143
Decommissioning Restoration and HKFRS 2 Share-based Payment, 311
Environmental Rehabilitation Funds, 282 HKFRS 3 Business Combinations, 408, 739,
HK(IFRIC) Interpretations, 38 871
HK(SIC) Int-10 Government Assistance – no HKFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale
specific relation to operating activities, 166 and Discontinued Operations, 97
HK(SIC) Int-15 Operating Leases – HKFRS 7 Financial instruments Disclosures,
Incentives, 224 479, 522
HK(SIC) Int-21 Income Taxes – Recovery of HKFRS 8 Operating segments, 665
Revalued Non-depreciable Assets, 414 HKFRS 9, 490, 495
HK(SIC) Int-25 Income taxes – Changes in HKFRS 9 Financial Instruments, 479
the Tax Status of an Entity or its HKFRS 10, 584, 603, 729, 732, 734, 754,
Shareholders, 415 766, 767, 845, 848, 858, 862, 873, 907
1081
Financial Reporting
HKFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Intragroup balances, 907

Statements, 282, 729 Intra-group transactions, 734, 779, 782
HKFRS 11 Joint Arrangements, 282, 729 Intrinsic value, 312
HKFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Inventories, 253
Entities, 729 Inventory, 687
HKFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Investing activities, 569, 570
Entities, 735 Investment, 728
HKFRS 13, 147 Investment entities, 733
HKFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement, 549 Investment products offered to the public, 31
HKFRS for Private Entities, 81 Investment property, 143
HKICPA's Conceptual Framework, 47 Investor Compensation Company Limited
HK-Int 4 Lease – Determination of the length (ICC), 31
of lease term in respect of Hong Kong
Land Leases, 243
Hong Kong Accounting Standards, 36 J
Hong Kong Exchanges and Clearing Limited Joint arrangement, 407, 728
(HKEx), 31 Joint control, 604
Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards, Joint operation, 728
34 Joint venture, 7, 585, 728
Hong Kong Institute of CPAs (HKICPA), 29
Hong Kong Insurance Authority (HKIA), 33
Hong Kong Interpretations, 38 K
Hong Kong legal framework, 5
Hong Kong Monetary Authority (HKMA), 34 Key management personnel, 604
Hong Kong Partnerships Ordinance, 5
L
I Lease, 219, 220
Identifiable, 176, 740 Lease term, 222
IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Leasing, 219
Customers, 366 Lessee accounting, 223
IFRS for SMEs, 82 Lessee's incremental borrowing rate of
Impaired asset, 191 interest, 222
Impairment, 127 Lessor accounting, 234
Impairment loss, 117, 191 Level 1 inputs, 555
Impairment losses, 102 Level 2 inputs, 555
Impairment of financial assets, 507 Level 3 inputs, 555
Impairment test, 192 Liabilities, 55
Impracticable, 620 Liability, 54, 269
Inception of the lease, 222 Liquidation, 20
Income, 56, 57, 366 Listed companies, 31, 40
Income approach, 554 Loans and receivables, 503
Income statement, 697 Long-term employee benefits, 434
Income Statement, 516 Losses, 57
Incremental costs, 222
Indemnification assets, 751 M
Indications of impairment, 191
Indirect method, 572 Management commentary, 62
Inland Revenue Department, 5 Manufacturer or dealer lessors, 237
Intangible asset, 175 Market approach, 554
Intangible assets, 686 Market condition, 313
Integrated reporting, 63 Market participants, 550
Integrity, 42 Material, 619, 711
Interest, royalties and dividends, 351 Materiality, 51, 685, 711
Interest rate implicit in the lease, 221 Measurement, 59
Interim financial report, 681 Measurement of revenue, 347
Interim period, 681 Measurement period, 751
Interim reports, 40 Merger accounting for common control
Internally generated assets, 177 combinations, 871
1082
Index
Mid-year acquisitions, 784 Post-employment benefit plans, 434

Minimum lease payments, 221 Post-employment benefits, 434, 438
Modifications to share-based payments, 330 Potential ordinary share, 641, 642
Monetary items, 898 Power, 728, 729
Most advantageous market, 553 Present value, 59
Multi-employer plans, 435, 439 Present value of a defined benefit, 435
Multiple vesting dates, 321 Presentation currency, 897
Principal market, 553
Prior period errors, 619
N Professional Accountants Ordinance, 29
Negative equity, 754 Professional behaviour, 42
Net defined benefit liability (asset), 443 Professional competence and due care, 42
Net interest on the defined benefit liability Projected unit credit method, 442
(asset), 435 Pronouncements of the International
Net investment in a foreign operation, 898 Accounting Standards Board (IASB), 34
Net investment in the lease, 222 Property, plant and equipment, 117
Net realisable value, 253, 258 Prospective application, 620
Non-adjusting events, 629 Prospectus requirements, 17
Non-cancellable lease, 222 Provision, 55, 56, 269
Non-controlling interest, 584, 739, 746, Provisions, 270
770, 782, 791, 793 Public accountability, 82
Non-vesting conditions, 320 Puttable financial instruments, 484
Notes to the financial statements, 712
Q
O Qualifying asset, 465
Objective of financial statements, 49 Qualitative characteristics, 51
Objectivity, 42
Obligation, 55 R
Off-balance sheet finance, 240
Officers of companies, 15 Reacquired rights, 751
Offsetting, 381, 711 Realisable (settlement) value, 59
Offsetting a financial asset and a financial Realisable value, 59
liability, 489 Receivership, 20
Onerous contract, 274 Reclassification adjustments, 854
Operating activities, 569, 570 Reclassification of financial instruments, 492,
Operating lease, 143, 220, 224 505
Operating lease and investment property, Recognition, 58
147 Recognition criteria, 58
Operating leases, 234 Recognition of the elements of financial
Operating segment, 665 statements, 58
Options, 641 Recoverable amount, 101, 117
Orderly transaction, 549 Recoverable amount of an asset, 191
Ordinary shares, 641 Registration of charges, 17
Originating timing differences, 385 Regular way purchase or sale, 501
Other comprehensive income, 706 Reimbursements, 273
Owner-occupied property, 143 Related party, 604
Related party transaction, 604
Related party transactions, 606
P Relevance, 51
Parent, 728 Relevant activities, 728
Partnerships, 5 Remeasurements of the net defined
Past service costs, 446 benefit liability (asset), 435
Payroll taxes, 685 Rendering of services, 350
Performance, 56 Reportable segments, 665
Performance condition, 313, 319 Reporting entity, 49, 50
Performance obligations, 367 Research, 180
Permanent differences, 385 Research and development costs, 180
Plan assets, 435 Residual value, 117, 123, 185
1083
Financial Reporting
Restructuring, 20, 274 Sustainability reporting, 63

Retrospective application, 620, 621
Retrospective restatement, 620
Return on plan assets, 436 T
Revaluation, 57, 125, 184 Tax, 687
Revaluation model, 121 Tax base, 384, 404
Revenue, 347, 366 Tax expense (tax income), 379
Reversal of an impairment loss, 204 Tax losses, 380, 394
Rights issue, 646 Tax planning opportunities, 393
Rights issues, 488 Taxable profit (tax loss), 379
Risks and rewards, 220 Taxable profit/(tax loss), 379
Taxable temporary differences, 384, 388,
S 405
Temporary differences, 384, 385
Sale and leaseback transactions, 238 Termination benefits, 434, 454
Securities and Futures Commission (SFC), The asset ceiling, 448
30 Theoretical ex-rights price, 646
Service concession arrangements, 356 Timeliness, 53
Service condition, 313, 316 Trade date v settlement date, 501
Service cost, 435, 444 Transfers to or from investment property, 148
Settlement, 436 Treasury share transactions, 329
Settlement value, 59 True and fair, 710
Settlements, 447
Share capital and reserves, 702
Share issues, 17 U
Share option, 312, 649 Understandability, 53
Share split/reverse share split, 645 Unearned finance income, 222
Share-based payment arrangement, 312 Unguaranteed residual value, 222
Share-based payment transaction, 312 Unit of account, 551
Share-based payment transactions among Unrealised profits, 779
group entities, 326 Useful life, 122, 185, 222
Share-based payments with a choice of Users and their information needs, 49
settlement, 324
Short-term employee benefits, 434, 436
Significant influence, 604, 728 V
Single economic entity, 727
SME-FRF, 78 Valuation techniques, 554
SME-FRF and SME-FRS, 77 Value in use, 101, 191
SME-FRS, 78 Variable production overheads, 255
Sole trader business, 5 Verifiability, 52
Spot exchange rate, 897 Vertical groups, 790
Stage of completion, 296 Vest, 313
Statement of changes in equity, 707 Vesting conditions, 313
Statement of financial position, 699 Vesting period, 313
Statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income, 703 W
Statutory reporting, 18
Step acquisitions, 858 Warrants, 641
Stock Exchange of Hong Kong, 29 Winding up, 20
Subsidiary, 728
Subsidiary held for sale, 846
1084
Notes
1085
Financial Reporting
1086
Notes
1087
Financial Reporting
1088
Notes
1089
Financial Reporting
1090
Notes
1091
Financial Reporting
1092
Notes
1093
Financial Reporting
1094
Feedback Form – Financial Reporting Learning Pack
To help us improve the quality of the Learning Pack, we appreciate your ratings on the following areas:
Very Useful Not

useful useful
1. Learning focus
2. Chapter topic lists
3. Topic highlights
4. Quality of explanations
5. Technical references (where relevant)
6. HKFRS and HKAS margin references

(where relevant)
7. Self-test questions and answers
8. Exam practice questions and answers
9. Case study and illustration (where relevant)
10. Topic recap diagrams
11. Glossary of terms
12. Index

Excellent Good Adequate Poor
13. Overall opinion of this Learning Pack
If you have any further comments or suggestions on the Learning Pack, please indicate below:
Please return this feedback form to:

Education and Training,
Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants,
27th Floor, Wu Chung House,
213 Queen's Road East,
Wanchai, Hong Kong.
Alternatively email to etd@hkicpa.org.hk.

Module A Financial Reporting 5th Edition

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Module A Financial Reporting 5th Edition

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Qualification

� th Edition Fifth Edition

HKMALP15.indd 1-2 30/07/2015 16:25

ISBN 9781 4727 3602 4

British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data

BPP Learning Media Ltd

The copyright in this publication is jointly owned by

Your learning materials, published by BPP Learning

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

The contents of this publication are intended as a guide

Every effort has been made to contact the copyright

We are grateful to HKICPA for permission to reproduce the

Module A Financial Reporting

Part A Legal environment

Part B Financial reporting framework

Part C Accounting for business transactions

Answers to exam practice questions 919

Examples Illustrations of particular techniques or concepts with a worked solution or

viii Financial Reporting

LO1. Legal environment

Describe the legal requirements associated with company

LO2.03 Small and Medium-sized Entity Financial Reporting 2

LO2.10 Integrated reporting: 1

xii Financial Reporting

LO3.04 Employee benefits: 2

LO3.07 Construction contracts: 3

xiv Financial Reporting

LO3.09 Intangible assets: 3

LO3.11 Financial assets, financial liabilities and equity 2

xvi Financial Reporting

LO3.13 Impairment of assets: 3

LO3.16 Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets: 3

xviii Financial Reporting

LO3.19 The effects of changes in foreign exchange rates: 2

LO3.23 Operating segments: 3

LO4.06 Business combinations: 3

xxii Financial Reporting

LO4.08 Interests in joint arrangements: 3

1 Hong Kong legal framework

In this chapter you will cover the following learning outcomes:

1 Hong Kong legal framework

1.1 Types and relative advantages of alternative forms of

1.1.1 Sole trader business

1.2 Legal procedures for establishment of companies

(d) is not a company limited by guarantee.

1.3 Corporate governance

(e) To increase transparency regarding auditors' independence, disclosure of non-audit fees

2 Directors, officers, meetings and returns

2.1 Directors' responsibilities

2.1.2 Powers and obligations

2.2 Officers of companies

2.3 Annual general meeting and annual return

2.3.2 Annual return

3 Legal requirements associated with company

3.1 Share issues and prospectus requirements

3.2 Debt instruments and registration of charges

3.2.1 Registration of charges

3.3 Statutory reporting and documentation requirements

The company must prepare a

3.4 Appointment and removal of auditors

3.5 Restructuring, including appointment of receivers and

3.5.4 Companies (Winding up and Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance

3.6 Financial statements requirements